Call for Papers
Special Issue Editors:
Jiatao Li (The Hong Kong University of Science and Technology, mnjtli@ust.hk)
Gongming Qian (The Chinese University of Hong Kong, qian@baf.cuhk.edu.hk)
Kevin Zhou (The University of Hong Kong, kevinz@ hku.hk)
Jane Lu (CEIBS, janelu@ceibs.edu)
Submission deadline: September 1, 2019
First author notification: October 1, 2019
Special issue workshop: December 18-19, 2019
Tentative publication date: 2020
Introduction
In recent years, the world economy has witnessed repeated trials of strength between globalization and de-globalization (e.g., Cuervo-Cazurra, Mudambi & Pedersen, 2017; Prashantham, Eranova & Couper, 2018). On the one hand, the Trump administration launched the United States on a protectionist course by stating that “Protection will lead to great prosperity and strength.” On the other hand, China leader Xi Jinping called for globalization; he declared: “Pursuing protectionism is like locking oneself in a dark room. While wind and rain may be kept outside, that dark room will also block light and air” (World Economic Forum, 2017). Ironically, China has long been known as a protectionist and isolationist economy even after it joined WTO in early 2000s while the US as a free and open one following its victory in the Second World War. It seems the US and China, the two largest economies in the world, changed their position on global economic order. Actually, China launched its new national policy on economic globalization known as the “Belt and Road Initiative” (BRI) in 2013, which is different from the “go out” policy adopted in China by the end of 1990s. Although this initiative has a short history, it has provided fertile soil for observing how it facilitates and promotes the new wave of globalization (Li, Liu & Qian, 2019).
Trials of Strength between Globalization and De-globalization
Globalization can be both a description and a prescription (Chehade, 2016). As a description, “globalization” refers to the widening and deepening of the international flows of technology, capital, trade and information within a single integrated global market. As a prescription, “globalization” entails the liberalization of national and international markets in the belief that the free flow of goods, capital and information will lead to economic growth and increased human welfare. Trump has argued for protectionism and asserted that decades of free-trade policies were responsible for the collapse of the American manufacturing industry by, for example, bringing cheap consumer goods into the country, costing domestic jobs and depressing wages (Allen, 2016). Similarly, support for Brexit came in large part from those worried about their jobs and the entry of immigrants. To roll back economic globalization, Trump signed an executive order to withdraw from Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP), a U.S.-led free trade pact. He also signed an executive order to renegotiate, or even scrap, the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA). Other global trade deals are also now very much in doubt, notably the agreement being negotiated between the US and Europe, known as the Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP) (Allen, 2016). Further, the Trump administration threatened to slap taxes on U.S. companies (MNEs) investing overseas, raise tariffs to discourage companies from offshoring production and jobs, and introduce border taxes that penalize imports relative to exports, or both (Smith, 2017).
With a parallel development, the Trump administration’s withdrawal from the TPP gives China the opportunity to strengthen its position in the region (Smith, 2017). Beijing has been positively pushing its own regional free-trade pacts which include both the Free Trade Area of the Asia Pacific (FTAAP) and the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP), which some observers see as competitors to the TPP. At the same time, China has been advocating its development strategy and framework known as “BRI” which focuses on connectivity and cooperation among countries primarily between itself and the rest of Eurasia (Li, Liu & Qian, 2019). The BRI has already attracted over 100 countries and international organizations to join, and enjoyed wider support from Beijing-led Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB).
These changes derived in this new international business environment will affect many parameters of strategy, institution, new venture creation, and supporting business activities such as resource allocation and investment selection. The new environment challenges how businesses are organized and governed. Academic research, however, has yet to explain how firms can navigate the new international business environment. MNEs and entrepreneurs alike must account for these developments in terms of their plans and strategies in the coming years.
The APJM Special Issue seeks to provide an assessment of new challenges under rapidly changing international environments, and firm’s strategic responses toward the coexistence of globalization (e.g., BRI) and de-globalization (e.g., protectionism). We want to generate new insights on the change in the new business landscape and what new theory and evidence are needed to better elucidate this new environment. New theoretical perspectives, empirical evidences, and novel case studies can help identify the driving and inhibiting forces behind strategic responses in the new business landscape, and how firms and industries can adapt to and benefit from this dynamic environment.
We welcome both theoretical and empirical contributions, and papers that address the FDI and international strategy issues relating to the new global business landscape. We offer a few questions below to provide a sense of what the SI seeks to address. These questions are illustrative at best and not intended to set boundaries in terms of the key themes of interest.
Sample Topics
- How do national strategies, for example, the Belt and Road Initiative of China, help their firms open up new avenues and adapt to rapidly changing international environments?
- How could Asian firms utilize institutional or government-specific factors (at the country level) to deal with the coexistence of globalization and de-globalization challenges?
- What strategic options are available for Asian firms to maintain sustainable development within the highly dynamic institutional environment?
- In a new environment of world-wide protectionism, both domestic firms and MNEs will be confronted with fierce industrial competition and/or even “industrial wars”. How could firms address such challenges?
- How could developed economy MNEs manage their operations in Asia? How would such strategic moves or decisions (e.g., harvesting and divestment) affect their competitive advantage in the host countries? What strategies can help them sustain the scale and scope in Asia?
- How could Asian MNEs deal with the institutional pressure from the Trump administration? Should they move directly into the U.S. market to create new demand and increase sales? For firms that already operate there, should they continue their investment (reinvestment) even though it may not produce profits?
- How could Asian firms use M&A and/or strategic alliances to collaborate with Chinese counterparts in jointly developing their business operations along the “Belt and Road” routes?
______________________________________________________________________________
Submission Process and Deadlines
* All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted by September 1, 2019.
* For informal inquires related to the Special Issue, proposed topics and potential fit with the Special Issue objectives, please contact the guest editors.
* For those authors who have submitted the papers to the normal manuscript issues, one option is to remove your prior submission and then submit the paper again selecting the Special Issue on the author system. If you do not want to do so, please send a message to the editor office to indicate your intention for this SI.
APJM Special Issue Workshop
All authors who are invited to revise and resubmit their manuscripts are expected to present their papers at an APJM Special Issue workshop to be held at Xiamen University, China, in December 18-19, 2019. The special issue editors and APJM editorial board members will provide developmental feedback to paper presentations during the workshop to enhance the quality and contribution of papers in order to maximize the impact of the SI. But presentation at the workshop does not guarantee acceptance of a paper for publication in APJM and attending the workshop is not a precondition for acceptance into the Special Issue.
References
Allen, K. 2016. Trump’s economic policies: protectionism, low taxes and coal mines https://www.theguardian.com/.../trumps-economic-policies-protectionism-low-taxes-and-coal-mines
Chehade, G. (2016). Could Trump be the end of economic globalization? Asian Times, (November 18, 2016). www.atimes.com/trump-end-economic-globalization/
Cuervo-Cazurra, A., Mudambi, R., & Pedersen, T. 2017. Globalization: Rising skepticism. Global Strategy Journal, 7: 155-158.
Li, J., Liu, B., & Qian, G. 2019. The belt and road initiative, cultural friction and ethnicity: Their effects on the export performance of SMEs in China. Journal of World Business, DOI: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jwb.2019.04.004.
Prashantham, S., Eranova, M., & Couper, C. 2018. Globalization, entrepreneurship and paradox thinking. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 35(1): 1-9.
Smith, D. 2017. Trump withdraws from Trans-Pacific partnership amid flurry of orders. The Guardian.
World Economic Forum. (2017). President Xi’s speech to Davos in full. Global Agenda, China, Economy. Retrieved from https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2017/01/full-text-of-xi-jinping-keynote-at-the-world-economic-forum.
Special Issue Editors:
Jiatao Li
Prof. Li is the Lee Quo Wei Professor of Business, and Chair Professor of Management, Hong Kong University of Science and Technology. He is an elected Fellow of the Academy of International Business (AIB). Prof. Li is a leading expert on global business strategy. His current research interests are in the area of organizational learning, strategic alliances, corporate governance, innovation, and entrepreneurship, with a focus on issues related to global firms and those from emerging economies. His work has appeared in leading academic journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Academy of Management Review, Organization Science, Strategic Management Journal, Journal of Management, and Journal of International Business Studies. He has served as an Associate Editor of the Strategic Management Journal from 2009 to 2016. He currently serves as Editor of the Journal of International Business Studies for 2016-2022, responsible for research related to strategy and policy in emerging economies. He is also on the editorial boards of the Academy of Management Journal, Strategic Management Journal, Global Strategy Journal, Journal of Management, and Long Range Planning. He served as Program Chair of the 2018 Academy of International Business annual conference in the US.
Gongming Qian
(The Chinese University of Hong Kong, qian@baf.cuhk.edu.hk)
Prof. Qian is full professor and department chair, Southern University of Science and Technology, and former Chair of the Department of Management at The Chinese University of Hong Kong. He received his Ph.D. in International Business/Management from Lancaster University, England. His research interests include the financial economics of multinational enterprises and foreign direct investment, international strategy, and entrepreneurship. He has published widely in peer reviewed academic journals including Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, Journal of Business Venturing, Journal of International Business Studies, and Strategic Management Journal. He has co-edited and is co-editing a Journal of International Business Studies special issue, a Journal of Management Studies special issue, an Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice special issue, and a Journal of International Business Policy special issue published and to be published in 2018, 2019, 2020 and 2021, respectively. He serves on the editorial board of Journal of International Business Studies.
Kevin Zhou
(The University of Hong Kong, kevinz@hku.hk)
Prof. Kevin Zhou is Chang-Jiang Scholar Chair Professor, Chair Professor of Strategy/International Business at Faculty of Business and Economics, University of Hong Kong. Prof. Zhou’s research interests include capabilities and innovation, trust and relational ties, and strategic issues in emerging economies. Prof. Zhou has published numerous papers in prestigious journals such as Administrative Science Quarterly, Academy of Management Journal, Strategic Management Journal, Journal of Marketing, Journal of International Business Studies, Organization Science, and among others. His work is highly influential and well cited: He has been the World’s Top 1% cited scholars based on ISI's Essential Science Indicators (ESI) since 2011 and has been the World’s Highly Cited Scientific Researchers since 2016.
Jane Lu
(China Europe International Business School, janelu@ceibs.edu)
Prof. Jane Lu is Parkland Chair Professor of Strategy at China Europe International Business School, while on leave from her role as James Riady Chair in Asian Business and Economics in the Department of Management and Marketing, the University of Melbourne. She is currently the Editor-in-Chief of Asia Pacific Journal of Management. Jane’s research centers on international strategy such as internationalization, entry mode choice and alliance partner selection. Her recent research continues this line of research but with a focus on emerging market firms and their internationalization. Jane Lu has published in leading academic journals such as Administrative Science Quarterly, Academy of Management Journal, Strategic Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Management and Journal of Business Venturing, among other journals.
Chinese culture has profoundly influenced the way a firm does business in contemporary China. With China’s growing economic power and international status, multinational corporations have been increasing their presence in China. Yet, it is truly challenging for practitioners and researchers to fully grasp the unique aspects and diversity of regional business cultures throughout China. Moreover, rapid globalization and development of information technology have enabled increasing numbers of Chinese companies to go international. Understanding foreign business cultural environments is an essential element in ensuring their successful entry into a foreign market.
The main purpose of the 2011 China Business Culture Research Conference, which will be held from 21 Oct. to 24 Oct. 2011 in Jinan, Shangdong, China, is to promote the development of business culture research and practice. The conference will provide a high-level academic exchange platform for scholars in business culture to facilitate their communication and discussion of the latest research output.
Organizer:
Shandong University
The Journal of China Business Culture Research
Jinan Management Science Institution
Sponsors:
MAG Scholar
Asian Journal of Business Research
Conference topics:
The conference will include, but not be limited to, discussion of the following research topics:
- The Domain of Chinese business culture;
- International and Chinese business culture development and progress;
- International business cultural diversity;
- Comparisons between Chinese business culture and other business cultures;
- Confucian entrepreneurial culture;
- Business group culture;
- Entrepreneurial culture;
- Regional business culture;
- Commodity culture;
- Brand culture;
- Business etiquette;
- Guanxi in business;
- Advertising culture;
- Corporate culture;
- Consumer culture;
- Currency culture;
- Bazaar culture;
- Business luck culture;
- Tourism and culture;
- Corporate culture;
- China business culture innovation;
- Business culture and Chinese management style;
- Business culture and economic development;
- Business culture and social development.
Authors are encouraged to submit their full papers via internet to the conference email address: sywh2011@163.com.
A paper review committee, formed by distinguished scholars, will review the submitted papers, and the results will be announced before 15 September 2011.
The conference accepts normative, empirical and practical papers. Selected papers will be published in academic journals such as China Business Culture Research, Journal of China Business Culture Research, and Asian Journal of Business Research.
Conference schedule:
21 Oct. Registration
22 Oct., 2011, Morning, – Conference opening ceremony and keynote speech
22 Oct., 2011, Afternoon – Panel discussion
23 Oct 2011, Panel discussion
24 Oc. 2011, Tour to Qufu, Mount Tai or Ancient Capital Qi (cultures of Qi and Lu)
Important days:
22 Aug 2011 – Deadline of call for papers
22 Sep 2011 – Notification of paper acceptance
22-23 Oct 2011 – China Business Culture Research Conference
Conference Organization:
Organizing Committee:
Chairmen: Professor Xingyuan Wang (Shandong University)
Professor Zhilin Yang (City University of Hong Kong)
Committee members:
Professor Guoqun Fu (Peking University)
Professor Jiang Wei (Zhejiang University)
Professor Congdong Li (Jinan University)
Professor Dongjin Li (Nankai University)
Professor Jing Huang (Wuhan University)
Professor Xudong Gao (Tsinghua University)
Professor Yuhuang Zheng (Tsinghua University)
Professor Mingli Zhang (Beihang University)
Professor Zhaohua Wang (Beijing Institute of Technology)
Professor Yunqi Zhang (Central University of Finance and Economics)
Professor Ya Sheng (Zhejiang Gongshang University)
Professor Youjin Liu (Xiangtan University)
Professor Yonggui Wang (University of International Business and Economics)
Professor Tao Wang (Wuhan University)
Professor Haizhong Wang (Sun Yat-Sen University)
Professor Fasheng Zhao (Confucianism Research Centre, Chinese Academy of Social Sciences)
Professor Zhiying Liu (University of Science and Technology of China)
Professor Jinlan Liu (Tianjin University)
Professor Hongwei Liu (Shandong University)
Professor Zhijun Chen (Shandong University)
Professor Zuohao Hu (Tsinghua University)
Professor Yongqiang Li (Southwest University of Finance & Economics)
Professor Zhou Meihua (China University of Mining & Technology)
Professor Lu Yudong (Dalian University of Technology)
Professor Chenting Su (City University of Hong Kong)
Professor Alan Cai (Carletin University, Canada)
Professor Kim-Shyan Fam (Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand)
Professor Michael R. Hyman (New Mexico State University. USA)
Professor Thomas Madden (South Carolina University. USA)
Professor Chenglu Wang (New Heaven University, USA)
Professor Florian Wangenheim (Technical University of Munich, Germany)
Committee Secretariat:
sywh2011@163.com
2013 INFORMS/Organization Science Dissertation Proposal Competition Call for Submissions
Submission Deadline: July 1, 2013
We invite you to submit your dissertation proposal to the INFORMS/Organization Science Dissertation Proposal Competition. Now in its 21st year, this competition is one of the most prestigious available to doctoral students studying organizations. Eight finalists will be chosen, based on reviews by experienced referees. Finalists will present their dissertation proposals in a workshop on Saturday, October 5, 2013 at the fall INFORMS Conference held in Minneapolis, MN. During the workshop finalists will receive detailed feedback from a panel of respected organizational scholars who act as final judges for the competition. The all-day workshop also provides a wonderful opportunity to interact with a small group of future colleagues.
At the workshop, the judges will select a winner and a runner up. In order for their dissertation proposals to be considered for this competition, students must meet the following eligibility criteria:
1. Students must have defended their dissertation proposal between August 1, 2012, and August 1, 2013, but not yet defended their dissertation.
2. The expected completion date for students’ dissertations should be on or before July 1, 2014.
3. No part of the dissertation or dissertation proposal may be accepted for publication, provisionally or otherwise, at an academic journal prior to submission for this competition.
We encourage all eligible doctoral students who are studying topics related to organization science to submit summaries of their dissertation proposals. Dissertation proposals addressing issues related to any aspect of organization theory, organizational behavior, strategy, business ethics, or entrepreneurship are welcome.
Submissions should meet the following formatting criteria:
1. Proposal summaries must be no longer than 15 double-spaced pages in 12-point Times font with 1-inch margins. Up to 7 additional pages containing references and exhibits may be included.
2. Because this is a dissertation proposal competition, empirical results should not appear in the dissertation proposal summary or appendices.
Dissertation proposals will be judged based on soundness of theory, methodological rigor, and contribution to the field of organization science. In keeping with the mission of the INFORMS College on Organization Science, boldness and innovation of the dissertation will be important criteria in the judging process. The competition is being coordinated this year by Emily Block of the University of Notre Dame’s Mendoza College of Business.
We are fortunate to again be using Organization Science's ScholarOne Manuscripts submission system to manage dissertation proposal submissions and reviews. The web address for submissions is http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/orgsci. If you do not already have an account you will have to create one. This is a quick and easy process. Applications must be received by July 1, 2013. Dissertation proposal summaries that do not meet the formatting criteria will be returned to students without review. In addition to the proposal summary, each application must include a nomination letter from the applicant’s adviser certifying that the student is likely to complete the dissertation by July 1, 2014 and the date when the student advanced to candidacy – there is no need for a detailed recommendation letter. Please follow Organization Science's instructions for submitting your proposal.
A couple of important things to note:
- In step 1, select the manuscript type "Proposal."
- In step 2, Attributes, please select a few key words to aid in assigning reviewers.
- In step 4, Reviewers and Editors, do not recommend any reviewers. However, you should indicate Emily Block as your preferred SENIOR EDITOR.
- In step 5, Details and Comments, paste your cover letter into the window and use the browse attachment function to attach your COVER PAGE as well as YOUR ADVISER'S NOMINATION LETTER.
- In step 6, Upload Files, upload a copy of your proposal WITHOUT ITS COVER PAGE OR OTHER IDENTIFYING INFORMATION. The first page should include only your dissertation title and abstract.
Please direct any inquiries to: Emily Block, eblock1@nd.edu
Guest Editors
Omrane Guedhami
University of South Carolina
Sofia Johan
College of Business, Florida Atlantic University
Tilburg Law and Economics Center (TILEC)
Florencio Lopez-de-Silanes
SKEMA Business School
National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER)
Siri Terjesen
Kogod School of Business, American University & Norwegian School of Economics
Keynote Speaker
Sanjai Bhagat (University of Colorado at Boulder)
Submission deadline: December 1, 2019
Background of the Special Issue
Corporate governance is in a state of flux. Changes are brimming in both developed and developing economies around the world. There are considerable regulatory adjustments at national levels as well as transformations in internal governance at the firm level.
The sources of internal governance changes are wide and varied. Structural changes to the economy have changed the nature of entrepreneurial firm formation, where the boundaries of the firm are evolving, maybe even disappearing, in many industries. Many functions that used to be within firms are now outsourced. Managing these outsourced relations has become more complex, giving rise to new governance problems.
Modes of finance have likewise evolved, giving rise to more complex governance solutions. Donations, rewards, and equity crowdfunding, as well as marketplace lending, also known as alternative finance, have become much more common in recent years. These new modes of alternative finance give rise to new challenges in securing other forms of more traditional finance for scaling up, and failure to establish proper governance suitable to the context can give rise to success or failure. At the IPO stage, many firms now seek dual class listing structures, which puts pressure on regulators to facilitate such structure or risk losing business, such as the case of Alibaba listing in New York instead of Hong Kong.
International integration of firms, business, and trade along with evolving cultural norms in different regions around the world create different needs for governance solutions.
Corporate policies, including risk-taking, are increasingly recognized to be significantly affected by political systems, religion, culture, gender, race, and legal conditions, among other factors. Governance solutions vary widely depending on the legal, ethical, and cultural conditions in different regions around the world. Changes that have been widespread at the national level, including but not limited to changes in political environments, bankruptcy laws, regulations governing diversity on boards, and labor laws should therefore logically take into account these factors.
This special issue seeks papers that investigate the causes and ensuing consequences of these changes. A key interest here is for new work that examines the risks associated with these governance changes. Also, we seek papers that investigate skewness effects of these governance changes, or ‘tipping points’, giving rise to success versus failure. New corporate governance research is needed to address these questions. To this end, new research papers could be developed around the following themes:
1. What is the societal role of the modern corporation and the role of corporate governance in facilitating it?
2. Do dual-class shares add or create value, and what is the role of founders and ownership type in corporate governance?
3. Should corporate governance be tied to sustainability, and if so, how? How should governance solutions balance between the different ESG elements?
4. What are the new agency problems and governance solutions associated with evolving new economy firms and outsourced functions?
5. How are corporate polices, risk taking, and ethics affected by evolving political climates, and how does this interaction depend on culture, religion, legal institutions, gender, and race?
6. What are the governance implications associated with the new innovations in fintech?
7. How do legal changes such as quotas for diversity on boards, bankruptcy laws, and labor laws affect entrepreneurial risk taking and skewness in entrepreneurial outcomes?
Papers addressing other related current governance questions are of course welcome.
Submissions and Review Process
A paper development workshop will be held at Florida Atlantic University (Boca Raton, Florida), on February 28, 2020. Attendance is encouraged but optional. Keynote speaker will be Sanjai Bhagat, Provost Professor of Finance, University of Colorado at Boulder. The guest editors will be available at this conference to assist in the development of research. Another workshop held with the Journal of Corporate Finance on Corporate Governance Failures will follow on the subsequent day February 29, 2020, whereby authors are also encouraged, but not required to attend.
The deadline for submission of full papers to the workshop is December 1, 2019. Submissions have to follow the CGIR style guide to authors and should be sent to Sofia Johan (sjohan@fau.edu) and Siri Terjesen (terjesen@american.edu) with the subject line “CGIR Special Issue Conference”. Notifications about acceptance to the workshop will be sent by December 31, 2019.
Fully developed manuscripts should be submitted to CGIR by June 15, 2020 through the CGIR Manuscript Central website http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/CGIR. Contributors should follow the CGIR Author Guidelines (which can be found at www.cgir.org).
Final decisions on papers for the CGIR Special Issue will be made later in 2020 following the journal’s standard procedures. Please note that acceptance to the workshop does not necessarily guarantee acceptance to the CGIR Special Issue. Similarly, acceptance to the workshop is not a condition for submission to the CGIR Special Issue.
Contacts
Omrane Guedhami, University of South Carolina, omrane.guedhami@moore.sc.edu
Sofia Johan, College of Business, Florida Atlantic University and TILEC, sjohan@fau.edu
Florencio Lopez de Silanes, SKEMA Business School and NBER, florencio.lopezdesilanes@skema.edu,
Siri Terjesen, Kogod School of Business, American University, and Norwegian School of Economics, terjesen@american.edu
Special Issue Co-Editors:
Suma Athreye Professor of Technology Strategy Essex Business School Southend Campus University of Essex Email: |
Lucia Piscitello Professor of International Business, DIG-Politecnico di Milano Milan and University of Reading, UK Email: |
Ken Shadlen Professor in Development Studies Department of International Development London School of Economics Email: |
Special Issue Description
Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs) have become ubiquitous in current debates about trade and globalization, and have emerged as a key issue of contention in global trade and investment negotiations. The 'Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights' (TRIPS), signed in 1994 as a founding element of the World Trade Organization, represents the most important attempt to establish a global harmonization of Intellectual Property protection, creating international standards for the protection of patents, copyrights, trademarks and designs. As part of the World Trade Organization, it also is subject to that organization’s dispute settlement system, and thus, unlike previous international agreements on IPRs, includes enforcement procedures at the intergovernmental level.
Protecting IPRs of course means different things for firms, who most profit from them, and for governments, who bear the burden of creating the infrastructure for the enforcement of IPRs (and, in some areas, are among the major consumers of goods protected by IPRs). The processes of IP legislation and enforcement can thus be difficult and controversial. In designing IP polices governments need to mindful of balancing the reward for innovative activity with the incentives for diffusion of that innovation. Put differently, the interests of the producers must be arrayed against the interests of the consumer. Even within a national economy, this may be difficult as producers are much better organized to lobby policy than are consumers (Olsen 1962). In an international context this can be almost impossible to achieve without some supra-national intervention. Thus the adoption of TRIPS at the multilateral level and its implementation at national levels has been fraught with conflicts, as many political scientists (e.g. May and Sell, 2006; Ryan, 1998; Sell, 2003; Matthews 2002; Deere 2008) and economists (e.g., Archibugi and Filippetti, 2010; Maskus, 2000; Maskus and Reichman, 2005) have shown.
Nearly two and a half decades after TRIPS came into effect, much has changed in the global innovation landscape. Technology trade has flourished and more technology has been transferred to emerging market subsidiaries by MNEs. China has emerged as a major power making huge strides in patenting in both domestic, European and US jurisdictions (Hu et al 2017; Li 2012). Indian public research institutes like CSIR have found patenting has helped them become more self-reliant for funds. New institutional forms of Intellectual Property which pool patents have also emerged in response to the global challenges. Examples include the Medicines Patent Pool (MPP) to tackle AIDS (WIPO 2011), the GAVI alliance to improve childhood immunization (Kremer and Grennerster, 2004) and the EcoPatent Commons, GreenXchange and Canada’s Oil Sands Alliance (COSIA) to control carbon emissions (Awad, 2015).
Although IB theories emphasize the role of innovation and technological change in originating and strengthening the competitive advantages of the MNE, IB scholarship has focused mostly on considering IPR regulations as a location advantage/disadvantage (e.g. Ivus, Park, Saggi, 2017), or an institutional factor (e.g., Peng, Ahlstrom, Carraher, Shi, 2017a, b; Peng, 2013) interacting with MNE strategies. This is a narrow view and one that does not address the emerging new institutional developments around intellectual property policy and the effects of these on trade, investment and multinational behavior.
TRIPS also generated new political configurations between governments and business (and other social actors) and, importantly, the use of non-market strategies to influence IPR policy. Understanding these new patterns of organization and political mobilization, traditionally the domain of political economy, is exceedingly important in the context of emerging markets where implementing TRIPS implied substantial changes to national laws and policies. The most studied sector in this regard has been pharmaceuticals, as TRIPS required countries to allow drugs to be patented when many countries previously did not do so. National debates are no longer about whether drug firms should get patents, but how strong the associated rights should be, and how long these rights of exclusion should last for. Shadlen (2017) shows that national approaches to both introducing pharmaceutical patent systems and reforming these new patent systems have been driven by constellations of interests in society (rather than, for example, the ideology of incumbent presidents or the nature of political institutions). These issues, namely how the focal points of debate have changed and the search for drivers of cross-national and within-country variation, are common to a range of global challenges, beyond pharmaceuticals, such as clean technologies and global warming.
As regional trading blocs run into political problems it may be worth reassessing the TRIPS experience once again to highlight what has worked well and what has not. The proposed special issue aims at stimulating a wider discussion on the international patenting landscape, its use by emerging markets and the influence on trade and MNE strategies. This is a two-way interaction where firm behaviors can help/influence the design of better IP policies, but whose successful implementation in turn requires cooperation from firms (Lundan, 2018). This special issue is aimed at an inter-disciplinary audience in a genuine effort to bring together research that wants to understand the experience of TRIPS and what it offers in terms of IPR policy as the world heads towards de-globalisation. Related contributions have gradually begun to appear in the IB literature (Journal of World Business, Transnational Corporations and Journal of International Business Policy). Relevant research has also appeared in other disciplines such as Journal of Law and Economics, Journal of Development Studies and Journal of Development Economics. They provide some stepping stones and research agendas for this special issue.
The Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP) aims to be a leader in publishing high quality research analyzing emerging public policy trends and their impact on international firms. Through this Special Issue call, JIBP aims specifically to champion research analyzing the contribution of IP harmonization to processes of technology transfer, policy making, capability building and challenges to governance. This special issue is intended to be a first – but certainly not last - focal point triggering IB scholarly attention to this area. For that reason, this special issue will also be accompanied by a Paper Development Workshop in December 2019.
The following is an indicative (but not exhaustive) list of topics to guide potential authors:
- The effect of IPR policies on technology-related trade and investment
- Home- and host-country IPR policy effects on technology trade and choice of partners, before and after TRIPS
- How the spread of global value chains (GVCs) and countries’ and firms’ integration into GVCs affects national IP strategy
- How TRIPS has affected the internationalization and “off-shoring” of research and development
2. Domestic and foreign firms and the political economy of IPR policies
- MNE influence on regional and/or global IP harmonization.
- MNE lobbying strategies to change IPR policies in host and home countries.
- The internationalization of trademarks
- Case studies of national politics around joining the Patent Cooperation Treaty
3. IPR policies: Trends and effects at the country level
- Home- and host-country IPR regulatory effects on domestic technological capability and economic development
- Home- and host-country IPR policy effects on inward and outward FDI
- IPR and patenting patterns in home- and host-countries
- The emergence of competition and antitrust institutions as important actors in countries and sectors where patenting is new
- Understanding the changing demands for stronger IP rules by local actors in industries where imitation and reverse-engineering are difficult
4. IP implementation and its effect on economic outcomes
- Understanding the differences between de jure and de facto levels of IP protection and the effect of divergence on technology investment and trade
- How TRIPS has affected the role of technology transfer offices in public (and private) universities and research institutions
- IP infringement and its effect on MNE investment and domestic inventiveness
- Effectiveness of new IPR regimes (patent pooling) for solving the technology needs of global challenges
- New forms of property right protection (in the digital age); open models for patents
We welcome extended proposals from research in all relevant scientific fields (researchers in IB, economics, political science, sociology, law, geography, innovation, development studies, public policy, and international relations) and especially welcome proposals bridging various scientific disciplines. A paper can be aimed at theory development, but can also be empirical (aimed at collecting and interpreting larger data samples or specific case studies). To give us a wider choice of papers, our call is for extended proposals which should be submitted to the Editors by 15 December 2018. Selected proposals will be expected to submit full papers by 15 July 2019.
Special Issue Proposals
Proposals should be written in English and not exceed a total of seven (7) pages and 4000 words – five (5) pages for the body which can include charts, graphs, diagrams, and up to two (2) pages of references. The 4000-word count includes all text in the charts, graphs, diagrams, and references.
Only electronic submissions of proposal(s) will be accepted, submitted via the Manuscript Central portal for JIBP: https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibp. A maximum of two (2) proposals, either as an author or a co-author, may be submitted.
We seek original, unpublished work to move the scholarly conversation on TRIPS forward. Proposals may be rooted in or derived from prior work, but the submitted proposal must reflect significant development. Any proposal submitted that is judged to be identical or substantially similar to work already published, presented or under review for another conference or publication, will not be considered for invitation to develop a full manuscript.
Proposals are easiest to handle if submitted in PDF format. MS Word (or equivalent) will also be accepted. The title should be listed in the header of each page. Please use single spacing and 10-point font or larger. All proposals received by the deadline date (December 15, 2018) are deemed as original and final.
Proposals are reviewed by the special issue editors, so they are not anonymous. Proposals should include name and institutional affiliation of all authors. Authors who submit full manuscripts can expect a standard double-blind peer review process after submission.
Timeline from Proposal to Publication
- December 15, 2018: Deadline for submission of extended proposals
- January 20, 2019: Notification of acceptance or rejection of proposals for development as full manuscripts for submission
- June 24-27, 2019 (AIB 2019 Copenhagen): Editors participate in a panel that highlights the current JIBP special issues
- July 15, 2019: Deadline for submission of full papers via Manuscript Central portal for JIBP (https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibp)
- September 15, 2019: First round of double-blind peer review of submitted papers concluded
- December 2019: Revised papers to be presented at a Paper Development Workshop
- Jan 15, 2020: Editorial notification of conditional acceptance or rejection for inclusion in the JIBP special issue
- March 1, 2020: Final manuscripts submitted for the special issue
- June 2020: Special issue publication
Selected bibliography
Archibugi D., Filippetti A. (2010), The Globalisation of Intellectual Property Rights: Four Learned Lessons and Four Theses, Global Policy, 1(2): 137- 149. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1111/j.1758-5899.2010.00019.x
Awad, B. (2015), Global Patent Pledges A Collaborative Mechanism For Climate Change Technology, CIGI papers #81, Canada. [ last accessed 04/08/2018 from https://www.cigionline.org/sites/default/files/no.81.pdf]
Albert G.Z. Hu, Peng Zhang , Lijing Zhao (2017) China as number one? Evidence from China's most recent patenting surge, Journal of Development Economics, 124, 107–119.
Deere, C. (2008) The Implementation Game: The TRIPS Agreement and the Global Politics of Intellectual Property Reform in Developing Countries. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Ivus, O., Park, W.G. & Saggi, K. (2017), Patent protection and the composition of multinational activity: Evidence from US multinational firms, Journal of International Business Studies, 48(7): 808-836.
Kremer, M., & Glennerster, R. (2004). Strong Medicine - Creating incentives for pharmaceutical research on neglected diseases. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Li, Xibao (2012). Behind the recent surge of Chinese patenting: An institutional view, Research Policy 41 236–249.
Maskus, K. E. (2000) Intellectual Property Rights in the Global Economy. Washington, DC: Institute for International Economics.
Maskus, K. E. and Reichman, J. H. (2005) International Public Goods and Transfer of Technology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Matthews, D (2002) Globalising Intellectual Property Rights: The TRIPS Agreement. Routledge.
May, C. and Sell, S. (2006) Intellectual Property Rights: A Critical History. London: Lynne Rienner.
Peng, M. W. (2013). An institution-based view of IPR protection. Business Horizons, 56: 135–139.
Peng, M. W., Ahlstrom, D., Carraher, S. M., & Shi, W. (2017a). History and the debate over intellectual property. Management and Organization Review, 13(1): 15-38.
Peng, M. W., Ahlstrom, D., Carraher, S. M., & Shi, W. (2017b). An institution-based view of global IPR history, Journal of International Business Studies, 48(7): 893-907.
Ryan, M. R. (1998) Knowledge Diplomacy: Global Competition and the Politics of Intellectual Property. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution Press.
Sell, S. K. (2003) Private Power, Public Law: The Globalization of Intellectual Property Rights. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Shadlen, K.C (2017) Coalitions and Compliance: The Political Economy of Pharmaceutical Patents in Latin America. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
WIPO (2011) Medicines Patent Pool: Facilitating Access to HIV Treatment. Wipo magazine ( last accessed 04/08/18 from http://www.wipo.int/wipo_magazine/en/2011/03/article_0005.html
CONFERENCE OUTLINE:
The 31st International Conference on Pacific Rim Management, co-organized by the Association for Chinese Management Educators (ACME) and The City University of Macau (CityU Macau), will be held from June 29 to July 1, 2024, in Macau, China. The conference provides a forum for business educators and practitioners to exchange information and stimulate cooperation with academic and professional organizations in the Pacific Rim region.
PROGRAM TRACKS:
Accounting & Auditing | International Business & Foreign Direct |
Business Ethics & Corporate Governance | Issues in Taxation |
Chinese Management | Leadership |
Corporate Finance | Management Information Systems |
Data Mining & Big Data Analysis | Manufacturing & Service Design |
Economics | Marketing & Consumer Behavior |
Entrepreneurship | Multiple Criteria Decision Making |
Financial Derivatives | Organizational Behavior & Knowledge Management |
Financial Management & Financial Institute | Portfolio and Investments Management |
Human Resource Management & Industrial Relations | Production & Operations Management |
Information Technology and Security | Strategic Management |
Internet of Things | Supply Chain Management |
Internet & E-Commerce | Technology & Innovation Management |
International Trade & Integration Economics | Other related fields in business and management |
SUBMISSION AND REVIEW OF PAPERS:
An abstract or full paper, written in English and MS Word, should be submitted to https://easychair.org/conferences/?conf=icprmacme2024 by April 30, 2024.
Papers for the meeting will be reviewed anonymously, and authors will be notified of the decision by May 15, 2024. We also invite volunteers to participate as discussants and track chairs. Further information about submission instructions and the conference is available at http://myacme.org.
Quality papers will be suggested to the following journals for possible publication after further formal reviews.
- Contemporary Management Research
- Electronic Commerce Studies
- International Journal of Business
- International Journal of Business System Research
- International Journal of Cyber Society and Education
- International Journal of Electronic Commerce Studies
- International Journal of Revenue Management
- Journal of Integrated Enterprise Systems
- International Journal of Management Theory and Practices
REGISTRATION FEE:
Early bird registration: $150.00 (End on June 5, 2024, at 11:50 PM US PST);
Regular registration: $180.00 (End on June 29, 2024);
Student and retiree: $100.00 (End on June 29, 2024). Please see the Eventbrite registration link for details: https://acme2024.eventbrite.com
Conference Program Chair:
Dr. José Alves, Faculty of Business, City University of Macau
Conference Program Co-Chairs:
Dr. William Chen, Faculty of Business, City University of Macau
Dr. Harry Xia, Craig School of Business, California State University, Fresno
The handbook will be published as part of the World Scientific Series in Management Strategies, Policies and Implementation. Series Editor-in-Chief: Prof. Gideon Markman
Book Description:
Africa is a fascinating and increasingly relevant context for management research and practice. Recent estimates indicate that Africa has the youngest and fastest-growing population, with the overall population expected to increase to 2.5 billion by 2050. Recent forecasts also show that Africa’s youth population will rise as a share of the world’s youth population from 19 percent to 33 percent between 2015 and 2050 (Dews, 2019). Consequently, the workforce in Africa is expected to grow by nearly 450 million people between 2010 and 2035 (George, Corbishley, Khayesi, Haas & Tihanyi, 2016). This population boom has the potential to unlock more than $3 trillion in consumer spending, according to a McKinsey Global Institute (MGI) report (2023). In addition to this vast human capital potential, the increasing proliferation of information and communication technologies (George et al., 2016) and surge in global value chains in Africa implies significant opportunities for firms participating in growing, global sectors such as agriculture, energy, financial services, and information technology. These factors in the environment along with the human capital potential in Africa implies that African countries are uniquely positioned to be hubs for innovation and global business. Thus, businesses that misunderstand Africa run the risk of missing one of the 21st century’s great growth opportunities.
Despite the impending growth unfolding on the continent, the existing management literature often suggests that Africa’s businesses have tended to focus on short-term operational issues at the expense of long-term strategic imperatives and opportunities (e.g., Mellahi & Mol, 2015). Similarly, the literature points to underdevelopment in the inputs and outputs of the innovation process among organizations in Africa (e.g. Allard & Williams, 2020). These are fair criticisms considering limited evidence to the contrary. Indeed, the management literature on strategies (e.g., Pierce & Snyder, 2020; Uzuegbunam & Uzuegbunam, 2018) and innovations (e.g., Allard & Williams, 2020) in Africa is nascent. This limited perspective on the strategic and innovative activities of African based organizations overlooks the rich nuance and eclecticism of strategic and innovative activity on the continent. Africa’s 54 countries present a rich, complex but underexamined background for management scholars (Nachum et al., 2023; Pierce & Snyder, 2020).
This handbook calls for a cross-sectoral and cross-national collection of perspectives and evidence regarding strategic initiatives and innovations that are stimulating and supporting businesses as they seek to grow and capitalize on opportunities in Africa in the 21st century. The book will focus on strategies and innovations across different types of organizations, including, but not limited to small, medium, or large firms, family firms, professional service firms, entrepreneurial start-ups, social enterprises, multinational enterprises, and public-private partnerships. We are open to strategies and innovations across a myriad of industries and sectors, such as agriculture, sports, film, finance, technology, manufacturing, retail, etc.
We are seeking chapter submissions that include, but are not limited to the following topics:
- What resource combinations and orchestration strategies are African firms employing to capitalize on human, financial or natural resources on the continent?
- What forms of intellectual property strategies are employed to protect firms’ assets in Africa?
- What alliance and merger and acquisition strategies between African firms and international firms are being used to stimulate organizational growth and opportunity?
- What innovative interorganizational partnerships/collaborations (e.g., public-private partnerships) are being developed or used to capitalize on the continent’s resources or geography?
- How do business accelerator/incubator programs on the continent shape strategy in entrepreneurial firms?
- What business model strategies and innovations support the birth and growth of African firms?
- What are the ecosystem strategies and innovations that foster entrepreneurial activity and success in Africa?
- How do African firms leverage or deploy platform strategies?
- What are the effects of frugal innovations and strategies in new or established African firms?
- What are the approaches and effects of value innovations and blue ocean strategies in Africa?
- What strategies and innovations contribute to the formation, survival, and growth of social enterprises in Africa?
- How do formal or informal institutional forces affect strategies and innovations on the continent?
- Comparative analysis related to firm strategies and innovations: Within and across African countries, cities, and rural areas. Between firms in Africa and firms in other parts of the African diaspora (i.e., the Caribbean; Afro-Latino sectors and markets). Between firms in Africa and firms in other parts of the world.
- What are the economic geography dimensions of strategy in Africa?
- How does national or organizational culture inhibit or encourage strategic and innovative activities in Africa?
- How do African firms construe performance and success (e.g., social performance, environmental performance)?
Chapter submissions should be uploaded to the online submission system by September 1, 2024. Contributions must be original, unpublished work. Though contributions may be empirical or conceptual, conceptual works (such as essays, etc.) should strive to leverage anecdotal or practical evidence to substantiate critical claims in the chapter. We welcome different empirical approaches including qualitative, quantitative, or mixed methods. We especially encourage submissions from African scholars.
All chapter submissions should include a concrete analysis of implications for practice or / and public policy. Manuscripts should be submitted either in Microsoft Word or PDF formats with a maximum length of 30 pages (double-spaced). Authors are encouraged to follow the Academy of Management Journal Style Guide in preparing their submissions Academy of Management Journal STYLE GUIDE FOR AUTHORS.
Important Dates:
Deadline for chapter submissions – September 1, 2024
1st round reviews of papers completed – November 30, 2024
2nd round reviews of selected papers – May 31, 2025
If you have any questions, please contact Dr. Dykes (bdykes@su.edu) or Dr. Uzuegbunam (ikenna.uzuegbunam@howard.edu).
Call for chapters for the upcoming book "A Strategic Negotiator’s Handbook: From Local to Global Perspectives". Following chapters needed:
- Chapter: Negotiation as an Optimal Dispute Resolution Alternative
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from Europe: The French Style
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from Europe: The British Way
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from Europe: The Italian Way
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from Asia: The Chinese Approach
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from Asia: The Japanese Approach
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from Latin America: The Brazilian Style
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from North America: The US Way
- Chapter: Negotiating with Managers from North America: The Canadian Way
In addition to the above, any other chapter proposals in the field of global negotiation and business/organizational conflict resolution & management are welcome.
Mohammad Ayub Khan, PhD.
Full-Professor & Director
Marketing & International Business Department
Business School, North Region,
Tecnológico de Monterrey, Campus Monterrey
Ave. Eugenio Garza Sada 2501, Monterrey, N.L., México, 64849.
+52-81-8358-2000 ext. 4340
Management International Review Management International Review publishes research-based articles that reflect significant advances in the key areas of International Management.
Its target audience includes scholars in International Business Administration. MIR is a double-blind refereed journal that aims at the advancement and dissemination of applied research in the fields of International Management. The scope of the journal comprises International Business, Cross-cultural Management, and Comparative Management. The journal publishes research that builds or extends International Management Theory so that it can contribute to International Management Practice.
About the Focused Issue
Research on the internationalisation of the firm gained momentum in the 1970s. The dominant explanations from this period conceptualised internationalisation as a process that occurs over a period of time. Since then, internationalisation has received considerable scholarly attention.
However, while it is agreed to be a process, internationalisation of the firm is infrequently studied processually. Cross-sectional research designs dominate research in this area, and studies that pose process-based questions (i.e., in the form of ‘How does firm internationalisation evolve over time?’) are rare. Calls for longitudinal research and the inclusion of temporal dimensions are made regularly, but have not been taken up.
This inattention to process persists even though there has been considerable progress in process methods and theorising. Within the field of management, Andrew Pettigrew, Ann Langley and Andrew Van de Ven, among others, have articulated the difference between process- and variance-based research and provided a vocabulary and roadmap for process researchers.
Our aim with this focused issue is to advance understanding of how to study internationalisation as a process. We welcome conceptual and empirical papers that question mainstream variance-based assumptions, propose novel approaches and methods, and use process research to develop, challenge and extend theory in the area of firm internationalisation. We are open to qualitative submissions as well as quantitative papers based on longitudinal data.
Contributions are sought that address the following process-related questions:
1) What process/es does internationalisation involve? This could include issues such as:
- understanding specific phases as part of the firm’s overall internationalisation process, e.g. pre-, de- and re-internationalisation;
- post-entry trajectories of firms (i.e. going beyond the focus on entry mode and locational choices);
- conceiving internationalisation as a learning process, a process of organisational change, etc;
- studying operation modes over time, e.g. franchising and foreign direct investment as a process;
- Considering different units of analysis: not just the firm but e.g. product, business unit or business model.
2) What methodological innovations are needed to advance understanding?
Possibilities include:
- business history and historical methods, and other interdisciplinary approaches;
- methodologies for studying the future;
- quantitative approaches to longitudinal analysis;
- ethnographic methods for studying the micro-processes of internationalisation;
- options for studying internationalisation as a non-linear process.
3) Once we study internationalisation as a process, what new insights do we gain? Possibilities for theoretical advances might include:
- Applying complexity theory, co-evolutionary theory and other theories that allow for dynamic explanations;
- Developing process theories that explain change over time;
- Taking account of context and its changes in the internationalisation process;
- Taking a process approach to research on (so-called) ‘Born Globals’ and INVs, the early and accelerated internationalisers;
- (Even perhaps) rethinking the concept of internationalisation itself.
Submission Information
- All papers will be subject to MIR’s blind review process
- Authors should follow MIR guidelines, http://www.mir-online.de/Guideline-for-Authors.html
- Contributions should be submitted in English, in a Microsoft Word or compatible format via e-mail attachment to catherine.welch@sydney.edu.au<mailto:catherine.welch@sydney.edu.au>
- Questions can be addressed to any of the co-editors: Peter Liesch (p.liesch@business.uq.edu.au<mailto:p.liesch@business.uq.edu.au>), Niina Nummela (niina.nummela@utu.fi<mailto:niina.nummela@utu.fi>), Catherine Welch (catherine.welch@sydney.edu.au<mailto:catherine.welch@sydney.edu.au>)
- For further information, see
http://www.internationalisationprocess.com<http://www.internationalisationprocess.com/>
- Submission deadline: 31 October 2013
About the Guest Editors
Peter W. Liesch is Professor of International Business in the UQ Business School at The University of Queensland, Australia. His research interests include the facilitators and inhibitors of the internationalisation of the firm, particularly the smaller firm.
Niina Nummela is Professor of International Business at the University of Turku, Finland. Her research interests include SME internationalisation, cross-border acquisitions and mixed-methods research strategies.
Catherine Welch is Associate Professor in the Discipline of International Business at The University of Sydney, Australia. Her current research interests focus on qualitative research methodology and firm internationalisation processes.
The competitive landscape has been shifting in recent years more than ever. Globalization, rapid technological changes, codification of knowledge, the Internet, talent and employee mobility, increased rates of knowledge transfer, imitation, changes in customer tastes, the obsolescence of products and business models – have all caused a turbulent environment and accelerated changes and disruptions. These trends are expected to continue in the future, producing ever more rapid and unpredictable changes. Current concepts such as sustained competitive advantage, resource-based view, and strategic planning have been deemed vague, tautological, and inadequate for companies to cope with the rate and complexity of environmental and market changes (e.g., Kraaijenbrink, Spender and Groen, 2010; Lado, Boyd, Wright and Kroll, 2006).
In a chaotic environment in which markets emerge, collide, split, evolve, and die one of the primary determinants of a firm’s success is strategic agility, the ability to remain flexible in facing new developments, to continuously adjust the company’s strategic direction, and to develop innovative ways to create value. There is a tension between formal processes of strategic planning that require strategic commitments for a course of action and opportunistic strategic agility. Strategic planning has been criticized for preparing plans for tomorrow based on yesterday’s actions, concepts, and tools. Although strategic planning can help in specific situations, it usually creates an inertia that prevents fast adaptation when circumstances change or market discontinuities occur. Strategic agility requires inventing new business models and new categories rather than rearranging old products and categories. To cope with growing strategic discontinuities and disruptions, scholars have suggested the creation of strategically agile companies, including new ways for managing business transformation and renewal, developing dynamic capabilities, creating imitation abilities, maintain a high level of organizational flexibility, developing learning and knowledge transfer skills, using adaptive corporate culture, optimizing human resource scalability, and more (e.g., Doz and Kosonen, 2010; Dyer and Ericksen, 2005; Eisenhardt and Martin, 2000; Shenkar, 2010a; Weber, Tarba, and Reichel, 2011; Wilson and Doz, 2011).
The goal of this special issue is to stimulate authors to redefine the spectrum of means and processes available to create and use strategic agility. The issue challenges authors to provide the frameworks that managers can use to integrate, develop, and reconfigure competences and resources required to deal with hypercompetitive markets. Given markets discontinuities and the rapidly increasing pace of change, companies need new and agile paradigms.
We invite papers that focus on strategic agility in both the national and international arenas. We encourage contributions that address but are not limited to the following topics:
What are the origins, components, and outcomes of strategic agility?
What are the roles of early warning systems, communication, learning, scanning, knowledge transfer, training, managerial rotation, and rewarding in the development of strategically agile companies?
What is the relationship between strategic agility on one hand and organizational flexibility, modular organizational forms, conflicts and confrontations, dynamic capabilities (Eisenhardt and Martin, 2000), imitation (Shenkar, 2010b), cultural characteristics (Weber, Tarba, and Reichel, 2011), human resource management (Shafer, Dyer, Kilty, Amos, and Ericksen, 2001) and other existing and emerging concepts?
What insights can perspectives from strategy, economics, organizational behavior, international management, psychology, sociology, anthropology, and other disciplines provide into the nature, antecedents, processes, and effects of strategic agility?
Do strategic sensitivity and resource fluidity (Doz and Kosonen, 2008; 2010) create only a temporary advantage or can they improve performance in both short and the long term?
What is the role of strategic agility in mergers and acquisitions, given their high failure rate? For example, what is the importance of strategic agility components at the pre-merger planning stage (e.g., due diligence, scanning, and screening), the negotiation stage (Weber, Belkin, and Tarba, 2011), and during post-merger integration? What is the effect of various practices (communication, training) within the context of different national cultures (Weber, Rachman-Moore, and Tarba, 2011), and of integration approaches such as symbiosis (Weber, Tarba, and Rozen Bachar, 2011) and hybrid integration (Schweizer, 2005) on strategic agility?
What are the profiles of strategically agile multinational corporations?
Do changes in partners' resources and capabilities cause loss of flexibility to joint ventures, resulting in a high rate of failure? When and how should new modular organization forms be applied in the creation of strategic alliances?
When should management embrace intuitive, improvisational, and action-oriented forms of decision making for the sake of effectiveness?
Please bear in mind that CMR publishes primarily original articles that are research based and address issues of current concern to managers.
SUBMISSION
To consider your manuscript for publication in this special issue, submit your paper by February 29, 2012 to the official CMR website, indicating the title of the special issue.
All papers should meet the submission requirements of CMR: http://cmr.berkeley.edu/submission_guidelines.html .
The papers will be sent for review following CMR’s standard review process, coordinated by the guest editors. The final decisions about publications will be made by the CMR editor.
Please indicate in your text why and how your paper will appeal not only to scholars but also, and especially, to managers.
For further information, please contact the CMR co-guest editor for this special issue, Prof. Yaakov Weber yaakovw@colman.ac.il .
REFERENCES
Doz, Y.L and Kosonen, M. 2008. The dynamics of strategic agility: Nokia's rollercoaster experience. California Management Review, 50 (3), 95-118.
Doz, Y.L and Kosonen, M. 2010. Embedding strategic agility. Long Range Planning, 43, 370-382.
Dyer, L. and Ericksen, J. (2005). In pursuit of marketplace agility: Applying precepts of self-organizing systems to optimize human resource scalability. Human Resource Management, 44 (2), 183–188.
Eisenhardt, K. M. and Martin, J. A. 2000. Dynamic capabilities: What are they? Strategic Management Journal, 21, 1105-1121.
Goldman, S. L., Nagel, R. N., and Preiss, K. 1995. Agile Competitors and Virtual Organizations: Strategies for Enriching the Customer. van Nostrand Reinhold.
Kraaijenbrink, J., Spender, J.-C., and Groen, A. J. 2010. The resource-based view: A review and assessment of its critiques. Journal of Management, 36 (1), 349-372.
Lado, A. A., Boyd, N. G., Wright, P., and Kroll, M. 2006. Paradox and theorizing within the resource-based view. Academy of Management Review, 31 (1), 115-131.
Shafer, R. A., Dyer, L., Kilty, J., Amos, J., and Ericksen, J. (2001). Crafting a human resource strategy to foster organizational agility: A case study. Human Resource Management, 40 (3), 197–211.
Shenkar, O. 2010a. Copycats: How Smart Companies Use Imitation to Gain a Strategic Edge. Harvard Business Press.
Shenkar, O. 2010b. Imitation is more valuable than innovation. Harvard Business Review (April), 1-3.
Schweizer, L. 2006. Organizational integration of acquired biotech companies into pharmaceutical companies: The need for a hybrid approach. Academy of Management Journal, 48 (6), 1051–1074.
Weber, Y., Belkin, T., and Tarba, S.Y. 2011. Negotiation, cultural differences, and planning in mergers and acquisitions. Proceedings of the EuroMed Academy of Management 2010 Annual Conference, 1249-1257. Nicosia, Cyprus, November 2010.
Weber, Y., Rachman-Moore, D., and Tarba, S.Y. 2011. Human resource practices during post-merger conflict and merger performance. International Journal of Cross-Cultural Management. Forthcoming.
Weber, Y., Tarba, S.Y., and Reichel, A. 2011. International mergers and acquisitions performance: Acquirer nationality and integration approaches. International Studies of Management & Organization, 41 (3), 9 - 24.
Weber, Y., Tarba, S. Y., and Rozen Bachar, Z. 2011. Mergers and acquisitions performance paradox: The mediating role of integration approach. European Journal of International Management. 5 (4), 373 - 393.
Wilson, K. and Doz, Y. L. 2011. Agile innovation. California Management Review, 53 (2), 6 - 26.
The United Nations (UN) set the agenda to achieve sustainable development by securing the commitment of 193 countries to adopt the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGS). The SDGS represent an ambitious challenge to end all forms of poverty, tackle climate change while promoting economic prosperity and inclusion by the end of year 2030. The 17 goals put forward are: 1) No poverty; 2) Zero hunger; 3) Good health and well-being; 4) Quality education; 5) Gender equality; 6) Clean water and sanitation; 7) Affordable and clean energy; 8) Decent work and economic growth; 9) Industry, innovation, and infrastructure; 10) Raise your voice against discrimination; 11) Sustainable cities and communities; 12) Responsible production and consumption; 13) Climate action; 14) Life below water; 15) Life on land; 16) Peace, justice, and strong institutions; and 17) Partnerships for the goals. Detailed information on the 17 goals can be found here: https://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/
States and non-state organizations are called to work together and collaboratively and contribute with financial resources, knowledge, and expertise. In this context, this Special Issue focuses on the role of colleges and universities in achieving sustainable development.
Submissions for the Special Issue could relate, but are not limited, to the following topics:
- Innovative pedagogical approaches to teaching and learning toward sustainable development
- Administrative, academic, and student-led initiatives in sustainability
- Inclusion of sustainable development topics in the curriculum: stand-alone, cross-disciplinary and trans-disciplinary programs
- Campus design for sustainability
- Partnerships between universities and stakeholders to achieve sustainable development
- Overcoming resistance and skepticism among students and staff
- Teacher competencies in sustainable development
- Assessment of student learning in sustainable development
Comprehensive reviews, case studies, and research articles that focus on statistical analyses are invited for submission to this Special Issue. Please contact Patricia Kanashiro (pkanashiro@loyola.edu) with questions.
Manuscript submission information
Deadline for submissions: March 30, 2019
Manuscripts should be submitted online at https://raep.emnuvens.com.br/raep and can be written in English, Spanish, or Portuguese. Submitted manuscripts should not have been published previously, nor be under consideration for publication elsewhere (except conference proceedings papers). All manuscripts are thoroughly refereed through a double-blind peer-review process. A guide for authors and other relevant information for submission of manuscripts is available on the instructions author page.
About RAEP
Administração: Ensino e Pesquisa (RAEP) (ISSN 2358-0917) is the first academic publication in Brazil aimed at disseminating the very latest research in Administration/Management teaching and research. It is published 3 times a year by the Brazilian National Association of Undergraduate Courses in Administration (ANGRAD) for the academic community: students, professors, researchers and academic managers of courses and programs in Administration.
The journal is classified in stratum B1 of the Administration, Accounting and Tourism Qualis-CAPES. The journal is Abstracted/Indexed in Cengage, Ulrich's, EBSCO, ProQuest, Web of Science, Spell, Cengage Learning, DOAJ, DIADORIM, LatinREV and it is published 3 times a year.
Editors
Patricia Kanashiro, Ph.D. (Loyola University Maryland, United States)
Cristiane Benetti, Ph.D. (ICN Business School, France)
Janette Brunstein, Ph.D. (Universidade Presbiteriana Mackenzie, Brazil)
Eric Talavera Campbell, MRe (Education Quality Accreditation Agency-EQUAA, Peru)
Friedemann Schulze-Fielitz, M.A. (EFMD GN Americas, United States)
Institutional theory has become one of the most important perspectives in international business in recent years. Researchers have applied theories from neoinstitutional economics and sociology to study how characteristics of the global, regional, country, and industry environments influence the strategies and performance of multinational enterprises. Studies have illustrated the importance of institutional variation for a wide range of constructs, including diversification, foreign direct investment, governance, innovation, organizational learning, and social networks.
Whereas institutional theory has been helpful in highlighting why and how the rules of the international business game may change in different contexts, many studies have relied on constructs, frameworks, and mechanisms developed outside of the international business field. Our goal with this volume is threefold. First, we would like to encourage international business and management scholars to design new theoretical frameworks of institutions for the different levels of the business environment. Second, we would like to invite institutional theorists to outline potential new theoretical directions for international business researchers. Third, we wish to publish a collection of original ideas that will provide the foundation for future doctoral dissertations and other research projects in international business.
We hope the volume will provide a forum for thought-provoking theoretical ideas, discussions, reviews, and methodological advances owing to its format and our review process. Although we expect to receive mostly theoretical papers, we are open to empirical submissions using different methodological approaches with institutional theory as their main theoretical lens. Furthermore, we welcome papers that are aimed at improving measures of institutions and proposing suitable methods for testing institutional effects.
Information on past AIM volumes and contributors can be found at this link:
http://www.emeraldinsight.com/books.htm?issn=1571-5027.
Submission Information
• Authors should submit an electronic copy of their proposal (5 single-spaced pages) to Laszlo Tihanyi (ltihanyi@tamu.edu) by September 15, 2011.
• Authors with selected proposals will be encouraged to attend a session at the Strategic Management Society Annual Conference in Miami on November 6, 2011.
• Submission deadline for full papers: December 15, 2011.
• Submission deadline for revised papers: February 20, 2012.
• Publication date of AIM volume: July 1, 2012.
For additional information, please contact:
Laszlo Tihanyi
B. Marie Oth Associate Professor in Business
Department of Management
Mays Business School
Texas A&M University
College Station, Texas 77843-4221
Tel: 1-979-845-2825
E-mail: ltihanyi@tamu.edu
http://people.tamu.edu/~ltihanyi/
Guest editors
- Valentina De Marchi (ESADE)
- Mehmet Demirbag (University of Essex)
- Ismail Gölgeci (Aarhus University)
- Ans Kolk (University of Amsterdam)
- Sven Kunisch (Aarhus University)
Background
The global business landscape is undergoing profound shifts as the challenges posed by environmental degradation and climate change become increasingly prominent. Businesses operating across borders impact environmental sustainability in profound ways, ranging from resource extraction (Ghauri et al., 2021) to greenhouse gas emissions (Patnaik, 2019), in their own operations and through their supply chains (Kim & Davis, 2016). The role of international business (IB) in shaping and responding to these challenges, while definitely not new to the academic field (Kolk, 2016), has come into sharper focus in recent years (Yu et al., 2023).
Concerns about planetary boundaries have entered the management literature (e.g., Howard-Grenville & Lahneman, 2021; Whiteman et al., 2013), and growing societal pressures are starting to be reflected in policymaking and corporate intentions and practices. Despite earlier insights on the interaction between institutions and multinational enterprises (MNEs) – be it home- and host-country contexts and or international rule-setting on green issues (e.g. Pinkse & Kolk, 2012; Pisani et al., 2019) – in-depth studies on the complexities relevant to this day and age are relatively scarce and incremental. Existing paradigms and approaches to environmental sustainability fall short of recognizing and addressing the profound challenges that exist (Nadeau, 2008) and there is thus a need for a fundamental reconsideration, with the natural environment being at the top of the agenda.
Such scholarly work is particularly important given the mounting evidence that business activities profoundly impact the natural environment. Various literatures have drawn attention to the loss of biodiversity, potable water, and clean air and soils (e.g., George et al., 2015; Howard-Grenville & Lahneman, 2021; Müller et al., 2016), and how the changing climate threatens the survival of humankind (Rockström et al., 2023; Rockström et al., 2009; Steffen et al., 2015). There are tremendous challenges associated with the creation and implementation of clean energy supply chains (Aflaki & Netessine, 2017), especially concerning the use of critical materials/minerals, requiring circularity (Ciulli et al., 2020) and careful, forward-looking planning considering the environmental implications (Aflaki & Netessine, 2017). The introduction of digital technologies to smoothen international operations offers the potential for addressing environmental concerns but also has shortcomings, which are often unforeseen (Ciulli & Kolk, 2023).
Overall, there is a profound and high-priority imperative for a paradigm shift away from “sustainable” efficiency measures and toward the transformational approaches required to establish equitable and restorative IB policies and practices. Such a paradigm shift and transformational approaches to the connection between the natural environment and IB require profound knowledge about the complex interactions between MNE activity and the natural environment, as well as to provide advice to practicing managers and policymakers.
Aim of the Special Issue
This special issue seeks to turn the spotlight on the ‘natural environment’ so that scholars in IB and cognate fields can inform practice and policymaking while advancing and moving the research frontier to include societal relevance. For example, instead of viewing the natural environment as exogenous, there is a need to study externalities, endogenize the natural environment, and understand how adverse effects can be avoided.
Recent years have seen the launch of several policy proposals to reverse incentives for the better, but how and what MNEs are responding to and/or anticipating such changes and dealing with trade-offs is largely unknown. MNEs may also have contradictory and unexpected influences on the natural environment worldwide, especially when accounting also for their value chains, and must often make difficult choices to address pressing issues in the natural environment. While traditionally the so-called “pollution haven effect”, which threatens the natural environment in emerging markets and around the globe (Berry et al., 2021), has received most attention, more recent insights point at not just a ‘race to the bottom’ but also ‘race to the top’ effects (Bu & Wagner, 2016; Pisani et al., 2019). It is crucial to better understand the dynamics for replacing incentives to evade by solutions for truly addressing environmental problems as desired by policy professionals (e.g., how carbon credits can truly help reduce emissions, pollution, and environmental harm rather than just creating a market for offsetting).
We strongly encourage empirical studies and exploratory inductive work with clear relevance for current and future policymaking, considering that a range of countries are taking steps to further environmental sustainability and net-zero technology development.
The objectives of this special issue include:
- Advancing new perspectives and evidence on IB and the natural environment, including protection, potential restoration, circularity, and redesign towards greener global value chains (GVCs);
- Developing and extending theories with policy implications that bridge natural and social sciences or fundamentally embed legal insights to advance IB research on environmental sustainability;
- Developing the connection between IB and public policy by critically examining the impact of policies on MNEs and vice versa.
Prospective authors should note that the purpose of JIBP is to publish policy-relevant research related to IB issues. Work submitted to the special issue is expected to build on the existing body of knowledge as built up in the journal since its creation in 2018, and we also direct attention to the editorials, commentaries, and perspective pieces published as guidance. The guest editorial team will work with the newly established Policy Impact Advisory Committee to optimize the consolidation and extension of scholarly debates on IB and the natural environment that are informative for policy professionals.
Examples of Topic Areas of Interest
1) Actors (stakeholders and institutions):
- How do international sustainability standards (e.g., by ISSB) influence MNEs’ policies and activities? How do regulatory frameworks in relation to environmental concerns influence MNEs and their GVCs? How do these approaches come about considering societal pressures and business lobbying?
- What is the role of supra-national institutions in monitoring and influencing MNEs’ natural resource strategies? What are the interactions between trade policies, environmental regulations, and IB strategies?
- How do new trends, such as sustainable consumption and citizens resorting to courts, influence global markets and MNEs? What is the role of different stakeholders in policymaking to further environmental sustainability, and what are the differential effects across countries and regions?
2) Strategies:
- What are the strategic approaches of MNEs towards environmental stewardship? How do MNE innovation and technology transfer contribute to environmental sustainability? What are MNE strategies for climate change adaptation and mitigation in global markets?
- Given the level of urbanization and changing global demographics, how do MNEs contribute to the scarcity and distribution of resources such as water, land, air, and food? How do the paradoxes MNEs face in relation to the use and depletion of critical materials, as well as the implications of their extraction on biodiversity and communities, relate to their design and governance of IB activities?
- What is the potential of nearshoring, onshoring, local production, and geographic route optimization in global supply chains in supporting the natural environment? What are the dynamics of cross-border collaboration for environmental protection in the context of IB?
3) Governance and GVCs:
- What policy instruments can help countries capture an externality (such as technology spillovers) from GVCs? How can countries coordinate FDI to prevent rent-seeking and misallocating capital and increase environmental benefits from GVCs?
- How might an increase in the use of Industry 4.0 type of advanced/digital technologies (e.g., artificial intelligence) affect GVCs from the point of view of the natural environment and different actors/stakeholders in society? What will be the environmental effects of further digitalization in general and specific technologies in particular?
- How do justice, power asymmetry, inclusion, engagement, and empowerment between supply chain partners from different countries influence the natural environment? When and where do GVC governance choices enable environmental upgrading in GVCs?
4) Complexities and dynamics:
- For example, what are the consequences of supply chain tensions in the natural environment and planetary restoration? How do the paradoxes associated with the use and depletion of critical minerals and their policy implications relate to GVC design and governance?
- What are the temporal dynamics in the interactions between IB and the natural environment? For example, what is the connection between temporal scaling, temporal non-stationarity, and the natural environment in IB? What is the role of MNEs’ time horizons in preserving and restoring the natural environment?
Envisioned Impact
The special issue directly relates to a range of policy initiatives taken in recent years (or still in the works) to promote sustainability and reduce the impact of governments, citizens, and firms on the natural environment while promoting innovation. Examples include the EU’s Green Deal and Net-Zero Industry Act and the Inflation Reduction Act in the US. International organizations as well as standard setters are also considering the best ways to promote sustainability (sometimes under the ESG heading).
Submission and Review Process
Submitted manuscripts must adhere to the scope, standards, format, and editorial policy of the Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP). “Author Guidelines” and the JIBP Style Guide for Authors must be followed. Full paper submissions to the special issue will be reviewed as soon as they are received – the submission system opens 4 months before the SI deadline. As papers are accepted, they will be published on the JIBP Online First page on a rolling basis, irrespective of the timing of the other papers of the SI, to ensure quick publication process. Published SI papers will all be part of the same SI electronic collection, but might be published in different issues.
15 May 2024 JIBP’s Manuscript Central portal opens for full paper submissions
15 September 2024 Final deadline for submission of full papers via JIBP’s MC portal
September 2025 Expected publication of SI articles (published online on a rolling basis)
Special Issue Call for Papers:
Advancing Sustainable Development Goals and the Business Connection
Suggested Topics: Sustainable Business Practices, Corporate Social Responsibility, Inclusion and Diversity, Ethics, Impact of Business related to Global Development Goals.
Send manuscripts to editor@journalofbusinessleadership.online NLT May 31, 2021
Make sure to consult the JBL Author Guidelines and Manuscript Formatting Information (http://journalofbusinessleadership.online/) prior to submitting your manuscript.
The Journal of Business Leadership is listed in Cabell’s and indexed in the Library of Congress (ISSN ISSN 2164-4454 (online) ISSN 2164-4462 (print). It is a peer-reviewed journal that publishes quality research related to business and leadership.
The Journal of Business Leadership provides an ongoing forum for academic researchers to exchange information and research on both theoretical development and empirical analysis related to business and leadership issues. It publishes academic research articles that contribute to the advancement in business and leadership studies.
There is little doubt of the growing importance of China in the global economy. Getting access to the large consumer markets in China is an increasingly pressing issue for global advertisers. Advertising in China has developed at a rapid pace as China has evolved from a limited central-planned economy to a globally-focused economic superpower. This massive change in the advertising industry and supporting infrastructure along with the growing consumer affluence makes China a prime target for global advertisers. The rapid changes being experienced within China argue for cutting-edge research into the nature of advertising in China and the impact of advertising on Chinese consumers.
Therefore the Journal of Advertising Research (JAR) editorial team is calling for research into advertising and its place and role in Chinese society. The deadline for submissions is January 31, 2017.
The following list is an indicative, but not exhaustive, list of possible areas for submissions:
- Chinese consumer reactions to advertising content and media
- Cultural issues and their impact on advertising/promotions in China
- Insight into the infrastructural facilitators/impediments to advertising industry development in China
- Neuroscience insights and Chinese viewer behavior
- The use of celebrity endorsements in Chinese advertising
- Efficacy of different media in reaching various Chinese audiences
- The explosion of mobile in China and advertising strategies
- Ethical issues in Chinese advertisements
- Corporate social responsibility and advertising in China
- Social media use in China
- The impact of e-commerce on advertising media and creative
A preference is for empirical papers, but theoretical/conceptual papers will be considered if they provide a major advancement of understanding. Papers should be about building advertising theory and improving advertising practice. Given our strong practitioner readership, please place particular emphasis on practitioner implications of the research findings.
Optimal length for papers is 6,000 words, with shorter papers encouraged. Authors can use appendices for material useful, but not central, to the paper.
Any questions or to submit abstracts for feedback – please contact the Executive Editors: Professor John B. Ford for North American submissions (jbford@odu.edu) and Professor Jenni Romaniuk for submissions from other locations (Jenni@MarketingScience.info).
The emerging demographic context for the research and practice of human resource management (HRM) is unprecedented. Demographic shift in the form of ‘ageing societies’ has become recognized among academics and policy-makers as a growing economic challenge to organizations globally and to those operating from within so-called ‘developed’ economies in particular. Whereas some emerging economies and, by extension, some nationally-defined labor markets such as Turkey and Indonesia are experiencing rapid population growth and lower average ages among their populations, others such as Germany and Japan are experiencing a sharp fall in indigenous birth rates and simultaneously a rapidly ageing working population. In short, demographic shift in the form of ageing societies has become a key challenge to HRM policy-makers and practitioners across organizational, sectoral, regional, and national boundaries.
In this Special Issue we focus attention on two leading global economies, each giving context to historically comparable HRM systems: Germany and Japan. Each nationally defined system is under pressure to maintain equilibrium by seeking alternative working conditions or end-of-career pathways for older employees. At the national level, the response in each case might translate into policies for targeted immigration, increasing employment and career opportunities for women, or the raising of retirement ages in certain sectors. At an organizational level, HRM responses might become manifest in the re-negotiation of company pension and other compensation and benefit systems or the re-designing of work conditions and / or career pathways for older employees.
The emerging situation is both dynamic and, as stated previously, unprecedented. Consequently, organizations in both Germany and Japan are under pressure to formulate and implement innovative HRM strategies in response to the opportunities and threats to productivity that current global demographic trends are creating.
Call for Contributions
In the broader demographic context of ‘ageing societies’, this Management Revue Special Issue represents an attempt to identify and compare patterns of responses among HRM practitioners and policy-makers in German and Japanese organizations operating and competing across a range of business sectors. For the purpose of continuity across contributions we interpret ‘ageing societies’ as segments of nationally defined labor markets comprising current or potential employees at the age of fifty and over. In the specific context of markets for employment and career development so defined in Germany and Japan, we are looking for contributions on the following themes:
- Responding to the employment and career expectations of employees aged fifty and over in the German manufacturing sector
- Responding to the employment and career expectations of employees aged fifty and over in the Japanese manufacturing sector
- Responding to the employment and career expectations of employees aged fifty and over in German public sector organizations
- Responding to the employment and career expectations of employees aged fifty and over in Japanese public sector organizations
- Responding to the employment and career expectations of employees aged fifty and over in German service sector organizations
- Responding to the employment and career expectations of employees aged fifty and over in Japanese service sector organizations
Notes:
The Editors also welcome expressions of interest from potential contributors offering to write on themes that connect generally with those specified above.
The Editors especially welcome contributions in the form of joint collaborations between German and Japanese HRM researchers and practitioners.
Final contributions will be around 5,000 words in length.
The Editors undertake to provide full editorial support to contributors who are relatively new to preparing contributions for publication in a quality management journal through the medium of international English: initial offers to contribute can be submitted in English, German or Japanese.
Regardless of each contributor’s language of preference, the Editors undertake to engage all contributors in a cross-national dialogue that should both strengthen the cohesion of the discussion across contributions and establish a global network of HRM scholars and practitioners that endures beyond the publication of this Special Issue.
Deadline
Full papers for this Special Edition of ‘Management Revue’ must be with the editors by February 28th, 2015. All submissions will be subject to a double blind review process. Please submit your papers electronically via the online submission system at http://www.management-revue.org/submission/ ‘SI Ageing Societies – HRM’ as article section.
Hoping to hear from you!
Keith Jackson (keith.jackson@soas.ac.uk), SOAS, University of London and Doshisha University, Japan
Philippe Debroux, Soka University and Chuo University, Japan
Special Issue Editors
Xianghua Lu, Fudan University (lxhua@fudan.edu.cn)
Noman Shaheer, The University of Sydney (noman.shaheer@sydney.edu.au)
Weiguo Zhong, Peking University (zwg@gsm.pku.edu.cn)
Lin Tian, Fudan University (tianlin@fudan.edu.cn)
Jianyu Zhao, Harbin Engineering University (zjy@hrbeu.edu.cn)
Supervising Editor: Chinmay Pattnaik, University of Sydney (chinmay.pattnaik@sydney.edu.au)
In today’s era marked by rapid technological advancements, the confluence of Artificial Intelligence (AI) and organizational change emerges as a pivotal area for academic inquiry. AI, characterized as the pinnacle of computational progress reflecting human cognitive abilities, has evolved from an ambitious concept to a tangible reality. This evolution is reshaping business operations, strategic management, organization management and innovation management significantly (Berente, Gu, Recker, & Santhanam, 2021, p. 1435; Chen, Li, & Zhang, 2022; Fountaine, McCarthy, & Saleh, 2019). The adoption of AI technologies, including Large Language Model (LLM), machine learning, robotics, image recognition algorithms, and natural language processing, is not only augmenting decision-making processes but also fostering the creation of innovative products and services (Agrawal, Gans, & Goldfarb, 2018; Brynjolfsson & McAfee, 2014). This paper’s call to action is to examine the diverse effects of AI on organizational management and processes, emphasizing the necessity for extensive and cross-disciplinary studies in this rapidly changing and complex area (Bughin et al., 2018; Hirschberg & Manning, 2015).
AI’s widespread application in various organizational sectors has brought about a paradigm shift in strategic management and decision-making (Kaplan & Haenlein, 2019; Krakowski, Luger, & Raisch, 2023). AI’s capacity to analyze large datasets and predict trends is revolutionizing strategic planning, steering companies toward more data-driven and well-informed decisions (Davenport, Guha, Grewal, & Bressgott, 2020). This revolution is transforming not just conventional planning techniques but also establishing a new framework that incorporates AI insights for effective, long-term strategy and risk management (Fountaine, McCarthy, & Saleh, 2019). Concurrently, AI is driving a transformation in leadership and managerial approaches. Decision-making processes are becoming increasingly data-dependent, necessitating leaders to enhance their comprehension of AI’s potential and its broader implications (Brynjolfsson & McAfee, 2017). This change is spurring a shift in organizational culture, with a growing focus on innovation and adaptability (Iansiti & Lakhani, 2020; Sarwar, Gao, & Khan, 2023).
AI’s influence in organizational frameworks extends well beyond mere technological innovation and integration, impacting every aspect of business operations. AI presents vast opportunities for streamlining efficiency, innovating products and services, and securing a competitive advantage (Agrawal, Gans, & Goldfarb, 2018). Its role in automating routine tasks liberates valuable resources for operational initiatives (Brynjolfsson, Mitchell, & Rock, 2018) but also enhances decision-making accuracy through predictive analytics (Waller & Fawcett, 2013). In customer service, AI's presence is notable with the implementation of AI-driven chatbots and virtual assistants (Huang & Rust, 2018), and within human resources, it plays a crucial role in streamlining talent acquisition and management processes (Raisch & Krakowski, 2020). Nonetheless, while AI offers these benefits, it also introduces complex challenges, such as ethical issue, privacy concerns the implications of automation on operations management (Bughin et al., 2018). Consequently, organizations are tasked with the crucial responsibility of striking a balance between leveraging AI’s advantages and its responsible, ethical deployment, ensuring adept navigation in this new era of technology (Dignum, 2019).
AI technologies, such as machine learning, deep learning, and natural language processing, are reshaping the landscape of entrepreneurship (Chalmers, Shaw, & Carter, 2020). They provide novel tools for entrepreneurs to innovate, automate, and optimize various aspects of their ventures, from idea generation to scaling operations. For instance, AI can automate routine tasks, enhancing efficiency and freeing resources for innovations initiatives. The entrepreneurial landscape is changing due to AI's ability to predict trends and automate decision-making processes. This shift requires entrepreneurs to adapt their business models and strategies to harness AI's full potential. Future research in entrepreneurship should focus on understanding these changes, particularly how AI influences venture formation, decision-making processes within firms, and the overall outcomes of entrepreneurship, including financial returns and societal impacts.
AI is also rapidly transforming the landscape of international business, reshaping trade theories and policy implications. The burgeoning role of AI in global trade emphasizes the significance of economies of scale and knowledge creation (Olan et al., 2022). Firms with extensive datasets can generate more accurate predictions, leading to a competitive edge in the international market (Goldfarb & Trefler, 2018). This advantage is further augmented by the economies of scope, where AI's application across various domains within a company enhances its market position. However, the process of knowledge diffusion in AI exhibits a dual nature: while academic research and publications facilitate global knowledge sharing, the concentration of AI expertise in specific global tech hubs like Silicon Valley and Berlin indicates that much of AI's tacit knowledge remains regionally clustered. The strategic trade policy landscape is also being redefined by AI, with economies of scale, knowledge externalities, and the prominence of superstar scientists taking center stage. Privacy regulations have emerged as a critical factor in the AI-driven international business realm. Stricter privacy laws can constrain firms' innovative capabilities by limiting data accessibility, potentially leading to a competitive disadvantage in the global AI market. This scenario raises concerns about a potential "race to the bottom" in privacy standards, where countries might compete for AI industry investment through more lenient data usage policies.
Moreover, the advancement of AI signifies a shift from the industrial era to the information age, markedly improving data processing, business intelligence, and operational efficiencies across various industries (Bharadwaj, El Sawy, Pavlou, & Venkatraman, 2013). The integration of AI is particularly revolutionary, redefining organizational approaches to problem-solving and decision-making (Leonardi & Treem, 2020). As AI technologies continue to mature, they present new theoretical challenges, particularly in complex fields like neural networks and managing data uncertainty (Jordan & Mitchell, 2015). This dynamic environment underscores a range of emerging topics, including the application of machine learning in the expanding role of data science, and the deployment of deep learning in diverse sectors such as healthcare and environmental sciences (Agrawal, Gans, & Goldfarb, 2019).
Despite these technological strides, the assimilation of AI into existing systems necessitates significant investments, the upskilling of employees, and addressing critical issues around data privacy and security (Martin, 2019). Implementing AI effectively requires comprehensive change management strategies. This involves preparing the workforce for AI-driven alterations, promoting an innovative and learning-centric culture, and updating employee skills to match new technological requisites (Kane, Palmer, Phillips, Kiron, & Buckley, 2017). Therefore, the integration of AI into the business is significantly altering the employment landscape, presenting a mix of challenges and opportunities in workforce management (Chowdhury, Budhwar, Dey, Joel-Edgar, & Abadie, 2022). AI is transforming workplace functions, evident in its use in AI-enabled recruitment processes utilizing facial recognition and in automating sales operations (Tambe, Cappelli, & Yakubovich, 2019). While these innovations are remarkable, they also raise concerns about employee privacy and the potential adverse effects of labor optimization on the workforce (De Stefano, 2020). AI's application in tasks requiring complex reasoning, such as those involving advanced language models, prompts critical reflections on its influence on human involvement in judgment, decision-making, and creative endeavors (Daugherty & Wilson, 2018). The key challenge for organizations is to adapt to these transformations, fostering effective human-AIcollaboration, and addressing the ramifications of AI-driven decisions on organizational learning and individual career trajectories (Boudreau & Lakhani, 2017).
Comprehending the dynamics of how AI catalyzes organizational change is imperative for leaders and policymakers. The Asia pacific region provides an excellent context to explore and extend the organizational change research considering the substantial and intensive application of AI in this region. In addition, the Asia pacific region differs from other geographical regions in terms of political and socio-cultural contexts, which provides an opportunity for alternative conceptualizations of AI and organizational change.
In this special issue of Asia Pacific Journal of Management (APJM), we provide an opportunity for scholars to address both under-researched areas and unresolved issues related to a shared understanding of AI and organizational change. We welcome manuscripts on a large variety of topics, especially seeks contributions that deepen the understanding of AI’s role in organizational innovation and transformation, particularly emphasizing its impact on management. This invitation is extended to authors to engage in and enrich the ongoing conversation on the intricate relationship between AI and organizational change. Studies that provide unique insights of AI and organizational change in the contexts of Asia Pacific region with innovative methodologies are especially encouraged. A representative, but by no means exhaustive, listing of topics includes:
1. Strategic Management in an AI-Driven Era: How is AI redefining competitive advantage in various industries, and what implications does this have for strategic planning and execution? Studies in this domain could provide valuable insights into strategically leveraging AI for business growth and competitive advantages.
2. AI-Driven Innovation, Strategic Innovation Management in New Technology Context: How does AI contribute to organizational learning and innovation? What role does AI play in enhancing the production and service innovation process within organizations? How does AI enable organizations to capitalize on open innovation and collaborative ecosystems? How can AI drive disruptive innovation in established industries?
3. Entrepreneurship in the Age of AI: How does AI empower entrepreneurs in identifying and capitalizing on new market opportunities? In what ways can startups leverage AI to gain a competitive edge in rapidly evolving markets? What are the challenges and opportunities for entrepreneurs in building AI-driven business models?
4. Navigating Global Markets with AI and Strategies for International Business Expansion and Adaptation:How can AI assist companies in navigating the complexities of international markets and global competition? In what ways does AI enable businesses to adapt their products and services for diverse international markets? How does AI influence the decision-making process in international mergers, acquisitions, and partnerships?
5. AI Integration in Organizational Systems: How does the strategic incorporation of AI redefine organizational goals and competitive dynamics? What strategic planning is required to synchronize AI initiatives with long-term business strategies and objectives? How can AI integration ensure agility and adaptability in a rapidly evolving business environment?
6. AI and the Evolution of Organization Management: What impact does AI have on organizational structures, cultures, and processes? This line of inquiry aims to explore how AI-induced changes are reshaping organizational dynamics, redefining employee roles, and transforming the overall workplace environment. The goal is to understand AI's transformative potential for organizational design and culture (Zuboff, 2019) , the new skill sets required in AI-enhanced work environments, and strategies to nurture effective collaboration between humans and AI systems (Kellogg et al., 2020).
7. AI-Driven Decision Making in Organizations: How does AI influence decision-making processes at various organizational levels? This area of study should investigate the impact of AI on different tiers of decision-making, exploring how AI tools can enhance human judgment and decision-making abilities.
8. AI as a Strategic Tool in Enhancing Business Operations: How can AI-driven analytics strategically enhance the operations management in modern organization? What are the strategies for leveraging AI in streamlining operational processes and improving productivity? In what ways can AI contribute to the development of long-term relationships with business partners and improve value creation among ecosystems?
9. Ethical Dimensions of AI in Organizations: What ethical considerations arise from the deployment of AI in organizational contexts, and how can these be effectively managed? Investigations in this field should examine the ethical implications of AI, focusing on issues such as data privacy, algorithmic bias, and the formulation of ethical AIframeworks (Martin, 2019).
Further Details are available at: https://link.springer.com/journal/10490/updates/26984326
Annals in Social Responsibility is a new journal published once annually. We are currently seeking proposals for manuscripts to be included in the second volume or to be published in subsequent editions.
Journal Description & What Do We Publish?
Annals in Social Responsibility (ASR) publishes articles covering the significant developments in the area of Social Responsibility. ASR is a multi-disciplinary journal that publishes work arising from traditions in management, operations & supply chain management, marketing, economics, accounting & finance, sociology, psychology, political science, law, philosophy and other social and physical sciences that relate to the role that individuals, groups and institutions play in understanding of responsibilities and roles in society. Topics covered in the journal include major theoretical and methodological developments as well as current research in the aforementioned disciplines. Articles typically pertain to issues of corporate social responsibility, environmental and organizational sustainability, economic, corporate, social and political development, corporate, institutional and societal governance, property rights, social institutions and NGOs, and global issues of peace, conflict and human rights. Articles published appeal to a broad intellectual audience in their respective fields.
To be accepted for publication a paper must make a significant contribution to advancing knowledge about social responsibility through new theoretical insights, managerial application, methodology/data—or some combination thereof.
ASR has a particular interest in publishing the following types of manuscripts:
- Comprehensive, state-of-the-art literature reviews that integrate diverse research streams and identify promising directions for future investigations
- Analytical essays that offer new conceptual models or theoretical perspectives and use these frameworks as a foundation for developing research propositions
- Empirical articles that report results from exploratory or hypothesis-testing studies based on quantitative and/or qualitative methodologies
- Methodological papers that refine existing methodologies or develop new ones for investigating particular issues or topics central to the fields of inquiry listed above.
ASR Editorial Review Board
Herman Aguinis (Indiana, USA) – Human Resources, Modelling
Ruth Aguilera (Illinois, USA) – Governance, Intl Business
Pat Auger (Melbourne, AUSTRALIA) – Marketing, Modelling
Pratima Bansal (Ivey-UWO, CANADA) – Management, Sustainability
Michael Barnett (Rutgers, USA) – Management, Sustainability
Russell Belk (York, CANADA) – Marketing, Consumer Behaviour
Gordon Clark (Oxford, UK) – Earth Sciences, Sustainability
Jonathan Doh (Villanova, USA) – Politics, NGOs, Intl Business
Giana Eckhardt (London, Royal Holloway, UK) – Marketing, Consumer Behaviour
Jeffrey Harrison (Richmond, USA) – Strategy, Law
Stuart Hart (Cornell, USA) – Management, Innovation
Michael Hiscox (Harvard, USA) – Politics, Intl Relations
Ans Kolk (Amsterdam, NETHERLANDS) – NGOs, Development, Intl Business
Ted London (Michigan, USA) – NGOs, Development, Intl Business
Jeffrey Malpas (Tasmania, AUSTRALIA) – Ethics, Philosophy
Anita McGahan (Toronto, CANADA) – Strategy, Management
Joachim Schwalbach (Humboldt U-Berlin, GERMANY)
Donald Siegel (SUNY Albany, USA) – Strategy, Management, Governance
N. Craig Smith (Insead, FRANCE) – Strategy, Marketing
Tom Sorrell (Warwick, UK) – Philosophy, Politics
David Vogel (Berkeley, USA) – Economics, Politics
Richard Wilk (Indiana, USA) – Culture, Anthropology
Cynthia Williams (York, CANADA) – Law, Governance
Maurizio Zollo (Bocconi, ITALY) – Strategy, Sustainability
Submission Process
ASR does not accept article submissions without the initial submission of a proposal. The objective of the proposal process is to be efficient in the processing of articles. We want to know "what" you are going to say, "to whom" you are going to say it, "why" what you are saying is important, and "how" you are going to convince your audience of the veracity of your argument. This allows the editorial team to provide author(s) with information that facilitates the review process, while allowing us to be proactive in working with authors.
Proposals should be no longer than 5 pages single-spaced with standard 1-inch margins and in a 12-point font. The proposal must include the following information with the following headings.
The idea: The specific important and innovative idea that is going to be the focus of the article. This should not be long-winded literal description but be a clear and concise statement of the big/new idea that is at the core of what you are doing.
To whom is the article speaking: While ASR is clearly speaking to other scholars interested in issues of social responsibility, it is important to frame your paper in a specific topical and disciplinary area in the first instance. Hence, you need to outline who might be the primary audience for your article. For instance, is it the legal community, anthropologists, or marketing scholars (i.e., to what extent is it disciplinary?)? Is it those interested in human rights, CSR performance, or social innovation (i.e., to what extent is it phenomenon or topic based?)?
The importance of the idea: Why is your paper important? This needs to be understood as you address how you are going to take your specific knowledge and frame it in a way that resonates with your audience. In other words, why is it important to your readership and not just to you?
How are you going to justify, defend and communicate your idea: What is the theoretical and/or empirical evidence the article will be presenting in order to convince your audience of the veracity and importance of your idea? If you have specific data sources, outline what these are. If you are building a theoretical argument, then outline how you are going to logically justify and defend that argument. If your paper is empirical, provide a brief overview of your methods (e.g., experimental design, econometric model, statistical testing, etc.).
More information is available at: http://emeraldgrouppublishing.com/asr.htm and submissions are done via manuscript central.
Volume 1 of the journal can be seen here: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/toc/asr/1/1
You can read an editorial discussing the philosophy of the journal here: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/doi/full/10.1108/ASR-06-2015-0005
Over time we will be holding a series of workshops on topics of specific interest. We plan to hold these workshops in conjunction with conferences plus also independently.
If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the editors.
Inviting researchers to contribute to individual chapters in a book titled “Apparel retailing in emerging markets”.
I am specifically looking for researchers who can contribute to information regarding organization of apparel retail markets, international retailers in the market, buying for these markets, and consumers in these markets. The countries for which I am looking for contribution are:
China, Vietnam, Poland, Turkey, Chile, Romania, Argentina, Thailand, Russia, Spain, Brazil, and UAE.
Contributors will be included as co-authors for the chapter.
Please contact me for further details.
Best Wishes,
Jaya Halepete
Jaya Halepete, PhD
Assistant Professor
Fashion Merchandising
School of Arts and Sciences
Marymount University
2807 N. Glebe Road
Arlington, VA 22207
Office: 703 284 5752
Special Issue Editors:
- Christian Geisler Asmussen (Copenhagen Business School, Denmark, cga.smg@cbs.dk)
- Tailan Chi (University of Kansas, USA, chi@ku.edu)
- Sumit Kundu (Florida International University, USA, kundus@fiu.edu)
- Rajneesh Narula (University of Reading, UK, r.narula@reading.ac.uk)
Introduction
Forty years ago, Buckley and Casson (1976) published The Future of the Multinational Enterprise.. Following the intellectual legacy of Coase’s (1937) transaction cost economics, Buckley and Casson (1976: 33) argued that the multinational enterprise (MNE) internalizes activities across national boundaries “when markets in intermediate products are imperfect [because] there is an incentive to bypass them creating an internal market.” Hennart (1977, 1982), in parallel to Buckley and Casson (1976), contributed to the theory of the MNE by considering perspectives of transaction costs such as measurement and enforcement costs arising due to bounded rationality and opportunistic behavior in markets. Bringing an early resource-based perspective to internalization theory (before the notion of resource based view or RBV had even been coined in the field of strategy), Rugman (1981) explained internalization decisions made by the firm on the basis of firm specific advantages (FSAs) and country specific advantages (CSAs), while Rugman and Verbeke (1992, 2003, 2004) expanded on the geographic reach of these FSAs, thereby making the critical distinction between location-bound and non-location bound FSAs. Rugman and Verbeke (2001) also uncovered 10 distinct patterns of competence building across borders in MNEs that resulted from particular interactions between FSAs and CSAs, thereby acknowledging the joint importance of entrepreneurial action, transaction cost economizing and requisite resource combination inside the MNE. In parallel, the Eclectic Paradigm (Dunning, 1977, 1988, 1993; Dunning & Lundan, 2008) stressed the joint impact of ownership, location, and internalization advantages to explain the existence and functioning of the MNE. In combination, these theoretical advances have contributed to the establishment of internalization theory as a generally accepted theory of the MNE – and as an analytical framework that has explicitly or implicitly underlined much of the progress being made in International Business (IB) research over the last four decades. Internalization theory allows predicting a great number of organizational regularities in IB. These range from entry mode choices – and more generally the governance of international transactions, including the rise of international new ventures (INVs) – to internal organizational design in terms of structural and strategic governance, as well as the structuring of the interface with external economic actors. Yet, a number of issues still remain unresolved, and new questions have emerged—in particular, about the continued applicability of internalization theory in a rapidly changing world, and about the foundations of the theory in light of new developments in other fields and disciplines. This special issue on Applying and Advancing Internalization Theory invites original research that addresses these questions.
As noted by Rugman and Verbeke (2003: 125), The Future of the Multinational Enterprise was “a superb starting point for the study of the MNE, even if the complexity of this governance structure has grown far beyond what any international business scholar … could have predicted 25 years ago”. This is even more evident today as the nature of the global economy has changed and continues to change. Novel types of cross-border transactions and forms of MNEs have arisen, raising questions about the universal applicability of the theory. It is now time to revisit the theory of the MNE and to challenge its underlying assumptions. More advanced theoretical and empirical approaches promise to identify and explain better the little explored causal mechanisms leading to the existence or absence of MNEs. Analysis of these mechanisms will highlight not only the “why” but also the “how” of internalization theory. To advance this research agenda, we invite manuscripts from a variety of disciplines, including management and organizational studies, strategy, economics, economic geography, marketing, etc. Ideally, submitted manuscripts should improve upon the current state of internalization theory and its implications for managerial practice, by criticizing or extending the conventional thinking embedded within it. We welcome diverse approaches to this topic, including (but not limited to) conceptual models, formal models, simulations, experimental designs, and empirical studies (both qualitative and quantitative ones). Specifically, we invite submissions falling within one or both of the two themes described below.
Theme 1. Applying Internalization Theory to New Realities: Firms and Markets in the Contemporary Global Economy
Building upon general economic principles, applicable across a wide range of empirical phenomena, many scholars have credibly used internalization theory as an analytical tool in different institutional contexts. The theory has allowed explaining the presence of a variety of governance forms for managing international transactions (Casson, 1995, 2015; Narula & Verbeke, 2015). At the same time, few will dispute the fact that the world looks dramatically different today than it did when internalization theory first emerged. IB scholars therefore need to pay special attention to the new realities of the international economy and their influence on the evolution of MNEs.
A key tenet of internalization is that MNEs arise to exploit imperfections in markets, imperfections that are influenced by the myriad changes often referred to under the conceptual umbrella of “globalization”. These include political developments pertaining to economic integration, trade agreements, currency regimes, and other supra-national institutions that transform both the cost of managing firms across borders and of transacting in international markets (Rugman & Verbeke, 2005). They also include technological advances such as internet-based collaboration tools, virtual communities of practice, and online market exchanges, which have equally strong transaction cost implications (Bakos, 1998; Ardichvili, 2008). In combination, these developments have paved ways for new types of firms and novel business models. Firms are also geographically more dispersed than ever, engage in coopetition, have diffused innovation, and deploy global teams as well as virtual organizational structures (Axinn & Matthyssens, 2002).
Accordingly, two issues that loom large in this new world economic system are the growth of the service sector and the advent of the digital economy. The interactions that e-commerce firms have with their customers tend to possess different attributes and thus alter the cost-benefit calculus of various governance modes, as compared to the manufacturing sector (Singh & Kundu, 2002). Increasingly, new ventures aim to internationalize, right from inception, by leveraging advances in information technology. Widening geographic spread, alternative governance structures to access and control unique resources, and internalization of the core of value chain have strong theoretical implications (Oviatt & McDougall 1994; Verbeke, Zargarzadeh, & Osiyevskyy, 2014). In this process, the role of the subsidiary has become more vital, reflected in the growing importance of subsidiary specific advantage (Rugman and Verbeke, 2001; Mudambi and Navarra, 2004; Meyer, Mudambi, & Narula, 2011) and reverse innovation in MNEs (Mudambi, Piscitello, & Rabbiosi, 2014). As reflected in the concept of “meta-MNEs” (Lessard, Teece, & Leih, 2016), the existence of which can be explained by internalization theory (Verbeke & Kenworthy, 2008), the ability to earn economic rents from the creation of knowledge assets in subsidiaries around the world depends upon advantages of common governance. Yet there are also substantial costs of managing increasingly complex organizations and combining external and internal embeddedness in dispersed subsidiaries (Narula, 2014).
The same technological developments, in parallel with managerial and organizational developments, have also enabled MNEs to operate with increasingly porous boundaries (Regan & Heenan, 2010). The twenty-first century has witnessed the growth of networks and coalitions between firms (Dunning & Boyd, 2003), while the importance of relational assets and social capital has increased over time to as firms aim to access new knowledge (Dunning, 2003). The phenomenon of “quasi-internalization” has thus become increasingly relevant in today’s competitive landscape as organizations seek to utilize a middle-of-the-road approach to organize their activities – via both hierarchy and markets. Since the seminal paper of Hennart (1993) on the “swollen middle”, there has been a growing interest on MNEs’ minimization of organizational cost by looking at shirking, cheating, monitoring and other costs, recognizing that the choice is not one between internalization and externalization, but of a contextually contingent combination including outsourcing and alliances (Dunning, 2015).
These developments, which are often closely interlinked, present unique opportunities for theory development as they reveal the diverse strategies, challenges, and imperatives of the modern MNE. For example, does internalization theory apply, or perhaps apply differently, to alternative governance forms and structures, such as service firms, e-commerce firms, conglomerate businesses, state-owned enterprises, born global firms, family-owned MNEs, and Bottom-of-the-Pyramid MNEs? Does the rise of new business models based on new technologies or management principles influence the choice between internalization and externalization? How do MNEs mitigate opportunism, moral hazard, free riding, and other associated costs when generating and leveraging relational assets for productive gains? Is it even meaningful to continue to talk about the choice between firms and markets when the nature of contemporary economic exchange is often approaching one of quasi-internalization? Application of the theory to new and evolving contexts may bring new insights into subtle mechanisms, and ultimately inform the structure of the theory itself. With this theme, we welcome contributions that reflect the applicability (or partial applicability or even inapplicability) of internalization theory to the new realities of the contemporary global economy.
Theme 2. Advancing Internalization Theory by Rethinking its Foundations: Rationality, Learning, and Evolutionary Dynamics
Just as the context of internalization theory has changed, so has the way in which academics within and outside IB think and theorize about this context. With these changes, there is a so far largely untapped opportunity to integrate theoretical advances and empirical approaches from other disciplines into research on the MNE. Such integration has only recently and partially begun to take place, with various perspectives making excursions into the realm of IB. These include different disciplines, such as political economy (Henderson, Dicken, Hess, Coe, & Yeung 2002) and economic geography (Baldwin & Venables, 2013), as well as different approaches to theorizing, such as those related to microfoundations (Foss & Pedersen, 2004), general equilibrium modeling (Buckley & Hashai, 2009), co-evolutionary economics (Pitelis & Teece, 2010), equifinality (Raymond & St. Pierre, 2013), and agent-based simulation (Asmussen, Larsen, and Pedersen, 2016). However, uncharted territory still abounds and it is an open question how these perspectives can be subsumed into internalization theory, and in what ways they extend, refine, and challenge this theory. With this theme, we therefore aim to “open up the black box” of internalization theory and revisit its foundations.
One issue that sits squarely in this black box is the issue of behavioral assumptions. Internalization theory mostly predicts that effective governance forms will prevail, thereby implicitly or explicitly deriving its predictions from a profit-maximizing (or cost minimizing) paradigm (reflecting its roots in economic theory). Empirical evidence, in turn, mostly supports the predictions emerging from this paradigm, including predictions of foreign entry modes (e.g., Anderson & Gatignon, 1986; Agarwal & Ramaswami, 1992), location choices (e.g., Friedman, Gerlowski, & Silberman 1992; Mariotti & Piscitello, 1995), and performance (e.g., Kirca et al., 2011; Kirca, Fernandez, & Kundu 2016). However, we know surprisingly little about how these outcomes actually emerge. At the same time, economists themselves have continued to refine and challenge the notion of rationality. More precise concepts developed within the Coasean paradigm, such as adverse selection, moral hazard, holdup, have further enriched the analysis using the basic internalization approach (Chi, 1994), and imperfections such as bounded rationality and bounded reliability have been more completely developed (Verbeke & Greidanus, 2009; Kano & Verbeke, 2015). Even more radical departures from orthodoxy have come from new perspectives such as behavioral game theory (Camerer, 1997) and fairness equilibrium (Rabin, 1993). In this process, the barriers between economics and the other social science disciplines have become more porous and alternatives to economic rationality concepts, for example altruism (McWilliams, Siegel, & Wright, 2006) and collective identification (Cooper & Thatcher, 2010), have been applied to organizations and business settings.
These observations raise a number of related questions pertaining to internalization theory. For example, who makes the decisions about internalization and externalization? What guides these decision processes in terms of expectations, learning, and feedback loops, and how are those influenced by bounded rationality and by the challenges of measuring transaction costs? Which selection mechanisms (for example, competition in the markets for managers, capital, labor, or products) ensure efficient outcomes and under which conditions? What are the dynamic implications in terms of the evolution of firms and markets in a global context, and the performance of firms in the short and long term? To answer these questions, we need a better understanding of the causal mechanisms underlying the theory of the MNE, the scope of predictions supported by its assumptions, and the consequences of relaxing these assumptions. Obviously, any modifications to the assumptions and analytical logic of internalization need to be explicitly spelled out to ensure commensurability and logical consistency.
In rethinking the foundations of internalization theory along the above lines, new theoretical developments in adjacent research fields may provide leverage. These include, for example, the considerable research efforts on the governance of global value chains that have been undertaken since the 1990s in the fields of sociology, economic geography, development studies, and political economy. Scholars in these fields have examined issues such as sourcing (Gereffi 1999; Kaplinsky 1998; Dolan & Humphrey 2000) and contract manufacturing (Schmitz & Knorringa, 2010). Since the early 1990s, various frameworks have been put forward in attempting to explain how global industries are organized and governed (Coe, Dicken, & Hess, 2008). In their discussion of the organization of economic activities, these studies implicitly relate to the issue of global markets versus hierarchies that internalization theory also addresses, but so far very little cross-fertilization has occurred between these research streams.
Finally, similar to the governance aspects, the spatial aspects of internalization theory arguably remain equally underdeveloped, leaving ample opportunities to further integrate geographic aspects into studies of the MNE (Dunning, 1998). The ongoing analyses of semi-globalization (Ghemawat, 2003) and discontinuities in geographic space (Beugelsdijk and Mudambi, 2013) suggest the need to revisit accepted IB theories with the added insight of supra-national geographic levels, such as regions (Rugman and Verbeke, 2004; Arregle, Miller, Hitt, & Beamish, 2013; Verbeke & Asmussen, 2016), and of sub-national geographic levels, such as cities (Goerzen, Asmussen, & Nielsen, 2013). With this theme, we aim to integrate insights from the above-mentioned disciplines (and potentially other ones) outside of IB, into our understanding of the existence and boundaries of the MNE.
Conclusion
Of the two themes, the first has an emphasis on phenomena and the second on theory, but both themes have in common their focus on the MNE. Importantly, the two themes are not independent—for example, it is possible that the application of internalization theory to new contexts requires a re-specification of its assumptions, or that the change of assumptions leads to new predictions that require specific context for empirical testing. Overall, the aim of the special issue is to encourage academic research that develops more fine-grained analysis of how the MNE decides on its boundaries and on the organizational forms it takes. On particularly important, “intelligently controversial” questions, the editors may decide to foster debate using a point-counterpoint format. We hope that the collection of papers in our special issue will contribute to the evolving research on MNEs so as to create a more formative unified theory and a common epistemology for comprehending the evolution of MNEs within the ongoing progression of international business activities.
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between May 15, 2017, and June 1, 2017, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. Please indicate in the cover letter which theme(s) of the two described above the submitted manuscript addresses. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Agarwal, S. & Ramaswami, S. 1992. Choice of foreign market entry: impact of ownership, location and internationalization factors. Journal of International Business Studies, 33 (1), 517-551.
Anderson, E., & Gatignon, H. 1986. Modes of foreign entry: A transaction cost analysis and proposition. Journal of International Business Studies, 17(3), 1–26.
Ardichvili, A. 2008. Learning and Knowledge Sharing in Virtual Communities of Practice: Motivators, Barriers, and Enablers. Advances in Developing Human Resources, 10: 541–54.
Arregle, J.L., Miller, T.L., Hitt, M.A. & Beamish, P.W. 2013. Do regions matter? An integrated institutional and semiglobalization perspective on the internationalization of MNEs. Strategic Management Journal, 34(8), 910-934.
Asmussen, C.G., Larsen, M.M., & Pedersen, T. 2016. Organizational Adaptation in Offshoring: The Relative Performance of Home- and Host-based Learning Strategies. Organization Science, 27(4): 911-928.
Axinn, C. N. & Matthyssens, P. 2002. Limits on internationalization theories in an unlimited world. International Marketing Review 19(5), 436–449.
Bakos, Y. 1998. The emerging role of electronic marketplaces on the Internet. Communications of the ACM, 41(8): 35-42.
Baldwin, R. & Venables, A. 2013. Spiders and snakes: Offshoring and agglomeration in the global economy. Journal of International Economics, 90(2): 245–254.
Beugelsdijk, S., & Mudambi, R. 2013. MNEs as border-crossing multi-location enterprises: The role of discontinuities in geographic space. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(5), 413–426.
Buckley, P. J., & Casson, M. C. 1976. The future of the multinational enterprise. London: Macmillan
Buckley, P. J., & Hashai, N. 2009. Formalizing internationalization in the eclectic paradigm. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(1), 58–70.
Camerer, C. 1997. Behavioral game theory: Experiments in strategic interaction. New York, USA: Princeton University Press.
Casson, M. 1995. Enterprise and competitiveness: A systems view of international business: Oxford University Press.
Casson, M. C. 2015. Coase and International Business: The Origin and Development of Internalisation Theory. Managerial and Decision Economics, 36(1), 55-66.
Chi, T. 1994. Trading in strategic resources: Necessary conditions, transaction cost problems, and choice of exchange structure. Strategic Management Journal, 15 (4): 271-290.
Coase, R. H. 1937. The Nature of the Firm. Economica, 4(16), 386-405.
Coe, N.M., Dicken, P. & Hess, M. G. 2008. Introduction: global production networks – debates and challenges. Journal of Economic Geography, 8(3): 267-269.
Cooper, D., & Thatcher, S. M. B. 2010. Identification in organizations: The role of self-concept orientations and identification motives. Academy of Management Review, 35: 516–538.
Dolan, C. & Humphrey, J. 2000. Governance and trade in fresh vegetables: the impact of UK supermarkets on the African horticulture industry. Journal of Development Studies, 37(2): 147-76.
Dunning, J. H. 1977. Trade, location of economic activity and the multinational enterprise: A search for an eclectic approach In B. Ohlin, P. O. Hesselborn, & P. J. Wijkmann (Eds.), The International Allocation of Economic Activity, London: McMillan, 395-416.
Dunning, J. H. 1988. The eclectic paradigm of international production: A restatement and some possible extensions. Journal of International Business Studies, 19(1), 1-31.
Dunning, J. H. 1993. Multinational enterprises and the global economy. Wokingham: Addison Wesley Publishing company.
Dunning, J. H., 1998. Location and the multinational enterprise: a neglected factor? Journal of International Business Studies 29 (1), 45–66.
Dunning, J. H. 2003. Relational assets, networks and international business activity. In John H. Dunning and Gavin Boyd (Eds.), Alliance Capitalism and Corporate Management – Entrepreneurial Cooperation in Knowledge Based Economies: 1-23. Cheltenham, UK and Northampton, MA, USA: Edward Elgar.
Dunning, J. H. 2015. Reappraising the Eclectic Paradigm in an Age of Alliance Capitalism. In John H. Dunning (Ed.), The Eclectic Paradigm: A Framework for Synthesizing and Comparing Theories of International Business from Different Disciplines or Perspectives: 111-142. London, UK: Palgrave McMillan.
Dunning, J. H. and Boyd, G. (Eds.). 2003. Alliance Capitalism and Corporate Management – Entrepreneurial Cooperation in Knowledge Based Economies. Cheltenham, UK and Northampton, MA, USA: Edward Elgar.
Dunning, J. H. & Lundan, S. M. 2008. Multinational Enterprises and the Global Economy. Cheltenham, UK and Northampton, MA, USA: Edward Elgar.
Foss, N. & Pedersen, T. 2004. Organizing knowledge processes in the multinational corporation: an introduction. Journal of International Business Studies 35(5), 340–349.
Friedman, J., Gerlowski, D. A., & Silberman, J. 1992. What attracts foreign multinational corporations? Evidence from branch plant location in the United States. Journal of Regional Science, 32(4), 403-418.
Gereffi, G. 1999. International trade and industrial upgrading in the apparel commodity chain. Journal of International Economics, 48(1): 37-70.
Ghemawat, P. 2003. Semiglobalization and international business strategy. Journal of International Business Studies, 34(2), 138–52.
Goerzen, A., Asmussen, C. G., & Nielsen, B. B. 2013. Global cities and multinational enterprise location strategy. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(5), 427-450.
Hennart, J.-F. 1977. A theory of foreign direct investment. University of Maryland, Maryland.
Hennart, J.-F. 1982. A theory of multinational enterprise. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
Hennart, Jean-Francois. 1993. Explaining the swollen middle: Why most transactions are a mix of “market” and “hierarchy”. Organization Science, 4(4): 529-547.
Henderson, J., Dicken, P., Hess, M., Coe, N. & Wai-Chung Yeung, H. (2002) Global production networks and the analysis of economic development, Review of International Political Economy, 9(3), pp. 436–464
Kano, L. & Verbeke, A., 2015. The three faces of bounded reliability: Alfred Chandler and the micro-foundations of management theory. California Management Review, 58(1): 97-122.
Kaplinsky, R. 1998. Globalization, industrialization and sustainable growth: the pursuit of the nth rent. IDS Discussion Paper No. 365. Institute of Development Studies, University of Sussex, Brighton, UK.
Kirca, A. H., Hult, G. T. M., Roth, K., Cavusgil, S. T., Perryy, M. Z., Akdeniz, M. B., Deligonul, S. Z., Mena, J. A., Pollitte, W. A., & Hoppner, J. J. 2011. Firm-specific assets, multinationality, and financial performance: a meta-analytic review and theoretical integration. The Academy of Management Journal, 54(1), 47-72.
Kirca, A.H., Fernandez, W.D., & Kundu, S.K. 2016. An empirical analysis of internalization theory in emerging markets: The role of firm-specific assets and asset dispersion in the multinationality-performance relationship. Journal of World Business, 51(4): 628-640.
Lessard, D., Teece, D.J. & Leih, S., 2016. The Dynamic Capabilities of Meta‐Multinationals. Global Strategy Journal, 6(3), 211-224.
Mariotti, S., & Piscitello, L. 1995. Information costs and location of FDIs within the host country: empirical evidence from Italy. Journal of International Business Studies, 26(4), 815-841.
McWilliams, A., D. Siegel & P. M. Wright. 2006. Corporate Social Responsibility: Strategic Implications. Journal of Management Studies, 43(1): 1–18.
Meyer, K.E., Mudambi, R. & Narula, R., 2011. Multinational enterprises and local contexts: The opportunities and challenges of multiple embeddedness. Journal of Management Studies, 48(2): 235-252.
Mudambi, R. & Navarra, P., 2004. Is knowledge power? Knowledge flows, subsidiary power and rent-seeking within MNCs. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(5): 385-406.
Mudambi, R., Piscitello, L., & Rabbiosi, L. 2014. Reverse knowledge transfer in MNEs: Subsidiary innovativeness and entry modes. Long Range Planning, 47(1-2): 49-63.
Narula, R. 2014. Exploring the paradox of competence-creating subsidiaries: Balancing bandwidth and dispersion in MNEs. Long Range Planning, 47: 4-15.
Narula, R. & Verbeke, A., 2015. Making internalization theory good for practice: The essence of Alan Rugman's contributions to international business. Journal of World Business, 50(4), 612-622.
Oviatt, B.M. & McDougall, P.P., 1994. Toward a theory of international new ventures. Journal of International Business Studies, 25(1), 45-64.
Pitelis, C.N. & Teece, D.J., 2010. Cross-border market co-creation, dynamic capabilities and the entrepreneurial theory of the multinational enterprise. Industrial and Corporate Change, 19(4), 1247-1270.
Rabin, M. 1993. Incorporating Fairness into Game Theory and Economics. American Economic Review, 83 (5): 1281-1302.
Raymond, L. & St-Pierre, J. (2013). Strategic capability configurations for the internationalization of SMEs: A study in equifinality. International Small Business Journal, 31(1), 82–102.
Regan, M.C. & Heenan, P.T. 2010. Supply Chains and Porous Boundaries: The Disaggregation of Legal Services, Fordham Law Review 78, 2137-2139.
Rugman, A. M. 1981. Inside the multinationals: The economics of internal markets. London: Croom Helm.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 1992. A note on the transnational solution and the transaction cost theory of multinational strategic management. Journal of international business studies, 23(4), 761-771.
Rugman, A. M. & Verbeke, A., 2001. Subsidiary-specific advantages in multinational enterprises. Strategic Management Journal, 22(3), 237-250.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 2003. Extending the theory of the multinational enterprise: internalization and strategic management perspectives. Journal of International Business Studies, 34(2), 125-137.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 2004. A perspective on regional and global strategies of multinational enterprises. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(1), 3–18.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 2005. Towards a theory of regional multinationals: A transaction cost economics approach. Management International Review, 45(1): 5–17.
Singh, N. & Kundu, S.K. 2002. Explaining the growth of e-commerce corporations (ECCs): An extension and application of electic paradigm, Journal of International Business Studies, 33(4), 679-697.
Schmitz, H. & Knorringa, P. 2010. Learning from Global Buyers. The Journal of Development Studies, 37(2): 177-205.
Verbeke, A., Zargarzadeh, A. M. & Osiyevskyy, O., 2014. Internalization theory, entrepreneurship and international new ventures. Multinational Business Review, 22(3), 246-269.
Verbeke, A. & Asmussen, C.G. 2016. Global, Local, or Regional? The Locus of MNE Strategies. Journal of Management Studies, 53(6): 1051-1075.
Verbeke, Α., & Greidanus, N. 2009. The end of the opportunism versus trust debate: Bounded reliability as a new envelope concept in research on MNE governance. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(9): 1471-1495
Verbeke, A. & Kenworthy, T.P., 2008. Multidivisional vs metanational governance of the multinational enterprise. Journal of International Business Studies, 39(6), 940-956.
About the Guest Editors (Listed Alphabetically)
Christian Geisler Asmussen is a Professor of Strategic and International Management at Copenhagen Business School. Drawing on a background in formal economics but applying a multi-disciplinary approach to his research, he focuses in particular on the interaction between competitive advantage, geographic scope, and organizational structure. His research has been awarded numerous prizes from the Danish and international research communities, including the Barry M. Richman best dissertation award from the Academy of Management and the Haynes Prize for most promising scholar from the Academy of International Business. He currently heads a research project aiming to uncover the drivers of the micro-location choices of multinational firms.
Tailan Chi is a Professor of International Business & Strategy and Co-Director of the Center for Global Business Studies at the School of Business, University of Kansas. He is an editor of the Journal of International Business Studies and serves on the editorial boards of the Strategic Management Journal, Journal of World Business, Global Strategy Journal, International Journal of Strategic Change Management, and Journal of International Business & Economy.
Sumit Kundu is a Professor and James K. Batten Eminent Scholar Chair in International Business in the College of Business at Florida International University. He is the Vice President of the Academy of International Business [2014–2017] and serves on the editorial boards of Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of World Business, Global Strategy Journal, Journal of International Management, International Business Review, Management International Review, Cross Cultural and Strategic Management – An International Journal, and Thunderbird International Business Review.
Rajneesh Narula is the John H. Dunning Chair of International Business Regulation at the Henley Business School, University of Reading, UK. His research and consulting have focused on the role of multinational firms in development, innovation and industrial policy, R&D alliances and outsourcing. He has published over a 100 articles and chapters in books on these themes. He regularly acts as a consultant and advisor to the European Commission, UNIDO, UNCTAD and the OECD, and a variety of other international organizations. He holds honorary appointments at UNU-MERIT, Norwegian School of Business and Oxford University.
Tentative publication date: Summer 2018
Special Issue Editors:
- Christian Geisler Asmussen (Copenhagen Business School, Denmark, cga.smg@cbs.dk)
- Tailan Chi (University of Kansas, USA, chi@ku.edu)
- Sumit Kundu (Florida International University, USA, kundus@fiu.edu)
- Rajneesh Narula (University of Reading, UK, r.narula@reading.ac.uk)
Deadline for submission: June 1, 2017
Tentative publication date: Summer 2018
Introduction
Forty years ago, Buckley and Casson (1976) published The Future of the Multinational Enterprise.. Following the intellectual legacy of Coase’s (1937) transaction cost economics, Buckley and Casson (1976: 33) argued that the multinational enterprise (MNE) internalizes activities across national boundaries “when markets in intermediate products are imperfect [because] there is an incentive to bypass them creating an internal market.” Hennart (1977, 1982), in parallel to Buckley and Casson (1976), contributed to the theory of the MNE by considering perspectives of transaction costs such as measurement and enforcement costs arising due to bounded rationality and opportunistic behavior in markets. Bringing an early resource-based perspective to internalization theory (before the notion of resource based view or RBV had even been coined in the field of strategy), Rugman (1981) explained internalization decisions made by the firm on the basis of firm specific advantages (FSAs) and country specific advantages (CSAs), while Rugman and Verbeke (1992, 2003, 2004) expanded on the geographic reach of these FSAs, thereby making the critical distinction between location-bound and non-location bound FSAs. Rugman and Verbeke (2001) also uncovered 10 distinct patterns of competence building across borders in MNEs that resulted from particular interactions between FSAs and CSAs, thereby acknowledging the joint importance of entrepreneurial action, transaction cost economizing and requisite resource combination inside the MNE. In parallel, the Eclectic Paradigm (Dunning, 1977, 1988, 1993; Dunning & Lundan, 2008) stressed the joint impact of ownership, location, and internalization advantages to explain the existence and functioning of the MNE. In combination, these theoretical advances have contributed to the establishment of internalization theory as a generally accepted theory of the MNE – and as an analytical framework that has explicitly or implicitly underlined much of the progress being made in International Business (IB) research over the last four decades. Internalization theory allows predicting a great number of organizational regularities in IB. These range from entry mode choices – and more generally the governance of international transactions, including the rise of international new ventures (INVs) – to internal organizational design in terms of structural and strategic governance, as well as the structuring of the interface with external economic actors. Yet, a number of issues still remain unresolved, and new questions have emerged—in particular, about the continued applicability of internalization theory in a rapidly changing world, and about the foundations of the theory in light of new developments in other fields and disciplines. This special issue on Applying and Advancing Internalization Theory invites original research that addresses these questions.
As noted by Rugman and Verbeke (2003: 125), The Future of the Multinational Enterprise was “a superb starting point for the study of the MNE, even if the complexity of this governance structure has grown far beyond what any international business scholar … could have predicted 25 years ago”. This is even more evident today as the nature of the global economy has changed and continues to change. Novel types of cross-border transactions and forms of MNEs have arisen, raising questions about the universal applicability of the theory. It is now time to revisit the theory of the MNE and to challenge its underlying assumptions. More advanced theoretical and empirical approaches promise to identify and explain better the little explored causal mechanisms leading to the existence or absence of MNEs. Analysis of these mechanisms will highlight not only the “why” but also the “how” of internalization theory. To advance this research agenda, we invite manuscripts from a variety of disciplines, including management and organizational studies, strategy, economics, economic geography, marketing, etc. Ideally, submitted manuscripts should improve upon the current state of internalization theory and its implications for managerial practice, by criticizing or extending the conventional thinking embedded within it. We welcome diverse approaches to this topic, including (but not limited to) conceptual models, formal models, simulations, experimental designs, and empirical studies (both qualitative and quantitative ones). Specifically, we invite submissions falling within one or both of the two themes described below.
Theme 1. Applying Internalization Theory to New Realities: Firms and Markets in the Contemporary Global Economy
Building upon general economic principles, applicable across a wide range of empirical phenomena, many scholars have credibly used internalization theory as an analytical tool in different institutional contexts. The theory has allowed explaining the presence of a variety of governance forms for managing international transactions (Casson, 1995, 2015; Narula & Verbeke, 2015). At the same time, few will dispute the fact that the world looks dramatically different today than it did when internalization theory first emerged. IB scholars therefore need to pay special attention to the new realities of the international economy and their influence on the evolution of MNEs.
A key tenet of internalization is that MNEs arise to exploit imperfections in markets, imperfections that are influenced by the myriad changes often referred to under the conceptual umbrella of “globalization”. These include political developments pertaining to economic integration, trade agreements, currency regimes, and other supra-national institutions that transform both the cost of managing firms across borders and of transacting in international markets (Rugman & Verbeke, 2005). They also include technological advances such as internet-based collaboration tools, virtual communities of practice, and online market exchanges, which have equally strong transaction cost implications (Bakos, 1998; Ardichvili, 2008). In combination, these developments have paved ways for new types of firms and novel business models. Firms are also geographically more dispersed than ever, engage in coopetition, have diffused innovation, and deploy global teams as well as virtual organizational structures (Axinn & Matthyssens, 2002).
Accordingly, two issues that loom large in this new world economic system are the growth of the service sector and the advent of the digital economy. The interactions that e-commerce firms have with their customers tend to possess different attributes and thus alter the cost-benefit calculus of various governance modes, as compared to the manufacturing sector (Singh & Kundu, 2002). Increasingly, new ventures aim to internationalize, right from inception, by leveraging advances in information technology. Widening geographic spread, alternative governance structures to access and control unique resources, and internalization of the core of value chain have strong theoretical implications (Oviatt & McDougall 1994; Verbeke, Zargarzadeh, & Osiyevskyy, 2014). In this process, the role of the subsidiary has become more vital, reflected in the growing importance of subsidiary specific advantage (Rugman and Verbeke, 2001; Mudambi and Navarra, 2004; Meyer, Mudambi, & Narula, 2011) and reverse innovation in MNEs (Mudambi, Piscitello, & Rabbiosi, 2014). As reflected in the concept of “meta-MNEs” (Lessard, Teece, & Leih, 2016), the existence of which can be explained by internalization theory (Verbeke & Kenworthy, 2008), the ability to earn economic rents from the creation of knowledge assets in subsidiaries around the world depends upon advantages of common governance. Yet there are also substantial costs of managing increasingly complex organizations and combining external and internal embeddedness in dispersed subsidiaries (Narula, 2014).
The same technological developments, in parallel with managerial and organizational developments, have also enabled MNEs to operate with increasingly porous boundaries (Regan & Heenan, 2010). The twenty-first century has witnessed the growth of networks and coalitions between firms (Dunning & Boyd, 2003), while the importance of relational assets and social capital has increased over time to as firms aim to access new knowledge (Dunning, 2003). The phenomenon of “quasi-internalization” has thus become increasingly relevant in today’s competitive landscape as organizations seek to utilize a middle-of-the-road approach to organize their activities – via both hierarchy and markets. Since the seminal paper of Hennart (1993) on the “swollen middle”, there has been a growing interest on MNEs’ minimization of organizational cost by looking at shirking, cheating, monitoring and other costs, recognizing that the choice is not one between internalization and externalization, but of a contextually contingent combination including outsourcing and alliances (Dunning, 2015).
These developments, which are often closely interlinked, present unique opportunities for theory development as they reveal the diverse strategies, challenges, and imperatives of the modern MNE. For example, does internalization theory apply, or perhaps apply differently, to alternative governance forms and structures, such as service firms, e-commerce firms, conglomerate businesses, state-owned enterprises, born global firms, family-owned MNEs, and Bottom-of-the-Pyramid MNEs? Does the rise of new business models based on new technologies or management principles influence the choice between internalization and externalization? How do MNEs mitigate opportunism, moral hazard, free riding, and other associated costs when generating and leveraging relational assets for productive gains? Is it even meaningful to continue to talk about the choice between firms and markets when the nature of contemporary economic exchange is often approaching one of quasi-internalization? Application of the theory to new and evolving contexts may bring new insights into subtle mechanisms, and ultimately inform the structure of the theory itself. With this theme, we welcome contributions that reflect the applicability (or partial applicability or even inapplicability) of internalization theory to the new realities of the contemporary global economy.
Theme 2. Advancing Internalization Theory by Rethinking its Foundations: Rationality, Learning, and Evolutionary Dynamics
Just as the context of internalization theory has changed, so has the way in which academics within and outside IB think and theorize about this context. With these changes, there is a so far largely untapped opportunity to integrate theoretical advances and empirical approaches from other disciplines into research on the MNE. Such integration has only recently and partially begun to take place, with various perspectives making excursions into the realm of IB. These include different disciplines, such as political economy (Henderson, Dicken, Hess, Coe, & Yeung 2002) and economic geography (Baldwin & Venables, 2013), as well as different approaches to theorizing, such as those related to microfoundations (Foss & Pedersen, 2004), general equilibrium modeling (Buckley & Hashai, 2009), co-evolutionary economics (Pitelis & Teece, 2010), equifinality (Raymond & St. Pierre, 2013), and agent-based simulation (Asmussen, Larsen, and Pedersen, 2016). However, uncharted territory still abounds and it is an open question how these perspectives can be subsumed into internalization theory, and in what ways they extend, refine, and challenge this theory. With this theme, we therefore aim to “open up the black box” of internalization theory and revisit its foundations.
One issue that sits squarely in this black box is the issue of behavioral assumptions. Internalization theory mostly predicts that effective governance forms will prevail, thereby implicitly or explicitly deriving its predictions from a profit-maximizing (or cost minimizing) paradigm (reflecting its roots in economic theory). Empirical evidence, in turn, mostly supports the predictions emerging from this paradigm, including predictions of foreign entry modes (e.g., Anderson & Gatignon, 1986; Agarwal & Ramaswami, 1992), location choices (e.g., Friedman, Gerlowski, & Silberman 1992; Mariotti & Piscitello, 1995), and performance (e.g., Kirca et al., 2011; Kirca, Fernandez, & Kundu 2016). However, we know surprisingly little about how these outcomes actually emerge. At the same time, economists themselves have continued to refine and challenge the notion of rationality. More precise concepts developed within the Coasean paradigm, such as adverse selection, moral hazard, holdup, have further enriched the analysis using the basic internalization approach (Chi, 1994), and imperfections such as bounded rationality and bounded reliability have been more completely developed (Verbeke & Greidanus, 2009; Kano & Verbeke, 2015). Even more radical departures from orthodoxy have come from new perspectives such as behavioral game theory (Camerer, 1997) and fairness equilibrium (Rabin, 1993). In this process, the barriers between economics and the other social science disciplines have become more porous and alternatives to economic rationality concepts, for example altruism (McWilliams, Siegel, & Wright, 2006) and collective identification (Cooper & Thatcher, 2010), have been applied to organizations and business settings.
These observations raise a number of related questions pertaining to internalization theory. For example, who makes the decisions about internalization and externalization? What guides these decision processes in terms of expectations, learning, and feedback loops, and how are those influenced by bounded rationality and by the challenges of measuring transaction costs? Which selection mechanisms (for example, competition in the markets for managers, capital, labor, or products) ensure efficient outcomes and under which conditions? What are the dynamic implications in terms of the evolution of firms and markets in a global context, and the performance of firms in the short and long term? To answer these questions, we need a better understanding of the causal mechanisms underlying the theory of the MNE, the scope of predictions supported by its assumptions, and the consequences of relaxing these assumptions. Obviously, any modifications to the assumptions and analytical logic of internalization need to be explicitly spelled out to ensure commensurability and logical consistency.
In rethinking the foundations of internalization theory along the above lines, new theoretical developments in adjacent research fields may provide leverage. These include, for example, the considerable research efforts on the governance of global value chains that have been undertaken since the 1990s in the fields of sociology, economic geography, development studies, and political economy. Scholars in these fields have examined issues such as sourcing (Gereffi 1999; Kaplinsky 1998; Dolan & Humphrey 2000) and contract manufacturing (Schmitz & Knorringa, 2010). Since the early 1990s, various frameworks have been put forward in attempting to explain how global industries are organized and governed (Coe, Dicken, & Hess, 2008). In their discussion of the organization of economic activities, these studies implicitly relate to the issue of global markets versus hierarchies that internalization theory also addresses, but so far very little cross-fertilization has occurred between these research streams.
Finally, similar to the governance aspects, the spatial aspects of internalization theory arguably remain equally underdeveloped, leaving ample opportunities to further integrate geographic aspects into studies of the MNE (Dunning, 1998). The ongoing analyses of semi-globalization (Ghemawat, 2003) and discontinuities in geographic space (Beugelsdijk and Mudambi, 2013) suggest the need to revisit accepted IB theories with the added insight of supra-national geographic levels, such as regions (Rugman and Verbeke, 2004; Arregle, Miller, Hitt, & Beamish, 2013; Verbeke & Asmussen, 2016), and of sub-national geographic levels, such as cities (Goerzen, Asmussen, & Nielsen, 2013). With this theme, we aim to integrate insights from the above-mentioned disciplines (and potentially other ones) outside of IB, into our understanding of the existence and boundaries of the MNE.
Conclusion
Of the two themes, the first has an emphasis on phenomena and the second on theory, but both themes have in common their focus on the MNE. Importantly, the two themes are not independent—for example, it is possible that the application of internalization theory to new contexts requires a re-specification of its assumptions, or that the change of assumptions leads to new predictions that require specific context for empirical testing. Overall, the aim of the special issue is to encourage academic research that develops more fine-grained analysis of how the MNE decides on its boundaries and on the organizational forms it takes. On particularly important, “intelligently controversial” questions, the editors may decide to foster debate using a point-counterpoint format. We hope that the collection of papers in our special issue will contribute to the evolving research on MNEs so as to create a more formative unified theory and a common epistemology for comprehending the evolution of MNEs within the ongoing progression of international business activities.
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between May 15, 2017, and June 1, 2017, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. Please indicate in the cover letter which theme(s) of the two described above the submitted manuscript addresses. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Agarwal, S. & Ramaswami, S. 1992. Choice of foreign market entry: impact of ownership, location and internationalization factors. Journal of International Business Studies, 33 (1), 517-551.
Anderson, E., & Gatignon, H. 1986. Modes of foreign entry: A transaction cost analysis and proposition. Journal of International Business Studies, 17(3), 1–26.
Ardichvili, A. 2008. Learning and Knowledge Sharing in Virtual Communities of Practice: Motivators, Barriers, and Enablers. Advances in Developing Human Resources, 10: 541–54.
Arregle, J.L., Miller, T.L., Hitt, M.A. & Beamish, P.W. 2013. Do regions matter? An integrated institutional and semiglobalization perspective on the internationalization of MNEs. Strategic Management Journal, 34(8), 910-934.
Asmussen, C.G., Larsen, M.M., & Pedersen, T. 2016. Organizational Adaptation in Offshoring: The Relative Performance of Home- and Host-based Learning Strategies. Organization Science, 27(4): 911-928.
Axinn, C. N. & Matthyssens, P. 2002. Limits on internationalization theories in an unlimited world. International Marketing Review 19(5), 436–449.
Bakos, Y. 1998. The emerging role of electronic marketplaces on the Internet. Communications of the ACM, 41(8): 35-42.
Baldwin, R. & Venables, A. 2013. Spiders and snakes: Offshoring and agglomeration in the global economy. Journal of International Economics, 90(2): 245–254.
Beugelsdijk, S., & Mudambi, R. 2013. MNEs as border-crossing multi-location enterprises: The role of discontinuities in geographic space. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(5), 413–426.
Buckley, P. J., & Casson, M. C. 1976. The future of the multinational enterprise. London: Macmillan
Buckley, P. J., & Hashai, N. 2009. Formalizing internationalization in the eclectic paradigm. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(1), 58–70.
Camerer, C. 1997. Behavioral game theory: Experiments in strategic interaction. New York, USA: Princeton University Press.
Casson, M. 1995. Enterprise and competitiveness: A systems view of international business: Oxford University Press.
Casson, M. C. 2015. Coase and International Business: The Origin and Development of Internalisation Theory. Managerial and Decision Economics, 36(1), 55-66.
Chi, T. 1994. Trading in strategic resources: Necessary conditions, transaction cost problems, and choice of exchange structure. Strategic Management Journal, 15 (4): 271-290.
Coase, R. H. 1937. The Nature of the Firm. Economica, 4(16), 386-405.
Coe, N.M., Dicken, P. & Hess, M. G. 2008. Introduction: global production networks – debates and challenges. Journal of Economic Geography, 8(3): 267-269.
Cooper, D., & Thatcher, S. M. B. 2010. Identification in organizations: The role of self-concept orientations and identification motives. Academy of Management Review, 35: 516–538.
Dolan, C. & Humphrey, J. 2000. Governance and trade in fresh vegetables: the impact of UK supermarkets on the African horticulture industry. Journal of Development Studies, 37(2): 147-76.
Dunning, J. H. 1977. Trade, location of economic activity and the multinational enterprise: A search for an eclectic approach In B. Ohlin, P. O. Hesselborn, & P. J. Wijkmann (Eds.), The International Allocation of Economic Activity, London: McMillan, 395-416.
Dunning, J. H. 1988. The eclectic paradigm of international production: A restatement and some possible extensions. Journal of International Business Studies, 19(1), 1-31.
Dunning, J. H. 1993. Multinational enterprises and the global economy. Wokingham: Addison Wesley Publishing company.
Dunning, J. H., 1998. Location and the multinational enterprise: a neglected factor? Journal of International Business Studies 29 (1), 45–66.
Dunning, J. H. 2003. Relational assets, networks and international business activity. In John H. Dunning and Gavin Boyd (Eds.), Alliance Capitalism and Corporate Management – Entrepreneurial Cooperation in Knowledge Based Economies: 1-23. Cheltenham, UK and Northampton, MA, USA: Edward Elgar.
Dunning, J. H. 2015. Reappraising the Eclectic Paradigm in an Age of Alliance Capitalism. In John H. Dunning (Ed.), The Eclectic Paradigm: A Framework for Synthesizing and Comparing Theories of International Business from Different Disciplines or Perspectives: 111-142. London, UK: Palgrave McMillan.
Dunning, J. H. and Boyd, G. (Eds.). 2003. Alliance Capitalism and Corporate Management – Entrepreneurial Cooperation in Knowledge Based Economies. Cheltenham, UK and Northampton, MA, USA: Edward Elgar.
Dunning, J. H. & Lundan, S. M. 2008. Multinational Enterprises and the Global Economy. Cheltenham, UK and Northampton, MA, USA: Edward Elgar.
Foss, N. & Pedersen, T. 2004. Organizing knowledge processes in the multinational corporation: an introduction. Journal of International Business Studies 35(5), 340–349.
Friedman, J., Gerlowski, D. A., & Silberman, J. 1992. What attracts foreign multinational corporations? Evidence from branch plant location in the United States. Journal of Regional Science, 32(4), 403-418.
Gereffi, G. 1999. International trade and industrial upgrading in the apparel commodity chain. Journal of International Economics, 48(1): 37-70.
Ghemawat, P. 2003. Semiglobalization and international business strategy. Journal of International Business Studies, 34(2), 138–52.
Goerzen, A., Asmussen, C. G., & Nielsen, B. B. 2013. Global cities and multinational enterprise location strategy. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(5), 427-450.
Hennart, J.-F. 1977. A theory of foreign direct investment. University of Maryland, Maryland.
Hennart, J.-F. 1982. A theory of multinational enterprise. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
Hennart, Jean-Francois. 1993. Explaining the swollen middle: Why most transactions are a mix of “market” and “hierarchy”. Organization Science, 4(4): 529-547.
Henderson, J., Dicken, P., Hess, M., Coe, N. & Wai-Chung Yeung, H. (2002) Global production networks and the analysis of economic development, Review of International Political Economy, 9(3), pp. 436–464
Kano, L. & Verbeke, A., 2015. The three faces of bounded reliability: Alfred Chandler and the micro-foundations of management theory. California Management Review, 58(1): 97-122.
Kaplinsky, R. 1998. Globalization, industrialization and sustainable growth: the pursuit of the nth rent. IDS Discussion Paper No. 365. Institute of Development Studies, University of Sussex, Brighton, UK.
Kirca, A. H., Hult, G. T. M., Roth, K., Cavusgil, S. T., Perryy, M. Z., Akdeniz, M. B., Deligonul, S. Z., Mena, J. A., Pollitte, W. A., & Hoppner, J. J. 2011. Firm-specific assets, multinationality, and financial performance: a meta-analytic review and theoretical integration. The Academy of Management Journal, 54(1), 47-72.
Kirca, A.H., Fernandez, W.D., & Kundu, S.K. 2016. An empirical analysis of internalization theory in emerging markets: The role of firm-specific assets and asset dispersion in the multinationality-performance relationship. Journal of World Business, 51(4): 628-640.
Lessard, D., Teece, D.J. & Leih, S., 2016. The Dynamic Capabilities of Meta‐Multinationals. Global Strategy Journal, 6(3), 211-224.
Mariotti, S., & Piscitello, L. 1995. Information costs and location of FDIs within the host country: empirical evidence from Italy. Journal of International Business Studies, 26(4), 815-841.
McWilliams, A., D. Siegel & P. M. Wright. 2006. Corporate Social Responsibility: Strategic Implications. Journal of Management Studies, 43(1): 1–18.
Meyer, K.E., Mudambi, R. & Narula, R., 2011. Multinational enterprises and local contexts: The opportunities and challenges of multiple embeddedness. Journal of Management Studies, 48(2): 235-252.
Mudambi, R. & Navarra, P., 2004. Is knowledge power? Knowledge flows, subsidiary power and rent-seeking within MNCs. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(5): 385-406.
Mudambi, R., Piscitello, L., & Rabbiosi, L. 2014. Reverse knowledge transfer in MNEs: Subsidiary innovativeness and entry modes. Long Range Planning, 47(1-2): 49-63.
Narula, R. 2014. Exploring the paradox of competence-creating subsidiaries: Balancing bandwidth and dispersion in MNEs. Long Range Planning, 47: 4-15.
Narula, R. & Verbeke, A., 2015. Making internalization theory good for practice: The essence of Alan Rugman's contributions to international business. Journal of World Business, 50(4), 612-622.
Oviatt, B.M. & McDougall, P.P., 1994. Toward a theory of international new ventures. Journal of International Business Studies, 25(1), 45-64.
Pitelis, C.N. & Teece, D.J., 2010. Cross-border market co-creation, dynamic capabilities and the entrepreneurial theory of the multinational enterprise. Industrial and Corporate Change, 19(4), 1247-1270.
Rabin, M. 1993. Incorporating Fairness into Game Theory and Economics. American Economic Review, 83 (5): 1281-1302.
Raymond, L. & St-Pierre, J. (2013). Strategic capability configurations for the internationalization of SMEs: A study in equifinality. International Small Business Journal, 31(1), 82–102.
Regan, M.C. & Heenan, P.T. 2010. Supply Chains and Porous Boundaries: The Disaggregation of Legal Services, Fordham Law Review 78, 2137-2139.
Rugman, A. M. 1981. Inside the multinationals: The economics of internal markets. London: Croom Helm.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 1992. A note on the transnational solution and the transaction cost theory of multinational strategic management. Journal of international business studies, 23(4), 761-771.
Rugman, A. M. & Verbeke, A., 2001. Subsidiary-specific advantages in multinational enterprises. Strategic Management Journal, 22(3), 237-250.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 2003. Extending the theory of the multinational enterprise: internalization and strategic management perspectives. Journal of International Business Studies, 34(2), 125-137.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 2004. A perspective on regional and global strategies of multinational enterprises. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(1), 3–18.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. 2005. Towards a theory of regional multinationals: A transaction cost economics approach. Management International Review, 45(1): 5–17.
Singh, N. & Kundu, S.K. 2002. Explaining the growth of e-commerce corporations (ECCs): An extension and application of electic paradigm, Journal of International Business Studies, 33(4), 679-697.
Schmitz, H. & Knorringa, P. 2010. Learning from Global Buyers. The Journal of Development Studies, 37(2): 177-205.
Verbeke, A., Zargarzadeh, A. M. & Osiyevskyy, O., 2014. Internalization theory, entrepreneurship and international new ventures. Multinational Business Review, 22(3), 246-269.
Verbeke, A. & Asmussen, C.G. 2016. Global, Local, or Regional? The Locus of MNE Strategies. Journal of Management Studies, 53(6): 1051-1075.
Verbeke, Α., & Greidanus, N. 2009. The end of the opportunism versus trust debate: Bounded reliability as a new envelope concept in research on MNE governance. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(9): 1471-1495
Verbeke, A. & Kenworthy, T.P., 2008. Multidivisional vs metanational governance of the multinational enterprise. Journal of International Business Studies, 39(6), 940-956.
About the Guest Editors (Listed Alphabetically)
Christian Geisler Asmussen is a Professor of Strategic and International Management at Copenhagen Business School. Drawing on a background in formal economics but applying a multi-disciplinary approach to his research, he focuses in particular on the interaction between competitive advantage, geographic scope, and organizational structure. His research has been awarded numerous prizes from the Danish and international research communities, including the Barry M. Richman best dissertation award from the Academy of Management and the Haynes Prize for most promising scholar from the Academy of International Business. He currently heads a research project aiming to uncover the drivers of the micro-location choices of multinational firms.
Tailan Chi is a Professor of International Business & Strategy and Co-Director of the Center for Global Business Studies at the School of Business, University of Kansas. He is an editor of the Journal of International Business Studies and serves on the editorial boards of the Strategic Management Journal, Journal of World Business, Global Strategy Journal, International Journal of Strategic Change Management, and Journal of International Business & Economy.
Sumit Kundu is a Professor and James K. Batten Eminent Scholar Chair in International Business in the College of Business at Florida International University. He is the Vice President of the Academy of International Business [2014–2017] and serves on the editorial boards of Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of World Business, Global Strategy Journal, Journal of International Management, International Business Review, Management International Review, Cross Cultural and Strategic Management – An International Journal, and Thunderbird International Business Review.
Rajneesh Narula is the John H. Dunning Chair of International Business Regulation at the Henley Business School, University of Reading, UK. His research and consulting have focused on the role of multinational firms in development, innovation and industrial policy, R&D alliances and outsourcing. He has published over a 100 articles and chapters in books on these themes. He regularly acts as a consultant and advisor to the European Commission, UNIDO, UNCTAD and the OECD, and a variety of other international organizations. He holds honorary appointments at UNU-MERIT, Norwegian School of Business and Oxford University.
International Journal of Multinational Corporation Strategy Special Issue on: "Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Technology Diffusion – Multinational Marketing Management Strategies"
As technology revolutionises communication, financial flows and transportation, the world continues to feel smaller and smaller. It is now possible for companies to conduct business in almost any country around the world due to advances in global trade. Consequently, international and multinational marketing management are becoming more important; they support business activities, co-operations and consumer promotions. Multinational marketing can be simply categorised into two modes: business-to-business mode (B2B; industrial marketing) focuses on co-operations between organisations and resource sharing and integration, while business-to-consumer mode (B2C; promotional marketing) puts more emphasis on product and service positioning as well as promotions for end customers. From the B2B industrial marketing perspective, with the trend of AI development, global technology companies such as Google, IBM and NVIDIA have started to establish research centres and invest in skilled technical employees in host countries. These multinational enterprises (MNEs) work closely with local businesses in host countries and utilise the host country's information and communications technology (ICT) supply chain planning and technological manufacturing capabilities in the MNEs' AI research and development (R&D) and production. Having support from the governments of these host countries, such as the policy of promoting open, investment regimes and liberalised trade as a basis for economic growth, MNEs aim to build a consummate innovation ecosystem in these host countries.
Nevertheless, the innovation diffusion and collaborative R&D industrial strategies are facing significant challenges. For instance, MNEs' strategies in innovation diffusion and R&D collaboration are affected by host countries' industrial clusters, supply chains and related regulations (Cantwell & Zhang, 2011; Crescenzi, Gagliardi & Iammarino, 2015; Nygaard & Dahlstrom, 1992); resource integration is difficult as industrial marketing elements such as the host country's technology adoption capabilities of different industries and companies—including semiconductors, ICT, precision machinery manufacturing, and textiles—all need considerable evaluation and organisation (Castellani & Zanfei, 2002; Reddy, 1997). From the B2C marketing perspective, although more researchers and practitioners are devoted to promoting new AI applications, existing studies predominantly focus on maximising AI utility. For instance, the technology acceptance model (TAM) suggests that ease of use, usefulness, privacy issues and the possible risks of using an AI application can affect consumers adoption intentions (Davis, 1989; Duan, Edwards & Dwivedi, 2019).
However, more and more industrial reports indicate that the relevant AI utility factors are not sufficient enough to support the international marketing and promotional activities in most host countries, particularly host countries with companies who have recently established cooperative relationships with the MNEs (i.e. the AI applications are fairly new to consumers in these host countries) (Roth & Romeo, 1992; Carneiro & Faria, 2016). For instance, the Chinese brand Vivo frequently introduces innovative technologies but often encounters challenges when promoting in host countries such as Japan and Korea where Vivo develops AI applications with local businesses (Batra et al., 2000). Similarly, plastic payment such as debit cards and mobile payment are widely adopted in Western countries but are hard to promote in most Eastern societies such as India, even though many technological protocols are codeveloped with companies in India (Kesharwani & Bisht, 2012; Zhao, Anong & Zhang, 2019).
Furthermore, Facebook has been widely adopted by 24 billion users worldwide, but their Marketplace services are difficult to promote outside the U.S (Al-Heeti, 2018). In summary, although a good AI multinational co-operation might be established between the home country and the host country, the promotion of these AI applications in host countries can still be challenging. Some practitioners suggest that when introducing new technologies and AI applications to a new country or region, companies should create a character brand (Zhao & Balague, 2015). For example, “LINE”, an instant communication application for electronic devices, introduced “LINE FRIENDS” to create different characters or mascots for the brand. Such brand positioning strategies may help companies introduce new technology to other countries by capitalising on an emotional bond with consumers (Calder, Malthouse & Schaedel, 2009).
Nevertheless, when lacking a consistent theoretical foundation, it is hard to duplicate business success across nations. Unfortunately, only a few studies have investigated AI business co-operations with local organisations in host countries (B2B) or promotional strategies of AI applications (B2C) in these host countries. Our understanding of brand management, consumers' technology adoption intention, and cultural differences in managing and establishing multinational marketing management strategies is still limited. This call for papers seeks to provide multinational companies with AI development and management strategies from the B2B and B2C marketing perspectives, including government policy development, innovation diffusion and ecosystems, consumer behaviour and culture differences, and consumer AI adoption. Studies are encouraged to investigate industrial marketing perspectives and/or the consumer promotional marketing perspective of MNEs seeking to expand AI technologies to new foreign markets.
Subject Coverage Suitable topics include, but are not limited, to the following:
From the B2B perspective:
- MNE with AI development’s marketing and innovation diffusion
- MNE with AI development’s global innovation strategy on AI technology
- MNE with AI development and (local) innovation ecosystem
- MNE with AI development and host countries’ sectoral and technological innovation system
- MNEs with AI development’s innovation diffusion and host countries’ technology adoption
- AI innovation diffusion and industrial dynamics/transformation
From the B2C perspective:
- MNEs’ brand extension and management
- MNEs’ country of origin and country image on the execution of AI and introduction of new technology to a new market
- MNEs’ communication and promotional strategies
- MNEs’ AI personalisation and localisation of products
- Target market legislation or government policy barriers on MNEs’ introduction of AI and new technology products
Notes for Prospective Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. (N.B. Conference papers may only be submitted if the paper has been completely rewritten and if appropriate written permissions have been obtained from any copyright holders of the original paper). All papers are refereed through a peer review process. https://www.dropbox.com/s/ih7pokks4wqhjxi/IJMCS%20CFP%20id4954.pdf?dl=0 All papers must be submitted online. To submit a paper, please read our Submitting articles page: https://www.inderscience.com/jhome.php?jcode=ijmcs
If you have any queries concerning this special issue, please email Dr. Yu-Lun Liu at y.l.liu@ntut.edu.tw.
Important Dates
Manuscripts due by: 31 May, 2020
Notification to authors: 31 July, 2020
Final versions due by: 1 October, 2020
References
Al-Heeti, A. (2018). 'Facebook Marketplace is used in 70 countries, by 800 million people monthly', CNET, 1 May [Online]. Available at: https://www.cnet.com/news/facebook-marketplace-is-used-in-70-countries-by-800-million-people-monthly/ (Accessed: 28 September 2019).
Batra, R., Ramaswamy, V., Alden, D. L., Steenkamp, J. E. M. and Ramachander, S. (2000). 'Effects of brand local and nonlocal origin on consumer attitudes in developing countries', Journal of Consumer Psychology, 9(2), pp. 83-95.
Calder, B. J., Malthouse, E. C. and Schaedel, U. (2009). 'An experimental study of the relationship between online engagement and advertising effectiveness', Journal of Interactive Marketing, 23(4), pp. 321-331.
Cantwell, J., and Zhang, Y. (2011). 'Innovation and location in the multinational firm', International Journal of Technology Management, 54(1), pp. 116-132.
Carneiro, J. and Faria, F. (2016). 'Quest for purposefully designed conceptualization of the country-of-origin image construct', Journal of Business Research, 69(10), pp. 4411-4420.
Castellani, D. and Zanfei, A. (2002). 'Multinational experience and the creation of linkages with local firms:evidence from the electronics industry', Cambridge Journal of Economics, 26(1), pp. 1-25.
Crescenzi, R., Gagliardi, L. and Iammarino, S. (2015). 'Foreign multinationals and domestic innovation: Intra-industry effects and firm heterogeneity', Research Policy, 44, pp. 596–609.
Davis, F. D. (1989). 'Perceived usefulness, perceived ease of use, and user acceptance of information technology', MIS quarterly, 13(3), pp. 319-340.
Duan, Y., Edwards, J. S. and Dwivedi, Y. K. (2019). 'Artificial intelligence for decision making in the era of Big Data – evolution, challenges and research agenda', International Journal of Information Management, 48, pp. 63-71.
Kesharwani, A. and Bisht, S. S. (2012). 'The impact of trust and perceived risk on internet banking adoption in India: An extension of technology acceptance model', International Journal of Bank Marketing, 30(4), pp. 303-322.
Nygaard, A. and Dahlstrom, R. (1992). 'Multinational company strategy and host country policy', Scandinavian Journal of Management, 8(1), pp. 3-13.
Reddy, P. (1997). 'New trends in globalization of corporate R&D and implications for innovation capability in host countries: a survey from India', World Development, 25(11), pp. 1821-1837.
Roth, M. S. and Romeo, J. B. (1992). 'Matching product category and country image perceptions: A framework for managing country-of-origin effects', Journal of International Business Studies, 23(3), pp. 477-497.
Zhao, H., Anong, S. T. and Zhang, L. (2019). 'Understanding the impact of financial incentives on NFC mobile payment adoption: An experimental analysis', International Journal of Bank Marketing, 37(5), pp. 1296-1312.
Zhao, Z. and Balague, C. (2015). 'Designing branded mobile apps: Fundamentals and recommendations', Business Horizons, 58(3), pp. 305-315.
Note: Special issue conference will be held at Tongji University, Shanghai, China, December 19–20, 2012.
A ten page paper proposal should be submitted by October 31, 2012 (see submission process below)
Over the past two decades, many Asian economies have grown dramatically with an average growth of about 8% per year throughout the region. This dramatic economic growth has allowed large numbers of people to move out of poverty. However, it is increasingly clear that while there has been dramatic improvement in the overall rates of poverty in many nations in Asia, there are large numbers of people still in poverty in spite of the fast economic growth. For example, China continues to have over 300 million people that live in severe poverty while India has over 600 million. The large number of the severely poor people has increasingly been recognized as an issue for both governments and for businesses throughout Asia.
Governments and businesses understand that for continued economic growth, there needs to be political stability. For governments the presence of large numbers of the severely poor whose lives do not seem to be able to improve despite rapid economic growth offers a potential challenge to the needed political stability. However, businesses increasingly also see the large number of people in severe poverty are not only an issue for social concern, but also as a potentially large untapped market of consumers for goods and services. This ability to provide products to those desperately poor may in fact be easiest for firms in Asia as they internationalize and understand these markets. Asian multinational and entrepreneurial firms’ environmental setting includes such potential customers where major North American and European firms typically have no major access or understanding of this setting that is immediately at hand.
The recognition of the desperately poor as a potential market will not only lead to new sales for these firms but also offers a means to help those individuals in desperate poverty to create assets and prosperity. As a result, there is a fresh recognition that business in fact may offer the greatest single potential means to move individuals out of poverty. The generation of greater economic activity among the desperately poor may provide the means for the poor to change their own lives rather than the government or other groups doing for them. This has led to a focus by both governments and businesses to seek to encourage greater economic activity among the desperately poor. This activity includes not only business seeking to enter these settings but governments also looking to support other activities by non-profit organizations (NGOs) that generate business among the poor.
Management scholars have been slow to identify and examine an array of questions associated with the increasing entry of international business into settings of desperate poverty and the actions of government to support economic activity among the desperately poor. We believe that through poverty–business focused research, scholars can better understand businesses’ role in both helping Asia to reduce poverty, and also generating profit for companies as they reach out to serve these large untapped communities of consumers.
This APJM Special Issue seeks to provide a robust analysis of poverty and business in the Asian context. We want to generate new insights on poverty in the Asian context and how business can help to move people out of desperate poverty. Overall, the editors’ belief is that as business helps to generate greater economic activity in settings of severe poverty they will help to solve poverty as individuals in severe poverty are able to both generate greater incomes and accumulate greater assets as they participate with those large firms in those activities. Thus, a rich range of topics can be included in the special issue as we look at new and innovative activities that help to address these issues.
For example, we hope to receive research that will expand the limited research on major corporations serving the “bottom of the pyramid” or “subsistence markets” and how firms create such innovative methods to serve these markets. In addition, we are also interested in seeing articles that address how bringing business skills and ideas to settings of severe poverty can address the issues of poverty. There are also new technologies that help to solve the issues of poverty such as cell-phone banking. How do firms developing such technologies ensure that their products meet the needs of very different customer than have been typically addressed? In addition, how government policy can encourage more economic activity in settings of severe poverty, micro lending by governmental and NGOs, and the role of informal firms are also encouraged.
All else being equal, we encourage interdisciplinary teams to explore the above issues and also encourage diversity of thinking to create the path-breaking insights that we seek. Research questions of potential interest for this special issue could include, but are not limited to:
1. There are numerous enterprising individuals in Asia living in severe poverty with innovative ideas but without sufficient access to financial resources. What can be done to facilitate the transition of these innovative ideas to generate business venture growth in Asia? What is the role of microfinance in the effort to address this shortage of financial resources?
2. Many individuals in poverty form informal firms—firms that do not conduct legal activities but which do not register with the government. What is the nature of these firms? How does being an informal firm enable or restrict the ability of such firms for both survival and growth.
3. What is the role of networks and alliances by individuals in Asia living in severe poverty as they seek to either found or grow a business?
4. When firms seek to serve those that live in desperate poverty what are the strategic actions of the business that generate the greatest success? What are the ethical issues a firm must address as they seek to serve and compete in this domain in Asia as they pursue those activities?
5. What are the actions of governments that help to generate the greatest success as firms both seek to address issues of poverty and to serve and compete in markets characterized by desperate poverty?
6. What alliances between for-profit firms and NGOs help to generate the greatest reduction in poverty? In such alliances, what are the factors that generate the greatest success for business?
7. How do the issues of poverty and business differ across Asia? Particularly, as we consider the two largest economies in the region, China and India, what are the substantive differences of how business competes to serve the desperate poor in these two markets?
8. How do the innovation processes of firms differ as they seek to address those living at the bottom of the pyramid? Are Asian firms that come from these settings able to develop unique or more appropriate solutions than are firms from richer countries?
Submission Process
The submission process for this special issue shall be different than those typically pursued by APJM. Individuals are encouraged to submit a proposal to the special issue conference prior to submission of the article to the journal. This proposal should be 10 pages in length and submitted by October 31, 2012. Those proposals found to be relevant to the special issue will be asked to make a short presentation of their proposal to a conference focused on the special issue.
The special issue conference will be held at Tongji University in Shanghai, China, December 19–20, 2012. Proposals will receive brief comments at the conference. From the larger set of proposals presented, a smaller subset of papers will be encouraged to be submitted to the special issue. This subset will receive more extensive comments from the editors on how the paper should be developed for submission to the special issue.
The papers in this subset of selected proposals will be sent out for peer review. While those who cannot attend the proposal conference may submit to the special issue, authors are strongly encouraged to participate in this conference and the proposal system that is established. The submission of papers for the special issue is May 20, 2013. The expected publication date is 2014.
For questions regarding the conference and the special issue and the submission, please contact the guest editors: Garry Bruton g.bruton@tcu.edu, David Ahlstrom Ahlstrom@baf.msmail.cuhk.edu.hk, and/or Steven Si ssi@bloomu.edu.
Asian Business & Management (ABM) invites proposals for a special issue to be published in December 2017.
Please submit your proposal to the Editor-in-Chief (Michael A. Witt, abm.editor@insead.edu) with the following information:
- The names, contact details, and positions of the proposed Guest Editor(s). Please include brief biographical details.
- The title of the proposed special issue.
- An indication of the type of special issue--invited submissions, open call for paper submissions, or a mix.
- If there is to be an open call for papers: a one-page draft “Call for Papers” indicating the theme of the special issue, key topics, and methodological considerations (if any).
- For any invited papers: 300-word abstracts of the planned invited contributions, plus information about the authors and a confirmation of their commitment.
- Two to three pages on the rationale of the proposal, its intended scope, its intended contribution relative to existing knowledge, and its fit vis-a-vis ABM editorial policy (http://www.palgrave-journals.com/abm/journal/v11/n1/full/abm201123a.html).
Please submit your proposal by 31 May 2016. A committee of the editors of ABM will assess all received proposals and announce their decision by 11 June 2016.
Guest editors will be responsible for ensuring that the special issue adheres to our editorial policy and formal guidelines. All manuscripts, including invited pieces, will undergo a standard double-blind review. Guest editors are expected to contribute a substantively meaningful editorial for the special issues. Guest editors may submit their own papers for the special issue; review of these papers will be handled by a regular Editor of the journal, and acceptance is subject to the same standards as any other papers submitted to ABM.
The approximate timeline of the special issue is as follows:
- 31 May 2016: Submission deadline for proposals
- June 2016: Issue of public “Call for Papers” for the special issue
- Late November 2016: Deadline for first submission of papers, begin of review process
- September 2017: Deadline for submission of final manuscripts to publisher (precise date TBC)
For any questions, please contact me at abm.editor@insead.edu.
Submission Deadline: February 16, 2015
Program Chair: Carol Reade, San José State University
AJBS will hold its 28th Annual Meeting in cooperation with the Academy of International Business (AIB) in Bengaluru, India. The combined conference will run from June 26th through June 30th. The AJBS conference is June 26-27 (full day June 26th and half day June 27th) and the AIB conference is June 27-30, 2015). The Program Chair for this year’s conference is Carol Reade, San José State University, USA.
About AJBS: From its genesis as an informal network in 1982, AJBS was officially organized and held its first conference at the Wharton Business School in January, 1987. AJBS holds annual conferences at venues throughout the world, providing an opportunity for discussion of current developments and research on a range of business, public policy and teaching issues related to Japan. Papers for AJBS conference presentation are double blind peer reviewed. Accepted papers are considered for publication in the journal, Asian Business & Management (ABM). AJBS welcomes scholars, students and practitioners from all disciplinary backgrounds who are interested in Japanese business issues.
Why should you participate in both (AJBS and AIB) conferences? With one trip, you can attend both the most prestigious professional meeting in international business and an intimate conference that focuses specifically on Japanese business issues. The AJBS conference provides additional opportunities for journal publication and best paper awards, as detailed below.
Paper Submission: Authors may submit papers to either or both conferences. AJBS will consider submissions that have already been presented elsewhere, but not published in a journal or book. Authors are encouraged to consider submitting a paper tailored to the specialized audience at the AJBS conference as well as a modified version appropriate for the wider audience at AIB. As done in past years, we also plan to have one session run by AJBS at the AIB conference.
Submission Deadline: Monday, February 16, 2015. You can submit your paper via http://aib.msu.edu/events/2015/SubmissionInstructions.asp. We kindly ask you to upload your paper in MS-Word format. Submissions must be on letter paper (8.5"x11" or 216x279 mm), with double-spaced text and a font size of 11 points or larger. Please follow the JIBS style guide (http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jibs/style_guide.html).
Please submit papers in MS-Word format (if MS-Word format is not available, please use a basic text format that can be easily converted to MS-Word. Please do not submit papers in PDF format.). To facilitate the blind review process, remove ALL author-identifying information from the papers. Papers will be double-blind reviewed, with the conference papers selected and authors notified by early April, 2015.
Conference Registration: Registration for the conference will include a specially-discounted combined (AJBS plus AIB) conference fee, a one-year membership to AJBS (if not already a member) and a one-year subscription to Asian Business & Management.
Asian Business & Management: In 2003 AJBS established a partnership with the journal Asian Business & Management (ABM), published by Palgrave Macmillan in the U.K. As in recent years, the editor of ABM, together with the AJBS conference committee, will select several papers from this year's conference program to be considered for publication in ABM.
Palgrave Macmillan – AJBS Best Paper Award: Palgrave Macmillan has sponsored a ‘Best Paper’ prize at the annual AJBS meetings. The Best Paper Committee will review the finalist papers and select the winning paper.
For further information: Information on the Bengaluru, India meeting venue and AIB conference is available at http://aib.msu.edu/events/2015/. For questions regarding conference papers and submissions, please contact Carol Reade (carol.reade@sjsu.edu). For questions or comments regarding AJBS or conference registration, please contact ajbs@ajbs.org or the AJBS President, Gary Knight (gknight@willamette.edu).
Despite the economic and also increasingly political role of today’s Asian economies, research on the diversity of capitalism in Asia remains underdeveloped. If at all, the literature has included Japan, but neither systematically analyzed other Asian countries nor embedded Japan into the Asian context. Asia offers a rich and challenging empirical ground to study the emergence and change of new types of institutions (e.g. lack of a coherent institutional framework in China, the contrasting speed of institutional change in Japan and Korea, the rather uncontested dominant technological ideology even after Fukushima, or the idiosyncratic industrial specialization in India based on textile, IT and service). We hence suggest enlarging the analysis on the diversity of capitalism onto Asia, and to enrich, contest or enlarge established theories and concepts of the comparative capitalism approach with empirical evidence of Asian systems.
Research has started to show an interest into the diversity of Asian capitalisms (Amable 2003; Aoki, Jackson, and Miyajima, 2007; Lechevalier, 2011, Storz and Schäfer 2011; Whitley 1992, 1999). This research sheds light on how the specific properties of Asian capitalisms may be understood in the context of established theories and concepts of capitalism and how change within these systems can be incorporated. These two topics make up the core of the special issue: diversity of institutions and institutional change. In both parts, the special issue aims to integrate and re-evaluate important approaches that helped to better understand US and European economic systems. The special issue is not looking for papers to recapitulate existing critiques of the main theoretical frameworks constituting the comparative capitalism literature (Crouch 2005; Deeg and Jackson 2007; Hermann 2008), but uses empirical cases and data from Asia as a chance to extend, revise, or develop new theories that are relevant to the broad concerns of the comparative capitalism approach. We are therefore especially interested in papers adopting a comparative perspective. In pursuit of this idea, we understand the special issue as an analytical program contributing to a theoretically informed and empirically grounded understanding of today’s economies in Asia. Hence, we have a rather “large question” in mind, so that the special issue will neither be able to cover all important countries in Asia, nor be able to develop a “final” understanding of institutional regimes, their design, and institutional change. However, we hope to contribute to an informed debate of the institutional foundations of Asian economies. The following is a list of indicative, but not exhaustive, topic areas:
• Asian capitalisms in cross-national comparison: transformation and institutional diversity of capitalisms; comparative capitalism approaches (e.g. varieties of capitalisms, national innovation systems, regulationist theory, business systems) and Asia
• Asian capitalisms and institutional change: patterns of institution building; forms of institutional change (e.g. path activation or innovative use of paths); weak and strong institutional complementarities; diversity and interaction of actors in inducing and implementing change, considering also socio-political factors
• Asian capitalisms and the organization of the firm: corporate governance, strategy and structure within the diverse institutional systems in Asia; forms and change of HRM practices, career systems, worker involvement; varieties of leadership within economic systems in Asia
• Asian capitalisms and innovation: sectoral logics versus institutional logics; learning and knowledge creation; industrialization and de-industrialization
• Asian capitalisms, state regulation and political economy perspectives: implications of the role of the state in Asia; framing of Asian capitalisms in the context of state regulation, growth models and welfare regimes; inequalities; capitalism and democracy
• Asian capitalisms and the international and regional division of labor: towards a new theory of the institutional comparative advantages?; new patterns of knowledge creation and innovation
Submissions
Socio-Economic Review (SER) aims to encourage work on the relationship between society, economy, institutions and markets, moral commitments and the rational pursuit of self-interest. The journal seeks articles that focus on economic action in its social and historical context. In broad disciplinary terms, papers may be drawn from sociology, political science, economics and the management and policy sciences. The journal encourages papers that seek to recombine disciplinary domains in response to practically relevant issues, while at the same time encouraging the development of new theory.
Papers should be submitted by email to Cornelia Storz (email: storz@wiwi.uni-frankfurt.de). Please prepare manuscripts according to the guidelines shown at ser.oxfordjournals.org. The maximum length of articles including references, notes and abstract is 10,000, and the minimum length is 6,000 words. Articles must be accompanied by an abstract of no more than 150 words. The main document has to be anonymous and should contain title, abstract, and strictly avoid self references. Papers will be reviewed following the journal’s normal review process and criteria. Papers accepted into the revision stage are also invited to be presented and discussed at the SASE network Q on Asian Capitalisms in 2013 (for details, see www.sase.org).
For further information for this Special Issue please contact any of the Guest Editors:
Bruno Amable: bruno.amable@univ-paris1.fr
Steven Casper: Steven_Casper@kgi.edu
Sebastien Lechevalier: sebastien.lechevalier@ehess.fr
Cornelia Storz: storz@wiwi.uni-frankfurt.de
Timeline
Full paper submissions due: June 1, 2012
Special Issue Publication: April 2013 (Issue 2)
Introduction
Families represent a large and growing market worldwide. The family has been identified as the most important decision making and consumption unit. Since last two decades, this domain has attracted interests of marketers and academicians. Marketers in emerging Asian economies are just beginning to experience the growing influence of families in the consumption process. The abrupt changes in lifestyle patterns, increasing per capita incomes, extensive media and major socio-cultural as well as economic changes are bringing altogether new perspectives in consumer markets in Asia. The tested marketing concepts in the west are not as effective as in the traditional Asian consumers. Marketers need to move beyond the traditional predictable techniques that worked for generations. The latest data from World Bank shows that global family consumption has been rising year on year. In 2016, India’s total household final consumption expenditure was growing at 8.7 % annually; China was growing at 7.8%, Indonesia at 5% Cambodia 6.7%, Pakistan 6.9% and the Philippines at 7%.
Objective
While family as the fundamental unit of analysis remains central to many consumption decisions, it has received relatively insufficient attention from researchers in the areas of marketing and consumer behavior, and many nuances have been overlooked. The premise of this special issue is that this lack of attention is due to a restrictive notion of the role of family in consumption decisions and that many fertile research areas can be identified.
Recommended Topics
Topics to be discussed in this special issue include (but are not limited to) the following:
• Family Buying Process
• Consumer Decision Making Dynamics in Family
• Strategic Alliances that Family Members make
• Family Life Cycles and impact on Market
• Children as an important Decision Maker
• Child Socialization and Parent’s Reverse Socialization
• Family Decisions in Tourism, Consumer durables, Gadgets, other specific industries
• Social Media and Family’s Consumer Attitudes
• New Parenthood & Changing Consumer Decision
• Other related studies
Submission Procedure
Researchers and practitioners are invited to submit papers for this special theme issue on “Asian Families and Consumer Decisions” on or before June 30, 2018. All submissions must be original and may not be under review by another publication. INTERESTED AUTHORS SHOULD CONSULT THE JOURNAL’S GUIDELINES FOR MANUSCRIPT SUBMISSIONS at http://www.igi-global.com/publish/contributor-resources/before-you-write/. All submitted papers will be reviewed on a double-blind, peer review basis. Papers must follow APA style for reference citations.
All submissions and inquiries should be directed to the attention of:
Dr. Monica Chaudhary monicarana@gmail.com
Dr. Suhail Mohammad Ghouse suhailmghouse@gmail.com
Building a Sustainability-oriented Corporate Governance in Emerging Markets under a Risk Environment
The year 2025 could be a year in which humanity, many eco-systems and biological species, and business sectors could hit the point of no return. This book aims to address the intersection between business, society, biodiversity and technology by the year 2025. This book seeks to analyze the challenges and transformations required to be able to have sustainable businesses with a future orientation. This volume targets contributions to provide elements on current and potential social, demographic, technological, and managerial trends; the implications of the digital revolution in society and business; as well as the challenges of surviving, being sustainable and profitable. Furthermore, we seek to provide an understanding on business reasons to incorporate a future orientation in business strategy, and to facilitate understanding of the need for profound changes in individual behavior, culture of the organizations, public policy and business environments to adapt to the accelerated changes, and to manage business with orientation to the future.
Therefore, with this book, we seek to (i) present a collection of evidence and analysis of the implications of the digital revolution in society and business, and the challenges of surviving, being sustainable and profitable; (ii) identify potential social, demographic, technological, and managerial trends by 2025; (iii) understanding of the need for profound transformations in individuals, the culture of organizations and the environment to adapt to accelerated changes, and managing organizations with a focus on the future.
Topics for this volume include, but not limited to:
- Connection between sustainability and digital transformation.
- After the 2030 sustainable development agenda.
- What has been said about the future in the past. The past history of the future.
- Industry 5.0: What does really mean the human touch revolution?
- Challenges for humanity after 2025.
- Challenges for business after 2025.
- Challenges for governments after 2025.
- Ethical challenges in the year 2025.
- The geopolitical evolution and demographic characteristics by the second half of the 21st century.
- The future of the world economy.
- Models of development after the digital revolution.
- Uncertainty and sustainability for international business.
- Disruptive innovations and the challenges to sustainable and inclusive development.
- New conceptions of development.
- The future of production and consumption.
- Survival, sustainability and profitability.
- Business challenges for agile and exponential organizations.
- The challenges of inclusion: How to deal with the excluded.
- Diversity with diversity by 2025: the new different ones.
- Speed as a competitive advantage.
- Leadership of the future.
- Emerging organizational forms (such as B Corporations and others).
- Extra-planetary business.
- Challenges on renewable energy.
- Considerations of human development and happiness by 2025.
- Utopian views of the future.
- Positive impacts for humanity and business of automation and robotics
- Positive impacts for humanity and the planet of climate change.
- Techno-humanitarianism.
- Opportunity-exploration paradigm.
- More human humans: sensitivity, compassion and connection.
- Political forces shaping the future.
- Climate related forces shaping the future.
- What will happen to the sustainable development goals that are not met?
Important dates:
- Submission deadline for chapter proposals, emailed to mgonza40@eafit.edu.co by May 10th 2019
- Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals: May 21st, 2019.
- Deadline for full chapter: October 10th2019
- Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter: November 30th, 2019.
- Deadline for submission of revised chapters: January 30th, 2020.
- Estimated date of publication: End of first semester 2020.
Guidelines:
- Chapter Proposals: 250-500 words
- It should contain provisional title
- Author(s) information (name, affiliation, contact details)
- Summary of chapter including main idea, preliminary conclusions, and list of reference.
Peer Reviewer Commitments:
- Each accepted author must be willing to review several rounds of peer reviewed chapters by set deadlines during the October-November timeline.
Chapter:
Up to 10,000 words.
APA 6th manuscript formatting.
- Accepted chapters will be compiled in a book, which will be published by Palgrave Macmillan.
Book Editors:
Seung Ho "Sam" Park
Dr. Park is Professor and President’s Chair in Strategy and International Business and Executive Director of the Center for Emerging Market Studies at Nanyang Technological University in Singapore. He was the Parkland Chair Professor of strategy and Director of the Center for Emerging Market Studies at CEIBS and the founding president of the Skolkovo-EY Institute for Emerging Market Studies and the Samsung Economic Research Institute China.
Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez
Dr. Gonzalez-Perez (PhD, MBS, Psy) is Full Professor of Management at Universidad EAFIT (Colombia). She is the Chapter Chair for Latin America and the Caribbean at the Academy of International Business (AIB) (2018-2021). She is Member of the global council of the Sustainable Development Goal number 1 (SDG 1: End Poverty) of the World Government Summit (WGS). Furthermore, Alejandra is a Research Partner at the Center for Emerging Market Studies at Nanyang Technological University in Singapore.
Dinorà Floriani
Dinorá Eliete Floriani is the Director for Professional master’s in science (MsC) in Management and International Business, and coordinates the Master of Business Administration (MBA). Dinorá is Full Professor of Internationalization Strategy at University of Vale do Itajaí (UNIVALI)–Brazil. Visiting Professor at University of Florence in Italy and Halmstad University in Sweden. She has been served as Board Member of the Academy of International Business – Latin America and Caribbean Chapter 2018-2021 (AIB-LAT).
Corresponding editor:
- Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez, Universidad EAFIT, Colombia. Email: mgonza40@eafit.edu.co
International Journal of Business and Management (IJBM) (ISSN Online: 2815-9330) cordially invites scholars, academicians, and researchers from all over the world to submit their unpublished original work for inclusion in our special issue “Business after pandemic” (Vol 2, No 1, 2023).
Acceptable themes include, but are not limited to, the following: Accounting and Finance, International Business, Management Corporate Governance, Marketing, Supply Chain, Business Ethics, Corporate Governance, and Corporate Social Responsibility after pandemic.
The International Journal of Business and Management (IJBM) (ISSN Online: 2815-9330) is a fully open access, peer-reviewed academic journal. We adhere to the highest scientific standards and follow a rigorous peer-review process. We welcome submissions from across the social sciences, economics, and humanities disciplines. IJBM aims to publish rigorous theoretical, methodological, or empirical research associated with the areas of business and management including strategy, accounting, economics, finance, management, marketing, tourism, organisation, human resources, operations, supply chain, corporate social responsibility, and corporate governance. The journal aims to attract original knowledge based on academic rigour and of relevance for academics, researchers, professionals, and/or public decision-makers. IJBM is published by OJS system and supported by International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS).
There is no submission fee.
Why publish in IJBM: Fully open access Rigorous peer-review process
Fast publication: average peer review time within 8 weeks
Impact: affiliated with International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS) Support for early career researchers and underrepresented populations Commitment to diversity and inclusion
Editor in Chief: Prof. Zhongqian Liu Editor-in-chief@iessociety.org
Associate Editor: Dr. Scott Johnson editor@iessociety.com
INTRODUCTION TO THE THEME:
Multinational entreprises (MNEs) experienced ‘golden days’ during the 1990s and 2000s, they expanded globally and were major players in globalization. Today they have become powerful actors in the global economy. CEOs of international businesses are welcomed by heads of state as their counterparts, they are invited by governments to help solve global issues such as climate change and poverty, and they are facing dilemmas comparable to those of other international actors.
However, MNEs are facing global legitimacy challenges. They are suspected of tax avoidance, using low wage countries for corporate benefits only, disrespecting privacy regulations, abusing consumer data, violating local community rights, exploiting natural resources, ignoring basic human rights, and employing too many lobbyists targeting national and international political decision-making processes for their own corporate interests.
Although many of these challenges are not new, they have resurfaced and become more apparent during the past couple of years, partly due to the economic recession that many developed economies have faced and to the broader awareness of increasing global inequality and the importance of sustainability.
BUSINESS DIPLOMACY
Business diplomacy seems to be more relevant than ever to deal with these challenges. Business diplomacy involves developing strategies for long-term, positive relationship building with governments, local communities, and interest groups, aiming to establish and sustain legitimacy and to mitigate the risks arising from all non-commercial or exogenous factors in the global business environment.
Business diplomacy is different from lobbying or strategic political activity; it implies an (strategic / holistic) approach of an international business to look at itself as an actor in the international diplomatic arena. Representation, communication and negotiation are key in such an approach.
One of the consequences is that MNEs are able to operate in and show respect for an international business environment that consists of multiple stakeholders. This demands a strategic perspective and vision on the sector and the business environments in which the company wants to operate, and requires a specific set of instruments, skills and competences.
Doing business internationally means facing a complex international business environment; global companies, large, medium or small, need to manage and ‘survive’ in a rapidly changing political and economic business environment that requires them to interact with multiple stakeholders such as host governments and NGOs. To operate successfully among all these complexities, international business will need to develop business diplomacy competences and knowhow more than before.
Yet not many international companies recognize the importance of business diplomacy. Instead of training their managers in business diplomacy, most multinational corporations (MNCs) hire political diplomats and rely on their experience in managing complex relationships with host governments. MNCs need to anticipate stakeholder conflicts, communicate with non-business pressure and interest associations, influence host-government decision-making and maintain constructive relations with external constituencies. Therefore, they cannot rely on advisors only, but should develop their own business diplomacy competences.
It is argued that by engaging in business diplomacy, corporations can increase their power and legitimacy. Firms that are involved in business diplomacy have chosen to satisfy a social public demand rather than only a market demand. Scholars emphasize that it is important for modern corporations to respond to the expectations of various stakeholders in order to obtain a “license to operate”, and therefore the importance of enacting business diplomacy in today’s business environment is stressed.
In the international management literature the term business diplomacy is not widely recognized and has received (too) little scholarly attention.
AIM OF THE BOOK
This book aims at shaping the debate on business diplomacy in multinational corporations (MNCs). It will deal with questions such as:
What exactly is business diplomacy?
How is business diplomacy in MNCs related to (political) corporate diplomacy?
To what extent do MNCs engage in business diplomacy and how?
How can business diplomacy help to deal with the global legitimacy challenges that MNCs face?
What strategies, tactics and instruments in enacting business diplomacy?
Which existing theories can be applied to understand the international business-as-an-diplomatic actor perspective?
New theory development to understand business diplomacy, and what are directions for research on business diplomacy?
Specific topics that chapters can address:
International Business and global legitimacy challenges
International Business, Business diplomacy and the OECD guidelines
International Business, Business diplomacy and mitigating risks
International Business, Business diplomacy and sustainable development
International Business, Business diplomacy and the impact and potential of digitalization
International Business, Business diplomacy and fragile states
International Business as international political actors
MNEs, business diplomacy and tax avoidance schemes
International Business, business diplomacy and ethical dilemmas
EDITOR: Huub Ruël, Phd – Professor of International Business – Windesheim University of Applied Sciences (The Netherlands).
EDITORIAL TEAM: Raymond Saner (CSEND, Diplomacydialogue, University of Basl, Science Po (Paris)), Jan Melissen (Netherlands Institute for International Relations Clingendael, University of Antwerp), Shaun Riordan (Netherlands Institute for International Relations Clingendael), Donna Lee (University of Bradford), Doudou Sidibe (Novancia Business School, Paris), Jennifer Kestelyn (Ghent University).
SUBMISSIONS:
Submissions to this new book in the Emerald Advanced Series in Management are welcomed.
Submission deadline of draft chapters/extended chapter proposals: November 15th 2015
Acceptance notification: December 15th 2015
Full chapter submission: January 31th 2016
Authors must follow the author guidelines of the Emerald Advanced Series in Management.
Send submissions to: hjm.ruel@windesheim.nl or h.j.m.ruel@utwente.nl
Business groups are prevalent in both developed and emerging markets (Ghemawat & Khanna, 1998) and constitute the dominant organizational form in many emerging markets (Chung & Luo, 2008; Khanna & Rivkin, 2001). Scholars have utilized multiple theoretical perspectives, including institutional economics, sociology and resource-based view to define, characterize and comprehend business groups. Business groups play an important role in emerging markets by filling institutional voids and creating their own internal capital, labor and product markets (Khanna & Palepu, 2000a). There are important differences between group affiliated and unaffiliated firms in emerging economies, in terms of their underlying resource base and embeddedness in the institutional and social fabric of the local market. To add to this complexity, institutional environments in emerging economies are constantly evolving and thereby impacting strategy, particularly of organizations such as business groups that are highly embedded in the domestic context (Hoskisson, Eden, Lau, & Wright, 2000; Hoskisson, Wright, Filatotchev, & Peng, 2013). Internationalization of business group firms under such tumultuous conditions presents a rich context for advancing internationalization theory and, in particular, contributing to a better understanding of the strategic adaptation of emerging market firms.
The extant literature on business group has primarily focused on how groups as a whole and/or firms affiliated to groups perform in their home countries (e.g. Chacar & Vissa, 2005; Chang, Chung, & Mahmood, 2006; Douma, George, & Kabir, 2006; Khanna & Palepu, 2000a; 2000b; Khanna & Rivkin, 2001). There are only a few studies that have explored the impact that affiliation to a business group has on the degree of internationalization of the focal firm, and present inconclusive findings (e.g. Chang, 1995; Kim, Kim, & Hoskisson, 2010). Examining not only institutional differences but also factor market difference between home and host countries also seems to matter with regard to internationalization from emerging economies (Kim, Hoskisson, & Lee, 2014). In the wake of the recent widespread and accelerated internationalization of emerging market firms, including many that are affiliated to larger business groups, the internationalization of business group affiliated firms warrants a deeper and systematic investigation from a variety of theoretical and empirical approaches.
As emerging economies develop and become mid-range economies (Hoskisson, et al., 2013), how does this change the nature of business groups and their internationalization strategies. Do they restructure their portfolios as transaction cost theory would imply (Hoskisson, Johnson, Tihanyi, & White, 2005)? Do they substitute domestic product diversification for more internationalization (Meyer, 2006)? How are they structured and governed differently (Chittoor, Kale, Puranam, 2014) as the country settings change and as they pursue increased innovation and internationalization (Yiu, Hoskisson, Bruton, Lu, 2014)? How does government ownership influence their corporate and internationalization strategies (White, Hoskisson, Yiu, & Bruton, 2008)?
Many studies simply use dummies to distinguish group affiliates from independent firms. This approach assumes all affiliates benefit equally, which is questionable due to differences in value capture. For example, research shows that affiliate firms differ in their ability to capture benefits from internationalization; in this study more powerful group firms benefit from internationalization compared to less powerful affiliates (Wan, Hoskisson, & Kim, 2004). However, we have limited understanding of differences in power and of value capture among affiliates because few scholars examine heterogeneity among group affiliates.
The special issue solicits scholarly contributions that provide a finer-grained analysis of the internationalization of business group affiliated firms from emerging markets, encapsulating the unique attributes of business groups as well as that of the institutional and cultural contexts where they prosper. The following is an illustrative list of questions:
- How is the efficacy of business groups affected due to the rapidly changing institutional environment in EEs?
- Business groups are social structures deeply embedded in the broader institutional environment of EEs. How does this embeddnesses affect the internationalization propensity of their affiliates?
- What are the similarities and differences between business groups from different emerging economies as well as developed economies and how do these similarities/differences affect their internationalization behavior?
- How are business groups organized and managed differently in different country institutional and factor market settings? What organizational transformation are business groups undergoing to respond to the changes in the external institutional environment?
- What are the unique resources and capabilities of business groups? How do these capabilities help group affiliated firms in internationalization?
- Are the advantages and/or disadvantages of affiliation to business group context-dependent? How do individual business affiliate firms benefit more or less from group affiliation?
- Do advantages and/or disadvantages transfer to foreign markets when EE firms internationalize their operations?
- How do business groups extend their group like structure in foreign markets?
- How does the presence of a business group in an industry affect the industry-wide innovation and internationalization?
- How do the foreign market entry modes different between group affiliated and unaffiliated firms?
We encourage potential contributors to examine the internationalization of business groups from different theoretical perspectives and empirical approaches, including multi-level models and case studies. Authors should not merely be testing the existing theories in the context of business groups, but make use of the novel context to develop new theories and explanations, and thereby enrich our understanding of firm internationalization behavior in general, and of business group internationalization behavior in particular.
Submission Process:
By March 1, 2015 all manuscripts should be submitted using the online submission system. The link for submitting manuscript is: http://ees.elsevier.com/jwb.
To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, it is important that authors select 'SI: Business Groups' when they reach the "Article Type" step in the submission process.
We may organize a workshop designed to facilitate the development of papers.
Authors of manuscripts that have progressed through the revision process will be invited to it. Presentation at the workshop is neither a requirement for nor a promise of final acceptance of the paper in the Special Issue.
Questions about the special issue may be directed to any of the following guest editors:
Ajai Gaur, Rutgers University, USA ajai@business.rutgers.edu
Jane Lu, University of Melbourne, Australia jane.lu@unimelb.edu.au
Vikas Kumar, University of Sydney, Australia vikas.kumar@sydney.edu.au
Robert E. Hoskisson, Rice University robert.hoskisson@rice.edu
References
Chacar, A., & Vissa, B. (2005). Are emerging economies less efficient? Performance persistence and the impact of business group affiliation. Strategic Management Journal, 26(10): 933-946.
Chang, S.J. (1995). International expansion strategy of Japanese firms: capability building through sequential entry. Academy of Management Journal, 38(2): 383-407.
Chang, S., Chung, C., & Mahmood, I.P. (2006). When and how does business group affiliation promote firm innovation? A tale of two emerging economies. Organization Science, 17(5): 637-656.
Chittoor, R., Kale, P., & Puranam, P. (2014). Business groups in developing capital markets: Towards a complementarity perspective. Strategic Management Journal, forthcoming.
Chung, C., & Luo, X. (2008). Human agents, contexts, and institutional change: the decline of family in the leadership of business groups. Organization Science, 19(1): 124-142.
Douma, S., George, R., & Kabir, R. (2006). Foreign and domestic ownership, business groups, and firm performance: evidence from a large emerging market. Strategic Management Journal, 27(7): 637-657.
Ghemawat, P., & Khanna, T. (1998). The nature of diversified business groups: a research design and two case studies. Journal of Industrial Economics, 46(1): 35-61.
Hoskisson, R.E., Eden, L., Lau, C.-M., & Wright, M. 2000. Strategy in emerging economies. Academy of Management Journal, 43: 249-267.
Hoskisson, R. E., Johnson, R. A., Tihanyi, L. & White, R. E. (2005). Diversified business groups and corporate refocusing in emerging economies. Journal of Management, 31: 941-965.
Hoskisson, R.E., Wright, M., Filatotchev, I., Peng, M. (2013). Emerging multinationals from mid-range economies: The influence of institutions and factor markets. Journal of Management Studies, 50(7): 1295-1321.
Khanna, T., & Palepu, K. (2000a). Is group affiliation profitable in emerging markets? An analysis of diversified Indian business groups. Journal of Finance, 55(2): 867-891.
Khanna, T., & Palepu, K. (2000b). The future of business groups in emerging markets: long-run evidence from Chile. Academy of Management Journal, 43(3): 268-285.
Khanna, T., & Rivkin, J.W. (2001). Estimating the performance effects of business groups in emerging markets. Strategic Management Journal, 22(1): 45-74.
Kim, H., Hoskisson, R.E., & Lee, S.-H. (2014). Why strategic factor markets matter: 'New' multinationals' geographic diversification and firm profitability. Strategic Management Journal, Forthcoming.
Kim, H., Kim, H., & Hoskisson, R.E. (2010). Does market-oriented institutional change in an emerging economy make business-group-affiliated multinationals perform better? An institution based view. Journal of International Business Studies, 41: 1141-1160.
Meyer, K.E. (2006). Globalfocusing: From domestic conglomerate to global specialist. Journal of Management Studies, 43(5): 1109-1144.
Kim, H., Hoskisson, R. E. & Wan, W. P. 2004. Power dependence, diversification strategy and performance in keiretsu member firms, Strategic Management Journal, 25: 613-636.
White, R. E., Hoskisson, R. E., Yiu, D. & Bruton, G. (2008). Employment and market innovation in Chinese business group-affiliated firms: The role of group control systems, Management and Organization Review, 4: 225-256.
Yiu, D. Hoskisson, R. E., Bruton, G. & Lu, Y. (2014). Dueling institutional logics and the effect on strategic entrepreneurship in Chinese business groups. Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, 8(3): 195-213.
During the past three decades, the world has witnessed China’s rise from an underdeveloped country to the third largest economic power. Business leaders have taken a crucial role in developing the firms during this period, which constitutes the most powerful driving force for the rapid growth of the Chinese economy. While business leaders have made significant contributions to China’s economic and societal development via their unprecedented achievements, scholars have not systematically examined their leadership practices and, thus, have not developed rigorous theories to explain these practices. Among the vast amounts of literature on leadership, very few are on business leadership in the Chinese context. Researchers, educators, and practitioners are all aware that the Western-based leadership theories are not completely sufficient to understand the rich and unique leadership phenomenon in the Chinese context. To fully understand the miracle of the Chinese economy, it is essential to identify the unique issues in business leadership in the Chinese context.
The purpose of this special issue is to examine leadership in organizations at different levels, in different domains, or from different perspectives aimed at offering valuable insights into the organizational leadership phenomenon in Greater China. We intend to advance leadership research in the Chinese context, to improve leadership practices, and to add novel knowledge to global leadership literature.
China’s distinctive political, social and cultural environments have been regarded as the major factors breeding the leadership styles in Chinese business organizations. In addition, the unique characteristics of Chinese firms, which have been evolving in a transitional era, also play a major role in shaping the special leadership patterns in Chinese organizations. In the early state, leaders had to make arduous efforts to build legitimacy and to protect themselves in various ways such as registering a private firm as a collective one or getting a ‘red hat’ by registering a firm as a subsidiary or supplemental unit of a State-Owned Enterprise. Some business leaders skillfully adapted themselves to the changing environments and led their companies successfully.
Starting from the late 1990s and, in particular, after China became a member of the World Trade Organization (WTO), the Chinese government has opened its market to the outside world in almost all business sectors. In the domestic market, Chinese firms have to fiercely compete with strong foreign companies, many of which are multinational giants. Pessimists predicted that Chinese firms were not ready and would be overwhelmed by their international counterparts. However, many Chinese firms have not only survived, but also gained advantages in competing with foreign firms. Some Chinese firms have not only dominated the domestic market, but also started to share the international markets with multinational companies. While we can attribute the success of Chinese firms to different factors, we have no doubt that business leadership plays a crucial role in achieving such performance.
In this special issue, we seek manuscripts investigating leadership practices in Greater China and offering theories to understand these practices, which may present conceptualizations or/and findings that differ from, if not challenge, Western-imported theories. We expect this special issue to enrich our understanding of business leadership in the dynamic Chinese context by producing meaningful and valid knowledge. We highlight a Chinese perspective in examining business leadership in China. Broadly, any study that incorporates the Chinese context and offers conceptual and theoretical explanations on business leadership in the Chinese context is welcome. We invite submissions that either modify or extend the well-accepted leadership theories or develop innovative theories based on grounded/inductive approaches. We invite submissions that conduct rigorous research using either qualitative (case study, interview, grounded theory, or ethnographic methods, etc.) or quantitative approaches (survey, laboratory experiment, analyzing archival data, etc.). Purely conceptual papers are also welcome. You are encouraged to identify and choose meaningful and important problems based on your keen observation, your in-depth knowledge, or your astute analysis of business leadership and related phenomena in the Chinese context.
Submissions could address, but are not limited to, the following topics:
- The evolving pattern of leadership in Chinese business organizations;
- Business leadership in the transitional era in China;
- The characteristics of Chinese business leadership;
- Indigenous models of Chinese business leadership and their functioning mechanisms;
- Cultural and social antecedents of leadership;
- Economic and social consequences of Chinese business leadership;
- Implicit theories of Chinese leadership;
- Leader-member exchange (LMX) in Chinese societies;
- Business leadership and team dynamics;
- The nature of transformational leadership in Chinese organizations;
- Newly emerging leadership styles (e.g., authentic leadership, servant leadership, and ethical leadership, etc.) in the Chinese context;
- Multiple intelligences (e.g., emotional intelligence, cultural intelligence) and business leadership in Chinese societies
- Cross-cultural and comparative studies of business leadership
- The similarity and diversity of business leadership in different Chinese societies (including mainland China, Taiwan, Singapore, and Hong Kong )
- Cross-level business leadership.
World Scientific Publisher, Singapore
Editors:
Dr. Luis. Camacho, SUNY Empire State College, New York, USA
Dr. Satyendra Singh, University of Winnipeg, Canada
Deadline: Oct. 15, 2019
Developing countries and emerging markets have one of the fastest growth rates due to the advancement in technology, rise in global investments, and changes in consumer culture. Therefore, the knowledge translations and technology transfers from advanced countries to emerging markets and vice-versa are of essence. The advanced countries need access to the markets of emerging markets, and the emerging markets need the technology and investments, among others, from advanced countries. It is a win-win situation. In this context, the Academy of Business and Emerging Markets (ABEM) Conference in association with the World Scientific Publisherinvites book chapters that are based on thought-provoking topics yet theoretically sound and empirically testable. Controversial or debatable topics in the context of Business, Government and Community in emerging markets are particularly invited for the edited book entitled Business Practices, Growth and Economic Policies in Emerging Markets. Case studies are not suitable for this book.
Publication Schedule
Chapters due: Oct. 15, 2019
Reviewers’ comments: Dec 30, 2019
Revised chapters due: Mar 30, 2020
Camera-ready copy: June 30, 2020
Submissions
Initial submissions should be sent in Word document using Times New Roman Font Size 12, 1″ margin and double-spaced, and must include: (1) Cover page with title of the study, five keywords, author name(s), title, affiliation, full address, contact no and e-mail; and, (2) First page with the title, an abstract between 150-200 words, followed by body of the paper between 5,000 and 6,000 words including Tables (3 max), Figures (2 max) and References (APA style). No appendices. Please avoid footnotes.
Submissions should be sent to Dr. Luis Camacho (luis.camacho@esc.edu) and Dr. Satyendra Singh (s.singh@uwinnipeg.ca)
You may forward any inquiries to Dr. Luis Camacho (luis.camacho@esc.edu )
Developing countries and emerging markets have one of the fastest growth rates due to the advancement in technology, rise in global investments, and changes in consumer culture. Therefore, the knowledge translations and technology transfers from advanced countries to emerging markets and vice-versa are of essence. The advanced countries need access to the markets of emerging markets, and the emerging markets need the technology and investments, among others, from advanced countries. It is a win-win situation. In this context, the Academy of Business and Emerging Markets (ABEM) Conference in association with World Scientific Publisher invites book chapters that are based on thought-provoking topics yet theoretically sound and empirically testable. Controversial or debatable topics in the context of Business, Government and Community in emerging markets are particularly invited for the edited book entitled Business Practices, Growth and Economic Policies in Emerging Markets. Case studies are not suitable for this book.
Publication Schedule
Chapters due: Sept 30, 2019
Reviewers’ comments: Dec 30, 2019
Revised chapters due: Mar 30, 2020
Camera-ready copy: June 30, 2020
Submissions
Initial submissions should be sent in Word document using Times New Roman Font Size 12, 1″ margin and double-spaced, and must include: (1) Cover page with title of the study, five keywords, author name(s), title, affiliation, full address, contact no and e-mail; and, (2) First page with the title, an abstract between 150-200 words, followed by body of the paper between 5,000 and 6,000 words including Tables (3 max), Figures (2 max) and References (APA style). No appendices. Please avoid footnotes.
Submissions should be sent to Dr. Luis Camacho (luis.camacho@esc.edu) and Dr. Satyendra Singh (s.singh@uwinnipeg.ca)
You may forward any inquiries to Dr. Luis Camacho (luis.camacho@esc.edu )
This special issue of Business and Society aims to contribute to the development of theoretical and empirical insights on the role of business in African countries, in the context of the important environmental, social and governance challenges faced by the Continent. The need for knowledge to help further sustainable development, in an equitable and accountable way, makes a better understanding of business in Africa particularly urgent, especially considering the relative lack of research published on these themes in management and organization journals. To address the specific situation in African countries, existing theories and frameworks may need to be extended, adjusted or replaced by approaches that could have implications beyond the continent. Conversely, current paradigms may be directly applicable to the African context as such, but data limitations may require methodological adaptations.
While environmental and social issues exist across the globe, leading to a thriving literature on a range of topics, Africa seems to accumulate both major environmental problems and social problems. Environmental problems include, among others, the effects of global warming and climate variability, pollution, the loss of biodiversity, deforestation and desertification, which affect the availability of land and food. Compounding environmental issues, social problems are also prevalent throughout the African continent. The World Bank’s ranked 26 African countries among the 30 poorest countries in the world in GDP (PPP) in 2009 and the UN’s Economic Commission for Africa shows at best mixed results in the progress towards achieving the Millennium Development Goals by 2015, sharply contrasting with other continents, such as Asia or Latin America. Poverty, human rights violations, health problems and lack of social security are coupled with often weak governance, corruption and conflict. While the number of wars across the continent has decreased since the 1990s, some countries still face conflict or continue to show worrying signs of political instability. At the same time, African countries exhibit strong and resilient economic growth in spite of the global economic crisis, with a continent-wide forecasted growth of 5.3% for 2011, according to the International Monetary Fund, and huge potential and promising economic developments have been noted.
Yet, in spite of the scale and importance of the environmental and social issues in Africa, and in spite of the sustained economic growth that the continent has experienced for a decade, very few published papers in mainstream management journals use African data. A literature search for published papers on Africa in leading management journals yielded a total of twenty-seven published papers, of which only seven were published in the last decade. Among African countries, South Africa in particular, and to a lesser extent Nigeria, receives attention. This same pattern is found for more specific outlets on corporate social responsibility, sustainability and business ethics, in which South Africa is also a main focus, followed by Nigeria (Kolk & Lenfant, 2010; Visser, 2006). In international business and management, overview articles on the “state of the art” in corporate (social) responsibility and sustainable development showed a serious lack of attention for Africa as well (Egri & Ralston, 2008; Kolk & Van Tulder, 2010). Egri and Ralston (2008, p. 325) noted that “it is particularly troubling that there has been relatively little on-the-ground corporate responsibility research in countries where the need for corporate responsibility is most pressing due to greater poverty, environmental degradation, and institutional governance issues”. Remarkably, even in research on the base/bottom of the pyramid most of the cases and examples stem from India and other emerging economies, leaving the African relatively understudied, as shown in a recent article on a decade of BOP article (Kolk, Rivera-Santos, & Rufín, forthcoming).
We believe that this dearth of studies uncovers two distinct issues. First, while emerging countries such as China or India have recently become relatively common empirical settings in management studies, Africa may simply not always be on the radar as a place to conduct research. Second, conducting research in Africa creates specific challenges, which stem directly from the social, environmental and governance problems mentioned above, coupled with complexities related to linguistic, security, cultural and/or political issues. This particularly affects the possibility to collect empirical data in the absence of large-scale databases. While scholars start to better recognize the implications of conducting research in nontraditional contexts (Kriauciunas et al., 2011), the challenges associated with data collection in contexts characterized by high levels of poverty, conflict and poor governance may seem daunting to many researchers.
With a goal of putting Africa on the scholarly map, this special issue aims to publish papers on business, society and environment in the African context. We welcome innovative papers, both conceptual and empirical, both qualitative and quantitative, with a focus on or data from the African continent. The possible topic list covers the whole range of environmental, social and governance issues mentioned above. The special issue is open to papers from different theoretical backgrounds and academic disciplines as long as it relates to the business and society domain in line with the overall focus of the journal.
Submission guidelines
All paper submissions should conform to Business & Society’s standard guidelines for authors, details of which can be found at the B&S website: http://bas.sagepub.com
Questions about the special issue can be directed at the guest editors via e-mail:
akolk@uva.nl (Ans Kolk) or mrivera@babson.edu (Miguel Rivera-Santos)
Deadline: Manuscripts must be received by 1 December 2013, and should be sent to mrivera@babson.edu.
References
Egri, C. P., & Ralston, D. A. (2008). Corporate responsibility: A review of international management research from 1998 to 2007. Journal of International Management, 14, 319-339.
Kolk, A., & Lenfant, F. (2010). MNC reporting on CSR and conflict in Central Africa. Journal of Business Ethics, 93, 241-255.
Kolk, A., Rivera-Santos, M., & C. Rufín (Forthcoming). Reviewing a decade of research on the “Base/Bottom of the Pyramid” concept. Business & Society.
Kolk, A., & Van Tulder, R. (2010). International business, corporate social responsibility and sustainable development. International Business Review, 19(2), 119-125.
Kriauciunas, A., Parmigiani, A., & Rivera-Santos, M. (2011). Leaving our comfort zone: Integrating established practices with unique adaptations to conduct survey-based strategy research in non-traditional contexts. Strategic Management Journal, 32, 994-1010.
Visser, W. (2006). Research on corporate citizenship in Africa: A ten-year review (1995-2005). In W. Visser, M. McIntosh and C. Middleton (Eds.), Corporate citizenship in Africa: Lessons from the past; paths to the future. Sheffield: Greenleaf Publishing.
Introduction: Increasing importance of India in the global economy
India, considered to be an emerging market, is also a prominent BRIC country (Brazil, Russia, India and China), and fast becoming the hub of global economy today. Matloff (2004) cites a Gartner study according to which, 25 percent of all U.S. IT jobs will be offshored by 2010, from 5 percent today. It is likely that most of these offshored jobs will land up in India. Some industry pundits predict that like the Japanese ziabatsu, and the South Korean chaebols, India too may have its share of successful giants that accelerate her economic growth. Sheth and Sisodia (2006) in their path-breaking book, Tectonic Shift: The Geoeconomic Realignment of Globalizing Markets foresee the world to get fragmented into three main regional trading blocks: the European/African bloc, the Asian Bloc with China and Japan as its center, and the US/North American bloc with US and India as allies.
Learning from innovative Indian business-to-business market management practices
In such a business environment, new and innovative business marketing practices are required. One of the most successful examples of innovative business marketing practices is that of India’s largest private sector steel manufacturer, Tata Steel, which was the first company to go for intermediate branding, and a co-branding with its suppliers. Tata Steel, using such innovative marketing processes, has decommoditized steel in India. Similarly, Tata Steel’s joint venture with India’s largest public sector steel giant, Steel authority of India (SAIL) has launched an e-sourcing initiative called www.metaljunction.com which is the largest B2B e-commerce platform in India. This joint venture also started an e-selling initiative that facilitated dis-intermediation, collecting statutory sales tax documents and receivables from buyers, and on its way to become a full-fledged KPO outfit, providing complete order generation and fulfillment services for the sales chain.
The promise of the India-focused special issue of JBIM
New B2B marketing practices should engender new B2B marketing theories, which while originating from Indian practice and context, are expected to have wider applicability and relevance. Most B2B Marketing literature presents theories and models that are grounded in B2B marketing practices in developed countries, which are characterized by mature markets. Very little research has been carried out on the issues and challenges facing B2B marketers in different sectors in India. Many sectors are growing rapidly, taking up important positions in the global context as well.
This special India-focused issue of JBIM seeks to focus on intriguing practices and resulting theory relating to the B2B Marketing and Sales in some of the key industries in India.
Indicative coverage of the India-focused special issue of JBIM
Contributions to this special issue should fulfill one or more of the following conditions:
* Papers could be from both academics and practitioners in B2B Marketing & Sales
* Papers that take an interdisciplinary perspective in understanding B2B Marketing & Sales in India
* Papers presenting new theories or research about B2B Marketing and Sales practice in the Indian context
* Papers covering any type of research paradigm including case studies, qualitative and quantitative analysis, conceptual and empirical research
* Papers presenting rigorously validated qualitative studies that build new theories or provide a “really fresh perspective” in B2B Marketing and Sales that are relevant for India
* Papers presenting case studies of not so celebrated firms in India, that showcase innovative Marketing & Sales practices
Papers that will not be appropriate for the special issue are:
* Papers that are mere replication studies and/or based on validating extant theories in the Indian context.
* Teaching cases.
Indicative list of topics for developing the papers
An indicative, though not exhaustive, list of suggested topics that would be suitable for this special issue would include:
* Understanding and managing value in the B2B context in India
* Managing Buyer-Seller relationships in the Indian market
* Driving efficiency and effectiveness in B2B selling processes in India
* Customer-centricity in B2B marketing processes in India
* Role of buying centers in Indian B2B firms
* Intermediate branding in India
* Pricing Issues in B2B buyer-seller relationships
* Role of supply-chain and logistics in B2B marketing in India
* Outsourcing/offshoring to India
* Co-creation of value with B2B customers in India
* Innovation and new product development for B2B customers in India
* Segmentation practices in Indian B2B markets
* Sales-Marketing interface issues in industrial firms
* Market orientation of B2B firms in India
* Ethics in B2B marketing and sales
* Green marketing of B2B products and services
* Influence of culture on B2B marketing
* Tendering and purchasing processes in India
* Online B2B marketing practices and innovations
Additional dimensions that the paper should address
All contributions should have the following sections, in addition to the specific
content of the paper:
1. A section highlighting managerial implications, based on results from the application of the theories being presented.
2. For the key ideas presented, a section explaining the relevance/applicability to a broader audience of practitioners/academics in other parts of the world.
Process for the submission of papers:
Papers submitted must not have been published, accepted for publication, or presently be under consideration for publication with any other journal. Submissions should be approximately 6,000-8,000 words in length. Submissions to the Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing must be made using the Scholar One Manuscript Central system. For more details, please visit www.emeraldinsight.com/jbim.htm and consult the author guidelines.
A separate title page must be uploaded containing the title, author/s, and contact information for the author(s). Suitable articles will be subjected to a double-blind review. Hence authors should not identify themselves in the body of the paper.
Deadlines for various stages of processing the papers are:
Submission of first draft of paper: 31 December 2009.
First review results: 31 March 2010.
Submission of revised manuscripts (as applicable): 31 May 2010.
Second review results (as applicable): 31 July 2010.
Submission of accepted manuscripts in final form: 31 August 2010.
Special issue expected: late 2010 or early 2011.
Please address all communication to the special issue Guest Editors:
D.V.R. Seshadri, Visiting Faculty – Marketing Area, Indian Institute of Management
Bangalore, Bannerghatta Road, Bangalore 560076, India
E-mail: dvrs@iimb.ernet.in
Or
Ramendra Singh, Doctoral Candidate (Marketing), Indian Institute of Management
Ahmedabad, IIM Ahmedabad, Vastrapur, Ahmedabad 380015, India
E-mail: ramendras@iimahd.ernet.in
References
Matloff, N. (2004), “Globalization and the American IT Worker,” Communications of the ACM, 47(11), 27-29.
Sheth, Jagdish N., and Rajendra S.Sisodia (2006), Tectonic Shift: The Geoeconomic Realignment of Globalizing Markets, Response Books; Sage Publications, New Delhi.
Anthem Business & Management is a new series from Anthem Press that will publish
research monographs, reference books and upper-level textbooks for professionals, academics and students in these fields. Volumes in the series will be written by subject experts and may cover developments in all areas of business and management practices.
The series will also include authoritative, timely and accurate information on critical
developments in the world’s capital markets in areas such as hedge funds, regulation
and strategy, and practitioners’ guides in the financial services industry. We welcome
the opportunity to pursue co-publishing ventures with institutions and organizations
connected engaged with all areas of business, management and finance.
We welcome submissions of proposals that meet the criteria of this series. Should you
wish to send in a proposal for a research monograph, reference books upper-level textbook or handbook please contact us at: proposal@wpcpress.com. We also welcomeapplications for membership of our editorial board in this series, which should be addressed to the series editor.
Anthem Press is a distinguished independent international publishing house pioneering a
distinctive approach to the publishing of serious works across a wide range of subjects that appeal to academics, area specialists, students and researchers, professionals as well as to general readers.
Please send proposals to Kim Cahill, Managing Editor (kimberly.cahill@villanova.edu)
The Journal of World Business has a long tradition of publishing high impact special issues on emerging or provocative topics within the editorial purview of the journal. The objective of these special issues is to assemble a coherent set of articles that move understanding of a topic forward empirically and theoretically. Therefore, as a rule, Journal of World Business (JWB) will not publish special issues based solely on conferences. Rather, special issues must be motivated by a clear and compelling focus on an issue that is timely, significant and likely to generate interest among the readership of JWB.
PROCESS
Prospective guest editor(s) should submit written proposals that incorporate the rationale for the special issue topic, positions it in the literature, and include some illustrative topics that papers could focus upon. Prospective guest editor(s) should consult JWB's Aims and Scope to ensure the proposal fits within the journal's remit. The proposal should also include a draft of the actual call for papers and outline the credentials of the guest editor(s).
http://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal-of-world-business/
After the closing date, the JWB editorial team will review the proposals submitted and select one to three for further assessment. This additional analysis may include communication with prospective guest editors, suggestions as to how to strengthen the proposal and/or recommendations for the addition of other guest editors. Following this consultation, one proposal will generally be selected by the Editor in Chief to progress, although the guest editor(s) may still be asked to develop and refine the proposal further. The Editor-in-Chief will generally assign a JWB Senior Editor to serve on the SI editorial team as the Supervising Editor. The Supervising Editor will be responsible for acting as a liaison between the JWB editorial team and the guest editor(s) and ensuring that JWB editorial standards are maintained through the special issue process. She/he will be actively involved in the entire editorial process, including helping to select which papers are sent for review, identifying and assigning reviewers and in preliminary decisions throughout the review process. However, the ultimate decision to accept or reject papers rests with the Editor in Chief.
GUEST EDITOR(S)’ ROLE
The guest editor(s) will be responsible for publicizing the call for papers and for generating submissions for the special issue. If appropriate, they may host a workshop for papers being considered for the special issue but attendance at the workshop cannot be a prerequisite for the acceptance of papers. They will also be actively involved in all stages of the review process in terms of inviting reviewers and making preliminary decisions on submissions. The review process will be managed online through the EES system. It is also expected that the guest editors will write an introductory article that will position the special issue in the relevant literature and briefly introduce the papers in the issue. This article will be subject to editorial review. In order to prevent any perception of conflicts of interest, it is JWB policy that guest editors cannot submit to the special issue as authors of papers beyond the introductory article.
The Journal of World Business (JWB) invites proposals for special issues with a due date of July 15, 2015.
JWB has a long tradition of publishing high impact special issues on emerging or provocative topics within the editorial purview of the journal. The objective of these special issues is to assemble a coherent set of papers that move understanding of a topic forward empirically and theoretically. Therefore, as a rule, JWB will not publish special issues based solely on papers presented at conferences or workshops. Rather, special issues must be motivated by a clear and compelling focus on an issue that is timely, significant and likely to generate interest among JWB's readership.
PROCESS
Prospective guest editor(s) should submit written proposals that incorporate the rationale for the special issue topic, positions it in the literature, and include some illustrative topics that papers could focus upon. The proposal should also include a draft of the actual call for papers and outline the credentials of the guest editor(s).
After the closing date, the JWB editorial team will review the proposals submitted and select one to three for further assessment. This additional analysis may include communication with prospective guest editors, suggestions as to how to strengthen the proposal and/or recommendations for the addition of other guest editors. Following this consultation, one proposal will generally be selected by the Editor in Chief to progress, although the guest editor(s) may still be asked to develop and refine the proposal further. The Editor-in-Chief will generally assign a JWB Senior Editor to serve on the SI editorial team as the Supervising Editor. The Supervising Editor will be responsible for acting as a liaison between the JWB editorial team and the guest editor(s) and ensuring that JWB editorial standards are maintained through the special issue process. She/he will be actively involved in the entire editorial process, including helping to select which papers are sent for review, identifying and assigning reviewers and in preliminary decisions throughout the review process. However, the ultimate decision to accept or reject papers rests with the Editor in Chief.
GUEST EDITOR(S)’ ROLE
The guest editor(s) will be responsible for publicizing the call for papers and for generating submissions for the special issue. If appropriate, they may host a workshop for papers being considered for the special issue but attendance at the workshop cannot be a prerequisite for the acceptance of papers. They will also be actively involved in all stages of the review process in terms of inviting reviewers and making preliminary decisions on submissions. The review process will be managed online through the EES system. It is also expected that the guest editors will write an introductory article that will position the special issue in the relevant literature and briefly introduce the papers in the issue. This paper will be subject to editorial review. In order to prevent any perception of conflicts of interest, it is JWB policy that Guest Editors cannot submit to the special issue as authors of papers beyond the introductory article.
Please send proposals to : Kim Cahill, Managing Editor (kimberly.cahill@villanova.edu)
The Editorial Board of the Elite Hall Publishing House is calling for papers to be considered for publication in the upcoming issues of the three journals:
- International Journal of Information, Business and Management (IJIBM)
- International Journal of Advanced Engineering and Science (IJAES)
- International Journal of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering Research (JMIER)
We welcome papers and articles of analytic or empirical merit (up to 20 pages in length) in English. All our submitted papers are treated in an anonymous way between author(s) and referees (double blind) and articles are evaluated anonymously by two reviewers. We highly encourage doctoral students to submit excerpts of their dissertations or working papers relevant to entrepreneurship research for consideration. We don't charge any publication fee. So, it is free to publish your papers in the International Journal of Information, Business and Management (IJIBM), International Journal of Advanced Engineering and Science (IJAES) and International Journal of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering Research (JMIER).
For more information, visit the official website of the journals: http://elitehall.elitehall.com/ With thanks, Josephine Roy Publishing Manager, Elite Hall Publishing House, Taiwan International Journal of Information, Business and Management http://ijibm.elitehall.com/ International Journal of Advanced Engineering and Science http://ijaes.elitehall.com/ Journal of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering Research http://jmier.elitehall.com/
Guest Editors:
Piotr Trąpczyński (Poznan University of Economics and Business)
Łukasz Puślecki (Poznan University of Economics and Business)
Andreja Jaklič (University of Ljubljana)
Since the early 1990s, the region of Central and Eastern Europe (CEE) has attracted the interest of scholars because of its transition from a planned economy to a market economy.Both the different paths, and also the divergent outcomes of institutional reforms and frameworks constituted interesting areas of investigation (Meyer& Peng, 2005; Jaklič et at., 2020a). Attracting FDI, along with new technology and skills,creating indigenous MNEs, and changing business environment was essential for transformation.
One of the main interests of scholars and practitioners alike has been the development of effective market entry strategies for this turbulent and heterogeneous region.Many multinational enterprises (MNEs) entered CEE by acquiring local firms, usually lacking essential resources and management experience in competitive markets (Meyer & Estrin, 2001; Uhlenbruck & De Castro, 2000), and need to develop a comprehensive strategy to improve the competitiveness of these acquired subsidiaries (Uhlenbruck, 2004). The initial focus of foreign direct investment (FDI) on access to cheaper resources and sales markets gradually shifted to other, moreupstream areas of activity (Pavlínek, Domański & Guzik, 2009). This functional upgrading was preceded by spillover effects from cooperation with Western partners (Prokop et al., 2021).The increased integration of foreign subsidiaries and the creation of local entrepreneurial ecosystems simultaneously encouraged domestic companies to engage in more outward internationalization(Jaklič et at., 2020a; Trąpczyński & Banalieva, 2016). Comparatively weak institutional support and inadequate innovation capacity have long been among the barriers to international competitiveness for companies from CEE. Nevertheless, many have achieved leapfrogging internationalization and solid performance in international markets (Mair & Schoen, 2007; Caputo et al., 2016; Ipsmiller & Dikova, 2021). The establishment of domestic multinationals is based on innovative business models in their respective market segments (Suurna, 2011; Stocker, 2016), collaboration with foreign partners, and the use of complex internationalization strategies (Dikova et al. 2016, Jaklič & Burger, 2020). It has been argued that this increased focus on innovation is increasingly important given the challenge of the middleincome trap also facing CEE economies (Myant, 2018).
In the third decade since institutional change began in the region, there has been a new trend toward nearshoring and reshoring of activities from more distant Asian locations, driven by trends such as digitalization (Fel & Griette, 2017; Butollo, 2021), but also risks due to recurring crises.Continuous disruptions intensified value chain reconfiguration and innovation activity, thus forcing a new transition to digital and more sustainable business models. Firms from CEE economies (traditionally strongly affected by local and global shocks and conflicts) keep integration into GVC as development priority. Thestructure of GVC and functional specialization in CEE is heterogeneous and different from Western Europe (Jaklič et al, 2020b), the main business partner of CEE.For instance, Poland and Slovakia tend to focus on lower value-added fabrication processes, theBaltic countries and Slovenia specialize in management services, Hungary and Latvia gain inmarketing services, while the Czech Republic and Slovenia are concentrated on R&D activities (Kordalska & Olczyk, 2021).
Companies operating in a competitive global environment, where the risk and complexity of product development are increasing and the need for even more innovative services and products is growing, are seeking to expand collaboration through partnerships, especially in recent decades (Trąpczyński et al., 2018). As a result, we can observe the development of advanced and complex alliances between companies. The need to collaborate on innovative projects has led companies to use modern partnership models, including those based on the principles of open innovation (Chesbrough & Bogers, 2014). Research on open innovation shows how organizations manage both the inflow and outflow of knowledge and how they seek and select partners, and the innovations they offer (Chesbrough, 2020; West & Bogers, 2014). The propensity for open innovation and, more generally, the development of innovation collaborations are far less documented in CEE than in Western markets (Dziurski & Sopińska, 2020; Gołębiowski & Lewandowska, 2015; Jaklič et al, 2014; Lewandowska, 2015; Lewandowska et al, 2016; Pustovrh et al, 2017; Puślecki et al., 2021 a,b, 2022; Rangus et al, 2017). It is worthwhile (both from an academic and business perspective) to explore this area of research, especially in turbulent times, and to monitor the shift from an efficiency-driven economic model to a knowledge-based economy (CEE) that leverages the local and domestic innovation potential of all partners involved in innovation collaboration.
The changes mentioned above received new dynamics in the context of the rising wave of skepticism towards international business and recurring crises, whereby a smaller number of firm and MNE location and control configurations emerges, and domestic firms become more dominant (Buckley & Hashai, 2020). The COVID-19 pandemic has acted as a catalyst to the already ongoing processes of questioning the existing GVC configurations (Hayakawa & Mukunoki, 2021), while the war in Ukraine further aggravated the challenges to GVC.
In light of the said new wave of transition in the CEE region, a number of research topics emerge, which the following special issue of the Journal of East European Management Studies seeks to address. The range of areas for inquiry includes, but is not limited to, inter alia the following aspects:
- The emerging sectoral and geographic patterns of foreign direct investment (FDI) in CEE, with particular for reshoring and re-configuration of GVCs
- The sectoral and geographic patterns of innovation cooperation in CEE
- The development of new modes of innovation cooperation in CEE taking into account multidisciplinary perspective, R&D innovation ecosystems and open innovation paradigm
- The R&D alliance and alliance portfolio management in CEE – towards increased fragmentation and complexity
- Open innovation in CEE
- The role of location, experience, knowledgeand partner selection in innovation cooperation in CEE
- The development of organizational modes of R&D alliances in CEE – a shift to contractual and non-equity agreements
- The determinants of innovation cooperation in CEE; business-academia innovation cooperation (performance)in CEE • Business model innovations of CEE firms and their role on firm internationalization
- The strategic logic behind diverse patterns the international expansion of CEE firms
- The competitive strategy of CEE firms in different locations and sources of competitive advantage
- Strategies of CEE firms in coping with ongoing economic crises and the effects thereof on their international competitiveness
With the special issue we seek to reflect upon the most recent changes in CEE with regard to its role for international business, take stock of extant developments and provide an outlook for an emerging research agenda.
Submission process and important dates:
- Deadline for full paper submissions: 28/02/2023
- 1 st Double-blind review round completed: 31/05/2023
- Deadline for submission of revised versions: 31/08/2023
- 2 nd Double-blind review round completed: 15/10/2023
- Final decision: 31/10/2023
- Publication of the SI: until 15/12/2023
To be considered for this Special Issue, full papers must be submitted no later than, 28/02/2023 to Piotr Trąpczyński (piotr.trapczynski@ue.poznan.pl).
Submitted papers will undergo a double-blind peer review process and will be evaluated by at least two anonymous reviewers. Final acceptance is dependent on the reviewers’ judgment regarding:
- Topic fit: does the submission contribute to the special issue topic?
- Theoretical contribution: Does the submission offer novel insights or extend existing considerations?
- When applicable: Empirical contribution: Are the study design, data analysis, and results rigorous and suit the research questions? Do empirical findings offer innovative insights?
All submissions should be prepared for blind review according to the JEEMS author guidelines (https://www.jeems.nomos.de/fileadmin/jeems/doc/Authors_Guidelines.pdf). Informal enquiries regarding the Special Issue (topics, potential fit etc.) are welcome and can be directed to guest editors:
Piotr Trąpczyński (piotr.trapczynski@ue.poznan.pl)
Łukasz Puślecki (lukasz.puslecki@ue.poznan.pl)
Andreja Jaklič (andreja.jaklic@fdv.uni-lj.si)
China has experienced an incredible rate of growth in GDP in recent decades. Looking forward whether China’s economy will continue to remain stable and grow is of significant interest not only to China but also to the rest of the world. One significant challenge to the economic growth is China’s nascent financial markets. Recognizing the importance of a better financial system for more broad economic growth, the Chinese government has implemented a number of reforms in the financial markets. Moreover, the financial system itself constituents the major risks that the Chinese economy faces.
This special issue aims to invite scholarly writings that touch on any aspect of the challenges that relate to the reforms and risks in the financial markets and offer solutions as well as discuss the opportunities that could arise from such solutions. Papers in all areas of finance related to China are welcome, especially those on current issues such as shadow banking, internet finance, exchange rate reform, and local government debt, among others. The special issue will be guest-edited by Xiaoya Ding (University of San Francisco, USA), Chen Liu (Trinity Western University, Canada), and Ligang Zhong (University of Windsor, Canada).
PAPER SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS:
- All submissions will be handled electronically. Those interested in submitting their work to this special issue should e-mail their papers to Ligang Zhong (lzhong@uwindsor.ca).
- Papers should be written in English and should contain original material that have not been previously published or currently submitted elsewhere.
- Papers should be double-spaced and limited to between 7000-10,000 words including references. All submitted papers will go through the standard double-blind reviewing process so be sure to include an additional page with the title and abstract but without the names of the authors.
- Final editorial decisions shall be sent to authors within two months and authors of accepted papers will be required to follow the formatting instructions and complete a “Consent to Publish” form.
- Please e-mail all queries to Ligang Zhong (lzhong@uwindsor.ca).
The bimonthly journal, Chinese Economy, published by Taylor and Francis Group, offers an objective and analytical account of economic issues concerning China. The journal publishes original works written by scholars from all over the world on recent changes to the Chinese economy. The Chinese Economy focuses on China’s current economic development as well as issues pertaining to the country’s trade, banking, and finances. Policy and research papers addressing macroeconomic and firm-level analysis are particularly welcome. Scholars and policy-makers will find The Chinese Economy informative as it provides relevant and rigorous analysis by experts on China.
The articles in this journal are listed in the Contents of Recent Economic Journals (COREJ) and the Journal of Economic Literature, and indexed in the Bibliography of Asian Studies Online, Econlit, e-JEL, and JEL on CD, International Bibliography of the Social Sciences, International Bibliography of Periodical Literature on the Humanities and Social Sciences (IBZ), Emerging Sources Citation Index(ESCI), PAIS International, ProQuest Database, RePEc, and Scopus. Chinese Economy is ranked as B in the Australian Business Deans Council (ABDC) Journal Quality List.
Guest Editors:
Prof. Tamar Almor
College of Management, Academic Studies, Israel, talmor@colman.ac.il
Dr. Shlomo Y. Tarba
The University of Sheffield, UK, s.tarba@sheffield.ac.uk
Background and Rationale for the Special Issue
Rapidly internationalizing, entrepreneurial companies seem to emerge more frequently in small countries with advanced economies, such as Israel, than in larger economies such as the U.S. (Efrat and Shoham, 2012; Freeman and Cavusgil, 2007; Gabrielsson and Kirpalani, 2004), and are often referred to in literature as “born-global” companies (Hashai 2011; Hewerdine and Welch, 2013; Melen and Rovira Nordman, 2009; Vasilchenko and Morrish, 2011). Born-global companies are characterized as having the ability to create innovative, self-developed, technology-based products that are sold internationally from the start of their existence (Rovira Nordman and Melen, 2008). Born-global companies are defined as business organizations that from the time of their founding or shortly thereafter seek superior international business performance, by creating knowledge-based resources and capabilities in which form the basis for sales in various countries (Almor, 2013; Gabrielsson and Kirpalani, 2004). While most research on this topic has focused on developed economies (Almor, 2011; Almor and Hashai, 2004; Efrat and Shoham, 2011; Hewerdine and Welch, 2013; Uner, Kocak, Cavusgil, and Cavusgil, 2013), case studies and incidental reporting seems to indicate that such companies can be found, with increasing frequency, in developing economies as well. However, to date, few empirical studies have been published on this topic.
Most empirical studies on born-global companies examine firms that exist for less than a decade. Moreover, the afore-mentioned studies deal primarily with issues of the initial survival and growth of these companies (Hashai and Almor 2004). Incidental case studies published in newspapers, however, have suggested that at least part of these entrepreneurial knowledge-intensive companies have now been in existence for about two decades, are maturing, and have been facing issues that differ from those encountered by the young firms. Furthermore, the maturing process of born-global companies seems to be a relatively new phenomenon that has not yet been researched to date, and therefore few questions have been raised regarding their maturation process (Glaister, Liu, Sahadev, and Gomes, 2014; Trudgen and Freeman, 2014). As a result, relatively little data exist about maturing born-global companies, whether or not they have survived as independent companies, and what international strategies they use to remain competitive (Almor, 2013; Almor, Tarba, Margalit, 2014) . Although there are many examples of born-global, technology-based companies that have been acquired by larger technology-based firms and have been merged into the larger businesses (e.g., Gomes, Weber, Brown, and Tarba, 2011; Weber and Tarba, 2011; Weber, Tarba, and Oberg, 2014), there are relatively few that have survived as independent entities and so far little research has addressed the topic of independent survival, the strategies employed to do so and the effect of culture, the management team as well as other factors, on the independent survival.
Despite the fact that about two decades of research exists regarding high-tech, born-global companies and international new ventures (INVs), many research gaps remain. The purpose of this special issue is to examine these gaps by addressing issues such as born global companies originating from developing countries, the relationships between collaborative agreements and survival of such companies, the effect of senior management and culture on survival and more, as explained below.
Topics for the special issue:
The goal of this special issue is to stimulate scholars to focus (i) on the challenges and strategies of small, international high-tech companies in the global environment at individual, group, and firm level as well as (ii) on the role of location (eg. quality of business location, impact of presence of clusters, etc.) of the home and/or of the host countries on the international high-tech companies competitiveness.
We encourage review, conceptual, and empirical contributions that may address, but are not limited to, the following topics:
The contributions may address, but are not limited to, the following topics:
- What are the antecedents, moderators/mediators, and outcomes of competitive and/or growth strategies pursued by small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- How does the macro-environmental and micro-environmental (industry) context in developed and/or emerging economies influence success/failure of collaborative partnerships (alliances, joint ventures, and M&A) established by small, international high-tech companies?
- How do clusters impact on the ability of born-global firms to emerge, to invest in specific location abroad and to perform in international markets?
- What is the impact of senior management on success/failure of collaborative partnerships (alliances, joint ventures, and M&A) established by small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What skills, competencies, and behaviours the incumbent managers and employees need to learn and practice in order to enable small, international high-tech companies' success in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What is the impact of strategic agility and organizational ambidexterity on success/failure of small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What are the social, economic and environmental implications of innovation management (product vs. process innovation) in small, international high-tech companies' success in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What are the value-creating and value-capturing factors in small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What is the impact of emotions and resilience on success/failure of small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What is the influence of national cultural distance and corporate (organizational) differences on success/failure of small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What is the impact of venture capital funds on success/failure of small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
- What is the effect of collaborative agreements between governmental and industry bodies and academics institutions on success/failure of small, international high-tech companies in developed and/or emerging economies?
References:
Almor, T. (2011). Dancing as fast as they can: Israeli high-tech firms and the great recession of 2008. Thunderbird International Business Review, 53, 109-276.
Almor, T. (2013). Conceptualizing paths of growth for the technology-based, born-global firm originating in a small population, advanced economy. International Studies of Management & Organization, 43(2), 56-78.
Almor, T., & Hashai, N. (2004). Competitive advantage and strategic configuration of knowledge-intensive small and medium sized multinationals: A modified resource based view. Journal of International Management, 10, 479-500.
Almor, T., Tarba, S. Y., & Margalit, A. (2014). Maturing, technology-based, born-global companies: Surviving through mergers and acquisitions. Management International Review, (Forthcoming, doi: 10.1007/s11575-014-0212-9).
Efrat, K., & Shoham, A. (2011). Environmental characteristics and technological capabilities' interaction in high-technology born global firms. European Journal of International Management, 5(3), 271-284.
Efrat, K., & Shoham, A. (2012). Born-global firms: The differences between their short-and long-term performance drivers. Journal of World Business, 47, 675-685.
Gomes, E., Weber, Y., Brown, C., and Tarba, S.Y. (2011). Mergers, Acquisitions and Strategic Alliances: Understanding The Process. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.
Freeman, S., & Cavusgil, T. (2007). Towards a typology of commitment states among managers of born-global firms: A study of accelerated internationalization. Journal of International Marketing, 15(4), 1-40.
Gabrielsson, M., & Kirpalani, V.H.M. (2004). Born globals: How to reach new business space rapidly. International Business Review, 13, 555-571.
Glaister, A. J., Liu, Y., Sahadev, S., & Gomes, E. (2014). Externalizing, internalizing and fostering commitment: The case of born-global firms in emerging economies. Management International Review, (Forthcoming, doi: 10.1007/s11575-014-0215-6)
Hashai N., & Almor T. (2004). Gradually internationalization 'born-global' firms: An oxymoron? International Business Review,13, 465-483
Hashai, N. (2011). Sequencing the expansion of geographic scope and foreign operations by “born-global” firms”. Journal of International Business Studies, 42(8), 995-1015.
Hewerdine, L., & Welch, C. (2013). Are international new ventures really new? A process study of organizational emergence and internationalization. Journal of World Business, 48(4), 466-477.
Melen, S., & Rovira Nordman, E. (2009). The internationalisation modes of born globals: A longitudinal study. European Management Journal, 27, 243-254.
Rovira Nordman, E., & Melen, S. (2008). The impact of different kinds of knowledge for the internationalization process of born globals in the biotech business. Journal of World Business, 43, 171-185.
Trudgen, R., & Freeman, S. (2014). Measuring the performance of born-global firms throughout their development process: The roles of initial market selection and internationalisation speed. Management International Review, (Forthcoming, doi: 10.1007/s11575-014-0210-y).
Uner, M. M., Kocak, A., Cavusgil, E., & Cavusgil, S. T. (2013). Do barriers to export vary for born globals and across stages of internationalization? An empirical inquiry in the emerging market of Turkey. International Business Review, 22(5), 800-813.
Vasilchenko, E., & Morrish, S. (2011). The role of entrepreneurial networks in the exploration and exploitation of internationalization opportunities by information and communication technology firms. Journal of International Marketing, 19(4), 88-105.
Weber, Y., & Tarba, S. Y. (2011). Exploring integration approach in related mergers: Post-merger integration in the high-tech industry. International Journal of Organizational Analysis, 19, 202–221.
Weber, Y., Tarba, S.Y., and Oberg, C. (2013). A Comprehensive Guide to Mergers and Acquisitions: Managing the Critical Success Factors Across Every Stage of the M&A Process. USA & UK: Financial Times Press.
Submissions:
All papers will be subject to double-blind peer review, according to author guidelines available at : http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/journals.htm?id=cr
Submissions to Competitiveness Review are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/comprev (please select the correct special issue from the drop-down menu)
Submission deadline: March 31, 2015. However, earlier submissions are encouraged.
The review process will take approximately up to 6 months.
About the special issue editors
Tamar Almor (talmor@colman.ac.il) is a professor of Strategic Management and International Entrepreneurship at School of Business Administration, College of Management, Israel. She received her PhD from Tel-Aviv University, Israel. Her research interests include new entrepreneurial ventures, born global firms, innovation strategies, and mergers and acquisitions. Her work has been published in journals such as Journal of International Business Studies, Management International Review, Human Relations, Research Policy, International Business Review, International Studies of Management & Organization, Journal of International Management, Thunderbird International Business Review, and others.
Shlomo Y. Tarba (s.tarba@sheffield.ac.uk) is a Lecturer in Strategic Management at the Management School, University of Sheffield, UK. He received his PhD in Strategic Management from Ben-Gurion University and Master's in Biotechnology degree at the Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel. His research interests include strategic agility, born global firms, organizational ambidexterity and innovation, and mergers and acquisitions.
His research papers are published/forthcoming in journals such as Journal of Management, Academy of Management Perspectives, Management International Review, California Management Review, International Business Review, International Journal of Human Resource Management, Thunderbird International Business Review, International Studies of Management & Organization, Human Resource Management Review, and others.
The Japanese economy faced numerous challenges in the past decades. Among them are severe shocks caused by natural disasters and by domestic and international financial crises, but also long-term fundamental transformations like demographic change, globalization and digitalization as well as economic reforms addressing the labor market, corporate governance and employment practices. In this special issue, we want to take stock of how the changes in the economic, regulatory, technological and international environment affected the Japanese employment system (system level), and the recruitment, management and development of human resources (management level) since the year 2000. Papers may either address the system or management level. We aim at an overall balance between system and management level analyses.
Guiding questions are:
- To what extent did adjustments occur?
- To what extent did they differ across industries and firms?
- To what extent do we see continuity?
Multi-disciplinary perspectives and a wide range of research methodologies (such as literature reviews, qualitative or quantitative studies) are welcome. All papers (max 6000 words each) will go through a double-blind peer-review process.
Keywords: Japanese Employment System, Japanese Labor Markets, Japanese Management, Japanese Human Resource Management, Lifetime Employment.
Deadline for manuscript transmissions: July 31, 2019
Please send your manuscript to parissa@haghirian.com
Editor: Dr. Parissa HaghirianProfessor of International ManagementSophia University, Japan www.haghirian.com
50th Anniversary Special Issue of the Journal of International Business Studies
Tentative publication date: late 2019
The Academy of International Business (AIB) is a social community of scholars dedicated to creating and disseminating knowledge on international business (IB) challenges, with JIBS as its main, global conduit for publishing leading research.
In 2019, JIBS will be celebrating its 50th anniversary. The 50th year anniversary issue of the journal will address the broad issue of ‘Changing the World: How IB Research Makes a Difference.’ The anniversary issue will include scholarly pieces that can be theoretical in nature, empirical, or managerially oriented. Each paper will showcase how the research presented has made a difference to changing the world in a tangible fashion (retrospective work) or could do so in the foreseeable future (prospective work). The ‘world’ can refer to an entire subfield of IB research and teaching, or to mainstream managerial practice, or both. A few examples of past IB research that clearly meets the ‘changing the world’ criterion, include C. Bartlett and S. Ghoshal’s work on the transnational solution; G. Hofstede’s work on culture’s consequences; W.C. Kim and R. Mauborgne’s work on procedural justice in multinational enterprises; and S. Zaheer’s work on overcoming the liability of foreignness.
However, IB research making a difference should be interpreted generously, especially for prospective work aimed at transforming contemporary academic discourse or managerial practice. The work of IB researchers provides insight on IB phenomena, but whether an entire subfield of IB research and teaching, or mainstream managerial practice will be significantly altered by this insight, is never guaranteed. For example, in the face of well-researched, unambiguous conclusions on linkages between specific managerial actions and performance (or the absence thereof), mistaken views from the past might still reign for long periods of time, whether in research and teaching, or in managerial practice.
The JIBS Editors will consider work that includes how IB research is affecting – or is constructively interacting with – functional fields in management and other social sciences, so as to address more effectively critical IB subject matter. The subject matter studied can range from micro-foundational challenges to society’s grand questions. The reference to ‘critical’ subject matter means that the work should have major implications for our understanding of the governance, the strategy or the performance of internationally operating firms. Of special interest is work on internationally operating firms that goes against common perceptions, and that provides balanced analysis of the costs and benefits of particular managerial choices or courses of action. One example is analysis of the vulnerability of MNE networks and value chains, rather than the supposed market power thereof. A second example is integrative analysis of entry strategy (including mode mixes and in-depth study of firms’ entire foreign-operations portfolios) and the effects of compounded distance, seldom found in past research. A third example includes fact-based analysis of the outcomes of firm-level, industry-level and macro-level decisions and actions fostering globalization or de-globalization. Of particular interest is also how IB research can make a tangible difference in the practice of management, whether by increasing economic efficiency, creating better outcomes for a variety of stakeholders, or even improving the welfare of mankind broadly construed.
As regards theoretical papers, the JIBS Editors have a preference for path-breaking work, rather than incremental contributions, though radical new ideas should be solidly grounded in extant research. For empirical work, the JIBS Editors would like to see submissions that build mainly on primary data, rather than secondary data, in order to maximize the likelihood of truly path-breaking work, and with the authors having an unambiguously strong command of their data. Finally, papers with a distinct managerial flavor have been a hallmark of JIBS since 1970. In keeping with this tradition, the anniversary issue aims to include pieces that combine ‘state-of-the-art’ scholarly insight with important, evidence-based recommendations for management. As noted above, retrospective work, credibly documenting achievements of IB research in truly ‘making a difference’, will also receive full consideration.
The JIBS Editors are inviting submissions aligned with the ‘changing the world’ theme, and subject to the above qualifications, in three tracks.
Track 1: Theory papers making distinct contributions to the ‘changing the world’ theme, by recombining elements of IB theory with state-of-the-art findings from functional fields in management and from other social sciences.
Track 2: Empirical papers making distinct contributions to the ‘changing the world’ theme, by building mainly on primary data, and providing truly novel insight into the critical subject matter covered.
Track 3: Managerial-practice oriented papers making distinct contributions to the ‘changing the world’ theme, through evidence-based guidance on how to improve the governance, strategy or performance of internationally operating firms.
Submission Process and Deadlines
All manuscripts for the JIBS 50th Anniversary Issue will be reviewed as a cohort. Manuscripts must be submitted during the period July 9–20, 2018, to: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs.
All submissions will go through a first, fast-track evaluation round, conducted by the JIBS Reviewing Editor and Editor-in-Chief, to assess the suitability for the Anniversary Issue. Papers viewed as being sufficiently aligned with the ‘changing the world’ goals will be assigned to a member of the JIBS Editors team for further evaluation and subjected to double-blind review. High-quality submissions insufficiently aligned with the anniversary issue’s goals will be reassigned to the standard evaluation process for regular JIBS issues.
It is anticipated that a formal workshop will be organized for the papers that have passed the first round of double-blind reviews, in order to provide editorial guidance for additional revisions. This workshop will likely be organized in late 2018.
For more information about this Call for Papers, please contact the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
China has firmly installed itself as a key player in the world trade and investment arena. Not even four decades since its opening up, it has surpassed Germany and the United States to become the world’s largest exporter. Adding to this, it has recently become the world’s largest recipient of foreign direct investment (FDI) as well as the largest source of outward FDI (if Hong Kong is included). Originally, the key driver of China’s growing clout in international economy has been its export-led growth strategy. From the onset of its open-door policy in the early eighties, China has made attraction of export-oriented FDI a key element of its development path. Abundant supplies of low-cost labor and artificially cheap inputs to production, as well as an undervalued currency, contributed to China’s attraction of FDI and its comparative advantage in low-skilled exports. Decades of rapid economic growth, however, are now threatening to undermine China’s export-led growth. Rising labor costs (especially in the coastal area), tightening regulations and currency appreciation have gradually eroded China’s comparative advantage in low-skilled exports. As a consequence, China has spent significant resources trying to rebalance its economy by moving from an export-led growth strategy to a consumption-led growth model and by pushing the companies to upgrade their activities up a global value chain.
The new trends beg a serious question how China’s Great Rebalancing Act affects the country’s integration in the world economy. Is China’s growing middle class changing the type of FDI that it is able to attract? Is China’s export sector moving up the value chain and specializing in higher-skilled activities such as innovation? What explains the massive rise of Chinese outward FDI? And how does all this matter for China’s economic performance?
This special issue aims to provide insights into these questions by exploring and explaining new trends in China’s exports, FDI inflows and outflows. We welcome both theoretical and empirical contributions adopting different perspectives, and focusing on different levels of analysis and research methodologies. Particularly, we welcome empirical papers that make use of original data and that can explain their findings non-technically and for wider audiences. Possible research questions that would suit to this special issue include but are not limited to the following: What is the impact of inward FDI on investment, innovation and industrial sophistication in China? What is the impact of outward FDI on China’s economic integration and development? How do China’s shift towards services and the emergency of the middle class affect FDI flows and global economy?
The submission deadline for this special issue is 31 August 2016. Potential author(s) are encouraged to send us a proposal or abstract for pre-review by 31 May 2016 to the Managing (Guest) Editor(s) at tncr.special@gmail.com with an email subject “China CER Special”.
When China's leaders surveyed their development prospects at the onset of the twenty-first century, they reached an increasingly obvious conclusion, namely that their current economic development strategy, heavily dependent on natural resources, fossil fuel, exports based on cheap labour, and extensive capital investment, was no longer viable or attractive. For a range of pressing competitiveness, national security, and sustainability reasons, they decided to shift gears and as a result have embarked on an effort to move their country in the direction of building a so-called “knowledge-based economy”; in this new model, innovation and high-end talent are positioned as the new primary drivers of enhanced economic performance. Underlying this transition also seems to be a rather pervasive sense of urgency about the need for China to catch up more quickly with the rest of the world, especially in terms of science and technology (S&T) capabilities. In fact, the top echelon of Chinese leaders, foremost among them both President Hu Jintao and Premier Wen Jiabao, has recognized that enhancing innovation performance and harnessing the country's huge talent resources are crucial to China's ability to cope with an increasingly competitive international environment, build a comprehensively well-off and harmonious society and, more importantly, consolidate and fortify the ruling base of the Chinese Communist Party (CCP).
At the core of China's efforts to enhance its R&D capabilities and performance lies the steadily evolving Chinese national innovation system (NIS). Since the 1980s, there has emerged a growing literature in the West regarding the concept of the NIS; this literature has formed the focal point for Chinese efforts at both the national and local level to develop and enhance their own indigenous capabilities, science and technology. China's NIS differs from those in other developed countries, not only in organizational terms (Yifei, 2002), but also in terms of the strategic role of the innovation system in China's efforts to advance its national S&T capabilities. In 2006, the State Council announced the launch of the 15-year “Medium-to-Long-term Plan Outline for the Development of National Science and Technology (2006-2020)” (MLP) to promote more rapidly China's scientific and technological progress (Ministry of Science and Technology of the PRC, 2006). A key goal of the MLP is to “push forward the comprehensive establishment of a national innovation system with Chinese characteristics.” Understanding precisely what is meant by “Chinese characteristics” reveals much about the nature of innovation in China. It also will promote greater understanding of the steadily more pivotal role of the enterprise in driving the overall performance and productivity of China's NIS.
As of 2009, this new, very strong emphasis on innovation, talent and high-end knowledge seems to have begun to pay off, as China has built an indigenous innovation system that is very different from the Soviet-inspired one that existed for most of the Maoist era and well into the era of Deng Xiaoping. In fact, it is increasingly clear that China is now not only better positioned for, but also steadily more confident about, becoming a true technological power on both regional and global levels. In fact, one can now identify several new, emerging pockets of excellence across the spectrum of Chinese industries and technologies. Moreover, it is also obvious to Chinese scientific leaders that the country's recent progress and future potential can be explicitly attributed to the increasing role of the nation's talent assets. It is quite clear that China already has begun to move away from being the so- called “factory to the world.” Increasingly, China is relying more on brainpower than brawn to drive and shape its economic future. In this regard, the rise of China as a global technological power, even taking into account many of the PRC's prevailing shortcomings, is have important consequences for the country internally as well as externally. In this context, we might ask, is China really poised to become a substantial force in global innovation? In which fields is China likely to make its impact felt most? What might be the specific implications for China of having a more dynamic, proactive science and engineering talent pool? And what broad potential impact will China's innovation on global technological competition and international technological advance during the first part of the twenty-first century?
This special issue calls for papers that review and highlight the workings and performance of China's national innovation system at both the macro and micro levels. We are looking precisely for papers that can highlight the strengths and weaknesses of the Chinese innovation system in terms of organizational structure and performance; management of R&D in specific sectors; handling of S&T budgets and financial resources; supply, demand and utilization of scientific and engineering talent; and China's evolving role and positioning in the global innovation system. Both industry and enterprise case studies and technology-oriented research are welcome. Contributions by scholars from Mainland China are particularly encouraged. An internal Chinese perspective on the structure, operation and management of R&D in China from a so-called “insider point of view” will greatly enhance our knowledge about the operation and performance of the innovation system, including both its limits and its potential.
The primary criterion for consideration of publication is that manuscripts should be on research and application, and must be grounded in organizations operating in China. Contributed manuscripts may deal with, but are not restricted to, the following:
* The “culture of creativity” and its limits in the Chinese research environment.
* Innovation and the challenges of technological entrepreneurship.
* Innovative performance of small versus large firms in China.
* Case studies regarding the operation and performance of foreign R&D centres in China.
* The supply, demand and utilization of high end talent, including the role of returnees in altering the innovation environment.
* Case studies of indigenous innovation across one to two technology fields.
* Analysis and assessment of the enterprise R&D environment.
Submission guidelines
All manuscripts should be prepared according to the Chinese Management Studies author guidelines located at: www.emeraldinsight.com/cms.htm. All papers will be double blind reviewed following the journal's normal review procedure.
The deadline for submission of manuscripts is: 1 April 2010.
Submissions must be made using the ScholarOne Manuscript Central system: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/cms
Please direct enquiries to: Professor Denis Fred Simon, Penn State University: dfs12@psu.edu
References
Ministry of Science and Technology of the People's Republic of China (2006), ``Medium-to-Long-term Plan Outline for the Development of National Science and Technology (2006-2020) (MLP)'', China Science and Technology Newsletter, No. 456, February 9.
Yifei, S. (2002), ``China's national innovation system in transition'' Eurasian Geography and Economics, Vol. 43, pp. 476-93.
Bibliography
Cao, C., Suttmeier, R.P., and Simon, D. (2006), ``China's 15-year science and technology plan'', Physics Today, December.
Rowen, H.S. (Ed.) (2008), Greater China's Quest for Innovation, Shorenstein Asia-Pacific Center, Stanford University, Stanford, CA.
Simon, D.F. and Cao, C., China's Emerging Technological Edge: Assessing the Role of High-End Talent, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Suttmeier, R.P., Cao, C. and Simon, D. (2006a), ``China's Super Science Center: knowledge innovation and the remaking of the Chinese Academy of Sciences'', Science, April.
Suttmeier, R.P., Cao, C. and Simon, D. (2006b), ``China's innovation challenge and the re-making of the Chinese Academy of Sciences'', Innovations, December.
Thomson, R.E. and Sigurdson, J. (Eds) (2008), China's Science and Technology Sector, World Scientific Publishing, Singapore.
Clusters and MNEs innovation strategies
Editors: Philippe Gugler and Christian Ketels
Submission deadline : August 30th 2014
The Competitiveness Review invites research papers in the field of clusters and MNEs innovation strategies and in particular on the role of clusters in home and host countries as location advantages fostering MNEs competitiveness
The evolution of the global economy and improved access to goods and resources from distant locations have placed knowledge at the core of firms’ competitive advantages (Zander and Kogut, 1995, p. 76; Jensen and Szulanski, 2007, p. 1716; Sala-I-Martin et al., 2012, p. 7). As a result of their ability to supersede the market and internalize the benefits of the geographic distribution of their activities, multinational enterprises (MNEs) have distributed their value chain around the world and implemented a global network of subsidiaries that allow them to take advantage of the specific profile of different environments (Sölvell, 2002, p. 3; Ketels, 2008, p. 124; Mudambi and Swift, 2011, p. 1).
Firms are constantly driven to generate new knowledge to maintain a competitive edge (Sala-I-Martin et al., 2012, p. 7). The important role of the internationalization of R&D has been studied in detail since the 1990s (Kummerle, 1997; Cantwell et al., 2004, p. 58; Criscuolo, 2004, p. 39). Since the 1980s, strategic asset-seeking investments have exhibited increased importance as a significant motivator for FDI and have helped explain the increased internationalization of R&D (Dunning and Narula, 1995; Dunning, 1998, p. 50).
Because MNEs have the special ability to internalize the benefits of their geographic dispersion of activities, they can significantly improve their competitive advantages by spreading their activities across locations and taking advantage of the specificities of each business environment (Sölvell, 2002, p. 3; Dunning, 2008, p. 83). Innovation scholars have analyzed the tendency of innovative activities to concentrate spatially (Kline and Rosenberg, 1986; Freeman 1991; Nelson 1993; Malmberg et al., 1996). As noted by Maskell and Malmberg (1999, p. 172) and Asheim and Gertler (2005, p. 292), tacit knowledge represents a key ingredient in the development of unique capacities and innovations.
Although the literature on innovation and new knowledge generation has provided significant documentation of the benefits of agglomeration, few studies have analyzed the role of clusters in the global innovation strategies of knowledge-intensive MNEs (Dunning, 1998, p. 60; Birkinshaw and Sölvell, 2000, p. 3; Tavares and Texeira, 2006, p. 1; De Beule et al., 2008; p. 224; Asmussen et al., 2009; Mudambi and Swift, 2010, p. 463). Knowledge capabilities and innovation are the main drivers of a firm’s competitiveness (Zander and Kogut, 1995, p. 76; Jensen and Szulandski, 2007, p. 1716).
Clusters appear to be a unique source of knowledge dissemination and generation and may play an important role in the global innovation strategy of MNEs (Birkinshaw and Sölvell, 2000; Tavares and Teixeira, 2006; Mudambi and Swift, 2010). Defined in their strictest sense as “geographic concentrations of interconnected companies, specialized suppliers, service providers, firms in related industries, and associated institutions in particular fields” (Porter, 1998, p. 197-198), clusters provide an environment that is particularly conducive to innovation. In addition to the positive influence of clusters on productivity and new business creation, recent empirical studies have confirmed the role of clusters in the stimulation of innovation (Jaffe, 1989; Feldman, 1994; Baptista, 2001; Audretsch et al., 2005; Breschi et al., 2005; Cumbers et al., 2008; De Beule et al., 2008).
By referring to the traditional notions developed in the international business (IB) literature, clusters not only offer strong CSAs for regions and countries but also represent unique sources of FSAs for MNEs in their perpetual quest for new knowledge and innovation. Clusters represent a new target for strategic asset-seeking investments in the global innovation strategies of MNEs that we could label “CSA-cluster.” As highlighted by Rugman and Verbeke, “(…) an FSA may be developed internally from three possible geographic locations, each associated with particular CSAs: a home country operation, a host country operation, or an internal network whereby operations in various countries are involved” (2001, p. 240).
These three dimensions are particularly important for knowledge-intensive MNEs to improve their FSAs. The acquisition and generation of new knowledge through home and host cluster relationships may constitute a unique source of new knowledge and innovation for MNEs (Park, 2011; Yao et al., 2013; Nell and Andersson, 2012). (Note: this text above is extracted from a paper in progress of Gugler, Keller and Tinguely).
Themes of this special issue:
We welcome submissions that provide a contribution through interdisciplinary approaches. We invite conceptual papers and empirical studies based on qualitative and/or quantitative methods. Potential themes includes, but are not limited to:
- How MNEs develop innovative capabilities thanks to their location with host countries’ clusters?
- Which kind of interactions with clusters’ members are the most appropriate for MNEs to operate R&D and innovate?
- To what extend clusters constitute an important asset for countries to attract technology intensive MNEs?
- To what extend clusters constitute a valuable alternative to other mean to get access to foreign technology?
- How MNEs may organize and manage their internal and external networks in combination with clusters activities within their home and host countries?
- How clusters constitute powerful home and host CSAs and how to consider clusters in the literature based on the interactions between FSAs and CSAs?
- Do clusters create negatives externalities for firms that may induce some firms to adopt specific strategies to avoid that their knowledge being “lost” through spillovers within a cluster ?
- How cluster initiatives may play a crucial role to attract technology intensive MNEs?
Submissions:
- All papers will be subject to double-blind peer review, according to author guidelines available at: www.emeraldinsight.com/cr.htm
- Submissions to Competitiveness Review are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/comprev (please select the correct special issue from the drop-down menu)
Submission deadline : August 30th 2014
Papers will be published in 2015.
References:
Asheim, B.T. and Gertler, M.S. (2005), “The Geography of Innovation – Regional Innovation Systems,” in J. Fagerberg, D. C. Mowery and R. R. Nelson (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Innovation, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 291-317.
Asmussen, C.G., Pedersen, T. And Dhanaraj, C. (2009), Host-Country Environment and Subsidiary Competence: Extending the Diamond Network Model, Journal of International Business Studies 40 (1): 42-57.
Audretsch, D.B., Lehmann, E.E. and Warning, S. (2005), University Spillovers and New Firm Location, Research Policy 34: 1113-1122.
Baptista, R. (2001), Geographical Clusters and Innovation Diffusion, Technological Forecasting and Social Change 66 (1): 31-46..
Birkinshaw, J. and Sölvell, Ö. (2000), Preface, International Studies of Management and Organization 30 (2): 3-9.
Breschi, S., Lissoni, F. and Montobbio, F. (2005), “The Geography of Knowledge Spillovers: Conceptual Issues and Measurement Problems,” in S. Breschi and F. Malerba (eds.), Clusters, Networks, and Innovation, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 343-376.
Cantwell, J., Glac, K. and Harding, R. (2004), The Internationalization of R&D – The Swiss Case, Management International Review 44 (3): 57-82.
China. In: Henderson, J.V. & Thisse, J.F. (eds.). Handbook of Regional and Urban Economics, Vol 4. Elsevier, Amsterdam.
Criscuolo, P. (2004), R&D Internationalisation and Knowledge Transfer: Impact on MNEs and their Home Countries. Maastricht Economic Research Institute on Innovation and Technology.
Cumbers, A., MacKinnon, D. and Chapman, K. (2008), “Innovation, Collaboration and Learning in Regional Clusters: A Study of SMEs in the Aberdeen Oil Complex,” in C. Karlsson (eds.), Handbook of Research on Innovation and Clusters, Cheltenham: Edward Elgar, 300-317.
De Beule, F., Van Den Bulcke, D. and Zhang, H. (2008), “The Reciprocal Relationship between Transnationals and Clusters: A Literature Review,” in C. Karlsson (eds.), Handbook of Research on Cluster Theory, Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
Dunning, J.H. (1998), Location and the Multinational Enterprise: A Neglected Factor?, Journal of International Business Studies 29 (1): 45-66.
Dunning, J.H. (2008), “Space, Location and Distance in IB Activities: A Changing Scenario,” in J.H. Dunning and P. Gugler (eds.), Foreign Direct Investment, Location and Competitiveness, Oxford: Elsevier, 83-110.
Dunning, J.H. and Narula, R. (1995), The R&D Activities of Foreign Firms in the US, International Studies in Management Organization 25: 39-73.
Economic Literature, American Economic Association, 28 (4), pp. 1661–1707.
Feldman, M.P. (1994), The Geography of Innovation, Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Freeman, C. (1991), Networks of Innovators: A Synthesis of Research Issues, Research Policy 20: 499-514.
Jaffe, A.B. (1989), Real Effects of Academic Research, The American Economic Review 79 (5): 957-970.
Jensen, R.J. and Szulanski, G. (2007), Template Use and the Effectiveness of Knowledge Transfer, Management Science 53 (11): 1716-1730.
Ketels, C.H.M. (2008), “Microeconomic Determinants of Location Competitiveness for MNEs,” in J.H. Dunning and P. Gugler (eds.), Foreign Direct Investment, Location and Competitiveness, Oxford: Elsevier, 111-131.
Kline, S.J., and Rosenberg, N. (1986), “An Overview of Innovation,” in R. Landau and N. Rosenberg (eds.), The Positive Sum Strategy: Harnessing Technology for Economic Growth, Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 275-304.
Kuemmerle W. (1997), Building Effective R&D Capabilities Abroad, Harvard Business Review 75 March, 61-70.
Malmberg, A., Sölvell, Ö. and Zander, I. (1996), Spatial Clustering, Local Accumulation of Knowledge and Firm Competitiveness, Geografiska Annaler 78 B (2): 85-97.
Maskell, P. and Malmberg, A. (1999), Localized Learning and Industrial Competitiveness, Cambridge Journal of Economics 23: 167-86.
Mudambi R. and Swift T. (2011), Leveraging knowledge and competencies across space: The next frontier in international business, Journal of International Management 17 (3), 186-189.
Mudambi, R. and Swift, T. (2010), “Technological Clusters and Multinational Enterprise R&D Strategy,” in T. Devinney, T. Pedersen and L. Tihany (eds.), The Past, The Present and The Future of International Business and Management, Volume 23, Bingley: Emerald Group Publishing.
Nell P.C. and Andersson U. (2012), The complexity of the business network context and its effect on subsidiary relational (over-) embeddedness, International Business Review 21 (6), 1087-1098.
Nelson, R.R. (1993), National Systems of Innovation: A Comparative Study, Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Park B.I. (2011), Knowledge transfer capacity of multinational enterprises and technology acquisition in international joint ventures, International Business Review 20 (1), 75-87.
Porter, M.E. (1998), On Competition, Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Rugman, A.M. and Verbeke, A. (2001), “Location, Competitiveness, and the Multinational Enterprise,” in A.M. Rugman and T. Brewer (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of International Business, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 150-177.
Sala-I-Martin, X., Bilbao-Osorio, B., Blanke, J., Crotti, R., Drzeniek Hanouz, M, Geiger, T. and Ko, C. (2012), “The Global Competitiveness Index 2012-2013: Strengthening Recovery by Raising Productivity,” in K. Schwab, The Global Competitiveness Report 2012-2013, Geneva: World Economic Forum, 3-48.
Sölvell, Ö. (2002), The Multi-Home Based Multinational – Combining Global Competitiveness and Local Innovativeness, Paper presented at the Symposium in honor of John Stopford, London.
Tavares, A. T. and Teixeira, A. (2006), “Introduction,” in A.T. Tavares and A. Teixeira (eds.), Multinationals, Clusters and Innovation: Does Public Policy Matter, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Yao Z., Yang Z., Fisher G.J., Ma C. And Fang E. (2013), Knowledge complementarity, knowledge absorption effectiveness, and new product performance: The exploration of international joint ventures in China, International Business Review 22 (1), 216-227.
Zander, U. and Kogut, B. (1995), Knowledge and the Speed of the Transfer and Imitation of Organizational Capabilities: An Empirical Test, Organization Science 6 (1): 76-92.
Information and communication technologies drive globalization and have radically changed the organization of work structures within organizations. The organizations have responded by progressively shifting from traditional collocated teams to global virtual teams (GVTs) (Webster and Wong, 2008; Zakaria, 2008). The effective use of GVTs has become an indispensable prerequisite to implementing global strategies of Multinational Enterprises (MNEs) and independent firms working together in international networks (Lovelace et al., 2005). Several authors report that more than 60% of managers work regularly in virtual teams (de Lisser, 1999; Kanawattanachai and Yoo, 2002; Hertel, Geister, and Kondradt, 2005).
Global virtual teams can be defined as “temporary, culturally diverse, geographically dispersed, and electronically communicating work group[s]” (Jarvenpaa and Leidner, 1999). GVTs are not constrained by traditional geographic and time boundaries and can offer many advantages if properly managed. As Duckworth (2008) points out, through GVTs MNEs can economize on travel, immigration, expat relocation costs and save time. GVTs help improve efficiency by seamlessly distributing workload across different time zones. Importantly, the different backgrounds, local networks and knowledge resources of locally embedded team members create new opportunities to leverage complementarities, creativity and innovation.
However, to live up to their full potential, MNEs need to address crucial challenges of GVTs, such as time-zone differences (Sutanto, Kankanhalli and Tan, 2011), work styles (Liu, Magjuka and Lee, 2008), communication via low-context and low-media-richness channels across cultures (Butler and Zander, 2008) and leadership as well as technological-related issues hindering effective communication (Flammia, Cleary and Slattery, 2010).
This new phenomenon entails several important repercussions for management theories regarding the boundaries of the firm, principal-agent relationships, organizational learning, appropriability and social networks, among others. The growing importance of GVTs is also affecting the contents of the business curriculum, as many universities and business schools are implementing activities to teach and train students how to effectively work in this type of teams and how to cope with challenges mentioned above (Taras et al. 2013). As the crucial role of GVTs is only expected to grow more in the years to come, we encourage scholars to examine GVTs from different theoretical perspectives and empirical approaches in order to achieve implications relevant both for academics and practitioners.
This Special Issue aims to attract contributions that offer a fine-grained analysis of the distinct aspects that affect the behavior and performance of GVTs. Specifically, how can MNEs benefit from the several potential advantages that a smart management of this kind of team may provide? How can MNEs avoid the common pitfalls of GVTs? We welcome theoretical, empirical, methodological and case studies submissions addressing, but not limited to, the following issues:
- Advantages and disadvantages of GVTs vis à vis traditional collocated teams.
- Determinants and characteristics of successful GVTs.
- Knowledge-creation, dissemination and leakages in GVTs.
- Open collaboration and GVT-headquarters relationships.
- The process of creation and development of GVTs over time.
- Differences in GVTs composition and performance across industries.
- Leadership and team-dynamics in GVTs.
- Improving inter-personal communication, team cohesion and trust among GVT members.
- The impact of cross-cultural differences among GVT members on the team performance.
- Language-related issues in GVTs.
- Information and communication technologies and GVTs.
- The multifaceted role of distance (geographical, institutional, psychic, cultural, etc) in GVTs.
- Training employees and students how to effectively work in a GVT.
- The relationship between the use of GVTs and firm performance.
- GVTs and employee satisfaction.
- Reducing shirking and cheating in GVTs
- Trends in the use of GVT around the world – who makes use of them, who does not, and why?
- The role of GVTs in global business strategy.
Submission information
The deadline for manuscript submission is March 8, 2016. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with Journal of International Management’s Style Guide for Authors: http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-international-management/1075-4253/guide-for-authors and submitted through the Journal’s submission website.
To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, it is important that authors select ‘SI: Global Virtual Teams’ when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process.
Please direct any questions regarding the Special Issue to Alfredo Jimenez (ajimenez@ubu.es), Dirk Boehe (dirk.boehe@adelaide.edu.au), Vasyl Taras (v_taras@uncg.edu), and Dan Caprar (dan.caprar@unsw.edu.au).
References
Butler, C., Zander, L. 2008. The business of teaching and learning through multicultural teams. Journal of Teaching in International Business, 19(2), 192-218.
de Lisser, E. 1999. Update on Small Business: Firms with Virtual Environments Appeal to Workers. Wall Street Journal, October 5, 1999.
Duckworth, H. 2008. How TRW automotive helps global virtual teams perform at the top of their game. Global Business and Organizational Excellence, 28, 6-16.
Flammia, M., Cleary, Y., Slattery, D. M. 2010. Leadership roles, socioemotional communication strategies, and technology use of Irish and US students in virtual teams. IEEE Transactions of Professional Communication, 53(2), 89-101.
Hertel, G., S. Geister., U. Kondradt. 2005. Managing virtual teams: A review of current empirical research. Human Resource Management Review, 15, 65-95.
Jarvenpaa, S.L., Leidner, D.E. 1999 Communication and Trust in Global Virtual Teams, Organization Science 10, 791–815.
Kanawattanachai, P., Yoo, Y. 2002. Dynamic nature of trust in virtual teams. The Journal of Strategic Information Systems, 11(3-4), 187-213.
Liu, X., Magjuka, R.J., Lee, s. 2008. An examination of the relationship among structure, trust, and conflict management styles in virtual teams. Performance Improvement Quarterly, 21(1), 77-93.
Lovelace, K., Shapiro, D. L., Weingart, L. R. 2001. Maximizing cross-functional new Product teams’ innovativeness and constraint adherence: A conflict communications perspective. Academy of Management Journal, 44(4), 479-493.
Sutanto, J., Kankanhalli, A., Tan, B. C. Y. 2011. Deriving IT-mediated task coordination portfolios for global virtual teams. IEEE Transactions of Professional Communication, 54(2), 133-151.
Taras, V., Caprar, D., Rottig, D., Sarala, R., Zakaria, N., Zhao, F., Jimenez, A., Wankel, C., Lei, W.S., Minor, M., Bryła, P., Ordenana, X., Bode, A., Schuster, A., Vaiginiene, E., Froese, F., Bathula, H., Yajnik, N., Baldegger R., Huang V., 2013. A global classroom? Evaluating the effectiveness of global virtual collaboration as a teaching tool in management education. Academy of Management Learning & Education, 12(3), 414-435.
Webster, J., Wong, W. 2008. Comparing traditional and virtual group forms: Identity, communication and trust in naturally occurring project teams. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 19(1), 41-62.
Zakaria, N. 2008. Using computer mediated communication as a tool to facilitate intercultural collaboration of global virtual teams. In M. Pagani (ed.) Encyclopedia of Multimedia Technology and Networking, (1115-1123), 2. New York: Information Science Reference.
About the Guest Editors
Dr. Jiménez is Assistant Professor at the University of Burgos (Spain). His research interests are focused on the process and the determinants of success in the internationalization strategy of firms including political risk, cultural and psychic distance and corruption. In addition, he is also working on a research line devoted to virtual team and multi-cultural team management and dynamics. He has previously published several papers in several international relevant journals, including Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of World Business, Management International Review International Business Review and European Journal of International Management. He has also been a visiting scholar in different institutions in Australia, Norway, Italy, Germany, Ecuador and Mexico.
Dr. Dirk Boehe is Senior Lecturer at the University of Adelaide Business School (Australia). His research interests focus on multinational corporations, corporate social responsibility and corporate governance in emerging markets. His scholarly articles have appeared in The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Journal of Business Ethics, Journal of International Management, Journal of Small Business Management, Management International Review, Journal of World Business, World Development, Business and Society, Studies in Higher Education, among others. Before joining the University of Adelaide, he held full-time positions at Brazilian business schools. Before joining academia, Dirk gained professional experience in related areas such as market research, foreign trade and international consulting projects in Colombia, England, Germany and Venezuela.
Dr. Vasyl Taras is Assistant Professor at the University of North Carolina at Greensboro (United States). He has published several papers on culture and global virtual teams in leading International Business and Psychology journals such as Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Applied Psychology, Journal of World Business, Journal of International Management, Academy of Management Learning and Education, International Journal of Human Resource Management and Management International Review. He is also Associate Editor of the International Journal of Cross Cultural Management and Editorial Review Board Member of Journal of International Business, Journal of International Management and Management Research Review. He has recently co-edited a book about Experiential Learning and has plenty of experience as a business consultant.
Dr. Dan Caprar is a Senior Lecturer at the School of Management of the UNSW Australia Business School. His research, teaching, and consulting work are in the area of cross-cultural management, leadership, and self-development. Dan has published several papers on culture and global virtual teams in top journals including Journal of International Business Studies, Academy of Management Learning and Education, Journal of Business Ethics, Personnel Psychology, and the Journal of Social and Personal Relationships. In addition, his work on the culture of MNC local employees, published in the Journal of International Business Studies, was the runner-up for the Academy of Management HR Division Scholarly Achievement Award in 2011. Dan is currently a member of the Editorial Board for the Journal of International Business Studies and a Regional Associate Editor for the International Journal of Cross-Cultural Management.
International Business Research, a journal of Shanghai Institute of Foreign Trade, China and Asia and Globalization Review, a journal of MacEwan University, Canada, jointly announce a call for papers on Competition and Cooperation between China and Other Emerging Economies: Transnational Trade and Investment.
China has successfully fostered its robust economic growth in the past years, which has consolidated its status of world economic power. In the era of post-crisis, China is faced with challenges and competition from other emerging economies. How to tackle the issues of competition and cooperation between China and other emerging economies in the context of stagnated world economy and spreading financial crisis is worthy of special academic attention.
The call for papers seeks to deepen research, analysis and discussion of the issues of such challenges, competition and cooperation as China and other emerging economies are facing . We therefore call for papers that examine the environmental, social and economic effects of transnational trade and investment by China and other emerging economies.
We expect to publish the selected papers in the two journals. We are also organizing a conference in Shanghai on May 11, 2013, giving contributors of selected papers an opportunity to present and discuss their work.
The deadline for submitting the abstract for the papers is February 28, 2013. The notification of acceptance will be sent by March 30, 2013. The deadline for submitting the papers will be April 15, 2013.
Contacts:
Dr. JIN Xiaobai (shiftjournal@163.com)
Executive editor-in-chief, International Business Research; Associate professor of international law, Shanghai Institute of Foreign Trade, China
Dr. William X. Wei (weix@macewan.ca)
Editor-in-Chief, Asia and Globalization Review; Chair, Asia Pacific Management Program; Institute of Asia Pacific Studies, MacEwan School of Business, MacEwan University, Canada
Special Issue of the Competitiveness Review
“The Competitive Advantage of Nations: 25 Years After”
Christian Ketels (editor)
In 1990 Michael Porter published “The Competitive Advantage of Nations”, proposing a comprehensive framework to understand the competitiveness of locations. The book triggered a rich academic debate; up to now, Google Scholar registers more than 35,000 citations. Numerous countries, regions, and clusters have launched efforts to upgrade their competitiveness, motivated by Porter’s work.
In this special issue we aim to collect two groups of papers, reflecting on the impact that the book had on theory and practice. First, we want to explore how the thinking on competitiveness has evolved over time. In the academic community there has been an on-going debate about the nature of the competitiveness concept, and the policy implications it might have. Twenty-five years after the Competitive Advantage of Nation was published, it is time to see where we have ended up so far. Second, we want to learn from a number of specific country and region cases in which Porter’s framework provided the foundation for specific diagnostics and policy action. Practitioners have been looking at Porter’s competitiveness framework as a way to organize their economic policies. With the experience of these efforts over the last twenty-five years it is time to take stock and draw conclusions for policy practice going forward.
We are inviting a number of authors from academia and the policy community to this special issue. We also encourage submission from other authors, which will then go through the normal review process of the journal.
Submissions:
- Papers will be subject to double-blind peer review, according to author guidelines available at: http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/cr.htm
- Submissions to Competitiveness Review are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/comprev (please select the correct special issue from the drop-down menu)
Submission deadline : May 15th 2015
About the Editor:
Christian Ketels is a member of the Harvard Business School faculty where he serves as the Principal Associate of the Institute for Strategy and Competitiveness. He is the President of the TCI Network, the leading global network of practitioners in competitiveness, clusters and innovation. Together with Prof. Philippe Gugler, University of Fribourg and Chairman of the European International Business Academy (EIBA, he is the editor of the Competitiveness Review. Email: cketels@hbs.edu.
In terms both of its scale and severity, the worldwide financial crisis of 2007–2008 was the most damaging financial crisis to affect the world economy since the Great Depression of the 1930s. Many major financial institutions around the world collapsed or had to be bailed-out by governments. Global trade was also severely hit and a large number of national economies went into deep recessions. In the view of many economists and politicians, one of the main reasons why the fallout from the worldwide financial crisis of 2007–2008 proved to be so damaging was down to the fact that the global financial system had, in the years prior to the crisis, simply become too complex. This increased complexity, it is argued, proved to be especially damaging in the aftermath of the 2007–2008 crisis not only because it led to increased levels of contagion, but also because it made it more difficult for governments and regulators to intervene effectively.
This edited volume contributes to these ongoing debates by bringing together some of the top academics from the US and UK in the disciplines of Law, History and Economics to look in more depth at the historical and institutional aspects of the relationship between financial crises and systemic complexity. Conceptually, it is motivated by three main questions: 1) Is the present financial system more complex than in the past and, if so, why? 2) To what extent and in what ways does the worldwide financial crisis of 2007–2008 differ from past financial crises? 3) How can governments, regulators and businesses better manage and deal with increased levels of complexity both in the present and in the future?
It is the intention of the editors that this collection will not only encourage greater interdisciplinary debate, but also to be of use to policy-makers and legislators in their efforts to come up with more resilient ways of managing and dealing with increased levels of risk, both in the present and in the future. As such, we are particularly keen for contributions that deal with any of the following issues:
- Directors’ duties and the role of shareholders in financial regulation
- Government regulation, with a particular emphasis on moral hazard
- The extent to which financial crises are an inevitable consequence of free-market banking systems
- How changes in the size and scale of the US and UK banking sector have affected financial stability
- The impact of economic fundamentals on financial instability, with a particular focus on speculative manias and investment bubbles
- Differences in government responses to financial crises over time
- The differences between legal and economic understandings of financial property and corporate control
- Technological innovation and change, with a particular emphasis on changing payment and trading systems
- ‘Short-termism’ and high-risk trading in financial markets
- Transformations in the US and UK banking sector, particularly as regards the relationship between commercial and investment banking
- The relationship between ownership structure and systemic crises
- Changes in accounting practices and financial reporting procedures
The initial proposal for this edited volume has been already been officially accepted by Edward Elgar for publication in 2015 and confirmed confirmations have been accepted from a number of prominent academics in both the UK and the US. However, we still have a limited amount of space within which to fit a couple more contributions.
Submissions should be in the form of a 1–2 page chapter proposal (750 words max), clearly explaining the objective of the proposed chapter and the reasons why it is relevant to the issues covered in this collection. In addition, we also ask that all potential contributors submit a brief and up-to-date CV outlining their past work and previous achievements. The deadline for initial chapter proposals is 1 July 2013, but we both welcome and encourage potential contributors to submit before this date. All chapter proposals should be emailed in Word or PDF form to: matthew.hollow@durham.ac.uk
Call for papers for a special issue of International Journal of Cross Cultural Management
Conceptualizing, Measuring, and Studying Cross Cultural Performance
(Optional) Abstract submission deadline: April 30, 2021
Full paper submission deadline: June 30, 2021
Initial decisions: August 20, 2021
Final decisions: November 15, 2021
Expected publication: from April 2022
Special Editors
Jessica L. Wildman, Florida Institute of Technology, USA (jwildman@fit.edu)
Richard Griffith, Florida Institute of Technology, USA (griffith@fit.edu)
Jennifer Klafehn, HUMRRO, USA (jklafehn@humrro.org)
We invite articles that address the theoretical conceptualization of, measurement of, or study of cross cultural performance as a criterion in organizational contexts (e.g., multi-national corporations, non-governmental organizations, military) that provide novel and cutting edge perspectives on cross cultural performance as a construct.
In the past 20 years, global integration has peaked, the movement of people around the world has increased, and migration has more than doubled (Strauss, 2019). Increased globalization in the workplace has brought about increases in international assignments, travel, and collaborations (Hammond and Grosse, 2003; Shaffer et al., 2012), all of which require organizational employees to engage in any number of cross cultural interactions. Accordingly, the extent to which individuals succeed in these cross cultural interactions is an important focal topic for organizational leaders and researchers. Successful performance in cross cultural settings has been studied in a number of different organizational groups and contexts, including expatriate employees (e.g., Wang et al., 2013), international students (e.g., Burke et al., 2009), non-governmental organizations (e.g., Charleston et al., 2018), military populations (e.g., Hardison et al., 2009), global leaders (e.g., Caligiuri and Tarique, 2012), and global or multicultural teams (e.g., Yitmen, 2013). Given the increased globalization in multiple organizational settings, the need to appropriately define and measure cross cultural performance is becoming more pronounced.
To date, much of the cross cultural management research has centered its focus on the operationalization of predictors that influence how individuals perform in cross cultural situations. There is a wide body of research examining constructs such as cross cultural competence, cultural intelligence, and intercultural competence, which are terms that have sometimes been used interchangeably (Deardorff, 2015), but are generally conceptualized as some combination of knowledge, skills, abilities, and other characteristics that enable individuals to perform effectively in cross cultural settings (Ang and Van Dyne, 2008; Charleston et al., 2018; Chiu et al., 2013; Gallus et al., 2014; Hammer et al., 2003; Jyoti and Kour, 2017; Li, 2020; Velez-Calle et al., 2018).
Upon closer examination of the research on cross cultural competence, cultural intelligence, intercultural competence, and related constructs, most of the time, the predicted outcome of these constructs has not been well-defined or consistently measured. There is generally a lack of research that explicitly focuses on providing an unambiguous definition regarding what constitutes successful performance in cross cultural interactions, or what we will refer to as cross cultural performance (e.g., Kour, 2017; Lima et al., 2016; Velez-Calle, 2018). Few studies have explicitly defined (e.g., Gallus et al., 2014; Klafehn et al., 2013) or developed specific taxonomies (e.g., Hardison et al., 2009; Wisecarver et al., 2014) of cross cultural performance. More commonly, empirical studies have used any number of inconsistent concepts and measures to represent cross cultural performance including, but not limited to, expatriate failure rates (Chen et al., 2014; Okpara, 2016), subjective adjustment (Matsumoto and Hwang, 2013; Selmer and Lauring, 2016; Okpara, 2016), adaptability and adaptation (Matsumoto and Hwang, 2013), communication competence (Matsumoto and Hwang, 2013), interaction success (Charleston et al., 2018; Matsumoto and Huang, 2013), taking on a task or project (Charleston et al., 2018), multinational team leadership (Hajro and Pudelko, 2010), and multicultural team performance (Matveev and Nelson, 2004). In other words, most research examining cross cultural performance defines the concept using very general and vague terms, such as effective performance, effective interaction, success, functioning, and appropriate behavior in cross cultural contexts (e.g., Charleston et al., 2018; Li, 2020; Velez-Calle et al., 2018) without providing any careful analysis regarding what those terms actually mean and how they should be measured.
Examining the approaches and measures used to assess cross cultural performance also reveals an area ripe for study. There are existing validated measures of cross cultural competence (Matsumoto and Huang, 2013; van Driel and Gabrenya, 2013), cultural intelligence (e.g., Van Dyne et al., 2008), and intercultural competence (e.g., Hammer et al., 2003), and, generally, more research has focused on assessing the predictors of cross cultural performance than on assessing cross cultural performance itself (e.g., Lima et al., 2016; Velez-Calle et al., 2018). While many theoretical and methodological issues remain for existing cross cultural competence measures (van Driel and Gabrenya, 2013), the measurement of cross cultural performance is even less well developed. Cross cultural performance has been assessed using validated measures of adaptability (Lima et al., 2016, Matsumoto and Huang, 2013), adjustment (Chen et al., 2014; Okpara, 2016), and job performance (e.g., Jyoti and Kour, 2017), but no widely accepted and validated measure specific to cross cultural performance currently exists.
Furthermore, criterion measures of cross cultural performance often overlap conceptually with predictor measures. In fact, in some cases, cross cultural competence measures have been used and interpreted as criterion measures of performance (e.g., Lima et al., 2016, Velez-Calle, 2018) rather than as the predictor. Some researchers have argued in favor of more performance-based measures of cross cultural competence and its related constructs (e.g. Deardorff, 2015; Chiu et al., 2013). In other words, there exists ample conceptual muddiness around these concepts that suggests a need to detangle the conceptualization and measurement of cross cultural competence from the conceptualization and measurement of cross cultural performance.
In sum, cross cultural management research seems to be experiencing a criterion problem (Austin and Villanova, 1992) in which there is not a consistent framework for how to define and measure cross cultural performance. Without an agreed upon conceptualization and operationalization, it is difficult to systematically study the nomological network surrounding cross cultural performance in a way that moves toward scientific consensus. As a first step toward addressing this criterion problem within cross cultural management research, we invite scholarly articles that grapple with some aspect of the conceptualization, measurement, and study of cross cultural performance as a criterion in organizational contexts broadly defined (e.g., multi-national corporations, educational settings, non-governmental organizations, military). Consistent with the aim of this call for papers, we are not interested in works that focus primarily or only on predictors of cross cultural performance without giving careful attention to the criterion space, and/or works focused on culture-specific performance (e.g., what behaviors are most appropriate in a certain culture or country). Instead, we aim to bring together a set of scholarly works that clarify or provide novel perspectives on what cross cultural performance is as a criterion before building its nomological network. Submissions may take many forms including empirical studies, theoretical or conceptual papers, or integrative reviews. Ideal submissions will address key issues such as, but not limited to, the following:
- Theoretical/conceptual papers that explicitly and systematically define cross cultural performance and explore the implications of that new conceptualization.
- Theoretical/conceptual papers that explore the nuances of what cross cultural competence is and is not, and how it is similar or different from related concepts such as cultural intelligence, general intelligence/cognitive ability, cross cultural competence or general job performance.
- Theoretical/conceptual and/or measurement-oriented papers exploring the dimensionality of cross cultural performance as a criterion.
- Critical and integrative reviews of existing theories and research regarding cross cultural performance aimed at spurring new theory and research in this area.
- Papers considering the impact of context on cross cultural performance, for example, unifying definitions across multiple organizational contexts, or exploring the nuances of cross cultural performance within a particular/unique context.
- Empirical studies that include predictors of cross cultural performance but that are focused primarily on the conceptualization and/or measurement of cross cultural performance as a criterion rather than just on the predictors.
- Papers that describe the systematic development, validation, and/or use of new methods or tools for assessing cross cultural performance and that highlight implications for future research and/or practice.
Submissions
If you would like to discuss a possible submission, and for any further information, please contact the special editors: Jessica L. Wildman, PhD, at jwildman@fit.edu, Richard L. Griffith, PhD, at griffith@fit.edu, and Jennifer Klafehn, PhD, at jklafehn@humrro.org. Editors will be reviewing and providing feedback on optional 1000-word abstracts through April 30, 2021. After that date, full papers should be submitted through the IJCCM online submission system. Please visit our SAGE webpages at http://journals.sagepub.com/home/ccm, for more information on formatting and submission criteria, and submit your article via our online submission system at https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/IJCCM, ensuring you submit to the special issue. Submissions are subject to a rigorous double-blind review.
References
Ang S and Van Dyne L (2008) Handbook of cultural intelligence: theory, measurement, and applications. New York, NY: Routledge.
Austin JT and Villanova P (1992) The criterion problem: 1917–1992. Journal of Applied Psychology 77(6): 836–874.
Burke MJ, Watkins MB and Guzman E (2009) Performing in a multi-cultural context: The role of personality. International Journal of Intercultural Relations 33(6): 475–485.
Caligiuri P and Tarique I (2012) Dynamic cross-cultural competencies and global leadership effectiveness. Journal of World Business 47(4): 612–622.
Charleston B, Gajewska-De Mattos H and Chapman M (2018) Cross-cultural competence in the context of NGOs: bridging the gap between ‘knowing’ and ‘doing’. The International Journal of Human Resource Management 29(21): 3068–3092.
Chen ASY, Wu IH and Bian MD (2014) The moderating effects of active and agreeable conflict management styles on cultural intelligence and cross-cultural adjustment. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 14(3): 270–288.
Chiu CY, Lonner WJ, Matsumoto D and Ward C (2013) Cross-cultural competence: Cross-Cultural Competence: Theory, Research, and Application. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology 44(6): 843–848.
Deardorff DK (2015) Intercultural competence: Mapping the future research agenda. International Journal of Intercultural Relations 48: 3–5.
Gallus JA, Gouge MC, Antolic E, Fosher K, Jasparro V, Coleman S, Selmeski B and Klafehn, JL (2014) Cross-cultural competence in the department of defense: an annotated bibliography (No. SR-71). Army Research Institute for the Behavioral and Social Sciences, Fort Belvoir, VA.
Hajro A and Pudelko M (2010) An analysis of core-competences of successful multinational team leaders. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 10(2): 175–194.
Hammer MR, Bennett MJ and Wiseman R (2003) Measuring intercultural sensitivity: The Intercultural Development Inventory. International Journal of Intercultural Relations 27(4): 421–443.
Hammond C and Grosse R (2003) Rich man, poor man: Resources on globalization. Reference Services Review 31(3): 285–295.
Hardison CM, Sims CS, Ali F, Mundell B and Villamizar A (2009) Cross-cultural skills for deployed Air Force personnel: Defining cross-cultural performance. Santa Monica, CA: Rand Corporation.
Jyoti J and Kour S (2017) Cultural intelligence and job performance: An empirical investigation of moderating and mediating variables. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 17(3): 305–326.
Klafehn J, Li C and Chiu CY (2013) To know or not to know, is that the question? Exploring the role and assessment of metacognition in cross-cultural contexts. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology 44(6): 963–991.
Kour S (2017) Cultural intelligence as an effective cross-cultural competency: A literature review. International Journal in Management & Social Science 5(12): 123–131.
Li M (2020) An examination of two major constructs of cross-cultural competence: Cultural intelligence and intercultural competence. Personality and Individual Differences 164: 1–6.
Lima JE, West GB, Winston BE and Wood JA (2016) Measuring organizational cultural intelligence: The development and validation of a scale. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 16(1): 9–31.
Matsumoto D and Hwang HC (2013). Assessing cross-cultural competence: A review of available tests. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology 44(6): 849–873.
Matveev AV and Nelson PE (2004) Cross cultural communication competence and multicultural team performance: Perceptions of American and Russian managers. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 4(2): 253–270.
Okpara JO (2016) Cross-cultural adjustment of expatriates: Exploring factors influencing adjustment of expatriates in Nigeria. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 16(3): 259–280.
Selmer J and Lauring J (2016) Work engagement and intercultural adjustment. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 16(1): 33–51.
Shaffer MA, Kraimer ML, Chen YP and Bolino MC (2012) Choices, challenges, and career consequences of global work experiences: A review and future agenda. Journal of Management 38(4): 1282–1327.
Strauss D (2020) Globalisation Not To Blame For Rise In Inequality, Research Finds. [online] Ft.com. Available at: <https://www.ft.com/content/c8eacdfa-c375-11e9-a8e9-296ca66511c9> [Accessed 14 August 2020].
Van Driel M and Gabrenya Jr WK (2013) Organizational cross-cultural competence: Approaches to measurement. Journal of cross-cultural psychology 44(6): 874–899.
Van Dyne L, Ang S and Koh C (2008) Development and validation of the CQS. In: Ang and Van Dyne (eds) Handbook of cultural intelligence: Theory, measurement, and application. New York, NY: Routledge, pp.16–38.
Velez-Calle A, Roman-Calderon JP and Robledo-Ardila C (2018) The cross-country measurement invariance of the Business Cultural Intelligence Quotient (BCIQ). International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 18(1): 73–86.
Wang D, Freeman S and Zhu CJ (2013) Personality traits and cross-cultural competence of Chinese expatriate managers: A socio-analytic and institutional perspective. The International Journal of Human Resource Management 24(20): 3812–3830.
Wisecarver M, Foldes H, Adis C, Gallus J and Klafehn J (2014). Army Sociocultural Performance Requirements. Personnel Decisions Research Institute Inc, Arlington, Virginia.
Yitmen I (2013) Organizational Cultural Intelligence: A Competitive Capability for Strategic Alliances in the International Construction Industry. Project Management Journal 44(4): 5–25.
Special issue editors:
Madhu Viswanathan, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign, mviswana@illinois.edu
Ronika Chakrabarti, Lancaster University, r.chakrabarti@lancaster.ac.uk
Paul Ingenbleek, Wageningen University, paul.ingenbleek@wur.nl
Srinivas Venugopal, University of Vermont, svenugop@uvm.edu
The Journal of Consumer Affairs (JCA) invites papers for a special issue on consumer affairs in subsistence marketplaces. Subsistence marketplaces consist of consumer and entrepreneur communities living at a range of low income levels, and are concentrated in developing countries and regions such as Brazil, India, China, Vietnam, and Sub-Saharan Africa. Additionally, many individuals in developed countries also live in subsistence.
For more than a decade, the Subsistence Marketplaces Conferences have been a leading forum for evolving and sharing research and fostering best practices for improving quality of life in these communities. The subsistence marketplaces approach is unique in examining the intersection of poverty and marketplaces with a bottom-up approach that begins with micro-level understanding of life circumstances of consumers, entrepreneurs, and communities. This stream has been reflected in seven biennial conferences, one immersion conference [1], and almost 60 refereed articles in related special journal issues (https://business.illinois.edu/subsistence/conferences/), as well as in dedicated session tracks at other conferences and refereed articles in a variety of journals. The current call flows from the Seventh Conference on Subsistence Marketplaces, held in June 2018, but is also open to authors who did not attend this conference.
The conferences cover themes from consumption and entrepreneurship beyond literacy and resource barriers to consumption and commerce for a better world, impactful research to sustainable innovation, micro-level insights to macro-level impact, spanning geographies and substantive domains, and developing pathways at the intersection of research and practice.
Encouraging scholarship on subsistence marketplaces addresses one of the most critical and enduring ethical challenges faced by society - that of global poverty. A central theme is how to increase quality of life for people living in subsistence marketplaces. Research on subsistence marketplaces holds the potential to uncover important insights on how poverty intersects with major societal trends of today such as climate change, refugee crises, income inequality and rapid technological advancements. Obtaining deep understanding of these issues will be crucial to advancing well-being in subsistence contexts.
The following are suggestions for topics; however, submissions may go beyond these topics.
- Consumer behavior in subsistence marketplaces;
- Substantive domains of subsistence (e.g., water, sanitation, energy, food);
- Powerlessness of consumers in subsistence marketplaces;
- Access to innovation and consumer products in impoverished rural areas;
- Interventions to increase quality of life in subsistence marketplaces;
- Environmentalism of subsistence consumers and consumer-merchants;
- Issues of environmental justice relating to subsistence marketplaces;
- Pricing for value and sustainability;
- Economic and financial perspectives on subsistence marketplaces (e.g., financial literacy);
- Health, well-being, and justice in subsistence marketplaces;
- Research methods for subsistence marketplaces.
Researchers in all relevant fields are encouraged to submit their work. Manuscripts may be submitted online through Scholar One Manuscripts. Style guidelines and publishing requirements can be viewed online at wileyonlinelibray.com/journal/JOCA. Please contact the issue editors or the Journal office [ronhill@american.edu] for further information.
Guest Editors:
Dr. Pavlina Jasovska - University of Technology Sydney, Australia
Associate Professor Danielle Logue - University of Technology Sydney, Australia
Associate Professor Hussain G. Rammal - University of Technology Sydney, Australia
Deadlines:
Proposals submission: October 15, 2019
Full Chapters Due: January 31, 2020
Objective of the book:
There has been growing attention placed on the role of entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial activities in driving global economic growth and also in responding to changing social and environmental conditions affecting societies globally. In itself, the identification and capture of international opportunities represents an act of entrepreneurship by disrupting and creating markets in foreign countries. Historically, the international entrepreneurship literature has focused on the rapid and early internationalization of new ventures and start-ups. Yet an increasing number of multinational enterprises (MNEs) are encouraging and developing corporate intrapreneurship, where managers promote innovation in products and processes. Moreover, various activities by entrepreneurs and their start-ups are solving social, cultural and environmental challenges in foreign markets. This dedicated volume discusses these and other contemporary and emerging issues of entrepreneurship in International Business.
Contributions may address but are not limited to the following topics:
- What are the internationalization and scaling strategies of entrepreneurial firms (e.g., early and rapid internationalization or international withdrawal)?
- How do entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial firms identify new opportunities?
- How does social entrepreneurship address social, cultural and environmental issues?
- How do firms encourage and develop corporate intrapreneurship?
- What is the role of individuals in encouraging entrepreneurship (e.g., new venture owners, female entrepreneurs, expatriates, refugees)?
- What are the strategic responses employed by entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial firms to the institutional environment (i.e. non-market strategies)?
- How do entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial firms respond to the challenges faced in cross-border activities?
Submissions:
We welcome comparative studies, cross-cultural investigations, case studies, and both qualitative and quantitative approaches to examining entrepreneurship in the context of international business.
We invite chapter proposals of 1,000 words with 5 keywords by October 15, 2019 that outline the focus and contribution of the chapter. Authors will be notified by October 31, 2019 about the status of their proposals and, if accepted, sent chapter guidelines. Full chapters (of between 5,000 and 10,000 words) should be submitted by January 31, 2020. All submitted chapters will be subject to double-blind peer review. Contributors may also be requested to serve as reviewers for this project.
Submissions or any inquiries should be sent to Pavlina Jasovska (pavlina.jasovska@uts.edu.au), Danielle Logue (danielle.logue@uts.edu.au) and Hussain Rammal (hrammal@gmail.com).
Note: There are no submission or acceptance fees for manuscripts submitted to this book publication. All manuscripts are accepted based on a double-blind peer review editorial process.
Important Dates:
Proposal deadline: October 15, 2019
Acceptance notification: October 31, 2019
Full chapter submission: January 31, 2020
Reviewers’ comments: March 16, 2020
Revised chapters submission: May 15, 2020
It is likely that the book will be published in January, 2021.
Editors
Dr. Mehmet Ali TURKMENOGLU (Assist. Prof.) (PhD from Brunel University London)
Muş Alparslan Üniversitesi Kampusu, IIBF Ofis No 306, Diyarbakır Yolu 7. Km 49250- Muş/TURKEY
Email: dr.mturkmenoglu@gmail.com
Dr. Berat CICEK (Assist. Prof)
Muş Alparslan Üniversitesi Kampusu, IIBF Ofis No 302, Diyarbakır Yolu 7. Km 49250- Muş/TURKEY
Email: beratcicek@gmail.com
Dates
Proposals Submission Deadline: June 15, 2019
Full Chapters Due: October 13, 2019
Submission Date: March 4, 2020
Introduction
Over the last few decades, rapid changes have affected organizations' perspectives about employees. One change could be globalisation which caused a tough competition for enterprises. This competition has forced organisations to change the way of doing business which also affected people's expectations from organizations. Other changes include technological, societal, demographical, political, legal, and cultural transformations. These changes have raised awareness of paying attention to the importance of valuing human resources among employers and employees. Therefore, human resources researches have been attractive to business and academic environments to solve problems at work. For instance, globalisation has enabled employees to migrate to other countries and this situation caused to work in a culturally different work environment. Migrating to other countries has created both positive and negative consequences e.g. employers have obtained the talented employees they required and employees have reached to the desired labour market. Employers and employees have benefited from technological developments immensely. But also, it is argued that technology has deteriorated human relations. Ageing has become a major issue for employers rapid changing environment, especially adapting new changes, decreased performance and absenteeism. Opposed to ageing issues, having a rising and modernised education level created opportunities for finding better employees and employers.
Political and legal changes e.g. minimum wage, maximum working hours and union rights have guaranteed employees' working conditions and rights. In this context, researches of the human resources have concentrated on employees' work-related as well as personal life issues. This book is intended to cover current and future changes, issues, solutions of human resources management from an improving, critical, innovative and contemporary standpoint.
Objective
This book aims to examine attitudes, behaviours, experience, expectations of employees and employers about HR Management in a rapidly changing business environment. In this context, we would like to contribute to the field by shedding light on current trends of Human Resources functions e.g. planning, recruiting, orienting, developing and training and appraising of employees as well as managing industrial relations. In order to meet this aim, we invite authors to focus on especially workplace issues that employees encounter before, during and after employment e.g. discrimination, bullying, conflicts, emotions, ethics, participation and work-life balance. We expect that this book will not only expand the literature but also increase awareness among practitioners. Due to the rising trends such as intellectual capital and talent management, employees are considered more valuable to organizations. Thus, we expect related to mentioned HR issues with an interdisciplinary and critically point of view.
Target Audience
The potential audience will include but not limited to:
Graduate students,
PhD Candidates,
Researchers,
Business Community,
Academia,
Practitioners of profit and non-profit organizations,
Policymakers
Recommended Topics
Topics below are encouraged for authors to cover but it is not limited to:
Main Topics
- Human resources management in a competitive environment with advantages and disadvantages
- Effects of globalization on human resource management issues
- Demographic changes and societal transformations & HR Management
- Critiques of HR Practices
- Legal and political changes & HR Management
- Technological developments in HR Management
Sub Topics related to HR Management
- Ageing issues
- Diversity issues
- Work-life Balance Issues
- Recruitment Issues
- Orientation Issues
- Training and Development Issues
- Performance Appraisal Issues
- Downsizing Issues
- Industrial Relations Issues
- Ethical Issues
- Migrant Employment Issues
- Bullying
Submission Procedure
Researchers and practitioners are invited to submit on or before June 15, 2019, a chapter proposal of 1,000 to 2,000 words clearly explaining the mission and concerns of his or her proposed chapter. Authors will be notified by July15, 2019 about the status of their proposals and sent chapter guidelines. Full chapters are expected to be submitted by October 13, 2019, and all interested authors must consult the guidelines for manuscript submissions at http://www.igi-global.com/publish/contributor-resources/before-you-write/ prior to submission. All submitted chapters will be reviewed on a double-blind review basis. Contributors may also be requested to serve as reviewers for this project.
Note: There are no submission or acceptance fees for manuscripts submitted to this book publication, Trust in Knowledge Management and Systems in Organizations. All manuscripts are accepted based on a double-blind peer review editorial process.
All proposals should be submitted through the eEditorial Discovery®TM online submission manager.
Publisher
This book is scheduled to be published by IGI Global (formerly Idea Group Inc.), publisher of the "Information Science Reference" (formerly Idea Group Reference), "Medical Information Science Reference," "Business Science Reference," and "Engineering Science Reference" imprints. For additional information regarding the publisher, please visit www.igi-global.com.
This publication is anticipated to be released in 2020.
Important Dates
June 22, 2019: Proposal Submission Deadline
July 15, 2019: Notification of Acceptance
October 13, 2019: Full Chapter Submission
November 22, 2019: Review Results Returned
December 27, 2019: Final Acceptance Notification
February 21, 2020: Final Chapter Submission
Inquiries
Dr. Mehmet Ali TURKMENOGLU (Assist. Prof.) (PhD from Brunel University London)
Email: dr.mturkmenoglu@gmail.com
Dr. Berat CICEK (Assist. Prof)
Email: beratcicek@gmail.com
Contextualizing international business research to achieve research rigor and practical relevance is a challenge faced by all sub-disciplines within the domain of international business. Contextualizing international business research focuses on the big question, 'How do we identify and integrate context into our international business research?' and a corollary, 'Why should we identify and integrate context into our international business research?' We seek submissions for this special issue that explore the implications of context for IB theory building, research design and methodology including methodological approaches to build more robust IB theories; articles that focus on the conceptualization and meaning of context; and limitations of contextualization. Additionally, submissions that demonstrate novel methodological approaches for integrating context into IB theory building are welcome.
When the renowned international business scholar Peter Buckley (2002) questioned the distinctiveness of IB research, he responded to his own question and argued for more integration of culture, more use of comparative studies and of distinctive methods in IB research. Many argue contextual dimensions are what differentiate domestic research from international business and international management research (Buckley, 2002; Child, 2009; Oesterle & Wolf, 2011). Oesterle and Wolf (2011) raised the question, 'how international are our international journals?' And concluded that context was not adequately or at best modestly addressed in most of our research. We concur.
Despite the urging of thought leaders in IB for more contextualization, our approaches to contextualization appear limited, for example, focusing on categorical data or concepts like country or nationality (Von Glinow & Shenkar, 1994). They are static since our methods do not appear to be changing despite calls to do so (Buckley, 2002; Child, 2009; Teagarden, et al. 1995). Perhaps, most importantly, the scope of IB is expanding dramatically and our research contextualization appears inadequate, given the shift in business from the United States and Europe toward more 'exotic' emerging markets in Asia, Latin America and Africa with more pronounced differences in business and cultural environments. For our IB research to remain relevant we must more adequately contextualize our theory building.
Contextualization has been viewed through many lenses, and at multiple levels of analysis. While focusing on theory building, Whetten (2009) and Tsui (2004) differentiate context-specific and context-bound theory development, and Child (2009) discusses an 'outside in' versus 'inside out' perspective of contextualization. Von Glinow, Shapiro and Brett (2004) and Shapiro, Von Glinow and Xiao (2007) suggest a more complex perspective when they contrast 'single contextuality' with 'polycontextuality' or the multiple and qualitatively different contexts embedded within one another. Each of these studies acknowledges that context is important in IB theory building and each offer prescriptive recommendations for incorporating context.
Strategists (Ricart et al., 2004, Rugman & Verbeke, 2001) and behaviorists (Rousseau & Fried, 2001; Gelfend, Erez & Aycan, 2007) assert that location, one form of context, has an impact on theory. Khanna (2002) explores institutions and institutional voids in locations. Ghemawat (2001, 2003) examines country differences and offers the CAGE (Culture, Administrative, Geographic and Economic) framework to guide analysis. Ghemawat (2007) argues that despite globalization, there are significant locational differences that must be considered. Cheng (1994) suggests that context-embedded research ought to include '…a nation's social, cultural, legal, and economic variables as predictors and organizational attributes as dependent variables. Enright (2002) urges the use of multilevel analysis including supranational, macro, meso, micro and firm levels in the integration of location into competitive strategy. House and colleagues (2004) in their seminal GLOBE study discuss societies and their impact on leadership. Von Glinow and colleagues (2002 a, 2002 b) identify locational influences on human resource management best practices as do Von Glinow & Teagarden (1988, 1990). Shapiro and colleagues (2007) identify numerous contextual variables, including location, that address the multiple and qualitatively different contextual variables that influence understanding behavior in China.
Given the magnitude of possible contexts, researchers are challenged to comprehend the contextual and polycontextual dynamics in a limited number of foreign cultures. Tsui (2004) argues for inside-out, context specific indigenous research, and this represents one possible solution to the context challenge. Teagarden and Schotter (2013) and Enright (20020 argue for the importance of multilevel analysis to contextualize research and provide a deeper understanding of phenomena. Teagarden and colleagues (1995) suggest that team-based comparative-management studies provide the collective understanding to contextualize and make sense of multiple contexts in a single research project. There have been numerous examples that demonstrate the effectiveness of this latter approach (House, et al., 2004; Von Glinow, Teagarden & Drost, 2002a, 2002b).
The list of topics below is merely suggestive of the range of topics appropriate for the Special Issue, which ideally seeks inputs from scholars across a number of disciplines related to conducting research on organizational, institutional and environmental contexts. Through contributions to this special issue, we aspire to expand the boundaries of rigor and relevance in international business research.
Contributors are invited to submit manuscripts focus on topics and themes such as:
- How important is context to conducting International Business research?
- What are the various methodological approaches used to measure context?
- Is national culture an accurate reflection of context; if not, what other contextual variables better capture the notion of context?
- Do traditional measures of political, institutional, and governance capture important contextual conditions; if not, how are they incomplete and what additional constructs are required to supplement them?
- How does indigenous research help us uncover multiple contexts?
- What is context-embedded research, and why is it important?
- What role do institutions and institutional voids play in establishing context in International Business research?
- How does the use (or abuse) of context affect rigor or relevance in our theory development?
- How does the use of context help us expand theory in International Business?
- What research methods are most appropriate to uncovering the different and multiple contexts that underlie most international settings?
Submission process:
By 01 November, 2015, authors should submit their manuscripts online via the new Journal of World Business EES submission system. The link for submitting manuscript is: http://ees.elsevier.com/jwb.
To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, it is important that authors select ‘SI: Contextualizing Research’ when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process
Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the Journal of World Business Guide for Authors available at http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-world-business/1090-9516/guide-for-authors. All submitted manuscripts will be subject to the Journal of World Business’s blind review process.
We may organize a workshop designed to facilitate the development of papers. Authors of manuscripts that have progressed through the revision process will be invited to it. Presentation at the workshop is neither a requirement for nor a promise of final acceptance of the paper in the Special Issue.
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors:
Mary B. Teagarden, Thunderbird School of Management, Arizona State University, USA (mary.teagarden@asu.edu)
Mary Ann Von Glinow, Florida International University, USA (vonglino@fiu.edu)
References:
Buckley, P.J. (2002) 'Is the international business research agenda running out of steam?', Journal of International Business Studies, 33(2): 365-373.
Cheng, J.L.C. (1994) 'On the concept of universal knowledge in organization science: implications for cross-national research', Management Science, 40: 162-168.
Child, J. (2009) 'Context, Comparison, and methodology in Chinese Management Research', Management and Organization Review, 5(1): 57-73.
Enright, M.J. (2002) 'Globalization, regionalization, and the knowledge-based economy in Hong Kong. In J.H. Dunning (ed.) Regions, Globalization and the Knowledge-based Economy, Oxford University Press: Oxford, pp. 381-406.
Gelfend, M.J., Erez, M.and Aycan, Z. (2007) 'Cross-cultural organizational behavior', Annual Review of Psychology, 58: 479-514.
Ghemawat, P. (2001) 'Distance still matters', Harvard Business Review, 79(8), September: 137-147.
Ghemawat, P. (2003) 'Semiglobalization and international business strategy', Journal of International Business Studies, 34(2): 138-152.
Ghemawat, P. (2007) 'Why the world isn't flat', Foreign Policy, March-April: 54-60.
House, R. J., Hanges, P.J., Javidan, M., Dorfman, P.W. and Gupta, V. (2004) Culture, Leadership and Organizations: The GLOBE Study of 62 Societies. Sage.
Khanna, T. (2000) Local Institutions and Global Strategy, Harvard Business School: Boston, Harvard Business School Note No. 702-475.
Oesterle, M.J. and Wolf, J.M. (2011) '50 years of MIR and IB/IM research; an inventory and some suggestions for the fields development', Management International Review, 51: 735-757.
Ricart, J.E., Enright, M.J., Ghemawat, P., Hart, S.L., and Khanna, T. (2004) 'New frontiers in international strategy', Journal of International Business Studies, 35: 175-200.
Rousseau, D.M. and Fried, Y. (2001) 'Location, location, location: contextualizing organizational research', Journal of Organizational Behavior, 22: 1-13.
Rugman, A.M. and Verbeke, A. (2001) 'Subsidiary-specific advantages in multinational enterprises', Strategic Management Journal, 23(3): 237-250.
Shapiro, D.L., Von Glinow, M.A. and Xiao Z. (2007) 'Toward polycontextually sensitive research methods', Management and Organization Review, 3(1): 129-152.
Shenkar, O. and Von Glinow, M.A. (1994) 'Paradoxes of organizational theory and research: using the case of China to illustrate national contingency', Management Science, 40: 56-71.
Teagarden, M.B. and Schotter, A. (2013) 'Favor prevalence in emerging markets: a multi-level analysis of social capital', Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 30(2): 447-460.
Teagarden, M.B., M.A. Von Glinow, D. Bowen, C. Frayne, S. Nason, P. Huo, J. Milliman, M.C. Butler, M.E. Arias, N.H. Kim, H. Scullion and K.B. Lowe (1995). 'Toward building a theory of comparative management research methodology: An idiographic case study of the best international human resources management project', Academy of Management Journal, 38(5): 1261-1287.
Tsui, A.S. (2004) 'Contributing to global management knowledge: a case for high quality indigenous research', Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 21: 491-513.
Von Glinow, M.A. and Teagarden, M.B. (2009) 'The future of Chinese management research: rigor and relevance redux', Management and Organization Review, 5(1): 75-89.
Von Glinow, M.A. and Teagarden M.B. (1990). 'Contextual determinants of human resource management effectiveness in international cooperative alliances: evidence from the People's Republic of China', International Human Resource Management Review, 1: 75-93.
Von Glinow, M.A. and Teagarden M.B. (1988). 'The transfer of human resource management technology in Sino-U.S. cooperative ventures: problems and solutions', Human Resource Management, 27(2), Summer: 201-229.
Von Glinow, M.A, Teagarden, M.B. and Drost E. (2002a). 'Converging on IHRM best practices: lessons learned from a globally-distributed consortium on theory and practice', Human Resource Management, Special Issue, 41(1): 123-140.
Von Glinow, M.A, Teagarden, M.B. and Drost E. (2002b). 'Converging on IHRM best practices: lessons learned from a globally-distributed consortium on theory and practice', Asia Pacific Journal of Human Resource Management, Special Issue, 40 (1): 123-140.
Whetten, D. (2009) 'An examination between context and theory applied to the study of organizations in China', Management and Organization Review, 5(1): 29-55.
Guest Editors:
Crystal Jiang Ph.D., Bryant University, cjiang1@bryant.edu
Irem Demirkan Ph.D., Loyola University Maryland, idemirkan@loyola.edu
Qin Yang Ph.D., Robert Morris University, yang@rmu.edu
Submission deadline: September 15, 2017
Special Issue Theme Background
This New England Journal of Entrepreneurship (NEJE) special issue on ‘Corporate Entrepreneurship in Emerging Markets’ aims to explore key features of the corporate entrepreneurship in emerging economies.
It is widely accepted in the literature that corporate entrepreneurship encompasses two main phenomena of innovation and venturing (Yiu & Lau, 2008). While innovation refers to introduction of new products and production processes for improved firm performance, the focus on venturing is the creation of new businesses.
Corporate entrepreneurship can be a necessary driver for economic growth, new sources of employment, and an important source for reducing economic disparity. Contextual factors and social mechanisms are very important for entrepreneurship (Antio, Kenney, Mustar, Siegel & Wright, 2014; van Burg & Romme, 2014). For instance, firms’ corporate entrepreneurship interplays with government institutions (Holmes, Zahra, Hoskisson, DeGhetto & Sutton, 2016). However, studies focusing on corporate entrepreneurship, specifically those look into the roles of innovation and new venture creation have been neglected in emerging economies nations. Although corporate entrepreneurship can make a big difference in the firm competitiveness of emerging markets (Bruton, Ahlstrom & Obloj, 2008; Guo, Jiang, & Yang, 2014), the literature is still lacking in exploring the dynamics of corporate entrepreneurship in these contexts (e.g., De Clercq, Danis & Dakhli, 2010; Kiss, Danis & Cavusgil, 2012).
Emerging markets are defined as low-income, rapid-growth countries where government policies encourage economic liberalization. Emerging markets includes 51 developing countries in Asia, Latin America, Africa, and the Middle East and 13 transition economies (Hoskisson, Eden, Lau, & Wright, 2000). Emerging markets offer not only market potential but also a competitive advantage of their own as they become increasingly integrated into the global economy. Moreover during the last decade, emerging markets have assumed a prominent position in the global economy and they account for more than half of world GDP (IMF). Owning to their weak legal environment and resource deficiency, emerging market firms have been found to access to all possible sources of competitive strength (Contractor, 2013) and exploit unique firm-specific advantages for corporate entrepreneurship activities (Jiang, Yang, Song, & Annavarjula, 2016; Kotabe, Jiang, & Murray, 2016; Luo & Rui, 2010). Therefore, the need to open up the issue of corporate entrepreneurship as a significant source of firm competitiveness in these economies will fill an important void not only in corporate entrepreneurship, but also in emerging market management literatures.
Overall, the guest editors hope that the NEJE special issue will contribute to establishing the groundwork for corporate entrepreneurship in emerging markets that potentially inform both management research and practice for the future.
Potential Research Questions
The following list of research questions is neither intended to be exhaustive nor complete.
- How does unique setting of emerging markets foster corporate entrepreneurship?
- What are the processes of corporate entrepreneurship of firms in emerging markets?
- How do technological forces drive the process of innovation in emerging markets?
- What are the implications of government involvement in emerging markets on corporate entrepreneurship? How can firms from emerging markets create and protect their propriety technologies while competing globally?
- How can firms from emerging markets benefit from the pursuit of corporate entrepreneurship?
- Do firm characteristics matter in the pursuit of its corporate entrepreneurship from emerging markets including but not limited to firm size, firm age, industry, geographical locations, and among others? Do differences in ownership (ex. State owned enterprises, family businesses, business groups) common to emerging markets matter in pursuit of corporate entrepreneurship?
- Does internationalization of firms from emerging markets stimulate corporate entrepreneurship? Why and how?
- Are multinational corporations operating in emerging markets in a more favorable position than local firms in the pursuit of corporate entrepreneurship?
- Compared with developed economies, does the nature of corporate entrepreneurship change in some way in emerging economies?
Questions about the special issue may be directed to any of the guest editors: Crystal Jiang (cjiang1@bryant.edu), Irem Demirkan (idemirkan@loyola.edu), and Qin Yang (yang@rmu.edu).
Notes for Prospective Authors:
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere.
All papers are refereed through a double-blind rigorous developmental peer review process.
All papers must be submitted online. Submission guidelines are available at http://digitalcommons.sacredheart.edu/neje/policies.html.
Important Dates:
Submission of manuscripts: September 15, 2017
Notification to authors: November 15, 2017
Final versions due: January 31, 2018
Publication date: Spring, 2018
References:
Autio, E., Kenney, M., Mustar, P., Siegel, D., & Wright, M. (2014). Entrepreneurial innovation: The importance of context, Research Policy, 43(7), 1097-1108.
Bruton, G., Ahlstrom, D., & Obloj, K. (2008). Entrepreneurship in emerging economics: where are we today and where should the research go in the future? Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 32(1), 1-14.
Contractor, F. (2013). “Punching above their weight”: The sources of competitive advantage for emerging market multinationals, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 8(4), 304-328.
De Clercq, D., Danis, W., & Dakhli, M. (2010). The moderating effect of institutional context on the relationship between associational activity and new business activity in emerging economies, International Business Review, 19(1), 85-101.
Guo, C., Jiang, C., Yang, Q. (2014). The development of organizational capabilities and corporate entrepreneurial processes: The case of Chinese automobile firms. Thunderbird International Business Review, 56(6): 483-500.
Holmes, R.M., Zahra, S.A., & Hoskisson, R.E. (2016). Two-way streets:Tthe role of institutions and technology policy in firms’ corporate entrepreneurship and political strategies, Academy of Management Perspectives, 30(3), 247-272.
Hoskisson, R.E., Eden, L., Lau, C.M., & Wright, M. (2000). Strategy in emerging economies. Academy of Management Journal, 43, 249-267.
Jiang,C., Yang, Q., Song, S., Annavarjula, M. (2016). Emerging market firms’ catch-up strategy in new product development: Cases from Chinese companies. International Journal of Business and Emerging Markets, 8(3): 324-339.
Kiss, A., Danis, W., & Cavusgil, S. (2012). International entrepreneurship research in emerging economies: A critical review and research agenda, Journal of Business Venturing, 27(2), 266-290.
Kotabe, M., Jiang, C., & Murray, J. (forthcoming). Examining the complementary effect of political networking capability with absorptive capacity on the innovative performance of emerging-market firms. Journal of Management (online available).
Luo, Y., & Rui, H. (2010). An ambidexterity perspective toward multinational enterprises from emerging economies. Academy of Management Perspectives, 23(4), 49-70.
Van Burg, E., & Romme, A. (2014). Creating the future together: Toward a framework for research synthesis in entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 38(2), 369-397.
Yiu, D., & Lau, C.M. (2008). Corporate entrepreneurship as resource capital configuration in emerging market firms. Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 32, 37-58.
Aims and Scope
Corporate failures resulting from financial instability or scandal have serious negative consequences for all stakeholders, including employees, business partners, investors, creditors, auditors, regulators, capital markets, and society at large. The impact is even more severe when these events happen concurrently with economic stress, such as during the recent financial crisis, or when they occur on an industrywide basis, such as with the diesel emission scandal. This can lead to widespread negative effects in a particular country, or even unfold contagion effects across countries and industries. Furthermore, the effects of these events are usually profound, and can range from long-lasting negative reputational damage to the collapse of entire industries.
Establishing a clear understanding of the drivers of corporate failure is key. Unfortunately, the task has been overly challenging for researchers, partly because of misconceptions about how exactly to define it. Corporate failure has generally been deemed the cessation of operations by a corporation due to involvement in court procedures, or voluntary actions such as bankruptcy. We believe in taking a somewhat broader view of corporate failure, whereby a firm may be considered a failure if it does not meet particular objectives set forth by shareholders, stakeholders, and management. This type of failure is often linked with various agency problems, ineffective corporate governance, and misplaced incentives.
Some recent scandals and corporate failures of large corporations have underscored the impact on the capital market and society as a whole. They have highlighted the need for regulators to rethink regulatory frameworks and enforcement, and for corporations to rework their organizational structures and business ethics. For example, the financial industry appears especially prone to scandals, even after the hard lessons of the financial crises. Several large global banks, including Deutsche Bank, Merrill Lynch, Santander, JPMorgan, and Commerzbank, were involved in one of the largest tax evasion trading schemes in history, referred to as "cum-ex," where bank clients falsely claimed multiple tax rebates on capital gains taxes. This resulted in treasury costs of about €55.2bn. Similarly, major banks were accused of committing fraud and collusion in their rate submissions to LIBOR, which is the underlying for many derivatives and contracts, including mortgages.
However, even the perceived saviors in the finance arena called “Fintech” have disrupted the industry itself by increasing the margin pressure on established banks. Margin pressure was cited as the primary reason behind Wells Fargo’s recent scandal, where the bank charged over 800,000 customers for unwanted auto insurance. And Fintechs also seem to have become victims of their own success and high growth. For example, shares of the financial service provider Wirecard dropped by 25% on January 30, 2019, after it was accused of using forged contracts in multiple suspicious transactions.
Another example is the rise of Initial Coin Offerings (ICOs). This less regulated form of crowdsales, created to raise funds through a blockchain by selling venture-related tokens or coins in exchange for legal tender or cryptocurrencies, garnered enormous attention during 2017 and 2018. ICOs ultimately raised tens of billions of dollars. Unfortunately, according to Statis Group, about 80% of the transactions completed in 2017 have been identified as scams.
All of these recent events have raised fundamental questions that will be addressed in this special issue. We welcome the submission of research papers on the following topics:
Insider Trading
- What problems are associated with current insider trading regulations, and how can we improve the regulatory framework (e.g., penalties for breaking the law) to ensure effective enforcement of current laws?
- What are the direct and indirect detection mechanisms for illegal insider trading? What is an optimal and reliable detection policy?
- What ethical and economic issues are associated with insider trading, and how do they interact?
Market Manipulation
- How do accounting scandals affect firm, market, and investor confidence? What are the most effective methods to restore investor confidence after a major corporate scandal?
- What aspects of corporate governance structures and executive compensation schemes encourage or prevent managers from engaging in fraudulent or deceptive conduct?
- How do disclosure-disciplining mechanisms in general, and shareholder litigation in particular, mitigate the problem of illegal or unethical insider behavior? What are the problems associated with the current laws, and what potential new regulations could improve the regulatory framework?
Tax Evasion
- How does a firm’s corporate governance structure impact illegal tax evasion behavior? And how do managerial incentives (versus shareholder value maximization) motivate tax avoidance behavior?
- What are the economic impacts of tax evasion on firm value, and how does it differ among countries with different legal and cultural environments?
- How do offshore intermediaries help firms evade taxes and violate regulations? What potential channels could improve regulation?
- What are the most effective detection mechanisms to uncover tax evasion? And how does detection probability affect their use by firms?
High Frequency Trading (HFT)
- What are the positive and negative impacts of HFT and algorithmic trading on the equity market?
- What problems are associated with the current and suggested regulations on HFT (e.g., a per trade tax, implementation of fees, restricting the number of cancelled orders, etc.)? How can we improve HFT regulations in order to block potential channels for financial misconduct?
- What are the potential ethical/legal problems arising from the use of sophisticated and high-speed computer programs for generating, routing, and executing orders? How does it affect investor confidence (and also fairness perception) in financial markets?
Initial Coin Offerings and Crypto Assets
- What legal issues are associated blockchain-based coins and tokens?
- What are the potential channels for digital currency scams, and how can the regulatory framework be improved to mitigate the problem?
- What are the benefits and costs associated with crypto assets?
- How should the Initial Coin Market be regulated?
Details of Paper Submission and Due Date
Interested contributors should submit preferably full papers (only in English), but extended abstracts (1,000 to 1,500 words) may also be considered if they show considerable promise no later than September 30, 2019. Papers are submitted to the attention of the Guest Editors Rebel Cole (coler@fau.edu), Sofia Johan (sjohan@fau.edu), and Denis Schweizer (denis.schweizer@concordia.ca) with the subject heading: "Corporate Failures: Declines, Collapses and Scandals."
Based on these drafts, the Guest Editors in consultation with the Scientific Committee Members will select manuscripts that are most likely to result in first-rate, high-impact publications. Authors will be notified on or before November 30, 2019 if their papers are accepted for presentation at the International Conference on Corporate Failures: Declines, Collapses and Scandals that will be held the College of Business, Florida Atlantic University (Boca Raton, U.S.) February 29, 2020. Following the conference, authors will be invited to revise their papers based on the Guest Editors’ comments and those from the discussants and conference participants. Authors will then be asked to submit their revised version through the journal portal (https://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal-of-corporate-finance/) by August 1, 2020, to be peer-reviewed by two anonymous referees based on Guest Editors recommendation. Journal of Corporate Finance General Editors will make final decisions. After the normal review process, we expect to publish the Special Issue during the second half of 2021.
The International Conference on Corporate Failures: Declines, Collapses and Scandals will be conjointly organized by John Molson School of Business (Concordia University, Montreal, Canada) and Florida Atlantic University (Boca Raton, U.S.)
OVERVIEW: The objective of this Special Issue is to address theoretical and empirical gaps in prior Finance and International Business (IB) studies associated with corporate governance problems and the effectiveness of governance solutions in the context of multi-national enterprises (MNEs). The last decade has witnessed significant growth in both policy and research devoted to the corporate governance of MNEs. While IB and corporate finance research continue to evaluate the challenges facing MNEs in foreign product and capital markets, scholars have yet to adequately address the underlying corporate governance challenges, especially when MNEs operate in different industry and formal regulatory and informal normative and cultural institutional contexts. We invite submissions with a focus on the complex interface between firm-level governance mechanisms and diverse institutional contexts, including legal, economic, cultural and political institutions, that have a profound impact on various organizational outcomes of MNEs, such as capital structure, global business strategy including, for example, cross-border M&As, non-market strategies, and performance. This Special Issue will attempt to extend our understanding of governance issues in MNEs to embrace corporate finance, strategy and knowledge dimensions together with contextual issues related to national and global institutions.
TOPICS: The Special Issue welcomes both theoretical and empirical papers. Topics for the Special Issue can include, but are not limited to:
- The role of institutions and national business systems in corporate governance of MNEs.
- Complementarities and substitution among governance mechanisms at the firm-, industry- and macro-levels.
- Ownership and control structures in MNEs and their impact on global strategy and performance.
- Institutional voids and governance in global business groups, especially in emerging markets.
- The family-centric governance model in MNEs and its organizational effects.
- The governance role of global financial institutions and institutional investors including private equity and sovereign wealth funds (SWFs).
- The role of political connections and business networks in governance of emerging market MNEs.
- Executive incentives and their performance outcomes in the global business context.
- The role of informal institutions in the governance of MNEs, including normative, cognitive and cultural aspects.
- The inter-relationships between governance, institutions and the capital raising strategies of MNEs.
- The influence of legal and regulatory institutions on the governance of MNEs.
- Institutions, governance, and non-market strategies of MNEs.
- The influence of institutions and industry context on the balance between monitoring, strategic and legitimacy roles of governance in the MNE context.
- The governance aspects of MNEs’ global networks. The headquarter-subsidiary governance relationships.
- The impact of competition in both product and capital markets on governance of MNEs.
- The interactive effects of institutions and the external governance of third party “gatekeepers” (e.g., stock market analysis, bank-underwriters etc.) on MNE outcomes.
PAPER SUBMISSION PROCEDURE: Authors are asked to submit a full article by February 27, 2017. All submissions must adhere to the Journal of Corporate Finance editorial guidelines (http://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal-of-corporate-finance/). The papers will be screened initially by Special Issue’s Editors. The short-listed papers will go through the JCF regular review process according to standard journal policy. The first round of reviews will be followed by a paper development conference that will be held at the University of Georgia campus in Atlanta, Georgia (USA) on August 2-3, 2017. Acceptance to the conference does not guarantee acceptance into the Special Issue.
DEADLINE: February 27, 2017
Notification of acceptance to Special Issue conference |
May 29, 2017 |
||
Special Issue conference |
Atlanta, Georgia USA, August 2-3, 2017 |
||
Special Issue resubmission deadline |
October 1, 2017 |
||
Notification of acceptance to Special Issue |
December 2017 |
There is growing interest among scholars concerning the managerial implications of corporate social responsibility (CSR) and related areas such as firm sustainability. Because of the rise in consumer, investor, supplier, and worker demands for CSR, managers have begun to ask important questions regarding how to manage these activities and how to allocate resources to them. All of this has led to a strong organizational and community demand for research on CSR-related topics such as environmental responsibility, sustainability, and the appropriate management of stakeholders (including employee relations issues). In addition, practitioners seek knowledge that can be used to better manage employees in organizational settings vis-à-vis CSR.
Despite increasing attention, CSR research is still in an embryonic stage, with critical issues regarding frameworks and empirical methods yet to be resolved. Furthermore, much of the research to date has largely involved a macro level of analysis, focusing on such issues as understanding the relationship between CSR and the financial performance of firms. To achieve a more complete perspective on CSR, however, theory and research will need to address more micro-level human resource management and organizational behavior issues. As such, the primary goal of this special issue is to serve as a catalyst for scholarly work on CSR that expands the domain from an exclusive focus on the macro level of analysis to an inclusive focus that incorporates issues more directly related to human resource management and organizational behavior.
Original empirical research, theory development, meta-analytic reviews, and narrative literature reviews are all potentially appropriate for inclusion in the special issue. A number of topic areas that are commonly addressed by Personnel Psychology are potentially relevant to CSR issues. Some research questions that might be addressed in this special issue include (but are not limited to):
- How is CSR related to leadership and the characteristics of top executives?
- Can human resource management or organizational behavior offer innovative approaches to the study or measurement of CSR?
- How are ethical decision-making processes related to CSR endeavors?
- What implications do traditional human resource systems (e.g., selection, training, performance management, work design) have for effective adoption or implementation of CSR?
- What is the relationship between organizational culture/climate and CSR?
- Can CSR have an effect on employee identity?
- Is it appropriate for job analysis, recruitment, selection, appraisal, reward, and training processes to take into account CSR, and if so, how might such processes be designed?
- How does CSR affect employee-based indicators of effectiveness, such as absenteeism or turnover rates?
- What is the relationship between CSR and international human resource management?
- What are the effects of programs whereby employees engage in community service activities while receiving compensation from their firms?
- Is there a relationship between diversity and CSR?
- What are the implications of CSR for strategic human resource management?
- How do CSR policies or practices relate to employee work attitudes or morale?
Submission Process and Timeline
To be considered for the special issue, manuscripts must be submitted no later than December 31, 2011, U.S. Eastern Standard Time. Papers may be submitted prior to this deadline as well. Submitted papers will undergo a double-blind review process and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a special issue editor. Final acceptance is contingent on the review team’s judgments of the paper’s contribution on four key dimensions:
- Theoretical contribution: Does the article offer new and innovative ideas and insights or meaningfully extend existing theory?
- Empirical contribution: Does the article offer new and unique findings and is the study design, data analysis, and results rigorous and appropriate in testing the hypotheses or research questions?
- Practical contribution: Does the article contribute to the improved management of people in organizations?
- Contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the directions provided in the 2010 Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association (6th ed.). Be sure to remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the review team.
Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at:
http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ppsych
One notable feature of corporate social responsibility (CSR) is its fundamentally contested and socially constructed nature. While CSR has been typically seen in terms of voluntary and firmspecific phenomena in prior research, what constitutes responsible or irresponsible corporate behaviour depends very much on the wider institutional setting and how it defines and regulates legitimate corporate action. Corporations are embedded in wider societal and political arrangements and participate in local, national, and transnational polities. While CSR research widely acknowledges the importance of stakeholder salience and institutional context in shaping CSR, the role of institutions and processes of institutional change for CSR has remained under-explored. A second, less studied, aspect of the comparative, and therefore collective, character of CSR concerns the importance of norms, conventions, and expectations of appropriate conduct that originate outside of firms’ organisational field. Such norms and standards of behaviour often relate to differences between countries in formal regulatory institutions or in normative or cultural conventions regarding business conduct.
Researchers have recently shown particular interest in the intersection of CSR and institutional theory (Aguilera & Jackson, 2003; Campbell, 2006; Matten & Moon, 2008). The study of institutions brings light to how responsible and irresponsible behaviour of corporations is framed by wider social and political frames. Apart from mapping out new conceptual space in the understanding of CSR, an institutional perspective beyond the immediate organisational fields of individual companies has recently generated interest through the developments in the world economy in the late 2000s. The so-called ‘financial crisis’ has not only surfaced novel forms of corporate irresponsibility but in fact has unmasked the pivotal role of private corporations for a host of issues hitherto seen as core expectations on governments. The institutional embeddedness and governance mechanisms with which business and societies are mutually interdependent have given rise to novel ways of thinking not only about CSR, but in fact about the role of the institution of the modern (global) corporation Crouch, 2004, 2009).
While institutions shape how firms respond to a variety of social and environmental issues, research has shown that companies are not passive actors in processes of institutional entrepreneurship and development, particularly in contexts characterised by weak, underdeveloped, or unenforced institutional arrangements. The presence of such ‘institutional voids’ presents particular opportunities and challenges for understanding and enacting corporate responsibilities.
Multinational companies face particular difficulties in developing and implementing approaches to the management of their social responsibilities when operating across diverse institutional environments.
The goals of this Special Issue are to (a) stimulate innovative research on the social and political embeddedness of CSR within a variety of local, sectoral, national, and international settings; (b) develop conceptual tools for understanding the intersection of CSR with regulatory institutions, as well as diverse institutions of economic governance or “varieties of capitalism”; and (c) advance our understanding of CSR as a process of governance, whereby responsible and irresponsible behaviour is socially defined, contested, and sanctioned by various stakeholders with different degrees of power and influence over corporate decision-making. We invite theoretical and empirical papers from a variety of traditions in thinking about and studying institutions. The following is a list of indicative, but not exhaustive, topic areas:
- CSR in cross-national comparison: institutional diversity and CSR; varieties of capitalism and corporate responsibility; implicit vs. explicit forms of CSR
- CSR and state regulation: the implications of liberal or interventionist forms of state intervention for defining the social space of CSR; framing of CSR in the context of different forms of statehood; CSR as a substitute for formal regulation; the role of CSR within “institutional voids” or areas of limited statehood
- Diffusion of CSR: understanding the spread and form of CSR initiatives; regulative, normative, and mimetic forms of isomorphism
- Standard setting: standard setting with regard to social, environmental or governance standards; use of social branding and labeling; regulation of social and environmental disclosure
- Stakeholder power and influence: local actor constellations and power dynamics; the role of unions in implementing CSR initiatives; forms of influence by NGOs, media, or other civil society actors
- Reputation as a governance mechanism: role of responsible and irresponsible behavior in shaping reputation;
- Historical perspectives on CSR: origins of CSR in different countries or sectors; long-term changes in the relationship between the state, civil society and corporations.
Submissions
Socio-Economic Review (SER) aims to encourage work on the relationship between society, economy, institutions and markets, moral commitments and the rational pursuit of self-interest. The journal seeks articles that focus on economic action in its social and historical context. In broad disciplinary terms, papers are drawn from sociology, political science, economics and the management and policy sciences. The journal encourages papers that seek to recombine disciplinary domains in response to practically relevant issues, while at the same time encouraging the
development of new theory.
Papers should be submitted by email to Gregory Jackson (email: gregory.jackson@fu-berlin.de). Please prepare manuscripts according to the guidelines shown at ser.oxfordjournals.org. The
maximum length of articles including references, notes and abstract is 10,000, and the minimum length is 6,000 words. Articles must be accompanied by an abstract of no more than 150 words. The main document has to be anonymous and should contain title, abstract, and strictly avoid selfreferences. Papers will be reviewed following the journal’s normal review process and criteria. Papers accepted into the revision stage will be presented and discussed with the Guest Editors at a workshop which will be organized in conjunction with the SASE annual conference on June 23-25, 2010 held at the Universidad Autónoma de Madrid, Spain (for details, see www.sase.org).
For further information please contact any of the Guest Editors for this Special Issue:
Steve Brammer: mnssjab@management.bath.ac.uk
Gregory Jackson: gregory.jackson@fu-berlin.de
Dirk Matten: dmatten@schulich.yorku.ca
Special issue call for papers from International Marketing Review
Guest Editors
Pervez N. Ghauri, King’s College London, United Kingdom
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea
Chang Hoon Oh, Simon Fraser University, Canada
Purpose and Research Questions
Despite the recent economic slump and subsequent fluctuations of development activities in some markets, the general trend of economic growth around the globe has continuously shown upward movement over the last three decades. Along with the improvement in the quality of life, consumers are paying more attention to ethical and philanthropic activities of Multinational Enterprises (MNEs). Due to this phenomenon, corporate social responsibility (CSR) research is growing in importance. Scholarly evidence increasingly confirms that CSR activities are beneficial for corporate success (e.g., Orlitzky et al., 2003; Waddock and Graves, 1997). We presume that this is probably because consistent CSR activities induce a corporation's image enhancement, which subsequently results in consumer's trust in its products (Turker, 2009). Taken together, there is a general consensus that CSR is often considered as a key factor significantly influencing market image and corporate success at home as well as in international markets.
Reflecting the trend discussed above, scholars and business practitioners perceive CSR as an integral part of marketing strategy. In addition, in order to maximize shareholder wealth by carrying out actions that increase business profit, various stakeholders also need to be convinced that the company is a good citizen in the society (Freeman, 1984). Meanwhile, it should be noted that among all the stakeholders, one important group that appears to be particularly influential for firms to initiate CSR activities is consumers (Du, Bhattacharya and Sen, 2010). Considering the globalization of the markets, companies need to create a positive image in all international markets. However, a thorough review of the literature indicates that most studies exploring CSR are concentrated only on Domestic Marketing (e.g., the impact of CSR on consumer loyalty in the local markets) (see e.g., Adams, Licht and Sagiv, 2011; Muller and Kräussl, 2011; Luo and Bhattacharya, 2006; Lai et al., 2010), which clearly indicates that CSR research tends to have an implied domestic marketing bias and very little research into CSR issues has considered CSR’s international marketing implications.
CSR activities can also be used as a valuable international marketing strategy. For instance, some studies in International Marketing suggest that CSR by international marketers will significantly improve their national and corporate brands in developing and emerging markets (Torres et al., 2012). As another example, the spread of good word-of-mouth about desirable business practices between international consumers is definitely crucial for multinational enterprises to achieve successful subsidiary operations in foreign markets (Luo and Bhattacharya, 2006). Despite these facts, it is hard to find scholarly attention paid to the discussions linking international marketers, their CSR behavior and its influence on success/failure in foreign markets. Many major questions thus remain unanswered with respect to the nature and consequences of CSR activity for MNEs’ marketing strategies.
The aim of this special issue is to bring together theoretical and empirical advancements connecting CSR and international marketing issues. We seek both theoretical and empirical papers that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
- Do international marketers' CSR practices function as a catalyst enhancing international competitiveness and organizational performance in foreign markets?
- Does good corporate image derived from CSR practices play a pivotal role in acquiring local market information and eventually improving competitiveness in international markets?
- What are the motivations for CSR practices in foreign markets? Is there any particular relationship between the level of foreign CSR and national brand enhancement? Is there a difference in motivations between the CSR activities of international marketers in developed and developing nations?
- How do international marketers adapt themselves to host country CSR practices and regulations? What factors influence this adaptation? Does this adaptation process increase the brand value of MNEs?
- Do international marketers adopt standardized CSR practices, or do they adapt their approaches to host countries? What are the potential benefits/drawbacks and other marketing related consequences?
- Are the marketing-related and ethically-related benefits of CSR activities universal across foreign markets?
- Do foreign firms’ advanced environmental and marketing capabilities affect their CSR practices and brand image?
- How do firms transform environmental capability in order to internationally link it to marketing advantages under the institutional void (i.e., in least developed countries)?
- How do international marketers manage their CSR best practices in different local market environments?
- What are international marketing strategies of social enterprises?
- Is the CSR activity of global marketing firms related to the development of country of origin perceptions, country image or consumer ethnocentrism?
- Do MNEs in developed and emerging markets differ with respect to their CSR activity, and if so, why? Does it matter in terms of marketing success?
- Multinational CSR activity: what is it and how should it be measured?
- What is the impact of CSR communications on employee citizenship behavior across different markets?
- Do consumers, employees and investors in different countries respond differently to CSR activities and communications?
Submission Instructions
The deadline for submissions is 31 March 2014. Submissions should be made via ScholarOne Manuscripts: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/imrev
All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at the International Marketing Review. The guest editors are seeking reviewers for this issue and are soliciting nominations and volunteers to participate as reviewers. Please contact the guest editors to volunteer or nominate a reviewer.
More Information
To obtain additional information, please contact the guest editors:
Pervez N. Ghauri, King’s College, London (pervez.ghauri@kcl.ac.uk)
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies (leedspark@hufs.ac.kr)
Chang Hoon Oh, Simon Fraser University (coh@sfu.ca)
References
Adams, R. B., Licht, A. N., and Sagiv, L. (2011), “Shareholders and stakeholders: how do directors decide?”, Strategic Management Journal, Vol. 32, pp. 1331-1355.
Du, S., Bhattacharya, C. B. and Sen, S. (2010). “Maximizing business returns to corporate social responsibility (CSR): The role of CSR communication”, International Journal of Management Reviews, Vol. 12 No. 1, pp. 8-19.
Freeman, R. E. (1984), Strategic Management: A stakeholder approach. Boston, MA: Pitman.
Lai, C. S., Chiu, C. J., Yang, C. F., and Pai, D. C. (2010), “The effects of corporate social responsibility on brand performance: the mediating effect of industrial brand equity and corporate reputation”, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 95, pp. 457-469.
Luo, X., and Bhattacharya, B. (2006), “Corporate social responsibility, customer satisfaction, and market value”, Journal of Marketing, Vol. 70, pp. 1-18.
Muller, A., and Kräussl, R. (2011), “Doing good deeds in times of need: a strategic perspective on corporate disaster donations”, Strategic Management Journal, Vol. 32, pp. 911-929.
O’Shaughnessy, K. C., Gedajlovic, E. and Reinmoeller, P. (2007), “The influence of firm, industry and network on the corporate social performance of Japanese firms”, Asia Pacific Journal of Management, Vol. 24, pp. 283-303.
Orlitzky, M., Schmidt, F., and Rynes, S. (2003). “Corporate Social and Financial Performance: A Meta-Analysis”, Organization Studies, Vol. 24, pp. 403–441.
Torres, A., Bijmolt, T. H. A., Tribo, J. A., and Verhoef, P. (2012), “Generating global brand equity through corporate social responsibility to key stakeholders”, International Journal of Research in Marketing, Vol. 29, pp. 13-24.
Turker, D. (2009), “How corporate social responsibility influences organizational commitment”, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 89, pp. 189-204.
Udayasankar, K. (2008), “Corporate social responsibility and firm size”, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 83, pp. 167-175.
Waddock, S. A., and Graves, S. B: (1997). “The Corporate Social Performance – Financial Performance Link”, Strategic Management Journal, Vol. 18 No. 4, pp. 303–320.
Corporate social responsibility (CSR) is the subject of growing attention from firms, governments and regulators, stakeholder groups, and the media. Based on various responsibility criteria, a rapidly increasing number of institutes, investment funds, publications and online resources are calling on corporations to alter their business practices. In response to the increased attention given to corporations’ impact on society and the environment, a 2017 KPMG survey finds substantial growth in global CSR reporting rates (75% in 2017 compared to 64% in 2011 and 18% in 2002) and in the number of firms that include CSR information in their annual reports (60% in 2017 compared to 56% in 2015). Moreover, although the survey reveals that emerging markets from Africa and the Middle East, Eastern Europe, and Latin America are lagging behind North America and Western Europe, two emerging markets—Mexico and Taiwan—experienced the highest growth in CSR reporting relative to 2015 and four—India, Malaysia, South Africa, and Mexico—are among countries with the highest CSR reporting. This growth reflects regulatory changes and new requirements in several countries, as well as greater market awareness and pressure from investors (domestic and foreign) and consumers.
Against this backdrop of increased corporate engagement in social activities worldwide and given the substantial prior evidence in the context of developed countries, this special issue of Emerging Markets Review aims to promote high-quality, theoretical and empirical research that develops a better understanding the determinants and consequences of CSR practices of firms (financial and nonfinancial) and the role CSR plays in emerging financial markets. In particular, we are interested in innovative papers that exploit unique sources of CSR data and apply rigorous empirical methods.
The following are some selected examples of possible research topics:
CSR and corporate governance. How does corporate governance affect CSR behavior? Are better-governed firms more socially responsible? Is CSR an outcome of agency conflicts?
- Institutional ownership and institutional owner identity (Long-term vs short-term horizons; independent vs. non-independent)
- Board characteristics: size, independence, heterogeneity (e.g., gender diversity), busyness, interlocks, etc.
- CEO characteristics: tenure, ownership, power, political ideology, compensation, etc.
- Ownership concentration and blockholder identity (family, state, etc.)
- Does privatization in emerging markets affect CSR?
- Foreign ownership (identity and country of origin of foreign owners) and cross-listing
CSR, formal and informal institutions.
- What is the impact of informal institutions, such as culture and trust on CSR?
- How does the institutional, political and economic environments in emerging markets affect CSR and its disclosure?
Do socially responsible firms behave differently than socially irresponsible firms in emerging markets?
- Investment efficiency
- Dividends
- Restructuring
- Risk-taking
- Innovation
CSR and corporate performance.
- Is there a CSR valuation premium?
- Do socially responsible firms perform better than socially irresponsible firms?
- Do CSR and corporate governance interact to shape corporate performance and corporate valuations?
- Do CSR and factors related to the institutional, political and economic environments interact to shape corporate performance and corporate valuations?
- What is the value of CSR during crisis periods?
- How different are socially responsible firms in emerging markets compared to those in more developed countries?
CSR and access to financing.
- Access to finance (equity and debt issues, trade credit)
- Financing costs and credit ratings
- Stock liquidity
- Investor base
CSR, financial intermediaries and financial intermediary development.
- What is the effect of financial market development on CSR?
- Is CSR more prevalent in bank-based or market-based systems?
Methodology: Use traditional and innovative methodologies to address the endogeneity of CSR.
- Regression discontinuity design
- Difference-in-difference
- Instrumental variables
- Matching models (Propensity score matching, coarsened exact matching)
Paper Submissions
The deadline for submitting papers is December 31, 2018. Papers should be submitted by e-mail to csr_emr@aus.edu and copied to nboubakri@aus.edu. All submissions must be in English. Submissions should include two files: (1) full version of the paper with contact information for all authors, and (2) an anonymous version with title and abstract (no identification of the authors). PDF files are preferred, but word files are also accepted.
All submissions will go through a double reviewing process. First, the guest editors will evaluate the submissions. The outcome of the first-stage review process will be communicated to authors by January 31, 2019. Acceptable papers will be sent out for review. The outcome of the second-stage review process will be communicated to authors by March 31, 2019. Papers invited for further consideration for the special issue will have to go through the standard refereeing process of Emerging Markets Review, including addressing the reviewers’ and guest editors comments. Further instructions will be provided to the authors of the papers considered for publication in the special issue. In cooperation with the Managing Editor, we expect the special issue to be published at the end of 2019 or early 2020.
The COVID-19 pandemic has caused a contraction in demand for several products globally due to a decrease in consumption and investments. In particular, Caribbean countries are experiencing a disproportionate decline in export-related business, rising unemployment levels, poverty, and inequality. The purpose of this special issue is to analyze the newly-emerged business dynamics, trends, and patterns in the Caribbean region, within the context of intra and extra-regional relationships that would allow decision-makers to design and implement post-pandemic business strategies.
We invite theoretically sound and empirically-tested papers related to COVID-19 and businesses in the Caribbean region (defined as the Caribbean islands and continental countries with Caribbean coasts and islands).
JABEM mission, scope and submission guidelines are available at https://www.abem.ca/journal
All inquires and submission should be sent to Dr. Luis Camacho at luis.camacho@esc.edu with a copy to the guest co-editors:
- Dr. Moisés Alejandro Banks Peña, Universidad APEC, Dominican Republic (mbanks@adm.unapec.edu.do)
- Dr. Luis Baquero Rosas, Pontificia Universidad Catolica de Puerto Rico, Puerto Rico (lbaquero@pucpr.edu)
- Dr. Meena Rambocas, The University of the West Indies, Trinidad and Tobago (Meena.Rambocas@sta.uwi.edu)
Important dates
Submission deadline: June 15, 2021
First reviews: Aug 15, 2021
Second reviews: Oct 1, 2021
Camera-ready copy: Oct 30, 2021
Publication: Jan 2022
The COVID-19 outbreak has a large impact on business in operation all around the world. It is expected that this outbreak will have a much larger impact on the world economy than the epidemic of SARS in 2003 or arguably even than the global financial crisis in 2008. While the healthcare systems in the world scramble to combat this emergency, businesses, such as tourism, hospitality, airline, and restaurant, are hit hard with immediate and probably long lasting impact. Many other businesses, particularly manufacturing, struggle to get back to their normal operation due to the strict cordoning-off policies implemented in many countries.
Given the urgency and the scale of the impact by COVID-19 outbreak on China and the world, Frontiers of Business Research in China (FBR) calls for business scholars to contribute to the society by sharing their intelligence and research on related issues.
Examples of topics suitable for this special call may include, but are not limited to:
- Global value chain restructuring/resilience
- The outbreak and firm’s digitalization transformation
- The impacts of the outbreak upon firms, especially SMEs
- Firm's business strategies during and after the outbreak
- Social entrepreneurship in responding to the outbreak
- How to facilitate virtual work/learning from home
- Employees' risk perception and wellbeing during the outbreak
- How the company can support employees during the critical time
- How to help employees to recover from traumatic experience
FBR accepts studies using various methodologies including survey research, archival data analysis, experimental studies, case studies, qualitative methods, and other creative methods. We will do our best to expedite the peer review process and ensure timely publications. Accordingly, the time window for revision and resubmission may be shortened. To promote global communication, FBR sponsors Open Access and all published papers can be downloaded from our SpringerOpen website for free shortly after editorial acceptance.
The submission deadline is May 31, 2020. However, any new submission will be processed with double-blind peer review immediately. To submit a paper, please go to FBR’s SpringerOpen website: https://fbr.springeropen.com. When submit your paper, please select “COVID-19 and Business” under “Thematic Series” to be included in this special call.
ABOUT THE EDITORS
Zhaoli Song (bizszl@nus.edu.sg) is an Associate Professor of at School of Business, National University of Singapore. Prof. Song obtained his Ph.D. at University of Minnesota. His research interests include behavior genetics, leadership, social interactions, new comer socialization, job search and unemployment experience, and work-family boundary. He was the Associate Editor of Applied Psychology: An International Review during 2014-2017, and serves on the editorial board of Journal of Organizational Behavior. His papers have been published in journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Journal of Applied Psychology, and Journal of Business Venturing.
Wu Liu (wu.liu@polyu.edu.hk) is a Professor and Head of Department at School of Business, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University. Prof. Liu obtained his Ph.D. at Vanderbilt University. His current passion of research centers on (1) leader-member and team dynamics on voice behavior, and (2) under which social conditions that cross-cultural differences in conflict resolutions may appear or disappear. His works have appeared in journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Journal of Applied Psychology, and Journal Organizational Behavior. Professor Liu serves on the editorial board of Management and Organization Review.
Ziliang Deng (dengziliang@rmbs.ruc.edu.cn) is a Professor of International Business and Associate Dean (Research) at Renmin Business School, Renmin University of China. Prof. Deng obtained his PhD from the University of Nottingham. His research interest is international business in emerging markets (China in particular) and institutional environment, and his recent papers appeared in Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Business Ethics, among others. He is Executive Editor-in-Chief of Frontiers of Business Research in China, an editor of Journal of International Management and Asia Pacific Journal of Management.
ABOUT FBR
Created in 2007, FBR (ISSN 1673-7326; e-ISSN 1673-7431; CN11-5746/F) is a double-blind refereed quarterly journal in business research jointly managed by Renmin Business School, Renmin University of China, SpringerOpen, and Higher Education Press. FBR encourages interdisciplinary studies and interactions between Chinese and international researchers in the broad area of business administration. FBR is abstracted and indexed in major international databases including EconLit, ESCI, INSPEC, SCOPUS, and ProQuest. In 2019, FBR is awarded “The Highest International Impact Academic Journal of China (Humanities and Social Sciences)”.
Special Issue Editors:
- Gary Knight (Willamette University, USA, gknight@willamette.edu)
- Peter Liesch (University of Queensland, Australia, p.liesch@uq.edu.au)
- Lianxi Zhou (Brock University, Canada, lzhou@brocku.ca)
- Rebecca Reuber (University of Toronto, Canada, reuber@rotman.utoronto.ca)
Deadline for submission: November 16, 2015
Tentative publication date: Spring 2017
Introduction
The goal of this special issue of JIBS is to encourage research that deepens knowledge of the creation and capture of entrepreneurial opportunities across national borders by diverse organizational types such as international new ventures (INVs), born global firms, micro-multinationals, corporate entrepreneurs, family businesses, and social and non-profit ventures (e.g., Arregle, Naldi, Nordqvist & Hitt, 2012; Coviello & Jones, 2004; Knight & Cavusgil, 2004; Oviatt & McDougall, 1994; McDougall & Oviatt, 2000; Zahra, 2005; Zahra & George, 2002; Zahra, Newey & Li, 2014).
International entrepreneurship has been defined as “the discovery, enactment, evaluation, and exploitation of opportunities – across national borders – to create future goods and services” (Oviatt & McDougall, 2005: 7). Recent commentaries on the field (e.g. Cavusgil & Knight, 2015; Coviello, 2015; Jones, Coviello & Tang, 2011; Keupp & Gassmann, 2009; Mathews & Zander, 2007; Zander, McDougall-Covin & Rose, 2015) have urged scholars to move beyond current understandings of early and accelerated internationalization through richer theoretical and empirical investigations of international entrepreneurship. There has long been consensus that the pursuit of opportunity is the core of entrepreneurship (e.g. Knight, 1921; Schumpeter, 1939; Shane & Venkataraman, 2000), whether opportunities are discovered or created (Alvarez, Barney & Anderson, 2013). Scholars have identified important processes in this pursuit, including processes related to cognition (e.g. Grégoire, Barr & Shepherd, 2010), effectuation (e.g. Sarasvathy, 2001), and bricolage (e.g. Baker & Nelson, 2005; Garud & Karnoe, 2003), and an opportunity-focused perspective is being extended to international entrepreneurship (e.g. Bingham, 2009; Jones & Casulli, 2014; Mainela, Puhakka & Servais, 2014; Sarasvathy, Kumar, York & Bhagavatula, 2014).
Scholarship that integrates perspectives from entrepreneurship and international business, or spans disciplinary boundaries, can create new perspectives or frameworks that improve our understanding of the creation and capture of opportunities across national borders. We invite submissions that advance international business theory in this domain and, ideally, that also contribute to the entrepreneurship literature.
Possible Research Topics
The proposed special issue focuses on the creation and capture of entrepreneurial opportunities across national borders. We seek papers that advance theoretical perspectives and provide valuable insights and new knowledge to enrich international entrepreneurship scholarship, and also that guide practitioners and policy-makers. We invite submissions from scholars who, individually or collectively, draw on varied theoretical perspectives, adopt diverse empirical approaches, and investigate at multiple levels of analysis. We particularly encourage submissions that provide conceptual clarity of international entrepreneurship as pursued by different types of market actors, and those that provide new empirical contributions. Well-conceived submissions antithetical to this domain are welcome too, provided they make a meaningful contribution to the international business field more generally. Examples of appropriate topics and research questions include, but are not limited to, the following:
- How can perspectives from entrepreneurship and international business be integrated to create new perspectives or frameworks to enrich an opportunity-based understanding of international entrepreneurship, and unify and improve heterogeneous constructs and operational definitions?
- What processes are involved in the creation and capture of entrepreneurial opportunities across national borders? What accounts for variance in these processes and their outcomes? What is the role in such processes of key IB concepts such as psychic distance, risk, uncertainty, or transnational communities?
- How does the pursuit of international opportunities vary across categories of individuals? What new concepts, relationships or processes are important in understanding the cognitions, behaviors and/or outcomes associated with the pursuit of international opportunities by focal categories of entrepreneurs (for example, immigrant entrepreneurs, ethnic entrepreneurs, transnational entrepreneurs or women entrepreneurs)?
- How does the pursuit of international opportunities vary across categories of organizations? What new concepts, relationships or processes are important in understanding the cognitions, behaviors and/or outcomes associated with the pursuit of international opportunities by focal categories of organizations (for example startups, corporations, SMEs, family businesses, social ventures, not-for-profit ventures, governmental agencies, or non-governmental organizations)?
- How are organizations managing the challenges of early and/or accelerated internationalization in pursuing international opportunities? How do such firms manage costs, uncertainty and risks in such environments? How do they overcome inherent liabilities to be perceived as legitimate and reputable? What are their subsequent trajectories? We particularly welcome research in this area on firms in emerging, rapid-growth and less-developed economies, and from disciplines that have been under-represented to-date such as human resource management, finance, accounting, operations and policy studies.
- How do advanced technologies and digitization provide new and enhanced prospects to create and capture international opportunities? How does the sociomateriality of technologies impact interactions among market actors, and, for example, overcome the challenges of lack of a local presence? What are trade-offs between scale and adaptation?
- How do cultures and institutions, such as governments, regulations, and industries, affect market and nonmarket approaches to the pursuit of international opportunities, and, in turn, how do entrepreneurial activities affect cultural and institutional contexts? What institutional policies and practices impact, or are impacted by, the pursuit of international opportunities? How does entrepreneurial internationalization vary across different cultural and institutional environments?
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between November 2, 2015, and November 16, 2015, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Alvarez, S.A., Barney, J.B., & Anderson, P. 2013. Forming and exploiting opportunities: The implications of discovery and creation processes for entrepreneurial and organizational research. Organization Science, 24(1): 301-317.
Arregle, J-L., Naldi, L., Nordqvist, M., & Hitt, M.A. 2012. Internationalization of family-controlled firms: A study of the effects of external involvement in governance. Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 36(6): 1115-1143.
Baker, T., & Nelson, R. 2005. Creating something from nothing: Resource construction through entrepreneurial bricolage. Administrative Science Quarterly, 50(3): 329-366.
Bingham, C. 2009. Oscillating improvisation: How entrepreneurial firms create success in foreign market entries over time. Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, 3(4): 321-345.
Cavusgil, S.T., & Knight, G. 2015. The born global firm: An entrepreneurial and capabilities perspective on early and rapid internationalization. Journal of International Business Studies, 46(1): 3-16.
Coviello, N. 2015. Re-thinking research on born globals. Journal of International Business Studies, 46(1): 17-26.
Coviello, N., & Jones, M. 2004. Methodological issues in international entrepreneurship research. Journal of Business Venturing, 19(4): 485–508.
Garud, R., & Karnoe, P. 2003. Bricolage versus breakthrough: Distributed and embedded agency in technology entrepreneurship. Research Policy, 32: 277-300.
Grégoire, D.A., Barr, P.S., & Shepherd, D.A. 2010. Cognitive process of opportunity recognition: The role of structural alignment. Organization Science, 21(2): 413-431.
Jones, M.V., & Casulli, L. 2014. International entrepreneurship: Exploring the logic and utility of individual experience through comparative reasoning approaches. Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 38(1): 45-69.
Jones, M. V., Coviello, N., & Tang, Y. K. 2011. International entrepreneurship research (1989-2009): A domain ontology and thematic analysis. Journal of Business Venturing, 26(6): 632-659.
Keupp, M., & Gassmann, O. 2009. The past and the future of international entrepreneurship: A review and suggestions for developing the field. Journal of Management, 35(5): 600-633.
Knight, G., & Cavusgil, S.T. 2004. Innovation, organizational capabilities, and the born global firm. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(2): 124-141.
Knight, F.H. 1921. Risk, Uncertainty and Profit. New York: Houghton Mifflin.
Mainela, T., Puhakka, V., & Servais, P. 2014. The concept of international opportunity in international entrepreneurship: A review and research agenda. International Journal of Management Reviews 16(1): 105-129.
Mathews, J., & Zander, I. 2007. The international entrepreneurial dynamics of accelerated internationalization. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(3): 387-403.
McDougall, P., & Oviatt, B. 2000. International entrepreneurship: The intersection of two research paths. Academy of Management Journal, 43(5): 902–906.
Oviatt, B., & McDougall P. 1994. Toward a theory of international new ventures. Journal of International Business Studies, 25(1): 45–64.
Oviatt, B. & McDougall, P. 2005. The internationalization of entrepreneurship. Journal of International Business Studies, 36(1): 2-8.
Sarasvathy, S.D. 2001. Causation and effectuation: Toward a theoretical shift from economic inevitability to entrepreneurial contingency. Academy of Management Review, 26(2): 243-263.
Sarasvathy, S., Kumar, K., York, J.G., & Bhagavatula, S. 2014. An effectual approach to international entrepreneurship: Overlaps, challenges, and provocative possibilities. Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 38(1): 71-93.
Schumpeter, J.A. 1939. Business cycles: A Theoretical, Historical, and Statistical Analysis of the Capitalist Process. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Shane, S., & Venkataraman, S. 2000. The promise of entrepreneurship as a field of research. Academy of Management Review, 25(1): 217-226.
Zahra, S. 2005. A theory of international new ventures: A decade of research. Journal of International Business Studies, 36(1): 20–28.
Zahra, S., & George, G. 2002. International entrepreneurship: The current status of the field and future research agenda. In M. Hitt, R. Ireland, M. Camp, & D. Sexton (Eds.) Strategic leadership: Creating a new mindset: 255–288. London: Blackwell.
Zahra, S., Newey, L., & Li, Y. 2014. On the frontiers: The implications of social entrepreneurship for international entrepreneurship. Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 38(1): 137-158.
Zander, I., McDougall-Covin, P., & Rose, E.L. 2015. Born globals and international business: Evolution of a field of research. Journal of International Business Studies, 46(1): 27-35.
Special Issue Editors
Gary Knight is the Helen Jackson Chair in International Management at Willamette University in Salem and Portland, Oregon, USA, and Visiting Professor at the University of Southern Denmark. He is Chair of the Western United States Chapter of the Academy of International Business. He has published widely on born globals and international entrepreneurship, including several articles in JIBS. His 2004 co-authored article on born globals won the 2014 JIBS Decade Award. Co-authored books include Born Global Firms: A New International Enterprise. He is currently an editor of the International Business book collection at Business Expert Press. He testified on firm internationalization before the US House of Representatives Small Business Committee. He was inaugural Chair of the “SMEs, Entrepreneurship, and Born Global” track of the Annual Meeting of the Academy of International Business. His co-authored textbook with S. Tamer Cavusgil and John Riesenberger, International Business: Strategy, Management, and the New Realities, 3rd Ed, is published by Pearson Prentice-Hall. His PhD in international business is from Michigan State University. Prior to academia, he was the export manager of an internationalizing SME.
Peter Liesch is Professor of International Business in the UQ Business School at The University of Queensland, Australia. He has published extensively on small firm internationalization and born global firms. He co-edited a special issue on early internationalization at the Journal of World Business, and jointly won an Australia Research Council Grant on born globals. Funded by the Australia Business Foundation, he jointly produced Born to be Global: A Closer Look at the International Venturing of Australian Born Global Firms. His publications have appeared in the Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Journal of World Business, and others. Currently Associate Editor, Strategy and International Business with the Australian Journal of Management, he was also Senior Editor of the Journal of World Business. He served as Vice-President (Administration) of the Academy of International Business and Vice-President of the Australia and New Zealand International Business Academy. A Fellow of the Australian Institute of Management and a Professional Member of the Economics Society of Australian (Qld) Inc., his Ph.D. is from the School of Economics at The University of Queensland.
Lianxi Zhou is Professor of Marketing and International Business in the Goodman School of Business (GSB) at Brock University, Canada. He is also a Visiting Professor at the Nottingham University Business School (NUBS) China, and has served as Chair Professor in the School of Management and Economics at Shaoxing University and Honorary Professor in the MBA School of Management Zhejiang Gongshang University, China. Previously he taught at the University of Guelph, Canada and Lingnan University in Hong Kong. His recent research on international entrepreneurship has focused on born globals and international new ventures. He brings perspectives from international marketing, entrepreneurship, and IB theories to the study of international entrepreneurship. He has published extensively in refereed journals, including Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Business Venturing, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, International Business Review, Journal of International Marketing, Journal of World Business, and others. Also, he has taught for MBA and EMBA programs in a number of leading universities across Canada, Hong Kong, and the Chinese Mainland. He is currently in the Editorial Board for the Journal of International Marketing. He received his PhD in Marketing from Concordia University in Montreal, Canada.
Rebecca Reuber is Professor of Strategic Management at the University of Toronto’s Rotman School of Management, and Area Editor for International Entrepreneurship at JIBS. Her recent IE research has focused on the internationalization of internet-based new ventures. She sits on the editorial boards of Journal of Business Venturing and Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, and recently completed three terms as Associate Editor at Family Business Review. She has held visiting positions at the University of Adelaide, the University of Glasgow, the University of Victoria, The Australian National University, and Dartmouth College. She has also conducted policy-oriented research in the international entrepreneurship area, in collaboration with the Conference Board of Canada, Industry Canada, the Department of Foreign Affairs & International Trade Canada, and the Commonwealth Secretariat.
Editors
- Jasmin Mahadevan, Pforzheim University, Germany (corresponding editor), jasmin.mahadevan@hs-pforzheim.de
- Henriett Primecz, Corvinus University of Budapest, Hungary
- Laurence Romani, Stockholm School of Economics, Sweden
Publisher: Routledge (2019)
Type of book: casebook
Condensed case chapter (2,000 words) submission: February 15th, 2018
A casebook about intersectionality in Cross-Cultural Management
With the help of rich case studies, we wish to introduce the notion of ‘intersectionality’ to facilitate a critical Cross-Cultural Management (CCM). Intersectionality refers to the understanding that individuals are not only different, but related, and that multiple identity markers need to be considered when trying to comprehend individual life-experiences. Related to CCM, this means to consider ‘culture’ on multiple levels (e.g. national, organizational, professional, et cetera), to acknowledge interrelated processes of social identity (e.g. identification, recognition and sense of belonging) and to pay attention to power-effects as being intertwined with CCM contexts, frameworks and actors (e.g. majority-minority relations, the impact of diversity markers such as gender, race, religion, age, sexual orientation etc., and social class, dominant discourses, dynamics of organizational change etc.).
What we mean by an intersectional approach to culture
An intersectional approach to culture requires us to challenge simple and singular explanations of cultural difference, to investigate the divergent meanings of perceived difference, and to challenge the labels to which perceived difference is attached. For instance, it might be that organizational actors ascribe difficulties in working together to national culture, but a closer investigation might reveal that these perceptions are actually rooted in organizational inequalities of power between headquarters and subsidiary and learned discourses such as ‘modern West’ versus ‘undeveloped non-West’.
Intersectionality therefore also means to acknowledge that every life-experience has a standpoint, and that we are not necessarily able to take up or even approximate the position of others. At the same time, intersectionality invites us to consider how also we, as CCM researchers and actors, are different and related to those with whom we interact. This means that we need to explicate our own standpoints from which we approach CCM and to reflect upon why and how ‘this makes sense to us’. For example, we must assume that the researcher’s cultural identifications will shape their research approach and the interpretations that ‘make sense’ to them, and that the researcher’s embodied, performed or assumed cultural identity will inform how the researcher is perceived by those studied.
References
Acker, J. (2012) ‘Gendered organizations and intersectionality: problems and possibilities’, Equality, Diversity and Inclusion: An International Journal, 31(3): 214-224.
Boogard, B. and Roggeband, C. (2010), ‘Paradoxes of intersectionality’, Organization, 17(1): 53-75.
Kerner, I. (2012). “Questions of intersectionality: Reflections on the current debate in German gender studies, European Journal of Women's Studies, Vol. 19, No. 2, pp. 203-218.
McCall, L. (2005). “The complexity of intersectionality”, Signs, Chicago Journals, Vol. 30, No 3, pp. 1771-1800.
Mahadevan, J. (2017), A Very Short, Fairly Interesting and Reasonably Cheap Book about Cross-Cultural Management. London: Sage (in particular, chapters 4 and 5).
Prasad, A. (2006), ‘The jewel in the crown: Postcolonial theory and workplace diversity’. In: Konrad, A.M., Prasad, P. and Pringle, J.K. (eds.), Handbook of Workplace Diversity, London: Sage, 1-21.
Rahman, M. (2017), ‘Islamophobia, the impossible Muslim, and the reflexive potential of intersectionality’. In J. Mahadevan and C.-H. Mayer (eds), Muslim Minorities, Workplace Diversity and Reflexive HRM. London: Taylor and Francis, 35-45.
Ridgeway, C.L. (2009), ‘Framed before we know it: How gender shapes social relations’, Gender & Society, 23(2): 145-60.
Wells, C.C., Gill, R., McDonald, J. (2015).“Us foreigners”: intersectionality in a scientific organization", Equality, Diversity and Inclusion: An International Journal, Vol. 34, No. 6, pp. 539 – 553.
Zanoni, P., Janssens, M., Benschop, Y. and Nkomo, S. (2010), ‘Editorial: Unpacking diversity, grasping inequality: Rethinking difference through critical perspectives’. Organization, 17, 9-29.
Your case chapter
We invite case chapters that highlight selected aspects of an intersectional approach to culture. Cases should be empirical, and can be based in any of the research paradigms as long as they offer ‘thick’ or ‘rich’ insights into single contexts or individuals. They should challenge common-place cultural explanations and offer multiple perspectives, involving power-sensitivity and researcher reflexivity. Learning should flow from the empirical material, not from theory, and should then be put into perspective using selected aspects of an intersectional approach to culture. Each case should focus on a selected few points and conclude with recommendations to practitioners.
Regardless of the focus point of your contribution: Ultimately, we would like to help answer the following questions: If we believe that mainstream (comparative) CCM with its focus on national cultural differences is insufficient – what else do we have to offer? How can CCM not only focus on difference but also show how we are related? What are the cases that highlight how exactly individuals (including the researcher) give divergent and intersecting meaning to perceived difference? How can we better include power in our CCM analyses and conceptualizations? We will be pleased to discuss any ideas for chapters. Please direct all your questions to jasmin.mahadevan@hs-pforzheim.de.
Submission schedule
- Inform the Editor of your intention to submit a chapter no later than 10 December 2017.
For doing so, send an e-mail to jasmin.mahadevan@hs-pforzheim.de, using the subject heading “critical CCM casebook guidelines”. You will receive informative guidelines and sample chapters.
- Condensed case chapter proposal due 15 February 2018
- Editorial decision (accept or reject) and feedback to authors who are invited to develop the full chapter 31 March 2018
- Full chapter (max 5,000 words, including references) due 01 September 2018
Send your submission to
jasmin.mahadevan@hs-pforzheim.de,
using the subject heading “critical CCM casebook submission”.
All submissions will undergo peer-review.
Topics for the chapters may include, but are not limited to:
- language as linked to cultural hegemony (the power-effects which are linked to language fluency, English as a lingua franca, values attached to certain languages et cetera)
- diversity, identifications and requirements for cultural belonging (how dominant identity requirements construct disadvantaged individuals/groups, and how these individuals/groups are perceived)
- cultural explanations, neo-colonialism and organizational power (how organizational conflicts are explained with cultural differences but are rooted in structural hierarchy, history and dominant perceptions on what constitutes ‘good’ management which advantages some over others)
- challenging dominant viewpoints (how CCM might look like from previously neglected standpoints and what needs to be considered in order to challenge presumed ‘CCM truths’ such as: what does it ‘mean’ to be Muslim?, which are the regions of the world to be considered by CCM?, what defines ‘difference’ in CCM? and so on). This also includes a critique of dominant IM or CCM ‘lenses’ through which phenomena such as expatriation, internationalization et cetera are perceived and researched upon. Moreover, it might refer to neglected facets of culture, for instance by highlighting the relevance of phenomenology, embodiment, habitus, tacit culture, et cetera.
For some years now, fair trade has been typically spoken and written about in solely positive terms, as a ‘trading partnership based on dialogue, transparency and respect, which seeks greater equity in international trade. It contributes to sustainable development by offering better trading conditions to, and securing the rights of, marginalized producers and workers – especially in the South’. (FINE, 2001 in Moore, 2004: 73). However, the current global economic recession has brought with it the need to reflect upon the way in which trade activities are carried out across the world, including those practices associated with fair trade. For example, questions have been asked whether, indeed, the ‘Fair Trade Project’ is entirely beneficial to all involved parties and whether, in the present economic climate, we can actually afford to engage in fair trade.
Responding to Goodman (2004: 910), who sees a need for fair trade to continue to ‘become more politically and economically threatening’ by opening up ‘the definition of “fairness” contra its economic logic to facilitate a broader constituency from which to construct a less privileged, more sustainable, and more just sense of development….plantation workers, growers with lower quality products, and coffee servers can and should become a moral and politicized goal for fair trade…a re-centering of Northern identities around notions of global citizenship rather than those of a one dimensional consumer’, we seek contributions to the critical exploration of the practices and discourses of fair trade.
Contributions to the special issue may take theoretical or empirical approaches to the nature, dysfunctions and/or possibilities of fair trade. They might, for example, include discussions of:
* How fair is fair trade?
* Ethics of consumption and fair trade
* Marketing and fair trade
* Power and identity issues in fair trade
* Mainstreaming of fair trade
* Environmental and sustainability issues of fair trade
* The fair trade status of a city / university
* Fair trade as business strategy
* Political economy of fair trade
* Accreditation and cost of fair trade to producers
* Accountability and impact of fair trade on producers
* Co-operative and collective business models for fair trade
Those wishing to contribute should submit an extended of 1,000 words to Jane Gibbon jane.gibbon@ncl.ac.uk or Martyna Sliwa martyna.sliwa@ncl.ac.uk by 30th November 2009. Feedback on the abstracts will be provided by December 30th 2009. Full papers of 5,000 - 8,000 words should be submitted to the Guest Editors by 30th April 2010.
Suitable articles will be subjected to a double-blind review; hence authors should not identify themselves in the body of the paper.
The special issue is scheduled for publication in February 2011. Papers submitted must not have been published, accepted for publication, or be under consideration for publication. For additional information about the journal please see the journal’s webpage: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/cpoib.htm
By the end of this decade, the majority of African countries would have celebrated their 50th independence anniversary. The world has been carefully watching developments on the African continent during this half-century journey, and perceptions broadly oscillate between optimism and pessimism. Rapid socioeconomic gains achieved during the early decades of independence heralded hopeful predictions that the continent was on the march towards prosperity. This Afro-optimistic promise has alternatingly given way to Afro-pessimism as respective African countries have faltered and encountered difficulties in the lead up to the turn of the century. References to a ‘hopeless continent’ (The Economist, 2001) tend to highlight unfavourable business environments, weak institutions, and limited opportunities (Asiedu, 2004).
Rapid economic growth in recent decades and the resilience of African economies in the wake of global recessions have seen the pendulum shifting back towards optimism. Investors and observers increasingly speculate on the promise Africa has for global economic development. Positive perceptions of new and emerging opportunities on the continent underscore this logic. These opportunities are occurring against a backdrop of new developments within Africa which include, inter alia, the emergence of a sizeable middle-class with enhanced purchasing power, the emergence of multinational enterprises (MNEs) from within the region, the evolution of multi-lateral and international trade and investment agreements, and the rising levels of both inward and outward foreign direct investment flows. Alongside these shifts is a widespread transformation of structural, economic, political and social institutions currently underway across numerous African countries. New and rapidly growing trade and investment links are evident between African economies and new emerging economies such as China and India.
A resurgent scholarship on international business in Africa has resulted, focusing variously on the motives and determinants of foreign direct investment (Naudé and Krugell, 2007; Asiedu, 2006); the role of government policies, institutions and corruption on foreign direct investment (Musila and Sigue, 2006), knowledge transfer, and human resource practices within multinational corporations (Horwitz, 2015; Osabutey, William and Debrah, 2014). These and related studies present mixed and sometimes conflicting findings.
What this body of scholarship may tend to share is the unequivocal acceptance of the legitimacy of existing paradigms to explain current shifts being played out across Africa. Critical perspectives of international business in Africa therefore remain few and under the research radar. This widespread acceptance and application of established models may, in particular contexts, limit the ability to critically probe and analyse the current shifts in order to generate fresh insights.
For instance, given the diversity and pluralism of political, economic, sociocultural, and institutional systems among African countries, what are the implications of recent foreign investment flows on existing management practices or inter-state power relations in Africa? Do these represent new possibilities or are these simply a recreation of previous trends? Additionally, in which new ways are the current national, regional and global institutions influencing the international business environment in Africa? How are colonial legacies shaping investment flows in recent times? To what extent might post-colonial African countries be experiencing new forms of colonialism (neo-colonialism) through inward FDI? How does the nature and role of inward FDI from Asia (China and India for example) differ from that originating from the EU, USA or Japan? In which ways do international business and trade fuel conflict and the erosion of human rights in Africa?
The assumption of African homogeneity tends to obfuscate the realities of diversity and complexity as well as limit impactful research. Traditional models of inquiry may not necessarily explain these unanswered questions and leave us less knowledgeable about the motives, practices and implications of international business in Africa. There is however a growing research interest in critical perspectives on international business in Africa (e.g. see Amankwah-Amoah, 2016; Ado and Su, 2016; Ayres, 2012; de Jonge, 2016; Eweje, 2006; Konijn and Tulder, 2015). Although there has been a growing body of research on Africa, it has been suggested that this needs to be marshalled towards a better narrative and understanding of how firms behave, the role of leaders and the management of indigenous enterprises (Amankwah-Amoah, 2016).
This special issue on critical perspectives on international business in Africa is therefore timely. Following the mission of cpoib (Roberts and Dörrenbächer, 2016, 2012) this issues supports critically reflexive discussion of the nature and impact of international business activity in Africa on individuals, specific communities, the environment, the economy and society from inter-, trans-, and multi-disciplinary perspectives. The special issue seek to contribute to IB and related literature, and generate useful information and analysis for business educators, management practitioners and policy makers. Moreover, this special issue aims to provide a platform for scholars to rethink and further develop integrative as well as novel IB frameworks that are relevant in the African context.
Researchers are invited to consider and address these critical IB issues in the African context from a variety of perspectives. Scholars can identify and examine common issues in Africa as well as highlight country-specific issues. We encourage scholars to apply a wide variety of rigorous methodological approaches drawing on the latest research in this respect. Manuscripts may cover wider perspectives as long as the papers are in line with the broad theme of the proposed special issue: Guiding areas of useful contributions may include, but are not restricted to:
1. Theory of international business
i. What is the influence of western IB theory and management practices within international business in Africa?
ii. Are there African-specific perspectives which non-African firms could learn from? Are western business practices appropriate within African multinational firms?
2. Institutions
i. What are the implications of the wide-ranging diversity of national institutional and governance systems within African countries on foreign direct investment flows and management practices?
ii. In which new ways are national, regional (African Union/ ECOWAS/EAC/SADC) or international institutions (World Bank/ IMF/UN) influencing the international business environment in Africa? How is regional integration shaping the reality of international business within Africa?
iii. How are perceptions of fragility, corruption or instability influencing the dynamics of international business in Africa?
iv. In which ways do colonial legacies influence flows of foreign direct investment (FDI) to Africa? To what extent do the recent flows of foreign investment into Africa constitute neo-colonialism?
v. Is there a new narrative to the new Afro-Sino relations? Is there another story behind resource-seeking motives of Chinese MNEs in Africa?
3. Bottom of the pyramid
i. Which are the opportunities and challenges that international business may encounter in developing new products and markets to service consumers at the so-called ‘bottom of the pyramid’ within African countries?
4. Risk
i. What are the implications of the contemporary risks of doing business in Africa, including terrorism, domestic insurgencies and political interference?
Submission process and deadlines:
Submissions should follow the author guidelines for critical perspectives on international business which can be found at: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/cpoib.htm
The submission deadline is 30th November, 2016, with initial reviewing to be completed by 1st March, 2017, revisions due by 30th June 2017, final decisions by 31st August, 2017, and anticipated publication in 2018.
Submissions should be via the Scholar One Manuscripts online submission system (http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/cpoib). Enquiries about the special issue should be directed to the special issue guest editors Dr Richard B. Nyuur (Richard.Nyuur@northumbria.ac.uk) or Dr Roseline Wanjiru (Roseline.Wanjiru@northumbria.ac.uk) or Dr Joseph Amankwah-Amoah (Joseph.Amankwah-Amoah@bristol.ac.uk) or Dr Simeon E. Ifere (sifere@unilag.edu.ng).
References
Amankwah-Amoah, J. (2016), “Coming of age, seeking legitimacy: The historical trajectory of African management research”, critical Perspectives on International Business, Vol. 12 Iss: 1, pp. 1-14,
Ado, A and Su, Z. (2016), “China in Africa: A Critical Literature Review”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 12 Iss: 1, pp. 40-60.
De Jonge, A. (2016), “Australia-China-Africa Investment Partnerships: A new frontier for triangular cooperation?” critical Perspectives on International Business, Vol. 12 Iss: 1, pp. 61-82.
Asiedu, E. (2004), “Policy reform and foreign direct investment in Africa: Absolute progress but relative decline”, Development Policy Review, Vol. 22 No. 1, pp. 41-48.
Asiedu, E. (2006), “Foreign Direct Investment in Africa: The Role of Natural Resources, Market Size, Government Policy, Institutions and Political Instability”, The World Economy, Vol. 21 Iss: 1, pp. 63-77.
Ayres, C. J. (2012),"The international trade in conflict minerals: coltan", critical Perspectives on International Business, Vol. 8 Iss 2, pp. 178 - 193
Eweje, G. (2006), “Environmental costs and responsibilities resulting from oil exploitation in developing countries: The case of the Niger Delta of Nigeria”, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 69 Iss: 1, pp. 27-56.
Horwitz, F. (2015), “Human resources management in multinational companies in Africa: a systematic literature review”, The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Vol. 26 Iss: 21, pp. 2786-2809.
Konijn, P & van Tulder, R. (2015),"Resources-for-infrastructure (R4I) swaps", critical Perspectives on International Business, Vol. 11 Iss: 3/4 pp. 259 – 284.
Musila, J. W. and Sigue, S. P. (2006), “Accelerating foreign direct investment flow to Africa: from policy statements to successful strategies”, Managerial Finance, Vol. 32 Iss: 7, pp. 577-593.
Naudé, W. A. and Krugell, W. F. (2007), “Investigating geography and institutions as determinants of foreign direct investment in Africa using panel data”, Applied Economics, Vol. 39, pp. 1223-1233.
Osabutey, E. L., Williams, K. and Debrah, Y. A. (2014), “The potential for technology and knowledge transfers between foreign and local firms: A study of the construction industry in Ghana”, Journal of World Business, Vol. 49 Iss: 4, pp. 560-571.
Roberts, J. and Dörrenbächer, C., (2016), “Renewing the call for critical perspectives on international business: towards a second decade of challenging the orthodox”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 12 Iss: 1, pp. 2-21 .
Roberts, J. and Dörrenbächer, C., (2012), “The Futures of critical perspectives on international Business”, critical Perspectives on International Business, 8 Iss: 1, pp. 4‐13.
The Economist (2001), “Africa's elusive dawn”, Vol. 358 Iss: 8210, pp. 17.
Bios of Guest Authors
Richard B. Nyuur, PhD, is a Senior Lecturer in Strategic Management and International Business at the Newcastle Business School, Northumbria University, UK. His research interests lie at the intersection of strategy and international business in the broad areas of foreign direct investment (FDI), international business strategy, international human resource management, and corporate social responsibility. He has published in journals such as International Human Resource Management Journal, Journal of Small Business Management, Thunderbird International Business Review, Journal of Strategy and Management, African Journal of Economic and Management Studies, International Journal of Foresight and Innovation Policy, and Social Responsibility Journal. His scholarly work has also been presented at leading international conferences and published as chapters in peer-reviewed books. He is currently on the editorial boards of Journal of African Business and the European Journal of Economics and Management.
Dr Roseline Wanjiru, PhD, is a Senior Lecturer in Strategic Management and International Business at the Newcastle Business School, Northumbria University, UK. She has broad interdisciplinary research interests in the economic geography of multinational enterprises, the location of foreign direct investment, and economic development particularly in Sub-Saharan Africa. Roseline has worked in several East African countries and her scholarly work has been published in journals such as World Development, Transnational Corporations, and Regions as well as international conference proceedings. She holds a PhD from the University of Leeds and is currently the programme leader for the Business with Economics and Business with International Management degrees at Newcastle Business School, Northumbria University.
Dr. Simeon Emezana Ifere, PhD, is a lecturer at the Department of Business Administration
University of Lagos. Before returning to academia, he had over 25 years’ industry experience, which includes 5 years in management and 12 years in senior management positions in two Multinational organisations - Elf and Total groups. He also subsequently worked for Total group and Oando Plc as an Operations Consultant and a Turnaround Consultant respectively. His research interests broadly focus on employee engagement and work-life balance, talent management, and corporate social responsibility. His papers are forthcoming in the International Journal of Human resource Management. He has also presented his scholarly work at leading international conferences.
Dr Joseph Amankwah-Amoah, PhD, is an Associate Professor (Senior Lecturer) of Management at University of Bristol. His research focuses on global business strategy, international divestment, liberalisation, international entrepreneurship (business failure), and lateral hiring in emerging economies. Since completing his PhD in 2010, Joseph has published over 80 articles in refereed academic journals, conference proceedings and book chapters. He has published articles in journals such as the International Journal of HRM, Business History, Group & Organization Management, Journal of Business Research, Technological Forecasting and Social Change, European Business Review, Industrial Management & Data Systems, Critical Perspectives on International Business, Management & Organizational History, Thunderbird International Business Review and Journal of General Management
The postcolonial thinker Edward Said (1978, 1993) noted that migration was the great marker of our time and that with the increasing global movement of people there would be increasing ‘inter-cultural’ contact. When viewed through the ‘lens’ of critical organization and management studies, the processes and types of mobility, movement and migration in today’s ‘globalized’ environment present interesting possibilities for a reformulation and reconsideration of mobility within contemporary global capitalism.
In particular, there seems to be much room for the critical study of managerial and professional mobility and movement in business and organization studies, and specifically the idea of the “transnational capitalist class”. Beyond conventional expatriation, there are many new kinds of mobility occurring that involve the transnational capitalist class in the contemporary global business environment. They have yet to be exposed to critical investigation in a sustained fashion. In Western-based multinational companies these include the development of mobile ‘global elites’ and increasing numbers of short-term, commuter and rotational assignments and assignees (Dickmann and Doherty, 2010; McKenna and Richardson, 2007; Suutari, 2003).
The implications of these systems and forms of mobility in the broader context of ‘globalization’ and global capitalism have yet to be significantly explored from a critical perspective. In addition, the so-called self-initiated expatriate (SIE) has recently come under scrutiny. The SIE is an individual who ‘expatriates’ independently of an organizational sponsor. Much of the research on the SIE has been conducted on and with professionals moving from Western countries to other parts of the world (Jokinen, Brewster and Suutari, 2008; Myers and Pringle, 2005; Richardson, 2006; Selmer and Lauring, 2010; Tharenou and Caulfield, 2010). While there has been some more critical work undertaken on the ‘whiteness’ of these SIEs and emigrants in the broader sociological literature (Leonard, 2010), very little has been undertaken from a critical paradigm specific to business and organizations.
In this special issue, then, we seek papers that subject the globally mobile managerial and professional class, particularly in the context of business and organizational studies, to critical investigation.
The list below presents illustrative topics for contributions:
• How can we conceptualize organizational and self-initiated managerial professional global mobility critically?
• To what extent do globally mobile professionals represent a transnational capitalist class operating in the interests of global capital? How do this growing transnational class reflect changes in the global labour process?
• To what extent are those who are globally mobile professionals, both within organizational contexts and SIE’s engaging in ‘Imperial careering’? What are the elements of ‘Imperial careering’ in the contemporary business world and how can we link it to a postcolonial analysis?
• Who are the globally mobile elite and why are they being created by corporations? What purposes do a globally mobile elite perform within multinational corporations that maintain and enhance discourses and structures of multinational power and dominance?
• What is the impact of global mobile professionals on the locations to which they move? How is ‘whiteness’ important in this mobility and in forms of racial hierarchicalization in host locations? How can we conceptualize and empirically research globally mobile professionals from non-metropolitan centres? What are the gendered aspects of professional global mobility?
• What do concepts such as hybridization and mimicry offer a critical analysis of mobility and how has hybridization in particular been appropriated by multinational corporations?
• How do globally mobile professionals impact the host countries from a critical perspective?
• How does the movement of the global professional and managerial class underpin a globalized system of neoliberalism? Do the global professional and managerial class constitute a group from all parts of the world who cross borders in support of global capital?
We welcome theoretical, conceptual and empirical papers that explore and investigate the critical dimensions of the global mobility of professionals and managers as a developing transnational capitalist class.
Submission process:
Submissions should follow the author guidelines for Critical Perspective on International Business which can be found at: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/cpoib.htm
The submission deadline is 1st September 2012, with initial reviewing to be completed by 30th November 2012, revisions due by 1st February 2013, final decisions by 1st May 2013, and anticipated publication in early 2014.
Submissions should be via the Scholar One Manuscripts online submission system (http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/cpoib).
Please direct questions to any of the special issue editors at: smckenna@yorku.ca, M.N.Ravishankar@lboro.ac.uk, D.Weir@ucs.ac.uk
References
Dickmann, M., & Doherty, N. (2010). Exploring organizational and individual career goals, interactions, and outcomes of developmental international assignments. Thunderbird International Business Review, 52, 301-311.
Jokinen, T., Brewster, C., & Suutari, V. (2008). Career capital during international work experiences: contrasting self-initiated expatriate experiences and assigned expatriation. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 19, 979-998.
Leonard, P. (2010). Expatriate Identities in Postcolonial Organizations: Working Whiteness, Surrey: Ashgate.
McKenna , S., & Richardson, J. (2007). The increasing complexity of the internationally mobile professional: issues for research and practice. Cross Cultural Management, 14, 307-329.
Myers, B., & Pringle, J. K. (2005). Self-initiated Foreign Experience as Accelerated Development: Influences of Gender. Journal of World Business, 40, 421-431.
Richardson, J. (2006). Self-directed expatriation: family matters. Personnel Review, 35, 469-486.
Said, E.W. (1978) Orientalism, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd.
Said, E.W. (1993) Culture and Imperialism, New York: Vintage.
Selmer, J., & Lauring, J. (2010). Self-initiated academic expatriates: Inherent demographics and reasons to expatriates. European Management Review, 7, 169-179.
Suutari, V. (2003). Global managers: Career orientation, career tracks, life-style implications and career commitment. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 18, 185-207.
Tharenou, P., & Caulfield, N. (2010). Will I stay or will I go? Explaining repatriation by self-initiated expatriates. Academy of Management Journal, 53, 1009-1028.
Urry, J. (2000), Sociology beyond societies: Mobilities for the twenty-first century, Routledge, London.
About the Guest Editors
Dr Steve McKenna is Professor of Human Resource Management at York University, Toronto. His research interests include global mobility, postcolonial approaches to management and organization studies and the processes involved in ‘learning to work’. He co-convened a sub-theme at EGOS in 2007 from which came a special issue of the Journal of Management Development on ‘Managing, managerial control and managerial identity in the post-bureaucratic world’. He has published articles in Organization, Management Learning, International Journal of Human Resource Management and Management International Review. He is regional editor (North America) for Personnel Review.
Dr. M.N. Ravishankar is Reader in Globalization and Emerging Markets at the School of Business and Economics, Loughborough University, UK. His research interests span culture and its interface with business strategies, offshore outsourcing of work and IT-enabled transformations in emerging markets. Ravi’s research has appeared in leading international journals such as Information Systems Research, Journal of Vocational Behaviour and Omega.
Professor David Weir is Dean of the Business School at University Campus Suffolk, UK. He is also Emeritus Professor of the University of Northumbria, Visiting Professor in Management Development at Lancaster University, Visiting Professor Bristol Business School, Professor Affilie, ESC Rennes, France and Distinguished Visiting Professor, ETQM College, Dubai. He is a Companion of the Chartered Institute of Management and the author of several books including the best selling “Modern Britain” series. He is currently completing a book on “Management in the Arab world”. He was a joint editor of the book Critical Management Studies at Work (2009), Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
Guest Editors
Claudine Gaibrois, University of St. Gallen, Switzerland
Philippe Lecomte, Toulouse Business School, France
Mehdi Boussebaa, University of Glasgow, UK
Martyna Śliwa, University of Essex, UK
Introduction to the Special Issue
Scholarly interest in the role of language and, in particular, the rise of English as a global language in international business (IB), and organizational life more generally, has grown considerably in the past two decades. Most of the studies to date, however, have adopted a managerialist-functionalist perspective, focusing on corporate or individual solutions for overcoming language barriers. While this stream of research has significantly contributed to understanding the challenges of multilingualism in IB, research would now benefit from other perspectives. In other words, there is a need for research in IB going beyond questions of organizational efficiency and performance.
In particular, there is a need for more critical studies so as to examine how language policies and language practices in IB are mediated by power and politics. For instance, the increasingly widespread practice of mandating of a common language inside multinationals, far from being a neutral process, “should be viewed as exercise of power” (Vaara et al., 2005, p. 596). In this context, native speakers of the imposed language typically benefit from “unearned status gain” (Neeley and Dumas, 2016, p. 1) that gives them undue control over the communication flow (Feely and Harzing, 2003; Harzing and Pudelko, 2013; Neeley, 2013). The mandated language typically empowers some while disempowering others (Dotan Elliaz et al., 2009; Vaara et al., 2005) and acts as a source of individual influence within the firm (Barner-Rasmussen et al., 2014; Marschan-Piekkari et al., 1999; Peltokorpi and Vaara, 2014). Similarly, some research has shown how translation can be understood as an inherently political act (Ciuk et al., 2018; Logemann and Piekkari, 2015).
Moreover, studies of human agency creation in the context of linguistic inequalities, which might include open resistance against the use of a certain language as well as more subtle forms of non-compliance such as adaptation, would highlight power and politics in multilingual organizations as a source of dynamism and change, stressing possibilities of empowerment, emancipation and giving voice to marginalized groups. As an example, scholars have recently stressed the power effects of hybrid language use, as it can provide possibilities to express voice and participate (Gaibrois, 2018; Janssens and Steyaert, 2014), thus departing from the general tendency to emphasize national languages in language-sensitive IB (Tietze et al., 2016).
This emerging body of power-sensitive research has advanced understanding of language policies and practices in IB and one can expect it to be developed further, both empirically and conceptually. However, we believe it is time to conduct more critically oriented studies that can locate corporate language policies and practices in wider historical and socio-political contexts. One example is research on language policy informed by theories of imperialism and colonialism (Boussebaa et al., 2014; Boussebaa and Brown, 2017; Śliwa, 2008; Vaara et al., 2005). Another example is research pointing to the linkages between global English and neo-liberalism (e.g. Śliwa, 2010). Research on language policies and language use in IB also needs to take into account the hierarchy that exists between languages so as to bring into the analysis the fact that languages are generally “not equal in terms of socio-politico-economic value” (Hua 2014, p. 236) and thus potentially productive of intra-organizational inequalities. As Bourdieu’s (1991) notion of linguistic capital highlights, the value of an individual’s utterance depends on the value of that person’s first language on the market of languages.
Additionally, in order to understand the effects contemporary IB activity has on the individual, specific communities and society (Dörrenbächer and Michailova, 2019), we need more research on the ways in which language policies and practices in IB relate to privilege and inequality as well as to processes of participation and inclusion/exclusion (e.g. Tatli and Özbilgin, 2012). Research investigating how language intersects with other diversity dimensions such as migrant background, education or organizational function shows how language contributes to social and organizational differentiation (Johansson and Śliwa, 2016). Possible questions include the effects of using English as ‘lingua franca’ on low-qualified employees’ participation in organizational life (Gaibrois, 2015), or the consequences of the foreign-language environment on migrants’ and refugees’ organizational status.
On a conceptual and empirical level, most research on language policies and language use in IB tends to be conducted from a Western perspective. Frameworks and methodologies developed in the USA and Western Europe continue to be applied across different socio-cultural contexts, and the major debates are orchestrated by scholars affiliated with Western universities and by Westerners based elsewhere, as Michailova and Tienari (2014) have criticized with regards to IB in general. However, conceptualizations of multilingualism or methodologies stemming from outside the industrialized world (Roberts and Dörrenbächer, 2016) hold great potential for deepening understanding of language policies and language use in IB.
Finally, research in other organizational contexts than multinational corporations is required, because focusing on the multinational as a core category of IB research often remains static, structural and binary, and is not aligned with the fluidity and change of human activity, in which language practices play a crucial role (Angouri and Piekkari, 2018). Examples of other research contexts include universities (Boussebaa and Brown, 2017), offshore outsourcing companies (Boussebaa et al., 2014). Informal, partial and temporal organizations (Angouri and Piekkari, 2018) or non-profit based IB, as suggested in a call by Dörrenbächer and Michailova (2019), are another promising research context.
In this Special Issue, we therefore invite scholars from various disciplines and geographical locations to address multilingualism in IB from a critical perspective, focusing on how multilingualism in IB relates to privilege and inequality. Potential authors are encouraged to highlight the impact of the contemporary global and societal context on language policies and practices, and vice versa. Conceptual, methodological and empirical contributions addressing the following, by no means exhaustive, themes are particularly welcome:
- The impact of (neo)colonialism on language policies and language practices in IB
- The effects of language hierarchies on individuals’ language capital in organizations
- Language and its intersection with other diversity dimensions, such as education, occupation, organizational status or gender
- The consequences of language policies for employees on the lower hierarchical levels and/or with limited proficiency in foreign-languages
- Migrants’ and refugees’ language-related challenges
- Agency creation in multilingual organizations and resistance against language-skill related privilege
- The political dimensions of translation
- Perspectives on language policies and language practices in IB from outside the industrialized world
Following the renewed aim of critical perspectives on international business (cpoib) to focus on the contemporary context of IB (Dörrenbächer and Michailova, 2019), submissions are expected to address how global and societal changes relate to language policies and practices in IB. Potential contributors are encouraged to challenge the earlier focus on managerial perspectives by highlighting issues of privilege and inequality. They are also invited to suggest alternatives to focusing on efficiency and individual-level language skills by presenting innovative approaches to addressing multilingualism in organizations.
Submission Instructions
The deadline for submissions is 31 March 2020. For more information on critical perspectives on international business, including style guidelines, please visit the journal’s website at: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/loi/cpoib/.
All submissions will be subject to the regular blind peer review process of critical perspectives on international business. Submissions to the special issue are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/cpoib.
More Information
Enquires about the special issue should be directed to the guest editors:
Claudine Gaibrois, claudine.gaibrois@unisg.ch
Philippe Lecomte, p.lecomte@tbs-education.fr
Mehdi Boussebaa, mehdi.boussebaa@glasgow.ac.uk
Martyna Śliwa, masliwa@essex.ac.uk
References
Angouri, J. and Piekkari, R. (2018), “Organising multilingually. Setting an agenda for studying multilingual organisations and organising”, European Journal of International Management, Special Issue: “Working across Language Boundaries in International Business", Vol. 12 Nos 1/2, pp. 8-27.
Barner-Rasmussen, W., Ehrenrooth, M., Koveshnikov, A., and Mäkelä, K. (2014), “Cultural and language skills as resources for boundary spanning within the MNC”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 45 No. 7, pp. 886-905.
Bourdieu, P. (1991), Language and Symbolic Power, Cambridge: Polity Press.
Boussebaa, M., Sinha, S. and Gabriel, Y. (2014), “Englishization in offshore call centers: A postcolonial perspective”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 45 No. 9, pp. 1152-1169.
Boussebaa, M. & Brown, A-D. (2017), “Englishization, Identity, Regulation and Imperialism”, Organization Studies, Vol. 38 No. 1, pp. 7-29.
Ciuk, S., James, P. and Śliwa, M. (2018), “Micropolitical Dynamics of Interlingual Translation Processes in an MNC Subsidiary”, British Journal of Management, https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-8551.12323.
Dörrenbächer, C. and Michailova, S. (2019), “Societally engaged, critical International Business research: A programmatic view on the role and contribution of cpoib”, critical perspectives on international business, forthcoming
Dotan-Eliaz, O., Sommer, K. L. and Rubin, Y. S. (2009), “Multilingual groups. Effects of linguistic ostracism on felt rejection and anger, coworker attraction, perceived team potency, and creative performance”, Basic and Applied Social Psychology, Vol. 31, pp. 363-375.
Feely, A. J. and Harzing, A.-W. (2003), “Language management in multinational companies”, Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal, Vol. 10 No. 2, pp. 37‑52.
Gaibrois, C. (2015), Power at work: The discursive construction of power relations in multilingual organizations, Bamberg: Difo-Druck.
Gaibrois, C. (2018), “’It crosses all the boundaries': Hybrid language use as empowering resource”, European Journal of International Management, Special Issue “Working across Language Boundaries in International Business”, Vol. 12 Nos 1/2, pp. 82-110.
Harzing, A.-W. and Feely, A. (2008), “The language barrier and its implications for HQ-subsidiary relationships”, Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal, Vol. 15 No. 1, pp. 49-61.
Harzing, A-W. and Pudelko, M. (2013), “Language competencies, policies and practices in multinational corporations: A comprehensive review and comparison of Anglophone, Asian, Continental European and Nordic MNC”, Journal of World Business, Vol. 48 No. 1, pp. 87-97.
Hua, Z. (2014), “Piecing together the ‘workplace multilingualism’ jigsaw puzzle”, Multilingua, Vol. 33 Nos 1/2, pp. 233-242.
Janssens, M. and Steyaert, C. (2014), “Re-considering language within a cosmopolitan understanding. Toward a multilingual franca approach in International Business studies”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 45 No. 5, pp. 623-639.
Johansson, M. and Śliwa, M. (2016), “‘It is English and there is no alternative’: Intersectionality, language and social/organizational differentiation of Polish migrants in the UK”, Gender, Work and Organization, Vol. 23 No. 3, pp. 296-309.
Logemann, M., and Piekkari, R. (2015), “Localize or local lies? The power of language and translation in the multinational corporation”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 11 No. 1, pp. 30-53.
Marschan-Piekkari, R., Welch, D. and Welch, L. (1999), “In the shadow: The impact of language on structure, power and communication in the multinational”, International Business Review, Vol. 8 No. 4, pp. 421-440.
Michailova, S. and Tienari, J. (2014),"What's happening to international business?", critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 10 Nos 1/2, pp. 51-64.
Neeley, T. (2013), “Language matters. Status loss and achieved status distinctions in global organizations”, Organization Science, Vol. 24 No. 2, pp. 476-497.
Neeley, T.B. and Dumas T.L. (2016), “Unearned status gain. Evidence from a global language mandate”, Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 59 No. 1, pp. 14-43.
Peltokorpi, V. and Vaara, E. (2014), “Knowledge transfer in multinational corporations: Productive and counterproductive effects of language-sensitive recruitment”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 45 No. 5, pp. 600-622.
Philippson, R. (1992), Linguistic Imperialism, Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Roberts, J. and Dörrenbächer, C. (2016), “Renewing the call for critical perspectives on international business: towards a second decade of challenging the orthodox”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 12 No. 1, pp. 2-21.
Śliwa, M. (2008), “Understanding social change through post‐colonial theory: Reflections on linguistic imperialism and language spread in Poland””, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 4 Nos 2/3, pp. 228-241.
Śliwa, M. (2010), “‘Catching up with civilisation’: Reflections on language spread in Poland”, Journal of Organizational Change Management, Vol. 23 No. 6, pp. 689-709.
Tatli, A. and Özbilgin, M. (2012), “Surprising intersectionalities of inequality and privilege: the case of the arts and cultural sector”, Equality, Diversity and Inclusion: An International Journal, Vol. 31 No. 3, pp. 249-265.
Tietze, S., Holden, N. and Barner-Rasmussen, W. (2016), “Language use in multinational corporations: The role of special languages and corporate idiolects”, In: Ginsburgh, V. and Weber, S. (Eds.), The Palgrave Handbook of Economics and Language, Palgrave Macmillan, Basingstoke, pp. 312-341.
Vaara, E., Tienari, J., Piekkari, R. and Säntti, R. (2005), “Language and the Circuits of Power in a Merging Multinational Corporation”, Journal of Management Studies, Vol. 42 No. 3, pp. 595–623.
About the Special Issue Editors
Claudine Gaibrois (PhD from the University of St. Gallen) is a Lecturer for Culture, Society and Language at the Zurich University of Applied Sciences and an External Lecturer for Language Diversity in Organizational Contexts at the University of St. Gallen, Switzerland, and the Ecole de Management Strasbourg, France. Her research interests include linguistic and cultural diversity, communication in organizational contexts, intercultural communication and power relations. She has published in journals such as Journal of World Business, International Journal of Cross Cultural Management and European Journal of International Management. She has also co-edited a volume of the Bulletin Suisse de linguistique appliquée, which addresses the role and perception of language at the workplace from an international comparative perspective. She is a member of the board at the Groupe d’Etudes en Management et Langage (GEM&L)
Contact: claudine.gaibrois@unisg.ch
Philippe Lecomte is President and founding member of GEM&L, an international research group on Management and Language. He has been Associate Professor at Toulouse Business School (TBS), France for over 30 years. He was head of the Language department of TBS and co-director of the Major in International Management at TBS. Philippe Lecomte was guest lecturer at WFI- Ingolstadt School of management in 2009 and 2011. His current research interest is in language in international business and management education. He has co-edited four special issues on language and management (Management & Avenir, 2013; Gérer et Comprendre, 2014; International Journal of Cross-Cultural Management, 2015, European Journal of International Management, 2017). He is senior editor of the European Journal of International Management.
Contact: p.lecomte@tbs-education.fr
Mehdi Boussebaa is Professor of International Business at the University of Glasgow in the UK. His primary research investigates the impact of globalization on organizational behaviour and the role of multinationals as agents of globalization. Empirically, he has a particular interest in professional service multinationals and internationalizing universities. His work has been published in journals such as Organization Studies, Human Relations, Journal of International Business Studies and Journal of World Business. He currently is an Associate Editor of critical perspectives on international business and serves on the editorial boards of Organization Studies, Journal of World Business and Journal of Professions and Organization.
Contact: mehdi.boussebaa@glasgow.ac.uk
Martyna Śliwa is Professor of Management and Organisation Studies at the University of Essex. Her research interests include linguistic diversity, multilingualism and translation in multinational corporations. She has published research addressing issues of language and power in journals such as Journal of International Business Studies, British Journal of Management and Culture and Organization. She is particularly interested in how language intersects with other aspects of organisational diversity and what effects it has on individual careers as well as organisational hierarchies and power relations. Martyna has extensive experience of editorial work and is currently Associate Editor of the British Journal of Management and Management Learning.
Contact: masliwa@essex.ac.uk
The European single market has come a long way in allowing for the free movement of people, goods, services and capital across the Union. European institutions, organizations, businesses and private citizens, can potentially operate, compete and coexist within a supranational society, the citizens of which come from divergent cultural backgrounds of no fewer than 27 member states, that become even more composite as a result of an increasing influx of migrant workers seeking a better life in Europe.
Externally, European organizations expand their scope of activities following EU's leading position in the global political and economic arena, including its role in the so much needed Islamic-Western mutual understanding and reconciliation. This reality is reflected in the complexity of the European business, governance and administrative environment that demands a high level of cultural competency from organizations and their management. A cross-cultural know-how that can potentially become an organizational resource needs to be developed that will expand managers' effectiveness in a wide spectrum of international and home settings.
Yet, research allowing us to improve our understanding of cross-cultural management issues, in Europe and elsewhere, is rather limited. Researchers intending to address this gap are invited to submit their work to this special issue. Theoretical and/or empirical papers of both a quantitative and a qualitative nature on all aspects of modern management are invited. A European-Mediterranean perspective is preferable.
Topics could include but are not limited to:
* Implications of culture on managerial styles and decision making
* Culture and strategy: implications of culture for strategic decision making
* Strategic alliances, mergers and acquisitions across cultures
* Implications of culture on management practice
* Corporate and organizational cultures
* Leadership in multi-cultural contexts
* Marketing services and products in cross-cultural environments
* Culture's impact on customer behaviour
* Ethnocentrism
* Cross-cultural communications and negotiations
* Management ethical Issues related to culture
* Cross-cultural perspectives of branding strategies.
Submission guidelines
Papers submitted must not have been published, accepted for publication, or presently be under consideration for publication with any other journal. Submissions should be approximately 4,000-6,000 words in length. Submissions to Cross Cultural Management must be made using the ScholarOne Manuscript Central system. For more details, please visit Emerald Insight and consult the author guidelines. A separate title page must be uploaded containing the title, author(s), and contact information for the author(s).
Suitable articles will be subjected to a double-blind review; hence authors should not identify themselves in the body of the paper.
Guest Editors
Yaakov Weber
College of Management Academic Studies, Israel
Shlomo Tarba
University of Birmingham, UK
Consulting Editor
Daniel Rottig
Florida Gulf Coast University, USA
Mergers and acquisitions (M&As) of companies located in emerging markets (EMs) as well as M&A deals that have originated from emerging market firms in recent years account for a large share of foreign direct investment (Rottig, 2017). Furthermore, the majority of outward foreign direct investment from EMs is created through M&As that help firms to achieve strategic objectives such as growth and acquisitions of technology and resources. However, the number of studies that focus on M&As in and out of EMs is much smaller than those studies that analyze M&As in and out of developed economies, which constitute a major research gap and opportunity for future studies. For example, a recent review of the literature on the critical success factors of M&As (Gomes, Angwin, Weber and Tarba, 2013; Rottig and Reus, 2018) concluded that there is a scarcity of theoretical and empirical work examining cross-border M&As by EM firms. Moreover, based on a meta-analysis of culture’s consequences for acquisition performance, Rottig (2017: 28) notes that “the majority of culture-related acquisition performance research is based on samples of acquirers and targets in developed countries with a recent emergence of studies examining acquisitions of Western-based firms in emerging markets. Interestingly, however, we could not identify a single empirical study that examined the effects of cultural differences on acquisition performance based on a sample of acquisitions of emerging market targets by emerging market acquirers. Against the background of the recent proliferation of acquisitions across emerging markets – with emerging market acquirers accounting for 53 percent of global cross-border acquisitions and 72 percent of targets being located in emerging markets (UNCTAD, 2014) – future research is likely to make a contribution by theoretically examining the unique institutional environments of emerging markets, developing location-specific conceptual models for the culture-based acquisition performance determinants in these markets, and empirically analyzing such models based on samples of acquirers and target firms that are indigenous to these markets.” These reviews point out the need for more research on M&As within EMs as well as M&As originating from EM firms.
Most of the scarce, extant literature on M&As in and out of EMs is based on samples from only one single country such as China or India, and the results are mixed. It is questionable whether conclusions drawn from studies of M&As in one emerging market context can be generalized to other EM contexts and other EM firms. Furthermore, there is a lack of research testing the applicability of findings and theories from the literature on cross-border M&As in developed countries in the context of M&As in and out of EM. For example, more research is needed on the unique institutional (external and internal) factors in EMs that impact the strategies, implementation, and performance of M&A in EMs (e.g., see Rottig, 2016). Studies have therefore pointed to the fact that that there are significant differences in institutional environments between developed economies and emerging economies, and underscored the need for extending the existing knowledge on M&As by exploring these transactions in new national and organizational settings (Ahammad, Leone, Tarba, Glaister & Arslan, 2017; Buckley, Elia, & Kafouros, 2014).
This special issue aims to foster the research streams on antecedents (factors affecting performance) and outcomes (performance) of cross-border mergers and acquisitions in and out of emerging markets. This complex, widespread and growing phenomenon of M&As will require the incorporation of multidisciplinary, multi-level and cross-cultural models and analyses (Junni, Sarala, Tarba, & Weber, 2015; Weber, 2012; Weber, Tarba, & Oberg, 2013).
We invite papers that focus on theories and findings that explain pre- and post-M&A processes in EMs. We encourage both conceptual and empirical (quantitative and qualitative) contributions that may address, but are not limited to, the following topics:
Multidisciplinary Approach and Interrelationships Among M&A Stages in and out of EMs:
- What insights can perspectives from strategy, organizational behavior, international management, psychology, sociology, anthropology and other disciplines provide to our understanding of M&A performance in and out EMs?
- Given that some studies show that experience does not necessarily lead to better performance, how can Learning theory, the Knowledge-based-view and/or Resource-based-view explain M&A performance in EMs?
- Do strategic goals, strategic choices and screening processes during the pre-M&A stage lead to different psychological experiences and outcomes that require different HR practices and implementation approaches in the post-M&A stage in an emerging market context?
Success Factors at M&A Stages in and out of EMs
- What are the success factors during the planning, closing and implementation stages of M&A in EMs?
- How do the unique institutional contexts of emerging markets affect M&A performance across stages in the M&A process?
- What are the roles of leadership and trust during different stages of M&A in EMs?
- What are the best practices for synergy realization in M&As in and out EMs?
- Under what circumstances (e.g., institutional contexts, industries, firm size) are communication, training, staffing, recruiting, rewarding and other practices during the pre and post-merger period the most effective?
Paper Submission Deadline: December 20, 2018
Guidelines on Submission:
- Please visit the International Journal of Emerging Market website at www.emeraldinsight.com/journal/ijoem for details about author and submission guidelines.
- Please submit your papers directly through the ScholarOne submission and review system, which you can access via http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ijoem Please select this special issue in ScholarOne when submitting your paper.
References:
Ahammad, M. F., Leone, V., Tarba, S. Y., Glaister, K. W., & Arslan, A. (2017). Equity ownership in cross-border mergers and acquisitions by British firms: An analysis of real options and transaction cost factors. British Journal of Management, 28 (2), 180-196.
Buckley, P. J., Elia, S., & Kafouros, M. (2014). Acquisitions by emerging market multinationals: Implications for firm performance. Journal of World Business, 49(4), 611-632.
Gomes, E., Angwin, D. N., Weber, Y., & Tarba, S. Y. 2013. Critical success factors through the mergers and acquisitions process: Revealing pre- and post-M&A connections for improved performance. Thunderbird International Business Review, 55(1): 13-35.
Junni, P., Sarala, R., Tarba, S. Y., & Weber, Y. (2015). Strategic agility in acquisitions. British Journal of Management, 26(4), 596-616.
Rottig, D. 2016. Institutions and emerging markets: Effects and implications for multinational corporations. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 11(1): 2-17.
Rottig, D. 2017. Meta-analys es of culture's consequences for acquisition performance: An examination of statistical artifacts, methodological moderators and the context of emerging markets. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 12(1): 8-37.
Rottig, D. & Reus, T. H. 2018. Research on culture and international acquisition performance: A critical evaluation and new directions. International Studies of Management & Organization, 48(1): 3-42.
UNCTAD. 2014. World Investment Report: Investing in the SDGs: An action plan. New York: United Nations Publications.
Weber, Y. 2012. Handbook of Research on Mergers and Acquisitions. Edward Elgar, MA, USA.
Weber, Y., Tarba, S.Y., & Oberg, C. (2013). A Comprehensive Guide to Mergers and Acquisitions: Managing the Critical Success Factors Across Every Stage of the M&A Process. USA & UK: Financial Times Press.
CSR in Developing Countries: Towards a Development-Oriented Approach
Editors: Dima Jamali, Charlotte Karam & Michael Blowfield
Since the turn of the millennium, we have witnessed a surge of interest in the notion of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) coupled with an explosion in the number of articles, books, and chapters written on the topic. CSR is generally used as an umbrella term to describe the complex and multi-faceted relationships between business and society and to account for the economic, social and environmental impacts of business activity. Within the literature emerging from developed economies, CSR has been examined along three main tracks, namely as a function of profit maximizing behavior (McWilliams & Siegel, 2002), institutional pressures (Campbell, 2007), or managerial cognition (Muller & Kolk, 2009).
In this respect, scholars have delved into various aspects and applications of CSR including the use of CSR for legitimation, the relationship between CSR and financial performance and analyses of institutional pressures affecting CSR expressions. While this research has significantly advanced our understanding of CSR and its antecedents and implications, the bulk of this research has been concentrated in developed economies and in European and North American countries more specifically.
There has been a burgeoning parallel interest in understanding the dynamics and peculiarities of CSR in developing economies (Blowfield & Frynas, 2005; Newell & Frynas, 2007; Idemudia, 2011). Authors have contested the immediate transferability of frameworks and conclusions drawn in the developed world to developing countries and have argued for the need for a more nuanced analysis of how CSR manifests itself in emerging markets (Egri & Ralston, 2008; Kolk & Lenfant, 2010; Kolk & Van Tulder, 2010). The context-dependence of CSR has indeed been re-emphasized in recent years and the fact that developing countries present peculiar institutional constellations that affect CSR manifestations is now well-recognized (e.g. Jamali & Sidani, 2012; Visser, 2008). Scholars have suggested for example that philanthropy constitutes the main expression of CSR in the developing world whether because of prevailing cultural norms and expectations (Jamali &Neville, 2011; Gao, 2009), religious expectations (Jamali, Sidani, & El-Asmar, 2009a; Jamali, Zanhour, & Keshishian, 2009b) or the difficult and pressing socio-economic needs which put pressure on firms to embrace philanthropic programs and interventions (Frynas, 2005).
Other institutional gaps that affect the expressions of CSR in developing countries, include the contracted and retracted role of governments in developing countries (Frynas, 2005; Amaeshi et al., 2006) which often creates environments that are ripe for abuse (Khavul & Bruton, 2013; Newenham-Kahindi, 2011) and the weakness of drivers pertaining to business associations and nongovernmental organizations (Jamali & Neville, 2011). Ite (2005) identifies corruption, poor governance and the lack of accountability to be the main hindrances for CSR in Nigeria, causing exacerbated poverty and unemployment. Hence while there has been some increased scholarship on CSR in developing countries, and new insights into the cultural and local specifics of CSR engagement, there is need for additional research that can inform a more nuanced and sophisticated research agenda that links to public policy and development goals in more substantive ways. In fact various authors have highlighted a core challenge pertaining to how to move CSR beyond philanthropy, rhetoric, legitimization, imagery, and public relations in the developing world to substantive engagement that addresses engrained social problems (e.g. poverty, education, unemployment) and that has developmental impact and implications (Barkemeyer, 2009; Karam & Jamali, 2013).
Hence, this book volume is intended to highlight the current discussion on CSR in developing countries, through the voices of authors, scholars and practitioners working in these contexts. The editors welcome contributions pertaining to various aspects of CSR engagement in developing countries, with a particular focus on the question of the promise and potential of CSR to serve as an effective development tool.
The question of how the business sector can serve as an effective agent of change in the developing world is important and timely, particularly as the CSR paradigm continues to be anchored in voluntary self-regulatory conceptions (Barmekeyer, 2009; Jamali, 2010). In this respect, Blowfield and Dolan (forthcoming) begin to chart the way by giving insights into how the business sector has moved from a reactive non-intentional role in promoting development to a more proactive and engaged stance and specify three important criteria for an engaged developmental orientation pertaining to investing one’s capital, giving primacy to the poor and their issues, and accountability to address poverty and marginalization. In summary we invite contributions to this book volume seeking to address two primary questions. The first question is to what extent and in what ways do CSR agenda challenges and initiatives differ in developing economies, and how to account for these variations?
The second equally important question is how CSR can be mobilized more effectively to serve as a development tool, in the sense of aligning more systematically with meeting development goals that are worthy and substantive. We believe that exploring CSR in developing country contexts is important because these are the contexts where CSR and developmental needs are most acute (Jamali & Mirshak, 2007; Visser, 2008) and because developing countries often present a distinctive set of CSR agenda challenges which may have qualitative differences from those faced in the developed world (Visser, 2008). We also believe that in our current time, CSR needs to be examined more systematically not only in terms of constraints but also in terms of developmental potential in addressing relevant societal concerns and local development needs. We invite a range of nuanced contributions that are able to move beyond the ideological fault lines of CSR is good versus bad (Dolan & Rajak, 2011), to focus on the CSR peculiarities, ambivalences and tensions of CSR in developing countries and addressing the CSR-development nexus or interface more specifically.
Some questions that can guide contributors as they reflect on possible topics include:
- What are the possible lines of inquiry linking CSR to development? What are the important questions needed to be asked to develop fruitful future research directions on CSR in developing countries?
- What are the specificities of CSR in developing countries? How to account for the variation?
- What does it mean for business to be a genuine development agent?
- How can CSR be leveraged, or mobilized, or tailored for greater developmental impact in different developing contexts?
- What is meant by inclusive growth or inclusive capitalism and how can companies channel some of their innovative ingenuity to worthwhile development needs and projects in the developing world?
- What are the questions that CSR researchers should be asking to contribute to a locally appropriate CSR discourse while simultaneously remaining relevant to the global CSR dialogue?Similarly, what questions should practitioners be asking to make a local contribution and to lead the development-oriented CSR forward on the global stage?
- Where can CSR research in developing countries feed back into CSR research and practice in developed countries?
- What are the practical and methodological challenges of conducting quantitative and qualitative CSR research within and across developing economies and how can these serve as opportunities for developing innovative and stimulating new avenues for CSR research in general?
- What are the practical challenges of implementing development-oriented CSR initiatives within and across developing economies and how can these serve as opportunities for developing innovative and stimulating new avenues for responsible engagement?
A brief (one page) proposal or outline of your book chapter in terms of intended structure and main arguments and objectives is due by end of November 2013; we will endeavor to get back to you in relation to acceptance by end December 2013 and the full chapter contribution will be due on May 30, 2014.
In terms of formatting guidelines, Greenleaf formatting guidelines should be closely followed. These include the following (we should check with John): - Harvard referencing should be used throughout - The entire manuscript is double-spaced - Tables and diagrams are sent separately from the text
REFERENCES
Amaeshi, K. M., Adi, B. C., Ogbechie, C., & Amao, O. O. (2006). Corporate social responsibility in Nigeria: Western mimicry or indigenous influences? Journal of Corporate Citizenship, 24 (winter) 83-99. Barkemeyer, R. (2009). Beyond compliance – below expectations? Cross-border CSR, development and the UN Global Compact. Business Ethics: A European Review, 18(3), 273-289. Blowfield, M. (2007). Reasons to be cheerful? What we know about CSR’s impact. Third World Quarterly, 28(4), 683-695. Blowfield, M., & Dolan, C. (Forthcoming). Business as development agent: Evidence of possibility and improbability. Blowfield, M., & Frynas, J. G. (2005). Setting new agendas: critical perspectives on corporal social responsibility in the developing world. International Affairs, 81(3), 499–513. Campbell, J. L. (2007). Why would corporations behave in socially responsible ways? An institutional theory of corporate social responsibility. Academy of Management Review, 32, 946–967. Dolan, C. & Rajak, D. (2011). Introduction: Ethnographies of corporate ethicizing. Journal of Global and Historical Anthropology, 60, 3-8. Egri, C. P., & Ralston, D. A. (2008). Corporate responsibility: A review of international management research from 1998 to 2007. Journal of International Management, 14, 319-339. Frynas, J. G. (2005). The false development promise of corporate social responsibility: Evidence from multinational oil companies. International Affairs, 81, 581-98. Gao, Y. (2009). Corporate social performance in China: Evidence from large companies. Journal of Business Ethics, 89, 23-35. Greenfield, W. M. (2004). In the name of corporate social responsibility. Business Horizons, 47(1), 19-28. Idemudia U. (2011). Corporate social responsibility and developing countries: Moving the critical CSR research agenda in Africa forward. Progress in Development Studies, 11(1), 1-18. Ite, U.E. (2005). Poverty reduction in resource-rich developing countries: what have multinational corporations got to do with it? Journal of International Development, 17, 913-929. Jamali, D. (2010). The CSR of MNC subsidiaries in developing countries: Global, local, substantive or diluted? Journal of Business Ethics, 93, 181-200. Jamali, D., & Mirshak, R. (2010). Business-conflict linkages: Revisiting MNCs, CSR and conflict. Journal of Business Ethics, 93(3), 443-464. Jamali, D., & Mirshak, R. (2007). Corporate social responsibility: Theory and practice in a developing country context. Journal of Business Ethics, 72(1), 243-262. Jamali, D. & Neville, B. (2011). Convergence versus divergence of CSR in developing countries: an embedded multi-layered institutional lens. Journal of Business Ethics, 102(4), 599-621. Jamali, D. & Sidani, Y. (2012). CSR in the Middle East: Fresh perspectives. In D. Jamali, & Y. Sidani (Ed.), Introduction: CSR in the Middle East: Fresh Perspectives (pp. 1-11). Palgrave Publishers: UK. Jamali, D., Sidani, Y., & El-Asmar, K. (2009a). Changing managerial CSR orientations: A three country comparative analysis of Lebanon, Syria and Jordan. Journal of Business Ethics, 85(1), 173-192. Jamali, D., Zanhour, M., & Keshishian, T. (2009b). Peculiar strengths and relational attributes of SMEs in the context of CSR. Journal of Business Ethics, 87(3), 355–367. Karam, C., & Jamali, D. (2013). Gendering CSR in the Arab Middle East: an institutional perspective. Business Ethics Quarterly, 23(1), 31-68. Khavul, S., & Bruton, G. D. (2013). Harnessing innovation for change: Sustainability and poverty in developing countries. Journal of Management Studies, 50(2), 285-306. Kolk, A., & Lenfant, F. (2010). MNC reporting on CSR and conflict in Central Africa. Journal of Business Ethics, 93, 241-255. Kolk, A., & Van Tulder, R. (2010). International business, corporate social responsibility and sustainable development. International Business Review, 19(2), 119-125. McWilliams, A., & Siegel, D. (2002). Corporate social responsibility: A theory of the firm perspective. Academy of Management Review, 26, 177–127. Muller, A., & Kolk, A. (2009). CSR performance in emerging markets: Evidence from Mexico. Journal of Business Ethics, 85(2), 325-337. Newell, P., & Frynas, J. G. (2007). Beyond CSR? Business, poverty and social justice: An introduction. Third World Quarterly, 28(4), 669-681. Newenham-Kahindi, A. M. (2011). A global mining corporation and local communities in the Lake Victoria Zone: The case of Barrick Gold multinational in Tanzania. Journal of Business Ethics, 99, 253–282. Visser, W. (2008). Corporate social responsibility in developing countries. In A. Crane, A. McWilliams, D. Matten, J. Moon, & D. Siegel (Eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Corporate Social Responsibility (pp. 473-479). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Whether conducted internationally or within the same nation, cross-cultural research relies heavily on questionnaires and surveys. However, analysts often wonder whether responses generated by respondents from different cultural contexts mean the same thing. Cultural background may shape how different people use the same response scales. Likewise, self-report questions might elicit tendencies that interfere with what a survey researcher might want to know. In other cases, culture might influence as to whether respondents provide answers to the question as stated in the text, or if they are inclined to tailor their answer based on the specific context in which the question is being asked. And yet in other cases, participants’ answers may differ as a function of whether a question appears early or late in the same survey.
The present Special Section aims to bring together contemporary research that tackles problems of survey responding in a cross-cultural context. The focus is on issues, which have the potential of compromising cultural comparisons, yet which may also be of interest as cultural phenomena in their own right. Issues include, but are not limited to, acquiescent responding, disaquiescent responding, extreme responding, middling responding, socially desirable responding and context-driven responding. Papers may wish to diagnose cultural response tendencies, broadly construed, and demonstrate the consequences for conclusions about cultural differences. Similarly, papers may wish to propose new approaches in how to deal with various response tendencies, either at the stage of questionnaire design or the analysis of self-report data. Papers are also encouraged if they examine the predictors of cultural response tendencies, or demonstrate the conditions under which they are present or absent. Both theoretical and empirical contributions will be considered.
Manuscripts should be no longer than 6,000 words (including footnotes, references, tables, and figures, but excluding the abstract), have no more than 30 references, and include a 200-word abstract. If warranted (e.g., when reporting a coherent series of multiple studies) longer manuscripts may be considered, but authors are encouraged to contact the special section editor. Manuscripts are expected to follow standard guidelines of the International Journal of Psychology (http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1002/%28ISSN%291464-066X/homepage/ForAuthors.html). Submissions will be peer-reviewed.
To ensure the suitability of a manuscript for the special section, authors should send an abstract (300-500 words) to reach the Guest Editor, Markus Kemmelmeier (markusk@unr.edu) by December 15, 2014, before submitting the complete manuscript. Manuscripts must be submitted in electronic form via IJP’s website (http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/pijp).
Deadline for paper submissions is April 30, 2015.
Papers acceptable for publication that cannot be published in this special section may be considered for publication in a regular issue of the International Journal of Psychology, unless authors explicitly decline this option.
This is a call for papers for a special issue of Research in International Business and Finance focused on behavioral explanations for the use of outside financing by business firms. This topic has assumed great importance following the global financial crises of 2007-2008 and the great recession that followed. One of the major causes of these events has been traced to the high leverage employed. However, there have been wide international variations in the leverages employed and in the outside financing used by entities in various countries and not all countries suffered equally in these crises. This special issue will focus on the international differences in outside financing and financial leverages used by businesses and possible explanations for these international differences.
Traditionally, research on the capital structure of firms has focused on the impact of firm-level variables to assess the relative strength of the pecking order theory versus the trade-off theory and other theories. However, it seems outcomes in finance, including capital structure and financing decisions, are shaped by laws and institutions that result from nations’ culture and history. Thus, there has been much interest in how international differences in risk attitudes and other national social and institutional characteristics influence the availability of external finance and the capital structure of firms. Recent research has begun to examine the influence of such factors as national culture, social trust, legal origins, bankruptcy laws, disclosure environments, governance, employment rights, and other national behavioral characteristics on the capital structures of firms.
Additionally, since traditional research on capital structure and financing sources has focused on non-financial firms, we also invite papers focused on financial and/or service firms. We feel the capital structure of financial firms is of particularly timely relevance as nations recover from the recent financial crisis and consider the impact of financing restrictions of banks.
Papers that use new and or novel empirical methodologies to examine topical issues using extensive cross-sectional and time-series international data sets are particularly welcome. We are also interested in behavioral explanations that are backed up by adequate empirical analysis.
In order to enhance the fit of a manuscript with the goals of the special issue, potential authors are invited to submit and receive feedback on a three page summary of the proposed paper as early as possible.
Journal information and author guidelines can be accessed at
http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/journaldescription.cws_home/699534/authorinstructions
Please send your manuscripts and other inquiries to the attention of the special issue editors:
Raj Aggarwal and John Goodell at: RIBAFSpecialIssueAG@gmail.com;
Journal information and author guidelines can be accessed at:
http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/journaldescription.cws_home/699534/authorinstructions
The deadline for submission of completed manuscripts is July 30, 2012. We look forward to your submissions to this special issue of the RIBAF.
The German Journal of Research in Human Resource Management is the highest ranked German journal covering research on all issues related to Human Resource Management (HRM) and is listed by the SSCI. The Special Issues published in English receive considerable attention both in Germany and across Europe.
This Special Issue is dedicated to current issues in international HRM: Global assignments, global careers and global talent management. These topics have gained tremendous importance due to the increasing globalization of the world economy and the war for internationally qualified talent. This not only applies to multinational enterprises, but also to small- and medium-sized enterprises, as senior managers are challenged to attract and retain global talent.
We seek to publish research articles that deepen our understanding of phenomena related to global assignments, global careers and global talent management from both individual and from organizational perspectives. Individual perspectives include challenges of various types of assignments and their management. Papers on global careers might address, for example, the success of international assignments, female careers in international management, or cross-cultural learning processes of expatriates. The organizational perspective comprises various functional areas in IHRM, including the most important practice, global talent management. However, topics such as expatriate management and global performance management are also related to global assignments, global careers, and talent management.
The objective of this Special Issue is to draw together scholars who are working at the forefront of this research domain. This includes strong theoretical, conceptual and/or empirical papers using quantitative or qualitative approaches in order to advance our knowledge of international HRM – especially with regard to global assignments, global careers, and global talent management.
As an illustrative (but not exhaustive) list of themes/topics we hope to see addressed in this special issue are:
• Various types of assignments (traditional, self-initiated assignments, etc.)
• Expatriation and repatriation for various types of assignments
• International careers
• Female careers in international management
• Global performance management
• Global talent management
• Cross-cultural training methods
• Cross-cultural learning
• Human resource development strategies
• A comparative approach to human resource development
• Any additional theoretical, empirical, review or model-building contributions in international human resource development (broadly defined).
Submissions
In order to be considered for publication in this Special Issue, an abstract of two pages should be sent to the editors by 15 July, 2012. The submission process is competitive, and the Editors will review the abstracts and contact authors with an invitation to submit full manuscripts. Abstracts and full papers should be written in English.
The deadline for the full papers is 31 December, 2012. The papers will undergo a double-blind review process. Submitted papers must represent original work that is unpublished and not currently submitted or under review for possible publication in other journals. Formal guidelines for final submission are available from: www.Hampp-Verlag.de or www.zfp-personalforschung.de. Publication is scheduled in late 2013.
Introduction
The importance of customers for business firms has created tough ‘rivalries’ among competitors over acquiring new customers or retaining/expanding relationship with current ones. In particular, customer knowledge has been utilized as a key strategic resource and distinctive core competency to gain sustainable competitive advantage following the transformation of organizations from ‘product-centric’ to ‘customer-centric’ ones. The advancements in electronic and web-enabled systems coupled with accelerations in globalization, competitive environments, and changing customer’s preferences have created new challenges as well as opportunities for leveraging customer knowledge (CK) competencies.
Objectives
Customer-Centric Knowledge Management (CCKM) is needed in order to build good customer relations, continue to serve each customer in his or her preferred way, and to maintain customer satisfaction and loyalty. It includes the management of processes and techniques used to collect information regarding customers' needs, wants, and expectations for the development of new and/or improved products/services.
This book intends to address managerial and technical aspects of customer-centric knowledge implementation. It seeks to expand the literature and business practices and to create a very significant academic value to the dynamic and emerging fields of organizational knowledge management, customer relationship management, and information and communication technologies (ICTs).
Target Audience
This book seeks to offer audiences of business/IT academics and practitioners a refreshed and an enhanced view of research ideas in customer knowledge management.
Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
Customer Knowledge
- Generation
- Sharing
- Implementation
Customer–Centric Knowledge Management
Strategic Analysis
- Design and Development
- The Role of People
- The Role of Technologies
- The role of Processes
- Delivery Channels
- Supply Chains
- Organizational Learning
- Organizational Change
- Communities of Practice/Creation
- Performance Metrics
- Project Management
- e-Commerce
- e-Governmental
Submission Procedure
Academics, researchers and practitioners are invited to submit on or before March 15, 2010, a 2-3 page chapter proposal clearly explaining the mission and concerns of his or her proposed chapter. Authors of accepted proposals will be notified on or before March 30, 2010 about the status of their proposals and sent chapter guidelines. Full chapters are expected to be submitted by June 30, 2010. All submitted chapters will be reviewed on a double-blind review basis. Contributors may also be requested to serve as reviewers for this project.
Publisher
This book is scheduled to be published by IGI Global (formerly Idea Group Inc.), publisher of the “Information Science Reference” (formerly Idea Group Reference), “Medical Information Science Reference” and “IGI Publishing” imprints. For additional information regarding the publisher, please visit www.igi-global.com. This publication is anticipated to be released in 2011.
Important Dates
March 15, 2010: Proposal Submission Deadline
March 30, 2010: Notification of Acceptance
June 30, 2010: Full Chapter Submission
September 30, 2010: Review Results to Authors
October 30, 2010: Revised Chapter Submission
November 15, 2010: Final Acceptance Notifications
Inquiries and submissions can be forwarded electronically (Word document) or by mail to:
Prof. Minwir Al-Shammari
Director, Graduate Studies Program
College of Business Administration
University of Bahrain
P.O Box 32038, Sakhir
Kingdom of Bahrain
Fax: (+973) 17-449-776
Email: minwir@yahoo.com
As a result of globalization, migration and international mobility of human resources are of growing relevance (OECD, 2015). Many individual factors drive this increasing mobility, such as the desire for adventure, higher quality of life, compensation, career, and family or personal ties (e.g. Al Ariss et al., 2013; Cerdin, Diné and Brewster, 2014; Doherty, Dickmann and Mills, 2011; Froese and Peltokorpi, 2013; Hippler, 2009; Selmer and Lauring 2011). Externally, the joint influence of the global economic climate, demographic changes, and geopolitical crises have been triggering the phenomena (OECD, 2015). At the same time, the domestic context in which many business organizations operate is becoming more complex and dangerous, mainly due to the threat of natural disasters, war, violent conflicts, crime, civil unrest, and terrorism (Bader, Schuster and Dickmann, 2015). Therefore, an increasing number of people are engaging in roles and jobs that involve mobility under higher danger and risk, such as military, health, emergency and rescue service providers, development aid volunteers and peacekeepers, journalists, diplomats, religious missionaries etc. Until now, we know only little about how the intensification of risks affects international mobility. Previous research has focused on the physical and psychological hazards of certain occupational groups, such as military (e.g. Kelly, Hutchings and Pinto, 2015) and war journalists/correspondents (e.g. Feinstein, Owen and Blair, 2002); other studies have considered the HRM issues of hostile settings (e.g. Bader and Schuster, 2015, Reade and Lee, 2012), highlighting the reality that terrorism-related threats can cause stress and impair expatriates’ attitudes and performance (Bader and Berg, 2013).
Despite these contributions and recent developments in the understanding of multiple forms of international mobility (Mayrhofer and Reiche, 2014; Shaffer et al., 2012), little is known about the people who work in dangerous and remote areas, such as offshore, war zones, humanitarian, and emergency settings. Therefore, this special issue aims at attracting scholarly research that contributes to the knowledge about (1) the dangerous settings (profit and non-profit) in which international mobility occurs, (2) the dangerous occupations (skilled or less-skilled) involving permanent, long-term or short-term international mobility, (3) the individual antecedents and outcomes related to these dangerous assignments, and (4) the organizational policies and practices aimed at managing these dangerous assignments.
Original quantitative and qualitative empirical research, theory development, case studies, and critical literature reviews from multiple disciplines (e.g. sociology, psychology, occupational health, migration, international travelling, risk and safety management, etc.) are appropriate for potential inclusion in this special issue. Also, multi-level approaches are particularly sought to accommodate individual, organizational, and societal perspectives. The following list of topics and research questions illustrate the aims and scope of the special issue. Please note that this list is not exhaustive and other ideas are welcome as well:
• Dangerous and extreme settings: What can we learn from the most frequent threats of dangerous international contexts, such as war and conflict scenarios, peacekeeping, humanitarian and health international assistance etc.? How can permanent threats be managed and overcome?
• Dangerous and extreme occupations: What are the most frequent forms of dangerous and extreme occupations in the context of international mobility? To what extent does the understanding of these occupations advance our theorization of international work and mobility?
• Danger and risk – individual antecedents: What are the main motivations and requirements of accepting dangerous international assignments? What effects do intrinsic motives (e.g. a specific calling, a religious duty, etc.) and extrinsic motives (e.g. compensation, career advancement, etc.) have on the acceptance, outcome and repetition of these assignments?
• Danger and risk – individual outcomes: How do individuals cope with dangerous international assignments, related to different aspects such as decision-making, family, work-life interface, work identity, compensation, career implications etc.? What are the differences in the underlying psychological processes, such as adjustment, commitment (organizational and occupational), and satisfaction of the workers in dangerous international assignments?
• Danger and risk – beyond the individual: How do family members handle the separation or the move into dangerous settings? What are the social networks established in the dangerous host location? How do individuals and/or family members cope, over the short and long-term, with extreme outcomes, such as injury, illness, burnout, disability, or death?
• Danger and risk – organizational policies and practices: What are an organization’s reasons to assign people in dangerous locations? What are the human resource management policies and practices aimed to attract, select, and prepare people for dangerous international assignments? What are the challenges associated with multiple reassignments? What are the main hardship policies and practices in view of accident, illness, death, kidnapping etc.? To what extent can for-profit organizations and multinational corporations (MNCs) learn from the organizational policies and practices of the non-profit organizations (NPO’s) operating in dangerous and extreme contexts?
• Danger and risk – the role of the employer: What is the organization’s ethical responsibility and under which conditions should assignments be terminated or not initiated in the first place? What is the employer’s duty of care required by law and social responsibility? How can employers guarantee safety for employees?
Submission Process and Timeline
To be considered for the special issue, manuscripts must be submitted no later than 30 November, 2016, 5:00pm Central European Time. Papers may be submitted prior to this deadline as well. Submitted papers will undergo a double-blind peer review process and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a special issue editor. The final acceptance is dependent on the review team’s judgments of the paper’s contribution on four key dimensions:
(1) Theoretical contribution: Does the article offer novel and innovative insights or meaningfully extend existing theory in the field of global mobility?
(2) Empirical contribution: Does the article offer novel findings and are the study design, data analysis, and results rigorous and appropriate in testing the hypotheses or research questions?
(3) Practical contribution: Does the article contribute to the improved management of global mobility?
(4) Contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the Journal of Global Mobility author guidelines, available at www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm. Please remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the reviewers. Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jgmob. For enquiries regarding the special issue please contact any of the three Guest Editors, Luisa Pinto, at lhpinto@fep.up.pt; Benjamin Bader, at benjamin.bader@leuphana.de and Tassilo Schuster, at tassilo.schuster@fau.de.
References
Al Ariss, A., Koall, I., Mustafa, Ö. and Vesa, S. (2013), 'Careers of skilled migrants', Journal of Management Development, Vol. 32 No. 2, pp. 148-151.
Bader, B. and Berg, N. (2013), ‘An empirical investigation of terrorism-induced stress on expatriate attitudes and performance’, Journal of International Management, Vol. 19 No. 2, pp. 163-175.
Bader, B. and Schuster, T. (2015), 'Expatriate Social Networks in Terrorism-Endangered Countries: An Empirical Analysis in Afghanistan, India, Pakistan, and Saudi Arabia', Journal of International Management, Vol. 21 No. 1, pp. 63-77.
Bader, B., Schuster, T. and Dickmann, M. (2015), 'Special issue of International Journal of Human Resource Management: Danger and risk as challenges for HRM: how to manage people in hostile environments', The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Vol. 26 No.15, pp. 2015-2017.
Cerdin, J. L., Diné, M. A. and Brewster, C. (2014), 'Qualified immigrants’ success: Exploring the motivation to migrate and to integrate', Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 45 No. 2, pp. 151–168.
Doherty, N., Dickmann, M. and Mills, T. (2011), 'Exploring the motives of company-backed and self-initiated expatriates', The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Vol. 22 No. 3, pp. 595-611.
Feinstein, A., Owen, J. and Blair, N. (2002), 'A Hazardous Profession: War, Journalists, and Psychopathology', American Journal of Psychiatry, Vol. 159 No. 9, pp. 1570-1575.
Fisher, K., Hutchings, K. and Pinto, L. H. (2015), 'Pioneers across war zones: The lived acculturation experiences of US female military expatriates', International Journal of Intercultural Relations, Vol. 49, pp. 265–277.
Froese, F. J. and Peltokorpi, V. (2013), 'Organizational expatriates and self-initiated expatriates: differences in cross-cultural adjustment and job satisfaction', The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Vol. 24 No.10, pp. 1953-1967.
Hippler, T. (2009), 'Why do they go? Empirical evidence of employees' motives for seeking or accepting relocation', The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Vol. 20 No. 6, pp. 1381 - 1401.
Mayrhofer, W. and Reiche, S. B., (2014), ’Guest editorial: context and global mobility: diverse global work arrangements’, Journal of Global Mobility, Vol. 2 No. 2.
OECD (2015), International Migration Outlook 2015. Paris: OECD Publishing.
Reade, C. and Lee, H. J. (2012), ‘Organizational Commitment in Time of War: Assessing the Impact and Attenuation of Employee Sensitivity to Ethnopolitical Conflict’, Journal of International Management, Vol. 18 No. 1, pp. 85–101.
Selmer, J. and Lauring, J. (2011), 'Acquired demographics and reasons to relocate among self-initiated expatriates', The International Journal of Human Resource Management, Vol. 22 No. 10, pp. 2055-2070.
Shaffer, M. A., Kraimer, M. L., Chen, Y. P. and Bolino, M. C. (2012), 'Choices, Challenges, and Career Consequences of Global Work Experiences', Journal of Management, Vol. 38 No. 4, pp. 1282-1327.
Special Guest Editors:
- Jeffrey J. Reuer (University of Colorado Boulder, USA, jeffrey.reuer@colorado.edu)
- Marjorie Lyles (Florida International University, USA, mlyles@fiu.edu)
- Samuel Adomako (University of Birmingham, UK, S.Adomako@bham.ac.uk)
- Riikka M Sarala (University of North Carolina at Greensboro, USA, rmsarala@uncg.edu)
- Jeoung Yul Lee (Hongik University, Korea / Chongqing Technology & Business University, China, jeoungyul@hongik.ac.kr)
- Consulting Senior Editor: Lucia Naldi (Jönköping University, Sweden, Lucia.Naldi@ju.se)
Submission window: January 2 - February 29, 2024
Submission deadline: February 29, 2024
Tentative publication date: Spring 2026
Related tracks: International Business; CSR and Business Ethics
Motivation for the Special Issue
This Special Issue focuses on the importance of political institutions, such as democratic and autocratic beliefs, and examines their impact on international business (IB). The traditional definition of democracy refers to a political system characterized by “free and fair elections, adult suffrage, protection of civil liberties, and few non-elected tutelary authorities (e.g., militaries, monarchies, religious bodies)” (Filippaios, Annan-Diab, Hermidas, & Theodoraki, 2019: 1104). Under democratic governance, political governance risks can be reduced, and multinational corporations (MNCs) can benefit from democracy. In this sense, because “a true democracy” can strongly protect political rights and civil liberties (Levitsky & Way, 2010), politically transparent and democratic host countries can attract MNCs from democratic home countries (Filippaios et al., 2019).
However, the intersection of the phenomenon of democracy and international business (IB) remains a conceptual, theoretical, and empirical research gap in the IB field except for a few papers (e.g., Arregle, Miller, Hitt, & Beamish, 2013; Filippaios et al., 2019). In leading management and IB journals, few studies have dealt with democracy in the business/management context from an IB perspective (c.f., Stratu-Strelet et al., 2023). Furthermore, among these few studies, only two papers have dealt with democracy and IB directly (Arregle et al., 2013; Filippaios et al., 2019). Within the broader fields of political science and economics, the relationship between democracy, political risk, and international trade has been examined, but few discussions have pertained to the level of international firms, such as MNCs or small international firms (e.g., global firms), and managerial decision-making. However, democratization plays a vital role for companies when deciding on the modus operandi for their foreign investment (As-Saber et al., 2001). In addition, democratization can leverage prosperity and free trade, which rely on the institutional determinants of both international and local micro- and macroeconomic mechanisms and interest group rivalry (Henisz & Mansfield, 2006). This research gap implies interesting avenues for further research, including examining firms in the context of less-developed, emerging markets and transition economies where “low intensity” democratic or autocratic political regimes prevail, which influences MNCs’ operations and globalization (Youngs, 2004).
To address this gap, this Special Issue aims to contribute to an interdisciplinary and heterogenous understanding of the role of democracy in the IB. Democracy is a socially important and relevant topic through which the IB can offer novel contributions with the broader goal of progress towards a better and socially more equitable world. For example, the literature on international political economy has examined the association between democratic governance and the degree of democracy in host countries (Asiedu & Lien, 2011; Greider, 1998; Ursprung & Harms, 2001), with conflicting results. Some studies have found that MNCs undertake FDI more in host countries where democratic governance prevails (McGuire & Olson, 1996; Ursprung & Harms, 2001). On the other hand, previous studies have revealed a negative association between MNCs’ FDI and democracies in host countries (Greider, 1998; Wintrobe, 1998) or even a non-linear association between them (Adam & Filippaios, 2007; Asiedu & Lien, 2011). Hence, all these studies are predominantly based on an international political economy perspective, and there is no clear conclusion. In addition, there has been limited exchange between the fields of international political economy and IB in translating the findings to the level of specific critical decisions for international firm managers. There is a need to bring interdisciplinary theorizing (from economics, political science, public administrative science, sociology, and psychology) to the field of IB in an integrative manner, with a focus on different types of international firms, their managers, employees, and stakeholders. Moreover, we encourage research that pursues creative or innovative ways of operationalizing democracy and democratic governance to capture its multiple dimensions.
Submissions should offer explicit and new theoretical contributions(s) but can build on relevant theoretical perspectives. It is crucial to employ a theoretical framework to link democracy—as a broader, cross-disciplinary field of interest—and IB to develop novel theoretical insights and contributions that can benefit decision-making in international firms.
We encourage multidisciplinary approaches and multilevel research designs. Researchers can study democracy in the IB context based on various data sources. For example, to investigate the impact of the political democracy of host countries and geographic regions on MNCs’ location selection, Arregle et al. (2013) used a composite index based on factor analysis on datasets from multiple data sources, such as Freedom House’s annual survey of political rights and civil liberties and the Political Constraint Index (POLCON) dataset (Henisz, 2000). To explore the impact of a host country’s political governance (democratic vs. autocratic regimes) on its attractiveness to MNCs, Filippaios et al. (2019) measured political governance (a composite index on the spectrum of democratic and autocratic regimes) based on Polity IV and civil liberties suppression based on Freedom House. In addition, research can utilize content analysis based on Internet searches, newspapers, magazines, academic journals, and surveys. Furthermore, qualitative research based on field research and interviews can offer unique insights into these phenomena.
Specific Focus of the Special Issue
Given the understudied research gap on the effects of democracy on IB and vice versa, as well as the related organizational outcomes and interaction effects, the themes of this call for papers are purposefully very wide. We offer the following areas and research questions as illustrative examples rather than an exhaustive list:
1. Democratic vs. autocratic political governance and organizations
- What are the effects of different dimensions of democracy on organizational processes across borders (e.g., international corporate social responsibility, international knowledge flows and spillovers, internationalization process and entry mode decisions, location selections, and so on) (Ursprung & Harms, 2001)?
- What are the relationships between institutions, political rights, civil liberties, and FDI outflows and inflows?
- How does human capital moderate the relationship between civil liberties and FDI motives?
- What is the relationship between global CSR practices and democracy? What are their implications on the behaviors of MNCs (Wettstein, Giuliani, Santangelo, & Stahl, 2019)? How do institutional voids in home countries of emerging market MNCs allow them to decouple CSR from their implementations (Tashman, Marano, & Kostova, 2018)?
2. Democracy vs. autocracy and global value chains, digitalization, environmental disruptions, institutions, and non-market strategy
- How do democracy and autocracy affect global value chains? What are their implications for the regionalization and localization of global value chains currently? What are the implications of this agenda for globalization/de-globalization and IB?
- How do digitalization and the fourth industrial revolution affect the relationship between democracy and MNCs’ FDI?
- How does democracy vs. autocracy affect the non-market strategies of MNCs? How do lobbying, bribery, corruption, and political connections affect MNCs’ FDI decisions and entry modes, as well as globalization/de-globalization?
- How do formal institutions and societal trust relate to democracy and IB (Gaur, Pattnaik, Singh, & Lee, 2022)?
3. Research across levels of analysis
Democracy can be conceptualized at various levels, such as the supranational, regional, national, corporate, subsidiary, functional area, team, or individual levels of analysis, as well. The examples are as follows:
- From the push-and-pull forces perspective, how does the home country’s political democracy influence the internationalization of an MNC in a host country (Arregle et al., 2013)? How does the host country’s “region-relative” political democracy influence the internationalization of an MNC (Arregle et al., 2013)?
- How can organizations maintain democratic rules across their overseas subsidiaries or operational locations to obtain social outcomes or create global efficiency and outcomes?
- How do advanced vs. emerging economies-based business groups differ in their emphasis on human rights or labor rights, and what are the implications for IB? How do different types of business groups (i.e., widely held, state-owned, and family owned) (Cuervo-Cazurra, 2006) affect MNCs’ human or labor rights orientation?
- How do organizations deal with human rights or labor rights across their global units (headquarters, regional headquarters, and subsidiaries), functions, or teams?
- How do entrepreneurs maintain the rule of human rights or labor rights when they expand their start-ups to the global markets? How do MNC CEOs or senior managers maintain human rights or labor rights for their employees in local subsidiaries, especially in the context of weak institutions?
Paper Development Workshop Conference and Symposium
To help authors further improve their papers, we will organize a paper development workshop conference during the summer of 2024. We invite the authors of papers that receive the decision to revise and resubmit their papers, but participation in the workshop is not a condition for the acceptance of a paper for the Special Issue. This opportunity allows these authors to receive constructive feedback from well-reputed journal editors, discussants, and conference participants, and can support these authors in strengthening and improving their manuscripts.
In addition, we plan to hold a symposium at a major academic conference in 2026 for papers selected for acceptance in our special issue to increase their visibility and impact.
Submission Process and Deadlines
All manuscripts will be reviewed as cohorts in this Special Issue. Manuscripts must be submitted between January 2 – February 29, 2024, at https://www.editorialmanager.com/jobr. All submissions will go through the JBR regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information on this call for a paper, please contact the Special Issue Editors.
Submission window: February 1st - September 30, 2024
Tentative publication date: Spring 2026
Related tracks: International Business; CSR and Business Ethics
Motivation for the Special Issue
This Special Issue focuses on the importance of political institutions, such as democratic and autocratic beliefs, and examines their impact on international business (IB). The traditional definition of democracy refers to a political system characterized by “free and fair elections, adult suffrage, protection of civil liberties, and few non-elected tutelary authorities (e.g., militaries, monarchies, religious bodies)” (Filippaios, Annan-Diab, Hermidas, & Theodoraki, 2019: 1104). Under democratic governance, political governance risks can be reduced, and multinational corporations (MNCs) can benefit from democracy. In this sense, because “a true democracy” can strongly protect political rights and civil liberties (Levitsky & Way, 2010), politically transparent and democratic host countries can attract MNCs from democratic home countries (Filippaios et al., 2019).
However, the intersection of the phenomenon of democracy and international business (IB) remains a conceptual, theoretical, and empirical research gap in the IB field except for a few papers (e.g., Arregle, Miller, Hitt, & Beamish, 2013; Filippaios et al., 2019). In leading management and IB journals, few studies have dealt with democracy in the business/management context from an IB perspective (c.f., Stratu-Strelet et al., 2023). Furthermore, among these few studies, only two papers have dealt with democracy and IB directly (Arregle et al., 2013; Filippaios et al., 2019). Within the broader fields of political science and economics, the relationship between democracy, political risk, and international trade has been examined, but few discussions have pertained to the level of international firms, such as MNCs or small international firms (e.g., global firms), and managerial decision-making. However, democratization plays a vital role for companies when deciding on the modus operandi for their foreign investment (As-Saber et al., 2001). In addition, democratization can leverage prosperity and free trade, which rely on the institutional determinants of both international and local micro- and macroeconomic mechanisms and interest group rivalry (Henisz & Mansfield, 2006). This research gap implies interesting avenues for further research, including examining firms in the context of less-developed, emerging markets and transition economies where “low intensity” democratic or autocratic political regimes prevail, which influences MNCs’ operations and globalization (Youngs, 2004).
To address this gap, this Special Issue aims to contribute to an interdisciplinary and heterogenous understanding of the role of democracy in the IB. Democracy is a socially important and relevant topic through which the IB can offer novel contributions with the broader goal of progress towards a better and socially more equitable world. For example, the literature on international political economy has examined the association between democratic governance and the degree of democracy in host countries (Asiedu & Lien, 2011; Greider, 1998; Ursprung & Harms, 2001), with conflicting results. Some studies have found that MNCs undertake FDI more in host countries where democratic governance prevails (McGuire & Olson, 1996; Ursprung & Harms, 2001). On the other hand, previous studies have revealed a negative association between MNCs’ FDI and democracies in host countries (Greider, 1998; Wintrobe, 1998) or even a non-linear association between them (Adam & Filippaios, 2007; Asiedu & Lien, 2011). Hence, all these studies are predominantly based on an international political economy perspective, and there is no clear conclusion. In addition, there has been limited exchange between the fields of international political economy and IB in translating the findings to the level of specific critical decisions for international firm managers. There is a need to bring interdisciplinary theorizing (from economics, political science, public administrative science, sociology, and psychology) to the field of IB in an integrative manner, with a focus on different types of international firms, their managers, employees, and stakeholders. Moreover, we encourage research that pursues creative or innovative ways of operationalizing democracy and democratic governance to capture its multiple dimensions.
Submissions should offer explicit and new theoretical contributions(s) but can build on relevant theoretical perspectives. It is crucial to employ a theoretical framework to link democracy—as a broader, cross-disciplinary field of interest—and IB to develop novel theoretical insights and contributions that can benefit decision-making in international firms.
We encourage multidisciplinary approaches and multilevel research designs. Researchers can study democracy in the IB context based on various data sources. For example, to investigate the impact of the political democracy of host countries and geographic regions on MNCs’ location selection, Arregle et al. (2013) used a composite index based on factor analysis on datasets from multiple data sources, such as Freedom House’s annual survey of political rights and civil liberties and the Political Constraint Index (POLCON) dataset (Henisz, 2000). To explore the impact of a host country’s political governance (democratic vs. autocratic regimes) on its attractiveness to MNCs, Filippaios et al. (2019) measured political governance (a composite index on the spectrum of democratic and autocratic regimes) based on Polity IV and civil liberties suppression based on Freedom House. In addition, research can utilize content analysis based on Internet searches, newspapers, magazines, academic journals, and surveys. Furthermore, qualitative research based on field research and interviews can offer unique insights into these phenomena.
Specific Focus of the Special Issue
Given the understudied research gap on the effects of democracy on IB and vice versa, as well as the related organizational outcomes and interaction effects, the themes of this call for papers are purposefully very wide. We offer the following areas and research questions as illustrative examples rather than an exhaustive list:
1. Democratic vs. autocratic political governance and organizations
- What are the effects of different dimensions of democracy on organizational processes across borders (e.g., international corporate social responsibility, international knowledge flows and spillovers, internationalization process and entry mode decisions, location selections, and so on) (Ursprung & Harms, 2001)?
- What are the relationships between institutions, political rights, civil liberties, and FDI outflows and inflows?
- How does human capital moderate the relationship between civil liberties and FDI motives?
- What is the relationship between global CSR practices and democracy? What are their implications on the behaviors of MNCs (Wettstein, Giuliani, Santangelo, & Stahl, 2019)? How do institutional voids in home countries of emerging market MNCs allow them to decouple CSR from their implementations (Tashman, Marano, & Kostova, 2018)
- What are the repercussions of well-established economic institutions and protection laws in home and host countries to attract FDI inflows (Wong, 2016)
2. Democracy vs. autocracy and global value chains, digitalization, environmental disruptions, institutions, and non-market strategy
- How do democracy and autocracy affect global value chains? What are their implications for the regionalization and localization of global value chains currently? What are the implications of this agenda for globalization/de-globalization and IB?
- How do digitalization and the fourth industrial revolution affect the relationship between democracy and MNCs’ FDI?
- How does democracy vs. autocracy affect the non-market strategies of MNCs? How do lobbying, bribery, corruption, and political connections affect MNCs’ FDI decisions and entry modes, as well as globalization/de-globalization?
- How do formal institutions and societal trust relate to democracy and IB (Gaur, Pattnaik, Singh, & Lee, 2022)?
3. Research across levels of analysis
Democracy can be conceptualized at various levels, such as the supranational, regional, national, corporate, subsidiary, functional area, team, or individual levels of analysis, as well. The examples are as follows:
- From the push-and-pull forces perspective, how does the home country’s political democracy influence the internationalization of an MNC in a host country (Arregle et al., 2013)? How does the host country’s “region-relative” political democracy influence the internationalization of an MNC (Arregle et al., 2013)?
- How can organizations maintain democratic rules across their overseas subsidiaries or operational locations to obtain social outcomes or create global efficiency and outcomes?
- How do advanced vs. emerging economies-based business groups differ in their emphasis on human rights or labor rights, and what are the implications for IB? How do different types of business groups (i.e., widely held, state-owned, and family owned) (Cuervo-Cazurra, 2006) affect MNCs’ human or labor rights orientation?
- How do organizations deal with human rights or labor rights across their global units (headquarters, regional headquarters, and subsidiaries), functions, or teams?
- How do entrepreneurs maintain the rule of human rights or labor rights when they expand their start-ups to the global markets? How do MNC CEOs or senior managers maintain human rights or labor rights for their employees in local subsidiaries, especially in the context of weak institutions?
Paper Development Workshop Conference and Symposium
To help authors further improve their papers, we will organize a paper development workshop conference during February of 2025. We invite the authors of papers that receive the decision to revise and resubmit their papers, but participation in the workshop is not a condition for the acceptance of a paper for the Special Issue. This opportunity allows these authors to receive constructive feedback from well-reputed journal editors, discussants, and conference participants and can support these authors in strengthening and improving their manuscripts.
In addition, we plan to hold a symposium at a major academic conference in 2026 for papers selected for acceptance in our special issue to increase their visibility and impact.
Submission Process and Deadlines
All manuscripts will be reviewed as cohorts in this Special Issue. Manuscripts must be submitted between February 1st and September 30, 2024, at https://www.editorialmanager.com/jobr. All submissions will go through the JBR regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information on this call for a paper, please contact the Special Issue Editors.
Are you interested in contributing a chapter to a new book project titled Digital Entrepreneurship and the Global Economy (Routledge, 2023)?
Digital entrepreneurship refers to business activities in the digital media and information and information and communication technologies. It encompasses entrepreneurial pursuits in areas such as artificial intelligence, blockchain, internet of things, and augmented reality among many others. The digital economy is expected to bring about $60 Trillion in revenue by 2025.
Drawing from international contributors from different countries, the book aims to be a key resource on digital entrepreneurship within an international context. The intended audience will be academics, corporate leaders, entrepreneurs, government leaders, consultants and policy makers worldwide.
In this book project, I am gathering academics, scholars and thought leaders from around the world to provide their perspective on digital entrepreneurship.
Potential chapter topics are shown below:
Chapter Title Word Count
Chapter 1 |
Introduction: digital entrepreneurship in a global context |
4000 |
Chapter 2 |
Understanding digital entrepreneurship |
4000 |
Chapter 3 |
Challenges in digital entrepreneurship |
4000 |
Chapter 4 |
Opportunities in digital entrepreneurship |
4000 |
Chapter 5 |
Digital entrepreneurship in small ventures and start-ups |
4000 |
Chapter 6 |
Corporate digital entrepreneurship |
4000 |
Chapter 7 |
Digital entrepreneurship and its local and international ecosystem |
4000 |
Chapter 8 |
Digital entrepreneurship and policy formation |
4000 |
Chapter 9 |
The future of digital entrepreneurship in a global economy |
4000 |
Chapter 10 |
Conclusion |
4000 |
A country or international angle on the above topics is highly recommended. Proposals for topics outside of the above list may be accepted, provided that there is a compelling rationale behind it. Chapter contributors will have over a year to complete their chapters. Chapter due date is July 15, 2022.
If you are interested in contributing a chapter, kindly submit the following to me via email in one MS Word file on or before March 15, 2021 : 1) Proposed title from the list of chapters above or an alternative topic, 2) 3 sentence abstract, 3) 3 sentence bio of chapter contributor(s).
I look forward to hearing from you, and in working together to advance knowledge of digital entrepreneurship within an international context.
Dr. J. Mark Munoz
Professor, Management and International Business
Dwayne Andreas Endowed Professor of Business, Millikin University
Tel Nos (217) 433-1425
Email : jmunoz@millikin.edu
Dr. J. Mark Munoz is currently co-editing a book with Drs. Alka Maurya, Loveleen Gaur and Gurinder Singh titled “Disruptive Technologies and International Business: Challenges and Opportunities for Emerging Markets” (DeGruyter, 2022). Might you be interested in contributing a chapter?
This book project is very relevant to the AIB community for the following reasons: 1) it has an international business theme, 2) it underscores the importance of disruptive technologies in today’s global business environment, 3) it promotes collaboration of scholarship across countries, 4) it provides an opportunity for scholars and researchers to showcase their work to a global audience, and 5) it helps advance the understanding of the challenges and opportunities relating to disruptive technologies in emerging markets.
Various disruptive technologies are reshaping organizations and impacting economies worldwide. Drawing from international contributors from different countries, the book aims to be a key resource on disruptive technologies and international business. The intended audience will be academics, corporate leaders, entrepreneurs, government leaders, consultants and policy makers worldwide.
In this book project, we are gathering academics, scholars and thought leaders from around the world to provide their perspective of disruptive technologies:
Potential chapter topics are shown below:
Chapter Title Word Count
1 |
New age technologies and disruption of globalization |
7,000 – 10,000 |
2 |
Smart contracts and international business |
7,000 – 10,000 |
3 |
Technologies, factories of the future and innovation districts: The socio-spatial reorganization of international business |
7,000 – 10,000 |
4 |
IoT, smart cities and international business |
7,000 – 10,000 |
5 |
3D printing and international business |
7,000 – 10,000 |
6 |
Block chain and payment in international business |
7,000 – 10,000 |
7 |
Block chain and global value chains |
7,000 – 10,000 |
8 |
Block chain and documentation in international business |
7,000 – 10,000 |
9 |
New divisions of labor under Industry 4.0 |
7,000 – 10,000 |
10 |
E-business and international trade |
7,000 – 10,000 |
11 |
Digital marketing and globalization |
7,000 – 10,000 |
12 |
Managing business in the era of digital disruption; Unleashing the next wave of innovation |
7,000 – 10,000 |
Proposals for topics outside of the above list may be accepted, provided that there is a compelling rationale behind it.
Chapter contributors will have over a year to complete their chapters. Chapter due date is May 15, 2021.
If you are interested in contributing a chapter, kindly submit the following to jmunoz@millikin.edu in one MS Word file on or before Feb 15, 2021 : 1) Proposed title from the list of chapters above or an alternative topic, 2) 3 sentence abstract, 3) 3 sentence bio of chapter contributor(s).
Divergence, Convergence, or Crossvergence in International Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management Review (HRMR) announces a call for papers for a special issue on “Divergence, Convergence, or Crossvergence in International Human Resource Management”.
The special issue is edited by Professor Akram Al Ariss (Université de Toulouse, Toulouse Business School) and Professor Yusuf Sidani (American University of Beirut, Olayan Business School).
Whether organizations and their HR practices are converging—becoming more similar—(convergence theory) or diverging in their practices (divergence theory) is a matter of intense scholarly interest. In their award-winning paper about values evolution, Ralston et al. (1993; 1997), proposed the crossvergence theory of values evolution. This perspective marked a departure from the traditional convergence/divergence theory of values formation. The convergence theory posited that values develop in sync with the prevailing technology in a particular society given the impact of technological development on other educational and institutional structures. As societies become more similar to one another in terms of industrialization and use of technology, values will eventually converge to Western capitalism, given that this is where most industrialization has traditionally occurred (Ralston, 2008). The divergence theory, on the other hand, argues that the socio-cultural influences are typically the prevailing forces that lead societal members to adopt specific values irrespective of other external drivers. The crossvergence theory argues instead that it is in fact a combination of sociocultural forces as well as “business ideology influences” that is the major force behind the formation of value systems. A similar term that has been coined in HR research is the “bounded convergence” perspective, which argues that HRM practices sometimes pursue hybrid models of HR (Zhang, 2012).
Congruent to the above, this CFP invites scholars to explore these ideas in the realm of HR practices. To what extent do HR practices converge in line with what may be considered best practices in that regard, which are mainly developed in Western societies? Or is it the case that in any given society, sociocultural practices particular to that society have more impact in determining that society’s HR practices? Or are we instead witnessing a realization of the crossvergence theory, wherein a combination of factors molds HR practices. The crossvergence theory, as far as HR practices are concerned, has been understudied in HR scholarship. From the papers we are calling for, we would like to build an understanding of the trends of convergence/divergence/crossvergence of HRM processes and systems. Earlier HR research seems to be hinting at crossvergence in certain areas. Sidani and Al Ariss (2013), for example, suggest that MNCs operate in such a way that certain practices converge (given their global usage) while other practices diverge (given local contexts) thus leaning toward a crossvergence perspective. Brewster, Wood, and Brookes (2008) also find evidence of both similarities and differences in IHRM practices. Brewster (2004) presents what he terms as “European perspectives on human resource management” suggesting the existence of institutional and cultural factors that do not conform to a pure convergence theory. Likewise, Rowley and Benson (2002) explore the difficulties and challenges facing HRM convergence theory in the Asian context (please refer to the SI in HRMR about the Chinese context, Zhang, 2012). Other contributions to HRMR also explore the existence of country/region-specific HR practices (for example Gooderham & Nordhaug, 2011; Huo, Huang, & Napier, 2002; Mayrhofer, Brewster, Morley, & Ledolter, 2011; Morley, 2004). The questions that we ask in this SI cover issues including to what extent we have a global HRM versus region-specific model of HR (North American model, European model, Asian model, Middle Eastern model, Nordic model, etc.)? Where do these systems meet and where do they part both in theory and in practice? In this special issue, we are interested in discourses that are currently present in the English language in various parts of the world. We are also interested in under-represented regions of the world, such as the Asian, African, and Latin American contexts in addition to other world experiences. We encourage researchers whose work entails investigating work practices in non-Western contexts to share their perspectives of HRM within their own contexts. The idea is to attract papers addressing these issues at the micro (i.e., individual and group) level with openness to the macro (organizational and societal) levels of analysis.
Some relevant questions (non-exhaustive list) are as follows:
- Are the assumptions of HRM that we understand in the West applicable in other world regions? What are the major concepts, models, and theories of HRM in those non-Western contexts and how do these enrich our understanding of divergence/convergence/convergence perspectives?
- What are some of the comparative features of HRM systems in different parts of the world, and at different levels of analysis? What does this tell us about HRM and allied fields (e.g. organizational behavior, industrial/organizational psychology, labor relations)?
- What are the roles of individuals, groups, organizations, and institutions in creating similar or different approaches to HRM?
- How is HRM practiced in countries where most of the major employers are large government affiliated employers? What differences do we see in such contexts in areas such as personnel selection, compensation, performance appraisal, attraction and retention, training and development, among others?
- HRM in Western contexts assumes a certain level of ‘rule of law’. How are HRM processes understood at the individual, group, and organizational levels where the rule of law is deficient or barely existent?
- What key new trends in HRM can be identified as international/global (e.g. Global Talent Management)? How do such trends stimulate empirical research, as well as critical examination of existing concepts, models, and theories?
- What is the impact of national cultures in developing a specific understanding for the role of HRM? Should we expect that variances along such dimensions (i.e. Hofstede, GLOBE etc.) would be reflected in different HR systems?
Consistent with HRMR’s scope, conceptual and theoretical papers are welcomed (not empirical). Papers should be submitted according to the journal’s guidelines:
http://ees.elsevier.com/humres/
Deadlines:
15th September 2014: Submit abstracts (maximum 1000 words) to the guest-editors.
15th October 2014: Invitations to submit full papers will be sent out.
15th April 2015: Submission of full papers for refereeing.
15th May 2015: Authors will receive feedback.
15th September 2015: Full papers with revisions will be due.
2016: Journal volume to be published.
REFERENCES
Brewster, C. (2004). European perspectives on human resource management. Human Resource Management Review, 14(4), 365-382.
Brewster, C., Wood, G., & Brookes, M. (2008). Similarity, isomorphism or duality? Recent survey evidence on the human resource management policies of multinational corporations. British Journal of Management, 19(4), 320-342.
Gooderham, P., & Nordhaug, O. (2011). One European model of HRM? Cranet empirical contributions. Human Resource Management Review, 21(1), 27-36.
Huo, Y. P., Huang, H. J., & Napier, N. K. (2002). Divergence or convergence: a cross‐national comparison of personnel selection practices. Human Resource Management, 41(1), 31-44.
Mayrhofer, W., Brewster, C., Morley, M. J., & Ledolter, J. (2011). Hearing a different drummer? Convergence of human resource management in Europe—A longitudinal analysis. Human Resource Management Review, 21(1), 50-67.
Morley, M. J. (2004). Contemporary debates in European human resource management: Context and content. Human Resource Management Review,14(4), 353-364.
Rowley, C., & Benson, J. (2002). Convergence and divergence in Asian human resource management. California Management Review, 44(2).
Ralston, D. A. (2008). The crossvergence perspective: Reflections and projections. Journal of International Business Studies, 39(1), 27-40.
Ralston, D. A., Holt, D. H., Terpstra, R. H., & Kai-Cheng, Y. (1997). The impact of national culture and economic ideology on managerial work values: A study of the United States, Russia, Japan, and China. Journal of International Business Studies, 177-207.
Ralston, D. A., Gustafson, D. J., Cheung, F. M., & Terpstra, R. H. (1993). Differences in managerial values: A study of US, Hong Kong and PRC managers. Journal of International Business Studies, 249-275.
Sidani, Y., & Al Ariss, A. (2013) Institutional and corporate drivers of global talent management: Evidence from the Arab Gulf region. Journal of World Business (2013), http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jwb.2013.11.005.
Zhang, M. (2012). The development of human resource management in China: An overview. Human Resource Management Review, 22(3), 161-164.
Guest Editors: Professor Sanjoy Sircar, and Professor SK Shanthi, and Editorial Assistant: K. Srinivasa Reddy (ismo.special@gmail.com).
Key benefits to the authors: There is one best paper award, which will be awarded by the Guest Editors of this issue of ISMO. The forthcoming issue of International Studies of Management & Organization (Ranked “B” in ABDC Rankings and Indexed in Scopus) focuses on Diversification Strategy of Firms in Emerging Economies and its objective is to shed light on uncovered strategic decisions of emerging-market firms in the existing international business (IB) literature. The concept of diversification strategy has been significantly investigated in developed market enterprises (DMEs), and covered topics such as related and unrelated firm performance, motives behind international diversification and cultural aspects. Corporate diversification was found to improve shareholders value in the short-run and enhances firm value in the long-run (e.g. Erdorf et al. 2013; Purkayastha et al. 2012). However, does diversification offer extra returns to the shareholders and improve the firm’s value in firms in emerging-markets? What are the determinants (motives) of emerging-market firms' diversification choice? Does diversification strengthen the firm competitiveness? Most of the studies conclude that diversification is the choice of top-level management for maximizing firm value and shareholders premium. Thus, a recent review on corporate diversification and firm value by Erdorf et al. (2013) concluded that firm’s value is influenced by industry-specific and macroeconomic factors, and that those factors may vary for different organizations. They also suggest that diversified firms, as compared with focused firms, seem to have higher returns, and tend to acquire discounted business divisions. Conversely, it is also argued that there is a growing amount of academic research on various aspects of management in emerging markets but few scholars have studied diversification-strategy using fewer samples (e.g. Mishra and Akbar 2007). Therefore, this issue will bridge the existing knowledge gap and will add knowledge to the IB literature on corporate diversification and firm value, especially of firms in emerging economies. With this backdrop, the guest editors invite scholars to submit their papers on the following themes or other related issues.
The papers can be conceptual, empirical, and case-study based.
- Diversification, learning and resource-seeking
- Costs and benefits of diversification strategy
- Diversification of state-owned, public and private enterprises
- Diversification and group affiliation (e.g. Khanna and Palepu 2000)
- Concentric diversification and firm performance
- Conglomerate diversification and firm performance
- Market expansion, product diversification and firm performance
- Determinants of concentric vs. conglomerate diversification
- Diversification announcements and shareholders value creation
- Diversification of firms within emerging markets/developed, and comparison
- Diversification of family-business enterprises
- Diversification of small- and medium-sized enterprises
- Private equity investments, acquisitions and diversification
- Diversification and its effect on capital structure
- Diversification and firm competitiveness
- Diversification and corporate governance
- Cross-border diversification strategies and firm performance (e.g. Donnelly 2013; Luo and Tung 2007)
- Critical aspects and risks in corporate diversification
- Comparative studies with reference to above themes
Case studies development and analysis (Single or Multi) Submission and Publication Information:
Submission of First Draft via e-mail: 30 April, 2014
First round review comments returned to authors: 30 September, 2014
Resubmission of First-round selected papers via e-mail: 31 December, 2014
Second round review comments returned to authors (If necessary): 28 February, 2015
Final Decision: 31 March, 2015 Number of papers: 4 to 6 papers
Submission guidelines: The papers should confer with the theme. It is advised that there is a greater interest in selecting papers, which are comparative, empirical and case-study based. The papers must be relevant to theory testing/development, and/or policy implications. Further, authors should submit their papers in structured format that includes abstract, introduction, literature review, methodology, results and discussions and conclusions. (http://www.mesharpe.com/journal_info/IMOcontrib_guidelines.pdf). Please do not hesitate to contact the Editorial Assistant for more information.
References: Donnelly, N. 2013. “The Emergence and Internationalization of Irish MNEs – Exploring “Small Country Effects.” International Studies of Management & Organization 43(1): 26-51. Erdorf, S.: T. Hartmann-Wendels: N. Heinrichs, and M. Matz. 2013. “Corporate Diversification and Firm Value: A Survey of Recent Literature.” Financial Markets and Portfolio Management 27(2): 187-215. Khanna, T., and K. Palepu. 2000. “Is Group Affiliation Profitable in Emerging Markets? An Analysis of Diversified Indian Business Groups.” Journal of Finance 55(2): 867-891. Luo, Y., and R. L. Tung. 2007. “International Expansion of Emerging Market Enterprises: A Spring Board Perspective.” Journal of International Business Studies 38(4): 481-498. Mishra, A., and M. Akbar. 2007. “Empirical Examination of Diversification Strategies in Business Groups: Evidence from Emerging Markets.” International Journal of Emerging Markets 2(1): 22-38. Purkayastha, S.: T. S., Manolova: and L. F. Edelman. 2012. “Diversification and Performance in Developed and Emerging Market Contexts: A Review of the Literature.” International Journal of Management Reviews 14(1): 18-38.
Special Issue Editors
- Phillip C. Nell (Vienna University of Economics and Business, Austria and Copenhagen Business School, Denmark, phillip.nell@wu.ac.at)
- Philip Kappen (Copenhagen Business School, Denmark, pka.smg@cbs.dk)
- Tomi Laamanen (University of St. Gallen, Switzerland, tomi.laamanen@unisg.ch)
Deadline for submission: June 30, 2015
INTRODUCTION
Headquarters (HQ) activities have long been a subject of research in management, strategy, and international business. This research focuses on activities such as control and coordination of subunits, resource allocation, conflict resolution, the orchestration of innovations, and many more sometimes subsumed under the term “parenting” activities.
Interestingly, recent empirical evidence suggests that firms seem to use increasingly fine-grained and complex approaches to organize their HQ activities and they increasingly locate these activities abroad. For example, Desai (2009: 1284) formulates that we are now witnessing firms that are “Bermuda-incorporated, Paris-headquartered (...), listed on the NYSE [New York Stock Exchange] with US-style investor protections and disclosure rules, a chief information officer in Bangalore, a chief finance officer in Brussels and a chief operating officer in Beijing”. What seems to emerge is a picture where not only regular value chain activities are increasingly “disaggregated” and “dispersed” (cf. Contractor, Kumar, Kundu, and Pedersen, Journal of Management Studies Special Issue, 2010) but where this applies also to HQ activities.
Although much is known of individual HQ units (e.g. corporate HQs) and individual HQ activities, we believe that these recent trends have not been focused upon sufficiently in extant research. Furthermore, extant research is relatively silent regarding the overall structuring of HQ activities. In fact, much of the empirical and theoretical work in the past has used a relatively simple concept of the HQ frequently viewing it as a single, identifiable unit at the apex of the organization at one particular location. This work has produced very valuable insights but the assumption of the HQ as a single, identifiable unit located at one particular location seems to be increasingly at odds with reality.
What is the impact of relaxing this assumption for our theories that explain vertical relationships within firms, the way how hierarchy functions, and the way how responsibilities are distributed between headquarters and subunits? Given the trend towards more disaggregated and dispersed HQ activities we may suffer from a reductive fallacy that impairs our understanding of the way contemporary firms are managed.
The objective of this special issue is to address the lack of attention to such complex HQ configurations. The contributions we envision would have to explicitly break with the dominant literature viewing the HQ as a single, identifiable unit located at one specific location. We call for contributions to the special issue that could significantly enhance our understanding around the nature and the consequences of complex HQ configurations, building on the notion of increasing disaggregation and dispersion that we borrow from the extensive work on value chain activities.
While we are interested in gaining a deeper understanding of the phenomenon we are also interested in receiving manuscripts that make substantial theoretical contributions. That is, we think that many theories could benefit from being exposed to the complexity of contemporary HQ configurations which allows for testing, verifying, and fine-tuning of these theories.
Note that we do not favor any particular epistemological or theoretical perspective and we wish to attract a diverse range of papers. We anticipate submissions focusing on a variety of analysis levels. We also think that the Special Issue topic is conducive to multilevel methodologies. Thus, investigations could focus on and combine HQ activity levels such as corporate HQs, divisional HQs, executive teams, individual HQ or subunit managers, or the entire HQ system. Questions that papers might explore include, but are not limited to:
Determinants and nature of complex configurations of HQ activities
- What are the circumstances under which complex HQ configurations occur more frequently?
- Are there institutional or industry-specific pressures for particular types of configurations?
- How and why do HQ configurations evolve over time?
- How are complex HQ configurations linked to a firm’s boundary decisions?
Value-creation (or destruction) by complex HQ configurations
- How are value-adding functions, including coordination, control, and entrepreneurial roles, influenced?
- How do geographically distant divisional headquarters activities complement corporate-level headquarters activities and how is this coordinated?
- How do dispersed executive teams coordinate their work to influence their businesses? How are potential drawbacks of such configurations kept at bay?
- What is the role played by temporarily assigned headquarters-roles to specific subunits such as centers of excellence?
- What are the potential parenting advantages and disadvantages of complex HQ configurations?
- How does the changing configuration of HQ activities shape corporate vs. decentralized strategic initiatives and attention-processes?
- How are inter-dependencies between dispersed HQ activities managed?
Consequences of complex HQ configurations
- How does the level of complexity of the HQ configuration influence HQ-subsidiary relationships in multinational companies?
- How are internal dynamics in the firm, such as resource allocation or internal bargaining processes, affected?
- What is the effect of institutional distances between HQ activities on the legitimacy of the headquarters both within and outside the firm? How does this influence modes of control or the adoption of corporate practices?
- How are information asymmetries, principal-agent relationships, or parenting capabilities affected by disaggregation and dispersion of HQ activities?
SUBMISSION PROCESS AND DEADLINES
- Papers will be reviewed following the JMS double-blind review process.
- Submissions should be prepared in accordance with the JMS Style Guide for Authors (see http://www.blackwellpublishing.com/pdf/JMS_Prep_of_Manuscripts.pdf).
- Manuscripts should be electronically submitted by e-mail to JMSComplexHQ@wu.ac.at.
The deadline for submissions is June 30, 2015
- Papers will be reviewed by the editors as soon as they are received and, if suitable for the special issue, immediately entered into double-blind review processes in accordance with JMS standard procedures.
- Please direct any questions regarding this Special Issue to the guest editors Phillip Nell (phillip.nell@wu.ac.at), Philip Kappen (pka.smg@cbs.dk), or Tomi Laamanen (tomi.laamanen@unisg.ch)
Manuscript Development Workshop
- The guest editors of this special issue are planning to hold a manuscript development workshop on January 28-29, 2016 in Vienna, Austria.
- Those authors who receive an invitation for an R&R will be invited to attend this workshop.
- Please note that the participation at the workshop does not guarantee acceptance of the paper in the special issue. Furthermore, attendance is also not a prerequisite for publication.
Guest editors
Shasha Zhao, Middlesex University, London, United Kingdom
Paul N Gooderham, NHH Norwegian School of Economics, Bergen, Norway
Anne-Wil Harzing, Middlesex University, London, United Kingdom
Marina Papanastassiou, Middlesex University, London, United Kingdom
About critical perspectives on international business
The mission of cpoib is to exclusively support critical reflections on the nature and impact of contemporary international business (IB) activities around the globe from inter-, trans- and multidisciplinary perspectives. The journal places a special emphasis on scholarly works that question the hegemony of multinational enterprises (MNEs) and evaluate the effects of their IB activities on the global economy and national societies.
Scope and Rationale of the Special Issue
CPOIB invites the submission of articles that address the theme: “Do Multinational Enterprises Contribute to, or Reduce Global Inequality?”. The term ‘inequality’ refers to various societal and economic phenomena inside or across nation states, such as income, gender, social class, economic conditions, welfare, as well as other wider developmental issues.
Although the relationship between nation states and MNEs has been historically important, dominant IB thinking has traditionally paid considerably greater attention to firm level factors of MNEs such as strategy, structure, and performance. With some exceptions such as Ackroyd and Murphy (2013), Lee and Gereffi (2015), and Roberts and Dörrenbächer (2016), IB scholars have shown relatively sparse interest in the societal, economic, and cultural consequences of the emergence and growth of MNEs. However, a recent study by Piketty (2014) suggests that the world is witnessing rising inequalities in both advanced and emerging economies, a reversal of the post Second World War trend towards greater equality and integration. A critical question worth asking is what role (if any) MNEs play in the development of this trend. In April 2017 this question was a core plenary theme at the Academy of International Business UKI Chapter Conference. Panelists and delegates were divided on the issue, but several presenters argued that MNEs operating in contexts of institutional voids generally generate significant inequality.
MNEs are facing an increasingly competitive and crowded global market, which has led to a rapid expansion of dispersed value-chain activities in search of greater and more sustainable competitive advantages. Two related developments contribute to the necessity and opportunity for greater dispersion. At the firm level, we see an intensified exercise by MNEs to fine-slice and (re)locate global value-chain activities to the most advantageous locations (Buckley 2009; Mudambi and Santangelo, 2016). At the country level, we note dynamic and heterogeneous shifts in market and institutional conditions of home and foreign nation states. For instance, some recent evidence shows that, for the first time in history, a significant growth in advanced-economy MNE innovation investment is taking place in emerging economies (Awate et al., 2015; Jha et al., 2015). This is predominantly due to institutional improvements in these countries and preferential government policies for promoting and supporting innovation activities (Liu et al., 2011). Similarly, continuous technological development and changes in manufacturing capabilities in the case of advanced economies as well as improvement in market and institutional conditions in the case of emerging economies are seen to create new learning and growth opportunities for emerging-economy MNEs. UNCTAD (2015) reports that the largest outward investment from emerging economies to advanced economies as well as other emerging economies has occurred in the past five years. As such, nation states around the world are experiencing the most extensive and dynamic MNE activities in their local territories to date (Clougherty et al., 2017).
However, negative outcomes of MNE activities are increasingly noted. For instance, MNEs that were once trusted are found to act illegitimately across host countries. A recent case is the Volkswagen ‘Dieselgate’. In September 2015, the company admitted to cheating official environmental standard requirements by installing software inside each vehicle to falsify system information (Howe, 2015). A survey initiated by Legatum Institute London, an international think tank for promoting policies to address poverty, reveals that the public holds largely negative views of MNEs (Withnall, 2015). The survey covered seven nations, including advanced (Britain, USA, and Germany) and emerging economies (Brazil, India, Indonesia, and Thailand) and revealed that 90 per cent of respondents believe MNEs are not ‘clean’ and a substantial majority agree that MNE actions in host countries contribute to a growing inequality gap. Some other worth noting examples include the case of Bangladesh where Lim and Prakash (2017) find that Western brand owners often pressurise local suppliers to fulfill orders, causing the suppliers to sustain wages to bare minimum and ignore extremely poor working conditions. This subsequently led to the collapse of a factory building where over 1,000 workers (mostly female) died. In the case of the UK, Taylor and Driffield (2005) find empirical evidence which shows that inward investment by MNEs leads to 11 per cent increase in wage inequality because of shift in demand for new labour skills. On the other hand, some positive cases remain. For example, in a similar study on wage and labour skill, but in the case of Ireland, Figini and Görg (1999) find that the rise in wage inequality because of inward investment is temporary and drops eventually. In the case of China, Greaney and Li (2016) find no evidence that MNEs are to be blamed for the prominent issue of urban-rural income inequality.
Going beyond these scattered examples as to how MNEs contribute to inequality, this special issue seeks papers which conceptually or empirically advance the debate on the relationship between MNEs and inequality. Whilst papers that argue in favor of MNEs contributing to equality are welcome, we are particularly keen to see papers which offer new theoretical or empirical angles useful in discussing the role of MNEs in contributing to inequality.
Papers focusing on the following specific themes should consider submitting to the special issue
However the list is by no means exhaustive or restrictive:
- Whether and how do MNEs contribute to (or reduce) inequality in income, gender, social class, economic development, welfare, or other wider developmental issues?
- Whether and to what extent does MNEs’ foreign direct investment (FDI) impact on multi-level factors of host countries (macro-level: e.g. culture, institutions; micro-level: e.g. individual, family)?
- Whether and how do MNEs contribute to (or reduce) subnational inequality in the case of emerging economies? What can be learnt from possible inter-regional differences?
- Whether and how do MNEs contribute to (or reduce) subnational inequality in the case of advanced economies? What can be learnt from possible inter-regional differences?
- What, if any, are the similarities or differences between advanced-economy MNEs and emerging-economy MNEs in terms of their contribution to (or reduction of) inequality? What can be learnt from these similarities or differences?
- Whether and to what extent do emerging economies and advanced economies experience different or similar impact of MNE FDI activities? That is, do emerging economies benefit or suffer more in comparison to advanced economies, or vice versa?
- What methodological challenges and solutions exist when collecting empirical data in relation to MNEs and inequality (and equality)? What are the methodological considerations when measuring impact of MNE activities in host economies?
- What indigenous insights can enrich the existing literature on the relationship between MNEs and inequality to inform managerial practices and future research?
- What are new conceptual or empirical insights into policy-making or managerial challenges in inequality reduction? What theoretical and practical lessons can be learnt from cases of a reduction or increase in inequality? What can be useful policy frameworks that effectively address the impact of MNEs on inequality?
Submission Process and Deadlines
Submission Instructions
- All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review.
- Please use the Author guidelines
- Papers will be reviewed in accordance with cpoib guidelines. Submissions to this special issue of cpoib are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts portal
Deadlines
- Submission deadline: 31st December 2017
- Estimated publication date: late 2018 or early 2019
More Information
Enquiries about the special issue should be directed to the guest editors –
Shasha Zhao (s.zhao@mdx.ac.uk)
Paul N. Gooderham (Paul.Gooderham@nhh.no)
Anne-Wil Harzing (anne@harzing.com)
Marina Papanastassiou (m.papanastasiou@mdx.ac.uk)
References
Ackroyd, S. and Murphy, J. (2013) Transnational corporations, socio-economic change and recurrent crisis, Critical Perspectives on International Business, 9 (4): 336-357.
Awate, S., Larsen, M. M., and Mudambi, R. (2015) Accessing vs sourcing knowledge: A comparative study of R&D internationalization between emerging and advanced economy firms. Journal of International Business Studies, 46 (1): 63-86.
Buckley, P. J. (2009) The impact of the global factory on economic development. Journal of World Business, 44 (2): 131-143.
Clougherty, J. A., Kim, J. U., Skousen, B. R., and Szücs, F. (2017) The foundations of international business: Cross‐border investment activity and the balance between market‐power and efficiency effects. Journal of Management Studies, 54 (3): 340-365
Figini, P., and Görg, H. (1999) Multinational companies and wage inequality in the host country: The case of Ireland. Review of World Economics, 135 (4): 594-612.
Greaney, T.M. and Li, Y. (2017) Multinational enterprises and regional inequality in China Journal of Asian Economics, 48: 120–133
Howe, B. (2015) Volkswagen scandal: 5 scary numbers, CNN Money, 4th November, accessed on 16/05/2017, [available at: http://money.cnn.com/2015/11/04/news/companies]
Jha, S., Dhanaraj, C., and Krishnan, R. (2015) How does multinational R&D evolve in emerging markets? Working Paper, International Institute for Management Development, 2015-02
Lee, J. and Gereffi, G. (2015) Global value chains, rising power firms and economic and social upgrading, Critical Perspectives on International Business, 11 (3/4): 319-339
Lim, S. and Prakash, A. (2017) Four years after one of the worst industrial accidents ever, what have we learned? The Washington Post, the monkey cage section, accessed on 12/05/2017, [available at https://www.washingtonpost.com/news/monkey-cage]
Liu, F. C., Simon, D. F., Sun, Y. T., and Cao, C. (2011) China's innovation policies: Evolution, institutional structure, and trajectory. Research Policy, 40(7): 917-931.
Mudambi, R., and Santangelo, G. D. (2016) From shallow resource pools to emerging clusters: The role of multinational enterprise subsidiaries in peripheral areas. Regional Studies, 50(12): 1965-1979.
Piketty, T. (2014) Capital in the Twenty-First Century, Harvard University Press: Cambridge, MA.
Roberts, J., and Dörrenbächer, C. (2016) Renewing the call for critical perspectives on international business: towards a second decade of challenging the orthodox. Critical Perspectives on International Business, 12(1): 2-21.
Taylor, K., and Driffield, N. (2005) Wage inequality and the role of multinationals: Evidence from UK panel data. Labour Economics, 12 (2): 223-249.
UNCTAD (2015) World Investment Report, United Nations Publications: Geneva
Withnall, A. (2015) 2 charts that show what the world really thinks about capitalism, The Independent, 3rd November, accessed on 14/05/2017, [available at: www.independent.co.uk/news/business/news]
About the Special Issue Editors
Shasha Zhao is Senior Lecturer (Associate Professor) of International Business and Global Innovation at Middlesex University Business School, London. She received her Ph.D. from Alliance Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK, and previously held positions at Royal Holloway College, University of London, and Plymouth University, UK. Her research focuses on MNE subsidiary role, MNE innovation strategy, and impact of MNE FDI on host economies. Her research has been published in journals such as Human Resource Management Journal, and International Marketing Review. She also acts as a regular reviewer for a number of journals such as Asian Business & Management, Human Resource Management Journal, and Journal of Knowledge Management. Her latest research focuses on MNE innovation activities in emerging economies, and possible social and political implications.
Paul N. Gooderham is Professor of International Management and Head of the Department of Strategy & Management at NHH: Norwegian School of Economics, Bergen. He is also an adjunct professor at Middlesex University. His research interests are concentrated on international and comparative management. He has published over 80 books, book chapters, and academic articles in journals such as Journal of World Business, Journal of Management, Journal of Management Studies, Journal of International Business Studies, Strategic Management Journal, Human Relations and Administrative Science Quarterly. Among his books are a co-authored textbook, International Management: Theory and Practice (Edward Elgar) published in 2013. Paul is on the senior advisory board of Journal of Organizational Effectiveness and a regular reviewer of journals including Journal of World Business, Human Resource Management Journal, and Human Relations. Since 1994, he has been a member of Cranet the largest comparative HRM research network in the world.
Anne-Wil Harzing is Professor of International Management at Middlesex University, London. Previously, she was Professor and Associate Dean Research at the University of Melbourne, Australia. Her research interests include international HRM (e.g. gender issues), headquarter-subsidiary relationships, the role of language in international business, and the quality and impact of academic research. She has been an associate editor of management journals and a current editorial board member of 13 management journals including Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of World Business, and International Business Review. Anne-Wil has published more than 100 books, book chapters, and academic papers in journals such as Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of World Business, Journal of Organizational Behavior, Human Resource Management, Organization Studies, and Strategic Management Journal. More than a dozen of her articles have won research awards or distinctions. Anne-Wil has been listed on Thomson Reuter's Essential Science Indicators top 1% most cited academics in Economics & Business worldwide since 2007.
Marina Papanastassiou is Professor of International Business and Innovation at Middlesex University Business School, London. She was also the Head of Department of International Management and Innovation at Middlesex University Business School (2014-16). Marina received her Ph.D. from the University of Reading and previously held positions such as research professor at Copenhagen Business School, Denmark and University of Athens, Greece. Her research focuses on MNE FDI strategy. Marina has published in a number of related journals including Journal of World Business, Management International Review, R&D Management, and Research Policy. Her latest research includes FDI in emerging economies. She is a regular reviewer of journals such as Management International Review, and R&D Management. She is also a Fellow of the European International Business Academy.
Emerald Publishing Limited, Registered Office: Howard House, Wagon Lane, Bingley, BD16 1WA
United Kingdom. Registered in England No. 3080506, VAT No. GB 665 3593 06
Scholars, generally agree, that good governance influences national competitiveness. This, however, has not been documented and debating it has become an imperative scholarly task. How we manage our nation state or govern ourselves in a broad sociopolitical environment directly affect economic performance.
This issue has been underscored in the public forums conducted by the International Monetary Fund, United Nations, World Bank, World Economic Forum, etc. World Bank annually evaluates over 200 countries of the world with its governance indicators. World Economic Forum considers global governance as one of the major public discourse issue.
Possible topics are as follows.
- Theoretical and empirical models explaining how governance affects competitiveness at macro (national) and micro (industry specific) level.
- Understand governance as an independent, dependent or mediating construct—variables closely related to it are geopolitics, size of the nation, geographic location, globalization, democracy, economic freedom, environment or culture.
- Policy measures governments could take for better governance resulting higher competiveness.
- Methodological difficulties in measuring governance and its relationship with national competitiveness.
- Influence of governance on international trade, direct investment, and production decisions of the multinational corporations.
The special issue aims at investigating the relationship between governance and competitiveness, and, offer policy suggestions. Authors are encouraged to submit both conceptual and empirical papers. Use APA Style in preparing the manuscript.
Submit manuscripts to the guest editor electronically via email at waheed@tamucc.edu. Authors from developing countries are especially encouraged to submit. Dr. Abu N. M. Waheeduzzaman is a Professor of Marketing and International Business, College of Business, Texas A&M University-Corpus Christi.
East Asian Wisdom and its impact on business culture and performance in a cross-cultural context
Co Guest-Editors:
Chris Baumann, Macquarie University, Sydney Australia, and Seoul National University (SNU), Korea
Hume Winzar, Macquarie University, Sydney, Australia
Tony Fang, Stockholm Business School, Stockholm University, Sweden
Summary
There is growing recognition that we can learn a lot from the East to inspire and enrich our mainstream theory and practice (Chen, 2010a, 2010b). Can we make good use of East Asian wisdom in cross-cultural and strategic management? For example, the teachings of Confucius have allegedly contributed to remarkable economic growth across East Asia, and Western researchers have struggled for decades on what it means and how to leverage Confucianism, Daoism, Buddhism, and Yin Yang thinking into the generation of fresh theoretical and practical insights on research and business practices, respectively. It is not clear among commentators whether such perspectives are pure philosophy, religion, or ideology (Fingarette, 1972) or a combination thereof. In the context of cross-cultural management and strategy, how do these questions affect business culture and performance?
Hofstede and Bond’s study (1988) showed that countries in the Confucian orbit have experienced the fastest rate of growth since the 1950-60s. Winzar (2015) pointed out from the 1970s, Individualist economies (Europe and the US) outperformed Collectivist economies (China and Korea), and commentators argued that Collectivism holds Asian countries back. But by the 2000s similar commentators argued that Collectivism was responsible for the growth of the Tiger Economies. The situation has changed again as Chinese, Japanese and Korean technology (including innovation and, to a degree, brand building and management) now equal or exceed European and US companies on many measures. It has also been found that East Asia performs ahead of Europe, the rest of Asia, and South/Central America both academically (in terms of PISA) and in competitiveness (Baumann and Winzar, 2016). Much of our understanding of East-Asian cultures has been framed with Western-designed instruments (Fang, 2003), and too often we make broad conclusions along the lines of, for example, “Chinese managers are different from US managers, so Confucianism, and other orientations, must be responsible”. We make such broad inferences about the role of East Asian wisdom without attempting to “deconstruct” the construct. We can do better.
The discussion of the role of East Asian wisdom on management and related disciplines is not new. In this journal, several publications have paid attention to these issues, including Li’s (2016) theoretical explication of the Eastern Yin Yang frame and its application to paradox management, Fang’s (2012) conceptualization of culture in the age of globalization, as well as HR implications of Eastern values (Jiang, Gollan & Brooks, 2015; Chin, 2014), Western explorations of acculturation of expatriates and migrant managers in Asia (Selmer and Lauring, 2014), cultural differences and the aesthetics of product design (Shin, 2012), and ethical perspectives of Chinese and American managers (Pan et al. 2010). Elsewhere, we have seen seminal contributions on management practice in Confucian societies (Yeung and Tung, 1996), and important work on changing cultural values, behaviour and ethical conduct (Faure and Fang, 2008; Tung and Verbeke, 2010; Woods and Lamond 2011), along with valuable critical reviews highlighting the paradoxical nature of culture (Fang, 2003, 2006, 2010, 2012), the influence of Confucian perspectives on Western leadership and management education (Manarungsan and Tang, 2012), the implication of strategic thought in East Asian for business and management (Fang, 1999; Tung, 1994), and the evolution of institutional approaches to education more broadly (Baumann, Hamin and Yang, 2016). Further afield, in other disciplines, we see very comprehensive perspectives on the role of East Asian wisdom on political philosophy (Rozman, 1993), competitiveness and economic growth (Hofstede and Bond, 1988) and influences on Western philosophy generally (Wilhelm, 1972). Confucianism and countries in the ‘Confucian Orbit’ (Baumann, Hamin, Tung and Hoadley, 2016) have a new found focus in scholarly work on competitiveness, but equally so, scholars in multiple fields are curious about the roles of Daoism (Woolley, 2016), Buddhism (Vallabh and Singhal (2014) and Yin Yang (Fang, 2012).
For the purposes of cross-cultural and strategic management, is East Asian wisdom a social and psychological framework that may vary across different cultural groups, or is it a constant that is manifested in different ways according to economic and social conditions? For example, does it make sense to say that one group is “more Confucian” than another? Or on one dimension or another? If so, then how do we derive empirical measures of the various facets of Confucianism?
These and many other questions niggle at Western (and Eastern) scholars as they try to understand how to better communicate, conduct business and formulate strategies across countries.
Topics
We are interested in any and all articles, so long as they address issues relating to East Asian Wisdom and cross-cultural management and strategy.
Topics can include, but are not limited to:
- Conceptualisation and measurement of aspects of East Asian Wisdom, such as Confucianism, at the individual (micro), group (meso), and national (macro) levels.
- Historical interrelationships between East Asian Wisdom and PEST (Political, Economic, Social, Technological) environments – antecedent or consequent relationships.
- Interrelationships between East Asian Wisdom and Management, Business, Performance and Competitiveness.
- Differences in East Asian Wisdom in the East Asia Region (e.g. China, Japan, Korea, Singapore, Taiwan, Vietnam).
- Differences in East Asian Wisdom among members of the East Asian diaspora – Contribution to intra-national diversity.
- Mediating and/or moderating role of East Asian Wisdom in Cross-cultural research.
- The role of East Asian Wisdom in the provision of services, product design and development.
- The interplay between East Asian Wisdom and management and strategy.
- Role of East Asian Wisdom (e.g., Yin Yang) in cross-cultural innovation and in the formation of competitiveness and economic outcomes.
East Asian Wisdom is multi-faceted and multi-layered, and we are interested in papers which address areas and concepts not usually found in the literature, or areas that are severely undeveloped or inaccurate in our current understanding. We are living in an era that has transitioned from “West leads East” to “West meets East” (Chen, 2010a, 2010b). Our theories and practices need to be and can be inspired by this historical transition.
Submission instructions
All manuscripts will undergo a double-blind review process. Submissions should be between 5,000-9,000 words, including references, figures and tables, and follow the manuscript requirement outlined on the journal’s website: http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm. The submission deadline is January 1, 2017. Please direct queries to:
Associate Professor Chris Baumann, e mail: chris.baumann@mq.edu.au;
Associate Professor Hume Winzar, e mail: hume.winzar@mq.edu.au; and
Professor Tony Fang, Stockholm Business School, e-mail: tony.fang@sbs.su.se
References
Baumann, C., Hamin, H., Tung, , R. L. and S. Hoadley, S. (2016), Competitiveness and workforce performance: Asia vis-à-vis the “West”, International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 28 (11).
Baumann, C., H. Hamin and S. J. Yang (2016). "Work ethic formed by pedagogical approach: evolution of institutional approach to education and competitiveness." Asia Pacific Business Review, 22 (3).
Baumann, C., and Winzar, H. (2016). The role of secondary education in explaining competitiveness. Asia Pacific Journal of Education, 36 (1).
Chen, M.-J. (2010a). West Meets East: Enlightening, balancing, and transcending. Annual Meeting of the Academy of Management. June 14, http://aom.org/Meetings/annualmeeting/past-meetings/theme2011.aspx
Chen, M.-J., & Miller, D. (2010b). West meets East: Toward an ambicultural approach to management. Academy of Management Perspectives, 24(4): 17-24.
Chin, T. (2014). "Harmony as means to enhance affective commitment in a Chinese organization." Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal 21(3): 326-344.
Fang, T. (1999). Chinese business negotiating style. Thousand Oaks: Sage.
Fang, T. (2003). "A Critique of Hofstede’s Fifth National Culture Dimension." International Journal of Cross Cultural Management 3(3): 347-368.
Fang, T. (2006). From “Onion” to “Ocean”: Paradox and Change in National Cultures. International Studies of Management and Organizations 35(4): 71-90.
Fang, T. (1999): Chinese Business Negotiating Style. Thousand Oaks: Sage.
Fang, T. (2010). Asian management research needs more self-confidence: Reflection on Hofstede (2007) and beyond. Asia Pacific Journal of Management 27: 155-170.
Fang, T. (2012). Yin Yang: A new perspective on culture. Management and Organization Review, 8(1): 25-50.
Faure, G. O., & Fang, T., (2008). Changing Chinese values: Keeping up with paradoxes. International Business Review, 17(2): 194-207.
Fingarette, H. (1972). Confucius -- The Secular as Sacred, New York: Harper and Row
Hofstede, G. and M. H. Bond (1988). "The Confucius connection: From cultural roots to economic growth." Organizational Dynamics 16(4): 5-21.
Li, P. P. (2016). "Global implications of the indigenous epistemological system from the east: How to apply Yin-Yang balancing to paradox management." Cross Cultural & Strategic Management 23(1): 42-77.
Jiang, Z., P. J. Gollan and G. Brooks (2015). "Moderation of Doing and Mastery orientations in relationships among justice, commitment, and trust: A cross-cultural perspective." Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal 22(1): 42-67.
Manarungsan, S. and Z. Tang (2012). “Integrating Oriental Wisdom in MBA Education: The Case of Confucianism.” Leadership through the Classics. G. P. Prastacos, F. Wang and K. E. Soderquist, Springer Berlin Heidelberg: 377-387
Pan, Y., X. Song, A. Goldschmidt and W. French (2010). "A cross‐cultural investigation of work values among young executives in China and the USA." Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal 17(3): 283-298.
Vallabh, P., & Singhal, M. (2014). “Buddhism and decision making at individual, group and organizational levels.” Journal of Management Development, 33(8/9), 763-775.
Rozman, G., Ed. (1993). The East Asian Region - Confucian Heritage and Its Modern Adaptation, Princeton Univ. Press.
Selmer, J. and J. Lauring (2014). "Self-initiated expatriates: An exploratory study of adjustment of adult third-culture kids vs. adult mono-culture kids." Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal 21(4): 422-436
Shin, D. H. (2012). "Cross‐analysis of usability and aesthetic in smart devices: what influences users' preferences?" Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal 19(4): 563-587
Tung, , R. L. (1994). Strategic Management Thought in East Asia. Organizational Dynamics, 22(4): 55 -65.
Tung, R. L. and A. Verbeke (2010). "Beyond Hofstede and GLOBE: Improving the quality of cross-cultural research." Journal of International Business Studies 41(8): 1259-1274.
Tung, R. L. and C. Baumann (2009). "Comparing the attitudes toward money, material possessions and savings of overseas Chinese vis-à-vis Chinese in China: convergence, divergence or cross-vergence, vis-à-vis ‘one size fits all’ human resource management policies and practices." The International Journal of Human Resource Management 20(11): 2382-2401
Wilhelm, R., (1972). Confucius and Confucianism: Translated into English by George H. Danton and Annina Periam Danton. Routledge & Kegan Paul.
Winzar, H. (2015). "The ecological fallacy: How to spot one and tips on how to use one to your advantage." Australasian Marketing Journal 23(1): 86-92
Woods, P. and D. Lamond (2011). "What Would Confucius Do? – Confucian Ethics and Self-Regulation in Management." Journal of Business Ethics 102(4): 669-683
Woolley, N. (2016). The Emergence of Daoism: Creation of a Tradition, By Gil Raz. Routledge Studies in Taoism. London: Routledge, 2012 (paper 2014). Religious Studies Review, 42(1), 58-58.
Yeung, I. Y. M. and R. L. Tung (1996). "Achieving Business Success in Confucian Societies: The Importance of Guanxi (Connections)." Organizational Dynamics 25(2): 54-65
Invitation to submit articles for the upcoming
Vol. 3 No 1. Spring 2016 issue
Submission Deadline: January 17, 2016
The Journal of Eastern European and Central Asian Research (JEECAR) is a multi-disciplinary, scholarly, high quality, double-blind peer-reviewed journal, with topics concerning:
- Economics
- Finance
- Management
- Marketing
- International Affairs
The main focus is in the Eastern European and Central Asian business and national political economies. The Journal is registered by the Library of Congress, listed in the Directory of Open Access Journals (DOAJ), indexed with EBSCO, Ulrich, Google Scholar, OAI WorldCat Digital Collection, included in the EconBib index, and evaluated for an Impact Factor by CiteFactor.org, and each article has assigned an individual CrossReff DOI address.
The Editorial Board consists of distinguished experts among academics and practitioners who specialize in business topics within the Easter European and Central Asian regions. The latest journal issue with articles can be obtained online at: http://ieeca.org/journal/index.php/JEECAR/issue/archive.
The primary focus of the Journal is to provide an intellectual forum in theory, as well as practice, and to explore issues relevant to newly emerging nations. Submissions may include theoretical issues, new business model ideas, methodological issues, empirical studies, or case studies in the field of enterprise management or new developments of multinational corporations in the specific global economies.
Complete information about the submission guidelines is available at the JEECAR website: http://ieeca.org/how-to-submit-article
The JEECAR journal is published by the Institute of Eastern Europe and Central Asia with the support and cooperation of Webster University in St. Louis, MO.
Nikolay Megits, Ph.D.
Editor-in-Chief
Journal of Eastern European and Central Asian Research
ISSN 2328-8272 (print)
ISSN 2328-8280 (online)
Guest Editors:
- Douglas Cumming (Florida Atlantic University, USA, cummingd@fau.edu)
- Sofia Johan (Florida Atlantic University, USA, sjohan@fau.edu)
- Zaheer Khan (University of Kent, UK, z.a.khan@kent.ac.uk)
- Martin Meyer (University of Kent, UK, m.s.meyer@kent.ac.uk)
Background and rationale for the focused issue
The rise of digitization and ICTs-enabled technologies have played an important role in overcoming cross-border transactions costs, thus offering significant opportunities and benefits to firms to compete on a global scale. The growth and widespread diffusion of internet have created numerous opportunities for firms to provide products and services across both developed and developing markets.
Current research has focused on examining e-commerce strategy; the barriers and adoption related challenges of e-commerce (see Agarwal and Wu, 2015 for an overview), among others. Within the international business field, one stream of research has applied Dunning’s OLI paradigm to explain the rise of e-commerce firms (e.g., Singh and Kundu, 2002). Recent IB scholarships have focused on examining the rise of platform-based firms and highlighted the importance of direct and indirect networks effect in explaining the internationalization and cross-border activities of platform-based firms (e.g., Brouthers et al., 2016; Chen et al., 2019; Zeng, Khan & De Silva, 2019). Despite the contributions of extant literature, there has been limited discussions around e-commerce related policy and how it affects the international business activities, as well as global value chains of multinational enterprises.
The aim of this focused issue is to encourage scholars to explore the following research questions at the intersections of international business, public policy and legal aspect of e-commerce. We would like to receive both conceptual and empirical papers.
Research Questions
Papers for the focused issue could fall within the following questions and related topic areas:
- How does e-commerce affect global capital flows to emerging and developed markets?
- What are the ways that SMEs can use crowdfunding to internationalize?
- How are multinationals affected by e-commerce policy?
- How does e-commerce policy affect the IB and SME ecosystem?
- How does e-commerce affect trade flows in different institutional contexts?
- What is the role of WTO in shaping e-commerce policy, and how does regulatory harmonization affect e-commerce policies?
- Does e-commerce policy affect cross-border investment from venture capitalists and private equity funds?
- How do regulatory changes affect e-commerce policies and adoption of e-commerce across different countries?
- How does e-commerce policy affect multinational value chains?
- How does e-commerce policy affect the link between SMEs and multinationals?
Submission Guidelines
Papers for this focused issue should be prepared in accordance with the MIR’s submission guidelines available at: https://www.springer.com/business+%26+management/journal/11575?detailsPage=pltci_2329480
Papers should be submitted directly to the guest editors at ecommibpol@gmail.com by the deadline of August 31, 2020. All paper will go through the MIR regular double-blind review process.
References
Agarwal, J., & Wu, T. (2015). Factors influencing growth potential of e‐commerce in emerging economies: An institution‐based N‐OLI framework and research propositions. Thunderbird International Business Review, 57(3), 197-215.
Brouthers, K.D., Geisser, K.D., & Rothlauf, F. (2016). Explaining the internationalization of ibusiness firms. Journal of International Business Studies, 47(5), 513-534.
Chen, L., Shaheer, N., Yi, J., & Li, S. (2019). The international penetration of ibusiness firms: Network effects, liabilities of outsidership and country clout. Journal of International Business Studies, 50(2), 172-192.
Singh, N., & Kundu, S. (2002). Explaining the growth of e‐commerce corporations: An extension and application of the eclectic paradigm. Journal of International Business Studies, 33, 679-697.
Zeng, J., Khan, Z., & De Silva, M. (2019). The emergence of multi-sided platform MNEs: Internalization theory and networks. International Business Review, in press.
China’s success in integrating itself into the world economy has attracted worldwide attentions. Developing nations are particularly impressed with the way that China mobilizes its resources for rapid economic growth. China’s cautious and gradual approach to economic reform may provide useful experience to countries in economic transition. The outstanding performance of China’s economy in responding to the global financial crisis has been catalytic to the economic recovery in the United States and the European Union. To evaluate the sustainability of the emerging Chinese model of economic development an important aspect is to understand to what extent productivity growth has contributed to China’s spectacular economic growth in the past three decades. The Journal of Chinese Economic and Business Studies (JCEBS) henceforth calls for contributions to the 2011 Special Issue on Chinese Productivity.
The complexity and enormous scale of China’s economy require methodologies that can be used for systemic investigations of productivity performance. The special issue encourages empirical studies within the neo-classical framework of Solow, which is still considered as the core of modern growth theory in the literature. While imposing a basic structure on a macro economic model of general equilibrium nature, the Solow framework can be applicable to both well-developed market economies and planned economies. To accommodate significant differences in total factor productivity across countries and regions efforts in the exploration of its cross-sectional implications are also welcome.
The rapid economic growth in China would have not been possible had there not been the tremendous development of a vibrant Chinese business sector. China’s businesses have experienced an early stage of gradual reform in the state sector, followed by the dramatic expansion of the rural industries and a surge in the privatization of state and collective firms. While China was becoming the most attractive destination for foreign direct investment in the process, Chinese firms in recent years have started to acquire foreign companies and attempted to build up their own brand names. To make the presence of the Chinese firms sustainable internationally, innovation and productivity improvement are crucial to their continued success abroad. Submissions in the related areas of business studies will be appreciated.
In recent years, there seems to have been a consensus between scholars of growth empirics and applied productivity analysts that improving productivity estimations and better analysis to identify determinants of the productivity performance are the two areas to which major research efforts should be devoted. One direction we suggest is the study of the “knowledge production function.” This approach is to be attractive in an empirical sense that the techniques of applied productivity analysis might be effective in investigations on the determinants of innovation and economic growth.
China’s industrialization process has basically followed the historical path of the developed nations. However, the limitation of this traditional approach is that it exerts enormous pressure on the natural environment. In many circumstances, the environmental issues can be studied under the standard framework of applied productivity analysis, which is based on well-founded economic theory of production. Submissions of papers in this area are highly recommended.
Contributions concerning productivity performance of service and agricultural sectors are also very welcome. Papers comparing China and India or Brazil, the former Soviet Union or Russia, the United States or the European Union, and South and East Asia including Japan are particularly interesting to the special issue. Studies on trade and productivity with firm heterogeneity, structural time series models of aggregate productivity, and real business cycle related productivity issues are all suitable for submission.
Papers should be submitted in Word or PDF format via email to Jinghai Zheng (Guest Editor) Department of Economics University of Gothenburg Sweden
Email: Jinghai.Zheng@gmail.com<mailto:Jinghai.Zheng@gmail.com>
Submitted papers will normally be reviewed by two independent referees as well as by the Guest Editor. Deadline for submission is 20th May 2010.
Growing economic inequality in society has become a serious concern for both developed and developing countries. This special issue is based on the premise that a better understanding of the relationship between business and society is possible by examining it within the context of rising economic inequality. We are interested in a broad range of issues focused on linking business, society, and economic inequality.
Organizational research devoted to examining the firm-inequality relationship is at a very nascent stage and needs to draw on established research in other disciplines, as well as develop new theories by making broad connections between previously unexamined phenomena. Similarly, empirical examinations might have to make use of publicly available data and established methods, as well as creatively generate new data and methods to study this complex phenomenon. Therefore, we invite conceptual and empirical papers that offer substantial potential to result in high quality publications.
SUBMISSION PROCESS AND DEADLINES
Interested authors are encouraged to submit a 6-page proposal (excluding references and exhibits) to Hari Bapuji (inequalitysi.2014@gmail.com) through email by November 30, 2014. The guest editors will provide developmental feedback and invite authors of suitable proposals to submit a full paper to the special issue. In addition, potential authors may contact any of the guest editors to discuss initial ideas for papers. While interested authors are encouraged to make use of the guidance of the guest editors before submitting full papers, full papers may be submitted (and will be equally welcomed) even without prior consultation with guest editors.
The deadline for submission of all full papers (including papers that received feedback on their proposals) will be June 30, 2015.Authors should submit their manuscripts through ScholarOne Manuscripts at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/bas. Manuscripts should be prepared following the Business and Society author guidelines: http://www.sagepub.com/journals/Journal200878/manuscriptSubmission.
Submission Deadline: December 31, 2016
Guest Editor: Abu Waheeduzzaman, Ph.D.
The Journal of Euromarketing is the official Journal of the International Management Development Association (IMDA) published by IMDA Press. It is a premier publication outlet in international marketing with a focus on Europe, emerging nations and other countries. It serves the academics, practitioners, and public policymakers on issues pertaining to marketing and related disciplines.
Economic integration can be achieved at three levels: (1) global level under WTO, (2) regional level through in various regions of the world (e.g., EU, NAFTA, ASEAN, MERCOSUR, or TPP), and (3) bilateral level between nations through free trade agreements. Manuscripts pertaining to integration and marketing at all three levels are welcome.
Possible topics are as follows.
- Investigate how economic integration affects marketing at macro (national) and micro (industry specific) level. Relate geopolitics, size of the nation, geographic location, globalization, democracy, economic freedom, environment or culture to the phenomenon.
- Discuss the effect of “trade creation” and “trade diversion” in marketing.
- Determine the effect of economic integration on international trade, direct investment, and marketing decisions of the multinational corporations.
- Examine the relationship between integration and various concepts in marketing, viz., country of origin, consumption convergence, standardization-adaptation, or marketing productivity.
- Offer policy suggestions for business and governments pertaining to integration and marketing. Is more integration good for marketing?
- Study methodological issues in measuring economic integration and relate them to marketing.
The Special Issue on Economic Integration and Marketing invites manuscripts focusing on the impact of economic integration in marketing. The manuscripts should be no longer than 9000 words, double spaced (including references, tables, figures and abstracts) with a margin of at least one inch (2.54 cm) on all sides. Each manuscript has to be accompanied by a statement that it has not been published and has not been submitted simultaneously for publication elsewhere. Authors are responsible for obtaining permission to reproduce copyrighted material from other sources. All accepted manuscripts, artwork, and photographs become the property of the publisher. Authors are encouraged to submit both conceptual and empirical papers. Use APA Style in preparing the manuscript. Submit manuscripts to the guest editor electronically via email at waheed@tamucc.edu. Hard copy submissions can also be sent to the following address. Authors from emerging and developing nations are encouraged to submit. Abu N. M. Waheeduzzaman, Ph.D. College of Business Texas A&M University-Corpus Christi 6300 Ocean Drive, OCNR 319, Unit 5808 Corpus Christi, Texas 78412 USA
Special issue guest editors
Cristiano Bellavitis (Higher School of Economics, National Research University)
Igor Filatotchev (Cass Business School, City University London, and Vienna University of Economics and Business)
Dzidziso Samuel Kamuriwo (Cass Business School, City University London)
Tom Vanacker (Ghent University)
Introduction
Entrepreneurial firms are the backbone of economies and drivers of both economic development and employment. Young and innovative entrepreneurial firms are germane to the creation, development and growth of new technologies, industries and markets and create the most jobs. Yet, these firms often need considerable amounts of financial capital to sustain their growth. Over the last decades, the entrepreneurial finance literature emphasized the importance of business angels and venture capital investors.
However, despite the relevance of angel and venture capital financing, in recent years a whole set of relatively new sources of financing have emerged (e.g., Bruton, Khavul, Siegel and Wright, 2014). Entrepreneurs in science and technology start-ups can raise financing from numerous sources, such as accelerators and incubators, proof-of-concept centres, university-based seed funds, crowdfunding platforms, and IP-backed financial instruments. Moreover, contrary to common accounts of startup activity, research further shows that new entrepreneurial firms heavily rely on external debt sources, including bank financing (e.g., Robb and Robinson, 2014). Others argue that entrepreneurs can create and grow flourishing firms without raising the external financing that other firms consider to be essential, for instance, through financial bootstrapping and bricolage (e.g., Baker and Nelson, 2005; Winborg and Landström, 2001).
Considering the importance of entrepreneurial firms for the overall economic system, there is a need for research on these distinct sources of financing to understand how they impact start-ups (Fraser, Bhaumik and Wright, 2015). Extant research has only skimmed the surface in terms of exploring the ways (a) entrepreneurs rely on these relatively new sources of financing, (b) entrepreneurs use more traditional sources of financing (such as bank debt), which are typically assumed to be unavailable to early stage entrepreneurial firms, and (c) entrepreneurs use more or less creative strategies to realize “more with less”.
Furthermore, the entrepreneurial finance literature is largely segmented by the source of financing from which entrepreneurs obtain their financing. As highlighted by Cosh, Cumming and Hughes (2009) entrepreneurial finance studies focus, almost exclusively, on a single source of financing. Largely separate streams of literature have emerged in bank finance, lease finance, business angel finance, venture capital, private equity, supplier finance and more recently, crowdfunding. However, in practice, entrepreneurs often raise financing from a multitude of sources. Hence, we need a better understanding of how these various sources of financing interact and how different combinations support (or harm) entrepreneurial firms (Hanssens, Deloof and Vanacker, 2015).
Research topics
The special issue intends to further our knowledge of the latest trends in entrepreneurial finance, including the emergence of relatively new sources of finance, generally ignored sources of financing and strategies entrepreneurs can implement to realize more with less need for external financing. We also would like to explore how distinct sources of financing interrelate with each other and with more “classic” sources of entrepreneurial financing. We welcome papers adopting a multitude of methods, both empirical and theoretical contributions. Topics of interest include but are not restricted to the following:
- What is the effect of being embedded in multiple funding networks to firm outcomes?
- Are new sources of entrepreneurial financing going to replace or complement venture capital and angel finance? If so, how?
- For which firms each funding source is more accessible?
- What can firms do to increase the probability of raising new sources of entrepreneurial financing?
- When and for which type of companies is each funding source more advantageous in boosting performance (e.g. survival, growth, M&A, IPO)?
- And what is the ideal combination of funding sources for entrepreneurial firms performance?
- How can entrepreneurs grow their firms without raising additional external financing?
- Are there geographical differences in relation to entrepreneurial financing?
- What sources of financing are available in developing countries?
Paper submission procedure
All submissions will be subject to the standard review process followed by Venture Capital: An International Journal of Entrepreneurial Finance. All manuscripts must be original, unpublished works that are not under review for publication elsewhere. Papers for the Special Issue should be prepared and formatted according to the Journal’s Instructions to Contributors and should be sent as a Word file to: Cristiano Bellavitis, Higher School of Economics, National Research University, Russia at CBellavitis@hse.ru
Key dates
The deadline for the submission of papers is 31 December 2015. We expect the following timing in between initial submission and publication of the Special Issue:
- 31st of March 2016: Completion of first round reviews
- 30th of April 2016: Decisions notified to authors
- 30th of September 2016: Revised submissions due
The Special Issue is scheduled for publication in early 2017. To support the development of papers, the editorial team is available at AOM (Vancouver).
Over the last decade emerging market multinationals (EMNCs) have become important players in the world economy. This has led to increased interest in their behavior by academics and policy makers alike who are beginning to come to grips with the most important analytical and policy issues that affect the world economy due to the rise of EMNCs. A lively debate in the literature is discussing the applicability of lessons from the study of developed country multinationals to EMNCs, and the contributions that the study of EMNCs can offer to theories of the multinational enterprise in general.
Studies from developed economy multinationals recognize that both firm-specific and environmental factors help explain international diversification. Over the last decade, increasing attention has been given to the drivers of internationalization strategies of firms from emerging economies and evidence on the relationship between EMNCs’ competitive advantages and the nature of their internationalization strategies is beginning to emerge. In this context, extant literature has focused on aspects of home country environments as potential determinants of EMNCs’ advantages and internationalization processes. Erramilli, Agarwal and Kim (1997) observed “that firm-specific advantages are molded by home-country environment has received some empirical scrutiny and support.” Yet, there remain significant unresolved questions in the international business and strategic management literatures as to how the home environment of a firm impacts its international strategies and operations. The substantial increase in outward foreign direct investment from countries such as China and India emphasizes the importance of this question.
The global economy is shifting in ways that offer new opportunities and new challenges for firms from emerging economies. These firms often originate from institutional environments which are heterogenic and segmented, have co-evolved their structures and practices within idiosyncratic institutional environments, and need to overcome differences between diverse institutional settings in their foreign direct investments. These challenges are often compounded by limited organizational and managerial experience and capabilities to internationalize.
We believe that there are significant opportunities for improving our understanding of how home country environment affects various processes and outcomes that drive EMNCs, and thus to advance theories of the multinational enterprise. Consequently, we are soliciting empirical and theoretical work addressing these complex relationships between various forms of home country environmental heterogeneities and EMNCs. This special issue provides an opportunity to bring together the research of scholars from a diverse range of disciplinary traditions such as economics, sociology and political science. As such, the following list of potential research questions is merely illustrative of the broad range of studies that could fit in the special issue of Asia Pacific Journal of Management (APJM):
• How do EMNCs leverage political and social ties at home to gain access to and/or leadership in foreign markets, especially developed country markets?
• How do the institutional framework and the resource endowment of the home country influence the patterns and processes of organizational learning and capability building that enable investments abroad?
• From a co-evolutionary perspective, what are the dynamics of the interrelationship between institutional change and corporate strategy? How do EMNCs leverage their experience abroad to impact institutional development at home?
• What is the extent and modalities through which emerging market governments influence the operations of EMNCs?
• What distinguishes international investment strategies by state-owned by privately-owned EMNCs? Is government ownership enabler or liability in internationalization?
• What role do country of origin formal (regulatory) and informal (cultural) institutions play in pace of internationalization and degree of international commitments?
• How do governance structures, such as ownership and managerial incentives, affect internationalization decisions and the success or failure of overseas operations?
All papers are to be submitted to the APJM website http://apjm.edmgr.com. The deadline for receipt of papers for this special issue is December 1, 2013. The format of submissions must comply with submission guidelines posted at the APJM website, and we have a marked preference for submissions which debate with, extend, and/or refute the indicative literature cited below. Please indicate that your submission is to be reviewed for the Special Issue on Emerging Economy Multinationals (choose that in the “article type” item during the submission process).
Papers will be double-blind peer-reviewed. We will make initial editorial decisions by June, 2014. Authors invited to revise and resubmit their work will be invited to present the papers at the APJM special issue workshop to be held at the conference on “Emerging Economy Multinationals” at Copenhagen Business School in Copenhagen, Denmark.
The papers accepted and presented at the workshop will be considered for publication in a special issue of the APJM. Presentation at the workshop does not necessarily guarantee publication in the special issue. The combination of a workshop and a special issue nevertheless follows a highly successful APJM initiative to bring out the full potential of authors and papers. For questions about the special issue, please contact Bersant Hobdari, Guest Editor, at bh.int@cbs.dk.
Indicative Contemporary Literature
Bhaumik, S.K., Driffield, N. & Pal, S., 2010. Does ownership structure of emerging market firms affect their outward FDI? The case of the Indian automotive and pharmaceutical sectors, Journal of International Business Studies, 41: 437-450.
Boisot, M. & Meyer, W. 2008. Which way through the open door? Reflections on the internationalization of Chinese firms, Management and Organization Review 4(3): 349-366.
Buckley P.J., Clegg J., Cross A., Rhodes, H., Voss H. & Zheng, P. 2008. Explaining China's outward FDI: an institutional perspective', in: Sauvant, K. ed., The rise of transnational corporations from emerging markets, Cheltenham: Elgar.
Chen Y.Y. & Young, M.N. 2010. Cross-border mergers and acquisitions by Chinese listed companies: A principal–principal perspective, Asia Pacific Journal of Management 27(3): 523-539.
Cui, L. & Jiang, F. 2012. State ownership effect on firms’ FDI opwnership decisions under institutional pressure: A study of Chinese outward-investing firms, Journal of International Business Studies, online advance.
Dunning, J.H., 2006. Comment on ‘dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization’, Asia Pacific Journal of Management 23, 139-142.
Erramilli, M. K., Agarwal S. & Kim S. 1997. Are Firm-Specific Advantages Location-Specific Too, Journal of International Business Studies 28(4), 735-757.
Filatotchev, I., Strange, R., Piesee, J. & Lien, Y.C. 2007. FDI by firms from newly industrialized economies in
emerging markets: Corporate governance, entry mode and location, Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4): 556-502.
Gammeltoft, P. 2008. Emerging multinationals: Outward FDI from the BRICS countries, International Journal of Technology and Globalisation, 4(1): 5-22.
Gubbi, S.R. Aulakh, P., Ray, S., Sarkar, M.B. & Chitoor, R. 2010. Do international acquisitions by emerging-economy firms create shareholder value? The case of Indian firms, Journal of International Business Studies 41, 397–418.
Jormanainen, I. & Koveshnikov, A. 2012. International activities if emerging market firms: A critical assessment of research in top management journals, Management International Review, advance online.
Lin, W.-T., & Cheng, K.-Y. 2012. The effect of upper echelons’ compensation on firm internationalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management. doi:10.1007/s10490-011-9261-9.
Luo Y.D., Xue Q. & Han B. 2010. How emerging market governments promote outward FDI: Experience from China. Journal of World Business 45(1): 68-79.
Mathews, J. A. 2006. Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23: 5-27.
Meyer, K.E. & Thaijongrak, O. 2013. The dynamics of emerging economy MNEs: How the internationalization process model can guide future research, Asia Pacific Journal of Management, in press.
Morck R., Yeung B. & Zhao M. 2008. Perspectives on China's outward foreign direct investment. Journal of International Business Studies 39(3): 337-350.
Ramamurti, R. 2012. What is really different about emerging market multinationals? Global Strategy Journal 2(1): 41-47.
Tan, D. & Meyer, K.E. 2010. Business groups’ outward FDI: A managerial resources perspective, Journal of International Management, 16(2): 154-164.
Yang, H., Sun, S. L., Lin, Z., & Peng, M. W. 2011. Behind M&As in China and the United States: Networks, learning, and institutions. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 28(2): 239-255.
Multinational companies from emerging economies (EMNCs) are becoming major players in the globalized world economy and wield growing influence on economic dynamics in developed, emerging and developing countries alike. The foreign presence and operations of EMNCs are becoming increasingly intertwined with innovation and knowledge generation processes both at home and abroad.
While the extant literature tends to build on the assumption that firms internationalize on the basis of innovations carried out at home, EMNCs often engage in international activities with the intent to access technologies they lack or to acquire resources enabling them to strengthen their innovative capabilities.
There are a range of challenges associated with such activities. Identifying, assessing, accessing and absorbing technology and knowledge from abroad is rife with challenges. Compounding these challenges, EMNCs are often engaging asymmetrically with foreign partners much stronger than themselves in a particular technological domain. Vice-versa, relinquishing technology to EMNCs may pose dilemmas to incumbents as well as nations.
At a more aggregate level, innovation-related outward foreign direct investment is contingent upon and in turn influences the broader institutional innovation system in which the investing firm is embedded. For example, competitive dynamics at home may drive firms to seek technology abroad; successful absorption of foreign technology may require an enabling knowledge infrastructure at home; and technologies acquired abroad may in turn spill over into the wider domestic innovation system.
In host economies, innovation-related investments by EMNCs may bring about synergies and infuse local firms with required capital and market access, while at the same time intensifying competition in technological domains. Where high-tech clusters in developed economies are concerned, the nature and impact of EMNC presence remains insufficiently analyzed.
This special issue solicits papers related to the broad theme of the relationship between emerging economy multinationals and innovation and knowledge flows, whether perceived at micro, meso or macro level. Conceptual, representative and case-based papers alike are welcomed.
Subject Coverage
Topics include but are not limited to:
• Which roles of outward foreign direct investment (OFDI) are coming to play in the innovation processes of EMNCs, at both strategic and operational levels?
• Why, how and with which outcomes are EMNCs engaging in innovation-related OFDI?
• What are the implications for incumbent MNCs in developed countries, e.g. in terms of competitive and collaborative dynamics?
• How do host governments respond to technology-seeking investments by EMNCs? To which extent do they promote them, and what may be appropriate facilitating frameworks?
• What are the macroeconomic and institutional contingencies and implications for home economies of innovation-related investments?
• What are the opportunities and threats for host economies of these investments?
Notes for Prospective Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. (N.B. Conference papers may only be submitted if the paper was not originally copyrighted and if it has been completely re-written).
All papers are refereed through a peer review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page.
Editors and Notes
All papers must be submitted online. To submit a paper, please read our information on preparing and submitting articles. If you experience any problems submitting your paper online, please contact submissions@inderscience.com, describing the exact problem you experience. Please include in your submission the title of the Special Issue, the title of the Journal and the names of the Guest Editors.
Editors
James Agarwal, Haskayne School of Business, University of Calgary, Canada
Terry Wu, University of Ontario Institute of Technology, Canada
We invite academics and practitioners who are interested in the area of global marketing to submit book chapters for possible publication in the proposed book entitled "Emerging Issues in Global Marketing: A Shifting Paradigm". This book is expected to be published in early 2018 by Springer.
Brief Description
The increasing global competition for goods and services has led many business firms to develop international marketing strategies as part of their corporate mandate and corporate strategy. While previously the focus of international marketing was largely focused on the cultural and institutional differences, there has been an exponential growth in innovation and technological advances (e.g., social media and big data) especially in emerging markets that is impacting the approach to global marketing as business firms reach out to potential customers globally. Simultaneously, signs of new market potential with authoritarian regimes are promising as embargoes are lifted (e.g., normalized US-Cuba relations). However, at the same time, emerging political risks and security concerns are changing the global game plan as countries weaken their commitment to regional trade blocs (e.g., UK and Brexit) and economies falter under populist leadership (e.g., Venezuela). The traditional approach to global marketing is no longer sufficient to address the emerging issues in global markets for the 21st century. Global companies need to take a new look at the contemporary threats and opportunities in markets, institutions, and technology and how they affect entry and expansion strategies through careful marketing-mix combinations.
Against this background, this book aims to address the paucity of research that currently exists in this area. In particular, this book will cover both the emerging theories and applications of global marketing for the 21st century. It aims to be of relevance to both academic researchers and practitioners globally such as CEOs and chief marketing officers as well as government officials and policy makers interested in formulating strategies/policies for global marketing activities in the face of a globalized economy.
With this perspective in mind, we invite you to submit a chapter that will offer new insights into emerging and cutting-edge issues in global marketing and highlight how global marketing strategies are changing in a globalized and digital economy that is fast changing. The objective of this book is to present emerging issues and shifting paradigms in global marketing. Both conceptual and empirical (quantitative, qualitative and mixed methods) papers are welcome. Potential topics of interest include, but are not limited to, the following topics:
- Globalization, Regionalization, De-Regionalization: Emerging Theoretical Frameworks in the Context of Emerging Economies (e.g., BRICS, Brexit)
- Marketing Issues, Impact, and Implications of WTO on Globalization
- Political Risk for Global Marketers in Populist, Xenophobic, and Authoritarian Regimes
- Emerging Frameworks of Political Risk, Corruption, and CSR Strategies in Global Markets
- Emerging Theories of Cultural and Institutional Distance: Concepts, Dynamics, Crossvergence, and Measurement Issues
- Global Marketing Research: Sampling Equivalence, Measurement Equivalence, Levels of Analysis, Hierarchical Modeling, Big Data and Customer Analytics and Techniques
- Emerging Theories on Global Entry Strategies: Exporting, Contractual Agreements, and FDI
- Lead Markets and Clusters of ‘R&D’ Innovation in Global Markets
- Global, Regional, Local Branding Strategies in an Age of Growing Counterfeit Markets
- Firm, Market, and Government Policy Factors in Global Pricing
- Traditional versus Social Media Advertising: New Trends and Budget Allocation
- Changing Nature of Global Retail Landscape
- E-Commerce and M-Commerce (social media): New Global Marketing Challenges and Strategies
- International Entrepreneurial Firm Growth and Expansion Strategies: Firm Specific and Country Specific Advantages
- Global Marketing in Services (Deregulation, WTO, Sector Specific Issues)
Timeline
- Submit a book chapter proposal: November 15, 2016
- Notice of accepted chapter proposal: December 15, 2016
- Submission of full book chapter: June 15, 2017
- Final chapter submission after revisions: August 15, 2017
Submission Process
Chapter proposals must be submitted by November 15, 2016 to be considered. We will make initial editorial decisions on chapter proposals by December 15, 2016. Authors of accepted proposals will be invited to submit their full book chapters by June 15, 2017. All submissions will be double-blind peer-reviewed. Contributors may be asked to serve as reviewers.
- You are invited to submit a 2-3 page chapter proposal
- Manuscripts must be original, and should not have been previously published or currently under consideration by other books or journals.
- Please submit your chapter proposals via email to both editors: James Agarwal, james.agarwal@haskayne.ucalgary.ca; Terry Wu, terry.wu@uoit.ca.
- All submissions must follow the format and reference styles from the Journal of International Business Studies.
Any questions pertaining to the book chapters, please contact the co-editors:
Dr. James Agarwal: james.agarwal@haskayne.ucalgary.ca
Dr. Terry Wu: terry.wu@uoit.ca
References:
Agarwal, James and Terry Wu (2015), “Factors Influencing Growth Potential of E-Commerce in Emerging Economies: An Institution-Based N-OLI Framework,” Thunderbird International Business Review, 57(3), 197-215.
Agarwal, James and Dorothee Feils (2007), “Political Risk and the Internationalization of Firms: An Empirical Study of Canadian-based Export and FDI Firms,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, Vol. 24, No. 3, 165-181.
Agarwal, James and Terry Wu (2004), “China's Entry to WTO: Global Marketing Issues, Impact, and Implications,” International Marketing Review, 21(3), 279-300.
Agarwal, James, Naresh K. Malhotra and Ruth N. Bolton (2010), “A Cross-National and Cross-Cultural Approach to Global Market Segmentation: An Application Using Consumers’ Perceived Service Quality,” Journal of International Marketing, 18(3), 18-40.
Antia, Kersi D., Mark Bergen and Shantanu Dutta (2004), “Competing with Gray Markets,” MIT Sloan Management Review, Vol. 46, No. 1, 63-69.
Coviello, Nicole (2015), “Re-Thinking Research on Born Globals”, Journal of International Business Studies, 46, 17-26.
Malhotra, N. K., Agarwal, James & Ulgado, Francis. M. (2003). Internationalization and Entry Modes: A Multitheoretical Framework and Research Propositions. Journal of International Marketing, 11(4), 1-31.
Meyer, Klaus E. and Mike W. Peng (2016), “Theoretical Foundations of Emerging Economy Business Research,” Journal of International Business Studies, 47, 3-22.
Steenkamp, Jan-Benedict (2014), “How Global Brands Create Firm Value: The 4V Model” International Marketing Review, Vol. 31. No. 1, 5-29.
Van Hoorn Andre and Robert Maseland (2016), “How Institutions Matter for International Business: Institutional Distance Effects vs. Institutional Profile Effects,” Journal of International Business Studies, 47, 374-381.
Over the last decade the significance of emerging economies in Africa, Asia-Pacific and Latin-/ South America in global logistics and supply chain management (LSCM) has been increasing. Using these regions as a context, research attention is beginning to be devoted to a market commonly known as the “Base of the Pyramid” or BOP. The BOP includes the majority of the world’s population, predominately residing in the least developed countries, who make up the bottom of the world’s economic pyramid. Involving the BOP as a pool of potential customers requires vigorous private and public partnerships that are willing to assume shared responsibility and implement sustainability practices beyond narrowly defined economic/productivity-based goals. It is therefore time for LSCM researchers to consider emerging issues related to BOP markets.
The objective of this STF is to raise awareness of the BOP market, and to encourage ground-breaking research in this domain. While current research is scarce in this area, we believe in the great potential of this domain. Desired topics include, but are not limited to the following:
- Impact of trade agreements on LSCM strategic practices involving BOP markets.
- Conceptual frameworks that examine complexity related to sustainable LSCM involving BOP customers.
- Empirical examinations of the role of LSCM in achieving competitive advantage for BOP markets.
- Theories and models that integrate LSCM principles (e.g. quality management, outsourcing, innovation, supplier development) within the BOP context.
- Interdisciplinary analyses of techno-culture interactions in LSCM for BOP entities.
- Critical roles of global LSCM for building sustainable environments for BOP entities.
- Case studies and theoretical frameworks in LSCM related to building products and services involving BOP markets.
All topically appropriate papers will go through JBL’s double-blind review process. Submission will be accepted between March 1 and March 31, 2016. You can learn more by e-mailing one of the guest editors at hult@broad.msu.edu, Paul.Hong@Utoledo.Edu, or Schoenherr@broad.msu.edu. Please submit your paper via Manuscript Central. Note that it is a special topic forum submission.
This special issue aims to enhance the understanding of the contemporary role of politics in the global economy and its significance for international business. At a more general level, the special issue aspires to contribute to a better integration of the role of politics and of non-markets strategies into international business theories, dimensions that have so far not been subjected to much systematic treatment.
The focus on outward investment from emerging economies and emerging market multinational enterprises (EMNEs) supports this agenda particularly well. It serves as a laboratory or extreme case to bring out more clearly the different dimensions of the special issue theme and their implications. Issues of politics, policies and institutions are often especially pronounced, both in home and host countries, when we consider EMNEs relative to multinationals from advanced economies (AMNEs). EMNE strategies are becoming entwined with those of governments, political parties, lobbyists, and other formal and informal institutions, in a variety of constellations. In emerging-economy home countries, where market failures and institutional voids tend to be widespread, the state more often than not plays a relatively active role in the economy and EMNE strategies and operating modes are more conditioned by politics, policies and non-market considerations. In advanced-economy host countries, there are often more sensitivities associated with EMNEs than with AMNEs, and political and regulatory responses are more pronounced. In both emerging and developing economy host countries, it is not uncommon for EMNE activities to be underpinned and conditioned by formal or informal interactions between home and host country governments. This special issue aspires to shed more light on the multi-level interrelationships between politics and EMNEs’ internationalization and the non-market agenda for their international strategy.
Over the last decade, outward investment from emerging economies has been steadily rising as a share of total outward investment (Goldstein & Shaw, 2007; Gammeltoft, 2008). Recent backlashes notwithstanding, more and more EMNEs are becoming competitive in an increasing number of markets and sectors on the basis of accumulated technological and managerial skills and abilities to manage global supply chains (Ramamurti & Singh, 2009; Gammeltoft, Barnard & Madhok, 2010). Yet, over the course of the same decade, the conditions for operating across borders have undergone significant changes. Succeeding the global financial crisis, national governments have resorted to interventionist and protectionist measures to safeguard domestic jobs and the competitiveness of national firms. Deglobalization rhetoric has been pronounced in a number of countries where nationalist and populist parties and individuals have elicited significant electoral support. However, the resort to measures impeding the flow of goods, capital, people and information has not been confined to individual countries. Other contemporary events such as the US-China trade and technology war, sanctions against Russia, Brexit, and the Covid-19 pandemic have further compounded some of these challenges.
More generally, the global economy has witnessed a widespread resurgence of politics in the wake of the environmental changes such as the global financial crisis, electoral support for nationalist governments, and the Covid-19 pandemic. This represents a marked shift from the preceding period from the 1990s onward, where neoliberal policies were dominant and there was more widespread consensus about the rules, norms and principles that would promote growth and stability. Today, with a considerably more entropic world order, the models and theories applied for a couple of decades to global economic change may benefit from reconsideration and extension to better take the new political circumstances into account. In recent years, international business theory has developed a much better appreciation of the importance of institutions. Yet, the role of politics and policies is yet to be systematically theorized and has so far been treated primarily as a source of risks and costs.
The increasing role of politics has been particularly pronounced where EMNEs’ expansion and performance are concerned. In the global economy, the locus of financial and political power is shifting towards emerging economies and in emerging economies, both state ownership and political support are essential pillars for the success of many EMNEs (Panibratov & Michailova, 2019). Political and institutional factors over time become embedded within EMNEs, transforming country-specific advantages into firm-specific ones. These political and policy issues associated with EMNEs meet with concern and policy responses, e.g. regarding their motives and competitive behavior (Panibratov, 2012), which leads to the increase of political bargaining between EMNEs and host countries’ governments, with examples such as Huawei in the US, or Gazprom in the EU. Ability to leverage politics constitutes a competitive advantage for EMNEs adding to their competitiveness and flexibility in their cross-border operations. Although economic motivations of EMNEs continuously develop and get more sophisticated, political factors remain an important tool to facilitate their expansion.
The resurgence of politics is manifest at multiple institutional levels, viz. firms, organizations, states, and multinational regimes. Most evidently, national governments have become less intent on integrating with other economies and international regimes and more intent on devising policies to better promote their own national interests, e.g. through protectionist measures and subsidies (Evenett, 2019). Abroad, governments mobilize representations, diplomacy and debt and aid conditionalities in support of commercial goals. More heavy-handed national regulation and incentives in home and host countries affects flows of goods, capital, people and information through both push and pull effects (Avioutskii & Tensaout, 2016). Hence, the global economy has become more adversarial and shifted from a more rule-based and transparent environment towards one that is more transactional and opaque.
At the level of firms, in many countries, the international competitiveness of national firms is more and more becoming a government rather than just a private concern, in particular of course where state-owned companies are involved (Cuervo-Cazurra et al., 2014; Panibratov & Michailova, 2019). EMNEs adjust their strategies to better deal with the new and more volatile political and regulatory environment and attendant risks and uncertainties (John & Lawton, 2017; Globerman, 2017; Stoian & Mohr, 2016; Villa, Rajwani & Lawton, 2015). The ability to leverage politics is becoming more important for the competitive advantage of EMNEs and firms are increasingly engaging in and formalizing political activities through lobbyism, political advocacy, CSR and other nonmarket strategies (Doh, Lawton, & Rajwani, 2012; White, Hemphill, Joplin, & Marsh, 2014).
At the level of international regimes, multiple international agreements, organizations, partnerships etc., such as the WTO, the TPP and the TTIP, have lost momentum and stagnated or even receded and in some domains new and contesting international regimes are being introduced, e.g. the AIIB, RCEP, BRICS and SCO, challenging those which were for a while hegemonic. At the level of civil society organizations and the general public, populist and anti-globalization movements have gained more strength and influence in a variety of countries and domains.
In addition to the distinct institutional levels, the special issue theme can be approached from different topical perspectives, for example:
Political risk perspective: Host country political risk has been widely analyzed in the literature. Home country political risk, on the other hand, has been less scrutinized. Companies may over time accumulate capabilities in managing political risks and hence may lower their overall exposure to them or mitigate them better. We encourage authors to address the issue of the political risk and respective political strategies of EMNEs in host countries, developed as well as developing.
Political capital perspective: While prior research has recognized the value of firms’ political capital in the home country and demonstrated that political connections provide firms with a favorable access to home country resources (Goldman, Rocholl, & So, 2013; Zhu & Chung, 2014), benefits (as well as liabilities) of political capital can also appear in host markets. We invite papers studying EMNEs’ internationalization through the lenses of political power balances and distribution, bargaining, and other basic features of political markets integrated in the IB context.
Non-market strategy / corporate political activity (CPA) perspective: The wide range of political strategies used by MNEs to influence host government decision-making is one of the cornerstones of the CPA concepts, and has raised a significant interest recently from international business and political economy scholars (Akbar & Kisilowski, 2015; Doh, Lawton, & Rajwani, 2012; Hillman, 2005). It is important to study further how the non-market mechanisms (e.g. CPA or lobbyism) affect the internationalization of EMNEs and OFDI from emerging economies.
Geopolitical perspective: EMNEs may occasionally serve as conduits for home country government influence over certain regions for socio-cultural or historical reasons and governments in emerging economies can leverage strategic partnerships in neighboring regions to strengthen their position in international political and economic relations (Maksakova, 2014). We seek papers addressing geopolitical issues of EMNE-host country relations such as the rise of economic nationalism (Zhang & He, 2014), the role of supranational institutions (Weinberg, 2016), and the involvement of politics in economic relations in general.
More generally, this special issue seeks contributions, which extend the understanding of the multi-level interplay between political processes, governance and policies and the internationalization of emerging market multinationals and the implications it holds for firms, governments and international regimes. This broader theme spans a wide range of specific topics and can be approached with different disciplinary, theoretical and empirical lenses. Hence, the editors welcome both theoretical and empirical papers, applying qualitative, quantitative or mixed methods, and encourage contributions from a range of disciplines, such as international business, strategy and organization, political science, political economy, economic geography, regional studies, economic sociology, as well as cross-disciplinary contributions. Papers aimed at advancing the theoretical frontier of the understanding of the significance of politics and policies for EMNEs and outward investment from emerging economies are particularly welcome.
Extending the understanding of the role of politics in the internationalization of EMNEs imposes few restrictions on the international business themes that may be addressed: most conventional IB themes may be subjected to a deeper and more explicit analysis of how they may be conditioned by politics. At the firm level, analysis may pertain to governance, strategies, and operations of firms alike. Firms’ more prevalent non-market strategies partly reflect, partly shape political processes and policy outcomes. At the level of governments, interventions in both domestic (e.g. factor and product) and international (e.g. trade and investment) markets impact on EMNE internationalization, and at the supranational level, trade and investment regulation and agreements is an important theme along with the dynamics with which these regimes evolve, partially under the influence of multinational firms and national governments.
Indicative but by no means exhaustive issues pertaining to the theme of the special issue include the following:
- How and with which outcomes do home governments support the internationalization of EMNEs, both domestically and abroad?
- What are the roles of diplomacy and soft power in EMNE internationalization?
- How do dynamics between different levels of government in home countries, e.g. central vs regional, affect EMNE internationalization?
- How and with which effects do host governments seek to capture the opportunities and mitigate the risks from the increasing presence and strengths of EMNEs?
- Which non-market strategies do EMNEs deploy to mobilize the support of or to mitigate the adverse effects of governments in home and host countries?
- How and to which extent do EMNEs respond to political changes in host countries’ institutional and governmental system in their corporate political activity?
- Do EMNEs' non-market strategies vary systematically with firm characteristics such as forms of ownership, governance, nationality, industry or certain types of capabilities?
- How do protectionist measures and increasing regulatory scrutiny in host economies influence international strategies and supply chain organization of EMNEs?
- How do EMNEs manage increasing political risk and regulatory uncertainty?
- How have supranational institutions and international regimes evolved to shape EMNE internationalization? How do firms and governments seek to actively influence their evolution?
- How do civil society organizations, popular movements and the media shape the responses to EMNE internationalization?
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Please address your questions to the guest editors: pg.egb@cbs.dk; panibratov@gsom.spbu.ru
Call for papers at the IBR website: https://www.journals.elsevier.com/international-business-review/call-for-papers/emerging-market-multinationals
REFERENCES
Akbar, Y.H. and Kisilowski, M. (2015), ‘Managerial agency, risk, and strategic posture: Nonmarket strategies in the transitional core and periphery’, International Business Review, 24(6): 984-996.
Avioutskii, V. and Tensaout, M. (2016), ‘Does politics matter? Partisan FDI in Central and Eastern Europe’, Multinational Business Review, 24(4): 375-398.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A., Inkpen, A., Musacchio, A., & Ramaswamy, K. (2014), ‘Governments as owners: State-owned multinational companies’, Journal of International Business Studies, 45(8): 919-942.
Doh, J. P., Lawton, T. C. and Rajwani, T. (2012), ‘Advancing nonmarket strategy research: Institutional perspectives in a changing world’, Academy of Management Perspectives, 26(3): 22-39.
Evenett, S. (2019), ‘Protectionism, state discrimination, and international business since the onset of the global financial crisis’, Journal of International Business Policy, 2(1): 9-36.
Gammeltoft, P. (2008), 'Emerging multinationals: outward FDI from the BRICS countries', International Journal of Technology and Globalisation, 4(1): 5-22.
Gammeltoft, P., Barnard, H. and Madhok, A. (2010), ’Emerging multinationals, emerging theory: Macro- and micro-level perspectives’, Journal of International Management, 16(2): 95-101.
Globerman, S. (2017), ‘A new era for foreign direct investment?’, Multinational Business Review, 25(1): 5-10.
Goldman, E., Rocholl, J. and So, J. (2013), ‘Politically connected boards of directors and the allocation of procurement contracts’, Review of Finance, 17(5): 1617-1648.
Goldstein, A. and Shaw, T.M. (2007), Multinational Companies from Emerging Economies: Composition, Conceptualization and Direction in the Global Economy, London: Palgrave Macmillan.
Hillman, A. (2005), ‘Politicians on the board of directors: Do connections affect the bottom line?’, Journal of Management, 32(3): 464-481.
John, A. and Lawton, T. C. (2017), ‘International political risk management: Perspectives, approaches and emerging agendas’, International Journal of Management Reviews, 20(4): 847-879.
Maksakova, M. (2014), ‘Vozvrashchenie Rossii na Balkany: ehkonomicheskij aspect’, Observer, 9: 50-63.
Panibratov, A. (2012), Russian Multinationals: From Regional Supremacy to Global Lead, London, New York: Routledge.
Panibratov, A. and Michailova , S. (2019), ‘The role of state ownership and home government political support in Russian multinationals’ internationalization’, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 14(3): 436-450.
Ramamurti, R. and Singh, J.V. (eds.) (2009), Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Stoian, C. and Mohr, A. (2016), ‘Outward foreign direct investment from emerging economies: escaping home country regulative voids’, International Business Review, 25(5): 1124-1135.
Villa, M.A. De, Rajwani, T. and Lawton, T. (2015), ’Market entry modes in a multipolar world: Untangling the moderating effect of the political environment’, International Business Review, 24(3): 419-429.
Weinberg, J. (2016). ‘European Union member states in cross-national analyses: The dangers of neglecting supranational policymaking’, International Studies Quarterly, 60(1),1: 98–106.
White, G. O., Hemphill, T. A., Joplin, J. R. W. and Marsh, L. A. (2014), ‘Wholly owned foreign subsidiary relations-based strategies in volatile environments’, International Business Review, 23(1): 303-312.
Zhang, J. and He, X. (2014), ‘Economic nationalism and foreign acquisition completion: the case of China’, International Business Review, 23(1): 212-227.
Zhu, H. and Chung, C. (2014), ‘Portfolios of political ties and business group strategy in emerging economies: Evidence from Taiwan’, Administrative Science Quarterly, 59(4): 599.
“Name some Brazilian multinationals. Even harder than "famous Belgians", isn't it? Despite Brazil being the world's eighth-largest economy, with plenty of big, profitable firms, few of them have a reasonable share of their operations abroad and are thus genuinely multinational.” The Economist, Sept 21, 2000.
“For the first time Brazil has a crop of companies that can be described as multinationals. Some of them are already well known outside Brazil: Petrobras; Vale, one of the world’s largest mining companies; and Embraer, the world’s third-largest maker of passenger jets.” The Economist, November 12, 2009.
These two quotes from the British newspaper The Economist reflect the change in view about Multilatinas, or Latin American multinational companies. The reason is not that there were no Multilatinas before 2000. In fact, there have been Multilatinas for over a century. For example, the Argentinean shoemaker Alpargatas was created in 1885 and established subsidiaries in Uruguay in 1890 and in Brazil in 1907. The reason is that there were few studies analyzing Multilatinas before the 2000s. This was part of a general trend in the international business literature that appeared to have ignored the region. For example, a review of articles in two leading journals in the field of international business (Journal of International Business Studies and Management International Review) in the period 1987-1997 indicated that fewer than 6% of the articles mentioned Latin America (Elahee and Vaidya, 2001). This paucity of studies on the region had not changed in recent times. A review of studies in four leading international business journal (Journal of International Business Studies, Management International Review, Journal of World Business, and International Business Review) in 2001-2005 indicated that only 2.75% of articles studied firms in the region (Perez-Batres, Pisani and Doh, 2010). Nevertheless, a few analyses of multinationals have indicated that firms from this region are becoming multinational rapidly and some of them are becoming leaders in their industries (Casanova, 2009; Cuervo-Cazurra, 2008,; Fleury and Fleury, 2010; Santiso, 2013).
In this special issue we plan to take stock of what is known about these firms and identify potential avenues for future research. Other special issues of the Journal of World Business have analyzed various regions of the world such as India (Varma and Budhwar, 2012), China (Laforet, Paliwoda and Chen, 2012), Africa (Kamoche, 2011), the Middle East (Mellahi, Demirbag and Riddle, 2011), and Korea (Paik and Lee, 2008). This special issue contributes to the global scope of the Journal of World Business by studying firms from Latin America, which have, thus far, been underrepresented in the management and business literature (Brenes, Montoya and Ciravegna, 2014). With this special issue, we aim to not only increase our understanding of Multilatinas, but also to identify the particular characteristics of their internationalization and how it compares with the internationalization of firms from other regions.
The rise of emerging market multinationals has been well documented (for example see the papers in the special issues edited by Aulakh, 2007; Cuervo-Cazurra, 2012; Gammeltoft, Barnard and Madhok, 2010; Luo and Tung, 2007; and in the books edited by Cuervo-Cazurra and Ramamurti, 2014; Ramamurti and Singh, 2007, Sauvant, 2008; Williamson et al., 2013), yet the literature on emerging market multinationals has thus far focused mainly on firms from regions other than Latin America. With this Special Issue of Journal of World Business, we aim to fill this gap, contributing to the international business literature and the body of knowledge documenting the practices of multinational companies.
This call is an attempt to integrate different aspects that might have influenced the growth and internationalization of Latin American firms. We welcome theoretical, empirical, methodological and case studies submission addressing, but not limited to, the following issues:
- Successful Multilatinas expanding outside their region
- Comparative ownership advantages/disadvantages of Multilatinas
- Internationalization patterns of Latin American firms
- The internationalization of state-owned Latin American firms
- Institutional constraints for Latin American companies to internationalize
- Foreign performance of Latin American firms
- Effects of exports promotion agencies on the internationalization of Latin American firms
- Governance in Multilatinas
- The internationalization of Latin American business groups
- Global leadership in Multilatinas
- Dimensions of management diversity in Multilatinas
- Determinants of outward FDI from Latin America
- The role of governments in Latin American International Business
- Corporate social responsibility and sustainable practices in Multilatinas
- The role of family-owned business conglomerates in Multilatinas
- Oligopolistic structures and internationalization in Multilatinas
- Multilatinas and economic and political crises
- Cultural challenges in doing business from Latin America
- The role of Latin American diaspora and returning emigrants in international business
Submission process:
By May 4, 2015, authors should submit their manuscripts online via the new Journal of World Business EES submission system. The link for submitting manuscript is: http://ees.elsevier.com/jwb.
To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, it is important that authors select ‘SI: Latin American MNCs’ when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process
Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the Journal of World Business Guide for Authors available at http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-world-business/1090-9516/guide-for-authors. All submitted manuscripts will be subject to the Journal of World Business’s blind review process.
We may organize a workshop designed to facilitate the development of papers. Authors of manuscripts that have progressed through the revision process will be invited to it. Presentation at the workshop is neither a requirement for nor a promise of final acceptance of the paper in the Special Issue.
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors:
- Ruth V. Aguilera, Northeastern University, United States (r.aguilera@neu.edu)
- Luciano Ciravegna, King’s College, London, UK, (Luciano.ciravegna@kcl.ac.uk)
- Alvaro Cuervo-Cazurra, Northeastern University, United States (a.cuervocazurra@neu.edu)
- Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez, Universidad EAFIT, Colombia (mgonza40@eafit.edu.co)
References:
Aulakh, P. S. (2007). Emerging multinationals from developing economies: motivations, paths, and performance. Journal of International Management, 13, 338-355.
Brenes, E. R., Montoya, D., & Ciravegna, L. (2014). Differentiation strategies in emerging markets: The case of Latin American agribusinesses. Journal of Business Research, 67, 847-855.
Casanova, L. (2009). Global Latinas: Latin America's emerging multinationals. Palgrave Macmillan.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2008). The multinationalization of developing country MNEs: The case of Multilatinas. Journal of International Management, 14, 138-154.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2012). How the analysis of developing country multinational companies helps advance theory: Solving the Goldilocks debate. Global Strategy Journal, 2, 153-167.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A., & Ramamurti, R. (2014). Understanding multinationals from emerging markets. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Economist. (2001). Brazil's Gerdau: Who dares wins. The Economist. www.economist.com/node/374586
Economist. (2009). Special Reports Economist Brazil. The Economist. www.economist.com/node/14829517
Elahee, M. N., & Vaidya, S. P. (2001). Coverage of Latin American business and management issues in cross-cultural research: An analysis of JIBS and MIR 1987-1997. International Journal of Organization Theory & Behavior, 4, 21-31.
Fleury, A. & Fleury, M. T. L. (2011). Brazilian multinationals: Competences for internationalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
Gammeltoft, P., Barnard, H., & Madhok, A. (2010). Emerging multinationals, emerging theory: macro- and micro-level perspectives. Journal of International Management, 16, 95-101.
Kamoche, K. (2011). Contemporary developments in the management of human resources in Africa. Journal of World Business, 46, 1-4.
Laforet, S. Paliwoda, S. and Chen, J. (2012). Introduction. Journal of World Business, 47, 1-3.
Luo, Y., & Tung, R. L. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 481-498.
Mellahi, K., Demirbag, M., & Riddle, L. (2011). Multinationals in the Middle East: Challenges and opportunities. Journal of World Business, 46, 406-410.
Paik, Y., & Lee, S. H. (2008). Introduction. Journal of World Business, 43, 1-4.
Pérez-Batres, L.A., Pisani, M.J., & Doh, J.P. (2010). Latin America’s Contribution to IB Scholarship. Academy of International Business Insights, 10, 3-7.
Ramamurti, R., & Singh, J. V. (eds). (2009). Emerging multinationals from emerging markets. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Santiso, J. (2013). The decade of the Multilatinas. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Sauvant, K. P. (ed). (2008). The rise of transnational corporations from emerging markets: Threat or opportunity? Northampton, MA: Edward Elgar.
Varma, A., & Budhwar, P. (2012). International Human Resource Management in the Indian context. Journal of World Business, 47, 157-338.
Williamson, P., Ramamurti, R., Fleury, A., & Fleury, M. T. (eds). (2013). Competitive advantages of emerging country multinationals. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Objective
Emerging markets firms venturing into advanced economies has received increasing attention from both academics and practitioners (Atsmon, Kloss, & Smit, 2012; Luo & Tung, 2007). Although existing research has examined various aspects of this important phenomenon, such as the role of government (Luo, Xue, & Han, 2010), ownership and entry mode choice (Cui & Jiang, 2012), and absorptive capacity and overseas acquisitions (Deng, 2010; Liu & Woywode, 2013), there is the need to unpack contextual factors and to explore how context can influence the business leader’s decision making and managerial practices amid the venturing abroad phenomenon by emerging market enterprises.
Context matters a great deal for international business research and practices, such as the multiple embeddeness of multinational enterprises and local contexts (Meyer, Mudambi, & Narula, 2011). Cultural difference has an important bearing for emerging market firms venturing abroad. For instance, favours are a medium of exchange for social capital and prevalent in business in emerging markets (Teagarden & Schotter, 2013). However, such business practices might not be available in advanced economies which might become obstacles for emerging markets firms, or induce misunderstanding and confusion for Western managers. Despite under the same umbrella concept of emerging economies (Hoskisson, Wright, Filatotchev, & Peng, 2013), yet, emerging markets can vary on most significant dimensions—institutionally, economically, culturally, socially, technologically (Teagarden, 2013). Hence, there is the need to delineate and specify the contextual factors and boundary conditions with respect to emerging markets firms venturing into advanced economies. Furthermore, marketing practices in emerging markets may challenge the assumptions of received body of knowledge (Sheth, 2011).
The international marketing strategy of emerging market firms might pursue different strategy against the conventional wisdom (Vrontis, 2003; Vrontis, Thrassou, & Lamprianou, 2009). Mergers & Acquisitions (M&A) is a complex and sophisticated international management topic which involves multi-faceted challenges for managers in both emerging and developed markets (Weber, Tarba, & Oberg, 2014). M&A was identified as one primary market entry mode for emerging markets firms venturing abroad (Deng, 2012; Gomes, Angwin, Weber, & Tarba, 2013). One recent study shows that Chinese firms adopted an innovative post- acquisition integration approach largely due to the influence of contextual factors (Liu & Woywode, 2013). In addition, the ambidexterity perspective might largely advance our understanding of multinational enterprises from emerging economies (Chebbi, Yahiaoui, Thrassou, & Vrontis, 2014; Luo & Rui, 2009).
We embrace a pluralist view on emerging markets (Von Glinow & Teagarden, 2009) and encourage scholars to gain a nuanced contextualized understanding of emerging markets firms venturing into advanced economies through a comparative international management perspective (Luo, Sun, & Wang, 2011). Therefore, we seek for thought-provoking research on contexts and emerging markets firms venturing into advanced economies, and welcome both empirical (qualitative as well as quantitative) and conceptual contributions. Especially, we hope to highlight the practical implications derived from rigorous scholarship, to inform practice and provide insights for business practitioners and/ or policy makers. It is of significant importance to nurture future business leaders with a global mindset (Javidan, Teagarden, & Bowen, 2010), and we suggest a better understanding of emerging market firms venturing into advanced economies can help business leaders as well.
This SI aims to attract a variety of papers that can move the exciting research agenda further. Topics appropriate include, not limited to, the following:
- Institutions (formal and/ or informal) impact on emerging markets firms venturing abroad
- Commonalities and differences among emerging markets firms venturing abroad, BRIC (Brazil, Russia, India, China) countries and beyond
- Standardization vs. adaptation of international marketing of emerging markets firms
- Learning and (reverse) knowledge transfer of emerging markets firms venturing abroad
- International marketing practices and market entry strategy
- Ambidexterity, HRM and leadership practices
- Strategic management from a comparative international perspective
- Community involvement and non-market strategy
We encourage cross-fertilization approach by blending different theoretical lenses (Oswick, Fleming, & Hanlon, 2011), and we particularly welcome scholars from strategy and international business to join our stimulating discussions. Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All papers are refereed through a double-blind peer review process. A guide for authors and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page. http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/journal/117946257/grouphome/ForAuthors.html
Important Dates
- Submission deadline: November 1, 2014
- Publication release: 2016
Articles must be submitted through Thunderbird International Business Review’s Manuscript Central electronic submission system: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr
Please ensure your article abides by the scope and formatting conditions of this journal, which are detailed at http://www.thunderbird.edu/knowledge_network/tibr/submission.htm When submitting your article, please specify in your cover letter that you are submitting to the special issue on “Emerging Markets Firms Venturing into Advanced Economies”.
For additional information, please contact the special issue editors: Demetris Vrontis, School of Business, University of Nicosia, vrontis.d@unic.ac.cy, Yipeng Liu, Kent Business School, University of Kent, Y.P.Liu@kent.ac.uk
References
Atsmon, Y., Kloss, M., & Smit, S. 2012. Parsing the Growth Advantage of Emerging-Market Companies. Mckinsey Quarterly, 3: 10-14. Chebbi, H., Yahiaoui, D., Thrassou, A., & Vrontis, D. 2014. Building Multi-Unit Ambidextrous Organizations - A Transformative Framework. Human Resource Management: Forthcoming. Cui, L., & Jiang, F. 2012. State ownership effect on firms' FDI ownership decisions under institutional pressure: a study of Chinese outward-investing firms. Journal of International Business Studies, 43(3): 264-284. Deng, P. 2010. What determines performance of cross‐border M&As by Chinese companies? An absorptive capacity perspective. Thunderbird International Business Review, 52(6): 509-524. Deng, P. 2012. The Internationalization of Chinese Firms: A Critical Review and Future Research*. International Journal of Management Reviews, 14: 408-427. Gomes, E., Angwin, D. N., Weber, Y., & Tarba, S. Y. 2013. Critical Success Factors through the Mergers and Acquisitions Process: Revealing Pre‐and Post‐M&A Connections for Improved Performance. Thunderbird International Business Review, 55(1): 13-35. Hoskisson, R. E., Wright, M., Filatotchev, I., & Peng, M. W. 2013. Emerging Multinationals from Mid‐Range Economies: The Influence of Institutions and Factor Markets. Journal of Management Studies, 50(7): 1295-1321. Javidan, M., Teagarden, M., & Bowen, D. 2010. Making it overseas. Harvard Business Review, 88(4): 109-113. Liu, Y., & Woywode, M. 2013. Light-touch Integration of Chinese Cross-Border M&A: The Influences of Culture and Absorptive Capacity. Thunderbird International Business Review, 55(4): 469-483. Luo, Y., & Rui, H. 2009. An ambidexterity perspective toward multinational enterprises from emerging economies. Academy of Management Perspectives, 23(4): 49-70. Luo, Y., Sun, J., & Wang, S. L. 2011. Comparative strategic management: An emergent field in international management. Journal of International Management, 17(3): 190-200. Luo, Y., & Tung, R. L. 2007. International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4): 481-498. Luo, Y., Xue, Q., & Han, B. 2010. How emerging market governments promote outward FDI: Experience from China. Journal of World Business, 45(1): 68-79. Meyer, K. E., Mudambi, R., & Narula, R. 2011. Multinational enterprises and local contexts: the opportunities and challenges of multiple embeddedness. Journal of Management Studies, 48(2): 235-252. Oswick, C., Fleming, P., & Hanlon, G. 2011. From borrowing to blending: Rethinking the processes of organizational theory building. Academy of management review, 36(2): 318-337. Sheth, J. N. 2011. Impact of emerging markets on marketing: Rethinking existing perspectives and practices. Journal of Marketing, 75(4): 166-182. Teagarden, M. B. 2013. Not All Emerging Markets Are Created Equal. Thunderbird International Business Review, 55(3): 235-236. Teagarden, M. B., & Schotter, A. 2013. Favor prevalence in emerging markets: A multi-level analysis. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 30(2): 447-460 Von Glinow, M. A., & Teagarden, M. B. 2009. The future of Chinese management research: rigour and relevance redux. Management and Organization Review, 5(1): 75-89. Vrontis, D. 2003. Integrating adaptation and standardisation in international marketing: the AdaptStand modelling process. Journal of Marketing Management, 19(3-4): 283-305. Vrontis, D., Thrassou, A., & Lamprianou, I. 2009. International marketing adaptation versus standardisation of multinational companies. International Marketing Review, 26(4/5): 477-500. Weber, Y., Tarba, S. Y., & Oberg, C. 2014. A Comprehensive Guide to Mergers and Acquisitions: Managing The Critical Success Factors Across Every Stage of The M&A Process. USA & UK: Pearson & Financial Times.
The rise of multinational corporations (MNCs) from emerging markets has been a major development during the last decade. Publications such as the UNCTAD Global Investment Report and the FT Global 500 indicate the increasing share of these companies among the world’s largest multinationals. This development not only relates to the BRICs, but also comprises companies from countries such as Indonesia, Malaysia, Mexico, Saudi-Arabia, Singapore, South Africa, Taiwan, Turkey and others. Explaining the rather sudden rise of these companies has become somewhat of a growth industry over the last years. (Brennan 2011, Sauvant et al. 2010). Various International Business scholars have developed or modified long established analytical instruments in order to account for the rise of these companies. Theories such as the Eclectic Paradigm (Dunning 1986) or the Product Cycle Model (Wells 1983) have been extended in order to account for the rise of these companies while others such as the Linking, Leverage, Learning-approach (Mathews 2002) have been proposed to address this novel phenomenon.
However, many of these approaches do not fully take into account that the institutional and political background in the home states of these companies may be quite different from the ones within most countries of the established centre of the world economy and that this background may be a very important one for understanding the transnational activity of these corporations (Goldstein 2007, Ramamurti 2008). Moreover, literature has only begun to address the implications of this institutional background for the global economic order (Nölke and Taylor 2010, Nölke 2011).
This call for papers is based on the assumption that a major feature of emerging market MNCs appears to be their close relationship with their home country states. To be sure, many Western MNCs cultivate close relationships with their home states as well (as, for instance, recently witnessed in the financial sector), but this special issue will investigate whether and where there is a special quality of relationship between the state and major corporations stemming from countries outside of the recent centre of the world economy, as well as explore how this special quality affects the cross-border activities of these corporations.
In order to study this claim, a number of topics may be highlighted that might form the focus of individual contributions, both comprising of specific public policies and more general structural issues. A first set of topics looks at the role of (partial) state ownership/(former) public enterprises among emerging markets MNCs, direct financial support by (para-) state bodies, such as development banks or pension funds, as well as the importance of close, formal or informal inter-personal networks between major corporations and public officials in these countries, as far as this proximity and these support measures directly effect the cross-border operations of emerging market MNCs.
The close relationship between emerging markets multinationals and their home states may, however, not be limited to a domestic issue. Corporations and governments may also cooperate quite closely with regard to trans-/international relations. A number of issues could be explored in this context:
• Close relations between corporations and governments for gaining access to natural resources in other countries.
• Cooperation between emerging market MNCs and home state governments with regard to negotiations about global/regional economic regulation, e.g. with regard to the selective protection of intellectual property rights or to competition policies that are geared towards the support of emerging “national champions”.
• The non-enforcement of international regulations by home state governments, e.g. accounting and auditing standards or corporate governance regulations that prevent unfriendly take-overs, particularly by rival multinationals.
• The different role of these MNCs with regard to private transnational governance, e.g. with regard to social and environmental standards.
• The degree of integration of emerging market MNC managers in transnational organizations of the global capitalist class – vis-à-vis their primary identification with domestic state-based class networks.
Generally, the close relationship between these corporations and their home states may be considered as a problematic affair, not only from the perspective of liberals that despise any intervention of the state in economic affairs. We welcome papers that give special attention to the potential effects of this relationship with regard to:
• The concentration of economic and political power due to the collusion of public officials and MNC owners/managers and its effect for the cross-border operation of firms.
• Public policies that are biased towards the transnational expansion of big companies, thereby disadvantaging broad social groups (e.g. high consumer prices due to weak competition policies).
• The emergence of international tensions, due to the use of governments in order to further company strategies (or the use of corporations for political strategies).
In order to study the agenda outlined above, we seek contributions by political scientists, political economists and critical business scholars, but also from scholars with a background in sociology, geography or business history. Moreover, we are seeking contributions from all regions of the world, in particular from emerging market economies.
Time schedule
The submission of manuscripts will follow a two step-approach. The first round is based on an initial call for abstracts (300 – 5000 words) with a deadline of 15 March 2012. A selected number of authors will subsequently be invited for an authors’ workshop on 18/19 June 2012 in Parma/Italy, sponsored by the COST Action IS 0905 “The Emergence of Southern Multinationals and their Impact on Europe”. Participation will be open to both members of the COST Action and other scholars. Papers for this workshop will be due 31 May 2012.
The submission deadline for manuscripts with CPoIB will be 1 December 2012, with initial reviewing to be completed by 28 February 2013, revisions due by 1st May 2013, final decisions by 1 August 2013, and anticipated publication in early 2014. Submission of manuscripts will be open to all scholars, not limited to participants of the authors’ conference in June 2012.
Submissions should follow the author guidelines for Critical Perspectives on International Business which can be found at http://www.emeraldinsight.com/cpoib.htm.
Please direct questions, proposals and papers to the special issue Guest Editor at: a.noelke@soz.uni-frankfurt.de.
About the Guest Editor
Dr. Andreas Nölke is Professor of Political Science, with a special focus on International Relations and International Political Economy at Goethe University, Frankfurt. His research interests include comparative capitalism, emerging markets, financialization, deep integration, private governance and transnational policy networks. He has published articles in leading journals such as World Politics, Review of International Political Economy, Journal of Common Market Studies and Business and Politics.
References
Brennan, L. ed. (2011), The Emergence of Southern Multinationals: Their Impact on Europe, London/New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Dunning, J. H. (1986) “The Investment Development and Third World Multinationals,” in K. M. Khan (ed.) Multinationals of the South: New Actors in the International Economy, London/New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Goldstein, A. (2007), Multinational Companies from Emerging Economies, London/New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Mathews, J. A. (2002) “Competitive Advantages of the Latecomer Firm: A Resource-Based
Account of Industrial Catch-Up Strategies,” Asia Pacific Journal of Management 19: 467-488.
Nölke, A (2011) “Non-triad Multinational Enterprises and Global Economic Institutions, in: D. H. Claes and C. H. Knutsen (ed.), Governing the Global Economy. Politics, Institutions, and Economic Development, London/New York: Routledge.
Nölke, A and H. Taylor (2010), Non-triad Multinationals and Global Governance: Still a North-South Conflict?, in: M. Ougaard/A. Leander (eds.), Business and Global Governance, London/New York: Routledge.
Ramamurti, R. (2008) “What Have We Learned about Emerging-Market MNEs?,” Paper
Prepared for Conference on Emerging Market Multinationals: Outward FDI from Emerging and Developing Economies, 9-10 October 2008, Copenhagen: Copenhagen Business School.
Sauvant, K. and G. McAllister with M. Maschek eds. (2010), Foreign Direct Investments from Emerging Markets, London/New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Wells, L. T. (1983) Third World Multinationals: The Rise of Foreign Investment from Developing Countries, Cambridge, Mass: The MIT Press.
The study of a multinational company (MNC) has been a fundamental component of the international business literature. While there have been significant variations in the strategies and structures of MNCs from different advanced regions, they have tended to share technological, marketing, and managerial strengths, enabling them to overcome the so-called liability of foreignness in a variety of markets. They have invested for the most part in wholly or majority-owned subsidiaries, transferred technology, products, and knowledge from headquarters to their operations around the world, and relied on elaborate bureaucratic mechanisms and financial controls (Guillen and Garcia-Canal, 2009).
Recent years have seen the emergence of a growing number of MNCs from emerging economies as diverse as Brazil, China, Korea, India, Malaysia, Mexico, Russia, Singapore, Taiwan, and Turkey (Goldstein et al, 2006). Whereas these firms have essentially had humble beginnings, some of them have become global leaders in the meantime (Li and Kozhikode, 2008; Guillen and Garcia-Canal, 2009). The new MNCs operate internationally using entry modes such as alliances, joint ventures and wholly owned subsidiaries. Some of them are small and product focused and others are large and diversified (Guillen and Garcia-Canal, 2009). The literature has referred to them as “thirdworld multinationals” (Wells, 1983), “latecomer firms” (Mathews, 2002), “unconventional multinationals” (Li, 2003), “challengers” (BCG, 2008), and “emerging multinationals” (Accenture, 2008; Goldstein, 2007).
In spite of the interest in the topic of emerging multinationals as such, the academic literature is still based on the observation of firms from the so-called Triad (i.e. US, EU and Japan). Only recently a growing strand of literature has begun to question the phenomenon (Li, 2003). The Journal of International Business Studies (2007), the Journal of International Management (2007), the International Journal of Technology and Globalization (2008) and Industrial and Corporate Change (2009), for example, have dedicated special issues to the topic (Amighini et al, 2007). Although these issues have indeed published some very interesting pieces of work on emerging multinationals, those studies have largely focused on the nature of their competitive advantage, motivations, investment development paths and internationalization patterns (Amighini et al, 2007). This has also been the case for books published on the topic. For example, while Sauvant (2009) has comprehensively analyzed the rise and features of emerging multinationals, managerial aspects typical in these types of companies have not explicitly been dealt with. Also Ramamurti and Singh (2009) have asked why so many firms in emerging economies have internationalized so aggressively in the last decade, what competitive advantages these firms enjoy, and what the origins of those advantages are; however, their work has also largely neglected numerous management perspectives.
In academic studies, attempts to understand emerging multinationals have originated primarily from the “developed world” towards “developing countries”. Developing economies have been studied in their relation to investors and corporations expanding into them. Radhakrishnan (1994) has referred to this focus as the “I think therefore you are” syndrome. Genuine developments of emerging multinationals have been subsumed under the overarching explanatory power of Western theories. This attitude has inadvertently affected management and leadership studies. Western management has been regarded as a universal norm, and non-western management practices have been judged against this norm. The proponents of the so-called convergence hypothesis (e.g., Kerr et al, 1960) have argued that management systems would converge towards the models originating from the U.S. From this starting point, patterns in other countries have been viewed either as derivative of, or deviations from, the U.S. model (Locke et al, 1995). MNCs from developed countries have been given the status of ‘mainstream’, and emerging multinationals have been regarded as ‘unconventional’.
In recent years, it has been realized that many of the Western management practices and managerial styles cannot be transplanted exactly in the same manner to other culture and country contexts. Western management literature presents a model of organizational life that may or may not be appropriate in a non-Western business context. This is especially true for emerging multinationals. When Western management theories are applied directly, they may not match the local and cultural understanding of managerial problems and functions in non-Western MNCs. For example, unlike Western management theories, which emphasize delegation, empowerment, and power sharing as key component of effective leadership, research in many developing countries show that a more directive and autocratic management style is accepted and even legitimized (Badawy, 1980; Hofstede, 1984, Dia, 1994). Whereas especially the American view on management tends to overplay the influence of the top manager (Meindl, Ehrlich, and Dukerich, 1985; Meindl and Ehrlich, 1987), paternalism is valued and found in many developing nations (e.g., Dorfman and Howell, 1988). Similarly, counter to Western management paradigms which emphasize consistency and logic, research on management in many developing countries shows that behaving in accordance with the manager's beliefs, personalized and informal methods of conducting interpersonal business affairs and face saving are accepted as personal qualities of effective leaders (Abdullah, 1996).
In this book, we aspire to provide a new vantage point to management in emerging multinationals. Our aim is to create a state-of-the-art overview of management in emerging multinationals, from the point of view of these organizations themselves. We want to identify an analytic typology of cultural characteristics in order to interpret differing approaches to rationality, motivation, ethics and interpersonal relationships in a managerial context. We aim to illustrate the strengths and weaknesses of various managerial approaches in different national contexts. Readers of the book will better understand the interplay among country and company cultures, corporate strategy, as well as individual differences in an emerging country´s MNCs. We will also be able to evaluate the generalizability of models from Western cultures in a more balanced manner. To summarize, in Marsden’s words (1991, p. 36), it is our aim to “… begin from where the people are, rather than from where development (and management) experts would like them to be…”.
The chapters included in this book can potentially make significant contributions to the theory and practice of management of MNCs by facilitating our understanding of universally applicable theories and concepts. The book will target students and researchers of international business and postgraduate students in such courses as international management, cross-cultural studies, and international business.
Topics covered include but are not limited to:
- Cultural congruence and cultural differences in the interpretation of management in emerging country MNC’s
- Traits, skills and styles of managers in emerging country MNC’s
- General leadership styles of managers from emerging multinationals
- Motivation techniques of managers from emerging multinationals
- Communication and decision making styles
- Control mechanisms (management of processes and outputs)
- Value orientations and ethical dimensions of managers from emerging multinationals
- Negotiation styles of and between managers in emerging multinationals
- Multinational applications of generic strategies in emerging multinationals
- Societal culture: Influences on organizational culture in emerging multinational contexts
We are looking to include both conceptual and empirical papers in this edited book. Relevant case study examples are also welcome.
Notes for Potential Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All papers are refereed through a peer-review process. Please be prepared to review and comment on some of the submitted articles for this book.
Important Dates
Deadline for submissions of extended abstracts: March 30, 2010
Deadline for submissions of completed papers: July 1, 2010
Double blind review of papers and feedback from review given to the author(s) by: September 30, 2010
Deadline for final submission of corrected papers: December 15, 2010
No changes can be made to the papers after: January 15, 2011
Editors and Notes
You may send one copy in the form of an MS Word file attached to an e-mail (details in Author Guidelines) to both the following:
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Dilek Zamantili Nayir (dznayir@marmara.edu.tr)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Vlad Vaiman (vlad@ru.is)
References
Abdullah, A. (1996), Going Glocal: Cultural Dimensions in Malaysian Management, Malaysian Institute of Management, Kuala Lumpur.
Accenture. (2008). The rise of the emerging-market multinational. Retrieved December 3rd, 2009 from http://www.accenture.com/Global/Accenture_Blogs/Accenture_High_Performance_Business_Blog/January_2008/The+Rise+of+the+Emerging+Market+Multinational.htm
Amighini A., Sanfilippo M. and Rabellotti R. (2007), Emerging economic regional powers and local systems of production: new threats or new opportunities?, WP SERIES – N. 04/09 The rise of multinationals from emerging countries. A review of the literature
Badawy, M.K. (1980), Styles of mid-eastern managers, California Management Review 22 (2), 51-58.
BCG. (2008). The 2008 BCG 100 new global challengers: How top companies from rapidly developing economies are changing the world. Retrieved November 20th, 2009 from http://www.asiaing.com/how-100-top-companies-from-rapidly-developing-economies-are-changing-the-world-a-bcg-r.html.
Dia, M. (1994), Indigenous management practices: lessons for Africa's management in the '90s, in Serageldine, I. and Taboroff, J. (Ed.), Culture and Development in Africa, World Bank, Washington, DC. 165-191.
Dorfman, P.W. and Howell, J.P. (1988), Dimensions of national culture and effective leadership patterns: Hofstede revisited, Advances in International Comparative Management 3, 127-150.
Goldstein A., Bonaglia F. and Mathews J. (2006), Accelerated internationalization by emerging multinationals: The case of white goods,
Working paper, retrieved on October 12th, 2009 from http://dea2.univpm.it/quaderni/pdf/270.pdf.
Guillen M.F. and Garcia-Canal E. (2009), The American model of the multinational firm and the “new” multinationals from emerging economies, Academy of Management Perspectives 23 (2), 23-35.
Goldstein, A. (2007). Multinational companies from emerging economies. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Hofstede, G. (1984), Cultural dimensions in management and planning, Asia Pacific Journal of Management 1, 81-99.
Kerr, C., Dunlop, J. T., Harbison, F., and Myers, C. A. (1960). Industrialism and industrial man: The problems of labour and the management of economic growth. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Li, P. P. (2003). Toward a geocentric theory of multinational evolution: The implications from the Asian MNEs as latecomers. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 22(2), 217–242.
Li J. and Kozhikode R. K. (2008), Knowledge management and innovation strategy: The challenge for latecomers in emerging economies, Asia Pacific Journal of Management 25, 429–450.
Locke, R., Piore, M., and Kochan, T. (1995). Introduction. In R. Locke, T. Kochan, and M. Piore (Eds.), Employment relations in a changing world economy. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press
Mathews, J. A. (2002). Dragon multinationals: A new model of global growth. New York: Oxford University Press.
Meindl, J.R. and Ehrlich, S.B. (1987). The romance of leadership and the evaluation of organization performance. Academy of Management Journal, 30 (9), 91 - 109.
Meindl, J.R., Ehrlich, S.B. and Dukerich, J,M. (1985). The romance of leadership. Administrative Science Quarterly, 30, 78-102.
Marsden, D. (1991). Indigenous management. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 2(1), 21–38.
Radhakrishnan, R. (1994). Postmodernism and the rest of the world. Organization, 1: 305–340.
Ramamurti R. and Singh J. V. (2009), Emerging multinationals in emerging markets, Cambridge University Press; 1 edition.
Wells, L. T. (1983). Third world multinationals: The rise of foreign investment from developing countries. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
CALL FOR AUTHORS: Encyclopedia of Emerging Markets A Gale | Cengage Learning Reference We are inviting academic editorial contributors to the Encyclopedia of Emerging Markets to be published in 2013 by Gale | Cengage Learning. The Encyclopedia of Emerging Markets explores the world’s fastest-growing and newly flourishing emerging markets to include those countries in which a previously untapped potential for exports or investment is anticipated. Nations typically characterized under this banner are often developing countries, but they may also be economically formidable countries with markets that are increasingly open to exports. This single volume reference includes overviews of 33 countries currently identified as displaying the most rapid growth in social, business, and industrial activities. The market overview articles range from 2,000 to 3,000 words and are comprised of key macroeconomic data, geographic, political, and industrial factors, as well as comprehensive data on the nation’s GDP. 67 industry profiles articles ranging from 2,500-4,000 words also examine the markets which are at the forefront of the select countries’ bourgeoning economies. A list of contributors is included in the volume as well as an index and a thorough glossary. The following nations will be covered: Argentina Bangladesh Brazil Bulgaria Chile China Colombia Czech Republic Egypt Hungary India Indonesia Israel Malaysia Mexico Morocco Nigeria Pakistan Peru Philippines Poland Romania Russia South Africa South Korea Taiwan Thailand Tunisia Turkey United Arab Emirates (UAE) Ukraine Venezuela Vietnam We are now making article assignments with a deadline of November 15, 2012. If you are interested in contributing to the Encyclopedia of Emerging Markets, it can be a notable publication addition to your CV/resume and broaden your publishing credits. Moreover, you can help ensure that accurate information and important points of view are credibly presented to students and library patrons. Compensation is an honorarium payment of $.03 per word. The list of available articles and style guidelines are prepared and will be sent to you in response to your inquiry. Please then select which unassigned articles may best suit your interests and expertise. If you would like to contribute to building a truly outstanding reference with the Encyclopedia of Emerging Markets, please contact me by the e-mail information below. Please provide a brief summary of your background in global business topics, or provide your CV. Thanks for your time and interest. Thomas Walzer Author Manager markets@golsonmedia.com
Chapter contributions are now invited from leading international scholars and experienced researchers in the field of women’s entrepreneurship for an exciting new book Entrepreneurial Ecosystems and Growth of Women’s Entrepreneurship: A Comparative Analysis, to be published by Edward Elgar Publishing Inc. in 2017.
The Diana International Project (1) is committed to advancing knowledge about the status of women’s entrepreneurship around the world. This book is the eighth volume in the series associated with the Project and will build on the success of the first volume - Brush, C., Carter, N.M., Gatewood, E.J., Greene, P.G. and Hart, M. (eds.) (2006) Growth-oriented Women Entrepreneurs and their Businesses: A Global Research Perspective. This new volume will further consider the various national and international, social and contextual influences on women’s entrepreneurship by examining ecosystems, and how these affect and influence growth strategies and business potential.
The objective of this book is to foster a provocative discussion about topics on women’s entrepreneurship and growth considering ecosystem frameworks. While it is anticipated that many of the contributors will already be part of the Diana International Project, we are aiming for an inclusive discussion on women’s entrepreneurship. Thus, chapters are particularly sought from researchers in geographic regions less represented in the Project, specifically Africa, Asia and South America.
Chapter submissions should be based on rigorous empirical or theoretical research, and should discuss and analyse one of the following:
- key cultural, historical, social, political and economic (contextual) influencing factors on the ecosystems and how these influence growth and development of women’s entrepreneurship in a particular country (or group of countries)
- strategies which were successfully adopted by nascent or established women entrepreneurs (or which could logically be adopted by them) to enhance the growth potential of their business within their ecosystems.
- comparisons of country, regional or area ecosystems and their influence on growth strategies for women entrepreneurs
- deep analysis of a single ecosystem considering its gendered aspects and how these influence growth strategies for women’s entrepreneurship
The overall aim of the book is to highlight key growth influences on women’s entrepreneurship, and to offer valuable insights into the mechanics of women’s entrepreneurship globally.
June 2015 |
Diana Conference, Babson College |
October 1, 2015 |
Expressions of interest/abstracts from participating authors. |
October 30, 2015 |
Formal invitation/submission guidelines to selected authors. |
January 1, 2016 |
Submission of draft chapters & initial review process. |
March 1, 2016 |
Completion of feedback to authors. |
May 1, 2016 |
Submission of revised chapters from authors (including necessary permissions for diagrams, etc). |
June 30, 2016 |
Ongoing editing of chapters by editorial team. |
June/July 2016 |
Completion of Prelims, Introduction & Conclusions.
|
Sept. 1, 2016 |
Submission of final manuscript to Edward Elgar. |
If you are interested in submitting a chapter, please express your interest, in the first instance, by putting together a chapter abstract, as per the guidelines below, and forwarding it to GA_EElgarBook@bentley.edu, by October 1, 2015.
For an informal discussion on your submission, please contact any of the editors.
Submission Guidelines:
- A cover letter with all author affiliations and the paper title
- 3 page (double-spaced) abstract
- Include title- but NO AUTHOR information
- Research question/purpose of the chapter
- Theoretical foundation
- Data source(s) and methodology
- Implications/contributions
- Please submit your proposals to: GA_EElgarBook@bentley.edu
(1) The Diana Project was launched in 1999 by Professors Brush, Carter, Gatewood, Greene and Hart, to study the phenomenon of women’s entrepreneurship in the United States. The Diana Project team, in partnership with ESBRI (Entrepreneurship and Small Business Research Institute, Sweden), inaugurated the Diana International Project (DIP) in 2003. DIP currently involves researchers from 16 countries worldwide and aims to provide a platform from which to develop, conduct and share a global research agenda dedicated to answering questions about women entrepreneurs and growth oriented businesses.
Africa is no longer the lost continent! Yet, the development of entrepreneurship is still in its early stages. If entrepreneurship is expected to contribute to Africa’s development, a great deal more needs to be done! This Special Issue of the JDE will focus on the nature and implications of entrepreneurship in Africa. Manuscripts may address any phase or aspect of the entrepreneurial process such as start-up, finance, growth, management, and influences of and effects on economic development. Studies may focus solely on one country or on comparisons between countries. All manuscripts must contribute to the editorial mission of the JDE.
The following are examples of topics of submitted manuscripts:
1. Women and Entrepreneurship
2. Roots of entrepreneurship in Africa
3. Special Opportunities and Challenges faced by entrepreneurs
4. Entrepreneurship and economic reforms
5. Cross-country comparisons and implications
6. The use of social networks (domestic and global).
7. Regional differences
8. Public Policy
9. Entrepreneurship education
10. Financing Issues
A double-blind review process will be employed to select manuscripts for publication. Each manuscript will be reviewed by two reviewers as well as being given topical considerations.
The length of the manuscript should not exceed 25 pages including all references, tables, and figures. Submitted manuscripts should follow the formatting and style guidelines provided in the Journal. Please submit your manuscript electronically by November 30, 2009 to jde@listserv.syr.edu:
Special Issue Co-Editors: Peter Koveos and Pierre Yourougou, Syracuse University; Ben Amoako-Adu, Wilfrid Laurier University
Guest Editors:
Paola Vola, University of Eastern Piedmont, Novara, Italy
Sylvia Rohlfer, CUNEF, Madrid, Spain
Lucrezia Songini, University of Eastern Piedmont, Novara, Italy
The competitive landscape of the twenty-first century is dynamic, highlighting the need for organizations to be entrepreneurial. Thus, a scientific dialogue on entrepreneurial orientation and spirit in family businesses and SMEs has emerged as a relevant topic. However, the capacity to conjugate entrepreneurial spirit of family businesses and smaller enterprises with the managerialization of the organizational structure and mechanisms as well as the professionalization of people involved in the company is critical for the long-term survival and development of those firms.
Research on managerialization of SMEs and family firms points out that they are characterized by a lower adoption of managerial mechanism, as a consequence of the strong linkages between the owners/managers and the enterprise; and/or the lack of managerial knowledge at the ownership, governance and management levels. It is commonly underlined that the management in these firms is characterized by some degree of informality and that individual and social control systems are more suited to these enterprises, due to common shared values and languages, informal relationships etc. (Marlow, Taylor and Thompson, 2010; Saundry, Jones and Wimberley, 2014; Rohlfer, Munoz and Slocum, 2016).
However, some authors stated that formal mechanisms could help family owned businesses to cope with the interests and problems of both the company and the family, and their specific agency costs (Rue and Ibrahim, 1996; Schulze et al., 2003; Songini, Gnan et Malmi, 2013; Della Torre and Solari, 2013). Literature on family firms recognizes the importance of managerialization and professionalization in smoothing succession’s process.
This special issue of Management Revue and the corresponding Track 03_09 – Entrepreneurship and Managerialization in SMEs and family firms, under SIG 03 – Entrepreneurship, at EURAM 2017, provides an opportunity to take stock of developments on these issues, particularly on the adoption of management mechanisms and the professionalization of SMEs and family firms and their balance with entrepreneurial spirit.
We are looking for contributions that explore the ability of successful SMEs and family business to maintain fresh entrepreneurial spirit while consolidating management and control mechanisms, and introducing professional managers, but also for contributions that analyze the consequences of losing momentum in that balance.
Thus, we invite papers that make an important theoretical and/or empirical contribution to our understanding of such issues; international and comparative papers are particularly welcome. Areas of interest include but are not limited to:
- How and why SMEs and family firms restructure and reorganize the management of the firm in the light of managerialization and professionalization?
- How can SMEs and family firms balance entrepreneurial spirit and managerialization/ professionalization? How do they maintain this balance along time and during generations?
- What is the role of family members and non-family members in balancing entrepreneurial spirit and managerialization/ professionalization?
- What is the role of women (family and non-family members) in such a balance?
- What is the role of managerial mechanisms and professional managers in SMEs and family firms’ development and growth?
- What are the implications of managerialization and professionalization on key employee relations characteristics, such as pay and conditions, employee voice and labor management relations?
- How and why owner/managers ́ approaches to managerialization and professionalization vary in relation to issues such as firm, sector, national contexts and employee characteristics, among others?
- What are the implications for owner-managers and other stakeholders, including employees?
- Which theories can best help us explain and understand managerialization and professionalization in SMEs and family firms, and the relation with entrepreneurship?
This is not an exhaustive list.
Management Revue is a peer-reviewed, interdisciplinary European journal publishing both qualitative and quantitative work, as well as purely theoretical papers that advances the study of management, organization, and industrial relations. Management Revue publishes articles that contribute to theory from a number of disciplines, including business and public administration, organizational behavior, economics, sociology, and psychology. Reviews of books relevant to management and organization studies are a regular feature (http://www.management-revue.org/).
European Academy of Management
The European Academy of Management (EURAM) is a learned society founded in 2001. It aims at advancing the academic discipline of management in Europe. With members from 49 countries in Europe and beyond, EURAM has a high degree of diversity and provides its members with opportunities to enrich debates over a variety of research management themes and traditions (http://euramonline.org/programme2017/tracks/sig-03-entrepreneurship-ent.html).
Potential authors
Authors are encouraged to submit research manuscripts that are likely to make a significant contribution to the literature on entrepreneurship and managerialization and professionalization in SMEs and family firms for a double-blind review process. Contributors to the Track 03_09 “Entrepreneurship and Managerialization in SMEs and family firms” at EURAM 2017 Conference are encouraged to discuss their sub- mission prior or during the conference. Even if conference participants will benefit from a fast review process, submissions are not solely restricted to conference participants.
Deadlines
Full papers for this special issue of Management Revue must be with the editors by 31 July 2017. All submissions will be subject to a double-blind review process. Papers invited for a “revise and resubmit” are due on the 30 November 2017. Final decision will be made by May 2018. The special issue will be published in late 2018.
Submission and guidelines
Please submit your papers electronically via the online submission system at http://www.management-revue.org/submission/ using SI “Managerialization” as article section.
The guest editors welcome informal enquiries by email:
Literature
- Aldrich, H. & Cliff, J. (2003). The pervasive effects of family on entrepreneurship: toward a family embeddedness perspective, Journal of Business Venturing, 18(5), 573-596.
- Bettinelli, C., Fayolle, A. & Randerson, K. (2014). Family entrepreneurship: a developing field. Found. Trends Entrep., 10(3), 161–236.
- Brannon, D. L., Wiklund, J. & Haynie, J. M. (2013). The varying effects of family relationships in entrepreneurial teams. Entrep. Theory Practice, 37(1), 107–132.
- Chenall, R. (2003). Management control system design within its organizational context: findings from contingency-based research and directions for the future, Accounting Organizations and Society, 28 (2-3), 127-168.
- Corbetta, G., Marchisio, G. & Salvato C. (2005). Fostering Entrepreneurship in Established Family Firms - Crossroads of Entrepreneurship, Springer.
- Della Torre, E. & Solari, L. (2013). High-performance work systems and the change management process in medium-sized firms. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 24(13), 2583-2607.
- Durán-Encalada, J. A., San Martín-Reyna, J. M. & Montiel-Campos, H. (2012). A Research Proposal to Examine Entrepreneurship in Family Business. Journal of Entrepreneurship, Management and Innovation, 8(3), 58-77.
- Fayolle, A. (2016). Family entrepreneurship: what we need to know. In K. Randerson, C. Bettinelli, G. Dossena, & A. Fayolle (eds.), Family Entrepreneurship: Rethinking the Research Agenda (pp. 304–306). Abingdon, UK: Routledge.
- Hoy, F. & Sharma, P. (2010). Entrepreneurial Family Firms. New York, NY: Prentice Hall.
- Jennings, J. E. & McDougald, M. S. (2007). Work–family interface experiences and coping strategies: implications for entrepreneurship research and practice. Academy of Management Review, 32(3), 747-760.
- Malmi, T., & Brown, D. A. (2008). Management control system as package - Opportunities, challenges and research directions. Management Accounting Research, 19(4), 287-300.
- Marlow, S. Taylor, S & Thompson, A. (2010). Informality and formality in medium-sized companies: contestation and synchronization. British Journal of Management, 20(4): 954-966.
- Randerson, K., Bettinelli, C., Fayolle, A. & Anderson, A. (2015). Family entrepreneurship as a field of research: exploring its contours and contents. Journal of Family Business Strategy, 6(3), 143–154.
- Randerson, K., Dossena, G. & Fayolle, A. (2016). The futures of family business: family entrepreneurship. Futures, 75, 36–43.
- Rohlfer, S., Muñoz Salvador, C. and Slocum, A. (2016). People management in micro and small organizations – a comparative analysis. FUNCAS: Estudios de la Fundación. Series Análisis, no. 79.
- Sharma, P. (2016). Preface. In K. Randerson, C. Bettinelli, G. Dossena, & A. Fayolle (eds.), Family Entrepreneurship: Rethinking the Research Agenda (p. xiv). Abingdon, UK: Routledge.
- Songini L. (2006). The professionalization of family firm: theory and practice. In Poutziouris P., Smyrnios K. & Klein S. (eds.), Handbook of Research in Family Business (pp. 269-297). UK: Edward Elgar Publishing.
- Songini, L. & Gnan, L. (2009). Glass ceiling and professionalization in family SMEs, Journal of Enterprising Culture, 17(4), 1-29.
- Songini, L., Gnan, L., & Malmi, T. (2013). The role and impact of accounting in family business, Journal of Family Business Strategy, 4, 71-83.
- Songini, L. & Gnan, L. (2014). The glass ceiling in SMEs and its impact on firm managerialization: A comparison between family and non-family SMEs, International Jounal of Business Governance and Ethics, 9(2): 287-312.
- Songini, L. & Vola, P. (2014). The role of Managerialization and Professionalization in Family Busines Succession: Evidences from Italian Enterprises, in L. Gnan, H. Lundberg, L. Songini & M. Pelllegrini (eds.) Advancing European Entrepreneurship Research (169-196), IAP, Information Age Publishing Inc.
- Songini, L. & Vola, P.(2015) The Role of Professionalization and Managerialization in Family Business Succession. Management Control, 2015/1, 9-43
- Songini, L. & Gnan, L. (2015). Family Involvement and Agency Cost Control Mechanisms in Family Small and Medium-sized Enterprises, Journal of Small Business Management, 53(3), 748–779.
Objective
This special issue seeks to advance research on entrepreneurship in emerging markets. We invite scholarly and practitioner papers that advance extant knowledge and understanding of the factors that impact the establishment, internationalization, success and survival of small and medium enterprises in emerging markets. We welcome conceptual and empirical research including meta-analytical studies on the topic. Interesting topics may include, but are not limited to, the internationalization strategies of SMEs from emerging markets; the internationalization and de-internationalization processes of SMEs in emerging markets; relationships of SMEs with suppliers, customers, governments, labor unions and other institutional constituencies in emerging markets; the impact of culture on entrepreneurship in emerging markets; female entrepreneurship in emerging markets; the sustenance of born-global firms in and from emerging markets; economic, political, legal, technological and social impacts on entrepreneurship in emerging markets; and opportunities and challenges facing entrepreneurship in emerging markets.
Submission and Review Process
The deadline for submissions is December 1, 2011. Articles must be submitted through Thunderbird International Business Review’s Manuscript Central electronic submission system: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr
Please ensure your article abides by the scope and formatting conditions of this journal, which are detailed at http://www.thunderbird.edu/knowledge_network/tibr/submission.htm When submitting your article, please specify in your cover letter that you are submitting to the special issue on “Entrepreneurship in Emerging Markets”.
Time Line
December 1, 2011: Deadline for electronic submissions of papers to TIBR special issue
March 2012: First round reviews for authors
September 2012: Deadline for papers with revisions
December 2012: Final decisions on papers for TIBR special issue
More Information
For additional information, please contact the special issue editors:
Ilan Alon, The China Center, Rollins College & Harvard Kennedy School, IALON@rollins.edu
Daniel Rottig, Lutgert College of Business, Florida Gulf Coast University, DRottig@fgcu.edu
Background
The informal sector refers to activities that are lawful in nature but not declared to the public authorities and thus are fully or partially outside of formal government regulation, taxation, and observation. In recent years, there has been growing recognition that many entrepreneurs operate wholly or partially in the informal sector. This tendency of entrepreneurs to operate in the informal sector is applicable not only in developing countries but also in transition economies as well as western developed nations.
Indeed, it is recognized that although this is a sizeable realm in global perspective, such entrepreneurship is more prevalent in some global regions and nations. It is also widely recognized that this is a heterogeneous sphere and that its character varies across populations. In some populations, it may be largely necessity-driven entrepreneurs operating in the informal sector; in others, it may be opportunity-driven entrepreneurs.
Special Issue on entrepreneurship in the informal sector: institutional perspectives
This special issue seeks to explore entrepreneurship in the informal sector from a range of institutional perspectives. Economic relations and institutions are shaped within - and thus are an integral part of - the surrounding political, social and cultural context. As such, informal sector entrepreneurship has to be understood within the broader political, social and cultural context of the places in which it is found.
The aim of the special issue is to bring together studies of informal sector entrepreneurship drawn from a wide variety of contexts. Empirical as well as conceptual studies are welcome. Topics of interest might include but are not restricted to the following:
- The influence of formal and informal institutions on informal sector entrepreneurship
- The role of weak institutions and corruption
- Tax morale
- Public perceptions of informality
- Social entrepreneurship in the informal sector
- Vulnerable groups and entrepreneurship/bottom of the pyramid studies
- Necessity- versus opportunity-driven entrepreneurship
- Public policy perspectives on informal sector entrepreneurs
- Case studies of policy initiatives to tackle informal entrepreneurship
- Social capital and informal entrepreneurship
- Risk of detection and informality
- Comparative studies of informal entrepreneurship
Other topics not mentioned above are welcome so long as they conform to the broad theme of the special issue.
Submission instructions
The deadline for the submission of papers is 15th January 2016.
Papers must be submitted electronically at: http://www.edmgr.com/rsbe/
Papers for the Special Issue should be prepared and formatted according to the Journal’s Instructions for authors available at: http://www.tandfonline.com/action/authorSubmission…
Enquiries regarding this special issue can be addressed to: Marijana Baric (marijana.baric@buckingham.ac.uk) or Colin C. Williams (C.C.Williams@sheffield.ac.uk).
Entrepreneurship has been, without doubt, a topic of rapidly growing interest to academics and policymakers for several decades. Since the beginning of the academic discourse on the topic, the conversation has expanded along multiple paths. A variety of facets have been explored including the relevance of entrepreneurship (e.g. Kuratko, 2011), policies and entrepreneurship (e.g. Hafer, 2013), economic benefits of entrepreneurship (e.g. Decker et. al., 2014), risk (e.g. Knight, 2005), the institutional environment for entrepreneurship (e.g. Gupta et. al., 2014), innovation ecosystems (e.g. Autio and Thomas, 2014), environmental conditions (e.g. Carsrud and Brännback, 2011) and environmental uncertainty (Gartner & Liao, 2012), opportunity discovery (e.g. Baker et. al., 2005), the opportunity nexus (e.g. Shane and Ventkatamaran, 2000), entrepreneurial finance (e.g. Fraser et. al., 2015), alternative financing (e.g. Bruton et. al., 2015) international entrepreneurship (e.g. Coviello, McDougall & Oviatt, 2011), corporate entrepreneurship (Corbett et. al., 2013), gender and entrepreneurship (e.g. Marlow & McAdam, 2013) and entrepreneurship education (e.g. Boyles, 2012). In addition, the notion of entrepreneurship has substantially evolved from the creation of new businesses into the realm of social (e.g. Choi & Majumdar, 2014) or political (e.g. Narbutaite Aflaki and Petridou, 2015) causes. While there have also been some studies with a country focus (e.g. Ahlstrom & Ding, 2014; Kraus & Werner, 2012), and selected ones with a focus on certain types of countries such as emerging economies (e.g. Kiss, Danis & Cavusgil, 2012) or post-conflict countries (e.g. Efendic et. al., 2014), there is still a relative paucity of research with a cross-national or cross-cultural focus. Apart from the large international comparative studies that is annually conducted by the Global Entrepreneurship Monitor Consortium (e.g. Levie et. al., 2014), interest in country-specific or comparative studies has been limited. With this special issue, we intend to inspire and present research with such international and cross-cultural themes. For this issue, we invite submissions that provide cross-national comparisons or deep insight into the specific environments for entrepreneurship of individual countries. We seek both theoretical and empirical papers.
Subject Coverage: Suitable topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Macro-economic benefits of entrepreneurship
- Institutional environments
- Policies and regulation
- Drivers and restraining factors behind entrepreneurship
- Perception of risk and uncertainty
- Opportunity discovery
- New venture creation
- Innovation ecosystems
- Gender issues in entrepreneurship
- International entrepreneurship
- Individual and organizational creativity and innovation
- Entrepreneurship in post-conflict environments
- Social entrepreneurship
- Free-trade agreements and entrepreneurship
- New and alternative ways of start-up financing
- Science and university entrepreneurship
- Entrepreneurship education
- Government incentives and state-financed entrepreneurship
Notes for Prospective Authors: Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. (N.B. Conference papers may only be submitted if the paper has been completely re-written and if appropriate written permissions have been obtained from any copyright holders of the original paper). All papers are refereed through a peer review process. All papers must be submitted online. To submit a paper, please read our Submitting articles page.
Important Dates
- Submission of Manuscripts: 30 December, 2015
- Notification to Authors: 1 March, 2016
Final Versions Due: 1 November, 2016
Purpose and research questions
Research on international competitiveness has been rigorously researched in the last three decades, as the phenomenon itself was spurred on by the extensive international involvement of multinational enterprises (MNEs). While strong firm- and subsidiary-specific advantages enhance MNEs’ international competitiveness, they should consider host country/region competitiveness, as well as home country competitiveness, for their success in internationalization (Rugman and D’Cruz, 1994; Rugman et al., 2012). Kolk (2010), in an earlier issue of this journal, illustrated how environmental sustainability issues can affect MNEs’ local, regional and global activities and when sustainability can be an opportunity for the development of firm specific advantages.
While managers, policy makers and the media have acknowledged that environment issues are one of the biggest concerns and challenges of businesses in the future, it is still unclear how environmentally responsible management (ERM) practices can become an additional dimension of firms’ international competitiveness (or firm-specific advantages). It is also unclear how the nation’s interest in regard to the environment enhances or weakens the competitiveness of the nation. For example, the pollution haven hypothesis notes that manufacturing and natural resource extraction firms relocate their operations from developed to less developed countries in order to take advantage of weak environmental regulations (Brunnermeier and Levison, 2004; Madsen, 2009; Jaffe and Palmer, 1997). The pollution haven hypothesis implies that environmentally responsible business practices do not provide international competitiveness as long as firms can find alternative places to locate their operations. On the other hand, an alternative win-win strategy (Porter, 1991; Porter and Van der Linde, 1995; Palmer et al., 1995) underlines the dynamic nature of competition, innovation and customer needs and suggests that properly designed environmental regulations can enhance a country’s competitiveness to promote business and attract good quality investment (Rivera and Oh, 2012). The win-win strategy views environmentally responsible business practices as eventually increasing international competitiveness. Thus, environmentally responsible MNEs do not need to exploit weak environmental regulations of a host country as these MNEs already have strong environmental capabilities (Rugman and Verbeke, 1998).
A recent study (Aguilera-Caracuel et al., 2012) found that corporate environmental practices in a host country depend upon country- and firm-level characteristics. The purpose of this special issue is to provide an avenue for modern competitiveness thinking that focuses on environmental responsibility among the many aspects of corporate social responsibility. We believe that significant opportunities exist for improving our understanding of how ERM affects MNEs’ international competitiveness and, thus, we would like to use these opportunities to advance theories of MNEs. This special issue provides an opportunity through which to bring together the research of scholars from a diverse range of disciplinary traditions, such as international business, strategy, economics, political science, and sociology. As a consequence, we expect that contributors will leverage their own perspectives and training in order to formulate and address novel research questions and hypotheses. We seek both theoretical and empirical papers that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
How do MNEs transform home-grown ERM practices into international competitiveness?
What are the country- and firm-level boundary conditions of ERM induced international competitiveness?
Do MNEs’ ERM practices function as a catalyst, enhancing international competitiveness and organizational performance in foreign markets?
How do MNEs manage the various needs of ERM in host countries and align MNE- and subsidiary-level ERM practices?
Do environmentally responsible and green firms have advantages in foreign market entry and expansion? Is there any heterogeneity across the level of economic and social developments in a host country and across industries?
Does good corporate image derived from ERM practices play a pivotal role in acquiring local market information and eventually improving organizational competitiveness in international markets?
What motivates ERM practices in foreign markets? Is there any particular relationship between the level of foreign ownership and ERM practices abroad?
How do MNEs adapt themselves to host country ERM practices and regulations over time? What factors retard this adaptation? Does this adaptation increase the MNEs capabilities over their competitors?
Do foreign firms’ advanced environmental capabilities affect a host country’s ERM practices and regulations?
How do MNEs transform environmental capability to firm-specific advantages under the institutional void (i.e. in least developed countries)?
How should we measure environmental capability and performance of MNEs?
Submission Instructions:
The deadline for submissions is July 1, 2013. To learn more about the Multinational Business Review, including style guidelines, please visit the Multinational Business Review web site at:
www.emeraldinsight.com/mbr.htm
All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at the Multinational Business Review. The guest editors are seeking reviewers for this issue and are soliciting nominations and volunteers to participate as reviewers. Please contact the guest editors to volunteer or nominate a reviewer.
More information
To obtain additional information, please contact the guest editors:
Chang Hoon Oh, Simon Fraser University (coh@sfu.ca)
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies (leedspark@hufs.ac.kr)
References
Aguilera-Caracuel, J., Aragon-Correa, J.A., Hurtado-Torres, N.E. and Rugman, A.M. (2012), ‘‘The effects of institutional distance and headquarters’ financial performance on the generation of environmental standards in multinational companies’’, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 105, pp. 461-74.
Brunnermeier, S.B. and Levison, A. (2004), ‘‘Examining the evidence on environmental regulations and industry location’’, Journal of Environment and Development, Vol. 13 No. 1, pp. 6-41.
Jaffe, A.B. and Palmer, K. (1997), ‘‘Environmental regulations and innovation: a panel data study’’,Review of Economics and Statistics, Vol. 79 No. 4, pp. 610-19.
Kolk, A. (2010), ‘‘Social and sustainability dimensions of regionalization and (semi)globalization’’,Multinational Business Review, Vol. 18 No. 1, pp. 51-72.
Madsen, P.M. (2009), ‘‘Does corporate investment drive a race to the bottom in environmental protection? A reexamination of the effect of environmental regulation on investment’’, Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 52 No. 6, pp. 1297-318.
Palmer, K., Oates, W.E. and Portney, P.R. (1995), ‘‘Tightening environmental standards: the benefit-cost of the no-cost paradigm?’’, Journal of Economic Perspectives, Vol. 9 No. 4, pp. 119-32.
Porter, M.E. (1991), ‘‘America’s green strategy’’, Scientific American, Vol. 264 No. 4, pp. 168.
Porter, M.E. and van der Linde, C. (1995), ‘‘Toward a new conception of the environment-competitiveness relationship’’, Journal of Economic Perspectives, Vol. 9 No. 4, pp. 97-118.
Rivera, J. and Oh, C.H. (2012), ‘‘Environmental regulations and multinational corporations’ foreign market entry investments’’, Policy Studies Journal, forthcoming.
Rugman, A.M. and D’Cruz, J.R. (1993), ‘‘The double diamond model of international competitiveness: the Canadian experience’’, Management International Review, Vol. 33 No. 2, pp. 17-39.
Rugman, A.M., Oh, C.H. and Lim, D.S.K. (2012), ‘‘The regional and global competitiveness of multinational firms’’, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Vol. 40 No. 2, pp. 218-35.
Rugman, A.M. and Verbeke, A. (1998), ‘‘Corporate strategy and international environmental policy’’,Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 29 No. 4, pp. 819-33.
Abstracts due: July 1, 2017
Guest Editors:
Hilary E. Kahn
School of Global and International Studies
Indiana University
Bloomington, Indiana
Joshua E. Perry
Kelley School of Business
Indiana University
Bloomington, Indiana
Overview:
While the global business landscape may at times give the impression that it is flattening, connecting, homogenizing, and effacing difference, it is also quite complex, with dramatically contoured and contextual idiosyncrasies existing among cultures, business practices, political regimes, economic systems, traditions, religions, and histories. Customary practices in some markets may differ dramatically from what is acceptable or even legal in others, while at the same time manufacturing, importing and exporting, investments strategies, trade policy, markets, and modes of consumption are truly becoming worldwide. How does one navigate this world of similarity and difference, where business practices and protocol bring the world together as much as they accentuate difference?
How can executives, managers, marketers, consumers, and entrepreneurs operate confidently, successfully, and ethically in a culturally diverse global business environment? How do human values intersect with business practices? Can we speak about universal values in regard to a global business landscape, or must we consider human values in the context of specific business practices, social structures, and transactions? What exactly is a global business landscape? How does the global economy impact local decisions and practices, including how geopolitical entities and states define new practices and policies to build on what is both a universal and contextualized global business landscape? How should business leaders taking products and services to market understand and negotiate the inevitable tension between those relatively undeveloped markets without bright-line rules and those markets governed closely by government regulators and NGO watchdogs? Is mere compliance with existing codes of conduct or social norms sufficient or does ethical leadership in an industry require some greater or more aspirational commitment to “doing the right thing” – and how is the “right thing” in the business context defined or determined anyway? How does the complex international business world emerge in more localized and less obviously “global” settings? What new skills and learning must educators teach toward as we prepare students and citizens for the complicated global landscape that is as increasingly similar as it is rapidly different?
These are just some of the vexing questions we hope to address in this special issue of Business Horizons. We are particularly interested in papers that explore these issues – and recommend best practices and applicable strategies – from a variety of disciplinary viewpoints, including anthropological, sociological, historical, educational, and legal scholarship. Moreover, we encourage conceptual, empirical, or theoretical submissions that explore these issues in a variety of industry and social contexts, including: health care, education/learning, technology, intellectual property, marketing, management, supply chain, finance, innovation and entrepreneurship, sustainability, human rights, government and public policy, etc., with the editorial aim being to strike a balance between practical application and scholarly analysis that prompts readers to think about the ethical and cultural dynamics of international business in new, innovative, and constructive ways.
If interested, please contact Josh Perry or Hilary Kahn to discuss your specific idea or plan to submit your 300-word abstract no later than July 1, 2017. Final submissions should conform to the Business Horizons Guide for Authors, available at: http://www.elsevier.com/locate/bushor
IMPORTANT DATES:
Abstracts due to BH by July 1, 2017
Review of abstracts complete and invitations to submit complete manuscript issued to authors on Aug 1, 2017
Completed manuscript due to BH by Dec 15, 2017
Manuscript returned to authors for revisions by Feb 15, 2018
Final manuscript submissions to BH due by April 1, 2018
This Special Issue of Business History will investigate the embeddedness and adaptation of East Asian business operations in Europe.
The influx of East Asian enterprises into Europe has a long history. Japanese business engagements in Europe stretch back for over more than 100 years and have, in this period, constantly evolved and adapted (Mason 1992; Buckley et al., 2013). Early Taiwanese investments date back to the 1950s (Tung, 1991; Ibeh et al., 2004) and Korean firms have explored European markets since the mid-1970s, when car manufacturer Daewoo opened its first trading office in Germany (Cherry, 2007). Foreign direct investment (FDI) by multinational firms often plays a key role in the economic development of host nations by enhancing human capital, conferring technology spillovers, and competitiveness (Barrell and Pain 1997) – and the evidence is that Japanese, Korean, and Taiwanese investments have benefited European host countries (Strange, 2002; Lee et al., 2012). Of itself, this provides the incentive for the governments of Europe to compete in influencing the decision process of multinational firms – to attract them to their constituencies, while hoping that these firms embed themselves locally.
The courting of Chinese firms by European Union member states has to be understood with this in mind. Although Chinese investments remain small to date, their growth over recent years and the rising assertiveness of Chinese companies strongly suggests a trend towards increased activity and greater visibility within Europe (Clegg and Voss, 2012). Analysing and comparing how Chinese investors, and investors from other East Asian nations, have approached and developed in Europe over time will yield important insights for scholarly understanding and for practitioners in European and other host countries.
Contributions are invited to investigate how and to what extent East Asian firms in Europe have evolved, while adapting to a different institutional context and embedding in the local economies. All contributions should shed light on specific characteristics of East Asian firms, and should consider critically if an East Asian ‘model’ of investment into Europe can be identified. If there were such a model, is there any evidence that late-comer investors from China, Korea and Taiwan have learned from the experience of Japanese firms with their long history of European activities? In other words, is there something akin to a demonstration effect from Japanese investors to other East Asian enterprises? And we know that, by and large, it is Japanese and Chinese firms that have invested in Western Europe, while Korean firms have preferred the Central and Eastern European member states. How has this difference in location affected local embeddedness and linkage building by investors? And what part is played by cooperation and competition between East Asian firms within the theatre of Europe? Suggested include subject coverage Investment and divestment strategies of East Asian businesses in Europe Local embeddedness and linkages of East Asian businesses in Europe Competitiveness of East Asian firms in Europe Adaptive processes and strategies Effect of the enlarging of the European Union on East Asian businesses.
Guidance notes
- Articles should be based on original research and/or innovative analysis.
- The main findings should not have been published or submitted elsewhere.
- The editors expect articles to be theoretically informed and to express novel interpretations of East Asian business history in Europe with implications for East Asian business history more generally.
- Authors wishing to use social science or managerial instruments of analysis should adapt them so that they allow for dynamic and not simply cross-sectional analysis. Articles should explain change across time and not simply examine static conditions.
- Authors are welcome to discuss ideas for papers with the guest editors Business History specific author and formatting guidelines can be found on the journal’s website: www.tandfonline.com/loi/fbsh
Submitting your manuscript
Submitted manuscripts should not have been previous published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All manuscripts are refereed through a double-blind peer review process. Please submit your manuscript online by 31 May 2015: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/fbsh When submitting online, please clearly indicate the Special Issue it is for.
Call for Chapters
Proposals Submission Deadline: January 15, 2019
Full Chapters Due: March 31, 2019
Submission Date: April 30, 2019
Introduction
The publication draws attention to the human side of the implications of the digital age. More importantly to the cultural aspects of work across national borders, cultural challenges faced by international virtual teams, management dilemmas relative to the resource issues when dealing with cultural diversity and Human Resource Management challenges confronted by technical environments and nationally qualified labour shortages.
Objective
Unlike Hofstede’s (2001) “collective programming of the mind” or Trompenaars and Turner’s (1998) problem resolution collective, Hoecklin (1995: 24) offers the following definition: ‘culture is not a ‘thing’ which can be experienced through the senses, just as ‘needs’, ‘social systems’, ‘evil’, and ‘peace’, are not directly tangible or visible. They are ideas constructed within the society. ‘Culture’ does not exist in a single easily defined form for specific goal for a specifiable number of people in a bounded area. And, obviously, a society does not consist of individuals with entirely uniform mental characteristics or personalities”. Unlike many of her contemporaries, Hoecklin does not provide a homogeneous form of culture, one that is easily assigned a grade or ranking, or cluster when compared with others. Given this more pertinent definition of culture, questions arise as to the relevancy of existing cultural models in a globalised world of rapid change and an international push towards digitalisation. Successive researchers have proposed several means to update the Hofstedean model and cultural dimensions. Recognising that the initial four components are now dated and due to Hofstede’s premise that culture is static, interested parties seek to upgrade the original rankings thereby, increasing the relevancy to a globalised twenty-first century. The major objective of this book is to promote new cultural models representative of the contemporary world environment subject to digital transformation.
Target Audience
The target audience of this book comprises professionals and researchers working in the fields of management and associated disciplines. Management practitioner: reference/guidebook to better formulate and design change management; evaluate possible impacts to ‘business as normal’; revise HR management policies and avoid ambiguous circumstances. Academics: use either as course texts or to supplement course -related materials; enhance curricula to incorporate new cultural models; identify areas of future research. Psychologists and sociologists: enhance current practice to incorporate new cultural models and to identify areas of future research. Consultants [consultancies]: enhance current practice to incorporate cultural appreciation.
Recommended Topics
Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
I- New definitions of culture:
- proponents of culture and their impact of management;
- Post-Hofstedean models;
- culture and group behaviour in the digital era;
- determinants of shared culture, and
- the fallacy of national cultures.
II- Digital era:
- I4.0 as a misnomer;
- cultural approaches to the digital era;
- national policies to achieve digitalisation;
- digital versus culture---social and economic impact, and
- Human Resource Management in the digital age.
III- culture, diversity, and the digital era
- xenophobia and serotyping---hiring policies in labour challenged cultures;
- digital diversity;
- upgrading HRM policies;
- racial profiling;
- computer literacy versus sexual orientation or religion, and
- gender equality.
IV-learning, education, and research
- redefining culture and work effort in the digital age;
- competence and expertise overrides stereotyping and xenophobia, and
- new methods of intercultural research.
Submission Procedure
Researchers and practitioners are invited to submit on or before January 15, 2019, a chapter proposal of 1,000 to 2,000 words clearly explaining the mission and concerns of their proposed chapter. Authors will be notified by January 30, 2019 as to the status of their proposals and sent chapter guidelines. Full chapters are expected to be submitted by April 30, 2019 and all interested authors must consult the guidelines for manuscript submissions at http://www.igi-global.com/publish/contributor-resources/before-you-write/ prior to submission. All submitted chapters will be reviewed on a double-blind review basis. Contributors may also be requested to serve as reviewers for this project.
Note: There are no submission or acceptance fees for manuscripts submitted to this book publication, Examining Cultural Perspectives in a Globalised World. All manuscripts are accepted based on a double-blind peer review editorial process.
All proposals should be submitted through the eEditorial Discovery® online submission manager.
Publisher
This book is scheduled to be published by IGI Global (formerly Idea Group Inc.), publisher of the "Information Science Reference" (formerly Idea Group Reference), "Medical Information Science Reference," "Business Science Reference," and "Engineering Science Reference" imprints. For additional information regarding the publisher, please visit www.igi-global.com. This publication is anticipated to be released in 2019.
Important Dates
January 15, 2019: Proposal Submission Deadline
January 30, 2019: Notification of Acceptance
March 31, 2019: Full Chapter Submission
April 30, 2019: Review Results Returned
May 15, 2019: Final Acceptance Notification
July 31, 2019: Final Chapter Submission
Inquiries
Dr. Richard Brunet-Thornton
richard.brunet-thornton@vse.cz
Expatriate research has played an important role in international business and international human resource management research during the last few decades (Welch & Björkman, in press). This is not surprising given the key role expatriates often play in foreign subsidiaries, their high cost, and the challenges they may face in foreign cultures. However, since the early research on expatriate success, the definition of an expatriate and what it means to be successful have expanded (Collings, Scullion, & Morley, 2007; Brewster et al., 2014). While prior research has greatly increased our understanding of the determinants of expatriate success, the literature is criticized for being largely expatriate-centric, particularly focused on corporate expatriates, and with a somewhat singular focus on increasing expatriate cross-cultural adjustment (Takeuchi, 2010; Welch & Björkman; in press). This is problematic because the background, motivation, and experiences of the different types of expatriates, e.g. corporate versus self-initiated expatriates, may vary substantially (Froese & Peltokorpi, 2013). Accordingly, organizations need to concern themselves beyond simply the adjustment of their expatriates, and look at whether the objectives of expatriation have been met – both long and short term, and the impact it has had, and may continue to have, on multiple stakeholders (Reiche, Lazarova, & Shaffer, 2014).
With this comes a greater imperative to broaden our research perspectives. These perspectives should account for a greater range of expatriate types and the increasing presence of women expatriates and expatriates from emerging economies (Brookfield Global Relocation Trends, 2014; Collings et al., 2007; Mayrhofer & Scullion, 2002). When defining expatriate success, our perspectives should also involve a longer time frame (including repatriation, career outcomes, and sustainability), and a wider range of stakeholders directly or indirectly implicated by the expatriation process (Oddou, Osland, Blakeney, 2009; O’Sullivan, 2013). Cross-cultural contact impacts and requires adaptation of all parties involved – not simply the expatriate (Berry, 1997; Caprar, 2012). A multiple stakeholder perspective is also crucial for developing sustainable IHRM expatriation practices. We should also be interested in processes – asking what roles various stakeholders play in the expatriation process, and what effect expatriation may have on these stakeholders. We suggest that stakeholders could include, but are not limited to: the multinational HQ and its subsidiaries, host country nationals (HCNs) within and outside of the workplace, other expatriates in the host unit or in other subsidiaries, spouse/partner, family members, and host communities and nations.
This special issue seeks papers that can change the conversations we will have about expatriation, expand our theoretical horizons, while identifying clear practical and actionable prescriptions for expatriates and the stakeholders. We encourage papers that think outside the proverbial expatriate adjustment box and papers that situate the expatriate in the appropriate context along with the stakeholders implicated by the process. Original quantitative, qualitative, and mixed-methods research, meta-analytic reviews, and theory development are all potentially suitable for inclusion in the special issue. Below is a list of exemplary topics that are consistent with the scope of the special issue:
- Networks of expatriates
- Challenges surrounding the selection, preparation and support of women expatriates
- Interaction between expatriates and HCNs of different hierarchical levels (supervisor, colleague, subordinate)
- Impact of HCNs on expatriate success
- Impact of expatriates on HCNs’ attitudes and behaviors
- Sustainable relationships between expatriates and local stakeholders
- Sustainable IHRM expatriation practices
- Differences and impact of host organizations on different types of expatriates
- Interaction between family and expatriate (e.g., work-life balance, conflict, or enrichment)
- Challenges of emerging expatriate types (e.g., flexpatriates, commuters, virtual expatriates who are geographically separated from their families, expatriates from emerging economies)
- Challenges organizations face in managing alternative forms of global employees
- Impact of spouse/family, co-worker, mentor, organizational support
- The roles of HQs and subsidiaries in the expatriation process
- Stakeholders in the repatriation process and career development of expatriates
- Interaction between the repatriate and the work unit
- Expatriate-specific HR practices in the host unit
- Organizational culture in the subsidiary and/or local organization
- Experiences of expatriates in various host country environments
Submission Process and Timeline
To be considered for the special issue, manuscripts must be submitted no later than 15th November 2015, 5:00pm Eastern Standard Time. Papers may be submitted prior to this deadline as well. We welcome quantitative, qualitative (including case studies) and conceptual papers that provide unique insights into expatriates in context. Findings and/or conceptualizations should have theoretical and policy implications, and seek to inform management practice. The editors of the Special Issue will be pleased to discuss initial ideas for papers via email.
Submitted papers must be based on original material not under consideration by any other journal or publishing outlet. The editors will select up to 5 papers to be included in the special issue, but other submissions may be considered for other issues of the journal. All papers will be subject to a double-blind peer review in accordance with the journal guidelines and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a special issue editor. The final acceptance is dependent on the review team’s judgments of the paper’s contribution on four key dimensions:
- Theoretical contribution: Does the article offer novel and innovative insights or meaningfully extend existing theory in the field of global mobility?
- Empirical contribution: Does the article offer novel findings and are the research design, data analysis, and results rigorous and appropriate in testing the hypotheses or research questions?
- Practical contribution: Does the article contribute to the improved management of global mobility?
- Contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the Journal of Global Mobility author guidelines, available at www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm. Please remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the reviewers.
Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jgmob. Authors should select the special issue title Expatriates in Context from the drop down menu.
For enquiries regarding the special issue please contact either of the two Guest Editors, Fabian Froese at ffroese@uni-goettingen.de or Soo Min Toh at soomin.toh@toronto.ca.
References
Berry, J. (1997). Immigration, acculturation, and adaptation. Applied Psychology: An International Review, 46, 1, 5–34.
Brewster, C., Bonache, J., Cerdin, J.-L., & Suutari, V. (2014). Exploring expatriate outcomes. International Journal of Human Resource Management. 25, 1921-1937.
Caprar, D.V. (2011). Foreign locals: A cautionary tale on the culture of MNC local employees. Journal of International Business Studies 42, 608-628.
Collings, D.G., Scullion, H., & Morley, M.J. (2007). Changing patterns of global staffing in the multinational enterprise: Challenges to the conventional expatriate assignment and emerging alternatives. Journal of World Business, 42, 198 – 213.
Froese, F.J., & Peltokorpi, V. (2013). Organizational expatriates and self-initiated expatriates: Differences in cross-cultural adjustment and job satisfaction. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 24, 1953-1967.
Mayrhofer, W. & Scullion, H. (2002). Female expatriates in international business: empirical evidence from the German clothing industry. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 13, 815-836.
Oddou, G., Osland, J. S., & Blakeney, R. N. (2009). Repatriating knowledge: Variables influencing the "transfer" process. Journal of International Business Studies, 40, 181-199.
O’Sullivan, S. L. (2013). The empowering potential of social media for key stakeholders in the repatriation process. Journal of Global Mobility, 1, 264-286.
Reiche, S., Lazarova, M., & Shaffer, M. (2014). Me, myself and I: From individual-centered to multiple stakeholder perspectives in expatriate research. Panel presented at the Academy of International Business Annual Meeting.
Takeuchi, R. (2010). A critical review of expatriate adjustment research: Progress, emerging trends, and prospects. Journal of Management, 36, 1040-1064.
Welch, D., Björkman, I. (in press). The place of international human resource management in international business. Management International Review, DOI 10.1007/s11575-014-0226-3.
The management research on international mobility remains focused on immigrants in the ‘West’ such as in Europe and U.S.A (Al Ariss and Özbilgin, 2010; Inal, Özbilgin and Karataş-Özkan, 2009). Nevertheless, career of skilled immigrants in the Middle-East is under- researched in the management studies (Healy and Özbilgin, 2003). Accordingly, we know little on the career barriers and also on the opportunities as well as the strategies that immigrants in the Middle-East use to advance their careers. This theme is of great importance as of the large numbers of immigrants in this region. For example, organizations in oil exporting countries within the region are in need of employing expatriates from different parts of the world (Richardson and McKenna, 2003). However, in complete contrast to this openness towards attracting an international workforce, granting work and citizenship rights in some Middle-Eastern countries is a very complicated process.
We are interested in empirical and conceptual research that investigates the careers of skilled people undertaking an international mobility to or within the Middle-East region. This includes persons relocating to the Middle-East from European countries, Canada, U.S.A as well as from other countries. This also includes people moving from one Middle-Eastern country to another (such as the case of many Palestinians, Lebanese and Syrians) (Yapp, 1995). This international mobility could be undertaken on temporarily or permanent basis.
Countries in the Middle-East as well as immigrants in this region are not homogeneous (Tanova, Karatas-Özkan and Inal 2008). Accordingly, we are interested in studies that situate the career experiences of the immigrants within national and historical settings. This situational approach would offer a good representation of the diversity of careers available for immigrants in this region. Papers could examine the career of immigrants from micro-individual, meso-organizational, and macro contextual levels (Özbilgin, 2006; Syed, 2008). Contributors might decide to focus on one of these levels or to have a multilevel study. Papers using different methodological approaches and inter-disciplinary perspectives are welcome.
Call for papers questions may include (but are not limited to):
- From a regional comparative perspective, what are the limitations and opportunities that the different state policy interventions in the Middle-East present for skilled immigrants’ career development?
- At a national level, how do state policy interventions in the different Middle-Eastern countries influence the career experiences of skilled immigrants?
- How does the intersection of gender and ethnicity affect skilled immigrants' career development in the context of employment in the Middle-East?
- At the micro-individual level, what explains how skilled immigrants can have successful (or unsuccessful) careers in the Middle-East?
- What do we know on immigrant entrepreneurs in the context of the Middle-East?
- Within career and management studies, what theoretical frameworks/sensitizing concepts could be suitable to study careers of skilled immigrants in the Middle-East? What interdisciplinary approaches (e.g. sociological, political, socio-cultural, ideological and economical) could be suitable to examine their career experiences?
Manuscripts (with a word-count of 5000-7000) and correspondence should be submitted via e-mail by November 30th 2010 to either Guest Editors of this special issue (while copying the others) at the following email address:
Akram Al Ariss: akram.alariss@groupe-esc-troyes.com
Nur Koprulu: nkoprulu@ciu.edu.tr
Gozde Inal: ginal@ciu.edu.tr
References
Al Ariss, A. and M. Özbilgin (2010). ‘Understanding Self-Initiated Expatriates: Career Experiences of Lebanese Self-initiated Expatriates’, Thunderbird International Business Review, 54(4).
Inal, G., M., Özbilgin, M. Karatas-Özkan (2009). Understanding Turkish Cypriot Entrepreneurship in Britain. In T. Kucukcan and V. Gungor (eds), Turks in Europe: Culture, Identity, Integration, Amsterdam: Turkevi Research Centre, pp. 483-513.
Özbilgin, M. F. (2006). ‘Relational methods in organization studies: a review of the field’. In O. Kyriakidou and M. F. Özbilgin (eds), Relational Perspectives in Organizational Studies. A Research Companion, pp. 244-264. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
Özbilgin, M. and G. Healy (2003). ‘"Don't mention the war" - Middle Eastern careers in context’, Career Development International, 8(7), pp. 325 - 327.
Richardson, J. and S. McKenna (2003). ‘International experience and academic careers: what do academics have to say?’, Personnel Review, 32(6), pp. 774-795.
Syed, J. (2008). ‘Employment prospects for skilled migrants: A relational perspective’, Human Resource Management Review, 18 (1), pp. 28-45.
Tanova, C., M. Karatas-Özkan and G. Inal (2008). ‘The process of choosing a management career. Evaluation of gender and contextual dynamics in a comparative study of six countries: Hungary, Israel, North Cyprus, Turkey, UK and the USA’, Career Development International, 13(4), pp. 291-305.
Yapp, M. (1995). The Near East Since the First World War. London: Longman.
Guest editors: Brendan Gray (University of Otago) and Rod McNaughton (University of Auckland)
Abstract due: 31 July 2014
Confirmation: 31 August 2014
Full papers submitted by: 15 January 2015
We are seeking conceptual and empirical papers that explore the theoretical interplay between entrepreneurship, sustainability and resilience. This offers an opportunity to examine the interface between these three constructs thus contributing to a significant scholarly debate and the development of theory that is importance to the broader field of business, economics, and allied fields of practice such as economic development. Possible topics include:
- Tensions between sustainability and resilience
- Mechanisms linking entrepreneurship to the resilience of individuals, organizations or communities
- Institutional influences on entrepreneurship, sustainability and resilience
- Studies of sustainability and resilience in real or virtual communities
- Issues involved in using the constructs of sustainability and resilience at different levels, from the individual through to nations
- Studies that focus on particular economic, social and/or ecological risks and human response viewed through the lens of sustainability and/or resilience
- Approaches and issues to measuring sustainability and resilience
- Other related issues.
“Resilience” is an increasingly important concept in our understanding of how organisations and local communities perform and respond to exogenous shocks. Research in a number of contexts suggests the actions of entrepreneurs result in more resilient organizations and economic systems that better withstand disruptions and recover quicker. However, there is limited knowledge of the specific mechanisms that drive this association, even though such knowledge would be valuable in helping organizations and regions to foster entrepreneurial activities that will better prepare them to deal with a variety of possible challenges.
Entrepreneurship researchers have made surprisingly few contributions to the discussion and understanding of “resilience”. Yet resilience and entrepreneurship have many attributes in common; for example, flexibility, adaptiveness, proactivity, and innovativeness. One of the key tensions in entrepreneurship theory – whether the actions of entrepreneurs move the economy toward equilibrium or away from it – has an analogy in resilience discourse; the question of whether resilience helps communities and/or organisations to preserve existing economic structures or adapt by forging new ones.
The dominance of the “sustainability” construct in the entrepreneurship literature may be one reason that researchers have yet to grapple with the possible overlap between entrepreneurship and resilience enhancing processes. Sustainability is associated with business models that minimize negative externalities, whereas resilience focuses more on adapting to change, especially sudden shocks in the external environment. Thus, while literature adopting a sustainability perspective tends to focus on how business effects the environment, a resilience perspective focuses more on how the environment affects business.
The Journal of Enterprising Communities: People and Places in the Global Economy is published by Emerald. Articles should be a maximum of 10,000 words, including references and appendices. Information on the format of manuscripts is available at: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=jec#10 Prospective authors should begin by sending an abstract of approximately 500 words to one of the guest editors before 31 July 2014. Selected authors will be invited to develop a full paper and submit it for review by 15 January 2015.
Co-editors:
Professor Brendan Gray
University of Otago
Professor Rod McNaughton
University of Auckland
Motivation for the Special Issue
Family businesses, which contribute more than 66% of global GDP, significantly influence the global economy, particularly through their dominance in emerging markets. With the fast development of emerging markets, more family businesses from the Global South have stepped on the international stage. These family businesses have unique characteristics and behaviors that are distinct from those of their peers in more developed countries in the Global North. Yet most of the literature examines family businesses in the Global North. This focus has created an important knowledge gap that leads us to direct attention to family businesses in the Global South to advance existing IB theories and introduce new constructs and theories from other fields that enrich the interdisciplinarity and cross-functionality of the IB field.
We typically divide the world into more developed, wealthier nations that are commonly referred to as the "Global North", where most IB scholars are located, and developing nations or the "Global South". However, this simplistic division is being reconsidered because not all wealthier nations are situated in the Global North while not all developing nations are situated in the Global South. Moreover, countries in Asia, the Middle East, Africa, and Latin America are growing in political and economic power, triggering a reordering of the global political and economic dynamics, such as power relations and strategic interactions between nations and regions, and policies and approaches to trade, investment, regulations and development. Because family businesses in these regions account for more than three-quarters of all companies and more than half of the largest ones, the previously mentioned global reordering throws a spotlight on family businesses from the Global South as key actors with growing agency to influence the global economy and the contexts in which they operate.
Various theoretical perspectives have been used to study family businesses, including internalization theory, institutional theory, the resource-based view, and behavioral agency theory. For example, family businesses have unique family-based resources that provide firm-specific advantages (Kano, Ciravegna & Rattalino, 2021) and stability-inducing heritage assets (Arikan, Koparan, Arikan & Shenkar, 2019) that are combined with a persistent, long-term approach to internationalization (Calabro, Chrisman & Kano, 2022). To provide another example, research based on behavioral agency theory shows that family owners’ pursuit of socioemotional wealth (SEW) – which includes the family owners’ preservation of a) control and influence, b) binding social ties with stakeholders, c) identification with the business, d) transgenerational control, and e) emotional attachment (Gomez-Mejia, Makri, & Larraza-Kintana, 2010) – helps explain distinct family firm behaviors and outcomes, including on internationalization (Miroshnychenko et al., 2023). Because family owners tend to be loss-averse regarding their SEW, they display a lower likelihood of internationalization. Moreover, if they internationalize, their internationalization mode, scope, scale and process tend to differ from those of their non-family counterparts (Arregle et al., 2021; Arregle et al., 2017; Debellis et al., 2024; Hennart, Majocchi, & Forlani, 2019; Pukall & Calabro, 2014).
Yet, prior literature has focused on family business behaviors and outcomes in the context of the Global North and overlooked their counterparts from the Global South (Arikan & Shenkar, 2022). Similarly, regions such as MENA, Sub-Sahara Africa, and smaller countries in Asia and Latin America have remained underrepresented in IB research. One notable exception refers to Arregle et al. (2021), who systematically document how family ownership in the Global North and Global South influences organizational internationalization, adding nuance to IB theories. Arregle et al. (2024) argue that there is scope to further integrate research in family business with research in the IB field.
While the unique institutional environment shapes family businesses in the Global South differently from those in the Global North (Eddleston, Sarathy & Banalieva, 2019; Lu et al., 2015), we still lack a deeper understanding of the underlying mechanisms that shape the internationalization trajectories of family businesses from the Global South (Dau, Morck & Young, 2021). These firms leverage the family to grapple with an institutional context characterized by weaker institutions, economic inequality, less access to scarce resources, environmental degradation, human rights concerns, and lower transparency as reflected in the Transparency International’s Corruption Perceptions Index. By virtue of their ability to navigate and fill institutional voids, they can operate under vast uncertainty, and innovate when faced with new challenges. Moreover, they bring these skills from their domestic markets to international markets and acquire new capabilities as they globalize. For example, Dinh et al. (2019) compared the corporate governance of Asian family businesses with those in the West from an institutional perspective. The authors argue that institutional factors in the Asian context, such as political, regulatory, cultural, and social issues, shape the informal governance mechanisms of Asian family businesses. Their findings draw attention to the importance of informal institutions, suggesting that Asian family businesses utilize political connections in response to legal failure and depend largely on personal relationships to mitigate uncertainty. Several other scholars showed that these unique institutional capabilities can be leveraged in other markets (Cuervo-Cazurra & Genc, 2008). For instance, Carney, Dieleman and Taussig (2016) documented how an Indonesian family business leveraged its experience working with the Indonesian military in its projects in Vietnam, where the military also played an influential role. Lincoln, Gerlach, and Ahmadjian (1996) examined how Japanese family businesses leveraged their historical zaibatsu roots and keiretsu network connections to navigate both domestic and global markets, maintaining stability through cross-shareholding and interlocking directorates. Additionally, the embeddedness of family businesses in informal institutions outside their home country can lead to unique forms of diaspora entrepreneurship (Portes & Sensenbrenner, 1993). Therefore, given the distinct characteristics and behaviors of family businesses from the Global South, the existing findings and knowledge might not be applicable to understanding these family businesses’ unique internationalization trajectories, requiring a deeper understanding of the role of formal and informal institutions, more nuanced theory development, and/or the development of novel theories.
We view this dearth of knowledge on family businesses in the Global South as an opportunity to develop new theories and add nuance to established IB theories (e.g., the Uppsala model or the OLI paradigm). For instance, in the Global South, families constitute familial networks, and societal trust in families is high, whereas trust in formal institutions can be low (Jaskiewicz et al., 2021). Large family business groups have emerged across the Global South and North in the past decades. In South Korea, family ownership and control are the defining foundation of “who controls a corporation,” given the national economy's significant dependence on family businesses (Kim, Kim & Li, 2008). Despite this, the family dimension of these international business groups has received limited attention. Moreover, there has been even less emphasis on family business groups from or in regions, such as MENA or Sub-Sahara Africa, that are currently gaining influence as the world order evolves. For instance, few scholars have studied the diversity among and across family businesses in different parts of the Global South. Tasavori et al. (2018) show that internal social capital can prompt the international performance of family businesses in Turkey. Also, Chung et al. (2021) argue that, in the context of Taiwan, family managers can be appointed to foreign subsidiaries to mitigate institutional uncertainties. In addition, Rienda et al. (2019) provide evidence that Indian family businesses show different entry modes compared to their counterparts from developed countries. Research in the context of Korean business groups suggests that ties to political regimes influence the formation of cross-border alliances (Siegel, 2007), but it is unclear whether this holds true for all markets. While these findings contribute to existing literature, more studies are needed to systematically compare and develop IB theories that integrate these findings at the intersection of IB and family businesses, particularly in the Global South.
Research has examined the hurdles of internationalization, including entry barriers (e.g., necessary economies of scale, greenfield investment, joint ventures), yet excluding successful SMEs from the Global South. However, the Internet of Things, rapid digitalization, and artificial intelligence applications enable even small companies from countries such as Egypt or Nigeria to internationalize successfully. For instance, Elves is an Egyptian SME providing a personal assistant service that, thanks to the use of AI, has been able to expand its services beyond Egypt, reaching a global customer base. What we do not know yet is how the family dimension of funding, owning, and/or managing many of these players from the Global South influences their global ascent (or decline) relative to family business players from the Global North and non-family players from the Global South.
One area where the increasing agency by family businesses from the Global South may be particularly impactful is in addressing Grand Challenges, commonly defined as “formulations of global problems that can be plausibly addressed through coordinated and collaborative effort” (George, Howard-Grenville, Joshi & Tihanyi, 2016: 1880). Family businesses in the Global South have the potential to play a fundamental role in addressing Grand Challenges such as climate change, human rights issues, or social inequality, both in constructive as well as in destructive ways. In terms of constructive roles, we see promise in discovering how family business from the Global South leverage their ability to fill institutional voids by combining their resources and socioemotional purposes to effect change in their ecosystem (Tippman, Ambos, Giudice, Monaghan & Ringov, 2023). For instance, corporate giving can serve as a strategic tool for family business from the Global South to contribute to society at large and gain community support (Jeong & Kim, 2019). In terms of destructive ways, the strength of family ties may have unintended negative effects on society, for instance, when kinship networks or clans build powerful family business groups (Suddaby et al., 2023) that are associated with state capture (Fogel, 2006), and these become the extended arm of autocratic leaders and dictators, associated with unethical behaviors such as tax avoidance (Niu, Wang, Zhou & Gan, 2024) or corruption (Cuervo-Cazurra & Genc, 2008). Moreover, family involvement can negatively affect corporate social responsibility, suggesting that controlling family members may prioritize their own interests over those of minority shareholders (Choi, Han & Kwon, 2019; Ghoul, Guedhami, Wang & Kwok, 2016). Although there is a large literature on multinationals and their ability to navigate institutional voids and contribute to alleviating societal problems, the mechanisms by which family businesses navigate institutional voids and tackle Grand Challenges remain understudied (Buckley, Doh & Benischke, 2017).
Besides refining, enriching and/or extending existing theories in IB, we suggest that focusing on family businesses from the Global South, their internationalization and ability to address Grand Challenges, has the potential for integrating theories from outside the IB field. The study of family business is, by definition, interdisciplinary, and scholars already use a wide range of theories, drawing from fields outside or adjacent to management, such as finance and economics (Masulis, Pham & Zein, 2011), family science (Combs et al., 2020) and anthropology (Stewart, 2003; Verver & Koning, 2018) to advance theory on these businesses. Integrating such insights from outside IB to reflect on family businesses’ internationalization is still in its infancy. However, recent papers in the Journal of International Business Studies illustrate the vast potential of pursuing this path. For instance, Bohas and Meschi (2023) suggest that elite status attainment by Chinese business owners is a motivation for and success factor in acquisitions of French vineyards, while Carney and Dieleman (2024) draw on sociology theories to suggest that status signaling can constitute a tool to alleviate the liability of outsidership that family businesses from the Global South face when seeking entry into the Global North. We hope to accelerate this stream of research and expect this special issue to help integrate more novel theories outside IB.
Aims and Scope of the Special Issue
The proposed SI seeks to advance our understanding of family businesses from the Global South and Global North. We are interested in contributions that can unlock knowledge on underexplored topics and geographies and advance ongoing conversations in the IB field. We are especially keen to stimulate new theoretical insights that extend IB theories or that open up new streams of IB research by leveraging theories from outside the IB field.
We welcome submissions answering questions at the macro, meso, and micro levels of analysis (as well as across levels). Moreover, we welcome research using diverse methods, including quantitative and qualitative approaches and conceptual/theoretical contributions. We encourage interdisciplinary and cross-functional perspectives.
In line with JIBS policy, we do not accept review papers for this special issue. We welcome high-quality submissions that look at family businesses from around the world, particularly those from regions that have been under-represented in the literature. Finally, the editors especially welcome manuscripts that research how family businesses address Grand Challenges. We welcome submissions with different theoretical and methodological perspectives.
Possible topics that would be suitable for this SI include (but are not limited to):
- Where do families, in particular those from the Global South, get their advantage (or disadvantage) from? What differentiates them from other multinationals, whether from the Global North or the Global South? What makes them distinct in different institutional contexts and how does this distinctiveness impact the way they internationalize? What organizational features do they display, and what networks do these families form? How are they different from industrial networks or state-owned enterprises? Are current IB theories sufficient to understand their internationalization patterns? What is the role of formal and informal institutions and how do related insights impact IB theories? How can insights from other disciplines, within and outside the broader management field, enhance our cross-functional IB knowledge?
- When do family businesses, particularly in the Global South, approach Grand Challenges at home and abroad, and, if they do, why? What explains whether family businesses, in such contexts, alleviate or contribute to inequality, human rights issues, and environmental concerns? What determines whether family businesses become heroes or villains regarding Grand Challenges? Do family businesses follow other approaches toward Grand Challenges as compared to other companies? If so, how and why? Where do these differences matter?
- There are various theoretical perspectives explaining family businesses’ goals, behaviours, and outcomes. The Socioemotional Wealth (SEW) perspective has been popular in the Global North. Can this perspective provide novel explanations for family businesses’ internationalization and approaches to Grand Challenges in the Global South? For instance: How does SEW differ and operate across family businesses from different international contexts? Do family owners from the Global South pursue additional dimensions of SEW that are not included in the five key dimensions developed in the Global North? If so, why do family owners pursue these new SEW dimensions, and how does their pursuit influence their approaches to internationalization and their efforts to address Grand Challenges? Alternatively, are other perspectives, such as internalization theory or institutional theory more promising and relevant in the context of the Global South to explain family businesses’ approaches to internationalization and efforts to address Grand Challenges?
- How do the Internet of Things, digitalization, and AI change family businesses’ ability and willingness to internationalize and address Grand Challenges? How do these mechanisms change chosen approaches of family businesses from the Global South relative to those from the Global North? Can these mechanisms help family businesses deal with the inherent uncertainty and roughness that often paralyze organizational decision-making in challenging institutional environments?
- What drives family business decisions to “give up” on internationalization and hide the family’s wealth in tax havens? What motivates families to move their businesses into or out of markets in the Global South, politically/economically unstable and war-torn countries? Additionally, where does family capital go in such situations? How does the geographical location of their capital influence these companies’ decisions to expand internationally?
- How do family businesses hedge against risks (or even war) in politically/economically unstable countries in the Global South? How do they respond to co-optation, corruption, and undue regulatory pressures exerted on entrepreneurial families and family businesses in this context? Are there any differences on how family businesses in the Global South manage their relations with home and host governments and other stakeholders in comparison with family businesses in the Global North or non-family counterparts?
- Does family capitalism play a different role in the Global South when compared to the Global North and across different regions from the Global South? If yes, how? For instance, what is the role played by family offices, family foundations, family investment companies, or family academies in managing the financial, socioemotional and human capital of entrepreneurial families? How do differences in the extent and type of financial and socioemotional wealth owned by entrepreneurial families lead to differences in their behavior with respect to international business?
Deadline and Submission Instructions
Authors should submit their manuscripts between January 16, 2026, and January 30, 2026, via the Journal of International Business Studies submission system, available at https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the standard double-blind review process.
The guest editors plan to run:
- Three online information sessions about the Special Issue at different times to enable scholars from around the globe to participate.
- Presentations at major global conferences on family business – IFERA, FERC, and STEP – to bring this special issue to the attention of scholars using novel approaches, constructs, and theories that could inform the international business field.
- A paper development workshop (PDW) at the 2025 AIB annual meeting. The guest editorial team has already secured some funding for this.
- A communication strategy with regular posts on the LinkedIn, X, and Facebook platforms. Moreover, we will also share posts via the AOM, AIB, SMS, FERC and IFERA listservs to create awareness and enhance the reach of the special issue.
- A symposium for the papers accepted in the special issue. The aim is to enhance the visibility and impact of the articles included in the special issue. The guest editorial team has already secured some funding for this.
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
Publisher: Springer International
Publishing Editor: Dr. Sami BASLY, Associate Professor, University of Paris West Nanterre La Défense
Book description: Family firms are the most common type of firms throughout the world and particularly in the Arab and Muslim-Majority countries. Surprisingly, very little academic research has been conducted about these organizations in a region characterized by a strong importance given by individuals and communities to family, clans, values and tradition. From the Maghreb to the Middle East, small and more aged firms are commonly owned and managed by members of extended families who play a distinguishing role in the Arab world unlike nuclear families in Western or Nordic countries. As extant research is mainly due to Western researchers established in many cases in these countries, current knowledge about Arab family firms is heavily influenced by a Western culture lens. Well, even if theses analyses are legitimate, one could assume that researching family firms in the Arab world may require handling the specific context, culture and values of the countries where they evolve. Besides, family business scholars have paid attention to family firms in some regions of the world – apart from Western countries – such as Asia, Latin America. But, to our best knowledge, no attention has been paid to the Arab countries region despite the need and value of such an analysis.
The projected book intends to shed light on these organizations in order to highlight their uniqueness in the specific context of the Arab region. How these firms could grow, operate and compete in societies characterized by high collectivism, high uncertainty avoidance and high masculinity (Hofstede, 1991)? Even if it is difficult to generalize most cultural values across all Arab countries (Lamb, 1987), some authors emphasized the unique characteristics of the Arab culture and identified it as a fourth paradigm that represents the management practice in Arab countries besides the three most well-known paradigms (American, European, and Japanese cultural paradigms) (Obeidat et al., 2012). Particularly, Arab culture is adherent to religion and is characterized by “familism”, where the loyalty of individuals is to their families and then to the next social level that individuals belong to as their tribe, religious sect or to the extended family (Sidani and Thornberry, 2009). In addition, as pointed out by Al-Rasheed (2001), managers have a limited future orientation and excessive lack of delegation of authority. Moreover, a difficult emancipation from tradition is highly noticeable. In sum, some constant features may be underscored and may explain how family firms may be specific in Arab countries as all of these traits could be reflected in managerial styles, attitudes and practices.
Economic environment is not to be neglected as many of these countries roughly share the same difficulties pertaining to underdevelopment, high rates of unemployment and weak diversification of economies. In some other Arab countries, oil abundance is a determinant feature which constitutes both a hindrance to the exploration of new economic models but also a facilitator allowing for the conversion of certain countries’ economies. Arab family firms greatly contribute in shaping the economies of their countries but they are also constrained by their environment. However, they are the key for the development of the region’s countries and may help to provide solutions to the current crisis and political turmoil mainly originating from unemployment and lack of freedom. We solicit your scholarly articles to be incorporated in this edited book as a chapter. Prospective authors are encouraged to submit papers tackling the various aspects of management, governance and strategy of family firms in the Arab countries.
- We expect scholarly articles to be incorporated in this edited book to highlight the following themes:
- Does the cultural specificity of Arab family firms shape the governance and management of these firms?
- What is the influence that specific values in the Arab world (Honor, pride, loyalty, trust) could exert on the management of family firms? How do spiritual and religious values influence business in family firms?
- What’s the role of emotions in the management of family firms in the Arab World?
- Is there any specificity of innovation by Arab family firms?
- What influence do uncertainty avoidance and risk aversion have on financial decisions?
- Do Arab family firms deal differently (from their Western counterparts) with social pressures and corporate social responsibility?
- What impact, if any, political regimes and systems have on family firms in the Arab world?
- How do Arab family firms compete internationally?
- What is specific in the succession process for Arab Family firms?
Submission procedure: Conceptual and empirical papers (9000 – 10000 words) adopting a managerial, economic, sociological or historical perspective are welcome. Papers must be original and not published or in consideration elsewhere in other books, journals or websites. All papers will be submitted to a peer review process.
Interested authors are invited to send:
- a working Chapter title;
- a concise and a compelling abstract for the chapter;
- a detailed resume (academic post, main academic qualifications and publications);
Submissions are to be sent by email to: sbasly@u-paris10.fr
Time frame:
- Deadline for proposal submission: May 15, 2016
- The final version is needed by June, 30, 2016
Contact: For inquiries about this call for chapters and manuscript submissions, please email to the editor: sbasly@u-paris10.fr
References:
Al-Rasheed A., 2001. Features of Traditional Arab Management and Organization in the Jordan Business Environment. Journal of Transnational Management Development, Vol. 6, Iss. 1-2, 2001.
Dadfar, H., 1984. Organization as a mirror for reflection of national culture: A study of organizational characteristics in Islamic nations. In Proceedings of the First International Conference on Organization Symbolism and Corporate Culture, 1984.
Hofstede, G., 1991. Cultures and Organizations: Software of the Mind. McGraw-Hill, London.
Lamb, D., 1987. The Arabs. Random House, New York.
Obeidat, B. Y., Shannak, R. O., Masa’deh, R., & Al-Jarrah, I. (2012). Toward better understanding for Arabian culture: Implications based on Hofstede’s cultural model. European Journal of Social Sciences, 28(4), 512-522.
Sidani, Y., Thornberry, J., 2009. The current Arab work ethic: Antecedents, implications, and potential remedies. Journal of Business Ethics 91 (1), 35–49.
Weir, D. T. H., 1993. Management in the Arab world, In Proceedings of The First Arab Management Conference. University of Bradford Management Centre, UK July 6-8, 604-623.
In this special issue, we invite researchers to submit original papers, case studies and review articles that provide new insights on family firms in Iberoamerican countries. Articles that compare the findings from these regions with the current literature are particularly encouraged. The topics to be covered by this call include, but are not limited to:
- Firm succession, family legacy and sustainability of family businesses.
- Essays in business history of families firms.
- Firm performance and the family founder effect.
- Internationalization and businesses diversification in family controlled firms.
- Family business groups and conglomerates.
- Corporate governance in family firms.
- Family businesses finance, capital structure and agency conflicts.
- Entrepreneurship dynamics within family firms.
- Productivity and innovation in family controlled firms.
- Professionalization and delegation within family firms.
- The role of family businesses and business families in different economies and societies.
For questions regarding, Submission Process & Guidelines for this special Issue please contact the Guest Editors:
Alberto Gimeno, ESADE, Spain alberto.gimeno@esade.edu
Maria José Parada, ESADE, Spain mariajose.parada@esade.edu
Claudio Muller, Universidad de Chile, Chile cmuller@fen.uchile.cl
References
Claessens, S., & Yurtoglu, B. (2013). Corporate governance in emerging markets: A survey, Emerging Markets Review, 15: 1–33.
Fan, J., Wei, K., & Xu, X. (2011). Corporate finance and governance in emerging markets: A selective review and an agenda for future research, Journal of Corporate Finance, 17: 207–17.
Kearney, C., 2012. Emerging markets research: trends, issues and future directions. Emerging Markets Review 13: 159–183.
Yu A., Lumpkin G., Sorenson R., & Brigham, K. (2012) The Landscape of Family Business Outcomes: A Summary and Numerical Taxonomy of Dependent Variables, Family Business Review, 25: 33-57.
Asia Pacific Journal of Finance and Banking Research (APJFBR)
ISSN (Online edition) 1933-3455; ISSN (Print Edition) 1933-3390
The Editor of the Asia Pacific Journal of Finance and Banking Research (APJFBR) invites papers on the following topics but not limited to:
- The Supply Chain Finance
- New Technologies in Finance
- New Techniques of Risk Analysis in the Emerging Markets
- Entrepreneurship and Diversification in the Environment of Globalization
- Theoretical and empirical papers or case studies relating to all areas of Banking, Finance.
We will publish a special issue on the theme New Trends in the Emerging Financial Market next year, in addition to our normal annual edition.
About the journal
APJFBR, ISSN [(Online edition) 1933-3455; ISSN (Print Edition) 1933-3390] is an annual, peer-reviewed research journal publishing since 2007. It is listed in Cabell’s, EBSCO and ProQuest Directories of USA. For more information about this journal, please go to http://www.globip.com/asiapacificjournal.htm
Submission Process
All submissions will undergo a rigorous double-blind evaluation process to ensure quality of publication. Send us your manuscripts at the following address: submissions@globip.com. Articles are accepted in MS-Word or PDF formats. For your article to be considered for the special edition, please submit by March 31, 2014. Submission and publication fees are waived.
Who may submit articles?
Contributions from both scholars and practitioners will be highly obliged.
Please direct all questions to:
Dr. Weiping Liu
Editor-in-Chief, E-mail: liuw@easternct.edu
Despite their shared historical roots, international economics (IE) and international business (IB) have developed as two distinct fields of study. While economists directed their efforts at formalizing the workings of international trade and investment at the macroeconomic level, business scholars attempted to open the black box of the (multinational) enterprise, relying more on conceptual narratives than mathematical tools.
With the advent of new trade theory (Helpman and Krugman, 1987), the firm was re-introduced as the object of interest in international economics. The recent advancement of the heterogeneous firm in formal models of (“new new”) international trade (Melitz, 2003) has further spawned an unprecedented amount of theoretical and empirical microeconomic research in international economics (Greenaway and Kneller, 2007). Hence, after fifty years of co-existence, the potential for spillovers between IE and IB has increased significantly.
The purpose of this special issue is to explore ways in which empirical research in IE and IB can inform and reinforce each other. In many cases, mutual unawareness of existing themes, models, methodologies and jargon, makes effective integration of both streams difficult. In an era of globalization with such a crucial role for multinationals, and the need for scholars to explain contemporary global developments, a more effective model of knowledge development is key. We believe that increased understanding in and of both IE and IB will advance our knowledge of firm-level trade and investment behavior beyond the levels that can be achieved if these streams keep developing in relative isolation.
This special issue seeks to integrate insights from IB and IE. A number of (non-exhaustive) illustrative examples of topics where IE and IB either share unexploited overlap and synergies, or could benefit from each other’s conceptual and methodological insights are the following:
- The sources of firm heterogeneity. Most international economists limit their theoretical and empirical conceptualization of firm heterogeneity to differences in (labour or total factor) productivity. IB scholars on the other hand have provided more diverse sources of firm heterogeneity, for example in theories of strategy and economic organization based on firm-specific resources (e.g. Hennart, 2009). (How) can these alternative sources of firm heterogeneity be incorporated in microeconometric models of international trade and investment, and what are their implications for trade and investment performance?
- Behavioural theories of internationalization. Already in the 1970s, IB scholars recognized that firms tend to follow specific paths of internationalization which tend to defy rational cost and benefit calculations. In particular, cumulative learning experience and psychic distance between home and host countries are important explanatory factors in this regard. More recently, economists have also started to document and model similar strategies of sequential exporting. What can the established IB literature (e.g. Johanson and Vahlne, 2009) in this field add to the new developments in IE?
- The impact of the liability of foreignness. Ever since the inception of their field, IB scholars have put the liability of foreignness at the center of theories on trade and Foreign Direct Investment (e.g. Hymer, 1976; Zaheer & Mozakovski, 1997). This liability bears resemblance to the notion of fixed export and investment costs in IE heterogeneous firms models, which empirically have been related to the extensive (rather than the intensive) margin of trade and investment (e.g. Helpman et al., 2008). Such a distinction is rarely made in IB studies. (How) can the different notions underlying the liability of foreignness be incorporated more systematically in studies on the extensive and intensive margins of trade?
- Firm heterogeneity and the impact of FDI. IB scholars have traditionally been more concerned with the determinants and organization of FDI, whereas IE scholars have worried more about the impact of FDI via spillovers or wages (Meyer, 2004). It seems natural to assume that FDI which is differently motivated or organized will also yield different impacts on the host-country environment. Can these two literatures be linked to lead to more nuanced and richer empirical predictions on the contingencies of the impact of FDI?
- Global value chain fragmentation. Both IE and IB scholars agree on the increased relevance of offshoring and outsourcing. Whereas IB scholars have used survey based evidence suggesting a move from manufacturing to increased offshoring of knowledge-based activities (blue collar to white collar offshoring), IE scholars refer to a similar phenomenon as increased trade in tasks (Grossman and Rossi-Hansberg, 2008). One crucial issue concerns the relation between the two observations; how does the trade in tasks discussion relate to the offshoring discussion in IB? What overall picture emerges when putting the two observations together?
Planning and submission procedure
The deadline for submission is August 31, 2012. Submissions can be sent to Roger Smeets (r.smeets@uva.nl).
References:
Greenaway, D. and Kneller, R. 2007. Firm heterogeneity, exporting, and Foreign Direct Investment. The Economic Journal 117(517): F134-F161.
Grossman, G.M. and Rossi-Hansberg, E. 2008. Trading tasks: A simple theory of offshoring. American Economic Review 98(5): 1978-1997.
Helpman, E. and Krugman, P.R. 1987. Market Structure and Foreign Trade. MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Helpman, E., Melitz, M. and Rubinstein, Y. 2008. Estimating trade flows: Trading partners and trading volumes. Quarterly Journal of Economics 123(2): 441-487.
Hennart, J.F. 2009. Down with MNE centric theories! Market entry and expansion as the bundling of MNE and local assets, Journal of International Business Studies 40(9): 1432-1454.
Hymer, S.H. 1976. The international operations of national firms: A study of foreign direct investment. MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Johanson, J. and Vahlne, J.E. 2009. The Uppsala internationalization process model revisited: From liability of foreignness to liability of outsidership, Journal of International Business Studies 40(9): 1411-1431.
Melitz, M. 2003. The impact of trade on intra-industry reallocations and aggregate industry productivity. Econometrica 71(6): 1695-1725.
Meyer, K.E. 2004. Perspectives on multinational enterprises in emerging economies. Journal of International Business Studies 35(4): 259-276.
Zaheer, S., and Mosakowski, E. 1997. The dynamics of the liability of foreignness: a global study of survival in financial services, Strategic Management Journal 18(6): 439-464.
The Institute of Central American Fiscal Studies (Icefi) is a think tank that specializes in issues related to fiscal policy. The research area of Icefi is centered in Central America, region in which the Institute has elaborated technical analysis in topics such as public policy, health, education, macroeconomics, political action, environmental issues and development focused on fiscal policy. The Institute believes that the efforts of research should be applied to the construction of societies more equitable and just in Latin America, specifically Central America. This belief is the main reason why the Institute began with the Revista Centroamericana de Estudios Fiscales (RCEF).
The purpose of the journal is to publish advanced knowledge focused on fiscal issues of Latin America, specifically Central America, in the topics related to economic, social, political and environmental circumstances and its impact in fiscal policy. The journal motivates the creation of avant-garde theories and innovative knowledge in fiscal policy by researchers that are interested in presenting original papers and book reviews.
Invitation to publish in the first edition of RCEF
The first issue of RCEF invites researchers to submit papers in the field of fiscal policy in Latin America focused in public policy, health, education, macroeconomics, political action, fiscal budgets, government income, tax effects and fiscal methodologies that could be applied to Central America. The journal accepts research that includes new theoretical frameworks and innovative methodologies in the fiscal policy theme in Latin America, specifically Central America.
The suitable topics would include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Public policy focused on fiscal issues
- Environmental issues and its impact on fiscal policy
- Education and public policy
- The consequences of fiscal policy in health
- Comparative analysis of government’s budgets
- Analysis of fiscal incomes
- The effect of taxes, direct or indirect, en the economic development of Central America or Latin America
- Comparative methodologies in fiscal policy applied to Central America or Latin America.
The Inter-American Development Bank (IADB) is sponsoring the first edition of the RCEF
Submission and review of papers
All submitted papers must be original, unpublished and it should not be under consideration in a different journal. The papers will be revised by a peer-review journal that will guarantee an ethical and transparent process.
First reception of papers: June 1st 2015
Revision of papers: July 5th 2015
Submission of final papers: July 30th 2015
For more information please visit our website: http://www.rcef.icefi.org/ or contact Mauricio Garita at the following address: mauricio.garita@icefi.org
Several (if not most) countries have not fully recovered from the devastating consequences of the recent multifaceted global crisis, which emerged as a subprime mortgage – and an energy (oil shock of 2007-2008) – crisis that was triggered in 2007 and gradually developed into a financial, sovereign debt and eventually, an economic crisis without precedent in post-war economic history. Data until 2015 (2014 for foreign direct investment – FDI) reveal that economic recovery in the West is still very fragile. While the United States (where the crisis commenced) and most European countries (where the crisis impacted the most) have recovered in terms of GDP and inward FDI, only two countries from the European Union (EU) have recovered in terms of employment and similarly, only seven EU countries have surpassed the amount of fixed investment (gross fixed capital formation) that was reported before they were hit by the crisis. The United States have also not recovered in terms of employment and fixed investment.
The fragile economic recovery following the global financial and economic crisis, and the climaxing refugee and migrant crisis, are an example of the issues that endanger stability in the EU. However, it is persistently poor performance in economic indicators such as unemployment rates that give rise to Euroscepticism and jeopardize coherence and growth of the EU.
The experience of economic adjustment in the Eurozone (and the EU) with regard to the limited potential for public investment expenditure and the emphasis on improving competiveness, indicates the critical role of FDI. Within the particular framework, policy officials should improve the conditions favoring the factors that determine inward FDI and the reinvestment rate with the purpose of keeping as much of the rents as possible on FDI in the domestic economy and improve the absorptive capacity in order to improve competitiveness, innovation and productivity. The abovementioned describe the focus of this special issue on the factors attracting FDI and its impact on the host and home EU countries in the aftermath of the global financial and economic crisis. The aim is to attract papers that research the phenomenon and to present the experience of emerging vis-à-vis developed EU economies.
More specifically, the special issue is focused on – but not limited to –research in the following topics:
- The changing geography of FDI in the EU after the crisis with emphasis on flows, concentration and impact.
- The role of FDI in the relationships between the former communist bloc of the Soviet Union, Eastern Europe and Asia with the EU, after the crisis.
- The contribution of FDI in the economic, political and social transformation of EU members and candidates of the former communist bloc of the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe, after the crisis.
- Political risk, national culture (e.g. formal/informal institutional environment) and foreign direct investment in the EU.
- Revisiting FDI and home/host EU countries economic growth and/or economic development (e.g. social impact of FDI).
- The impact of FDI on home/host EU countries competitiveness vis-à-vis international trade or outsourcing.
- Determinants and motives of FDI in the EU.
- Barriers and obstacles to FDI in the EU.
It is desirable that the above topics will be addressed from a comparative perspective, i.e. across time (before and after the crisis) and/or between economies and sectors of economic activity.
For further information please contact Bitzenis Aristidis (bitzenis@yahoo.com).
Bitzenis P. Aristidis is a Professor in Global Entrepreneurship and Foreign Direct Investment at the Department of European and International Studies of the University of Macedonia, Greece. He received his Ph.D. from Glasgow University, UK (on FDI). He has published extensively in international refereed journals and in books with various publishers such as Palgrave-Macmillan, Ashgate. Dr Bitzenis is an active researcher in various European funded programs such as Interreg, THALIS, DASTA, etc.
References and further reading
Bitzenis, A. and Vlachos, V.A. (2016). Foreign direct investment in the light of the recent crisis. Global Business and Economics Review, 18 (2): 115-123.
Bitzenis, A., Vlachos, V.A. and Papadimitriou, P. (2012). Mergers and Acquisitions as the Pillar of FDI. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Eurostat: http://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/data/database. Eurostat data on Gross Domestic Product at market prices and Gross Fixed Capital Formation (chain linked volumes, index 2005=100) and unemployment rates (unadjusted) extracted on 15.05.2016.
OECD: http://stats.oecd.org/. OECD data on United States Gross Domestic Product and Gross Fixed Capital Formation (constant prices, 2010 base year) extracted on 15.05.2016.
UNCTAD: http://unctadstat.unctad.org/wds/ReportFolders/reportFolders.aspx. UNCTAD data on Foreign Direct Investment at current prices (inward stock) extracted on 15.05.2016.
UNCTAD (2013). World Investment Report 2013: Global Value-Chains: Investment and Trade for Development. New York and Geneva: United Nations. Available online at http://unctad.org/en/PublicationsLibrary/wir2013_en.pdf.
UNCTAD Policy Brief No. 3, April 2012. Sovereign Debt Crisis: From Relief to Resolution. Available online at http://unctad.org/en/PublicationsLibrary/uxiiipb2012d3_en.pdf.
UNCTAD Policy Brief No. 5, June 2012. Breaking the cycle of exclusion and crisis. Available online at http://unctad.org/en/PublicationsLibrary/uxiiipb2012d5_en.pdf.
"Foreign entrepreneurs in China" Submission deadline extended to June 15th, 2018 Journal information at: https://eber.uek.krakow.pl/index.php/eber/index
Submit at: https://eber.uek.krakow.pl/index.php/eber/user/register
Description of the Thematic Issue
BACKGROUND: Since its “opening” nearly 40 years ago, China has been attracting foreign entrepreneurs. Now, being the world’s second-largest economy, a member of the World Trade Organization as well as other global and regional economic blocks and cooperation agreements, the country remains a magnet for businesspeople from all around the world. During the process of China’s impressive economic development foreign entrepreneurs played an important role contributing to the advancement of technology and management practices in China. Yet, while learning from abroad still plays an important role, the focus has been shifting towards development of Chinese own knowledge and enhancing Chinese innovation. Successive Five-Year Plans and state policies explicitly focus on the development of Chinese technologies, patents, know-how, and brands. AIMS The aim of this thematic issue of the Entrepreneurial Business and Economic Review (EBER) is to understand the changing role of foreign entrepreneurs in China with regard to the international diffusion of knowledge, management practices and innovation.
Specifically we ask:
- what do foreign entrepreneurs learn in China?
- What is their role in the international diffusion of Chinese technologies and innovation?
- What kind of management practices do they learn and apply back in their home countries, or spread further across the world?
- What is the current role of foreign entrepreneurs in the advancement of technology in China?
- Do they bring valuable technologies and managerial practices which can be applied in China?
- Can foreign entrepreneurs act as catalysts of Chinese innovation?
We are inviting empirical papers investigating subjects within the broad theme of this issue.
The EBER journal has a strong tradition of publishing high-quality quantitative research, however, we are open to other research methodologies as well. The list of topics below is indicative. Prospective authors can contact the EBER and the thematic issue editors to discuss their ideas and consult potential submissions.
TOPICS: Topics include, yet are not limited to:
- Cross-border start-ups
- Foreigners in business incubators
- Government policies and international entrepreneurship Inclusive international entrepreneurship
- Diffusion of innovation between developing and developed regions
- Innovative businesses models for international entrepreneurship
- Institutional environments of the home and the host country
- International diffusion/transfer of innovation International diffusion/transfer of knowledge
- International diffusion/transfer of management practices
- International entrepreneurship in the digital economy
- International social entrepreneurship
- Knowledge spill-overs from international new ventures
- The role of foreign entrepreneurs in the society
Description of the Thematic Issue
BACKGROUND
Since its “opening” nearly 40 years ago, China has been attracting foreign entrepreneurs. Now, being the world’s second-largest economy, a member of the World Trade Organization as well as other global and regional economic blocks and cooperation agreements, the country remains a magnet for businesspeople from all around the world. During the process of China’s impressive economic development foreign entrepreneurs played an important role contributing to the advancement of technology and management practices in China. Yet, while learning from abroad still plays an important role, the focus has been shifting towards development of Chinese own knowledge and enhancing Chinese innovation. Successive Five-Year Plans and state policies explicitly focus on the development of Chinese technologies, patents, know-how, and brands. AIMS The aim of this thematic issue of the Entrepreneurial Business and Economic Review (EBER) is to understand the changing role of foreign entrepreneurs in China with regard to the international diffusion of knowledge, management practices and innovation.
Specifically we ask: what do foreign entrepreneurs learn in China? What is their role in the international diffusion of Chinese technologies and innovation? What kind of management practices do they learn and apply back in their home countries, or spread further across the world? What is the current role of foreign entrepreneurs in the advancement of technology in China? Do they bring valuable technologies and managerial practices which can be applied in China? Can foreign entrepreneurs act as catalysts of Chinese innovation?
We are inviting empirical papers investigating subjects within the broad theme of this issue. The EBER journal has a strong tradition of publishing high-quality quantitative research, however, we are open to other research methodologies as well. The list of topics below is indicative. Prospective authors can contact the EBER and the thematic issue editors to discuss their ideas and consult potential submissions.
TOPICS
Covered Topics include, yet are not limited to:
- Cross-border start-ups
- Foreigners in business incubators
- Government policies and international entrepreneurship
- Inclusive international entrepreneurship
- Diffusion of innovation between developing and developed regions
- Innovative businesses models for international entrepreneurship
- Institutional environments of the home and the host country
- International diffusion/transfer of innovation
- International diffusion/transfer of knowledge
- International diffusion/transfer of management practices
- International entrepreneurship in the digital economy
- International social entrepreneurship
- Knowledge spill-overs from international new ventures
- The role of foreign entrepreneurs in the society
SUBMISSION
Completed papers must be submitted on or before April 15, 2018 (Central European Time) via the OJS system at https://eber.uek.krakow.pl/index.php/index/login
Submission at: https://eber.uek.krakow.pl/index.php/eber/announcement
Background
Twenty years ago, Lall and Narula (2004) proposed that it was time to reconsider the role of foreign direct investment (FDI) in economic development amidst a liberalizing global economy. Today, we believe a similar reflection is necessary given the substantial changes that the global economic system is recently undergoing that impact FDI, including the strengthening sustainability imperative, the digital revolution, and the rising geopolitical tensions. This special issue aims to inspire new thinking on foreign investment for development, focusing on how this relationship has evolved and what role policy plays in it.
The discussion comes at an opportune time as numerous countries and international organizations have turned their attention to foreign investment for development. While the topic has been a longstanding focus of the United Nations Trade and Development (UNCTAD), i.e., as a central theme of its flagship publication, the World Investment Report, it has also become a focal point at the World Trade Organization (WTO). The WTO has entered negotiations on Investment Facilitation for Development, aiming to develop a global agreement to improve the investment and business climate in developing countries. Moreover, numerous international governmental organizations (IGOs) and the Academy of International Business (AIB) have recently joined forces to develop the World Investment for Development Alliance (WIDA) to create a collaboration mechanism for sustainable international investment. This special issue aims to contribute to this conversation. It aims to provide both theoretical and empirical insights that can support international organizations and governments in developing a robust FDI policy agenda on investments for development.
Foreign Direct Investment for Development
One of the most hotly contested issues in international business research concerns the varied roles of multinational enterprises in the development process of countries (Lall & Narula, 2004; Ghauri, Fu, and Vaatanen, 2017). For many years, FDI has been painted as an integral part of an open and effective international economic system and a major catalyst for development (De Mello, 1997; Borensztein et al., 1998). Scholarship has focused on the benefits of inward FDI (IFDI), especially in developing countries (Fu, Buckley and Fu, 2020; Sawitri & Brennan, 2023; van der Straaten et al., 2023). It found that IFDI can stimulate economic development (Moran et al. 2007) and facilitate country catch-up (Larmin & Livanis, 2013). It does so by boosting the productivity of local companies in upstream and downstream sectors (Alfaro & Chauvin, 2022), fostering technology and knowledge transfer (Meyer & Sinani, 2009), and improving managerial and employee skills (Alfaro & Chauvin, 2022; Fu, Essegbey, & Promkon, 2019). It can also influence institutional and regulatory environments, especially in developing countries, by strengthening their intellectual property (IP) protection standards (Brandl et al., 2018). Beyond these economic benefits, IFDI can improve environmental and social conditions in host countries by transferring “cleaner” technologies and encouraging more socially responsible corporate actions (Fu et al., 2021; Amendolagine et al., 2021; 2023; Wiessner et al., 2024). For all these reasons, IFDI is considered a critical tool for achieving the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDG) at both the host-country and global levels (Montiel et al., 2021; van Tulder et al., 2021).
Moreover, outward FDI (OFDI) has also been linked to development (Castellani et al. 2008; Dunning & Lundan 2008; Bathelt & Buchholz 2019), especially its potential to generate growth in the home region by facilitating skill upgrading and generating jobs that support foreign-based activities, creating new markets and stimulating production growth, as well as facilitating access to both foreign business networks and new knowledge. This finding not only applies to advanced economies but also to developing countries (Hennart, 2012; Pananond, 2015; Fu, Buckley & Fu, 2020). For example, emerging-market multinational enterprises (EMNEs) can learn from their internationalization activity and gain experience by accessing geographic and culturally distant markets (Luo & Tung, 2007; Amendolagine et al., 2018).
However, the benefits of FDI are not automatically or evenly distributed across countries, regions, sectors, and workers (Fu, 2004; Alfaro & Chen, 2016), with many stakeholders facing negative implications that can hamper development. For instance, researchers have found that FDI can distort local labor markets (Gagliardi et al., 2021) and temporarily reduce employment opportunities (Moore et al., 2023). It was found to hamper indigenous entrepreneurship and innovation (Zahra & Hashai, 2022; Fu, Pietrobelli, & Soete, 2011), enhance rural poverty (Brandl et al., 2021), exploit local deficiencies such as constrained free speech (Fiaschi et al., 2017), transfer irresponsible business practices abroad (Surroca et al., 2013), and create chokepoints that can generate national security concerns (Luo & Van Assche, 2024). These negative implications of FDI have spurred debates in both academic and policy circles on the overall impacts of FDI for development and how to identify and spur Sustainable FDI (Sauvant, 2021), quality FDI (OECD, 2019) and socially responsible investment (SRI) (Sparkes & Cowton, 2004) that aim to enhance development.
In this context, developing the right FDI policies at both the national and international levels is crucial for maximizing the developmental benefits of FDI (Buckley, 2018). Nations and international organizations need to develop these in a global economy that is trying to reinvent itself. The launch of the UN SDGs is a manifestation of the growing sustainability imperative that policymakers are adopting in their development of FDI policies. Growing geopolitical tensions imply that governments are also including security concerns in their FDI policies. Development in digital technologies and artificial intelligence, as well as the climate change challenge, suggest that countries need to reflect on the implications that these have on FDI.
This JIBP special issue seeks manuscripts on the broad subject of “foreign investment for development.” We are particularly interested in articles that study how this relationship has evolved, considering new global realities related to grand challenges, such as climate change, the 4th industrial revolution, and rising geopolitical tensions. We welcome submissions that are grounded in the fields of international business, development economics, economic geography, international economics, and development studies.
Possible Topical Areas of Interest
For this special issue, we invite scholars to contribute theoretical and empirical research that expands or improves current knowledge on the interaction between foreign investment and economic development. Submissions may include but are not restricted to the following topics:
Relation between FDI and economic/sustainable development
1. Types of FDI and their impact on economic development:
Is inward and/or outward FDI a boon or bane for economic/sustainable development?
What is sustainable/quality FDI, and how does it relate to economic/sustainable development?
Which type of FDI is best for inclusive and sustainable development?
What is the relation between impact investment and economic development?
What role does the location of origin of the MNE (e.g., multinationals from emerging markets) and size and maturity of the firm (e.g., small multinationals or born globals) play in economic development?
Do MNEs’ CSR investments have economic development outcomes?
2. Impact of FDI on different levels and paths of economic/sustainable development:
How effective is FDI for transferring knowledge and technology?
What explains the uneven distribution of FDI around the globe?
Does South-South FDI impact development differently from North-South/North-North FDI?
What role does FDI play in global and regional value/supply chains?
What role does FDI play in achieving the UN Sustainable Development Goals?
Does FDI enhance or constrain the green transition in developing countries?
What are ethical issues related to FDI and economic development?
What are FDI’s potential drawbacks, such as lack of positive linkages with local communities and potentially harmful social and environmental impact of FDI, especially in the extractive and heavy industries?
3. External factors impacting FDI and economic development:
How does geopolitics influence the relation between FDI and economic/sustainable development?
Have the digital revolution and AI affected the relationship between FDI and economic/sustainable development?
What role does timing play in the relationship between FDI and economic/sustainable development?
Relation between policies and FDI/international business
4. Policy impacts FDI/international business:
Do FDI policies generate the envisioned effects of economic development? What are their unintended consequences?
How do policies for economic, sustainability, or national security reasons affect multinational enterprises and their global value chains?
How effective are FDI policies that aim to reduce inequality?
What is the rationale for supranational investment facilitation policies, such as the WTO’s “Investment Facilitation for Development”?
What are the predicted gains from a WTO agreement on Investment Facilitation?
What role can supranational soft policies play in investment facilitation?
How does the European Union Cohesion Policy affect economic, social and territorial inequality?
5. FDI/international business impacts policy:
How do public agendas around FDI policy emerge and evolve in light of recent patterns of FDI? How do MNEs and other stakeholders influence/lobby for FDI policies?
How do governments align/misalign with FDI policies?
While the title states “Investment,” the special issue would also consider papers that look at the operation of multinational firms in host countries regarding their development impact, even after the original investment has taken place. The examination of how MNE activities in host countries affect economic development – or other aspects of development such as social or institutional development or pursuit of the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals – would be welcome, again if the analysis includes explicit consideration of actual or potential government policy.
Focusing on this topic can help our scholarly community build stronger bridges with policy actors in national governments and international organizations, which is one of the ultimate goals of the journal. JIBP is also interested in papers that emphasize the company perspective on government policies and on the role of international organizations. So, overall, the goal is to focus on investment strategies and government policies that contribute to development.
Envisioned impact
The discussion on foreign investment for development in this special issue should provide useful and holistic insights for policymakers in the areas of trade and investment promotion, as well as those involved in foreign relations, on the consequences of FDI in developing countries. At the same time, such discussion should also benefit managers who conduct FDI, both in advanced and developing economies.
Submission and Review Process
Submitted manuscripts must adhere to the scope, standards, format, and editorial policy of the Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP). “Author Guidelines” and the JIBP Style Guide for Authors must be followed.
The Special Issue will proceed in two phases. In Phase 1, the four guest editors will review all submitted proposals. An extended abstract should be around 2000-3000 words, including graphs, tables, figures, and references. It should provide (i) the author(s)’ details, (ii) the purpose of the study, (iii) the research question(s) being addressed, (iv) how the article addresses the core concepts of the special issue; and (v) the relevance of the study for scholars and policy professionals; and (vi) the envisioned impact of the paper.
Extended abstracts should be emailed to the JIBP Managing Editor, Anne Hoekman, at managing-editor@jibp.net with “Special Issue Foreign Investment” in the subject line.
Contributors with submissions likely to contribute to the SI will be invited to develop a full paper. These invitations provide no guarantee for publication in the SI. They serve as indications of interest in how the full papers can contribute to the SI. In Phase 2, the submitted papers will go through the regular JIBP process of submission, peer-review, revision, acceptance, and JIBP publication. The timeline for submission is as follows:
January 30, 2025 Deadline for extended abstract submission by email to managing-editor@jibp.net
August 30, 2025 Deadline for submission of full papers via JIBP’s Manuscript Central portal
September 2026 Expected publication of SI (accepted articles published online)
Bottom (base) of the Pyramid concept has a long history. The term was first coined by the US President, Franklin D. Roosevelt, in a radio address in 1932. However the concept was popularized in the business literature by C.K. Prahalad much more recently. Since then, study of BoP has captured attention of practitioners and scholars alike (Gollakota, Gupta, and Bork, 2010, Karamchandani, Kubzansky and Lalwani, 2011; Olsen and Boxenbaum, 2009); and four approaches have emerged for strategizing about the BoP:
Fortune Finding: Prahalad and Hamel (1990) underlined the scale of the world population not included in the global markets, and the potential of fortune-finding by catering to the common needs of this poorest population, by providing low-cost products and extending distribution reach.
Fortune Creating: London and Hart (2011) postulate that the next generation of BoP business strategies require a shift to “fortune creating” with the four billion consumers, producers, and entrepreneurs who make up the poorest population of the world, so that viable and scale ventures may be designed.
Fortune Sharing: Some social entrepreneurship scholars based in the industrialized markets contend the need for the corporations to approach the BoP with a corporate social responsibility mindset, and commit to sharing their wealth with the BoP, rather than seeking to create wealth off or through the BoP (Berkman, 2010; Davidson, 2009).
Fortune Stealing: Some social activists based in the emerging markets maintain that the multinational corporations have been all too enthusiastic to take off with the technological fortune that belongs to the communities in which the poor people have lived for generations, without giving any credit or compensation (for example, see Shiva, 2011).
Besides understanding and contrasting these approaches, there is also a need to re-examine the concept of the Base of the Pyramid. While in economic terms, the world’s low-income communities may be at the Base of the Pyramid, in human terms, many low-income communities are known for their hospitality and helping spirit and thus perhaps could be at the Top of the Pyramid (Gupta, 2011; Leisinger, 2007; Rashid and Rahman, 2009). In the informal economy of these communities, the concrete local social context of the humans may matter more than the abstract global economic context of the corporations. Thus, as we democratize and decentralize the discourse by giving voice to the “BoP” communities that have been disconnected from the mainstream global markets, there may be a need to reframe our language.
We propose the concept of Extensional Technological Growth (ETG) as a heuristic for strategies involving the disconnected communities. We observe that a flip side of the weak linkages of the low-income communities with the global markets has been the preservation of the uniqueness of the technological base of the people in these communities (Gupta, 2008). This people’s technological base is generally locally efficient, relying on the complementarity of the locally available and distributed resources (Cooke, 2006). In several nations, efforts are beginning to be made to connect alternative and diverse technological bases across multiple community groups and construct innovative, scalable, and disproportionately proficient technological base (Gupta, 2011). These efforts have a potential to generate extensional technological growth (ETG), connecting beyond the mainstream boundaries and channels for augmenting technological capabilities.
Issues related to disconnected communities are particularly relevant for emerging economies of South Asia[1], where 25% of the population currently lives under poverty levels. As South Asia is estimated to provide 30-32% of the increment to the world population into 2050 (World Bank, 2011), as per the traditional understanding of BoP, there is going to be even a greater expansion of the BoP in the region (Khilji, 2011). For the special issue of the South Asian Journal of Global Business Research, we invite papers situated in or inspired by the South Asian context, and that explore theoretical and empirical aspects of topics such as:
1) Could there be alternative approaches to BoP as popularized by Prahalad? What would the theoretical and practical underpinnings of these approaches?
2) Is economic wealth really the right perspective to define the base in the BoP? What other perspectives could be used?
3) How do we engage these disconnected and forgotten communities and what can we learn from them? What approaches, strategies and practices are emerging from these communities that would further our understanding of leadership, management, innovation etc.?
4) Can social learning and critical theory (and other theories) be used to explain possible strengths of the BoP?
5) How to improve the ETG ecosystem- nonprofits forming alliances with business vs. nonprofits as mediators between business and people groups;
6) How to develop the ETG market – seeding and base-building for marketing to the BoP vs. manufacturing for low cost in the BoP vs. pursing ETG with the BoP;
7) How to leverage the ETG for global markets – green leap of small footprint innovations designed for the BoP vs. buyback of green solutions designed using ETG know-how for the global markets;
8) How to account for the ETG -- corporate social charity given to the BoP (cost-center) vs. sustainable distributed gain sharing with those contributing to ETG (profit center);
9) How to fund the ETG business ventures – philanthro-captialists offering patient capital to the central actors vs. microcredit federations offering fast circulation capital to decentralized actors;
10) Two sides of the ETG entrepreneurship – promoting consumption through marketing initiatives vs. promoting investment through multiplex linkages in the low-income communities
11) How to design the ETG ventures – for economies of scale through connectivity with the global economic context vs. for economies of choice through sensitivity to the local social context.
We are hoping to use a new lens on the BoP in order to allow us to be more creative and think differently, hence we encourage submissions beyond these questions, as long as these contribute to advancing research, policy and practice related to BoP and ETG. We welcome submission from all business or related disciplines, and are open to multi-disciplinary approaches.
Deadlines:
Abstracts (3 pages) should be submitted by December 15, 2011 to any one of the following guest editors. Authors of the selected abstracts will be invited to participate in a symposium proposal under the auspices of the South Asian Academy of Management on the topic for the Academy of Management Conference 2012 at Boston, whose theme is “Informal Economy”.
Full Paper deadline (8000 words) via Scholar One to SAJGBR: March 30, 2012. After screening by the special issue editors, these papers will be double blind reviewed before being accepted for publication.
Anticipated Publication date: Sept 2012
About the Special Issue Editors:
Vipin Gupta (Ph.D., Wharton School) is Professor and Co-director of the Global Management Center at the California State University San Bernardino. He has made significant contributions to the science of culture, sustainable strategic management in the emerging markets, managing organizational and technological transformations, and entrepreneurial and women’s leadership, and is a pioneer in the field of culturally sensitive models of family business around the world. He has authored or edited 16 books, including the seminal GLOBE book on culture and leadership in 62 societies, eleven on family business models in different cultural regions, two on organizational performance, one on the MNCs in China, and an innovative strategy textbook. He has published about one hundred fifty articles as book chapters and in academic journals, such as the Journal of Business Venturing, Journal of World Business, Family Business Review, International Journal of Cross-cultural Management, and Asia-Pacific Journal of Management, among others. Dr. Gupta has been a Japan Foundation fellow, and a recipient of the Society for Industrial Organizational Psychologists’ coveted “Scott M. Myers Award for Applied Research—2005”.
Email: gupta05@gmail.com
Shaista E. Khilji (PhD, Cambridge University, UK) is the Founding Editor-in-Chief of South Asian Journal of Global Business Research (SAJGBR), and Associate Professor of Human and Organizational Learning at the George Washington University (Washington DC). Her research focuses on issues related to Global Leadership, Talent Development, Innovation, and Cross-Cultural Management with a particular emphasis on emerging economies. She has published several articles in reputable scholarly journals, including the International Journal of Human Resource Management, Journal of World Business, and the Journal of Product Innovation Management, contributed to edited volumes and presented more than 40 research papers at various international conferences. She has received several awards, including “Honorary Lifetime Fellow of Cambridge Commonwealth Society” (UK); “Pride of Profession Award” (India); the “Outstanding Service” and “Best Reviewer” awards by the Academy of Management (USA), “Top 10%” paper award by the Academy of International Business (Italy), and a “Bronze Award” by McGraw Hill Higher Education. She was nominated for the Washingtonian “Rising Star under 40 years” for her all-round academic achievements, “Best International Symposium’ and “Newman’ awards by Academy of Management.
Email: shaistakhilji@gmail.com
About the South Asian Journal of Global Business Research (SAJGBR):
South Asian Journal of Global Business Research (SAJGBR) is dedicated to advancing theoretical and empirical knowledge of business and management issues facing multinational and local organizations within South Asia. It publishes high-quality research articles, insights and reviews which contribute to the scholarly and managerial understanding of contemporary South Asian business issues. SAJGBR is committed to providing a unified platform to publish research that links research communities in South Asia with the rest of the world.
SAJGBR publishes both conceptual and empirical papers that address a variety of business issues within South Asia, in order to inform and advance international business theory and practice. All papers must be based upon rigorous quantitative and/or qualitative methodological approaches. SAJGBR is also open to creative reviews and insights from a variety of people engaged in international business, including policy makers, consultants, practitioners and managers.
South Asian Journal of Global Business Research is a publication of Emerald Publications. For more information, please refer to http://www.emeraldinsight.com/products/journals/journals.htm?id=sajgbr
References:
Berkman, J. (July 9, 2010), “Millions of Hungry Families Are Not a ‘Market Opportunity’”, available at: http://news.change.org/stories/millions-of-hungry-families-are-not-a-market-opportunity.
Cooke, P. (2006), “Global bioregional networks: a new economic geography of bioscientific knowledge”, European Planning Studies, Vol. 14, pp. 1265–1285.
Davidson, K. (2009), “Ethical concerns at the Bottom of the Pyramid: Where CSR meets BOP”, Journal of International Business Ethics, Vol. 2 No. 1, pp. 22-32.
Gollakota, K., Gupta, V., and Bork, J. (2010), “Reaching customers at the base of the pyramid – a two-stage business strategy”, Thunderbird International Business Review, Vol. 52 No. 5, pp. 355-367.
Gupta, A.K. (2011), Various articles and blogs, available at: http://www.sristi.org/anilg/anilgblog.php
Gupta, V, (2008), “Constructing a sustainable technological platform in India”, Vidwat: The Indian Journal of Management, Vol. 1 No. 1, pp. 1-8.
Karamchandani, A., Kubzansky, M., and Lalwani, N. (2011), “Is the Bottom of the Pyramid really for you”? Harvard Business Review, Vol. 89 No. 3, pp. 107-111.
Khilji, S.E. (2011), Population 7 billion and counting: How it would affect us all. Panel talk presented at GW Alumni Weekend celebration, The George Washington University, Washington DC, USA
Leisinger, K. M. (2007), “Corporate Philanthropy: The ‘Top of the Pyramid’”, Business & Society Review, Vol. 112 No. 3, pp. 315-342.
Olsen, M., and Boxenbaum, E. (2009), “Bottom-of-the-Pyramid: Organizational barriers to implementation”, California Management Review, Vol. 51 No. 4, pp. 100-125.
Rashid, A. T., and Rahman, M. (2009), “Making profit to solve development problems: the case of Telenor AS and the Village Phone Programme in Bangladesh”, Journal of Marketing Management, Vol. 25 No. 9/10, pp. 1049-1060.
Shiva, V. (2011), “Navdanya International”, available at: http://www.vandanashiva.org/
________________________________________
[1][1] Including Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka. A broad concept of South Asia might include immigrant communities from the South Asia region, and the influence of the South Asian cultural system worldwide.
Asia Pacific Journal of Management
Special Issue and Conference on “From Emerging to Emerged: A Decade of Development of Dragon Multinationals”
Submission Deadline: April 15, 2015
Conference Place and Date: December, 2015 (tentative dates)
Venue: Macquarie University, Sydney, Australia
Estimated Date of Publication: November 2016
Special Issue Guest Editors:
Jane Lu (University of Melbourne and National University of Singapore)
Xufei Ma (Chinese University of Hong Kong)
Lucy Taksa (Macquarie University)
Yue Wang (Macquarie University)
Special Issue Consulting Editors:
Mike Peng (University of Texas at Dallas)
Ravi Ramamurti (Northeastern University)
Conference Sponsor:
Department of Marketing and Management, Macquarie University, Sydney, Australia.
In 2006, the Asia Pacific Journal of Management (APJM) published an influential article “Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization” (Mathews, 2006a, 23:5-27). In this conceptual article, John Mathews (Macquarie University, Australia) defines firms from the periphery—especially those from the Asia Pacific region—as ‘dragon multinationals’. The author develops a new model to illustrate the three pillars common in these firms’ pattern of accelerated internationalization and summarizes them into his linkage, leverage, and learning (LLL) model.
According to Mathews (2006a), for dragon multinationals, the best and the quickest way to capture global opportunities and to tap into global resources is first to link up with firms around the global, second to leverage such links to overcome resource barriers (including foreign direct investment (FDI) through acquisitions), and third to learn to build up their own capabilities in a cumulative fashion. These three pillars of linkage, leverage and learning are what make dragon multinationals’ international expansion distinctive from the internationalization pattern of Western incumbents.
To the extent that firms that lack initial resources may take advantage of the increasingly interconnected global economy in a pattern consistent with the LLL model, the LLL model may become one of the dominant paradigms in international business (IB) research in the 21st century, just like how the OLI model was viewed by the IB and management community in the 20th century. We do not know whether this significant paradigm development will happen, but the fact that John Mathews’ article won the second APJM Best Paper Award in 2009 and became the second most cited APJM paper ever (with over 600 Google Scholar citations) in just a few years after its appearance in 2006 is a strong signal that the IB and management community may just be ready to embrace such a paradigm development. However, whether such a paradigm development will materialize (Dunning, 2006; Narula, 2006) is at least dependent on two critical issues, which will be addressed in this Special Issue. First, do we have accumulated sufficient evidence to suggest that there is indeed a need for a new paradigm such as the LLL model to account for a very different internationalization process? Second, nearly ten years since Mathews (2006a), do we have sufficient knowledge about ways that those already emerged dragon multinationals (such as Acer, Li & Fung, and Lenovo that appeared in Mathews’ original article) manage their global operations?
To further enrich our understanding of the merits and limits of the LLL model, we also call for papers that provide new theoretical or empirical insights to help us better understand the internationalization patterns and strategies adopted by firms from the rapidly developing Asia Pacific region including those are still emerging and those already emerged in the global stage. To the extent that management problems remain the same over time while their solutions differ from part of the world to part of the world (Hostede, 2007), we also welcome manuscripts that look at the impact of the emerging or emerged dragon multinationals on the strategies and behaviours of Western MNEs in different parts of the world.
Overall, this Special Issue provides an opportunity to (1) reflect on John Mathews’ influential article on the then emerging dragon multinationals, and (2) bring together research on recent development of those dragon multinationals that are already emerged in the global market as well as research on the interactions between these (relatively) new players and incumbent western players in an increasingly interconnected global business environment. To serve these purposes, manuscripts are not restricted to, but could deal with the following topics:
- Empirical studies to test the validity of the LLL model in a broader range of firms (including but not limited to emerging and emerged dragon multinationals).
- How the strategies, structures, and management practices (e.g. how to manage the challenge of diverse workforce) adopted by those emerged dragon multinationals differ from MNEs from the West and Japan.
- How the LLL model and OLI model complement or substitute each other.
- How the expansion of dragon multinationals to regions such as Africa and Australia affects the strategies of Western MNEs in these regions.
- How the pattern of expansion of dragon multinationals is affected by varying institutional conditions in their home countries.
- What the performance implications are as a result of the expansion of dragon multinationals.
Papers for the Special Issue should be submitted electronically to the APJM Online Submission System at https://www.editorialmanager.com/apjm/, and identified as submissions to the “From emerging to emerged: a decade of development of dragon multinationals” Special Issue. The deadline for receipt of papers for this special issue is April 15, 2015. The format of submissions must comply with submission guidelines posted at the APJM website. Please indicate that your submission is to be reviewed for the Special Issue on “From Emerging to Emerged: A Decade of Development of Dragon Multinationals” (choose that in the “article type” item during the submission process).
Papers will be double-blind peer-reviewed. We will make initial editorial decisions by July 1, 2015. Authors invited to revise and resubmit their work will be invited to present the papers at a Special Issue development conference hosted by the Department of Marketing and Management at Macquarie University, Sydney, Australia.
The papers accepted and presented at the special issue conference will be considered for publication in the Special Issue of the APJM. Presentation at the conference does not necessarily guarantee publication in the special issue. The combination of a development conference and a Special Issue nevertheless follows a highly successful APJM initiative to bring out the full potential of authors and papers.
For questions about the special issue, please contact any of the Special Issue Editors:
Jane Lu
Professor, Department of Management and Marketing, University of Melbourne; and National University of Singapore
Email: jane.lu@unimelb.edu.au
Xufei Ma
Associate Professor, Department of Management, Chinese University of Hong Kong
Email: xufei@cuhk.edu.hk
Lucy Taksa
Professor, Department of Marketing and Management, Macquarie University
Email: lucy.taksa@mq.edu.au
Yue Wang
Associate Professor, Department of Marketing and Management, Macquarie University
Email: yue.wang@mq.edu.au
References:
Hofstede, G. (2007). Asian management in the 21st century. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 24: 411-420.
Dunning, J. H. (2006). Comment on Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23: 139-141.
Narula, R. (2006). Globalization, new ecologies, new zoologies, and the purported death of the eclectic paradigm. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23: 143-151.
Mathews, J. A. (2006a). Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23: 5-27.
Mathews, J. A. (2006b). Responses to Professors Dunning and Narula. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23: 153-155.
From Resources and Value Chains to Consumer Benefits and Innovation Ecosystems: Demand-Side Perspectives in International Business
Guest editors:
- Ana Cristina O. Siqueira, Duquesne University
- Ronaldo C. Parente, Florida International University
- Richard Priem, Texas Christian University & LUISS Guido Carli University
Deadline: November 20, 2013
1. Purpose of Special Issue
Globalization, companies’ increasing emphasis on innovation, and the fast-paced introduction of new technologies have encouraged companies to search for technologies anywhere in the world (Doz, Santos, & Williamson, 2001), develop technologies in emerging economies (Immelt, Govindarajan, & Trimble, 2009), and manage innovation ecosystems internationally (Adner, 2012). Venturing beyond the sequential notion of value chains (Porter, 1985), some companies have developed collaborative arrangements involving economic transactions and institutional arrangements between suppliers, complementors, and users (Normann & Ramirez, 1993; Stabell & Fjeldstad, 1998). Such “innovation ecosystems” can be understood as networks of interconnected organizations that incorporate both production- and use-side participants who create value through innovation (Autio & Thomas, forthcoming). In an increasingly interconnected world, some firms are able to create more value than any single firm could alone by coordinating innovation ecosystems that cross industry boundaries and national borders.
Demand-side approaches to value creation represent a new, bourgeoning area in the fields of technology innovation, entrepreneurship, and strategic management (Priem, Li, & Carr, 2012). For instance, an earlier symposium at the 2009 meeting of the Academy of Management addressed the topic of “Demand-Side Approaches to Strategy and Innovation: Moving beyond a Resource-Only Focus” and showcased the work in this area by scholars from different countries. More recently, a symposium at the 2012 meeting of the Academy of Management discussed the topic of “Strategy in Ecosystems,” bringing together presenters who have made major contributions to this growing area, such as Ron Adner, Carliss Baldwin, Marco Iansiti, Michael Jacobides, Kathleen Eisenhardt, and Yves Doz.
Demand-side studies have begun investigating key questions such as: how consumer demand may influence innovation decisions (Fontana & Guerzoni, 2008; Sawhney, Verona & Prandelli, 2005; Tripsas, 2008), and how consumer-focused strategies influence value creation and appropriation (Adner & Snow, 2010; Gruber, MacMillan, & Thompson, 2008; Ye, Priem, & Alshwer, 2012). Among these approaches, the perspective of “consumer benefits experienced” (Priem, 2007) examines demand-side strategies that firms can employ to create value. Consumers are arbiters of value by endorsing or rejecting the value of innovations (Priem, 2007).
International business researchers have started to examine: how multinational organizations access knowledge distributed across consumer groups and different countries in developing innovations (Wilson & Doz, 2011); how collaboration with upstream suppliers, complementors, and downstream consumers facilitates value creation through innovation in an interconnected world (Autio & Thomas, forthcoming); and the effect of innovation on internationalization (e.g., Zeng & Williamson, 2007). Nonetheless, demand-side approaches in international business remain in their infancy (Gulati, Puranam, & Tushman, 2012), and research from this new perspective is needed for a more complete understanding of how the interaction of organizations within innovation ecosystems influences internationalization. Such research can enrich the international business field.
2. Examples of research themes and questions for the Special Issue
Some illustrative (but not exclusive) demand-side research questions that would be appropriate for this special issue include:
- How do multinational organizations develop demand-side advantages with ordinary resources?
- What conditions facilitate the transfer of user-innovation knowledge in multinational organizations?
- How do multinational organizations drive cross-border innovation ecosystems?
- What conditions influence the internationalization of innovation ecosystems?
- How does the internationalization of innovation ecosystems influence the development of new technologies?
- How do global nonprofit organizations and social enterprises support innovation ecosystems with cross-border collaborations?
- To what extent does collaboration within an innovation ecosystem enhance the internationalization prospects of emerging market multinationals?
- How might demand-side approaches help extend the knowledge-based and resource-based views of multinational organizations?
- To what extent could institutional theory help explain the management of innovation ecosystems across borders?
- How might traditional international business theoretical frameworks such as the Uppsala internationalization model benefit from demand-based approaches?
3. Submission Instructions
The deadline for submission of manuscripts is November 20, 2013. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with Journal of International Management’s Style Guide for Authors: http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-international-management/1075-4253/guide-for-authors.
Manuscripts should be electronically submitted to: http://ees.elsevier.com/intman. To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for review in relation to the special issue it is important that authors select “Demand-Side Perspectives” when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process. All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at JIM.
Please direct any questions regarding the Special Issue to Ana Siqueira (siqueiraa@duq.edu) with a copy to Ronaldo Parente (rcparent@fiu.edu) and Richard Priem (r.priem@tcu.edu).
4. References
Adner, R., & Snow, D. 2010. Old technology responses to new technology threats: Demand heterogeneity and technology retreats. Industrial and Corporate Change, 19: 1655–1675.
Adner, R. 2012. The wide lens: A new strategy for innovation. New York, NY: Penguin Books
Adner, R., & Kapoor, R. 2010. Value creation in innovation ecosystems: How the structure of technological interdependence affects firm performance in new technology generations. Strategic Management Journal, 31(3): 306−333.
Autio, E., & Thomas, L. D. W. Forthcoming. Innovation ecosystems: Implications for innovation management. In M. Dodgson, N. Philips, & D. M. Gann (Eds), The Oxford handbook of innovation management. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
Doz, Y., Santos, J., & Williamson, P. 2001. From global to metanational: How companies win in the knowledge economy. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Fontana, R., & Guerzoni, M. 2008. Incentives and uncertainty: An empirical analysis of the impact of demand on innovation. Cambridge Journal of Economics, 32: 927–946.
Gruber, M., MacMillan, I. & Thompson, J. 2008. Look before you leap: Market opportunity identification in emerging technology firms. Management Science, 54: 1652–1665.
Gulati, R., Puranam, P., & Tushman, M. 2012. Meta-organization design: Rethinking design in interorganizational and community contexts. Strategic Management Journal, 33: 571–586.
Immelt, J. R., Govindarajan, V., & Trimble, C. 2009. How GE is disrupting itself. Harvard Business Review, October: 56-65.
Normann, R., & Ramirez, R. 1993. From value chain to value constellation: Designing interactive strategy. Harvard Business Review, 71: 65-65.
Porter, M. E. 1985. Competitive advantage: Creating and sustaining superior performance. New York: Free Press.
Priem, R. L. 2007. A consumer perspective on value creation. Academy of Management Review, 32(1): 219−235.
Priem, R. L., Li, S., & Carr, J. C. 2012. Insights and new directions from demand-side approaches to technology innovation, entrepreneurship, and strategic management research. Journal of Management, 38(1): 346−374.
Sawhney, M., Verona, G., & Prandelli, E. 2005. Collaborating to create: The internet as a platform for customer engagement in product innovation. Journal of Interactive Marketing, 19(4): 4−17.
Stabell, C. B., & Fjeldstad, Ø. D. 1998. Configuring value for competitive advantage: On chains, shops, and networks. Strategic Management Journal, 19: 413−437.
Tripsas, M. 2008. Customer preference discontinuities: A trigger for radical technological change. Managerial and Decision Economics, 29: 79–97.
Wilson, K., & Doz, Y. L. 2011. Agile innovation: A footprint balancing distance and immersion. California Management Review, 53 (2): 6-26.
Ye, G., Priem, R. L., & Alshwer, A. 2012. Achieving demand-side synergy from strategic diversification: How combining mundane assets can leverage consumer utilities. Organization Science, 23(1): 207−224.
Zeng, M., & Williamson, P. J. 2007. Dragons at your door: How Chinese cost innovation is disrupting the rules of global competition. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Over the past decade, Frugal Innovations have garnered the attention of management scholars and practitioners due to their high economic potential and rapidly growing adoption in business. With its roots in emerging economies, Frugal Innovation as a concept has come a long way from focusing on subsistence marketplaces to being applied to address global challenges such as changing demographics and climate change. Specifically, in light of the ongoing digital revolution and arrival of new business models such as sharing and circular economy, Frugal Innovations are being explored on a global scale from various new perspectives. The focus is drifting away from merely being ‘cost’ and ‘BoP’ driven innovations to being ‘green’ and ‘sustainable’ innovations. However, unlike this shift, a large part of current research on Frugal Innovation is still oriented towards BoP markets and low-cost strategies.
Marking the start of a new wave of Frugal Innovation research, this book comes at an appropriate time to encourage academicians to explore the concept of Frugal Innovation from new perspectives and set future research agenda. To discuss different product development strategies and tools that are being employed by organizations across the globe to implement Frugal Innovations. Furthermore, this book also aims to discuss the recent and upcoming trends and their impact on frugal innovations strategies.
Hence, the aims of this book are:
- Starting a new wave in Frugal Innovation research
- Exploring Frugal Innovation from new perspectives
- Set future research agenda
Topics include but are not limited to:
- Frugal Innovation as a worldwide phenomenon
- Reverse Innovation – the global answer to frugality?
- Frugal Engineering fostering Frugal Innovation
- Digital Revolution as a driver of frugality
- Circular Economy and Sustainability
- Technological Innovation and Disruption
- Frugal Ecosystems in the age of Sharing Economy
We encourage specific papers from both a SME and MNC perspective.
Prospective authors should send their manuscripts electronically to the following email address: (Nivedita.agarwal@fau.de), with the subject title as: " Frugal Innovation and its Implementation- Book Chapter". Submitted manuscripts will be refereed by at least two independent and expert reviewers for quality, correctness, originality, and relevance. Submitted manuscripts (around 20 pages) should conform to the standard guidelines of the Springer's book chapter format.
Timeline
Submission of abstracts August 1st 2019
Submission of full manuscripts November 1st 2019
Review Feedback January 15th 2019
Revised paper submission March 15th 2020
Publication Winter 2020
We are inviting academic editorial contributors to a new 1-volume encyclopedia about major marketing strategies, with assignments focused on 100 major marketing strategies for some of the top global and emerging brands from 2011 – 2012. Entries include major product/service, mobile app, social media, brand development, packaging, and television strategies amongst other types. Each entry (2,500 - 3000 words) provides situational analysis, information on the target market, overview of the marketing strategy, and outcome.
Here are a few of the available entries: Product Advertisement Advertising Company FUJIFILM X100 The Sect of Wandering Photographers Mutual Workshop Limited Hong Kong IKEA IKEA e-folder Laboratory Ideas Kft. Budapest Mercedes-Benz The Invisible Drive Jung von Matt Hamburg B-Class F-Cell MTV Balloons Loducca Sao Paulo Nike 360 Control - Binaural Mix - Use Headphones Factory London Football Boot Nokia Pure Twenty-six characters, an alphabetical journey Nokia London Peugeot Reaction Time Euro RSCG Zurich Zurich Skoda Curriculum Vitae weareflink GmbH Hamburg And More...
We are making article assignments with a submission deadline of December 24, 2012, or sooner. If you are interested in contributing to the Gale Encyclopedia of Major Marketing Strategies, it can be a notable publication addition to your CV/resume and broaden your publishing credits. Moreover, you can help ensure that accurate information and important points of view are credibly presented to students and library patrons. Compensation is an honorarium payment of $.03 per word and contributors receive credit for their work in the List of Contributors in the front of the encyclopedia. The list of available entries with a link to the Clio Award site for each entry, style guidelines and sample entry will be sent upon request. Upon receipt of the materials you will select the unassigned entries (without a name in the contributor column) that best suit your interests and expertise, and send your selection to me for confirmation and assignment.
If you would like to contribute to building a truly outstanding reference with the Encyclopedia of Major Marketing Strategies, please contact me by the e-mail information below. Please provide a brief summary of your background in marketing/advertising or provide your CV. Thanks for your time and interest. Best, Sue Moskowitz Author Manager Golson Media work@golsonmedia.com
Guest Editors:
Carin Smaller, Advisor on Agriculture and Investment, International Institute for Sustainable Development (IISD), &
Kathleen Sexsmith, Assistant Professor of Rural Sociology, Pennsylvania State University (Incoming Fall 2017)
Dear Fellow Scholars and Researchers:
Multinational enterprises (MNEs) in the agricultural and extractive sectors are increasingly adopting voluntary guidelines for economic, social, and environmental responsibility along their supply chains, in response to public demands for greater accountability and a stronger contribution to sustainable development. While these initiatives have had strong positive impacts in several areas, the actors involved have paid less attention to gender inequities and inequalities. Indeed, MNEs, governments, and standard-setting organizations have moved slowly and unevenly to address the gendered consequences of MNE activities in the communities where they operate. The result is a diverse set of investor practices, national policies, laws, sustainability standards, guidelines, and certification criteria that take many different approaches to gender issues. Researchers do not know enough about the impacts on gender roles and relations in communities when MNEs adopt responsible investing approaches in their international investment activities. They also do not know enough about the differences in their outcomes, or which approaches work best.
Taken together, initiatives to support MNEs in their efforts to contribute to gender equality in the communities where they operate have yet to realize their full potential. For example, some sustainability initiatives for cross-border agricultural and land investment, like Fairtrade, UTZ Certified, the CFS Voluntary Guidelines for the Responsible Governance of Tenure of Land, Fisheries and Forests, and the Principles for Responsible Investment in Agriculture and Food Systems, are gender-mainstreamed in their content and take a gender-sensitive approach to implementation. Yet, some other initiatives in the agricultural and land sector include only vague non-discrimination principles. Moreover, even the most gender-sensitive agricultural investment initiatives have struggled with how to address gender bias at the level of local cultures. In the mining, oil, and gas sectors, global standards like the Extractive Industry Transparency Initiative have done little to address the negative impacts of resource extraction on women’s safety in conflict zones, their exclusion from employment opportunities, and their unpaid labour burden. Although there is still plenty of work to be done, interest in the potential contributions of MNEs to gender equity and equality through responsible international investment at the current moment is high.
This special issue will focus on the gender dynamics of cross-border investments in the agricultural and extractive sectors, specifically in terms of the policies, laws, sustainability standards, guidelines, and certification criteria that shape the gendered outcomes of investments by MNEs. It will seek articles that address one or more of the following topics:
- The historical and political processes through which gender has come to be included – however unevenly – in the major sustainability initiatives that MNEs adopt;
- Analysis of the direct and indirect impacts of MNEs adopting these initiatives on gender relations and women’s empowerment in the communities where they are implemented;
- The influence (or the capacity to influence) of these initiatives on MNE behaviour, sustainable development, and national laws or policies in these sectors;
- A closely related topic agreed upon with the guest editors.
An important criterion for article selection will be relevance of findings to MNEs, policy discussions, the practical concerns of governments, intergovernmental organizations, civil society organizations and communities engaging with these initiatives. Comparative research is particularly welcome.
Length of contributions: Between 5000–8000 words (plus an abstract not exceeding 150 words)
Submission deadline: November 15, 2017.
Authors are requested to submit their manuscript by email to: tncj@unctad.org
Please send questions regarding this special issue and submissions to:
Kathleen Sexsmith <kjs256@cornell.edu>
Special Issue Editors
Andri Georgiadou, Equality Inclusion Diversity Center, Cyprus
Beverly Dawn Metcalfe, American University of Beirut, Lebanon
Niki Dickerson von Lockette, Pennsylvania State University, USA
Dimitria Groutsis, The University of Sydney, Australia
This special issue aims to foster a discussion about the mutual entanglement of gender, embodiment and identity in organizations and the emergent theoretical directions and approaches that challenge this entanglement and disentanglement. Accordingly, we seek to advance the field and provide a foundational resource for future scholars. The call is therefore directed to those who want to explore the embodiment of gender from a broad range of different disciplines and theoretical perspectives with the common aim of approaching the body both as a site for transgressive encounters and as actively participating and shaping such encounters. Our focus is also transnational and seeks to explore the complexities of embodiment and identity beyond a western space and lens.
In critical debates related to work and organization the human body is considered and discussed as the site of the labor-force. However, there are other layers of the body that deserve to be explored in-depth. Social scientists have conceptualized the body as a project individuals work on and alter as a means of identity construction and reconstruction (Butler, 1990; 1993; Dale, 2001; Shilling, 2017). Furthermore, the body has largely been treated as a medium that helps people explore and experience the world (Monaghan, 2002). One’s perception of their body is considered interdependent with social relationships and control factors that constrain this perception of one’s body in conformity with socio-cultural ideals, models and normative as well as moral accounts (Thompson and Hirschman, 1995; Dale, 2005). Construction of the body and the associated body image therefore embodies a process of socialization. This becomes a means of signifying one’s self-worth and status in the presentation of the self and in social relationships and lifestyles, and also in the exertion of control over one’s self (Thompson and Hirschman, 1995).
We agree with the feminist critique of the mind-body split and its dualistic counterparts: male/female, culture/nature, public/private, human/animal and as such we seek to counterbalance and transgress this bifurcation informing scientific explanations and disciplinary boundaries. The body has become a veritable hot spot, marking itself as a boundary concept that forcefully disrupts established disciplinary identities and fields of investigation. The body is also a locus where nature and culture meet, and it refuses to accommodate any easy distinction between these two terms. Instead, the very presence of the body demands a radical rethinking of the meaning of both nature and culture (Shiling, 2017).
Bodies make themselves present at the very core of a range of different embodied phenomena, such as emotions, desires, identity, and agency (Warhust and Nickson 2009; Simpson and Pullen, 2018). Embodiment in its most simple understanding means the lived experience of human beings, an experience which always bridges “the mind” and “the body”, “the natural” and “the cultural”. Embodied beings are never determined only by their material, or by their social and cultural conditions, but at the same time they are never fully unbound or completely elastic. The historical and spatial differences, changes and stabilities in how bodies and embodiment are perceived and understood, therefore provides insight into both the potentials and constraints of future body theory.
Women's bodies in organizations have been framed as problematic. Gatrell (2011) has illustrated the public hostility toward breastfeeding women at work, similarly Haynes (2012) argues that notions of physical capital remain highly gendered in professional services firms, with implications for equality and diversity in professional work. However, the ‘active’ body has largely been represented in the literature from a Western perspective: based on western forms of bodies, bodily experiences and embodiment (see for example Brewis and Sinclair, 2000; Hall et al., 2007; Monaghan, 2002; Oerton, 2004; Simpson and Pullen, 2018). Likewise, these writings largely present white colonial interpretations and do not consider the multiplicity of embodied forms (Metcalfe and Woodhams, 2012). In this vein, these insights do not provide explanations of embodiment in diverse geographical and cultural spaces including Africa, the Middle East, Latin America, and Asia for instance.
Our concern then is that the substantive literature is ‘colonizing’ bodily accounts, thus leaving the ‘subaltern’ and ‘othered’ identities in the shadows (Spivak and Harasym, 2014; Liu, 2017). Further, ideas of whiteness and the power effects of space and belonging remain under theorized. There is a need therefore for studies to explore bodily processes as part of colonization. Feminist postcolonial accounts of bodily experiences, desires and action and the politics of resistance provide a promising avenue of enquiry for GWO scholars.
In light of this, we invite theoretical, empirical and methodological contributions that explore the lived embodiment of workers and managers, teasing out how gendered embodiment affects bodily feelings and relational and organizational experiences at work, and how the body constitutes an active medium of work, management and organization. Contributions from different fields are welcomed. We also encourage an interdisciplinary approach, acknowledging that gendered embodiment has numerous intellectual roots and allies. The following issues are indicative, but not exhaustive, of our field of focus:
- Globalization, territories and borders and the lived embodiment and bodily experiences of people at work and in organizations.
- Migration and the sense of ‘being’ in the world, through spatiality, embodiment and groundedness in place.
- Critical accounts of embodiment including feminist postcolonial accounts, Marxist humanist or social revolutionary dynamics of the spatiality of embodiments.
- Spatiality as territory: how does the inner activity of the body transcend to the external environment.
- Colonization, decoloniality and forms of embodiment.
- Dress, fashion and intersections with bodily practices.
- How organizations marginalize qualities and aspects of embodiment associated with women.
- Affect and the material circumstances that compel or constrain embodied gender performativity.
- The gendered division of labor and its relationship to embodiment as the materiality of gender subjectivity.
- How various forms of transgender embodiment intersect with other forms of bodily, socio-corporeal and socio-demographic difference, including race, sexuality, age and (dis) ability.
- The social construction of transgender in the institutional arrangements of organizations, industries and fields.
- The bodily techniques and practices that employees and managers mobilize in expressing – or hiding- (trans) gender.
Deadline for submission of full papers: September 30th, 2019
Manuscripts should be around 9,000 words. Manuscripts considered for publication will be peer-reviewed following the journal’s double-blind review process. Submissions should be made via the journal’s Scholar One Manuscript Central at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/gwo. Author guidelines can be found at the journal’s website at: http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1111/%28ISSN%291468-0432/homepage/ForAuthors.html.
Further enquiries about the special issue should be directed to: Andri Georgiadou (equidy@andrigeorgiadou.com), Beverly Dawn Metcalfe (metcalfebd@yahoo.co.uk), Niki Dickerson von Lockette (ntd10@psu.edu), Dimitria Groutsis (dimitria.groutsis@sydney.edu.au).
References
Brewis, J. & Sinclair, J. (2000). Exploring embodiment: women, biology and work. In Hassard, J., Holliday, R. and Willmott, H. (eds) Body and Organization (pp. 192–214). London: Sage.
Butler, J. (1990). Gender trouble: feminism and the subversion of gender. London: Routledge.
Butler, J. (1993). Bodies that matter: on the discursive limits of sex. London: Routledge.
Dale, K. (2005). Building a Social Materiality: Spatial and Embodied Politics in Organizational Control, Organization, 12(5).
Dale, K. (2001). Anatomising embodiment and organisation theory Basingstoke. London: Palgrave.
Gatrell, C. (2011). Policy and the pregnant body at work: Strategies of secrecy, silence and supra‐performance. Gender, Work & Organization, 18(2), 158-181.
Hall, A., Hockey, J., & Robinson, V. (2007). Occupational cultures and the embodiment of masculinity: Hairdressing, estate agency and firefighting. Gender, Work & Organization, 14(6), 534-551.
Haynes, K. (2012). Body beautiful? Gender, identity and the body in professional services firms. Gender, Work & Organization, 19(5), 489-507.
Liu H, (2017). Undoing Whiteness: The Dao of Anti‐racist Diversity Practice. Gender Work and Organization, 24(5), 451-563.
Metcalfe, B. D., & Woodhams, C. (2012). Introduction: New Directions in Gender, Diversity and Organization Theorizing–Re‐imagining Feminist Post‐colonialism, Transnationalism and Geographies of Power. International Journal of Management Reviews, 14(2), 123-140.
Monaghan, L. F. (2002). Embodying gender, work and organization: solidarity, cool loyalties and contested hierarchy in a masculinist occupation. Gender, Work & Organization, 9(5), 504-536.
Oerton, S. (2004). Bodywork boundaries: power, politics and professionalism in therapeutic massage. Gender, Work & Organization, 11,5, 544–65.
Shilling, C. (2017). Body pedagogics: Embodiment, cognition and cultural transmission. Sociology, 51(6), 1205-1221.
Simpson, R., & Pullen, A. (2018). ‘Cool’ Meanings: Tattoo Artists, Body Work and Organizational ‘Bodyscape’. Work, Employment and Society, 32(1), 169-185.
Spivak, G. C., & Harasym, S. (2014). The post-colonial critic: Interviews, strategies, dialogues. London: Routledge.
Thompson, C. J., & Hirschman, E. C. (1995). Understanding the socialized body: A poststructuralist analysis of consumers' self-conceptions, body images, and self-care practices. Journal of consumer research, 22(2), 139-153.
Warhurst, C., and Nickson, D. (2009). Who’s got the look? Emotional, aesthetic and sexualized labour in interactive service work. Gender, Work and Organization, 16(3): 385– 404.
Summary
Global leadership has served as a hallmark topic in leadership research for the past few decades, in response to an unprecedented growth of international firms and markets (Ajarimah, 2001; Caligiuri, 2006; Gentry et al., 2014; Khilji et al., 2010; Mendenhall et al., 2012). However, scholars have described it as a western-centric (Arvey et al., 2015), seemingly age-blind (Spisak et al., 2014) and male-dominated (Kyriakidou, 2012; Syed & Murray, 2008) field. The intersectional effects of gender, age and other forms of identity remain relatively under-explored in the leadership literature. Arvey et. al. (2015) note that western scholars and western data predominantly drive global leadership research. To energize this field and add to theoretical significance (Glynn & Raffaelli, 2010), it is important to examine global leadership and its interplay with gender and inter-generations in non-western or ‘unconventional’ contexts (Bamberger & Pratt, 2010; Khilji & Rowley, 2013; Scandura & Dorfman, 2004; Steers et al., 2012).
For the past two decades, South Asia has attracted greater interest among business leaders, politicians and academics alike. It has become one of the most dynamic and fast-growing regions in the world, which many multinational companies consider as an important strategic growth market for their business activities, as they invest in local production facilities and integrate domestic companies into their value chains (Khilji, 2012; Khilji & Rowley, 2013). Goldman Sachs (2011) predicts continued development in the region- as India is likely to emerge as world’s second largest economy by 2050, and Bangladesh and Pakistan have a high potential of becoming two of the world’s largest 11 economies (referred to as Next-11) in the 21st century, along with BRIC, (Goldman Sachs, 2011). Recently, Pakistan has attracted US$ 46 billion of investment from China, which is expected to boost Pakistan’s socio-economic development (CNN Money, 2015; The Wall Street Journal, 2015). From a generational perspective, leadership literature has paid relatively less attention to age (Spisak, et al., 2014). Age remains an important issue within South Asia context given the population growth and demographic mix in that region. In stark contrast to many developed countries, South Asia has a significantly younger population that is continuing to grow. If qualified and skilled, then this population is likely to be in high demand in future global labor market (Khilji, 2012; Khilji & Keilson, 2014).
Recent reviews of national talent development initiatives indicate that South Asian countries, particularly Pakistan and Bangladesh, are acutely aware of a long standing ‘leadership deficit’ there, with many reports indicating that the young have a growing level of anxiety about renewal of leadership (Khilji & Keilson, 2014; Masood, 2013). To address this, respective governments have implemented a wide range of leadership development initiatives. Further, scholars have also argued that the Indian subcontinent –given its fast changing environment and resource constraints - should serve as a training ground for future global leaders (Khilji & Rowley, 2013; Power, 2011). In sum, there is a necessity to learn more about leadership in and from South Asia, because demographically and contextually, South Asia is likely to exert significant influences on global leadership research and practice. Specifically, examining South Asian generational views on leadership is likely to offer new insights for future theory and practice of leadership (Pio & Syed, 2014).
From a gender perspective, the leadership field is strongly focused on, and influenced by, men. Some scholars have even argued that the term leadership is “conventionally constructed in masculine terms” (Kyriakidou, 2012, p. 4; Vinkenburg et al., 2011). In order to overcome this limitation, several scholars have undertaken studies to examine leadership through a gender lens (Eagley & Heilman, 2015; Peus et al., 2015). A majority of gender research has adopted an equity and fairness perspective, focusing on the gender gap in leadership (Hausmann, Tyson, & Zahidi, 2011; Peus, et al., 2015; Schuh et al., 2014). While this research has contributed fundamentally to the literature, it may be worthwhile to link leadership studies to broader domains of gender- including gender roles, identity, social location and relationships (Glynn & Raffaelli, 2010). Such topics are not only important for reconsidering the role of gender in leadership and evaluating conceptualizations of leadership but also most appropriate for South Asia where gender inequities appear to be more significant than in the West (UNDP, 2013). However, there are also several South Asian women who are defying organizational and social norms (Pio & Syed, 2013). Some of these women are leading multinational corporations, while others are at the forefront of socio-economic change through their entrepreneurial ventures. For example, Malala Yusafzai’s effort for girls’ right to education, Kiran Mazumdar Shaw’s rise as the Indian biotech queen, Bibi Russell’s building of a pioneering fashion house in Bangladesh, Naina Lal Kidwai’s appointment as the Indian Country Head of HSBC, Nasreen Kasuri as founder of the international chain of Beaconhouse School System in Pakistan and Roshane Zafar’s drive as an award winning Pakistani social entrepreneur.
Through this Special Issue (SI), we want to foster research on gender, generation and leadership from the South Asia region or from a South Asian perspective. The SI seeks to improve understanding of demographic and social development in the context of leadership in South Asia and the factors that influence these developments. With the purpose of providing an unconventional non-western perspective (Bamberger & Pratt, 2010; Khilji & Rowley, 2013) and also in line with the intersectionality perspective (Shields, 2008), we are interested in publishing research that explores South Asian leadership experiences and perspectives about gender, and/or generations. An examination of the intersections between gender and leadership, generations and leadership, and/or generation and gender in leadership (including life course stage and age) can help us to understand changes in gender, intergenerational and other social relations over time. An intersectional lens is helpful to deconstruct categories within which policy makers and academics often confine groups and individuals, providing a nuanced and holistic understanding of how women are located within various social situations and contexts (Shields, 2008). The lens is also useful for developing an understanding of the leadership process – including leadership development in organizations – in terms of how women’s potential as business leaders may be fully utilized, as well as the mechanisms for changes over time. A critical analysis of gender and generations is also crucial to understanding leadership because of the constantly evolving relations between women and men, and between younger and older generations (IIED, 2013).
Both of these approaches encourage South Asian voices to emerge, as these are predominantly absent in the leadership literature. Glynn & Raffaelli (2010) highlight methodological convergence among leadership scholars. To expand the scope as well as focus on theoretical development of the global leadership field, submissions of studies using non-traditional research methods are also encouraged for this SI. In recent years, studies using diverse research methods (such as storytelling, narrative, ethnographic) that have offered rich insights into leadership patterns. Thus, we urge submission of all forms of rigorous analyses as well as critical perspectives. We seek rigorous data-driven and strong conceptual frameworks for this SI. We encourage papers and frameworks that go beyond merely finding cross-cultural, cross-gender and cross-generational differences (or similarities) to highlighting diverse, local and unexplored perspectives that can enrich theoretical developments in global leadership and offer ‘frame-breaking’ insights (Youssef & Luthans, 2012).
The mission of SAJGBR is to advance theoretical and empirical knowledge of business issues facing multinational and local organizations of South Asia and South Asian diaspora. With this in mind, we request only paper submissions that are based upon data collected from any South Asian country, as per the World Bank classification (i.e., Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan and Sri Lanka. Topics The purpose of this SI is to offer view of South Asian leadership from gender and generational lens. Thus, authors are allowed to construct their own definition of leadership, gender and generations to be able to incorporate diverse views and conceptualization, and truly capture South Asian perspectives. We are interested in a variety of submissions, so long as they address an issue relating to gender and leadership OR generations and leadership OR a combination of gender, generations and leadership in the South Asian context specifically. We expect contributors to make an important theoretical contribution and clearly incorporate cultural or contextual variations.
Topics could include, but are not limited to:
- What are the concepts and perspectives, processes and outcomes of leadership in South Asia? How (and why) are these influenced (or not influenced) by gender and/or generations?
- How do South Asian women lead multinational companies and other organizations in South Asian and/or non-South Asian context?
- What are some of the current views of gender and generations in leadership in South Asia? What new views are emerging?
- How does gender or generations intersect with other forms of identity such as social class, faith, ethnicity, caste and urban/rural background and to what extent do such intersections affect leadership in South Asia?
- How is gender reproduced, maintained, negotiated and re-created through practice and development of leadership?
- What are salient features of women’s multiple social identities in South Asia? How do these reinforce, neutralize and constitute each other to construct leadership identities?
- How are gender and/or generational stereotyping portrayed in South Asian leadership? How does this effect business?
- Do the younger generations of leaders act as agents of change. How?
- What are the varying gender and/or generational expectations from leadership? How are organizations accommodating these expectations in South Asia?
- What is the relationship between global and local ways of understanding gender and generation in leadership?
- How is leadership development related to gender and emerging leaders?
- Given that entrepreneurial ventures provide women the opportunities to practice leadership (Bullough et al., 2015), how does entrepreneurial creativity and independence allow women to become good leaders? What are some of the opportunities and challenges that women may be faced with as an entrepreneur leader?
For theoretical contributions, we also encourage stocktaking reviews and analyses. If researchers are to pursue this line of research, we strongly encourage them to review Stinchombe’s (2002) conceptualization of theory development, Glynn & Raffaelli’s (2010) meta-analysis of leadership research, and Khilji & Matthew’s (2012) review of research focused upon South Asia.
Submission Guidelines and Schedule
All manuscripts will go a double-blind review process. Submissions should be between 7000-8000 words including references, figures, and tables. Please follow submission guidelines at http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=sajgbr A selection of the submitted papers may also be considered for inclusion into a presentation symposium to be submitted to the 2016 Academy of Management Conference – subject to the paper’s potential and authors’ interest and availability. Hence, submission deadline for full paper and/or expanded abstracts of no less than 4000 words (for consideration for inclusion in the AOM 2016 symposium proposal) is: December 10, 2015
Submission deadline for full paper (for all papers): April 10, 2016
Expected publication date: September 2017
Authors are welcome, though not required, to contact the SI editors to discuss their ideas before formal submission. Please direct all queries to all editors via email: Shaista E. Khilji (shaistakhilji@gmail.com), Jawad Syed (j.syed@hud.ac.uk ), and Mary Sully De Luque (Mary.Sullydeluque@thunderbird.asu.edu ).
Note: The title of the Journal may change from 2017. More information will be shared with authors, when available.
References
Ajarimah, A.A. (2001). Major challenges of global leadership in the twenty-first century. Human Resource Development International, 4(1), 9-19.
Arvey, R., Dhanaraj, C., Javidan, M., Zhang, Z-X. (2015). Are there unique leadership models in Asia? Exploring uncharted territory. Leadership Quarterly, 26, 1-6.
Bamberger, P., & Pratt, M.G. (2010). From the Editors: Moving forward by looking back: Reclaiming unconventional research contexts and samples in organizational scholarship. Academy of Management Journal, 53(4), 655-671.
Bullough, A., De Luque, M.S., Abdelzaher, D., & Heim, W. (2015). Developing women leaders through entrepreneurship education and training. Academy of Management Perspectives, 29(2), 250-270.
Caligiuri, P. (2006). Developing global leaders. Human Resource Management Review, 16, 219- 228.
CNN Money. (2015). Pakistan lands US$ 46 billion investment from China. Available at http://money.cnn.com/2015/04/20/news/economy/pakistan-china-aid-infrastucture/ Last accessed Aug 25, 2015
Eagley, A., & Heilman, M. (2015). Call for papers: Special issue of Leadership Quarterly on gender and leadership. Ely, R.J., Ibarra, H., & Kolb, D.M. (2011). Taking gender into account: theory and design for women's leadership development programs. Academy of Management Learning and Education, 10(3), 474-493.
Gentry, W.A., Eckert, R.H., Munusamy, V.P., Stawiski, S.A., & Martin, J.L. (2014). The needs of participants in leadership development programs: A qualitative and quantitative cross-country investigation. Journal of Leadership & Organizational Studies, 21(1), 83-101.
Glynn, M.A., & Raffaelli, R. (2010). Uncovering mechanisms of theory development in an academic field: Lessons from leadership research. Academy of Management Annals, 4(1), 359-401.
Goldman Sachs. (2011). People, potential, possibilities. Retrieved from http://www.goldmansachs.com/gsam/docs/funds_international/brochures_and_sales_aids/fund_literature/advisor_brochure_n-11_en.pdf (accessed Aug 25, 2015).
Hausmann, R., & Tyson, L.D., & Zahidi, S. (2011). The Global Gender Gap Report 2011. Retrieved from: http://www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_GenderGap_Report_2011.pdf (accessed Aug 25, 2015).
UNDP (2013). The rise of the South: Human progress in a diverse world. Human Development Report. New York, NY: United National Development Programme.
IIED (2013). Making gender and generation matter. International Institute for Environment and Development. Available at: http://www.iied.org/making-gender-generation-matter (accessed 27 August 2015).
Khilji, S.E., & Keilson, B. (2014). In search of global talent: Is South Asia ready? South Asian Journal of Global Business Research, 3(2), 114-134.
Khilji, S.E., & Rowley, C. (2013). Globalization, Change and Learning in South Asia. Oxford, UK: Chandos Publishing.
Khilji, S.E. (2012). Does south Asia matter? Rethinking south Asia as relevant in international business research. South Asian Journal of Global Business Research, 1(1), 8-21.
Khilji, S.E., & Matthews, C.D. (2012). Editor’s perspective: Published South Asian research: Current standing and future directions. South Asian Journal of Business Research, 1(2), 154-176.
Khilji, S. E., Davis, E. B., & Cseh, M. (2010). Building competitive advantage in a global environment: Leadership and the mindset. In T. Devinney, T. Pedersen & L. Tihanyi (Eds.), The Past, Present and Future of International Business and Management, Advances in International Management (Vol. 23) (pp. 353–37), New York, NY: Emerald.
Kyriakidou, O. (2012). Gender, management and leadership. Equality, Diversity and Inclusion: An International Journal, 31(1), 4-9. Masood, T. (2013, December 31). Pakistan’s leadership deficit. The Express Tribune. Retrieved from: http://tribune.com.pk/story/653004/pakistans-leadership-deficit/ (accessed August 25, 2015).
Mendenhall, M.E., Reiche, B.S., Bird, A., & Osland, J.S. (2012). Defining the “global” in global leadership. Journal of World Business, 47, 493-503.
Peus, C., Braun, S., & Knipfer, K. (2015). On becoming a leader in Asia and America: Empirical evidence from women managers. Leadership Quarterly, 26, 55-67.
Pio, E., & Syed, J. (2013). Guest Editorial: our bodies, our minds, our men: Working South Asian women. Gender in Management, 28(3), 140-150.
Pio, E. & Syed, J. (2014). Sacred activism through seva and khidmat: Contextualising management and organisations in South Asia. Journal of Management & Organization, 20(5), 1–15.
Power, C. (2011). India’s leading exports: CEOs. Time, 7(November), pp. B1-B4.
Scandura, T., & Dorfman, P. (2004). Leadership research in an international and cross-cultural context. Leadership Quarterly, 15(2), 277-307.
Schuh, S. C., Hernandez Bark, A.S., Van Quaquebeke, N., Hossiep, R., Frieg, P., & Van Dick, R. (2014). Gender differences in leadership role occupancy: The mediating role of power motivation. Journal of Business Ethics, 120(3), 363-379.
Shields, S. A. (2008). Gender- an intersectionality perspective. Sex Roles, 59, 301.
Spisak, B.R., Grabo, A.E., Arvey, R.D., & van Vugt, M. (2014). The age of exploration and exploitation: Younger-looking leaders endorsed for change and older-looking leaders endorsed for stability. Leadership Quarterly, 25, 805-816.
Steers, R.M., Sanchez-Runde, C., & Nardon, L. (2012). Leadership in a global context: New directions in research and theory development. Journal of World Business, 47, 479-482.
Stinchombe, A. (2002). New sociological microfoundations for organizational theory: a postscript. In M. Lounsbury & M. Ventresca (Eds.). Research in sociology of organizations: social structures and organizations revisited. Oxford: JAI Press.
Syed, J. & Murray, P. (2008). A cultural feminist approach towards managing diversity in top management teams. Equality, Diversity and Inclusion, 27(5), 413-432.
The Wall Street Journal. (2015). China readies US$ 46 billion for Pakistan trade route. Available at http://www.wsj.com/articles/china-to-unveil-billions-of-dollars-in-pakistan-investment-1429214705 Last accessed Aug 28, 2015.
Vinkenburg, C. J., van Engen, M. L., Eagly, A. H., & Johannesen-Schmidt, M. C. (2011). An exploration of stereotypical beliefs about leadership styles: Is transformational leadership a route to women’s promotion? The Leadership Quarterly, 22, 10-21.
Youssef, C.M., & Luthans, F. (2012). Positive global leadership. Journal of World Business, 47, 539-547.
Dr. Munoz is discussing with a major academic publisher to edit a book titled “Geopolitics of Technology: Concepts and Cases." Gathering academics, scholars, and thought leaders from around the world to provide their perspectives on the geopolitics of technology.
This book project is very relevant to the AIB community for the following reasons:
- it will take on a global theme
- it underscores the importance of technology in today’s global business environment
- it promotes the collaboration of scholars across countries
- it provides an opportunity for scholars and researchers to showcase their work to a global audience
- it helps advance the understanding of the challenges and opportunities relating to the geopolitics of technology
The convergence of geopolitics and technology is reshaping organizations and impacting economies worldwide. Drawing from contributors from different countries, the book aims to be a key resource on the geopolitics of technology. The intended audience will be academics, corporate leaders, entrepreneurs, government leaders, consultants and policy makers worldwide.
Potential chapter topics are shown below:
Introduction
- Understanding the Geopolitics of Technology - The introduction chapter will define the term geopolitics of technology and will discuss key factors affecting it. It will highlight the contemporary geopolitical and technology landscape and will feature statistics and research literature. Overview of the current challenges and opportunities will be discussed. The book structure and content will be presented.
Asia-Pacific
- Technology Geopolitics: China - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: India - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: Australia and New Zealand - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: Japan - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
North America
- Technology Geopolitics: USA - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: Canada - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
Europe
- Technology Geopolitics: UK - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: Germany - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: Russia - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary geopolitics of technology in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: France - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the country and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
Latin America
- Technology Geopolitics: Latin America or a country in Latin America - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in Latin America or a country in Latin America and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
Middle East and Africa
- Technology Geopolitics: Middle East or a country in the Middle East - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in the Middle East or a country in the Middle East and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
- Technology Geopolitics: Africa or a country in Africa - The chapter will shed light on the contemporary technology geopolitics in Africa or a country in Africa and its implications. Research will be discussed along with relevant examples. Key considerations and recommendations will be offered.
Conclusion
- Geopolitics of Technology: Implications and Future Considerations - The chapter will highlight key considerations and the future implications relating to the practice of geopolitics of technology.
Proposals on topics outside of the above list will be accepted. The list of countries mentioned above are just suggestions. There are several other countries not mentioned above that play a large and important role in the geopolitics of technology. Also, there are many other factors, angles and issues relating to technology geopolitics that need to be explored and considered in its practice. New ideas are welcome. The book structure may change depending on the accepted chapter contributions. A review team will assist in determining the best structure and chapter contributions for the book.
Chapter contributors will have over a year to complete their chapters. Final chapter due date will be May 15, 2026.
If interested in contributing a chapter, kindly submit the following via email to jmunoz@millikin.edu in one MS Word file on or before August 15, 2024:
- Proposed title from the list of chapters above or an alternative topic
- 3 sentence abstract
- 3 sentence bio of chapter contributor(s)
Globalization affects people, organizations, nations, and regions. It exerts strong impacts on the driving forces and business landscape, creating and changing strategic opportunities and pressures for economic development, growth, employment, and sustainability. East Central Europe (ECE), the Baltics, and Russia play an increasingly important role in the European region both as emerging markets and competitive players. In contrast to Western European nations and business entities, ECE, the Baltics, and Russia receive more limited and sporadic coverage in business literature. The changing dynamics in the European region and beyond, the unfolding political-economic challenges across the European Union, as well as the rising global power of emerging economic powers such as Brazil, China, India, Russia, and others require knowledge, skills, and methodological platforms inducing strategies and operations in the new and ever changing business landscape. In turn, this facilitates the need for strategic competitive analysis on the national, regional, and company levels. The proposed book strives to contribute to the body of knowledge addressing and connecting these issues into the integrative comparative regional context.
Mission
This book will present a comparative, competitive geo-regional cross-country analysis of ECE, the Baltics, and Russia: implications for international business.
Objectives
o Analyze regional and national business competitiveness of ECE, the Baltics (two emerging European regions) and Russia (a major strategic player in the Commonwealth of Independent States - CIS).
o Contrast and compare ECE, the Baltics, and Russia in geo-regional and national strategic competitive context.
o Explore key strategic strengths, core competencies, weaknesses in a comparative strategic context.
o Identify key business trends, drivers, and dynamics on the national level across ECE, the Baltics, and Russia.
o Examine patterns and trends in regional trade and foreign investment.
Scholarly Value, Potential Contribution/Impact, and Purpose Increasingly powerful forces of globalization sharpen global and geo-regional business competitiveness and political-economic interdependence. They critically impact socio-economic development, job creation, and other strategic priorities at the regional, national, and company levels. The proposed book explores scholarly frontiers and applications in a strategic business study of emerging European regions: ECE, Baltics, and Russia. The book discusses subject issues in a comparative integrative perspective.
Target Audience
This book is designated for scholars, professionals, managers, government agencies, universities, think tanks, and other individuals, organizations, and institutions interested in a deeper understanding of the geo-regional strategic business dynamics and landscape involving ECE, the Baltics, and Russia. More specifically, the book explores political-economic environment and competitiveness, and provides insights on attractiveness, strategic benefits, costs, and risks of doing business in these regions of Europe in a comparative context.
Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. GLOBALIZATION, SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT, AND COMPETITIVENESS: GLOBAL CONCEPTS, TRENDS, DRIVERS, DYNAMICS, AND GEO-REGIONAL IMPLICATIONS o Competitiveness in the context of globalization o Implications of competitiveness in the regional context: ECE, Baltics, Russia
2. SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT AND COMPETITIVENESS: REGIONAL VIEW o Regional potential for socio-economic development, core competencies, and competitive advantages and disadvantages in the global and geo-regional context o Regional trends, drivers, and dynamics in socio-economic development and
competitiveness: comparative view (competing/comparator geo-regions)
--> EAST CENTRAL EUROPEAN (ECE) REGION
-->BALTIC REGION
-->RUSSIA
3. SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT AND COMPETITIVENESS: NATIONAL VIEW (list of countries -tentative) Suggested issues to be covered for each country:
National potential for socio-economic development, core competencies, and competitive advantages and disadvantages in the regional context a. Key global business rankings (competitiveness cost of doing business, trade, FDI, risks, etc.) b. Trends, drivers, and dynamics in socio-economic development and competitiveness: comparative view c. Key economic sectors/industries, their dynamics, current state, and future outlook d.
Environment, climate, profile, and patterns in international business (trade, FDI) e. Competitive SWOT analysis (Strengths, Weakness, Opportunities, Threats) f. Best corporate practices in competitiveness .
Domestic forms . Foreign-based/international firms g. Cases/other materials illustrating best practices and lessons in business competitiveness and developments h. Main country-specific sources of information and consulting assistance in doing business (domestic government, international organizations, foreign government, non-profit organizations and think tanks, private consultancies)
EAST CENTRAL EUROPE
o Bulgaria
o Czech Republic
o Poland
o Hungary
o Romania
o Ukraine
BALTIC COUNTRIES
o Estonia
o Latvia
o Lithuania
RUSSIA
o Countrywide
o Leading economic regions
Submission Procedure and Format
Contributors are invited to submit on or before April 30, 2013, a 2-3 page chapter proposal clearly explaining the mission, priorities, structure, and format of his/her proposed chapter. Authors of accepted proposals will be notified by May 15, 2013 about the status of their proposals and sent chapter guidelines. Full chapters (written in English under American Psychological Association style, approximately 8,000 words each) are expected to be submitted by August 30, 2013. All submitted chapters are subject to double blind reviews. Contributors may also be requested to serve as reviewers for this project.
Publisher
This book
(http://www.igi-global.com/publish/call-for-papers/call-details/884) is scheduled to be published by IGI Global (formerly Idea Group Inc.), publisher of the "Information Science Reference" (formerly Idea Group Reference), "Medical Information Science Reference," and "IGI Publishing"
imprints. For additional information regarding the publisher, please visit www.igi-global.com<http://www.igi-global.com>. This publication is anticipated to be released in 2014.
Important Deadlines:
Chapter proposal submission: on or before April 30, 2013 Chapter proposal acceptance notification: May 15, 2013 Full chapter submission: August 30,
2013 Review Process: August 30 - October 15, 2013 Review Results to Authors:
October 30, 2013 Revised Chapter Submission: November 30, 2013 Final Acceptance Notifications: December 30, 2013 Submission of Final Chapters:
January 15, 2014 Book publication: 2014 Inquiries and submissions can be forwarded electronically (Word document):
Dr. Anatoly Zhuplev
Professor. International Business and Entrepreneurship
Hilton Center for Business Loyola Marymount University
1 LMU Drive, MS 8385
Los Angeles, California 90045-2659
U.S.A.
E: azhuplev@lmu.edu<mailto:azhuplev@lmu.edu> Tel: 310. 338 7414 Fax:
310. 338 3000
http://cba.lmu.edu/facultyresearch/facultylist/zhuplev.htm
What makes some organizations more competitive than others in the global marketplace? Is the "global competitiveness" of these organizations driven by structure, strategy, tactics, implementation, opportunities, or, very likely, a combination of one of more of these potential components?
Nowadays, business success depends on expanding the global reach of the organization. Marketing's contribution to the scholarship about what makes some organizations globally competitive is important and unique. In a global marketplace, which is converging in some customer needs and wants and market segments, but also diverging in others, marketing has an opportunity to be very influential in scholarship and practice. A number of articles and also special issues have tackled various topics related to the "competitiveness" theme.
The Special Issue on Global Competitiveness of the Journal of International Marketing aims to extend this literature by publishing a set of articles that will shed greater insights into how marketing can help describe, explain, and predict issues within the scope of organizations being globally competitive. In global markets, there is greater divergence in environmental imperatives and different sets of competitors are typically present. Additionally, it is more common for organizations to have simultaneous competitive and cooperative relationships and/or relationships with multiple partners, who could potentially be direct adversaries to each other. The Special Issue specifically targets "marketing strategy" and "strategic marketing" topics, but with a core focus on global competitiveness.
To address these strategy issues, the Journal of International Marketing is issuing a call for papers for the purpose of advancing international marketing knowledge on firm and SBU-level global competitiveness. In terms of content, papers may be either conceptual or empirical in nature and pursue either theory-building or theory-testing. Topics include (but are not limited to) innovation, entrepreneurship, culture, social, human, and relational capital, knowledge and learning, branding, CSR and sustainability, and internationalization in relation to global competiveness. In terms of methodology, papers may be based on empirical techniques (e.g., case, survey, archival research) or on modeling techniques (i.e., optimization or simulation). Papers that integrate multiple perspectives and/or multiple methodologies are especially encouraged.
Papers targeting the Special Issue should be submitted using the JIM submission system and will also undergo the same review process as regularly submitted papers. The deadline for submission is June 27, 2016. Questions pertaining to the Special Issue should be directed to:
Special Issue Editors:
G. Tomas M. Hult, Ph.D.
Professor and Byington Endowed Chair
Director, International Business Center
Broad College of Business
Michigan State University
645 North Shaw Lane, Room 7
East Lansing, MI 48823-1122
U.S.A.
T: + 1- 517-353-4336
E: hult@msu.edu
and
Professor Constantine S. Katsikeas
Editor-in-Chief, Journal of International Marketing
Associate Dean (Faculty)
Chair of the Marketing Division
Arnold Ziff Endowed Research Chair in Marketing & International Management
Leeds University Business School
Maurice Keyworth Building
University of Leeds
Leeds LS2 9JT
U.K.
T: +44-(0)-113-343-2624
Submission to: timothy.coombs@tamu.edu and dan.laufer@vuw.ac.nz
1. Purpose of Special Issue
Examples of crises involving multinationals can be found in the media around the world on a regular basis. Examples of high profile crises involving multinationals include the disappearance of Malaysia Airlines Flight 370, the oil spill in the Gulf by BP, sudden acceleration in Toyota cars, and people becoming seriously ill after using Vioxx, a prescription drug manufactured by the American multinational Merck.
Despite the importance of Crisis Management to both academicians and practitioners, only recently have business journals devoted special issues to the topic (Laufer, 2015), and none to our knowledge in the area of global crisis management.
Crisis Management is defined as “a set of factors designed to combat crises and to lessen the actual damage inflicted by a crisis” (Coombs, 2015). Drawing from the literature in emergency preparedness, crisis management involves four interrelated factors: Prevention, preparation, response and revision (Coombs, 2015). These factors are incorporated in a commonly used three-stage approach describing Crisis Management as involving three phases. The pre-crisis phase (prevention and preparation), the crisis phase (response), and the post-crisis phase (learning and revision).
2. Examples of research themes and questions for the Special Issue
Whereas research has been conducted in all three phases of Crisis Management, most of the research is in the crisis phase and very little has been examined in the international context. This special issue is devoted to this area, and in particular we encourage submission of cross-cultural papers examining how the practice of Crisis Management differs across countries. Both theoretical and empirical submissions are welcome. The empirical studies can use quantitative or qualitative methods. The following list of themes and questions are meant to be illustrative, not exhaustive, and to provide an indication of topics we are interested in for this Special Issue.
- Risk Assessment and Diagnosing Crisis Vulnerabilities: Do stakeholders assess risk differently across countries? What cultural factors influence risk assessment?
- Impact of Crises on Stakeholder Relationships (Employees, Customers, the Media, Shareholders): Do stakeholders react differently to crises across countries? What cultural factors influence the different reactions?
- Communications During Crises: Do stakeholders react differently to corporate communication strategies across countries? What cultural factors influence the different reactions? Which communication strategies are most effective in a global context?
- Managing Global Crises: How does a global crisis differ from a localized one? What factors need to be considered by companies in responding to a global crisis?
- The Role of Corporate Reputation in a Crisis: What role does corporate reputation play in a global crisis? What is the impact of a strong corporate reputation during a global crisis. Is it more or less effective in certain cross-cultural contexts? How is corporate reputation impacted by a crisis? Is it more or less adversely impacted in certain countries? What cultural factors influence the extent of reputational harm?
- Organizational Learning & Crises: Are employees in certain countries more or less receptive to learning from a crisis, and open to organizational change? What cultural factors facilitate organizational changes following a crisis?
3. Submission Instructions
The deadline for submission of manuscripts is October 31, 2016. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with Journal of International Management’s Style Guide for Authors: http://sbm.temple.edu/jim/authors.html. Manuscripts should be electronically submitted to the Guest editors at timothy.coombs@tamu.edu and dan.laufer@vuw.ac.nz. All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at JIM.
4. Contact details
Please direct any questions regarding the Special Issue to one of the guest editors.
- Timothy Coombs (timothy.coombs@tamu.edu)
- Daniel Laufer (dan.laufer@vuw.ac.nz)
References
Coombs, W. T. 2015. Ongoing Crisis Communication (4th ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage
Laufer, D. 2015. Emerging Issues in Crisis Management. Business Horizons 2015 Vol 58 (2): 137-139.
Introduction
This Special Issue is motivated by and in memory of John H. Dunning (Professor Emeritus, University of Reading and Rutgers University). Professor Dunning was one of the founders of the modern field of international business (IB) research, with a scholarly oeuvre spanning a 50-year period. His last public message, sent to the Academy of International Business Fellows just before he passed away on January 29, 2009, recommended that JIBS prepare a Special Issue devoted to "the various and unique causes and implications of the current world wide credit crunch and economic slow down; and what might be done to avoid this happening again." He suggested that, "Articles might range from viewing the slowdown in an historical context, to considering a wholesale reconfiguration of international financial organisation, to the need for a moral upgrading of the institutions of global capitalism." His suggestion was triggered by the "last two years [which] have brought about the most amazing chain of events in the global market place that I can remember in my lifetime".
Special Issue Theme
This Call for Papers announces a Special Issue, designed around Dunning's theme, and specifically focused on insights from IB research into the current crisis of the global market economy. The global financial crisis, which struck most of the world's national and regional economic systems in 2008, has led to calls for further reflection on the economizing and value creating properties of both the micro-level and macro-level institutions of capitalism at the heart of this economic crisis. Moreover, the current crisis was preceded by earlier global financial crises, such as the 1997 Asian currency crisis, from which one might draw useful lessons for the current crisis.
John Dunning has undoubtedly been the most important intellectual force in IB research during the past half century. His eclectic paradigm represents the core of modern IB theory and provides the intellectual foundation for much of the research published in JIBS. The eclectic paradigm builds upon three interrelated components: (1) Ownership (or firm-specific) advantages, reflecting the resource-based view (RBV) related part of the framework. (2) Location advantages, reflecting the main variables addressed by international economics, political science and modern institutional theory. (3) Internalization advantages, using Coasean foundations to explain the existence and governance of MNEs, i.e., firms with value adding activities in two or more countries. Dunning's joint focus on firm-level resources, location characteristics (including macro-level institutions) and internalization/de-internalization challenges provides the scholarly basis for contemporary analysis of international business. In terms of Dunning's eclectic paradigm, eight research questions are proposed for this Special Issue:
1. Does MNE activity contribute to the severity of global economic crises or does the multinational character of many firms, on the contrary, allow mitigating some of the worst effects in terms of reducing firm bankruptcies, lay-offs, capital destruction, etc.? For example, to the extent that domestic MNE ownership advantages have been hollowed out because of poor management (as in financial services and automobiles), does this lead to societal spillover effects across borders and across large business networks? Alternatively, does the existence of large, well-run foreign MNEs allow the acquisition, absorption and redeployment across borders of valuable knowledge assets that have been poorly managed?
2. Should MNEs reassess the relative attractiveness of alternative locations for international business generally, and foreign direct investment specifically, depending on the severity of global economic crises and the appropriateness of policy responses in these locations? For example, a number of economic and financial governance mechanisms, including the US capital market, have been described as best practice, created location advantages, to be emulated by other countries. Here, elements such as stringent disclosure rules, sophisticated financial accounting controls, relative absence of excessive government regulation impeding innovation and more generally the resilience and adaptation capability of the governance mechanisms involved, have been viewed as instrumental to a macro-level platform for firm-level success. However, it now appears that the true nature of many of these created location advantages has been misunderstood, and that many economic actors have wrongly assessed the relative attractiveness and risks associated with seemingly optimal locations.
3. How do global economic/financial crises affect the internalization/de-internalization calculus of firms operating across borders (e.g., entry mode choices), especially in terms of de-internalizing activities previously conducted inside the firm, so as to improve flexibility and facilitate internal network control? The effects of economic and technological changes, as well as management innovations, on optimal internalization levels are well understood in the IB field, as are the implications of alternative policy regimes such as patent protection systems, bilateral and regional trading systems, international accounting standards, etc. However, the impact of a "black swan" catastrophic event on firm-level boundaries, especially in the international sphere, deserves special attention if it triggers needs for massive resource re-combinations by MNEs, especially those with international networks.
4. How do global economic crises affect government, public and managerial perceptions of the role of IB and MNEs in the world economy? How do global crises affect MNE-state relations? Are they more likely to be characterized by Dunning's optimistic, cooperative perspective or Vernon's pessimistic, conflictual perspective? Does a global economic crisis increase the legitimacy of stakeholder management models found in firms outside the Anglo-Saxon world, rather than a shareholder management approach? Is there a renewed appreciation for micro-level governance models built on far-reaching cooperation between business firms and financial institutions, and between the firm and its workforce? Does the global crisis trigger a reflection in large MNEs on their moral obligations, if any, vis-à-vis hard-hit local communities abroad where operations must be closed or downsized?
5. How do global crises affect corporate political (non-market) strategies? What roles do firms engaged in international business play when faced with contradictory demands for increased protectionism and improved regional/multilateral cooperation, triggered by a global or regional economic crisis? Any global crisis upsets existing competitive positions and trajectories, with some firms becoming "winners" and others "losers". Which types of firms are more likely to favor protectionism versus increased policy coordination at the regional and multilateral levels? The related question is how these firms will engage in the policy debate (e.g., firm-level versus industry-level lobbying, active intervention versus funding external actors, focus on domestic governments versus international organizations, etc.). How do MNEs shift the balance between their market and non-market-based strategies in response to global crises?
6. How are the organization and management of the multinational enterprise affected by global economic crises? How are intrafirm and interfirm innovation and knowledge flows affected? Do global economic crises encourage or discourage M&As and international strategic alliances? Are global supply chains being redesigned as a result of these crises? How do global economic crises affect MNE decisions such as the locus of R&D and innovation (centralized/decentralized, location), human resources management (e.g., revisiting the use of expatriates, trade-offs on global retrenchment decisions) and international marketing (e.g., revisiting standardization/customization and cutting or refocusing long-term branding efforts) decisions? Do global crises encourage "wait-and-see", early mover or faster exit strategies?
7. Since many global economic crises are launched by financial and/or currency crises (e.g., the 1997 Asian currency crisis), of particular interest are the international financial implications of global economic crises, at the firm, country and international levels. From a firm-level perspective, how is the international finance function within firms affected (e.g., exchange rate management; management of various exposure types; financial structure decisions; sourcing of financial resources, including access to credit and capital markets; comparative corporate governance issues from a finance perspective)? From a national and supra-national perspective, what are the implications for the banking, financing, insurance and accounting systems supporting international trade and investment (both portfolio and foreign direct investment), as well as for international financial markets in general and in emerging economies in particular?
8. From a macro-level perspective, how do global economic crises affect the national and supra-national institutions of capitalism? What roles are played by public international institutions (e.g., the IMF, World Bank, WTO), regulating and rating agencies that affect international transaction (e.g., BIS, IASB, Moody's), and international agreements (e.g., double tax treaties, bilateral investment treaties, codes of conduct)? All economic actors engaged in international business are affected by a variety of macro-level institutions of capitalism, many of these representing exogenous parameters for these actors. Each global economic crisis leads to societal debate on the efficiency, effectiveness and distributive equity impacts of these macro-level institutions, thereby potentially triggering large-scale governance redesign and a new umbrella for micro-level IB transactions. Is there a need for a "wholesale reconfiguration of international financial organisation" or for a "moral upgrading of the institutions of global capitalism", as suggested by Professor John Dunning?
Building upon the above, as IB scholars, we are particularly interested in how the current crisis of the global market economy affects international business through its impact on MNEs, including the entire range of internationally active firms, from entrepreneurial start-ups to the
largest, global companies. We are equally interested in new forms of business-government interaction in the context of international policy coordination as well as renewed protectionism. Finally, we also want to gain new insight on changes in the macro-level institutions of capitalism that affect IB transactions. Here, we welcome creative thinking on the design of new, macro-level institutions aimed to prevent future economic crises. From a conceptual perspective, we do expect scholars submitting papers to understand the foundations of modern international business theory, as laid out by Professor Dunning, but do invite creative perspectives informed by
any relevant scholarly discipline. Papers may address the antecedents or consequences of global economic/financial crises for international business, the nature of crises as they unfold internationally, and/or the role of international firms and markets in these crises, from both theoretical and empirical viewpoints. Papers may also examine global economic crises and consequences for firms from a comparative institutional or cultural perspective. Moreover, papers may address policy responses to such crises and formulate policy reforms of institutions and markets moving forward based on sound theories and empirics.
The Special Issue Editors have intentionally kept the above list of suggested topics short so as to stimulate creativity and thereby encourage prospective authors to adopt a variety of perspectives in approaching this subject. Key is that all submissions on global economic crises are viewed from an IB perspective. All submissions must fit within the domain statement of the journal and follow the JIBS policy statements including the Statement of Editorial Policy, Information for Contributors, Style Guide and Code of Ethics; see http://www.jibs.net.
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this Special Issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between January 4 and January 29, 2010, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. Please select the option from the special issue drop-down menu in Manuscript Central that identifies your paper as a submission for the "Global Economic Crises and International Business" Special Issue, and include the words "Global Economic Crises and IB Special Issue Submission" on your title page. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the same norms and processes. As manuscripts are accepted for publication, they will be posted in the Advance Online Publication system on http://www.jibs.net.
For more information about this Call for Papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
Call for Proposals
Advances in International Management 2016 Volume:
Global Entrepreneurship: Past, Present & Future
Editors
Timothy Devinney (University of Leeds)
Gideon Markman (Colorado State University)
Torben Pedersen (Bocconi University)
Laszlo Tihanyi (Texas A&M University)
The role that small- and medium-sized enterprises play in the economic development and growth of cities, regions and nations has been an increasing subject of debate and study for the last half century. Concomitant with the concern with the larger social and economic impact of these firms there has been interest in the factors that lead to their formation, growth, and decline. We know that startups face daunting economic factors that result in their high failure rates. These risks are exacerbated by the economic developments over the last half century that have created conditions where the economic pressures facing small and medium sized firms have become increasingly global. Hence, it is critical that such firms account for how they can compete at larger scale more quickly and do so in a geographically wider domain. In addition, the increasing global nature of competition means that entrepreneurs need to develop business models that can thrive not just in their local markets, but also adapt to a variety of cultures, social, and economic ecosystems that might be quite different. In short, while the complexity of building a global startup and expanding a small- and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) globally are well appreciated, our understanding of these complexities remains quite limited.
The 2016 volume of the Advances in International Management—the most-downloaded annual scholarly publications in business and management—will focus on the opportunities and challenges that entrepreneurs and small- and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) face in a world of global competitions. We have outlined four goals for this volume. First, we would like to provide an overview of successful strategies that global entrepreneurs and SMEs have employed that have allowed them to establish regional and international footprints. Second, we wish to examine how local resources, culture and managerial capabilities have contributed to startups’ global success (or the lack thereof). Third, we would like to study the interactions between SMEs and multinational enterprises (MNEs) both at the level of MNEs as incubators for entrepreneurial ventures and as competitors to those ventures. Fourth, we aim to publish a collection of chapters with original, even edgy ideas and theoretical advances that will provide the foundation for future doctoral dissertations and other research projects on international entrepreneurship.
We hope the volume will provide a forum for thought-provoking empirical research, theoretical ideas, discussions, and reviews owing to its format and our review process. We are open to theoretical papers and empirical submissions using different methodological approaches and diverse macro and micro perspectives.
Submission Information
- Authors should submit an electronic copy of their proposal (5 single-spaced pages) to the Editors of the volume (Adv.Intl.Mgt@gmail.com) by July 1, 2015. Our suggestion is to not submit your abstract before 1 June, as we will not be examining them in sequence.
- Workshop for abstracts accepted for consideration: 7-8 October 2015 (immediately following the SMS Conference). The workshop will be held in Denver.
- Submission deadline for full papers: November 15, 2015.
- Submission deadline for revised papers: February 10, 2016.
- Publication date of volume: July 1, 2016.
The Advances in International Management (AIM) is a research annual devoted to advancing the cross-border study of organizations and management practices from a global, regional, or comparative perspective, with emphasis on interdisciplinary inquiry. Information on past AIM volumes and contributors can be found at the following link:
Handbook of Research on Global Fashion Management and Merchandising
A book edited by Alessandra Vecchi, (London College of Fashion, U.K.) Chitra Buckley, (London College of Fashion, U.K.)
To be published by IGI Global: http://bit.ly/1xAyrPO
For release in the Advances in Logistics, Operations, and Management Science (ALOMS)
Book Series ISSN: 2327-350X
Propose a chapter for this book The Advances in Logistics, Operations, and Management Science (ALOMS) Book Series provides a collection of reference publications on the current trends, applications, theories, and practices in the management science field. Providing relevant and current research, this series and its individual publications would be useful for academics, researchers, scholars, and practitioners interested in improving decision making models and business functions. Introduction The Research Handbook of Fashion Management provides an edited collection of chapters on grounds theories, application and practices the field of management in the fashion sector. Providing relevant and current research, this publication would be useful for academic, researchers, scholars, and practitioners interested in improving their understanding of management within the context of Globalization in a highly volatile and creative environment.
Fashion management is multi-faceted discipline that within the context of Globalization finds itself at the intersection of the following related fields: Fashion Entrepreneurship, Operations Management, Fashion Marketing and International Business. Normally these fields constitute sparse bodies of knowledge within Fashion Management, however because of the heightened complexity of the current business environment they are becoming more and more complementary. As such an in-depth understanding of their interplay is not only necessary but it could also provide a useful interpretative lens to fully appreciate the value of Fashion management and its business practices in an era of Globalization. As global fashion markets are becoming increasingly complex and their dynamics more and more interconnected, a broader understanding of fashion management is essential to anticipate unexpected change and to capitalize on emerging fashion business practices. This research handbook will focus on various dimensions of managing fashion businesses that are interrelated and complementary in a global context.
Objective of the Book
This research handbook looks to discuss Fashion Management research in the following related fields: Fashion entrepreneurship, Operations Management, Fashion marketing and International business. The handbook covers various sub-themes including visionary leadership, fashion technology, business model development, sourcing and supply chain management, operations management in fast fashion and slow fashion businesses, product innovation management, fashion brand management, digital strategies in the fashion industry, experiential marketing and branding in fashion and the internationalization of fashion firms.
Target Audience
The target audience of the research handbook will be a vast array of fashion management practitioners, academics and researchers who have a keen interest in the ever-changing dynamics of the fashion industry. The book would also be suitable to be used as a teaching aid in a variety of courses in different disciplines both at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Fashion management in a global perspective
- The European fashion industry and the appeal of its heritage
- Fashion entrepreneurship
- Visionary leadership
- Financial management
- Fashion-technology
- Business model development
- Business incubation in the fashion industry
- Operations management in the fashion industry
- Fast fashion and Slow fashion
- Sourcing and supply chain management in fashion
- Product innovation management
- Managing HR in fashion firms
- The importance of CRM
- Fashion buying and merchandising
- Fashion marketing
- Digital strategies in the fashion industry
- The importance of CSR
- Fashion brand management
- Experiential marketing and branding in the fashion industry
- The internationalization of fashion firms
- Cross-cultural marketing
- The emerging markets
- Counterfeiting, IPR and legal issues
- The global fashion industry and its emerging dynamics
Submission Procedure
Both researchers and practitioners are invited to submit a chapter proposal of 1,000-2,000 words clearly explaining the mission and concerns of their proposed chapter by February 28th, 2015. Submissions should be made through the web link at the bottom of this page. Authors of accepted proposals will be notified by April 30, 20155 about the status of their proposals and sent chapter outlines. Full chapters are expected to be submitted by June 30, 2015. All submitted chapters will be reviewed on a double-blind review basis. Contributors may also be requested to serve as reviewers for the research handbook.
Submit a chapter
All proposals should be submitted through the link at the bottom of this page.
Publisher
This book is scheduled to be published by IGI Global (formerly Idea Group Inc.), an international academic publisher of the “Information Science Reference” (formerly Idea Group Reference), “Medical Information Science Reference,” “Business Science Reference,” and “Engineering Science Reference” imprints. IGI Global specializes in publishing reference books, scholarly journals, and electronic databases featuring academic research on a variety of innovative topic areas including, but not limited to, education, social science, medicine and healthcare, business and management, information science and technology, engineering, public administration, library and information science, media and communication studies, and environmental science. For additional information regarding the publisher, please visit www.igi-global.com. This publication is anticipated to be released in 2016.
Important Dates
February 28, 2015: Proposal Submission Deadline
April 30, 2015: Notification of accepted proposals
June 30, 2015: Full Chapter Submission
August 30, 2015: Review Results to Authors
September 30, 2015: Revised Chapter Submission
October 15, 2015: Final Acceptance Notifications
Inquiries can be forwarded to Chitra Buckley Graduate School, London College of Fashion, U.K. Tel: +44 (0)207 514 7578, +44 (0) 7807 041383 Email: c.buckley@fashion.arts.ac.uk, chitra.buckley@wanadoo.fr Dr. Alessandra Vecchi Graduate School, London College of Fashion, U.K. Tel: +39 338 9418941 Email: a.vecchi@fashion.arts.ac.uk, alessandra.vecchi@unibo.it
Propose a chapter for this book To find related content in this research area, visit InfoSci®-OnDemand: Download Premium Research Papers http://www.igi-global.com/infosci-ondemand/search/
Global marketing managers are at the heart of effective strategy execution. Unfortunately, limited research exists to understand the skills, knowledge and strategies that make managers effective, most notably as they face new challenges brought forth by the changing global economy.
The global economic crisis has highlighted the importance of managerial skills in re-balancing the global economy. For example, how does one pursue increased output in consumption-driven economies coupled with the pursuit of consumption stimulation in export-oriented economies. These changes require new skills, knowledge and roles of global marketing managers.
Similarly, the changes in the global economy may create a need to rethink managerial approaches to issues such as risk, profit, competition, and ownership For instance, (1) whereas managers were traditionally willing to trade-off risk for return, in today’s global economy managers may work to avoid risk regardless of return, (2) how have global marketing managers re-adjusted strategies as profits are exposed to selective taxation? (3) how have global marketing managers adjusted newly evolving competitive conditions? and (4) how do global marketing managers adapt strategies to compete against new, government directed competitors?
Manuscripts may be conceptual or empirical. All manuscripts should have direct practitioner relevance.
Topics could include, but are not limited to:
- Global marketing manager strategies for assessing and addressing the re-balancing of the global economy
- Global marketing manager efforts for cross-boarder strategy integration in relation to the re-balancing of the global economy
- Global marketing manager employment of technology for coordinating cross-country strategies in changing times
- The changing role and responsibilities of global marketing managers
- Global marketing manager perspectives and approaches to the re-positioning of issues in the new global economy (i.e., risk, profit, competition and ownership)
- Identification of the skills making global marketing managers effective
- Psychological characteristics of effective global marketing managers in changing times
- Judgment and decision making aspects of global marketing managers
- Strategies for developing and retaining effective global marketing managers
- The influence of the organization on the effectiveness of global marketing managers
- Executive Insight articles pertaining to global marketing managersCase studies of the challenges faced by global marketing managers and strategies for effectively overcoming these challenges
Deadline for Submission: February 11, 2011.
Guidelines for the Journal of International Marketing can be found at: http://www.marketingpower.com/jim.
Manuscripts should be submitted at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ama_jim.
About the Journal: Abstracting/Indexing/Ranking
• SCImago Journal Rank; Scopus; EBSCOhost, ProQuest; ABI/INFORM Complete
• ABS UK Academic Journal Ranking Guide (2); ABDC Journal Ranking List (B)
• Working towards Social Sciences Citation Index
Aims and Scope of the Issue
We invite scholars to submit papers for a special issue of International Studies of Management & Organization (ISMO). The focus of the special issue is on “Global Networks and Innovation in China.” The issue aims to contribute to the literature on global network management, and innovation in emerging economies.
As an emerging economy, China is quickly rising up the global ranks in a number of intellectual property-heavy sectors, with an increasing number of R&D centers, including both domestic and foreign-invested ones. Prime Minister Keqiang Li calls for “popular entrepreneurship and innovation” to achieve a “better-quality, more efficient, upgraded economy” (Two sessions of the government work report 2015). In the same year, Chinese government initiated “the Belt and Road” policy to further encourage Chinese firms to strengthen their network worldwide. These two policies facilitate the domestic and foreign-invested innovation, respectively.
Innovation is a key determinant for firm performance (Hamilton 1982; Hauser et al. 2006) and plays a key role in the firm survival and development (De Dreu 2006). In China’s transitional economy, where ongoing institutional transitions are shaping the competition landscape, there are a range of uncertainties that firms need to buffer against and/or eliminate (Bao, Chen and Zhou 2012; Zhou and Li 2012). Undoubtedly, innovation is an effective strategy for local firms wishing to increase their domestic and international competitiveness, and for China to survive amid global competition (Li and Atuahene-Gima 2001; Tellis et al. 2009). Institutional and market environment can both affect the effectiveness of innovation in China (Gao, Gao, Zhou and Huang 2015).
Multinational corporations (MNCs) have largely invested in R&D in China and their R&D centers diffuse knowledge to both local and international markets (Deng 2003; Fan 2006). From the ownership advantage theory, MNCs transfer advanced proprietary technology, immobile strategic assets (e.g., brands, local distribution networks) and other capabilities to their foreign subsidiaries (Li and Zhong 2003; Warner et al. 2004; Zhang 2003). As their competitors, local firms also actively absorb knowledge, which is demonstrated and leaked by foreign firms, to develop their unique technology (Ju et al. 2013). Therefore, the innovation capabilities in Chinese firms, including Chinese subsidiaries and local firms, have been largely strengthened.
The aim of this issue is to encourage authors to investigate innovation in China, from both domestic and international perspectives. For example, in the context of China, the institutional development, market complexity, internal business network and external global network actively influence the innovation of local firms and subsidiaries. How do these factors affect innovation interactively? Also, there is a gap in knowledge on the differences among innovation of local firms, subsidiaries and MNCs, and how do they interplay to create new knowledge through managing resources and networks worldwide. This Call for Papers focuses on the following research questions: How and to what extent do Chinese firms make a balance between incremental and radical innovation? How do members in an innovation team work together? How do Chinese firms facilitate innovation collaborations with other firms? How do Chinese firms maintain creativity of employees and motivate collaboration among employees? How do subsidiaries balance between knowledge transferred from MNCs and absorbed from local environment? How do MNCs decide what types of knowledge to disseminate to subsidiaries in China?
The above-mentioned topics and questions are still underexplored in the context of China. We believe that this issue can significantly contribute to extending the existing knowledge on this subject, and provide new insights to scholars and practitioners. We prefer comparative papers for this issue.
These are some of the potential topics that we seek conceptual and empirical papers on:
- The effects of intuitional complexity, inadequacy and development on innovation in China
- Creativity, trust and interactions of team members in facilitating innovation in China
- Innovation process in internet and e-commerce industry in China
- Organizational structure and innovation in China
- The effects of political tie, business tie, and global network on innovation in China
- A resource-based view of innovation and firm performance in China
- A social network view of innovation and firm performance in China
- An organizational ecology view of innovation and firm performance in China
- A balance between knowledge transfer from MNCs and adoption from local environment for subsidiaries
- Co-optation between local firms and subsidiaries in China
- Critical aspects and risks of managing global networks for innovation in China
Timeline of the Publication process
Submission of full papers via E-mail: 28 February, 2017
Editorial Desk decision: 15 March, 2017
Review report communicated to authors: 30 May 2017
Submission of Revised-papers along with ‘Author Response Letter’: 1 September 2017
Final Submission of the complete issue to Journal Editors: 30 March 2018
Schedule of Online/Print Publication: 2018/2019
Submission of Papers
All submissions must satisfy the theme of the special issue. The papers should be relevant to theory testing/development, and/or managerial implications. Please submit your manuscripts via email to: ismodcinemnes@gmail.com
About the Guest Editors
Tian Wei is an associate professor in strategic management at the School of Management, Fudan University in China. She obtained her PhD from the University of Cambridge, United Kingdom. She has published in reputable international refereed journals such as International Business Review, Journal of International Management, and others. Her research focuses on value creation and value destruction of international acquisitions, knowledge transfer in international business, and internationalization of Chinese firms.
Maoliang Bu is an associate professor at School of Business, Nanjing University, and adjunct professor at Hopkins-Nanjing Center. His research is mainly on globalization and environmental sustainability. His papers are published in journals such as Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Comparative Economics, and others. He is the co-editor of “Globalization and the Environment of China” (Emerald, 2014). Maoliang is an Alexander von Humboldt Fellow. He has previously worked as a post-doctoral researcher at University of Goettingen, and as a visiting professor at University of Groningen and University of Gothenburg.
The ability of MNEs to attract, develop, manage and retain talent across its global network can be a source of competitive advantage (Collings & Mellahi, 2009; Tarique & Schuler, 2010). Talent management involves managing employee development in a global context and staffing the worldwide operations of the MNE (Collings, 2014; Sidani & Al Ariss, 2014).
Historically, expatriate assignments were for an extended period of time. However, the high cost associated with expatriate assignments has forced MNEs to use short-term international staffing arrangements (Collings, Scullion, & Morley, 2007; Reiche, Kraimer, & Harzing, 2011). These alternative arrangements include short-term commuter assignments and virtual assignments (Collings, et al., 2007; Dowling, Festing, & Engle, 2013). MNEs are now more focussed on developing and using the global talent pool rather than sending expatriates for specific tasks (Sparrow, Scullion, & Tarique, 2014).
For this volume, we invite chapters on issues relating to talent management in MNEs with an emphasis on global mobility from organizational, individual and contextual perspectives. From the organizational perspective, we are interested in topics related to the arrangement and management of various workforce patterns in the global operations of MNEs. We are also interested in exploring how expatriates develop their careers through international assignments (Bonache, Brewster, & Suutari, 2001; Dickmann & Harris, 2005). From a contextual perspective, issues related to talent management by MNEs in both developed and emerging economies are also of interest (Farndale, Scullion, & Sparrow, 2010).
We invite conceptual and empirical submissions that address the following topics (but are not limited to):
- What is the role of HR in implementing and facilitating global staffing and talent management in MNEs?
- What are the antecedents and outcomes of talent management and global staffing at individual, organizational and country level?
- How do contextual factors influence talent management and staffing in MNEs?
- What influences MNE global staffing choices with respect to parent country nationals (PCNs), third country nationals (TCNs) and host country nationals (HCNs)?
Submission Information:
Authors should submit an electronic copy of their chapter (up to 9,000 words in length) to the Guest Editors of the volume (ying-guo@hotmail.com).
Submission deadline for chapters: 1 September 2015
Submission deadline for revised chapters: 30 November 2015
The International Business and Management series applies a truly international perspective to the study of international business, with a special emphasis on management and marketing issues and aims to advance the frontiers of knowledge in this fast developing field. Further information on the International Business and Management Series can be found at: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/series/ibm
References:
Bonache, J., Brewster, C., & Suutari, V. (2001). Expatriation: A developing research agenda. Thunderbird International Business Review, 43, 3-20.
Collings, D. G. (2014). Integrating global mobility and global talent management: Exploring the challenges and strategic opportunities. Journal of World Business, 49, 253-261.
Collings, D. G., & Mellahi, K. (2009). Strategic talent management: A review and research agenda. Human Resource Management Review, 19, 304-313.
Collings, D. G., Scullion, H., & Morley, M. J. (2007). Changing patterns of global staffing in the multinational enterprise: challenges to the conventional expatriate assignment and emerging alternatives. Journal of World Business, 42, 198-213.
Dickmann, M., & Harris, H. (2005). Developing career capital for global careers: The role of international assignments. Journal of World Business, 40, 399-408.
Dowling, P., Festing, M., & Engle, A. (2013). International Human Resource Management (6th ed.). London: Cengage Learning.
Farndale, E., Scullion, H., & Sparrow, P. (2010). The role of the corporate HR function in global talent management. Journal of World Business, 45, 161-168.
Reiche, S. B., Kraimer, M. L., & Harzing, A.-W. (2011). Why do international assignees stay? An organizational embeddedness perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 42, 521-544.
Sidani, Y., & Al Ariss, A. (2014). Institutional and corporate drivers of global talent management: Evidence from the Arab Gulf Region. Journal of World Business, 49, 215-224.
Sparrow, P., Scullion, H., & Tarique, I. (2014). Strategic talent management: contemporary issues in international context. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Tarique, I., & Schuler, R. S. (2010). Global talent management: Literature review, integrative framework, and suggestions for further research. Journal of World Business, 45, 122-133.
Special Issue Co-Editors:
- Carlo Pietrobelli, Università Roma Tre and UNU-MERIT, carlo.pietrobelli@uniroma3.it
- Roberta Rabellotti, Università di Pavia & University of Aalborg, roberta.rabellotti@unipv.it
- Ari Van Assche, HEC Montréal, ari.van-assche@hec.ca
Special Issue description
The global value chain (GVC) framework has become an influential development paradigm in policy circles. Since its academic inception 25 years ago, the framework has been adopted by a wide range of governments and international organizations, including the International Labor Organization, the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development, the World Bank and the World Trade Organization (Gereffi, 2018). Both in developed and developing countries, national policymakers have started taking into consideration GVCs in their development strategies at country, regional and local level (Taglioni & Winkler, 2016).
Depending on the field, global value chains are also known as “global factory” (Buckley, 2009), “global production network” (Henderson et al., 2002), or “global commodity chain” (Gereffi, 1999). The appeal of the framework lies in its premise that analyzing global industries can provide profound insights into the development opportunities of firms, clusters, regions and countries (Buckley, 2009; Gereffi et al., 2005). Complementary to international business scholars’ focus on the strategies of lead firms (Buckley and Strange, 2015; Kano, 2018), GVC researchers suggest that global lead firms have the corporate power to define the terms and conditions of chain participation, thus affecting local suppliers and workers involved in it. It is therefore relevant to analyze the conditions and policies under which value chain participation puts suppliers and workers on dynamic learning paths that may facilitate economic and social upgrading (Barrientos et al., 2011).
There is a growing appreciation in the academic community that the new GVC reality requires novel policy prescriptions. Gereffi (2013) advocates for the adoption of GVC-oriented industrial policies that focus on the development of fine-grained GVC activities and emphasize the importance of leveraging international supply chain linkages. Van Assche (2017) argues that policymakers should adopt a supply chain mindset in their international business policy that focuses on allowing domestic firms to link rapidly, efficiently and reliably with foreign value chain partners.
Having said that, these policy prescriptions have remained exceedingly general. What specific policies could help firms, countries, regions and clusters benefit from GVCs, and how, has been left implicit and hardly tackled systematically in the literature or in policy practice. For example, policies that are meant to attract GVCs (e.g., integrate firms into a value chain) are very different from policies that are meant to capture the possible but uncertain gains from GVC integration (Pietrobelli & Staritz, 2018; Lema, Rabellotti and Sampath, 2018; Lema, Pietrobelli and Rabellotti, forthcoming).
GVC-attraction policies may be needed when countries do not easily appeal to global lead firms due to new-entry disadvantages, incomplete or asymmetric information regarding potential suppliers’ capacity and the business context, or a lack of specific inputs and factors. This kind of policy pertains to new ways of attracting foreign direct investments and new trade policies, including methods of attracting foreign investors to fill gaps in specific parts of the value chain (Blyde, Pietrobelli, & Volpe, 2014). Trade policy also needs some rethinking in light of GVCs, as import tariffs on intermediate goods may end up multiplying the actual tariff burden and penalize exports (Miroudot et al., 2013; Van Assche, 2017).
Value-capture policies are more related to the programs that aim to strengthen and deepen innovation and production ecosystems by building firm-level production and innovation capabilities that are necessary for capturing such gains (Sako & Zylberberg, forthcoming). For example, a GVC-oriented policy focused on learning could include innovation policies (e.g., matching-grant programs) to support firms’ innovation or collaborative innovation involving firms and universities and other research-oriented stakeholders, in a coherent way that is based on the characteristics and requirements of the GVCs that are present in the country/region/cluster (as well as those of the GVCS that could be entering it). Other examples of such policies include targeted training programs (to create the skills local firms need for their integration into and upgrading within GVCs), and organizational investments to provide technology services in the areas of standards, metrology, testing, and certification.
Policies that are developed in the lead firm’s home country may also have diffusion effects along the chain (Meyer & Gereffi, 2010). Governmental programs aimed at regulating global flows of goods, services, capital and production factors, for example by introducing standards and requirements, are likely to have an impact on the organization and governance of GVCs, thus influencing the upgrading prospects of firms, clusters, regions and countries around the world. This includes both the standards and rules set by governments (rules of origin), as well as those set and enforced by private and non-governmental organizations.
On the empirical front, there is a dire need for more analysis that studies the impact of GVC-oriented policies on firms’ participation in GVCs, on their ability to capture value, and on the economic and social implications on their workers (Tokatli, 2012; Van Assche and Van Biesebroeck, 2018). To date, most GVC research has focused on case studies and detailed industry analysis, which have been useful for uncovering new trends and for theory building. Future work will need to validate the policy propositions that come forth from the GVC framework with quantitative analysis.
Finally, the field can benefit from more research on new trends in the organization of global value chains and how they affect GVC-oriented policy propositions. The McKinsey Global Institute (2019) has documented that GVCs are becoming more regional and their expansion is less and less based on labor arbitrage. Gereffi (2018) suggests that digitization and protectionism are forcing global lead firms to adapt their global value chain governance. A deep reflection is needed on how these trends require governments to redesign their international business policies.
For this special issue, we encourage researchers from different fields (e.g. international business, economic sociology, economic geography, innovation studies, international economics, international political economy) to submit their work on GVC-oriented policy. Papers can be either aimed at theory development or empirical contributions (both quantitative analyses based on large data samples and qualitative case studies). They can focus on developing, emerging or developed countries. They can study the link between policies and GVCs at various levels: firm, worker, cluster, region or country.
Papers for this Special Issue may address (among others) the following questions:
- Which policies can be used to attract GVCs and lead firms in countries/regions/clusters?
- Should policymakers adopt push or pull strategies to integrate their suppliers into GVCs?
- What are the opportunities and pitfalls related to GVC-oriented industrial policy?
- How do regulatory policies affect GVC functioning and inter-firm relationships?
- Does the emergence of GVCs require policymakers to rethink trade and FDI policy?
- How useful are supplier development policies and programs for sustainable economic and social development?
- What is the impact of technology and innovation programs on local suppliers’ integration, upgrading and capacity to generate value added within GVCs?
- Who are the policy actors that are best positioned for implementing GVC policies and dealing with large multinationals, which frequently are the GVC lead companies?
Timeline for submission and publication
- September 1, 2019: deadline for proposal submission via Manuscript Central portal for JIBP (https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibp)
- March 1, 2020: deadline for submission of full papers
- December 1, 2020: deadline for accepting all SI papers
- March 2021: special issue publication
References
Barrientos, S., Gereffi, G., & Rossi, A. (2011). Economic and social upgrading in global production networks: A new paradigm for a changing world. International Labour Review, 150(3‐4), 319-340.
Blyde, J., Pietrobelli, C., & Volpe, C. (2014). “A World of Possibilities: Internationalization for Productive Development“, Chapter 8 in G. Crespi, E. Fernandez-Arias and E.H. Stein, Rethinking Productive Development: Sound Policies and Institutions for Economic Transformation, Palgrave, pp.233-78.
Buckley, P. J. (2009). The impact of the global factory on economic development. Journal of World Business, 44(2), 131-143.
Buckley, P. J., & Strange, R. (2015). The governance of the global factory: Location and control of world economic activity. Academy of Management Perspectives, 29(2), 237-249.
Gereffi, G. (1999). International trade and industrial upgrading in the apparel commodity chain. Journal of international economics, 48(1), 37-70.
Gereffi, G. (2018). Global Value Chains and Development. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Gereffi, G., Humphrey, J., & Sturgeon, T. (2005). The governance of global value chains. Review of International Political Economy, 12(1), 78–104. http://doi.org/10.1080/09692290500049805
Gereffi, G., & Sturgeon, T. (2013). Global value chain-oriented industrial policy: the role of emerging economies. Chapter 14 in D. Elms & P. Low (Eds.) Global value chains in a changing world, WTO Publications: Geneva, 329-360.
Henderson, J., Dicken, P., Hess, M., Coe, N., & Yeung, H. W. C. (2002). Global production networks and the analysis of economic development. Review of international political economy, 9(3), 436-464.
Kano, L. (2017). Global value chain governance: A relational perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 1-22.
Lema R., Pietrobelli C., and Rabellotti R., forthcoming. Innovation in global value chains. In G. Gereffi, S. Ponte & G. Raj-Reichert, 2019, Handbook on Global Value Chains, Edward Elgar: Cheltenham, UK and Lyme, US.
Lema R., Rabellotti, R., & Sampath, P. (2018). Innovation trajectories in developing countries: Co-evolution of global value chains and innovation systems. The European Journal of Development Research, 30(3): 345-363.
Mayer, F., & Gereffi, G. (2010). Regulation and economic globalization: Prospects and limits of private governance. Business and Politics, 12(3), 1-25.
McKinsey Global Institute (2019). Globalization in transition: the future of trade and value chains. https://www.mckinsey.com/~/media/mckinsey/featured%20insights/innovation/globalization%20in%20transition%20the%20future%20of%20trade%20and%20value%20chains/mgi-globalization%20in%20transition-the-future-of-trade-and-value-chains-full-report.ashx
Miroudot, S., D. Rouzet and F. Spinelli (2013), “Trade Policy Implications of Global Value Chains: Case Studies”, OECD Trade Policy Papers, No. 161, OECD Publishing. http://dx.doi.org/10.1787/5k3tpt2t0zs1-en
Pietrobelli, C. and Rabellotti, R. (2011). Global Value Chains Meet Innovation Systems: Are There Learning Opportunities for Developing Countries? World Development, 39(7), 1261–1269. http://doi.org/10.1016/j.worlddev.2010.05.013
Pietrobelli, C. and Staritz, C. (2018). “Upgrading, Interactive Learning, and Innovation Systems in Value Chain Interventions”, European Journal of Development Research, https://doi.org/10.1057/s41287-017-0112-5
Sako, M., & Zylberberg, E., forthcoming. Supplier strategy in global value chains: shaping governance and profiting from upgrading. Socio-Economic Review.
Taglioni, D. and Winkler, D. (2016). Making Global Value Chains Work for Development. The World Bank: Washington. http://doi.org/10.1596/978-1-4648-0157-0
Tokatli, N. (2012). Toward a better understanding of the apparel industry: a critique of the upgrading literature. Journal of Economic Geography, 13(6), 993-1011.
Van Assche, A. (2017). Global value chains and the rise of a global supply chain mindset. Chapter 13 in S. Tapp, A. Van Assche & R. Wolfe (eds.), Redesigning Canadian Trade Policies for New Global Realities, McGill-Queen’s University Press: Montréal, 183-208.
Van Assche, A., & Van Biesebroeck, J. (2018). Functional upgrading in China's export processing sector. China Economic Review, 47, 245-262.
The increasing integration of global capital markets now makes it easier for firms to access capital outside of their home countries. Firms access international capital markets through a variety of means such as initial public offerings (IPO), seasoned equity offerings (SEO), cross-listings, depository receipts, special purpose acquisition companies (SPACS), shelf offerings, private equity and other informal equity capital channels. Firms can also access debt resources outside their market through bank loans, and foreign bond issues. Finally, cross border flows of venture capital (VC) continue to increase rapidly. The objective of this Special Issue will be to explore the challenges firms face in capital markets beyond their domestic boundaries, be it equity, debt, or VC markets.
While IB research continues to evaluate the challenges facing firms in foreign product markets, IB scholars have yet to adequately address the underlying reasons why firms face challenges in foreign equity markets. These include underpricing, higher underwriting and professional fees, higher listing fees, audit fees (Bronson, Ghosh, and Hogan, 2009), and greater risk of lawsuits (Bhattacharya, Galpin, and Haslem, 2007), and home bias on the part of investors (French and Poterba, 1991). Further, research suggests the existence of a “foreign firm discount” relative to host market firms (Frésard and Salva, 2010).
Venture capital and private equity have truly become global phenomena and take many forms such as cross-border investment, foreign acquisitions, VC firms opening offices overseas, and influencing their portfolio firms to enter and exit international stock exchanges. Foreign firms raise significantly more debt than equity in the U.S.. Indeed, the largest component of the international capital market is the bond market.
Research on the motivation, the processes, the supporting mechanisms, and the range of outcomes that firms experience as a result of entering international capital markets is extremely limited so far. We believe such research can draw from a variety of theoretical perspectives and research traditions in international business. The choice of whether to access financial resources outside of the firm’s home market, how to select the appropriate foreign market, and the manner in which to raise resources are all relevant questions that parallel prior IB research market and entry mode choice. IB scholars consider LOF as the “fundamental assumption driving theories of the multinational enterprise” (Zaheer, 1995: 341). Yet, the conceptualization and research on LOF solely based upon product market may be inadequate today given the increasing integration of capital markets (Bell, Filatotchev and Rasheed, 2012).
In addition to the main theoretical perspectives in international business, the Special Issue welcomes scholars and perspectives from diverse disciplines such as finance, economics, and sociology.
TOPICS
The interaction between product market and capital market strategies
- Prior research shows that the decision to list abroad has implications on the success of the firm’s products. What are the implications of capital market strategies for product market strategies and vice versa?
Culture and capital markets
- There is a growing body of research that investigates how culture affects both economic exchange and outcomes by affecting expectations and preferences (Guiso, Sapienza, and Zingales, 2009). How does culture affect cross-border transactions in formal or informal capital markets?
The role of distance
- Even in a world where technology has shrunk distance and time, spatial costs are non-trivial. Do spatial costs exist in financial markets? Moreover, do spatial costs impact capital market strategies, and the choice of foreign capital markets?
The role of innovation
- Financial markets are continuously producing new vehicles through which firms can acquire capital resources. What are the antecedents of innovations in global capital markets? How do firms take advantage of these innovations?
Institutional environments and their implications on capital market strategies
- New exchanges in Europe and Asia with vastly different listing and disclosure requirements thank New York and London. How has the competition among stock exchanges impacted the international capital raising strategies of firms?
Liabilities of Foreignness
- What are the sources of Liabilities of Foreignness (LOF) that firms face in formal or informal capital markets and what are the strategies that enable firms to overcome them?
Informal capital market strategies
- Private equity represents an innovation in the ability to provide capital to unquoted firms. What are challenges that private equity firms face in international markets? Likewise, what are the challenges that private equity portfolio firms face?
Governance and capital market strategies
- To what extent does internationalization of capital markets lead to convergence of governance practices across countries??
The role of trust
- Trust has been found to affect the international investment choices of private equity firms (Bruton, Ahlstrom, and Puky, 2009). How does trust impact the international capital market strategies of firms?
Third parties and capital market strategies
- Capital markets are mediated markets in that sense that participants rely greatly on key third parties, such as investment banks, brokers, and investment analysts for information production. How do third parties impact the choice of foreign capital markets? What are the internationalization strategies that these third parties pursue?
Processes
- What are the top management and board factors that impact capital market strategies? Both individual and team level factors hold considerable promise providing greater insights into the reasons why firms choose capital resources outside of their home market, and the manner in which these resources are accessed.
Performance
- What accounts for success in foreign capital markets? How do strategies for firms seeking debt capital differ from those seeking equity? How do home and host country factors determine the outcome of these strategies?
- While many of the firms that make their initial public offerings go on to succeed, what is often overlooked is the fact that more than half of these firms actually delist within the first few years (Doidge, Karolyi, and Stulz, 2010). What are the factors that account for the delisting of firms on foreign exchanges?
SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS
The deadline for manuscript submission is May 15, 2015. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with Journal of International Management’s Style Guide for Authors: http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-international-management/1075-4253/guide-for-authors and submitted through the Journal’s submission website. A paper development workshop will be held at the 2015 Academy of Management conference in Vancouver. Final Drafts are due February 28, 2016.
Please direct any questions regarding the Special Issue to Igor Filatotchev (Igor.Filatotchev@city.ac.uk), Greg Bell (gbell@udallas.edu) and Abdul Rasheed (abdul@uta.edu).
REFERENCES
Bell, R. G., Filatotchev, I., Rasheed, A. 2012. The liability of foreignness in capital markets: Sources and remedies. Journal of International Business Studies, 43(2): 107-122.
Bhattacharya, U., Galpin, N., Haslem, B. 2007. The home court advantage in international corporate litigation. Journal of Law and Economics, 50: 625-659.
Bruton, G., Ahlstrom, D., Puky, T. 2009. Institutional differences and the development of entrepreneurial ventures: A comparison of the venture capital industries in Latin America and Asia. Journal of International Business Studies, 40: 762-778.
Doidge, C., Karolyi, A., Stulz, R., 2010. Why do foreign firms leave U.S. equity markets? Journal of Finance 65, 1507-1553.
French, K., Poterba, J. 1991. Investor diversification and international equity markets. The American Economic Review, 81(2): 222-226
Frésard, L., Salva, C. 2010. The foreign firm discount. Working Paper, HEC School of Management, HEC Paris.
Guiso, L., Sapienza, P., Zingales, L. 2009. Cultural biases in economic exchange? Quarterly Journal of Economics, 124(3): 1095–1131.
Schmeisser, B. 2013. A systematic review of literature on offshoring of value chain activities. Journal of International Management, 19(4), 390-406.
Zaheer, S. 1995. Overcoming the liability of foreignness. Academy of Management Journal, 38(2): 341-363.
Management and Organization, Special Issue on “Governance in Family Firms: Antecedents, Mechanism, and Consequence ":
http://www.taom.org.tw/journal_O.php#tabs-3
Management and Organization is a TSSCI and CSSCI ranking journal.
This special issue welcomes manuscripts in English or Chinese.
Submission Deadline: November 30, 2019
Submission Link: http://www.ipress.tw/J0102
Additional Information:
Enquiry and Special Issue Guest Editors
Zong-Rong Lee, Academia Sinica, Taiwan, e-mail: zlee@sinica.edu.tw
Hsi-Mei Chung, I-Shou University, Taiwan, e-mail: smchung@isu.edu.tw
Special Issue Theme Introduction
Governance is the methods to keep the entity run in the right way and get the good consequences. Governance will be related with a subject, such as the corporate or the government. From 1980, corporate governance is a hot issue in the management, finance or the law field. The aim of corporate governance is to enhance the corporate operation and performance as well as protecting the stakeholders’ interests by external and internal governance mechanism designs (Shleifer & Vishny, 1997;OECD, 2004). Whether corporate governance works is contingent on who is the controller, and the aim of the controller can meet other stakeholder’s interests or not (Aguilera & Crespi-Cladera, 2016; Davis, 2005). Family and the family owners are one kind of important controller in the corporate history (Morck, 2000, 2007). The importance of family and the owners as the corporate controllers will be related with the governance issues and also the discussion on what kind of “good way” for corporate and for the family.
In the past few decades, scholars have addressed the governance issues in the family firms from the angles of corporate governance. In that, we got fruitful research on whether ownership, management and board structure may influence the governance and the consequences in a family firm (e.g., Aguilera & Crespi-Cladera, 2012; Carney, 2005; Kumar & Zattoni, 2016). In the same time, there are scholars highlight the family governance concept and indicate the differences of the family goal with the corporate goal in a family firm (e.g., Le Breton-Miller & Miller, 2006, 2018 ; Miller & Le-Breton-Miller, 2006). However, either addressing corporate governance issues in a fmaily firm or family governance issues, studies need to indictae specifically how, why, and for what consequence that family will influnece the coproate (Gersick & Feliu, 2013; Jennings, Breitkreuz, & James, 2013; Payne, 2018).
Family firm is a kind of complex organization that combines with the family and the firm entity. In order to know deeply how, why, and for what consequences that family will influence the corporate, Organization and Management journal calls a special issue on “Governance in Family Firms: Antecedents, Mechanism, and Consequence”. We sincerely welcome scholars from different disciplines, such as management, sociology, psychology, history, law, or even the anthropology, to submit the manuscript in Chinese or English.
We seek to advance the family firm studies by encouraging the followings topics (not limited to these topics):
- Cultural environment and the governance in the family firms
- Institutional context and the governance in the family firms, for example, corporate law and the governance in a family firm
- Family control and the social performance consequences
- Family control and the corporate strategy or performance
- Family dynamics and the succession in a family firm
- Governance in a family business group or in a public family firm
- Organizational attributes in a family firm and the social capital in a family firm
References
- Aguilera, R. V., & Crespi-Cladera, R. 2012. Firm family firms: Current debates of corporate governance in family firms. Journal of Family Business Strategy, 3(2): 66-69.
- Aguilera, R. V., & Crespi-Cladera, R. 2016. Global corporate governance: On the relevance of firms’ ownership structure. Journal of World Business, 51(1): 50-57.
- Carney, M. 2005. Corporate governance and competitive advantage in family-controlled firms. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 29(3): 249-265.
- Davis, G. F. 2005. New directions in corporate governance. Annual Review of Sociology, 31(1): 143-162.
- Gersick, K. E., & Feliu, N. 2013. Governing the family enterprise: Practices, performance and research. In Leig Melin, Matitias Nordqvist, & Pramodita Sharma (Eds.), SAGE Handbook of Family Business: 196-225. London, Sage Publications Ltd.
- Kumar, P., & Zattoni, A. 2016. Family business, corporate governance, and firm performance. Corporate Governance: An International Review, 24(6): 550-551.
- Le Breton-Miller, I., & Miller, D. 2006. Why do some family business out-compete? Governance, long-term orientations, and sustainable capability. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 30(6): 731-746.
- Le Breton‐Miller, I., & Miller, D. 2018. Looking back at and forward from: “Family Governance and Firm Performance: Agency, Stewardship, and Capabilities”. Family Business Review, 31(2): 229-237.
- Miller, D., & Le-Breton-Miller, I. 2006. Family governance and firm performance: Agency, stewardship, and capabilities. Family Business Review, 19(1): 73-87.
- Morck, R. K. (Ed.). 2000. Concentrated Corporate Ownership. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
- Morck, R. K. (Ed.). 2007. A History of Corporate governance around the World: Family Business Groups to Professional Managers. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
- Organization of Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). 2004. OECD Principles of Corporate Governance. Paris: OECD.
- Payne, G. T. 2018. Reflections on family business research: Considering domains and theory. Family Business Review, 31(2): 167-175.
- Sharma, P., Melin, L., & Nordqvist, M. 2013. Introduction: Scope, evolution, and future of family business studies. In Leig Melin, Matitias Nordqvist, & Pramodita Sharma (Eds.), The Sage Handbook of Family Business: 1-22. London, Sage Publications Ltd.
- Shleifer, A., & Vishny, R. W. 1997. A survey of corporate governance. Journal of Finance, 52(2): 737-783.
One of the major trends characterizing the beginning of the 21st century is the globalization of state owned enterprises (SOEs) and the role of the state as a cross-border investor. Of immediate relevance to international business (IB) scholars is the globalization of large SOEs from countries as diverse as France, Norway, China, Russia, India, Brazil, Kuwait, Saudi Arabia, Malaysia, and South Korea. While some of these SOEs focus on natural resource-based sectors such as metals, oil, and gas, others specialize in technology-based segments such as nuclear power generation, automobile manufacturing, and telecommunication equipment or in services such as banking, transportation, or construction as part of their globalization programs. A relatively recent variation, the Sovereign Wealth Fund (SWF) has emerged as a key state-directed entity in the global financial and economic landscape, supporting the globalization of SOEs. While some of the SWFs have taken a more activist role in managing their portfolios, others have been far more passive, using their investments to build diplomatic bridges across countries and to secure goodwill for other projects that might be construed as national priorities.
Despite the rise of SOEs as a dominant force in the global economic landscape, IB scholars’ understanding of these firms remains sparse. Until recently, most SOEs conducted business within state borders and tended to be domestically focused and thus outside the domain of traditional IB research.
Much of the extant literature in IB has tended to characterize governments and business as antagonists, bargaining over shares of rents in host country contexts, as illustrated by Vernon (1971). Some leading political economists even accentuate the negative effects of foreign direct investment (FDI), encouraging governments to view MNCs with suspicion. These historical viewpoints are ripe for change since many progressive governments have adopted multiple ways of attracting FDI to their own countries while systematically exploring opportunities to invest abroad.
This special issue offers a unique opportunity to consider the role of governments as promoters of international business activity and to challenge and extend existing theories of the multinational along interdisciplinary lines. Since SOEs sit at the important crossroads between international business and political economy, IB research can significantly benefit from insightful examinations of the intersection of these two fields. In particular, the linkage between home country policies that promote the globalization of domestic SOEs in support of national objectives (e.g., securing access to natural resource supplies for other domestic firms) and the development of state-to-state relationships with countries that are host to critical resources is likely to be a crucial one that can further our understanding of this cross-disciplinary domain.
The successful internationalization of some SOEs creates a challenge to existing theoretical approaches and assumptions about the competitiveness and behavior of state-owned firms, the drivers and behavior of multinational companies, and the relationships between multinationals and governments. The special issue aims to improve our understanding of this phenomenon as well as to promote extension of current theories to account for this new phenomenon. Moreover, analyzing the internationalization of SOEs can serve as a good incubator for interdisciplinary ideas from a range of fields that straddle the periphery of the traditional IB domain such as the study of business and government, developmental economics, financial management, industrial policy, and public sector management. By building a common platform drawing on eclectic contemporary work, IB scholars can help address the core issues that dominate debates on the global role of SOEs, SWFs, and state sponsored FDI sourcing agencies that are collectively reshaping the impact of the state in global economic activity.
Topics for the Special Issue
While state ownership opens many questions and potential research avenues, we particularly welcome papers that span theoretical boundaries to create new frameworks and ideas that enhance our understanding of the complexities associated with state directed global investments. We favor papers that make quantum jumps in theoretical understanding over those that make incremental contributions. We will lean toward papers that embrace multiple theoretical traditions versus those that are more parochial in nature. Although some areas of inquiry, such as the well-established work on privatization, transitional economies, and emerging market multinationals, are all critical areas of work, this special issue will exclusively focus on the global relevance of SOEs and their impact on the global strategy landscape. We offer below a few possible questions to provide a flavor of what the special issue seeks to address. These questions are illustrative at best and are not intended to set boundaries in terms of the key themes of interest.
• Traditional IB research has tended to view cross-border businesses and governments as antagonists seeking to maintain their own spheres of control and focused on maximizing their own share of the benefits that accrue from economic activity. However, recent changes demonstrate that governments, through SOEs, can play the role of enablers of cross-border activity. How do home governments foster state-to-state relationships that help SOEs to access vital resources? How do such ventures share the risks and rewards?What mechanisms can be used to promote the stability of such ventures and shield them from changes in political climate? How do SOE-SOE partnerships perform? How do SOE-SOE partnerships effectively mitigate the risk of expropriation?
• Government ownership imposes unique demands on organizations as they strive to meet the different, often conflicting objectives of economic performance and national mission. How do prevailing theories of international strategic expansion account for the uniqueness of governments as owners? Since many of the original theories in IB research tend to revolve around privately owned organizations, how might a focus on government ownership enhance and extend prevailing theories of international growth and firm conduct in the global landscape?
• The pressures of responding to the numerous challenges of implementing a successful global strategy call for radically new ways of managing SOEs. It demands a departure from the typical unipolar, home-country centric view to a multipolar, global view of deploying assets, managing a global workforce, and pursuing strategies that build economic value outside the domain of the home country. How have SOEs transformed themselves as a result of the global exposure? How has this exposure altered the nature of the relationship between an SOE and its home country? What are the key determinants that drive the level of involvement of the State as the owner in major strategic decisions of a globalized SOE? Does the degree of involvement change with the success of the globalization efforts?
• Many resource-rich governments in the last decade launched SWFs to channel their excess revenues from booming commodity markets. However, relatively little is known about their behavior as investors. Are they are just another form of state-run pension funds, making international investments in a relatively passive and apolitical way? Or, are they multinationals with complex strategic and political agendas? What are the conditions under which these entities are able to use the power of capital to secure access to global assets, influence favorable policy treatment in the host country, or leverage reciprocal benefits?
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue.
Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between September 17, 2012, and October 5, 2012, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the same double-blind review process that JIBS uses for regular manuscripts and follow the same norms and processes that have been established by the journal; see www.jibs.net.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors.
About the Guest Editors
Kannan Ramaswamy (kannan.ramaswamy@thunderbird.edu) holds the William D. Hacker Chair of Management at the Thunderbird School of Global Management. Much of his recent work is set in emerging markets and explores the determinants of success in these settings and the creation of core competences by local firms that emerge as multinational enterprises from these countries. He is also extensively involved in working with business leaders from a wide range of Fortune 100 companies across the world. He has authored over 50 refereed papers and 20 case studies. His research has appeared in distinguished journals such as the Strategic Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Academy of Management Journal, Management International Review, Journal of Management, and Journal of Business Research. Oxford University Press published his book Global Strategy: Creating and Sustaining Advantage Across Borders co-authored with Professor Andrew Inkpen.
Andrew Inkpen (andrew.inkpen@thunderbird.edu) holds the Seward Chair of Global Strategy at the Thunderbird School of Global Management. His research has involved areas such as the management of joint ventures and strategic alliances, cross border and inter-firm knowledge management and transfer. He is on the editorial boards of various journals, including Journal of International Business Studies, Strategic Management Journal, Organization Science, and Journal of Management Studies. He has extensive experience working with executives from a variety of industries and firms. He has written more than 50 refereed research articles, more than 40 teaching cases, and numerous book chapters. He is the co-author of several textbooks and co-author of Global Strategy (Oxford: 2006; with Kannan Ramaswamy) and the Global Oil and Gas Industry: Management, Strategy and Finance (Pennwell: 2011).
Aldo Musacchio (amusacchio@hbs.edu) is an associate professor in the Business, Government, and International Economy Unit (BGIE) at the Harvard Business School and a Faculty Research Fellow at the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER). He has a Ph. D. in Economic History from Stanford University. His book, Experiments in Financial Democracy (Cambridge University Press, 2009) focused on how companies can adopt corporate governance practices that protect investors in relatively adverse legal and institutional environments. His current research project looks at the current state of state capitalism around the world, at turnarounds in state-owned enterprises, and at what works and does not work when government banks finance private companies (with a special focus on the case of Brazil). In addition to his scholarly work, he has also written several case studies on companies with a strong state owned heritage in emerging market settings. He advises nonprofits focused on education in Latin America and consults for state-owned enterprises in Latin America.
Alvaro Cuervo-Cazurra (A.CuervoCazurra@neu.edu) is an Associate Professor of International Business and Strategy at Northeastern University. He has a Ph.D. from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and another from the University of Salamanca. He analyzes how firms internationalize and is currently studying the emergence of developing-country multinational firms. His geographical area of expertise is Latin America. His research appears in leading academic journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Research Policy, and Strategic Management Journal, among others, and in several edited books. He is the reviewing editor of Journal of International Business Studies, and an editorial board member of Global Strategy Journal, Journal of World Business, Organization Studies, and Strategic Management Journal, among other journals. His research has received numerous awards, including best paper awards from the Academy of Management and European International Business Academy, and best dissertation in strategy from the Academy of Management.
Overview of the Special Issues
Green finance can be defined as comprising "all forms of investment or lending that consider environmental effect[s] and enhance environmental sustainability" It combines the world of ‘traditional’ finance and business with socially responsible and environmentally friendly behaviors. It plays an increasingly important role in mobilizing capital towards investments that help to fulfill commitments under the Paris agreement for climate change, or underpin efforts in achieving the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). It is an emerging arena for many participants, including individual investors, financial institutions and institutional investors, credit market participants, as well as other economic agents such as major energy producers and consumers – each of which harbor questions on how best to adopt it. Yet rapid growth in sub-fields of green finance, such as green bonds, stands testament to the appetite among both investors and users of capital, to embrace a new class of financial instruments that offers a different combination of financial and social returns.
Against the backdrop of a pressing global vulnerability to increasingly severe climatic change and the immediate need to reduce carbon emissions, huge investments are needed in green and climate-resilient infrastructure across the globe. According to the Global Environment Facility, an estimated $400-600 billion per annum is needed to finance the conservation of land, forests and water, and more than $350 billion of incremental capital to fund projects in renewable energy and energy efficiency. However, there’s a large gap between the required capital and the actual capital flows: the latest accounting of climate finance suggests the financing gap to be in the region of $70 billion*, while anecdotal evidence and views among practitioners suggest this may be a conservative estimate.
Green finance can be connected to the majority of the SDGs, and successes in achieving the SDGs may hinge on well implemented green finance solutions by firms, while simultaneously delivering co-benefits that enhance general business sustainability and reflect positively on firms environmental, social and governance performance metrics. Research regarding green finance is of critical importance to underpin sustainable development capable of benefiting the full spectrum of stakeholders and participants in domestic and global economies and international financial systems. The financial system has a unique ability to rapidly and continuously adjust and develop innovative mechanisms that direct finance to meet the development needs of an economy, allocating financial resources fairly and effectively while maintaining vigil over the need for financial efficiency. In order to mobilize required resources further research is needed to bridge an apparent knowledge gap, and make progress to answering the question: how to close the green-finance gap?
In a recent report the Inter-Governmental Panel on Climate Change identified the mobilization of climate finance as critical to limiting global warming to 1.5◦C, and preventing catastrophic climate change. Climate finance is a rapidly emerging area of finance (at least into the mainstream) that takes as its aim the promulgation of investments targeted towards reducing vulnerability, and generally increasing the level of preparedness and/or resilience of human and ecological systems, to the negative impacts of climate change. Examples of projects that constitute climate finance include those that reduce emissions, enhance efforts to capture and store (sink) greenhouse gases, investment in renewable energy systems, smart cities etc.
Mobilizing investments to the level necessary to reach the ‘1.5◦C pathway’ requires a major shift in investment patterns of both public and private financing, from regional, national, and international entities. Such a shift should be accompanied by enhanced rules, regulations, fiscal incentives and the creation of effective markets at the international, national, and sub-national levels to shift current and projected “business-as-usual” investments on to a different trajectory. Thus, advancing our understanding of the required enabling environment, and investigating the efficiency and effectiveness of various mechanisms and channels of climate finance are of critical importance for mobilizing and allocating financial resources reasonably and effectively to achieve global, national, and local climate change mitigation and adaptation goals.
The Special Issues of International Review of Financial Analysis and Finance Research Letters will directly address issues in this dynamic area of research and welcome a wide range of empirical methodologies and theoretical orientations addressing issues of material importance to future adoption of climate finance.
Toward these goals, the editors seek manuscripts that address research questions including, but not limited to:
- Advantages and disadvantages of climate finance under different institutional and environmental contexts
- Enabling environment for mobilizing climate finance – including dimensions of liquidity and secondary markets
- Explorations of the role of governments in promoting green finance
- Green investments and products and their interaction with traditional asset classes
- Identification of the advantages and disadvantages of green finance under different institutional and environmental contexts
- Investor demand for climate finance opportunities
- The efficiency and effectiveness of climate finance
- The interactions/associations between international fragmentation and domestic politics of green finance
- The overlap/conflicts between international fragmentation (on investment opportunities) and domestic politics behind climate finance
- The role of governments in promoting climate finance and/or attracting investors
- Theoretical and applied contributions on sustainability-growth nexus in the sector
- Uncovering of the effectiveness of green investments and financial products
- Understandings of the nature and norms of green finance as a financial phenomenon
United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC). 2014. 2014 Biennial assessment and overview of climate finance flows report. UNFCCC, Bonn.
Volz, U., Bohnke, L., Kneierim, Richert, K., Rober, G-M., and Eidt, V. (2015) Financing the Green Transformation: How to Make Green Finance Work in Indonesia, Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Krushelnytska, O. (2017) Introduction to green finance. Global Environment Facility (GEF). Washington, D.C.: World Bank Group. http://documents.worldbank.org/curated/en/405891487108066678/Introduction-to-green-finance
Submission deadlines
The project will progress on an expedited timeline, adhering to the fixed deadlines set out below. Please format and reference your paper according to the requirements of the journal to whom you are submitting. Note that Elsevier journals work on a “online first” publication model, so as and when papers are accepted they are available online, with full citeable articles available when the SI’s are published.
Key dates:
(1) August 15th 2019 – Submission system open for submission of article
(2) May 30th 2020 – Deadline for submission of articles
(3) September 2020 – Special issue publication
About the Editors
Shunsuke Managi is the Distinguished Professor of Technology and Policy & Director of the Urban Institute at the Kyushu University, Japan. He has been awarded several national research grants on topics such as urbanization, transportation, energy, climate change, sustainability, and population change. He was a lead author for the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), a coordinating lead author for the Intergovernmental Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services (IPBES), and director for the Inclusive Wealth Report 2018 (IWR 2018). He is chief-editor of “Economics of Disasters and Climate Change” and “Environmental Economics and Policy Studies”, and co-editor of “Resource and Energy Economics”. He is co-chair of the Scientific Committee for the 2018 World Congress of Environmental and Resource Economists.
David Broadstock is Deputy Director for the Center for Economic Sustainability and Entrepreneurial Finance in the School of Accounting and Finance at The Hong Kong Polytechnic University. David’s research interests cover various aspects of the empirical economics of energy and the environment, with special interests in consumer behaviour and energy finance. David is currently Editor for The Energy Journal, and an Editorial Board Member of the British Journal of Management.
Jeffrey Wurgler is the Nomura Professor of Finance at New York University Stern School of Business. His research and teaching interests include corporate finance and behavioral finance. Before joining Stern in 2001, Professor Wurgler was the Robert B. and Candice J. Haas Assistant Professor of Corporate Finance at Yale School of Management. He has also been a Visiting Fellow at the University of Oxford Said Business School.Professor Wurgler received a Bachelor of Arts and Sciences degree from Stanford University and a PhD in Business Economics from Harvard University.
Handbook of Research on Islamic Business Ethics will be published by Edward Elgar, UK. The Handbook aims to provide relevant theoretical background and to present the most recent results of empirical research on business ethics in Islam. That is, the Handbook aims to capture the state of the research and suggest a direction for future studies. The collection of chapters in the Handbook includes original conceptual and empirical contributions. These chapters should enrich the field of business ethics while enabling researchers and practitioners to understand the nature and scope of Islamic business ethics.
Conceptual and empirical contributions are sought. Topics include, but are not limited to, the following: Ethical Foundations in Islam, Theology and Market Exchange, Market and Corporate Social Responsibility, Market Competition and Public Policy, Work Centrality and Islamic Ethics, Social and Economic Justice, Employment and Organizational Relations, Morality of Personal Responsibility, and Globalization and Human Dignity.
Please send about 200 word proposal on or before June 22, 2012, clearly explaining the purpose of the chapter, with an outline of issues to be discussed, and the likely contribution of the proposed chapter. Send submissions to Abbas J. Ali at aaali@iup.edu.
Latinas and Latinos (hereinafter referred to as Latinos or Hispanics) are individuals who trace their heritage to Latin America or the Iberian Peninsula in Europe (Marin & Marin, 1991). Their economic importance in the Americas and the world is growing extensively. For instance, the Pew Hispanic Center estimated that Hispanics currently make up 15 percent of the U.S. population, and account for more than half (50.5%) of its population growth. The U.S. Census Bureau (2010) also reported that the number of Hispanic-owned businesses increased by 43.7 percent to 2.3 million –more than twice the national rate of 18.0%--between 2002 and 2007. Population forecasts suggest this group may become up to one third of the USA workforce by 2050, and their collective purchase power exceeded $1 Trillion in 2011. Internationally, after years of intense economic expansion, Portugal and Spain have been in trouble in the recent past, while most Latin American nations continue to show promising signs from a business perspective (Latin Business Chronicle, 2012).
Latinos around the world share commonalities in values, attitudes and other preferences that impact the behavior in organizations in a wide variety of ways. The Latin American countries share with the Iberian nations a common religion, the mestizaje (mixing) of a number of races, over four hundred years of a generally shared history, and other factors that are often perceived as actionable similarities for managers with an interest in or responsibilities dealing with Hispanics. But several commentators have warned us about the dangers of assuming that the commonalities apply to all individuals or even groups (Triandis, 1994; Vassolo, De Castro & Gomez-Mejia, 2011). Socio-economic status, education, geographic endowments, mobility, skin color, gender, and other factors often overpower the similarities, creating a perfect storm in which even managers with the best intentions end up facing numerous challenges associated with managing such a diverse set of employees.
Clearly, Hispanics are an important group to study, but systematic, evidence-based research on work issues about them has been lagging in the Management as well as Industrial and Organizational Psychology (Blancero, DelCampo & Marron, 2007; Vassolo et al., 2011). In particular, although empirical work on diversity has increased over the past two decades, there is a dearth of studies employing Hispanic/Latino samples (Blancero & DelCampo, 2012; Olivas-Luján, 2008). Cultural values and traditions are thought to affect the attitudes and behavior of individuals, and only by examining Latino samples can we understand how their unique culture and subcultures influence their behaviors (Knouse, Rosenfeld, & Culbertson, 1992; Olivas-Luján et al., 2009; Sanchez & Brock, 1996; Stone, Johnson, Stone-Romero & Hartman, 2006).
In this special issue we are seeking micro-oriented manuscripts that provide insight into issues related to Hispanics/Latinos/Latinas in organizations in any part of the world (e.g., Latin America, U.S., Canada, Europe, Asia, Africa). We invite contributions that are empirical or conceptual in nature. We purposely have chosen to keep this call for papers broadly stated as we are interested in a broad conceptual network that can inspire future work on Latinos and workplace topics that affect them in the most influential ways. However, it merits emphasis that the focus of the special issue is limited to individual and small group, not organizational levels of analysis. We invite authors to contact us with their ideas by May 1, 2012 so that we can discuss their suitability for this Special Issue.
The key themes and foci that we would like to explore include some of (but are not limited to) the following:
• What are the cultural value differences between Hispanic/Latino subgroups (e.g., Argentineans, Brazilians, Cubans, Colombians, Hispanic-Americans, Mexicans, Peruvians, Puerto Ricans, etc.)?
• What roles do cultural values play in behavior in organizations?
• How does the intersection of race, skin color, ethnicity, socioeconomic status and gender affect behavior or preferences in Latinos and Latinas?
• Do the current national (U.S., Canadian, British, French, etc.) human resource practices meet the needs or values of Latinos and Latinas?
• What are the changing roles of gender and other drivers of diversity among Hispanics?
• What factors affect mentoring relationships with Hispanics and in what ways?
• How do cultural values influence job choice or reward preferences?
• What organizational practices attract, motivate and retain Latinos and Latinas?
• What factors influence the effectiveness of Hispanic managers or entrepreneurs?
• What roles do language and bi- or multi-culturalism play in the behavior of Latinos?
Submission Guidelines:
The deadline for receipt of manuscripts is November 1, 2012. Please contact the Special Issue Guest Editors via email by May 1, 2012 to increase the chances that your manuscript fits their editorial intentions. Please submit your manuscript in MS Word using the ScholarOne system on the journal's Manuscript Central website (http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jomp). If you have questions about using the system please contact Kay Wilkinson, Editorial Administrator (kwilkinson@emeraldinsight.com). You should also specify that the manuscript is for the special issue on “Hispanics and Latin Americans in the Workplace.”
Manuscripts should follow the JMP submission guidelines outlined at http://www.emeraldinsight.com/jmp.htm. They should be no more than 6,000 words of text (not including tables, references or graphs). In addition, titles should be eight words or less.
In keeping with ethical standards of research, each author who submits a manuscript to JMP must ensure that the original data or results presented in the manuscript have not been published in whole or part elsewhere. The primary reason for this is that duplicate publication may distort the knowledge base in a field and may lead to erroneous inferences regarding a phenomenon. Authors for whom English is their second language are encouraged strongly to use an editing service prior to submitting their manuscripts. One example of such a service is Emerald Publishing Editing Services; information about these services can be found at the Emerald Publishing website (http://www.emeraldinsight.com/authors/index.htm). This Special Issue is open and competitive. Submitted papers will undergo the normal, double-blind, peer review process.
The Journal of Managerial Psychology obtained an impact factor of 2.15 in the 2010 report by Thomson Reuters. Its acceptance rate is 15%. The average turnaround time is 45 days, with a range of 14 to 90 days.
Guest Editors:
Donna Maria Blancero, Bentley University, Waltham, MA (DBlancero@bentley.edu)
Miguel Olivas-Lujan, Clarion University of Pennsylvania, Clarion, PA (molivas@clarion.edu)
Dianna Stone, University of Texas, San Antonio, TX (DiannaStone@satx.rr.com)
References:
Blancero, D.M. and DelCampo, R.G. (2012), Hispanics at Work: A Collection of Research, Theory and Application, Nova Science Publishers, Hauppauge, NY.
Blancero, D.M., DelCampo, R.G. and Marron, G.F. (2007), Hired for Diversity: Rewarded for Conformity: Hispanics in Corporate America. The Business Journal of Hispanic Research, Vol. 1 No. 1, pp. 12-25.
Knouse, S. B., Rosenfeld, P. and Culbertson, A.L. (1992), Hispanics in the Workplace, Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks, CA.
Latin Business Chronicle. (2012), "Latin America 2012: Economic Outlook", available at: http://www.latinbusinesschronicle.com/app/article.aspx?id=5458 (accessed 27 February 2012).
Sanchez, J.I. and Brock, P. (1996), Outcomes of Perceived Discrimination among Hispanic Employees: Is Diversity Management a Luxury or a Necessity? Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 39, pp. 704-720.
Stone, D.L., Johnson, R.D., Stone-Romero, E.F. and Hartman, M. (2006), A Comparative Study of Hispanic-American and Anglo-American Cultural Values and Job Choice Preferences. Management Research, Vol. 4, pp. 8-21.
Marin, G. and Marin, B. (1991), Research with Hispanic Populations, Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks, CA.
Olivas-Luján, M.R. (2008), Evidence-Based Management: A Business Necessity for Hispanics. The Business Journal of Hispanic Research. Vol. 2 No. 2, pp. 10-26.
Olivas-Luján, M.R., Monserrat, S.I., Ruiz, J.A., Greenwood, R.A., Madero G., S., Murphy, E.F. and Santos, N.M.B.F. (2009), Values and Attitudes towards Women in Argentina, Brazil, Colombia and Mexico. Employee Relations: The International Journal. Vol. 31 No. 3, pp. 227-244.
Triandis, H.C. (1994), Culture and Social Behavior, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY.
U.S. Census Bureau (2010), “Census Bureau Reports Hispanic-Owned Businesses Increase at More than Double the National Rate”, available at: http://www.census.gov/newsroom/releases/archives/business_ownership/cb10-145.html (accessed 15 January 2012).
Vassolo, R.S., De Castro, J.O., and Gomez-Mejia, L.R. (2011), Managing in Latin America: Common Issues and a Research Agenda. Academy of Management Perspectives. Vol. 25 No. 4, pp. 22-36.
Objective of the Special Issue:
“The multinationalizing trend (is) widely recognized as similar in nature irrespective of the nationality of the parent company” – Raymond Vernon (quoted in Wilkins 1986: 202)
Vernon’s quote above presents an interesting hypothesis that is worthy of deeper examination. Does the home country of a multinational company (MNC) not matter much, as he asserts, or does it, and if so how? That is the main question explored in this special issue of the Journal of World Business.
The rise of new multinationals from emerging markets serves as a valuable natural experiment for probing the impact of a firm’s home country on its international strategy and behavior (Ramamurti, 2009). By 2015, emerging market multinational companies (EMNCs) accounted for one-quarter of world outward foreign direct investment (FDI) flows and one-fifth of the largest firms in the Fortune Global 2000. This growth led to a surge in academic interest in these firms, including special issues and volumes dedicated to their analysis (e.g. Aulakh, 2007; Cuervo-Cazurra, 2012; Cuervo-Cazurra & Ramamurti, 2014; Gammeltoft, Barnard & Madhok, 2010; Luo & Tung, 2007; Ramamurti & Singh, 2009; Williamson et al., 2013). However, there has also been a growing debate on the value of studying them as a distinct type of MNC (see Aharoni, 2014; Cuervo-Cazurra, 2012; Dunning, Kim & Park, 2008; Godley, 2014; Ramamurti, 2012; Rugman, 2010). Part of the debate and associated confusion emerges from the flawed comparison that some of the analyses make, particularly in disentangling the impact of a multinational’s home country from that of other variables. Some unique features of these firms may be not so much associated with their home country but rather with their industry of operation, stage of internationalization, ownership structure, and international experience (Ramamurti, 2012). An appropriate comparison of EMNCs with firms from other countries, such as advanced country multinational companies (AMNCs), may reveal which features of EMNCs are truly unique because of the country they come from and which are common to all MNCs regardless of their home country.
Many of the current MNC theories have paid limited attention to an MNC’s home country. Location has received relatively less attention than other firm characteristics (Dunning, 1998). Even those studies that tackle location explicitly have tended to focus on how characteristics of the host country affect the expansion of foreign firms, such as the host country’s level of development, its institutional and political system, or its economic size and degree of economic openness (e.g., Barkema, Bell & Penning, 1996; Chung & Beamish, 2005; Delios & Henisz, 2003; Meyer et al., 2013). Other studies have examined how the “distance” between the home and host country affects the international expansion of companies (e.g., Johanson & Vahlne, 1977; Ghemawat, 2001; Luo & Shenkar, 2011). More recently, a few studies have started paying attention to the impact of home country characteristics on a firm’s innovations and foreign expansion (e.g., Cuervo-Cazurra, 2006; Cuervo-Cazurra & Genc, 2008; del Sol & Kogan, 2007; Garcia-Canal & Guillen, 2008; Govindarajan & Ramamurti, 2011; Holburn & Zelner, 2010; Hoskisson et al., 2013; Luo & Wang, 2012).
In this special issue we propose to go beyond these studies and expand theories and models of the multinational by explaining how the home country affects the internationalization of the firm. This includes not only analyses of EMNCs, but also studies of AMNCs as well as comparisons of the behavior of EMNCs and AMNCs. Studies of EMNCs are a natural laboratory for extending existing models of the multinational because these have been built implicitly on the experience of AMNCs. Hence, studies that focus on EMNCs can provide new insights because their variation in home country characteristics and lower levels of economic, social, and political development facilitate the identification of mechanisms and a comparison of differences with current models. Moreover, home country tends to be more important to EMNCs than to incumbent AMNCs, providing another base for understanding how the home country affects internationalization. Studies of AMNCs can provide useful insights as long as they focus on advancing our theoretical understanding of the role of home country on internationalization. Comparative studies of companies from multiple home countries are particularly welcome if they tease out the role of the home country on internationalization. Single-country studies that pay particular attention to the mechanisms by which the home country affects a firm’s internationalization are also welcome. We welcome papers using diverse methodologies, including theoretical essays, large-sample analyses, and qualitative studies, as long as they provide a clear and detailed explanation of theoretical mechanisms and a strong theoretical contribution.
The objective of the special issue is to develop a better understanding of the theoretical mechanisms that explain how the home country influences the internationalization of the firm. The following topics are meant to illustrate the range of submissions rather than limit the ideas; authors are welcome to contact the guest editors to discuss the appropriateness of other topics related to theme of this Special Issue:
- How do companies coming from countries at different levels of economic or political development differ in their global strategies? How do early globalizers from emerging countries differ from late globalizers as their home country conditions have changed quickly over time? How does the change in the home country (economic growth, pro-market reforms, pro-market reversals, political change, etc.) affect the global expansion of firms?
- How do the home country and its relationships with particular host countries affect the international expansion of firms? How do changes in relationships among home and host countries (economic integration, political conflict, increased immigration, etc.) alter firm internationalization?
- How does the level of development of the country affect the innovativeness and types of innovations that firms create and use in their global expansion? How do innovations for the base of the pyramid in the home country become global innovations? What adaptations are made to these to use abroad and how are they transferred?
- What can one learn from EMNCs about the process by which firms become multinationals? How does this process vary across different home countries, and how does it compare with the process by which earlier generations of MNCs emerged out of Japan, South Korea, the United States, or Western Europe?
- How do firms develop resources and capabilities to deal with the particular economic, geographic, political and social conditions of their home countries and use these abroad? How are these resources and capabilities transferred and adapted to other countries? How do EMNCs adapt and modify their strategies developed in the home country to address differing conditions of countries that are more or less developed than their home country?
- What is the role of the government in the international expansion of firms? Under what conditions does it facilitate internationalization? Under which conditions does it hinder it? How do state-owned firms differ from private firms when it comes to internationalization? How do these patterns vary across countries?
- How do EMNCs establish home-host country technological, organizational and operational links? How do they differ from AMNCs in organizing and managing such links? What are some effective mechanisms through which EMNCs orchestrate home-host country links? How do they integrate their acquired foreign strategic assets with their home base operations, and then use this stronger home base to reverberate to and further nurture international operations?
Submission Process:
Between January 1 and Febrary 14, 2017, authors should submit their manuscripts online via the Journal of World Business submission system:http://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal-of-world-business. To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, it is important that authors select ‘SI: MNC Home Country’ when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process
Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the Journal of World Business Guide for Authors available athttps://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-world-business/1090-9516/guide-for-authors. All submitted manuscripts will be subject to the Journal of World Business’s double blind review process.
We will organize a workshop designed to facilitate the development of papers that will be held at Northeastern University in June of 2017. The workshop will be sponsored by the Center for Emerging Markets at Northeastern University and the Center for International Business Education and Research at the University of Miami. Authors of manuscripts that have progressed through the revision process will be invited to it. Presentation at the workshop is neither a requirement for nor a promise of final acceptance of the paper in the Special Issue.
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors: Alvaro Cuervo-Cazurra, Northeastern University (a.cuervocazurra@neu.edu); Yadong Luo, University of Miami (yadong@miami.edu); Ravi Ramamurti, Northeastern University (r.ramamurti@neu.edu) and JWB Supervising Editor Siah Hwee Ang, Victoria University of Wellington (SiahHwee.Ang@vuw.ac.nz).
References:
Aharoni, Y. (2014). Theoretical debates on multinationals from emerging economies. In A. Cuervo-Cazurra & R. Ramamurti (Eds.), Understanding multinationals from emerging markets (pp. 15-30). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Aulakh, P. S. (2007). Emerging multinationals from developing economies: motivations, paths, and performance. Journal of International Management, 13, 338-355.
Barkema, H. G., Bell, J., & Pennings, J. M. (1996). Foreign entry, cultural barriers, and learning. Strategic Management Journal, 17, 151-166.
Chung, C. C., & Beamish, P. W. (2005). The impact of institutional reforms on characteristics and survival of foreign subsidiaries in emerging economies.Journal of Management Studies, 42, 35-62.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A., Genc, M. (2008). Transforming disadvantages into advantages: Developing country MNEs in the least developed countries. Journal of International Business Studies, 39, 957-979
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2006). Who cares about corruption? Journal of International Business Studies, 37, 803-822.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2012). How the analysis of developing country multinational companies helps advance theory: Solving the Goldilocks debate. Global Strategy Journal, 2, 153-167.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A., & Ramamurti, R. (2014). Understanding multinationals from emerging markets. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
del Sol, P., & Kogan, J. (2007). Regional competitive advantage based on pioneering economic reforms: The case of Chilean FDI. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 901-927.
Delios, A., & Henisz, W. J. (2003). Political hazards, experience and sequential entry strategies: The international expansion of Japanese firms, 1980-1998.Strategic Management Journal, 24, 1153-64.
Dunning, J. H. (1998). Location and the multinational enterprise: A neglected factor? Journal of International Business Studies, 29, 45-66.
Dunning, J.H., Kim, C., & Park, D. (2008). Old wine in new bottles: a comparison of emerging-market TNCs today and developed-country TNCs thirty years ago. In K. Sauvant (Ed.), The Rise of Transnational Corporations from Emerging Markets: Threat or Opportunity? (pp. 158-180). Northampton, MA: Edward Elgar.
Gammeltoft, P., Barnard, H., & Madhok, A. (2010). Emerging multinationals, emerging theory: macro- and micro-level perspectives. Journal of International Management, 16, 95-101.
Garcia-Canal, E., & Guillen, M. F. (2008). Risk and the strategy of foreign location choice in regulated industries. Strategic Management Journal, 29, 1097-1115
Ghemawat, P. (2001). Distance still matters. Harvard Business Review, 79 (8), 137-147.
Godley, A. (2014). What does history add to EMNC research? In A. Cuervo-Cazurra & R. Ramamurti (Eds.), Understanding multinationals from emerging markets (pp. 31-49). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Govindarajan, V., & Ramamurti, R. (2011). Reverse innovation, emerging markets, and global strategy. Global Strategy Journal, 1, 191-205.
Holburn, G. L. F., & Zelner, B. A. (2010). Political capabilities, policy risk and international investment strategy: Evidence from the global electric power industry. Strategic Management Journal, 31, 1290-1315.
Hoskisson, R., Wright, M., Filatotchev, I. & Peng, M. W. (2013). Emerging multinationals from mid-range economies: The influence of institutions and factor markets. Journal of Management Studies, 50, 1295-1321.
Johanson, J., & Vahlne, J. E. (1977). The internationalization process of the firm: A model of knowledge development and increasing foreign market commitments. Journal of International Business Studies, 8, 23-32.
Luo, Y., & Tung, R. L. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 481-498.
Luo, Y. & Shenkar, O. (2011). Toward a perspective of cultural friction in international business. Journal of International Management, 17, 1-14.
Luo, Y., & Wang, S. L. (2012). Foreign direct investment strategies by developing country multinationals: A diagnostic model for home country effects.Global Strategy Journal, 2, 244-261.
Meyer, K., Estrin, S., Bhaumik, S., & Peng, M. W. (2009). Institutions, resources, and entry strategies in emerging economies. Strategic Management Journal, 30, 61-80.
Ramamurti, R. (2009). What have we learned about emerging market multinationals? In R. Ramamurti & J. V. Singh (Eds.) Emerging multinationals in emerging markets (pp. 399-426). Cambridge UK: Cambridge University Press.
Ramamurti, R. (2012). What is really different about emerging market multinationals? Global Strategy Journal, 2, 41-47.
Ramamurti, R., & Singh, J. V. (Eds.). (2009). Emerging multinationals from emerging markets. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Rugman, A.M. (2010). Do we need a new theory to explain emerging market MNEs? In K. P. Sauvant, W. A. Maschek & G. A. McAllister (Eds.), Foreign direct investments from emerging markets: The challenges ahead. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Sauvant, K. P. (Ed.). (2008). The rise of transnational corporations from emerging markets: Threat or opportunity? Northampton, MA: Edward Elgar.
Wilkins, M. (1986). Japanese multinational enterprises before 1914. Business History Review, 60, 199-232.
Williamson, P., Ramamurti, R., Fleury, A., & Fleury, M. T. (Eds.). (2013). Competitive advantages of emerging country multinationals. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
On December 31, 2019, COVID 19 was reported to the World Health Organization. Since then, it has been declared a global pandemic. With over 107 million cases worldwide, the pandemic has had a profound impact on global commerce. Please discuss the myriad of ways COVID has impacted the way the world does business.
The Journal of International Business and Law (JIBL) is calling for student papers for its special issue on International Business Strategies to Cope with Trade Wars. The topics include but are not limited to:
* Business or corporate strategy to handle coordination, expense and impact of government mandated travel requirements.
- Business or corporate strategy to evolve with the increasing rise in the use of cryptocurrency and the movement away from traditional banking.
- Business or corporate strategy to manage international vaccination roll-outs to re-engage in large scale in-person global business.
- Business or corporate strategy to handle coordination, expense and impact of government mandated travel requirements.
- Business or corporate strategy to protect employees and consumers during an uncertain era of international business.
- How multinational corporations are managing long-term financial investment amidst a global recession.
The paper should have a student as a leading or sole author. As for the format, follow the Journal of International Business Studies (JIBS) style at https://aib.msu.edu/jibs The submission of the full paper is due April 1, 2021. Submit to Crista Marie Westley (cjacks3@pride.hofstra.edu) and Justin Burgess (jburgess1@pride.hofstra.edu), Co-Editors-in-Chief, Journal of International Business and Law, Frank G. Zarb School of Business, Hofstra University. The accepted papers are expected to be published in the spring issue of 2021.
In 2021, Bangladesh is celebrating 50 years of independence with a remarkable achievement of economic graduation from a least developing to a developing country status, and the Wall Street Journal identified the country as the ‘economic bull case’ in the South Asian region (Bird, 2021). As the second-largest economy of South Asia, it has been one of the fastest-growing economies of the world over the past decade, backed by its ready-made garment (RMG) exports, human resources exports, demographic dividend, self-sufficiency in food grains, and stable macroeconomic conditions (The World Bank, 2021). According to the 'World Economic League Table’ published by the Centre for Economics and Business Research (CEBR), a London based think tank, the economy of Bangladesh would become the 24th largest in the world by 2033 (“Bangladesh 2nd largest”, 2019). Despite the admirable economic progress, Bangladesh has been struggling with low labour productivity, skill mismatch and shortage, poor workplace safety records, unemployment and underemployment of skilled human resources (Absar,2014). To keep pace with the economic success and to achieve the vision 2041 to become a developed nation, Bangladesh needs to develop and manage its most critical resource – human resources effectively and efficiently (Mahmood & Absar, 2015; Absar, Nimalathasan, & Mahmood, 2012).
The Special Issue of the South Asian Journal of Human Resources Management will focus on the current state and future outlook of HRM practices in Bangladesh. The aim of this special issue is to provide a platform for the researchers to examine various aspects of HRM in Bangladesh that might be common to other countries in South Asia or unique to Bangladesh. More specifically, this special issue will focus on the HRM issues, such as,
- What are the implications of Industry 4.0 on the HR practices of Bangladeshi organisations?
- What features of Bangladeshi national culture have shaped or hindered organisational HR practices?
- How is demographic dividend shaping HRM in Bangladesh?
- What about HR practices in the public sector of Bangladesh?
- What are the challenges of HR practices in the RMG industry of Bangladesh?
- What about employment laws and their implications for HRM in Bangladesh?
- How the forces of globalisation have been affecting Bangladesh’s HRM practices?
- Are there concerns about diversity, inclusion, gender equality, and women's empowerment in managing HR in Bangladesh?
- Skill mismatch/shortage appears to be another key challenge to promote employment in Bangladesh. How are the employers or the state overcoming this challenge?
- Workforce's safety and health is a major concern for Bangladeshi manufacturing organisations, especially in the RMG and ship recycling industry. How are HRM practices dealing with that?
- What about the changing role of HRM in Bangladesh in the crises like the ongoing pandemic caused by COVID-19?
- What about the roles played by educational institutes, professional associations, and trade unions in advancing HRM practices in Bangladesh?
Potential research topics
To fulfil the purpose of the special issue, the topics of potential contributions may include, but are not limited to, the following subject areas:
- Industry 4.0 and future of HRM in Bangladesh
- Institutions, national culture and HRM practices in Bangladesh
- Diversity, inclusion, and HRM in Bangladesh
- Talent management practices in Bangladesh
- Employee safety, health, and wellbeing in Bangladesh
- Employer branding and HRM practices in Bangladesh
- HRM in SMEs in Bangladesh
- HRM in the public sector and non-profit organisations in Bangladesh.
- HR practices in MNCs and JVCs in Bangladesh.
- HRM in family businesses in Bangladesh
- Natural disaster, pandemic, crisis management and HRM responses
- Religiosity, spirituality and mindfulness in Bangladesh
- Leadership and HRM practices in Bangladesh
- Economic development and future of HRM in Bangladesh
Research based on Bangladesh or comparative/multi-country studies on South Asia (as defined in the aims and scope section of SAJHRM website) are welcome.
Submission information and timelines
Submissions to be made through the SAGE Peer Review, a web-based online submission and peer review system: https://peerreview.sagepub.com/sajhrm
- Submission open date: June 1, 2021
- Submission deadline date: December 31, 2021
- Publication date: December 1, 2022 (Volume 9, Issue 2)
We welcome a range of review and conceptual papers, qualitative and quantitative studies, methodological perspectives, interviews/practitioners’ perspectives, essays, commentaries, case studies, and book reviews that provide frameworks for understanding HRM in Bangladesh. All research papers submitted will be subject to a double-blind peer-review process. Authors are encouraged to contactthe guest editorsfor further clarifications and to discussthe aims and scope of their paper. For more information about the journal and submission guidelines, please visit the journal’s website: https://journals.sagepub.com/home/hrm
Enquiries
Please submit enquiries directly to one of the above-mentioned guest editors
References
- Bird, M. (2021, March 3). Bangladesh Is Becoming South Asia’s Economic Bull Case. The Wall Street Journal. https://www.wsj.com/articles/bangladesh-is-becoming-south-asias- economic-bull-case-11614763213
- The World Bank. (2021). The World Bank in Bangladesh. https://www.worldbank.org/en/country/bangladesh/overview
- Bangladesh 2nd largest economy in South Asia. (2019, January 8). The Daily Star. https://www.thedailystar.net/bangladesh/bangladesh-ranked-41st-largest-economy-in-2019- all-over-the-world-study-1684078
- Absar, M. M. N. (2014). Interview with Musharrof Hossain, President, Bangladesh Society for Human Resource Management. South Asian Journal of Human Resources Management, 1 (1), 113-117.
- Mahmood, M., & Absar, M. M. N. (2015). Human resource management practices in Bangladesh: Current scenario and future challenges. South Asian Journal Human Resources Management, 2 (2), 171-188.
- Absar, M. M. N., Nimalathasan, B., & Mahmood, M. (2012). Investigating HRM - Market performance relationship: Evidence from Bangladeshi organisations. South Asian Journal of Global Business Research, 1 (2), 238-255.
Recognized by Fortune as one of the world’s most admired companies and by BusinessWeek as one of the most influential companies on the planet, Chinese firm Huawei is the largest telecommunications-equipment manufacturer in the world. Starting from its humbling beginning as a telephone switch maker in 1987, former People’s Liberation Army engineer Zhengfei Ren has built Huawei into a technology giant that has its products and services reached more than 170 countries. Huawei has become one of the most powerful Chinese companies in the global economy, and its phenomenal growth is a fascinating chapter of the globalization of Chinese enterprises in the twenty-first century. However, Huawei has been facing tremendous challenges around the globe, including cybersecurity concerns, intellectual property right and espionage allegations, and economic sanction controversies. In recent years especially in the United States, the company has experienced a period of turbulence and defeat, and the future success of Huawei in the developed nations has increasingly been questioned.
To understand Huawei is to understand contemporary China. The world needs much more comprehensive examinations of its business environment and global operations. Accordingly, we are seeking far-reaching analyses by scholars from China, as well Asia, Africa, Latin America, Europe and the United States, and the proposed book will be published by Palgrave Macmillan in 2020. Please note that we are seeking neither hagiography nor condemnation but critical and balanced studies on the globalization of Huawei. The central focus of our undertaking is to examine China’s technology giant from economic, political, and international business perspectives, and a great emphasis will be on the current challenges and controversies faced by Huawei, as well as its corporate strategies and future directions. If you are interested, please send proposed chapter title, a CV, and descriptive abstract to the following email addresses (by June 7, 2019). If accepted, your proposed chapter should be 5,000-6,000 words in length, completed within six months. Depending on the proposed topic, we will decide about acceptance within 20 days; afterwards, we can follow up with necessary paperwork on consent forms, reference guidelines, etc.
Thank you in advance, let us know if you have further questions.
Wenxian Zhang WZhang@Rollins.edu
Ilan Alon ilan.alon@uia.no
Christoph Lattemann c.lattemann@jacobs-university.de
About The Series:
Globalization has led to spatial division and disaggregation of work across the globe, leading to the evolution of novel forms of work organization and contextually-embedded approaches such as co-working and co-creation in an interconnected and interdependent ecosystem. Whilst there are many advantages of scale and scope associated with these work design forms there are also many problems and challenges. Palgrave Studies in Global Human Capital Management presents new research that examines the intersection of globalization, technology, innovation, HRM practices and work organization. With an emphasis on human capital management in international business, the series stresses the importance of culture and contextually-situated knowledge a dynamic work environment, especially in the context of big emerging markets to enhancing productivity and competitiveness with a skilled work force.
Call for Papers:
Human Capital and Innovation: Examining the Role of Globalisation is the second book in the Palgrave Studies in Global Human Capital Management series. The aim of the book is to explore how human capital contributes to innovation in multinational organisations within the context of inter-connected globalised world.
Globalisation refers to growing economic dependence among countries as reflected in the increasing cross-border flows of goods and services, know-how and people. It has led to slicing of value chain, spatial division and disaggregation of work across the globe. Scholars argue that multinational organisations are best placed to exploit the benefits offered by globalisation. In the early phases of globalisation, multinational organisations outsourced production to low cost locations in developing countries to stay ahead in the competition. However, in recent years, multinational organisations have started to setup offshore research and development centres and acquiring local firms in developing countries to exploit available skills and talent to find new ways to innovate. There are enough examples of developing countries, such as India and China, that have develop competitive advantage based on their human capital.
We invite contributions in this emerging area of study with examples from a range of industries and countries.
Submission deadline: 31 March 2016
Final submission deadline: 30 June 2016
Publication date: Autum 2016
For more information or to submit a proposal, please contact Professor Sumit Kundu at kundus@fiu.edu or Dr Surender Munjal at S.Munjal@lubs.leeds.ac.uk
More information at www.palgrave.com
The 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights and subsequent treaties define human rights as inalienable fundamental rights to which a person is inherently entitled simply because she or he is a human being. More recently, the 2015 United Nations (UN) Sustainable Development Goals and the 2011 UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights contribute to the promotion of the human rights agenda in the business sector. The UN initiatives add to a number of other initiatives, e.g., by the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) and the International Labor Organization (ILO) to actively promote various ‘soft-law’ interventions designed to reduce corporate wrongdoing.
These initiatives have promoted rising awareness regarding the human rights conduct of Multinational Enterprises (MNEs) and other business actors, which global (social) media and global activist groups contribute to amplify. The rising awareness and expectations regarding corporate human rights conduct poses new and important challenges to MNEs operating in multiple environments with varying legitimacy requirements (Kostova and Zaheer, 1999), and dealing with human rights is rapidly becoming the new frontier of corporate social responsibility (CSR). Still, multinationals adopt very diverse approaches and strategies to cope with human rights issues. Unilever has recently issued its first Human Rights Report inspired by the idea that “business can only flourish in societies in which human rights are respected, upheld and advanced” (Paul Polman, Unilever CEO). Likewise, Nestlé CEO Paul Bulcke, in his keynote speech at the 2014 UN Forum on Business and Human Rights, in Geneva, declared that "human rights is about doing, is about how we behave – every day, everywhere”. Such initiatives seem to suggest that MNEs progressively speak the human rights language and human rights issues are becoming central to MNEs’ CSR agenda. At the same time, infringements on human rights by large MNEs remain prevalent. This has been the case, among many others, of the Apple-Foxconn labor rights scandal denounced in the New York Times in 2012, and the infringement of the rights of indigenous communities by the Brazilian mining multinational, Vale, in connection to the Belo Horizonte Dam project.
These contrasting conducts are still poorly understood, and call for a deeper investigation into how MNEs deal with human rights when designing their strategies, operations and organization in multiple institutional, cultural and legal environments, as well as on the drivers of MNEs’ human right conduct and on the effects of such a conduct on corporate competitiveness.
While there is a lively and established scholarly debate on business and human rights, research in international management and international business has not picked up systematically on the subject as of yet. Rather, it has focused more narrowly on related topics such as corporate corruption, or more broadly on CSR strategies and MNEs’ environmental conduct (Cuervo-Cazurra, 2006; Rabbiosi and Santangelo 2014; Van Tulder and Kolk, 2001; Kolk, 2010; Zheng, Luo and Maksimov, 2015). As a result, to date our knowledge on MNEs’ human rights conduct is mainly derived from other fields, such as international law, political science and international relations (for a review see Giuliani and Macchi, 2014), and from business ethics (Doh, Husted, Matten and Santoro, 2010; Arnold 2010; Wettstein 2012). However, we still lack a full understanding of MNEs’ human rights conduct in connection with traditional international management and international business issues. For example, questions about the role played by individuals in key organizational positions (e.g. expatriates and inpatriates) in determining MNEs’ human right conduct, as well as questions about how headquarters (HQ)-subsidiary relationships influence the decision-making process around human rights issues, are largely under-investigated. So are questions connected to MNEs’ human rights conduct in relation to the liability of foreignness and country of origin disadvantage. At the same time, there is very little theory development and empirical evidence on the efficacy of MNEs’ CSR strategies for substantially enhancing the promotion of human rights both at home and in the host countries. For example, although there is a growing body of research examining how MNEs respond to the dual pressures of global integration and local responsiveness with regard to CSR and ethics (e.g., Husted & Allen, 2006; Muller, 2006; Miska, Witt, & Stahl, forthcoming), little is known about the conditions promoting a transnational approach to human rights that recognizes “both universal moral limits and the ability of communities to set moral standards of their own” (Donaldson & Dunfee, 1999: 50). Our knowledge on the influence of the home, host and meta-environment on MNEs’ human rights conduct remains scant. More theoretical and empirical analyses are needed to investigate whether MNEs respecting and promoting human rights outperform competitors that are less caring. Finally, we still need to learn about lobbying strategies and business-government interactions of MNEs in connection to human rights as well as on the effect of current and planned transnational initiatives to regulate human right conduct across borders.
This special issue intends to address these gaps by serving three objectives. First, the special issue aims to build an international management and international business theoretical perspective on the topic by promoting cross-disciplinary research on MNEs and human rights, and by taking stock of extant knowledge. Second, the special issue aims to encourage research proposing conceptual frameworks and theoretical perspectives useful to understand drivers and effects of MNEs’ human rights conduct, as well as to develop effective managerial implications and suggestions for policy-making. A third aim of the special issue is to start drafting a research agenda on MNEs and human rights that international management and international business scholars can further develop in the forthcoming years.
The special issue solicits both theoretical and empirical contributions, which draw on different research streams and disciplines, including international management, international business, business ethics, international law, political science and business and human rights. Methodologically, the issue welcomes qualitative, quantitative, and mixed-method research approaches. It is expected that empirical studies explicitly contribute to set a theoretical agenda. In particular, we welcome submissions addressing, among others, questions related to the factors that influence MNE human rights conduct, and on the effects of MNE human rights conducts, as elaborated below:
Drivers of MNE human rights conduct
- The role of expatriates and inpatriates in promoting the cause of human rights in foreign subsidiaries. Under what conditions do expatriates promote a universal versus a relativistic perspective on human rights?
- Embedding human rights in corporate culture. How can respect for human rights become embedded as part of a corporation's culture, identity, and character? How can corporations change their own internal compass to infuse respect for human rights as part of corporate objectives and missions?
- MNEs’ human rights conduct and transfer of good human rights practices within the multinational network. Does the adoption of international codes of conduct and/or other principle-based initiatives (UN Global Compact, OECD Guidelines) by HQs ensure human rights respect and promotion also by foreign subsidiaries? How do HQs strategically transfer good human rights practices to foreign subsidiaries?
- MNE’s human rights conduct across different institutional environments. Why and under what circumstances do MNEs infringe on the human rights of home or host country’s stakeholders? In what way do institutional, cultural and legal differences between home and host environments facilitate or prevent such violations in one or both environments? To what extent do MNEs play opportunistically and exploit different institutional, cultural and legal environments by lowering their human rights standards? Will such opportunistic strategies remain viable given the rising global awareness of human rights?
- Liability of foreignness and human rights. The need to overcome the liability of foreignness may pose strategic choices, potentially conflicting with human rights promotion and respect in foreign countries. How does MNEs’ liability of foreignness influence the human rights conduct of foreign subsidiaries?
- Country of origin and human rights. MNEs originating from institutionally weak countries face the double challenge of overcoming preconceptions about their country of origin reputation in relation to human rights and adjusting to more institutionally demanding host countries. In such contexts, do Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and global activist groups play a role in mitigating these firms’ liabilities? What strategies do MNEs enact to align with most demanding institutional environments?
- CSR and human rights. Can MNEs promote business conduct, which is respectful of human rights in multiple legal and institutional settings through a single CSR strategy? How does the adoption of different CSR strategies (e.g., global, local or transnational CSR strategies) influence MNEs’ human rights conduct across different institutional environments?
- Market competition and human rights. Does a strong home or host market competition encourage respect or infringements of human rights by MNEs?
- Differentials in human rights conduct across different types of MNEs. Do state-owned and private MNEs show different human rights conduct in different institutional contexts? Does the human rights conduct of advanced country MNEs differ from that of emerging country MNEs?
- Implications of current business and human rights policy debates for multinational business. Current discussions on a potential international treaty for business and human rights may influence MNEs’ process of implementation of the UN Guiding Principles. What are the implications of such a scenario for the human rights conduct of MNEs, and for Governments?
Effects of MNEs human rights conduct
- Effects of infringements of human rights. What are the consequences of MNEs’ infringements of human rights for their competitiveness, and how does such a behavior affect MNEs relationships with key home and host country stakeholders (e.g. consumers, indigenous communities, local NGOs and government) as well as with stakeholders in the meta-environment (e.g. global NGOs and (social) media)? Does harmful human rights conduct by the managers in one subsidiary affect the value, reputation or profitability of other subsidiaries and of the HQ?
- Political and sub-political activity and strategies of MNEs in relation to human rights. How do human rights factor into lobbying strategies and other business-government interactions of MNEs both in home and host countries? How are multi-stakeholder initiatives in the human rights realm transforming MNE’s business outlook and strategies? How are the ‘leaders’ in regard to MNE human rights conduct influencing and changing the political context in which they operate?
- Empirical research on the uptake and impact of the UN Guiding Principles. How successful are the Guiding Principles in catalyzing change in multinational companies and in improving the situation on the ground for the victims of corporate human rights abuse?
Submission process
Authors should submit their manuscripts no later than submission deadline online via the Journal of World Business EES submission system at http://ees.elsevier.com/jwb. To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, it is important that authors select ‘SI: MNEs and Human rights’ when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the Journal of World Business Guide for Authors available on the journal web page. All submitted manuscripts will be subject to the Journal of World Business’s blind review process.
Submissions open: September 1, 2016
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors or supervising editor:
- Elisa Giuliani, University of Pisa, Italy (elisa.giuliani@unipi.it)
- Grazia D. Santangelo, University of Catania, Italy (grsanta@unict.it)
- Florian Wettstein, University of St. Gallen, Switzerland (florian.wettstein@unisg.ch)
- Supervising Editor: Günter Stahl, Vienna University of Economics and Business (guenter.stahl@wu.ac.at)
References
Arnold, D. (2010). Transnational Corporations and the Duty to Respect Basic Human Rights. Business Ethics Quarterly 20(3), 371-399.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2006). Who Cares about Corruption? Journal of International Business Studies, 37(6): 807-822
Doh, J., Husted, B. W., Matten, D., & Santoro, M. (2010). Ahoy there! Toward greater congruence and synergy between international business and business ethics theory and research. Business Ethics Quarterly, 20(3): 481-502.
Donaldson, T., & Dunfee, T. W. (1999). When ethics travel: The promises and peril of global business ethics. California Management Review, 41(4): 45-63.
Muller, A. (2006). Global versus local CSR strategies. European Management Journal, 24(2): 189–198.
Giuliani, E., Macchi, C. (2014). Multinational Corporations' Economic and Human Rights Impacts on Developing Countries: A Review and Research Agenda. Cambridge Journal of Economics, 38(2): 479-517.
Husted, B. W., & Allen, D. B. (2006). Corporate social responsibility in the multinational enterprise: strategic and institutional approaches. Journal of International Business Studies, 37(6): 838–849.
Kolk, A. (2010). Trajectories of sustainability reporting by MNCs. Journal of World Business, 45 (4): 367-374.
Kostova, T., Zaheer, S. (1999). Organizational legitimacy under conditions of complexity: the case of the multinational enterprise. Academy of Management Review. 24(1): 64-81.
Miska, C., Witt, M.A., & Stahl, G.K. (forthcoming). CSR strategies of Chinese multinational enterprises: Drivers of global CSR integration and local CSR responsiveness. Business Ethics Quarterly.
Rabbiosi, L., Santangelo, G. D. (2014) When in Rome, do as the Romans do: Subsidiary Autonomy as a Response to Corruption Distance. Academy of Management Proceedings, 2014, 1: 13763.
Van Tulder R., Kolk A., (2001) Multinationality and Corporate Ethics: Codes of Conduct in the Sporting Goods Industry, Journal of International Business Studies, 32 (2): 267–283.
Wettstein, F. (2012). CSR and the debate on business and human rights: Bridging the great divide. Business Ethics Quarterly, 22(4): 739-770.
Special issue call for papers from Cross Cultural & Strategic Management
The submission portal for this SI will open October 1, 2019
Editors
Pingping Fu (Pingping.Fu@nottingham.edu.cn), University of Nottingham, Ningbo, China;
Ernst von Kimakowitz, Humanistic Management Center and Humanistic Management Network;
Michal K. Lemanski, University of Nottingham, Ningbo, China;
Leigh Anne Liu, Georgia State University
Purpose of the Special Issue
The purpose of the Special Issue is to identify humanistic leadership characteristics and behaviors that have enabled leaders in different cultures to gain respect from local communities and substantially contributed to the local economic development. Essentially, our effort is to build a new leadership theory, using an indigenous lens that explicitly focuses on human well-being and that aims to lead a sustainable future by creating a common good.
Specifically, the Special Issue aims to:
- Draw attention to inclusive human nature by highlighting the common features of humanistic leadership across cultures;
- Stimulate interest in examining deep-rooted human values and their role in forging identities;
- Establish humanistic leadership as a new theory based on empirical evidence from different cultures to guide future leadership studies;
- Positively influence leadership practices in different cultures.
Definition of humanistic leadership
What kind of leaders are humanistic? What do they need to be or to do in order to effectively deal with the challenges the world is facing? We have developed a working definition of humanistic leadership to facilitate identifying such leadership practices. Humanistic leaders are those who: 1) respect people as holistic human beings by taking care of himself/herself as well as the followers’ multiple needs and motives; 2) they constantly improve themselves while developing the followers to unleash their full potential, and 3) they recognize and try to take into account all stakeholders’ interests while striving to pursue the common good.
To link to the more established literature on humanistic management, we have consulted with Ernst von Kimakowitz, founder of the Humanistic Management Center and co-founder of the Humanistic Network, about the definition. He said the three dimensions of humanistic leadership connect very nicely with and mirror the three pillars of humanistic management: human dignity, ethical reflection, and stakeholder engagement. “1) Respect for people as holistic human beings can only be brought to life when overcoming an instrumental view on people in economic activities and this, in turn, is central for respecting their dignity; 2) constant self-improvement is not possible without self-reflection and hence it corresponds very well with the integration of ethical reflection in management decisions; and 3) serving the common good as a leader is best attained by engaging with stakeholders in your Humanistic Leadership definition and that corresponds well to stakeholder engagement in the three stepped approach to Humanistic Management. In it, stakeholder engagement is described as the best way to ensure that management decisions respect the rights and interests of all those that are affected to build mutually beneficial relationships (i.e. serve the common good).”
In short, humanistic leadership differs from traditional leadership approaches in the following ways:
Traditional Humanistic
Focus Profit People
Purpose More functional Holistic
Means Prioritization Optimization
Drive Efficiency Effectiveness
Target Shareholders Stakeholders
Examples of such leaders
Although it is a new theory, in practice, such leadership can be found everywhere and has proven to lead to sustainability. For example, Jamsetji Tata, who found the Tata Group in India in 1868, now the country’s largest conglomerate with 700,000 employees and $110.7 billion of revenue to fulfill a mission “To improve the quality of life of the communities we serve globally, through long-term stakeholder value creation based on Leadership with Trust” left by the founder 150 years ago. In Japan, Kazuo Inamori, an entrepreneur who founded Kyocera and later KDDI, two Fortune 500 companies, was guided by his very basic set of ethics and morals based on the conscience that all humans innately possess, “Don’t be greedy,” “Don’t deceive others,” and “Don’t tell lies.” At the age of 70, Mr. Inamori’s hard-working attitude and genuine belief in human beings’ good nature miraculously got Japanese Airline out of deficit in one year and made it once again a successful company in the aviation industry in the world.
Criteria and reasons
The Global Leadership and Organizational Behavior Effectiveness (GLOBE) research project proposed and empirically supported cultural implicit leadership theory (CLT), which argues that leadership effectiveness is determined by the extent to which leaders’ values are aligned with the company core values, which are consistent with the normative values of the society the business is operating in (House et al, 2014). Recently, a “new genre” of leadership theories, including complexity leadership, servant leadership, spiritual leadership, cross-cultural leadership, and e-leadership, have been proposed and the emerging work on followership has also been examined comprehensively (Avolio et al. 2009; Dihn et al 2014; Winston & Ryan 2008). Nevertheless, despite these advances, the majority of the existing leadership research still focuses on employee productivity or organizational performance when examining outcomes, with much less attention paid to employees as a whole person, or as a person whose identity is closely related to her/his work. Humanistic leaders are conscientious of the multiple needs of human beings and trying hard to satisfy them; they are also constantly trying to cultivate themselves to lead by being a good role model; they focus on the big picture, trying to satisfy the interests of all stakeholders. Studying humanistic leadership practices can enrich leadership theory and offer practitioners role models. This is important because to address some of the pressing challenges the world faces today, the system needs to be reinvented as well as the leadership theories that were developed to motivate the workforce.
All submissions should meet the following criteria:
- Be based on qualitative data collected through interviews of one or two well-respected leaders and their followers, demonstrating the effects of humanistic practices and the connections of such practices with the local cultural values;
- Advance/refine existing leadership theories, i.e. make a significant theoretical contribution;
- Make connections between those leadership phenomena and local cultural values; i.e. a cultural perspective to fit the mission of CCSM; this can include one country studies with clear indigenous theorizing and some discussion of generalizability.
“It was the best of times; it was the worst of times,” the famous quote from A Tale of Two Cities by Charles Dickens used to describe the French Revolution can also be used to describe the current times we live in. We hope the papers in this Special Issue will help prolong the best of times while stopping the worst times, and that humanistic leadership practices can help businesses move toward a sustainable future that will lead to the best of times.
References
Avolio, B. J., Walumbwa, F. O., & Weber, T. J. (2009). Leadership: current theories, research, and future directions. Annual Review of Psychology, 60: 421-449.
Dinh, J. E., Lord, R. G., Gardner, W, L., Meuser, J. D., Liden, R.C., and Hu, J. (2014). Leadership theory and research in the new millennium: Current theoretical trends and changing perspectives. Leadership Quarterly, 25: 36-62.
House, R., Dorfman, P., Javidan, M., Javidan, M, Hanges, P., Sully de Luque, M. (2014). Strategic Leadership across Cultures. SAGE Publications.
Winston, B., & Ryan, B. (2008) Servant Leadership as a Humane Orientation: Using the GLOBE Study Construct of Humane Orientation to Show that Servant Leadership is More Global than Western. International Journal of Leadership Studies, 3(2): 212-222.
Submission Instructions
All manuscripts will undergo a double-blind peer-review process. Submissions should be between 7,000-10,000 words, including references, figures, and tables, and follow the manuscript requirement outlined on the journal’s website: http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=CCSM.
Submissions to Cross Cultural & Strategic Management are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts, the online submission, and peer review system. Registration and access are available at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ccsm
Submission deadline: Dec. 31, 2019
Tentative publishing: December 2020
The value of globalization and international business is increasingly being called into question. Despite the potential for poverty alleviation and more equitable distribution of resources, critics claim that the majority of the benefits of the globalization project accrue to relatively few individuals. Citing environmental degradation resulting from unregulated industry, and resource and property reallocation from indigenous people to multinational corporations, critics claim that local populations often suffer in the name of development. Several scholars have already noted that the seeds of this inequity and injustice are found in the (often unacknowledged) colonial, imperialistic modes and mentalities of international business theory and practice. In this volume, authors are invited to provide expositions on alternative paradigms to more established forms of inquiry in international business on subjects including foreign direct investment, international strategy, knowledge transfer, political economy, and national culture. Rather than reinforcing the primacy of profits and the interests of multinational corporations, this volume seeks to explicate new and existing management theory and practice which focuses on the tenets of the humanistic management paradigm: protecting human dignity, and promoting human wellbeing. We invite submissions that address one or more of our three main objectives:
1. Deconstruction of existing international business theory and provision of inclusive, humanistic management alternatives.
2. Humanistic innovations in business practice and teaching.
3. National and international government policy for the promotion of humanistic international business and management.
Abstracts not exceeding 300 words should be sent for consideration to:
Samantha Carey
scarey8@fordham.edu
Deadline: April 1, 2013
Invitations for full chapters: May 1, 2013
Please structure your abstract as follows:
A) Objectives
B) Background
C) Theory
D) Conclusions
E) Contributions
Purpose and Research topics:
Despite the recent economic slump and subsequent reductions and fluctuations of investment activities undertaken by multinational enterprises (MNEs) in host markets, the overall volume of foreign direct investment (FDI) has significantly grown over the last three decades. The major proportion of the FDI flows from market economies to centrally planned countries with the latter currently receiving huge amounts of inward FDI from the West. A representative example of this flow is China. China is often referred to as the factory of the world and/or the black hole of inward FDI. According to UNCTAD (2001, 2011), the recorded figure for 2010 revealed a more than doubling in the increase of China’s inward FDI (i.e., US$105.7 billion) since the year 2000 (US$40.7 billion). The same information also reveals that inward FDI in Vietnam dramatically increased from an annual average of US$651 million between 1989 and 1994 to US$ 2.1 billion in 2000 and US$8.2 billion in 2010.
A more direct example that clearly demonstrates the interaction between market and centrally planned economies is the Korean case. Based on mutual agreements between South (market) and North (centrally planned) Korean governments, South Korea established an industrial complex through FDI in Gaesung, North Korea. A number of South Korean MNEs participated in the project in order to exploit their capital and technology in combination with North Korea’s cheap labor force. As of March 2012, South Korean MNEs invested in a wide range of industrial sectors, such as textile, chemical, machinery, metal engineering, electricity & gas, electronics, food products, paper & wood, ceramics and so on. Since its establishment in 2008, the stock of production exceeded US$1 billion in September 2010 and approximately 50,000 North Koreans were employed as of January 2012 (EncyKorea, 2013). As the first industrial complex inaugurated jointly by South and North Korea, it has been a mutually beneficial contribution to political reconciliation, economic development, economical collaboration and cultural exchange.
However, we do not know enough that what impact this cooperation between market and centrally planned economies has had on the political, economic development, social and cultural areas. In this regard, the aim of this special issue is to bring together theoretical and empirical advancements examining the impact of FDI from disparate economies. We seek both theoretical and empirical papers that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
- Does FDI from market economies trigger economic growth in centrally planned countries? How does FDI from the former economies function as a vehicle to enhance economic development in the latter?
- Who obtains more benefits from FDI between market and centrally planned economies?
- Is the impact of FDI different in different centrally planned economies and are there different patterns of economic development?
- What are the key factors promoting positive spillover effects of FDI in centrally planned economies?
- What are the primary conditions that inhibit the negative economic development outcomes from inward FDI in these countries?
- How do Western MNEs contribute to social evolution, particularly in centrally planned countries?
- What is the effect of profit remittance by Western MNEs on these economies? What encourages Western MNEs to re-invest profits in these markets?
- Does foreign investment induce political transitions and institutional changes in centrally planned countries?
- What is the extent to which Western MNEs influence cultural evolution in these countries?
- Are market economies influenced by outward investments into centrally planned countries?
- Does the economic cooperation between market and centrally planned economies affect national / country of origin image?
Submission Instructions:
The deadline for submissions is March 31, 2015. Thunderbird International Business Review, including style guidelines, please visit the Thunderbird International Business Review website at: http://tibr.thunderbird.edu/submission.
All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at the Thunderbird International Business Review. The guest editors are seeking reviewers for this issue and are soliciting nominations and volunteers to participate as reviewers. Please contact the guest editors to volunteer or nominate a reviewer.
More Information:
To obtain additional information, please contact the guest editors:
Pervez N. Ghauri, King’s College London, UK (pervez.ghauri@kcl.ac.uk)
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea (leedspark@hufs.ac.kr)
References:
EncyKorea (2013), Industrial complex established in Gaesung. Available http://terms.naver.com/entry.nhn?docId=1821118&cid=1599&categoryId=1599
UNCTAD (2001). World investment report: Promoting linkages. Geneva: United Nations.
UNCTAD (2011). World investment report: Non-equity modes of international production and development. Geneva: United Nations.
The U.S. President Donald Trump has imposed tariffs on imports from numerous countries and wants to change or terminate current trade agreements with other countries, which resulted in the trade war. Journal of International Business and Law (JIBL) is calling for student papers for its special issue on The Impact of President Trump's Trade Policy. The research question is "What is the impact of President Trump's trade policy on the economy or business, domestic or international?" The paper should have a student as a leading or sole author.
The submission due of the full paper is November 1, 2018. Submit to Dr. Boonghee Yoo (boonghee.yoo@hofstra.edu), faculty editor, Professor of Marketing and International Business, Frank G. Zarb School of Business, Hofstra University.
The accepted papers will be published in January 2019 in Volume 17 Issue 1.
Special issue information:
Motivation for the Special Issue-Potential Research Issues
Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) is now a hot topic in business due to climate crises and conflicts between countries (Dong et al, 2022). Many companies have struggled to understand the link between their level of commitment to ESG factors and long-term success in global value chains. ESG is a set of standards that companies must adhere to in order to create and maintain a socially responsible and sustainable business (Barros et al. 2024). ESG includes three dimensions, i.e., environmental performance, social impact and governance. Specifically, environmental factors include biodiversity, climate change, pollution and resources, and water security (Tong et al. 2023); social factors include customer responsibility, health and safety, corporate social responsibility (Panagopoulos et al. 2016), human rights and community, and labor standards (Shen et al. 2024); governance includes anti-corruption initiatives, corporate governance, risk management and tax transparency (Dai and Tang 2022).
Recently, improving ESG performance has been a central goal for managers (Benjamin et al. 2023). Incorporating ESG metrics into business strategies can create value for key stakeholders by enhancing operational efficiency, reputation, and financial performance. It would help to acknowledge the ESG risks and opportunities relevant to business and requires a thorough assessment of environmental impact, corporate social responsibility practices, and financial performance while remaining mindful of societal and environmental considerations (Lee et al. 2022).
ESG can also drive consumer preferences. Consumers are increasingly aware of the importance of sustainability and social responsibility. They are actively looking for information to confirm or disconfirm beliefs about companies (Skarmeas and Leonidou 2013). ESG reporting is an organization’s public disclosure of its corporate ESG data. ESG reporting aims to inform the organization’s ESG process improvement, product innovation activities, and sustainability performance (Li et al. 2023). Based on ESG reporting, consumers can know the type of company’s sustainability and make better-informed decisions.
ESG can reduce costs substantially. Imposing ESG practices in companies effectively can help combat rising operating expenses, such as raw-material costs and the true cost of water or carbon. Given the link between ESG strategy and the cost of capital, investors increasingly focus on understanding a company’s ability to manage long-term risks through ESG disclosures (Iurkov et al. 2024).
ESG can also enhance supply chain robustness and channel resilience. ESG standards encourage channel members to assess ESG practices and ensure they align with their values and standards. This includes ensuring suppliers use environmentally friendly materials and processes, treat workers fairly, and follow ethical business practices (Bag et al. 2023). These standards can be used to measure a company’s sustainable performance, mitigate business risk, and increase transparency within the entire supply chain (Dai and Tang 2022). Recently, to enhance ESG performance, many companies have invested in technology solutions such as blockchain and AI (Asif et al. 2023). These technologies can help firms both strategically and operationally.
This special issue aims to publish high-quality theoretical and empirical papers addressing ESG value creation challenges in multinational corporations. We seek research works that employ mainstream scientific methods in business research (e.g., case studies, empirically grounded analytics, surveys, event studies, and so on). The use of multi-methodological approach is also fine. In particular, we invite papers that look into the theory and connect with other business management functions such as marketing, innovation, and strategy. Original, high-quality research that has neither been published nor is currently under review by other journals is welcome.
Potential topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Linking ESG with company values, strategy, and goals.
- ESG practices integration with sustainable and ethical practices.
- Providing transparency and accountability to improve ESG performance.
- ESG risk identification and management.
- ESG framework and metric development in terms of marketing, retailing, and supply chain management.
- Digitalization for ESG performance.
- Emerging technologies such as AI, IoT, and blockchain for improving ESG performance.
- Supply chain robustness and resilience for improving ESG performance.
- ESG and supply chain disruption.
- Impacts of customer participation on ESG value creation.
- Customer perceptions of a firm’s ESG practices.
- ESG and firm performance outcomes.
- Integrating ESG into business management functions such as marketing, innovation, and strategy.
Manuscript submission information:
Submissions are welcomed starting: March 1, 2025
Paper Submission Deadline: March 31, 2025
If you'd like to submit to this special issue, you can do it here.
Please make sure you select the Article Type 'VSI: ESG Performance’ when submitting your paper.
All submissions will go through the JBR regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
Call for Book Chapters: India’s Technology-Led Development
Series: Emerging Issues and Trends in Indian Business and Economics
Volume 1. Emerging issues and trends in India’s technology dimension
Editors: Vipin Gupta, N. Ravichandran, and Samir Chatterjee
Publisher: World Scientific (Worldscientific.com)
Targeted Publication Date: January 2022
Paper Submission Deadline: May 31, 2021
As the contemporary strategy and international literature demonstrates, the industrial paradigm of reliance on the off-the-shelf globally tradable technology for corporate, national, and international development has serious limitations. The new paradigms of digitization and robotics are offering opportunities to codify and automate the local ways for managing logistics, operations, and services. How has, is, and should India tap these opportunities to develop global leadership in integrated method and machinery solutions?
In fact, the global pandemic of 2020 has shaken the fundamental foundations of business and economics in all nations. By virtue of the size of its population, geographical inequities in development, and pre-dominance of self-employed and micro, small, and medium-sized enterprises, India faces unique challenges for the sustainability and growth of business and economics. In the past, the mantra for the growth of local firms was to globalize international supply chains by becoming their learning nodes, and by servicing integrated globalized learning to the global hubs. In the post-COVID world, as the global hubs give their own intellectually-protected local voice to the values acquired historically from diverse local hubs, local firms in the emerging markets need fundamentally divergent models for sustaining their growth. At the corporate and national levels, India is increasingly focusing on the policies for giving voice to globalizing the local as the path forward for all businesses and economies. Local knowledge embedded within local businesses and economic networks, that have not been appropriated by the transnational networks of the MNCs for their private gains, offer unique opportunities for globalizing local firms as well as the national networks that support them.
For Volume 1 in the series on emerging issues and trends in Indian business and economics, we seek perspectives from both academics and practitioners about the functionality, quality, workculture, and cultural dimensions of fast-changing business and economy in globalizing India. We are looking for papers that illuminate India’s way for managing technology through method digitation and machine robotization at the organizational, community, national, and multinational levels. We are also interested in papers that help further the understanding of the cultural, historical, archeological, or emerging/ futuristic ways for managing technology in India. The submitted paper should be about 5,000 words.
Part A Understanding India’s way for managing technology
· The cultural way for managing technology
· The historical way for managing technology
· The archeological way for managing technology
· The futuristic way for managing technology in Post-COVID India
Part B Emerging paradigms of method digitization
· Emerging organizational paradigm of method digitization
· Emerging community paradigm of method digitization
· Emerging national paradigm of method digitization
· Emerging multinational paradigm of method digitization
Part C Emerging paradigms of machine robotization
· Emerging organizational paradigm of machine robotization
· Emerging community paradigm of machine robotization
· Emerging national paradigm of machine robotization
· Emerging multinational paradigm of machine robotization
Part D Emerging paradigms for technology leadership
· Emerging organizational paradigm for technology leadership
· Emerging community paradigm for technology leadership
· Emerging national paradigm for technology leadership
· Emerging multinational paradigm for technology leadership
The papers may be emailed to any of the series editors:
Vipin Gupta, vipin.gupta@csusb.edu
Samir Chatterjee, Samir.Chatterjee@cbs.curtin.edu.au
Narasimhan Ravichandran, nravi@iima.ac.in
About the series editors:
Dr. Vipin Gupta is a Professor of sensible management and appropriate science at the Jack H. Brown College of Business and Public Administration, California State University San Bernardino, USA. He has a Ph.D. in managerial science and applied economics from the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania. He is a gold medalist from the Post-graduate Program of the Indian Institute of Management, Ahmedabad, India. Professor Gupta has authored more than 180 journal articles and book chapters and published twenty books, including the co-edited Culture, Leadership, and Organizations: The GLOBE Study of 62 Societies. Besides delivering lectures and keynotes, he has presented at international academic conferences in more than sixty nations. He has been on the governing board and organizing committee of several international conferences. As a 2015-16 American Council of Education fellow, he visited sixty-two universities, colleges, and higher education institutions in nine European nations, the USA, and India. His latest project comprises twelve authored books under the series “Vastly Integrated Processes Inside Mother Nature” in 2021. The first three books already published in this year-long series, What Is Divine Energy, What Is Present Reality, and Is Present Reality, have received wide appreciation from the academics, practitioners, and critics alike. Selected press coverage on the latest project:
https://news.yahoo.com/professor-vipin-guptas-metaphysics-digs-133806966.html
https://in.news.yahoo.com/dr-vipin-gupta-expert-managerial-085435951.html
https://criticspace.com/2021/02/03/an-interview-with-author-vipin-gupta-at-criticspace/
Dr. Narasimhan Ravichandran is the Executive Director, Manipal Centre for Business Practice (MCBP), Manipal Academy of Higher Education (MAHE), Manipal. During 1980-2018, he served as the faculty in the Production & Quantitative Methods Area, at Indian Institute of Management-Ahmedabad. During 2008-2014, he served as the Director, Indian Institute of Management, Indore. He has edited, co-edited, authored 12 books and published over 90 research articles and 50 case studies. He has been consultant to 21 organizations and trained 300 faculty members on case method of teaching.
Dr. Samir Ranjan Chatterjee is an Emeritus Professor renowned for his role as university academic, research scholar and International trainer and consultant for more than five decades. Besides his home base at Curtin University in Australia, he has lived and worked for extended periods in India, China, USA, UK, France, former Yugoslavia, Japan, Singapore, Mongolia, Malaysia, Indonesia, and Hong Kong. During 1994 – 95, he lived in Mongolia for a year as the United Nations Adviser in the development of management education in the country. Following that assignment, he worked extensively in Mongolia until 1999 as Director of a number of large capacity building programs funded by the United Nations Development Program. Between 1999-2003, he was appointed by the Asian Development Bank to serve as the international expert reviewer of the implementation program of a US$ 250 million higher education sector reform project in Indonesia. From 2013-2015, he was the Project Adviser of a ‘Pro-Poor Capacity Building’ Program for Senior Public Sector Executives in Mongolia funded by the Australian Government. Prof Chatterjee was recognized by Curtin University as a pioneer in the development of the university’s international programs initiated in 1980’s. He has been a Fellow of the Australian Institute of Management and a Fellow of the Australian Society of CPAs. He has authored and co-authored eleven books including a book on Indian Management published by Sage, thirty five book chapters and about two hundred scholarly journal publications and refereed international conference papers. He is on the editorial board of number of international scholarly journals. He serves as the Doctoral thesis examiner of many Australian and Asian Universities. He was the President of the Society for Global Business and Economic Development (SGBED) and currently Chairs the organization’s ‘Board of Trustees. ‘Prof Chatterjee was a National shortlisted nominee for the “2017 Australian of the year” award.
About MIR – Management International Review
Management International Review publishes research-based articles that reflect significant advances in key areas of International Management. Its target audience includes scholars in International Business Administration. MIR is a double-blind refereed journal that aims at the advancement and dissemination of applied research in the fields of International Management. The scope of the journal comprises International Business, Cross-cultural Management, and Comparative Management. The journal publishes research that builds or extends International Management Theory so that it can contribute to International Management Practice. For more information see http://www.mir-online.de/.
About the Focused Issue
Over the last few years, tremendous progress has been made in many emerging markets around the world. The development of knowledge on these economies, however, lags behind their growing relevance in the world economy. One reason for this is that indigenous man-agement concepts such as ubuntu (South Africa), dharma (India), guanxi (China) or blat’ (Russia) which are essential for understanding management practices in these countries are not adequately reflected by traditional “Western” management theories.
It is only recently that the significance of these aspects has been fully recognized in interna-tional management research. For example, in a study of the indigenous conceptual dimensions of Chinese CSR, Xu & Yang (2009) reveal that several widely accepted CSR dimensions in the western world have no embodiments in China. Das (2010) shows how the Indian view of good management practices is strongly rooted in ancient Indian epics such as the Mahabharata and the Ramayana. And Jackson, Amaeshi & Yavuz (2008) demonstrate how the success of firms in Africa is affected by the use of indigenous management techniques.
As a consequence, several scholars call for more context-specific research to draw on indi-genous thought in developing new theories that can help to better understand management practices in Asia, Africa or Latin America (Holtbrügge 1999; Meyer 2006; Panda & Gupta 2007; Banerjee & Prasad 2008; Zheng & Lamond 2009). Moreover, studying indigenous management theories can also be useful for understanding the implicit assumptions of tradi-tional western views and in this way contributes to global management knowledge (Punnett 2004; Cappelli et al. 2010).
While the need for indigenous management research is clear, there are currently very few stu-dies that analyze concrete implications for discovering interesting and relevant research ques-tions, theory building, and data collection (e.g., Tsui 2004; Cheng, Wang & Huang 2009). In this call for papers we specifically seek contributions that may help to close this research gap. We encourage contributors to submit both conceptual and theory-building papers, as well as empirical studies. Possible paper topics include, but are not limited to:
- Foundations of indigenous management practices
- Implications of indigenous management theories for different management functions such as marketing, organization, HRM, etc.
- Implications of indigenous management theories on the individual, group, and organiza-tional level
- Performance implications of indigenous management practices
- Methodological aspects of indigenous management research
- Transferability of indigenous management practices to other countries
- Clashes and synergies between “Western” and indigenous management practices
Submission Information
- All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review
- Authors should follow MIR guidelines, http://www.mir-online.de/Guideline-for-Authors.html
-
Contributions should be submitted in English language in a Microsoft or compatible format via e-mail attachment to dirk.holtbruegge@wiso.uni-erlangen.de,
knn@hss.iitb.ac.in, and
wanghui@gsm.pku.edu.cn. - Submission deadline: 31.08.2011 (however earlier submissions are encouraged)
- The review process will take approx. 5-6 months.
Guest editors
- Gary Gereffi (Duke University)
- Pavida Pananond (Thammasat University)
- Fredrik Tell (Uppsala University)
- Tony Fang (Stockholm University)
Background
The societal relevance and impact of international business (IB) research to bridge the gap between theory and practice and to contribute to the betterment of the world are increasingly emphasized within the IB discipline (Tung, 2023). From its inception, the Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP) has sought to encourage scholars in IB and cognate fields to increase their impact in policymaking circles by connecting IB research to major contemporary issues (Lundan, 2018; Van Assche, 2018). The global value chain (GVC) research community is uniquely positioned to pursue and deliver this impact because it links “the macro- (global), meso- (industry and country) and micro- (firm and community) levels of analysis” (Gereffi, 2019: 196) and “bridges the firm-specific, private-sector and country-level, societal divide that has separated the international business and international economics literatures” (ibid: 195). The GVC approach has successfully navigated this terrain through its focus on the role of multinational enterprises (MNEs) in global industries, examining how international trade and foreign direct investment (FDI) affect the development prospects of advanced, emerging and less-developed nations in the global economy (Gereffi, 2018; 2019).
Industrial policy and GVCs
One of the most hotly contested issues in GVC research concerns the varied roles of the state in the development process (Horner & Alford, 2019). How states used different policies to direct economic activities has also been discussed in the literature on industrial policy (see, e.g., Rodrik, 2008; Harrison & Rodríguez-Clare, 2010; Warwick, 2013). Although the concept can be traced back to the infant industry arguments of United States (US) Treasury Secretary Alexander Hamilton in the 18th century and German economist Friedrich List in the 19th century, industrial policy became widely debated and deployed in both developing and industrialised economies in the post-World War II period (Naudé, 2010; Andreoni & Chang, 2019).
Definitions of industrial policy range from broad to narrow. Drawing upon his literature review, Warwick (2013: 16) suggests: “Industrial policy is any type of intervention or government policy that attempts to improve the business environment or to alter the structure of economic activity toward sectors, technologies or tasks that are expected to offer better prospects for economic growth or societal welfare than would occur in the absence of such intervention.” Industrial policies can be of both “harder” (price-related) and “softer” (collaboration-oriented) varieties (Harrison & Rodríguez-Clare, 2010), and they may be targeted horizontally across the economy or towards designated sectors (Warwick, 2013).
In the 1960s and 1970s, the state played a large and direct role in the import-substituting industrialization (ISI) strategies in Latin America, India, and elsewhere, where the tools of industrial policy included local-content requirements, mandatory joint-ventures, and export-promotion schemes to induce MNEs to set up local subsidiaries to make goods in relatively protected domestic markets (Gereffi, 1994: 215-217). In Asia as well, the “Five Dragons”, i.e. Japan (Johnson, 1982), South Korea (Amsden, 1989), Taiwan (Wade, 1990), Hong Kong (Chiu, Ho & Lui, 1997) and Singapore (Cheang, 2022), prospered by adopting their own versions of industrial policy with an active state role in promoting export-oriented industrialization (EOI). A combination of ISI and EOI development strategies has typically been adopted in newly industrializing economies across Latin America and Asia (Gereffi and Wyman, 1990).
Although the neoliberal narrative of the 1970s frowned upon an extensive role of the state in economic management and discredited the use of industrial policy, the concept resurfaced since the mid-2000s as a response to the global financial crisis (Wade, 2018; Chang & Andreoni, 2020; Rodrik, 2023). Today, industrial policy is back in mainstream debates largely due to the growing geopolitical concern of major economic superpowers (Cherif & Hasanov, 2019). The surge of China to become the leading export economy and second largest economy in the world (behind only the US) highlights the importance of balancing the attention given to advanced industrial economies along with emerging and less developed economies in the Global South (Tung, 2023). In addition, smaller economies in Southeast Asia, like Indonesia, Malaysia, and Thailand have their own types of developmental state and economic development patterns (Rasiah, 2021), highlighting the ongoing need for comparative research on this topic.
Current disruptions and the return of industrial policy
The current era is defined by multiple disruptions and economic slowdowns caused by the COVID-19 global pandemic (Gereffi, 2020), the manifold logistical, energy, refugee, and supply consequences of the Ukraine war (Pisani-Ferry, 2022), the rising wave of economic nationalism, and the antagonistic rivalry between the United States and China (Tung, Zander, & Fang, 2023), the world’s two largest economies. In response, governments around the world have chosen to prioritize or reorient industrial policies to strengthen strategic global supply chains of their respective nations. In this era of disruption, we appear to be shifting, at least in part, from a prosperity-driven to a security-driven development landscape, and in this special issue we seek a deeper understanding of how GVCs are changing in the process (Gereffi, 2014; Pananond, Gereffi & Pedersen, 2020; Lee & Gereffi, 2021; Zhan, 2021).
GVC research has shown that “resilience” has different meanings at the firm level (operational efficiency), for supply chains (governance structures and strategies of lead firms) and for countries (national security) (Gereffi, Pananond & Pedersen, 2022). However, the security-driven narrative on economic resilience may emphasize a country-level focus over other perspectives. The one-sided interpretation of resilience in response to home-country geopolitical concerns may result in practices, like reshoring or divestment, that may not always bode well for firms’ governance and financial performance (Pedroletti & Ciabuschi, 2023; Pietrobelli & Seri, 2023).
The renewal of industrial policy adoption in the name of national economic security may trigger further changes and reconfigurations in global industries. In the US, the Biden administration has sought to build more resilient supply chains by strengthening U.S. manufacturing capabilities in strategic sectors such as semiconductors, batteries for electric vehicles, active ingredients for essential medicines, and critical minerals used in advanced electronics and clean energy (White House, 2021). The 2020 Industrial Strategy for Europe (European Commission, 2020) is designed to support the twin transition to a green and digital economy, making European Union (EU) industry more competitive globally. Measures aim at enhancing Europe’s autonomy by fortifying a series of “strategic value chains” including clean and autonomous vehicles, smart health, low-carbon emission industries, the industrial internet of things, and cybersecurity (European Commission, 2019; Dür, Eckhardt & Poletti, 2022). More broadly, the US-led Global North is seeking to build up a “democratic chips” alliance (Reuters, 2022) to reduce their reliance on China (Luo & Van Assche, 2023; Peters, 2022).
Concurrently, in China, President Xi Jinping’s call to realize the “Chinese Dream” (i.e., the great rejuvenation of the Chinese nation) has fuelled China’s own quest to become a technological superpower with advanced manufacturing, electric vehicles, clean energy, and digital technologies being built up rapidly. The launch of China’s long-term state-sponsored initiatives such as “Made in China 2025”, the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), and China’s Dual Circulation model (European Union, 2020) are strategic moves to make China a leader in global high-tech manufacturing and simultaneously focus on domestic demand and indigenous innovation. The US-China rivalry is increasing and the challenges for trade and industrial policies in GVCs are significant (Li et al., 2022). Notwithstanding a dominant central government and a panoply of state-owned enterprises that wield enormous influence over the national economy, China’s diversified and sustained export success in GVCs and its rapid economic growth also reflect more decentralized and bottom-up policy initiatives at the city and provincial levels (Gereffi, Bamber, & Fernandez-Stark, 2022).
To combat the resource nationalism related to China’s control of many rare-earth minerals (e.g., 41% of cobalt, 28% of lithium, 78% of graphite, and 6% of nickel) and 80% of the processing capacity for these minerals (Chang & Bradsher, 2023), the US State Department is pushing a “minerals security partnership” with 13 governments (U.S. Dept. of State, 2022). In addition, the EU has proposed a “buyers’ club” for critical minerals with G7 countries (Swanson, 2023). The main goals of both proposals are to establish common (and higher) labor standards for suppliers of critical minerals, given the poor standards typical in many mineral-rich countries, as well as to reduce the dependency on China.
Implications of changing configurations of GVCs for IB and industrial policy
Decoupling from China or severing the complex supply chains that tie the two countries together has been popular in some US policy circles, but would have major consequences for the reconfiguration of GVCs throughout the world (Vertinsky et al., 2023; Witt et al., 2023). Given the well-established difficulties of decoupling from China (Farrell & Newman, 2020; Shih, 2020), international leaders have begun advocating for an alternative notion of “de-risking” to deal with a more assertive China (Ciuriak, 2023). European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen initially introduced the term in a speech on March 30, 2023: “I believe it is neither viable – nor in Europe’s interest – to decouple from China. Our relations are not black or white – and our response cannot be either. This is why we need to focus on de-risk – and not decouple” (Cave, 2023).
National and regional initiatives all utilize various forms of industrial policy to remake GVCs (Gereffi & Sturgeon, 2013; Pietrobelli, Rabellotti & Van Assche, 2021). However, 21st century development strategies require interactive industrial policy to navigate complex trade and production linkages in the global economy (Gereffi, Lim & Lee, 2021), unlike earlier eras when domestic industries were more self-contained (Rodrik, 2023). A modern industrial and innovation strategy must simultaneously address several related sets of concerns: global economic competitiveness, national security, reliable international partnerships, and inclusive and sustainable economic growth (Sullivan, 2023; Bistline, Mehrote & Wolfram, 2023; Patrucco et al., 2022). While global challenges like climate change, sustainable development, and demographic shifts require coordinated action, regions may offer the best setting to identify supply-chain trade-offs and conflicts, and negotiate stable global solutions (O’Neill, 2022). Thus, a GVC perspective on industrial policy allows us a broader space to examine its wide-ranging impacts on social and environmental upgrading progress and the overarching economic goals of growth and sustainability.
Possible Topical Areas of Interest
For this special issue, we invite scholars to contribute theoretical and empirical research that expands or improves current knowledge on the interaction between industrial policy and GVCs in an era of disruptions. Submissions may include but are not restricted to the following topics:
GVCs as a driver of industrial policy
- How do public agendas around industrial policy emerge and evolve in light of recent patterns of GVC competition?
- Do geographical chokepoints in GVCs help drive the rise of industrial policy in strategic sectors? Are industrial policies effective in addressing such chokepoints?
- How can cross-sectoral, cross-regional and/or cross-cultural compositions of GVCs be used to study policy ambitions with respect to strategic industries?
- What are causes, effects and processes associated with the relocation of supply and industrial policies in emerging economies?
- What does the move from “prosperity-driven” to “security-driven” in different national or regional contexts mean for GVCs?
Industrial policy and GVC governance
- How do specific industrial policy initiatives affect GVC configurations? Does it differ if they are developed for resilience or sustainability reasons?
- How does industrial policy shape patterns of offshoring/reshoring/friendshoring? What are main antecedents and consequences?
- How do sanctions (geopolitical, technological, financial, and trade-related) affect GVC strategy and operations? Can MNEs shirk the effects by reconfiguring their GVCs?
- Is “smart specialization” attainable and desirable in today’s era of disruptions?
- What lessons can be drawn from the Covid-19 pandemic for more sustainable and inclusive GVC governance?
- Can industrial policies such as the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism reduce carbon leakage through global value chains?
Industrial policy and deglobalization
- Is the deglobalization of GVCs a likely outcome of regional and national sources of policy change? May this differ across regions?
- How do MNE strategies interact with global and local policy landscapes with respect to evolving GVC governance?
- How does populism affect IB policies in GVCs?
- Do regional trade agreements strengthen or undermine GVC trade and investment linkages?
GVC reactions to industrial policy
- What supplier strategies are effective in coping with the consequences of policy-driven GVC disruptions and how have these evolved?
- How do friend-shoring and ally-shoring initiatives affect MNE strategies and changing industrial policies?
- What is the proper balance between just-in-time (JIT) and just-in-case (JIC) business models to stabilize GVCs in the realm of new industrial policies?
Industrial policy and implications on innovation and economic development
- What are the ramifications of policy-induced technology wars for the location and rate of innovation activities?
- How do changes in the industrial policy landscape affect economic development in emerging or least-developed economies?
- What are examples, processes and effects of unintended consequences of policy changes?
- What is the impact of supply-chain disruptions on the importance of a multilateral trading system based on WTO rules?
- How are different views of political and business leaders in the Global South vs. the Global North on changing GVC configurations expressed and why?
Envisioned impact
The discussion on industrial policy in this special issue should provide useful and holistic insights for economic policy makers on the consequences of industrial policy beyond domestic borders. These insights could help policy makers in the areas of trade and investment promotion, as well as those involved in foreign relations. At the same time, such discussion should also benefit managers of firms whose activities are part of global value chains across industries, both in advanced and developing economies.
Submission and Review Process
Submitted manuscripts must adhere to the scope, standards, format, and editorial policy of the Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP). “Author Guidelines” and the JIBP Style Guide for Authors must be followed.
The Special Issue will proceed in two phases. In Phase 1, the four guest editors will review all submitted proposals. A Proposal should not exceed 2500 words, including graphs, tables, figures, and references. It should provide (i) the author(s)’ details; (ii) purpose of the study; (iii) the research question(s) being addressed; (iv) how the piece addresses the core concepts of the special issue; and (v) the relevance of the study for scholars and policy professionals; and (vi) the envisioned impact of the paper.
Contributors with submissions likely to contribute to the SI will be invited to attend an online idea development workshop prior to submitting their full papers. These invitations provide no guarantee for publication in the SI. They serve as indications of our interest in how the full papers can contribute to the SI. In Phase 2, the submitted papers will go through the regular JIBP process of submission, peer-review, revision, acceptance, and JIBP publication. The timeline for submission is as follows:
December 15, 2023 Deadline for proposal submission via JIBP’s Manuscript Central portal
February 2024 Idea Development Workshop (virtual)
June 15, 2024 Deadline for submission of full papers via JIBP’s Manuscript Central portal
Autumn 2024 Paper Development Workshop (virtual)
June 15, 2025 Expected publication of SI (accepted articles published online)
Special Issue Editors:
- Luis Alfonso Dau (Northeastern University, USA, L.Dau@northeastern.edu)
- Aya Chacar (Florida International University, USA, chacara@fiu.edu)
- Marjorie Lyles (Indiana University, USA, mlyles@iupui.edu)
- Jiatao Li (Hong Kong University of Science and Technology, Hong Kong, mnjtli@ust.hk)
Deadline for submission: August 31, 2018
Tentative publication date: Spring 2020
Introduction
This call invites papers focusing on the relationship between informal institutions and international business. In this special issue, we understand institutions to be “humanly devised constraints” or “the rules of the game in a society” (North, 1990: 3). Much attention has been paid to formal institutions, or the written (or codified) rules or constraints, such as laws, regulations, constitutions, contracts, property rights, and formal agreements. On the other hand, much less attention has been given to informal institutions or the typically unwritten but socially shared rules and constraints (Pejovich, 1999; Sartor & Beamish, 2014; Sauerwald & Peng, 2013). These informal institutions include common values, cognitions, beliefs, traditions, customs, sanctions, and norms of behavior that are often expected or taken for granted (North, 1990, 2005). In common parlance, the term ‘institutions’ is often used to refer to ‘organizations’ (e.g., governments, international organizations, non-governmental organizations, etc.), but it is important to distinguish between institutions and organizations for academic purposes in order to examine the relationship between them (Chacar, Celo, & Hesterly, 2017; North, 1990, 2005; Scott, 2013). For instance, the WTO is an organization that provides a formal institutional framework of written rules to which its member countries agree to adhere. Simultaneously, membership in the WTO creates informal (or unwritten) institutional structures between member nations, such as reciprocity and interdependency expectations. Papers examining the interaction of formal and informal institutions on international business are also welcome.
In the advent of globalization, the international business literature has increasingly emphasized the importance of considering the institutional environment, instead of studying firm behavior in a vacuum (Dau, 2012, 2013, 2017; Eden, 2010; Kostova, 1997, Kostova et al., 2008; Li, 2013; Li & Qian, 2013). Still, a gap exists in our understanding of informal institutions, as formal institutions only provide part of the picture (North, 1990). This gap is particularly problematic in developing and emerging markets, where informal institutions may have a more prominent role, enabling and facilitating business transactions (Khanna & Palepu, 1997, 2000; Verbeke & Kano, 2013).
Note that this special issue invites papers on informal institutions and not culture, although submissions may examine their relationship and tease out the differences between the two constructs as they relate to international business. Some prior work has treated culture and informal institutions as synonymous. However, these two terms are distinct albeit they can overlap at times. Definitions of culture vary in the literature, but it is typically defined as “the collective programming of the human mind that distinguishes the members of one human group from those of another. Culture in this sense is a system of collectively held values” (Hofstede, 1984: 51). It “is the deeper level of basic assumptions and beliefs” (Schein, 1985: 6-7; see also, Hofstede, 1980, 1994; House et al., 2004; Schein, 2004; Tung & Verbeke, 2010). Informal institutions, on the other hand, are the actual unwritten rules and norms of behavior (North, 1990, 2005), which likely arise as a result of and in conjunction with the cultural framework, but also of formal structures in place in a given location. For instance, whereas culture is often captured with broad dimensions such as the degree of uncertainty avoidance (Hofstede, 1980), embeddedness (Schwartz, 1992), or assertiveness (House, et al., 2004), informal institutions specifically refer to the shared unwritten rules or norms in a society, organization, or other social grouping.
Interdisciplinary Work and Work from Different Perspectives
Interdisciplinary work and research from different institutional perspectives is particularly welcome. Campbell (2004) has identified three main “institutional theories”: rational choice institutionalism (or institutional economics/comparative institutional analyses) (North, 1990; Williamson, 1975, 1985, 2000), organizational institutionalism (or neo-institutional theory) (DiMaggio & Powell, 1991; Scott, 1987, 2013), and historical institutionalism (or institutional sociology) (Granovetter, 1985, 1992, 2017). These theoretical strands are associated primarily with economics, political science, and sociology, respectively, but have been used across disciplines using other names as well (Campbell, 2004).
Submissions should make a clear and novel theoretical contribution, but may build on any theoretical lens (e.g., internalization theory, resource based view, transaction cost economics, evolutionary theory, learning theory, agency theory, etc.) in addition to the institutional theories (Cantwell et al., 2010; Dunning & Lundan, 2008, 2010). What is critical is to use the institutional framework to help develop new theoretical insights.
Furthermore, we encourage work that provides novel ways of measuring informal institutions.
Sample Topics
Given the limited attention on the effects of informal institutions on firms, as well as on the joint effects of formal and informal institutions on firms, this call for papers is purposefully broad. The following is not an exhaustive list, but provides some examples of potential topics:
- How do informal institutions, and their interactions with formal institutions, affect firms?
- What is their impact on firm strategy across borders (e.g., internationalization decisions, location choices, mode of entry decisions, entrepreneurship, global corporate social responsibility, global innovation, etc.) (Dau & Cuervo-Cazurra, 2014; Pejovich, 1999)?
- Are some of these institutions or combinations of institutions in different markets more conducive to firm success (Chacar, Newburry, & Vissa, 2010)?
- How do firms organize internally to improve their institutional fit across countries? What structures and organizational models do they choose under different institutional conditions?
- How do organizations learn the informal rules and develop international capabilities to manage them (Easterby-Smith & Lyles, 2011; Lyles, 2014)? How do resources and capabilities vary in these differing institutional contexts?
- How does informal knowledge sharing or know-how sharing take place? How do inter- and intra-organizational learning systems and knowledge transfer relate to informal vis-à-vis formal institutional information and knowledge?
- Do informal rules and governance choices allow unethical choices that are covered up? What happens if they are exposed?
- What is the relationship between governance choices and the use of informal institutional structures, such as relational contracting based on favors, trust, reciprocity, interdependency, family ties, social capital networks, mutually beneficial relationships, interpersonal connections, and business group networks (Vissa, Greve, & Chen, 2010)? What is the specific role of informal structures such as Guanxi/Guanxiwang in China, Blats/Svyazy in Russia, Wasta in the Arab World, Immak in Korea, Kankei in Japan, Jeito/Jeitinho in Brazil, and ‘grease’ payments (Batjargal, 2007; Chen et al., 2004; Chua et al., 2009; Ledeneva, 1998; Millington et al., 2005; Opper et al., 2017; Park & Luo, 2001; Smith et al., 2012; Zhou et al., 2007)?
- How do informal institutions alter the value distributions among stakeholders (Chacar & Hesterly, 2008; Coff, 1999; Lieberman & Chacar, 1997)?
- How does the nature of competition and industry structure change with the informal institutional structure? Are foreign and local firms affected differently (Chacar & Vissa, 2005)?
- How do these institutions change and how do actors and organizations affect them (Vaccaro & Palazzo, 2015)?
- How do firms engage in non-market strategies to affect informal and formal institutions and institutional structures/frameworks?
- How do firms influence formal and informal institutions in different ways?
- What is the impact of informal institutions on international organizations (e.g., international non-governmental organizations [INGOs], inter-governmental organizations [IGOs], international non-profit organizations [INPOs], etc.) and how do these organizations affect informal institutions?
Research Across Levels of Analysis
Although institutions are typically conceptualized at the national level of analysis, they may also be conceptualized at other levels, such as the supranational, regional, corporate, subsidiary, functional area, or workgroup/team levels of analysis. Papers focusing on informal institutions at different levels are also welcome. In particular, papers that study informal institutions across levels of analysis are particularly welcome. Some examples follow:
- How are informal supranational institutions (i.e., hyper norms that cross borders) and formal supranational institutions (i.e., international laws, rules, regulations, and agreements) shaped by globalization and how does this affect international business?
- How are supranational informal and formal institutions impacted by the diversity in informal and formal national environments and how does this complicate international business? Similarly, how can firms cope with or even benefit from such differences?
- When do the informal and formal institutional frameworks of a firm clash and when are they compatible with the informal and formal institutional environments of their home and host countries of operation?
- How can firms align informal and formal institutions across their international subsidiaries or across their areas of operation to enhance their international efficiency, growth, and performance?
- How do business group informal institutional structures and networks operate and what are the implications for international business?
- How do firms manage informal institutional differences across their international units (headquarters/subsidiaries), functional areas, or work groups?
- Do MNEs provide a means of reducing informal and formal institutional differences across nations?
Conference and Symposium
With the aim of helping the authors further develop their papers, we will organize a paper development workshop conference during the spring of 2019. We will invite the authors of papers that receive the option to revise and resubmit their manuscripts. Together with the review process, the opportunity to present and receive comments from discussants and conference participants, will aid authors in strengthening and refining their papers.
Furthermore, we plan to have a symposium at a major academic conference in 2020 for the final selected papers that will appear in the special issue, in order to increase their visibility and impact.
Submission Process and Deadlines
Submissions need to meet JIBS guidelines, including in terms of what is considered international business. Typically, single country studies are only considered international if they focus on international firms or firm internationalization. Furthermore, submission should have implications for international business, although they may also have secondary implications for other fields.
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this Special Issue. Manuscripts must be submitted between August 17-31, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this Call for Papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Batjargal, B. 2007. Network triads: transitivity, referral and venture capital decisions in China and Russia. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(6): 998-1012.
Campbell, J.L. 2004. Institutional Change and Globalization. Princeton University Press, Princeton.
Cantwell, J.L., Dunning, J.H. and Lundan, S.M. 2010. An evolutionary approach to understanding international business activity: The co-evolution of MNEs and the institutional environment. Journal of International Business Studies, 41(4): 567-586.
Chacar, A.S., & Hesterly, W. 2008. Institutional settings and rent appropriation by knowledge‐based employees: the case of Major League Baseball. Managerial and Decision Economics, 29(2‐3), 117-136.
Chacar, A.S., Newburry, W., & Vissa, B. 2010. Bringing institutions into performance persistence research: Exploring the impact of product, financial, and labor market institutions. Journal of International Business Studies, 41(7), 1119-1140.
Chacar, A.S., & Vissa, B. 2005. Are emerging economies less efficient? Performance persistence and the impact of business group affiliation. Strategic Management Journal, 26(10), 933-946.
Chacar, A.S., Celo, S. & Hesterly 2017. The Rules of the Game in MLB: Do Formal or Informal Institutions Change First? Business History, in press: http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00076791.2017.1342811.
Chen, C.C., Chen, Y.R., and Xin, K. 2004. Guanxi practices and trust in management: A procedural justice perspective. Organization Science, 15(2): 200-209.
Chua, R.Y., Morris, M.W., and Ingram, P. 2009. Guanxi vs. networking: Distinctive configurations of affect-and cognition-based trust in the networks of Chinese vs. American managers. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(3): 490-508.
Coff, R.W. 1999. When competitive advantage doesn't lead to performance: The resource-based view and stakeholder bargaining power. Organization science, 10(2), 119-133.
Dau, L.A. 2012. Pro-market reforms and developing country multinational corporations. Global Strategy Journal, 2(3): 262-276.
Dau, L.A. 2013. Learning across geographic space: Pro-market reforms, multinationalization strategy, and profitability. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(3): 235-262.
Dau, L.A. 2017. Contextualizing international learning: The moderating effects of mode of entry and subsidiary networks on the relationship between reforms and profitability. Journal of World Business, in press: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jwb.2016.10.005.
Dau, L.A. and Cuervo-Cazurra, A. 2014. To Formalize or Not to Formalize: Entrepreneurship and pro-Market Institutions. Journal of Business Venturing, 29(5): 668-686.
DiMaggio, P.J. and Powell, W.W. (eds.) 1991. The new institutionalism in organizational analysis (Vol. 17). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Dunning, J.H. and Lundan, S.M. 2008. Institutions and the OLI paradigm of the multinational enterprise. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 25(4): 573–593.
Dunning, J. H. and Lundan, S.M. 2010. The institutional origins of dynamic capabilities in multinational enterprises. Industrial and Corporate Change, 19(4): 1225-1246.
Easterby-Smith, M., and Lyles, M.A. (Eds.) 2011. Handbook of Organizational Learning and Knowledge Management. New York: John Willey and Sons.
Eden, L. 2010. Letter from the Editor-in-Chief: Lifting the veil on how institutions matter in IB research. Journal of International Business Studies, 41.2: 175-177.
Granovetter, M. 1985. Economic action and social structure: The problem of embeddedness. American Journal of Sociology, 91: 481–510.
Granovetter, M. 1992. Economic institutions as social constructions: A framework for analysis. Acta Sociologica, 35(1): 3-11.
Granovetter, M. 2017. Society and economy: Framework and principles. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Hofstede, G. 1980. Culture’s consequences: International differences in work-related values. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Hofstede, G. 1984. National cultures and corporate cultures. In L.A. Samovar, R.E. Porter (Eds.), Communication between cultures. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.
Hofstede, G. 1994. The business of international business is culture. International Business Review, 3(1): 1–14.
House, R.J., Hanges, P.J., Javidan, M., Dorfman, P.W., & Gupta, V. (Eds.). 2004. Culture, leadership and organizations: The GLOBE study of 62 societies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Khanna, T. and Palepu, K.G. 1997. Why focused strategies may be wrong for emerging markets. Harvard Business Review, 75(4): 41-51.
Khanna, T. and Palepu, K.G. 2000. The future of business groups in emerging markets: Long-run evidence from Chile. Academy of Management Journal, 43: 268-285.
Kostova, T. 1997. Country institutional profiles: Concept and measurement. Academy of Management Proceedings, 180-183.
Kostova, T., Roth, K. and Dacin, M.T. 2008. Institutional theory in the study of multinational corporations: A critique and new directions. Academy of Management Review, 33(4): 994-1006.
Ledeneva, A.V. 1998. Russia’s economy of favors: Blat, networking, and informal exchange. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Li, J.T. 2013. The Internationalization of Entrepreneurial Firms from Emerging Economies: The Roles of Institutional Transitions and Market Opportunities. Journal of International Entrepreneurship, 11(2): 158-171.
Li, J.T and Qian, C. 2013. Principal-Principal Conflicts under Weak Institutions: A Study of Corporate Takeovers in China. Strategic Management Journal, 34: 498-508.
Lieberman, M. & Chacar, A.S. 1997. Distribution of Returns among Stakeholders: Method and Application to U.S. and Japanese Companies . In Thomas, Howard and O’Neal, Don (Eds.) 1997, Strategic Discovery: Competing in New Arenas. John Wiley & Sons Ltd: London, UK.
Lyles, M.A. 2014. Organizational Learning, knowledge creation, problem formulation and innovation in messy problems. European Management Journal, 32(1): 132-136.
Millington, A., Eberhardt, M., and Wilkinson, B. 2005. Gift giving, guanxi and illicit payments in buyer–supplier relations in China: Analysing the experience of UK companies. Journal of Business Ethics, 57(3): 255-268.
North, D.C. 1990. Institutions, Institutional Change, and Economic Performance. New York: Cambridge University Press.
North, D.C. 2005. Understanding the Process of Economic Change. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Opper, S., Nee, V. and Holm, H. 2017. Risk Aversion and Guanxi Activities: A Behavioral Analysis of CEOs in China. Academy of Management Journal, 60(4): 1504-1530.
Park, S. and Luo, Y. 2001 Guanxi and organizational dynamics: Organizational networking in Chinese firms, Strategic Management Journal, 22: 455-477.
Pejovich, S. 1999. The effects of the interaction of formal and informal institutions on social stability and economic development. Journal of Markets and Morality, 2(2).
Sartor, M.A. and Beamish, P.W. 2014. Offshoring innovation to emerging markets: Organizational control and informal institutional distance. Journal of International Business Studies, 45(9): 1072-1095.
Sauerwald, S., & Peng, M.W. 2013. Informal institutions, shareholder coalitions, and principal–principal conflicts. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 30(3), 853-870.
Schein, E.H. 1985. Organizational Culture and Leadership (1st edition), San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers.
Schein, E.H. 2004. Organizational Culture and Leadership (3rd edition), San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers.
Schwartz, S.H. 1992. Universals in the content and structure of values: Theoretical advances and empirical tests in 20 countries. San Diego: Academic Press.
Scott, W.R. 1987. The adolescence of institutional theory. Administrative science quarterly: 32(4): 493-511.
Scott, W.R. 2013. Institutions and organizations (4th ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Smith, P.B., Torres, C., Leong, C.H., Budhwar, P., Achoui, M., Lebedeva, N. 2012. Are indigenous approaches to achieving influence in business organizations distinctive? A comparative study of guanxi, wasta, jeitinho, svyazi and pulling strings. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 23(2): 333-348.
Tung, R.L., and Verbeke, A. 2010. Beyond Hofstede and GLOBE: Improving the quality of cross-cultural research. Journal of International Business Studies, 41(8), 1259-1274.
Vaccaro, A., & Palazzo, G. 2015. Values against violence: institutional change in societies dominated by organized crime. Academy of Management Journal, 58(4), 1075-1101.
Verbeke, A., & Kano, L. 2013. The transaction cost economics (TCE) theory of trading favors. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 30(2), 409-431.
Vissa, B., Greve, H.R., & Chen, W.R. 2010. Business group affiliation and firm search behavior in India: Responsiveness and focus of attention. Organization Science, 21(3), 696-712.
Williamson, O.E. 1975. Markets and Hierarchies, Analysis and Antitrust Implications: A Study in the Economics of Internal Organization. New York: Free Press.
Williamson, O.E. 1985. The Economic Institutions of Capitalism: Firms, Markets, Relational Contracting. New York: Free Press.
Williamson, O.E. 2000. The New Institutional Economics: Taking Stock, Looking Ahead. Journal of Economic Literature, 38(3): 595-613.
Zhou, L, Wu, W.P., Luo, X. 2007. Internationalization and the performance of born-global SMEs: the mediating role of social networks." Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4): 673-690.
About the Guest Editors
Luis Alfonso Dau is an associate professor of International Business and Strategy at the D’Amore-McKim School of Business at Northeastern University. His research focuses on the strategic responses of emerging market firms to institutional processes and changes. He is particularly interested in the impact of regulatory reforms on the international strategy and performance of such firms.
Aya Chacar is an Professor in Management and International Business and Ingersoll-Rand Chaired Professor at Florida International University. She holds a PhD in Strategy and Organization from University of California, Los Angeles. Her research interests are on the interaction of institutions and globalization on firm organization and leadership, strategy and performance, strategic human assets and value appropriation.
Marjorie Lyles is Professor of International Strategic Management at Indiana University Kelley School of Business and the Kimball Faculty Fellow. She was founding Director of the Indiana University Center on Southeast Asia. She is a member of the American Management Association's International Council and has been an Invited Scholar and consultant for the U.S. Department of Commerce in the Peoples' Republic of China. Marjorie's writings center on organizational learning, international strategies and cooperative alliances, and technology development particularly in emerging economies. She is a Fellow of the Academy of International Business and a JIBS Area Editor.
Jiatao (JT) Li is Lee Quo Wei Professor of Business, Head and Chair Professor of Management, and the Senior Associate Dean of the HKUST Business School, Hong Kong University of Science and Technology. His current research interests are in the areas of organizational learning, strategic alliances, corporate governance, innovation, and entrepreneurship, with a focus on issues related to global firms and those from emerging economies. His work has appeared in top academic journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Academy of Management Review, Journal of International Business Studies, Organization Science, and Strategic Management Journal. He is a Fellow of the Academy of International Business and a JIBS Area Editor.
This special issue is designed to advance research on business models in global competition. International firms, whether long-established MNEs or emerging market new ventures, create and capture value through business models that are undergoing a radical transformation worldwide. The quest for building global competitive advantages in today’s market landscapes, such as the permeating use of information technologies, increased reliance on emerging markets, heightened threats from low-cost rivals, and growing pressure to be locally resilient yet globally integrated, prompts business model innovations. Emerging opportunities, including those at the middle income level and bottom of the pyramid in developing countries, and new challenges, such as the economic slowdown in the developed world, put additional pressure on MNEs to innovate with their business models. While “innovating business models” suggests many potential research questions, this special issue particularly welcomes papers that span theoretical boundaries and disciplines to create new perspectives or frameworks that improve our understanding of the processes, forces, paths, evolution, outcomes or contextualized factors associated with developing, innovating, or executing business models for global competition by multinationals from developed or developing countries.
Background:
A business model describes a formula of unique value creation. It typically consists of a unique customer value proposition and profit-making scheme, as well as key resources and processes coupled together as a system to operationalize value creation. It often connects strategy, customers, resources, and processes to form a distinct value creation, delivery, and capture system. In global competition, the business model describes how the MNE creates value distinctively in the global marketplace by combining technology, capital, products, brands, brainpower, and value-creation activities that suit peculiarly well foreign or global market needs, giving rise to an advantage over its global rivals and sustained profitability. As business activities reach out internationally, a business model will have extended and enhanced ramifications for MNE performance at both global and local levels. Transnational operations also imply that business models may vary across different countries in which the MNE operates and competes. A successful profit formula in one host country may not be transferable to other host countries due to the disparate conditions surrounding the firm.
Research on business models in global competition has not yet been prominent in academic discourse. This is caused in part by the fact that MNEs have never faced the immense pressure they do today for innovating business models. In fact, 95% of senior executives of Western MNEs doubt that their companies have the right business or operational model for today’s shifting business world, according to a 2011 Accenture survey. Thus, there is a need to tap into this important topic and its underlying forces, processes, and consequences to create a richer field of global strategy.
Research Questions:
We focus exclusively on the global relevance or global process of business models adopted by MNEs from either developed or developing countries. In concert with the mission of GSJ, we seek papers that are multidisciplinary in scope and interdisciplinary in content and methodology (empirical substantiation preferred) and are cutting-edge research, breaking new conceptual ground and addressing real-world phenomena regarding developing and innovating business models for winning global competition. Examples of topics that fall under the domain of this special issue, which are illustrative at best and are not intended to define the boundaries of this special issue, include:
By virtue of their global spanning capabilities and their need to compete in multiple markets, there are more opportunities as well as more complexities for MNEs than for domestic firms in innovating business models. How do MNEs develop business models to capitalize on the global scale, global network, and global reach of their cross-border operations? What major factors (local, regional or global) should MNEs consider in designing and executing a complicated business model system? How do liabilities of foreignness, the advantages of global connectivity, and spatial transferability play their part in shaping the creation of business models designed to achieve sustained returns?
After several decades of operating in foreign emerging markets, most Western MNEs have become "strategic insiders" who view their large-scale operations in these markets as key to their overall global success. Increasingly dependent on these markets and fiercely competing against local companies that are more cost effective and faster in product development, MNEs are propelled to develop new business models for their growth. How do they depart or evolve from their old business models? What are compelling forces that spark MNEs to revamp existing business models? How do competition and cooperation with local firms affect an MNE’s new business model? How do new business models (e.g., reverse innovation, multi-tier marketing, co-evolution, adaptive diversification) used by Western MNEs actually work in emerging markets?
Business models are more global than ever before because of the growing integration of the world economy. At the same time, offshoring and outsourcing are changing the nature of the firm, producing unprecedented international relocation of economic activity. What are the specific conditions at the global, regional, national, industry- and firm-levels that make MNEs shift their dominant business models? In what ways do MNEs build a virtuous cycle between existing strengths and new business models and between their business models and new competitive advantages? How do institutional pressures in the environment shape or reshape business model innovation? Why do some MNEs prefer the use of a similar business model in many foreign markets while other MNEs opt for different business models for different markets?
Unlike domestically run firms, MNEs have many more global-level factors to think through when innovating business models. Will business model creation or innovation depend on an MNE’s international strategies (multi-domestic, transnational, and global)? How do host country contextualized forces influence business model creation and evolution? How do MNE business models coevolve with shifting conditions of macro- and micro-business environments surrounding them? How successful are these evolving models (many business models do fail)?
Deadline and Submission Instructions
The deadline for submission of papers is December 31, 2014. All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. All submissions will go through the GSJ regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes that have been established by the journal (see gsj.strategicmanagement.net).
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the GSJ Managing Editor, Lois Gast (lgast@wiley.com) or the Special Issue Guest Editors:
Yadong Luo, University of Miami (yadong@miami.edu)
Peter Buckley, University of Leeds (pjb@lubs.leeds.ac.uk)
Henry Yeung, National University of Singapore (henryyeung@nus.edu.sg)
This edited book is scheduled as volume 20 of International Finance Review (IFR), an annual book series, to be published in 2020. IFR publishes theme-oriented edited volumes on various issues in international finance, including global dimensions of financial economics, accounting, and strategy. IFR is indexed by AERES (France), EconLit, Scopus, ProQuest, EBSCO, Thomson Reuters' Book
Citation Index, and others. To know more about this volume, please visit:
http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/books/series.htm?id=1569-3767
Overview of the Volume:
Every day, new technology is changing the way we do business. Innovation and disruption influence firms and industries ranging from financial services to industrial firms, from business processes to payment systems, from manufacturing and retail systems to supply chains. We hear more and more about AI, big data, blockchain, fintech, 5G, and so forth as manifestations of disrupting technology that may profoundly influence business, finance, industry, law, and government. Innovations are changing the way we transact, the way we keep our books and records, the way we process payments and accounting, and the way we verify and reduce fraud.
Innovative applications within finance are already approving mortgages and personal loans, searching for fraudulent activity and giving financial advice. At the same time, governments and regulatory agencies are pondering how best to govern technologies and innovations. Extra-territorial extensions of these technologies and innovations globally challenge the boundaries of law.
We welcome original manuscripts on broad topics relevant to, not only fintech and financial innovation but also on corporate innovation and disruption in domestic or global context. Some examples include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Cryptocurrencies and their economic significance;
- Regulating digital transactions and systems;
- Blockchain and its effects on the digital economy;
- Trends in financial innovation and fintech industry;
- Payment systems and peer-to-peer lending; artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning (ML) and the internet of things (IoT);
- The use of distributed ledger technology and smart contracts in international business;
- Digital disruption in business processes;
- Technology enabled innovations;
- Management and governance of innovations;
- Venture and finance of technological and innovating firms;
- Industrial evolution around digital innovation;
- Digital economy and innovation ecosystems;
Submission procedure, Deadline and contacts:
Original manuscripts are to be submitted by February 28, 2019 to volume editors:
J. Jay Choi (jjchoi@temple.edu) and Bora Ozkan (bora.ozkan@temple.edu).
This Management of Organization Review (MOR - impact factor 2.738) special issue aims to explore the key features of the innovation and entrepreneurship eco-system in India. There is recent evidence that innovation and entrepreneurship dynamics in transforming economies differ from like processes in advanced market economies in significant ways. Therefore, applying the dominant theoretical lens developed to study innovation and entrepreneurship in advanced market economies may be inappropriate. For instance, the Global Entrepreneurship Monitor (GEM) surveys clearly demonstrate the composition of total entrepreneurial activity (TEA) for advanced and transforming economies is substantially different, with a significantly higher level of ‘need-based’ entrepreneurship in the latter. Hence the typical advanced economy transition from wage employment to may be reversed in transforming economies. Transforming economies also witness a significant role of the transnational diaspora in their entrepreneurial and innovation processes. Further, at the level of corporate entrepreneurship, London and Hart (2004) argue that results of studies of MNE subsidiary entrepreneurship undertaken in advanced market economies may not generalize to transforming market economies. In summary, a fundamental question is whether entrepreneurship and innovation in transforming economies are diverging from the norms of advanced economies as these countries get wealthier and develop entirely new trajectories.
Special Issue Editors: Suresh Bhagavatula (IIM-Bangalore), J. Peter Murmann (UNSW - AGSM), Ram Mudambi (Temple)
Deadline: July 17, 2017
Questions about the special issue may be directed to any of the guest editors. Papers for the special issue should be submitted electronically through MOR’s ScholarOne Manuscripts site at
http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/mor
and identified as submission to the ‘Innovation and Entrepreneurship in India’ special issue.
In recent years, a combination of different factors has led many Latin American companies to turn to innovation. International companies have increased their operations in that part of the world. At the same time, Latin American companies are competing in other parts of the world. As a consequence, innovative products and services, at competitive prices, become of fundamental importance at home and abroad. Innovative products and services mean new or improved products and services and competitive prices depend on innovative processes. As a consequence, Latin American companies are concerned with innovations in products, services and processes. On the other hand, increasing costs of R&D have opened up new possibilities for joint efforts of foreign companies with Latin American companies. Other intervening factors are the increasing concerns over sustainability, the impact of government regulation and policies, new innovation practices, social change, etc.
The goals of this special issue are to present insights into the concepts of innovation and innovation management in Latin America, that are relevant to scholars and practitioners concerned with the challenges of innovation in that part of the world.
Potential topics of interest include, but are not limited to:
• Product, service and process innovation challenges for Latin American companies
• Innovation strategy, collaboration and competition
• Innovation and technology for sustainable development
• Open and user innovation in Latin America
• Government innovation policy and regulation for innovation
• Innovation systems in Latin America
• The role of venture capital in supporting innovation in Latin America
• Trends in innovation management in Latin America
• New business models in Latin America
• Practices for managing knowledge in innovation management
• Employment of technology in innovation
• Effectively coordinating innovation activities across borders
• Managing virtual teams and environments for innovation
• Challenges to entrepreneurial innovation in Latin America
• Product- and service-innovation alignment with corporate sustainability efforts
We encourage full research papers based on ample empirical evidence but we also seek papers that are conceptual in nature. Papers that compare policies and practices across different countries in Latin America are also welcome.
Submission
Deadline for submission: October 8, 2012
Papers for the Special Issue should be submitted to lucilia.silva@coppead.ufrj.br with the title of the Special Issue in the Subject Line.
Papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere.
Formatting basics
File types and font: Word or PDF, 12 point Times New Roman.
Text: double-spaced, not to exceed 30 typed pages including abstract, keywords, references, tables, figures, and appendixes.
Title page (separate file): should include title, author(s) name/title, institution, address, telephone number, email address, and acknowledgments, if applicable.
Authors should also supply a shortened version of the title suitable for the running head, not exceeding 50 character spaces.
There is a burgeoning academic literature on the societal and environmental role of the corporation. Unfortunately, this research has failed to generate a substantive academically relevant and empirically practical business logic for these corporate roles (Devinney, 2009). However, if one goes back to early work in the field, there is a strong suggestion that the business case for sustainability and social responsibility can be found in a linkage to innovation (Hart & Milstein, 1999). That is, that the value of corporate social and environmental responsibility – the core of the sustainability agenda – can be found by looking at it as a form of market and organizational innovation. This is supported by later work from scholars such as McWilliams and Siegel (2000) who cite evidence such as the strong correlation of CSR with R&D and advertising to argue that the value of socially responsible behavior and sustainability is strongly related to its integration with other intangible assets. However, despite the logic of this early work, there has been little research that has effectively integrated our extensive knowledge of innovation and product and service development with concerns about sustainability and social responsibility. Integrating these two areas could create a more coherent and parsimonious business case for sustainability and CSR and help to provide a normative guide for managers attempting to develop more sustainable corporate strategies.
The purpose of this special issue is to engage scholars who are focus on organizational and product/process/service innovation. We would like to go beyond traditional management scholarship and engage thinkers in economics, sociology and engineering. The special issue targets two audiences: academics involved in the fields of innovation and scholars interested in sustainability and social responsibility. Theoretical, methodological and empirical manuscripts will be considered, as long as the research has significant implications for strategy and innovation research and practice. Possible topics that will be suitable for this special issue include (but are not limited to) the following:
- Applications of existing models of innovation and product/service development to a sustainable enterprise model
- The role of open and collaborative innovation in developing more sustainable organizations as well as products and services
- The role of extra-organizational knowledge (e.g., from NGOs) in fostering innovation
- New empirical approaches to innovation arising from increasing demands on corporations for environmental and social responsibility
- Theoretical and empirical research on the role of innovation in “strategic” CSR and sustainability (Siegel, 2009)
- The role of environmentally and socially responsible ‘creative destruction’ in building new products and markets
Linkage with the 6th International CSR Conference and Special Workshops
Authors considering this special issue are also encouraged to present their research at the 6th International CSR Conference to be held in Berlin on 8–10 October, 2014 (information is available here: http://www.csr-hu-berlin.org). Proposals to this conference only require a short abstract and this will provide an opportunity to interact with the special issue editors and get comments on your work. The deadline for abstracts is 5 May, 2014.
In addition, we expect that all papers receiving an R&R (Revise & Resubmit) in the first round will be invited to a series of workshops in mid-2015 to interact with the special issue editors plus other authors.
Note that attending the conference or the workshops is not mandatory and will not influence the disposition of your manuscript. These are simply part of the process of improving scholarship.
Process and Deadlines:
- Abstracts for the 6th International CSR Conference (for those wishing to attend): 5 May 2014
- Full paper submissions to the LRP Special Issue: 1 December 2014
- Decisions made on the first round of submissions: 31 March 2015 (approximate)
- Workshops for papers receiving R&Rs: June 2015 (approximate)
- Submission deadline for second round: 31 August 2015
Each article will be sent to two or three reviewers, with the intent that each paper will be examined by experts in the application area – e.g., CSR, environmental sustainability – and in innovation/strategy. Assigning reviewers in such a manner is meant to ensure that the paper address both ‘sustainability’ and ‘innovation’ issues of relevance to the key audience of the special issue.
Special Issue Editors
Timothy M Devinney (Ph.D., University of Chicago), University Leadership Chair and Professor, University of Leeds, and Professor (Conjoint) at the Faculty of Medicine at the University of New South Wales.
Joachim Schwalbach (Ph.D., University of Bonn), Professor of International Management at Humboldt-Universität zu Berlin.
Donald S. Siegel (Ph.D., Columbia University). Donald Siegel is Dean of the School of Business and Professor of Management at the University at Albany, SUNY.
Special Issue Editors:
- Jaideep Anand (Ohio State University, USA, anand.18@osu.edu)
- Gerald McDermott (University of South Carolina, USA, gerald.mcdermott@moore.sc.edu)
- Ram Mudambi (Temple University, USA, rmudambi@temple.edu)
- Rajneesh Narula (University of Reading, UK, r.narula@henley.ac.uk)
Deadline for submission: November 1, 2018
Tentative publication date: Summer 2020
Introduction
This special issue focuses on the nature of innovation, within and across firms, in the context of emerging economies. It follows a recent trend by scholars increasingly using emerging economies as terrains to explore core assumptions about FDI, foreign market entry, alliances, and institutions (Govindarajan & Ramamurti, 2011; Henisz, 2000; Khanna & Palepu, 2000; Morck, Yeung, & Yu, 2000; Narula, 2012). This issue also seeks to build on work from fields such as strategy, organizational theory, economic geography, and economic sociology that has sought to identify the mechanisms that lead to different patterns of product and process innovations as well as the breakthrough and diffusion of new technologies and knowledge (Gordon & McCann, 2005; Henderson & Clark, 1990; Owen-Smith & Powell, 2004; Rosenkopf & Tushman, 1998).
Innovation remains a critical component for sustained growth and competitive advantage for emerging economies and their firms. Over the last two decades, research at the intersection of innovation and development has increasingly forced us to reframe some fundamental assumptions about the nature, process and underpinnings of innovation in all economies. As global value chains (GVCs) and MNEs link innovation systems in advanced market economies with those in emerging economies, cross-border opportunities and challenges arise that were not seen in previous decades. These challenges often relate to economic development and upgrading at the emerging economy end (Giuliani, Pietrobelli, & Rabellotti, 2005), whereas at the advanced market end, they relate to offshoring and rationalization (Leigh & Gifford, 1999).
The dynamics and spread of GVCs and MNEs and their associated innovation activities has pushed scholars to reconsider the mechanisms and direction for cross-border transfer of knowledge and technologies (Gereffi, 1999; Zhao & Anand, 2009, Narula, 2014). Scholars have shown how firm learning often depends on distinct vertical and horizontal network linkages (Hirschman, 1968; Morris, Kaplinsky, & Kaplan, 2012) as well as the ability of local firms to generate new absorptive capacities (Mudambi et al., 2017; McDermott & Corredoira, 2010; Thun, 2006; Vasudeva & Anand, 2011). We see shifts in the direction of cross-border knowledge creation, as MNEs from advanced countries are using emerging economy innovation systems to develop new types products and processes that leverages their GVCs and brings new knowledge back to headquarters (Brandt & Thun, 2010; Govindarajan & Ramamurti, 2011; Herrigel et al., 2013).
These streams of scholarship have led to fresh debates on the fundamental types of knowledge and skills critical for firms in emerging economies. Dominant views on innovation, from network analysis to innovation systems to MNC spillover effects, often place a premium on the necessity of firms having access to pioneering technologies and societies creating institutions focused promoting the transfer of pioneering knowledge (Breznitz, 2007; Nelson, 1993; Owen-Smith & Powell, 2004). However, recent work reveals that sustained innovation in emerging economies may depend more on access to diverse applied, experiential knowledge which enables backward firms to shift to more modern organizational capabilities. (McDermott & Pietrobelli, 2017; Perez-Aleman, 2011; Pietrobelli & Rabellotti, 2011). The vast majority of emerging economy firms (many of which are small- and medium-sized enterprises) face large technological gaps, and cannot take advantage of international standards and technologies. This absence of absorptive capacity constrains the sequence and nature of learning processes, the shape of technological advances and the core mechanisms of knowledge transfer.
Concerns about forms of innovation, technological upgrading and knowledge diffusion are at the center of growing debates at the intersection of economic geography and MNE strategy, particularly regarding the role of MNEs in emerging economy innovation systems. Traditionally, the view was rather pessimistic where MNEs tended to minimize their local linkages, set up value extracting "islands" within poor economies (Narula, 2018). More nuanced views can be found in cluster analysis that highlights the importance of social capital in developing linkages to prevent the rise of dualism (Giuliani, 2006; Schmitz, 2004). However, the debate about the role of MNEs in establishing innovation connectivity with and in emerging economies is far from settled and this special issue is an attempt to make progress toward resolving it.
In turn, the context of emerging markets offers a growing opportunity to evaluate how innovation systems or broader innovative capacities emerge in ways to create sustained advantage. Emerging economy industry leaders are forced to generate new organizational and institutional constellations in order to overcome technological gaps with the advanced world (Mair, Marti, & Ventresca 2011). Understanding the process of innovation in emerging economies opens the door to exploring new networks, mechanisms and alternative institutional resources to improve access to this knowledge and implement "catch-up processes" (Vasudeva & Anand, 2011; Bartholomew, 1997; McDermott & Pietrobelli, 2017; Fu et al., 2011).
Such discussions naturally lead us to re-examine dominant theories of the MNE and of capabilities creation. In researching issues of knowledge creation as well as product and process upgrading in emerging economies, scholars are exploring the assumptions about internalization theory (Hennart 2012; Narula, 2012), the nature and upgrading of firm-specific advantages (FSAs) as well as the relative locational advantages for MNE innovation activities (Mudambi et al., 2018; Madhok & Keyhani, 2012). Recent debates on the validity of MNE motives to understand strategic-asset augmenting activity by emerging economy MNEs are also worth exploring (Meyer, 2015; Benito, 2015; Elia & Santangelo, 2017).
Indeed, innovation in these countries offers an excellent context to study the creation of new firm capabilities. For instance, MNEs display considerable variation in the governance modes for organizing their R&D activities, which in turn impacts the competence creation in subsidiaries (Palmie et al., 2014). The cross-border transfer of firm level capabilities via joint ventures, strategic alliances and mergers & acquisitions also provides valuable research opportunities (Zhao & Anand, 2009, 2013; Narula & Verbeke, 2015).
Suggested Topics for Submissions
We encourage research that can address innovation at multiple levels of analysis, such as the firm, industry, and value chain as well as comparative analysis of different patterns of firm and institutional strategies across nations and regions. We encourage submissions that draw on a variety of theoretical and disciplinary approaches to the study of innovation in emerging market countries. Suggested topics can include, but are not restricted to:
- What types of innovation strategies are emerging market MNEs creating to penetrate new markets?
- In what ways are advanced economy MNEs altering their learning and alliances strategies with emerging market firms to improve their own innovative capacities?
- What types of cross-border network relationships are emerging and advanced economy firms creating to facilitate and leverage their innovation processes?
- What types of strategies and organizational forms are emerging market public and private actors using to improve their absorptive and innovative capacities?
- What types of internal and external strategies are SMEs using to overcome inherited technological and resources gaps in order to participate in global innovation networks?
- What sort of institutional rules and resources appear to impede or facilitate innovation in emerging market countries?
- What organizational mechanisms provide the best conduit for knowledge flow into and out of emerging markets?
- Under what conditions can emerging economy firms take global leadership in terms of innovation?
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between October 18, 2018, and November 1, 2018, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Bartholomew, S. 1997. National systems of biotechnology innovation: Complex interdependence in the global system. Journal of International Business Studies, 28(2): 241-266.
Benito, G. R. 2015. Why and how motives (still) matter. Multinational Business Review, 23(1): 15-24.
Brandt L., & Thun, E. 2010. The fight for the middle: upgrading, competition, and industrial development in China. World Development, 38(11): 1555-1574.
Breznitz, D. 2007. Innovation and the State: Political Choice and Strategies for Growth in Israel, Taiwan, and Ireland. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
Corredoira, R. A., & McDermott, G. A. 2014. Adaptation, bridging and firm upgrading: How non-market institutions and MNCs facilitate knowledge recombination in emerging markets. Journal of International Business Studies, 45(6): 699-722.
Elia, S., & Santangelo, G. D. 2017. The evolution of strategic asset-seeking acquisitions by emerging market multinationals. International Business Review, 26(5): 855-866.
Fu, X., Pietrobelli, C., & Soete, L. 2011. The role of foreign technology and indigenous innovation in the emerging economies: technological change and catching-up. World Development, 39(7): 1204-1212.
Gereffi, G. 1999. International trade and industrial upgrading in the apparel commodity chain. Journal of International Economics, 48(1): 37-70.
Giuliani, E., Pietrobelli, C., & Rabellotti, R. 2005. Upgrading in global value chains: Lessons from Latin American clusters. World Development, 33(4): 549-573.
Giuliani, E. 2006. The selective nature of knowledge networks in clusters: Evidence from the wine industry. Journal of Economic Geography, 7(2): 139-168.
Govindarajan, V., & Ramamurti, R. 2011. Reverse innovation, emerging markets, and global strategy. Global Strategy Journal, 1(3-4): 191-205.
Gupta, A., & Govindarajan, V. 2000. Knowledge flows within multinational corporations. Strategic Management Journal, 21: 473-496.
Hennart, J. F. 2012. Emerging market multinationals and the theory of the multinational enterprise. Global Strategy Journal, 2: 168-187.
Henderson, R. M., & Clark, K. B. 1990. Architectural innovation: The reconfiguration of existing product technologies and the failure of established firms. Administrative Science Quarterly, 35(1): 9-30.
Henisz, W. J. 2000. The institutional environment for multinational investment. Journal of Law, Economics, and Organization, 16(2): 334-364.
Herrigel, G., Wittke, V., & Voskamp, U. 2013. The process of Chinese manufacturing upgrading: transitioning from unilateral to recursive mutual learning relations. Global Strategy Journal, 3(1): 109-125.
Hirschman, A. O. 1968. The political economy of import-substituting industrialization in Latin America. Quarterly Journal of Economics, 82(1): 1-32.
Khanna, T., & Palepu, K. 2000. The future of business groups in emerging markets: Long-run evidence from Chile. Academy of Management Journal, 43: 268-285.
Leigh, D. & Gifford, K. 1999. Workplace transformation and worker upskilling: the perspective of individual workers. Industrial Relations, 38(2): 174-191.
Madhok, A., & Keyhani, M. 2012. Acquisitions as entrepreneurship: Asymmetries, opportunities, and the internationalization of multinationals from emerging economies. Global Strategy Journal, 2(1): 26-40.
Mair, J., Marti, I. & Ventresca, M. 2012. Building Inclusive Markets in Rural Bangladesh: How Intermediaries Work Institutional Voids. Academy of Management Journal, 55(4): 819-850.
McDermott, G. A., & Corredoira, R. A. 2010. Network composition, collaborative ties, and upgrading in emerging-market firms: Lessons from the Argentine auto-parts sector. Journal of International Business Studies, 41(2): 308-329.
McDermott, G., & Pietrobelli, C. 2017. Walking before you can run: The knowledge, networks and institutions for emerging market SMEs. In A. Camuffo & T. Pedersen (Eds), Breaking up the global value chain: Opportunities and consequences. Advances in International Management, Vol. 30.
Morris, M., Kaplinsky, R., & Kaplan, D. 2012. "One thing leads to another" - Commodities, linkages and industrial development. Resources Policy, 37(4): 408-416.
Morck, R., Yeung, B., & Yu, W. 2000. The information content of stock markets: Why do emerging markets have synchronous stock price movements? Journal of Financial Economics, 58(1): 215-260.
Meyer, K. E. 2015. What is "strategic asset seeking FDI"? Multinational Business Review, 23(1): 57-66.
Mudambi, R., Narula, R., & Santangelo, G. 2018. Location, collocation and innovation by multinational enterprises: a research agenda. Industry and Innovation, 25(3): 229-241.
Mudambi, R. 2008. Location, control and innovation in knowledge-intensive industries. Journal of Economic Geography, 8(5): 699-725.
Narula, R. 2012. Do we need different frameworks to explain infant MNEs from developing countries? Global Strategy Journal, 2(3): 188-204.
Narula, R. 2014. Exploring the paradox of competence-creating subsidiaries: Balancing bandwidth and dispersion in MNEs. Long Range Planning, 47(1-2): 4-15.
Narula, R. 2018. Multinational firms and the extractive sectors in the 21st century: Can they drive development? Journal of World Business, 53(1): 85-91.
Narula, R., & Verbeke, A. 2015. Making internalization theory good for practice: The essence of Alan Rugman's contributions to international business. Journal of World Business, 50(4): 612-622.
Nelson, R. (Ed.) 1993. National Innovation Systems: A Comparative Analysis. New York: Oxford University Press.
Owen-Smith, J., & Powell, W. 2004. Knowledge networks as channels and conduits: The effects of spillovers in the Boston biotechnology community. Organization Science, 15(1): 5-21.
Palmi篓娄, M., Keupp, M. M., & Gassmann, O. 2014. Pull the right levers: Creating internationally "Useful" subsidiary competence by organizational architecture. Long Range Planning, 47(1-2): 32-48.
Pietrobelli, C., & Rabellotti, R. 2011. Global value chains meet innovation systems: Are there learning opportunities for developing countries? World Development, 39(7): 1261-1269.
Rosenkopf, L., & Tushman, M. L. 1998. The coevolution of community networks and technology: Lessons from the flight simulation industry. Industrial and Corporate Change, 7: 311-346.
Schmitz, H. (Ed.) 2004. Local enterprises in the global economy: Issues of governance and upgrading. Northampton, MA: Edward Elgar.
Thun, E. 2006. Changing Lanes in China: Foreign Direct Investment, Local Governments, and Auto Sector Development. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Vasudeva G., & Anand, J. 2011. Unpacking Absorptive Capacity: A Study of Knowledge Utilization from Alliance Portfolios, Academy of Management Journal, 54(3): 611-623.
Zhao, Z .J., & Anand, J. 2009. A multilevel perspective on knowledge transfer: Evidence from the Chinese automotive industry. Strategic Management Journal, 30(9): 959-983.
Zhao, Z. J., & Anand, J. 2013. Beyond boundary spanners: The "collective bridge" as an efficient interunit structure for transferring collective knowledge. Strategic Management Journal, 34(13): 1513-1530.
About the Guest Editors
Jaideep Anand is the William H. Davis Chair and Dean Distinguished Professor at the Fisher College of Business, and the Academic Director of the Center for Innovation and Entrepreneurship at the Ohio State University. He is also a Senior Research Fellow at the Center for Emerging Market Studies at CEIBS. Prior to joining Fisher, he was faculty at the University of Michigan (Ross) and Research Fellow at the William Davidson Institute. His interests include corporate growth and innovation, mergers & acquisitions, and multinational management.
Gerald McDermott is Professor of International Business at the Moore School of Business of the University of South Carolina and is Senior Research Fellow at IAE Business School in Argentina. He specializes on issues of innovation, risk, and institutional change in emerging market countries. His books and articles have examined the impact of industrial networks on the economic governance institutions in post-communist countries; the creation of innovation clusters in manufacturing and agriculture in South America; and the impact of transnational regulatory integration on developing countries.
Ram Mudambi is the Frank M. Speakman Professor of Strategy at the Fox School of Business, Temple University. He is also the Executive Director of the Temple CIBER. Previously he served on the faculties of Case Western Reserve University, University of Reading (UK) and University of North Carolina Chapel Hill. He is a Fellow of the Academy of International Business (AIB), an Honorary Professor at the Center of International Business, University of Leeds (CIBUL), UK, and a Life Fellow of the Academy of the University of Messina, Italy. His current research projects focus on the geography of innovation and the governance of knowledge-intensive processes, especially in the context of emerging economies.
Rajneesh Narula is the John H. Dunning Chair of International Business Regulation at the Henley Business School, University of Reading, UK. His research and consulting have focused on the role of multinational firms in development, innovation and industrial policy, R&D alliances and outsourcing. He has published over a 100 articles and chapters in books on these themes. He is an area Editor of JIBS. He holds honorary appointments at UNU-MERIT, Norwegian School of Business, Urbino University and Oxford University.
Stephan Liozu (Case Western/Ardex Americas) and Andreas Hinterhuber are Editors of a book on Innovation in Pricing published by Routledge in 3Q 2012. Confirmed authors are from academia as well as leading international companies. We are calling for proposals for chapters on any of the following topics:
Organizing the pricing function
New approaches in pricing strategy
New approaches in pricing tactics
Psychological aspects of pricing
We are open to a wide number of research methods and welcome also theoretical contributions (e.g. literature reviews). Format 20-25 pages with the usual request for original, unpublished contributions. We especially welcome further contributions related to Psychological elements of pricing with a preference for empirical papers. Please address any further questions to Stephan Liozu (sliozu@case.edu) and/or Andreas Hinterhuber (full contact information below).
Submission deadline (draft papers): 31 December 2011
Submission deadline final papers: 31 March 2012
Andreas Hinterhuber
Partner, Hinterhuber & Partners
Strategy Pricing Leadership
Innsbruck, Austria
Phone: +43 664 402 7 402
andreas@hinterhuber.com
www.hinterhuber.com
The Journal of Product Innovation Management is proud to announce a special issue focused on the future of product development and innovation management in the global automotive industry. The automotive industry is an integral component of the global economy and is unique in that it encompasses every aspect of the value chain – from raw materials to design and development, manufacturing, sales and service, and even disposal. Such complex manufacturing systems have enormous economic impacts on many sectors of the economies where they persist. Every value creating area of this business is undergoing significant innovative change as a result of the emergence of new markets and competitors, the worst recession in generations, and increased direct and indirect government intervention. Product planning, portfolio management, supply chain and operations, marketing, engineering, design, IT, finance, and retail management have all experienced significant and somewhat radical changes to the way they do business. Radical and incremental product and process based innovations abound in this industry and have far reaching implications. It is important to understand how companies are managing the new product development and innovation processes in this environment, what types of products those companies will produce in the future, and how consumer wants and needs will be satisfied while dealing with greater regulation.
While we expect all papers to be related to innovation in the automotive industry, we seek a mix of papers in terms of empirical and theoretical approaches, disciplinary focus, as well as multiple levels of analysis. Cross-disciplinary work is strongly encouraged. In addition, submissions should have clear industry implications for management strategy and practice at the level of the firm and/or economic, social and political consequences at a societal level. We welcome practitioner participation.
The purpose of this special issue is to provide a forum for articles exploring leading-edge issues of significant academic and managerial interest which have been traditionally under-researched, grounded in a specific industry context. Submissions about any of the following topics (and/or combinations thereof) are suggested, but certainly not limited to:
- The role of product architectures and new product development and product launch
- Product development teams including the design and management of global, cross-cultural, and/or multinational teams; inter-organizational NPD teams; virtual teams
- Innovation in the marketing, sales, and distribution practices and trends
- The role of technology in the new product development process
- Innovation in environmental sustainability vis-à-vis fuel efficiency, emissions, mobility
- Process innovation in manufacturing -- productivity, quality, product variety, flexibility
- Comparative firm performance / benchmarking of new product development and management.
- Diffusion of practices in new product development and management
- The role of national industrial policies on automotive innovation and market presence.
Scholars committed to industry studies have demonstrated that the results of industry based research grounded in observation, and integrated with theory and analysis, can make important contributions not only to academic knowledge, but also to industry practice and public policy. We encourage submissions that employ a wide variety of both quantitative and qualitative research methods as it is possible to provide a unique perspective using diverse methodological approaches. Further, interdisciplinary/international/industry-academic co-author teams are highly encouraged.
All submissions other than invited commentaries will be subject to the standard double-blind review process followed by JPIM. All manuscripts must be original, unpublished works that are not concurrently under review for publication elsewhere.
- An electronic copy should be submitted to the special issue editors by: August 5, 2011
- All submissions should conform to the JPIM manuscript submission guidelines available at http://www.pdma.org/journal/AuthorInfo.pdf
- The title page should include the names, titles, professional affiliations, and contact information of the authors. Authors’ names should appear on the title page only. Authors should refrain from revealing their identity in the body of the manuscript
- Clearly identify the corresponding author and provide a list of key words
- Please provide names and contact information for up to 3 individuals, unfamiliar with the paper, who would be qualified to review the manuscript.
Co-editors of the Special Issue:
Professor Janell D. Townsend, Ph.D.
Marketing and International Business
Oakland University
348 Elliott Hall
Rochester, MI 48309 USA
1 (248) 370-2544
townsend@oakland.edu
http://www.sba.oakland.edu/faculty/townsend/
Professor Roger J. Calantone, Ph.D.
Eli Broad Chaired University Professor of Business
Co-Director Institute for Entrepreneurship and Innovation
Michigan State University N370 Business College Complex
East Lansing, MI USA
1 (517) 432-6400
rogercal@msu.edu
Innovation is the creation and transformation of new knowledge into new products, processes, or services that meet market needs. As such, innovation creates new businesses and is the fundamental source of growth in business and industry and can be the key driver for the creation of more sustainable economies and company strategies.
The ability to generate and sustain innovation has become critical for companies as markets grow more global, open, and competitive, and as customer expectations grow more diverse and demanding.
This special issue wants to cover the current issues in innovation management and innovation networks and is interested in topics like:
- The impact of new sustainability requirements on the dynamic capabilities that a firm should develop and sustain to remain innovative and therewith competitive in turbulent environments. In particular, which new innovation capabilities are required to integrate environmental, social and financial objectives?
- How, and under what conditions, do entrepreneurs in developing countries innovate? And what can be done to support innovation by entrepreneurs in developing countries?
- Balancing capability building for radical and incremental innovations. Incremental innovation capabilities consist of skills and competences that refine existing products, while radical innovation capabilities are covering skills which are needed to significantly transform existing products or services. What kind of learning creates capabilities needed for the generation of incremental or of radical innovations? What kind of lessons can be taken respectively how to manage the process of developing capabilities in innovation management?
- Analysis of innovation networks: Economic operations and thus innovations are embedded in social relations and structures. Therefore, the organizational units that create innovation are not individual businesses, but usually networks. From a resource point of view, networks hold a variety of advantages for their members, such as access to material and immaterial resources, information and knowledge. How can the new role of intermediaries as an architect of collective exploration and creation of knowledge in open innovation be described? What are the key variables in the process of managing innovation networks? Any kind of discussions and analysis of innovation networks are welcome.
This is not an exhaustive list.
Deadline
Full papers for this special edition of 'management revue' must be with the editors by July 31st, 2014. All submissions will be subject to a double blind review process. Please submit your papers electronically via the journal submission system at http://hermes.hsu-hh.de/mrev/ using 'Innovation Management' as article section.
Looking forward to hearing from you!
Susanne Gretzinger, University of Southern Denmark, Sønderborg (sug@sam.sdu.dk)
Simon Fietze, University of Southern Denmark, Sønderborg (simonf@sam.sdu.dk)
Wenzel Matiaske, Helmut-Schmidt-University Hamburg (Germany) (matiaske@hsu-hh.de)
China’s influence in business and innovation within the World is likely to grow over time. History shows that China once greatly influenced Western culture and provided the world with new, radical inventions. However, the innovation within the country did not progress well even with the establishment of new China in 1949 and in particular during the “cultural revolution” and retreatment from the rest of the world during the twentieth century. Starting with the reforms of Xiaoping it was Western culture’s turn to influence Sino-culture and Chinese innovation, which has resulted largely in what some have called a ‘cost innovation’ strategy (Zeng & Williamson, 2007). However, this influence has been shown to exaggerate the incremental nature of innovations within the Chinese context (Johnson & Weiss, 2008). As the next phase in its transition towards a major global economic power, China has embarked on a mission to develop its capabilities for new and radical ‘indigenous’ innovation and update the educational and intellectual mission of the country.
Papers for this special issue should relate to major issues regarding innovation in China- for example, education (and its reforms), learning and creativity, innovation type and business growth. We welcome original empirical and conceptually rigorous papers at all levels of analysis. In general, papers will ideally examine the connections among innovation, education and managing technology and business growth in China.
Topics may include:
- Historical perspectives of innovation, learning and/or education in China.
- Case studies of Chinese-created radical innovations.
- Educational and innovation practices at the individual level.
- Descriptive case studies characterizing the creativity of individuals and correlating this with educational background and life experiences within the Chinese context.
- Explorations of how individuals manage creative tensions within educational instruction in the schools, colleges and universities in China.
- Educational and innovation practices at the classroom level.
- Exploration of the progress of various regions of China in classroom reforms.
- Comparison cases of classrooms in which CBU (creative but undesirable) student behaviour is tolerated versus DBU (desirable but uncreative) student behaviour.
- Educational and innovation practices at the industry and institutional level.
- Investigations of the creative process in Chinese educational institutions.
- Case studies and descriptions of industry and the need and use of creativity to explore the practices being implemented by Chinese companies like Lenovo, Haier, Alibaba and Baidu.
- Educational and innovation practices at the national level.
- Educational and innovation policies involved in technological and process/service related innovation.
- Critical analyses of China’s national policies toward innovation and education.
Coverage (of JTMC)
JTMC is the only journal that focuses exclusively on technology management in China. The journal encourages theoretical and applied research papers which identify good practice, address the existing deficiencies in processes and assist in the development of the transfer of technology and knowledge.
Coverage includes the following areas of technology management and how they impact upon the areas of marketing, human resources, accounting and finance and the supply chain:
Technology management
Technology transfer
Chinese business and culture
Research management in China
Innovation management
Technology economics
Knowledge transfer and sharing
Knowledge management
Technology and business strategy
Project management
Entrepreneurship and leadership
Cross - culture management
Product life cycle management
Journal Editor
Dr Richard Li-Hua, Salford University, Manchester, UK
r.li-hua@salford.ac.uk
Guest Editors of the Special Issue
Dr. William H.A. Johnson, Penn State University
Professor Joseph W. Weiss, Bentley University
Send manuscripts for consideration to William H.A. Johnson at: whj1@psu.edu
Deadline for submitting papers to Guest Editors: June 15, 2010
Institutional theory provides a non-economic explanation of organizational behaviors and strategies in business markets (DiMaggio & Powell, 1991; Scott, 2008). Institutions regulate economic activities by setting the rules of the game as the basis for production, exchange, and distribution. It is essential for managers to follow rules, norms, and belief systems related to the institutional environment and mobilize their social, economic, and political resources to adapt and change institutional environments. Scott (2008) has claimed that institutional theory has reached its adulthood. Nevertheless, very limited rigorous research has been conducted in the area of business marketing. As such, scholars have called for further coverage of a wide range of open questions related to the applications of institutional theory in business marketing (Grewal & Dharwadkar 2002, Yang, Su, & Fam, 2012).
The primary focus of this special issue is devoted to how institutional theory can be advanced in the context of business marketing. Specifically, we are interested in exploring two broad, interrelated areas of institutional theory. The first area lies in the development and conceptualization of various institution-based constructs and their inter-relationships with other well-established theories, such as transaction cost economics, and the resource-based view, (Peng, Wang, & Jiang 2008). For example, firms often employ such approaches as isomorphism, decoupling, ceremonial adoption to gain social acceptance from various legitimating parties. How can these concepts apply to marketing practices in channel management? The second area is to explore performance implications of institutional environments from an interactive perspective (Yang & Wang, 2011). Such interactive perspectives explore how firms accommodate strategic responses to handle institutional constraints and take advantage of institutional capital. For example, how do institutional pressure and process (e.g., regulating, validating, and habitualization; Grewal & Dharwadkar 2002) evoke business strategic actions, which in turn, affect firm performance?
This special issue of Industrial Marketing Management encourages innovative research with strong theoretical grounding and empirical rigor to explore the following (not all-inclusive) topics:
• The key implications of institutional environments on firm strategies and performance;
• How firms interpret, manipulate, revise, and elaborate institutional environments in channel management;
• The institutional perspective of adoption and implementation of marketing practice in channels;
• Strategies used to cope with institutional challenges in managing international marketing channels;
• The effect of institutional environments on opportunism in channel management;
• What is institutional capital? How can firms gain it and strategically use it to gain competitive advantage? What is the role of institutions as social capital in relational exchange and transaction cost analysis?
• The typologies of institutional pressures (coercive, normative, and mimetic processes of social reproduction) and process in business markets;
• How do firms handle the dilemma of efficiency and legitimacy?
• How do business marketing managers mobilize their social, economic, and political resources to adapt and change institutional environments?
• What are the ways in which manufacturers and distributors, as institutional change agents, can be studied?
• What strategies do firms employ to gain legitimacy in a business market?
• The legitimacy considerations of a firm’s choice of business partners;
• The institutional effects of interfirm collaborations in business markets;
• The effect of institutions on knowledge management (e.g., acquisition, transfer, and learning) and innovation activities in marketing channels;
• The linkage of the institutional environment to the internal polity and economy of channel dyads;
• How useful are the existing methodological tools in institutional theory for studying business marketing?
• The methodological issue regarding the level of analysis (e.g., the interaction among macro-, meso- and micro-level of institutions);
• What strategies do managers used to bridge institutional distances between two business partners?
• The connection of institutional theory with other organizational theories such as resource dependence and transaction cost economics.
Manuscript submission and any inquires should be sent electronically by June 1, 2012 as an MSWord file attached to an e-mail to special issue coeditors, Professor Zhilin Yang, at mkzyang@cityu.edu.hk or forrest.yang@vuw.ac.nz, and Professor Chenting Su at mkctsu@cityu.edu.hk with a copy to the IMM editor at plaplaca@journalimm.com, For journal information and how to prepare the manuscript, please access Industrial Marketing Management’s Guide for Authors at the following URL: http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/journaldescription.cws_home/505720/authorinstructions
References
DiMaggio, Paul J. and Walter W. Powell (1991), "Introduction," in The New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis, Walter W. Powell and Paul J. DiMaggio, eds. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1–38.
Grewal, Rajdeep and Ravi Dharwadkar (2002), "The Role of the Institutional Environment in Marketing Channels," Journal of Marketing, 66 (July), 82–97.
Peng, Mike, Denis Wang and Yi Jiang (2008), “An Institution-based View of International Business Strategy: A Focus on Emerging Economies,” Journal of International Business Studies, 39 (5), 920-936.
Scott, W. Richard (2008), Institutions and Organizations: Ideas and Interests. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
Yang, Zhilin and Chenlu Wang (2011), “Guanxi as a Governance Mechanism in Business Markets: Its Characteristics, Relevant Theories, and Future Research Directions,” Industrial Marketing Management, 40 (7), 492-495.
Yang, Zhilin, Chenting Su and Kim-Shyan Fam (2012), “Dealing with Institutional Distances in International Marketing Channels: Governance Strategies that Engender Legitimacy and Efficiency,” Journal of Marketing, 76 (3).
The International Journal of Emerging Markets (IJoEM), published by Emerald, would like to invite papers for a special issue on the theme of Institutions and Emerging Markets. The final deadline for submission is December 1, 2012, but the editors would encourage authors to submit their papers to the upcoming Academy of International Business Southeast USA (AIB-SE) Annual Conference by June 30, 2012. Please visit the 2012 AIB-SE website at www.aibse.org for details and instructions on how to submit your paper. The best accepted thematic conference papers on institutions and emerging markets will be invited to a special Journal Paper Development Workshop, sponsored by Emerald. The workshop will allow all invited authors to meet with the IJoEM editor-in-chief and the guest editors of the special issue, discuss their work with colleagues and so further develop their papers, which will then be automatically considered for publication in the IJoEM special issue.
International Journal of Emerging Markets
Constituting over two-thirds of the world’s population and one-fifth of its GDP, the emerging markets are expected to continue to impact the world’s new economic order, ushering in changes in economic thought, management philosophy, global operations, and financial flows. Given their importance to the global economy, the emerging markets are an important testing ground for existing models and concepts in international business, management, marketing, economics, and finance, pushing the boundaries of existing theories. They are also fertile ground for developing new models and theories with different contextual origins.
Although there is no universal agreement about which countries belong to the group of “emerging” markets, there is some consensus in the literature on their characteristics, including:
(1) Emerging markets economies are growing relatively faster, as compared to the rest of the world;
(2) Emerging market governments are transitioning their institutions, promulgating new laws, and changing their governance structures. New economic freedoms, in particular as they relate to business, are begin to appear in formerly politically restrictive regions;
(3) Emerging markets are becoming increasingly integrated with the rest of the world due to the movement of people, ideas, money, and products, as well as by their entry into international institutions;
(4) Emerging markets still suffer from relatively backward governance structures, under-developed institutions, corruption, deficiencies in infrastructure, income inequalities, uneven development, and a host of other socio-economic and political problems that may be obstacles to reaching their full potential.
The International Journal of Emerging Markets (IJoEM), published by Emerald, brings together articles that examine the emerging markets, both theoretically and empirically. Highly rigorous research, case studies, and review articles, such as meta-analytic reviews, are also encouraged. We especially welcome comparative studies of emerging markets or studies comparing the emerging markets with the developed markets. IJoEM offers contributors and readers an opportunity to explore issues related to the emerging markets from multi-functional (international business, management, marketing, finance, and accounting), multi-disciplinary (business, economics, area studies, and other social sciences), and multi-national geographic perspectives. For more information, please visit the IJoEM website at www.emeraldinsight.com/ijoem.htm
IJoEM Special Issue Topics
Potential topics for this special issue may include, but are certainly not limited to:
- MNC responses to emerging market institutions
- Emerging market multinationals
- Legitimacy in emerging market contexts
- Emerging markets and global institutions
- Formal and informal institutions in emerging market contexts
- Quantitative and qualitative analysis in emerging markets
AIB-SE Journal Paper Development Workshop and Special Journal Issue
The Best Thematic Papers accepted for the 2012 AIB-SE conference will be invited for an IJoEM Journal Paper Development Workshop, to be held during the annual AIB-SE conference in Fort Lauderdale, Florida, which will be sponsored by Emerald. The workshop will provide participants with an opportunity to meet with the IJoEM Editor-in-Chief, Dr. Ilan Alon, present and discuss their work and further develop their papers before submitting them for review to an academic journal. All papers accepted for the journal paper development workshop will automatically be invited for submission to the special issue on “Institutions in Emerging Markets” to be published by IJoEM in 2013. The guest editors of this special issue, Dr. Daniel Rottig and Dr. Matthew C. Mitchell will be available during the conference and workshop for questions and further information. Furthermore, all authors of accepted conference papers will have a chance to win one of multiple best paper awards, which include cash prices for the winners. For more information please visit the 2012 AIB-SE Conference Website at www.aibse.org
IJoEM Announcement of Editor-In-Chief
Dr. Ilan Alon has been selected as the next Editor-in-Chief of the International Journal of Emerging Markets. Known to many in the IB arena, Ilan is the Cornell Professor of International Business and the Director of the China and India Centers at Rollins College, Florida. He is also Editor of AIB Insights. Ilan will begin his editorial tenure on 1 May 2012, with responsibility for issues published in 2013 and beyond.
We look forward to your submissions. If you have any questions please don't hesitate to contact the editors at anytime.
Ilan Alon, Ph.D.
Editor-in-Chief
Director, The China and India Centers
Rollins College and Harvard University
ialon@rollins.edu
Daniel Rottig, Ph.D.
Special Issue Guest Editor
Assistant Professor of International Business and Strategy
Lutgert College of Business - Florida Gulf Coast University
DRottig@fgcu.edu
Matthew C. Mitchell, Ph.D.
Special Issue Guest Editor
Assistant Professor of International Business and Strategy
College of Business and Public Administration - Drake University
Matthew.Mitchell@drake.edu
Background and Motivation:
Business models exclusively focused on exploiting economies of scale are no longer suitable in Western economies with relatively high wages and developed welfare systems. A transition towards more innovation-based and difficult-to-imitate economic models would permit economies in the developed world to maintain growth trends and competitiveness. This development can take place through the integration of differentiated services into manufacturing offerings, a phenomenon described in the literature as servitization (Vandermerwe and Rada, 1988; Baines et al., 2009).
A generalised decrease of returns on product sales, coupled with an increased focus on customer satisfaction has been encouraging a rising number of companies to supplement their product offerings with services along the whole product lifecycle. The combination of product-service offerings help in reducing vulnerability and volatility of cash flows throughout the life of a product, allowing for higher shareholder value. In addition, competitive advantages achieved through services are often more sustainable since, being less visible and more labour dependent, services are more difficult to imitate than other strategies focused on product innovation, technological superiority or low prices. Finally, service sectors benefit from the development of digital technology, especially in rural areas (Rahman et al., 2011). Thus servitization is recognized as an important source of competitive advantage and firm performance (Neely, 2008; Visnjic and Van Looy, 2013).
Current research is rich in firm-based case studies and descriptions of successful service-oriented business models. Nevertheless, and despite recognition in the US and Europe of the potential transformative power of service innovation (see for example European Commission, 2011), it remains undeveloped in terms of analysis of the links between servitization processes and territorial competitiveness. For example, academics in the field have not yet offered specific empirical approaches to assess the degree of servitization that a region and/or its component industries have experienced.
The current literature is also silent with regards analysis of public policies encouraging the development of service-oriented strategies in firms or groups of firms as a means to driving forward territorial competitiveness. Indeed, while there is burgeoning research on policy mix for innovation and competitiveness (Cooke et al., 2011; Flanagan et al., 2011; Borras and Edquist, 2013; Ketels, 2013), there is little explicit analysis of how these policy mixes might relate to servitization processes (see Hsie and Lee (2012) as one of the exceptions). In this context and at this juncture, greater academic analysis of the link between servitization, territorial competitiveness and associated public policies has the potential to make important impacts.
Goals and Topics:
The Special Issue welcomes papers that offer novel research contributions in exploring the links between servitization and territorial competitiveness. Papers may make theoretical and/or empirical contributions on the following suggested topics:
- Theoretical developments on the links between servitization and competitiveness.
- Case studies on implementing service strategies in a given industry or region.
- Empirical approaches-methods on how to estimate the degree of servitization of a region and/or industry.
- Empirical approaches-methods linking servitization and competitiveness of regions and countries.
- Assessment of public policies focusing on the development of service initiatives.
Submissions:
- All papers will be subject to double-blind peer review, according to author guidelines available at: www.emeraldinsight.com/cr.htm
- Submissions to Competitiveness Review are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/comprev (please select the correct special issue from the drop-down menu)
Submission deadline : January 5th 2015
Take note that there is a Servitzation conference at Deusto University in Bilbao, Spain in November 2014 (http://www.servitization.org/?lang=es). This can serve to expose papers and get pre-emptive feedback from peers and the editors of this special issue.
Papers will be published in 2015.
References:
Baines, T. S., H. W. Lightfoot, O. Benedettini, and J. M. Kay. 2009. The servitization of manufacturing: A review of literature and reflection on future challenges. Journal of Manufacturing Technology Management, 20: 547–567.
Borras and Edquist (2013). The choice of innovation policy instruments. Technological forecasting and social change, 80(8): 1513–1522.
Cooke, P., Asheim, B., Boschma, R., Martin, R., Schwartz, D. and Todtling, F. 2011. Handbook of Regional Innovation and Growth. Cheltenham:Edward Elgar.
European Commission. 2011. Meeting the challenge of Europe 2020: The transformative power of service innovation, Report by the Expert Panel on Service Innovation in the EU.
Flanagan, K., Uyarra, E. and Laranja, M. 2011. Reconceptualising the policy mix for innovation, Research Policy, 40(5): 702–713.
Hsie, P.F., Lee, C.S. (2012). A note on value creation in consumption-oriented regional service clusters. Competitiveness Review, Vol. 22 No. 2, pp. 170-180.
Ketels, Christian (2013). Recent Research on Competitiveness and Clusters: What Are the Implications for Regional Policy? Cambridge Journal of Regions, Economy and Society, 6 (2): 269-284
Neely A. 2008. Exploring the financial consequences of the servitization of manufacturing. Operations Management Research 1(2): 103–118.
Rahman, S.M., Tootoonchi, A., Monahan, M.L. (2011). Digital technology: a vehicle for making rural businesses competitive. Competitiveness Review, Vol. 21 No. 5, pp. 441-451.
Vandermerwe S, Rada J. 1988. Servitization of business: adding value by adding services. European Management Journal 6(4): 314–324.
Visnjic, I.K. and Van Looy, B. 2013. Servitization: Disentangling the impact of service business model innovation on manufacturing firm performance. Journal of Operations Management, 31(4), pp. 169-180.
Current cross-cultural management research has a decidedly comparative flavor; we tend to compare management practices in one nation versus another. The globalization of trade and an increasingly mobile international workforce make intercultural interactions within and between organizations commonplace. These intercultural interactions, whether face-to-face or virtual, can take place within a given geographic location or across countries. However, we only have a limited understanding of how individuals and organizations interact, communicate, negotiate, and manage conflict across cultural boundaries. Previous research shows that when interacting with counterparts from different cultures, we may experience variations in negotiation strategies (Adair & Brett, 2005; Brett & Okumura, 1998; Brett, 2014), asymmetrical communication experiences (Liu, Chua, & Stahl, 2010), different sensitivities to self-construal (Lee, 2005), or different motivations for consensus (Liu et al., 2012). A recent review of literature on conflict management (Tjosvold, Wong, & Chen, 2014) reveals that open-minded discussions and mutually beneficial relationships are critical to resolving conflicts. Combining these two lines of research, we ask how the intercultural context challenges the development of mutually beneficial relationships? Is cultural complexity a barrier for open communication? Can cultural diversity facilitate creative and constructive solutions to intercultural conflict?
The purpose of this special issue is to showcase research that sheds light on the dynamics, antecedents, consequences, and contextual factors that influence intercultural conflict and collaboration. We invite theoretical and empirical papers using qualitative, quantitative, and mixed approaches to explore intercultural interactions at the individual, team, organizational, and multiple levels. We invite papers from management and other disciplines to advance the understanding of intercultural conflict and collaboration, including but not limited to the following issues:
- What are the individual, cultural, societal, and institutional causes of intercultural conflict? What might help diffuse the negative impact of the causes and consequences of such intercultural conflict? What would facilitate constructive management of intercultural conflict? What and how could we harness the positive consequences associated with diverse perspectives and approaches to yield more innovative solutions to problems/issues that confront us as rapid changes and growing complexity become the norm rather than the exception?
- Why do we collaborate interculturally at the individual, team, and firm levels? What constitute intrinsic and extrinsic motivations for intercultural collaboration? What are the dynamics of such motivation that influence the success and sustainability of intercultural collaboration? How can we assess the benefits and costs of culturally diverse teams?
- What individual characteristics might influence the ways intercultural conflict and collaboration are managed? How are these characteristics developed?
- What kinds of team composition and dynamics influence success and failure in managing intercultural conflict and collaboration?
- How do organizations manage intercultural conflict and collaboration with multiple stakeholders? Do they manage conflict with clients, suppliers, and customers from different cultural backgrounds similarly or differently? What determines the similarity or differences in their approaches? Do organizations collaborate with intercultural partners differently? What strengthens and weakens intercultural collaboration?
The list of topics is suggestive, not comprehensive. We are open to multiple perspectives on identifying new areas for enhancing the understanding of intercultural conflict and collaboration at multiple levels of analysis.
References:
Adair, W.L., & Brett, J. M. 2005. The negotiation dance: Time, culture, and behavioral sequences in negotiation. Organization Science, 16, 33-51.
Brett, J. 2014. Negotiating globally (3rd ed.). San Francisco: John Wiley & Sons.
Brett, J. M., & Okumura, T. (1998). Inter- and intracultural negotiation: U.S. and Japanese negotiators. Academy of Management Journal, 41(5), 495-510.
Lee, S. 2005. Judgment of ingroups and outgroups in intra- and intercultural negotiation: The role of interdependent self-construal in judgment timing. Group Decision and Negotiation, 14(1), 43-62.
Liu, L.A., Chua, C.H., & Stahl, G. 2010. Quality of communication experience: Definition, measurement, and implications for intercultural negotiations. Journal of Applied Psychology, 95(3), 469-487.
Liu, L.A., Friedman, R.A., Barry, B., Gelfand, M.J., & Zhang, Z-X. 2012. The dynamics of consensus building in intracultural and intercultural negotiations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 57(2), 269-304.
Tjosvold, D., Wong, A.S.H., & Chen, N.Y.F. 2014. Constructively managing conflicts in organizations. Annual Review of Organizational Psychology and Organizational Behavior, 1, 545-568.
Submission Guidelines and Deadline:
To be considered for this special issue, manuscripts need to meet the following guidelines: (1) be submitted through the ScholarOne website http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ccmij, (2) be between 7,000 and 12,000 words in length including references and appendices, and (3) follow the manuscript requirements outlined on the journal’s website: http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=ccm#10.
All submissions will undergo a double-blind review process. The submission deadline is September 1, 2016.
Questions about the special issue can be directed to the guest editors: Leigh Anne Liu (laliu@gsu.edu), Wendi Adair (wladair@uwaterloo.ca), Dean Tjosvold (tjosvold@ln.edu.hk), or the Editor-in-Chief Rosalie Tung (tung@sfu.ca).
Guest Editors:
Leigh Anne Liu is an associate professor of international business at Georgia State University.
Leigh Anne studies the roles of culture and cognition in negotiation, conflict management, collaboration, teams, and relationships in multicultural settings. Her research has appeared in Administrative Science Quarterly, Journal of Applied Psychology, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, and Management and Organization Review, among other outlets. She has been a visiting professor at Toulouse Business School in France, Peking University, and Nanjing University in China. She has consulted for Fortune 500 companies and the nonprofit sectors on conflict management and multicultural competence programs. Leigh Anne has taught courses and workshops for undergraduate, MBA, MIB, PhD, and executive students on topics of international negotiation, multicultural competence, global management, and cross-cultural behavior.
Wendi Adair is Associate Professor in the Department of Psychology and Director of the Culture at Work Lab at the University of Waterloo. Dr. Adair’s research focuses on negotiation and conflict management in the global marketplace. Other areas of research include culture and creativity, culture and communication context, and third culture building in multicultural teams. Wendi is Associate Editor of Negotiation and Conflict Management Research and past president of the International Association for Conflict Management. Her research has appeared in outlets including Journal of Applied Psychology, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, and Organization Science, and she is co-editor of the Handbook of Research on Negotiation (2013). She has taught negotiation and conflict management, cross-cultural organizational behavior, leading and managing multicultural teams, and inclusive communication for undergraduate, MA, PhD, corporate, and nonprofit audiences.
Dean Tjosvold is Henry Y. W. Fong Chair Professor of Management, Lingnan University in Hong Kong. He has taught at the Pennsylvania State University and Simon Fraser University in Vancouver. He is a past president of the International Association for Conflict Management and was elected to the Academy of Management Board of Governors in 2004. Dean has published over 200 articles, 20 books, 30 book chapters, and 100 conference papers on managing conflict, cooperation and competition, decision-making, power, and other management issues. He is a past Associate Editor, Journal of Organizational Behavior; Ex-Officio Senior Editor, the Journal of World Business; and past Associate Editor, Group Decision and Negotiation. His books have been selected by Fortune and other Book Clubs and have been translated into Chinese and Spanish. With colleagues, he has written books on teamwork, leadership, and conflict management published in Mainland China. He is a partner in his family’s health care business based in Minnesota, USA.
Traditionally, corporations have taken mostly reactive positions on climate change by applying mitigation and adaptation strategies in response to current or future risks. Few corporations have taken a pro-active, opportunity-seeking, strategic approach to improve competitiveness over and above the mitigation and adaptation requirements set by policymakers, industry norms, or shifting consumer preferences.
The discussion should no longer focus on whether or not human activity has an impact on a changing climate, or how much impact it has, but rather on how to maximize competitiveness while mitigating the change.
The purpose of the current special issue is to stimulate an interdisciplinary, integrated discussion across a wide range of issues related to climate change and multinational corporations.
We strongly encourage submissions from physical science and social science collaborations. We solicit both conceptual and empirical contributions related to practice that address, but are not limited to, the following topics:
-
Adaptation and mitigation actions are complementary and mutually achievable.
- How can or do MNCs capitalize on this synergy?
- When is it advantageous to focus exclusively on mitigation and/or adaptation?
- What adaptation and mitigation dimensions should be incorporated into the strategic management process?
-
A key challenge faced by MNCs is to ensure concrete solutions for adaptation to the dual impact of climate change and climate policy.
- How do MNCs assure visibility and influence with regulatory decision makers in formulation of policy?
- What should every MNC know about mitigation and adaptation from the business viewpoint?
- How should return on investment (ROI) in adaptation and mitigation be measured? – What are the appropriate metrics?
- How do MNCs influence relevant stakeholders and bring them into the climate strategy process?
-
What are current best practices in pro-active climate strategy that go beyond adaptation and mitigation? Is there room for arbitrage?
- What are the effects of the increasing pressures put on MNCs operating in emerging markets, including China?
- At the country level, China is developing a significant position in solar and other energy and climate mitigation technologies. Will they also lead in pro-active climate strategy that goes beyond mitigation?
-
What can MNCs learn from the historically leading markets, Germany for example, with respect to climate adaptation and mitigation?
- How can developed country MNCs build on new climate mitigating technologies in competing developing economies?
- Can climate strategy practices of developed country MNCs be appropriated by developing country MNCs? Should they be?
Studies from different scientific streams have generally failed to step into each other’s areas of research, hence missing opportunities for cross-fertilization. Although scholars raised this issue earlier (e.g, Hoffman, 2000; Kolk & Pinkse, 2007), there has not been a systematic attempt in the literature to address this important issue.
Therefore, a major goal of this special issue is to encourage articles that apply new and innovative ways to inform practice.
This special issue supports approaches that might face challenges in more traditional outlets. We seek breakthrough ideas. Shorter pieces are also welcome. Case studies should go beyond descriptive approaches by including a substantial discussion section that emphasizes generalizability and potential transferability to the target audiences’ domains.
Submissions for this issue should be submitted electronically to TIBR at http://mc.manuscriptcenteral.com/tibr .
Important Dates - Submission deadline: November 1, 2011, Publication release: 2012
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All papers are refereed through a double-blind peer review process. A guide for authors and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page. Improperly formatted papers will be unsubmitted for correction by the contact author.
Note: Please indicate in your submission that the submission is for this special issue. Do NOT include your identifying contact information in your manuscript when uploading it into the submission system. Authors of accepted papers will have to sign and submit a copyright transfer form.
For questions regarding this special issue, authors are invited to contact Dr. Andreas Schotter, andreas.schotter@thunderbird.edu or Prof. Michael Evan Goodsite, mgo@dmu.dk.
Questions about the submission process should be addressed to TIBR Managing Editor Suzy Howell, suzy.howell@thunderbird.edu .
The IJBR is currently accepting papers for an upcoming special issue entitled: International Business Strategy in Emerging Economies. The purpose of the special issue is to develop theoretical and empirical approaches in the field of international journal of business research, strategic management and entrepreneurship. The editors invite papers in which questions from the public domain are framed for further study by management scholars, as well as papers that systematically apply theories and empirical approaches from strategy and entrepreneurship to issues related to the public interest. The ultimate objective is to develop a long-range agenda for research on innovation in the public interest.
Subject Coverage Topics of interest include but are not limited to:
*International and Global Strategy
*Global Strategy and Emerging Economies
*Business models and business model innovations
*Original empirical research contributions exploring linkages among cooperative strategies, innovation, organizational effectiveness and competitiveness
*Case studies on cooperative strategies for competitiveness or innovation
*Exemplars of theory building and its induction in competitiveness to develop constructs and testable hypotheses.
*Strategic alliances for internationalization
*Learning & innovation capabilities: issues & measurement
*Collaborative business models (e.g. for standardization)
*Knowledge creation and technological innovation
*Collaboration strategies for technology standard battles
*Organizational performance and competitiveness
*Antecedents and consequences of firm competitiveness
*Business model innovation for industrial competitiveness
The U.S. President Donald Trump, following his “America First” policy, has imposed tariffs on imports from numerous countries and wants to modify or terminate current trade agreements with other countries, which has created worldwide anti-globalization sentiment. Journal of International Business and Law (JIBL) is calling for student papers for its special issue on International Business Strategies to Cope with Trade Wars.
The topics include but are not limited to:
- Business or corporate strategy to reduce or minimize the impact of the trade wars
- Business or corporate strategy to avoid the boycotting by the consumers of the country that is in a war with the country of the firm
- Business or corporate strategy to compete against other countries’ firms in a trade war
- Business or corporate strategy to protect the brand image by separating the brand from the country of the origin effect
The paper should have a student as a leading or sole author.
As for the format, follow the Journal of International Business Studies (JIBS) style at https://aib.msu.edu/jibs
The submission due of the full paper is November 1, 2019. Submit to Dr. Boonghee Yoo (boonghee.yoo@hofstra.edu), faculty editor, Professor of Marketing and International Business, Frank G. Zarb School of Business, Hofstra University.
The accepted papers are expected to be published in the fall issue of 2019.
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) has become a catchphrase, possibly because it means different things to different people, it serves many political and marketing purpose, and because the concept itself of CSR is unclear, ambiguous, multidimensional and changing. Multinational enterprises (MNEs), which by definition operate and are managed across national jurisdictions, are increasingly powerful and not always accountable entities.
This power and lack of accountability is reflected both at international and national levels. In order to attract and maintain Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) nations have to create favourable conditions for foreign corporations. This conflict between FDI and national sovereignty may weaken national governments and limit their regulatory actions at both the national and transnational level, explaining the shift from nation-state regulation towards alternative forms of regulation. These alternative forms rely heavily on voluntary initiatives by the MNEs which are implemented and monitored by the civil society and MNEs themselves.
Since the 1990s’ globalisation has been a growing concern on socially responsible MNEs, and CSR and corporate governance have became top priorities for businesses. In today’s global economy, it can be observed a decreasing tolerance of poor working condition and environmental degradation. This book offers an understanding and contextualising the implication of a firm’s behaviour to its social stakeholders, shareholders and the environment at the international level.
Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Political, cultural and social responsibility issues at the firm level
• Sustainability and international business
• Multinational enterprises (MNEs) at the local and international environment
• Challenges for MNEs operating in emerging countries
• MNEs and poverty alleviation
• CSR and the bottom of the pyramid
• MNEs and national sovereignty
• International Business ethics and global risk
• International business and the illegal economies
• IB, corruption and bribery
• IB and criminal organisations
• Public- Private and Business-Community partnerships
• Dimensions of concept of CSR
• Corporate Philanthropy
• Limitations of market based approaches
• Investment and CSR
• Climate change and international business
• Corporate Diplomacy
• Role of corporations in shaping global business policy.
• Corporate Governance (CG) within the framework of International Business.
• Corporate Citizenship
• Global Compact and IB
• Social Responsibility Networks
. Cause Marketing & Ethical Promotion
Important dates:
• Submission deadline for chapter proposals (title and 300-500 words abstract): March 12th 2012
• Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals: March 30th 2012
• Deadline for full chapter: 1st of August 2012
• Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals: 30th of August 2012
• Deadline for submission of final chapters: 1st of October 2012
Accepted chapters will be compiled in a book, which will be published by Emerald Group Publishing within the Advances in Ecopolitics series.
Call for Papers for a Special Issue on “International Competitiveness”
What makes some organizations more competitive than others in the international marketplace? Is the “international competitiveness” of these organizations driven by structural properties, strategic elements, tactical implementation, opportunistic behavior, or a combination of one of more of these and/or myriad other potential components? Marketing’s contribution to the scholarly dialogue about what makes some organizations internationally competitive is important and potentially unique. In a global marketplace which is converging in tastes and market segments in some respects and diverging in others, marketing has an opportunity to be in the forefront of scholarship.
The special issue on international competitiveness aims to publish papers that will shed greater insights into how marketing can help describe, explain, and predict issues within the scope of organizations being internationally competitive. Firm competitiveness in an international context can be assessed at various levels where marketing phenomena can be of strong influence. Some examples of these levels include: unit, profit center, firm, venture, strategic group, industry, country, and world region. The special issue targets any level(s) of international competitiveness, as long as the core focus is marketing phenomena which are related to a firm’s competitiveness in the international marketplace (including organizational units, profit centers, etc.).
To address these issues, the Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science is issuing a call for papers for the purpose of advancing marketing knowledge on firm competitiveness in the global marketplace. In terms of content, papers may be either conceptual or empirical in nature and pursue either theory-building or theory-testing. In terms of methodology, papers may be based on empirical techniques (e.g., case, survey, archival research) or on modeling techniques (i.e., optimization or simulation). Papers that integrate multiple perspectives and/or multiple methodologies are especially encouraged.
Papers targeting the special issue should be submitted using the JAMS submission system (www.edmgr.com/jams) and will also undergo the same review process as regularly submitted papers. The deadline for submission is February 1, 2011. Questions pertaining to the special issue should be directed to:
G. Tomas M. Hult, Editor
Anne Hoekman, Managing Editor
Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science
Michigan State University
East Lansing, MI 48864-1121, USA
Phone: +1-517-353-4336
Email: jams@msu.edu
The world economy is increasingly becoming global. Most organizations no longer define their scope in terms of national economies and national boundaries and marketers must understand consumer behavior patterns in different world markets to effectively serve the special needs of international consumers. However, despite considerable research efforts, it is not clear whether market globalization leads to the homogenization of consumer behavior or consumer behavior becomes more heterogeneous due to differences across nations, countries, regions or cultures. This issue, which is more important now than ever before, is not well understood and clearly requires further study to allow the development of effective international marketing strategies.
The aim of the Special Issue is to generate insights on international consumer behavior, insights that inform strategy and are relevant to decision makers within organizations, whether these are for-profit firms, non-profits, or governmental agencies. Manuscripts that draw on and integrate multiple perspectives (e.g., psychology, sociology, anthropology or consumption economics) are especially encouraged. The research approach can be qualitative, quantitative or mixed. Conceptual manuscripts that focus on the strategic possibilities of international consumer insights are also welcome. All manuscripts should have clear relevance to the international marketing field, share a focus on consumers as the unit of analysis, and translate consumer insights into a strategy discussion.
Possible topics include, but are not limited to:
- Similarities and differences in consumer behavior among developed, developing, emerging, and frontier markets
- Cross-cultural comparisons in terms of consumer information processing and decision making
- Country of origin effects
- Consumption experiences and consumer-brand relationships for local and global brands
- Consumer ethnocentrism, animosity, national identity, and cosmopolitanism
- Consumer satisfaction and complaining behavior across cultures
- Global consumer culture and the global teenager
- Consumer adoption and diffusion of innovations across cultures
- Social media, content, and online marketing across cultures
- International market segmentation
- Consumers’ perception of CSR across countries
- Cultural manifestations (values, heroes, rituals and symbols) and consumer behavior
- Global and local consumer culture positioning strategies
Papers targeting the Special Issue should be submitted using the JIM submission system and will also undergo the same review process as regularly submitted papers. The deadline for submission is JUNE 12, 2017.
Questions pertaining to the Special Issue should be directed to:
Constantine S. Katsikeas
Editor-in-Chief, Journal of International Marketing
Arnold Ziff Research Chaired Professor of Marketing and International Management
Leeds University Business School
Maurice Keyworth Building
University of Leeds
Leeds LS2 9JT
U.K.
Phone: +44 (0) 113-343-2624
Email: csk@lubs.leeds.ac.uk
Papers are invited for publication in this special issue of the Journal of Teaching in International Business (JTIB) published by Routledge/Taylor and Francis. JTIB is the premier scholarly journal in its field now in its 27th year of publication (JTIB home page, http://www.tandfonline.com/toc/wtib20/current ). JTIB instructs international business educators, curriculum developers, and institutions of higher education worldwide on methods and techniques for better teaching to ensure a global mindset and optimum, cost-effective learning in international business. JTIB seeks original, significant, scholarly, and applied articles that use empirical data and analysis to show the effectiveness of various approaches to teaching international business; enrich and make more effective the classroom presentations of teachers of international business; facilitate research endeavors of international business consultants, researchers, business education foundations, and institutions of higher learning. Papers for this special issue should not have been published or submitted elsewhere for publication.
We expect the papers in this issue to make significant contributions and provide fresh insights for the teaching of International Entrepreneurship, preferably based on empirical evidence. Topic areas (but not limited to) can include how entrepreneurship is taught around the world. Specifically:
(1) To what extent research and case studies on entrepreneurship are brought into undergraduate, MBA, and PhD curriculum, and/or how effect this has been for the following topics:
- entrepreneurial finance
- entrepreneurship and innovation
- crowdfunding
- venture capital and private equity
- cross-border entrepreneurship
- entrepreneurial opportunities
- measuring entrepreneurship
- country comparisons
- microfinance
- IPOs
- culture and entrepreneurship
- public policy and entrepreneurship
- legal perspectives on entrepreneurship
- corporate governance perspectives on entrepreneurship
- gender and entrepreneurship
(2) To what extent student study abroad programs have enriched the international entrepreneurship education?
(3) What are some specific challenges entrepreneurs facing globally and how can we educate them better to prepare these challenges?
Submission and Review Process:
To ensure full consideration for inclusion in this special issue, fully developed manuscripts should be submitted to JTIB by July 1st, 2017. All manuscripts submitted to the special issue should be submitted through the JTIB Manuscript Central website https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jtib (Special Issue: International Entrepreneurship). Contributors should follow the JTIB Author Guidelines (see http://www.tandfonline.com/toc/wtib20/current)
The guest editors for the Special Forum on International Entrepreneurship (IE)
in the Journal of Business Venturing invite proposals for review papers in the
field of IE.
The Special Forum will be comprise of two sections: 1) Field Reviews of IE, and
2) Focused Topic Reviews of IE. Each part will have its own set of deadlines.
Details follow.
Section 1: Field Reviews of IE
Submissions to the first section of competitive papers will focus on field
reviews of research in International Entrepreneurship. These papers will
demarcate the field of IE with a thorough and systematic review of the
development and state of IE research. These reviews are to be general in
nature, and distinct from those in Section 2 (see below).
Section 2: Focused Topic Reviews of IE
Submissions to the second section of competitive papers will differ from Section
1 papers in that they will focus on a specific topic of relevance in IE
research. They should propose and outline a critically evaluative review of
that particular topic or question, discussing the relevant theory and
perspectives in some depth. Some suggested topics might be:
* Social capital and network perspectives in IE research
* The strategic management influence in IE research
* IE in emerging or transitional economies
* Capturing performance in IE research
* IE as marketing exchange; the marketing perspective in IE
* What are the economic/political factors behind the phenomenon of IE?
* Finance perspectives in IE research
* Transnational and migrant entrepreneurship in IE research,
* IE from a social and sustainable perspective
* The psychology influence; understanding the international entrepreneur
* Others
All submissions (Sections 1 and 2) should address the past and future of IE in
an effort to advance high quality scholarship in this field. All authors should
keep in mind three key objectives of the papers in this Special Forum:
1. celebrate IE as a field of study;
2. define IE as a discrete, mature and growing disciplinary area; and
3. provide a rich base for future research in IE.
Submission Guidelines
Rather than submit full papers, 5 page proposals are requested for both Sections
1 and 2 of the Special Forum. Each proposal will include the intent, scope and
theoretical positioning of the review as well as anticipated contributions to
the IE field. The Guest Editors, JBV Editor and a select panel of scholars will
review each proposal, selecting those proposals to be developed into full
papers. Each full paper will be blind reviewed through the JBV system, subject
to the rigours and risks of any peer review process.
The author(s) of each successful Section 2 proposal will receive draft versions
of the accepted Section 1 papers that provide the foundation for this Special
Forum. This is so Section 2 authors will have a full understanding of findings
that have emerged in the general reviews and can use them as a point of
departure. Together, all of the Special Forum papers will provide a
comprehensive overview of IE research. Critically, they will provide a solid
foundation and research agendas for future study.
Please follow the guidelines for authors of the Journal of Business Venturing
at:
http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/journaldescription.cws_home/505723/authorinstructions
Please submit proposals or any questions by email to Nicole Coviello
(ncoviello@wlu.ca)
Key Dates: (Please note the tight deadline for submission of proposals and final
papers)
Field Reviews (Section 1)
15 November 2009 Section 1 proposals due
30 November 2009 Section 1 decisions communicated to proposal authors
01 March 2010 Section 1 papers due
Focused Topic Reviews (Section 2)
15 January 2010 Section 2 proposals due
15 February Section 2 decisions communicated to proposal authors
October 2010 Section 2 papers due
Guest Editors
Nicole Coviello
Field Editor (International Entrepreneurship), Journal of Business Venturing
Professor of Marketing, Wilfrid Laurier University, Canada
Patricia McDougall
William L. Haeberle Professor of Entrepreneurship
Kelley School of Business, Indiana University, USA
Ben Oviatt
Professor Emeritus of Managerial Sciences
Georgia State University, USA
‘Journal of Entrepreneurship, Management and Innovation’ (JEMI)
SPECIAL ISSUE CALL FOR PAPERS
http://jemi.edu.pl/
THE ENTREPRENEURSHIP ISSUE OF JEMI 2015
edited by
Krzysztof Wach, Associate Professor
Cracow University of Economics, Poland
(guest editor)
will focus on
INTERNATIONAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP. NEW PERSPECTIVES IN INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS RESEARCH
The concept of 'international entrepreneurship' (IE), as one can assume, was used for the first time in the doctoral dissertation of Tomas Otto Kohn in 1988 at Harvard. It is most probably that it was published for the first time in the work of J.F. Morrow in the same year. A year later, this notion appears in scientific publications by various authors, including P.P. McDougall , who together with B.M. Oviatt developed this theory in the following years. It can therefore be assumed that the current international entrepreneurship as an area of research is only 25-30 years old, although its intensive development occurred only in the first decade of the 21st century, that is, de facto, a few years ago. IE has been developing very intensively, however it must be admitted that, apart from some elements of this school, it is still quite poorly explored and described field in the literature.
The special issue seeks papers that discuss and analyse:
- international entrepreneurship as a new field of research,
- international entrepreneurship vs. international business,
- international entrepreneurship school vs. theory of internationalisation of firms
- traditional versus rapid internationalisation of firms,
- role of the entrepreneur in the process of internationalisation of firms,
- internationalisation of small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs vs. LEs),
- internationalisation of family businesses,
- recognising and exploring international business opportunities,
- entry modes and internationalisation patterns of firms,
- international strategies of Central European small businesses (SMEs vs. LEs),
- international competitiveness of Central European small businesses (SMEs vs. LEs),
- internationalisation of Central European small businesses (SMEs vs. LEs),
- int’l entrepreneurship vs. int’l management and int’l marketing.
Contributors are welcome to propose other topics that meet the objectives of this issue.
Paper submission:
Papers should be submitted before the end of October 2014 to JEMI, at: jemi@wsb-nlu.edu.pl. They must be in sufficient detail for the referees to judge their meaning and value. Submissions must be in English, should normally be no more than 15 pages in length (up to 8000 words), and follow the submission requirements posted on the JEMI website at http://jemi.edu.pl/pl/submission.html. Notifications of acceptance will be sent to authors within one-two months.
International Ethnic Entrepreneurship
Approaches and strategies of successful immigrant entrepreneurs crossing national boundaries
National economies opened to the world and became more integrated in the last 50 years. As also travel became easier and more affordable, people with different national backgrounds left their homes and went into industrialized countries as refugees, asylum seekers and economic migrants (Cross 1992, Esping-Andersen 1993; Massey and Denton 1993). From the Chinese in greater Asia and Canada, to the Turks in Germany, from the Algerians in France to the Indians in Africa and New Zealand, the developed world became the final destination of populations with different socio-cultural or ethnic origins, which turned them into multi-cultural societies (Gorter et al. 1998).
Over the years, a significant shift in the work orientation towards self-employment took place among these ethnic groups (Delft et al. 2000, Masurel et al. 2002, Min 1987, Waldinger et al. 1990, Ward and Jenkins 1984; Kobrin and Speare, 1983; Lewandowski, 1980). Whereas most of them had been employed as laborers in earlier years, they started to be active as "ethnic entrepreneurs". Instead of queuing for jobs with the locals, they created work opportunities for themselves and even became employers of other people as well.
Ethnic entrepreneurs are people who start their own business often through an individual connection with former immigrants (Butler and Green, 1997) through a set of regular patterns of interaction with them (Waldinger et al., 1990). Ethnic entrepreneurs significantly influence national economies. According to the Ethnic Minority Business Forum (2003) for example, there are 66.000 ethnic minority owned businesses in London today, as well as around 93.000 self employed people from ethnic minority communities. These minority businesses employ well over half a million people. Also in other parts of the world, ethnic minorities have started to have a say in business; the ethnic Chinese for example have created large multi-divisional enterprises in the host societies of Southeast Asia. Ethnic businesses today contribute to the economy by increasing economic and cultural diversity, reducing unemployment among immigrants and raising living standards in ethnic groups.
One of the important questions is which factors effect migrants; decisions to engage in entrepreneurial activities. The decision has been explained with either the Structural or the Cultural approach (Mavratsas, 1997). Whereas the Structural approach argues that the situation in the host country is a prime cause for migrants engagement in entrepreneurial activities (Cole, 1959), the Culturalist approach sees values and cultural elements as the essential determinants of entrepreneurial activity. Studies demonstrate, that these elements are similar in many aspects across different minority groups. A comparative examination of entrepreneurship among Maghrebian and Pakistani businesses for example shows, that motivation, markets and the importance of family labour are equally important. Studies also show that networks are determining factors in entrepreneurship success, as network connections help ethnic entrepreneurs raise money, invent technology, locate materials, get training and hire workers (Gabbay & Leenders, 1999).
Although studies on ethnic communities in business life have increased over the last years, these studies have dominantly considered labour migration and only limited attention has been given to entrepreneurial migration. Whereas some works have dealt with this topic as well, most academic works on ethnic entrepreneurship have told the stories of particular minority groups in specific societies (e.g. Light and Bonachich, 1991; Silverman, 2001 Folk, 2007).
This special issue of International Business Review focuses on two gaps in the extant literature on ethnic entrepreneurship: First, unlike previous work, which tended to focus on one country or one region of the world, with this special issue we aim to cover a global scope with chapters on America, Europe, and Asia. It is our intention to provide a broad perspective on the nature and scope of entrepreneurship within ethnic groups and bring new insights and methods to the phenomenon of ethnic entrepreneurs. Second, most work until now has focused on the marketing related dimensions of the phenomenon. This special issue aims to provide a management related understanding of how international firms are organized to achieve their strategic goals. Combining essays, case studies and empirical studies from around the globe, we want to give a deeper understanding of the characteristics, motivation and orientation of ethnic entrepreneurs as well as their value systems, preferences, goals and management styles. It is our aim to understand the success stories of ethnic entrepreneurs in different environments putting special emphasis on the cultural, social and institutional resources that made these successes possible.
Guest Editors:
Prof. Dr. Tamer Çavusgil (Georgia State University/USA)
Dr. Dilek Zamantili Nayir (Marmara University/Turkey)
Prof. Dr. Gerd-Michael Hellstern (University of Kassel/Germany)
Prof. Dr. Tevfik Dalgic (University of Texas at Dallas/USA)
Prof. Erin Cavusgil (University of Michigan Flint/USA)
Subject Coverage
Topics covered include, but are not limited to:
* Global trends in ethnic business
* The role of ethnic entrepreneurship in shaping the structure of modern economies
* The role of culture and cross cultural communication in ethnic businesses
* Strategy formulation in ethnic businesses
* The role of business-government relations
* The role of trust and cultural values
* Gender and generation differences
* Economic, political and social network structures in ethnic entrepreneurship
* Organizational culture in ethnic enterprises
We are looking to include both conceptual and empirical papers as well as case studies in this special issue. Papers with a multi-country, comparative perspective will be preferred.
Schedule
February 28, 2010 Submission of manuscripts
June 15, 2010 Reviewer comments to authors
September 30, 2010 Submission of final articles
January 15, 2011 Final articles to the publisher
Notes for Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All papers are refereed through a peer review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page at http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/journaldescription.authors/133/authorinstructions
Editors and Notes
Please send your submission in the form of an MS Word file attached to an e-mail to both:
Prof. Tamer Çavusgil
The Institute of International Business - J. Mack Robinson College of
Business, Georgia State University,
35 Broad Street, Suite 1438, Atlanta Georgia 30303 USA
stcavusgil@gsu.edu
and
Dr. Dilek Zamantili Nayir
Marmara University - Faculty of Economic and Administrative Sciences
Department of Business Administration in German language
81610 Anadoluhisari Istanbul Turkey
dznayir@marmara.edu.tr
Editors:
Prof. Zhongqiang Liu - President, International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS), Editor-in-chief, International Journal of Business and Management (IJBM), EISSN: 2815-9330, Email: zhongqiang.liu@iessociety.com
Prof. Scott Johnson - Vice President, International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS), Editor, International Journal of Business and Management (IJBM), EISSN: 2815-9330, Email: Scott@iessociety.com
Mr. David Cameron - Manager Operations, International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS), Email: David.cameron@iessociety.com
Dr. Nicole Pannet - Director, Research and Operations, International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS), Email: Nicole.pannet@iessociety.com
Ms. Tiffany - Marketing Manager, International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS), Email: tiffany@iessociety.com
Call for Papers International Journal of Business and Management (IJBM) (ISSN Online: 2815-9330) cordially invites scholars, academicians, and researchers from all over the world to submit their unpublished original work for inclusion in our next publication issue (Vol 2, No 2, 2023).
Acceptable themes include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Accounting and Finance
- International Business
- Management Corporate Governance
- Marketing
- Supply Chain
- Business Ethics
- Corporate Governance
- Corporate Social Responsibility.
We are CrossRef. International Emerging Scholars Society (IESS) provides financial support for academic research projects which have the potential to be applied in the field of financial technology and sustainability. Papers that have been already presented at major academic conferences such as the American Finance Association, the European Finance Association or the Western Finance Association are not eligible for funding by IESS. Two grants of NZD 5000 each are available and payment will be made directly to the researcher.
Requirements:
- Should hold a current membership of IESS (i.e. student, faculty, or professional)
- Be the principal investigator of the funded project
- Project has't received any other funding Presentation of the research project on completion
The interested applicants can send their research proposal and CV to researchsupport@iessociety.com by 15 September 2023. The committee will make the decision by 30 November 2023. Only selected applicants will be contacted. The preference will be given to the projects that has potential of publication in top journals. The committee decision will be final.
International Knowledge Flows in the Context of Emerging Economy MNEs and Increasing Global Mobility
CALL FOR PAPERS
Special Issue of International Business Review
International knowledge flows in the context of emerging economy MNEs and increasing global mobility
Guest Editors:
Xiaohui Liu, Loughborough University
Axèle Giroud, UNCTAD/University of Manchester
Deadline for Submission: 31 January 2014
Existing studies on multinational enterprises’ (MNEs) cross-border knowledge flows have predominantly focused on the movement of knowledge within developed countries’ MNEs and/or on how local firms in developing countries benefit from the entry of foreign firms (Gupta and Govindarajan, 2000; Buckley et al., 2002; Görg and Strobl, 2005; Liu and Buck, 2007; Blalock and Simon, 2009; Ghauri and Yamin, 2009; Liu et al., 2009; Meyer and Sinani, 2009; Giroud et al., 2012; Irsõvá and Havránek, 2013). Such dominance may reflect the technologically leading position of developed countries. However, emerging economy firms that have lagged behind firms from developed countries in the past are now rapidly catching up. In particular, emerging economy MNEs (EMNEs) have gained new momentum in the world economy through actively engaging in outward FDI. These changes have been reflected in a new body of literature which goes beyond early explanations for FDI from emerging economies (Wells, 1983; Lall, 1983; Amsden, 1989), since FDI outflows from emerging economies have increased significantly and represent a rising share of global FDI (UNCTAD, 2006; 2013). The new literature strives to understand whether EMNEs follow different internationalisation paths or whether their strategies differ from those of MNEs from developed countries (Fleury and Fleury, 2011; Ghauri and Santangelo, 2012; Witt and Lewin, 2007); whether existing theoretical concepts apply similarly for these firms (Liu et al., 2005; Luo and Tung, 2007; Matthews, 2006; Wang et al., 2012); whether there are unique differences in the case of EMNEs investing in other emerging economies or least developed countries (UNCTAD, Global Investment Trends Monitor, 2013).
Despite recent literature, there remain gaps in the understanding of how EMNEs engage in the process of intra- and inter-firm knowledge transfer across borders and within host countries. Many important research questions remain unanswered: What is the best way for EMNEs to be successful in their strategic asset seeking investment in developed countries? How do EMNEs’ strategic motives affect the host countries in which they operate? Do EMNEs have new ways of learning or unique mechanisms through which cross-border knowledge flows are facilitated? The lack of answers to these questions is all the more surprising given claims that (1) EMNEs actively invest in developed economies through acquisition in order to access key assets, resources and technologies, and (2) they may have a more positive impact on host developing countries due to similarities in the level of economic development and institutional contexts (Ramamurthi and Singh, 2009; Giroud et al., 2012).
Facilitating international knowledge flows, a significant increase in human mobility has become a major aspect of the globalization process. Emerging economies have attracted a large number of return migrants who moved to developed countries in the past and are now returning to their home countries after several years of education and business experience abroad. This increasing trend of human mobility across countries may have profound implications for international knowledge flows. And yet we know relatively little about whether the cross-border knowledge flows of EMNEs differ from those of developed MNEs in the presence of international labour mobility (Liu et al., 2010; Gao et al., 2013).
These new developments challenge the dominant view of cross-border knowledge flows based on established MNEs from developed countries and represent opportunities to advance existing research in this area. It is theoretically and practically important to examine the nature, direction, process and impact of international knowledge flows in the context of EMNEs and increasing human mobility across borders, and enrich our understanding of these key issues. In particular, we need to unpack the socio-cultural process of cross-border knowledge flows by taking account of the characteristics of EMNEs and increasing global mobility.
This special issue aims to extend this line of research by focusing on cross-border knowledge flows and their impact in the context of EMNEs and human mobility. We wish to encourage IB and management scholars to identify new research questions and reveal new dimensions of international knowledge flows in order to reflect the new landscape of the world economy (i.e. EMNEs and an increasing trend of international labour mobility).
Themes of this special issue
We welcome submissions that make a contribution through interdisciplinary approaches. We invite theoretical/conceptual papers and empirical work that draws on qualitative or quantitative methods or an innovative combination of both. Potential themes include, but are not limited to:
How do EMNEs learn from host countries?
- In what way is OFDI used as a tool to access international knowledge for EMNEs?
- What are the challenges and difficulties facing EMNEs in terms of reverse knowledge transfer (RKT)/spillovers?
- Have EMNEs established internal or unique mechanisms to enhance cross-border knowledge flows?
- What specific roles do expatriates and/or migrants play in enhancing learning by EMNEs from host countries?
- How or to what extent do institutional contexts affect RKT/spillovers for EMNEs?
To what extent do host countries learn/benefit from EMNEs?
- What impact do EMNEs have on developed and developing host countries (notably through knowledge spillovers and linkages)?
- How do EMNEs’ strategic characteristics affect their potential for knowledge spillovers and linkages in host countries?
- Do knowledge spillovers and linkages of EMNEs differ from those of established MNEs from developed countries?
- What is the role of expatriates and migrants in enhancing the impact of EMNEs in host countries?
Guidelines and submission information: All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review in accordance with IBR guidelines. Authors should follow IBR guidelines, http://www.journals.elsevier.com/international-business-review/. All submissions should be submitted electronically to http://ees.elsevier.com/ibr/ choosing SI: International knowledge flows and EMENs as the article type. Submission deadline: 31 January 2014. Questions about the special issue can be directed to the guest co-editors: Xiaohui Liu (X.Liu2@lboro.ac.uk); Axèle Giroud (axele.giroud@mbs.ac.uk).
References
Amsden, A. (1989). Asia's Next Giant: South Korea and Late Industrialization. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Blalock, G., and Simon, D. (2009). Do all firms benefit equally from downstream FDI? The moderating effect of local suppliers’ capabilities on productivity gains. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(7): 1095-1112.
Buckley, P. Clegg, J., and Wang, C. (2002). The impact of inward FDI on the performance of Chinese Manufacturing Firms. Journal of International Business Studies, 33(4): 637-655.
Fleury, A., and Fleury, M.T. (2011), Brazilian Multinationals - Competences for Internationalization. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Gao, L., Liu, X., and Zou, H. (2013). The role of human mobility in promoting Chinese outward FDI: A neglected factor? International Business Review, 22(2): 437-449.
Ghauri, P., and Santangelo, G. (2012). Multinationals and the changing rules of competition, Management International Review, 52(2): 145-154.
Giroud, A., Jindra, B., and Marek, P. (2012). Heterogeneous FDI in transition economies: A novel approach to assess the developmental impact of backward linkages. World Development, 40(11): 2206-2220.
Giroud, A., Mirza, H., and Wee, K. (2012). South-south foreign direct investment: Key role of institutions and future prospects. Handbook of Institutional Approaches to International Business. Wood, G and Demirbag, M. Cheltenham, Northampton, Edward Elgar: 365-381.
Görg, H., and Strobl, E. (2005). Spillovers from foreign firms through worker mobility: an empirical investigation. Scandinavian Journal of Economics 107(4): 693-709.
Gupta, A. K., and Govindarajan, V. (2000). Knowledge flows within multinational corporations. Strategic Management Journal, 21(4): 473-496.
Irsõvá, Z., and Havránek, T. (2013). Determinants of Horizontal Spillovers from FDI: Evidence from a Large Meta-Analysis. World Development, 42: 1-15.
Lall, S. (1983). The New Multinationals: The Spread of Third World Enterprises. Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons.
Liu, X., Buck, T., and Shu, C. (2005). Chinese economic development, the next stage: Outward FDI? International Business Review, 14(1): 97-115.
Liu, X. and Buck, T. (2007). Innovation performance and channels for international technology spillovers: Evidence from Chinese high-tech industries. Research Policy, 36(3): 355-366.
Liu, X., Wei, Y., and Wang, C. (2009). Do local manufacturing firms benefit from transactional linkages with multinational enterprises in China. Journal of International Business Studies, 40(7): 1113-1130.
Liu, X., Lu, J., Filatotchev, I., Buck, T., and Wright, M. (2010). Returnee entrepreneurs, knowledge spillovers and innovation in high-tech firms in emerging economies. Journal of International Business Studies, 41(7): 1183-1197.
Luo, Y., and Tung, R. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38 (4), 481-498.
Mathews, J. (2006). Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization, Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23(1), 5-27.
Ramamurti, R., and Singh, J.V. (2009). Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
UNCTAD (2006). World Investment Report 2006: FDI from Developing and Transition Economies, Implications for Development (Geneva and New York: United Nations).
UNCTAD (2013). Global Investment Trends Monitor (Geneva and New York: United Nations).
Wang, C., Hong, J., Kafouros, M., and Boateng, A. (2012). What drives the internationalization of Chinese firms? Testing the explanatory power of three theoretical frameworks. International Business Review, 21(3): 426-438.
Wells, L.T. (1983). Third world multinationals: The rise of foreign investment from developing countries. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Witt, M. A., and Lewin, A. Y. (2007). Outward foreign direct investment as escape response to home country institutional constraints. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4), 579–594.
About the special issue editors
Xiaohui Liu is Professor of International Business and Strategy at the School of Business and Economics, Loughborough University. Her main research interests include knowledge spillovers, human mobility, innovation and the internationalisation strategies of firms from emerging economies. She has published widely, with publications in the Journal of International Business Studies, Research Policy, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, International Business Review, Journal of World Business, Management International Review, Management and Organization Review and Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal. She is area editor of the International Journal of Emerging Markets and the Secretary-General of the Chinese Economic Association (UK).
Axèle Giroud is currently working for the Investment Issues Section in the Division on Investment and Enterprise at UNCTAD (United Nations Conference on Trade and Development). She is on leave of absence from her position as Reader of International Business at the Manchester Business School University of Manchester. Her main research interests are in multinational corporations’ technology and knowledge transfer, and inter-firm linkages. She has published widely, including books and articles in journals such as World Development, International Business Review, Journal of World Business and Management International Review. She sits on the editorial boards of a number of academic journals.
Emerging markets are countries that have low-income but that experience rapid economic growths (Cavusgil et al., 2002) and often include developing countries in Asia, Latin America, Africa, the Middle East and transition economies in the former Soviet Union, and China (Hoskisson et al., 2000). While the world is witnessing dramatic shift in wealth creation from firms in developed economies to firms in emerging markets (Bruton et al., 2013), scholarly works have not fully recognized that the behavior of emerging market firms challenge long-held international marketing concepts and theories developed to explain phenomena in developed markets of Western Europe and North America, which have relatively stable and efficient market supporting institutions.
Unique to emerging markets are conditions of institutional underdevelopment and great market uncertainties such that firms operating in emerging markets face severe and unpredictable market conditions that often threaten their very survival (Bruton et al., 2013). Market supporting institutions (e.g. market intermediaries, capital markets, and legal institutions) are poorly developed, necessitating the need for firms to plan for unexpected upheavals (Quartey, 2003). Money is hard to come by in such markets given those markets’ poor capital markets and history of subsistence consumption (Viswanathan and Rosa, 2007). Market oriented principles are yet to take root in such markets as many are still in transition after several years of running centrally-planned economies (Manolova et al., 2008).
Evidence shows that internationalizing emerging market firms face conflicts with their host Western country governments and capital markets due to concerns about the nature of emerging market firms’ marketing (and financial) transparency (The Financial Times, 2012; Wall Street Journal, 2006). There is also concern that these firms receive disproportionate protection and preferential resource allocation from their home governments to support their international marketing efforts (Rugman et al., 2014).
The socio-cultural, economic, regulatory and political conditions under which international marketing strategies are made in emerging markets are unique and are in rapid transition (Acquaah, 2007). Some of these issues suggest that how international marketing is undertaken in emerging markets might be very different from what we already know in developed markets. An implication is that international marketing theory needs recalibrating to account for emerging market conditions that may shape the nature, boundary conditions, antecedents, and outcomes of international marketing strategy best practices in emerging market firms.
Despite these unique characteristics of, and dynamics in, emerging markets, and the emergence of scholarly works on the international marketing activities of emerging market firms to inform mainstream scholarly discourses (Acquaah, 2007; Kriauciunas et al., 2011; Walumbwa et al.,, 2011), we still know relatively little about how international marketing strategies are undertaken by emerging market firms (Barney and Zhang, 2009; Tsang, 2009). Accordingly, we seek manuscripts that help enrich our understanding of how conditions in emerging markets help explain the nature, boundary conditions, antecedents, and outcomes of international marketing strategies of firms in such markets. Studies examining international marketing activities of firms of all sizes (e.g., micro, small and large multinational enterprises) and ownership forms (e.g., state-owned and privately-owned enterprises) are welcome. We strongly encourage papers that focus on issues that advance and enrich current managerial and scholarly thinking while simultaneously contributing to mainstream international marketing knowledge.
Suitable topics include but are not limited to:
- What processes do emerging market firms follow to develop their international marketing strategies?
- What are the institutional and/or task environment forces driving international marketing strategy development in emerging market firms?
- What are the performance outcomes and boundary conditions of international marketing strategy in emerging markets?
- Subsistence consumption and international marketing strategy in emerging markets
- The informal sector and its implications for international market performance of emerging market firms.
- Strategic orientations of internationally active emerging market firms.
- Nature of international marketing strategies of emerging market multinationals.
- Export marketing strategy of emerging market firms.
- International marketing knowledge transfer of emerging markets Firms.
- International innovation strategy of emerging market firms operating in declining versus high-tech industries.
- Drivers of international product innovation success and failure of emerging market firms.
- International marketing and entrepreneurship interface in emerging market firms.
- Market entry mode choices and international marketing strategy of emerging market firms.
- Extending the institutional difference hypothesis across multiple emerging markets
- Strategies for learning from brand and business failures in internationally active emerging market firms.
- When and how are relationships at home and/or foreign markets useful for international marketing strategy effectiveness?
Guest Co-Editors: Prof. Yaw Debrah, Swansea University; Dr. Joseph Amankwah-Amoah, University of Bristol; Dr. Nathaniel Boso, University of Leeds
Guidelines and Submission Information
All manuscripts should be submitted to the special issue at manuscript central at https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/imrev, following IMR manuscript submission guidelines available at http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=imr. All papers submitted to the Special Issue will be subjected to double-blind peer review in accordance with IMR guidelines. For further information please contact any of the Guest Editors for this Special Issue: N.Boso@Leeds.ac.uk; joseph.amankwah-amoah@bristol.ac.uk; y.a.debrah@swansea.ac.uk
References
Acquaah, M. (2007), “Managerial social capital, strategic orientation, and organizational performance in an emerging economy” Strategic Management Journal, 28, 1235-1255.
Barney, J. B. and Zhang, S. (2009), “The future of Chinese management research: A theory of Chinese management versus a Chinese theory of management”, Management and Organization Review, 5, 15-28.
Bruton, G. D., Filatotchev, I., Si, S., and Wright, M. (2013), “Entrepreneurship and Strategy in Emerging Economies”, Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, 7(3), 169-180.
Cavusgil, T., Ghauri, P., and Agarwal, M. (2002), “Doing business in emerging markets: Entry and negotiation strategies”
Thousand Oaks: Sage. Financial Times (2012), “Investors steer clear of Chinese IPO in US”, The Financial Times, January 3.
Hoskisson, R.E., L. Eden, C.M. Lau and M. Wright (2000), “Strategy in emerging economies. Academy of Management Journal”, 43(3), 249-267.
Kriauciunas, A., Parmigiani, A. and Rivera-Santos, M. (2011), “Leaving our comfort zone: Integrating established practices with unique adaptations to conduct survey-based strategy research in nontraditional contexts”, Strategic Management Journal, 32, 994-1010.
Manolova, T. S., Eunni, R. V., and Gyoshev, B. S. (2008), “Institutional environments for entrepreneurship: evidence from emerging economies in Eastern Europe”, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 32(1), 203-218.
Quartey P. (2003). “Financing small and medium enterprises (SMEs) in Ghana”, Journal of African Business, 4(1), 37–55.
Rugman, A.M., Nguyen, Q.T.K. and Wei, Z. (2014), “Chinese multinationals and public policy”, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 9 (2), 205-215.
Tsang, E. W. K. (2009), “Chinese management research at a crossroads: Some philosophical considerations”, Management and Organization Review, 5, 131-143.
Viswanathan, M., and Rosa, J. A. (2007), “Product and market development for subsistence marketplaces: consumption and entrepreneurship beyond literacy and resource barriers”, Advances in International Management, 20, 1-17.
Wall Street Journal (2006), “IPO outlook”, The Wall Street Journal, August 28, p. C6.
Walumbwa, F. O., Avolio, B. J. & Aryee, S. (2011), “Leadership and management research in Africa: A synthesis and suggestions for future research”, Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology, 84, 425-439.
As you are aware, Artificial Intelligence (Ai) is having a significant impact on many organizations and countries worldwide. A PWC Report indicated that Ai can contribute as much as 26% boost in the GDP of countries. It is forecasted to have a $15.7 Trillion impact on the global economy by 2030. The edited book aims to educate readers on the state-of-affairs of Ai in various locations around the world. Drawing from international contributors from different countries, the book aims to be a key resource on Ai in international locations. The intended audience will be academics, corporate leaders, entrepreneurs, government leaders, consultants and policymakers worldwide.
In this book project, we are gathering academics, scholars and thought leaders from around the world to provide their perspective of Ai in selected countries.
Chapter topics are shown below:
Chapter |
Title |
Word Count |
1 |
Artificial Intelligence in the USA |
3,500 |
2 |
Artificial Intelligence in the UK |
3,500 |
3 |
Artificial Intelligence in Canada |
3,500 |
4 |
Artificial Intelligence in France |
3,500 |
5 |
Artificial Intelligence in Germany |
3,500 |
6 |
Artificial Intelligence in Russia |
3,500 |
7 |
Artificial Intelligence in Brazil |
3,500 |
8 |
Artificial Intelligence in China |
3,500 |
9 |
Artificial Intelligence in India |
3,500 |
10 |
Artificial Intelligence in South Africa |
3,500 |
Proposals for countries outside of the above list may be accepted, provided that there is a compelling rationale behind it.
Chapter contributors will have a year to complete their chapters. Chapter due date is June 15, 2020.
If you are interested in contributing a chapter, kindly submit the following to Dr. Mark Munoz via email in one MS Word file on or before June 15, 2019 :
- Proposed title from the list of chapters above or an alternative topic
- 3 sentence abstract
- 3 sentence bio of chapter contributor(s)
Dr. J. Mark Munoz, Professor, Management and International Business
Dwayne Andreas Endowed Professor of Business, Millikin University
Advisor, The Ai Initiative (The Future Society), Harvard University
Tel Nos (217) 420-6762, (217) 433-1425
Email : jmunoz@millikin.edu
Guest Editors:
Frank Hoy, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, USA
Jacobo Ramirez and Michael Wendelboe Hansen, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark
Paloma Miravitlles, Universitat de Barcelona, Spain
Important Dates
Submission of manuscripts: 11 May, 2015
Notification to authors: 22 June, 2015
Final versions due: 16 November, 2015
Special Issue on: "Internationalisation of Family Business Groups"
Internationalisation strategies of family business groups vary across developed and emerging free-market economies (e.g. Etemad 2013; Astrachan 2010). While a growing literature addresses issues related to the internationalisation of family business groups (e.g. Zahra, 2003; Donckels & Fröhlich 1991), there has been less of a research focus on (1) how institutional pressures moderate their internationalisation process, (2) the motivations behind their internationalisation (e.g. Ward 1997), and (3) the specific internationalisation strategies adopted. This special issue is open to theoretical and empirical papers that analyse the link between family business groups and their internationalisation processes.
Different institutional contexts might dictate family business groups’ responses to institutional pressures. Formal (official regulations and laws) and informal (traditions and customs) institutions might challenge the internationalisation of family business groups (e.g. Dickson et al. 2006). It might be argued that in turbulent institutional settings, both challenges and opportunities encourage the internationalisation of family business groups. External challenges may be in developing alliances with partners with local knowledge (e.g. Lu & Beamish, 2001). However, family business groups could also face internal challenges, as their members could have different global visions, mindsets and entrepreneurial personalities (e.g. Hutchinson et al. 2007).
Subject Coverage
Suitable topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Responses by family business groups to political and societal institutional arrangements to gain access to international developed and emerging markets
- Effects of family management on the intention for internationalisation
- Effects of family culture and ethnicity on internationalisation
- Intentional vs. opportunistic impacts on family business practices in international expansion
- Extension of family network relations into international operations
- Where and how family groups internationalise
- Types of strategic alliances that family groups use in their internationalisation strategies
- Family firm life cycles and internationalisation
- Sources of financing for implementing family business group internationalisation strategies
- Roles of governments in family business internationalisation
- Human resource issues for family businesses in international commerce
- Supply chain issues faced by family firms in internationalisation
- Perceptions that international business partners hold of family ownership
Notes for Prospective Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. (N.B. Conference papers may only be submitted if the paper has been completely re-written and if appropriate written permissions have been obtained from any copyright holders of the original paper).
All papers are refereed through a peer review process.
All papers must be submitted online before 11 May 2015. To submit a paper, please read our Submitting articles page or at http://www.inderscience.com/info/ingeneral/cfp.php?id=2878
Africa’s participation in international business and world trade has been a topic of intense scholarly, practitioner and policy debates for several decades (Ibeh, Wilson, & Chizema, 2012). While some have argued that Africa economies are improving and becoming relevant in the international business arena (Marzo & Patterson, 2010), there is a growing contention that Africa is still unable to contribute meaningfully to the global economy given the dominance of commodities and raw materials in Africa’s international trade activities (Henson, Masakure, & Cranfield, 2011). While the debates continue, evidence is emerging to suggest that the speed, scope and scale at which African firms have been investing in the global economy is growing (McNamee, Pearson & Boer, 2015; Krüger & Strauss, 2015). For example, in the financial services industry, more than 70 African banks have emerged to become dominant international players (Beck, Fuchs, Singer & Witte, 2014):
Ecobank, Standard Bank and First National Bank individually hold over 30% of banking assets in nine countries. Beyond banking, African multinationals have emerged in the telecommunications, manufacturing, energy, agribusiness, aviation, and technology sectors, with firms such as MTN, SABMiller, Telkom, Dimensions Data, Massmart, Nampak, Shoprite, Dangote, Oando, Glo, Interswitch, Nakumatt, Smile and Sasol expanding to several countries and positioning themselves as major international players (Adeleye, Ibeh, Kinoti & White, 2015).
Given these impressive performances of African multinationals on the global stage in recent times, the Boston Consulting Group have identified 40 African global challengers, 18 from Southern Africa, 17 from North Africa region, 3 from Western Africa, 2 from South-Eastern Africa. There are five categories of these African challengers: The Big Local Players: these are African multinationals with assets and sales which are more than 90% domestic, but continue to record impressive international activity gradually; the Exporters: these are firms that have a vast majority of their coming from exporting operations, but have assets that are largely local; the Regional Players: African firms with at least 10% of their assets located outside of their home country but within Africa; the Multi-continental Players having at least 10% of their assets outside of Africa; and the Global Players comprising of African multinationals with more than half of their assets outside of the continent.
The current trend in the internationalization of African firms reveals a picture of a unique variety of factors propelling African firms to internationalize: reliance on formal and informal networking ties; the tendency to serve regional African markets; the dominance of the service sector, rising number of early stage and minority entrepreneurs, among others. Given the rising number of African firms on the international stage, Africa has recently been captured in the global press for being at the receiving end of burgeoning international business and politics (Schwarz & Yellin, 2013). For example, a recent Ernest and Young’s business attractiveness survey concluded that “While skeptics still abound […] a critical mass of African economies have grown at high and sustained rates; so much so that, despite the impact of the ongoing global economic situation, the size of the African economy has more than tripled since 2000.
The outlook also appears positive, with many parts of the region forecast to continue experiencing relatively high growth rates and a number of African economies predicted to remain among the fastest growing in the world for the foreseeable future” (Ernest and Young, 2013: 4). Notwithstanding these promising trajectories, several issues remain unresolved. For example, questions are asked about how much of these international business activities are truly Africa originated and whether African firms are ready to handle the influx of foreign multinationals hurrying to Africa to take advantage of the emerging opportunities on the continent (Bräutigam & Xiaoyang, 2011). The increasing internationalization of African markets has also drawn attention to related issues of Africa’s inadequate infrastructure, undersupplied skilled workforce, weak market-supporting institutions, militarized borders, and heterogeneous socio-cultural terrain.
Despite these unique but intriguing features, empirical research directly examining the nature, drivers, outcomes and boundary conditions of the internationalization behavior of African firms is lacking. While recent scholarly international business (IB) works have focused on economic renaissance occurring in Africa (Nwankwo, 2012) and with leading IB scholars calling for greater coverage of African related topics in the IB literature (e.g., Teagarden, 2009; Babarinde, 2009), scholarly efforts to understand how African firms are strategically managed for international competitiveness have only recently begun to take shape (e.g., Kropp, Lindsay, & Shoham, 2006; Fukunishi, 2009). This call, therefore, is an attempt to draw scholarly attention to interesting and challenging research themes on African firms investing in the global economy. To this end, this call seeks manuscripts that help enrich scholarly understanding of how conditions in Africa help explain the nature, drivers, outcomes and boundary conditions of internationalization behavior of African firms. Studies that examine international business activities of African firms of all sizes (including micro, small and large multinational enterprises) and ownership forms (e.g., state-owned, privately-owned, private-public partnership enterprises) are welcome.
We welcome both conceptual and empirical (quantitative, qualitative or mixed method) papers that address the following research questions or topics:
- Do African firms exhibit unique internationalization behaviors that can help extent extant IB theory?
- What are the motivations for, and outcomes of, Africa-to-Africa internationalization strategy?
- Do similar-aged African multinationals internationalize in the same manner as other emerging market or developed economy multinationals?
- Do African foreign direct investors emphasize different factors than non-African investors in deciding if and how to invest in Africa?
- Do African multi-continental and global players emphasize different factors when investing in Africa than non-African countries?
- What are ownership advantages in the context of intra-African Foreign Direct Investment (FDI)? How can internationalizing African firms help broaden the concept of ownership advantages?
- How do the springboard and linkage-leverage-learning perspectives apply to internationalizing African firms?
- To what extent do colonial heritage influence location decisions of internationalizing African firms? Do regional economic blocs (e.g. Economic Community of West African States) and trade agreements play a role in the international location decisions of internationalizing African firms?
- What kinds of resources and capabilities do African firms need to internationalize rapidly?
- To what extent can managerial network ties help or hurt internationalization of African firms?
- Do rapidly internationalizing African firms perform better than their counterparts that follow a more gradual process of internationalization?
- How do institutional conditions in African markets help African firms penetrate and grow in foreign markets with similar conditions?
- How do industry-, country-, sub-regional-, regional-specific or firm-specific factors condition the international performance effects of international strategies of African firms?
- What role does stakeholder engagement play in the internationalization of African firms?
- Can international companies operating in African markets enhance their performance by being good corporate citizens? Does commitment to corporate social responsibility (CSR) and sustainability initiatives translate into positive financial results in Africa? What factors moderate the impact of CSR and sustainability strategies on performance for internationalizing African firms?
Kindly note that the above listed research questions or topics are in no way exhaustive.
We encourage authors to think about research questions that creatively address the core theme of the special issue call.
Guest Co-Editors:
Dr. Nathaniel Boso, University of Leeds, UK Prof. Kevin Ibeh, Birkbeck University of London, UK Prof. Amon Chizema, University of Birmingham, UK Dr. Ifedapo Adeleye, Lagos Business School, Nigeria
Guidelines and Submission Information
All manuscripts should be submitted to the special issue at manuscript central at:
http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr. Authors must follow directions for submission for submitting manuscripts to TIBR, which available at http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1002/(ISSN)1520-
6874/homepage/ForAuthors.html. It is important for authors to note that all papers submitted to the Special Issue will be subjected to double-blind peer review in accordance with TIBR guidelines. For further information please contact any of the Guest Editors for this Special Issue.
A special paper development workshop will be organized on this theme at the Academy of International Business Sub-Sahara Africa Conference in August 2016 in Lagos, Nigeria.
References
Adeleye, I., Ibeh, K., Kinoti, A. & White, L. (2015). The Changing Dynamics of International Business in Africa. Basingstoke and New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Babarinde, O. A. (2009). Africa is open for business: A continent on the move. Thunderbird International Business Review, 51(4), 319-328.
Bräutigam, D. & Xiaoyang, T. (2011). African Shenzhen: China's special economic zones in Africa. Journal of Modern African Studies, 49, 1, 27-54.
Ernst and Young (2013). Getting Down to Business: 2013 Attractiveness Survey. Ernst and Young: Emerging Markets Center.
Fukunishi, T. (2009). Has Low Productivity Constrained the Competitiveness of African Firms? A Comparison of Kenyan and Bangladeshi Garment Firms. The Developing Economies, 47(3), 307-339.
Henson, S., Masakure, O., & Cranfield, J. (2011). Do fresh produce exporters in sub- Saharan Africa benefit from GlobalGAP certification? World Development, 39(3), 375-386.
Ibeh, K., Wilson, J., & Chizema, A. (2012). The internationalization of African firms 1995–2011: Review and implications. Thunderbird International Business Review, 54(4), 411- 427.
Kropp, F., Lindsay, N. J., & Shoham, A. (2006). Entrepreneurial, market, and learning orientations and international entrepreneurial business venture performance in South African firms. International Marketing Review, 23(5), 504-523.
Krüger, R. & Strauss, I. (2015) “Africa rising out of itself: The growth of intra-African FDI”, Columbia FDI Perspectives, 139: January 19.
Marzo, F., & Patterson, S. (2010). Africa’s outlook. OECD Observer, 279, 64–65.
McNamee, T., Pearson, M. & Boer, W. (2015) Africans Investing in Africa:
Understanding Business and Trade, Sector by Sector. Basingstoke and New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Nwankwo, S. (2012). Renascent Africa: Rescoping the landscape of international business.
Thunderbird International Business Review, 54(4), 405-409.
Schwarz, G. and Yellin, J. (2013). Obama in Tanzania, sees Africa as next global economic success. Available online at www.cnn.com/2013/07/01/world/africa/tanzania-obama/index.html?hpt=wo_c2.
Teagarden, M. B. (2009). Sub‐Saharan Africa at a key inflection point. Thunderbird International Business Review, 51(4), 317-318.
Since the 1990s Central and Eastern European (CEE) economies have reached a level of development and openness that allows local firms to operate in foreign markets. Over the past decade, transition economies from CEE have been the fastest-growing host and home region for FDI (UNCTAD, 2014). Although these economies have attracted a huge amount of academic research following their opening in the 1990s, most studies thus far have focused on foreign firms’ operations in these markets and on the difficulties to adapt to a different institutional framework (Gebulda, Meyer and Delios, 2008; Meyer and Su, 2015). Very few studies have analyzed the internationalization of CEE firms. In a recent study on the emerging market firms in fourteen top international management journals from 2000 to 2010, Jormanainen and Koveshnikov (2012) identify only three articles out of fifty on international activities of CEE firms. Existing studies on this topic mostly analyze the international expansion of Russian multinationals (Kalotay and Sulstarova, 2010), or they analyze CEE outward FDI using the Dunning’s Investment Development Path framework (Stoian, 2013). Research on the internationalization motives and the ways CEE firms internationalize remains extremely limited. In addition, performance implications of these firms’ international operations are under-researched.
Expanding research on the internationalization of CEE firms deserves academic interest because these economies have experienced profound changes over the past twenty-five years and a better understanding of the interactions between the institutional context and firm strategy may contribute to theory (Peng, Wang and Jiang, 2008; Kiss, Danis and Cavusgil, 2012; Kafouros and Aliyev, 2015). Indeed, the transition from planned to market-oriented economy has strongly influenced the internationalization processes of firms (Meyer & Peng, 2005; LiPuma, Newbert and Doh, 2013). Moreover, several CEE countries have become members of the European Union (EU) over the last ten years and several others are official candidates. This increased market integration creates new opportunities and threats for CEE firms because it opens new export and investment opportunities through the reduction of transaction costs, but on the other hand it increases competitive pressure and the burden of regulatory harmonization. These on-going transformations are shaping the business environment in the EU and their study is of utmost importance for the European Commission, as illustrated by their inclusion in Horizon 2020, the EU Research and Innovation Programme.
The special issue solicits theoretical and empirical (quantitative and case-based) articles that contribute to the understanding of the internationalization of CEE firms addressing, but not restricted to, the following range of issues.
- What are the motives, the determinants, the modes and the speed of entry, the location patterns of the international operations of CEE firms?
- Which theoretical frameworks can be used to analyze the internationalization of CEE firms?
- Do the findings on the internationalization of CEE firms challenge existing theoretical frameworks? Why and how?
- What are the sectoral specificities of CEE internationalized firms?
- What is the impact of structural reforms (privatization, restructuration, international openness) on the internationalization of CEE firms?
- What is the role of the different dimensions of EU membership in the internationalization of CEE firms?
- Over the last 20 years CEE countries have received a large amount of FDI. How does foreign presence/ownership affect local firms’ internationalization?
- How does the existing institutional framework shape the internationalization of new ventures in CEE economies?
- Service sector is less developed in CEE countries. How do CEE service firms internationalize?
- What is the role of the State in the internationalization of CEE firms? How do State-Owned CEE firms expand abroad?
- How different are CEE firms from other emerging countries’ firms in terms of international strategies and performances?
References
Gelbuda, M., Meyer, K. E., & Delios, A. (2008). International business and institutional development in Central and Eastern Europe. Journal of International Management, 14(1), 1-11.
Kalotay, K., & Sulstarova, A. (2010). Modelling Russian outward FDI. Journal of International Management, 16(2), 131-142.
Kiss, A. N., Danis, W. M., & Cavusgil, S. T. (2012). International entrepreneurship research in emerging economies: A critical review and research agenda. Journal of Business Venturing, 27(2), 266-290.
Jormanainen, I., & Koveshnikov, P. C. A. (2012). International activities of emerging market firms. Management International Review, 52(5), 691-725.
Kafouros, M., & Aliyev, M. (2015). Institutional development and firm profitability in transition economies. Journal of World Business, doi:10.1016/j.jwb.2015.06.002.
LiPuma, J. A., Newbert, S. L., & Doh, J. P. (2013). The effect of institutional quality on firm export performance in emerging economies: a contingency model of firm age and size. Small Business Economics, 40(4), 817-841.
Meyer, K. E., & Peng, M. W. (2005). Probing theoretically into Central and Eastern Europe: Transactions, resources and institutions. Journal of International Business Studies, 36(6), 600–621.
Meyer, K. E., & Su, Y. S. (2015). Integration and responsiveness in subsidiaries in emerging economies. Journal of World Business, 50(1), 149-158.
Peng, M. W., Wang, D. Y., & Jiang, L. Y. (2008). An institution-based view of international business strategy: A focus on emerging economies. Journal of International Business Studies, 39(5), 920–936
Stoian, C. (2013). Extending Dunning's investment development path: The role of home country institutional determinants in explaining outward foreign direct investment. International Business Review, 22(3), 615-637.
UNCTAD (2014), World Investment Report 2014, UN: Geneva.
Submission Process
Submitted articles should be original contributions and should not be not under review for publication elsewhere at the same time. All papers that pass the preliminary screening will be blind peer-reviewed. Manuscript should be between 4000 and 6000 words in length, inclusive of all text, tables and references. Submitted manuscripts should comply to the format indicated in the submission guidelines on the journal website:
http://emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=ebr
Deadline for submission: December 15, 2015
Notifications to authors: February 15, 2016
Expected publication date: June 2016
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors:
- Marina Dabic, University of Zagreb, Croatia (mdabic@efzg.hr) and Nottingham Trent University, UK (marina.dabic@ntu.ac.uk)
- Olivier Lamotte, Paris School of Business, France (olamotte@esg.fr)
Volume 1. Strategy and operations of foreign firms in Russia
Volume 2. Internationalization process of Russian firms
Special Issue Editor: Andrei Panibratov (Saint Petersburg State University, Russia)
Internationalization of emerging markets is not brand new phenomenon, with many economies (such as Brazil, India, Kazakhstan, Poland, South Korea and many others) being successfully integrated in the global business environment. The economic development in these countries is based on the intensive presence of foreign companies in these countries markets, and also strongly affected by international trade and investment projects of firms from these economies.
Russia, in contrast with these countries, is late-internationalizer, due to the delayed economic development and political constrains remaining from the time of the Soviet Union. As a consequence, western firms first established their operations in the markets of Eastern Europe, bringing capitals and technologies and investing in the infrastructure and institutions, which led to the more advanced economic position of many east-European economies compared to Russia (Filippov & Duysters2011).
The internationalization record of Russia is also characterised by the limited amount of Russian multinational enterprises (MNEs), outward foreign direct investments (OFDI) targeting mostly tax havens, weak knowledge base of Russian firms with international operations, and modest advantages of Russian MNEs over their global counterparts. Nevertheless, the interest of foreign investors in Russia has always been high. The immediate reaction of Western firms to the fall of the communism resulted in a waterfall of investment and trade projects from Europe and the USA to Russia (Wright et al. 2002). After the stabilization of the investment climate, in the early 2000s, global companies further increased not only amount but also the scale of their investment projects, with several ‘mega-deals’ in the energy sector. Even facing obstacles such as global financial crisis in 2008 and sanctions in 2014, the interest of western enterprises in Russia remained relatively high (WIR 2016).
Recent developments of the Russian economy and institutions have also initiated a new wave of outward investments from Russia and increased the international involvement of Russian firms. This became even more evident with the increased support by the Russian government of various cooperative incentives, e.g., between Russian and Chinese enterprises (Panibratov 2016).
In addition, many traditional patterns of Russia’s internationalization have changed. Being historically based on the exploration and trade in the area of natural resources (from agriculture to petroleum), today international achievements of Russian firms, as well as their ability to overcome liability of foreignness, are more and more explained with the ability to rely on technologies and know-how (Panibratov 2015), and knowledge-based competencies of these firms including human capital development and harvesting of talents (Latukha 2015).
Although the combination of financial and political resources with local approaches to business development is discussed in the context of other emerging economies (Ramamurti 2009), Russian firms create their own, often unique business models, based on the various government attitudes towards Russian firms (Panibratov 2012). This is, in general, more applicable to the large enterprises in strategically important sectors (Mihailova and Panibratov 2012), but is also relevant for more technology-intensive industries such as IT and software (Panibratov and Latukha 2014) due to remaining influence of post-communist legacy on these firms’ operations.
Although some research on internationalization of Russia’s economy and enterprises has been done (Puffer & McCarthy 2011), the literature remains modest. The existing gap can be addressed by topics such as business strategy, competitive advantages, knowledge and innovations, and political capital – as of foreign firms in Russia, and as of Russian firms abroad.
This Special Issue, hence, provides the opportunity to present two perspectives – inward and outward internationalization – of Russia. Potential research questions that could be answered in this Special Issue are:
- How multinational firms from advanced economies adjust their competitive advantages for expansion in Russia, what is the cost of this adaptation?
- What capabilities of multinational firms cannot be successfully implemented in Russia, and how does this influences these firms’ competitive position?
- What are the specifics of the knowledge acquisition, exploitation, and dissemination between headquarters and subsidiaries of Western firms in Russia, and of Russian firms abroad?
- To what extent the experience of pioneers-multinationals in Russia generated a learning advantage over other foreign firms in the current economic and geo-political situation?
- How does the process of switching from natural-resources to technologies-driven expansion define internationalization of Russian firms at country-, industry- and firm-level?
- What are the determinants of Russian firms’ strategy abroad? What are the origins and explanations?
- What is the role of home country institutions in the internationalization of Russian firms?
- What are the effects of liability of foreignness for Russia’s inward and outward investments? What are the consequences of the country of origin effect? What are the specifics of ‘being Russian’ liability?
- What is the role of political capital in the internationalization of Russian firms?
- How strategies of multinational firms originating from Russia help to broaden the IB theory?
Deadlines, Submission Guidelines and SI Editor Information
Submissions to the Special Issue must be submitted through the WJEB website. The deadline for submissions is March 1, 2017. No late submissions will be accepted. The preference is made for submissions establishing a debate consistent with the literature cited below. Please indicate that your submission is to be reviewed for the Special Issue onInternationalization of Russian economy and firms: inward and outward perspective.
Papers will be blind peer-reviewed. We will make initial editorial decisions by June, 2017.
For questions about the special issue, please contact Andrei Panibratov (panibratov@gsom.pu.ru)
Indicative literature consistent with the theme of Volume 1 – Strategy and operations of foreign firms in Russia
Kouznetsov, A. (2009). Country conditions in emerging markets and their effects on entry mode decisions of multinational manufacturing enterprises: Evidence from Russia. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 4(4): 375-388.
Latukha, M, Doleeva, A., Järlström, M., Jokinen, T, & Piekkari, R. (2016). Does corporate language influence career mobility? Evidence from MNCs in Russia. European Management Journal, Published online 13 January 2016.
Mihailova, I. (2015). Outcomes of learning through JVs for local parent firms in transition economies: Evidence from Russia. Journal of World Business, 50(1): 220-233.
Panibratov, A. (2014). Developing brand awareness via social networks as a new sprout of global firms’ strategy on the Russian market, Journal of Euromarketing, Special Issue ‘Branding as a Lever of Competitiveness in the Bigger Europe’, 23(1-2): 37-56.
Panibratov, A. (2009). Internationalization process of Russian construction industry: Inward investments perspective. Journal for East European Management Studies, 2: 210-228.
Panibratov, A. (2016). Unraveling the IJV rationale in emerging markets: The case of multinational enterprises in the Russian construction industry. Journal of East-West Business, 22(2): 97-117.
World Investment Report. (2016) Investor Nationality: Policy Challenges. United Nations publication. Geneva: UNCTAD.
Wright, M., Filatotchev, I., Buck, T. and Bishop, K. 2002. Foreign partners in the former Soviet Union. Journal of World Business, 37(3): 165-179.
Indicative literature consistent with the theme of Volume 2 – Internationalization processes of Russian firms
Dikova, D., Panibratov, A., Veselova, A., & Ermolaeva, L. (2016). The joint effect of investment motives and institutional context on Russian international acquisitions, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 2016, 11(4): 674-682.
Filippov, S. & Duysters, G. (2011). Competence-building in foreign subsidiaries: The case of new EU member states, Journal for East European Management Studies, 16(4): 286-314.
Kalotay, K. & Panibratov, A. (2013). Developing competitive advantages of Russian multinationals through foreign acquisitions, in P.J. Williamson, R. Ramamurti, A. Fleury and M.T.L. Fleury (eds.) The Competitive Advantage of Emerging Market Multinationals. Cambridge University Press, New York: 220-238.
Kalotay, K. & Sulstarova A. (2010). Modeling Russian outward FDI. Journal of International Management, 16: 131-142.
Kalotay, K. (2005). Outward foreign direct investment from Russia in a global context. Journal of East-West Business, 11(3/4): 9-22.
Kuznetsov, A.V. (2012). The development of Russian multinational corporations. International Studies of Management and Organization, 41(4): 34-50.
Latukha, M. (2015).Talent management in Russian companies: domestic challenges and international experience. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 26(8), 1051-1075.
Michailova, S., McCarthy, D.J. & Puffer, S.M. (2013). Russia: As solid as a BRIC? critical perspectives on international business, 9(1/2):5-18.
Mihailova, I. & Panibratov, A. (2012). Determinants of internationalization strategies of emerging market firms: A multilevel approach. Journal of East-West Business, 18(2): 157-184.
Mihailova, I., Shirokova, G., and Laine, I. (2015). New venture internationalization from an emergent market: Unexpected findings from Russia, Journal of East-West Business, 21(4): 257-291.
Panibratov, A. & Latukha, M. (2014).Obtaining international results through partnerships: Evidence from Russian MNEs in the IT sector. Journal for East European Management Studies, 19(1): 31-57.
Panibratov, A. (2015). Liability of foreignness of emerging market firms: the country of origin effect on Russian IT companies. Journal of East-West Business, 21(1): 22-40.
Panibratov, A. (2016). Home government influence on Russian MNEs: Balancing control against interest. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 11(4): 1746-8809.
Panibratov, A. (2012). Russian multinationals: From regional supremacy to global lead. Routledge, London, U.K.
Puffer, S.M., & McCarthy, D.J. (2011). Two decades of Russian business and management research: An institutional theory perspective. Academy of Management Perspectives, 25(2): 21-36.
Ramamurti, R. (2009). What have we learned about emerging-market MNEs? in R. Ramamurti and J.V. Singh (eds.) Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: 399-426.
Internationalization process and strategies has been a popular topic among international business researchers for some time. However, most of these studies deal with manufacturing firms and research on internationalization of service industry firms is rather scarce. At the same time, in the last decade, middle and upper income countries are experiencing a process of transformation by which services account for an increasing share of employment, international trade and FDI. In this sense, service industry firms have been most active in internationalizing their operations. Services sector firms now represent the largest share of global FDI flows accounting for 62% of world inward foreign direct investment (FDI) stock in 2006 (UNCTAD 2008).
This process of internationalization has been reinforced by the important outsourcing trend experienced in many value chain activities, the liberalisation of many national and international regulations and the creation and development of new service firms, based on telecommunication and information technologies, in an international framework (Sanchez and Pla-Barber, 2006). However, the heterogeneity of services implies considerable differences between sub-sectors in a range of factors including competitiveness and patterns of geographical distribution and internationalization. Therefore there is a need to investigate variables and models that go beyond those drawn from traditional empirical work focusing on the manufacturing sector. Moreover, services and manufacturing is becoming intertwined meaning that proportion of services even in manufactured goods is increasing and becoming more tangible. Most manufactured goods now contain a major proportion of service element. In the last decade or so many Western firms have moved their service components or operations to emerging markets to achieve cost benefits or other types of efficiencies (Buckley & Ghauri 2004).
This special issue therefore, focuses on the changing nature of the firm and looks particularly on the internationalization of services firms. A number of studies point out the special nature of services firms and the location implications of globalization that may influence the future flows of FDI and their impact on economies and industries (Ahroni 1996; Buckley and Ghauri 2004 and Pla-Barber, Sanchez and Madhok, 2010).
Subject coverage
Potential topics include, but are not limited to:
- The process of internationalization of service sector firms
- Decisions regarding commitment and control in different services industries
- Entry strategies of Western firms into emerging markets in services sector
- Entry strategies of Emerging market firms into Western markets in service sector
- FDI flows in service sector
- The impact of FDI, particularly in service sector, on home and host economies.
- Internationalization of different sectors, such as; banking, retailing, healthcare, hospitality, consulting and education
- Reconfiguration of sectors and resources at different locations
- Knowledge flows between international services firms
- Strategies of outsourcing/offshoring in the service industry firms
- The impact of national and regional policies to foster services firms internationalisation.
Notes for Prospective Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All papers are refereed through a peer review process. A guide for authors and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Journal web page.
Important Dates
The deadline for submission is: May 31, 2011
Publication date: May, 2012
Editors and Notes
You may send one copy in the form of a PDF file attached to an e-mail (details in Author Guidelines) to the following:
Professor José Pla-Barber
Faculty of Economics
University of Valencia
46120. Valencia (Spain)
Phone: +34 963828917
Fax: +34 963828333
E-mail: jose.pla@uv.es
Professor Pervez Ghauri
King’s College London
150 Stamford Street
London SE1 9NH, UK
Phone: +44-20-7848 4122
Fax: +44-20-7848 4639
E-mail: Pervez.ghauri@kcl.ac.uk
Please include in your submission the title of the Special Issue.
Submission deadline: January 31, 2018
Submissions open: January 1, 2018.
Guest Editors:
- Ilan Alon
- Roy Mersland
- Trond Randøy
- Oded Shenkar
- Martina Musteen (Supervising Editor)
Across the globe, social enterprises, sometimes called hybrid organizations, are receiving increased public and academic attention (Wang et al, 2015; Battilana and Dorado, 2010). Whether organized as a for-profit firm or a non-profit organization, a social enterprise operates with two logics: To be financially self-sufficient, or sustainable, and to achieve a socially desired outcome (Sharir and Lerner, 2006; Miller et al., 2012). These can include solutions to homelessness (McKenna, 2013), improved quality of life and inclusion for the disabled population (Wang et al., 2015) or better treatment for those suffering from diseases, such as tuberculosis (Lönnroth et al., 2007). Many different definitions for social enterprises have been proposed over the years (summarized by Zahra et al., 2009). We define and differentiate social enterprises on three dimensions:
- Social enterprises pursue a “double” bottom line (economic and social betterment). Among the primary goals of a social business is social value creation, that is, addressing or solving a social problem, sometimes at the expense of profits.
- Unlike philanthropic organizations depending on donations and symbolic CSR-related activities depending on discretionary corporate philanthropy, social enterprises need to be financially sustainable. This means that these enterprises need to earn their income by providing the market place with products and services, and do so at a price that recoups the cost at, or below, the prevailing market price. At a minimum, they need to survive and, under ideal condition, grow and expand.
- Social enterprises fill institutional voids at the local, national and global level. They commonly provide services, or goods, that are either unavailable or lacking through the public or private sectors.
We see that ontological and epistemological gaps exit in the research on international social enterprises. There is no consensus on how the performance of social enterprises should be studied (Mair and Martí, 2006), including the trade-offs between social goals and financial goals (Mersland, et al. 2011; Randøy et al, 2015). Although Zahra et al. (2008) highlighted a lack of research on social enterprises, we still observe that researchers have not yet adequately addressed social enterprise issues with empirical studies and much of the current research on social enterprises is in the form of descriptive case studies (e.g., Wang et al. 2015).
Social enterprises often operate across different countries and contexts or have partners from different institutional settings. The literature on social enterprises, particularly as an international phenomenon, is underdeveloped (Sharir and Lerner, 2006) and we see a need to explicitly examine multinational, cross-border and comparative orientations of these kinds of enterprises. Social enterprises are prevalent in both developed and developing country contexts (Mair and Marti, 2006; Wang et al, 2015). While many social enterprises originate in the developed world, others, such as Bangladesh’s BRAC, dedicated to alleviating poverty, have emerged out of developing countries. Yet, cross-country comparative research is rare (Kerlin, 2012) and, as a result, a comprehensive understanding of the phenomenon is lacking. This special issue provides an opportunity to introduce the social enterprise phenomenon into the international business literature, in an effort to upgrade and cross-fertilize the two research streams. We highlight that research on social enterprises in relation to their conceptualization (Carraher, Welsh and Svilokos, 2016), drivers (Méndez-Picazo et al., 2015), internationalization process (Zhara et al., 2008), placement (Mair and Schoen, 2007) modes of entry (Wang et al., 2015), and impacts (Mersland et al., 2011) is still underexplored and provide the underlying motivation for this Special Issue.
The internationalization of social enterprises is driven by a number of factors, including global wealth disparity, corporate social responsibility, market failures, technological advances and shared responsibility efforts (Zahra et al., 2008). Their international expansion is commonly driven by the global nature of the problem addressed, such as health services, and the lack of available local or national resources. The rapid growth of social enterprises is further fueled by a significant increase in the capital mobilized by so-called impact investment funds, i.e. funds that typically invest in social enterprises. For example, a recent report by J.P. Morgan and The Global Impact Investing Network indicate that 8 billion US dollars were committed to impact investments in 2012 and an additional 9 billion US dollars in 2013.
The internationalization of social enterprises takes different forms. Some social enterprises are born global, such as CURE, an Ohio-based non-profit dedicated to the treatment of childhood cancer in China, and Lifenet International, based in Florida and dedicated to provide quality and sustainable healthcare to the poor in sub-Saharan Africa. Others follow an incremental and gradual internationalization, such as Dialogue in the Dark, which started in Germany and expanded slowly to more than 40 countries.
Social enterprises are important to public policy as they address market imperfections and lower the burden on governments. Thus, there is a growing interest in social enterprises as these may reduce long term public (or private) subsidies (Zahra et al., 2009), and contribute to social change, empowerment, and economic development (Chell, 2007). Sometimes their internationalization is seen as politically desirable, while at other times they are faced with hostility or mistrust (e.g., Economist, 2014).
Many social enterprises have scalable business models both across countries and across the value chain. Recent years have seen the emergence of multinational social enterprises (MNSE). For example, Riders for Health enables the delivery of healthcare services through vehicle fleets and operations across more than 10 countries in Africa. The well-known Grameen Foundation operates microfinance institutions across 36 countries and has claimed to help about 10 million of the world’s poor. Dialogue in Social Enterprises operates three concepts in over 40 countries to facilitate social inclusion of disabled, disadvantaged and elderly people on a global basis. Numerous social enterprises serve a global need in multiple operating environments using complex organizational structures. Other social enterprises are small and local providing an opportunity for researchers to examine the scalability of these enterprises, on the one hand, and compare these to similar organizations in other locations, on the other hand.
Several theories have been identified as promising channels for the study of the internationalization of the social enterprises, including cosmopolitanism, pro-social, internalization (Zahra et al. 2008), structuration theory, institutional entrepreneurship, social capital, social movement (Mair and Marti, 2005), sustainability, non-profit, grounded theory (Weerawardena and Mort, 2006), resource-based and network theories (Westhead et al, 2006).
We are seeking conceptual, theoretical and empirical (both quantitative and qualitative) papers that advance the state of knowledge on internationalization of social enterprises. Topics include, but are not limited to:
- The internationalization process of social enterprises. Do extant theories apply?
- Typologies of social enterprises and new theory of the multinational social enterprise
- Scalability of social enterprises across diverse locations
- Determinants of born global social enterprises
- Comparative research among social enterprises in developed and developing countries
- Market selection and modes of entry of social enterprises
- International networks and stakeholders and their influence on social enterprises
- The international landscape of impact investors and their influence on social enterprises
- The trade-off between financial and social performance in international social enterprises
- The finance of international social enterprises
- International issues in microfinance, microfranchising, and the “bottom of the pyramid” businesses and related organizations
- Structure and strategy of international social enterprises
- Determinants of internationalization of social enterprises, including social mission focused businesses
- Impact of social enterprises in differing market conditions
- Entrepreneurial and managerial antecedents of international social networks
- Internal and external antecedents of international social entrepreneurship
Submission process
Authors should submit complete manuscripts between the 1st and the 31st of January 2018 via the JWB EVISE online submission system at https://www.evise.com/profile/#/JWB/login. To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this special issue, it is important that authors select ‘SI: Int. Soc. Entr.’ when they reach the “Article Type” step in the online submission process. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the JWB Guide for Authors available on the journal web page. All submitted manuscripts will be subject to the JWB’s blind review process.
Questions about the Special Issue may be directed to the guest editors or supervising editor:
- Ilan Alon, University of Agder (ilan.alon@uia.no)
- Roy Mersland, University of Agder (roy.mersland@uia.no)
- Trond Randøy, University of Agder (trond.randoy@uia.no)
- Oded Shenkar, Ohio State University (Shenkar.1@osu.edu)
- Martina Musteen, San Diego State University (mmusteen@mail.sdsu.edu)
References:
Battilana, J. & Dorado, S. (2010). Building sustainable hybrid organizations: The case of commercial microfinance organizations. Academy of Management Journal, 53 (6): 1419-1440
Carraher, S. M., Welsh, D.H.B., & Svilokos, A. (2016). Validation of a measure of social entrepreneurship. European Journal of International Management, 16(4): 386-402.
Chell, E. (2007). Social enterprise and entrepreneurship towards a convergent theory of the entrepreneurial process. International small business journal, 25(1): 5-26.
J.P. Morgan. (2013). Perspectives on Progress: The Impact Investor Survey. J.P.Morgan and Global Impact Investing Network. 1-28.
Kerlin, J.A. (2012). Defining Social Enterprise across Different Contexts: A Conceptual Framework Based on Institutional Factors. Nonprofit and Voluntary Sector Quarterly, 42(1): 84-108.
Lönnroth, K., Aung, T., Maung, W., Kluge, H., & Uplekar, M. (2007). Social franchising of TB care through private GPs in Myanmar: an assessment of treatment results, access, equity and financial protection. Health Policy and Planning, 22(3): 156-166.
Mair, J. & Martí, I. (2006). Social entrepreneurship research: A source of explanation, prediction, and delight. Journal of World Business, 41(1): 36-44.
Mair, J., & Schoen, O. (2007). Successful social entrepreneurial business models in the context of developing economies: An explorative study. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 2 (1), 54-68.
McKenna, G. R. (2013). Tackling labour market exclusion of homeless people: The role of social enterprise (Doctoral dissertation, Middlesex University).
Méndez-Picazo, M. T., Ribeiro-Soriano, D., & Galindo-Martín, M. Á. N. (2015). Drivers of social entrepreneurship. European Journal of International Management, 9 (6): 766-779.
Mersland, R., Randøy, T. & Strøm, R. Ø. (2011). The impact of international influence on microbanks’ performance: A global survey. International Business Review, 20 (2): 163-176.
Miller, T.L., Grimes, M.G., McMullen, J.S., & Vogus, T.J. (2012). Venturing for others with heart and head: How compassion encourages social entrepreneurship. Academy of Management Review, 37(4): 616-640.
Randøy, T. Strøm, R. Ø. & Mersland, R. (2015). The Impact of entrepreneur-CEOs in microfinance institutions: A global survey. Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, 39 (4): 927-953.
Sharir, M., & Lerner, M. (2006). Gauging the success of social ventures initiated by individual social entrepreneurs. Journal of World Business, 41 (1): 6-20.
The Economist. (2014) Foreign Funding of NGOs: Donors: keep out. September 11 Issue: http://www.economist.com/news/international/21616969-more-and-more-autocrats-are-stifling-criticism-barring-non-governmental-organisations?zid=292&ah=165a5788fdb0726c01b1374d8e1ea285
Wang, H., Alon, I., & Kimble, C. (2015). Dialogue in the dark: Shedding light on the development of social enterprises in China. Global Business and Organizational Excellence, 34(4): 60-69.
Weerawardena, J., & Mort, G. S. (2006). Investigating social entrepreneurship: A multidimensional model. Journal of World Business, 41(1): 21-35.
Westhead, P., Wright, M., & Ucbasaran, D. (2002). International market selection strategies selected by ‘micro’and ‘small’firms. Omega, 30(1): 51-68.
Zahra, S. A., Gedajlovic, E., Neubaum, D. O., & Shulman, J. M. (2009). A typology of social entrepreneurs: Motives, search processes and ethical challenges. Journal of Business Venturing, 24(5): 519-532.
Zahra, S. A., Rawhouser, H. N., Bhawe, N., Neubaum, D. O., & Hayton, J. C. (2008). Globalization of social entrepreneurship opportunities. Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, 2(2): 117-131.
Research Data
Research data forms the backbone of research articles and provides the foundation on which knowledge is built. Researchers are increasingly encouraged, or even mandated, to make research data available, accessible, discoverable and usable. Although not mandatory, the journal encourages authors to submit their data at the same time as their manuscript. Further information can be found at:
https://www.elsevier.com/authors/author-services/research-data
Guest editors of International Journal of Export Marketing (IJEXPORTM) Dr. Tiia Vissak, Senior Researcher and Dr. Dafnis N. Coudounaris, Associate Professor, both from the University of Tartu,
School of Economics and Business Administration, invite you to submit a contribution to the Special Issue 1 2018.
Important dates for your submission: Manuscripts due by: 1st February 2018, Notification to authors: 15th June 2018, Final versions due by: 30th September 2018.
Description [aims/objectives/content/readership/etc.
Aims and objectives: This special issue aims to investigate Central and Eastern European firms’ internationalization opportunities after Brexit and leading Chinese multinationals’ recent entry to Europe. Studies on export activities, export barriers and export motives of born globals/international new ventures and other types of internationalizers, and also CEE firms’ foreign direct investments, international joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions, and divestments are welcome. They can be conceptual or based on quantitative, qualitative or mixed methods. Studies based on data from more than one CEE country are especially welcome.
Subject Coverage
Topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Business opportunities and impediments arising from Brexit
- Business opportunities and impediments arising from Chinese multinationals’ entry to CEE
- Business opportunities and impediments arising from other changes in CEE firms’ economic environment
- CEE firms’ export performance
- CEE firms’ export motives and barriers
- CEE exporters’ de- and re-internationalization (foreign market exits and re-entries
- Born globals established in CEE
- Other internationalizers established in CEE
- Immigrant and re-migrant entrepreneurship in CEE
- The impact of network relationships on CEE firms’ internationalization
- The impact of ownership change on CEE firms’ internationalization
- Foreign direct investments by CEE firms
- International joint ventures in CEE
- Mergers and acquisitions in CEE
- Factors causing CEE firms’ divestment decisions
Notes for Prospective Authors:
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. (N.B. Conference papers may only be submitted if the paper has been completely re-written and if appropriate written permissions have been obtained from any copyright holders of the original paper).
All papers are refereed through a peer review process. All papers must be submitted online. Please read our information on submitting articles
If you have any queries concerning this special issue, please email the Guest Editors at tiia.vissak@ut.ee and dafnis.coudoounaris@ut.ee
IJEXPORTM has a rigorous review process and it has already gained international recognition in different international lists i.e. Finnish list (JUFO 1 Level), Norwegian List ( Scientific 1 Level)
and USA List ( Cabell’s directory). Other lists are on the way to evaluate IJEXPORTM.
IJEXPORTM will apply to the SCOPUS List and the Emerging List of Web of Science during 2018.
The editorial board of IJEXPORTM consisting of 49 top scholars together with another 30 ad-hoc reviewers handle the review process.
Introduction
After more than two decades of research on the internationalization of small firms and new ventures, the literature characterizes several stereotypical patterns (or paths or pathways) of SME internationalization with respect to timing of entry, geographic range and intensity of commitment to foreign markets. These international patterns are the focus of this special issue.
Within the field of international marketing, the origin of literature on internationalization patterns is the notion of “stage models'', which characterize internationalization as an incremental and linear trajectory, during which firms progress from limited exploration of international markets through various stages of increasing commitment as they learn and gather resources (e.g. Johanson and Wiedersheim-Paul, 1975; Johanson and Vahlne, 1977, 2009). This incremental model describes one possible internationalization path.
The phenomenon of “born-global'' firms or other types of international new ventures, in which firms commit to international markets soon after founding, is frequently posited as a challenge to traditional stage models (e.g. Oviatt and McDougall, 1994; Knight and Cavusgil, 1996) and may be seen as another internationalization path. From an international marketing perspective the choice between these two ends-of-the continuum is clear: a firm either concentrates first on a few markets and conducts marketing activities in those markets, or rapidly diversifies into a large number of markets and conducts marketing activities in all of them (Mas et al., 2006).
However, internationalization is more complicated than a simple process of market selection: the level of internationalization does not necessarily steadily increase. Firms can retrench or “de-internationalize'' (see Benito and Welch, 1997), they can internationalize rapidly after a long period of domestic focus (see Bell et al., 2001), and there may be several episodes of internationalization that eventually emerge as a long-term pathway of internationalization (see Jones and Coviello, 2005). The longitudinal development of internationalizing SMEs, and the performance implications of different internationalization pathways, is under-researched. Zahra and George (2002), for example, in their review focusing on international entrepreneurship, pose the question of “What happens after the internationalization?'' and conclude that only a few studies look at this issue. There is still a paucity of empirical research on whether accelerated internationalization (or some other internationalization path) does, in fact, play a role in determining long-term survival, success and/or growth. The few studies that have been conducted often report findings that are contradictory or ambiguous (e.g. Bloodgood et al., 1996) or are based on small samples (e.g. Gabrielsson et al., 2008).
Consequently, the objective of this special issue is to present studies that explicitly deal with the internationalization patterns (or paths/pathways) of internationalizing SMEs (e.g. international new ventures, born-global firms, born-again global firms), and to consider the antecedents and consequences/performance outcomes of internationalization patterns.
Research questions
- Manuscripts are solicited on topics related to the issues described above and including:
- Longitudinal studies focusing on internationalization patterns, paths and pathways of SMEs, born-global firms, international new ventures and born-again globals
- Modeling and describing internationalization patterns, paths and pathways
- Typologies of internationalization paths
- Studies which focus on time and internationalization patterns, paths and pathways
- Studies that compare the characteristics and performance of SMEs that follow different internationalization paths/pathways
- Studies focusing on phases of firms' international development and the growth of SMEs
- Studies focusing on which ways the path/pathway influences the performance of the firm
- Studies focusing on long-term outcomes of “born-globalness'' (and/or other international paths/pathways)
- Contributions to methodology for research on patterns, paths and pathways of internationalizing SMEs
- Multi-country comparative studies of internationalization patterns
- Marketing strategy implications of international pathways
- Internationalization pathways and strategic flexibility
- Causes of/antecedents to internationalization pathway choice
- Requirements for successful internationalization via alternative pathways
- Contingency models of internationalization pathways
- Different internationalization pathways and the global recession.
Authors are not limited to these topics. Both conceptual and empirical papers are welcome.
Guidelines for submissions
All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review. Author guidelines for prospective contributors are available at: www.emeraldinsight.com/imr.htm
Papers should be submitted via the Manuscript Central online submission system: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/imrev (select the correct special issue from the drop-down menu during submission).
For more information, or to discuss the potential fit of your research with the theme of the special issue, contact Olli Kuivalainen: olli.kuivalainen@lut.fi
Traditionally, international business was mainly the domain of large, well-resource endowed multinational enterprises (MNEs). This was largely due to the fact their entrepreneurial counterparts have far fewer financial, human, and tangible resources, and suffer from liability of newness. Recently, we have witnessed more small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs) build sufficient capabilities to go global at early stages. In some cases we see entrepreneurial firms with distinctive characteristics that emerge at the international level from inception (born global). SMEs are more than ever able to address resources and legitimation issues, which are needed for international expansion and which are at the core of their survival.
This volume of Technology, Innovation, Entrepreneurship and Competitive Strategy is devoted to research aimed at understanding the environment in, both the home and host countries that facilitates the emergence of Born-Global organizations, the fostering of internationalization activity of new ventures and SMEs and the entrepreneurial actions and inclinations of these firms’ founders that lead them to enter the international arena at an early stage. We seek papers that explore how such organizations are able to overcome the liability of newness and lack of resources and engage in international activities.
Research topics might include but are not limited to studies that offer insights into the Internationalization strategies of new ventures, born global firms and SMEs; performance implications of the internationalization of new ventures, SMEs and Born-Global firms; factors that lead to greater success of Born Global firms; and the learning processes associate with international capabilities of such firms.
We welcome contributions that tackle these and related issues from a variety of theoretical and empirical perspectives. Contributions to this TIE-CS volume may take a range of forms, may focus on different levels of analysis, and may employ both quantitative and qualitative approaches.
Submission Guidelines: All papers submitted must represent original research not previously published elsewhere. Depending on the scope that you wish to present, the chapter should be approximately 30-40 double-spaced pages including any illustrations, figures, tables and graphs. References to other publications must be in APA 6th Edition reference style. All copy-edited submissions will be subject to review and editorial decisions.
For questions regarding the content of this TIE-CS volume, the editorial process, or to submit a paper, please contact: Barak Aharonson (aharonson@tau.ac.il) or Uriel Stettner (urielste@tau.ac.il)
Expatriate compensation is often regarded as a key component of effective international assignment management (Bonache & Fernandez, 1997; Harvey & Moeller, 2009), yet it has long been a source of frustration for many multinational companies (MNCs) (Chen, Choi, & Chi, 2002; Foote, 1977; Harvey, 1993; Suutari & Tornikoski, 2001). Compensating expatriates is undoubtedly complex, complicated by fluctuating exchange rates, inflation, challenging locations in emerging markets, variable income tax rates, and a range of new compensation practices (Dwyer, 1999; Phillips & Fox, 2003). A survey by Ernst & Young (2010) found that 67 percent of mobility managers report “compensation packages” as the biggest area where international assignee expectations are not met. Yet prior research suggests that expatriates do not seek or accept international assignments purely for financial reasons (Borstorff, Harris, Feild, & Giles, 1997; Dickmann, Doherty, Mills, & Brewster, 2008). Indeed, there is compelling evidence that expatriates have many non-financial reasons for engaging in global mobility, with career enhancement and progression, seeking a personal or family adventure, and fulfilling a lifelong dream among them (Hippler, 2009; Selmer & Lauring, 2012). Why then is expatriate compensation such a challenge?
A successful compensation strategy involves keeping expatriates motivated while maintaining a competitive advantage through the meeting of MNC corporate goals and budgets (Latta, 1998; Morris, Clark, & Pennings, 1997). There is also the challenge of allaying compensation disparity between expatriates and local employees, which has been identified as a key determinant of dissatisfaction and lower morale among host-country nationals (HCNs) that work directly with international assignees (Leung, Wang, & Hon, 2011). Moreover, the fierce competition for foreign talent has caused issues in executive compensation (Carpenter, Sanders, & Gregersen, 2001), not because it is driving salaries up as one would logically expect, but because it is driving salaries down. Consider, for example, that global mobility bears considerable costs that are prohibitive for many companies, the response to which is to engage in cost-cutting. Whereas in years gone by, MNCs used ‘rich’ compensation packages to create a “home away from home” as an incentive to relocate (predominantly the balance sheet or full package approach; see Sims & Schraeder, 2005 for an overview), the availability of more expatriates willing to accept reduced packages such as local-plus and to localise in the host-country has caused a decline in the need for home-country compensation approaches (McNulty & Aldred, 2013), particularly in Asia (Diez & Vierra, 2013; ORC Worldwide, 2008). Local-plus is an approach in which expatriate employees are paid according to the salary levels, structure, and administration guidelines of the host location, as well as being provided, in recognition of the employee’s foreign status, with special expatriate benefits such as transportation, housing, and the costs of dependents’ education. It is worth noting that not all expatriates on local-plus receive the full range of additional benefits, these being at the discretion of the employing organization and largely determined by the location of the assignment (e.g. hardship versus non-hardship location), among other factors (Stanley, 2009). Thus, while the traditional reasons for needing expatriates (e.g. knowledge and skills transfer, global control and culture, career development) remain valid, more localised and local-plus expatriates now have a level of managerial talent that they can often compete for jobs with “full package” expatriates.
But, there are opportunity costs associated with expatriate compensation as a result of these new approaches: changes in the assignee profile in terms of the types of employees that are willing to engage in global mobility (McNulty & Aldred, 2013); increases in turnover when expatriates leave their job during an assignment and join a competitor (Brookfield Global Relocation Services, 2013); and an increasing number of third-country nationals and self-initiated expatriates that are willing to accept localized employment, thereby reducing MNCs’ reliance on parent-country nationals. Yet, our understanding of these issues is scant, with only a limited number of studies exploring, for example, global versus expatriate compensation approaches (e.g., Gomez-Mejia & Welbourne, 1991; Salimaki & Heneman, 2008), and few studies of an empirical nature (e.g., Harvey, 1993; Leung et al., 2011; Lowe, Milliman, De Cieri, & Dowling, 2002; Stone, 1995; Welch, 1994).
In this special issue, we provide a platform for new approaches to expatriation compensation with a view to extending the very limited knowledge about this under-researched and under-developed, yet highly relevant, topic. We invite submissions focused on any of the following themes, noting this is not an exhaustive list and other topics are welcome:
- What are new approaches to expatriate compensation? What are the drivers for their implementation?
- How important is expatriate compensation to expatriates? What are the “hygienic” versus “motivator” factors pertaining to expatriate compensation? What is really “important” to (a) MNCs, and (b) expatriates?
- What are the implications of the rapid increase in “local-plus” and other host-based packages such as localization? In what regions of the world are these compensation approaches taking hold, and why?
- How can managers deal with expatriates’ compensation concerns and develop packages that motivate and reward for optimum return in terms of ROI, assignee satisfaction, and global performance success?
- What are the advantages and disadvantages of traditional versus new approaches to expatriate compensation?
- How should the various types of assignees be compensated (i.e., PCNs, TCNs, SIEs, among others)? What are the implications arising from differences in compensation approaches among different types of assignees?
- To what extent are changes to compensation and the process through which companies manage compensation as important as the remuneration itself?
- What implications arise when expatriates are transitioned from “legacy” (i.e., initially deployed) compensation plans to new approaches?
- Should compensation approaches be different for male versus female expatriates? For parent country nationals versus third country nationals? For traditional versus non-traditional expatriates? For inter-regional versus intra-regional assignees?
- How do expatriate compensation policies and practices affect host country nationals?
- When expatriates receive reduced compensation packages such as local-plus, do career benefits as a form of non-financial compensation mitigate salary losses?
Submission Process and Timeline
To be considered for the special issue, manuscripts must be submitted no later than 30 April, 2015, 5:00pm Eastern Standard Time. Papers may be submitted prior to this deadline as well. We welcome quantitative, qualitative (including case studies) and conceptual papers that provide unique insights into expatriate compensation and its practice. Findings and/or conceptualizations should have theoretical and policy implications, and seek to inform management practice. The editors of the Special Issue will be pleased to discuss initial ideas for papers via email.
Submitted papers must be based on original material not under consideration by any other journal or publishing outlet. The editors will select up to 5 papers to be included in the special issue, but other submissions may be considered for other issues of the journal. All papers will be subject to a double-blind peer review in accordance with the journal guidelines and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a special issue editor. The final acceptance is dependent on the review team’s judgments of the paper’s contribution on four key dimensions:
- Theoretical contribution: Does the article offer novel and innovative insights or meaningfully extend existing theory in the field of global mobility?
- Empirical contribution: Does the article offer novel findings and are the research design, data analysis, and results rigorous and appropriate in testing the hypotheses or research questions?
- Practical contribution: Does the article contribute to the improved management of global mobility?
- Contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the Journal of Global Mobility author guidelines, available at www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm. Please remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the reviewers. Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jgmob. Authors should select the special issue title New Perspectives on Expatriate Compensation from the drop down menu.
For enquiries regarding the special issue please contact either of the two Guest Editors, Yvonne McNulty at ymcnulty@expatresearch.com or Michael Harvey at mharvey@bus.olemiss.edu.
References
Bonache, J., & Fernandez, Z. 1997. Expatriate compensation and its link to the subsidiary strategic role: A theoretical analysis. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 8(4): 457-475.
Borstorff, P., Harris, S., Feild, H., & Giles, W. 1997. Who'll go? A review of factors associated with employee willingness to work overseas. Human Resource Planning, 20(3): 29-40.
Brookfield Global Relocation Services. 2013. Global relocation trends survey report. Woodridge, IL.
Carpenter, M. A., Sanders, W. G., & Gregersen, H. B. 2001. Bundling human capital with organisational context: the impact of international assignment experience on multinational firm performance and CEO pay. Academy of Management Journal, 44(3): 493-511.
Chen, C., Choi, J., & Chi, S. 2002. Making justice sense of local-expatriate compensation disparity: mitigation by local references, ideological explanations, and interpersonal sensitivity in China-foreign joint ventures. Academy of Management Journal, 45(4): 807-817.
Dickmann, M., Doherty, N., Mills, T., & Brewster, C. 2008. Why do they go? Individual and corporate perspectives on the factors influencing the decision to accept an international assignment. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 19(4): 731-751.
Diez, F., & Vierra, K. 2013. Why companies in Asia are changing their approach to pay, WorldatWork. Scottsdale, AZ: WorldatWork.
Dwyer, T. 1999. Trends in global compensation. Compensation and Benefits Review, 31(4): 48-53.
Ernst & Young. 2010. Global Mobility Effectiveness Survey. London, UK.
Foote, M. R. 1977. Controlling the cost of international compensation. Harvard Business Review, 55(6): 123-132.
Gomez-Mejia, L., & Welbourne, T. 1991. Compensation strategies in a global context. Human Resource Planning, 14(1): 29-41.
Harvey, M. 1993. Empirical evidence of recurring international compensation problems. Journal of International Business Studies, 24(4): 785-799.
Harvey, M., & Moeller, M. 2009. Expatriate managers: A historical review. International Journal of Management Reviews, 11(3): 275-296.
Hippler, T. 2009. Why do they go? Empirical evidence of employees' motives for seeking or accepting relocation. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 20(6): 1381-1401.
Latta, G. W. 1998. Expatriate incentives: beyond tradition. HR Focus, 75(3): S3.
Leung, K., Wang, Z., & Hon, A. H. Y. 2011. Moderating effects on the compensation gap between locals and expatriates in China: A multi-level analysis. Journal of International Management, 17(1): 54-67.
Lowe, K., Milliman, J., De Cieri, H., & Dowling, P. 2002. International compensation practices: A ten-country comparative analysis. Human Resource Management, 41(1): 45-66.
McNulty, Y., & Aldred, G. 2013. Local plus: Winning the compensation battle but losing the talent war. Strategic Advisor 4(9): 1-5.
Morris, R. W., Clark, S. W., & Pennings, J. M. 1997. The changing overseas assignment: Managing for competitive advantage. Compensation and Benefits Review, 29(2): 49-56.
ORC Worldwide. 2008. Survey on local-plus packages in Hong Kong and Singapore. New York.
Phillips, L., & Fox, M. 2003. Compensation strategy in transnational corporations. Management Decision, 41(5/6): 465-476.
Salimaki, A., & Heneman, R. 2008. Pay for performance for global employees. In L. Gomez-Majia, & S. Werner (Eds.), Global Compensation: Foundations and Perspectives: 158-168. Milton Park, UK: Routledge.
Selmer, J. & Lauring, J. 2012. Reasons to expatriate and work outcomes of self-initiated expatriates. Personnel Review, 41(5): 665-684.
Sims, R., & Schraeder, M. 2005. Expatriate compensation: An exploratory review of salient contextual factors and common practices. Career Development International, 10(2): 98-108.
Stanley, P. 2009. Local-plus packages for expatriates in Asia: A viable alternative. International HR Journal, 3: 9-11.
Stone, R. 1995. Expatriation remuneration practices: A survey of Australian multinationals. International Journal of Management, 12(3): 364-372.
Suutari, V., & Tornikoski, C. 2001. The challenge of expatriate compensation: The sources of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among expatriates. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 12(3): 389-404.
Warneke, D., & Schneider, M. 2011. Expatriate compensation packages: What do employees prefer? Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal, 18(2): 236-256.
Welch, D. 1994. Determinants of international human resource management approaches and activities: A suggested framework. Journal of Management Studies, 31(2): 139-164.
Professor Jan Selmer, Ph.D.
Founding Editor-in-Chief
Journal of Global Mobility (JGM)
The Home of Expatriate Management Research (Emerald)
www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm
Department of Business Administration
School of Business and Social Sciences
Aarhus University
E-mail: selmer@badm.au.dk
Guest Editors:
Steve Globerman, Western Washington University, Steven.Globerman@wwu.edu
Walid Hejazi, University of Toronto, Hejazi@Rotman.utoronto.ca
MBR Special Issues: Is the Global Company in Retreat? – Overview
The January 28, 2017 Issue of the Economist featured two articles focusing on the question of whether multinational firms (MNEs) were declining in importance (“The retreat of the global company”). The stories made several empirical points, each of which has been a familiar theme in the IB literature:
- MNEs (defined as firms with more that 30% of sales outside their home region) are performing less well than they did in the past relative to more localized competitors.
- Share prices of MNEs are falling relative to non-MNEs
- Profits of the largest MNEs in the world have declined over the past 5 years, with foreign profits declining most
- Returns-on-equity (ROE) of the largest MNEs are falling, and are lower than non-MNEs
- Competition in foreign markets is increasing as local firms become more efficient, particularly in emerging markets, and this lowers profitability in those countries
- MNEs are divesting assets abroad, and are thereby becoming less multinational
- There are differences across industries and countries, but the overall conclusion is that “multinationals are no longer achieving superior performance”.
These issues have been at the heart of the IB literature over the years. There is a significant literature on whether firm performance increases with multinationality; whether MNEs outperform non-MNEs on a variety of measures; whether subsidiaries of MNEs outperform local competitors; whether MNEs are global or regional; and whether emerging market multinationals (EMNEs) are different from developed country multinationals.
The Economist article challenges us to revisit these issues, and ask whether it is true as an empirical matter that MNEs no longer achieve superior performance. We are therefore announcing a special issue of MBR to address these empirical questions.
Some of the following specific questions are meant to be illustrative guides for paper topics. Variations on these questions are certainly welcome:
- Has the value of multinationality changed over time, and is it declining?
- Do MNEs outperform non-MNEs, or do the largest MNEs outperform firms in general? Has the relationship changed in recent years?
- Do the subsidiaries of MNEs outperform local competitors in specific markets, and, if so, is the advantage being eroded?
- Is there a recent tendency for MNEs to reduce and/or consolidate their foreign operations, and if so, does this phenomenon decrease their global presence?
- Does the recent performance of MNEs from developed countries differ from the performance of those from developing countries, and in particular from China?
- Have MNEs enjoyed more success in some geographical regions than in others and, if so, why?
- Have the regional strategies of MNEs highlighted by Alan Rugman’s work become less successful or less prominent in recent years?
We are seeking empirical contributions that address these questions to be published in a special issue of MBR. Consistent with our commitment to publishing papers that explore current concerns in a timely manner, and consistent with our commitment to publish replication and exploratory studies, we are soliciting papers that are purely empirical in nature, and that build on the existing literature to answer the questions above.
There is an extensive empirical literature from which to draw background on these questions. See, for example,
- T. Agmon and D. Lessard (1977), “Investor Recognition of Corporate International Diversification”, Journal of Finance, 32 (4): 1049-1055
- H. Berry (2006), “Shareholder Valuation of Foreign Investment and Expansion”, Strategic Management Journal, 27: 1123-1140.
- S. Douglas and C. Craig (1983), “Examining Performance of U.S. Multinationals in Foreign Markets”, Journal of International Business Studies, 14 (3): 51-62
- L. Games and K. Ramaswamy (1999), “An Empirical Examination of the Form of the Relationship between Multinationality and Performance”, Journal of International Business Studies, 30 (1): 173-188
- L. Li (2007), “Multinationality and Performance: A Synthetic Review and Research Agenda”, International Journal of Management Reviews, 9 (2): 117-139
- A. Michel and I. Shaked (1986), “Multinational Corporations versus Domestic Corporations: Financial Performance and Characteristics”, Journal of International Business Studies, 17 (3): 89-100
- T. Osegowitsch and A. Sammartino (2008), “Reassessing (Home-) Regionalisation”, Journal of International Business Studies 39 (2): 184—196
Submission Details
- We are encouraging the submission of relatively short (6000 words) papers that are both concise and rigorous. We are not looking for new theory development but, rather, new evidence that bears upon the issues raised by the Economist.
- Submissions should be prepared using the MBR Manuscript Preparation Guidelines.
- Manuscripts should be submitted by 20 October 2017 using the MBR website (https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tmbr)
- Manuscripts will be reviewed according to the MBR double-blind review process.
- For informal inquiries related to the Special Issue, proposed topics and potential fit with the Special Issue objectives, please contact the guest editors.
Guest Editor: M. Kabir Hassan, University of New Orleans
Contact for Guest Editor: mhassan@uno.edu
Editorial office: suzy.howell@thunderbird.asu.edu
Submission portal: https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr (to create an account)
Deadlines:
Submissions open: May 1, 2017
Submissions close: November 1, 2017
Reviews and Decision: June 30, 2018
Publication: online upon acceptance, print 2019
Islamic economics aims at analysing, interpreting, and resolving economic problems in accordance with the principles of Islam. It supplements conventional economic analysis by exploring the religious and moral aspects of economic life. Islam is an avowedly norm-based way of life seeking spiritual fulfilment, whereas conventional economics is a predominantly secular discipline which maintains a distinction between the positive and normative. Indeed, the trend of standard economics has been to abandon values and ethical theory. Conventional economics construes an economic agent as a collection of preferences (attitudes, tastes, actions, and laws) that adjusts to changes in the costs and benefits of resources. By comparison, Islam considers a human being as a servant and vice-regent of God on earth, adjusting behaviour so as to adhere to the model laid out in Islamic jurisprudence. It is from this perspective that Islam puts great emphasis on keeping one eye on the material and the other on the spiritual.
Accordingly, in the Islamic schema, the rational actor of standard economics is replaced by the ‘faithful’ actor who pursues personal interests within social bounds and communal interest. Self-interest is not denied, but nor is it absolute. It should be moderated by moral and religious concerns to ensure that others are able to enjoy similar freedoms. Economic activity should be both financially and socially beneficial.
Like conventional economics, Islam encourages economic activity, production, trade, and free markets. However, Islam does not prioritize such behaviour over all other aspects of human activity. While the importance of the market is retained, Islam aims to reform it ‘internally’ through the behaviour of market participants and institutions and reorganize it on a more ethical footing.
The aim of this special issue is to focus on empirical studies and evaluate how well Islamic institutions have achieved their objectives. There is necessarily an emphasis on what can be measured and tested, as opposed to what is conceptualized and formulated. Four recent trends substantiate the relevance of this special issue. First, according to the 2009 Pew Forum on Religion and Public Life report, 1.57 billion people, nearly 1 in 4 in the world, are Muslim. Second, the growth of universities in Muslim countries and the expanding interest in Islamic thought in Western universities have created a receptive audience for Islamic economics. Third, the Islamic financial industry nearly doubled from 2007 to 2010, a period when most conventional banks were struggling. The fact that no Islamic banks needed to be bailed out by taxpayer money has increased interest in the soundness and resilience of the Islamic financial model. Finally, it is imperative for the ideals of Islamic economics to be put to the test. Some key questions must be answered. In a global business environment largely unsympathetic to the Islamic model, how well have religious-based values translated into actual performance? Is following the Islamic model a hindrance to financial institutions, or is there evidence that it can be economically and spiritually rewarding? These are questions that can be answered using modern empirical methods.
Original manuscripts are solicited in the following areas:
- Role of Islamic socio-economic institutions in economic development
- Perspective of Islamic economics and finance, including its critique
- Role of Islamic principles in microeconomic institutions, exchange and market discipline
- Ethics and morality in Islamic economics and finance
- Faith, values, and economic development
- Economic doctrines and values of Islam
- Influence of faith on Muslim economic behaviour
- Infrastructure Finance
- Islamic social thought and corporate governance
- Structuring Islamic securitization
- Socially-responsible investment strategy
- Promoting SME financing through Islamic Finance
- Exploring new horizons of Islamic banking and finance
- Islamic wealth management
- Role of various stakeholders in financing
- Corporate social responsibility of Islamic financial institutions
- Management, leadership and governance of Islamic financial services providers
- Principles of Islamic jurisprudence and legal maxims
- Meeting the needs of macroeconomic challenges through Islamic Finance
- Impact of global financial crisis on Islamic banks
- Risk management in Islamic finance
- Market penetration in non-Islamic contexts
- Zakah, poverty alleviation and Islamic banks
- Shariah-compliant risk management
- Role of Islamic Finance in ensuring greater financial inclusion
- Islamic Finance, consumer protection and financial stability
- Creating financing opportunities through Sukuk
- Islamic Financial Laws and their adoption in the current era
- Islamic Business Ethics
- The economics of corruption in the Muslim world
- The Arab Spring: economic causes, consequences, and lessons learned
- The effects of competition on the development of Islamic finance industry
Manuscripts must be submitted at: https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr and follow author guidelines, available on the journal home site.
Editor: Antonio Marturano (marturanoa@luiss.it) LUISS Guido Carli, Rome (Italy)
Italy has had an amazing fabric of leaders and ideas on leadership since the Romans: Italy indeed did not only provide all kinds of leaders (from Machiavellian-amoralist leaders to saint and value-centred leaders) but also many Italian scholars have helped us to think about leadership. From Marc Aurelius, Machiavelli, Gramsci, to Agamben, today, Italian scholars have provided tools with which to understand the leadership phenomena. On the other hand Caesars, the Church, the Renaissance, the Mafia, Mussolini and Fascism, leftist movements in the ‘70s, the Agnelli Family and today’s Berlusconism provide key features useful to understand leadership, leadership culture, followership and leaders’ behaviours.
Such immense reservoir of leaders and leadership ideas, provide conceptual contradictions that are even challenging established paradigms in leadership studies. Leadership studies indeed is a quite multidisciplinary field as it takes lessons from history, politics, narrative, philosophy, management, law, psychology, sociology and many other fields. Therefore Italy, with its own history, social complexity and contemporary political muddles, is a good field to test, rethink and improve leadership studies concepts and theories. Moreover Italy is a sort of laboratory to understanding social trends. Where are societies going? Which kind of leadership is likely to emerge worldwide? Which kind of national culture has encouraged Berlusconism? Which leadership concepts and theories have been changed through Italian history and how has this happened?
The role of ethics in leadership studies, for example, went through different periods in which its weight in the field continuously changed. In Marc Aurelius ethics and responsibility was a fundamental ingredient for a would-be-leader; while in Machiavelli, apparently, amoralism was a fundamental characteristic for a leader whose only aim was to keep governing a nation. In more recent times Italian political individuals such as Giulio Andreotti or, in business field, Eni’s founder Enrico Mattei, based their leadership performances on crude cynicism, though they were living in a society based on a welfare state economy. Moreover, in the recent climate, the rise of Berlusconism (understood as a leadership model in both business and politics based on the ideal of self-made man) is accompanied by a leadership crisis in left parties and in alternative (that is, based on different values) leadership models in business.
Organizations such as the Catholic Church and Mafia have provided paradoxical examples of leadership phenomena. The Church itself provides complex instances of leadership processes that have contributed to the development and institutionalisation of the central leadership concept of Charisma since St. Paul. To what extent has the Church provided models for everyday organization and to what extent can religious Charisma be a useful tool to clarify modern Charisma? Is religious Charisma a normative notion asking for a true leader to behave ethically? On the other hand the Mafia is the archetypal secret organization: not only because of its hidden membership and its still ancestral initiation rites and secrecy laws (such as omertà code of silence), but also because of its hidden and variable hierarchical structure enable it to create merciless and eccentric leaders. The Godfather or The Sopranos provide a fictional characterization of Mafia leaders’ authoritarian style and personal characteristics. According to G. Debord (in Comments on the Society of Spectacles, 1988), “The Mafia is not an outsider in the world; it is perfectly at home in it. At the moment of the integrated spectacular, it in fact reigns as the model for all the advanced commercial enterprises”. To what extent have corporations in recent times copied the Mafia model to protect their business and their own organization?
Moreover, authors such as Gramsci, Pareto and Mosca offered tools to understand leadership, which are today fundamental tools of leadership analysis. Notably, Gramsci offered the notion of hegemony that, far from becoming an obsolete concept in post-communist societies, represents a crucial concept to understand how leading forces in organisations keep control over followers. Capitalism, Gramsci suggested, maintain control not just through violence and political and economic coercion, but also ideologically, through a hegemonic culture in which the values of the bourgeoisie became the 'common sense' values of all. Thus a consensus culture developed in which people in the working-class identified their own good with the good of the bourgeoisie, and helped to maintain the status quo rather than revolting against it. Impression management is a powerful technique for a leader to exercise his or her hegemony over the group; Benito Mussolini built his image through media such as cinema and radio, and today Silvio Berlusconi has built his image through television; these both created a popular consensus around themselves. How important is the role of mass media in building hegemony and shaping a leader’s image? Will the Internet change the way in which a leader’s image is created and perceived? Will the way in which hegemony is created, change through the use of new media (or, rather than be imposed will it emerge from followers)?
Attached to this concept there is another key concept offered by Gaetano Mosca, namely elite theory. If we start from the layered pyramids Gramsci describes, we can understand Mosca’s definition of modern elites in term of their superior organisational skills. These organisational skills were especially useful in gaining political power in modern bureaucratic society. Nevertheless, Mosca's theory was more liberal than the elitist theory of, for example, Vilfredo Pareto, since in Mosca's conception, elites are not hereditary in nature and peoples from all classes of society can theoretically become the "elite". He also adhered to the concept of "the circulation of elites," which is a dialectical theory of constant competition between elites, with one elite group replacing another repeatedly over time. These concepts are still used in leadership studies as leadership takes place within social structures and also it shapes these social structures. Elites shape leaders directly and indirectly, and leaders shape elites too sometimes simply by rising to pre-eminence and sometimes more directly by shaping that elite, in composition, number wealth and reputation and so forth. Some leadership scholars claim the Leader-Member Exchange theory, in particular, bears a close resemblance to elite theory. In such theory groups can be split into in-groups and out-groups depending on the followers’ particular relationship with the group’s leader. To what extent can this theory be paralleled by elite theory and how can the latter help to theoretically enrich the former? Furthermore, actual organizations, especially those taking place in the Internet, tend to be more and more hierarchically flat: how will the elite theory change in order to fit better the organisational changes around us and how will it be reflected in Leader-Member Exchange theory?
Articles are invited which address these and similar topics. Papers can be of a theoretical or empirical nature, or investigate practical concerns. They can be drawn from any research tradition; contributions of both a quantitative and a qualitative nature are invited.
Enquiries, expressions of interest and submission of abstracts (500 words maximum) should be sent to the Guest Editor shown at the address above. Abstracts should arrive by 1 April 2010. Completed articles of between 6,000-8,000 words should be submitted by 31 January 2011 at the latest for review. Articles will be double blind reviewed. The issue will be published in Summer 2012.
For more information, visit http://lea.sagepub.com
The Japanese economy started picking up steam after the second Abe administration launched a new economic policy named “Abenomics” in 2012, combining a three-pronged approach: fiscal expansion, monetary easing, and structural reform. The Japanese stock market started soaring. In November 2017, the Nikkei Index rose to 22,000 points from 8,500 at the beginning of 2012 and the unemployment rate fell to 2.8%, the lowest level in the last 23 years.
However, many manufacturing sectors continued to be battered by falling competitiveness and scandal. Previously powerful electronics giants like Sanyo, Sharp and Toshiba had recently collapsed or were on the verge of it. Fujitsu, NEC, Toshiba, and Sony sold or separated their PC divisions, which had been their core profit centers, due to increased competition from Asian PC makers. Japan’s advantage in quality control in manufacturing sectors was also challenged. Takata, an automotive parts company, produced defective airbag inflators for years, resulted in a massive recall of 46 million airbags. Nissan recalled all 1.2 million new passenger cars it sold in Japan over the past three years after discovering final vehicle inspections were not performed by authorized technicians. Scandals due to falsification of quality data were uncovered at leading Japanese firms such as Kobe Steel, Mitsubishi Material, Asahi Kasei, Toray, and Toyo Tire and Rubber.
Growth of emerging economies and digital transformation are gradually affecting Japanese business systems and society. The center of gravity in the world economy is shifting from advanced countries to less advanced ones, creating new landscapes for international business strategies of Japanese firms. New waves in digital technologies, e.g., big data, artificial intelligence, IoT, Fintech, and sharing economy apps, are creating both new opportunities and threats to Japanese firms.
A large body of research has examined the unique aspects of traditional Japanese business in such areas as Alliances, Human Resources, and Operations. Research on internationalization of Japanese multinational companies is prominent in the area of International Business. However, Japan and Japanese business have continued to evolve, driven by many factors including changing technology, the changing competitive landscape, maturing of business segments Japanese companies compete in, demographic changes, and many other drivers (Abo 2015; Aman and Nguyen 2012; Amann, Jaussaud, and Martinez 2012; Asakawa and Westney 2013; Nakano 2017; Sekiguchi, Froese, and Iguchi 2016; Sutherland and Santos 2010; Ueki et al. 2010).
This is a call for papers examining what is new in Japanese business. Possible research questions that would suit this Special Issue include, but are not limited to the following:
- What is new about our understanding of Japanese business? In other words, what do we now view distinctly differently than in the past (e.g., new ways of analyzing, interpreting, and new theories)?
- What is new about the international business of Japanese firms? How have Japanese businesses adapted to trends such as globalization, a shrinking domestic workforce, and digitalization?
- What is new about the management systems of Japanese businesses? How have conventional Japanese management practices such as lifetime employment practices evolved? How have corporate governance and keiretsu networks of Japanese firms changed in the face of globalization of business?
- What is new about the environment of Japanese businesses? How has intuitional logic in the Japanese business environment changed and shaped the behavior of Japanese firms and foreign firms in Japan? How have reforms in law and regulations affected business strategy of Japanese firms?
- What is new about innovation in Japanese businesses? Have Japanese firms maintained competitive edges in innovation and new product development? What are the new trends in innovation in Japan? How do Japanese firms compete against Asian multinationals in development and commercialization of emerging technology?
- What is new about entrepreneurial activities in the Japanese business community? How have the way new businesses are organized, launched, and funded changed? Are new emerging Japanese businesses similar or different from traditional companies that came before them?
- What new do we know about how Japanese organizations are turned around, restructured, and reoriented?
This call is open to different qualitative and quantitative methodological approaches and research designs. Empirical papers are encouraged.
Submission Process
To be considered for the Special Issue, manuscripts must be submitted by April 30th, 2018, via https://www.editorialmanager.com/jabm/ To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this Special Issue, please select ‘SI: Japanese Business’ when you reach the ’Select Article Type‘ step in the online submission process. Authors should prepare their manuscript according to the guidelines of Asian Business & Management, see: http://www.palgrave.com/gp/journal/41291/authors/presentation-formatting
Submitted papers will be reviewed through a double-blind peer review process. For enquiries, please contact Derek Lehmberg at derek.lehmberg@ndsu.edu We welcome your submissions.
References
Abo, Tetsuo. 2015. Researching international transfer of the Japanese-style management and production system: Hybrid factories in six continents. Asian Business & Management 14(1): 5-35.
Aman, Hiroyuki, and Pascal Nguyen. 2012. The size and composition of corporate boards in Japan. Asian Business & Management 11(4): 425-444.
Amann, Bruno, Jacques Jaussaud, and Isabelle Martinez. 2012. Corporate social responsibility in Japan: Family and non-family business differences and determinants. Asian Business & Management 11(3): 329-345.
Asakawa, Kazuhiro, and D. Eleanor Westney.2013. Evolutionary perspectives on the internationalisation of R&D in Japanese multinational corporations. Asian Business & Management 12( 1): 115-141.
Nakano, Tsutomu (ed.). 2017. Japanese Management in Evolution: New Directions, Breaks, and Emerging Practices. Abingdon: Routledge.
Sekiguchi, Tomoki, Fabian Jintae Froese, and Chie Iguchi. 2016. International human resource management of Japanese multinational corporations: Challenges and future directions. Asian Business & Management 15(2): 83-109.
Sutherland, John, and José Miguel Pinto Dos Santos. 2010. Corporate employment strategies in Japan, 1991–2003. Asian Business & Management 9(1): 67-100.
Ueki, Hideo, Mariko Ueki, Richard Linowes, and Tomasz Mroczkowski. 2011. A comparative study of enablers of knowledge creation in Japan and US-based firms. Asian Business & Management 10(1): 113-132.
Call for papers & proposal requirements
The main theme of the book is Japanese business in the digital age. We seek proposals for the book that highlight how the Japanese industry is adopting (or adapting) digital technologies and how it is addressing the challenges posed by the emerging technologies. We expect papers from all management areas impacted by digital technologies including manufacturing, human resources such as training and development, economic and financial impacts along with service perspectives.
Proposal should include the following:
- Title of the Chapter
- Names of authors and their affiliation (institution they represent)
- Corresponding author should be identified with a (*)
- Email of corresponding author should be noted
- Proposals should be between 400-500 words in length highlighting the key issues it will address
- Five keywords
- Bios of all authors (between 150-200 words)
Review Process
Proposals submitted will be reviewed by the Editors and an initial structure of the book will be created. After a shortlisting process, selected authors will be invited to submit full papers (about 3000-4000 words). Full Papers submitted will be peer-reviewed by a team of academics and practitioners from around the world. The review process will be coordinated by the Editors and an Editorial Board. The Editors and the Editorial Board members will be introduced when the call for full papers is made.
Objective and Background
Business today is facing unprecedented change mainly due to adoption of new (digital) technologies. We are noticing manufacturing and services being transformed further due to advanced robotics, emergence of artificial intelligence, growth of digital networks which are growing in size and capability as the number of connected devices explodes, advanced manufacturing (such as 3D printing), and collaborative connected platforms including machine to machine communications. Adoption of digital technology has caused process disruptions in both manufacturing and services sector and led to new business models and new products. While most of these examples are in front of us and we read and hear about them in media, this book targets not-so-obvious disruptions (e.g. in the education sector, in services and changing business models) along with some obvious ones (e.g. 3D printing and in addressing mobility issues).
This book explores the impact of such changes from a Japanese perspective on the workforce, education to prepare the workforce for tomorrow, ways to finance technology advancements, the impact of new products and services, impact on supply chains, etc. It will attempt to paint a big picture in which a previously manufacturing centric successful economy adopts change to retain and rebuild success in the global environment.
About the Editors
Anshuman KHARE is Professor in Operations Management at Athabasca University, Canada. He joined Athabasca University in January 2000. He is an Alexander von Humboldt Fellow and has completed two post-doctoral terms at Johannes Gutenberg Universität in Mainz, Germany. He is also a former Monbusho Scholar, having completed a postdoctoral assignment at Ryukoku University in Kyoto, Japan. He has published a number of books and research papers on a wide range of topics. His research focuses on environmental regulation impacts on industry, just-in-time manufacturing, supply chain management, sustainability, cities and climate change, online business education, etc. He is passionate about online business education. Anshuman serves as the Editor of IAFOR Journal of Business and Management, Associate Editor of "International Journal of Sustainability in Higher Education" published by Emerald and is on the Editorial Board of International Journal of Applied Management and Technology.
Hiroki ISHIKURA is a professor for the Department of Commerce in Osaka Gakuin University, Japan and used to be an assistant professor Kyoto University. He received a Doctor of Engineering degree from Kyoto Institute of Technology and graduated from Fukui University textile engineering department. His research interests lie inn Manufacturing Systems. He is closely involved with academic societies such as the International Journal of the Japan Society for Production Management (Editor in Chief), International Journal of Standardization (Editor in Chief), International Journal of Manufacturing Technology and Management (UK) as Editorial Board Member and the Society for Standardization Research (Vice Chairman), the Society of Japan Production Management (Director), the Textile Machinery Society of Japan (Fellow), International and Domestic Technologies, Japan (Secretariat) and Textile Research Journal, USA as a reviewer.
William W. BABER has combined education with business throughout his career, his professional experience has included economic development in the State of Maryland, language services in the Washington, DC area, supporting business starters in Japan, as well as teaching business students in Japan, Europe, and Canada. He is at the Graduate School of Management at Kyoto University where he is Associate Professor in addition to holding courses at University of Vienna and University of Jyväskylä.
Contact / Coordinating Editor
Dr. Anshuman Khare
Professor for Operations Management
ATHABASCA UNIVERSITY
201 - 13220 St. Albert Trail
Edmonton AB T5L 4W1
CANADA
E-mail: anshuman.khare@fb.athabascau.ca
Timeline and Deadlines
September 2018 – December 2019
- Call for proposals: August1, 2018
- Receipt of proposals: October 31, 2018
- Call for papers after review of proposals: November 30, 2018
- Receipt of full papers: April 30, 2019
- Review and revisions to be completed by July 31, 2019
- Preparation of manuscripts and handover to publisher by September 30, 2019
Target Date of Publication: The target date for publication is December 2019 provided everything goes as planned.
Researchers have, quite justifiably, begun the process of investigating multinational companies (MNCs) from developing or transition economies. Yet MNCs from the developed economies will continue, for the foreseeable future, to control a large majority of total foreign direct investment (FDI) assets, and they still enjoy, overall, significant global scope and advantages in technology, brands and management.
In the heyday of Japanese management, in the 1980s, ‘globalization’ was directly associated with ‘Japanization’. Japanese companies with strong competitive capabilities - or, as outlined in Dunning’s eclectic paradigm for FDI, ownership advantages - took the lead in MNC investment. Since 1990, however, Japan has simultaneously faced increasing competitive pressures from other Asian countries and witnessed slow and even negative rates of growth at home. Once responsible for over a fifth of annual global outward FDI flows, Japan more recently accounted for less than 4 per cent. In 1990, Japan’s share of world outward FDI stock had reached a total of 9.7 per cent; then, by 2010, this had fallen to about 4.0 per cent. In 1994, Japan had 19 entries amongst the Top 100 non-financial Transnational Corporations (as outlined in UNCTAD’s World Investment Report), and showed competitive strengths in automobiles (with 3 entries), trading companies (4), electronics and electricals (7), metal making and processing (2), and tyre and rubber (1), alongside the listing of conglomerate business groups (2). Japan, by 2010, had a reduced total of 9 entries, showing a presence amongst the most important multinationals in automobiles (3), trading companies (2), electronics and engineering (3), and, as a result of overseas acquisitions, tobacco (1). The falling away in the numbers of electronics and metal enterprises amongst the biggest global players was especially notable.
Due to its economic difficulties since 1990 and because, arguably, any reform process has been drawn out, there is a tendency to emphasise Japan’s long-term decline from a peak characterised by an ‘economic miracle’ and international leadership in business methods. Yet Japan is the world’s third largest economy, as well as being one of the world’s richest in per capita terms, and it has command of considerable technological and organizational resources. Japan is the world’s 8th largest holder of outward FDI stock (as recorded for 2012), significantly ahead of its major Asian competitors, China, South Korea and Taiwan. It remains the notable Asian exporter of technology, and its MNCs retain a major presence in the developed markets of North America and Europe.
Since the 1990s, Japan’s corporations have been shifting production overseas and their interests have increasingly diverged from those of the Japanese economy. The country’s MNCs had historically relied on their home market and on the resources of their parent companies. Japanese manufacturers found that they had to compete more actively in a global marketplace that demanded capabilities and management approaches not necessarily the same as those needed within Japan. The largest automobile MNCs obtain the majority of their sales from overseas subsidiaries: 64 per cent in the case of Toyota, 81 per cent for Honda, and 78 per cent for Nissan (for 2012). Sony achieved 67 per cent. On the other hand, while the trading company Sumitomo Corporation reached a figure of 47 per cent, the three rivals of Mitsubishi Corporation, Marubeni and Itochu were far behind in the range of 20-30 per cent.
Asia Pacific Business Review is calling for contributions to a special edition on Japanese MNCs, their role in the modern global economy, and their ability to adapt and take advantage of international or regional business trends. The journal welcomes interesting and informative articles on any aspect of this topic, but the following are amongst the issues being considered.
- To what extent have Japanese MNCs adequately adjusted their strategies or business models, since the 1990s, or in response to more recent events? Do they provide useful lessons for developed economy MNCs in general, or for developing economy MNCs in the long-term?
- Have Japanese MNCs been slow to change organisational structures of strong control by the parent company and expatriate managers? Have they failed, comparatively speaking, to develop the capabilities of their subsidiaries? How successfully are they exploiting locational and off-shoring advantages through global value chains?
- To what degree do Japanese MNCs continue to possess competitive advantages in technology, products, operations or management, and how can they increase these specific strengths? How successful have they been at transferring capabilities across national borders, or at utilising the capabilities of their global networks?
- What are the main elements of Japanese MNC human resource management and to what extent are they distinctive? Do these vary globally?
- How effective are Japanese MNCs in managing international strategic alliances, joint ventures, and contracted suppliers and distributors?
- Does the Japanese business system still restrain the emergence of new companies and industries with the potential to replace those demonstrating declining international performance?
- How have changes in Japanese government policy affected the business strategies of MNCs?
- Why, in general, has the Japanese service sector not shown the same levels of international competitiveness and ‘multinational-ity’ as manufacturing? Why, on the other hand, have general trading companies (sogoshosha) been amongst their most successful MNCs (despite comparatively low degrees of ‘multinational-ity’)? In what ways have Japanese trading companies adapted their strategies and business models?
- To what extent does FDI theory help explain the strategies, capabilities and organization of Japanese MNCs? Have Japanese MNCs been a special case?
In the first instance, we are requesting Abstracts by 30th May 2014 and asking that they be sent to Dr Robert Fitzgerald at r.fitzgerald@rhul.ac.uk.
Abstracts should be a maximum of 500 words, and should include: title, aim or rationale, theory or theories used, methodology (if appropriate), findings, implications, and conclusions.
The editors will review the Abstracts, and, following this process, invitations to submit full papers will be sent by 30th June 2014. Full papers will be due by 1st October 2014.
Full papers will be double blind refereed. Authors must submit their manuscript as a word file via email attachment to Dr Robert Fitzgerald at r.fitzgerald@rhul.ac.uk.
Please see the Asia Pacific Business Review website for style requirements: http://www.tandf.co.uk/journals/titles/13602381.asp
Editors:
Dr Robert Fitzgerald, Royal Holloway, University of London: r.fitzgerald@rhul.ac.uk
Professor Chris Rowley, Cass Business School, City University & HEAD Foundation, Singapore: apbr@city.ac.uk
Asia Pacific Business Review is indexed and abstracted in: Social Sciences Citation Index; Journal Citation Reports/Social Sciences Edition; Current Contents/Social and Behavioural Science.
The Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP) editorial team is pleased to announce its inaugural call for review article proposals. A review article should offer a compelling overview of the latest advancements in a well-researched area within the field of international business policy. Rather than concentrating solely on international business scholarship, it should explore both explicit and implicit connections with related research streams in cognate fields, highlighting the benefits of cross-disciplinary idea exchange. A strong review article should not only summarize recent literature but also set a future research agenda that is firmly grounded in the review.
The author team, which may not exceed four authors, should ideally include a recognized scholar from a discipline other than international business. The proposal needs to clearly identify in the proposal the relevant expertise that each author brings to the subject of the review.
The JIBP Editorial Team will provide feedback to each proposal submission and will invite the authors of accepted proposals to submit a full article. In some cases, a proposal may be accepted conditionally, pending on major changes to the proposal. First drafts of review papers will undergo a double-blind review process, with reviewers informed that the manuscript stems from an accepted proposal.
Proposals for review articles should be submitted by November 1, 2024, to the JIBP Managing Editor, Ms. Anne Hoekman (managing-editor@jibp.net). Proposals should be approximately three pages long, excluding the cover letter, references, and bios (max. 400 words per author), which can be added in an appendix. Good proposals generally include:
- A convincing argumentation why a (new) review is needed;
- If previous reviews have been published on the topic, an explanation what the value added is of a new review;
- A discussion of the scope and inclusion/exclusion criteria of the review;
- An overview of the new perspectives and insights that the review article will provide and a discussion why these are policy-relevant;
- A discussion of the relevant expertise that each author brings to the table (in appendix)
For more information on the boundaries of the field of international business policy, please refer to Van Assche and De Marchi (2024). To understand the distinctions between review articles, perspectives pieces, and commentaries, please read Narula (2024).
The Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP) editorial team is pleased to announce its inaugural call for review article proposals. A review article should offer a compelling overview of the latest advancements in a well-researched area within the field of international business policy. Rather than concentrating solely on international business scholarship, it should explore both explicit and implicit connections with related research streams in cognate fields, highlighting the benefits of cross-disciplinary idea exchange. A strong review article should not only summarize recent literature but also set a future research agenda that is firmly grounded in the review.
The author team, which may not exceed four authors, should ideally include a recognized scholar from a discipline other than international business. The proposal needs to clearly identify in the proposal the relevant expertise that each author brings to the subject of the review.
The JIBP Editorial Team will provide feedback to each proposal submission and will invite the authors of accepted proposals to submit a full article. In some cases, a proposal may be accepted conditionally, pending on major changes to the proposal. First drafts of review papers will undergo a double-blind review process, with reviewers informed that the manuscript stems from an accepted proposal.
Proposals for review articles should be submitted by November 1, 2024, to the JIBP Managing Editor, Ms. Anne Hoekman (managing-editor@jibp.net). Proposals should be approximately three pages long, excluding the cover letter, references, and bios (max. 400 words per author), which can be added in an appendix. Good proposals generally include:
- A convincing argumentation why a (new) review is needed; If previous reviews have been published on the topic, an explanation what the value added is of a new review;
- A discussion of the scope and inclusion/exclusion criteria of the review;
- An overview of the new perspectives and insights that the review article will provide and a discussion why these are policy-relevant;
- A discussion of the relevant expertise that each author brings to the table (in appendix)
For more information on the boundaries of the field of international business policy, please refer to Van Assche and De Marchi (2024). To understand the distinctions between review articles, perspectives pieces, and commentaries, please read Narula (2024).
JIBS Special Issues address under-researched or controversial topics, and new emerging themes in international business. Special Issues should encourage new streams of insightful and influential research, in line with the JIBS Statement of Editorial Policy. The JIBS Editors welcome in particular, Special Issue proposals that connect mainstream research performed within the AIB community and streams of research on international business issues developed in related disciplines, and where these strands of research have so far been developed largely independently of one another. The team of Guest Editors for a Special Issue will typically include at least one JIBS Editor as the Supervising Editor, but there is no requirement to include a JIBS Editor in any initial Special Issue proposal, as the editorial team will add an appropriate Supervising Editor after acceptance of the proposal. The proposal should include a maximum of four guest editors (not including the JIBS Supervising Editor). There are typically two JIBS Special Issues published each year.
JIBS also invites proposals for Review Articles. A Review Article should include a compelling summary of the state-of-the-art in a well-researched subject area within the international business field. In addition, it should explore the links, both explicit and implicit ones, between this subject area and complementary research streams in related disciplines: here, it should demonstrate the value of cross-fertilization of ideas from international business and from these complementary research streams, and it should establish an agenda for future research. The team of authors of a Review Paper should ideally include a recognized scholar from another discipline than international business. A JIBS Editor will be actively involved in providing feedback to the authors at an early stage, after proposal acceptance. First drafts of Review Articles will be subjected to a double blind review process, but the reviewers will be informed that the submitted manuscript results from a Review Article proposal that has been accepted by the Editors. The expectation is that manuscripts should go through only one round of revisions.
All proposals for Special Issues should be submitted by July 1, 2024, and all proposals for Review Articles should be submitted by July 1, 2024, to the JIBS Managing Editor, Ms. Anne Hoekman; please note that no extensions will be offered for these deadlines.
A proposal should be approximately 3 pages long, excluding cover letter, references and bios, which can be added in an appendix to the proposal; bios should be limited to 400 words per contributor. Please submit everything in one PDF file. Please note that one criteria used in evaluating any proposal is originality and novelty of the topic, so we ask that submitters disclose any previously published or in process projects on similar themes in a cover letter; if disclosing any projects on a similar topic, please also fill out and include an originality matrix.
For more information:
Please send proposals to
Kim Cahill, Managing Editor (kimberly.cahill@villanova.edu)
The Journal of World Business (JWB) invites proposals for special issues with a due date of June 15, 2016.
JWB has a long tradition of publishing high impact special issues on emerging or provocative topics within the editorial purview of the journal. The objective of these special issues is to assemble a coherent set of papers that move understanding of a topic forward empirically and theoretically. Therefore, as a rule, JWB will not publish special issues based solely on papers presented at conferences or workshops. Rather, special issues must be motivated by a clear and compelling focus on an issue that is timely, significant and likely to generate interest among JWB's readership.
PROCESS
Prospective guest editor(s) should submit written proposals that incorporate the rationale for the special issue topic, positions it in the literature, and include some illustrative topics that papers could focus upon.The proposal should also include a draft of the actual call for papers and outline the credentials of the guest editor(s).
After the closing date, the JWB editorial team will review the proposals submitted and select one to three for further assessment. This additional analysis may include communication with prospective guest editors, suggestions as to how to strengthen the proposal and/or recommendations for the addition of other guest editors. Following this consultation, one proposal will generally be selected by the Editor in Chief to progress, although the guest editor(s) may still be asked to develop and refine the proposal further. The Editor-in-Chief will generally assign a JWB Senior Editor to serve on the SI editorial team as the Supervising Editor. The Supervising Editor will be responsible for acting as a liaison between the JWBeditorial team and the guest editor(s) and ensuring that JWB editorial standards are maintained through the special issue process. She/he will be actively involved in the entire editorial process, including helping to select which papers are sent for review, identifying and assigning reviewers and in preliminary decisions throughout the review process. However, the ultimate decision to accept or reject papers rests with the Editor in Chief.
GUEST EDITOR(S)’ ROLE
The guest editor(s) will be responsible for publicizing the call for papers and for generating submissions for the special issue. If appropriate, they may host a workshop for papers being considered for the special issue but attendance at the workshop cannot be a prerequisite for the acceptance of papers. They will also be actively involved in all stages of the review process in terms of inviting reviewers and making preliminary decisions on submissions. The review process will be managed online through the EES system. It is also expected that the guest editors will write an introductory article that will position the special issue in the relevant literature and briefly introduce the papers in the issue. This paper will be subject to editorial review. In order to prevent any perception of conflicts of interest, it is JWB policy that Guest Editors cannot submit to the special issue as authors of papers beyond the introductory article.
Because several proposals were approved in response to our last call, we anticipate an especially competitive process for this round, with no more than one or two proposals likely to be approved.
JWB has a long tradition of publishing high impact special issues on emerging or provocative topics within the editorial purview of the journal. The objective of these special issues is to assemble a coherent set of papers that move the understanding of a topic forward empirically and theoretically. Therefore, as a rule, JWB will not publish special issues based solely on papers presented at conferences or workshops. Rather, special issues must be motivated by a clear and compelling focus on an issue that is timely, significant and likely to generate interest among JWB's readership.
The due date for submission of the proposals and supporting documents is June 17, 2019. Please submit your documents by email to the JWB Managing Editor Ms. Michaela Correa (JWB@business.rutgers.edu).
PROCESS
Prospective guest editor(s) should submit written proposals that incorporate the rationale for the special issue topic, positions it in the literature, and include some illustrative topics that papers could focus upon. The proposal should also include a draft of the actual call for papers and outline the credentials of the guest editor(s). Please submit the following documents:
- The proposal, including the draft call for papers.
- CVs of the guest editors.
- Any additional information such as plans for special issue workshops.
After the closing date, the JWB editorial team will review the proposals submitted and select one to three for further assessment. This additional analysis may include communication with prospective guest editors, suggestions as to how to strengthen the proposal and/or recommendations for the addition of other guest editors. Following this consultation, one proposal will generally be selected by the Editor in Chief to progress, although the guest editor(s) may still be asked to develop and refine the proposal further. The Editor-in-Chief will generally assign a JWB Senior Editor to serve on the SI editorial team as the Supervising Editor. The Supervising Editor will be responsible for acting as a liaison between the JWB editorial team and the guest editor(s) and ensuring that JWB editorial standards are maintained through the special issue process. She/he will be actively involved in the entire editorial process, including helping to select which papers are sent for review, identifying and assigning reviewers and in preliminary decisions throughout the review process. However, the ultimate decision to accept or reject papers rests with the Editor in Chief.
GUEST EDITOR(S)’ ROLE
The guest editor(s) will be responsible for publicizing the call for papers and for generating submissions for the special issue. If appropriate, they may host a workshop for papers being considered for the special issue, but attendance at the workshop cannot be a prerequisite for the acceptance of papers. They will also be actively involved in all stages of the review process in terms of inviting reviewers and making preliminary decisions on submissions. The review process will be managed online through the system. It is expected that the guest editors organize the review process consistent with the journal’s high standards in terms of quality and process efficiency (e.g., turnaround times). It is also expected that the guest editors will write an introductory article that will position the special issue in the relevant literature and briefly introduce the papers in the issue. This paper will be subject to editorial review. In order to prevent any perception of conflicts of interest, it is JWB policy that Guest Editors cannot submit to the special issue as authors of papers beyond the introductory article.
This process is highly competitive with 1-2 proposals typically accepted per round.
Managing individuals and organizations successfully in turbulent and highly diverse contexts requires, among others, a better understanding of commonalities and differences of these contexts, their unique demands and their changes over time. In particular, knowledge and knowledge flows across various kinds of boundaries, interaction processes among and between different types of individual and collective actors and the role of basic assumptions and action-related values play a key role. In this special issue of Cross Cultural Management, which provides a focused academic platform for encouraging research on cross-cultural aspects of management, work and organization, we would welcome empirical and conceptual papers in the following areas:
* Specific knowledge required for individual and organizational goal achievement in culturally mixed settings
* Boundaries inhibiting and promoting knowledge flows
* The role of knowledge migration for individual and organizational effectiveness
* Different forms of knowledge migration
* Specifics of communication processes in turbulent and culturally mixed environments
* The role of different forms of communication in knowledge migration processes
* New media and communication in culturally mixed settings
* The role of mass media in knowledge migration
* Convergence, divergence or stasis? Individual and collective values and their development over time
* The relationship of values and culture
* Value changes between generations -- myth, reality or ?
* Work-related values of young graduates and their implications for organizations and societies.
The special issue welcomes papers from a broad range of theoretical and methodological positions and is open to empirical as well as conceptual contributions related to the issues of knowledge migration, communication, and value change from the perspective of cross-cultural competence and management.
Additionally, selected papers submitted to the VIIIth IACCM Conference 2009 will be invited for publication in this special issue.
Deadline for submissions: 1 October 2009
Expected publication date: 2010
Submissions are made using Scholar One's Manuscript Central online submission system. This is accessible at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ccmij Please ensure that your submission complies with the journal's manuscript requirements which can be found on the journal homepage at: www.emeraldinsight.com/ccm.htm
Dr Katharina Chudzikowski,
Interdisciplinary Group for Management and Organisational Behaviour,
WirtschaftsuniversitÌt Wien, Althanstrasse 51, A-1090 Wien, Austria
Web site: www.wu-wien.ac.at/inst/ivm
Tel: +43-1-313 36-4009
Fax: +43-1-313 36-90-4009
E-mail: Katharina.Chudzikowski@wu-wien.ac.at
Professor Gerhard Fink,
Research Institute for European Affairs,
WirtschaftsuniversitÌt Wien, Althanstrasse 39-45, A-1090 Wien, Austria
Web site: www.wu-wien.ac.at/wuw/institute/europainstitut/team/fink
Tel.: +43-1-313 36-4137
Fax: +43-1-313 36-90-4137
E-mail: gerhard.fink@wu-wien.ac.at
Professor Wolfgang Mayrhofer,
Interdisciplinary Group for Management and Organisational Behaviour,
WirtschaftsuniversitÌt Wien, Althanstrasse 51, A-1090 Wien, Austria
Web site: www.wu-wien.ac.at/inst/ivm
Tel: +43-1-313 36-4554
Fax: +43-1-313 36-90-4554
E-mail: wolfgang.mayrhofer@wu-wien.ac.at
We are inviting chapters of approximately 10,000 words (although there is much room for flexibility to accommodate the different topics) towards this research handbook. Based on the requests from some of the potential contributors, we have extended the deadline to 30th September 2019. Once the chapters are submitted, comments will be provided to the authors within 2 months, and we will seek the final version of the chapters from authors in another 3-4 months. We request you to submit your chapters to researchhandbook1@gmail.com. Please let us know if you have any questions. We look forward to receiving your chapter.
Editors:
Zaheer Khan, University of Kent, UK (z.a.khan@kent.ac.uk)
Smitha R. Nair, University of East Anglia, UK (s.ravindranathan-nair@uea.ac.uk)
Yong Kyu Lew, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, Republic of Korea (yklew@hufs.ac.kr)
The research handbook aims to bring together the burgeoning and fragmented literature on Knowledge Transfer in the international context, and to provide a definitive direction for future debates and enquiries. While the modern business landscape has become more complex and turbulent, firms have increasingly embraced multiple types of knowledge collaboration and acquisition (by way of strategic alliances and acquisitions) in their attempts to expand into wider markets and consolidate their position, gain access to resources, and acquire technology and know-how (Almeida, Song and Grant, 2002; Bresman, Birkinshaw and Nobel, 1999; Dhanaraj et al., 2004; Lane, Salk and Lyles, 2001; Mudambi, Piscitello and Rabbiosi, 2014; Nair, Demirbag and Mellahi, 2016; Perez-Nordtvedt et al., 2008; Sarala et al., 2016). These collaborative networks often prove to be ‘fertile grounds’ for firms to engage in knowledge exchange and learning, which is considered vital for creating competitive advantage (Argote and Ingram, 2000; Kogut and Zander, 1993; Lyles and Salk, 1996). This has paved way for the growing literature on knowledge transfer, especially between organisations (or organisational units) that are geographically dispersed across different countries or continents. The extant research has largely explored the different antecedents and consequences pertaining to knowledge transfer (Andersson et al., 2015; Driffield, Love and Menghinello, 2010; Foss and Pederson, 2002; Gupta and Govindarajan, 2000; Khan et al., 2015; Minbaeva et al., 2003; Szulanski, Ringov and Jensen, 2016; van Wijk et al., 2008; Zhao and Anand, 2009), while spanning different levels of analysis, including inter-firm, firm, group and individual. The literature also extensively borrows from a wide range of theoretical perspectives to explain the knowledge transfer mechanisms at work with regard to these antecedents and/or consequences. These diverse themes and perspectives have contributed to the fragmented state of the literature and hence this book proposes to highlight emerging common ground and concerns between these themes, and to promote cross-fertilization of ideas and theoretical integration in the context of international knowledge transfer. The digitization and orchestration of diverse global value chain activities also require new means to transfer cross-border knowledge within and across firms, therefore, research is needed in understanding the key mechanisms and timing of such mechanisms and how different mechanisms influence the cross-border knowledge transfer process.
Thus, this handbook is timely and will provide fresh insights into the challenges faced by multinational enterprises whilst engaging in knowledge transfer and further highlight the contextual influences imposed by the industrial sectors and countries that they are associated with. The proposed volume offers a rare and unique opportunity for scholars engaged in research on knowledge transfer to share their findings in such a scholarly outlet. Chapters will be fresh, previously unpublished work, which has an international dimension. A list of indicative themes (but not limited to) that we look forward to receiving as potential contributions is listed below:
Indicative Themes
- Theoretical perspectives relevant to knowledge transfer
- Micro-foundations of knowledge transfer
- Knowledge transfer processes: managerial and organisational mechanisms
- Cultural and institutional influences on knowledge transfer in various contexts
- Comparative analyses of cross-border/regional knowledge transfer
- Different aspects of knowledge transfer – dimensions, directions and levels, in the context of multinational networks, joint ventures, M&As and non-equity based strategic alliances
- Knowledge transfers, specifically to/from emerging/developing economies
- The role of leadership and top management teams in international knowledge transfer
- The role of social capital in knowledge transfer – networks & relationships
- Knowledge transfer, innovation & firm performance
- Knowledge characteristics and their influences on knowledge transfer
- The role of language in the process of cross-border knowledge transfer
- The impact of organizational structure and absorptive capacity in cross-border knowledge transfer
- Reverse knowledge transfer and its impact on innovation
- Cross-border knowledge combination between specialized firms
References
Almeida, P., Song, J. & Grant, R. M. (2002), Are Firms Superior to Alliances and Markets? An Empirical Test of Cross-Border Knowledge Building, Organization Science, 13(2), 147–161.
Andersson, U., Gaur, A., Mudambi, R. & Persson, M. (2015), Unpacking interunit knowledge transfer in multinational enterprises. Global Strategy Journal, 5(3), 241-255.
Argote, L. and Ingram, P. (2000), Knowledge Transfer: A Basis for Competitive Advantage in Firms, Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, 82(1), 150–169. Bresman, H., Birkinshaw, J. & Nobel, R. (1999), Knowledge Transfer in International Acquisitions. Journal of International Business Studies, 30(3), 439-462.
Dhanaraj, C., Lyles, M. A., Steensma, H. K. & Tihanyi, L. (2004), Managing Tacit and Explicit Knowledge Transfer in IJVs: The Role of Relational Embeddedness and the Impact on Performance, Journal of International Business Studies, 35, 428-442.
Driffield, N., Love, J. H. & Menghinello, S. (2010), The multinational enterprise as a source of international knowledge flows: Direct evidence from Italy, Journal of International Business Studies, 41, 350–359.
Foss, N. J. & Pederson, T. (2002), Transferring Knowledge in MNCs: The Role of Sources of Subsidiary Knowledge in Organizational Context, Journal of International Management, 8(1), 49-67.
Gupta, A. K. & Govindarajan, V. (2000), Knowledge Flows Within Multinational Corporations, Strategic Management Journal, 21, 473-496.
Khan, Z., Shenkar, O., & Lew, Y.K. (2015), Knowledge transfer from international joint ventures to local suppliers in a developing economy. Journal of International Business Studies, 46(6), 656-675.
Kogut, B. & Zander, U. (1993), Knowledge of the firm and the evolutionary theory of the Multinational Corporation, Journal of International Business Studies, 24(4), 625-645.
Lane, P. J., Salk, J. E. & Lyles, M.A. (2001), Absorptive Capacity, Learning, and Performance in International Joint Ventures, Strategic Management Journal, 22, 1139-1161.
Lyles, M. A. & Salk, J. E. (1996), Knowledge Acquisition from Foreign Parents in International Joint Ventures: An Empirical Examination in the Hungarian Context. Journal of International Business Studies, 27(5), 877-903.
Minbaeva, D. B., Pedersen, T., Bjorkman, I., Fey, C. F. & Park, H. J. (2003), MNC knowledge transfer, subsidiary absorptive capacity, and HRM, Journal of International Business Studies, 34, 586–599.
Mudambi, R., Piscitello, L. & Rabbiosi, L. (2014), Reverse knowledge transfer in MNEs: Subsidiary innovativeness and entry modes. Long Range Planning, 47(1-2), 49-63.
Nair, S. R., Demirbag, M. & Mellahi, K. (2016), Reverse knowledge transfer in emerging market multinationals: The Indian context. International Business Review, 25(1), 152-164.
Pérez-Nordtvedt, L., Kedia, B. L., Datta, D. K. & Rasheed, A. A. (2008), Effectiveness and Efficiency of Cross-Border Knowledge Transfer: An Empirical Examination. Journal of Management Studies, 45(4), 714-744.
Sarala, R. M., Junni, P., Cooper, C. L. & Tarba, S. Y. (2016), A sociocultural perspective on knowledge transfer in mergers and acquisitions. Journal of Management, 42(5), 1230-1249.
Szulanski, G., Ringov, D. & Jensen, R. J. (2016), Overcoming stickiness: How the timing of knowledge transfer methods affects transfer difficulty. Organization Science, 27(2), 304-322.
van Wijk, R., Jansen, J.J., & Lyles, M.A. (2008), Inter‐and intra‐organizational knowledge transfer: a meta‐analytic review and assessment of its antecedents and consequences. Journal of Management Studies, 45(4), 830-853.
Zhao, Z. J. & Anand, J. (2009), A multilevel perspective on knowledge transfer: Evidence from the Chinese automotive industry. Strategic Management Journal, 30(9), 959-983.
Guest Editors:
Douglas J. Cumming, Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada
Sofia Johan, Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada; and Tilburg Law and Economics Centre (TILEC), University of Tilburg, Netherlands
Feng Zhan, Boler School of Business, John Carroll University, USA
Minjie Zhang, Odette School of Business, University of Windsor, Canada
Submission Deadline: September 17th, 2017
BACKGROUND OF THE SPECIAL ISSUE:
The objective of this special issue of the International Journal of Managerial Finance (IJMF) is to promote both theoretical and empirical research on the intersection and interaction law and culture on corporate decisions, firm value, and financial transactions.
Academic research in finance has traditionally studied legal perspectives on finance following the pioneering work of La Porta et al. (1998); however, more recently, there has been a growing interest in the role of culture in finance (Karolyi, 2016). Both law and national culture can explain a number of corporate events such as foreign investments, cross-listings, and innovation investment, among other things. Nevertheless, few studies up to date focus the intersection and interaction impact between law and culture on firms and financial markets. One of the difficulties to implement such studies is that regulations tend to change from time to time but national culture remains relatively stable. Also, national culture and legal environments are highly correlated. To this end, new research is needed to ascertain the relative importance of law versus culture in financial markets.
The special issue of IJMF welcomes submissions of papers developed themes that include but are not limited to:
- To what extent are regulatory changes in different countries affected by national culture (Stulz and Williamson, 2013)?
- What is the role of angel investors, venture capital, innovation centers and incubators in different economies around the world (Cumming and Johan, 2013), and how does it depend on national culture and financial regulation?
- What is the relative importance of culture and legal institutions for emerging versus developed markets? Are agency problems associated with state-owned enterprises affected by the legal and cultural settings in which they operate?
- How is contagion influenced by law versus culture in global financial markets?
- What are the identification strategies/methodologies that can provide causal insights between cultural and legal institutions and financial markets?
- How do legal and cultural institutions affect firms’ innovation investment and long-term financial performance?
- How do legal and cultural forces interact in ways that exacerbate or mitigate risk-taking behavior of firms and individuals?
References
Cumming, D.J., and S. Johan, 2013. “Technology Parks and Entrepreneurial Outcomes around the World” International Journal of Managerial Finance 9(4), 279-293.
Karolyi, A. (2016). “The Gravity of Culture for Finance,” Journal of Corporate Finance 41(1), 610-625.
La Porta, R., Lopez-de-Silanes, F., Shleifer, A., and Vishny, R.W., 1998. “Law and Finance,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 1113–1155.
Stulz, R.M., Williamson, R. (2003). “Culture, Openness, and Finance” Journal of Financial Economics 70, 313-349.
SUBMISSIONS AND REVIEW PROCESS:
The deadline for submission to the special issue of IJMF is September 17th, 2017. All manuscripts submitted to the special issue should be submitted through the IJMF Manuscript Central website online at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ijmf. Contributors should follow the IJMF Author Guidelines (which can be found at http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/authors/index.htm ). Final decisions on papers for the IJMF special issue will be made later in the year.
CONTACTS:
Douglas J. Cumming, Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada, douglas.cumming@gmail.com
Sofia Johan, Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada, and Tilburg Law and Economics Centre (TILEC), University of Tilburg, Netherlands, sjohan@schulich.yorku.ca
Feng Zhan, Boler School of Business, John Carroll University, USA, fzhan.jcu@gmail.com
Minjie Zhang, Odette School of Business, University of Windsor, Canada, mikezhang115@gmail.com
Special Issue Guest Editors:
Jacqueline Mayfield, Texas A&M International University
A.R. Sanchez Jr. School of Business
Milton Mayfield, Texas A&M International University
A.R. Sanchez Jr. School of Business
The International Journal of Business Communication seeks and encourages the submission of high quality scholarly manuscripts for a special issue on Leadership Communication, scheduled for publication in January, 2017. IJBC is a respected, well established, high impact international journal that disseminates theoretical and practical knowledge from the business communication field. The journal draws contributions from multiple disciplines so as to fully explore all aspects of business communication, and accepts manuscripts from the administrative disciplines, liberal arts, and social sciences.
The general consensus is that leadership communication is vital to organizations. Yet there is much divergence in its conceptualizations – which are further complicated by emergent research streams, due in part to globalization, digitalization, shared leadership, workforce diversity, and demands for greater leadership integrity. Case in point, some scholars employ hierarchical leadership communication models, while others utilize discursive processes wherein leadership is co-created. Equally important, a wide array of methodological strategies have been utilized – embracing a spectrum of quantitative to qualitative approaches – to investigate leadership communication. As for emergent research streams, some of the existing leadership communication research is under scrutiny, not having always incorporated the factors of globalization, demographic diversity, employee empowerment, and information technology into its models.
All of the preceding leadership communication topics need research initiatives and progress. Moreover, the current leadership communication literature reveals a dearth of inquiry which clarifies both leadership communication processes and their rapports with key organizational outcomes, including firm, employee, customer, societal, and other stakeholder welfare.
For all of these reasons, this special issue seeks manuscripts that either reflect these diverse perspectives and/or investigate developing trends in leadership communication. All quality manuscripts that address leadership communication in these contexts are welcomed for submission. Topic categories include but are not limited to:
- Team Leadership Communication
- Shared Leadership Communication
- Strategic Leadership Communication
- Leadership Communication Channels
- The Context of Leadership Communication
- Cross-Cultural Leadership Communication
- Non-Traditional Leadership Communication
- Leadership Communication and Social Issues
- Co-Creation of Leadership Through Discourse
- Methodological Issues in Leadership Communication Research
This special issue on leadership communication is being co-edited by:
- Professor Jacqueline Mayfield, PhD, A.R. Sanchez Jr., School of Business, Texas A&M International University, Laredo, TX
- Professor Milton Mayfield, PhD, A.R. Sanchez Jr., School of Business, Texas A&M International University, Laredo, TX.
The co-editors will gladly discuss preliminary paper ideas, and both can be contacted at jmayfield@tamiu.edu.
All manuscripts will be reviewed following IJBC´s normal double-blind review process. Submissions are open to everyone.
For your submission, please send an initial proposal consisting of approximately a fifteen hundred (1,500) word abstract. This proposal should include your research question, method (quantitative and qualitative), findings, and conclusions. Theory development and simulation proposals will also be considered provided there is a strong fit with the issue´s theme and the work is of especially high quality. Your proposal should be submitted through e-mail (to jmayfield@tamiu.edu) no later than January 31, 2016. Contributors will be informed of decisions by March 2016. All accepted proposals must be completed and submitted as full papers by May 15, 2016.
JOURNAL OF WORLD BUSINESS
Call for papers for a special issue
Submission Deadline: September 1, 2014
Learning and Knowledge Management In and Out of Emerging Markets
Guest Editors: Preet S. Aulakh, Sumit K. Kundu, and Somnath Lahiri
Supervising Editor: Mike Peng
Significant attention has been devoted in recent years to understand how MNCs from developed nations enter and compete in various emerging markets. A growing body of research has also focused on how MNCs from emerging markets internationalize to compete in the global arena. There is unanimity amongst scholars that competing within emerging markets and internationalizing out of these markets require strategic choices that are markedly different from those prescribed in traditional models of MNC behavior (Aulakh & Kotabe, 2008; Contractor et al., 2007; Hoskisson et al., 2013; Luo & Tung, 2009; Meyer et al., 2009). But how MNCs learn and manage knowledge as they compete in and out of emerging markets has gained little scrutiny in the contemporary international business research (Lahiri, 2011; Peng et al., 2010). The aim of this JWB special issue is to foster scholarship that develops new theory and promotes novel empirical and practitioner insights on MNC learning and knowledge management (LKM) strategies in the context of emerging markets.
The importance, processes, and outcomes of LKM have been well documented in the literature. Organizational learning theory considers firms as cognitive enterprises. Although some overlaps exist between learning and knowledge management, the former can be considered a precursor of the latter. Through learning, organizations are able to create, acquire, and transfer knowledge and accordingly modify their behavior to reflect new knowledge and insights. Knowledge acquired as a result of learning allows firms to either reinforce or change organizational routines. Scholars have forwarded the notion of learning organizations, wherein individual-level learning is transferred to the organization level resulting in shared mental models. These mental models allow organizations to update their beliefs about various cause-effect relationships relating to themselves, their markets, and competitors, and devise strategies to adjust and respond to internal and external environments. Learning and consequent knowledge development is facilitated by firms’ experience, both positive and negative (Chang et al., 2012). Scholars agree that properly implemented LKM processes can be a source of competitive advantage. However, they also caution that firms can make erroneous strategic decisions if learning is based on biased representation of past reality.
To compete in foreign markets MNCs need to learn and gather knowledge about the local business environment including roles played by various stakeholders, business partners and competitors. Dealing with various components of learning (information acquisition, information dissemination, shared interpretation, and development of organizational memory) and knowledge management can be tricky as host nations may present institutional environments that may be ambiguous and uncertain to foreign MNCs. Therefore, MNCs may need to frame different LKM strategies that fit local contexts and allow them to compete over local rivals by grafting new knowledge or engaging in learning and knowledge gathering from others. Given that business environments in emerging markets are markedly different from those in developed nations, question arises as to how MNCs engage in LKM as they compete in and out of emerging markets and whether LKM processes differ owing to differences in MNCs’ home market attributes.
This special issue solicits scholarly contributions that advance our understanding of LKM strategies that (a) MNCs from developed nations deploy to enter and compete within emerging markets, and (b) MNCs from emerging markets utilize in their own internationalization processes. The following is an illustrative list of questions:
- How do developed nation MNCs (DMNCs) learn and build knowledge from their prior entries into emerging markets? What strategies and structures do they employ to use existing knowledge to compete in emerging markets?
- How do emerging market MNCs (EMNCs) learn and build knowledge from their prior internationalization moves out of their home markets? What strategies and structures do they employ to use existing knowledge to compete in developed markets or other emerging markets (Peng, 2012)?
- How and why LKM strategies of DMNCs and EMNCs differ? In addition, how do these strategies differ across manufacturing and service sectors (Kundu & Merchant, 2008)?
- Does affiliation with specific networks or business groups influence the KLM strategies of firms?
- What role does distance (institutional, organizational, geographical) (Berry et al., 2010) play in the LKM strategies of DMNCs and EMNCs?
- How do DMNCs and EMNCs organize resources and capabilities (Lahiri et al., 2012) to efficiently formulate and implement LKM strategies?
- How do DMNCs and EMNCs institute policies, structures, and processes to facilitate LKM (Sun et al., 2012)?
- How do LKM strategies affect global competitiveness and performance of DMNCs and EMNCs?
Submission process
Authors should email their manuscripts in Word (no PDF please) to all three Guest Editors (and copy Supervising Editor) with the subject labeled “Submission to JWB SI: Learning and knowledge management” by September 1, 2014. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the Guide for Authors available at http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-world-business/1090-9516/guide-for-authors. The anticipated publication date is 2016. All submitted manuscripts will be subjected to JWB’s blind review process.
Submitted manuscripts may be conceptual or empirical (quantitative or qualitative). Questions about the special issue may be directed at any of the following guest editors:
- Preet S. Aulakh, Guest Editor, York University, Canada (email: paulakh@schulich.yorku.ca)
- Sumit K. Kundu, Guest Editor, Florida International University, USA (email: kundus@fiu.edu)
- Somnath Lahiri, Guest Editor, Illinois State University, USA (email: slahiri@ilstu.edu)
References
Aulakh, P.S., & Kotabe, M. (2008). Institutional changes and organizational transformation in developing economies. Journal of International Management, 14(3): 209-216.
Berry, H., Guillén, M.F., & Zhou, N. (2010). An institutional approach to cross-national distance. Journal of International Business Studies, 17: 1-26.
Chang, Y., Gong, Y., & Peng, M.W. (2012). Expatriate knowledge transfer, subsidiary absorptive capacity, and subsidiary performance. Academy of Management Journal, 55(4): 927-948.
Contractor, F.J., Kumar, V., & Kundu, S.K. (2007). Nature of the relationship between international expansion and performance: The case of emerging market firms. Journal of World Business, 42(4): 401-417.
Hoskisson, R.E., Wright, M., Filatotchev, I., & Peng, M.W. (2013). Emerging multinationals from mid-range economies: The influence of institutions and factor markets. Journal of Management Studies (In Press).
Kundu, S.K., & Merchant, H. (2008). Service multinationals: Their past, present, and future. Management International Review, 48: 371-377.
Lahiri, S. (2011). India-focused publications in leading international business journals. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 28(2): 427-447.
Lahiri, S., Kedia, B.L., & Mukherjee, D. (2012). The impact of management capability on the firm resource-performance relationship: Evidence from Indian offshore outsourcing service providers. Journal of World Business, 47(1): 145-155.
Luo, Y., & Tung, R.L. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4): 481-498.
Meyer, K.E., Estrin, S., Bhaumik, S.K., & Peng, M.W. (2009). Institutions, resources, and entry strategies in emerging economies. Strategic Management Journal, 30(1): 61-80.
Peng, M.W. (2012). The global strategy of emerging multinationals from China. Global Strategy Journal, 2(2): 97-107.
Peng, M.W., Bhagat, R.S., & Chang, S-J. (2010).Asia and global business. Journal of International Business Studies, 41(3): 373-376.
Sun, S.L., Peng, M.W., Ren, B., & Yan, D. (2012). A comparative ownership advantage framework for cross-border M&As: The rise of Chinese and Indian MNEs. Journal of World Business, 47(1): 4-16.
Aim of the edited book volume
Historical and contemporary evidences underline the contributions of Diaspora Entrepreneurs (DEs) to the welfare of their country of ancestry, through diverse entrepreneurial activities that foster local economic growth and development. Transnational Diaspora Entrepreneurship (TDE) can leverage international trade competitiveness, and deepen regional integration in Africa. A variety of lessons can be drawn from major Regional Economic Communities (RECs) such as the Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS), Common Market for Eastern and Southern Africa (COMESA), East African Community (EAC), Intergovernmental Authority for Development (IGAD), Indian Ocean Commission (IOC), and Southern African Development Community (SADC). Those joint lessons from practice and the related theories are systematized and will be made public in this book.
Title of the edited book volume
Leveraging Transnational Diaspora Entrepreneurship for Investments, Trade, Regional Integration, and Local Economic Development in Africa: Insights from Theory and Practice
Main parts of the edited book volume
The volume is divided into five parts:
Part I: Theoretical and empirical explanations of the business and economic development impact of TDE This part will illuminate the theoretical and empirical explanations of the broad impacts of TDE on business and economic development.
Part II: TDE and development This part will identify the diverse factors which, are the main drivers of TDE, including cultural, (e.g., urge to achieve economic independence) economic (e.g., access to business finance) and social (e.g., social exclusion, or otherwise), etc.
Part III: TDE and local industrial transformation This part will query how Diaspora Entrepreneurs can and have harnessed knowledge and skills generated or acquired in various sciences (natural i.e., environmental and agricultural, engineering, architectural, medical or social.), to advance industrial transformation in their countries of ancestry (CoA).
Part IV: TDE, regional integration, and international trade This sub-theme will explore the impact which TDEs have on the trade performance of their CoA, as well as on their countries of residence (CoR). Also, it will explore how TDE impact regional integration agenda of the RECs to which their countries of origin belong.
Part V: Harnessing TDE for economic development in Africa: conclusions and way forward This part will digest of ideas and facts for harnessing TDE for economic development in Africa, and outline the elements of a strategy needed to achieve this goal.
Submission timelines
Submissions are invited but not limited to member institutions of the Trans Africa Universities Partnership (TANUP) for any of the sub-themes. They can be made to any of the editors of the proposed book. Chapters may cover more than one thematic area. More than one chapter from the one author is also invited.
Submission of (revised) abstract: 15 July, 2015
Submission of (revised) draft chapter: 31 August 2015
Submission of edited final chapter: 30 October 2015
Volume editors
- Professor Klaas Molenaar; The Hague University of Applied Sciences and DSV, Stockholm University, Sweden, klaas.molenaar@timpoc-consultants.com
- Professor Francis Mambalya, Leipzig University, Germany f.matambalya@gmail.com and francis.matambalya@uni-leipzig.de
Organizations of today frequently emphasize their way of doing things in the belief that they can guide employees’ work and link behaviors to positive organizational outcomes. Such articulation has taken on many guises over the years, many based on values connected to organizational culture, sometimes argued to ‘glue’ geographically dispersed multinational companies (MNCs) together, while managing – or effectively overriding – national cultural differences. Interestingly, the tide now seems to have turned, and a look at organizations’ present-day websites reveals that MNCs are more likely to embrace cultural diversity, view multiculturalism as an asset, and envision multicultural leadership. Culture – both organizational and national – is now viewed as something to be leveraged, and values are seen as instrumental for success.
Since the early works on national cultural values, much has been learned about how to manage differences related to both culture and values. Yet, it is our belief that values should not just be managed, but that organizations should work to glean the positive aspects arising from differences in national cultural, organizational and individual values. This special issue welcomes contributions that veer from traditional emphases on national cultural values. As new forms of organizing emerge, so, too, should research move from a focus on the traditional to new applications of values. We especially encourage novel research offering fresh insights at various levels of analysis, interdisciplinary approaches that offer new or critical perspectives and contributions that are forward-looking without forgetting our roots. Empirical, conceptual and theory-building papers are welcome. Possible topics in the context of global organizations include but are not limited to:
• leveraging values, core values, value diversity, value conflicts, espoused values, bottom-up value-based cultures, new perspectives on the value-fit (person/organization), values and cultural contexts, values and multiculturalism;
• value-driven leadership or management, values in work teams, values in global projects, values and talent management, values and careers, values and employee engagement, values of migrant workers, values and work-family conflict or enrichment, generational value differences and implications for organization and management;
• values and organizational learning, values and financial performance, value differentiation and competitiveness, values and power, values and control, value and impression management, values and networks, values and sustainability, values and the dark side of globalization, values and positive organizational theory and thinking.
About the Pre-Publication Workshop
A pre-publication workshop will be held in Sigtuna, Sweden, on November 8-10, 2012. The purpose of the workshop is to further develop and improve a set of selected potentially publishable papers. Invitations to the workshop will be based on the submitted full papers. Authors who are invited will be asked to submit a revised paper before the workshop, based on a first round of reviews. The revised papers will be distributed to all workshop participants to be read beforehand in preparation for the feedback and discussion sessions. Workshop attendance is not mandatory to being considered for publication, but we encourage participation as we believe that it is helpful in the paper-writing process. The authors will be asked to revise their papers in another round after the workshop, based on the Editors’ summary comments from the workshop and from the reviewers in the double-blind review process. Selection of papers for publication will be based on the final revised paper submitted after the workshop.
Submission Information
• All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review.
• Authors should follow MIR guidelines, http://www.mir-online.de/Guideline-for-Authors.html.
• Contributions should be submitted in English language in a Microsoft or compatible format via e-mail attachment to: globalvalues@fek.uu.se
• Questions can be addressed to any of the co-editors on:
lena.zander@fek.uu.se
Karsten.Jonsen@imd.ch
Elizabeth.Rose@aalto.fi
Audra.Mockaitis@monash.edu
• Submission deadline: May 1, 2012 (earlier submissions are encouraged).
Important Dates
May 1, 2012 Paper submission
August 1, 2012 Selection of potentially publishable papers to revise and resubmit, and an invitation to the pre-conference workshop
October 1, 2012 Submission of first revise and resubmit papers
November 8-10, 2012 Pre-publication workshop in Sigtuna, Sweden
February 1, 2013 Submission of second revise and resubmit papers
March 1, 2013 Selection of papers for publication
Topic
The rise of the city as a magnet of economic activity and hub of trade and investment has attracted the agglomeration of business firms and particularly multinational companies. Global cities today project their economic and political power across borders making them important economic agents in the global economy (Sassen, 1991). A few of these cities located in Latin America are creating business and economic conditions that rival those of some countries in the region. Increased agglomeration also brings negative conditions such as crime, violence, traffic congestion and pollution that come with increased urbanization. On a smaller scale, agglomeration spreads within a country, creating significant hubs to attract business that in turn generates a sub-national cycle of prosperity and urban malaise. Cities have coped with the opportunities and problems in many different ways and create their particular sets of regulations, legal frameworks and norms. In some cities, corruption and inefficiency have plagued city governance. The efficiency and quality of these normative sets and their implementation is referred to as the quality of institutions (North, 1990; Glaeser et. al, 2004; La Porta et. al 1999). In very large cities, sub-city governance emerges as the more specific context that explains location decisions. Municipalities, city districts add a layer of regulations but also deal with their own social problems.
This special issue focuses on understanding how the quality of the institutional environment of an Iberoamerican city shapes the location decision of multinational franchises. For instance, why would Starbucks populate Santiago, Chile with a large network of stores while it would have few stores in Caracas, Venezuela?
Economic theory has focused on the study of the economic advantages of co-location and externalities (Krugman, 1991). International business theory has focused on how multinationals internalize the location advantages offered by host countries. These local advantages can be leveraged with firm specific advantages to gain local competitive advantage (Cantwell, 2009; Dunning, 1998). The literature in International Business has analyzed this decision at the region and country level (Alcacer, 2013; Alfaro and Chen, 2014; Flores, et. al 2013; Tan and Meyer, 2011). Economic geography focuses on the spatial characteristics that can favor an agglomeration of economic activities. The integration of International Business Theory and Economic Geography views on the location decision has drawn the attention of researchers to the location decisions of multinationals (Beugeldsjik, 2010; Beugeldsjik et. al 2013). The Institutional Theory perspective on location decisions of multinationals is more recent. Using the perspective that institutions matter opens up a promising research avenue. The focus of research using an institutional approach has been at the regional and national level (Ali et. al, 2010; Du and Tao, 2008; Mengistu and Adhikary, 2011). Research focusing on any of these three perspectives at the city level is scant despite the fact that most location decisions take place at this level (Goerzen, et. al 2013). Furthermore, research on agglomeration and location decisions about Iberoamerica is rare (Korez-Vide, et.al 2014) and at the city level non-existent.
The objective of this special issue is to integrate the International Business, Economic Geography and Institutional perspectives to generate better insights on the importance of institutional quality on the location and agglomeration of multinational and national companies at the city level.
Examples of research questions of contributions to the special issue include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Does the institutional quality of a city moderate the location decision of a multinational?
- Does the agglomeration and geographic spread of multinationals differ between foreign-owned or nationally owned business networks?
- What factors explain the agglomeration of business in general and multinationals in Latin American cities?
- How to measure the institutional quality of Iberoamerican cities?
- How do regional, country and city factors explain the agglomeration of multinationals in Iberoamerica?
We invite contributions using various methodologies to address these questions. These contributions could use a multilevel (region, country, city and district (community). Methodological contributions on how to better measure and validate city institutional quality and agglomeration are also welcome; case studies and descriptive studies are not.
Guest Editor: Dr. Fernando Robles, School of Business, The George Washington University. roblesf@gwu.edu
Submission Process
The submission process will be as follows.
Step 1- Full papers should be submitted through ScholarOne Manuscripts page of Management Research (https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/mrjiam) no later than August 31st, 2016. Manuscripts should have a maximum of 8000 words, and must include a structured abstract (http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/authors/guides/write/abstracts.htm).
Do not forget to select this special issue once you login into the system.
Step 2 - After the blind review recommendations, the guest editor will announce acceptance / rejection decisions by November 31st, 2016.
Step 3 - Authors of accepted papers will have until December 31st, 2016 to submit their manuscripts incorporating the reviewers’ suggestions.
Expected publication of accepted papers will be in the second half of 2017.
References
Alcacer, J. (2013). Location strategies for agglomeration economics. Strategic Management Journal, 35, 1749-1761.
Alfaro, L. and Chen, M.Y. (2014). The global agglomeration of multinational firms. Journal of International Economics, 94, 263-276.
Ali, F.A., Fiess, N. and MacDonald, R. (2010). Do institutions matter for Foreign Direct Investment? Open Economic Review, 21, 201‐209.
Beugeldsjik S., Mumdabi, R., Anderson, U. and Zaheer S. (2013). The multinational in geographic space- Special Issue. Journal of International Business Studies, 44, 413-546.
Beugelsdijk, S., McCann, P., and Mudambi, R. 2010. Place, space and organization; economic geography and the multinational enterprise. Journal of Economic Geography, 10, 485-493.
Cantwell, J.A. 2009. Location and the multinational enterprise. Journal of International Business Studies, 40, 35-41.
Du, J., Lu, Y. and Tao, Z. (2008). FDI Location choice: Agglomeration vs. institutions. International Journal of Finance and Economy, 13.92-107.
Dunning, J. H. (1998). Location and the multinational enterprise: A neglected factor? Journal of International Business Studies, 29, 45-66.
Flores, R., Aguilera, R. Mahdian, A. and Vaaler, P. (2013). How well supranational regional grouping schemes fit international business research models? Journal of International Business Studies, 44, 451-474.
Glaeser, E.L., Porta, R.L., Lopez-‐de-‐Silanes, F. and Shleifer, A. (2004). Do institutions cause growth? Journal of Economic Growth, 9, 271-303.
Goerzen, A., Asmussen, C.G., and Nielsen, B. (2013). Global cities and multinational enterprise location strategy. Journal of International Business Studies, 44, 427- 450.
Korez-Vide, R., Voller, P. and Bobek V. (2014). German and Austrian foreign direct investment in Brazilian regions: Which are the location choice factors? Journal of Management and Strategy, 5, 68-81.
Krugman, P. (1991). Increasing returns and economic geography. Journal of Political Economy, 99, 483-499.
La Porta, R. Lopez-de-Silanes, F., Shleifer, A. and Vishny, R. (1999). The quality of government. Journal of Law, Economics and Organization, 15, 222-279.
Mengistu, A.A. and Adhikary, B. (2011). Does good governance matter for FDI inflows? Evidence from Asian economies. Asia Pacific Business Review, 17 (3), 281-‐299.
North, D.C. (1990). Institutions, institutional change and economic performance. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Sassen, S. 1991. The global city: New York, London, Tokyo. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Tan D., and Meyer, K. (2011). Country-of‐origin and industry FDI agglomeration of foreign investors in an emerging economy. Journal of International Business Studies, (42), 504-520.
The distribution of economic value creating activities across space has intrigued scholars since at least the nineteenth century. Over the course of the last century, this phenomenon has been studied from different perspectives with economic geographers and regional scientists leading the trend. The growing interest in geography in the international business community is reflected in a number of special issues in IB journals. This special of Industry and Innovation seeks to expand the understanding of cross-border innovative activities along at least two dimensions.
First, traditionally international business scholars have focused on the organization of economic activities and less so on the characteristics of places (Beugelsdijk et al., 2010). In other words, economic geography has focused on the location, while international business scholars have examined the (multinational) firm. Second, the recent debate on the propensity of firms to collocate innovative activity remains lively. In particular, multinationals face collocation advantages and disadvantages when crossing international borders and selecting host locations (Narula and Santangelo, 2009, 2012). On the one hand, multinationals may wish to collocate with unaffiliated firms (e.g. suppliers, competitors, or customers) to internalize L-advantages in order to enhance and create firm-specific advantages. On the other, firms may either deliberately avoid collocating (Alcacer, 2006) or resort to strategies to monitor collocated partners (Narula and Santangelo, 2009) in order to limit dissipation of unintended knowledge flows. Both collocation advantages and disadvantages are not automatic and critically depend on the public goods nature of the Ladvantagesto be internalized, the level of competition, MNC technological leadership and insidership in the host location (Alca´cer, 2006; Alca´cer and Chung, 2007; Cantwell and Mudambi, 2011). Embeddedness in multiple local contexts creates opportunities, but also raises challenges, particularly in terms of stressing the bandwidth of managers who must handle the increasing complexity (Meyer et al., 2011). We are still missing a clear picture and a full understanding of the boundary conditions of collocation advantages and disadvantages.
This special issue intends to offer a further forum bridging the international business community with economic geography, and start a new forum where these two communities could connect with innovation scholars. The ultimate aim is to achieve a fruitful cross-fertilization of the three fields in order to gain a more comprehensive knowledge of the organizational and geographical dimension of cross-border innovative activities.
The special issue welcomes both theoretical and empirical contributions, which draw on different theoretical streams. Research adopting a variety of research methodologies is welcome, including qualitative, quantitative, and mixed- method approaches. Empirical studies should explicitly contribute to a theoretical agenda, and preferably be based on novel and exclusive data. Papers that are primarily descriptive are not welcome. Possible topics and research questions that would be appropriate for this special section would include, but would not be limited to, the following list:
- What are the implications of the rise of knowledge-intensive intangibles for MNEs’ location and organizational strategies? Does this phenomenon provide new advantages for international new ventures? Does the rise of knowledge-intensive intangibles shift collocation advantage in disadvantages and vice versa?
- Do MNEs exposed to multiple sources of knowledge dissipation need new strategies to protect their ownership advantages? Is modularity a panacea?
- Would the nature of collocation advantages and/or disadvantages MNEs face in emerging markets be different than in advanced economies? Would the boundary conditions for collocation advantages be different in emerging market clusters?
Submission Process
Manuscripts of a maximum of 6,000 words should be prepared in accordance with Industry and Innovation guidelines and submitted by December 31, 2015 via the online journal submission system by selecting this special issue title. The online submission system for the special issue will open on December 15, 2015. No earlier submissions will be accepted.
References
Alcacer, J. 2006. “Location Choices across the Value Chain: How Activity and Capability Influence Collocation.” Management Science 52: 1457–1471.
Alcacer, J., and W. Chung. 2007. “Location strategies and knowledge spillovers.” Management Science 53: 760–776.
Beugelsdijk, S., P. McCann, and R. Mudambi. 2010. “Introduction: Place, space and organization— economic geography and the multinational enterprise.” Journal of Economic Geography 10: 485–493.
Cantwell, J. A., and R. Mudambi. 2011. “Physical attraction and the geography of knowledge sourcing in multinational enterprises.” Global Strategy Journal 1: 206–232.
Meyer, K., R. Mudambi, and R. Narula. 2011. “Multinational enterprises and local contexts: The opportunities and challenges of multiple embeddedness.” Journal of Management Studies 48: 235–252.
Narula, R., and G. D. Santangelo. 2009. “Location, collocation and R&D alliances in the European ICT industry.” Research Policy 38: 393–403.
Narula, R., and G. D. Santangelo. 2012. “Location and collocation advantages in international innovation.” Multinational Business Review 20: 6–25.
The concept of strategy is central to the effectiveness and competitiveness of any organisation (Evered, 1983, Porter, 1980). Strategic orientation (SO) encompasses the adaptation and positioning of a firm’s internal resources, capabilities and activities, and combinations thereof, both to deflect threats and to exploit opportunities present in the firm’s external environment (Venkatraman, 1989; Teece, Pisano, and Shuen, 1997; Manu and Sriram, 1996; Lado, Boyd, and Wright, 1992). Following Venkatraman’s (1989) seminal work, SO has evolved into a multi-dimensional concept, culminating in a body of knowledge of related research examining various constructs on firm performance and growth. In particular, such studies have lent significant focus to the firm’s marketing orientation and entrepreneurial orientation, followed by research on other firm orientations related to learning, innovation, technological and sales aspects (Hakala, 2011).
SO has been a concept widely used in the research field of strategic management, entrepreneurship and marketing, yet to a lesser degree in the field of international entrepreneurship. Further, empirical attention on strategic orientations in firms has been predominately directed towards large enterprises (Jaworski and Kohli 1993; Pelham and Wilson 1995), with limited research coverage on SMEs, and more so internationalizing SMEs and BGs/INVs. Many questions emerge regarding the benefits for international entrepreneurs/managers of adopting various strategic orientations, and the ways in which firms can go about managing and aligning their organisational practices with their international operations. Likewise, serious questions have been raised about the ‘universal utility’ of various strategic orientations for Born Globals (BGs) and International New Ventures (INVs) operating in different countries (e.g., Ellis 2007; Cadogan et al. 2009). Exploring any of the well-established types of strategic orientations in the context of international entrepreneurship warrants further research (Covin and Miller, 2014).
Although few, studies in the field of IE have focused on the relationships between entrepreneurial orientation and (export) market orientation (EO/MO) and INV performance (Bing and Zhengping, 2011; Evers, 2011; Boso, Story and Cadogan, 2013; Martin and Javalgi, 2016). Marketing orientation has been definitively linked to multiple areas of firm strategy and business performance. Studies examining EO in BGs/INVs have clearly highlighted the importance of the founder’s global vision and proactive mindset to be reflected strongly across organizational characteristics and operations (Knight and Cavusgil, 2004; Coviello, 2015). Nevertheless, much of the existing research on marketing orientation in international entrepreneurship has focused on the external environment rather than on the firm’s internal environment, thus widening the knowledge gap on the role of EO and MO for international performance and growth of BGs/INVs.
The purpose of this special issue is to shed new light on the nature of strategic orientations adopted by BGs/INVs and their respective impacts on their international growth and performance. We invite researchers to submit conceptual and empirical papers on any issue that addresses strategic orientations in BGs/INVs. Specifically, this issue invites papers that advance knowledge on the internal environment under which strategic orientations emerge, develop, interact, and are implemented by BGs/INVs. We do not expect submitted papers to deal with all types of strategic orientations simultaneously: researchers could focus on just one or two orientations (e.g. market orientation, entrepreneurial orientation, innovation orientation) and explore their impact(s). It would be also interesting for papers to further highlight the problems and challenges associated with enacting specific strategic orientations in BGs/INVs and their impact on growth. Other interesting inquiries can address the circumstances in the firm’s internal environment under which several strategic orientations develop and how such processes differ in BGs/INVs, as compared to other contexts. Consequently, potential topics include, but are not limited to:
- Defining, adapting, and measuring international strategic orientations in BGs/INVs.
- Levels of analysis of strategic orientation in international entrepreneurship research.
- Antecedents to and conditions that enable and disable the adoption and implementation of international strategic orientations.
- Different international strategic orientations and their consequential impact on performance of BGs/INVs (e.g. international performance, innovation)
- Conceptual and empirical discrepancies across strategic orientations at an international level.
- Interactions between multiple strategic (entrepreneurial, market, learning, technological) orientations in response to international opportunities for entrepreneurial internationalization (BGs, INVs, etc.).
- Similarities and differences in strategic orientations across domestic/international market operations.
- The role of industry and environment in international strategic orientation
- The relationship between national culture and strategic orientation of BGs/INVs.
- Strategic orientation in Born Global digital ventures
- The relationship between strategic orientation and business model development and implementation in BGs/INVs/
- International strategic orientation(s), early internationalization, and foreign entry mode selection (e.g. Internet; foreign agents and distributors, JVs, FDI, alliances and/or networks).
- International strategic orientation(s) and international marketing strategy in BGs/INVs (e.g., standardization, adaptation, etc.)
- Profiling BGs/INVs versus firms internationalizing gradually based on the constituent elements of one or more international strategic orientations (e.g., forms of export market orientation).
Please visit the Journal of International Entrepreneurship website for format and styling and submit papers online to the journal no later than 31 July 2018.
https://link.springer.com/journal/10843
Notes for Prospective Authors:
Submitted contributions should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere.
Papers are refereed through the journal’s double-blind peer-review process.
A guide for authors is available on http://jien.edmgr.com.
Important Dates:
The deadline for submission is: 31 July 2018 for publication in early 2020 of the journal.
Please submit to the Journal of International Entrepreneurship at http://jien.edmgr.com, click on Submit a New Manuscript, select: Article Type and continue onward.
Editor in Chief: Hamid Etemad
E-mail: hamid.etemad@mcgill.ca
Guest Editors:
Natasha Evers
Marketing Discipline, J.E. Cairnes School of Business & Economics, National University of Ireland, Galway
Email: natasha.evers@nuigalway.ie
Gabriela Gliga
Marketing Discipline, J.E. Cairnes School of Business & Economics, National University of Ireland, Galway.
Email: gabriela.gliga@nuigalway.ie
Alex Rialp-Criado
Department of Business, School of Economics and Business, Universitat Autònoma Barcelona (UAB), Barcelona, Spain
E-mail: Alex.Rialp@uab.cat
References:
Bing, L.I.U. and Zhengping, F.U., 2011. Relationship between strategic orientation and organizational performance in born global: A critical review. International Journal of Business and Management, 6(3), p.109
Boso, N., Story, V.M. and Cadogan, J.W., 2013. Entrepreneurial orientation, market orientation, network ties, and performance: Study of entrepreneurial firms in a developing economy. Journal of Business Venturing, 28(6), pp.708-727
Cadogan, J. W., Kuivalainen, O. and Sundqvist, S., 2009. Export Market-Oriented Behavior and Export Performance: Quadratic and Moderating Effects Under Differing Degrees of Market Dynamism and Internationalization. Journal of International Marketing: December 2009, 17 (4), pp. 71-89.
Coviello, N., 2015. Re-thinking research on born globals. Journal of International Business Studies, 46(1), pp.17-26
Covin, J.G. and Miller, D., 2014. International entrepreneurial orientation: Conceptual considerations, research themes, measurement issues, and future research directions. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 38(1), pp.11-44
Dess, G.G. and Davis, P.S., 1984. Porter's (1980) generic strategies as determinants of strategic group membership and organizational performance. Academy of Management journal, 27(3), pp.467-488
Ellis, P.D., 2007. Distance, dependence and diversity of markets: Effects on market orientation. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(3), pp.374-386
Evered, R., 1983. So what is strategy?. Long range planning, 16(3), pp.57-72
Evers, N. 2011. Market orientation in new export ventures, International Journal of Entrepreneurship & Innovation Management, 13 (3-4), pp. 357-376.
Hakala, H., 2011. Strategic orientations in management literature: Three approaches to understanding the interaction between market, technology, entrepreneurial, and learning orientations. International Journal of Management Reviews, 13, pp. 199-217.
Jaworski, B.J. and Kohli, A.K., 1993. Market orientation: antecedents and consequences. The Journal of marketing, pp.53-70
Knight, G.A. and Cavusgil, S.T., 2004. Innovation, organizational capabilities, and the born-global firm. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(2), pp.124-141.
Lado, A.A., Boyd, N.G. and Wright, P., 1992. A competency-based model of sustainable competitive advantage: Toward a conceptual integration. Journal of management, 18(1), pp.77-91
Manu, F.A. and Sriram, V., 1996. Innovation, marketing strategy, environment, and performance. Journal of business Research, 35(1), pp.79-91
Martin, S.L. and Javalgi, R.R.G., 2016. Entrepreneurial orientation, marketing capabilities and performance: The moderating role of competitive intensity on Latin American international new ventures. Journal of Business Research, 69(6), pp. 2040-2051.
Pelham, A.M. and Wilson, D.T., 1995. A longitudinal study of the impact of market structure, firm structure, strategy, and market orientation culture on dimensions of small-firm performance. Journal of the academy of marketing science, 24(1), pp.27-43
Porter, M.E. 1980. Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors. New York: Free Press, 1980.
Teece, D.J., Pisano, G. and Shuen, A., 1997. Dynamic Capabilities and Strategic Management. Strategic Management Journal, 18(7), pp.509-533
Venkatraman, N., 1989. The concept of fit in strategy research: Toward verbal and statistical correspondence. Academy of management review, 14(3), pp.423-444
Special Issue Editors:
- Ilya Cuypers (Singapore Management University, Singapore, ilyacuypers@smu.edu.sg)
- Gokhan Ertug (Singapore Management University, Singapore, gokhanertug@smu.edu.sg)
- Martin Kilduff (University College London, UK, m.kilduff@ucl.ac.uk)
- Akbar (Aks) Zaheer (University of Minnesota, USA, azaheer@umn.edu)
- John Cantwell (Rutgers Business School, USA, cantwell@jibs.net)
Deadline for submission: October 10, 2016
Tentative publication date: Spring 2018
Introduction
The progress of research on social networks has enabled the increasingly fruitful application of network ideas across disciplines in recent times (e.g., Barabasi, 2002; Burt, Kilduff, & Tasselli, 2013; Christakis & Fowler, 2009; Jackson, 2008). In addition to its prominent role in the sociological arena, in economics, psychology, and in inter-disciplinary research, the network perspective has yielded, and continues to yield, significant advancements in many research domains.
However, despite the prominence of the social network perspective (in its many instantiations) across business disciplines, its presence in international business (IB) remains, by comparison, limited. There have been a small number of social network studies that have explored IB-related questions (e.g. Ghoshal & Barlett, 1990; Ellis, 2000; Andersson, Forsgren, & Holm, 2002; Joshi, Labianca, & Caligiuri, 2003; Forsgren, Holm, & Johanson, 2005; Vasudeva, Zaheer, & Hernandez, 2013; Cantwell, 2013; Zhang, Cantwell, & Jiang, 2014; Haas & Cummings, 2015). Other IB studies have used networks predominantly in a metaphorical sense (Ghoshal & Barlett, 1990).
These examples highlight the rich theoretical rewards from applying social network theory in IB research. Despite the flexibility and adaptability of social network theories and mechanisms, research in IB has not yet seen the levels of integration of the social network perspective evident in other fields. As a result, we see great potential for social network theories and mechanisms to extend and enrich established IB scholarship. Accordingly, we propose a special issue forum that will encourage the use of network perspectives in relation to a broad set of IB-related questions.
Topics
Social network theory and mechanisms can be – and have been – applied at multiple levels of analysis. We encourage submissions that investigate questions at the individual, group, subsidiary, firm, business group, or location (e.g. city, sub-national region and country) levels. One of the key aims of this special issue is to encourage IB network research by drawing on different disciplinary perspectives to conceptualize and construct networks at these different levels of analysis including, for example, studying the origins, evolution, and consequences of individual, inter-group, inter-firm or interorganizational level ties within and across MNEs as well as between the MNE and external actors. We welcome a diversity of theoretical perspectives and methodological and empirical approaches.
A social network is a social structure made up of a set of social actors (such as individuals, organizations, countries, or cities), sets of dyadic ties, and other social interactions between actors. The social network is a theoretical construct useful throughout the various social and behavioral sciences to study relationships between individuals, groups, organizations, or even entire societies, such as countries or regional areas. Thus, submissions to the special issue will reflect the study of social networks in international business relationships of different kinds, which may include but is not limited to more specific applications of social network theory, or social network analysis or methods. It is expected that articles will focus on the social aspects of cross-border networks used or developed for international business objectives, including both internal and external corporate networks, ethnic entrepreneurial networks, pre-firm international proto-business connections, and the role of kinship or ethnic ties in international business networks.
We see potential for social network theory to contribute to research in each of the six sub-domains of IB studies, as stated in the JIBS Statement of Editorial Policy. Studies could address topics including but not limited to:
- How do social networks affect the activities, strategies and decision-making processes of MNEs? Conversely, how do changes in the strategies and activities of MNEs influence their social networks?
- How do social networks of one kind (or with one type of actor) internal to MNEs influence the interactions between MNEs and other types of external actors, organizations, and institutions? How have these relationships (in terms of network tie type, tie strength, tie density and so on) been changing over time and what are the implications of these changes?
- What is the role of social networks in the cross-border activities of firms such as intra-firm trade, finance, investment, and technology transfers?
- How does the international environment (e.g., cultural, economic, legal, political) affect the development, characteristics, dynamics, and consequences of social networks?
- How do social networks affect the initiation and governance of cross-border organization forms (e.g., strategic alliances, mergers and acquisitions) and cross-border activities (e.g., entrepreneurship, knowledge-based competition, corporate governance across borders)?
- What are cross-country differences in social networks and their implications, as based, for example, on cultural differences?
We purposely state these themes in broad terms. Each theme can be approached in a number of ways, making use of the mechanisms offered by research in social networks to forge a deeper understanding of these and other issues of interest to IB research.
To further illustrate this potential, we provide brief examples of how important theories and topic areas in IB research can be developed further by integrating theory and insight from research on networks.
- The multinational organization is core to international business. Although researchers have suggested conceptualizing the multinational organization as a social network, this perspective can be further explored and developed, especially considering the development of research on social networks in the intervening 25 years. A dynamic and evolutionary view of multinational organizations as social networks will both be closer to the reality of the phenomenon and also leverage the recent research on the dynamics and evolution of networks. To take one example, intra-firm networks might influence the internationalization decisions of multinational organizations, which would influence the boundaries of the multinational organization. Such a change in firm boundaries itself, in turn, would influence the intra-firm networks that affected these changes in the first place. In addition, the formal and informal relationships that make up intra-firm networks can relate differently to decisions and outcomes. This example also illustrates the presence and relevance of different levels and types of networks, in terms of influencing internationalization decisions, and how these decisions can be further investigated with the application of insights and tools from network research.
- Although it is well established that actors internal to the multinational organization interact frequently in both formal and informal ways with actors external to the multinational organization, relatively little is known about the determinants of these relationships in terms of closeness and connectedness, nor do we know how these relationships change over time.
- The Eclectic OLI (Ownership, Location, Internalization) paradigm has triggered a considerable body of research in IB. Incorporating a network perspective into this paradigm can offer new insights to broaden this well-established framework. Each of the OLI parameters might be influenced by the presence of social networks. For example,
- Social networks with certain structural properties, for example bridging ties, have been suggested as means for actors to obtain privileged access to resources. Hence, networks might be an important source of multinational organizations’ ownership advantages.
- The presence of networks with particular structures, such as those that demonstrate small-world properties, can influence the overall effectiveness of systems, thereby making a location characterized by these structures more attractive. Because such networks can be locally embedded, they can offer a source of location advantages.
- Studies have shown that social networks can influence the emergence and development of trust, as well as reputation mechanisms. Therefore, the presence of cohesive or dense networks might make market-based governance mechanisms more or less attractive, which would affect multinational organizations’ internalization advantages.
- An assumption underlying many IB theories is that multinational organizations doing business abroad face costs, i.e., they incur a liability of foreignness (LoF). Incorporating social network theory can further enrich our understanding of this core IB concept. For example:
- To what extent is a multinational organization’s LoF driven by the absence of local networks?
- What kinds of local or global networks help mitigate LoF?
- How might the interplay of a multinational organization’s global network and the local networks of the multinational organization’s subsidiaries work together to reduce LoF?
- How do informal networks (e.g., immigrant networks that establish social and business connections between a home and host country) mitigate LoF?
In addition, applications of social network theory to IB issues may also enrich the social network perspective, for instance by elucidating issues like:
- How do the formation, evolution and consequences of networks with actors that are dispersed across different countries differ from those of networks with actors concentrated within a single country?
- How do networks and institutions co-evolve differently across countries?
- How and when do network properties like structural holes and closure manifest themselves differently in different institutional environments?
- To what extent does network research in a cross-border setting require different methodological approaches than those conducted within a single country?
We emphasize that the foregoing represents a suggestive list and we would encourage authors to explore the application and extension of social networks mechanisms and methods to IB theories, topics and questions in ways that extend beyond this list.
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between September 26, 2016, and October 10, 2016, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Andersson, U., Forsgren, M., & Holm, U. 2002. The strategic impact of external networks: subsidiary performance and competence development in the multinational corporation. Strategic Management Journal, 23(11): 979-996.
Barabasi, L. 2002. Linked. Penguin, London, England.
Burt, R. S., Kilduff, M., & Tasselli, S. 2013. Social network analysis: Foundations and frontiers of advantage. Annual Review of Psychology, 64: 527-547.
Cantwell, J. A. 2013. Blurred boundaries between firms, and new boundaries within (large multinational) firms: the impact of decentralized networks for innovation. Seoul Journal of Economics, 26(1): 1-32.
Christakis, N. A. & Fowler, J. H. Connected. 2009. The surprising power of our social networks and how they shape our lives. New York: Little Brown.
Ellis, P. 2000. Social ties and foreign market entry. Journal of International Business Studies, 31(3): 443-469.
Forsgren, M., Holm, U., & Johanson, J. 2005. Managing the embedded multinational: A business network view. Edward Elgar: Cheltenham, UK.
Ghoshal, S., & Bartlett, C. A. 1990. The multinational corporation as an interorganizational network. Academy of Management Review, 15(4): 603-626.
Haas, M. R., & Cummings, J. N. 2015. Barriers to knowledge seeking within MNC teams: Which differences matter most? Journal of International Business Studies, 46(1): 36-62.
Jackson, M. O. 2008. Social and economic networks. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Joshi, A., Labianca, G., & Caligiuri, P. M. 2003. Getting along long distance: Understanding conflict in a multinational team through network analysis. Journal of World Business, 37(4): 277-284.
Vasudeva, G., Zaheer, A., & Hernandez, E. 2013. The embeddedness of networks: Institutions, structural holes, and innovativeness in the fuel cell industry. Organization Science, 24(3): 645-663.
Zhang, F., Cantwell, J. A., & Jiang, G. 2014. The competence creation of recently-formed subsidiaries in networked multinational corporations: Comparing subsidiaries in China and subsidiaries in industrialized countries. Asian Business & Management, 13(1): 5-41.
Special Issue Editors
Ilya RP Cuypers is an Assistant Professor of Strategy at the Lee Kong Chian School of Business, Singapore Management University. He received his PhD in strategic management and international business from Tilburg University, the Netherlands. His current research focuses on the governance, dynamics and performance implications of external corporate development activities (e.g., acquisitions, alliances and joint ventures), investment decisions under uncertainty, and issues related to interorganizational ties. His work has been published in journals such as Organization Science, Strategic Management Journal and Journal of International Business Studies. He is a member of the Editorial Review Board of the Journal of International Business Studies and the Global Strategy Journal.
Gokhan Ertug is an Associate Professor of Strategic Management at the Lee Kong Chian School of Business, Singapore Management University. He received his PhD in Management from INSEAD. He is interested in studying social networks, status, reputation, and trust. Beyond studying these topics in various settings, including settings in international business, he also has an interest in studying distance and categorization specifically in an international business context.
Martin Kilduff is Professor of Organizational Behavior at UCL, former editor of Academy of Management Review (2006-08), and currently associate editor of Administrative Science Quarterly. He received his PhD from Cornell University. Prior to joining UCL he served as Diageo Professor of Management Studies at Cambridge University, and prior to that served on the faculties of University of Texas at Austin, Penn State, and Insead. Martin’s work focuses on social networks in organizations and includes the co-authored books Social networks and organizations (Sage, 2003); and Interpersonal networks in organizations: Cognition, personality, dynamics and culture (Cambridge University Press, 2008). His articles have appeared in a diverse range of journals, including Administrative Science Quarterly, Academy of Management Journal, Organization Science, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, Journal of Applied Psychology, Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, Journal of International Business Studies, and Social Networks.
Akbar (Aks) Zaheer is Professor and Curtis L. Carlson Chair in Strategic Management at Carlson School of Management, University of Minnesota. He received his PhD in strategic management from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and his Master's in Business from the Indian Institute of Management in Ahmedabad. His current research themes include social networks, the antecedents and consequences of trust in organizations and in interfirm exchange, and strategic alliances, among others. He has served as Associate Editor of Academy of Management Review and as co-editor of several well-cited special issues, including Strategic Management Journal (Special Issue on Strategic Networks, 2000) and Organization Science (Special Issue on The Genesis and Dynamics of Networks, 2012). He has published in many journals, including Journal of International Business Studies, Administrative Science Quarterly, Organization Science, Management Science, Strategic Management Journal, Academy of Management Review, Academy of Management Journal, and Global Strategy Journal. He is an elected Fellow of the Strategic Management Society.
John Cantwell is the Editor-in-Chief of the Journal of International Business Studies from 2011-16. He is Distinguished Professor (Professor II) of International Business at Rutgers University. He was previously Professor of International Economics at the University of Reading. John Cantwell's main research areas are the analysis of corporate technological change and international business. He is the author of Technological Innovation and Multinational Corporations (Basil Blackwell, 1989), which remains one of the most cited books in the international business field, since it helped to inspire a new literature on the role of international networks in technology creation, which now lies at the center of the international business research area. He was the President of the European International Business Academy (EIBA) in 1992, and in 2001 he was elected as one of four EIBA Founding Fellows. In 2005 he was elected as a Fellow of the Academy of International Business (AIB), and he was Vice President of the AIB in 2006-08, when he was responsible for the program of the annual conference of the AIB held in Milan in 2008.
Journal of East European Management Studies (JEEMS) Call for Papers for Special Issue: Management and Organization in Times of War
Deadlines:
- Deadline for Extended Abstracts: 31st July, 2024
- Deadline for Submissions: 30th November, 2024
War always has a profound effect on various fields of study, and management studies is no exception. (Aronovici, 1919; Fenelon, 1940; Hutton, 1918; Powell, 1954). The ongoing Russian invasion of Ukraine has not only heightened the global focus on the region, but has also intensified the scrutiny of war's impact on management practice and theory. This unique and turbulent context provides a rich backdrop for exploring the diverse and dynamic ways in which war reshapes management and organizational behaviour across different sectors (Havrylyshyn et al., 2024; Maśloch, 2023; Opatska et al., 2024).
As we witness the unfolding events in Ukraine, it becomes increasingly clear how integral management studies are for understanding and navigating the complexities introduced by war. From strategic decision-making under duress to the transformation of organizational structures and cultures in response to crisis, the challenges are as varied as they are critical (Levy, 1986). This special issue addresses these pressing issues by seeking insights into the resilience, adaptability, and innovation that emerge in times of war and conflict.
We invite scholars and practitioners to contribute their research and perspectives on how war affects different branches of management, including but not limited to international management (Dai et al., 2017; Meyer et al., 2023; Reade & Lee, 2012), supply chain management (Bednarski et al., 2023; Cui et al., 2023; Krykavskyy et al., 2023), crisis management (Opatska et al., 2024), organizational resilience, leadership under stress, organizational change, and the role of identity and memory in organizational behaviour (Barnes & Newton, 2018). Our geographical focus is on the transition countries of Central and Eastern Europe as well as Caucasian countries, covering not only the current war in Ukraine, but also other armed conflicts in the region, both current (e.g. the conflict between Armenia and Azerbaijan) and in the past (e.g. the wars in ex-Yugoslavia).
This special issue aims to bring together a comprehensive array of analyses that examine not only the immediate impacts of the violent conflict but also consider the long-term implications for management theory and practice. We aim to develop a multidimensional understanding of management and organization in times of war, drawing from empirical research, theoretical advancements, and detailed case studies. Thus, conceptual as well as quantitative and qualitative studies are welcome. Submitted papers will undergo a double-blind peer review process and will be evaluated by at least two anonymous reviewers.
Submission process (two paths) and important dates:
⇒ Path 1 (optional)
- Deadline for extended abstracts submissions: 31st July, 2024 (send to thomas.steger@ur.de)
- Presentation of selected extended abstracts in two Paper Development Workshops (details will be provided after abstract acceptance)
- a) in person at the AIB-CEE Conference in Budapest, 18-21, September, 2024
- or b) online via Zoom on 13th September, 2024
⇒ Path 2
- Deadline for full paper submissions: 30th November, 2024 (send to thomas.steger@ur.de)
- Initial desk-rejections by 20th December, 2024
- 1st round of double-blind reviews completed by end of February, 2025
- Deadline for submission of revised versions by end of May, 2025
- 2nd round of double-blind reviews completed by end of August, 2025
- Final decision on inclusion in the special issue by end of September, 2025
- Publication of the SI: November/December, 2025
In order to support potential authors for this special issue, two paper development workshops will be organized, one in person at the AIB-CEE Conference in Budapest (18-21 September 2024) and one virtually via zoom on 13 September 2024. Potential authors interested in these events are invited to submit their extended abstracts (1-3 pages) to Thomas Steger by 31 July 2024 (thomas.steger@ur.de).
Final acceptance depends on the reviewers’ judgment regarding:
- Thematic fit: does the submission contribute to the topic of the special issue?
- Theoretical contribution: Does the submission offer novel insights or extend existing considerations?
- if applicable: Empirical contribution: Are the study design, data analysis, and results rigorous and appropriate to the research questions? Do empirical findings offer innovative insights?
All submissions should be prepared for blind review in line with the JEEMS author guidelines (https://www.jeems.nomos.de/fileadmin/jeems/doc/Authors_Guidelines.pdf). Informal enquiries regarding the special issue (topics, potential fit etc.) are welcome and can be directed to the guest editors Taras Danko (taras.danko@khpi.edu.ua), Tetiana Sobolieva (sobolieva_tetiana@kneu.edu.ua), Piotr Trąpczyński (piotr.trapczynski@ue.poznan.pl), or Thomas Steger (thomas.steger@ur.de).
Overview and Purpose of the special issue
While rapidly globalizing, contemporary multinational firms are increasingly dealing with suppliers and customers in emerging markets including China, India, and Brazil, among many other countries (Simões, Singh, & Perin, 2015) and given their unique business practices stemming from the locally prevalent cultures and unique institutions (Sheth, 2011), managers at multinational firms or local companies doing business in those markets need to understand their relationship management protocols to stay abreast on the potential strategic implications of local relationship management practices (Hewett & Krasnikov, 2016). For examples, institutional voids such as weak intellectual property rights in emerging markets challenge firms’ decisions in sharing new product development and technology in their global supply chains (Chang, Bai, & Li, 2015; Murphy & Li, 2015). However, our efforts to understand the required actions to deal with knowledge on how institutional and cultural environments in emerging markets shape local relationship management protocols fall short of the current business practices in such markets (Kumar, 2014). While selected few streams of literature serves well in that regard, there is a compelling need for additional research to further our understanding on the relationship management practiced by both multinational managers and local business partners in emerging markets (Murphy & Li, 2015; Sheth, 2011).
Our lack of knowledge on the unique relationship management protocols in emerging markets may be attributed to the disconnect between Western society-focused research and locally required business practices in these emerging markets (Murphy & Li, 2015). Furthermore, the state-of-the-art research technique and rigor expected by academic journals in the Western society could have built barriers for researchers and managers in emerging markets that prevent them from sharing their experience and knowledge with the Western world (Vincent-Lancrin, 2006). To overcome the current gap, researchers need to place bridging efforts to bring about the unique relationship management mechanism of the business world in emerging markets.
This special issue calls for research that addresses emerging market-specific relationship management practices in multinational firms’ daily operations including local partnerships/supplier managements and buyer/customer relationship management. We are particularly interested in research findings that are emerging market-specific while generalizable across those newly active emerging markets in the global economy.
Given the objectives of the special issue, researchers are encouraged to contribute to the understanding of the relationship management practices in emerging markets. Specifically, this special issue is interested in research topics and findings that can further our current understanding of relationship management practices outside Western markets. We are seeking contributions not only from the theoretical lens, but also from the methodological perspectives to open up the doors for non-traditional, yet scientific methodologies that may stimulate future research on relationship management in emerging markets.
All submissions must have unique contributions theoretically, or methodologically, or both. Given the potential unique contributions sought by the special issue, conceptual studies with well thought-out propositions, empirical studies with emerging market-specific findings, and methodological papers that open up new ways to carry out future studies in emerging markets are all welcome.
The potential research topics for the special issue may include, but are not limited to, the following topics:
- Relationship management protocols by managers of multinational firms for/in emerging markets
- Drivers of successful relationship management in emerging markets
- Decision behaviors of managers in emerging markets
- Influences of local formal and informal institutions on the relationship management process/outcomes in emerging markets
- Comparing and contrasting the similarities and differences in relationship management between the Western world and emerging markets
- Role of locally prevailing business practices in relationship management in emerging markets
- Emerging market specific customer/buyer relationship management practices
- Locally prevailing organizational styles and their impacts on relationship management in emerging markets
- Local management, leadership styles, and decision process in emerging markets
- Decision mechanism that serve interfirm relationship management practices in emerging markets
- Firm size, power, and dependence in supplier-buyer relationships and their implications for relationship management
- Decision making on innovation (product, service, or business model innovation) in customer/buyer relationship in emerging markets
- Performance implications of local style relationship management practices
Preparation and submission of paper and review process
Papers submitted must not have been published, accepted for publication, or presently be under consideration for publication elsewhere. Submissions should be about 6,000-8,000 words in length. Copies should be uploaded on Industrial Marketing Management’s homepage through the EVISE system. You need to upload your paper using the dropdown box for the special issue on “Managing B2B Relationship with Emerging Market Partners”. For guidelines, visit http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/journaldescription.cws_home/505720/authorinstructions. Papers not complying with the notes for contributors (cf. homepage) or poorly written will be desk rejected. Suitable papers will be subjected to a double-blind review; hence, authors must not identify themselves in the body of their paper. (Please do not submit a Word file with “track changes” active or a PDF file.)
Please address all questions to the guest editors:
Daekwan Kim, Florida State University, USA (dkim@business.fsu.edu)
Ruey-Jer “Bryan” Jean, National Chengchi University, Taiwan (bryan@nccu.edu.tw)
Tomas Hult, Michigan State University, USA (hult@msu.edu)
References
Chang, J., Bai, X., & Li, J. J. 2015. The Influence of Institutional Forces on International Joint Ventures' Foreign Parents' Opportunism and Relationship Extendedness. Journal of International Marketing, 23(2): 73-93.
Hewett, K. & Krasnikov, A. V. 2016. Investing in Buyer–Seller Relationships in Transitional Markets: A Market-Based Assets Perspective. Journal of International Marketing, 24(1): 57-81.
Kumar, V. 2014. Understanding Cultural Differences in Innovation: A Conceptual Framework and Future Research Directions. Journal of International Marketing, 22(3): 1-29.
Murphy, W. H. & Li, N. 2015. Government, company, and dyadic factors affecting key account management performance in China: Propositions to provoke research. Industrial Marketing Management, 51: 115-21.
Sheth, J. N. 2011. Impact of Emerging Markets on Marketing: Rethinking Existing Perspectives and Practices. Journal of Marketing, 75(4): 166-82.
Simões, C., Singh, J., & Perin, M. G. 2015. Corporate brand expressions in business-to-business companies' websites: Evidence from Brazil and India. Industrial Marketing Management, 51: 59-68.
Vincent-Lancrin, S. 2006. What is Changing in Academic Research? Trends and Futures Scenarios. European Journal of Education, 41(2): 169-202.
Chapter proposals are invited for the next volume in the Stoner/Wankel Palgrave Macmillan Series on Global Sustainability through Business. This volume focuses on risk-management and climate change. It addresses the role businesses and their support environment – government, not-for-profits, the media, etc. – are currently playing and can consider playing in the future to deal with the impacts of climate change.
The basic themes of this volume are that:
- climate change is already having major impacts on business, business is having major impacts on climate change, and these impacts continue to grow;
- risk management is a valuable way of framing climate change issues and for grappling with the consequences of climate change;
- the key players involved in managing the risks associated with climate change have learned valuable ways to protect themselves and others that all businesses can learn from, and
- those same key players are taking and can take ever-more valuable steps in the future not only to protect themselves and others from the negative consequences of climate change, but also to reduce and reverse the impact of the driving forces that are creating climate change.
Although the title of this volume and its major focus will be on one major aspect of global sustainability -- climate change -- this volume continues with the overall framing of the series – that global sustainability is a multi-faceted, global, multi-generational, economic, social, environmental, and cultural phenomenon and challenge to our species – a challenge we must meet on behalf of all generations and all species.
Proposals can be any length though 200 words are ideal. Please also include a brief biography mentioning any related publications and your degrees. Send these to stoner@fordham.edu AND wankelc@verizon.net .
The deadline for proposals is March 1, 2011. Chapter proposal acceptances will be determined by March 15, and drafts will be due June 1, 2011. The book will be published January 1, 2012.
The Context
The recent financial crisis has exposed an increasingly polarized global economic order: stagnation in advanced developed economies and growth and rising affluence in emerging countries. As a result, polarization is shaping the regional order, in particular in Latin America. A group of economies in this region is experiencing sustainable economic growth and strong domestic markets. This group of South American countries, led by Brazil includes Colombia, Argentina, Paraguay, Chile, Peru, and Uruguay. A second group of countries in the region is stagnating economically and becoming immersed in chaos, violence, and social instability. This second group is led by Mexico and includes most if not all of the Central American economies and some Caribbean countries. The former group has achieved sustainable growth to a great extent due to a combination of prudent macroeconomic policies, innovative social programs that alleviate poverty, and flexibility to realign their productive structure to meet the immense market opportunities of Asian growth. The latter group of economies is closely integrated with the now stagnant advanced economies in terms of trade, investment and remittances. As their economies deteriorate, poverty and violence increase.
This polarization creates structural differences in both groups. The growing economies overheat, suffer from exchange rate appreciation and inflationary pressures but enjoy growing local markets driven by an expanding middle class, and increased reserves. On the other hand, the depressed group of economies in the region exhibits large fiscal imbalances, loss of competitiveness to Asian competition, and dollarization. At the macro economic level, policy makers in both groups face different challenges and exercise a different mix of policy instruments to deal with opposite macroeconomic situations. In addition, both groups have in common a legacy of issues that include poor educational systems, income inequality, poor infrastructure, a large informal sector, corruption, obsolete legal and regulatory frameworks, and in many cases a high cost of doing business.
The most remarkable feature of this polarization that is that it has taken place over a very short time- the last five-to-seven years. Local firms in thriving markets are pressed to keep up with the challenges of fast growth ranging from human resource shortages to shortages of supply to energy. These challenges stem from the inadequate legacy environment, with a growing concern for sustainability and social inclusion. Consequently, research on management challenges in this new context is also far behind.
Purpose
The purpose of this special issue is to call for insightful research to enhance our understanding of how to manage in a polarized environment (expansion/ stagnation) and resolve the challenges of these two contrasting environments (growth/survival).
Research Questions
Within this context, this special issue aims to address the following general questions:
1. What are the current management challenges that firms face in a polarized Latin American environment?
2. How do firms meet these different challenges and what solutions emerge as best practices to deal with stagnation or growth?
3. If polarization continues and increases in the future, how would firms’ vision, and strategies diverge?
More specific questions relate to particular challenges in specific areas of business and for firms in one of the polarized economies in the region. The following are illustrative, rather than exhaustive, of the type of research that will fit well in the special issue.
How do firms deal with the challenges of retaining management talent in a polarized regional world? The following illustrate the contrasts of challenges. In growing environments like Brazil, management is scarce and hard to retain. What incentives and human resource strategies work better to keep talent from being attracted to other firms? In the stagnant economies of the region, management talent is abundant and perhaps tempted to leave the country in search of better professional opportunities. How do firms’ slow the talent migration? What are the best practices for retention in this case?
What type of strategies work better in an expansion or a survival mode? Firms in the growth economies of Latin America deal with a case of wealth of riches: a strong and growing mass market and also a strong export market in Asia. How do firms balance growth without taxing limited strategic resources? On the other hand, how do firms in stagnant economies in the region realign their strategies and productive structures to turn around their fortunes? Should these firms aim at growing Asian markets or the growing economies in the region- the Brazil market for instance?
The special issue will also focus on more specific research questions issues such as:
In the context of poor infrastructure, what supply and logistics strategies help firms meet the increasing and more dispersed demands in domestic markets? In meeting the needs of the growing international markets, what supply and logistics strategies allow firms to compensate for the distance disadvantage vis-à-vis closer competitors to Asian markets?
What product and pricing strategies are the best for the increasing middle class affluence of consumers in markets in the expansionary economies? Conversely, what marketing strategies work better for stagnant markets in the region?
With increasing pressure to preserve natural ecosystems, how do firms develop sustainable business strategies to meet the increasing global demand for natural resource-based commodities in large ecosystems (such as Amazonia)? What systems of economic, environmental and social indicators are used to manage growth and sustainability?
We hope that this special issue provides the venue for research to establish the foundation to study the long-term consequences of an increasing polarized Latin America and Caribbean region. Contributions are welcome to address the topic of the special issue in the form of theoretical and empirical contributions as well as case studies. Contributions of management issues focusing on the contrasting contextual economic situations (stagnation, expansion) and sustainable pressures (preservation and social responsiveness) are also welcome. Manuscripts focusing on one of the contexts or a comparative analysis of both will be considered.
Submissions Instructions:
The deadline for submissions is March 30, 2012.
All manuscripts will be subject to the double-blind peer review process of Management Decision. Submissions should be prepared in accordance to the Management Decision’s Author Guidelines http://www.emeraldinsight.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=md.
After registering on ScholarOne Manuscripts on http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/md follow the instructions to submit your manuscript. Please be sure to not Special Issue on “Managing in a Polarized Region,” when submitting your manuscript.
Please direct any questions to the editor of the Special Issue: Fernando Robles, George Washington University roblesf@gwu.edu
Central to the recent global debate on national health care are issues concerning economics and cultural values that drive decisions affecting the scale, scope, and delivery of health services (both preventive and treatment) provided for a country’s population. While most agree on the goal of seeking quality health care at an affordable price, wide disagreement exists, both within and across nations, about who (government, individual, or third party) should pay for what service and whether national health care should operate as a business, public welfare program, or a social enterprise. In the absence of clear evidence favoring one option over another, policymakers engage in “strategic choice” (Child, 1972), choosing between value-based priorities and criteria of operational effectiveness in making national health care decisions.
This special issue seeks to publish research that helps delineate the complex nature of national health care and offers evidence-based recommendations for its effective management. We are particularly interested in studies that investigate fundamental tensions between economic concerns and cultural values surrounding national health care, and how these tensions can be resolved or managed through strategic choice. Additionally, we encourage submissions that seek to frame the debate in novel and creative ways with the aim of introducing innovations into the design and/or delivery of health care at different levels of operation (e.g., individual, organization, regional, country, and international). Finally, given the important role played by pharmaceutical companies in the health care field, we also welcome contributions that examine topics related to policies and practices concerning the development of new drugs, particularly those that combat rare and neglected diseases.
Authors interested in submitting to the Special Issue should send an abstract (maximum 3 double-spaced pages) to the guest editor at the address below summarizing the key ideas of their paper and how it helps advance fundamental knowledge about national health care and its effective management. EJIM publishes both conceptual and empirical works, with special interest in papers that develop interdisciplinary knowledge by integrating theoretical ideas and research methods from two or more disciplines.
Notes for Intending Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere.
All papers are refereed through a peer-review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines webpage (http://www.inderscience.com/mapper.php?id=31).
Important Dates
Deadline for Abstract Submission: November 1, 2010
Deadline for Abstract Review Notification: December 15, 2010
Deadline for Full Paper Submission: May 1, 2011
Email Addresses
You may email one copy of your submission in the form of an attached MS Word file (details in Author Guidelines) to:
Professor Joseph Cheng
College of Business
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
Champaign, IL 61820, USA.
Email: jlcheng@illinois.edu
With an email copy to:
EJIM Editorial Team
Email: editors@ejim-global.org
and
IEL Editorial Office
Email: ejim@inderscience.com
Please include in your submission the title of the Special Issue, the title of the Journal and the name of the Guest Editor.
There has been a lot of “buzz” about managing expatriates. When we say “expatriates”, we almost always mean people who are sent by their companies abroad to fulfill some kind of mission in the host environment. The labor trends, however, show that there are more and more people going abroad by themselves to look for jobs in international companies. Some of these people are being “pushed” by their home environment – no jobs at home, hostile atmosphere, etc. These folks are outside of our scope of interest. Some other people are being “pulled” by other countries – looking for better job opportunities, seeking challenges, career growth opportunities, etc. These people are referred to as “Self-initiated Expatriates”, and normally, they are very well-educated, knowledgeable, skilled, motivated, and highly employable. These SIEs have absolutely specific needs, wants, and drives – different from those of either domestic employees or regular expatriates. Therefore, companies must develop some special techniques that would help them manage these SIEs and ensure that they stay with the company in the long-run. So, we thought that it would be interesting to explore various strategies for managing talent of these expatriates and to title the book “Managing Talent of Self-initiated Expatriates: A neglected source of the global talent flow” to reflect on our intentions.
At this point, my fellow co-editor Arno Haslberger and I would like to begin with some sort of market research and ask those of you working in this area to inform me about your possible interest in contributing to our book.
One-two page chapter proposals will be due on September 1, while the first draft of the chapter on January 1, 2012.
As a preliminary consideration, we are thinking of making this publication suitable to both academics involved in teaching, consulting, and executive education, and practitioners who want to use talent management techniques developed by leading scholars in this area of knowledge. Please feel free to share any of your own ideas that you might have in regards to this upcoming book.
Contact information:
Vlad Vaiman
vlad@ru.is
Thunderbird International Business Review Call for Papers
Special Issue: “Market Entry into Africa: Acquisitions and International Joint Ventures. Studies of foreign firm’s market entry strategies, challenges, and performance in Africa."
Deadline for submission of Manuscripts: 31 August 2018
Guest Co-Editors:
Dr. Nnamdi Oguji
Researcher, University of Vaasa, Finland
Consultant & Business Analyst, KONE Corporation
Email: nnamdi.oguji@uva.fi
+358449966229
Dr. Owusu Richard
Associate Professor
School of Business and Economics, Linnaeus University, Sweden
Email richard.owusu@lnu.se
+358452749131
For the past 40 years, while international business (IB) studies have focused on explaining the internationalization of multinational enterprises (MNEs) and the globalization of markets, studies focused on Africa have thus far been limited. Extending IB studies to the African context will improve IB theories as it has been suggested that contextualized explanations improve theorizing in international business studies (Meyer & Peng 2005; Welch, Piekkari, Plakoyiannaki & Paavilainen-Möntymäki 2011). African markets provide a unique context to test IB theories empirically and develop context-specific theories (Van de Ven & Jing 2011). Similar contextualization has been done in transition economies of Central and Eastern Europe (Meyer & Peng 2005), China (Child & Tse 2001), and studies on strategies of emerging market MNEs (Cuervo-Cazurra 2012).
The aim of this special issue is to advance international business in Africa and specifically focus on how foreign firms enter African markets via acquisitions and international joint ventures. It will extend knowledge of these market entry strategies in Africa for research and for foreign firms intending to or currently doing business in Africa.
This special issue will address two important entry mode choices for foreign firms seeking market entry into Africa, the choice of acquisitions (partial and full acquisitions) and international joint ventures. Acquisitions and international joint ventures are gaining importance in Africa (Boateng and Glaister 2003; Dadzie & Owusu 2015) partly due to an increasing consolidation of several industries and economic liberation policies implemented by many Africa countries (UNCTAD 2015).
Africa currently has some of the fastest growing countries in the world (World Bank 2017). It is described as the next frontier for global trade and competition (Teagarden 2009; Peters 2011; Roberts, Kayande & Srivastava 2015: 247). As a result, there is an increasing interest from foreign companies to focus on Africa (Robert et al. 2015: 249). While the interest in investing in Africa is rising, the know-how of business on the continent is very limited. There have recently been a few special issues focusing on Sub-Saharan Africa in the top international business journals: Vol 17, Issue 6 (Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing 2002); “Sub-Saharan Africa at a key inflection point” (Thunderbird International Business Review 2009); “Contemporary developments in the management of human resources in Africa” (Journal of World Business, 2011); “Contemporary challenges and opportunities of doing business in Africa” (Journal of Technological Forecasting and Social Change, 2016); “Critical perspectives on international business in Africa (Critical Perspectives on International Business, 2016); “Strategic Management in Africa (Global Strategy Journal, 2017) ; and a recent call “The internationalization of African firms” (Thunderbird International Business Review, 2016).
While cross-border acquisition may be the ideal strategy for foreign firms entering Africa, the relative institutional difference between African countries and home countries of foreign firms may make full acquisition entry strategies more challenging. For example, as most African economies rely on natural resources as their primary source of economic revenue, some governments impose several local content legislations to protect indigenous firms (Vaaland, Soneye & Owusu 2012). Local content legislation may hamper feasibility of several M&A deals, and thus, make it more viable for international joint ventures or other forms of acquisition entry strategies (partial and staged acquisitions).
The total value of acquisitions into Africa within the decade 2005-2014 doubled to $79bn compared to $34bn in the previous decade (1995-2004) (UNCTAD 2015). This trend will continue to rise as BRICS countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa) and other foreign corporations continue to invest in Africa for the continent's natural resources, vast untapped agricultural sector and increasing consumer base (Davies & Segain 2014; UNCTAD 2017). Also, there is an increasing trend towards regional M&A activity in Africa (ibid). Irrespective of this positive trend, there is still limited research on cross-border acquisitions into Africa.
Studies focused on cross-border acquisitions explore how organizations select potential acquisition targets, due diligence process, negotiation of acquisition deals, acquisition entry strategies, acquisition integration, acquisition performance and subsidiary exit. To the best of our knowledge, empirical studies focused on cross-border M&As in Africa are scant. The existing studies have mainly been done in the context of Ghana and have focused specifically on the choice between greenfields and acquisitions (Dadzie & Owusu 2015; Dadzie, Owusu, Amoako, & Aklamanu 2017), performance of acquisitions and greenfield investments in Ghana (Dadzie, Larimo & Nguyen 2014) and, recently, a study addressing how host country capability, target specific experience, institutions and host country market structure impact on Finnish firms’ choice for partial, staged and full acquisitions in Egypt, Morocco, Kenya, and South Africa (Oguji & Owusu 2017). This study showed that various firm-related and institutional factors affect the acquisition decisions of Finnish firms and that there has been a change of the emphases between partial and full acquisitions over time. All the above studies are, however, limited in the sense of their empirical research being limited to Ghana, and to Finnish companies. The under-representation of Africa in acquisition research and scholarly journals and the growing cross-border M&A’s into Africa (UNCTAD 2017) suggest the need for more studies that explore various aspects of cross-border acquisitions in the context of Africa.
Similarly, international joint venture (IJV) is a popular entry strategy through which foreign firms gain market entry into Africa (Boateng 2004). It is an entry strategy where two or more legally separate bodies (one a foreign entity) form a separate jointly-owned entity in which they invest and engage in various decision-making activities (Geringer & Hebert 1989; Geringer & Hebert 1991). A review of the literature on IJVs suggest that extant studies focus on motives of IJV formation, partner selection process, how IJVs are formed, trust and commitment in IJVs, ownership and control mechanisms in IJVs, knowledge transfer in IJVs, IJV stability and performance (Vaidya 2009). Studies on IJVs in Africa are limited. Existing studies have been done on the motives of IJV formation (Bartels, Johnson & Ahmed 2002; Boateng & Glaister 2003); ownership and control mechanisms in IJVs (Bartels et al. 2002; Hearn 2015); how IJVs are formed (Gómez-Miranda, Pérez-López, Argente-Linares & Rodríguez-Ariza 2015) and performance of IJVs in Africa (Boateng & Glaister 2002).
Specifically, on IJV formation, one key area of research is on how firms access the needed capital for IJV formation. It is often more difficult for foreign firms to access domestic credit compared to local firms in emerging countries (Moskalev 2010; Beyer & Fening 2012). On this premise, Boateng (2004) studied the capital structure of IJVs in Ghana and found that the size of IJV, type of IJV industry and ownership level of IJV partner have a positive bearing on the capital structure of IJVs in Ghana. According to him, foreign JV partners in Ghana use more debts compared with the host partners because debt capital offers foreign investors greater flexibility in repatriating funds- a strategy to avert the unfavorable tax laws governing the repatriation of dividends in Ghana.
On the motives of IJV formation, Bartels et al. (2002) explored the motives and control mechanisms of 45 British and French equity joint ventures in Ghana and Côte D’Ivoire. They found that while skills acquisition is the most important motivation for IJVs between firms from developed countries, market access, and government suasion are more important for IJVs between firms from developed and developing countries of Ghana and Côte D’Ivoire. Similarly, Boateng & Glaister (2003) studied the strategic motives of international joint venture formation in Ghana and found that the main motivation for IJVs in Ghana is to overcome regulatory restrictions, cost sharing and facilitate international expansion of the foreign partners.
Regarding ownership and control mechanism, extant studies argue that mechanism for control in IJVs lie on communications, coordination, and IJV functional integration with parent MNEs (Bartels et al. 2002). In the context of Ghana and Côte D’Ivoire, a primary mechanism of control is through the selection and appointment of the IJV Chief Executive Officer (CEO) (ibid). Hearn (2015) extends ownership mechanism to include how the board of the IJVs is constituted and the roles of the IJV board members. He showed that IJVs board members in the Anglo-Saxon economies are recruited from individuals with governmental or political backgrounds (e.g., Hillman, Keim, & Schuler 2004; Hillman 2005; Holburn & Vanden, Bergh 2008; Lester, Hillman, Zardkoohi & Cannella 2008). In Africa, increasing proportions of IJV board members are drawn from indigenous social elites and governments compared to their public company counterparts because of social and political legitimacy concerns (Hearn 2015). Gómez-Miranda et al. (2015) showed that Spanish-Moroccan IJVs utilized a high degree of centralization of decision taking to impact on the competitiveness, effectiveness, and efficiency of their joint venture.
Finally, studies focused on the performance of IJVs in Africa suggest that partner capabilities, capital adequacy, congruity of motives and goals and low levels of control are significant determinants of IJV performance in Ghana (Boateng & Glaister 2002). They also found that IJVs with a private sector host partner are perceived to perform better than IJVs with the host government as a partner.
Thus far, the general conclusion from these studies is that IJVs in Africa often have different characteristics from IJVs in the developed economies and require a different framework to look at the various stages IJVs go through. Besides, Africa is a continent with varying degrees of institutional and cultural differences between countries on the continent. The variation in institutional quality across African continent has been shown to lead to varying degrees of ownership mechanisms and roles of IJV board members (Hearn 2015).
Overall, despite the prevalence of IJVs and cross-border acquisitions in Africa, we lack a detailed understanding of the complete life cycle perspective of acquisitions and IJVs in Africa. Africa provides a unique context to focus IB studies on a coherent theme that provides a useful contribution to theory and practice.
We seek papers that explore and analyze why foreign firms opt for IJV and acquisition strategies in Africa, how they manage their African subsidiaries and their performance with these entry modes. Furthermore, we seek for mainly empirical research but also some conceptual papers that enrich the contextualization of Africa in international business. Specifically, we seek state-of-the-art empirical and conceptual papers on topics including, but not limited to the following:
Motives and formation of IJVs and Acquisitions in Africa
- Motives of IJVs and acquisitions in Africa
- Motives of regional M&A vs. other cross-border M&As.
- Partner selection in IJVs, targets search and due diligence in acquisitions in Africa
- How IJVs and acquisitions from western countries in Africa differ from those of emerging market countries such as the BRICS?
- What are the major trends in IJVs and acquisitions in Africa?
External factors that are affecting IJVs and cross-border M&As in Africa
- How have institutional changes in African countries affected IJVs and acquisitions in Africa?
- In which countries are foreign investors utilizing IJVs more than acquisitions and vice versa and why?
- How do the institutional frameworks in Africa affect IJV & M&A process?
- What are the obstacles to IJVs and cross-border M&A in Africa?
Entry and Ownership Strategies: How do foreign firms choose their entry strategies in Africa?
- How do firms choose between partial, staged, full acquisitions and IJVs?
- Partial acquisition vs. joint ventures
- Partial vs. Full Acquisitions
- Staged acquisitions vs. full acquisitions
- Ownership and control mechanisms in IJVS in Africa
Management of IJVs and Acquisitions in Africa
- Knowledge transfer in IJVS and Acquisitions
- Expatriate managers vs. local management team
- Local adaptation vs. absorption of foreign practices in IJVs and acquisitions in Africa
Organizational and Cultural Issues in Acquisitions and IJVs in Africa
- The impact of cultural and language diversity in Africa on effective integration of cross-border acquisitions in Africa
- The integration process in acquisitions in Africa
- The role of culture in integration management in cross-border acquisitions in Africa
- HRM practices in IJVS and acquisitions
- Integration strategies in acquisitions
Performance of IJVs and Acquisitions in Africa
- Lessons learned from unsuccessful acquisition deals and IJV failure in Africa
- Determinants of performance of IJVs and acquisitions in Africa
- Survival and stability of IJVs in Africa.
- Divestments of IJVs and acquisitions in Africa
Guidelines and Submission Information:
All manuscripts should be submitted to the special issue at manuscript central:
https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr
Authors must follow directions for submitting manuscripts to TIBR:
http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1002/(ISSN)1520-6874/homepage/ForAuthors.html
Papers submitted to the Special Issue will be subjected to double‐blind peer review in accordance with TIBR guidelines. Further questions about this special issue should be directed to any of the Guest Editors of this Special Issue.
International Journal of Export Marketing (IJEXPORTM) invites the submission of articles that fit the theme “Market entry strategies agenda: Exporting, IJVs / ISAs, Acquisitions and Greenfields”. Growing liberalization of trading policies, intensifying regional economic integrations, and increasing advances in information, communication, and transportation technologies are some of the factors that have contributed to the accelerating globalization of the business environment and the emergence of many lucrative opportunities (Keegan and Green, 2013). Different foreign market entry strategies have been traced by SMEs and MNCs. Particularly, exporting and FDIs i.e. IJVs / ISAs, Greenfields and Acquisitions have grown considerably the last three decades. Exporting has traditionally been the most popular form of entering international markets, mainly because it requires minimal organisational resources, involves lower business risks, and allows for greater structural and strategic flexibility (Czinkota, Ronkainen, Moffett, Marinova, and Marinov, 2009). By engaging in export activities, firms can enjoy important benefits, such as generate profits for reinvestment and future growth, exploit idle operating capacity and increase production efficiency, improve technological, quality, and service standards, and enrich managerial skills and experience through exposure to different markets (Terpstra, Foley, and Sarathy, 2012).
Previous research in the area of IJVs revealed a number of advantages as well as disadvantages seen from the parent’s point of view (Hollensen, 2014). In recent years there have been increasing numbers of cross-border joint ventures. Various potential conflicts between the partners caused by double management, repatriation of profits and mixing different cultures lead to the dissolution of the IJVs.
Acquisition enables rapid entry and often provides access to distribution channels, allowing the firm to acquire experience in dealing with the local market environment (Hollensen, 2014). The difficulties encountered with acquisitions may lead firms to prefer to establish Greenfields especially where production logistics is a key industry success factor and where no appropriate acquisition targets are available or they are too costly (Hollensen, 2014).
The rise of emerging markets, due to their significant institutional difference from the developed markets, further stimulates research in the above theme of research. Questions arise regarding large bodies of existing literature and how these translate into applicable and actionable research questions for emerging market contexts. For instance, how to make sense of internationalisation pathways and how to synthesize findings with a view to their suitability for emerging markets? Further, company capabilities are likely to be shaped within business groups and networks. When studying the internationalisation processes of SMEs and MNEs there is a need for investigation of foreign entry strategies i.e. exporting and FDIs in different markets i.e. developed and emerging ones.
This special issue is set up with a view to understand better the importance of foreign market entry strategies i.e. exporting and FDIs in the developed world as well as in the emerging markets, for the sake of clearer conceptualisations and perspectives on these phenomena. We therefore seek original research qualitative or quantitative that provides a basis for understanding current issues and advancing practices in International Marketing. Although all research methodologies and perspectives are welcome, papers that offer strong theoretical foundations, managerial and public policy implications, and empirical focus will be preferred.
Topics
Manuscripts are solicited on topics including:
- Exporting issues i.e. export barriers to entry abroad, export performance, export sales management, and export assistance programmes in developed or less developed countries (i.e. Western countries) and/or emerging markets i.e. BRIC countries
- FDIs i.e. IJVs / ISAs, Acquisitions and Greenfields in developed countries and/or emerging markets (BRIC countries)
Special Issue Editor
Dr Dafnis N. Coudounaris
Editor in Chief of IJEXPORTM
Professor (Ass.) of International Marketing
Department of Marketing
University of Vaasa
Wolffintie 34
65200 Vaasa
Finland
Phone: +358 40 658 5545
dafnis.coudounaris@uva.fi
Guidelines for submissions
All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review. Author guidelines for prospective contributors are available at http://www.inderscience.com/info/inauthors/author_mp.php#conf
Submission Information
Please submit the manuscript to: http://www.inderscience.com/jhome.php?jcode=ijexportm
Submission deadline: March 31, 2017
References
Czinkota, M., Ronkainen, I., Moffett, M., Marinova, S., and Marinov, M. (2009). International Business. European Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, Chichester, UK.
Hollensen, S. (2014). Global Marketing. 6th Edition. Pearson Education Ltd, Essex, Enlgland.
Terpstra, V., Foley, J., and Sarathy, R. (2012). International Marketing, 10th Edition, Naper Publishing Group, USA.
Asia Pacific Journal of Finance and Banking Research
This paper is a relating to Rural Banking Efficiency in Ghana using the non-parametric methodology of DEA.
Editors:
- Dr Payal Kumar, Professor and HR (Chair), BML Munjal University, India
- Dr Pawan Budhwar, Professor of International HRM, Aston Business School, UK
Emerging evidence suggests that research on mentorship has been dominated by the West (Chandler, Kram & Yip, 2011), and that little is known about the cultural variations of the mentoring phenomenon. This raises many questions including that of generalizability, for example, Prof G. F Dreher of Kelly School of Business, USA says: “Can the observed correlational or cause-effect relationships that make up the mentoring literature be generalized beyond low power distance western cultures? [1]. This edited volume aims to provide a deeper understanding of the contextual interpretation of mentoring by focusing on the Asian experience in countries such as China, India, South Korea, Taiwan, amongst others.
While some research on mentoring has begun in countries such as China (Wang, Noe & Greenberger, 2009) and India (Haynes & Ghosh, 2012; Kumar, 2017), in order to move the field forward there is still a strong need for more research. Gaining a deeper understanding of the contextual interpretation of demographic dynamics specific to a country is important given that “existing theories lack appreciation for the multiple contexts within which mentoring relationships operate” (Ramaswami & Dreher, 2010: p. 502). In fact, scholars are increasingly questioning the positivist trend of decontextualizing HRM from the social-historical context of the workplace (Cooke, 2018; Knights & Omanović, 2016). Recent studies do suggest that cultural context does impact strategic HR initiatives differently, implying that business leaders and scholars would need a deeper understanding of what makes development, training and competency initiatives thrive in a particular cultural context under the influence of larger historical and social structures (Srikanth & Jomon, 2015; Barkema, Chen, George, Luo, & Tsui, 2015).
Heeding the call for mentoring relationships to be studied across cultures (Clutterbuck, Kochan, Lunsford, Dominguez, & Haddock-Millar, 2017), it is hoped that this edited volume will move the field forward for scholars of talent management, mentoring and leadership. Given that Asian countries are known for high power distance cultures, and also given that protégés tend to perceive the mentor to be a more paternalistic figurehead, it is expected that the chapters in this volume will both consolidate and add new elements to existing scholarship. For practitioners (within Asia and also for those planning to work in these countries), a richer understanding of the cultural context that is more attuned to the mentor and protégé experience in the Asian context can help to improve their workplace experience in general. Till date there has been no publication that covers the entire gamut of mentoring experiences in Asia from all levels of analyses: 1. Individual 2. Dyadic and 3. The socio-economic country context. This edited volume attempts to do this.
References
Barkema, H. G., Chen, X. P., George, G., Luo, Y., & Tsui, A. S. (2015). West meets East: New concepts and theories. Academy of Management Journal, 58(2), 460.
Chandler, D. E., Kram, K. E., & Yip, J. (2011). An ecological systems perspective on mentoring at work: A review and future prospects. Academy of Management Annals, 5(1), 519-570.
Clutterbuck, D. A., Kochan, F. K., Lunsford, L., Dominguez, N., & Haddock-Millar, J. (Eds.). (2017). The SAGE Handbook of Mentoring. SAGE.
Cooke, F. L., Wood, G., Wang, M., & Veen, A. (2018). How far has international HRM travelled? A systematic review of literature on multinational corporations (2000–2014). Human Resource Management Review.
Haynes, R. K., & Ghosh, R. (2012). Towards mentoring the Indian organizational woman: Propositions, considerations, and first steps. Journal of World Business, 47(2), 186-193.
Kumar, P. (Ed.). (2018). Exploring Dynamic Mentoring Models in India. Palgrave Macmillan.
Knights, D., & Omanović, V. (2016). (Mis) managing diversity: exploring the dangers of diversity management orthodoxy. Equality, Diversity and Inclusion: An International Journal, 35(1), 5-16.
Ramaswami, A., & Dreher, G. F. (2010). Dynamics of mentoring relationships in India: A qualitative, exploratory study. Human Resource Management, 49(3), 501-530.
Srikanth, P. B., & Jomon, M. G. (2015). Perception of Managerial Competency Needs: An Indian Perspective. South Asian Journal of Human Resources Management, 2(2), 139-170.
Wang, S., Noe, R. A., Wang, Z. M., & Greenberger, D. B. (2009). What affects willingness to mentor in the future? An investigation of attachment styles and mentoring experiences. Journal of Vocational Behavior, 74(3), 245-256.
Chapter submissions are invited on the following indicative themes:
Proposed Table of Contents
Introductory chapter: Contextualizing mentorship in the Asian region
(by Payal Kumar and Pawan Budhwar)
PART ONE
Protégé and mentor identity
Protégé: negative and positive experiences
Leadership styles and mentoring functions, e.g., paternalistic mentor
Personality traits and mentoring, e.g., self-efficacy, propensity to learn
Case studies
PART TWO
Dyadic mentoring relationships
Role modeling behaviours and outcomes
Mentoring Gen Y
Intergenerational challenges
Gender and mentoring
Regional diversity and mentoring
Managing employees’ emotional labour
Formal and informal mentoring
Case studies
PART THREE
The social and economic context
Cross cultural (country) comparison, e.g., Intergenerational mentoring in UK and India
Organizational socialization in state-owned and private companies
Power distance and mentoring relationships
Organizational culture and mentoring
Business networking in Asia and mentoring, e.g., Guanxi, caste relationships
Case studies
IMPORTANT DEADLINES
● 31st August, 2018: Submit your chapter proposal of 700 to 800 words, and details of your institutional affiliation to: Payal Kumar (payalk1@gmail.com).
The following format is expected for the chapter proposal:
1) Rationale of the chapter
2) Details of study method
3) Expected contribution of the chapter
● 15TH October: Notification of accepted chapter proposal
Please note that all contributors are expected to complete at least one chapter review.
● 15th February 2019: Receipt of full chapters for peer review
Expected word count of chapters is about 6000 to 7000 words, not including references. For more details about the style of manuscript submission, see the Emerald author’s guideline page:
http://emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/ebooks/author_guidelines.htm
● 15th April: Authors notified of chapter reviews
● May 31st: Revised chapters re-submitted to volume editors (if needed) along with 100- word author bios
● 1st August 2019: Approved chapters delivered to publisher
● December 2019: Tentative book publishing date.
Purpose
Recent trends in much macro-management research, notably microfoundations (Foss & Lindenberg, 2013) and behavioral strategy (Gavetti, 2012), emphasize the role of heterogeneous individuals, top management and their interaction in driving firm-level outcomes. These approaches stress the interaction between individuals, decisions makers and top management within a firm in understanding its performance and outcomes. By contrast, in much of the global strategy literature the unit of analysis in studying competitiveness has primarily been the firm or industry. Researchers traditionally have explained firm-level outcomes mainly using firm-level variables, such as capabilities, or industry structure.
Thus, a relatively unexplored research area has been to examine the behavioral and individual-level characteristics of corporate leadership and managers. Important decisions, especially those related to global operations, are made by top managers/the Top Management Team, and endorsed and spearheaded by firm’s leadership/upper echelons. These decisions are taken by individuals who, depending on the multinational firm involved, may sometimes differ substantially in terms of cultural and educational background, age, education, and so on. The roles of leadership and individual manager characteristics as they relate to intention, choice, action, and interaction (Foss & Pedersen, 2014) have been under-researched.
This special issue seeks papers that will unpack and enrich the global strategy literature by focusing on its microfoundations (individuals and their interactions) as they relate to the firm’s internationalization process, knowledge transfer across boundaries, HQ-subsidiary relationships, global innovation and so on (Griffith, Cavusgil, & Xu, 2008). Papers may also use a behavioral strategy perspective (Gavetti, 2012) relating to leadership and top managers as explanations for the competitiveness and international expansion paths of firms.
Background
Microfoundations research aims at decomposing macro-level constructs (e.g., organizational routines, dynamic capabilities, strategic problem formulation) in terms of actions and interactions of members at various levels in an organization (Baer et al., 2013; Foss & Pedersen, 2014). It suggests that since any macro phenomenon is caused by micro-level mechanisms, it makes sense to focus at the micro level to identify the microfoundations or roots of the phenomenon. Felin and Foss (2005: 452) observed that “[I]ndividuals after all provide the nested antecedent to numerous collective phenomena and thus deserve careful theoretical and empirical consideration in our theorizing.” The same theme echoes in Barney and Felin (2013: 145) who note that “[T]hus, organizational analysis should be fundamentally concerned with how individual level factors aggregate to the collective level”.
The behavioral strategy perspective calls for scholarship that is grounded in cognitive psychology. Behavioral signifies “being about mental processes” (Gavetti, 2012). Executive judgments can be complex owing to self-confirming beliefs, competitive blind spots, self-interested causal attributions, perceptual filtering etc. (Powell et al., 2011: 1377).
Emerging country markets are culturally, institutionally and economically dissimilar or distant from developed country markets (Cuervo- Cazurra, 2012; Khanna & Palepu, 2013) and have a greater likelihood of having family-controlled businesses (Arregle et al., 2012). A subordinate research question is how the microfoundations of emerging market firms influence their international expansion and adaptation in distant markets? How do their mental processes affect collective leadership behavior? The role of leadership and manager characteristics become even more interesting for emerging market firms as they are generally less resource-endowed and often lack world-class managerial and leadership expertise (Contractor, 2013). Gavetti (2012) avers that “when markets are efficient, opportunities for superior …courses of action or strategic opportunities” are more limited than say in emerging markets where “…the behavioral roots of superior opportunities” can have greater play.
Suggested Research Questions
The special issue seeks theoretical or empirical papers that are ideally multidisciplinary in scope and interdisciplinary in content and methodology, and represent cutting-edge research. New or emerging methodologies for empirical studies are particularly welcome. Research questions (illustrative but not exhaustive) are shown below:
- What are the microfoundations of global strategic issues such as internationalization, knowledge transfer, HQ-subsidiary relationship, value chain disaggregation, innovation, competitive advantage etc.?
- How does a micro-foundational or behavioral strategy perspective supplement current conceptual understanding of global strategy decisions and structure?
- How do global strategy microfoundations differ for firms from developed country markets vis-à-vis firms from developing or emerging markets?
- How does the behavioral strategy perspective explain the role of family ownership in explaining competitiveness and internationalization?
- Do top managers in family controlled firms manage mental processes differently than top managers in non-family controlled firms?
- What are the microfoundations perspectives on the so-called “late-comer” advantage which is sometimes the case in the internationalization of emerging market firms?
- How does the microfoundations perspective explain the role of top managers and leadership in managing, interacting and benefitting from social networks and ethnic diasporas?
- Does utilizing a micro-foundational or behavioral perspective in global strategic issues call for new research methodologies?
References
Arregle, J.L., Naldi, L., Nordqvist, M., & Hitt, M.A. (2012). Internationalization of family-controlled firms: A study of the effects of external involvement in governance. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 36(6): 1115-1143.
Baer, M., Dirks, K.T., & Nickerson, J.A. (2013). Microfoundations of strategic problem formulation. Strategic Management Journal, 34(2): 197-214.
Barney, J., & Felin, T. (2013). What are microfoundations? Academy of Management Perspectives, 27(2): 138-155.
Contractor, F. J. (2013). “Punching above their weight”: The sources of competitive advantage for emerging market multinationals. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 8(4), 304-328.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2012). Extending theory by analyzing developing country multinational companies: Solving the Goldilocks debate. Global Strategy Journal, 2(3): 153-167.
Foss, N. J., & Lindenberg, S. (2013). Microfoundations for strategy: A goal-framing perspective on the drivers of value creation. Academy of Management Perspectives, 27(2): 85-102.
Foss, N.J., & Pedersen, T. (2014). Microfoundations in strategy research. Strategic Management Journal, DOI: 10.1002/smj.2362 (accepted article).
Felin, T., & Foss, N.J. (2005). Strategic organization: A field in search of micro-foundations. Strategic Organization, 3(4): 441-455.
Gavetti, G. (2012). Toward a behavioral theory of strategy. Organization Science, 23(1): 267 – 285.
Griffith, D.A., Cavusgil, S.T., & Xu, S. (2008). Emerging themes in international business research. Journal of International Business Studies, 39: 1220-1235.
Khanna, T., & Palepu, K. (2013). Winning in emerging markets: A road map for strategy and execution. Harvard Business Press.
Powell, T.C., Lovallo, D., & Fox, C.R. (2011). Behavioral strategy. Strategic Management Journal, 32(13): 1369-1386.
Submission Instructions
The deadline for submission of papers is May 31, 2016. All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue and will go through the GSJ regular double-blind review process following procedures established by the journal (see gsj.strategicmanagement.net).
More information:
To obtain additional information, please contact the special issue editors:
· Farok Contractor, Rutgers Business School: farok@andromeda.rutgers.edu
· Nicolai J. Foss, Copenhagen Business School: njf.smg@cbs.dk
· Sumit Kundu, Florida International University: kundus@fiu.edu
· Somnath Lahiri, Illinois State University: slahiri@ilstu.edu
For questions about submitting to the special issue please contact the GSJ Managing Editor, Sara DiBari (gsjeditorial@wiley.com).
Background
The rise of the middle class (MC) in rapidly transforming economies of East Asia, Latin America, Africa and the Middle East is one of the most remarkable megatrends of recent decades. Given the magnitude of the changes felt by vast numbers of households across the globe, as well as the importance the issue holds in the realms of society, politics, business, economics and culture, examining the middle classes in emerging markets (EMs) has become a topic of investigation, and in multiple areas of academic inquiry.
While a consensus definition does not exist, the middle class generally refers to a growing number of households in EMs who now have access to a substantial disposable income that they can direct towards discretionary purchases – e.g. cars, home appliance, better housing, private education for children, leisure, and so forth. One practical benchmark for delineating this group is having at least 30 percent of total household income available for discretionary consumption.
Yet, the rise of the middle class households in EMs is a multifaceted phenomenon signifying changes beyond discretionary consumption. Other factors by which middle class status can be defined include educational and professional achievement, political attitudes and participation, lifestyles, cultural values, or simply self-identification. The evolution of middle class is also correlated with rapid urbanization -- along with its consequences (e.g., housing and real estate pressures, unequal access to infrastructure between Tier 1 and Tier 2 cities, etc.). Finally, the rise of middle class in EMs heralds profound changes in societal values. Examples are: savings vs spending proclivity, attitudes toward borrowing, work-life balance, definition of success, religious practices, and individualism orientation.
Thus, business and economics scholars are not alone in studying the MC phenomenon. Scholars from such disciplines as media, communication, sociology, anthropology, political science, education, history, urban studies, and geography are also actively examining this topic. A special interest of some scholars is to contrast the contemporary developments in EMs with those already experienced by mature, post-industrial economies. Some also approach the middle class as a social phenomenon that derives meaning from social and cultural practices, while others treat it as political power with the capacity to shape a country's social, political, economic and cultural landscape.
The rise of the middle class has many important implications for international business and the processes of globalization. These arise not only because of the consumption requirements of the middle class, but also in issues such as gender equality, income equality and the environmental implications of the new patterns of consumption. There are also important fiscal consequences in terms of taxation and its role in funding the "developmental state" and macroeconomic effects arising from debt. The relationship between the rise of middle class consumption and the "middle income trap" remain to be fully examined. All these issues represent new opportunities for international business researchers.
We contend that the middle class phenomenon is one of the most profound aspects of contemporary growth markets, whether it is Brazil, China, Indonesia, Poland, South Africa, or Turkey. While business and economics scholars have begun to pay special attention to this topic, and are now producing empirical findings, we can benefit from the observations and conceptualizations of fellow researchers in related disciplines as well. Clearly, a multi-disciplinary, holistic understanding the middle class phenomenon, is needed.
In addition, we need to examine country variations, recognizing that each EM has exhibited a different trajectory in forming its middle class. Middle class households in different EMs may face different issues and embody a wide range of paradoxes regarding hope and anxiety, optimism and discontent, stability and change, and so forth. Therefore, a comparative perspective can lead to some common understanding of this remarkable megatrend of our times.
Specific Objectives of the Special Issue
In addition to business scholars, we encourage researchers from economics, and other social science disciplines to submit their relevant works. We pursue the following objectives in developing the special issue:
- Offer a platform for scholars from international business and other disciplines to articulate their conceptualizations of the middle class phenomenon; thus working towards a more holistic understanding of middle class;
- Elicit and disseminate conceptual frameworks and empirical works that examine: i) antecedents; ii) consequences; and iii) moderators of the middle class phenomenon;
- Encourage and disseminate alternative metrics and methodologies for quantifying middle class households in EMs;
- Call attention to the varying trajectories of countries that are building their middle classes, thus offering comparative perspectives;
- Publish empirical evidence on such presumed consequences of the rise of middle class as: entrepreneurial activity; income equality; political activism; transparency and democratic tendencies; and innovation; and
- Elicit studies that examine the relationship between the middle class phenomenon and such correlates as urbanization, modernization, sociological transformation;
Timeline for the Special Issue
Deadline for full paper submissions: 15 September 2014
Acceptance deadline for revised papers: 15 March 2015
Expected publication date of special issue: May 2015
To submit your papers, please access the journal's submission system by using the web link: http://ees.elsevier.com/ibr/default.asp
Each paper will be sent to two to three reviewers, with relevant qualifications.
Guest Editors
Tamer Cavusgil (cavusgil@gsu.edu ) currently serves as Fuller E. Callaway Professorial Chair and Executive Director, CIBER, at the J. Mack Robinson College of Business, Georgia State University, Atlanta, Georgia, USA.
Peter J Buckley, (pjb@lubs.leeds.ac.uk) , (BA (Econ), York; MA, East Anglia; PhD Economics, Lancaster; Dr hc (Uppsala)) is Professor of International Business and Director of the Centre for International Business, University of Leeds, (CIBUL), UK.
Migrants, Migration Policies, and International Business Research: Current Trends and New Directions
Special Issue Co-Editors
David Deeds Helena Barnard Paul M. Vaaler
Schulze Professor of Professor of Management John and Bruce Mooty Chair
Entrepreneurship & Doctoral Programme Dir in Law & Business
Opus College of Business Gordon Institute of Bus Sci Carlson School & Law School
University of St. Thomas University of Pretoria University of Minnesota
1000 LaSalle Avenue South 26 Melville Road 321 19th Avenue South
Minneapolis, MN 55403 Illovo, Johannesburg Minneapolis, MN 55455
USA SOUTH AFRICA USA
Tel +1 (651) 962 4407 Tel +27 11 771 4213 Tel +1 612 625 4951
Email david.deeds@gmail.com Email barnardh@gibs.co.za Email vaal0001@umn.edu
Special Issue Description
In the 2010s, individuals living outside their country of birth or childhood total more than 250 million, making “Diasporia” the fifth largest “country” in the world. National laws in host and home countries as well as international agreements linking those countries comprise a complex migrant and migration policy (M&MP) web doing the following: regulating migrant movement; defining migrant workplace rights; influencing migrant investment, innovation and entrepreneurship; taxing migrant income and wealth; attracting migrant votes; and otherwise “harnessing” migrants to serve policy goals.
How do such national and international M&MP trends matter for IB strategies and the individuals and multinational enterprises (MNEs) behind those IB strategies? IB research has a long history of studying migrant executives –expatriate managers— but today’s M&MPs have broader implications for a range of international workers, entrepreneurs and innovators, all of whom are well-represented in Diasporia. IB research can and should address current M&MP trends, and the IB challenges as well as opportunities they create for international investors, innovators, and entrepreneurs.
The new Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP) aims to be a leader in publishing high-quality research analyzing emerging public policy trends and their impact on international investors and firms. You can learn more about JIBP’s aims here: https://www.jibp.net. JIBP more specifically intends to champion research analyzing M&MP trends and their impact relevant to IB research. To that end, JIBP is sponsoring a day-long symposium on the topic in conjunction with the Academy of International Business annual meeting in Minneapolis, Minnesota, USA on Monday, June 25, 2018. You can learn more about and register for the day-long symposium here: https://stthomas.az1.qualtrics.com/jfe/form/SV_0fuAroJmeTm0e1L. There is no cost to register for the symposium.
JIBP is also issuing this call for paper proposals for subsequent development into full manuscripts for submission, peer review, and possible publication in a special issue of JIBP scheduled for late 2019.
We welcome proposals addressing these M&MP issues and others:
- Firm responses to host-country visa limitations on migrant worker recruitment.
- MNE influence on the emergence and terms of bilateral labor agreements.
- Home-country voting rights and migrant-related foreign direct investment.
- Home- and host-country regulatory effects on migrant remittances.
- The role of diasporas in international technology and knowledge transfers.
- Migrant mobility and patenting patterns in home- and host-countries.
- Bilateral investment treaties and the internationalization of migrant-run businesses.
- Home- and host-country taxation policy effects on migrant remittances.
- Home-country economic informality and foreign direct investment by migrants.
- Dual citizenship laws and home- versus host-country business activity by migrants.
- Individual and joint effects of bilateral labor agreements and bilateral investment treaties on MNE growth, structure, and performance.
- International patenting conventions (e.g., Patent Cooperation Treaty) and migrant innovation.
- How home and host countries encourage refugee versus economic migrant entrepreneurship.
- How non-governmental international organizations affect migration policy and business.
- Migration and growth in international money transfer, banking and related service industries.
- The role of migrants in transmitting business norms and entrepreneurial practices back home.
- Home-country investment by refugees versus economic migrants living abroad.
- Relationships between official foreign and international development aid and migrant remittances to developing countries.
- The role of home-country migrant affairs ministries in harnessing diasporas for more remittances, foreign direct investment, and other economic purposes.
- Host-country discrimination against migrants and migrant venture funding, founding, and growth.
- The role of host-country firms in settling refugees.
- MNE lobbying strategies to change migrant policies in host and home countries.
These M&MP issues are not meant to be exhaustive but illustrative of possible proposal topics.
We welcome proposals from researchers in IB, other management fields, and fields outside of management such as economics, political science, sociology, law, geography, development studies, public policy, and international relations. We especially welcome proposals bridging these disciplines. We welcome proposals primarily aimed at theory development, as well as empirical investigation of theoretically-grounded research questions. Empirical investigations may be primarily quantitative, qualitative, or a mix of both approaches. We seek a broad range of proposals addressing M&MP issues promising new and novel research contributions to IB research on M&MP issues.
Special Issue Proposals
Proposals should be written in English and not exceed a total of seven (7) pages and 4000 words – five (5) pages for the body which can include charts, graphs, diagrams, and up to two (2) pages of references. The 4000-word count includes all text in the charts, graphs, diagrams, and references.
Only electronic submissions of proposal(s) will be accepted, submitted via the Manuscript Central portal for JIBP: https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibp. A maximum of two (2) proposals, either as an author or a co-author, may be submitted.
We seek original, unpublished work to move the scholarly conversation on M&MP issues forward. Proposals may be rooted in or derived from prior work, but the submitted proposal must reflect significant development. Any proposal submitted that is judged to be identical or substantially similar to work already published, presented or under review for another conference or publication, will not be considered for invitation to develop a full manuscript.
Proposals are easiest to handle if submitted in PDF format. MS Word (or equivalent) will also be accepted. The title should be listed in the header of each page. Please use single spacing and 10-point font or larger.
All proposals received by the deadline date (September 1, 2018) are deemed as original and final.
Timeline from Proposal to Publication
All proposals will be evaluated by the special issue editors. They will follow this timeline for proposal acceptance, full manuscript development and submission, peer review, acceptance, and JIBP publication:
- September 1, 2018: Deadline for submission of proposals via Manuscript Central portal for JIBP (https://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibp).
- October 1, 2018: Notification of acceptance or rejection of proposals for development as full manuscripts for submission.
- February 1, 2019: Deadline for submission of full manuscripts.
- February 1 to September 1, 2019: Double-blind peer review, revision, and editorial notification of manuscript acceptance or rejection for inclusion in JIBP special issue.
- December 2019: Publication of JIBP special issue.
Proposals are reviewed by the special issue editors, so they are not anonymous. Proposals should include name and institutional affiliation of all authors. Authors invited to submit full manuscripts can expect standard double-blind peer review process once submitted.
Please contact the special issue editors with any questions.
Online misbehavior at universities and colleges--including cyberbullying, harassment, plagiarism misrepresentations, trickery, scams, privacy violations, hacking, intellectual property violations, etc.--is being addressed to varying degrees and in varying ways. This volume will provide reports on the nature and extent of problems and approaches to grappling with these issues.
Publication Schedule
Book chapter proposals received: February 21, 2011
Notification of accepted chapter proposals: March 1, 2011
Receipt of full book chapters: May 1, 2011
Chapter authors receive reviews with feedback: June 1, 2011
Final revisions due: August 1, 2011
Book release: January 3, 2012
Submit a one-page or so chapter proposal. Also, include for each of the co-authors a brief biography including terminal degree, current institutional affiliation and position, and a listing of any related publications. For each co-author include contact information, so we can readily contact you such as: email address, mobile phone, work phone, home phone, and Skype (if you do not mind us contacting you through these).
Send proposals and inquiries to both:
Charles Wankel wankelc@verizon.net and Laura A. Wankel wankella@shu.edu
Multinational Enterprises and Sustainable Development in the Extractive and Natural Resource Sectors
INDERSCIENCE PUBLISHERS
International Journal of Management Practice
SPECIAL ISSUE
Title:
Special Issue on: “Multinational firms and FDI in the 21st century: New theories, new participants and changing hegemony”
Guest Editors:
Dr Mark Cook
Description:
Recent years have witnessed increased globalisation of the world economy, aided by technological change, liberalisation and privatisation pursued by many governments, the development of bilateral and multinational trade agreements, the globalisation of tastes and the opening up of markets. Multinational Enterprises have become increasingly dominant in the global economy, accounting for over 80% of world trade and an equal proportion of private R&D. Consequently Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) has grown dramatically reached a peak in 2007 before the global financial crisis. The growth in FDI both through inward and outward FDI has increased much faster than Gross domestic Product (GDP) and Gross Fixed Capital Formation (GFCF).
FDI has stocks and flows have predominantly occurred within the global triad (North America, Europe, Asia) though in more recent years we have seen the emergence of emerging market or transitional economy FDI. However, FDI in Africa is still at a relatively low level.
Traditional theories of FDI have tried to explain FDI, through the OLI paradigm, capital arbitrage theory, international trade theory, the product life cycle model, the Hymerian view, and the search for markets, resources, efficiency and agglomeration economies. More recently we have seen the use of Institutional Theory to explain both developing and developed country FDI flows.
FDI can bring both benefits and costs to societies and there have been increased calls for the regulation of this activity. At the same time governments have considered FDI as an important stimulus for regional growth, improved productivity performances, a provider of much needed employment and export potential and to enhance competitiveness and they have not been inactive in pursuing policies to attract FDI, through state aid, tax breaks and reductions in corporation tax. As well as attempting to alter their national and regional landscapes to attract FDI some governments have undertaken policies to stimulate their own domestic industries to go overseas (The Chinese Go Global Policy). But to what extent should government be involved in the race to the bottom (through tax changes), or the race to the top (looking to obtain high value-added FDI and technological/HQ FDI)? To what extent has the hegemony of the developed world in the sphere of FDI flows been threatened by the financial crisis and the growth of new FDI from emerging markets and the BRIC countries? To what extent is this new FDI embedded in national economies and provide similar or different spillover effects? To what extent does firm heterogeneity impact upon the outcomes of FDI? What are the drivers of emerging market FDI and are these different for private organisations and Sovereign Wealth Funds?
This special issue offers a unique opportunity to explore the rapidly changing participants, drivers and impact of FDI in our global economy in a period of change in international trade and hegemony.
Subject coverage:
Topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Theories on the growth of emerging market FDI
- The regulations and control of FDI
- New theories of FDI behaviour
- The regional impact of FDI
- The drivers of FDI activity
- The impact of different source countries on inbound FDI
- Case studies on particular emerging market or developing country FDI organisation
- The spillover effects of FDI
- Sectoral studies of FDI in a globalised economy
- Government support for the globalisation of firms
- FDI and national competitiveness and export potential
- Regional or country studies of FDI successes and failures
- Critical perspectives on traditional theories of FDI
- FDI and the race to the bottom and race to the top
- Regional integration and trade agreements and FDI patterns
- Sovereign Wealth Funds and their impact on FDI
- Cluster theory and FDI patterns
- MNEs and governance
Notes for Intending Authors:
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere
All papers are refereed through a peer review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page
Deadlines for submission:
1-2 Page Abstract: by 1st September 2013
Confirmation of interest: 30st September 2013
Submission of Manuscripts: 31st December 2013
Notification to Authors: 9 February 2014
Final Versions Due: 30 April 2014
Editors and Notes:
You may send one copy in the form of an MS Word file attached to an e-mail (details in Author Guidelines) to the following:
Guest Editor(s) contact details, including email(s):
Dr. Mark Cook, Reader in International Business, The Business School, University of Wolverhampton, MN Building, Nursery Street, City Campus North, Wolverhampton, WV1 1AD. Email: Mark.cook@wlv.ac.uk
Section # 1
Dear Global Business Scholars: Hi
Ref: Invitation to Develop a Global Case on an Emerging Country’s Global Company
- I am pleased to invite members of AIB’s Global Family to develop a Case for publication in a Monographic Case Book to be published by Routledge (Taylor and Francis).
- Your Case must be 20 single space pages (not more and not less) on any company of your choice headquartered in an emerging country, that is attempting to build its global brand on the global stage.
- This AGBA’s Monographic Case Book is designed to support the world-class scholarship of scholars focusing on emerging countries.
- Only two co-authors (at a max) are allowed for each Case.
- Only One Case is allowed per author.
- Only One Case is allowed per Country.
- Monograph would have 30 cases encompassing 30 emerging countries.
- A Case published by Harvard Business School on a similar theme would be shared with prospective authors for benchmarking purposes. It would spell out (as a sample) (i) global issues, (ii) writing style and (iii) format; how to develop your own case.
- Your Case must focus on your chosen company’s Global Branding Model, strategy, focus, vision, mission, objectives, growth trajectory, success story, and the lessons learned during the course of its global brand building exercise.
- You are also requested to develop a 5 to 10 Page Teaching Note about your Case. This teaching note would not be published in the proposed Monographic Case Book.
- However, AGBA’s Global Secretariat located at the Millikin University (USA) would keep it on file to share it with those global professors who would like to use your case in their BBA/MBA courses across the world.
- It is a Teaching Case.
- Objective of Your Case is to teach Decision-Making Skills in the field of Global Branding to MBA students across the world.
- Indexing:
I am negotiating with the publisher for the indexing of both book and individual cases within Scopus for global recognition and prestige. Consequently, your case would count like a journal publication after indexing in Scopus.
- AGBA needs following 4 documents from you by the deadline given in the next section.
- Your Case in the MS Word Format ONLY;
- Your Teaching Note in MS Word format only;
- English Editing Certificate; and
- Similarity Report showing less than 10% similarity index.
Section # 2
Time-Line for the Development of Case Book
- June 1, 2022 --- October 30, 2022 ---- Develop Your Case and submit it to me within this time-frame.
- November 1, 2022 ---- November 30, 2022 --- Anonymous Global Reviewers will Review Your Case.
- December 1, 2022 ---- December 31, 2022---- You would be given one month to revise and improve your Case based on Global Reviews.
- January 1, 2023 ---- March 30, 2023 ---- Monographic Case Book would be edited by the Editor.
- May 1, 2023 --- Monographic Case Book would be Published Online as an E-Book by AGBA on its Website.
- May 20---22, 2023 --- Monographic Case Book would be released by the publisher at AGBA’s 19th global conference to held at the Al-Qasimia University (DUBAI) United Arab Emirates.
- You are cordially invited to patronize AGBA’s 2023 Face-to-Face (in person) Conference and be part of the history in the making when Monograph Case Book having your CASE would be released by the publisher.
- Important Note:
Kindly note that aforementioned deadlines cannot be extended under any circumstance in order to maintain global publication schedule.
Zafar U. Ahmed
Founder, President and CEO
Academy for Global Business Advancement
Washington DC
District of Columbia
USA
Cellphone #: +(1)-214-205-4234
Email: zafaruahmed@gmail.com
To be Published by
Routledge (Taylor and Francis)
Guest Editors:
- Ying Chen, Fujian Normal University/Nanjing University of Science and Technology (China)
- Gao Wu, Nanjing University of Science and Technology (China)
- Mette Søgaard Nielsen, Martin Senderovitz, & Simon Fietze, University of Southern Denmark
Special Issue
The importance of entrepreneurship as a driver of employment, innovation and national competitiveness has been widely acknowledged, as indicated with the European Commission’s recent Entrepreneurship 2020 Action Plan. Research into early stages of the start-up process – also termed nascent entrepreneurship (Davidsson, 2006) – reveals that combinations of factors on the individual (Unger et al. 2011; e.g. risk willingness, self-efficacy), team (Ruef & Aldrich, 2003; e. g. team size, team diversity), venture (Senderovitz et al., 2016; e. g. strategy, industry), environmental levels (Klyver et al., 2013; e. g. social networks, legislation, culture) affect idea generation, entrepreneurial intentions, start-up behaviour, and finally whether newly founded businesses survive, grow and generate profit.
It is increasingly recognized that in order to understand nascent entrepreneurship, it is insufficient to study factors individually; rather, nascent entrepreneurship is a multi-level phenomenon that requires investigations into how factors – in combination and across levels – function to influence the start-up process. For instance, the value of the resources in form of trust obtained from social networks might depend on the level of self-efficacy of the individual (Carolis et al., 2009) or on how collectivistic a nation’s culture is (Rooks et al., 2016).
China has become an increasingly important economic entity and the Chinese government has put much attention to entrepreneurial activities. They have recognized entrepreneurship as one of the key drivers of sustainable economic development. The government puts a lot of efforts to encourage and facilitate entrepreneurial activity (He, 2018). China, therefore, provides an important and interesting context to explore entrepreneurial activities from different perspectives and levels. Alongside the emergence and growth of entrepreneurial activities in the huge transitional economy, there is a need and great opportunities for further entrepreneurship research.
Therefore, this call for papers invites both empirical studies and theoretical papers that helps understanding how various factors, in combination and across levels, impact entrepreneurship in China, including idea generation, entrepreneurial intentions, start-up behaviour, and start-up performance.
References
- Davidsson, P. (2006). Nascent Entrepreneurship: Empirical Studies and Developments. Foundations and Trends in Entrepreneurship, 2(1), 1-76.
- De Carolis, D. M., Litzky, B. E., & Eddleston, K. A. (2009). Why networks enhance the progress of new venture creation: The influence of social capital and cognition. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 33(2), 527-545.
- He, C., Lu, J. & Qian, H. (2018). Entrepreneurship in China. Small Business Econmics. doi:10.1007/s11187-017-9972-5
- Klyver, K., Nielsen, S. L., & Evald, M. R. (2013). Women's self-employment: An act of institutional (dis) integration? A multilevel, cross-country study. Journal of Business Venturing, 28(4), 474-488.
- Ruef, M., Aldrich, H. E., & Carter, N. M. (2003). The structure of founding teams: Homophily, strong ties, and isolation among US entrepreneurs. American Sociological Review, 195-222.
- Rooks, G., Klyver, K., & Sserwanga, A. (2016). The context of social capital: A comparison of rural and urban entrepreneurs in Uganda. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 40(1), 111-130.
- Senderovitz, M., Klyver, K., & Steffens, P. (2016). Four years on: Are the gazelles still running? A longitudinal study of firm performance after a period of rapid growth. International Small Business Journal, 34(4), 391-411.
- Unger, J. M., Rauch, A., Frese, M., & Rosenbusch, N. (2011). Human capital and entrepreneurial success: A meta-analytical review. Journal of Business Venturing, 26(3), 341-358.
Deadline
Full papers for this special issue of management revue – Socio-Economic Studies must be submitted by May 31, 2019. All contributions will be subject to double-blind review. Papers invited to a “revise and resubmit” are due January 31, 2020. The publication is scheduled for issue 3/2020. Please submit your papers electronically via the online submission system at http://www.mrev.nomos.de/ using “SI Nascent Entrepreneurship” as article section.
Submission Guidelines
Manuscript length should not exceed 8,000 words (excluding references) and the norm should be 30 pages in double-spaced type with margins of about 3 cm (1 inch) on each side of the page. Further, please follow the guidelines on the journal's website and submit the papers electronically by sending a “blind” copy of your manuscript (delete all author identification from this primary document).
Hoping to hear from you!
Special issue information:
Overview and purpose of the special issue
The global economic order established following World War II has encountered major disruptions and undergone substantial structural reconfiguration (Petricevic and Teece, 2019). Against this backdrop, the global landscape dynamics have been extensively fractured with the effects of several recent circumstances leading to fundamental shifts in the traditional internationalization trajectories such as: (a) global pandemic, resulting in more nationalistic and protectionist policies and institutional adjustments to preserve employment and the financial interests of home markets (Cuervo-Cazurra et al., 2020; Delios, Perchthold, and Capri, 2021); (b) heightened geopolitical tensions, driving organizations to fuel decoupling efforts between specific regions, notably exemplified by the strained relations between China and the United States (Contractor, 2022; Witt et al., 2023), and (c) the retreat of globalization, giving rise to a more regionally fragmented world economy stemming from the escalation of uncertainty, and increased expenses in international transactions (Ciravegna and Michailova, 2023); and, (d) global degrowth, to stabilize the global economy by recalibrating growth opportunities from high-income countries toward low- and middle-income countries where growth opportunities remain (Hickel et al., 2022).
That said, these developments are profoundly influencing the fabric of the business landscape. With the trajectory of the world economy’s globalization becoming increasingly uncertain, business to business (B2B) enterprises operating beyond their national boundaries are under pressure to recognize and accommodate these disruptions by reconsidering their ‘global’ value chains (GVCs) and reassessing their traditional internationalization pathways (Petricevic and Teece, 2019). In this regard, this call for papers invites scholars to integrate geopolitical frictions with business views, intending to guide B2B firms navigating in these highly uncertain and disruptive business landscape considering new realities and trajectories of internationalization. Albeit the fact that previous research considering these disruptions and uncertainties extensively as a threat (e.g., Luo and Van Assche, 2023; Vertinsky et al., 2023), it should not be undervalued how resilient and adaptive organizations can be (Contractor, 2022; Zamborsky et al., 2023). Therefore, it remains unclear how B2B firms should adapt and how globalization might carry on under these conditions of neointernationalization.
These disruptions and uncertainties in the geopolitical sphere could also result in viable alternatives for B2B firms by considering new areas of opportunities, encompassing offshoring, reshoring, nearshoring, friendshoring, and safe-shoring. In the last two decades, the globalization’s influence on the global competitive landscape largely produced a pronounced trend towards outsourcing and overseas production, especially in the realms of manufacturing and sourcing (Gereffi, Lim, and Lee, 2018). In line with this, a multitude of organizations have been actively engaged in offshoring practices which involve the relocation of various value chain activities to foreign locations over the past few decades, as they have heavily attempted to benefit from the availability of cheaper raw materials, lower labour costs, and less stringent regulatory environments (Merino, Di Stefano and Fratocchi, 2021; Mukherjee, Kumar, Pandey, and Lahiri, 2023). Nevertheless, global value chain disruptions and radical shifts in the attractiveness of the specific locations have pushed companies reconsider their offshored manufacturing locations, which results in decisions relating to reversing their prior manufacturing offshoring decisions and bringing their activities back home (Barbieri et al., 2022; Ellram, Tate, and Petersen, 2013).
In the contemporary globalized context, the singular emphasis on cost as a primary determinant in decision-making processes related to internationalization has been supplanted (Mukherjee et al., 2019). This shift is attributed to the growing recognition among organizations of the multifaceted nature of their reputations, encompassing ethical and sustainability considerations, as well as other strategic imperatives (Ellram, 2013; Kafouros et al., 2022). Furthermore, firm-specific factors, such as strategic priorities and customer responsiveness, exert a significant influence on this decision-making process (McIvor and Bals, 2021). Consequently, the concept of nearshoring, referring to the relocation of the value chain activities to a nearby location to the home market, has gained attraction by addressing sustainability and ethical concerns associated with offshore production (Ellram et al., 2013; Gray et al., 2013).
The burgeoning concept of friendshoring presents a novel perspective on the globalization paradigm, suggesting a nuanced equilibrium between globalization and de-globalization, as some multinational enterprises (MNEs) prefer to maintain neutrality by not aligning with any particular side amidst geopolitical tensions and instead, are relocating to regions perceived as ‘friendly’ or ‘neutral’, such as Southeast Asia, South Asia, Africa, Latin America, the Middle East, and Eastern Europe (Bilgili et al., 2023; Zamborsky et al., 2023).
Despite the fact that friendshoring and decoupling have a more expansive global presence, yet they are commonly feasible merely in the regions characterized by minimal perceived risk, potentially compromising agility. At that point, another nascent topic of safe-shoring, may conversely addresses this inherent trade-off by emphasizing the importance of agility and resilience through maintaining a flexible approach and leveraging the advantages of low factor costs in areas characterized by economic volatility as they are able to quickly move globally in reaction to risk events (Kutschera et al., 2023).
Sample topics
We are calling for scholarly contributions that can illuminate the challenges and opportunities inherent in the evolving landscape of globalization, thereby enhancing our comprehensive understanding of the future trajectory of the internationalization arena, which may encompass novel practices such as offshoring, reshoring, nearshoring, friendshoring, and safe-shoring.
This special issue invites submissions of both conceptual and empirical manuscripts, employing diverse methodologies such as quantitative, qualitative, case studies, or triangulation of methods. We encourage multidisciplinary approaches. All manuscripts should be directly relevant to the recognition and accommodation of the disruptions to traditional internationalization trajectories that we are characterizing as neointernationalization.
Potential research questions for submission to this special issue include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Does traditional internationalization theory, such as the OLI framework and the Uppsala model, adequately address the neointernationalization of B2B firms?
- What new paradigms should be developed to recognize and accommodate the disruptions to traditional internationalization trajectories in industrial markets?
- What are the determinants that influence the international relocation decisions of business-to-business firms (B2B)?
- What are the key factors that determine the success or failure of industrial firms in adapting to the changing landscape of globalization and internationalization?
- How can B2B firms originating from emerging economies compete with geopolitical frictions in their internationalization operations?
- Which countries or regions are anticipated to come to the forefront of new internationalization trajectories, particularly for nearshoring or friendshoring practices of industrial firms?
- How may top management team characteristics of industrial firms affect decisions related to new internationalization trajectories from the upper echelons’ perspective?
- To what extent do the disparities in institutional environments between the home and host countries influence relocation decisions of B2B firms?
- How will different industries (i.e., primary, secondary, tertiary industries etc.) be affected by the emerging trends resulting from the disruptions of traditional internationalization trajectories?
- How might the evolving digital landscape influence the strategic decisions of industrial firms regarding the offshoring and reshoring of their operations?
- How do B2B firms leverage technology and digitalization to mitigate the impact of geopolitical frictions on their operations?
- What resources or capabilities do industrial firms require to effectively address the disruptions of traditional internationalization pathways?
- What are the key factors that determine the resilience and adaptability of B2B firms in the face of geopolitical frictions, particularly for safe-shoring?
- What are the trade-off mechanisms that exist between globalization, deglobalization, and sustainability practices in industrial markets?
- How do industrial firms assess and manage the risks associated with geopolitical frictions, and how do these risks impact their decision-making processes?
- What roles do network ties play in shaping decisions of B2B firms related to nearshoring or friendshoring?
Guest editors
- Nilay Bicakcioglu-Peynirci (University of Sussex Business School, United Kingdom), n.bicakcioglu-peynirci@sussex.ac.uk
-
Robert E. Morgan (Cardiff Business School, Cardiff University, United Kingdom & Copenhagen Business School, Denmark), morganre@cardiff.ac.uk
Important dates
- Submission opens: March 1, 2025
-
Deadline for submission: May 1, 2025
New Frontiers in Latin American Entrepreneurship and SME Internationalization: Research and Practice
Academia Revista Latinoamericana de Administración (ARLA) announces the forthcoming publication of a special issue, “New Frontiers in Latin American Entrepreneurship and SME Internationalization: Research and Practice” in association with the Global Entrepreneurship Development Centre (GEDC) at Kingston University London, UK. The GEDC is a global community on entrepreneurship research. It is the mission of the GEDC to raise levels of knowledge, theory and practice on entrepreneurship worldwide through the promotion of research.
Guest edited by Christian Felzensztein, Professor of International Entrepreneurship & Director of the Global Entrepreneurship Development Centre (GEDC) at Kingston University London, and Sascha Fuerst, Associate Professor of International Business at Universidad EAFIT Colombia.
About the GEDC Conference
Members of the GEDC are involved in joint entrepreneurship research programs, joint PhD workshops and conferences, faculty exchanges and cooperation. The theme for this first conference is New Frontiers in International Entrepreneurship: Research and Practice to be held at Kingston Business School, London, UK on 5-7 October 2016.
The intensive, two-day conference will serve as a platform for the GEDC members to network and discuss the further development of new theories and methodologies for a better understanding of internationalizing entrepreneurial firms facing new internationalization challenges. Only unpublished papers are invited for presentation in the competitive sessions.
More information at: http://business.kingston.ac.uk/research/research-centres/GEDC
Topic of interest
We know that both international networks and entrepreneurial orientation actively support the internationalization of small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) in Latin America (Felzensztein et al. 2015; Fuerst & Zettinig 2015). These two topics are important and still much disputed aspects of firm internationalization (Dimitratos et al. 2010, 2014). Understanding them can provide important insights for entrepreneurs that are choosing their internationalization strategies as well as for the institutions that may support them, such as export promotion agencies and trade associations. In some emerging economies, like those in the Latin American context, there is a tendency to provide incentives to openness to new international markets and to foster the SMEs’ internationalization (Felzensztein et al. 2014; Furst 2010). However, the region shows very different faces—large internal market economies (e.g., Brazil and Mexico) contrast with small but internationally competitive markets like Chile. According to the Global Entrepreneurship Monitor GEM 2015, the most remarkable cases in Latin America are Chile and Colombia with a large percentages of entrepreneurs (more than 80%) but only a limited degree of international orientation. These examples show that most of the entrepreneurs in the region do not show a strong orientation to sell their products or services to customers in other countries, or even in other geographical regions outside South America (Amoros et al. 2015; Felzensztein et al. 2015). From this perspective, it is interesting to explore, analyze, and learn about new results from research related to entrepreneurship and SME internationalization in Latin America.
Representative questions
We encourage contributions that provide new insights into entrepreneurship and SME internationalization in the context of Latin America. We welcome conceptual and empirical research and review articles able to expand our current understanding about the phenomenon. Different methodological approaches are welcome. These can be related to delivering new insights into the antecedents and outcomes of internationalization or the internationalization process per se. We also invite case studies for teaching purpose that have the potential to enrich our understanding about entrepreneurship and SME internationalization in Latin America.
The topics to be covered by this call for papers include, but are not limited to:
- The role or impact of the entrepreneur for internationalization.
- The role of learning and knowledge for internationalization.
- The role or impact of internal resources, networks, and strategies for internationalization.
- The role or impact of the institutional environment for internationalization.
- Entrepreneurial ecosystems and its role or impact on internationalization.
- The role or impact of public policies for internationalization.
- Case studies for teaching purposes that contribute insights into the process of entrepreneurial internationalization.
Submission Process & Guidelines
Submissions to ARLA are made using Scholar-One Manuscripts, the online submission and peer review system. Registration and access is available at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/arla
Interested authors must indicate the special issue on New Frontiers in Latin American Entrepreneurship and SME Internationalization: Research and Practice.
Full information and guidance on using Scholar-One Manuscripts is available at the Emerald Scholar-One Manuscripts Support Centre: http://msc.emeraldinsight.com
Author guidelines: http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=arla
Submission deadline: December 1st, 2016
References
Amoros, J.E, Ciravegna, L., Etchebarne, M.S, Felzensztein, C., Haar, J. (2015) International entrepreneurship in Latin America: Lessons from theory and practice. In Newburry, W., Gonzalez-Perez, M.A. (Eds), International business in Latin America: Innovation, geography and internationalization, (pp. 57-82). Houndmills, Basingstoke Hampshire: Palgrave Macmillan.
Dimitratos, P., Amoros, J.E., Etchebarne, M.S., Felzensztein, C. (2014) Micro-multinational or not? International entrepreneurship, networking and learning effects. Journal of Business Research, 67(5): 908–915
Dimitratos, P., Plakoyiannaki, E., Pitsoulaki, A., Tüselmann, H.J. (2010) The global smaller firm in international entrepreneurship. International Business Review, 19(6): 589–606
Felzensztein, C., Ciravegna, L., Robson, P., Amorós, J.E. (2015) Networks, entrepreneurial orientation, and internationalization scope: Evidence from Chilean small and medium enterprises. Journal of Small Business Management, 53(S1): 145–160
Felzensztein, C., Stringer, C., Benson-Rea, M., Freeman, S. (2014) International marketing strategies in industrial clusters: Insights from the Southern Hemisphere. Journal of Business Research, 67(5): 837–846
Fuerst, S., Zettinig, P. (2015) Knowledge creation dynamics within the international new venture. European Business Review, 27(2):182-213
Furst, S. (2010) Domestic SMEs in the television global value chain: The case of Caracol in Colombia. In UNCTAD (Ed.), Integrating developing countries’ SMEs into global value chains, (pp. 85-98). New York and Geneva: United Nations.
In many respects, multinationals are a defining invention of Western economies. But like much else, they are no longer the preserve of the West. The emerging economies are producing business giants of their own at a staggering rate. While these businesses share the scale and ambition of their developed-world counterparts, their processes and patterns of growth are often dissimilar to those of their competitors in the developed world. They are success stories that are changing the narrative rules as they go along.
As emerging market countries gain in stature, their companies are taking center stage. Emerging market companies accounted for over 40 percent of world exports and around a quarter of outward foreign direct investment investments flows (UNCTAD, 2012; Contractor, 2013). These emerging market companies will continue to be critical competitors in their home markets while increasingly making outbound investments into other emerging and developed economies. Working to serve customers of limited means, the emerging market leaders often produce innovative designs that reduce manufacturing costs and sometimes disrupt entire industries.
The state of the literature is divided in between those who claim that emerging market multinationals are similar to their Western counterparts and those who claim that these multinationals are a new phenomenon requiring new theories and frameworks. Arguments in support of new theoretical models in which EMNEs can contribute to IB theory can be divided into two streams. Ramamurti (2009), on the one side of the argument stresses the role of country of origin and other contextual factors in shaping emerging market multinationals internationalization strategies. In this respect, there is a need for empirically grounded research to discover ownership-specific advantages of emerging market multinationals, which either help or hinder internationalization process (Ramamurti, 2012). On the other side of the debate, others, like Dunning, Kim, and Park (2008) and Williamson and Zeng (2009), give reasons to believe that emerging market multinationals do not behave differently because of their origin, but because of fundamental changes in the world economy. As a consequence, emerging market multinationals would act similar to young multinationals from developed countries. In between these opposing views, Cuervo-Cazurra (2012) argues that the behavior of emerging market multinationals can be explained by extending and modifying the existing models rather than building new ones.
Consequently, we are soliciting empirical and theoretical work addressing these complex relationships between various forms of contextual heterogeneities and emerging market multinationals. This special issue provides an opportunity to bring together the research of scholars from a diverse range of disciplinary traditions such as economics, sociology and political science. As such, the following list of potential research questions is merely illustrative of the broad range of studies that could fit in the special issue:
- Are emerging market multinationals different from similar-aged developing market multinationals?
- Does the change in global economic conditions call for a radical change in the behavior of multinationals?
- What opportunities do fine sliced global value chains open for entry and upgrading of emerging market multinationals in the global economy?
- Can emerging market multinationals help broaden the concept of ownership advantages beyond the traditional definition including technology and brand value?
- Does availability of finance and existence of internal capital markets shape the response of emerging market multinationals to the financial crisis?
- Do emerging market multinationals use CRS and sustainability initiatives as sources competitive advantage?
- Are there contextual elements that make emerging market multinationals truly unique?
- How does corporate governance affect internationalization strategies of emerging market multinationals?
- What are the dynamics of the interrelationship between institutional change and corporate strategy?
- Do emerging market multinationals possess institutional capabilities that can be transferred across borders?
Deadlines, Submission Guidelines and Co-Editor Information
Submissions to the Special Issue must be submitted through the IJoEM website. The deadline for submissions is October 1, 2015. For general submission guidelines, see http://www.emeraldinsight.com/journal/ijoem. No late submissions will be accepted. We have a marked preference for submissions which debate with, extend, and/or refute the indicative literature cited below. Please indicate that your submission is to be reviewed for the Special Issue on Emerging Economy Multinationals. For questions about the special issue, please contact Bersant Hobdari, Guest Editor, at bh.int@cbs.dk.
Indicative Contemporary Literature
Buckley, P. J. 2014. “Forty years of internationalisation theory and the multinational enterprise.” Multinational Business Review 22 (3): 227-245.
Contractor, F. J. 2013. “Punching above their weight.” International Journal of Emerging Market 8(4): 304-328.
Ramamurti, R. 2012. “What is really different about emerging market multinationals?” Global Strategy Journal 2: 41-47.
Ramamurti, R. 2009. “What have we learned about emerging-market MNEs?” In Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets, Ramamurti R, Singh JV (eds). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, U.K.: 399–426.
UNCTAD. 2012. World Investment Report 2012: Towards a New Generation of Investment Policies. United Nations Conference on Trade and Development; Geneva, Switzerland.
Cuervo-Cazurra A. and Genc M. 2008. “Transforming disadvantages into advantages: developing country MNEs in the least developed countries.” Journal of International Business Studies 39: 957–979.
Aharoni, Y. 2014. "To understand EMNEs a dynamic IB contingency theory is called for." International Journal of Emerging Markets 9(3): 377 – 385.
Cuervo-Cazurra A. 2012. “Extending theory by analyzing developing country multinational companies: Solving the Goldilocks debate.” Global Strategy Journal 2: 153-147.
Cuervo-Cazurra A. and Ramamurti, R. (eds). 2014. Understanding multinaitonals from emerging markets. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, U.K.
Dunning J. H., Kim C., and Park D. 2008 , “Old wine in new bottles: a comparison of emerging-market TNCs today and developed-country TNCs thirty years ago”, in The Rise of Transnational Corporations from Emerging Markets: Threat or Opportunity?, Sauvant K. (ed), Edward Elgar: Northampton, MA.
Williamson P and Zeng M. 2009, “Chinese multinationals: emerging through new global gateways”, in Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets, Ramamurti R. and Singh J. (eds), Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, U.K.
In many respects, multinationals are a defining invention of Western economies. But like much else, they are no longer the preserve of the West. The emerging economies are producing business giants of their own at a staggering rate. While these businesses share the scale and ambition of their developed-world counterparts, their processes and patterns of growth are often dissimilar to those of their competitors in the developed world. They are success stories that are changing the narrative rules as they go along.
As emerging market countries gain in stature, their companies are taking center stage. Emerging market companies accounted for over 40 percent of world exports and around a quarter of outward foreign direct investment investments flows (UNCTAD, 2012; Contractor, 2013). These emerging market companies will continue to be critical competitors in their home markets while increasingly making outbound investments into other emerging and developed economies. Working to serve customers of limited means, the emerging market leaders often produce innovative designs that reduce manufacturing costs and sometimes disrupt entire industries.
The state of the literature is divided in between those who claim that emerging market multinationals are similar to their Western counterparts and those who claim that these multinationals are a new phenomenon requiring new theories and frameworks. Arguments in support of new theoretical models in which EMNEs can contribute to IB theory can be divided into two streams. Ramamurti (2009), on the one side of the argument stresses the role of country of origin and other contextual factors in shaping emerging market multinationals internationalization strategies. In this respect, there is a need for empirically grounded research to discover ownership-specific advantages of emerging market multinationals, which either help or hinder internationalization process (Ramamurti, 2012). On the other side of the debate, others, like Dunning, Kim, and Park (2008) and Williamson and Zeng (2009), give reasons to believe that emerging market multinationals do not behave differently because of their origin, but because of fundamental changes in the world economy. As a consequence, emerging market multinationals would act similar to young multinationals from developed countries. In between these opposing views, Cuervo-Cazurra (2012) argues that the behavior of emerging market multinationals can be explained by extending and modifying the existing models rather than building new ones. Gammeltoft et. al. (2010) stress the role of macro and micro perspectives when analyzing the dynamics of emerging market multinationals.
Consequently, we are soliciting empirical and theoretical work addressing these complex relationships between various forms of contextual heterogeneities and emerging market multinationals. This special issue provides an opportunity to bring together the research of scholars from a diverse range of disciplinary traditions such as economics, sociology and political science. As such, the following list of potential research questions is merely illustrative of the broad range of studies that could fit in the special issue:
- Are emerging market multinationals different from similar-aged developing market multinationals?
- Does the change in global economic conditions call for a radical change in the behavior of multinationals?
- What opportunities do fine sliced global value chains open for entry and upgrading of emerging market multinationals in the global economy?
- Can emerging market multinationals help broaden the concept of ownership advantages beyond the traditional definition including technology and brand value?
- Does availability of finance and existence of internal capital markets shape the response of emerging market multinationals to the financial crisis?
- Do emerging market multinationals use CRS and sustainability initiatives as sources competitive advantage?
- Are there contextual elements that make emerging market multinationals truly unique?
- How does corporate governance affect internationalization strategies of emerging market multinationals?
- What are the dynamics of the interrelationship between institutional change and corporate strategy?
- Do emerging market multinationals possess institutional capabilities that can be transferred across borders?
Deadlines, Submission Guidelines and Co-Editor Information
Submissions to the Special Issue must be submitted through the IJoEM website. The deadline for submissions is March 1, 2016. For general submission guidelines, see http://www.emeraldinsight.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=ijoem. No late submissions will be accepted. We have a marked preference for submissions which debate with, extend, and/or refute the indicative literature cited below. Please indicate that your submission is to be reviewed for the Special Issue on Emerging Economy Multinationals.
Papers will be blind peer-reviewed. We will make initial editorial decisions by June, 2016. Authors invited to revise and resubmit their work will be invited to present the papers at the IJoEM special issue workshop to be held at the 5th conference on “Emerging Economy Multinationals” at Copenhagen Business School in Copenhagen, Denmark during September/October 2016.
The papers accepted and presented at the workshop will be considered for publication in a special issue of the IJoEM. Presentation at the workshop does not necessarily guarantee publication in the special issue. The combination of a workshop and a special issue nevertheless follows a highly successful template to bring out the full potential of authors and papers. For questions about the special issue, please contact Bersant Hobdari, Guest Editor, at bh.int@cbs.dk.
Indicative Contemporary Literature
Aharoni, Y. 2014. "To understand EMNEs a dynamic IB contingency theory is called for." International Journal of Emerging Markets 9(3): 377 – 385.
Buckley, P. J. 2014. “Forty years of internationalisation theory and the multinational enterprise.” Multinational Business Review 22 (3): 227-245.
Contractor, F. J. 2013. “Punching above their weight.” International Journal of Emerging Market 8(4): 304-328.
Cuervo-Cazurra A. and Genc M. 2008. “Transforming disadvantages into advantages: developing country MNEs in the least developed countries.” Journal of International Business Studies 39: 957–979.
Cuervo-Cazurra A. 2012. “Extending theory by analyzing developing country multinational companies: Solving the Goldilocks debate.” Global Strategy Journal 2: 153-147.
Cuervo-Cazurra A. and Ramamurti, R. (eds). 2014. Understanding multinaitonals from emerging markets. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, U.K.
Dunning J. H., Kim C., and Park D. 2008 , “Old wine in new bottles: a comparison of emerging-market TNCs today and developed-country TNCs thirty years ago”, in The Rise of Transnational Corporations from Emerging Markets: Threat or Opportunity?, Sauvant K. (ed), Edward Elgar: Northampton, MA.
Gammeltoft, P., J.P. Pradhan and A. Goldstein (2010), ‘Emerging multinationals: home and host country determinants and outcomes’, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 5(3/4): 254-265.
Gammeltoft, P., H. Barnard and A. Madhok (2010), ‘Emerging Multinationals, Emerging Theory: Macro- and Micro-Level Perspectives’, Journal of International Management, 16(2): 95-101.
Gammeltoft, Peter, Filatotchev, Igor and Hobdari, Bersant. 2012. “Emerging Multinational Companies and Strategic Fit: A Contingency Framework and Future Research Agenda.” European Management Journal, 30(3): 175-188.
Narula, Rajneesh, (2012). Do we need different frameworks to explain infant MNEs from developing countries? Global Strategy Journal 2(3), 188-204.
Ramamurti, R. 2012. “What is really different about emerging market multinationals?” Global Strategy Journal 2: 41-47.
Ramamurti, R. 2009. “What have we learned about emerging-market MNEs?” In Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets, Ramamurti R, Singh JV (eds). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, U.K.: 399–426.
UNCTAD. 2012. World Investment Report 2012: Towards a New Generation of Investment Policies. United Nations Conference on Trade and Development; Geneva, Switzerland.
Williamson P and Zeng M. 2009, “Chinese multinationals: emerging through new global gateways”, in Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets, Ramamurti R. and Singh J. (eds), Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, U.K.
The tremendous growth in foreign direct investment over the past three decades has resulted in a need to staff hundreds of thousands of foreign affiliates of multinational enterprises (MNEs) (UNCTAD, 2015) in increasingly diverse, under researched territories many of which may require polycontextually sensitive research approaches designed to unearth “multiple and qualitatively different contexts embedded within one another” (Shapiro, Von Glinow & Xiao, 2007: 129). The staffing needs in these MNE affiliates, especially at managerial and technical levels, have often been met through the deployment of company-assigned expatriate employees, i.e. “employees working for business organizations, who are sent overseas on a temporary basis to complete a time-based task or accomplish an organizational goal” (Shaffer, Kraimer, Chen, & Bolino, 2012: 1286). This development has been paralleled by a substantial and evolving body of literature on expatriate management (Dabic, González-Loureiro & Harvey, 2015) and international human resource management (Tung, 2016). This burgeoning literature has taught us much about the critical and expensive resource that are expatriate employees, including an understanding of all stages of the expatriate cycle, i.e. recruitment, selection, on-arrival and on-site support and repatriation.
Given their criticality as a talent pool and the expense involved, it is only natural that we concentrated most of our collective research efforts on these focal individuals, i.e. the expatriate employees themselves. However, in doing so, we often overlooked the fact that expatriates neither live nor work in a vacuum. Rather, they share their space and experiences with other stakeholders, who also have a legitimate interest in how the international assignment unfolds and its consequences. Thus families (partners/spouses, children and members of the extended family), who either join the employee on assignment or stay home, co-workers at various levels (superiors, peers and direct reports among host country nationals (HCNs), parent company colleagues and third country nationals), external business contacts (customers, suppliers, etc.), the HR and international mobility functions in the home and host countries, host communities and entire nations, among others, all have a legitimate, if varying stake, in the process. Consequently, our literature has been criticised for being overly expatriate-centric to the detriment of its empirical and theoretical advancement (e.g. Takeuchi, 2010) and calls have been made for the incorporation of greater stakeholder perspectives and accounts in the expatriate literature (Doherty & Dickmann, 2012; Takeuchi, 2010).
Freeman (1984: 46) defines a stakeholder as “any group or individual who can affect or is affected by the achievement of the organization’s objectives”. While some important stakeholders have been recognised, a systematic mapping of relevant and legitimate stakeholders and their stake in the expatriate management process is still outstanding, as is a detailed analysis of how each stakeholder influences and is influenced by expatriates. Where, for example, HCNs have been recognised as relevant actors, it was their impact on the expatriate that was the focus of attention rather than the other way round (e.g. Toh & DeNisi, 2007). Some studies that have recognised multiple stakeholders in the expatriate management process have nonetheless focused on the expatriate’s performance as the terminal variable of interest (e.g. Malek, Budhwar & Reiche, 2015) while others such as Bonache, Sanchez and Zárraga-Oberty (2009), in examining the effect of the perceived unfairness of expatriate compensation levels on HCNs have sought to inject a less expatriate-centric perspective into their inquiry.
Not only do other stakeholders influence expatriates and are being influenced by expatriates, but in each case this influence can be detrimental or benign. The stakeholder and expatriate can be a problem or a resource in each case, a fact that so far has been mainly recognised in the context of the expatriates’ work-family interface (e.g. Haslberger, Hippler & Brewster, 2015). However, this could arguably extend to several other stakeholders.
What constitutes ‘expatriate success’ is still subject to much debate; even the appropriate conceptualization of ‘expatriate performance’ is much contested (Haslberger, Brewster & Hippler, 2014). With regard to other stakeholders, this debate has hardly commenced. What constitutes assignment success for an accompanying spouse or partner? For an accompanying child? For a HCN peer? For a host government? What, exactly, is ‘at stake’ for them?
Haslberger et al. (2014) have drawn attention to the importance of a temporal perspective when assessing the success of an expatriate. This importance extends to other stakeholders. During the expatriate assignment, an accompanying partner might experience a career interruption (a cost now), but may gain valuable international experience that furthers his or her career upon return (a benefit later). Moreover, the various stakeholders may gain or lose salience at different points in time throughout the assignment. Expatriates may require extensive support from the foreign HR department immediately upon arrival until they have moved into their new accommodation, have registered with the relevant authorities and have obtained a bank account and insurance, but might require relatively little support after this initial phase. Moreover, the cost-benefit-analysis can change over time. HCNs may have to invest considerable amounts of time in supporting the expatriate in the early stages of an assignment (costs outweigh benefits), but gain valuable knowledge from the expatriate later on (benefits outweigh costs). We feel there is an urgent need to adopt a process view, establishing not only who the relevant stakeholders are, but when they emerge as salient and when they are beneficial for the assignment and/or benefit themselves and when they are detrimental to the assignment and/or themselves affected negatively by the assignment.
In addition, the literature has yet to investigate mediated effects to any significant extent. What, for example, is the effect of the knowledge gained from an expatriate on the HCNs’ performance, and through this, on the subsidiary’s overall performance over time? How does the social capital an HCN gains (‘knowing whom’) affect his or her individual career outcomes in the longer term?
Against the backdrop of these debates, for this special issue we are particularly interested in manuscripts that:
- Access multiple sources of data, especially stakeholder-generated data;
- Adopt an interdisciplinary perspective and draw on theories outside the narrow confines of (I)HRM or I/O psychology, e.g. medicine, family systems, sociology, etc.;
- Suggest or test relationships that go beyond the assumption of simple, direct and unidirectional causality;
- Focus on the effect expatriates and expatriation have on other stakeholders, something which is a real lacuna in our current knowledge base, along with the effect of other stakeholders on the expatriate;
- Integrate the consideration of various stakeholders including their sometimes opposing influences, challenges and interests, e.g. a host government’s interest in knowledge transfer versus the local population’s dislike of foreigners, or a host-country unit’s interest in keeping and localising the expatriate versus the parent unit’s interest in repatriating him or her;
- Disaggregate stakeholders into constituent groups so that we might better understand who are the relevant stakeholders at the micro-level and how do effects aggregate, e.g. the interests of the parent company’s global mobility function may not be identical with that of the sending technical function, or the interests of HCN co-workers may not match with those of the host community at large;
- Explicate the mechanisms underlying the effects expatriates and stakeholders have on each other rather than simply establishing the existence of an effect.
Potential questions that manuscripts for this special issue might address could include, but are not limited to, the following:
- What theoretical lenses offer the prospect of unearthing and landscaping stakeholder priorities in expatriation?
- How would the use of a stakeholder lens alter and shape the direction of academic enquiry in expatriation?
- Who are the legitimate stakeholders in the expatriation process and what is the nature of their stake?
- How do expatriates affect the parent company context, e.g. by rising through the ranks upon return and shaping strategy?
- How do expatriates influence the foreign subsidiary where they are assigned?
- What is the relationship between expatriates and HCN colleagues? How do they influence each other?
- How do country-level variables affect the expatriate experience, e.g. racism or nativism?
- What are the short-term and long-term career consequences of international assignments for accompanying partners or spouses?
- What are the consequences, beneficial and detrimental, of international assignments for accompanying children both medium (completing secondary schooling successfully) and long-term (life chances)?
- How does the local population react to expatriates who feel they need to live separately from them, e.g. by being housed in guarded compounds?
Both conceptual and empirical contributions are welcome.
Submission Process and Timeline
Submitted papers must be based on original material not under consideration by any other journal or publishing outlet. The editors will select up to 5 papers to be included in the Special Issue, but other submissions may be considered for regular issues of the journal. All papers will undergo a double-blind peer review process and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a Special Issue editor.
To be considered for the Special Issue, manuscripts can be submitted anytime between April and September 2017 but no later than 30 September 2017, 5:00pm Central European Time. Final acceptance is dependent on the following:
- Theoretical contribution: Does the article offer novel and innovative insights and/or meaningfully extend existing theory in the field of global mobility?
- Empirical contribution: Does the article offer novel findings and are the study design, analysis, and results rigorous and appropriate in testing hypotheses or research questions?
- Practical contribution: Does the article improve the management of global mobility?
- Contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the Journal of Global Mobility author guidelines, available at www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm. Please remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the reviewers. Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jgmob. For enquiries regarding the special issue please contact either of the two Guest Editors, Thomas Hippler at thippler@essex.ac.uk or Michael Morley at michael.morley@ul.ie
Important dates
Paper submission deadline: 30 September 2017
Acceptance notification: March 2018
Publication: June 2018
References
Bonache, J., Sanchez, J. I., & Zárraga-Oberty, C. (2009). The interaction of expatriate pay differential and expatriate inputs on host country nationals' pay unfairness. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 20(10), 2135-2149.
Dabic, M., González-Loureiro, M. & Harvey, M. (2015) Evolving research on expatriates: what is ‘known’ after four decades (1970–2012), The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 26:3, 316-337.
Doherty, N. & Dickmann, M. (2012). Measuring the return on investment in international assignments: An action research approach. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 23(16), 3434-3454.
Freeman, R. E. (1984). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder Approach. London: Pitman.
Haslberger, A. Brewster, C. & Hippler, T. (2014) Managing Performance Abroad: A New Model for Understanding Expatriate Adjustment. Studies in Human Resource Development. New York: Routledge.
Haslberger, A., Hippler, T. & Brewster, C. (2015) 'Another Look at Family Adjustment.' In: Mäkelä, L. and Suutari, V., (eds.) Work and Family Interface in the International Career Context. Springer, pp. 53-70.
Malek, A. M., Budhwar, P., & Reiche, B. S. (2015). Sources of support and expatriation: a multiple stakeholder perspective of expatriate adjustment and performance in Malaysia. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 26(2), 258-276.
Shaffer, M. A., Kraimer, M. L., Chen, Y. P., & Bolino, M. C. (2012). Choices, challenges, and career consequences of global work experiences: A review and future agenda. Journal of Management, 38, 1282-1327.
Shapiro, D.L., Von Glinow, M.A. & Xiao, Z. (2007). Toward polycontextually sensitive research methods, Management and Organization Review 3(1), 129–152.
Takeuchi, R. (2010). A critical review of expatriate adjustment research through a multiple stakeholder view: Progress, emerging trends, and prospects. Journal of Management, 36(4), 1040-1064.
Toh, S. M., & DeNisi, A. S. (2007). Host country nationals as socializing agents: A social identity approach. Journal of Organizational Behavior, 28, 281-301.
Tung, R. L. (2016). New perspectives on human resource management in a global context. Journal of World Business, 51(1), 142-152.
UNCTAD (2015) World Investment Report 2015. New York: United Nations
Context
Multinational enterprises (MNEs) operating in this era of nationalist rhetoric and mercantilist behavior encounter growing nonmarket threats and uncertainty. Increased anti-globalization sentiment and legislation require MNEs to adjust and adapt their corporate strategies (Doh, Lawton, and Rajwani, 2012). There is extensive literature on political risk and regulatory uncertainty (Brewer, 1993; García-Canal and Guillén, 2008; Henisz and Delios, 2001; Henisz and Zelner, 2003; John and Lawton, 2017; Kobrin, 1979; White, Boddewyn, and Galang, 2015). In contrast, with a few notable exceptions (White, Hemphill, Joplin, and Marsh, 2014), there is scant research on multinational nonmarket strategy that explores both socio-political risks and uncertainty derived from government policies, particularly arising from increased nationalism and protectionism.
Compared to the post-Cold War 1990s, when firms flourished due to the neo-liberal environment that embraced globalization, the decade since the 2008 global economic crisis has been characterized by increased populism and skepticism towards globalization. Populist movements and leaders have largely focused on inequality and those left behind by globalization, but also on new technologies, as low skilled workers in advanced economies have increasingly become redundant due to automation, outsourcing, and offshoring (Oestreich, 2002). These sentiments and resultant nationalism were evident, for instance, in the 2016 U.S. presidential election results, as well as election results in the Philippines, Hungry, Mexico and Turkey, the 2017 Brexit referendum vote, and the 2018 Italian election leading to the first populist government in a large EU country. There is increased evidence to suggest a new world order is emerging due to greater focus by governments on national interests rather than multinational solutions (Globerman, 2017). The issues underlying this surge in populism are giving rise to viable political associations, parties and interests, which have largely elicited dismissive and passive aggressive responses from the established political classes, both at national and international levels (Avioutskii and Tensaout, 2016). This can be evidenced in the defensive response of the EU institutional leadership to populist victories in member countries including Greece, Hungary, and Italy. As a result, this standoff has increased uncertainty for MNEs pondering investment, expansion opportunities, and locational choices.
Many economies around the world are now framed by weaker political and regulatory institutions, resulting in nonmarket threats such as border and migration disputes, judicial arbitrariness, increased regulatory uncertainty, and rising social inequality. Therefore, many MNE strategic decisions are seriously challenged, and constrained, due to these institutional uncertainties and shortcomings. Further, whereas some MNEs benefit from these developments, most are dealing with increased costs, time, and insecurity burdens in their markets and supply chains. Numerous countries also face rising threats of terrorism, an increase in arbitrary legal rulings, government instability, lop-sided and underdeveloped consumer markets, and potentially destabilizing levels of youth unemployment. Much of the blame for these problems is apportioned to free trade, opportunistic foreign direct investment practices, liberal immigration policies and open borders, thus giving rise to anti-globalization movements. Therefore, these countries have developed far reaching new laws on migration, climate change, and corporate tax. MNE corporate strategies are undoubtedly challenged by this populist and anti-globalization sentiment. In response to these institutional shifts, MNEs are going through major strategic changes that involve new capability development or re-thinking capabilities in nonmarket arenas.
Given the implications for international business and management research during this new wave of nationalism (Meyer, 2017), and the attendant socio-political risk and regulatory uncertainty, there is a salient need for more research focused on MNE nonmarket strategies. Therefore, the aims of this special issue are to focus on (1) the conceptualization of responses that MNEs can develop to manage and mitigate these anti-global challenges; and (2) theorization concerning the types and forms of nonmarket strategies that can be adopted and implemented in order to enhance competitive advantage in contexts where nationalism and geopolitical risk is high. Academic research on these issues can generate new theoretical insights into the relationship between nonmarket threats and corporate level strategic decision-making, in relation to government policies, socio-political risk, institutional uncertainty, and an anti-global business environment.
Key Issues
Papers should preferably investigate how anti-globalization and mercantilist nonmarket threats are shaping MNE structures and operations, governance, strategic principles and practices, and outcomes. Papers could deal with the following issues (although innovative work in related and relevant areas will also be welcome):
- MNE nonmarket capability development and the local political economy, with a focus on anti-globalization policies
- Corporate strategy and nonmarket risk management in Europe, North America, the Middle East, or Asian regions
- How MNEs are affecting institutional changes in different countries and regions characterized by populist movements
- How MNEs engage external stakeholders, such as religious and ideological groups, political institutions, legal and regulatory institutions, powerful political actors and civil society organizations, to mitigate anti-globalization movements
- Resilience and recovery from anti-globalization following the closure of MNE subsidiaries
- MNE nonmarket strategy and business model innovation in nationalistic environments
- The possibilities and limits of corporate social responsibility, corporate power, authority and legitimacy in an era of anti-globalization
- Local governments, global talent strategies, and corporate strategies: how anti-globalization sentiment and forces impact winners and losers in international competition
- Nonmarket strategy, anti-globalization, market entry mode and corporate structures.
- How does the convergence of factors such as corruption and de-institutionalization within countries undergoing ultra-populist movements influence MNE strategies?
- Re-shoring, tax configuration, M&A, and corporate divestments as MNE responses to anti-globalization sentiment and nationalist policies
- Are political ties and relationships still important? Do lobbying practices need to adapt to a changing world? What role do they play during this period of anti-globalization?
The special issue is open and competitive with submitted papers undergoing the normal rigorous double-blind review process to ensure relevance and quality. The key criteria for acceptance of manuscripts are (1) relevance to the theme of the special issue; (2) scholarly rigor of analysis; and (3) novel and innovative arguments and findings. Papers focused on the development of theory and/or testing the boundaries of theory are particularly welcome. Submitted papers must be original work not under consideration by any other journal or outlet. Reviewers for papers submitted to the Special Issue will be drawn from the Special Issue Editorial Review Board and the MBR Editorial Review Board. No submission will be reviewed prior to the closing date.
Submission Process:
Between January 1 and March 1, 2020, authors should submit their manuscripts online. A guide for authors and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on MBR’s web page. All submissions should be submitted electronically to http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=mbr SI as the article type.
For more information:
Prospective authors are urged to contact the guest editors with their initial proposals or ideas well in advance of the deadline for final paper submission.
Contact details:
- Dr. George O. White III, University of Michigan-Flint (gowhite@umflint.edu)
- Dr. Tazeeb S. Rajwani, University of Essex (Tazeeb.rajwani@essex.ac.uk )
- Dr. Thomas C. Lawton, University of Surrey (thomas.lawton@surrey.ac.uk)
Sample of relevant references:
Avioutskii, V. and Tensaout, M. (2016), “Does politics matter? Partisan FDI in Central and Eastern Europe”, Multinational Business Review, Vol. 24, pp. 375-398.
Brewer, T. L. (1993), “Government policies, market imperfections, and foreign direct investment”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 24, pp. 101-120.
Doh, J. P., Lawton, T. C. and Rajwani, T. (2012), “Advancing nonmarket strategy reseach: Institutional perspectives in a changing world”, Academy of Management Perspectives, Vol. 26, pp. 22-39.
Garcia-Canal, E. and Guillen, M. F. (2008), “Risk and the strategy of foreign location choice in regulated industries”, Strategic Management Journal, Vol. 29, pp. 1097-1115.
Globerman, S. (2017), “A new era for foreign direct investment?”, Multinational Business Review, Vol. 25, pp. 5-10.
Henisz, W. J. and Delios, A. (2001), “Uncertainty, imitation, and plant location: Japanese multinational corporations, 1990-1996”, Administrative Science Quarterly, Vol. 46, pp. 443-475.
Henisz, W. J. and Zelner, B. A. (2005), “Legitimacy, interest group pressures, and change in emergent institutions: The case of foreign investors and host country governments”, Academy of Management Review, Vol. 30, pp. 361-382.
John, A. and Lawton, T. C. (2017), “International political risk management: Perspectives, approaches and emerging agendas”, International Journal of Management Reviews, https://doi.org/10.1111/ijmr.12166.
Kobrin, S. J. (1979), “Political risk: A review and reconsideration”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 10, pp. 67-80.
Meyer, K. E. (2017), “International business in an era of anti-globalization”, Multinational Business Review, Vol. 25, pp. 78-90.
Oestreich, J. E. (2002), “What can businesses do to appease anti-globalization protestors?”, Business & Society Review, Vol. 107, pp. 207-220.
Viatcheslav, A. and Tensaout, M. (2016), “Does politics matter? Partisan FDI in Central and Eastern Europe”, Multinational Business Review, Vol. 24, pp. 375-398.
White, G. O., Boddewyn, J. J. and Galang, R. M. N. (2015), “Legal system contingencies as determinants of political tie intensity by wholly owned foreign subsidiaries: Insights from the Philippines”, Journal of World Business, Vol. 50, pp. 342-356.
White, G. O., Hemphill, T. A., Joplin, J. R. W. and Marsh, L. A. (2014), “Wholly owned foreign subsidiary relations-based strategies in volatile environments”, International Business Review, Vol. 23, pp. 303-312.
Open innovation describes an innovation paradigm shift from a closed to an open innovation model (Chesbrough, 2003). With this idea, the term open innovation became one of the most common used buzzwords of recent years, with a plethora of research. To date, many companies are already using these principles in practice as well, especially when it comes to the integration of customers. However, the concept has been criticized for being too prescriptive and for offering little new to innovation research or practice (Trott and Hartmann, 2009). For instance, the lead-user concept (von Hippel 1988, 2005) became one of the most important trends in innovation management in the last ten years, but is open innovation any more than the lead-user concept (see IJIM Special Issue on User Innovation, 2008, 12(3))?
Hardly anybody outside a company knows its products and processes better than its suppliers (Bessant, 2003; Petersen et al., 2003; von Hippel, 1995).
Research confirms that intensive integration of suppliers in the value creation process positively influences the success of the company, particularly in highly competitive industries (Wingert, 1997). This is a result of the progressing reduction in the depth of value creation of manufacturers and the increasing transfer of know-how towards the suppliers.
In multilevel business-to-business relationships, the suppliers often have the best or the only access and comprehensive knowledge about the end users (Groher, 2003). A practical example for supplier integration is the use of guest engineers (Maylor, 2001). Therefore, suppliers determine the scope of possible innovations, which most companies do not actively use yet. The main risk for suppliers is the danger of releasing or using confidential expertise gleaned from other sources. Reciprocal trust is critical for this to work (Groher, 2003). Instruments such as the continuous improvement model or collaborative engineering already involve the suppliers, but mostly on an operative level only. Hence, suppliers are an important source for open innovation.
In this context, theoretical and conceptual papers on supplier integration and challenges on the firm level are welcome. Empirical studies that feature examples and results of supplier integration are encouraged, as well as papers on success factors and risks. Comparative studies that examine similarities and differences between different sectors and countries are also welcome.
Subject coverage
Topics include but are not limited to:
1. Theoretical aspects
2. Open and closed innovation frameworks
3. Supplier integration models
4. Determination of integration levels
5. Interfaces to other open innovation methods
6. Management of know-how transfer
7. Research on success factors
8. The role of the companies size
9. Organization within the companies
10. Management of networks
11. Marketing of innovations
12. Country comparisons
13. Networks for service development and delivery
14. Firm-level challenges
15. Selection of appropriate partners
16. Resource management
17. Use of collaboration tools
18. Evaluation of appropriate ideas
19. Determination of process interfaces
20. Incentive systems
21. Legal issues
22. Cultural aspects
23. Risk management
24. Innovation marketing and communication
25. Commercialisation of results
26. Best practice examples
27. Feedback and controlling principles
Notes for prospective authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published or be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All papers will be refereed through a doubleblind peer review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information is available at http://www.worldscinet.com/ijim
Important Dates
1-2 page abstract 1st November 2009
Submission of manuscripts 1st February 2010
Notification to authors 15th March 2010
Final drafts of papers 1st June 2010
Publication Autumn 2010
You are invited to contact the guest editor to discuss the topic of a possible paper in advance: brem@vend-consulting.com
Since Henry Chesbrough coined the term “open innovation” and introduced it as imperative for creating and profiting from technology in 2006, there has been growing recognition of open innovation business models among academicians and business managers. Consequently, publications on the exploration, application, and assessment of open innovation have spurred in recent years. There is almost consensus among scholars and practitioners that open innovation provides firms with leverage of knowledge expansion resulting in competitive advantages and above-average returns. One of the major means of achieving open innovation has been strategic alliances between firms, and between firms and research institutions. This edited volume will contribute to our understanding of open innovation through strategic alliances by demonstrating its principal forms, issues, and challenges in different industries, and in national and international contexts.
TENTATIVE TABLE OF CONTENT (suggested topics, but not limited to those listed below).
Open Innovation Business Models and the Role of Strategic Alliances (already authored by the editor)
Theoretical Foundations of Open Innovation and its Connection to Strategic Alliances
Open Innovation through Joint Ventures
Open Innovation through R&D Partnerships
Open Innovation through Organizational Networks
Open Innovation through Collaborative Community of Firms
Business-University Collaboration for Innovation
Strategic Alliances for Open Innovation in Specific Industries 1 (to be named)
Strategic Alliances for Open Innovation in Specific Industries 2 (to be named)
Strategic Alliances for Open Innovation in a Global Context
Building and Managing Trust between the Partners for Open Innovation
Challenges and Prospects of Strategic Alliances for Open Innovation
IMPORTANT DATES:
April 30, 2013 Submission of an abstract of the manuscript
June 30, 2013 Submission of the completed manuscript
July 15, 2013 Submission of revision of the manuscript, if it is necessary
Refik Culpan, Ph.D. (Editor)
Pennsylvania State University at Harrisburg
Middletown, PA 17057, USA
Email: rculpan@psu.edu
Phone: 717 948 6166
International Manufacturing Strategy in a Time of Great Flux
The Springer series addressing Operations Management, MEOP - Measuring Operations Performance is devoting its next peer-reviewed volume to the topic of International Manufacturing Strategy and Performance. International Manufacturing is operating within a time of great flux. While off-shoring of activities dominated over recent decades, near-shoring and re-shoring are increasingly being considered and observed in practice. At the same time, technologies such as 3D-prinitng are gaining greater traction while the role of ICT and data analytics is gaining increasing prominence in the international manufacturing landscape.
While issues related to the environment are also figuring more prominently in international manufacturing considerations, uncertainty around the cost of energy has recently arisen with long-time assumptions being called into question. International manufacturing is also experiencing greater servitisation. Considerations such as those identified above raise questions around the content and direction of International Manufacturing Strategy and its impact on Performance. Accordingly, it is timely to consider the state of International Manufacturing Strategy and how it is responding to them.
This volume will focus on International Manufacturing Strategy in a time of flux. It will seek to assess the state of International Manufacturing Strategy and how recent developments, whether pertaining to configuration, technology, the environment and otherwise are impacting it in terms of its content and direction and in other ways and in its relationship to Manufacturing Performance. Contributions are invited that address the above theme focusing on the following topics. However, this is not an exclusive list and all contributions that relate to the theme will be considered.
- The state of International Manufacturing Strategy
- Forces influencing International Manufacturing Strategy
- International Supply Chain Transformations
- Changing configuration conditions and International Manufacturing Strategy
- E2E international supply network integration
- ICT and International Manufacturing Strategy
- Technology disrupted international supply chains
- Digitally-enabled customercentric supply chains
- International Manufacturing Strategy and the Green agenda
- The circular economy and the impact of sustainability
- Risk and resilience of global supply networks
- The influence of emerging technologies on International Manufacturing Strategy
- The interplay of International Manufacturing Strategy and servitisation
- Emerging Multinationals and their impact on International Manufacturing Strategy
- Data analytics and International Manufacturing Strategy
The editors will select submissions for peer review.
The following are the key dates:
Proposals Submission: 01/12/2015
Proposals Acceptance: 15/12/2015
Full Paper Submission due: 15/01/2016
Editors select submissions for peer review: 15/02/2016
Reviews returned to contributors with directions from editors: 15/03/2016
Resubmissions due: 15/05/2016
Manuscript submitted to Springer: 30/06/2016
Proposal submissions should be sent to the volume editors Professor Andrea Chiarini (andrea.chiarini@unife.it ), Professor Louis Brennan (brennaml@tcd.ie) and Professor Alessandra Vecchi (alessandra.vecchi@unibo.it) no later than 1/12/15.
The book will be suitable to be used as a teaching aid in a variety of courses in different disciplines (ranging from International Business, Operations Management to Production Management) both at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Additionally the book will be relevant to academic, researchers and practitioners who have a keen interest in the manufacturing industry.
Thunderbird International Business Review is pleased to invite submissions to a special issue which will address issues faced by Chinese multinationals investing in the U.S. market. While the special issue has a focus on Chinese multinationals in the U.S. market, we also invite submissions on Chinese multinationals in other countries as compared to United States (Child & Rodrigues, 2005). Papers dealing with intersections between theory and practice are especially encouraged (Alon, Yeheskel, Lerner, & Zhang, 2013; Jansson & Söderman, 2012; Quer, Claver, & Rienda, 2012).
Chinese firms have quickly become instrumental players in the global marketplace and are on a U.S. buying spree (Yang, Yang & Doyle, 2013). Outbound Chinese FDI in January 2014 was $7.23 billion, up 47.2 percent from a year earlier and expected to exceed for the first time the inbound FDI in 2014. In 2013, Chinese firms invested more than $14 billion in the United States, and are continuing to search for new markets and new ventures. In the first quarter of 2014, Chinese firms spent $1.36 billion on 26 FDI transactions in the United States. This tremendous growth has been driven by large-scale acquisitions in food, energy and real estate.
Although some Chinese firms have gained a solid foothold in the United States (e.g., Lenovo and Haier), the U.S. market remains notoriously difficult for outsiders to enter. Many European, Japanese and Latin American firms have come to the United States with high hopes, only to retreat or go through a painful readjustment of expectations. Growing up in a distinctly different institutional environment (Deng, 2013; Yang & Stoltenberg, 2014), how have Chinese firms been managing the legal, financial and economic risks in the United States (Tan & Wang, 2011)? How are Chinese firms addressing the opportunity and challenges faced in the United States? What are the strengths and weaknesses of Chinese multinationals implementing a marketing and R&D strategy, and even manufacturing across the United States? We welcome papers addressing these issues and related topics.
Topics of Special Interest:
- Entrepreneurship, innovation & technology transfer by Chinese multinationals
- Contributions to the U.S. economy
- Challenges of Localization: Product safety, environmental and labor issues, intellectual property, regulatory, and legal issues.
- Image: Managing skepticism toward the globalization of China business
- Politics: Managing conflict and relationships with local and national governmental entities
- Motivations in Chinese enterprises in the United States
- Adapting Chinese managerial practices to the U.S. market
- Marketing Chinese brands in the United States
- Impact of CSR philosophy and practice in China vs. United States
- HR: Recruiting, developing, rewarding and retaining talent in Chinese enterprises operating in the United States
- M&A of Chinese firms in the United States: Challenges and opportunities
- Chinese investment in real estate & hospitality industry; Chinese tourism in the United States
The topics listed are meant to be illustrative; submissions on any topic that relates to the theme of Chinese multinationals are encouraged.
Submissions should be prepared in accordance with Thunderbird International Business Review's style guide and submitted to http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr by June 30, 2015. Be sure to indicate that it is for the special issue, Opportunities and Threats for Chinese Multinationals. The special issue is tentatively scheduled to be published in 2016.
For additional information and questions, please email chinabusiness@usfca.edu.
Special issue call for papers from International Journal of Emerging Markets, 2018 impact factor 2.067, 2018 cite score 2.16
Guest editors
Justin Paul, Rollins College- Florida & University of Puerto Rico- USA
Andrea Paltrinieri, University of Udine, Italy
Purpose and research questions
During the past 20 years, we have witnessed a tremendous changes in emerging markets’ academic research from multidisciplinary perspectives: economics, finance, business, marketing, management. On the other side, academic researchers have continuously improved their methodology to carry out literature reviews on specific fields of research.
In management and business research, for example, several forms of quali-quantitative surveys, such as bibliometric literature reviews and content analysis, have gained a lot of attentions, while in economics, purely quantitative methods, such as meta-analysis, have been used to examine the patterns of publication selections and explaining the differences in the results of the individual studies.
The aim of this special issue is to collect survey articles, performing literature reviews in the broadest emerging markets’ streams of research with multidisciplinary perspectives. Any review has to contain ideas for future research, setting a specific research agenda, to fill the gaps in the literature.
Topics for inclusion (among others)
In this IJoEm special issue, we welcome papers within the broad areas of emerging markets, with a specific focus on the articles and methods less covered by previous literature reviews. We seek surveys with future research agenda on the following areas (but not limited to):
- Different dimensions of marketing in emerging markets such as brand management; service marketing etc.
- Strategic management in emerging markets
- Internationalization of firms
- Banking systems in emerging markets
- M&A in emerging markets banks
- Efficiency and profitability in emerging markets banks
- Financial crises in emerging markets
- Emerging markets’ stock exchanges
- Institutional investors in emerging markets
- Emerging markets’ mutual fund performance
- Emerging markets’ stock indices behavior
- Emerging markets bonds and stocks
- Emerging markets’ currencies
- Capital flows in emerging markets
- Corporate governance in emerging markets
- HR management in emerging markets
- Entrepreneurship in emerging markets
Important Dates:
Paper Submission Deadline: December 15, 2019
Publication: Around Mid 2021
Guidelines on Submission:
Please visit the International Journal of Emerging Market at: www.emeraldinsight.com/journal/ijoem to know more about the manuscript requirements.
Submissions to the International Journal of Emerging Markets are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts, the online submission and peer review system. Registration and access is available through http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ijoem
More Information:
To obtain additional information, please contact the guest editors:
Justin Paul, Rollins College- Florida & University of Puerto Rico- USA: Justin.paul@upr.edu
Andrea Paltrinieri, University of Udine, Italy: andrea.paltrinieri@uniud.it
References/ Review Article authors can benchmark with:
Alon, I., Anderson, J., Munim, Z. H., Ho, A. (2018). A review of the internationalization of Chinese enterprises. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 1-33.
Cintra, R.F., Cassol, A., Ribeiro, I., De Carvalho, A.O. (2018). Corruption and emerging markets: Systematic review of the most cited. Research in International Business and Finance, 45, 607-619.
Fan, J.P.H., Wei, K.C.J., Xu, X. (2011). Corporate finance and governance in emerging markets: a selective review and an agenda for future research. Journal of corporate finance, 17, 207-214.
Hadengue, M., De Marcellis-Warin, N., Warin, T. (2017). Reverse innovation: a systematic literature review. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 12(2), 142-182.
Jimenez, A., Bjorvatn, T. (2018). The building blocks of political risk research: a bibliometric co-citation analysis. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 13(4), 631-652.
Jormanainen, I., Koveshnikov, A. (2012). International Activities of Emerging Market Firms. A Critical Assessment of Research in Top International Management Journals. Management International Review, 52(5), 691-725.
Kearney, C. (2012). Emerging markets research: Trends, issues and future directions. Emerging Markets Review, 13, 159-183.
Nnamdi, O., Owusu, R. (2014). Africa as a source location: literature review and implications. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 9(3), 424-438.
Oehmichen, J. (2018). East meets West-Corporate Governance in Asian emerging markets: A literature review and research agenda. International Business Review, 27(2), 465-480.
Paul, J., Benito, G. R. (2018). A Review of Research on Outward Foreign Direct Investment From Emerging Countries, Including China: What Do We Know, How Do We Know, and Where Should We Be Heading?. Asia Pacific Business Review, 24(1), 90-115.
Paul, J., Parthasarathy, S., Gupta, P. (2017). Exporting challenges of SMEs: A review and future research agenda. Journal of world business, 52(3), 327-342.
Rosado-Serrano, A., Paul, J., & Dikova, D. (2018). International franchising: A literature review and research agenda. Journal of Business Research, 85, 238-257.
Rottig, D. (2017). Meta-analyses of culture’s consequences for acquisition performance: An examination of statistical artifacts, methodological moderators and the context of emerging markets. International Journal of Emerging Markets, 12(1), 8-37.
Valickova, P., Havranek, T., Horvah, R. (2014). Financial development and economic growth: a meta-analysis. Journal of Economic Surveys, 29(3), 506-526.
Zamore, S., Ohene Djan, K., Alon, I., Hobdari, B. (2018). Credit risk research: review and agenda, Emerging Markets Finance and Trade, 54(4), 811–835.
Since several decades, researchers are giving more attention to organizational culture – or more precisely the values, rituals, symbols and heroes of the organizations. This is a development that has been accelerated by the trend towards flexible organizations and men in the era of new decentralization. This development is recently reinforced by the digitization of working life. In relation to these concepts, we see a renewed interest in the concept of (industrial) paternalism.
In organizational studies, a frequent interpretation of paternalism is the analysis of the use of different social welfare benefits. This is also a phenomenon with historical roots. In early industrial rural contexts, it was common for workers to have access to corporate-owned housing, food supply, healthcare etc. According to the research, these paternalistic benefits – or management techniques – aimed to stabilize the workforce and create an internal labour market. But many scholars in the field give the term paternalism a significantly broader meaning that includes a moral relationship between the employee and the employer. This position implies that the organization is given a different meaning, in the sense that it is based on a wider social relationship than a strict economic between the employee and the employer. The social conditions of the paternalistic organization are often compared to those in a family. The owner of the company (represented by the director or manager) is analysed in terms of to be the father – or the head – and the employees are like the children – or the body of the organization.
Within the framework of an essentially social-historical discussion, the British historian E. P. Thompson once noted that paternalism is a problematic concept. Central to his criticism was that it is a loose, unclear and descriptive term. Furthermore, he argued that using the concept implies the risk of identifying patterns of consensus rather than patterns of conflict in the social relations of production. This does not mean that researchers should avoid the term in historical and socio-economic analysis, but rather that the concept is needed to be filled with content and discussed theoretically as well as empirically.
Paternalism, in some contexts termed welfare capitalism, is a term used in various academic disciplines, such as anthropology, history, sociology and economics. The purpose of this seminar and the special issue of management revue – Socio-Economic Studies is to highlight the historical and contemporary relevance of the concept in cross-disciplinary discussions. Some context to discuss in order to clarify the concept of paternalism are listed below:
- paternalism as a historical phenomenon
- moral economy
- management practices
- labour market relations
- the welfare state
- paternalism in an international comparison
These are just some ideas and not an exhaustive list. The seminar welcomes empirical studies as well as theoretical papers and provides sufficient time for discussion and reflection.
Deadline
Full papers for this special issue of management revue – Socio-Economic Studies must be submitted by August 31st, 2019. All contributions will be subject to double-blind review. Papers invited to a 'revise and resubmit' are due January 31th, 2020. The publication is scheduled for issue 3/2020. Please submit your papers electronically via the online submission system at http://www.mrev.nomos.de/ using 'SI Paternalism' as article section.
Submission Guidelines
Manuscript length should not exceed 8,000 words (excluding references) and the norm should be 30 pages in double-spaced type with margins of about 3 cm (1 inch) on each side of the page. Further, please follow the guidelines on the journal’s website and submit the papers electronically by sending a 'blind' copy of your manuscript (delete all author identification from this primary document).
There is a very extensive body of literature on how multinationals manage people in different national contexts. (Ferner, 2009) The bulk of this literature, however, focuses on cases of multinationals from advanced industrial economies, and more specifically, the United States. Much less has been written on multinationals based in emerging markets, and what is published focuses on a very limited number of contexts (Chang, Mellahi, & Wilkinson, 2009). Yet, multinationals from emerging markets have become increasingly prominent on the international scene, most notably, those from the “top” emerging markets (Garten, 1996): Argentina, Brazil, the Chinese Economic Area, India, Indonesia, South Korea, Mexico, Poland, South Africa, Turkey, and Russia. We suggest that much can be learned from firms in emerging markets because they lack the historic first-mover advantage abroad. At the same time, they have considerable experience forging beneficial relations to national governments and coping in culturally diverse and often unstable markets.
World investment reports from UNCTAD show that although developed-country multinational enterprises (MNEs) account for the bulk of global foreign direct investment (FDI), developing and transition economies have emerged as significant outward investors, and the growth rate of the number of MNEs from developing countries and transition economies over the past 15 years has exceeded that of MNEs from developed countries. The growing importance of emerging economies has led to an upsurge of strategy research on the topic (Wright, Filatotchev, Hoskisson, & Peng, 2005); however, research on human resource management (HRM) has not kept pace with the research on MNCs from emerging economies. While there has been an accelerated interest in emerging markets and emerging market MNEs as new challengers, studies in recent special issues international business/management journals focus on internationalization, market entry strategy, and location choice aspects of these new challengers (Luo & Tung, 2007; Aulakh, 2007). It is widely agreed that the motivations behind emerging market MNEs’ international operations, particularly in developed markets, are related to capability building. HRM policies and practices, therefore, play crucial roles in building absorptive capacity, which helps firms develop ability to recognize the value of new information, assimilate it, and apply it to commercial ends (Cohen & Levinthal, 1990). HRM policies and practices facilitate reverse knowledge transfer to emerging market multinationals’ other subsidiaries and play crucial role in the success of the firm in diverse cultural environments.
There are also significant differences between state owned emerging market MNEs and private/or family owned MNEs’ HR policy and practices. Emerging country MNEs tend to be smaller with considerably fewer resources and international experience than their counterparts from developed markets. This limits their ability to transfer management practices across their subsidiaries. In order to catch up with developed country multinationals, therefore, they follow rapid and abnormal internationalization paths (leapfrogging through acquisitions). The small, but growing body of research on emerging market multinationals focuses on location choice, market entry
This special issue seeks to contribute to the emerging body of literature on HRM in emerging markets
This special issue seeks to contribute to the emerging body of literature on HRM in emerging markets through publishing articles with fresh insights, particularly on the varieties of people management strategies encountered in different national contexts. This special issue encourages submissions on the following themes and approaches:
- What makes emerging market multinationals different in terms of people management?
- Case studies of HRM in selected emerging market multinationals.
- Emerging market multinationals’ HRM practices in developed and developing country subsidiaries.
- International acquisitions of emerging market multinationals and HRM.
- Emerging market multinationals and HRM role in reverse knowledge transfer.
- Country of origin effect, liability of emergingness, and HRM policies of emerging multinationals.
- HRM practices of family-owned, private, and state-owned emerging market multinationals.
- Host country effects on HR policies and practice by emerging multinationals.
- Multinationals, state and society: Coping with managing people political challenging contexts.
- Multinationals and market volatility: Prosperity and challenges for HRM in crisis.
- Comparing country of origin effects: People management in multinationals from different emerging markets.
- Articles that help bridge the gap between theory and practice by providing both practical implications of empirical research on emerging economies MNCs and capture leading examples of practitioner-initiated HRM strategies and policies via theoretically grounded case studies.
Manuscript Submission and Review
All papers must be based on original material and must not be under consideration by any other journal. Papers intended for the HR Science Forum will undergo a rigorous, double-blind review process to ensure relevance and quality. Papers suited for the HR Leadership Forum (more practitioner-focused pieces, case studies, interviews, etc.) will be single-blind reviewed by subject matter experts. Please see HRM’s Publishing Cues for a complete description of each section. Submitted papers must also follow the HRM Style Guidelines, found at http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/journal/32249/home/ForAuthors.html.
The deadline for submitting papers is December 1, 2011.
Direct questions about content and ideas to the guest co-editors noted above. Direct all logistical questions about submitting and review to Managing Editor Leslie Wilhelm at lwilhelm@umich.edu. Manuscripts must be submitted electronically using the Journal’s web-based submission and review website called Manuscript Central: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/hrm. Electronic submission through Manuscript Central is required. Manuscript Central is configured to be very intuitive; therefore, you should have little difficulty creating an account and submitting your manuscript. The online system will guide you through each step of the process.
When submitting through Manuscript Central, please submit the following documents:
1. Document 1: A “blind” copy of your manuscript. Delete all author identification from this primary document. This document may include your tables and figures, or you may include tables and figures in a separate document.
2. Document 2: Submit a separate document with information that would typically appear on the document’s title page (author names, addresses, affiliations, contact information, etc.). This document may also include author biographies.
In addition:
- Answer “Yes” to the question regarding special issue submission and clearly label your submission for the “Emerging Market Multinationals” in the text box provided.
- Include a paragraph in your cover letter specifically identifying how the paper fits within the special issue theme.
- Direct logistical questions about submitting your manuscript through Manuscript Central to Managing Editor Leslie Wilhelm at lwilhelm@umich.edu or 734-748-9069.
Background and Objectives of the Special Issue:
Every few months, the popular press or business publications publish a news item about some well-known organization that is getting rid of its’ performance management system (PMS). More specifically, many of these organizations talk about getting rid of the numerical scales, and replacing those with one-on-one feedback and conversations, something they should have been doing in the first place. Although these reports have received a great deal of attention (e.g., Cappelli & Tavis, 2016), there has also been statement of concern over the wholesale abandonment of formal performance management systems (e.g., Goler, Gale, & Grant, 2016).
The fact remains that as long as there are individuals performing some kind of work in organizations, there will be a need for some manner of performance management in order to evaluate, compensate, and reward those individuals (see, e.g., Varma, Budhwar, & DeNisi, 2008). These are even more critical in multi-national enterprises (MNEs), as these organizations face unique pressures, such as the competing demands between the need for congruence with home country practices and the need to adapt to host country environment and context (see, e.g., Mellahi, Frynas, & Collings, 2016). Since human resource processes such as PMSs are impacted by local culture and norms much more than other organizational processes, it is important that we study these closely in order to be able to help MNEs develop systems that can appropriate meet the needs of the various stakeholders.
Indeed, scholars have been studying these processes with the specific intent of helping organizations improve performance, as it was often assumed that improving individual performance would lead to improvements in organizational performance (DeNisi & Smith, 2014). To examine the processes involved in performance management and appraisal, scholars have drawn upon several theories of psychology and social psychology. However, as DeNisi and Smith (2014) note “the link (between individual and organizational level performance) has (had) never really been established in a direct way.” Furthermore, as noted by DeNisi and Murphy (2017), although we have learned a great deal about how to improve individual performance, there has been surprisingly little progress made on how to influence firm-level performance. DeNisi and Smith (2014) went on to argue that certain bundles of HR practices could lead to the transformation of individual performance to organizational level performance. Given the importance of individual performance to organizational performance, especially for MNEs, we believe it is time to re-visit the processes and systems that govern performance management, so we can better understand how organizations might implement systems that can lead to improvements in individual, and, more critically to improvements in organizational performance.
Over the decades, scholars have presented a fairly comprehensive body of literature looking at performance appraisal and performance management issues (e.g. Bernardin & Wiatrowski, 2013; Varma, Budhwar, & DeNisi, 2008), but as noted above, there is still a great deal we don’t understand about performance management, especially in MNEs. More specifically, we need to better understand how to translate improvements in individual-level performance into improvements in organizational performance, and this point is emphasized by DeNisi and Murphy (2017) in their discussion of future research needs. But, in addition to the need to better understand the performance management process in general, there are also a number of specific areas where even less is understood about underlying processes.
For example, while there are scattered attempts to understand the context and the processes involved in managing and evaluating the performance of expatriates (e.g., Kang & Shen, 2016), there is then a need to develop a comprehensive model that identifies the key determinants of expatriate performance success, as well as identifies the key dimensions on which performance in an international assignment differs from one in an employee’s home country. Similarly, while there is some attempt to understand the human resource practices and processes in emerging nations (e.g. Budhwar, Tung, Varma, & Do, 2017), there is a need to conduct performance management related empirical studies in emerging markets that can help develop indigenous theoretical models that can better serve MNEs operating in these markets.
Accordingly, the aim of this special issue is to create an opportunity to fill the gaps in the existing body of literature by assembling conceptual, theoretical and empirical developments related to the topic of managing individual (and where relevant, team) performance in organizations. It is also the aim to begin a discussion on specific areas of research that has been largely overlooked by the research on PMS. That is, while PMS is generally acknowledged to be context-specific, there has been little attention paid to managing performance in cases such as MNEs that operate in multiple countries with different, unique, and often contradictory, cultural, social, and political contexts. Thus, it is important that the processes and systems in organizations are clearly understood.
Themes for the Special Issue:
The following are illustrative questions/themes that are consistent with the spirit of this special issue. Authors are encouraged to contribute papers with wider perspectives, as long as the papers are in line with the broad theme of the proposed special issue.
- What is the nature of PMSs in global corporations? How does the context of the nation(s) where the MNEs operate affect the structure, design, and implementation of PMSs?
- What theoretical frameworks can be or have been used to examine and explain the context-specific nature of PMSs in MNEs?
- How do MNEs measure the impact of individual performance on organizational performance?
- How are individual performance goals established? How much input is the individual allowed versus his/her supervisor? Through what process are these drawn from organizational goals?
- How do supervisors in MNEs collect performance related information? What measures do they use to ensure that the information is unbiased and truly represents the individual’s performance?
- How do MNEs define performance? How are competency dimensions established? What role does job analysis play in defining individual roles and performance expectations?
- How is performance measured in MNEs? What changes and advances have been made to the instruments used to measure performance?
- How is performance evaluated in MNEs? What training do raters receive to ensure that they are familiar with performance evaluation procedures and related organizational guidelines?
- How is feedback provided to individuals? What process is used to offer required coaching and counseling? How do organizations evaluate the success/failure of feedback mechanisms?
- How is motivation measured and what do organizations do to ensure that employees stay motivated? What mechanisms are used to connect motivation levels to individual performance levels?
- What impact does the supervisor-subordinate relationship have on subordinate motivation and performance in MNEs? What interventions do MNEs use to ensure that all employees are treated fairly?
- How do MNEs establish performance management and evaluation procedures for expatriates? How are these different from, and/or adapted from, systems and processes set up for home-country employees?
Submission Deadline: 31 December 2019 [please note the submission deadline is 31 Dec 2019, not 31 Dec 2018]
Submission Process:
Authors can submit their paper starting on December 1st 2019 to HRM for review, but no later than the submission deadline of December 31st 2019. Details on the manuscript submission process will be made available nearer to the submission window. Papers should be prepared and submitted according to the journal’s guidelines: https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/page/journal/1099050x/homepage/forauthors.html. All papers will be subject to the same double-blind peer review process as regular issues of HRM.
If you have questions about a potential submission, please contact Prof. Arup Varma at avarma@luc.edu
References:
Bernardin, H. J., & Wiatrowski, M. (2013). Performance appraisal. Psychology and Policing, 257.
Briscoe, D. R., & Claus, L. M. (2008). Employee performance management: policies and practices in multinational enterprises. Performance management systems: A global perspective, 15-39.
Buckingham, M., & Goodall, A. (2015). Reinventing performance management. Harvard Business Review, 93(4), 40-50.
Budhwar, P.S., Tung, R., Varma, A., & Do, H. (2017). Developments in Human Resource Management in MNCs from BRICS Nations: A Review and Future Research Agenda. Journal of International Management, 23, 111-123.
Cappelli, P., & Tavis, A. (2016). The performance management revolution. Harvard Business Review, October, pp. 58-67.
DeNisi, A. S. (2000). Performance appraisal and performance management. Multilevel Theory, Research, and Methods in Organizations: Foundations, Extensions and New Directions. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 121-156.
DeNisi, A.S., & Murphy, K.R. (2017). Performance Appraisal and Performance Management: 100 Years of Progress? Journal of Applied Psychology, 102(3), 421-433.
DeNisi, A., & Smith, C. E. (2014). Performance appraisal, performance management, and firm-level performance: A review, a proposed model, and new directions for future research. Academy of Management Annals, 8(1), 127-179.
Goler, L., Gale, J., & Grant, A. (2016). Let’s not kill performance evaluations yet. Harvard Business Review, November, pp. 90-94.
Gregersen, H. B., Hite, J. M., & Black, J. S. (1996). Expatriate performance appraisal in US multinational firms. Journal of International Business Studies, 27(4), 711-738.
Harvey, M. (1997). Focusing the international personnel performance appraisal process. Human Resource Development Quarterly, 8(1), 41-62.
Kang, H., & Shen, J. (2016). International performance appraisal practices and approaches of South Korean MNEs in China. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 27(3), 291-310.
Mellahi, K., Frynas, J. G., & Collings, D. G. (2016). Performance management practices within emerging market multinational enterprises: the case of Brazilian multinationals. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 27(8), 876-905.
Varma, A., Budhwar, P., & DeNisi, A (Eds.), 2008, Performance Management Systems: A Global Perspective. Global HRM Series, London: Routledge
In many countries managing and developing diversity is on the political and business agenda and has become an area of knowledge and practice in its own right. Yet all too often, diversity management and diversity research is centred in Western democracies, mono-culturally infused and biased (e.g., Jonsen et al., 2011; Nishii & Ozbilgin, 2007). At the same time, we know that diversity and equality at work cannot be treated as a unifying concept, nor be interpreted uniformly across cultures and countries, as highlighted in volumes and special issues on country or comparative perspectives on equal treatment and diversity, edited by Klarsfeld (2010), Syed and Özbilgin (2010), Klarsfeld et al. (2014) and Klarsfeld el al. (2016a and 2016b).
The purpose of this special issue is to further restore diversity and equality to its national contexts by shedding light on under-researched countries, including (though not being limited to) countries in Latin America, in Asia, Africa and Eastern Europe. Proposed papers should deal with, but not necessarily be limited to, the following questions:
- Is there an equal treatment or affirmative action legislation in the country and if so since when? In particular, what dimensions of diversity does it address (gender, race, age, etc.)? To what degree is it enforced (e.g., which sanctions do apply if the legislation is violated and how often are these sanctions actually put in practice)?
- Even in the absence of such legislation, is there a public debate about diversity in the country of study, and if so, what is this debate, and concerning what aspect of diversity? How and when was it started – if it was started at all? When do the first contributions appear in academia and in the media or press? Who are the actors involved in this debate, such as businesses, trade unions, political organizations, NGOs and other lobbies?
- Is there empirical research about diversity in the country of study and what are the main findings and/or contributions? What research questions are being addressed by the scholars about this country? To what extent do researchers and practitioners consider the intersections of multiple dimensions of diversity?
- What is the relationship between diversity management and equal treatment/equal opportunity/affirmative action legislation if such legislation exists in the country of study? Which concept appeared first?
All papers must be empirically driven, utilizing either primary or secondary data. Theoretical frameworks may also be used to assist with describing and/or understanding a country’s context. Multiple authorship is encouraged to offer diverse viewpoints, within each paper. It is anticipated that multiple authors will contribute different and diverse datasets to enrich the perspectives for each country. A submission which follows the process we outline here (i.e., common canvass of data) would be preferred over one that reviews existing literature.
If you have any queries, please contact the guest co-editor:
Alain Klarsfeld: a.klarsfeld@tbs-education.fr
Please upload your submissions to the Equality, Diversity and Inclusion ScholarOne Manuscripts website http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/edi - select ‘Special Issue’ and submit to the issue listed with the title: Perspectives on Diversity and Equality in Under-researched Countries. Submission will be available until October 31, 2017.
Papers must follow the journal submission guidelines:
http://emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=edi
References
Jonsen, K., Maznewski, M.L., & Schneider, S.C. (2011). Diversity and its not so diverse literature: An international perspective. International Journal of Cross Cultural Management, 11(1), 35-62.
Klarsfeld, A. (Ed.) (2010). Country perspectives on diversity and equal treatment at work, Cheltenham et al.: Elgar.
Klarsfeld, A., Booysen, L.A.E., Ng, E., Roper, I., & Tatli, A. (Eds.) (2014). Country perspectives on diversity and equal treatment at work, 2. edn., Cheltenham et al.: Elgar.
Klarsfeld, A., Ng, E.S., Booysen, L.A.E., Castro-Christiansen, L., & Kuvaas, B. (2016a). Comparative equality and diversity: main findings and research gaps. Cross-cultural and Strategic Management, 23(3), 1-37.
Klarsfeld, A., Ng, E.S., Booysen, L.A.E., Castro-Christiansen, L., & Kuvaas, B. (2016b). Research handbook of international and comparative perspective on diversity management. Edward Elgar.
Nishii, L.H., & Özbilgin, M.F. (2007). Global diversity management: towards a conceptual framework. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 18(11), 1883-1894.
Syed, J., & Özbilgin, M.F. (Eds.). (2010). Managing cultural diversity in Asia: A research companion. Elgar.
The problem of sustainability has received serious attention since the Club of Rome pointed to the limits of growth in 1972. Addressing ecological, economic and social issues, it is still a major – perhaps the biggest – challenge humanity faces. The problem demands attention by actors from all social levels. On the micro-level, sustainable consumption is often regarded as the major way how individual consumers can contribute to sustainable development. By now a growing number of people are aware that many consumption habits have to be changed because they are in conflict with the goal of sustainable development. Yet, there is a gap between knowledge and action. Much research has been done in the last 30 years on sustainable consumption, exploring the motivations, practices, opportunities, and drivers for sustainable consumption from economic, psychological and sociological perspectives. Despite this multidisciplinary effort and the often interdisciplinary nature of research on sustainable consumption, there is room for broadening the perspectives further. In particular, the link between political participation and sustainable consumption as a political statement as well as the link between various forms and objectives of political consumption deserves more attention. Further, the impact of societal inequality on sustainable consumption has not gained much attention. Especially research on the interaction between inequality, issues of security and precariousness, political participation and consumption behavior is lacking.
In the special issue, we would like to discuss our topic in an adequately broad and interdisciplinary way. We are particularly interested in questions such as:
- Inequality (e.g., precariousness) and sustainable consumption
- Citizenship and consumption
- Sustainable consumption as a political statement
- Quantitative and qualitative empirical studies on these issues
This is not an exhaustive list.
Deadline
Full papers for this special issue of management revue must be submitted by July 31st, 2015. All contributions will be subject to a double-blind review. Papers invited to a ‘revise and resubmit’ are due October 31st, 2015. Please submit your papers electronically via the online submission system at http://www.management-revue.org/submission/ using ‘SI Sustainable Consumption’ as article section.
Ortrud Leßmann (o.lessmann@hsu-hh.de), Helmut-Schmidt-University Hamburg (Germany)
Wenzel Matiaske, Helmut-Schmidt-University Hamburg (Germany)
Torsten Masson, Helmholtz Centre for Environmental Research - UFZ Leipzig (Germany)
Simon Fietze, University of Southern Denmark
The problem of sustainability has received serious attention since the Club of Rome pointed to the limits of growth in 1972. Addressing ecological, economic and social issues, it is still a major – perhaps the biggest – challenge humanity faces. The problem demands attention by actors from all social levels. On the micro-level, sustainable consumption is often regarded as the major way how individual consumers can contribute to sustainable development. By now a growing number of people are aware that many consumption habits have to be changed because they are in conflict with the goal of sustainable development. Yet, there is a gap between knowledge and action. Much research has been done in the last 30 years on sustainable consumption, exploring the motivations, practices, opportunities, and drivers for sustainable consumption from economic, psychological and sociological perspectives. Despite this multidisciplinary effort and the often interdisciplinary nature of research on sustainable consumption, there is room for broadening the perspectives further. In particular, the link between political participation and sustainable consumption as a political statement as well as the link between various forms and objectives of political consumption deserves more attention. Further, the impact of societal inequality on sustainable consumption has not gained much attention. Especially research on the interaction between inequality, issues of security and precariousness, political participation and consumption behavior is lacking.
In the special issue and the corresponding seminar (IUC Dubrovnik, http://www.iuc.hr/, 20.-24. April 2015), we would like to discuss our topic in an adequately broad and interdisciplinary way. We are particularly interested in questions such as:
- Inequality (e.g., precariousness) and sustainable consumption
- Citizenship and consumption
- Sustainable consumption as a political statement
- Quantitative and qualitative empirical studies on these issues
This is not an exhaustive list.
Deadline
Potential contributors to the seminar at the IUC Dubrovnik are encouraged to submit an abstract of 1-2 pages before January 31st, 2015 electronically via Management Revue’s online submission system at http://www.management-revue.org/submission/ using ‘IUC Dubrovnik’ as article section.
All contributors to the seminar are invited to submit their paper for the special issue of management revue. Full papers must be submitted by July 31st, 2015. All contributions will be subject to a double-blind review. Papers invited to a ‘revise and resubmit’ are due October 31st, 2015. Please submit your papers electronically via the online submission system at http://www.management-revue.org/submission/ using ‘SI Sustainable Consumption’ as article section.
Hoping to hear from you!
Ortrud Leßmann (o.lessmann@hsu-hh.de), Helmut-Schmidt-University Hamburg (Germany)
Wenzel Matiaske, Helmut-Schmidt-University Hamburg (Germany)
Torsten Masson, Helmholtz Centre for Environmental Research - UFZ Leipzig (Germany)
Simon Fietze, University of Southern Denmark
The Journal of East-West Business is published by Taylor & Francis Group LLC. The scope of the journal is international and it treats business issues from comparative, cross-cultural, and cross-national perspectives. The journal features an editorial advisory board that represents the Russian Federation, Eastern/Central European, and Baltic states in this new business arena. Central and Eastern European (CEE) countries have attracted increasing scientific and managerial interest since the start of transition in the area about 20 years ago. However, still relatively little is known in more detail about the marketing strategies used, the development of the strategies, background of the strategies used, consumer reactions, and performance of foreign companies in the single CEE countries and/or in CEE as a whole. This Special Issue would focus on various market analyses, marketing planning and management related topics in Central and Eastern European (CEE) countries including Russia and CIS countries. The papers may relate to the following themes and topics:
Marketing strategies standardization vs. adaptation.
Product and Branding Decisions.
Pricing decisions and methods of payment.
Distribution and logistics strategy of firms.
Communication, advertising and sales promotion strategies.
International Business Negotiations in the context of firms entering CEE markets.
Paper Procedure and Deadline
The articles may be theoretical and empirical including both quantitative and qualitative studies. The full papers or proposal should be delivered to the guest editor Professor Jorma Larimo (jla@uwasa.fi) latest on December 31st 2009.
Writing Instructions
The manuscript should be 20-25 typed pages, double spaced (including references and abstracts). For detailed writing instructions, kindly visit the journal’s website http://www.tandf.co.uk/journals/journal.asp?issn=1066-9868 and click on ‘Instructions for Authors’ in the ‘Author Resources’ section of the webpage.
Website
http://www.tandf.co.uk/journals/journal.asp?issn=1066-9868
Contact Info
Professor Jorma Larimo, Head of Department of Marketing,University of Vaasa, Wolffintie 34, 65101, Vaasa, Finland.
Tel: +358 6 324 8253. email: jla@uwasa.fi
Guest Editors:
Matthias Rätzer, Technical University Chemnitz, Germany
Ronald Hartz, Technical University Chemnitz, Germany
Ingo Winkler, University of Southern Denmark
For a couple of years now growth-driven societies have been in a permanent state of crisis. Since 2007 the global financial crisis and its aftermath are challenging our ideas of growth, well-being, consumption and work within global capitalism. Consequently, critical scholars in management and organization studies have begun to advocate alternative forms of organization and to problematize the collective imagination that ‘there is no alternative to growth’ (Parker et al. 2014; Atzeni 2012).
One important analytical dimension within the search for alternatives relates to the limits of growth in its economic, ecological and social dimension. For example, Meadows et al. (2004) explicate that a finite (world) system cannot handle an everlasting orientation toward growth without running into a collapse. Hirsch (1976) argues that social rise in a stratified society smolders, leading to social imbalances in the long term. Several authors discuss economic restrictions under the name of de-growth (Georgescu-Roegen 1977; Latouche 2009; Martínez Alier et al. 2010; Schneider et al. 2010; Kallis 2013). Schneider et al. (2010) point towards unfulfilled expectations in the context of creating win-win-situations and question the possibility of sustainable growth through technological and efficiency improvements. Relative to the social context, others discuss the label steady-state-economy, which challenges the relationship between growth and labor, solvency and consolidated public finances (Daly 1972, 1973; Lawn 2011; Blauwhof 2012).
However, there exist only few contributions discussing organizational alternatives to an orientation toward growth (Cheney et al. 2014). Some authors address growth neutral enterprises (Bakker et al. 1999; White/White 2012). Others note that neither governments nor private sector executives have any incentives supporting the development of a post-growth environment (e.g. Latouche, 2006; Ayres, 2008; Martínez Alier 2009). Therefore, the specific aim of this special issue is to substantiate the debate on post-growth, steady-state and de-growth from an organizational perspective. How can organizations respond to the limits of economic growth? How can organizations, from a post-growth perspective, promote their social worth as opposed to their monetary worth? How can organizations implement the elements of a post-growth economy, such as cutting-down and slowing down, a balance between sufficiency and dependency on consumption, institutional innovations for the society, the environment and regional economy (Paech, 2016)?
In addressing post-growth organizations (PGOs), we assume alternative organizations, featuring individual autonomy and respect, an orientation towards solidarity and cooperation, and responsibility to the future (Parker et al., 2014) to constitute a fertile ground for PGOs. Furthermore, we could imagine PGOs to develop from associations, growth neutral enterprises, co-operations, solidarity organizations, grass-root movements or even ‘traditional’ enterprises. Eventually, we do not restrict our focus on PGOs to the economic domain, but also take social and ecologic concerns, such as social entrepreneurs, into account. We call for contributions discussing different perspectives on PGOs, investigating their characteristics and limits. Furthermore, we embrace contributions investigating the range and coverage of PGOs as an organizational possibility in a future, post-growth society.
The contributions to this special issue should address one or more of the following questions:
- What characterizes the organization and the management of ‘post-growth organizations’ (PGOs)?
- Which role do the principles of autonomy, solidarity and responsibility play in PGOs? What kind of problems, contradictions and conjoint amplification are observable regarding these principles?
- Do PGOs enable us to cure some of the organizational ills created by a narrow focus on economic growth?
- What are the limits and prospects of PGOs in the transformation of capitalism?
- What organizational practices, tools and instruments are important in PGOs (e.g. accounting practices, compensation practices, decision making, regulations of working time, work-life balance, forms of participation etc.)?
- Is it possible to turn traditional organizations into PGOs?
- Which strategies (e.g. overcoming of externally defined difficulties, internal processes of storytelling, micro politics, adjustment of power) can be identified in the constitution and management of PGOs and which practices in PGOs are working well and which are not?
This is not an exhaustive list.
Deadline
Potential contributors to the Special Issue of Management Revue are encouraged to submit an abstract of 1-2 pages before 30 September 2016 electronically via the online submission system at http://www.management-revue.org/submission/ using ‘Post-Growth Organization’ as article section. Contributors will receive feedback and an invitation to submit a full paper by the end of October 2016.
Full papers must be submitted by 31 March 2017. All contributions will be subject to a double-blind review. Papers invited to a ‘revise and resubmit’ are due 31 August 2017.
Looking forward to hearing from you!
Important Dates
Paper title, abstract and short bio (email): 15 September, 2018
First full draft (word file): 15 December, 2018
The importance of Chinese businesses in the global arena has been particularly evident in recent years since they are able to compete effectively against global rivals in both developed and emerging countries (Child and Rodrigues, 2005; Guillen and Garcia-Canal, 2009; Luo and Tung, 2007; Mathews, 2006). Indeed, the growth of Chinese enterprises is clearly evidenced in terms of foreign direct investment (FDI). According to UNCTAD (2017), in the last ten years (2006-2016), FDI outflows from China have risen dramatically, from US$ 17,634 million to US$ 183,100 million, corresponding currently to 13% of the global outflows. Moreover, an increasing number of Chinese multinationals appear in Fortune’s ranking of the world’s 500 largest companies: in 2006, only 23 were listed (5%), growing progressively up to 103 in 2016, representing 21% of the firms in this ranking.
Consequently, the international presence of Chinese firms have increasingly attracted scholarly attention. A great number of studies on Chinese investment abroad have been published in specialised and academic journals. For example, many authors have researched the motives and location patterns of this Chinese investment (e.g. Buckley et al., 2007; Kolstad and Wiig, 2012; Morck et al., 2008; Wang et al., 2012). Another topic widely covered is the entry mode choice used by Chinese enterprises in their international adventures; particularly, mergers and acquisitions have attracted much attention (Deng, 2009; Zheng et al., 2016). Other authors have tackled the issue of cross-cultural problems faced by Chinese companies in developed countries (Klossek et al., 2012; Si and Liefner, 2014; Wong, 2012). However, much still remains to be researched regarding Chinese businesses outside of China.
For this special issue, we particularly welcome interdisciplinary submissions that complement the international business perspective. We encourage scholars to utilise different theoretical perspectives and apply a wide variety of rigorous methodological approaches so both conceptual and empirical (qualitative, quantitative and mixed-methods) contributions are desired.
Subject Coverage
Suitable topics include, but are not limited, to the following (any other areas are invited providing interesting information about the position of Chinese enterprises worldwide):
- Competitive business strategies of Chinese enterprises in foreign markets
- How Chinese companies are achieving legitimacy or reputation in developed countries? In what way new technologies are helping them for?
- The effects of Chinese investment in both developing or developed countries
- The ways in which Chinese enterprises are transforming marketing to show that their products have good quality
- Is Chinese dumping really a threat for the rest of Western companies?
- The ways in which Chinese companies struggle with their negative institutional heritage (e.g. bribery, lack of transparency)
- The expansion of Chinese ecommerce outside of China
- Communication and advertising strategies of Chinese enterprises in foreign markets
- Chinese digital marketing versus Western digital marketing, are there many differences?
- What is the Human Resources management approach of a foreign Chinese subsidiary like? It is really different from a host-local company? Are there differences between both Chinese State-owned enterprises and Private enterprises?
- What is the process of Knowledge Transfer in Chinese multinationals companies? Are there significant differences between the different sectors?
- What are the innovation processes of Chinese firms like? Which are the particularities of Chinese business model innovation? The ways in which Chinese firms take advantage of host-local knowledge to improve their innovation skills
Notes for Prospective Authors
If you are interested in submitting an abstract or have any questions, please email Dr Felix Barahona at felix.barahona@ub.edu and confirm your interest. We would be happy to receive your suggestions and/or answer your queries regarding suitability of your topic. The first step is to submit an abstract. Please email paper title, abstract (300 words) and short bio with previous publications (150 words) to Dr Felix Barahona at felix.barahona@ub.edu not later than 15 September 2018.
Submitted papers should not have been previously published. All papers will be subject to double-blind peer review. All papers must be submitted online and for that it is necessary to be registered with the journal. Please read our submitting articles page. For author guidelines and more information see:
http://revistes.ub.edu/index.php/JESB/about/submissions#onlineSubmissions
Important Dates
Paper title, abstract and short bio (email): 15 September, 2018
First full draft (word file): 15 December, 2018
Guest Editor’ Contact Details:
Dr. Felix Barahona,
Professor of Strategic Management
University of Barcelona
690 Diagonal Avenue, Barcelona (Spain)
E-mail: felix.barahona@ub.edu Tel: +34 (0)608808000
References
Buckley, P. J., Clegg, J., Cross, A. R., Liu, X., Voss, H., & Zheng, P. (2007). The determinants of Chinese outward foreign direct investment. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 499-518.
Child, J., & Rodrigues, S. B. (2005). The internationalization of Chinese firms: A case for theoretical extension. Management and Organization Review, 1, 381–410.
Deng, P. (2009). Why do Chinese firms tend to acquire strategic assets in international expansion?. Journal of World Business, 44, 74-84.
Guillén, M. F., & García-Canal, E. (2009). The American model of the multinational firm and the ‘new multinationals’ from emerging markets. Academy of Management Perspectives, 23(2), 23-35.
Klossek, A., Linke, B. M., & Nippa, M. (2012). Chinese enterprises in Germany: Establishment modes and strategies to mitigate the liability of foreignness. Journal of World Business 47:35-44.
Kolstad, I., & Wiig, A. (2012). What determines Chinese outward FDI?. Journal of World Business, 47, 26-34.
Luo, Y., & Tung, R. L. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 481-498.
Mathews, J. A. (2006). Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23, 5-27.
Morck, R., Yeung, B., & Zhao, M. (2008). Perspectives on China’s outward foreign direct investment. Journal of International Business Studies, 39, 337-350.
Si, Y., & Liefner, I. (2014). “Cognitive distance and obstacles to subsidiary business success: the experience of Chinese companies in Germany. Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, 105, 285-300.
UNCTAD (2017). World Investment Report 2017 (Investment and the Digital Economy). New York and Geneva: United Nations.
Wang, C., Hong, J., Kafouros, M., & Boateng, A. (2012). What drives outward FDI of Chinese firms? Testing the explanatory power of three theoretical frameworks. International Business Review, 21(3), 425-438.
Wong, L. (2012). ’Liability of foreignness’: Chinese investment in Australia. Transnational Corporations Review, 4, 46-75.
Zheng, N., Wei, Y., Zhang, Y., & Yang, J. (2016). In search of strategic assets through cross-border merger and acquisitions: Evidence from Chinese multinational enterprises in developed economies. International Business Review, 25(1), 177-186.
Issue Release: volume 32, issue 10 (2012)
Internal and external barriers to international expansion are substantial for firms in the professional services industry. At the same time, multi-lateral trade agreements, developments in information and communication technology, the increased global presence of their clients, and the development of multinational firms in emerging markets have been important drivers towards broader and more accelerated internationalization in the professional services industry. For most firms in the professional services industry, an expansion across borders results in the need for the acquisition of additional knowledge capital, challenges with the transfer of know how across organizational and national borders, and problems with foreign legal and institutional environments (Brock & Alon, 2009). And yet, surprisingly little research on this growing phenomenon has been published in the fields of international business, international management, or cross-cultural management. A relatively recent literature review (Netland & Alfnes, 2007) has shown that only 31 articles on the topic had been published in the most important service industries journals between 1999 and 2005. We therefore invite original contributions by scholars from a broad range of fields including (but not limited to) economics, entrepreneurship, finance, human resource management, international business, international management, knowledge management, management, marketing, organizational behaviour, and strategy.
Subject Coverage
We welcome both empirical and conceptual articles. Examples of topic areas appropriate to the theme of the special issue include:
• Motivation for internationalization of professional service firms.
• Internationalization paths in the professional services industry.
• Foreign market entry modes in the professional services industry.
• Global account and customer relationship management in the professional services industry.
• Managing human resources in the professional services industry across borders.
• Cross-cultural differences in the professional services industry.
• Global management of knowledge and learning in the professional services industry.
• Performance of professional service firms in the global marketplace.
• The role of technology in the internationalization of professional service firms.
• Internationalization, Regionalization and Globalization in the professional services industry.
• Development of the professional services industry in emerging markets.
The deadline for submitting papers is April 15, 2011. Questions about content, ideas, and first drafts should be directed to the guest editors Professor Vlad Vaiman, at vlad@ru.is, and Professor Gerhard Apfelthaler, at apfeltha@callutheran.edu. Please clearly identify your submission in the email subject line, SIJ - Professional Services Industry: Challenges and Opportunities of Internationalization - Special Issue.
Final papers must be submitted via Manuscript Central (http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/fsij), upon guest editor’s confirmation. All papers will go through the regular double-blind review process to ensure its relevance and quality, and must follow the SIJ Style Guidelines (see http://www.tandf.co.uk/journals/authors/fsijauth.asp). This special issue will be published in volume 32, issue 10 (2012).
We are very pleased to announce the Sixteenth Anniversary Organization Science Winter Conference (OSWC-XVI). OSWC-XVI. The raison d’être of the conference has been to stimulate theory and understanding about organizations through experimentation and boundary-crossing conversation and to contribute to the ongoing renewal of the field and of the journal Organization Science. OSWC conferences combine the leading-edge ideas of strategy and organization scholars, executives, entrepreneurs, and interested non-business scholars, in a community-enhancing setting. The time and place are February 4-7, 2010 at the newly renovated Sheraton Steamboat Hotel and Conference Center, Steamboat Springs Colorado.
The overarching goal of OSWC XVI is to celebrate Arie Y. Lewin, founder of the journal Organization Science and the OSWC and his contributions to the renewal of the field of organizations which trace back to his departmental editorship in Management Science (Organization Performance, Strategy and Design). He was the founding program director of the Decision Risk and Management Science program at NSF; and most recently his contribution to international business through his transformation of the Journal of International Business Studies.
Arie’s research has contributed or often gave voice to new lines of research ranging from his early work on the behavioral aspects of accounting (organizational slack, Williamson model of managerial behavior); frontier analysis (learning from outliers and the development of Data Envelopment Analysis methodology); complexity and co-evolution (innovation, imitation and absorptive capacity) and most recently the international longitudinal study of outsourcing and offshoring with its implications for new organizational forms and globalization of innovation.
To a great extent Arie’s research interests revolve around opening up the black box of organizational capabilities (routines and processes) as they relate to organizational adaptation over time (or inability to adapt) within co-evolutionary dynamics and which accounts for the variation in the ability of organizations to appropriate value from different configurations of organizational capabilities.
The widely reported heterogeneity in performance within industries or sectors has many implications for framing and executing research strategies in organization science with implications for organization design. For example advancing approaches for identifying outliers and comparative case analysis; meta routines as the micro foundation for specifying organizational capabilities such as flexibility, resilience, innovation, absorptive capacity etc. Similarly the empirical literature on performance is still very preliminary especially when organizational capabilities such as organizational learning, absorptive capacity, flexibility, and resilience are to be linked to measures of adaptation, growth and survival in turbulent environments or in times of paradigm shifts.
The goal for OSWC 2010 is to recognize that some configurations of organizational capabilities are superior to others on some dimensions (e.g. adaptability) but that equifinality in performance can be a common occurrence; that organizations co-evolve with their socio, political, institutional and economic environments; that organizations reflect different management internationalities and configurations of capabilities; that founding conditions and path dependence matter; that the managing of organizational capabilities for innovation, change, adaptation etc. is of critical importance to practitioners , and that in times of radical change most incumbents are selected out. But some incumbents are able to adapt successfully and “reinvent themselves”. These are all themes that have defined the research interests of Arie.
In the tradition of OSWC, we invite proposals for plenary panels and interactive poster papers on the theme of the conference. As has been the case in the past much of the plenary program is implemented from suggestions received from scholars wishing to participate in OSWC. The 2009 OSWC program included three (out of 5) plenary panels that were created from especially salient submitted papers. Most authors will be invited to join another highly acclaimed OSWC tradition—the open-ended evening-long (7–10pm) Interactive Poster Sessions accompanied with delectable finger food, wine, soft drinks and deserts. Historically, 50% of the OSWC attendee roster is reserved for participants new to the conference. In recent years 60% or more of the participants were first time participants in OSWC.
We welcome nominations of a distinguished researcher or practitioner especially known for applying or advancing the ideas Arie’s broad research interest. This person will be the featured guest at another OSWC tradition, the Fireside Chat on Saturday evening.
Individuals having substantive questions are invited to contact the program co-conveners for OSWC-XVI: Professor Linda Argote (argote@cmu.edu) and Professor Richard Burton (rmb2@mail.duke.edu). The program committee members are William Ocasio (wocasio@kellogg.northwestern.edu), Silvia Massini (silvia.massini@manchester.ac.uk), and Koen Heimeriks (KHeimeriks@rsm.nl).
If you are interested in attending OSWC-XVI but not as participant on the program please submit a statement expressing your interest in participating, mentioning one or two of your interests in major controversies. Please also suggest significant practitioners who you may be able to bring as well. The application deadline for panel proposals, individual papers or posters or individual applications to attend is October 16, 2009. However, as in the past the co-conveners, will issue invitations on a rolling basis as proposals come in.
Invitations to attend will be extended by the co-conveners of OSWC-XVI, Linda Argote, and Richard Burton. Panel proposals, posters and statement of interest in participation should be submitted by email to Richard Burton c/o Stefanie McAdoo (smcadoo@duke.edu).
This special issue of Journal for East-West Business is devoted to the analysis and forecast of the business and management development in Russia. The papers in the issue will look at the least-researched areas of business and management and aim to discover factors that will affect East-West business in the near future.
We are especially looking for articles that can provide more insight on the following topics:
- Which changes in business philosophy and business policy of Russian companies are expected in the near future?
- Which changes in internal management are expected in the near future?
- How the local labor markets will react to the current economic conditions?
- How foreign companies operating in Russia will shape their strategies in the near future?
- What are the recent trends and forecasts for investments of Russian companies abroad?
We welcome studies based on qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis, including case studies. In case studies, the names of the companies should not be disguised.
Guidance notes:
- Articles should be based on original research and/or innovative analysis.
- The main findings should not have been published or submitted elsewhere.
- The editors expect articles to be theoretically informed and to express novel interpretations of the current and anticipated trends in Russian business management.
- Authors wishing to use social science or managerial instruments of analysis should adapt them so that they allow for dynamic analysis.
Articles should explain or predict change across time and not simply examine static conditions. Submitted manuscripts should not have been previous published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere. All manuscripts are refereed through a blind peer review process. Please submit your manuscript by 30 July 2014 (or earlier) sending it directly to the Guest editor: gurkov@hse.ru
The globalization of Chinese business enterprises, in the wake of the rapid ascent of the Chinese economy, has increased substantially. With it comes the question of how to explain Chinese corporate behaviour as an essential component of China's new status as a leading world economic actor. Multiple reasons can be adduced to explain this global ascent: China's enormous growth has fuelled its need for resources, both strategic and natural, resulting in differing choices and patterns of investment. China's globalization has been driven, in large measure, by its outbound and inbound FDI activities which have evolved rapidly in the past 20 years and have implied varying explanatory frameworks. Once Premier Wen Jaibao announced in 2004 that ‘the Chinese government encourages more enterprises to go global’, the pace of Chinese outbound investment began to accelerate, with foreign acquisitions doubling from 40 in 2003 to 82 in 2006 and reaching a high of 298 in 2009 or some $73.20 billion, anticipated to account for roughly 8% to 9% of global merger and acquisition activity in 2011 (Williamson & Raman, 2011). The Chinese government openly encourages Chinese investment abroad, supported by a vast pool of savings and export surplus earnings, in addition to relatively cheap labour.
China is seeking the development of world-class multinational companies with a full range of competences to explore and exploit opportunities around the world, yielding enhanced technical know-how and access to distant foreign markets (Alon & McIntyre, 2008). The globalization of Chinese firms, in particular, has generated increasing attention in the professional literature (e.g., Williamson & Raman, 2011). With rapid economic growth in China and the societies with Chinese heritage social science researchers have been debating an important question: whether existing theories, which are primarily developed in the setting of the mature economies in the West, are nonetheless relevant and capable of explaining the economic miracles in Chinese societies? Or whether new theories based on the Chinese experience need to be developed (Barney & Zhang, 2009)? This debate has sharpened in the late 1990s and into the new century as China became the world's manufacturing base.
Some scholars (e.g., Alon et al., 2009) believe that existing theories can satisfactorily explain the globalization of Chinese enterprises. Applying institutional (macro, external), resource-based, and internalization (micro, internal) theories to explain internationalization is now commonplace, but studies which seek to combine multiple theoretical approaches can offer a richer explanatory terrain. Scholars who assert that China's firm behaviour does not need uniquely Chinese theories argue that, by definition, a theory should be generalizable to different observations across countries. There may be variations in how a theory manifests itself in various settings but a theory such as agency theory, resource-based theory, or institutional theory should be universal.
On the other hand, researchers have called for more indigenous research to account for context-sensitive research. Tsui (2004) suggested that the North American bias of Chinese management research has hampered our understanding by focusing on context-free conceptualization, where in fact, as Child (2000, 2009) noted, high context cultures such as China's stress national difference.
Global management knowledge can be gained through either context-embedded, context-bounded, or context-specific conceptualization (Tsui, 2004). Indeed, the rapid political, economic, and cultural transformations in emerging markets, such as China, present unprecedented opportunities to apply general theories and develop new ones grounded in a new social context. Whether context-specific or context-embedded, the inclusion of context requires indigenization (Tsui, 2004, 2009). There is an opportunity to investigate the validity of mainstream Western theories in China, while maintaining sensitivity to local specifics, in order to broaden the range and applicability of these theories. The resource-based view, industry and institutional theories can be combined to achieve a better understanding of Chinese firms' behaviours.
This Call for Papers is designed to encourage all those who are currently researching in the field of Chinese Management Studies to submit a paper to be included in this ‘Research Handbook of the Globalization of Chinese Firms.’ The intention is for the handbook to be as comprehensive as possible and to include a broad cross-section of papers from the different theoretical frameworks used in the Globalization of Chinese Firms. As a result, we are looking for as many papers as possible using the different theoretical frameworks. We are especially interested in conceptual studies, empirical investigations and state of the art reviews in the following areas:
• Identify how the specific attributes of Chinese business groups help in developing multinational advantages which, in turn, lead to either asset exploitation in developing countries or asset augmentation in developed countries.
• At the organization level, examine the relationship between internal capital markets, scope economies, vertical and horizontal linkages and internalized capabilities.
• Examine the Inter-organizational attributes that constitute a location advantage as well as a linkage to learning.
• Assess the relationship between institutional support, location advantages and learning.
• Use resource-based, industry-based, and institution-based explanations to explain strategic- and market-seeking motivations for FDI.
• Explain the role of family ownership in the international involvement of Chinese firms.
• Evaluate the relationship between scope economies, vertical and horizontal linkages, internalization, technology-based competitive advantage, export experience, diversification, family ownership, excess family control, and high discretionary slack.
• Assess the role of Industry variables like inter-organizational linkages, industry competition, and industry R&D intensity.
• When Chinese firms go to a country with a different institutional environment explain how they adjust their organization to operate efficiently?
• Explain the significance of Institutional variables like government support and regulations.
• Describe how Chinese firms manage organizational learning.
• Evaluate the role of culture distance, as well as capital requirements, for Chinese firms as they globalize.
• Explain the role mergers and acquisitions play in diminishing the impact of potential corporate and national cultural clashes.
Deadline for receipt of manuscripts is November 30 2012.
Papers should be submitted via e-mail to one of the Editors, Dr. Craig Julian, at the following e-mail address: craig.julian@scu.edu.au
The Springer series addressing Operations Management, MEOP - Measuring Operations Performance is devoting its next peer-reviewed volume to the topic of Reshoring of Manufacturing. Interest in Reshoring strategies – intended as companies' decisions to reverse previous off-shoring by bringing manufacturing back home – has gained momentum recently. However, little is known so far about the magnitude of this phenomenon, about its geographical boundaries, and about the underlying motivations. In spite of this interest, academic attention is lagging behind, and research is characterized by the lack of a shared definition, of a full understanding of the extent and drivers of the phenomenon, its opportunities as well as the main challenges. Decisions to implement Reshoring strategies mainly concern those companies for which the home country is at a mature stage (United States, Western Europe, Japan) and the host country is a developing or emerging markets (Asia, Eastern Europe, Latin America). In addition, Reshoring affects all sectors, both in capital-intensive than those that are labour-intensive. By observing the initiatives implemented by governments of the home country, it is noted that the importance given to the phenomenon varies greatly, and not always, it has a positive correlation with the number of repatriations. One example is Italy, which is emerging as the second country in number of Reshoring decisions, but in which no relief is put in place in order to encourage entrepreneurs to come back.
However, the economic policies implemented by a government can have a crucial impact on the location choices of entrepreneurs, as shown by the United States, which is the country with the highest number of Reshoring decisions and where the government is actively working to facilitate the process. Knowledge about Reshoring stems from a fragmented collection of case studies as part of inter-university consortia such as Uni-CLUB MoRe, initiatives such as the American Reshoring Initiative, institutions such as the Fraunhofer Institute and the German consulting firm, such as Boston Consulting Group. The result is that there is no comprehensive overview of the phenomenon to analyse it in a systematic and comprehensive manner. There is also evidence that scarce attention has so far been devoted to the analysis of the drivers, opportunities and the challenges. As such there is the need to further investigate the phenomenon of Reshoring.
This volume will focus on Reshoring in an era of Globalization. It will seek to assess the state of Reshoring and how recent developments, whether pertaining to configuration, technology, the environment and otherwise are impacting it in terms of its content and direction and in other ways and in its relationship to Manufacturing Performance. To this purpose, contributions are invited that address the above theme focusing on the following topics. However, this is not an exclusive list and all contributions that relate to the theme will be considered.
- The state of Reshoring within International Manufacturing Strategy
- Forces and drivers influencing Reshoring
- International Supply Chain Transformations as a result of Reshoring
- Changing configuration conditions and International Manufacturing Strategy as a result of Reshoring
- ICT and Reshoring
- Opportunities associated with Reshoring
- Challenges associated with Reshoring
- Reshoring and the Green agenda
- The circular economy and the impact of sustainability
- Risk and resilience of Reshoring
- The influence of emerging technologies on Reshoring
- The interplay of Reshoring and servitisation
- Emerging Multinationals and their impact on Reshoring
- Data analytics and Reshoring
The editor will select submissions for peer review. In particular papers adopting a case-study approach are particularly welcome.
The following are the key dates:
- Proposals Submission: 31/12/2016
- Proposals Acceptance: 15/01/2016
- Full Paper Submission due: 15/02/2017
- Editors select submissions for peer review: 15/03/2017
- Reviews returned to contributors with directions from editors: 15/04/2017
- Resubmissions of the final manuscript due: 15/05/2017
Proposal submissions should be sent to the volume editor Professor Alessandra Vecchi (email alessandra.vecchi@unibo.it) no later than 31/12/16. The book will be suitable to be used as a teaching aid in a variety of courses in different disciplines (ranging from International Business, Operations Management to Production Management) both at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Additionally the book will be relevant to academic, researchers and practitioners who have a keen interest in the manufacturing industry.
Introduction
At a time when international business scholars have called on executives and managers to place greater attention on corporate social responsibility in order to address issues of inequality, diversity, inclusion, and sustainability, in line with Rasche and Gilbert’s (2015) broader call, it is appropriate for the academic community to turn its attention inward and address the issue of responsibility in international business education. Given the expansion of IB educational activities through increasing coverage of relevant topics in functional courses, what is the role of IB education in shaping the mindsets and values of the business leaders of tomorrow? What is the unique contribution of IB courses to transforming business students into citizens of the world? In short, what responsibility do international business educators have and what do they aspire to achieve as educators?
Several aspects of IB education raise distinctive issues when addressing matters related to educator responsibility. It is not uncommon, for instance, for educators to seek not just education, but transformation. This has given rise to increasing use of experiential learning approaches (Taras & Gonzales-Perez, 2015), particularly in cross-cultural management courses. In 2014, AIB Insights (Maznevski, 2014; Peterson, 2014) dedicated an issue to one instance of an experiential activity that went terribly wrong, thereby plunging students, the instructor, and the institution into turmoil. What responsibility do instructors and institutions have in the selection and implementation of different pedagogies? To what extent do IB educators consider the impact their instructional decisions may have on their students, institutions of higher education, and the world?
In a similar vein, in a time of instability in sociopolitical and economic structures on the global level (Meyer, 2017) – amid calls for de-globalization and appeals to reconsider capitalism – what role does IB education play in promoting and maintaining civility and rationality in the broader public square?
In this AIB Insights Special Issue, we seek to further flesh out the contours of responsible IB education and promote a dialogue about enhancing the quality of IB education through an acceptance of greater accountability.
Example Topics
While we are broadly interested in any topic related to the Special Issue theme that encourages a discussion of the responsibilities of IB educators, some potential topics for the special issue are listed below.
- What is different about teaching IB from teaching in other disciplines (e.g., management, finance)?
- What ethical considerations and concerns underlie the teaching of IB?
- What are the responsibilities of educators in the IB field to stakeholders (i.e., students, sponsoring institutions, employers, societies)?
- How do these responsibilities vary based on:
- Lcation (e.g., within country or outside)?
- Timeframe (e.g., befre, during or after international experience)?
- Student demgraphics (e.g., age, gender, domestic versus international)?
- How do we ensure that IB education provides the transformational process that we aim for, and what responsibilities do educators have in designing and overseeing this process?
- What are the ethical issues associated with IB education?
- How does viewing IB education as a calling impact perceptions of responsibility?
- What is the role of IB education in a time of calls for de-globalization?
- What responsibility do educators have when selecting and implementing different pedagogy?
Submission Process and Timeline
AIB Insights is the Academy of International Business official publication that provides an outlet for short (around 2500 words), interesting, topical, current and thought-provoking articles. Colleagues interested in submitting their work to this Special Issue should consult the AIB Insights Editorial Policy and use the Online Manuscript Submission System, both of which can be accessed via the AIB Insights website at https://aib.msu.edu/publications/insights. Please select “Special Issue: IB Education” under ‘Track’ when submitting your manuscript.
Timeline: Please submit your work on or before October 31, 2019. Expected publication of this Special Issue is in the first half of 2020.
References
Maznevski, M. (2014). Managing Deep Intercultural Training Exercises. AIB Insights, 14(2), 7.
Meyer, K. E. (2017). International business in an era of anti-globalization. Multinational Business Review, 25(2), 78-90.
Peterson, M. F. (2014). Stepping on cultural and religious assumptions. AIB Insights, 14(2), 4.
Rasche, A., & Gilbert, D. U. (2015). Decoupling responsible management education: Why business schools may not walk their talk. Journal of Management Inquiry, 24(3), 239-252.
Taras, V., & Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. (Eds.). (2015). The Palgrave handbook of experiential learning in international business. Palgrave Macmillan.
For Submissions, Ideas And Questions, Please Contact: insights@aib.msu.edu
AIB Insights (ISSN: print: 1938-9590; online: 1938-9604) provides an outlet for short, topical, stimulating, and provocative articles.
Past copies of AIB Insights can be accessed through the AIB website at http://aib.msu.edu/publications/insights
AIB Insights Editorial Team
John Mezias, Editor
William Newburry, Associate Editor
Anne Hoekman, Managing Editor
Chei Hwee Chua, Communications Officer
The Journal of International Marketing wishes to advance Review Articles.
Research in international marketing continues to expand, developing new and innovative dimensions to complex international marketing phenomena. The increase in the amount of research in international marketing poses a challenge to international marketing scholars in identifying relevant prior literature and isolating the most important topics to address for the advancement of the discipline. As such, the Journal of International Marketing wishes to publish articles which both (1) rigorously review the current state of international marketing thought in international marketing areas and (2) provide guidance for future research and practice in these areas. Articles can employ any number of approaches, inclusive of, but not limited to, theoretical review, structured reviews of literature areas, and meta-analytic reviews.
Potential topics of interest would include, but are not limited to:
• Understanding the antecedents and consequences of international marketing strategy standardization/adaptation
• Born globals: Integrating the literature and setting a future research agenda
• Integrating the exporting literature: Antecedents and consequences of export performance
• An integrative assessment of research on international strategic alliances/joint ventures
• Meta-theoretical assessment of the international marketing literature
• Understanding the role of external factors on international marketing issues: A meta-analysis
• Marketing aspects of international entrepreneurship: A review and future research directions
• Theoretical approaches to international channel strategy
• Understanding international pricing strategies: A literature review with directions for future research
• Advancement and challenges to international advertising research: A meta-analysis
• The employment of transaction cost theory in international marketing strategy
• Agency theory’s insights on international marketing topics
• The complexity of the country-of-origin literature: Past, present, and future
• Understanding marketing’s interaction with society: public policy implications
• Evaluating conceptual and empirical research on the internationalization process of the firm
This is an “open” call and as such there is no specified deadline.
Journal guidelines can be found at: http://marketingpower.com/JIMGuidelines and manuscripts can be submitted via the online system at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ama_jim.
Questions should be directed to:
David A. Griffith
Editor, Journal of International Marketing
The John William Byington Endowed Chair in Global Marketing
Professor of Marketing
Department of Marketing
The Eli Broad Graduate School of Management
Michigan State University
N370 North Business Complex
East Lansing, MI 48824-1122, USA
Tel: 517.432.6429
Fax: 517.432.1112
email: Griffith@bus.msu.edu
Critical Perspectives on International Business invites the submission of articles that address the theme “Rising power firms and FDI - The challenge of economic development”. Rising powers refers to countries such as China, India and Brazil which are on a steep growth and development trajectory and rising power firms refers to emergent and leading firms from these countries with a clear strategic intent to challenge western and dominant forms of economic organisation (e.g. multinational enterprises (MNEs), lead firms in global value chains (GVCs)) (Luo and Tung 2007). Recent deliberations in international business pertaining to the impact of MNEs on economic development suggest a revision of dominant firm strategies along the side of social embeddedness, local relationship formation and social entrepreneurship (Seelos and Mair 2005; Tasavori and Sinkovics 2011; Yamin and Sinkovics 2009). Social embeddedness denotes an emerging concept of the engagement of firms in local economies and networks (Badry 2009), which extends beyond the definition of business networks which focusses mostly on direct suppliers and customers (Forsgren, Holm, and Johanson 2005). In particular, social embeddedness affords a clear link to broader concepts such as legitimacy of international business in emerging economies (Gifford, Kestler, and Anand 2010; Reimann et al. 2012). London and Hart (2004) offer examples of companies succeeding in less developed countries by pursuing relationships with non-traditional partners, co-inventing custom solutions, and building local capacity. They highlight the importance of capabilities of social embeddedness as a way for MNEs to perform effectively in less developed environments with mutual benefits for themselves and the host economies. Brady (2009) examines relational and structural network aspects and their influence on the success of companies’ Base of the Pyramid (BOP) strategies.
Nevertheless, given the dominant strategic trajectories of most MNEs from advanced economies a social embeddedness orientation entails perhaps too radical a shift in their strategies (Zanfei 2005). In contrast, rising power firms from emerging economies are arguably more likely to exhibit higher levels of capabilities for social embeddedness by default. As Amsden (2009) suggests, they typically have more knowledge of the local business environment, and are better plugged into relational and social networks.
This may have significant implications for international business in that patterns of South-South trade, FDI and other economic interactions can promise greater degrees of development outcomes and will offer products and techniques with an improved fit for customers and other users.
Manuscripts are solicited on topics addressing …
This special issue invites conceptual and empirical research that sheds greater light on the capabilities of rising power firms, their engagement and social embeddedness in both their own environment and in cross-border environments and their distinctive development impact of specific firm strategies. Within this framework we are interested in contributions that address one or more of the following issues:
• Is the growth of rising power firms based on highly distinctive business models or are these just a replication of existing ones?
• Is there any empirical evidence that suggests traditional and rising power firms exhibit different developmental impacts?
• Studies exploring the nature of social or community embeddedness of rising power firms – are there any lessons of this for western multinationals?
• Empirical studies that investigate the impact of rising power firms on poverty reduction, in their own country and other markets.
• Studies examining the involvement of rising power firms in global value chains or global production networks with specific reference to standards (labour, environment, products) or ‘double-standards’.
• Studies that address CSR practices and approaches in relation to rising power firms.
• The role of innovation, technological upgrading and leveraging on economic development.
• Studies that focus on how social embeddedness of rising power firms may foster innovation capabilities.
Special Issue Editors
Rudolf R. Sinkovics, Manchester Business School, http://www.personal.mbs.ac.uk/rsinkovics/, Email: Rudolf.Sinkovics@manchester.ac.uk
Mo Yamin, Manchester Business School, http://www.personal.mbs.ac.uk/myamin/, Email: Mo.Yamin@manchester.ac.uk
Submission information
o All papers will be subjected to double-blind peer review.
o Author guidelines are available at http://www.emeraldinsight.com/cpoib.htm
o Papers will be reviewed in accordance with CPoIB guidelines.
o Submissions to Critical perspectives on international business are made using ScholarOne Manuscripts http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/cpoib.
o Submission deadline: 30th November 2012
o Acceptance decision: 31st May 2013
o Approximate date of publication: Early 2014
References
Amsden, Alice H. (2009), "Does firm ownership matter? Poes vs. Foes in the developing world," in Emerging multinationals in emerging markets, Ravi Ramamurti and Jitendra V. Singh (Eds.). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 64-77.
Badry, Dina (2009), Multinational companies in low-income markets: An analysis of social embeddedness in southeast Asia Wiesbaden: Gabler Verlag.
Forsgren, Mats, Ulf Holm, and Jan Johanson (2005), Managing the embedded multinational: A business network view. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
Gifford, Blair, Andrew Kestler, and Sharmila Anand (2010), "Building local legitimacy into corporate social responsibility: Gold mining firms in developing nations," Journal of World Business, 45 (3), 304-311.
London, Ted and Stuart L. Hart (2004), "Reinventing strategies for emerging markets: Beyond the transnational model," Journal of International Business Studies, 35 (5), 350-370.
Luo, Yadong and Rosalie L. Tung (2007), "International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective," Journal of International Business Studies, 38 (4), 481-498.
Reimann, Felix, Matthias Ehrgott, Lutz Kaufmann, and Craig R. Carter (2012), "Local stakeholders and local legitimacy: MNEs' social strategies in emerging economies," Journal of International Management, 18 (1), 1-17.
Seelos, Christian and Johanna Mair (2005), "Social entrepreneurship: Creating new business models to serve the poor," Business Horizons, 48 (3), 241-246.
Tasavori, Misagh and Rudolf R. Sinkovics (2011), "Socially entrepreneurial behaviour of multinational companies: Are MNCs 'social entrepreneurs'?," in Firm-level internationalisation, regionalism and globalization, Elaine Hutson, Rudolf R. Sinkovics, and Jenny Berrill (Eds.). Houndmills, Basingstoke, U.K.: Palgrave MacMillan, 397-411.
Yamin, Mo and Rudolf R. Sinkovics (2009), "Infrastructure or foreign direct investment?: An examination of the implications of MNE strategy for economic development," Journal of World Business, 44 (2), 144-157.
Zanfei, Antonello (2005), "Globalization at bay? Multinational growth and technology spillover," Critical Perspectives on International Business, 1 (1), 5-17.
Please contact the guest editors for further guidance:
Rudolf R. Sinkovics, Manchester Business School - Rudolf.Sinkovics@manchester.ac.uk
Mo Yamin, Manchester Business School - Mo.Yamin@manchester.ac.uk
Submissions are invited for a special issue of CSEFA Volume 96. The focus of this issue is on financial risk management in a post financial crisis environment, including the effects of nonstandard monetary policies by central banks. Papers are not limited to but may address the following topics:
- advances in measuring and reporting risk and liquidity after the crisis,
- the impacts of Basel III including e.g. capital requirements and bank balance sheets,
- central bank monetary policies and bank liquidity,
- credit risk assessment and bank lending to SMEs,
- the impact of excess liquidity on asset prices (e.g. bubbles and crashes),
- the particular risks of inflationary or deflationary economic environments.
Selected papers will be published as chapters of CSEFA Volume 96. CSEFA is published by the Emerald Group Publishing Limited, Howard House, Wagon Lane, Bingley, BD16 1WA, United Kingdom. It forms a continuing series of refereed volumes featuring original academic research in financial economics. The series is now included in the ISI Web of Knowledge and Book Citation Index.
ABSTRACT SUBMISSION PROCEDURE: Submission of work of a high standard in the above topic area is very welcome. Please submit your paper proposal as an abstract including:
- the title and abstract,
- a list of keywords,
- names and affiliations (with email and postal address) of all authors,
- all authors’ 200 word bios,
to one of the editors. Authors will be notified about acceptance of their abstracts in due course.
FINAL MANUSCRIPTS: Upon acceptance, the submission deadline for final manuscripts is January 15, 2014. Final manuscripts have to be in MS Word text format with a length of up to 8000 words. They may include up to five tables or figures.
CONTACT:
Jonathan A. Batten
Email: jonathan.batten@monash.edu
Niklas F. Wagner
Email: niklas.wagner@uni-passau.de
The central, long-standing, question in the strategy, management, and marketing literatures is why some firms outperform others. The dynamic capabilities framework is nowadays the dominant theoretical perspective for explaining how firms achieve a sustainable competitive advantage and, thereby, enjoy superior performance. Dynamic capabilities typically refer to the firm's ability to integrate, build, and reconfigure internal and external competences to address rapidly changing environments. Thus, the key question should be why and how it is that, over time, some firms become successful in managing their capabilities, while other firms do not.
This question becomes more difficult to answer for firms operating in the global market. When businesses transcend national boundaries, firms need to create, renew, and orchestrate their resources in a more skillful manner to effectively manage differences in cultural, social, economic, political, technological, and allied factors between the local and foreign markets and timely address the increased levels of uncertainty inherent in international operations. However, studies on the capabilities of firms operating in the global marketplace have lagged behind those in domestic market settings.
While the nature, origins, evolution and consequences of capabilities have been much discussed in a domestic context, much less attention has been paid to which and how capabilities can help firms cope with the additional ramifications of international marketing.
The aim of the Special Issue is to advance understanding of the leading role that firm capabilities potentially play in international market operations.
How can capabilities help firms move along the internationalization path, formulate and implement effective international marketing strategies, develop close and profitable relationships with foreign customers and business partners, overcome the liability of foreignness, and successfully operate in different institutional environments? How important are they for firm survival and growth in global markets? Manuscripts may be conceptual or empirical. All manuscripts should have clear relevance to international marketing theory and practice.
Possible topics include, but are not limited to:
- Determinants and outcomes of capabilities in international market operations
- Marketing capabilities and innovation in international market operations
- The interplay between various institutional environments and firm capabilities
- Firm capabilities and the internationalization process of a firm
- Strategic orientations and firm capabilities in global markets
- Case studies of how firms create or acquire capabilities necessary to international business
- Different forms, functions, and levels of firms capabilities in international operations
- The role of firm capabilities in managing dyads, triads, networks, new ventures, and strategic alliances in international operations
- Knowledge capabilities in international operations
- How firm capabilities emerge, develop, adapt and change over time
Journal guidelines can be found here and manuscripts be submitted via the online system at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ama_jim.
Questions should be directed to:
Constantine S. Katsikeas
Editor-in-Chief, Journal of International Marketing Chair of the Marketing Division Associate Dean Arnold Ziff Research Chaired Professor in Marketing and International Management Leeds University Business School Maurice Keyworth Building University of Leeds Leeds LS2 9JT U.K.
Phone: +44 (0) 113-343-2624
Email: csk@lubs.leeds.ac.uk
Special Issue Editors
- Douglas Cumming (York University, Canada, dcumming@schulich.yorku.ca)
- Igor Filatotchev (City University London, UK, Igor.Filatotchev@city.ac.uk)
- April Knill (Florida State University, USA, aknill@cob.fsu.edu)
- Lemma Senbet (University of Maryland, USA, lsenbet@rhsmith.umd.edu)
- David Reeb (National University of Singapore, Singapore, dmreeb@nus.edu.sg)
Deadline for submission: August 31, 2015
Tentative publication date: Spring/Summer 2017
Nature of the Special Issue
Financial and legal institutions play key roles in facilitating governance through monitoring and mitigating information asymmetries, thereby enhancing international business and economic growth. Legal scholars emphasize that auditors, financial analysis, and banks serve as reputational gatekeepers that strongly influence capital market development (Coffee, 2002). Economists observe that legal institutions, such as courts and regulatory agencies, influence corporate finance and financial development by supporting private contractual arrangements (Beck and Levine, 2008). Yet, the development of financial and legal institutions varies widely across countries and political regimes. In this special issue, we seek to encourage diverse international business approaches to help foster the discourse on the relative importance of financial and legal institutions for corporate governance in different economies around the world. Further research is warranted on exactly how these institutions influence asymmetric information problems, how financial and legal institutions work in tandem and apart, and the differences in mechanism effectiveness in dissimilar economies and political regimes.
The law and finance literature highlights the importance of strong financial and legal institutions in promoting access to finance, economic development and growth. For example, stronger securities regulatory systems facilitate initial public offerings (La Porta et al., 1997, 1998, 2006), the spawning of new entrepreneurial start-ups (Klapper et al., 2006; Cumming and Knill, 2012) and growth in emerging markets (Senbet and Ncube, 1997; Allen et al., 2005; Bekaert et al., 2005). The success of these corporate endeavors, however, largely depends on the ability of corporate governance systems to mitigate agency problems and other governance conflicts specific to the particular economy (Shleifer and Vishny, 1997; John and Senbet, 1998; Gompers et al., 2003). Research shows that institutions may not only shape the nature of dominant governance problems in different countries, but also influence the efficacy of firm-level governance solutions (Chahine et al., 2012).
Recent work demonstrates that legal institutions by themselves fail to explain problems with corporate governance and more generally economic development in many markets around the world, such as China (Allen et al., 2005), India (Allen et al., 2012) and African countries (Allen et al., 2013). The success of certain countries, and the continued lack of success of others, remains largely unexplained on the basis of current understandings of the difficulties in separating ownership and control. In countries such as China, which often lack strong Western-style legal institutions and governance regulations, financial intermediaries establish other governance mechanisms that facilitate access to finance and economic growth.
Politics potentially distorts the role that legal and financial institutions play in corporate governance and skew the desired outcomes. Two dimensions within which politics can enhance or diminish the benefits that legal and financial institutions can provide in corporate governance around the world are: 1) the political economy of financial regulation (see, e.g., Rajan and Zingales, 2003), and 2) the value of political connections (among others, Fisman, 2001; Faccio et al., 2006; Claessens et al., 2008). Studies document that firms benefit from political connections, yet the impact on the international business aspects of corporate governance remains unclear as does the net or aggregate impact on industry growth.
We invite contributions to this special issue on the role of financial and legal institutions in corporate governance around the world. Our goal in this special issue is to integrate the strengths of finance, law, and international business scholars to gain insights into resolving asymmetric information and the associated governance problems in international business.
Topics
Submissions are encouraged from scholars that use different theoretical and empirical approaches to understand corporate governance, financial intermediation and growth in emerging and developed markets with an emphasis on finance, law and in politics. While not exhaustive, the following list suggests possible issues that would be appropriate to address in this special issue:
- How do financial and regulatory constraints impact strategy and growth in private versus public firms across different markets and/or over time?
- What influences regulatory competition across various economies? For instance, given that countries compete on corporate taxes, listing requirements, governance regulations, and court systems, how does regulatory competition effect FDI, or more broadly, international business?
- How do firms adapt their governance mechanisms and capital raising strategies in uncertain political and regulatory environments in different markets?
- What legal and/or political factors insulate firms in times of crisis? Do these differ across foreign and local firms?
- What is the role of financial regulation in spurring or discouraging international business and economic growth in emerging versus developed markets?
- What is the relative impact of political connectedness in different contexts in conferring special advantages to certain sectors of the economy or politically favored firms? For example, do political connections vary in their importance/effectiveness in countries with different financial and legal institutions?
- How important are property rights to financing innovation and international entrepreneurship? For instance, does the importance of property rights affect the types of financing activities in emerging and developed markets? How do differences in property rights influence sources of funding for innovative activities?
- How has the globalization of the IPO market and evolving regulation of exchanges around the world influenced international business and economic development in different countries?
- What patterns exist in disclosure policy, earnings management and accountability problems around the world and how do these patterns impact international business?
- How is the investor landscape changing? For example, what is the governance impact of private equity investors, hedge funds, sovereign wealth funds and other financial intermediaries?
- Does the political economy of international financial regulation influence how different firms raise capital in a global economy?
This Special Issue will provide an opportunity for JIBS to reach out to a wider audience that has traditionally been associated with the leading economics and finance journals. By publishing this Special Issue, JIBS will not only acknowledge the significant contribution of the “law and economics” perspective to international business research, but it will also send a strong signal that the journal wants to be an outlet of choice for top scholars working in the international economics, finance and comparative law areas.
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between August 17, 2015, and August 31, 2015, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
Cass Business School Workshop: Emerging Markets International Business
Cass Business School, in cooperation with JIBS, is pleased to host an international research workshop on “The Role of Financial and Legal Institutions in Corporate Governance” in February 2016, in conjunction with this special issue. The workshop will provide an opportunity for authors whose work has been shortlisted for the JIBS Special Issue. Experienced and distinguished scholars will serve as discussants to facilitate the development of the papers. There will be scholars interested in attending as general participants.
Details on the workshop will be forthcoming in 2015.
References
Allen, F, Carletti, E, Cull, R, Qian, J, Senbet, L, & Valenzuela, P. 2013, Resolving the African Financial Development Gap. NBER volume on African Development Successes (University of Chicago Press; edited by S. Edwards, S. Johnson and D. Weil)
Allen, F., Qian, J., & Qian, M. 2005. Law, finance and economic growth in China. Journal of Financial Economics, 77(1): 57-116.
Allen, F., Chakrabartib, R., Dec, S., Qiand, J., & Qiane, M. 2012. Financing firms in India. Journal of Financial Intermediation, 21(3): 409–445.
Beck, T. and R. Levine, 2008. Legal Institutions and Financial Development, Handbook of New Institutional Economics, Springer, Berlin.
Bekaert, G., Harvey, C. & Lundblad. C. 2005. Does financial liberalization spur growth? Journal of Financial Economics 77: 3-55.
Chahine S, Arthurs J, Filatotchev I., Hoskisson R 2012. The effects of venture capital syndicate diversity on earnings management and performance of IPOs in the US and UK: An institutional perspective. Journal of Corporate Finance, 18(1):179-192.
Claessens, S., Feijen, E. & Laeven, L. 2008. Political connections and preferential access to finance: The role of campaign contributions. Journal of Financial Economics 88: 554-580.
Coffee, J., 2002, Understanding Enron: It’s about the gatekeepers, stupid, The Business Lawyer 57: 1403-1420.
Cumming, D. & Knill, A. 2012. Disclosure, venture capital and entrepreneurial spawning. Journal of International Business Studies 43(6): 563–590.
Faccio, M., Masulis, R. & McConnell, J. 2006. Political connections and corporate bailouts. The Journal of Finance 61: 2597-2635.
Fisman, R. 2001. Estimating the value of political connections. American Economic Review: 1095-1102.
Gompers, P., Ishii, L.J. & Metrick, A. 2003. Corporate governance and equity prices. Quarterly Journal of Economics 118: 107.
John, K., & Senbet, L. 1998. Corporate governance and board effectiveness. Journal of Banking and Finance 22: 371-403.
Klapper, L., Laeven, L., & Rajan, R., 2006. Entry regulation as a barrier to entrepreneurship. Journal of Financial Economics 82:3, pp. 591-629, 2006.
La Porta, R.; F. Lopez-De-Silanes; A. Shleifer & Vishny, R. 1997. Legal determinants of external finance. The Journal of Finance LII: 1131-1150.
La Porta, R., Lopez-de-Silanes, F., Shleifer, A., & Vishny, R. 1998. Law and finance. Journal of Political Economy, 106(6): 1113–1155.
La Porta, R., Lopez-de-Silanes, F., & Shleifer, A. 2006. What works in securities laws? The Journal of Finance, 61(1): 1–32.
Rajan, R. & Zingales, L. 2003. The great reversals: the politics of financial development in the twentieth century. Journal of Financial Economics 69: 5-50.
Senbet, L. & Ncube, M. 1997. Financial regulation and liberalization in Africa under incentive problems and asymmetric information. Journal of African Economies, 6 (1): 29-88.
Shleifer, A. & Vishny, R. 1997. A survey of corporate governance. The Journal of Finance 52: 737-783.
Special Issue Editors
Douglas Cumming, J.D., Ph.D., CFA, is a Professor of Finance and Entrepreneurship and the Ontario Research Chair at the Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada. He teaches the MBA course “Venture Capital and Private Equity”. His research interests include venture capital, private equity, hedge funds, mutual funds, entrepreneurship, and law and finance. He is a Co-Editor of Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice and Finance Research Letters, and has been a guest editor for 12 special issues of top journals. He has published over 110 articles in leading refereed academic journals in finance, management, and law and economics, such as the Academy of Management Journal, Journal of Financial Economics, Review of Financial Studies, Journal of International Business Studies and the Journal of Empirical Legal Studies. He has received a number of academic best paper awards, such at the Ido Sarnat Best Paper Award from the Journal of Banking and Finance, and a best paper award from the Bank of Canada. He is the coauthor of Venture Capital and Private Equity Contracting (Elsevier Academic Press, 2nd Edition, 2013), and Hedge Fund Structure, Regulation and Performance around the World (Oxford University Press, 2013). He is the Editor of the Oxford Handbook of Entrepreneurial Finance (Oxford University Press, 2013), the Oxford Handbook of Private Equity (Oxford University Press, 2013), and the Oxford Handbook of Venture Capital (Oxford University Press, 2013). His work has been reviewed in numerous media outlets, including The Economist, The New York Times, Canadian Business, the National Post, and The New Yorker. He is a research associate with a number of institutions around the world, including Capital Markets CRC (Sydney), Cambridge University ESRC Center for Business Research (Cambridge UK), and the Center for Financial Studies (Frankfurt). Also, he has consulted for a variety of governmental and private organizations in Australasia, Europe, and North America.
Igor Filatotchev is Professor of Corporate Governance and Strategy and Associate Dean at Cass Business School, City University London, and Director of Centre for Research on Corporate Governance at Cass. He is also a Visiting Professor at Vienna University of Economics and Business. He earned his PhD in Economics from the Institute of World Economy and International Relations (Moscow, the Russian Federation). His research interests are focused on corporate governance effects on entrepreneurship and strategic decisions; sociology of capital markets. Key research programmes currently in progress include analysis of resource and strategy roles of corporate governance; corporate governance life-cycle; and a knowledge-based view on governance development in entrepreneurial firms and IPOs. He has published more than one hundred refereed academic papers, in addition to numerous books and book chapters, in the fields of corporate governance, entrepreneurship and strategy including publications in leading academic journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Academy of Management Perspectives, Strategic Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Organization Science, California Management Review, Journal of Management Studies and Journal of Management. Most recently he edited “Corporate Governance and the Business Life-cycle” (2010), London, New York: Edward Elgar, and co-edited “The Oxford Handbook of Corporate Governance” (2013), Oxford: OUP. He is an Associate Editor of Journal of Management Studies. Before joining JMS editorial team he was an Associate Editor of Corporate Governance: An International Review.
April Knill, Ph.D., is the Gene Taylor/Bank of America Professor of Finance at Florida State University. Before joining Florida State University, she was a consultant for the Development Research Group at the World Bank in Washington, DC. Her research interests include international finance, venture capital, and the intersection between law, finance and politics. She has published in journals such as Journal of Business, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Corporate Finance, Journal of Financial Intermediation, Journal of Comparative Economics and Financial Management. She has received the Dean’s Emerging Scholar Award as well as the Center for International Business Education & Research and Financial Management Association Award for the Best Dissertation in International Finance.
Lemma W. Senbet is the Executive Director of African Economic Research Consortium (www.aercafrica.org) and on leave from the University of Maryland as the William E. Mayer Chair Professor of Finance. Prior to Maryland and AERC, Lemma Senbet was a distinguished professor at the University of Wisconsin-Madison and held the Charles Albright Endowed Chair. Professor Senbet has achieved global recognition for his extensive and widely cited contributions to corporate and international finance, which have appeared in such premier journals as Journal of Finance, Review of Financial Studies, and Journal of Business. He has received numerous recognitions for his impact on the Finance profession. He has been elected twice as director of the American Finance Association and is a past president of the Western Finance Association. In 2000, he was inducted into the Financial Economists Roundtable, a distinguished group of world-wide financial economists who have made significant contributions to finance and apply research to current policy debates. In 2006, Professor was inducted Fellow of the Financial Management Association International in recognition of his career-long distinguished scholarship. In 2005, Prof Senbet was awarded an honorary doctorate by Addis Ababa University, Ethiopia's flagship university and his alma mater. Additional professional recognitions for Professor Senbet came from editorial appointments. He has been appointed to over a dozen journal editorial boards, including extended tenures with the Journal of Finance (12 yrs), Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis (6 yrs), and Financial Management (18 yrs). In 1999 he was named executive editor of FM and served two terms until 2005. In 2006 he was named Editor (Finance), JIBS, and he served five years. Prof Senbet has supervised numerous doctoral students who have gone on to become professors at leading institutions, such as Carnegie Mellon, Dartmouth, Vanderbilt, Minnesota, Florida, etc. Two of his former doctoral students are now Dean at Carnegie Mellon and Chief Economist of the US Securities and Exchange Commission, respectively. Prof Senbet has advised the World Bank, the IMF, the UN, African Development Bank, and various governmental and private agencies in USA, Canada, and Africa on issues relating to financial sector reforms and capital market development. Regarding his role in the US financial industry, Prof Senbet was a director of Fotris Funds and is currently an independent director for the Hartford Funds.
David M. Reeb holds the Mr. and Mrs. Lin Jo Yan Professorship of Banking and Finance and is a Professor in the Department of Finance at National University of Singapore (NUS) Business School. He also serves as an Editor at the Journal of International Business Studies, a Senior Fellow of the Asian Bureau of Finance and Economic Research (ABFER), and the Director of Business Doctoral Programs in NUS Business School. Dr. Reeb’s research focuses on corporate finance but also encompasses financial disclosure choices and delves into international business. His most recent publication documents how symptoms of insider trading increase after regulators, such as the Federal Reserve or the FDA, gain access to private information about the firm. Dr. Reeb’s research appears in the most influential academic journals in accounting, finance, law, and management (Journal of Finance, Journal of Financial Economics, Journal of Accounting and Economics, Accounting Review, Administrative Science Quarterly, Journal of Law and Economics, and the Journal of International Business Studies). This research generates thousands of citations, leading to features in the Wall Street Journal, BusinessWeek, The Economist, Forbes, the Financial Times, the International Herald Tribune, Inc Magazine, SmartMoney, MSNBC, CNN, Bloomberg TV, and several other major newspapers and business magazines in the US, Canada, Europe, Australia and Asia.
Description
As globalization intensifies and new middle classes emerge in most markets, multinational enterprises (MNEs) have significantly increased their international business efforts. The recorded figure for 2010 revealed a more than triple increase of the worldwide foreign direct investment (FDI) activities since the year 2000, amounting to US$20.4 trillion (UNCTAD 2011). The reason for the consistent expansion in MNEs foreign operations is closely associated with the increased realization that the presence of foreign firms is beneficial for both home and host countries. One view is that MNEs possessing sophisticated knowledge often function as a conduit for local firms to acquire foreign technology and know-how. In addition, MNEs also help in the creation of employment opportunities and an increase of exports strengthening the balance-of-payments position of the local economies (Park, 2011; Park and Ghauri, 2011). Likewise, home economies of MNEs achieve market expansion and learn about foreign markets.
However, some scholars (e.g., Chang, 2004; Ziegler, 2005) have shed light on the negative aspects of MNE operations, and even argue that MNEs are one of the primary obstacles inhibiting economic growth in developing countries. The explanations given by these scholars, proposing negative impacts are the following; often MNE activities are too vitalized and excessive, foreign firms attempt to dominate the market they enter and present a challenge to national sovereignty. Moreover, the aggravation of local competition against MNEs inevitably culls locally grown enterprises, which results in the deterioration of employment. In particular, MNEs re-invest only a fraction of their revenues in local economies and drain positive effects from both capital injections and the balance of payments. This leads to serious reductions in foreign exchange reserves, forces local governments to borrow more foreign debt and pushes the local economy into a vicious economic circle. These negative effects cause hardship for local governments and negatively influence their investments in infrastructure, education and technology development. In this vein, they suggest that MNE operations are not much different from the establishment of colonies.
A key problem is that it is perhaps hard to say that an unlimited open-door toward MNEs and limitless competition based on market principles is the only correct answer for economic growth. In other words, we cannot merely overlook the adverse aspects of MNEs, and need to practically assess the value of foreign investment. There is a general consensus that the fundamental goals and aims of MNEs are to pursue corporate profits and increase organizational competitiveness in overseas markets, and thus such gloomy opinions about MNEs are unavoidable to some extent. In this vein, it is time to think about the ways to lessen the skeptical attitudes of FDI by identifying the role of MNEs in local market developments. We also suggest that the negative impression of FDI might be significantly reduced if MNEs engage in actions that go beyond their direct economic and financial interests, involve themselves in activities that are not required by the law but further social good and use their internal resources in ways to benefit local markets through committed participation as members of society.
Taken together, the objective of this special issue is to bring both theoretical and empirical advancements examining the role of MNEs in developing local markets in various areas (e.g., economic, social, institutional and ethical developments).
Subject coverage
We seek both theoretical and empirical papers that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
- How does FDI function as a vehicle to enhance economic development in local markets? Does FDI from MNEs based in advanced economies trigger economic growth in developing countries in the long term?
- Who obtains more benefits from inward FDI between advanced and developing countries? Are there avenues for MNEs based in advanced economies to help developing countries to promote economic growth?
- Are there any different patterns of economic development through FDI between advanced and developing countries? What implications can be drawn from countries that have successfully leapfrogged into better economic status?
- What are the key factors promoting the positive spillover effects of FDI in developing economies?
- In the perspective of developing countries, what are the primary conditions that inhibit the negative economic outcomes from inward FDI?
- How does FDI contribute to social evolution, particularly in emerging and developing countries?
- What is the effect of profit remittance by MNEs in the local market economy? What encourages MNEs to re-invest profits in local markets?
- What motivates corporate social responsibility (CSR) practices in foreign markets? Is there any particular relationship between the level of foreign CSR and economic development in emerging and developing countries?
- What facilitates knowledge transfer from advanced to developing economies through FDI?
- Is there a correlation between FDI types (e.g., ‘vertical versus horizontal’ or ‘export-driven versus market-seeking’) and economic contributions in emerging and developing countries?
References
Chang, H-J. (2004), Globalization, economic development and the role of the State, London, NY: Zed Books.
Park, B. I. (2011), “Knowledge transfer of multinational enterprises and technology acquisition in international joint ventures”, International Business Review, Vol. 20, pp. 75-87.
Park, B. I. and Ghauri, P. N. (2011), “Key factors affecting acquisition of technological capabilities from foreign acquiring firms by small and medium sized local firms”, Journal of World Business, Vol. 46, pp. 116-125.
UNCTAD (2011). World investment report: Non-equity modes of international production and development. Geneva: United Nations.
Ziegler, J. (2005), L'empire de la honte, Paris: Fayard.
Notes for Prospective Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere.
All papers are refereed through a peer review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page.
Deadlines for submission
Submission of Manuscripts: April 30, 2015
Notification to Authors: July 1, 2015
Final Versions Due: December 1, 2015
The issue is published: May 2016
Editors and Notes
All papers must be submitted online. To submit a paper, please go to Online Submissions of Papers. If you experience any problems submitting your paper online, please contact submissions@inderscience.com, describing the exact problem you experience. (Please include in your email the title of the Special Issue, the title of the Journal and the names of the Guest Editors).
Guest Editor(s) contact details:
Dr. Pervez N. Ghauri
King’s College London, Department of Management, 150 Stamford Street, London, SE1 9NH, UK
Tel: 00-44-(0)20-7848-4122, Email: pervez.ghauri@kcl.ac.uk
Dr. Byung Il Park
Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, College of Business Administration, 270, Imun-dong, Dongdaemun-gu, Seoul, 130-791, South Korea
Tel: 00-82-(0)10-4157-3532, Email: leedspark@hufs.ac.kr
As globalization intensifies and new middle classes emerge in most markets, multinational enterprises (MNEs) have significantly increased their international business efforts. The recorded figure for 2010 revealed a more than triple increase of the worldwide foreign direct investment (FDI) activities since the year 2000, amounting to US$20.4 trillion (UNCTAD 2011). The reason for the consistent expansion in MNEs foreign operations is closely associated with the increased realization that the presence of foreign firms is beneficial for both home and host countries. One view is that MNEs possessing sophisticated knowledge often function as a conduit for local firms to acquire foreign technology and know-how. In addition, MNEs also help in the creation of employment opportunities and an increase of exports strengthening the balance-of-payments position of the local economies (Park, 2011; Park and Ghauri, 2011). Likewise, home economies of MNEs achieve market expansion and learn about foreign markets.
However, some scholars (e.g., Chang, 2004; Ziegler, 2005) have shed light on the negative aspects of MNE operations, and even argue that MNEs are one of the primary obstacles inhibiting economic growth in developing countries. The explanations given by these scholars, proposing negative impacts are the following; often MNE activities are too vitalized and excessive, foreign firms attempt to dominate the market they enter and present a challenge to national sovereignty. Moreover, the aggravation of local competition against MNEs inevitably culls locally grown enterprises, which results in the deterioration of employment. In particular, MNEs re-invest only a fraction of their revenues in local economies and drain positive effects from both capital injections and the balance of payments. This leads to serious reductions in foreign exchange reserves, forces local governments to borrow more foreign debt and pushes the local economy into a vicious economic circle. These negative effects cause hardship for local governments and negatively influence their investments in infrastructure, education and technology development. In this vein, they suggest that MNE operations are not much different from the establishment of colonies.
A key problem is that it is perhaps hard to say that an unlimited open-door toward MNEs and limitless competition based on market principles is the only correct answer for economic growth. In other words, we cannot merely overlook the adverse aspects of MNEs, and need to practically assess the value of foreign investment. There is a general consensus that the fundamental goals and aims of MNEs are to pursue corporate profits and increase organizational competitiveness in overseas markets, and thus such gloomy opinions about MNEs are unavoidable to some extent. In this vein, it is time to think about the ways to lessen the skeptical attitudes of FDI by identifying the role of MNEs in local market developments. We also suggest that the negative impression of FDI might be significantly reduced if MNEs engage in actions that go beyond their direct economic and financial interests, involve themselves in activities that are not required by the law but further social good and use their internal resources in ways to benefit local markets through committed participation as members of society.
Taken together, the objective of this special issue is to bring both theoretical and empirical advancements examining the role of MNEs in developing local markets in various areas (e.g., economic, social, institutional and ethical developments).
Subject coverage
We seek both theoretical and empirical papers that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
- How does FDI function as a vehicle to enhance economic development in local markets? Does FDI from MNEs based in advanced economies trigger economic growth in developing countries in the long term?
- Who obtains more benefits from inward FDI between advanced and developing countries? Are there avenues for MNEs based in advanced economies to help developing countries to promote economic growth?
- Are there any different patterns of economic development through FDI between advanced and developing countries? What implications can be drawn from countries that have successfully leapfrogged into better economic status?
- What are the key factors promoting the positive spillover effects of FDI in developing economies?
- In the perspective of developing countries, what are the primary conditions that inhibit the negative economic outcomes from inward FDI?
- How does FDI contribute to social evolution, particularly in emerging and developing countries?
- What is the effect of profit remittance by MNEs in the local market economy? What encourages MNEs to re-invest profits in local markets?
- What motivates corporate social responsibility (CSR) practices in foreign markets? Is there any particular relationship between the level of foreign CSR and economic development in emerging and developing countries?
- What facilitates knowledge transfer from advanced to developing economies through FDI?
- Is there a correlation between FDI types (e.g., ‘vertical versus horizontal’ or ‘export-driven versus market-seeking’) and economic contributions in emerging and developing countries?
References
Chang, H-J. (2004), Globalization, economic development and the role of the State, London, NY: Zed Books.
Park, B. I. (2011), “Knowledge transfer of multinational enterprises and technology acquisition in international joint ventures”, International Business Review, Vol. 20, pp. 75-87.
Park, B. I. and Ghauri, P. N. (2011), “Key factors affecting acquisition of technological capabilities from foreign acquiring firms by small and medium sized local firms”, Journal of World Business, Vol. 46, pp. 116-125.
UNCTAD (2011). World investment report: Non-equity modes of international production and development. Geneva: United Nations.
Ziegler, J. (2005), L'empire de la honte, Paris: Fayard.
Notes for Prospective Authors
Submitted papers should not have been previously published nor be currently under consideration for publication elsewhere.
All papers are refereed through a peer review process. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers are available on the Author Guidelines page.
Deadlines for submission
Submission of Manuscripts: January 15, 2015
Notification to Authors: April 1, 2015
Final Versions Due: December 1, 2015
The issue is published: May 2016
Editors and Notes
All papers must be submitted online. To submit a paper, please go to Online Submissions of Papers. If you experience any problems submitting your paper online, please contact submissions@inderscience.com, describing the exact problem you experience. (Please include in your email the title of the Special Issue, the title of the Journal and the names of the Guest Editors).
Guest Editor(s) contact details:
Dr. Pervez N. Ghauri
King’s College London, Department of Management, 150 Stamford Street, London, SE1 9NH, UK
Tel: 00-44-(0)20-7848-4122, Email: pervez.ghauri@kcl.ac.uk
Dr. Byung Il Park
Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, College of Business Administration, 270, Imun-dong, Dongdaemun-gu, Seoul, 130-791, South Korea
Tel: 00-82-(0)10-4157-3532, Email: leedspark@hufs.ac.kr
The book “SAGE Handbook of Questionnaire Design” is intended to be a comprehensive, authoritative volume that will eventually operate as the Benchmark work in the field of survey design. There is definitely a need for an up-to-date handbook on questionnaire design. Many books have been published on the topic, but most of those books are greatly outdated. There have been many developments in questionnaire design in general during the past several years, and some interesting development in specific fields of research, so a handbook that can provide a more updated account and be a one-stop source would be very helpful for researchers.
The proposed book will be divided in two parts. The first part will focus on issues in basic research using questionnaire design. The second part will focus on issues in applied research using questionnaire design. Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Theory-driven versus theory-seeking approaches to survey design
- Use of English versus other languages in survey design
- How questions frame answers in survey design
- User-computer interactions issues in survey design
- Cross-cultural differences in participants’ responses to surveys
- Statistical issues in survey design
- Ethical issues in survey design
- Surveys within public versus private domains
Guidelines: Book chapter’s proposals (300-500 words, due May 31) should be submitted to Stanley.Gaines@brunel.ac.uk.
Please include:
- Author(s) information (name, affiliation, contact details)
- Provisional book chapter title
- Summary of chapter including main idea, preliminary conclusions, other main points
- The chapter proposal does not have to be very detailed. It just should give an idea what the chapter will be about, so that we could assess its fit and suitability for the book.
Important dates:
- Submission deadline for chapter proposals (provisional title and 300-500 words abstract): May 31, 2014
- Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals: July 15, 2014
- Deadline for full chapter draft (5,000-10,000 words): November 22, 2014
- November 22-December 31: chapter draft revisions based on the feedback from the editorial team, work with authors towards bringing their chapters up to the expectations
- Final notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals, suggestions for further improvement: December 31, 2014
- Deadline for submission of final chapters revised per feedback from the editorial team: February 15, 2015
Accepted chapters will be compiled in a book, which will be published by SAGE.
Book Editors and contact details:
- Dr. Stanley O. Gaines, Jr., Brunel University, United Kingdom (Stanley.Gaines@brunel.ac.uk)
- Dr. Vasyl Taras, University of North Carolina at Greensboro, United States (v_taras@uncg.edu)
The Journal of Emerging Knowledge on Emerging Markets (JEKEM) is announcing preparations for the second issue of the India, China & America Institute's new Working Papers Journal. The, Journal of Emerging Knowledge on Emerging Markets is to be published in May 2010. This journal provides a forum for the exchange of ideas and shared learning experiences among policy makers, scholars and practitioners on the global economic impact of India, China and America. For more information visit icainstitute.org.
You are invited to submit your scholarly works-in-progress that are related to the rise of emerging economies, in particular China and India, and their impact on global markets, global resources and geopolitics of the world. The following topics are of particular interest:
- Agriculture and Food Sciences
- Corporate Social Responsibility
- Education
- Emerging Markets
- Energy
- Environment & Conservation
- Global Compliance and Global Transactions
- Healthcare and Life Sciences
- Information and Communication Technology
- Innovation
- Logistics & Transportation
- Manufacturing
- Media and Entertainment
- Policy Analysis
- Real Estate
- Retail
- Security
- Strategic Sourcing
Focus and Scope
The India, China & America Institute's Working Papers Journal, Journal of Emerging Knowledge on Emerging Markets (JEKEM), seeks to facilitate the exchange of ideas and shared learning experiences among policy makers, business executives and thought leaders on issues related to the rise of emerging economies, in particular China and India, and their impact on
global markets, global resources and geopolitics of the world. The ICA Institute offers this journal in order to provide an open access forum to identify and drive synergies among India, China and America in the areas of emerging markets, commercial growth and the alignment of policies for the benefit of a vast number of people.
For our purposes, Working Papers are defined as any pre-publication version of academic articles, book chapters, hypothesis, or reviews. The Working Papers posted on this site are deemed to be in-progress, or under submission, or even in press. The author(s) offer these Working Papers primarily in the interests of scholarship, and it is understood that they
may not be refereed. We welcome submissions of Working Papers from anyone. These Working Papers may be downloaded and also cited without prior permission from the author, however, are, of course, subject to the fair use of professional scholarship. Any comments on the Working papers and/or questions should be sent directly to the author(s).
For more information about submissions, write to icainstitute@gmail.com
Peer Review Process
Since the Journal of Emerging Knowledge on Emerging Markets seeks to promote discussion on research in- progress, reviews are not as rigorous as refereed or peer-reviewed journal reviews. Submissions are blind-reviewed by members of the Editorial Review Board for the purpose of eliminating biased, illogical, irrelevant or unsubstantiated submissions.
Deadline for submissions to the second issue: March 15th, 2010
Please direct all inquiries to Roxanne Russell, Managing Editor,
roxanne@icainstitute.org
Thanks for the continuing interest in our work,
L. Roxanne Russell
India, China & America Institute
icainstitute@gmail.com
“Social entrepreneurship” focuses entrepreneurial attention on the launch and growth of businesses that address social problems and social needs. Evidence of widespread moral decay in firms in many nations has fostered a greater emphasis on business ethics and social responsibility. Indeed recent economic challenges have widened the divide between “haves” and “have-nots”. The need for innovative solutions to such social problems is stark. As a field of inquiry, social entrepreneurship offers practical solutions to pressing social problems. In turn, a new generation of social entrepreneurs is gaining the knowledge and skills needed to make a difference. Social entrepreneurship, as an emerging field and as a force for social change, draws from several disciplines, including business, sociology, public administration, and social work. Theory and research have been limited and have largely not provided sufficient answers regarding the best mix and sequence of factors within a social entrepreneurship program to bring about the greatest impact. In order to design and implement effective social entrepreneurship programs that will provide the best possible educational experience to students, we need stronger theory and more convincing research evidence on the many cause-effect relationships in a successful social entrepreneurship program.
Objectives of the Book: We invite chapter proposals across all business and social disciplines that address both theoretical and empirical aspects of social entrepreneurship. We are especially interested in chapters that offer practical solutions and suggestions for the social entrepreneur; for example, in the meaning, measurement, and mission of this growing field. We also invite case studies and review papers. Overall, the goal of the book is to engage scholars and practitioners across disciplines in an examination and debate about various approaches of enacting programs of social change.
Suggested Themes: include, but are not limited to, the following:
- An examination of social entrepreneurship throughout history
- Definition and boundary issues of social entrepreneurship
- Research methodology and measurement issues in social entrepreneurship
- Ethics and social entrepreneurship
- Decision making in social entrepreneurial ventures
- Cultural differences in social entrepreneurship
- Gender differences in social entrepreneurship
- Personality (and other) traits of social entrepreneurs
- The impact of age and experience on social entrepreneurial ventures
- Psychological vs. financial profit in social entrepreneurship
- Social entrepreneurship in academia
- Technology as a driver for social entrepreneurship
- Politics, government, and social entrepreneurship
- Healthcare and social entrepreneurship
- The media and social entrepreneurship
- Social media as a vehicle for social entrepreneurship
- Social entrepreneurship and the sustainable organization
- Leadership and management issues in social entrepreneurial organizations
- Social entrepreneurship at individual, community, and societal levels
- Examination and analysis of successful social entrepreneurial organizations
- Social entrepreneurship on the local or community level
- The development of social entrepreneurship in children and teens
- Financing and funding social entrepreneurial ventures
- Social entrepreneurship and special interest groups
- Social entrepreneurship and the environment
- Conflict management and negotiation in social entrepreneurship
- Structuring the social entrepreneurial organization – is hierarchy necessary?
- Recognizing and rewarding social entrepreneurs and their employees
- Social entrepreneurial ventures, charities, and nonprofits – boundary issues?
- Opportunity recognition in social entrepreneurial ventures
- The future of social entrepreneurship
The above themes are only examples. We encourage authors to generate thoughtful chapter proposals that address any relevant aspect of social entrepreneurship.
Submission Procedure:
Submit a one- to three-page chapter proposal on or before June 15, 2012, explaining the basis and approach of the proposed chapter. Also, include for each of the coauthors a brief biography including full name, terminal degree, current institutional affiliation and position, and a listing of any related publications. For each coauthor include contact information, so we can readily contact you, to include: email address, mobile phone, work phone, home phone, Skype user name, and complete postal mailing address. Authors will be notified by June 30, 2012, if their chapter has been accepted, and will at that time receive further information about the format and additional guidelines to follow in the preparation of the full chapter.
Send proposals and inquiries to both:
Larry Pate at larry.pate@gmail.com and Charles Wankel wankelc@verizon.net as either as a PDF or Word file.
PUBLICATION SCHEDULE:
Book chapter proposals received: June 15, 2012
Notification of accepted chapter proposals: June 30, 2012
Receipt of full book chapters: November 15, 2012
Chapter authors receive reviews with feedback: January 5, 2013
Final revisions due: February 15, 2013
Book release: August 2013
A 3-page abstract due: Dec 1, 2013
Full papers due: April 30, 2014
The countries that make up South Asia have some of the world’s largest and most geographically dispersed diasporas (Chand, 2013). While diasporas have existed for thousands of years, globalization and increasing human and capital mobility have enhanced their importance and left them uniquely positioned to act as facilitators of trade and investment between their countries of origin (COO) and their countries of residence (COR). Modern diasporas have played vital roles in facilitating trade and investments between their COO and COR, including direct activities such as investing in their COOs (Buckley, Wang, & Clegg, 2007; Geithner, Johnson, & Chen, 2005) as well as more indirect facilitation activities such as providing transnational social networks that serve as conduits for trade (Khanna, 2007; Saxenian, 2002; Chand, 2010), helping with institutional and human capital development in the COO (Saxenian, 2006), driving the ‘immigrant effect’ (Chung & Tung, 2013; Chung, Enderwick & Naruemitmongkonsuk, 2010), improving the image of the COO in the COR (Chand & Tung, 2011), introducing the culture of the COO in the COR (Chand, 2010), contributing to ‘soft power’ for the COO (Chand & Tung, 2011), and contributing to technology transfer and capacity development in the COO (Lin, 2010). The roles of diasporas are undergoing important changes as the pressures of globalization on the one hand and the pull of the homeland on the other presents them with a unique set of challenges. While COOs try to leverage them as assets, there is also pressure to become a part of the COR, leading to emerging questions of cross-national and intra-national identity. The rising level of diaspora return to their COO and the increasing importance of brain circulation give this topic special importance in the twenty-first century. An organized diaspora community, particularly when augmented by large numbers and organizational resources, can command considerable political capital in a host country. This political capital can be used to help improve the nation brand of the COO and in improving its image in the COR.
This special issue call especially welcomes papers focusing on South Asian diasporas, but is not restricted to them. We are also open to conceptual/theoretical papers on diasporas that draw implications for South Asia and its relationship with its diasporas, and comparative research on other diaspora communities that can have lessons for South Asian businesses and policy makers.
Topics of interest include, but are not limited to:
- Comparisons of diaspora management across countries, with implications for the South Asian region
- The genesis of individual country diasporas (for e.g., India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh) and their role in driving trade and investment between the COO and COR
- Case studies of South Asian diaspora led organizations that span across multiple countries and explain how they help facilitate trade and FDI
- Conceptual papers dealing with creating and managing diasporas from a COO perspective
- The geopolitical importance of South Asian diasporas
- Challenges of diasporas living in CORs, and its effects on transnational trade
- Social networks of South Asian diasporas, and their effects on cross-border trade and investment
- Diaspora led FDI and its effects on policy making in COOs
- South Asian diasporas as agents of institutional and human capital development in their COO
- The role of South Asian diasporas in driving the COO effect
- Diasporas caused by ‘pull’ or ‘push’ effects
- Conceptual papers on diasporas with implications for South Asian countries and their relationship with their diasporas
- South Asia as ‘COR’ – intra-regional migration and implications for South Asian diasporas
- Differences between South Asia and the West as COR
The guest editors are happy to discuss initial ideas for papers and can be contacted directly via email.
Contributors should note:
- This call is open and competitive, and the submitted papers will be double-blind reviewed as per the editorial policies of the South Asian Journal of Global Business Research.
- Submitted papers must be based on original material not accepted by, or under consideration with, any other journal or outlet.
- For empirical papers based on data sets from which multiple papers have been generated, authors must provide the guest editors with copies of all other papers based on the same data.
- The guest editors will select a limited number of papers to be included in the special issue.
Other papers submitted to the special issue may be considered for publication in other issues of the journal at the discretion of the Editor-in-Chief.
Deadlines: We invite authors to email their abstracts (up to 3 pages including references) to Masud Chand, Shaista E. Khilji, Henry Chung, or Florian Täube at: Masud.Chand@wichita.edu, shaistakhilji@gmail.com, H.Chung@massey.ac.nz, or Florian.Taeube@ebs.edu by January 30, 2014 for a review. Authors will be notified of a decision by early March. Those invited to submit a full paper (8000 words) will be asked to meet the June 30, 2014 deadline. Please note that all full papers are to be submitted via ScholarOne, and subject to a double blind review before being accepted for publication. We are also open to authors submitting full papers without submitting an abstract first.
Anticipated Publication Date: Late 2015/Early 2016
About the South Asian Journal of Global Business Research (SAJGBR) SAJGBR is multidisciplinary in scope. We accept submissions in any of the business fields—Accounting, Economics, Finance, Management, Marketing and Technology—and are open to other disciplines that enhance understanding of international business activity, including anthropology, political science, psychology and sociology, etc. However, authors must clearly underline how their study relates to the advancement of international business theory and/or practice. We are especially interested in manuscripts that integrate theories and concepts taken from different fields and disciplines. We aim to publish high quality research articles, policy reviews, book reviews, country/practitioner/personal perspectives, conference reflections and commentaries, which contribute to the scholarly and managerial understanding of contemporary South Asian businesses and diaspora. We encourage authors to study relevance of mainstream theories or practices in their fields of interest, critique and offer fresh insights on South Asian businesses and diaspora, as well contribute to the development of new theories. South Asian Journal of Global Business Research is published by Emerald Group Publishing Limited. For more information, please refer to: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/sajgbr.htm
References: Buckley, P., Wang, C. and Clegg, J. (2007). The impact of foreign ownership, local ownership and industry characteristics on spillover effects from foreign direct investment in China. International Business Review, 16 (2): 142-158. Chand, M. (2010). Diasporas as Drivers of National Competitiveness. In T.M. Devinney, T. Pedersen, & L. Tihanyi (2010), Advances in International Management: The Past, Present and Future of International Business and Management, Volume 23,(pp. 583-602). New York, NY: Emerald. Chand, M. and Tung, R.L. (2011) Diasporas as the Boundary-Spanners: The role of Trust in Business Facilitation. Journal of Trust Research, 1 (1), 107-129. Chung, H.F.L and Tung, R.L. (2013). Immigrant social networks and foreign entry: Australia and New Zealand firms in the European Union and Greater China. International Business Review, 22 (1): 18-31 Chand, M. (2013). The South Asian diaspora- knowledge flows in the age of globalization. In Globalization, change and learning in South Asia (Khilji, S.E., & Rowley, C). Chandos Publishing: Oxford. Chung, H.F.L., Enderwick, P. and Naruemitmongkonsuk, J. (2010). Immigrant employee effects in international strategy: An exploratory study of international service firms. International Marketing Review, 27 (6): 652-675 Geithner, P., Johnson, P. & Chen, L. (Eds.) (2005). Diaspora philanthropy and equitable development in China and India. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. Khanna, T. (2007). Billions of Entrepreneurs: How China and India are reshaping their futures- and yours. Harvard Business School Press, Harvard University Press, Boston, MA. Kotabe, M., Riddle, L., Sonderegger, P. and Täube, F. (2013). Diaspora Investment and Entrepreneurship: The Role of People, Their Movements, and Capital in the International Economy, Journal of International Management, 19(1): 3-5. Lin, X. (2010). The diaspora solution to innovation capacity development: Immigrant entrepreneurs in the contemporary world. Thunderbird International Business Review, 52 (2): 123-136. Ministry of Overseas Indian Affairs ( 2012). Annual Report 2011-2012. http://www.moia.gov.in/writereaddata/pdf/Annual_Report_2011-2012.pdf Saxenian, A. (2002). Brain circulation: How high-skill immigration makes everyone better off. Saxenian, A. (2006). The new Argonauts: Regional advantage in a global economy. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA. Sonderegger, P. and Täube, F. (2010). Cluster lifecyle and Diaspora effects: evidence from the Indian IT cluster in Bangalore, Journal of International Management 16(4): 383-397.
South Asian Journal for Global Business Research Special Issue Call for Papers
South Asian Diasporas: Facilitators of Trade, Investment, and National Competitive Advantage
Guest Editors:
Masud Chand (Wichita State University, Wichita, Kansas, USA)
Shaista E. Khilji (George Washington University, Washington DC, USA)
Florian Täube (EBS Business School, Germany)
Henry Chung (Massey University, New Zealand)
A 3-page abstract due: Dec 1, 2013
Full papers due: April 30, 2014
The countries that make up South Asia have some of the world’s largest and most geographically dispersed diasporas (Chand, 2013). While diasporas have existed for thousands of years, globalization and increasing human and capital mobility have enhanced their importance and left them uniquely positioned to act as facilitators of trade and investment between their countries of origin (COO) and their countries of residence (COR). Modern diasporas have played vital roles in facilitating trade and investments between their COO and COR, including direct activities such as investing in their COOs (Buckley, Wang, & Clegg, 2007; Geithner, Johnson, & Chen, 2005) as well as more indirect facilitation activities such as providing transnational social networks that serve as conduits for trade (Khanna, 2007; Saxenian, 2002; Chand, 2010), helping with institutional and human capital development in the COO (Saxenian, 2006), driving the ‘immigrant effect’ (Chung & Tung, 2013; Chung, Enderwick & Naruemitmongkonsuk, 2010), improving the image of the COO in the COR (Chand & Tung, 2011), introducing the culture of the COO in the COR (Chand, 2010), contributing to ‘soft power’ for the COO (Chand & Tung, 2011), and contributing to technology transfer and capacity development in the COO (Lin, 2010).
The roles of diasporas are undergoing important changes as the pressures of globalization on the one hand and the pull of the homeland on the other presents them with a unique set of challenges. While COOs try to leverage them as assets, there is also pressure to become a part of the COR, leading to emerging questions of cross-national and intra-national identity. The rising level of diaspora return to their COO and the increasing importance of brain circulation give this topic special importance in the twenty-first century. An organized diaspora community, particularly when augmented by large numbers and organizational resources, can command considerable political capital in a host country. This political capital can be used to help improve the nation brand of the COO and in improving its image in the COR.
This special issue call especially welcomes papers focusing on South Asian diasporas, but is not restricted to them. We are also open to conceptual/theoretical papers on diasporas that draw implications for South Asia and its relationship with its diasporas, and comparative research on other diaspora communities that can have lessons for South Asian businesses and policy makers.
Topics of interest include, but are not limited to:
- Comparisons of diaspora management across countries, with implications for the South Asian region
- The genesis of individual country diasporas (for e.g., India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh) and their role in driving trade and investment between the COO and COR
- Case studies of South Asian diaspora led organizations that span across multiple countries and explain how they help facilitate trade and FDI
- Conceptual papers dealing with creating and managing diasporas from a COO perspective
- The geopolitical importance of South Asian diasporas
- Challenges of diasporas living in CORs, and its effects on transnational trade
- Social networks of South Asian diasporas, and their effects on cross-border trade and investment
- Diaspora led FDI and its effects on policy making in COOs
- South Asian diasporas as agents of institutional and human capital development in their COO
- The role of South Asian diasporas in driving the COO effect
- Diasporas caused by ‘pull’ or ‘push’ effects
- Conceptual papers on diasporas with implications for South Asian countries and their relationship with their diasporas
- South Asia as ‘COR’ – intra-regional migration and implications for South Asian diasporas
- Differences between South Asia and the West as COR
The guest editors are happy to discuss initial ideas for papers and can be contacted directly via email.
Contributors should note:
- This call is open and competitive, and the submitted papers will be double-blind reviewed as per the editorial policies of the South Asian Journal of Global Business Research.
- Submitted papers must be based on original material not accepted by, or under consideration with, any other journal or outlet.
- For empirical papers based on data sets from which multiple papers have been generated, authors must provide the guest editors with copies of all other papers based on the same data.
- The guest editors will select a limited number of papers to be included in the special issue. Other papers submitted to the special issue may be considered for publication in other issues of the journal at the discretion of the Editor-in-Chief.
Deadlines:
We invite authors to email their abstracts (up to 3 pages including references) to Masud Chand, Shaista E. Khilji, Henry Chung, or Florian Täube at: Masud.Chand@wichita.edu, shaistakhilji@gmail.com, H.Chung@massey.ac.nz, or Florian.Taeube@ebs.edu by December 1, 2013 for a review. Authors will be notified of a decision by early Jan 2014. Those invited to submit a full paper (8000 words) will be asked to meet the April 30, 2014 deadline. Please note that all full papers are to be submitted via ScholarOne, and subject to a double blind review before being accepted for publication. We are also open to authors submitting full papers without submitting an abstract first.
Anticipated Publication Date: 2015
About the South Asian Journal of Global Business Research (SAJGBR)
SAJGBR is multidisciplinary in scope. We accept submissions in any of the business fields—Accounting, Economics, Finance, Management, Marketing and Technology—and are open to other disciplines that enhance understanding of international business activity, including anthropology, political science, psychology and sociology, etc. However, authors must clearly underline how their study relates to the advancement of international business theory and/or practice. We are especially interested in manuscripts that integrate theories and concepts taken from different fields and disciplines.
We aim to publish high quality research articles, policy reviews, book reviews, country/practitioner/personal perspectives, conference reflections and commentaries, which contribute to the scholarly and managerial understanding of contemporary South Asian businesses and diaspora. We encourage authors to study relevance of mainstream theories or practices in their fields of interest, critique and offer fresh insights on South Asian businesses and diaspora, as well contribute to the development of new theories.
South Asian Journal of Global Business Research is published by Emerald Group Publishing Limited. For more information, please refer to: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/sajgbr.htm
References:
Buckley, P., Wang, C. and Clegg, J. (2007). The impact of foreign ownership, local ownership and industry characteristics on spillover effects from foreign direct investment in China. International Business Review, 16 (2): 142-158.
Chand, M. (2010). Diasporas as Drivers of National Competitiveness. In T.M. Devinney, T. Pedersen, & L. Tihanyi (2010), Advances in International Management: The Past, Present and Future of International Business and Management, Volume 23,(pp. 583-602). New York, NY: Emerald.
Chand, M. and Tung, R.L. (2011) Diasporas as the Boundary-Spanners: The role of Trust in Business Facilitation. Journal of Trust Research, 1 (1), 107-129.
Chung, H.F.L and Tung, R.L. (2013). Immigrant social networks and foreign entry: Australia and New Zealand firms in the European Union and Greater China. International Business Review, 22 (1): 18-31
Chand, M. (2013). The South Asian diaspora- knowledge flows in the age of globalization. In Globalization, change and learning in South Asia (Khilji, S.E., & Rowley, C). Chandos Publishing: Oxford.
Chung, H.F.L., Enderwick, P. and Naruemitmongkonsuk, J. (2010). Immigrant employee effects in international strategy: An exploratory study of international service firms. International Marketing Review, 27 (6): 652-675
Geithner, P., Johnson, P. & Chen, L. (Eds.) (2005). Diaspora philanthropy and equitable development in China and India. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Khanna, T. (2007). Billions of Entrepreneurs: How China and India are reshaping their futures- and yours. Harvard Business School Press, Harvard University Press, Boston, MA.
Kotabe, M., Riddle, L., Sonderegger, P. and Täube, F. (2013). Diaspora Investment and Entrepreneurship: The Role of People, Their Movements, and Capital in the International Economy, Journal of International Management, 19(1): 3-5.
Lin, X. (2010). The diaspora solution to innovation capacity development: Immigrant entrepreneurs in the contemporary world. Thunderbird International Business Review, 52 (2): 123-136.
Ministry of Overseas Indian Affairs ( 2012). Annual Report 2011-2012. http://www.moia.gov.in/writereaddata/pdf/Annual_Report_2011-2012.pdf
Saxenian, A. (2002). Brain circulation: How high-skill immigration makes everyone better off. http://www.brookings.edu/articles/2002/winter_immigration_saxenian.aspx.
Saxenian, A. (2006). The new Argonauts: Regional advantage in a global economy. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA.
Sonderegger, P. and Täube, F. (2010). Cluster lifecyle and Diaspora effects: evidence from the Indian IT cluster in Bangalore, Journal of International Management 16(4): 383-397.
Special Issue of Journal of Global Mobility
In the Hollywood blockbuster movie about the father of the atomic bomb, the main character, Oppenheimer, goes through many dramatic events before he becomes the “destroyer of worlds”. In real life, the physicist J. Robert Oppenheimer may have applied less melodramatic, if not boring, literature reviews (LRs) of the work of many fellow scientists to figure out how to advance the knowledge he needed to make the atomic bomb. LRs are essential for scientific cumulative knowledge development (Kepes, Bennett & McDaniel, 2014).
Systematic Literature Reviews (SLRs) have become the “gold standard”, initially in medical research but now even in the social sciences, including management (Atkinson, 2023b; Tranfield, Denyer and Smart, 2003). Although there is no generally accepted definition of an SLR, many scholars would agree that an SLR can be described as a reliable, scientific overview of extant research on a subject area or topic and that the purpose is to identify, appraise and synthesize all relevant studies using a transparent, replicable process (Petticrew and Roberts, 2008; Tranfield et al. 2003). The methods of SLRs vary but are typically undertaken through several pre-determined steps. One such method is the medical-research inspired PRISMA Statement consisting of a 27-item checklist (Moher et al., 2009). More often applied in the social sciences is the SALSA framework (Search, AppraisaL, Synthesis and Analysis) (Grant & Booth, 2009).
Other Literature Reviews
There are several additional ways, besides SLRs, to identify, appraise, and synthesize a range of relevant studies to summarize prior knowledge. Three major types are: Narrative Reviews, Descriptive Reviews and Scoping Reviews (Pare et al., 2015; Schryen et al., 2020). Basically, the Narrative Review attempts to identify what has been written on a subject or topic. There is usually no intention to generalize or generate cumulative knowledge since they do not involve systematic and comprehensive search of all relevant literature. The Descriptive Review collects, codifies, and analyzes numeric data in a specific research area to determine whether they support or reveal any patterns or trends. Hence, these reviews may claim to represent the state of the art in a research area. Finally, a Scoping Review tries to estimate the available literature on a particular topic. Such reviews may be undertaken for preliminary examination of a research area before engaging with it any further. These three types of LRs focus on a broad coverage of the literature rather than any deep coverage. Other types of LRs include explanation building Theoretical Reviews and Realist Reviews as well as Critical Reviews, making a critical assessment of extant literature (Breslin & Gatrell, 2023; Munn et al, 2018; Paré et al., 2015; Schryen et al., 2020).
Although probably best suited for SLRs, the output of all types of LRs can be further analyzed and re-imagined by bibliographic methods. Such techniques combine classification and visualization. Despite a growing interest in such methods, there exists little information on best practices and guidelines regarding studies involving bibliographic methods. Suffice it to say that bibliometric methods rely on statistical methods to analyze bibliographic and citation data (Block & Fisch, 2020; Zupic & Čater, 2015).
Literature Reviews and Generative AI
The amount of work needed to carry out a LR could be substantial, requiring sizable resources and considerable time. Therefore, recent developments in the field of Generative AI have been examined for undertaking such reviews. While the pros and cons are still debated about their suitability, the development of such tools is extremely fast. It is safe to assume that the application of AI in research has just started. In the future, AI may, for example, create continuous up-to-date literature reviews, always covering the current state of the research (Atkinson, 2023a; Burger et al., 2023). But we are not there yet, and scholars may at present use Generative AI more like a virtual research assistant than an automatic tool to create SLRs (Singh & Singh, 2023).
Focus of the Special Issue
Topic/Area of Literature Reviews
There must be a match between the submitted LR and what JGM publishes, i.e. research on global employees who cross borders physically and/or virtually for work purposes. These include corporate and self-initiated expatriates, as well as other forms of global employees, such as frequent international business travellers, short-term assignees, and migrant workers.
For more details on the remit of JGM, please visit: https://emeraldgrouppublishing.com/journal/jgm?id=jgm. To enhance the contribution of the submission, the LR should be as unique as possible. One way is to examine a topic/area where no previous review has been conducted. Another alternative could be to conduct a LR on phenomena that combine traditionally demarcated global mobility areas. Yet another option is to update obsolete or incomplete literature studies.
The Ultimate Test of a Literature Review.
No matter the choice of topic/area and the way to undertake a LR, the contribution needs to be clear and significant. Since the reason for conducting a LR is to acquire new knowledge, a relevant question to ask is what we learned from a specific LR that we did not know before. Did it provide an updated understanding by integrating and synthesizing extant knowledge? A related issue concerns the usefulness of that knowledge. Did it identify knowledge gaps or inconsistencies? And, if so, how can this new knowledge guide future research to further advance our knowledge about the reviewed topic/area? (Paul et al., 2021).
Submission Process and Timeline
To be considered for the Special Issue, manuscripts must be submitted no later than October 1, 2024, 5:00pm Central European Time. Submitted papers will undergo a double-blind peer review process and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a special issue editor – in this case, one of JGM’s editorial team members. The final acceptance is dependent on the review team’s judgments of the paper’s contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the Journal of Global Mobility author guidelines, available at www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm. Please remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the reviewers. Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jgmob. For enquiries regarding the special issue, please contact Professor Jan Selmer at selmer@mgmt.au.dk or Professor Margaret Shaffer at margaret.shaffer@ou.edu.
Important Dates
Paper submission deadline: October 1, 2024
Acceptance notification: July 2025
Publication: September 2025
In the Hollywood blockbuster movie about the father of the atomic bomb, the main character, Oppenheimer, goes through many dramatic events before he becomes the “destroyer of worlds”. In real life, the physicist J. Robert Oppenheimer may have applied less melodramatic, if not boring, literature reviews (LRs) of the work of many fellow scientists to figure out how to advance the knowledge he needed to make the atomic bomb. LRs are essential for scientific cumulative knowledge development (Kepes, Bennett & McDaniel, 2014).
Systematic Literature Reviews (SLRs) have become the “gold standard”, initially in medical research but now even in the social sciences, including management (Atkinson, 2023b; Tranfield, Denyer and Smart, 2003). Although there is no generally accepted definition of an SLR, many scholars would agree that an SLR can be described as a reliable, scientific overview of extant research on a subject area or topic and that the purpose is to identify, appraise and synthesize all relevant studies using a transparent, replicable process (Petticrew and Roberts, 2008; Tranfield et al. 2003). The methods of SLRs vary but are typically undertaken through several pre-determined steps. One such method is the medical-research inspired PRISMA Statement consisting of a 27-item checklist (Moher et al., 2009). More often applied in the social sciences is the SALSA framework (Search, AppraisaL, Synthesis and Analysis) (Grant & Booth, 2009).
Other Literature Reviews
There are several additional ways, besides SLRs, to identify, appraise, and synthesize a range of relevant studies to summarize prior knowledge. Three major types are: Narrative Reviews, Descriptive Reviews and Scoping Reviews (Paré et al., 2015; Schryen et al., 2020). Basically, the Narrative Review attempts to identify what has been written on a subject or topic. There is usually no intention to generalize or generate cumulative knowledge since they do not involve systematic and comprehensive search of all relevant literature. The Descriptive Review collects, codifies, and analyzes numeric data in a specific research area to determine whether they support or reveal any patterns or trends. Hence, these reviews may claim to represent the state of the art in a research area. Finally, a Scoping Review tries to estimate the available literature on a particular topic. Such reviews may be undertaken for preliminary examination of a research area before engaging with it any further. These three types of LRs focus on a broad coverage of the literature rather than any deep coverage. Other types of LRs include explanation building Theoretical Reviews and Realist Reviews as well as Critical Reviews, making a critical assessment of extant literature (Breslin & Gatrell, 2023; Munn et al, 2018; Paré et al., 2015; Schryen et al., 2020).
Although probably best suited for SLRs, the output of all types of LRs can be further analyzed and re-imagined by bibliographic methods. Such techniques combine classification and visualization. Despite a growing interest in such methods, there exists little information on best practices and guidelines regarding studies involving bibliographic methods. Suffice it to say that bibliometric methods rely on statistical methods to analyze bibliographic and citation data (Block & Fisch, 2020; Zupic & Čater, 2015).
Literature Reviews and Generative AI
The amount of work needed to carry out a LR could be substantial, requiring sizable resources and considerable time. Therefore, recent developments in the field of Generative AI have been examined for undertaking such reviews. While the pros and cons are still debated about their suitability, the development of such tools is extremely fast. It is safe to assume that the application of AI in research has just started. In the future, AI may, for example, create continuous up-to-date literature reviews, always covering the current state of the research (Atkinson, 2023a; Burger et al., 2023). But we are not there yet, and scholars may at present use Generative AI more like a virtual research assistant than an automatic tool to create SLRs (Singh & Singh, 2023).
Focus of the Special Issue
Topic/Area of Literature Reviews
There must be a match between the submitted LR and what JGM publishes, i.e. research on global employees who cross borders physically and/or virtually for work purposes. These include corporate and self-initiated expatriates, as well as other forms of global employees, such as frequent international business travellers, short-term assignees, and migrant workers.
For more details on the remit of JGM, please visit: https://emeraldgrouppublishing.com/journal/jgm?id=jgm. To enhance the contribution of the submission, the LR should be as unique as possible. One way is to examine a topic/area where no previous review has been conducted. Another alternative could be to conduct a LR on phenomena that combine traditionally demarcated global mobility areas. Yet another option is to update obsolete or incomplete literature studies.
The Ultimate Test of a Literature Review.
No matter the choice of topic/area and the way to undertake a LR, the contribution needs to be clear and significant. Since the reason for conducting a LR is to acquire new knowledge, a relevant question to ask is what we learned from a specific LR that we did not know before. Did it provide an updated understanding by integrating and synthesizing extant knowledge? A related issue concerns the usefulness of that knowledge. Did it identify knowledge gaps or inconsistencies? And, if so, how can this new knowledge guide future research to further advance our knowledge about the reviewed topic/area? (Paul et al., 2021).
Submission Process and Timeline
To be considered for the Special Issue, manuscripts must be submitted no later than October 1, 2024, 5:00pm Central European Time. Submitted papers will undergo a double-blind peer review process and will be evaluated by at least two reviewers and a special issue editor – in this case, one of JGM’s editorial team members. The final acceptance is dependent on the review team’s judgments of the paper’s contribution to the special issue topic.
Authors should prepare their manuscripts for blind review according to the Journal of Global Mobility author guidelines, available at www.emeraldinsight.com/jgm.htm. Please remove any information that may potentially reveal the identity of the authors to the reviewers. Manuscripts should be submitted electronically at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jgmob. For enquiries regarding the special issue, please contact Professor Jan Selmer at selmer@mgmt.au.dk or Professor Margaret Shaffer at margaret.shaffer@ou.edu.
Important Dates
- Paper submission deadline: October 1, 2024
- Acceptance notification: July 2025
- Publication: September 2025
In modern organizations and societies, standards are proliferating.
They occur in most fields (e.g., corporate governance, financial and
social auditing, product development, technical design), take many forms
(e.g., membership standards, multi-stakeholder standards), and are
particularly relevant when we are thinking about regulating
organizations beyond national boundaries (Brunsson &Jacobsson 2000;
Djelic & Sahlin-Andersson 2006). In a broad sense, we can define
standards as a particular type of rules: voluntary rules that are
explicitly formulated to pertain to a wide set of actors (individuals or
organizations). Many organizations are involved in developing,
sustaining, and implementing standards. Such organizations include, but
are not limited to, standard makers, adopters, monitoring and
certification agencies, and the wider public.
Standards and standardization are often addressed as part of the wider
discussion of organizational regulation. Regulation involves creating
and propagating more or less explicit rules and thus fosters the
formation of social order. Hence, studying standards allows us to
consider both the “demand side” of order, i.e., how organizations
and individuals are affected by organizing efforts, and the “supply
side,” i.e., how organizing elements are produced.
Despite their pervasiveness and significance in modern life, social
scientists have given comparatively little serious attention to
standards. It is only within the last few years that researchers have
started to systematically explore standards and the process of
standardization. Apart from research on individual standards such as ISO
9000 (e.g., Beck & Walgenbach 2005), CSR standards (e.g., Déjan et al.
2004) or accounting standards (e.g., Perry & Noelke 2005), there are now
also attempts to explore the logic of standards per se (e.g., Mörth
2004).
In this special issue of Organization Studies we want to bring together
the various strands of theorizing in this nascent area of research. We
do so to take stock of the developments and to advance the research
agenda. We are particularly (but by no means exclusively) interested in
exploring the various dynamics underlying standardization: those
involved in standards development, standards adoption, standards
following, and standards enforcement. By focusing on the dynamic aspect
of standards and standardization, we can look into the social
interactions, political maneuvers, power relations, manipulative
practices, and external pressures that shape the production and adoption
of standards by organizations. Researching the dynamic character of
standards also implies a close examination of the evolution, growth,
maturation, and disappearance of standards in society. We are interested
in discussing the organization and production standards on the macro
level (i.e., society) and the micro-level institutional practices that
standard implementation brings about.
Thus, we call for papers that deal with the various aspects and
dynamics of standardization. We are interested in conceptual and
empirical studies that draw on a variety of theoretical perspectives,
such as institutional theory, micro-political approaches, social
theories of practice, and in quantitative and qualitative methodological
approaches.
Possible topics for contributions include, but are not limited to, the
following issues:
- Growth and Context of Standardization: To what extent have standards
emerged as alternatives to governmental regulations? What role do
standards play in relation to international and supranational
governmental regulations? How should we distinguish between the
different types of standards? What influences the possible future growth
and expansion of standards in different fields?
- Production/Evolution/Change of Standards: Who is and who can be
responsible for developing standards? How are standard setters
themselves organized? To what extent are standards and standard setters
accountable to their stakeholders and the wider public? What problems
can arise within the process of standardization? What theoretical
perspectives can help us to better understand the global diffusion of
international standards, and their possible consequences, both intended
and unintended? How do standards gain legitimacy in the eyes of adopters
and the wider public? How much innovation is needed and desirable when
revising and improving standards?
- Adoption/Implementation of Standards: How are standards implemented
in corporations? What drives firms to adopt standards? What impact can
we expect from the implementation of standards? How can we measure this
impact in a meaningful way? How and why are standards modified during
the process of implementation? Does standards implementation foster
and/or impede creativity and innovation among adopters? Under what
circumstances does the adoption of standards produce hypocritical
behavior and inconsistencies between talk and action?
- Standards and the Transformation of Organizations: How do standards
affect the social practices in organizations? To what extent is the
recent rise of standards connected to the decrease of bureaucratic forms
of organization? How do organizations deal with the tension between
standardization and the quest for autonomy? How do standards influence
the work of/in meta-organizations such as the EU or UN?
- Standards and the Role of “Third Parties”: What “third
parties”, such as customers and auditors, are involved in the
standardization process? How do they affect the likelihood and form in
which standards are adopted? What influence do they have on the
development of standards?
- Competition and Compatibility Among Standards: What determines which
standard setter attracts the most followers? What factors foster and
impede competition among standards? Which factors foster monopoly and
stability? What is the relation between competition and compatibility
among standards? Does competition among standard setters drive
creativity in terms of the content of standards?
Literature:
Beck, M. and P. Walgenbach: 2005, Technical Efficiency of Adaptation to
Institutional Expectations? - The Adoption of ISO 9000 Standards in the
German Mechanical Engineering Industry, Organization Studies 26(6),
841-866.
Brunsson, N. and B. Jacobsson: 2000, A World of Standards (Oxford/New
York: Oxford University Press).
Déjean, F., Gond J.-P. and B. Leca: 2004, `Measuring the Unmeasured: An
Institutional Entrepreneur Strategy in an Emerging Industry', Human
Relations 57: 740-64.
Djelic, M.-L. and K. Sahlin-Andersson (eds.): 2006, Transnational
Governance - Institutional Dynamics of Regulation (Cambridge, UK:
Cambridge University Press).
Mörth, U. (ed): 2004, Soft Law in Governance and Regulation: An
Interdisciplinary Analysis. (Cheltenham: Edward Elgar).
Perry, J. and A. Noelke: 2005, International Accounting Standard
Setting: A Network Approach, Business and Politics 7: 1-s2.
Cultural metaphors and similar approaches to understanding culture and cultural similarities and differences have become more popular recently. These approaches provide a ‘different’ way of looking at culture that is distinct from the more quantitative measures of culture, and they provide additional ways to understand culture and its impact on management. The Caribbean region has been largely ignored in management research, and this special issue devoted to cultural metaphors within the region is intended to add to our knowledge of the region.
We welcome contributions about anywhere in the region and want to include views from the Dutch, English, French, and Spanish Caribbean; however submissions must be in English. Submissions will be blind reviewed in the traditional IJCCM review process. If you are interested in preparing a submission and would like more information on the metaphor concept, please send an email to eureka@caribsurf.com. If you are willing to serve as a reviewer for the Special Issue, please send an email to the same address.
Important Dates
October 31: Submissions Due
January 31: Completion of the Review Process
April 30: First Revisions
May 31: Completion of Second Review Process
June 30: Final Revisions
Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) inflows to Africa contribute as much as 29% to the continent’s capital. FDI to Africa peaked in 2008, but then fell approximately 36% in 2009. China’s growing desire for overseas investment has positioned China as a major player in the world among outward investors. In addition to this trend, Chinese firms such as China Mineral and Metal Corporation, Sinochem, Lenovo and Huawei Technology are completing global acquisition projects with the support of the Chinese government’s Going Global Strategy. Global observer-analysts comment that the reasons for the increase of Chinese investments in African countries stems from China’s global economic strategy, shaped by its political objectives and its demand for energy, minerals and other natural resources. A number of critical questions remain unanswered regarding the further development of the Chinese global economy and Chinese firms’ strategies abroad. This special issue hopes to explore some of them, including:
• What are the regional and sectoral trends of Chinese Outward Direct Investment (ODI) in Africa?
• What is the ownership structure of Chinese firms' ODI?
• What are the challenges and opportunities for Chinese firms resulting from China’s Going Global Strategy?
• What role does the Chinese government play in Chinese firms’ ODI in Africa?
• What are the impacts of African local institutions on ODI?
• What roles do international organizations (e.g., UNCTAD, IMF, etc.) play in Chinese firms’ ODI in Africa?
• What are the styles of management and governance of Chinese firms' overseas operations?
• What impact do Chinese firms have on African business and development?
Topical areas include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Chinese ODI in Africa
• Internationalization strategy of Chinese firms in Africa
• Organizational culture and management of Chinese firms in Africa
• Foreign policy of China in Africa
• Immigration and overseas Chinese in Africa
• Environmental concerns and sustainable development related to Chinese investments in Africa
• Human resources management (expatriates as well as employees) by Chinese firms in Africa
• Chinese ODI in Africa and local political linkage
• Policy implications of the inflow of Chinese FDI to Africa.
Papers for the Special Issue should be submitted to jab@athabascau.ca, weix@macewan.ca, and zhaox@slu.edu by December 15, 2011, with a covering letter indicating that the paper is for the Special Issue. A guide for authors, sample copies and other relevant information for submitting papers is available at:
http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/title~content=t792306882
The upcoming International Academy of African Business and Development Conference to be held in May 2011 in Edmonton will have a track on this subject. Papers submitted to this track will be considered for publication in this Special Issue. Details about the conference are available at: http://iaabd2011.athabascau.ca/tracks.php
All enquiries regarding the special issue should be sent to: Dr. William X. Wei, phone: 780-633-3535, weix@macewan.ca and Dr. Hongxin Zhao, phone: 314-977-3834, zhaox@slu.edu.
Supply chain is a global phenomenon. Increasingly, the linkages from raw materials to final products, and from producers to consumers, transcend national boundaries. Organizations seek efficiencies in business and non-business operations in the application of supply chains.. For instance, in the case of getting a toy in the hands of a parent, or getting emergency supplies to the survivors of an earthquake, supply chains play a crucial role.. While recent supply chains have a heavy reliance on communication and computing technologies, efficient supply chains also exist in traditional sectors with relatively low reliance on modern technologies. Thus, different best practices may have evolved in various countries on how to deal with issues related to cost, quality, time, and flexibility. This special issue is intended to be a forum to share the dispersed and diverse knowledge in the field of supply chains among academics and practitioners with the intent to generate ideas for further research as well as for lessons for practical application.
Journal of Knowledge Globalization (JKG): We perceive globalization to be the continuing effort by the peoples of the world to interact and share in the pursuit of their objectives transnationally. The objective of JKG (http://www.kglobal.org/journal.html) is to promote the sharing of knowledge globally. We consider our domain to be that of promoting knowledge that is multidisciplinary and global in intent.
JKG is sponsored by Sawyer Business School, Suffolk University, Boston, Massachusetts and published in the Simon Fraser University Online Journal System (http://journals.sfu.ca/jkg/). Editor: C. Gopinath, Suffolk University (cgopinath@suffolk.edu)
The structural shifts in and growth of India’s economy since the initiation of fundamental economic reforms in the 1990s has been well documented in academic studies as well as in various reports of international institutions and consultancy firms. However, there is a paucity of studies examining private and state-owned organizations in India which have been an important component driving India’s economic growth. Anecdotal evidence from the popular press points towards the dynamism of Indian firms in terms of success in international markets, innovation models, and governance structures, among others. The objective of this special issue of Long Range Planning is to direct research effort into a systematic examination of the organizational landscape in India. As scholars of management, context and phenomena are important, if they are likely to change our view of the world as it exists today or if they have the potential to change some of our existing theories. Special focus is needed on the phenomena in countries like India because they are interesting, important and have the potential to significantly question and/or change some of our management theories that have been primarily developed in entirely different contexts. The special issue aims to put the spotlight on theoretically novel and managerially relevant research in the areas of innovation, entrepreneurship, internationalization, strategic management, organizational structures and governance within the context of India. Some of the topics of interest for this special issue include (but are not limited to):
• Similarities and contrasts in the strategies and management styles of Indian firms compared to firms in the rest of world. What are some of the unique management practices both in domestic and international markets followed by Indian firms that could be of relevance to firms globally?
• Business groups are ubiquitous in many Asian economies. The dominant explanation of their existence has been that they fill institutional voids in underdeveloped economies. Even though we see significant economic liberalization and improvement in the institutional environment in India over the past two decades, old Indian business groups continue to thrive and prosper, and new business groups have emerged. Research related to the strategic adaptation of Indian business groups to institutional changes, their governance structures, and diversification (both geographical and industrial) strategies has the potential to contribute not only to the business group literature but also to broader theories of organizational adaptation and networks.
• Many firms from Asia and other emerging markets are transforming themselves into ‘emerging multinationals’ by successfully competing with traditional MNCs from developed economies. What strategies and processes led these firms to overcome their late mover and resource disadvantages to emerge as multinationals? How does the experience of Indian multinationals contribute to the broader understanding of ‘emerging multinationals’?
• Reverse innovation: Traditionally firms developed products in the more advanced economies and sold them with few modifications in the developing economies. However, there has been an emerging trend of ‘reverse innovation’, where a growing number of multinationals are developing products suited to the local requirements of developing markets in Asia and then finding markets for them in more advanced economies. Manuscripts focusing on the innovation strategies of both MNCs operating in India as well as indigenous Indian firms have the potential to contribute to the knowledge transfer and innovation literatures.
The special issue is open to a wide range of theoretical and methodological approaches to address these and other issues, including historical analyses, case studies, grounded theory building, econometric analyses, etc. Furthermore, the special issue is open to the consideration of different types of organizations, including private and state-owned firms, independent, family owned and business-group affiliated firms, belonging to traditional and emerging industries, etc. The audience of Long Range Planning includes academics as well senior executives. Authors submitting papers for this special issue should therefore make efforts to address both types of audiences. The deadline for submission of manuscripts is September 15, 2012. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with Long Range Planning’s Style Guide for Authors: http://ees.elsevier.com/lrp.
Please direct any questions regarding the special issue to either of the guest editors:
Raveendra Chittoor: Raveendra_Chittoor@isb.edu
Preet S. Aulakh: paulakh@schulich.yorku.ca
The Economic Cooperation Framework Agreement (ECFA) is a preferential trade agreement between mainland China and Taiwan that aims to reduce tariffs and commercial barriers across the Taiwan Strait. It was signed on June 29, 2010 and came into effect on September 12, 2010. ECFA gives Taiwan the opportunity to capitalize on China’s emerging demand and to integrate more fully into the East Asian economy. By strengthening the economic integration, it is expected to boost the bilateral trade between both sides and may attract more of FDI and financial investments from the rest of the world into Great China. A brief review about the early harvest program reveals that Taiwan’s gain varies in different sectors. It is thus crucial to assess the impact of ECFA on the economic outlook of both China and Taiwan. Studies that address various issues related to ECFA could lead to profound strategic and policy implications for practitioners and policy makers.
The Review of Pacific Basin Financial Markets and Policies concentrates on global interdisciplinary research on a broad range of business, finance and economics issues. This special issue welcomes both studies that investigate the impact of ECFA on the economic integration of Greater China and Pacific Rim countries and studies that examine the implications of EFCA concerning cross-straits trade relations and East Asian regionalism. The major topics include but not limited to:
1. Business, economic and financial issues in Greater China or among the Pacific Rim countries
2. Business opportunities open up to financial markets and services industries in the region
3. GDP growth and employment effect resulting from FDI and trade expansions
4. Global monetary and foreign exchange policy
5. Implications and issues related to FTA and WTO
6. International accounting issues related to MNEs investing in Greater China and Pacific Rim countries
7. MNE’s cost and benefit of China entry partnering with Taiwanese firms
8. MNE’s strategy capitalizing on Taiwan’s trade relations with Mainland China and Pacific Rim countries
9. Studies on specific sectors, including cultural/creative industry, high-techs, traditional, agricultural, and various service sectors (e.g. wholesaling and retailing, tourism, transportation, logistics, etc.)
10. Other interdisciplinary research in global accounting, business, economics, finance, Law, management and marketing
Please submit your paper online and indicate on the title page of your submission that the paper is for the Special Issue on ECFA. All enquiries regarding the special issue should be sent to: Dr. T. Steven Chang, steven.chang@liu.edu or Dr. Li-Ping Cheng, la_cheng@cc.nctu.edu.tw, and cheng@cier.edu.tw.
RPBFMP Website:
http://www.editorialmanager.com/rpbfmp/default.asp
Guidelines for Authors:
http://www.worldscinet.com/rpbfmp/mkt/guidelines.shtml
Deadline for paper submission: December 20, 2011
Guest Editor: David Shani Professor, Global Management, Kean University NJ, USA
e-mail: dshani@kean.edu
The increasing globalization of sport created a global multi-billion industry. Sports events are followed, watched and discussed by billions of spectators, loyal fans and or casual observer. This growing interest in sport didn’t go unnoticed by savvy marketers. Sports Marketing is much more than the marketing of sports. It was defined as the use of sports to achieve marketing objectives (e.g. sales, image, loyalty…), and as such became an important tool in the marketing arsenal of small domestic to and major MNC’S (Shani & Sandler, 1988).
As the field of sports marketing evolved, a significant body of research was created to understand better the various elements of sports marketing and how to use them effectively. As of today, most of these efforts were focused on for profit sector. Very little effort was made to study and adopt what we learnt about sports marketing to the nonprofit and public sector. The exception might be the subject of country image and sport (Floreck et al (2008), Gibson et al (2008), Green et al 2003), Nebenzhal et al (1991), Wonjun et al (2009)). This focus is perhaps, it is because the mega-events requires an investment of public money and need to be justified. A recent example is fir sure Sochi Winter Olympics that is estimated to cost the Russian people over 50 billion dollars!!! The un-stated objective of these game is to improve Russia’s image. Most other areas of non-profit and public marketing were not a focus of sports marketing research efforts. This is quiet puzzling as one could see the great possible synergy of sports marketing and non- profit sector. Both are about inspiration, people and unique stories.
This special issue is hoping to bridge the gap and serve as a starting point of focusing more research efforts in the use of sports marketing in nonprofit and public sector. The following list of subject is not exhaustive and it is just to provide an indication for potential contributors. Any other relevant subject in the area of Sports Marketing will be considered. As a multi-disciplinary Journal we are looking for original contributions. The effort can be empirical, conceptual, literature review or case studies.
- Entrepreneurial approaches for using sports marketing
- Ethics, social responsibility and sustainability
- The role of sport in marketing social change
- Global sports marketing challenges and opportunities
- Sports and the public sector
- Mega sports events and public policy
- Sports and cause related marketing
- Sports marketing and donors’ motivation
- Sports marketing to Increase loyalty and engagement at o non-profit organization
- Voluntarism and sports
- How does non-profit sports marketing differ from for profit sports marketing
- Understanding the Sport Consumer and fan loyalty
- Sports marketing and sponsorship and organization image
- Sports marketing and sponsorship and geographical image (country, region, city)
- Use of sports celebrities for social causes
- Recreation, Leisure, and Social Sport Marketing
- Social entrepreneurship and sport
- Diversity and Cultural issues in Sport Marketing
- The impact of new media on Sports Marketing
- The role of media distribution in sports?
- The Relationship between Sport Marketing, Hospitality, and Tourism
Author guidelines are available at: http://www.springer.com/business+%26+management/marketing/journal/12208
The closing date for submissions is July 15, 2014 for publication in Fall 2015.
If you have questions regarding relevance and submission of your work to this special issue, please email the guest editor at dshani@kean.edu
Soon after the fall of the Iron Curtain, it became clear that the end of state socialism in Eastern Europe did not necessarily imply the end of state domination over the economy and firm practices. Early studies found, that the post-socialist state – through its control over the banking system for instance – continued to influence firm-level strategies regarding product innovation, restructurings, supply chains, and human resource management (Whitley & Czaban, 1998a, 1998b). More generally, management scholars, political scientists, and sociologists found that the role of the state in post-socialist economies remained much more prominent and much more complex than initial optimistic accounts of “transition” and the “retreat of the state” had suggested (Martin, 2002, 2013; Schoenman, 2005; Stark, 1996; Stark & Bruszt, 2001). Thus, the initial retreat of the socialist state was slower than expected during the early 1990s. More recently, various transition economies may even experience a return of the state as an active player in the economy in its own right (Bremmer, 2008; Kurlantzick, 2016; Musacchio, Lazzarini, & Aguilera, 2015l; Sallai & Schnyder, 2018). In such cases, the state does not only intervene as a regulator – as the ideal-typical idea of liberal capitalism would have it – , but also as an owner of large companies, and designer of industrial policy directed towards promoting certain industries over others (see Hofman, Moon, & Wu, 2017).
More generally, one common characteristic of post-socialist countries is that the separation between the state sphere and the economy is more fluid than in established Western market-economies. This is partly a result of the process of post-socialist transformation. Creating capitalist market economies on the rubbles of the communist system has meant that post-socialist countries faced the tremendous challenge of creating a ‘capitalist class’ from scratch. Various types of privatisation processes of the vast state assets, and different political dynamics in different countries, have led to very different elite structures (Bandelj, 2008; King, 2001; Schoenman, 2005; Walder, 2003; Wedel, 2003). Yet, they share the common feature that the new economic elite did not emerge completely independently from the communist political elite, leading to complex interrelations between the two.
This has direct implications for the strategies of companies operating in such contexts. Specifically, managing the political environment becomes even more important for firms in post-socialist countries than in Western established capitalist economies (White, Fainshmidt, & Rajwani, 2017). Yet, the literature on such strategies in emerging markets and in particular in the post-socialist context remains underdeveloped (Deng & Kennedy, 2010; Mondejar & Zhao, 2013; White et al., 2017; Zhang, Zhao, & Ge, 2016). One exception is political ties. Political ties, as one particular form of political strategy, has seen considerable attention and underscore the importance of strategies to manage the firm’s dependence on the state especially in countries like Russia and China (Okhmatovskiy, 2010; Sun, Mellahi, & Thun, 2010; Sun, Mellahi, Wright, & Xu, 2015). Political ties and more broadly informal networks in state-business relations have been also widely recognised in some post-socialist countries that are now EU members, such as Poland (McMenamin and Schoenman, 2007, Schoenman, 2005) and Hungary (Stark, 1996, Stark and Vedres, 2012, Danis et al., 2009). Studies conclude that the weak nature of formal institutions in post-socialist states encourages firms to develop political activities based on business networks (Peng and Heath, 1996) and informal relationships (Peng, 2003, Luo and Zhao, 2013). Studies in the area of public affairs (McGrath et al., 2010) and corruption (Millar and Koppl, 2014), highlight the differences between Western and post-socialist public affairs culture (Harsanyi and Schmidt, 2012) and the issue that political strategies in post-socialist states remain a taboo (Sallai, 2013).
However, beyond political ties, other types of political resources, capabilities or lobbying strategies, have largely been neglected (Schnyder & Sallai, 2018). There are very few studies systematically analysing other political strategies – including information strategies, financial incentives strategies, and constituency building strategies (Hillman & Hitt, 1999) –, compared to the much better researched Western context. Furthermore, few studies have investigated how and why non-market strategies (Mellahi, Frynas, Sun, & Siegel, 2016) and their effectiveness vary across post-socialist settings (Akbar & Kisilowski, 2015). We therefore encourage submissions that investigate the specificities of non-market strategies in post-socialist settings, in particular in comparative fashion.
The specificities of post-socialist economies also has implications for the meso-level of state-business relationships: Given the politicised nature of post-socialist economies (Martin, 2002), state-business relationships are particularly important in post-socialist contexts. Various disciplines provide theoretical tools to analyse these relationships reaching from political science literature on lobbying and interest group politics (Eising, 2007; Sallai, 2013; Schnyder, 2012), to the corporate political activity (CPA) literature in management studies (Rajwani, Lawton, & Mcguire, 2013), and classical theories of business embedding in the state hierarchy in development studies (Evans, 1995; Johnson, 1982). All these theoretical tools have to date been insufficiently mobilised to understand how firms are embedded in the post-socialist context (Block & Negoita, 2016). Conversely Central and Eastern Europe – and the post-socialist context more generally – constitute very promising fields for theory development on these crucial issues of state-business relationships. We therefore also encourage the submission of papers that focus on the intermediate level of analysis, in particular studies adopting and interdisciplinary approach.
At the macro-level, the specific role and nature of post-socialist business systems and specifically the role of the state in them, are not often directly investigated and their impact on firm strategies is still not well understood. The comparative capitalism or comparative institutional analysis (CIA) literature (Fainshmidt, Judge, Aguilera, & Smith, 2016; Jackson & Deeg, 2008; Saka-Helmhout, Deeg, & Greenwood, 2016) distinguishes provides various labels to describe national business systems with more interventionist states than the typical Western ‘regulatory-‘ or ‘welfare’ states. These include– most commonly – ‘state capitalism’ (Musacchio et al., 2015) and ‘authoritarian capitalism’ (Witt & Redding, 2014). Some typologies more specifically distinguish the role of the state according to classical distinctions of regulatory-, developmental-, welfare-, and predatory states; with post-socialist countries falling either into the predatory or developmental categories (Fainshmidt et al., 2016). However, these attempts to describe and analyse the role of the state in post-socialism are often decontextualized and lack nuance across cases. Yet, these nuances are important to understand specific firm-level reactions to specific problems and opportunities created by the post-socialist state (King, 2001; Schoenman, 2005). We therefore also encourage submissions that take as the unit of analysis post-socialist national business systems as long as they allow us to further our understanding of how variations in the role of the state and macro-level factors shape firm- or individual-level practices and strategies in these contexts.
This special issue invites papers addressing questions related to these three topics: The impact of the role of the state in post-socialist and post-soviet countries on firm-level outcomes and strategies; firms’ non-market strategies in response to post-socialist states; state-business relationships in post-socialist countries. These can include, but are not limited to:
1. Cross-country comparisons of what type of state business relationships lead to superior firm-level and country-level outcomes.
2. Cross-country comparisons of non-market strategies in post-socialist and post-soviet contexts.
3. Longitudinal studies exploring how non-market strategies change/evolve in the context of post-socialist transformation.
4. Papers addressing the specificities of the two-way relationship between firm lobbying and state intervention.
5. Heterogeneity and determinants of firm-level non-market strategies in dealing with different types of post-socialist regimes.
6. Determinants of the effectiveness of different firm-level non-market strategies in different post-socialist settings.
7. Studies on foreign subsidiary and domestic firm political capabilities and non-market strategies and the determinants of their effectiveness.
8. Studies on the ways in which businesses organise their interest representation in a post-socialist context.
We welcome submissions focussing on cross-country comparisons or on single country-cases, as well as large-N firm-level studies, firm- or country-level case studies, and country-level comparative research, as long as they contain a clear and explicit link to the organisational- or individual-level.
Please submit your paper of no later than June 1, 2019 5pm CET by e-mailing it to G.Schnyder@lboro.ac.uk. All papers have to conform with the JEEMS author guidelines: https://www.jeems.nomos.de/fileadmin/jeems/doc/Authors_Guidelines.pdf
Timeline for SI:
1. February 2019 call to be published
2. Deadline for submission of full papers (10,000 words) 15th June 2019
3. Late June 2019 desk rejections
4. June - August, 2019 – 1st round R&R (6 weeks deadline for reviewers)
5. September 2019: decisions and invitation of papers for workshop
6. Workshop to be held at MGIMO Moscow November/December 2019
7. December 31st, 2019 deadline for resubmissions
8. January 2020-Feburary 2020, 2nd round R&R
9. February 2020: decisions
10. May 2020: deadline for resubmissions
11. May-June 2020: 3rd R&R
12. July-August 2020 final decisions/conditional acceptance
13. Autumn 2020 - publication
Special Issue Guest Co-Editors:
- Zaheer Khan, University of Kent, UK (z.khan-53@kent.ac.uk)
- Michael Czinkota, Georgetown University, USA and University of Kent, UK (czinkotm@georgetown.edu)
- Yong Kyu Lew, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, Korea (yklew@hufs.ac.kr)
- Joseph Amankwah-Amoah, University of Kent, UK (J.Amankwah-Amoah@kent.ac.uk)
- Pushyarag Puthusserry, University of Sussex, UK (P.N.Puthusserry@sussex.ac.uk)
Background of the proposed special issue
Ambidexterity is an important factor for influencing the performance at different levels in organizations (He & Wong, 2004; O'Reilly & Tushman, 2013; Junni et al., 2013; Raisch & Birkinshaw, 2008). Ambidexterity at the organizational level can be defined as the capability to reconcile two opposite strategies (for example, simultaneously pursuing both exploration and exploitation) within the same firm (O’Reilly & Tushman, 2004; Simsek, 2009). Thus, the challenge of ambidexterity lies in matching the organization’s strategy with its resources and competences (e.g. Raisch & Birkinshaw, 2008).
Strategic ambidexterity have received limited attention from global perspectives, and especially there are not enough comparative studies conducted on emerging markets' firms and developed markets firms to understand the antecedents and consequences of strategic ambidexterity for enhancing performance of these firms (Lavie et al., 2011; Raisch & Birkinshaw, 2008). From strategic management perspective, MNEs should choose their corporate strategies ‘where to compete’ for competitive advantage, by (1) diversifying products/services, (2) functional value chain activities and (3) geographical locations. Traditional management and international business literature has relatively focused on the geographical diversification of MNEs theoretically drawing on expanding MNEs oligopolistic behavior and internalization (Buckly & Casson, 1976), and knowledge-based view (Kogut & Zander, 1992).
In the globalization and digitalization era, however, contemporary MNEs strategically diversify the first two pillars (i.e., products/services and business functions) through innovative product development and outsourcing through strategic ambidexterity. In the economically integrated and technologically connected world, both EMNEs and DMNEs need to be strategic ambidextrous to implement their corporate/business strategies to cope with new environmental challenges and opportunities also coming from various conflicting forces and risks in international business, including cultural differences (Roth & Morrison, 1990; Shenkar, 2001)
Yet we have relatively limited understanding about the role of strategic ambidexterity in performance and global strategy pursued by EMNEs vis-a-vis DMNEs. Organizational ambidexterity studies have been conducted in a wide variety of industries and methodological settings, and the empirical results so far have been mixed (e.g. Junni et al., 2013). Above all, strategic ambidexterity has received limited research attention in the international business and management literature. The purpose of this special issue is to identify synergies between strategic ambidexterity and global strategy pursued by EMNEs vis-a-vis DMNEs for developing competitive advantage. We encourage authors to submit research articles ranging from theoretical/conceptual work to case studies. In addition, we welcome empirical research articles testing theories in the global business and management context.
The special issue offers novel insights in terms of the performance implications of strategic ambidexterity, the relative importance of strategic ambidexterity antecedents and their interaction effects, and the influence of different contexts (intra-firm, inter-firm, network) and different levels of analysis (firm level, business-unit level, top management team, individual), in terms of promoting theoretical synthesis, and suggests new venues for future research in the context of EMNEs.
These are some of the potential topics that we seek papers on:
(1) Strategic ambidexterity, business models, and global strategy implementation for developing competitive advantage by EMNEs vis-a-vis DMNEs
(2) Strategic ambidexterity and value creation vs. value capture by EMNEs vis-a-vis DMNEs
(3) Strategic ambidexterity, social networks, and competitiveness of EMNEs
(4) Human resource management practices, strategic ambidexterity and strategy implementation in EMNEs
(5) Strategic ambidexterity, overseas expansion and post acquisition strategies
(6) Strategic ambidexterity and reverse innovations
(7) Methodological challenges in measuring the impact of strategic ambidexterity on competitive advantage and performance of EMNEs and DMNEs
(8) Strategic ambidexterity and global supply chains of EMNEs vis-a-vis DMNEs
(9) Strategic ambidexterity and standardization vs. localization strategies of EMNEs vis-a-vis DMNEs
(10) Strategic ambidexterity, global networks and innovation in the context of EMNEs
(11) Strategic ambidexterity and corporate social responsibility and non-market strategies and performance of EMNEs and DMNEs
(12) Strategic ambidexterity and resilience
(13) Comparative institutional characteristics and strategic ambidexterity and performance
(14) Strategic ambidexterity and emerging economy international new ventures survival
Submission Process
The deadline for submitting papers is July 30, 2018.
Submissions to the special issue should be sent electronically through the Journal web platform https://www.evise.com/profile/#/IBR/login. When submitting their manuscript, it is important that authors select the ‘SI: Ambidexterity’ option in the “Article Type” step of the submission process.
Submissions should be prepared in accordance with International Business Review’s author guidelines available at: https://www.elsevier.com/journals/international-business-review/0969-5931/guide-for-authors. All manuscripts must be original, unpublished works that are not concurrently under review for publication elsewhere. All papers will receive a double-blind review following International Business Review’s normal review process.
Research data
Research data forms the backbone of research articles and provides the foundation on which knowledge is built. Researchers are increasingly encouraged, or even mandated, to make research data available, accessible, discoverable and usable. Although not mandatory, the journal encourages authors to submit their data at the same time as their drafts of the full manuscript. Further information can be found at: https://www.elsevier.com/authors/author-services/research-data
References
Buckley, P.J., & Casson, M. (1976). The future of the multinational enterprise, London: Macmillan.
He Z-L, Wong P-K (2004) Exploration vs. exploitation: An empirical test of the ambidexterity hypothesis. Organization Science, 15(4), 481–494
Junni, P., Sarala, R.M., Taras, V., & Tarba, S.Y. (2013). Organizational ambidexterity and performance: A meta-analysis. The Academy of Management Perspectives, 27(4), 299-312.
Kogut, B., & Zander, U. (1992). Knowledge of the firm, combinative capabilities, and the replication of technology. Organization Science, 3(3), 383-397.
Lavie, D., Kang, J., & Rosenkopf, L. (2011). Balance within and across domains: The performance implications of exploration and exploitation in alliances. Organization Science, 22(6), 1517-1538.
O Reilly, C.A., & Tushman, M.L. (2004). The ambidextrous organization. Harvard Business Review, 82(4), pp.74-83.
O'Reilly, C.A., & Tushman, M.L. (2013). Organizational ambidexterity: past, present and future. Academy of Management Perspectives 27(4), 324–338.
Raisch, S., & Birkinshaw, J. (2008). Organizational Ambidexterity: Antecedents, Outcomes, and Moderators. Journal of Management, 34(3), 375-409.
Roth, K., & Morrison, A.J. (1990). An Empirical Analysis of the Integration-Responsiveness Framework in Global Industries. Journal of International Business Studies, 21(4), 541-564.
Shenkar, O. (2001). Cultural Distance Revisited: Towards a More Rigorous Conceptualization and Measurement of Cultural Differences. Journal of International Business Studies, 32(3), 519-535.
Simsek, Z. (2009). Organizational ambidexterity: towards a multilevel understanding. Journal of Management Studies, 46(4), 597–624.
With the rapid growth of Asian economy, interest is growing among executives in learning the unique aspects of Asian business practices. Most Asian countries are implementing institutional transitions which entail dramatic changes of both formal and informal rules of business practice (Peng, Wang, & Jiang, 2008). Asian institutional environments (regulative, normative, and cognitive institutions), along with industry structure and firm factors are having substantial impacts on firm strategy and performance (Galbreath and Galvin; Zhou et al 2005). As such, scholars are calling for more rigorous theories that shed light on management and marketing from an Asian perspective (Kim, Yang, & Hyman 2009; Yang and Wang, 2011). This special issue seeks papers that enable deep understanding of Asian business practice and contribute to Asian theories of strategic management and marketing.
This special issue pursues manuscripts related to topics including, but not limited to:
- How do Asian cultures (such as Confucian values) influence interorganizational relationships in strategic management and marketing?
- How do Asian MNEs conduct strategic management and marketing to cope with institutional challenges in the process of outward foreign direct investment?
- How do Asian companies cope with the negative country of origin effect and build up brands in an upscale market?
- The effect of social networks, social capital, and government policies on strategy formation, execution, and performance of Asian companies
- Knowledge management and innovation activities in Asian companies
- How do institutional environments affect Asian firms’ strategic responses?
- A comparison of management and marketing strategy between Asian and Western markets.
- The opportunities and challenges of internationalization process of Asian companies
- Governance strategy in marketing channels in Asian markets.
- Adaptation and modification of existing consumer behavior theories to Asian markets; novel constructs that help explain variations in consumer or organizational buying behaviors.
- How do Asian companies cope with such strategic decisions as corporate Social Responsibility, corporate governance, professionalization, organizational forms, philanthropy, family office, and sustainable development?
Submission Details
The deadline for submission of manuscripts is October 31, 2011. Submit manuscripts as an e-mail attachment to both of the guest editors. The reviewing process will be similar to that used for previous special issues, including the use of guest editors and an editorial review board for the special issue submissions. Chenting Su (mkctsu@cityu.edu.hk) and Zhilin Yang (mkzyang@cityu.edu.hk), College of Business, City University of Hong Kong.
References
Galbreath, Jeremy, Peter Galvin (2008), “Firm Factors, Industry Structure and Performance Variation: New Empirical Evidence to a Classic Debate,” Journal of Business Research, 61, 109-117.
Fam, Kim-Shyan, Zhilin Yang, and Michael Hyman (2009), “Confucian/Chopsticks Marketing,” Journal of Business Ethics, 88 (3), 393-397.
Peng, Mike, Denis Wang and Yi Jiang (2008), “An Institution-based View of International Business Strategy: A Focus on Emerging Economies,” Journal of International Business Studies, 39 (5), 920-936.
Yang, Zhilin and Chenlu Wang (forthcoming), “Guanxi as a Governance Mechanism in Business Markets: Its Characteristics, Relevant Theories, and Future Research Directions,” Industrial Marketing Management.
Zhou, Zheng, Yong Gao, Zhilin Yang, and Nan Zhou (2005), “Developing Strategic Orientation in China: Antecedents and Consequences of Market and Innovation Orientations,” Journal of Business Research, 58 (8), 1049-1058.
Worldwide, businesses are faced with tremendous external factors that can dramatically affect efforts toward marketplace success. Whether it is natural disasters, political instability, or financial collapse, the fragility of the global economy has been evidenced extensively over the past few years. The borderless marketplace and the rapidity at which change can impact worldwide economies has made it an imperative that we better recognize and understand the phenomena that enable the forces of globalization to wield almost instantaneous transformation, as these forces of globalization have led to an aggressive competitive arena.
Every organization, regardless of geographic location, operates in this dynamic environment. Doing business in the constantly changing, borderless marketplace is an imperative in a marketplace in which world trade approached US$7 trillion by the beginning of the 21st century. This is not a situation to be feared, since change provides the opportunity for emergence of new market positions. Recently, however, changes are occurring more frequently and more rapidly with the potential for more severe impact. Due to growing real-time access to knowledge about customers, suppliers, and competitors, the international environment is increasingly characterized by instantaneity. As such, the past has lost much of its value as a predictor of the future, and current models of consumer and firm behavior may no longer harness the reality of the 21st century operating environment.
This special issue of the International Marketing Review is focused on any international marketing topic that is of relevance in today’s ever-changing marketplace. As such, we are interested in international strategic issues related to:
Emerging markets
Market entry decisions
Culture/subculture/ethnicity
Sustainability
Corporate governance
Buying behavior
Standardization vs. localization
as well as tactical issues related to the traditional 4 Ps of marketing:
International product/service development
International branding
International advertising
International channel management
International pricing
International supply chain
This international marketing research can engage in theory development or theory testing. The context of the research can be broad or narrow – we are not limiting to one particular domain or context. However, papers should have a clear international marketing focus on how the reality of the 21st century operating environment can be predicted and modeled to aid in our understanding and knowledge of consumer and firm behavior.
Submission details:
The deadline for submission is August 1, 2014. Authors should follow IMR’s submission guidelines and submit via ScholarOne:
http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/imrev. (Ensure you submit to the correct special issue in the drop-down menu)
All submissions will be subject to the double-blind peer review process at the International Marketing Review.
Questions related to this special issue can be directed to either/both guest editors.
About the special issue editors:
John B. Ford is Professor of Marketing and International Business in the College of Business and Public Administration, Old Dominion University (USA). He is currently a regular Visiting Professor at the School of Marketing, Curtin University, Perth, Australia and IESEG, the Catholic University of Lille, France. He has previously been a Visiting Professor at Henley Management College (UK), Cass Business School, City University of London (UK), Kent Business School, University of Kent (UK), University of Westminster (UK), Australian National University (Australia), Kitakyushu University (Japan), and Waikato University (New Zealand).
John is a Past President and a Distinguished Fellow of the Academy of Marketing Science (AMS), and he was awarded the Harold W. Berkman Service Award by the Academy of Marketing Science. John’s research focuses on international/cross-cultural advertising strategy, construct equivalence, and nonprofit competitiveness. He has published 75 academic articles in such journals as International Marketing Review, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Journal of Advertising, Journal of Advertising Research, Journal of International Marketing, Industrial Marketing Management, Journal of Business Research, Journal of Services Marketing, and Stanford Social Innovation Review to name a few. He currently serves on nine different editorial review boards.
Victoria Crittenden is Professor of Marketing and Chair of the Marketing Division at Babson College (USA). Additionally, she serves (or has served) as Visiting Global Scholar in the D.B.A. program at the Coles College of Business at Kennesaw State University (USA), Visiting Ph.D. Faculty at KTH Royal Institute of Technology in Stockholm (Sweden), Visiting Ph.D. Faculty at Luleå University (Sweden), a core faculty member at the WU Executive Academy (Austria) and as visiting faculty at the University of Ulster in Belfast (N. Ireland), The American College of Greece MBA Program in Athens (Greece), and University Robert Schuman, IECS in Strasbourg (France).
Vicky is President, and a Distinguished Fellow, of the Academy of Marketing Science (AMS). She is the 2013 recipient of the Pearson Prentice Hall’s Solomon-Marshall-Stewart Award for Innovative Excellence in Marketing Education awarded by the Teaching & Learning Special Interest Group in the American Marketing Association and the AMS Lamb, Hair, McDaniel Outstanding Marketing Teacher Award in 2005. Vicky’s research has been published extensively in journals such as the Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Marketing Letters, Sloan Management Review, Psychology & Marketing, Business Horizons, Entrepreneurship Theory & Practice, Journal of Business Research, Business Strategy Review, Corporate Reputation Review, Journal of Public Affairs, Journal of Personal Selling & Sales Management, Industrial Marketing Management, Journal of Strategic Marketing, Information and Management, Organizations and Markets in Emerging Economies, and International Journal of Production Economics. She served as founding co-editor of the AMS Review and serves currently on numerous editorial review boards.
Papers should be submitted by March 31, 2015
Guest Editors:
Keith W. Glaister, Professor Warwick (Business School University of Warwick, UK)
Mohammad Faisal Ahammad, PhD (Nottingham Business School Nottingham Trent University, UK)
Riikka M. Sarala, PhD (Bryan School of Business and Economics University of North Carolina, Greensboro, USA)
Alison J. Glaister, PhD (Aston Business School Aston University, UK)
Since a group of McKinsey consultants coined the phrase the “War for Talent” in 1997 (Axelrod, Handfield-Jones, & Michaels, 2002), academic and practitioner interest in strategic talent management continues to grow and business leaders consider the search for talented people as the single most important managerial preoccupation for this decade (Deloitte, 2010; Guthridge, Komm, & Lawson, 2008). Strategic talent management is defined as ‘activities and processes that involve the systematic identification of key positions which differentially contribute to the organisation's sustainable competitive advantage, the development of a talent pool of high potential and high performing incumbents to fill these roles, and the development of a differentiated human resource architecture to facilitate filling these positions with competent incumbents and to ensure their continued commitment to the organisation’ (Collings & Mellahi, 2009, p.304). Strategic talent management offers a distinct approach to the management of human resources and a response to the changes occurring in a turbulent operating environment, a means of improving firm performance (Joyce and Slocum, 2012), reducing employee turnover (Ballinger, Craig, Cross and Gray, 2011) and achieving sustainable competitive advantage (Iles, Priest and Chuai, 2010; Chatman, O’Reilly and Chang, 2005).
While the interest in talent management is growing (see for example Oltra and Lopez, 2013; Minbaeva and Collings, 2013; Joyce and Slocum, 2012;Guerci and Solari, 2012), the current assumptions and concepts in the strategic talent management literature are strongly embedded in the context of multinational, private, and US-based organizations, and may not be appropriate for describing and examining talent management in organizations operating in emerging market contexts (Collings et al., 2011), Consequently, further research is required from different perspectives and traditions.
The growing importance of emerging economies has led to an upsurge of strategy research on the topic (Wright, Filatotchev, Hoskisson, & Peng, 2005); however, research on strategic talent management has not kept pace with the research on multinational companies (MNCs) from emerging economies. While there has been an accelerated interest in emerging markets and emerging market MNCs studies in recent special issues in international business/management journals focus on internationalization, market entry strategy, and location choice aspects (Luo & Tung, 2007; Aulakh, 2007). It is widely agreed that the motivations behind emerging market MNC’ international operations, particularly in developed markets, are related to capability building. Strategic talent management, therefore, can play a crucial role in building absorptive capacity, which helps firms develop ability to recognize the value of new information, assimilate it, and apply it to commercial ends. In addition, strategic talent management may facilitate reverse knowledge transfer to emerging market multinationals’ other subsidiaries and play crucial role in the success of the firm in diverse cultural environments.
Although strategic talent management has been investigated by scholars from a variety of theoretical perspectives (see, for example, Scholz, 2012), practitioners, researchers and teaching academics are still in need of case studies and empirical research from emerging markets that examine the relevance, successes, and failures of particular talent management practices and strategies. Research needs to address the question of how organizations actually define talent in emerging market context and the roles and impact of various stakeholders, beyond HR and management, on talent management policy and practice. While employee retention strategies were investigated in a developed country context (Ahammad, Glaister, Weber and Tarba, 2012), talent retention strategies in the emerging market context received limited attention. Moreover, research needs to distinguish any attributional tendencies (Vaara, Junni, Sarala, Ehrnrooth, & Koveshnikov, 2013) in the managerial determination of the effectiveness of strategic talent management in the emerging market context. Gaining insight into these issues will not only help advance strategic talent management as a field of academic study, but will also provide practitioners with the insight and ideas to handle strategic talent management issues faced by their organizations.
The purpose of this special issue is therefore to generate a collection of papers on how emerging market companies understand the concept of talent management and how they plan and execute strategic talent management initiatives. This special issue should foster additional conversation on this important subject among academics and practitioners alike. Moreover, it should provide ideas for best practice implementation across different cultural contexts, and case material for executive education, as well as catalyze further cross-disciplinary study.
This special issue seeks to contribute to the emerging body of literature on strategic talent management through publishing articles with fresh insights, particularly on the varieties of talent management strategies encountered in emerging market contexts. This special issue encourages submissions on the following themes and approaches:
- What makes emerging market multinationals different in terms of strategic talent management?
- Emerging market multinationals’ talent management practices in developed and developing country subsidiaries.
- International acquisitions of emerging market multinationals and strategic talent management such as talent identification and retention strategies.
- Emerging market multinationals and strategic talent management’s role in reverse knowledge transfer.
- Role of managerial attributions in shaping an understanding of talent management, the implementation of talent management systems and the effectiveness of talent management systems within the emerging market context.
- Strategic talent management practices in private and state-owned organizations.
- Articles that help bridge the gap between theory and practice by providing both practical implications of empirical research on emerging market MNCs and capture leading examples of practitioner-initiated strategic talent management via theoretically grounded case studies.
References:
Ahammad, M. F., Glaister, K. W., Weber, Y. and Tarba, S. Y. (2012) Top management retention in cross-border acquisitions: the roles of financial incentives, acquirer’s commitment and autonomy. European Journal International Management, 6(4), 458-480.
Aulakh, P. S. (Ed.) (2007) Special issue on emerging market multinationals from developing economies: motivations, paths, and performance, Journal of International Management, 13(3), 235-402.
Axelrod, B., Handfield-Jones, H., & Michaels, E. (2002) A new game plan for C players, Harvard Business Review, January, 81–88.
Ballinger, G., Craig, E., Cross, R. and Gray, P. (2011) A Stitch in Time Saves Nine: Leveraging Networks to Reduce the Costs of Turnover, California Management Review, 53(4), 111-133.
Chatman, J., O’Reilly, C. and Chang, V. (2005) Cisco Systems: Developing a Human Capital Strategy, California Management Review, 47(2), 137-167.
Collings, D. G., & Mellahi, K. (2009) Strategic talent management: A review and research agenda, Human Resource Management Review, 19(4), 304–313. Collings, D. G., Scullion, H., & Vaiman, V. (2011) European perspectives on talent management, European Journal of International Management, 5(5), 453–462.
Deloitte (2010) Talent edge 2020: Blueprints for the new normal. Accessed on 12 June 2013. Available at: http://www.deloitte.com/assets/dcom-unitedstates/local%20assets/documents/imos/talent/us_talentedge2020_121710.pdf
Guerci, M. and Solari, L. (2012) Talent management practices in Italy-implications for human resource development. Human Resource Development International, 15(1), 25-41.
Guthridge, M., Komm, A. B., & Lawson, E. (2008) Making talent a strategic priority, McKinsey Quarterly, Issue. 1, 48–59.
Iles, P., Preece, D., & Chuai, X. (2010) Talent management as a management fashion in HRD: Towards a research agenda, Human Resource Development International, 13(2), 125–145.
Joyce, W. and Slocum, J. (2012) Top management talent, strategic capabilities, and firm performance. Organizational Dynamics, 41, 183-193.
Luo, Y. & Tung, R. (2007) International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4), 481-498.
Minbaeva, D. and Collings, D. (2013) Seven myths of global talent management. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 24(9), 1762-1776.
Oltra, V. and Lopez, S. (2013) Boosting organizational learning through team-based talent management: what is the evidence from large Spanish firms? The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 24(9), 1853-1871.
Scholz, T. M. (2012) Talent Management in the Video Game Industry: The Role of Cultural Diversity and Cultural Intelligence. Thunderbird International Business Review, 54(6), 845-858.
Vaara, E., Junni, P., Sarala, R. M., Ehrnrooth, M. and Koveshnikov, A. (2013), Attributional tendencies in cultural explanations of M&A performance. Strategic Management Journal (forthcoming).
Wright, M., Filatotchev, I., Hoskisson, R. E. and Peng, M. W. (2005) Strategy research in emerging economies: challenging the conventional wisdom. Journal of Management Studies, 42, 1-33.
Wright, P. M., Dunford, B. B., & Snell, S. A. (2001) Human resources and the resource based view of the firm, Journal of Management, 27(6), 701–721.
About the guest editors:
Keith W. Glaister
Professor of International Strategic Management. Keith W. Glaister joined Warwick business school in July 2013. Professor Glaister joined from the University of Sheffield where he was Dean of the Management School from 2005. As a leading researcher in the field of international strategic management, he has published 5 books and over 80 articles and book chapters. His main research focuses on the analysis of formation, partner selection, management and performance of international joint ventures and strategic alliances. Prof. Glaister has published in Strategic Management Journal, Journal of World Business, Journal of Management Studies, Organization Studies, British Journal of Management, Management International Review, and others. He is an Editorial Board member of the British Journal of Management and several other journals. He was recently re-elected to be a member of the Council of the British Academy of Management.
Mohammad F. Ahammad
Dr Ahammad is a senior lecturer at Nottingham Business School, Nottingham Trent University, UK. Dr Ahammad is an active researcher in the field of international business strategy, in particular, in the area of cross border mergers and acquisitions (M&As) on which he holds a PhD degree from the University of Sheffield. Dr. Ahammad has published his research studies in Human Resource Management (USA), International Business Review, International Studies of Management & Organization, European Journal of International Management, and others. He currently serves as a guest-editor for the special issue on cross-cultural collaboration at International Studies of Management & Organization.
Riikka M. Sarala
Dr. Sarala is an assistant professor of international business at University of North Carolina, Greensboro. Her research focuses on the socio-cultural integration process of mergers and acquisitions and on the management of knowledge and innovation in multinational corporations. Dr Sarala has published in Strategic Management Journal, Journal of Management Studies, Journal of International Business Studies, Academy of Management Perspectives, Academy of Management Learning & Education, Thunderbird International Business Review, and others.
Alison J. Glaister
Dr. Glaister is Lecturer in Strategic Human Resource Management at Aston Business School, Aston University, UK. She holds a PhD from the University of Leeds. She has over ten years industry experience in the private, public and voluntary sectors, working in roles that focused on international CRM and economic regeneration initiatives including: employability, new business start-ups, business diversification and export mentoring. Dr. Glaister is an active researcher in the field of strategic human resource management and her research interests include the development of international talent management systems, the impact of international business strategy on the HR transformation ‘project’, the evolving role of the HR professional and progress towards strategic partnership.
Thunderbird International Business Review
SUBMISSION GUIDELINES FOR AUTHORS
Submissions for this issue should be submitted electronically to TIBR at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr
Please indicate that the submission is for this special issue. Please DO NOT include your identifying contact information in your manuscript when uploading it into the submission system. For questions regarding this special issue, authors are invited to contact Dr. Mohammad Faisal Ahammad (e-mail: mohammad.ahammad@ntu.ac.uk)
HOW TO SUBMIT YOUR PAPER: Prospective authors must submit manuscripts online at: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/tibr and follow directions for submission by clicking on the Create Account tab at the upper right-hand corner of the web page. Follow instructions carefully to create your account. When it is created, log in and go to your authoring site. Begin the submission process by clicking on “Submit new manuscript.” Follow directions carefully. Be sure to indicate the type of manuscript you are submitting (practitioner, case study, and so forth). A cover letter must accompany each submission indicating the name, address, telephone and fax numbers of the corresponding author. It may be uploaded separately or copied into the appropriate area in the submission blocks. Please include an e-mail address. The letter must state that the article has not been previously published and that it is not currently under consideration elsewhere. Co-author information must also be included when you submit your manuscript.
NOTE: DO NOT UPLOAD A COVER PAGE as part of your manuscript file, or include any identifying information in the files you upload. A review PDF will be created from your files and for that reason the manuscript must be anonymous. Your personal information is entered elsewhere on the site. You may upload a cover page as a separate file and designate it as “material not for review.”
HOW TO FORMAT YOUR SUBMISSION: Papers should be submitted in English, typed, double-spaced, 12-point font (Times New Roman preferred) with 1-inch (2.5 cm) margins. An Executive Summary of not more than 150 words should be included. The summary should be preceded by the heading "Executive Summary." The manuscript should not exceed 30 pages double spaced, including references (10,000 words).
Six key words should be listed. Acknowledgements and information on grants received can be given before the References or in a first footnote, which should not be included in the consecutive numbering of footnotes. Explanatory footnotes are discouraged and should be kept to a bare minimum and be numbered consecutively throughout the text with superscript Arabic numerals. Use in-text form of citation and include a reference list at the end of the paper. References should be made in-text form of citation. This option consists of a parenthetical reference in the text-whenever possible just the last name of the author(s) or editor(s), the year(s) of the publication(s), and the page reference(s). For example: (Miller 1982: 103-4). The reference list at the end of the article should include information for all sources cited in the article. The references should be listed in alphabetical order and should be complete, including all author's names and initials, the title of the paper, the year, page number, and publisher. Please complete references on a separate sheet at the end of the manuscript. All figures must be submitted in a form suitable for reproduction (camera-ready copy). Care should be taken that lettering and symbols are of a comparable size. All graphs and diagrams should be referred to as figures and should be numbered consecutively in the text in Arabic numerals. Papers that do not follow submission guidelines will be unsubmitted for re-formatting by the submitting author. Questions may be emailed to Dr. Mary Teagarden, Editor, Thunderbird International Business Review: mary.teagarden@thunderbird.edu or to Ms. Suzy Howell, Managing Editor suzy.howell@thunderbird.edu
Copyright of published papers will be vested in the publisher. A copy of the transfer of copyright agreement, executed and signed by all authors, is required with each manuscript accepted. Original signatures are required.
If the article is accepted for publication, instructions on final submission will be sent to the author.
Prof. Mike Pettus and J. Mark Munoz are Guest Editing a Special Issue for the Journal of International Business and Entrepreneurship Development (JIBED). The journal is published by Inderscience Publisher, a UK/Switzerland publication (www.inderscience.com/jibed).
The theme of the Special Issue is "Strategy in Emerging Markets." Specifically, the objective of the journal issue is to uncover contemporary thinking and best practices for business organizations looking to enter or expand their business in emerging markets worldwide. We are looking to publish both theoretically-grounded and practice-oriented papers. All articles will be peer-reviewed.
If you have current articles, or are looking to write papers on the topics below, we strongly encourage you to submit your articles by November 15, 2012 for consideration.
Examples of relevant topics :
Marketing to emerging markets
Business development in emerging markets
Emerging market entry modes
International/global Strategy
Strategic alliances in emerging markets
M & A in emerging markets
Business challenges in emerging markets and strategic implications
Business opportunities in emerging markets and strategic implications
Heightening competitiveness in emerging markets
Managing competition in emerging markets
Other related topics are acceptable.
Kindly submit your articles to : Dr. J. Mark Munoz, Associate Professor, International Business at Millikin University. You can send your article, along with a 150 word abstract, by email to : jmunoz@millikin.edu.
The journal is currently accepting papers for an upcoming special issue entitled: International Business Strategy in Emerging Economies. The purpose of this special issue is to provide a venue for scholarship to probe the under-researched aspects of alliance strategy and management more deeply, catalyze new research on neglected topics of collaborative strategy, and encourage novel research methodologies on international collaborations.The purpose of the special issue is to develop theoretical and empirical approaches in the field of international journal of business research, strategic management and entrepreneurship.
The editors invite papers in which questions from the public domain are framed for further study by management scholars, as well as papers that systematically apply theories and empirical approaches from strategy and entrepreneurship to issues related to the public interest. The ultimate objective is to develop a long-range agenda for research on innovation in the public interest.
Subject Coverage Topics of interest include but are not limited to:
*International and Global Strategy
*Global Strategy and Emerging Economies
*Business models and business model innovations
*Original empirical research contributions exploring linkages among cooperative strategies, innovation, organizational effectiveness and competitiveness
*Case studies on cooperative strategies for competitiveness or innovation
*Exemplars of theory building and its induction in competitiveness to develop constructs and testable hypotheses.
*Strategic alliances for internationalization
*Learning & innovation capabilities: issues & measurement
*Collaborative business models (e.g. for standardization)
*Knowledge creation and technological innovation
*Collaboration strategies for technology standard battles *Organizational performance and competitiveness
*Antecedents and consequences of firm competitiveness
*Business model innovation for industrial competitiveness
Background and Purpose:
Research on international collaborations has blossomed in the last two to three decades, as the phenomenon itself was spurred on by globalization and rapid technological advances. Research on collaborative trends and motives quickly gave way to theoretically-driven and empirically-rigorous investigations of the determinants of multinational firms' investments and boundaries as well as the factors that can facilitate or impede effective international collaborations.
The current popularity of research on international collaborations may seem to advance the conclusion that this research domain has reached maturity, or is rapidly reaching maturity. While it is true that considerable progress has been made on theory of alliances, and there is no shortage of active scholarship in this domain, it is also clear that there remain many more questions and research opportunities than areas in which debates have been settled or consensus exists on how to structure, manage, or govern international collaborations.
The purpose of this special issue is to provide a venue for scholarship to probe the under-researched aspects of alliance strategy and management more deeply, catalyze new research on neglected topics of collaborative strategy, and encourage novel research methodologies on international collaborations.
Alliance research needs to delve much more deeply into issues of structure and process, governance and management, to understand the distinctive features and management challenges of this organizational form. This research might also draw much more extensively upon other theoretical traditions, including psychology and political science. We hope that this special issue will encourage research in directions such as these, provide an opportunity to take stock of this literature, and bring together some of the interesting and insightful research currently being carried out on international collaborations.
Research Questions:
We hope to spur research contributions related to the structuring, management, and governance of international collaborations. Contributions are welcome that bring new theory development to these topics, as are empirical contributions that primarily seek to test and extend theory in these domains. The following are illustrative, rather than exhaustive, of the types of research questions that would fit well within the special issue's domain:
? How do alliance processes (e.g., partner search, negotiations, and post-formation relationships between allies) relate to alliance structures and implementation?
? How do firms govern equity collaborations with boards of directors, other formal governance mechanisms or agreement provisions at their disposal?
? How do firms design agreements, administrative structures and interfaces in non-equity alliances?
? How do the ways firms structure, manage, and govern international alliances affect the value they create and capture?
? What determines the share captured by each partner of the incremental value created by the alliance?
? How do various formal and informal governance mechanisms substitute or complement each other for international collaborations?
? How do firms establish the micro-level foundations of alliance management and governance (e.g., managerial incentives, staffing, teamwork, etc.)?
? How do firms design and orchestrate international alliance portfolios?
? How do firms structure and manage international networks?
? How do alliance networks help develop industry standards, or how does the act of developing industry standards spur alliances and cooperation in a sector?
? In global offshoring, how do firms choose from arrangements ranging from fully-owned foreign subsidiaries, to arms-length contracting - with cooperative relations constituting an intermediate position?
? What new research questions on alliances might be tackled with underutilized research methods (e.g., simulations, experiments, formal analysis, multilevel modeling, etc.)?
Submission Instructions:
The deadline for submissions is August 12, 2012. To learn more about the Global Strategy Journal, including additional information on the submission process, please visit the Global Strategy Journal website at: http://gsj.strategicmanagement.net/
The Guest Editors are seeking reviewers for this special issue and are soliciting nominations as well as volunteers to participate in the reviews. All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at GSJ.
More Information:
To nominate a reviewer, volunteer to review, or obtain additional information, please contact the special issue editors:
Farok Contractor, Rutgers University (farok@andromeda.rutgers.edu)
Jeffrey Reuer, Purdue University (jreuer@purdue.edu)
Or, the Managing Editor of the GSJ, Lois Gast (lgast@wiley.com).
The GSJ is published by Wiley-Blackwell and is one of the many activities of the Strategic Management Society (SMS). The Society is unique in bringing together the worlds of reflective practice and thoughtful scholarship. The Society consists of more than 2,700 members representing over 70 different countries. Membership, composed of academics, business practitioners, and consultants, focuses its attention on the development and dissemination of insights on the strategic management process, as well as fostering contacts and interchange around the world.
Editor: Madhu Viswanathan (mviswana@illinois.edu)
Overview of Topic
The term subsistence connotes the everyday struggle on the part of individuals, households and communities, to meet life’s basic needs. Much of the world’s population exists within subsistence marketplaces and a great deal of public policy has focused on improving the quality of life of individuals within these marketplaces. Subsistence marketplaces consist of consumer and entrepreneur communities living at a range of low-income levels. Such communities are concentrated in developing countries and regions such as Brazil, India, China, Vietnam, and Sub-Saharan Africa. Subsistence communities also exist side-by-side with more affluent communities in developed nations. Subsistence marketplace is also a term coined to represent the spirit of understanding these contexts in their own right, not merely as markets to sell to or as contexts for policy initiatives, but also as individuals, communities, consumers, entrepreneurs, and marketplaces from which to learn. Distinct from macro-economic approaches, or relatively meso-level business approaches to poverty, such as the Base-of-the-pyramid approach, the subsistence marketplaces approach takes a micro-level approach to gain bottom-up understanding of life circumstances and marketplace interactions of subsistence consumers and entrepreneurs. Such a micro-level perspective has the potential to provide insights into both market and policy initiatives that complement those provided by more macro-level and meso-level approaches.
By unpacking the life circumstances in poverty with particular emphasis on marketplaces, economic systems, and related policy implications, this approach has led to grounded insights on thinking patterns associated with low income and low literacy, affective elements, decision-making, relationships and exchanges in the marketplace, consumption and entrepreneurship, and market ecosystems. Such insights have also been used to derive implications for product development, enterprise models, public policy, and sustainable development, reflecting the bottom-up approach of deriving macro-level insights that are on based on nuanced, micro-level understanding of the phenomenon. Additional information is available at http://www.business.illinois.edu/subsistence.
In keeping with the mission of the Journal of Public Policy and Marketing, this special issue seeks papers that identify policy implications of research and theory that focus on an understanding of micro-level phenomena in subsistence marketplaces. While purely macroeconomic approaches to such marketplaces do not fit within this call, papers at the meso- or macro-level that are explicitly linked to the micro-level are welcome and encouraged. The goal of this special issue is to be inclusive, but with an explicit emphasis on the bottom-up approach to understanding marketplaces, policy, and the public interest that is often neglected in the study of poverty.
Background of Related Conference Series and Stream of Research
This call for papers especially welcomes papers presented at the Fifth Subsistence Marketplaces Conference held June 13-15, 2014, but it is open to any contributor(s) regardless of participation in the conference or prior conferences. In the last decade, the Subsistence Marketplaces Conference has been a leading forum for evolving and sharing research and fostering best practices in subsistence marketplace communities. Specific themes of the fifth conference include consumption and conservation, entrepreneurship, substantive domains of subsistence, diverse geographies, social innovation, and curricular innovation. The theme of consumption and conservation emphasizes the need to understand the environmental issues that impinge on day-to-day living and basic needs of members of subsistence economies and the broader global community of which they are a part. The theme of entrepreneurship covers the gamut from survival and subsistence to thriving and transformational. Additional information about the conferences is available athttp://www.business.illinois.edu/subsistence/events/conferences.html.
Suggested Topics
Potential topics may include the following:
- Consumer behavior in subsistence marketplaces
- Entrepreneurship in subsistence marketplaces
- Substantive domains of subsistence (e.g., water, sanitation, energy, food)
- Emergence of marketing systems
- Environmentalism of subsistence consumers and consumer-merchants
- Issues of environmental justice relating to subsistence marketplaces
- Sustainable product design for subsistence marketplaces
- Inventing and re-inventing new products and services for subsistence marketplaces
- Organization design and re-design for operating in subsistence marketplaces
- Collaborative models for business innovations
- Supply chain and distribution challenges and opportunities
- Pricing for value and sustainability
- Marketing communication and education
- Innovative research methods
- Economic and financial perspectives on subsistence marketplaces (e.g. financial literacy)
- Health, well-being and justice in subsistence marketplaces
- Merging social and business missions through social innovations
- Incorporating business practices in nonprofit organizations developing social innovations
- Social innovation alliances and partnerships among NGOs, governments, and businesses
Other topics are also welcome. All submissions should be explicit about public policy implications (e.g., what policies are informed, which policy makers would find results useful, what is demonstrated or implied for policy decisions). In the context of this special issue, as consistent with the mission of JPPM, the term “policy” is used in a very broad sense and is not restricted to government actions; it also includes policy implications for NGO’s, corporations, professional associations, and religious organizations, among others. Policy may also include encouraging or facilitating market or other non-governmental mechanisms to work through regulation and/or de-regulation, incentives, facilitation, social marketing, social entrepreneurship or other approaches to improving quality of life and promoting public interest.
Submission Deadlines:
In order to assure publication of the special issue of JPPM in the fall of 2015 the timeline and deadlines for this special issue will be strictly followed. All papers will be peer reviewed. Papers in the review process will be rejected if the timeframe does not allow for timely revisions. However, such papers may be referred to the editor of JPPM for further review through the Journal’s normal review process.
August 1 to November 30, 2014 : Deadline window for paper submission
January 15, 2015 : Feedback to authors after peer review
February 28, 2015 : Deadline for revised submission
June 15, 2015 : Final deadline for subsequent revisions
Publication Submission Requirements
As per JPPM guidelines, which may be found at: https://www.ama.org/publications/JournalOfPublicPolicyAndMarketing/Pages/About.aspx
Editors:
Madhu Viswanathan (mviswana@illinois.edu), University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign
Raed Elaydi (relaydi@roosevelt.edu), Roosevelt University
Roland Gau (rgau@utep.edu), University of Texas at El Paso
Lisa Jones Christensen, University of Utah
Overview of Topic
The term “subsistence” connotes the everyday struggle on the part of low-income individuals, households and communities to meet life’s basic needs. Much of the world’s population exists within subsistence marketplaces and a great deal of public policy has focused on improving the quality of life of individuals in these settings. Specifically, subsistence marketplaces consist of communities of consumers and entrepreneurs living at a range of low-income levels. Such communities are concentrated in developing countries and economies around the world (e.g. Brazil, India, China, Central Asia and Sub-Saharan Africa). Subsistence communities also exist side-by-side with more affluent communities in developed nations. “Subsistence marketplace” as a term also represents a mindset focused on understanding subsistence contexts in their own right, not merely as markets to sell to or as contexts for policy initiatives but as individuals, communities, consumers, entrepreneurs, and marketplaces from which to learn.
Distinct from macroeconomic approaches, or relatively meso-level business approaches to poverty (such as the Base-of-the-Pyramid approach), the subsistence marketplaces approach takes a micro-level approach to gain bottom-up understanding of subsistence consumers and entrepreneurs. Such a micro-level perspective has the potential to provide insights into market and policy initiatives that complement perspectives from macro-level and meso-level approaches.
By unpacking the life circumstances of people living with low income with particular emphases on marketplaces, economic systems, and related policy implications, this approach has led to grounded insights on thinking patterns associated with low income and low literacy; as well as affective elements, decision-making, relationships and marketplace exchanges, consumption and entrepreneurship, and market ecosystems. Such insights have been used to derive implications for product development, enterprise models, public policy, and sustainable development. The work reflects the bottom-up approach of deriving meso- and macro-level insights based on a nuanced, micro-level understanding of the phenomenon. Additional information is available at https://business.illinois.edu/subsistence/.
In keeping with the mission of the Journal of Public Policy and Marketing, this special issue seeks papers that identify policy implications of research and theory that focuses on and stems from an understanding of micro-level phenomena in subsistence marketplaces. While purely macroeconomic approaches to such marketplaces do not fit within this call, papers at the meso- or macro-level that are explicitly linked to the micro-level are welcome and encouraged. The goal of this special issue is to be inclusive, but with an explicit emphasis on the bottom-up approach to understanding marketplaces, policy, and the public interest that is often neglected in the study of poverty.
Background of Related Conference Series and Stream of Research
This call for papers especially welcomes papers presented at the Sixth Subsistence Marketplaces Conference held June 17-19, 2016, but it is open to any contributor(s) regardless of participation in this conference or prior conferences in this series. In the last decade, the Subsistence Marketplaces Conference has been a leading forum for evolving and sharing research and fostering best practices in subsistence marketplace communities. Specific themes of the sixth conference included:
- Sustainability and Consumption from the Bottom-up
- Disruption, Technology, and Innovation
- Survival, Subsistence, and Transformative Entrepreneurship
- Institutional and Organizational Dimensions of Enterprises and
Partnerships
- Subsistence Narratives, Incentives, and Agency
- Integration and Visioning in Subsistence Marketplaces Research
- Traversing Theory and Practice
- Curricular Innovations
These themes span a number of issues that impinge on day-to-day living and basic needs of members of subsistence economies and the broader global community of which they are a part. Additional information about the conferences is available at https://business.illinois.edu/subsistence/conferences/2016-conference/.
Suggested Topics
Potential topics may include the following:
- Consumer behavior in subsistence marketplaces
- Entrepreneurship in subsistence marketplaces
- Substantive domains of subsistence (e.g., water, sanitation, energy, food)
- Emergence of marketing systems
- Environmentalism of subsistence consumers and consumer-merchants
- Issues of environmental justice relating to subsistence marketplaces
- Sustainable product design for subsistence marketplaces
- Inventing and re-inventing new products and services for subsistence marketplaces
- Organization design and re-design for operating in subsistence marketplaces
- Collaborative models for business innovations
- Supply chain and distribution challenges and opportunities
- Pricing for value and sustainability
- Marketing communication and education
- Innovative research methods
- Economic and financial perspectives on subsistence marketplaces (e.g. financial literacy)
- Health, well-being and justice in subsistence marketplaces
- Merging social and business missions through social innovations
- Incorporating business practices in nonprofit organizations developing social innovations
- Social innovation alliances and partnerships among NGOs, governments, and businesses
Other topics are also welcome. As noted in the JPPM guidelines for authors, papers submitted to Journal of Public Policy & Marketing should be explicit about the contribution to marketing and public policy (e.g., what policies are informed, which policy makers would find results useful, what is demonstrated or implied for policy decisions). In the context of this special issue, as consistent with the mission of JPPM, the term “policy” is used in a very broad sense and is not restricted to government actions; it also includes policy implications for NGO’s, corporations, professional associations, and religious organizations, among others. Policy may also include encouraging or facilitating market or other non-governmental mechanisms to work through regulation and/or de-regulation, incentives, facilitation, social marketing, social entrepreneurship or other approaches to improving quality of life and promoting public interest.
Submission Deadlines:
In order to assure publication of the special issue of JPPM in the fall of 2017 the timeline and deadlines for this special issue will be strictly followed. All papers will be peer reviewed. Papers in the review process will be rejected if the timeframe does not allow for timely revisions. However, such papers may be referred to the editor of JPPM for further review through the Journal’s normal review process.
October 1 to December 31, 2016: Deadline window for paper submission
February 28, 2017: Feedback to authors after peer review
April 15, 2017: Deadline for revised submission
June 30, 2017: Final deadline for subsequent revisions
Publication Submission Requirements
As per JPPM guidelines, which may be found at: https://www.ama.org/publications/JournalOfPublicPolicyAndMarketing/Pages/About.aspx
Journal of Business Research
Special Issue on “Supplier-Buyer Relationship Management in Marketing and Management Research: An Area for Interdisciplinary Integration”
Guest Editors:
Prof. Chenting Su (City University of Hong Kong)
Prof. Haibin Yang (City University of Hong Kong)
Motivation
Researchers in both Marketing and Management areas have approached the question of supplier-buyer management from different perspectives and methodologies. For example, marketing scholars have often referred to the two parties in the channel management as manufacturers and distributors (Anderson & Narus, 1990; Gu, Namwoon, Tse, & Wang, 2010; Yang, Su, & Fam, 2012), while management scholars have often examined the vertical relationship between suppliers and buyers (Mesquita, Anand, & Brush, 2008). Apart from the terminology difference, marketing researchers tend to focus more on the dyadic relationship management such as contractual and relational governance between manufacturers and distributors (e.g., Yang et al., 2012), while management researchers put more emphasis on the value creation and value appropriation process between suppliers and buyers as well as with related stakeholders (e.g., Chatain, 2011).
Although each stream of research has contributed significantly to our understanding of supplier-buyer management, they have largely run independently without much interaction. Accordingly, our knowledge in this area has been constrained by the disciplinary barriers between these two areas. For example, marketing researchers seldom pay attention to the management issues such as the tension between value creation and appropriation, while management researchers rarely touch upon the demand-side in supplier-buyer management (Priem, Li, & Carr, 2012).
Researchers can benefit tremendously by exchanging and integrating insights from these two different disciplines. For instance, one unifying perspective emerging in channel management investigates networks (Gu et al., 2010) or triadic relationships such as network governance (Wathne & Heide, 2004), triadic trust (distrust) (Vissa, 2012), etc. We believe these interdisciplinary findings would enlighten both areas and will be managerially important.
This call for paper will encourage submissions that cut across the two disciplines and have the potential to bring new perspectives, approaches, or findings that are difficult to achieve from either discipline. Researchers may explore the fundamental question of how marketing research may inform management studies in supplier-buyer management, or vice versa. Meanwhile we encourage new methods that move beyond the dominant practice of multiple regression analysis toward using algorithms in solving new problems in marketing and management such as fuzzy set qualitative comparative analysis, which helps deal with complex relationships in supplier-buyer relationship management (Woodside, 2013).
Topics
Topics could include but are not limited to the following:
- How different governance mechanisms are generated, managed, and complemented or substituted among related parties in supplier-buyer management
- How triadic trust or network trust is generated, managed and transferred among related parties in supplier-buyer management
- What are different value creation and appropriation mechanisms developed in supplier-buyer management
- How firms strategically balance the value creation and appropriation with related parties in supplier-buyer management
- How customers may play a role in the relationship between suppliers and buyers
- The new challenges of supplier-buyer management in different institutional contexts
- The new governance mechanisms of supplier-buyer management in virtual marketplace
Submissions and Deadline
All manuscripts should apply the general author guidelines (http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-business-research/0148-2963/guide-for-authors#20100) for the Journal of Business Research (JBR). Manuscripts should not have been previously published or be under consideration by other journals. Please submit your manuscript electronically via the JBR electronic submission system by October 15, 2015. Any inquiries can be sent to the two special issue co-editors:
Prof. Chenting Su, mkctsu@cityu.edu.hk, City University of Hong Kong.
Prof. Haibin Yang, haibin@cityu.edu.hk, City University of Hong Kong.
Biographies of the Guest Editors:
Dr. Chenting Su is Chair Professor of Marketing at the College of Business, the City University of Hong Kong. His research interests include institutional issues in marketing channels and Guanxi management in Chinese business circles. His research works have appeared in prestigious journals such as Journal of Marketing, Journal of Marketing Research, MIS Quarterly, Strategic Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, and among others. He serves as the Guest Editor for Journal of Business Research and Industrial Marketing Management as well as the Associate Editor of Asian Journal of Business Research. He sits in the editorial boards of Journal of Business Research and Customer Needs & Solutions, among others.
Dr. Haibin Yang is Professor of Management/Marketing at the College of Business, the City University of Hong Kong. His research interests include strategic alliances, innovation, entrepreneurship, and transition economy. His research works have appeared in some top-tier management journals such as Academy of Management Journal, Strategic Management Journal, Management Science, Journal of Management, Research Policy, and among others. He serves as the editorial board member of Strategic Management Journal, Journal of World Business, and Long Range Planning.
References
Anderson, J. C., & Narus, J. A. 1990. A model of distributor firm and manufacturer firm working partnerships. Journal of Marketing, 54(1): 42-58.
Chatain, O. 2011. Value creation, competition, and performance in buyer-supplier relationships. Strategic Management Journal, 32(1): 76-102.
Gu, F. F., Namwoon, K., Tse, D. K., & Wang, D. T. 2010. Managing distributors' changing motivations over the course of a joint sales program. Journal of Marketing, 74(5): 32-47.
Mesquita, L. F., Anand, J., & Brush, T. H. 2008. Comparing the resource-based and relational views: knowledge transfer and spillover in vertical alliances. Strategic Management Journal, 29(9): 913-941.
Priem, R. L., Li, S., & Carr, J. C. 2012. Insights and new directions from demand-side approaches to technology innovation, entrepreneurship, and strategic management research. Journal of Management, 38(1): 346-374.
Vissa, B. 2012. Agency in Action: Entrepreneurs' Networking Style and Initiation of Economic Exchange. Organization Science, 23(2): 492-510.
Wathne, K. H., & Heide, J. B. 2004. Relationship governance in a supply chain network. Journal of Marketing, 68: 73-89.
Woodside, A. G. 2013. Moving beyond multiple regression analysis to algorithms: Calling for adoption of a paradigm shift from symmetric to asymmetric thinking in data analysis and crafting theory. Journal of Business Research, 66(4): 463-472.
Yang, Z., Su, C., & Fam, K. 2012. Dealing with institutional distances in international marketing channels: Governance strategies that engender legitimacy and efficiency. Journal of Marketing, 2012(76): 41-55.
Coping with the challenge of sustainability will determine emergent organizational forms in years to come. If ten years ago CEO’s tended to pay lip service to sustainability, informally voicing their doubts about its financial feasibility – today they acknowledge sustainability’s significance for their competitive advantage. Sustainability is relevant, salient and has to be taken seriously even if it does, indeed, increase the costs of most business activities. Hence the unusual combination: guest editors and editor in chief join hands to stress the exceptional nature of this particular special issue. What we clearly need is less ideology (limit carbon dioxide emissions or we shall roast ourselves) and more robust theoretical imagination and more relevant empirical research.
Our main questions are to be found in the heart of our knowledge domain;
- How can we foster organizational learning and promote change, which will keep our organizations fit and our organizational citizens creative in an age of sustainability?
- What changes of routines and procedures should be put on our organizational agendas right now, today rather than tomorrow?
We invite theoretical papers, which take issue with the Sterne, Gore and Kyoto ecological projects or Freeman Dyson’s critique thereof, and which allow us to understand how we need to change our organizations. We invite empirical papers, focusing n real managerial and policy dilemmas and solutions. Limiting paper printouts of web documents or filling our car tires with helium is not enough. We would like to contribute towards an answer to the question: how to deal with sustainability challenge? How to balance short term priorities with a long term vision? Organizational change with stability? Domestic with global frame of reference? What is the role of leadership and implementation in creating a sustainable and realistic organization?
Proposed papers should be submitted to eileen.mullins@ashridge.org.uk by October 1, 2011. However, authors are invited to first submit their papers to the Ashridge International Research Conference (AIRC2) on “The Sustainability Challenge: Organizational Change and Transformational Vision” (Ashridge Business School, Berkhamsted, UK, June 10-12, 2011) by March 31, 2011. Reviews and decisions on acceptance for the conference will be announced by May 1, 2011 (see airc2@ashridge.org.uk) While it is possible to submit a paper for the special issue directly, those submitting it to the conference will benefit from earlier review and inspirational discussion with a critical audience.
Important Deadlines:
• Call for chapters: October 28, 2011
• Collecting abstracts from authors: November 29, 2011
• Sending comments about abstract: December 11, 2011
• Agreement with author on chapter: December 25, 2011
• Collecting full papers: January 20, 2012
• Editing by peer-reviewers: March 30, 2012
• Correcting chapters: May 31, 2012
• Submission book to Publisher: June 8, 2012
• Publication date: July 13, 2012
• Book launching ceremony in Bradford College: August 1, 2012
(5th International Conference on Governance Fraud Ethics and Social Responsibility)
Manuscript Style:
• Your abstract should be maximum one page.
• Please use font 12 and Palatino Linotype style in the text.
• Your chapter should be maximum 25 pages including tables.
• Please apply APA 5 (Journal of American Pscyhology Association) while writing your chapter.
• Introduction, Methodology, Findings, Discussion and Index Words should be added in the text.
Important Note for the Chapter Authors:
• Please send original papers for the book.
• When author send chapter to our group book, this means that he/she has delivered copyright of manuscript to the editors. And editors has rights transfer copyright to the Publisher.
Contact Editors:
Dr. Khoshro Jahdi – k.jahdi@bradfordcollege.ac.uk
Dr. Ulku Yuksel – ulku.yuksel@sydney.edu.au
Firm innovation and internationalization in emerging markets are intertwined with sustainability and the need for sustainable world development. The economic dimension of sustainability focuses on increased ROI, revenue and market share increases, lower costs, reduced risk, etc. The environmental dimension encompasses activities to preserve, protect, conserve and restore ecosystems and natural resources (e.g., climate change policies, preservation of natural resources, and minimization and prevention of toxic wastes). The social dimension addresses conditions and actions that specifically affect humanity (e.g., poverty, unemployment, education, health, human rights, etc.). Sustainability is critical for the developing world to ensure long-term business success while significantly contributing towards sustainable world development through a healthy environment and a stable society. Institutions, both formal and informal, facilitate or hinder sustainable business practices. Hence the need to incorporate the institutional lens, consisting of regulatory, cognitive and normal dimensions, in exploring sustainable business practices in emerging markets (Scott, 1995) [1]
In this special issue of the IJoEM, we intend to raise questions of sustainability, institutions and internationalization in emerging economies akin to those raised by Peng, Wang, and Jiang (2008) [2]: (1) What drives firm strategy in emerging markets? (2) What role do sustainable business practices and innovation play in firm success and failure? and 3) “How to play the game, when the rules of the game are changing and not completely known?” (Peng et al., 2008). Any contribution that furthers these topics, or related ones, in the context of MNCs in emerging markets is most welcome. In line with the above topic, we are editing a special issue of the IJoEM examining these issues. The special issue will feature the best papers from the Academy of International Business Southeast (AIB-SE) chapter meetings to be held in Miami, Florida in October 2014as well as submissions in response to the general call for papers.
Potential Topics of Interest (among others)
We welcome papers within the broadly defined subject theme area from all the major disciplines in business and management studies, including: strategy, international business, organizational behavior and cross-cultural management, marketing, operations and decision sciences, finance and accounting, international trade and business economics. Potential topics include, but are not limited to:
- Sustainability as a driver for innovation, growth and internationalization in developed vs emerging markets
- The role of institutions in promoting or constraining sustainable innovation in emerging markets
- Factors impacting the geographic clustering of internationalization efforts in sustainability worldwide
- The impact of distance on sustainable innovation and internationalization
- The effect of internationalization on sustainable innovation within a company or geographic region
- The role of institutions in promoting or constraining inward and outward internationalization
- Managerial mindsets needed for sustainable innovation and internationalization in emerging markets
- Cross-cultural collaboration in sustainable innovation efforts
- The marketing of sustainable innovations in emerging markets vis-à-vis the developed world
- Theoretical and Empirical contributions to the field of sustainability, institutions, and emerging markets
Deadlines, Submission Guidelines and Editors’ Information
Submissions for the special issue will be sourced from the best papers of the 2014 AIB-SE conference as well as responses to a general call. Based on editorial review, top rated papers will be invited to go through additional peer review to be considered for publication. Manuscripts for the special issue should be submitted through the IJoEM website: http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ijoem.
The deadline for submissions is December 15, 2014.
For general submission guidelines, see: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=ijoem
For additional information on the 2014 AIB-SE Conference, see: http://www.aibse.org/2014-annual-conference/2014-call-for-papers/
Dr. Anshu Arora (Special Issue Editor)
Associate Professor - Marketing
Director of Global Logistics & International
Business Education and Research Center
Savannah State University, Georgia, USA
Phone: (912) 358-3387
Dr. Nicole Hartley (Special Issue Editor)
Lecturer - Marketing
University of Queensland Business School
University of Queensland,
Brisbane, Australia
Phone: +61 7 3346 8022
Dr. Rangamohan V Eunni (Consulting Editor)
Professor & Chair, Management Department
Director: Emerging Markets Initiative
Williamson College of Business Administration
Youngstown State University, Youngstown, Ohio
Phone: (330) 941-7180
References:
[1] Scott, W.R.1995. Institutions and Organizations. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[2] Peng, M., Wang, D, & Jiang, Y. (2008). An institution-based view of international business strategy: A focus on emerging economies. Journal of International Business Studies, 39, 920–926.
The Role of Multinational Enterprises in supporting the United Nations SDGs Book to be published by Edward Elgar Publishing Editors Silvester IVANAJ, John McINTYRE, and Vera IVANAJ.
The Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development were adopted in September 2015 and took effect from January 2016 and represent a common global effort to achieve a more sustainable world for all by addressing poverty, inequality, climate change, environmental degradation, prosperity, peace, and justice. (UN, 2019). The role of the private sector in implementing the 17 SDGs is critical as the market power, policy influence, and reach of multinational enterprises (MNEs) make these organizations particular drivers for implementation of said goals. MNEs have already identified SDG‐related risks and opportunities that can affect profitability and long‐term performance ranging from Coca‐Cola being concerned about the impact of climate change on clean water sources to Delta Airlines considering delaying new aircraft purchases because of carbon credits, and the like. The global concerns addressed by the SDGs create both opportunities and risks throughout the value chain. Five years after SDGs’ adoption, despite some encouraging results, no country is on track to achieve all SDGs by the 2030 deadline. Many MNEs use the language of the SDGs without making substantial changes to their business practices. Numerous MNEs encounter difficulties to align their business strategy with the SDGs and integrate them into sustainability reports. There is a pressing need to develop new theories, modify existing proposed models, and determine how MNEs can influence the better and timely implementation of SDGs.
Suggested Topics for Submissions
The purpose of this book is to stimulate inter‐, multi‐, and transdisciplinary discussions on how MNEs can implement SDGs most relevant to their core strategies. The proposed book will include chapters presenting research advances in studies and practices linking disciplines, knowledge systems, and stakeholders to support a more sustainable business model for the short and more importantly long‐term, the issue will also take into consideration with solution‐oriented studies. The book is being designed with the intent to solicit high‐quality contributions, expand and integrate the knowledge base for academics, policy‐makers practitioners, consultants, and business leaders with an interest in different aspects of SDGs’ implementation, by proposing relevant frameworks, and effective levers of action.
Socio‐Economic factors and best practices
- Identify and test new implementation models, policy frameworks, and better practices of MNEs, thereby contributing to making societies more sustainable. What are more pragmatic and sustainable models, the policy frameworks that are sustainable as well as equitable that can be implemented by MNEs with respect to working towards the SDGs? What are the best practices being applied fields that can be used by MNEs in the same category or otherwise?
- What factors facilitate or hinder the adoption and implementation of SDGs? How macroeconomic (political, social, legal, institutional, cultural, etc.), microeconomic (market, competition, stakeholders, industry sectors, etc.), and organizational (size, hierarchy, executive management, etc.) factors have leverage on the implementation of SDGs? What is MNE’s involvement with outside institutions (other MNEs, NGOs, local governments, etc.) to effectively implement SDGs?
- What are the governments’ roles on MNEs operations? Which standards of governance at which levels are required to better meet SDGs expectations? How can MNEs align their future policy with an effective business strategy to remain globally competitive? What implications for MNEs’ suppliers and customers? How should employee awareness, training, and empowerment affect MNEs’ strategies and actions? Implementation and sustainable, equitable models
- Ways in which MNEs can positively or negatively influence agenda‐setting and political decision‐making of governments of countries in which they operate with respect to supporting SDGs? How can MNEs be embedded into larger societal contexts to enhance positive impacts? Which specific MNEs are most likely to innovate in light of the SDGs?
- How the transition to truly equitable, sustainable, post‐fossil carbon societies can be accelerated and, in so doing, reduce, avoid, and reverse further deleterious climate effects. How can these models be integrated into the existing business models, how can MNEs be catalysts for the integration of and ensure the sustainability of post-fossil-carbon societies
- What are the negative and positive roles that MNEs could play in addressing and reducing climate change impacts, what are the factors affecting their behaviors? How depending on a particular business model may drive the MNEs to take certain decisions in favor or against driving climate change impact? Does their geographical presence matter? Are they canceling their own progress out by the non‐uniform implementation of models to drive said climate change impacts?
- What are the latest scientific and technical breakthroughs that MNEs can implement? What are the factors required for MNEs to gain critical implementation of these emerging technologies?
- How can MNEs integrate the SDGs into their corporate strategy? How to disseminate the best practices of other countries? What is the relationship between the SDGs and company strategy? How to define the SDGs where an MNE has the greatest potential impact? How do government policies that aim to implement the SDGs affect MNEs' strategy? How better practices will assist collaborative border‐crossing operations, as private actors reconcile their major objectives in the framework to envision the future?
- How do MNEs contribute in countries where they operate in alleviating poverty and hunger, ensuring equitable education for all, achieving gender equity, sustainable management of water resources, offering decent working conditions in a global talent market, fostering sustainable innovations, production and consumption, combating global warming, or conserving scarce resources?
- What are the new approaches and pathways bridging the economic, political, ecological, and social spheres of the SDGs, where are there any overlaps or roadblocks from this cross‐functional perspective?
- What strategic implications do the SDGs may have on MNEs’ reporting strategy? How to use the goals as a framework for reporting in order to monitor and report the progress toward SDGs’ implementation? How should MNEs integrate the SDGs into their sustainability reports? What information MNEs should be reporting? What reporting framework? What indicator preferences in reporting on progress toward the SDGs? What new MNE’s reporting standards include SDGs? How should reporting consider the interests of stakeholders having no financial stake in the organization?
The topical areas, which authors may address for this book are not limited to those listed above.
Format
Chapter proposals can present different approaches and methods: theoretical reflections, analytical models and frameworks, literature reviews, monographs, best practices, and case studies.
Coverage/target audience
This book will engage academics, policy‐makers, corporate leaders, managers, NGOs, and other practitioners to develop book chapters, on the topic of how MNEs can align themselves to become key instigators of SDGs’ implementation. The chapter proposals can be original research, comprehensive literature reviews, theoretical frameworks, empirical studies, comprehensive, integrative reviews, case studies, best practices or about new techniques and technologies from the field.
Chapter submission
Chapter proposals must be written in good English. Authors with limitations in the command of written English are recommended to have their chapters edited by a Professional English Scientific Editor before the first submission. Poorly written pieces can compromise the decisions during the review process. The submission of contributions will be done in two stages. The first is to submit only an intention to contribute with a chapter. During this stage, the following information is required: title, authors with their affiliations, positions and addresses, an abstract of about 250‐300 words, and 5 keywords. If accepted, authors will be invited to submit the full version of their chapters.
Tentative submission timetable and deadlines
- Abstract submission: January 31, 2021
- Abstract acceptance: February 28, 2021
- Full chapter submission: April 30, 2021
- Author notification: June 15, 2021
- Revised version submission: July 15, 2021
- Final acceptance: July 31, 2021
How to submit
Book chapter submission is through email: John.McIntyre@scheller.gatech.edu or silvester.ivanaj@icn‐artem.com.
Review Process
The review process is single-blind.
Book Editors
- Silvester IVANAJ, ICN Business School, France: silvester.ivanaj@icn‐artem.com
- John McINTYRE, Scheller College of Business at the Georgia Institute of Technology, USA: John.McIntyre@scheller.gatech.edu
- Vera IVANAJ, Université de Lorraine, France : vera.ivanaj@univ‐lorraine.fr
The accepted chapters will be published by Edward Elgar Publishing. Below are some of our previous publications on the topic of MNS and Sustainable Development with this publisher:
- Multinational Enterprises and the Challenge of Sustainable Development https://www.e‐elgar.com/shop/gbp/multinational‐enterprises‐and‐the‐challenge‐of‐sustainabledevelopment‐ 9781848444133.html
- Strategies for Sustainable Technologies and Innovations https://www.e‐elgar.com/shop/gbp/strategies‐for‐sustainable‐technologies‐and‐innovations‐ 9781781006825.html
- Emerging Dynamics of Sustainability in Multinational Enterprises https://www.e‐elgar.com/shop/gbp/emerging‐dynamics‐of‐sustainability‐in‐multinationalenterprises‐ 9781784718527.html
- CSR and Climate Change Implications for Multinational Enterprises https://www.e‐elgar.com/shop/gbp/csr‐and‐climate‐change‐implications‐for‐multinationalenterprises‐ 9781786437754.html
Tentative publication date: Fall 2017
Overview: The main goal of this special issue is to encourage studies that deepen our knowledge of teaching international business in the Asia-Pacific region. While comparative studies between Asia-Pacific and other regions are promoted, those focusing on single country are also welcomed. Studies exploring specific topics in international business are also encouraged. Examples include, but are not limited to, family business management, impacts of top management teams, financing issues, corporate entrepreneurship and innovation, strategy, human resource management, organizational behavior, and so on. Both theoretical and empirical studies are invited, and case studies with significant contributions to the relevant literature will also be considered.
About the Journal: JTIB is a leading journal in international business education, and more detailed information can be found at: http://www.tandfonline.com/loi/wtib20. JTIB instructs international business educators, curriculum developers, and institutions of higher education worldwide on methods and techniques for better teaching to ensure a global mindset and optimum, cost-effective learning in international business. JTIB seeks original, significant, scholarly, and applied articles that: say something meaningful to international business curriculum developers; use empirical data and analysis to show the effectiveness of various approaches to teaching international business; enrich and make more effective the classroom presentations of teachers of international business; facilitate research endeavors of international business consultants, researchers, business education foundations, and institutions of higher learning. Papers for this special issue should not have been published or submitted elsewhere for publication.
Paper Submission Procedure: We will follow a double-blind review procedure in order to ensure the quality of this special issue. However, only one round of external reviews will be conducted, and editorial decisions will be made after we receive the revised manuscripts from the authors. The submission Deadline is March 15, 2017, and authors will be notified with the first-round reviewers’ reports by April 30, 2017. Submissions of revised manuscripts will be due by June 15, 2017, and editorial decisions will be available for the authors by June 30, 2017. Authors who are interested in submitting their manuscripts to this special issue may do so by emailing Zhenyu Wu at zhenyu.wu@umanitoba.ca by March 15, 2017. Please also send inquiries to Zhenyu Wu.
Objective of the book:
This edited research book focuses on technological innovation and international competitiveness, and we attempt to seek explanations for how this can influence business growth.
Technological innovation and competitiveness play an increasing critical role in business growth in the global (international) market. We are seeking contributions – theoretical as well as empirical – that study the relationships between technological innovation, international competitiveness, and business growth and make new contributions in the field.
Contributions may address but are not limited to the following topics:
- What are the main challenges of technological innovation and international competitiveness?
- How can knowledge, innovation and creative skills be integrated with technology solutions to create an international high-value for businesses?
- How do innovation and technology and competitiveness contribute to business growth?
- How can smart strategies contribute to the international competitiveness of business?
- What is the role of university-industry technology transfer in the context of international competitiveness?
- What is the impact of international networks and competition on business, and innovative ecosystems for business growth?
The focus of the chapters should be on cutting-edge theoretical developments and phenomena including best practices.
The book will link the technological innovation and international competitiveness perspectives to understand the process of business growth. We envision that this book will be one of the first to relate, in a broader sense, the micro (manager/entrepreneur and company), meso (industry), and macro (country) levels that affect business growth based on knowledge overflows. The book is thus interdisciplinary in nature appealing to entrepreneurs/managers and scholars, students and professionals.
Submissions procedure:
Academics, researchers and practitioners are invited to submit the full chapters till December 30, 2019. The doc or docx format of manuscripts should be submitted to: João J. Ferreira (jjmf@ubi.pt and/or jjmf66@gmail.com); Sérgio Teixeira (sergio.teixeira@staff.uma.pt); and Hussain Rammal (hussain.rammal@uts.edu.au)
The increasing prominence of MNEs from the developing countries (DC MNEs) has triggered an intensive debate in both the academic and popular press about its potential to influence growth and development, not just in their home and host countries, but also in the global economy at large. Despite being the subject of research for three decades, there is surprisingly little consensus in this regard.
Nonetheless, the following facts seem to survive scrutiny. First, that DC MNEs typically invest less in R&D and have weaker ownership assets than ‘conventional’ MNEs. Second, their internationalization tends to rely more on leveraging country-specific advantages and organizational innovations than firm-specific ownership assets. Third, the institutional environment in the home countries of DC MNEs influences their organization and governance. DC MNEs are often organized in diversified business groups and aim for more horizontal and vertical integration than what would be optimal in a more developed market (Khanna and Yafeh 2007; Hemrit 2011). Fourth, long-term linkages and networks characterize the relationships between firms. DC MNEs often rely on networks with ethnic, linguistic or cultural affinities that tend to be relatively closed and built on personalized governance and control systems. Fifth, DC MNEs exhibit a more mixed pattern of ownership than MNEs from developed countries. Many DC MNEs are either privately held (e.g. family-owned business groups) or wholly or partly owned by the state. Sixth, home governments support support the internationalization of domestic firms in order to strengthen the home economy’s international competitivenes (Rasiah et al. 2010).
The importance of FDI to development and growth is a much studied area (e.g., Lall and Narula 2004, Narula and Dunning 2010). In principle, FDI can raise labor productivity, output, employment, and incomes (Blomström et al. 1996). In addition, the literature suggests that further gains may arise because of the increased competition and discipline generated by foreign firms, from technological, managerial, and organizational spillovers, and from learning-by-doing effects in local suppliers (Hirschman 1958, De Mello Jr. 1997; Blomström and Kokko 1998). Most contemporary analyses and national strategies tend to emphasize the positive potentials inherent in FDI, but the positive assessment is not unanimous and many debates remain unsettled (Narula and Dunning 2010). FDI flows may also have negative effects on growth when there is a mismatch between the investment projects and the host country’s socio-economic conditions and absorptive capacity. The net effect of FDI also depends on a variety other factors such as the host country’s policy environment, and the structure of its political and social institutions. If DC MNEs do differ from conventional MNEs, it is likely that the development effects of DC MNEs are also different.
The purpose of this special issue of the European Journal of Development Research is to explore the development effects of MNEs from developing economies. Broadly speaking, the literature on DC MNEs has taken an Economics, International Business (IB) or Management perspective, but we will deliberately to seek alternative, more pluralistic (and cross-disciplinary) approaches, including contributions from political economy, sociology and anthropology. The empirical evidence on the developmental effects of outward FDI/DC MNEs remains fragmented and inconclusive: What are the developmental effects of DC MNEs? Are there tangible differences between DC MNEs and conventional MNEs in host countries? Are there important variations across and between industries, home countries, and host countries? How have geopolitical circumstances shaped their activities? Particular emphasis should be placed on the development effects that can be traced from the special characteristics and behavior of DC MNEs.
Key questions
We welcome papers from a variety of contexts that advance our theoretical and empirical understanding of the processes that shape and determine the developmental dimensions of DC MNEs, whether from a sociological, political, or economic perspective. The special issue welcomes a broad range of methodologies in enhancing our understanding of the aforementioned processes. These include quantitative studies, qualitative and case studies, multi-country comparative studies, replication studies and studies of specific projects. Key questions that may be addressed include:
What are the political economy and sociological causes and implications of the growth of DC MNE activity?
How do the operations of DC MNEs in developing countries differ from “conventional” MNEs? These differences can refer to technology as well as organizational capabilities, marketing, labor relations, and other operational dimensions.
Are the linkages between DC MNEs and local firms different from linkages between local firms and conventional MNEs?
What role do home governments play in supporting to DC MNEs?
What are political and sociological effects of DC MNE activity, relative to conventional MNEs?
Do DC MNEs affect migration patterns, both within countries and between countries?
Do DC MNEs follow different strategies in engaging in resource-seeking activities? What are the consequences of DC MNE investments in natural resources?
What are the links between FDI and trade for investors from developing countries? Do DC MNEs export back to their home countries, or are their exports directed towards third countries (e.g. the developed economies)?
What are the home country effects of FDI from developing countries? Are the spillover effects in the home countries, i.e., is technology and knowledge diffused from DC MNEs to other firms in the home country?
Proposed time table
The time table for the proposed special issue is as follows:
We invite proposals/abstracts/papers to be submitted to the guest editors by December 1, 2011. First full drafts of the papers should be submitted to EJDR’s website by March 2012 for formal review. Revised drafts will be presented and discussed at the bi-annual OFDI Conference at Copenhagen Business School in November 2012. Final manuscripts will be delivered in early 2013, for publication in Volume 24 (2013) of EJDR. All submissions need to follow the EJDR guidelines, and will be subject to a double-blind review. See www.palgrave-journals.com/ejdr for details.
Selected references
Blomström, M. and A. Kokko (1998) ”Multinational Corporations and Spillovers”, Journal of Economic Surveys, 12(3) 247-277.
Blomström, M., R. Lipsey and M. Zejan (1996), “Is Fixed Investment the Key to Economic Growth?” Quarterly Journal of Economics, 111 (1), 269–276.
Child, J. and Rodrigues, S, (2005), “The Internationalization of Chinese firms: A Case for Theoretical Extension?”, Management and Organization Review, 1(3), 381-410.
De Mello, L.R. (1997), “Foreign Direct Investment in Developing Countries and Growth: A Selective Survey”, Journal of Development Studies, 34, 1–34.
Dunning, J.H., R.V. Hoesel and R. Narula (1998), ‘Third World Multinationals Revisited: New Developments and Theoretical Implications’, in J.H. Dunning (ed.), Globalization, Trade, and Foreign Direct Investment, Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Hemrit, M. (2011), Beyond the Bamboo Network: The Internationalization Process of Thai Family Business Groups, Stockholm: Stockholm School of Economics.
Hirschman, A.O. (1958), The Strategy of Economic Development. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press.
Khanna, T. and Y. Yafeh (2007), ‘Business Groups in Emerging Markets: Paragons or Parasites?’ Journal of Economic Literature, 45(2): 331-72.
Kumar, K. and Mcleod, M.G.. (1981) Multinationals from Developing Countries, Lexington, MA: Lexington Books.
Lall, S. (1983) The New Multinationals: The Spread of Third World Enterprises, New York: Wiley.
Lall, S. & Narula, R. (2004) FDI and its Role in economic development: Do we need a new agenda, European Journal of Development Research, 16(3), pp. 447-464.
Lecraw, D.J. (1977), “Direct Investment by Firms from Less Developed Countries”, Oxford Economic Papers, 29(3), 442–457.
Luo, Y. and R.L. Tung (2007), “International Expansion of Emerging Market Enterprises: A Springboard Perspective”, Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 481–498
Mohan, G. and Tan-Mullins, M. (2009) Chinese Migrants in Africa as New Agents of Development? An Analytical Framework European Journal of Development Research, 21, 588–605
Mathews, J.A. (2002) Dragon Multinational: Towards a New Model of Global Growth, New York: Oxford University Press.
Narula, R. (2006), “Globalization, New Ecologies, New Zoologies, and the Purported Death of the Eclectic Paradigm”, Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23, 143–151.
Narula, R. (2010), “Much Ado About Nothing or Sirens of a Brave New World? MNE Activity from Developing Countries and its Significance for Development”, Background Paper for the Perspectives on Global Development 2010: Shifting Wealth, UNCTAD, Geneva.
Narula, R., Dunning, J.H. (2010). Multinational enterprises, development and globalization: some clarifications and a research agenda. Oxford Development Studies, 38(3): 263 – 287.
Narula, R., Q. Nguyen (2011), Emerging country MNEs and the role of home countries: separating fact from irrational expectations. University of Reading Discussion Paper Series
Ramamurti, R. and J.V. Singh (eds.). (2009) Emerging Multinationals in Emerging Markets, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rasiah, R., P. Gammeltoft, and Y. Jiang (2010), “Home Government Policies for Outward FDI from Emerging Economies: Lessons from Asia”, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 5 (3/4), 333-57.
Guest Editors:
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea
Lucia Piscitello, Politecnico di Milano School of Management, Italy
Nigel Driffield, Warwick University, Warwick Business School, UK
Purpose and Research Questions:
According to UNCTAD estimates (2007, 2011, 2020), after accounting for fluctuations based on economic conditions, the stock value of (outward) foreign direct investment (FDI) transactions grew from U$1.8 trillion a year in 1990 to U$6.2 trillion in 2000. The figure of U$12.5 trillion for 2006 was twice that of the year 2000 and worldwide FDI activities continued to expand, increasing to U$20.4 trillion in 2010 and to U$34.6 trillion in 2019.
While most of the main sources for such an FDI come from multinational corporations (MNCs) that have headquarters in developed economies (Berrill, Kearney, & O’Hagan-Luff, 2019), the primary economies, which attract FDI, are, namely China, India, and Southeast Asian countries. In addition, the African continent is also often referred to as the last blue ocean for MNCs to stably earn their profits abroad.
Despite the plausible theoretical ground for anticipating positive contributions (e.g. economic growth, innovations, institutional development and the progress of artificial intelligence, etc.) of FDI to these emerging and developing countries, the role of FDI in the issue remains highly controversial (Reiter & Steensma, 2010). While some studies confirm a positive impact of FDI (e.g., Adams, 2009; Salim & Bloch, 2009; Vu, 2008; Woo, 2009), others fail to find such relationship (e.g. Barry, Gorg, & Kosova, 2010; Strobl, 2005; Djankov & Hoekman, 2000; Jin & Zeng, 2017). In contrast, researchers in the third school argue conditions to yield the positive outcomes through FDI. As an example, Chitambara (2021) finds that FDI inflows exert a positive impact on economic growth only in combination with institutional development and trade openness. Hermes and Lensink (2003) and Durham (2004) document that FDI promotes economic development in the case where the host countries have achieved a certain level of financial systems and equipped appropriate financial market regulations. According to Reiter and Steensma (2010), the positive impact of FDI depends on the level of corruption in local markets.
Accordingly, those researchers argue different views on FDI contributions. For example, De Mello (1997) considers FDI as a bundle of foreign capital, technology and know-how. Consequently, host markets (i.e., developing and emerging countries) attracting FDI are anticipated to significantly reduce the technological gap against advanced economies leading to positive innovations. In the same vein, Asheghian (2004) emphasizes that output growth in the developing and emerging countries is dependent upon whether they can enhance efficiency and productivity throughout domestic industries, and argues that FDI inflows commonly result in increasing returns in domestic production and enlarges in the value-added content of FDI-related production. In contrast, some other researchers contend that MNCs extract profits from local markets and give nothing of value in exchange. In addition, they highlight that the relations between core and peripheral economies hamper the latter’s development, perpetuate their subordinate status, transfer economic surplus to the core, and increasingly force them to rely on core countries for investment, employment and technology (Perraton, 2007).
Due to this, we do not yet know enough about the two bright and dark sides of the same coin (i.e., FDI) represented by the statement that FDI is a double edged sword. In this regard, the aim of this special issue is to bring together theoretical and empirical advancements examining the contributions of MNCs and FDI to various areas in relatively underdeveloped markets. We seek conceptual, theoretical and empirical (both quantitatively and qualitatively approached) papers, as well as literature reviews and meta-analyses, that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
-
Which theories of international business or multinational enterprise best explain the apparent implications of FDI for developing countries?
-
What are the key factors yielding positive outcomes through FDI in developing and emerging economies? Is there any heterogeneity across the level of economic and social developments in a host country and across industries? What role does distance play?
-
How does FDI function as a means for knowledge transfer or knowledge extortion between developed and developing economies?
-
What is the effect of FDI on institutional development in local economies?
-
What is the impact of FDI on poverty and inequality in local economies?
-
How does FDI influence differently when it is attracted in developed and developing economies for innovation (e.g. De Beule & Van Beveren, 2019)?
-
Who obtains more benefits through FDI between advanced and developing countries?
-
Are there any patterns of social development through FDI in developing countries? What implications can be drawn from countries that have successfully leapfrogged into better economies?
-
In the view of emerging and developing countries, what are the primary conditions that retard double negative economic outcomes from inward FDI?
-
What is the effect of profit remittance by MNCs on the local market economy? What encourages MNCs to re-invest profits in local markets?
-
What are the effects of reorganizing of MNCs’ global value chains (GVCs) by “reshoring” production, diversifying their supplier bases and adopting industry 4.0 revolution on emerging and developing economies, as well as developed economies (e.g. De Marchi, Di Maria, Golini, & Perri, 2020; Van Assche & Lundan, 2020)?
Submission Instructions:
The deadline for submissions is 31 December, 2022. For further information of International Journal of Development Issues, including author guidelines, please visit the International Journal of Development Issues website at: https://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/journal/ijdi#author-guidelines.
All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at the International Journal of Development Issues.
More Information:
To obtain additional information, please contact the guest editor:
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea (leedspark@hufs.ac.kr)
Lucia Piscitello, Politecnico di Milano School of Management, Italy (lucia.piscitello@polimi.it)
Nigel Driffield, Warwick University, Warwick Business School, UK (Nigel.Driffield@wbs.ac.uk)
The recent financial and economic crisis starting in 2007/08 has underscored the frailty of the financial system. Economists have long stressed that uncertainty, asymmetric information, adverse incentives, and strategic behavior can become key drivers of the transmission of shocks through the financial system which eventually spreads into the real sector. Rebuilding the financial system and re-designing financial regulation pose important challenges for the future. Innovative research on the current economic and financial crisis and the lessons that it can teach about the global financial system and regulatory environment will be considered for inclusion in this special issue.
Potential paper topics include papers on
- Uncertainty and strategic behavior as contagion mechanism;
- Innovations in financial instruments and their welfare effects;
- Funding and market liquidity:
- Risk management and regulation;
- Transparency and market discipline;
- Measurement of systemic risk;
- Regulation of the “shadow banking system” of non-bank financial institutions;
- Domestic and international problems of existing resolution regimes for systemic risks,
The Editors of the Special Issue have intentionally kept the list of suggested topics short so as to stimulate creativity and encourage prospective authors to adopt a variety of perspectives when approaching this subject. The Special Issue will include a state-of-the art collection of papers relating what we can learn about impact of the crisis.
In keeping with the GEJ's tradition, empirical research and theoretical work with direct empirical applications are particularly encouraged.
Deadline:
Submissions should be sent no later than December 15, 2010.
All articles will be submitted to a process of peer evaluation, in accordance with the editorial policy of GEJ. For questions regarding this special issue, authors are invited to contact the editors: jpelz@gwu.edu and/or amir1s@colman.ac.il. Submissions for this issue should be submitted electronically to GEJ here. Please indicate that the submission is for this special issue
Guest Editors:
Joseph Pelzman
Department of Economics
George Washington University
Washington, DC 20052
jpelz@gwu.edu
and
Amir Shoham
Department of Business Administration
College of Management
Rishon L’Tzion, ISRAEL
amir1s@colman.ac.il
The Journal of Business Research will publish a special issue containing selected papers on examining the effects of childhood experiences on adult behavior and outcomes in relation to business decisions, processes and activities.
Many children have experienced famine, malnutrition, violence, poverty, neglect, abuse, homelessness, discrimination, bullying, health issues and other forms of adversities. For example, over half of the world’s nearly 26 million refugees are children, among whom many spend their entire childhoods away from homes or families (United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees, 2019). In Australia, for instance, more than 170,000 children (one in 33 children) received child protection services and nearly 45,000 children were in out-of-home care due to abuse or neglect (Australian Institute of Health and Welfare, 2020). Many developing countries have experienced large waves of internal migration with resultant ‘left-behind’ children. In rural China, approximately 12 million children under age 2 were left behind by parents who migrated to cities for work, resulting in those left-behind children having poorer cognitive development (Yue et al., 2020). In urban China, children of rural-urban migrant workers often experience discrimination within the urban public-school system, which prioritizes resources for local students (Wang, Cheng, & Smyth, 2018). How do these childhood experiences play out later in life? What are the channels through which this occurs? Do they contribute to economic choices, work practice, and performance? Do they confirm or challenge economic and management theories about decision-making, the organization of work, the formation of successful business? There is a growing body of literature on the relationship between childhood circumstances and adult economic and career behavior and outcomes. For instance, a relatively early study suggests that most successful CEOs have a ‘normal and happy’ childhood (Cox & Cooper, 1989). Another study finds that having a difficult childhood is positively correlated with entrepreneurial intentions by increasing one’s self-reliance, which, in turn, increases one’s ability to cope with the risks and uncertainties of self-employment (Drennan, Kennedy, & Renfrow, 2005). These contrasting and conflicting empirical results reflect theoretical ambiguity in the predictions of human capital theory regarding the relationship between (early) life experience and entrepreneurial behavior and outcomes (Simoes, Crespo, & Moreira, 2015).
Many gaps remain in our understanding of the effect of childhood experiences on economic behavior later in life. A recent review of the broader literature on the long-term effects of childhood experiences on individual outcomes suggests that ‘relatively mild shocks in early life can have substantial negative effects, but that the effects are often heterogeneous reflecting differences in child endowments, budget constraints, and production technologies. Moreover, shocks, investments, and interventions can interact in complex ways that we are only beginning to be understood’ (Almond, Currie, & Duque, 2018, p. 1360). The theoretical underpinnings of these complex relationships and implications for management and business practices and research are not well studied. Methodologically, there is relatively limited research at the interface of management, psychology, health and economic sciences that, for example, employs panel data econometrics and (quasi-) experimental designs to examine the causal relationship of childhood experiences on economic behaviors and outcomes later in life. Yet, having causal estimates is incredibly important when developing appropriate policies and managerial responses. With this special issue we seek to expand our understanding of the effects of childhood experiences on economic behavior and outcomes in adulthood as well as their implications for management and business theories and practices.
Submissions should address the broad area of childhood experiences and adult behavior and outcomes pertaining to business activities through adopting a methodological approach that emphasizes causal relationship. Submissions that are interdisciplinary in that they draw on behavioral insights from management, psychology, economics and other disciplines are particularly welcome. We are particularly interested in empirical papers that:
1. Use experimental methods and/or statistical/econometric approaches to examine the causal relations between childhood experiences and business behavior and outcomes in adulthood
2. Examine the mechanisms/channels through which these causal relations take effect, the implications for the workforce/workplace, career development, organizational or societal outcomes
3. Examine the ways through which businesses can utilize the availability of managerial talents, human capital and ‘good behavior’ that stemmed from childhood experiences
4. Develop new theories to understand the relationship between childhood experiences and adult outcomes in the context of actual business setting
5. Examine issues with strong child and young people policy relevance
6. Examine the roles of business organizations in the socioeconomic integration of marginalized groups with adverse childhood experiences However, submissions are by no means limited to these topics.
Submission Information Guide for Authors can be found in www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-business-research/0148-2963/guide-for-authors. Papers for the special issue should be submitted through the Journal of Business Research submission system (www.editorialmanager.com/JOBR). In the submission system, please choose article type ‘Childhood Experience’.
Submissions will be subject to the normal peer review process. Submissions for the special issue begin on June 1, 2020, with the final deadline for submission being November 30, 2020.
Questions pertaining to the special issue should be directed to the special issue managing guest editor, Dr Youqing Fan (email: y.fan@westernsydney.edu.au).
References:
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. (2020).
Child Protection Australia 2018–19. Canberra: Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. Almond, D., Currie, J., & Duque, J. (2018).
Childhood circumstances and adult outcomes: Act II, Journal of Economic Literature, 56(4), 1360-1446. doi:10.1257/jel.20171164 Cox, C. J., & Copper, C.L. (1989).
The making of the British CEO: Childhood, work experience, personality, and management style. Academy of Management Perspectives, 3(3), 241-245. doi:10.5465/ame.1989.4274744 Drennan, J., Kennedy, J., & Renfrow, P. (2005).
Impact of childhood experiences on the development of entrepreneurial intentions. The International Journal of Entrepreneurship and Innovation, 6(4), 231-238. doi:10.5367/000000005775179801 Simoes, N., Crespo, N., & Moreira, S. B. (2016).
Individual determinants of self‐employment entry: What do we really know?. Journal of Economic Surveys, 30(4), 783-806. doi:10.1111/joes.12111 United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. (2019).
Global trends: Forced displacement in 2018. Retrieved from https://www.unhcr.org/5d08d7ee7.pdf Wang, H., Cheng, Z., & Smyth, R. (2018).
Do migrant students affect local students’ academic achievements in urban China?. Economics of Education Review, 63, 64-77. doi:10.1016/j.econedurev.2018.01.007 Yue, A., Bai, Y., Shi, Y., Luo, R., Rozelle, S., Medina, A., & Sylvia, S. (2020).
Parental migration and early childhood development in rural China. Demography. Advance online publication. doi:10.1007/s13524-019-00849-4 (n.d)
INTRODUCTION
The Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) have garnered significant attention in the international business literature, reflecting a growing interest in understanding the role of business in addressing these global challenges. A systematic literature review by Mio et al. (2020) emphasises the strategic role of businesses in addressing the SDGs, highlighting the central role of various business actors beyond large international corporations. This aligns with the findings of Kolk et al. (2017), who reviewed research in international business journals on key SDGs related to poverty and inequality, energy and climate change, and peace.
The contribution of international business research to the SDGs is evident in the study by Rygh et al. (2021), which highlights the increasing number of IB articles referencing the SDGs, particularly in special issues of prominent journals such as the Journal of International Business Studies (JIBS) and the Journal of International Business Policy (JIBP). These journals have significantly contributed to the discourse on the SDGs, covering topics such as SDG interactions (Pradhan et al., 2017; Nilsson et al., 2016), the role of multinational enterprises (Zanten & Tulder, 2018), business sustainability reporting (Rezaee et al., 2023), and the engagement of the private sector with the SDGs (Scheyvens et al., 2016).
Furthermore, the study by Sianes et al. (2022) identifies the main trends in SDG-related academic research, including the most relevant journals, prolific authors, institutions, countries, and collaborative networks. Yeh et al. (2022) emphasise using bibliometrics to understand the trends and content of SDG-related research papers and identify gaps. Business model innovation is recognised as a key driver for achieving the SDGs (Rosati et al., 2022), while the study by Ordonez‐Ponce et al. (2021) establishes a positive connection between businesses and the SDGs through community sustainability partnerships. Moreover, the importance of cross-sectoral collaborations involving governments, businesses, international organisations, academia, and non-profits in achieving the SDGs is highlighted by Bulc et al. (2018).
In summary, the literature on SDGs in international business journals reflects a growing interest in understanding the role of business in addressing the SDGs, identifying trends in SDG-related research, and exploring innovative approaches such as business model innovation and cross-sectoral collaborations to contribute to achieving the SDGs. This call for chapters aims to build upon this foundation and further advance understanding of the intersection between international business and Sustainable Development Goals.
INVITATION
Dear International Business Scholars, Practitioners, and Decision-Makers,
We are excited to invite you to contribute to the WOS and Scopus-indexed “The Elgar Companion to International Business and the Sustainable Development Goals.” This handbook combines rigorous academic inquiry with practical insights, making it an essential resource for scholars, business practitioners, decision-makers, and students. We aim to provide a conceptual, theoretical, and methodological framework that addresses the intersection of international business strategies and sustainable development initiatives.
KEY THEMES AND TOPICS FOR SUBMISSION
1. SDGs and Strategic Alignment
- How can digitalisation help Multinational Enterprises (MNEs) align with and contribute to the 2030 development agenda?
- Alignment of corporate and government measures to enhance contributions to the SDGs
- Double accountability of MNEs’ positive impacts on SDGs
- Interpretation of MNE Alignment and contribution to sustainable development through existing internationalisation theories
2. Corporate Activism and Historical Perspectives
- Examples of corporate activism towards achieving SDGs at host and local companies
- Historical contributions of multinationals to sustainable development in host countries
- Responses of multinationals to their negative externalities
- Are emerging markets more aware of the sustainability-related needs of host stakeholders than multinationals from developed countries?
3. Internationalisation of ‘Sustainable’ MNEs
- Internationalisation of nature-positive, people-positive, and carbon-positive MNEs
- Criteria to prioritise trade-offs in international operations
- Internationalisation of sustainable development-related values from home countries to host country operations
- MNEs as the last mile to achieving the SDGs commitments by countries
4. Measuring and Monetising Impact
- Measuring and monetising MNEs’ impact in home and host countries
- The business case for MNEs in sustainable development: Balancing profitability with sustainability
- Social and environmental accountability: Integrating SDG contributions into balance sheet performance
- Challenges and methodological rigour required in measuring impacts
5. Policy, Regulation, and Cross-Country Comparisons
- Anticipating regulations to standardise social and environmental contributions in subsidiaries
- Cross-country comparisons of tax incentives and sanctions for MNEs contributing to local sustainable development
6. Critical Perspectives and Future Directions
- The risks of new forms of colonialism through MNE-imposed development agendas
- Critical views on the sustainability agendas of developed versus emerging markets
- Green and rainbow washing: Implications on international business
SUBMISSION GUIDELINES
We invite you to submit chapter proposals that clearly outline the scope and content of your intended chapter, ensuring alignment with the themes listed above. Proposals should be accessible to a broad audience, including business practitioners, policymakers, and academic scholars.
Please submit your chapter proposals to mgonza40@eafit.edu.co and wachk@uek.krakow.pl, which will include a brief outline, the targeted section, and a summary of the key contributions of the chapter. Abstracts should be 250-300 words in length.
Deadline for Submissions: 24th May 2024
We look forward to your innovative contributions, which promise to advance the discussion of international business and sustainable development significantly. Your participation is highly valued, and we are excited to see how your insights will help shape this crucial field.
We sincerely appreciate your commitment to this significant and timely endeavour. Your contributions will undoubtedly enrich the discourse on international business and sustainable development.
Selected authors will develop whole chapters (6000-8000 words) that contribute to the handbook’s foundational framework, benefiting the academic community and the wider industry.
CO-EDITORS
Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez (PhD) is Distinguished Professor of Corporate Sustainability and Head of the Masters in Sustainability at Universidad EAFIT in Colombia, a former Member of the Global Council for Sustainable Development Goal Number 1 (SDG 1: End Poverty), and a former Vice-President at the Academy of International Business (AIB) and Chapter Chair for Latin America and the Caribbean. She is an internationalisation, sustainability, and CSR expert with 75 peer-reviewed scholarly papers and 18 books. She is a frequent business media contributor and a Visiting Professor at numerous universities worldwide. She has lived, studied, or worked in several countries and, by April 2024, travelled to 99 countries.
e-mail: mgonza40@eafit.edu.co
ORCID: https://orcid.org/0000-0001-6338-4281
Krzysztof Wach is a Full Professor at the Krakow University of Economics (Poland). Professor of social sciences (2020), Post-Doc Degree of Habilitated Doctor (Dr. Hab.) in economics (2013), PhD in Management (2006). Member of the Commission for Economic Sciences of the Polish Academy of Sciences (PAN). Member of the Commission for Economic Sciences of the Polish Academy of Arts and Sciences (PAU). Member of the Commission for Organization and Management of the Polish Academy of Sciences (PAN) – Branch in Kraków. He serves on the editorial boards of international journals as an editor, including 'European Journal of International Management' (SSCI WoS), ‘Sustainable Technology and Entrepreneurship’ (Elsevier), ‘Central European Management Journal’ (Emerald), ‘International Journal of Multinational Corporation Strategy’ (Inderscience), 'Entrepreneurial Business and Economics Review' (ESCI/Scopus). He has published over 240 peer-reviewed publications (including 126 journal articles, 100 chapters and 17 books) and 19 edited volumes. His research interests include entrepreneurship, international business, innovation, and family firms.
email: wachk@uek.krakow.pl
ORCID http://orcid.org/0000-0001-7542-2863
SELECTED SCHOLARLY CONTRIBUTIONS
Ahi, A. A., Sinkovics, N., Shildibekov, Y., Sinkovics, R. R., & Mehandjiev, N. (2022). Advanced technologies and international business: A multidisciplinary analysis of the literature. International Business Review, 31(4), 101967.
Anastasiadis, S.; Perkiss, Stephanie; Dean, Bonnie; Bayerlein, Leopold; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra; Wersun, Alec; Acosta, Pilar; Jun, Hannah; Gibbons, Belinda (2021) Teaching sustainability: Complexity and compromises. Journal of Applied Research in Higher Education. Vol 13(1), pp. 272-286 https://doi.org/10.1108/JARHE-02-2020-0029
Book series: Advanced Series in Management, Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Borda, A.; Morales, Oswaldo; Teegan, Hildy; Rees, Gareth H & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra (2021) Addressing sustainable rural development with shared value: A Peruvian model from the cacao industry. Sustainability. Vol. 13 (14) 8028. https:// doi.org/10.3390/su13148028
Brandl, K., Moore, E., Meyer, C., & Doh, J. (2021). The impact of multinational enterprises on community informal institutions and rural poverty. Journal of International Business Studies, 1-20.
Buckley, P. J., Doh, J. P., & Benischke, M. H. (2017). Towards a renaissance in international business research? Big questions, grand challenges, and the future of IB scholarship. Journal of International Business Studies, 48, 1045-1064.
Bulc, B., Landers, C., & Driscoll, K. (2018). Data science: a powerful catalyst for cross-sector collaborations to transform the future of global health—developing a new interactive relational mapping tool (demo). Journal of Technology in Human Services, 36(1), 69–75. https://doi.org/10.1080/15228835.2017.1417954
Celone, A., Cammarano, A., Caputo, M., & Michelino, F. (2022). Is it possible to improve the international business action towards the sustainable development goals? Critical perspectives on international business, 18(4), 488-517.
Ciulli, F., & Kolk, A. (2023). International Business, digital technologies and sustainable development: Connecting the dots. Journal of World Business, 58(4), 101445.
Ciulli, F., Kolk, A., Bidmon, C. M., Sprong, N., & Hekkert, M. P. (2022). Sustainable business model innovation and scaling through collaboration. Environmental Innovation and Societal Transitions, 45, 289-301.
El-Kassar, A.-N.; Makki, D.; Gonzalez-Perez, M.A. & Cathro, V. (2023) Doing Well by Doing Good: Why is investing in university social responsibility a good business for higher education institutions cross-culturally? Cross Cultural & Strategic Management. Vol. 30(1) Pp. 142-165https://doi.org/10.1108/CCSM-12-2021-0233
Franco, W. & Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. (2016). International expansion opportunities for multilevel marketing via personal networks: An ethnographic study from Colombia. International Journal of Business and Society (IJBS). Vol. 17(1), pp. 28–46.
Gao, Y., Turkina, E., & Van Assche, A. (2023). The Nexus Between Cultural and Creative Sectors and the Sustainable Development Goals: A Network Perspective. In International Business and Sustainable Development Goals (Vol. 17, pp. 151-176). Emerald Publishing Limited.
Giuliani, E., & Macchi, C. (2014). Multinational corporations’ economic and human rights impacts on developing countries: A review and research agenda. Cambridge Journal of Economics, 38(2), 479-517.
Goerzen, A. (Ed.). (2023). Research Handbook on International Corporate Social Responsibility. Edward Elgar Publishing.
Goerzen, A., Iskander, S. P., & Hofstetter, J. (2021). The effect of institutional pressures on business-led interventions to improve social compliance among emerging market suppliers in global value chains. Journal of International Business Policy, 4(3), 347-367.
Goerzen, A., Sartor, M., Brandl, K., & Fitzsimmons, S. (2023). Widening the lens: Multilevel drivers of firm corporate social performance. Journal of International Business Studies, 54(1), 42-60.
Gomez-Trujillo, A. M.; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra & Baena-Rojas, Jose (2024) Sustainable Strategy as a Lever for Corporate Legitimacy and Long-Term Competitive Advantage: An Examination of an Emerging Market Multinationals. European Business Review. Vol. 36(1), pp. 112–139. https://doi.org/10.1108/EBR-01-2023-0003
Gomez-Trujillo, A. M.; Velez-Ocampo, Juan Fernando & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra (2020) A literature review on the causality between sustainability and corporate reputation, what goes first? Management of Environmental Quality. Vol. 31 (2), pp. 406–430. https://doi.org/10.1108/MEQ-09-2019-0207
Gomez-Trujillo, A.M. & Gonzalez-Perez, M.A. (2020). What we know about organisational sustainability and international business? , Management of Environmental Quality. Vol 31 (2), pp. 292–305. https://doi.org/10.1108/MEQ-08-2019-0173
Gomez-Trujillo, Ana M. & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria A. (2022). Digital transformation as a strategy to reach sustainability. Smart and Sustainable Built Environment. Vol. 11(4) pp. 1137–1162. https://doi.org/10.1108/SASBE-01-2021-0011
Gomez-Valencia, Manuela; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra & Gomez-Trujillo, Ana Maria (2021) “Six Ws” of Sustainable Development Risks. Business Strategy and the Environment. Vol 30(7), pp. 3131-3144. doi: https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.2794
Gonzalez-Perez (2016) Climate Change and the 2030 Corporate Agenda for Sustainable Development. Advances in Sustainability and Environmental Justice, Vol. 19, 189 - 202
Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. & Leonard, L. (2013). International Business, Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility. Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. & Leonard, L. (2015). The Global Compact: CorporateSustainability in the Post 2015 World. Advances in Sustainability and Environment. Vol. 17, pp. 1-20.
Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. Alejandra (2022). Regenerative and Sustainable Futures for Latin America and the Caribbean: Collective action for a region with a better tomorrow, Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Gonzalez-Perez, M. A.; Mohieldin, Mahmoud, Hult, Tomas G. & Velez-Ocampo, Juan (2021) COVID-19, sustainable development challenges of Latin America and the Caribbean, and the potential engines for an SDGs-based recovery. Management Research: Journal of the Iberoamerican Academy of Management. Vol. 19(1), pp. 22–37. Doi: https://doi.org/10.1108/MRJIAM-12-2020-1119
Gonzalez-Perez, Maria A. & Leonard, L. (2016). Climate change and the 2030 corporate agenda for sustainable development, Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Gonzalez-Perez, Maria A. & Sosa, S. (2015). Governments as Owners: Nationalisation of International Business and Social Responsibility. Advances in Sustainability and Environment. Vol. 17, 219–232.
Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra & Leonard, Liam (2015). The UN Global Compact: Sustainability in international markets. Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Goodall, M., & Moore, E. (2019). Integrating the Sustainable Development Goals into teaching, research, operations, and service: A case report of Yale University. Sustainability: The Journal of Record, 12(2), 93-96.
Gurdgiev, L., Liam & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra (2016). Great Recession: At the Crossroads of Sustainability and Recovery, Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Herrera-Cano, C. & Gonzalez-Perez (2016). Global Financial Crisis and the Emergence and Maturing of Socially Responsible Investments, Advances in Sustainability and Environmental Justice, Vol. 18, 189 - 202
Hofstetter, J. S., De Marchi, V., Sarkis, J., Govindan, K., Klassen, R., Ometto, A. R., ... & Vazquez-Brust, D. (2021). From sustainable global value chains to circular economy—different silos, different perspectives, but many opportunities to build bridges. Circular Economy and Sustainability, 1(1), 21-47.
Hofstetter, J. S., De Marchi, V., Sarkis, J., Govindan, K., Klassen, R., Ometto, A. R., ... & Vazquez-Brust, D. (2021). From sustainable global value chains to circular economy—different silos, different perspectives, but many opportunities to build bridges. Circular Economy and
Hult, G. Tomas M.; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra; Morgeson, Forrest V. & Moonesar, Immanuel Azaad (2023) A Theory of Market-Based Sustainability: Integrating Economics-Based Supply and Demand Theory with Doing Good, Warm Glow, and Price Fairness. Journal of Sustainable Marketing.Vol 4(2), pp. 149-176https://doi.org/10.51300/JSM-2023-115
Hult, G. Tomas M.; Mena, Jeannette; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra; Lagerström, Katarina & Hult, Daniel T. (2018), A Ten Country-Company Study of Sustainability and Product-Market Performance: Influences of Doing Good, Warm Glow, and Price Fairness, Journal of Macromarketing, Vol. 38 (3), 242–261. https://doi.org/10.1177%2F0276146718787017
Hult, G.M., Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra & Lagerström, Katarina (2020). The theoretical evolution and use of the Uppsala internationalisation model in the international business ecosystem. Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 52, pp. 38–49. https://doi.org/10.1057/s41267-019-00293-x
Iqbal, M., Kalim, R., & Arshed, N. (2024). Evaluating industrial competitiveness strategy in achieving environmental sustainability. Competitiveness Review: An International Business Journal, 34(2), 353-369.
Iskander, S., Goerzen, A., Asmussen, C. G., & Hashai, N. (2023). On Socially Responsible GVC Governance Structures: Outsourcing vs. Internalization in the First Mile. In AIB 2023 Annual Meeting: International Business Resilience under Global Disruptions (p. 188). Academy of International Business.
Kaartemo, V. & Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. (2020). Renewable energy in international business, critical perspectives on international business. Vol. 16(4), Pp. 325–226. https://doi.org/10.1108/cpoib-08-2019-0062
Kolk, A. (2003). Trends in sustainability reporting by the Fortune Global 250. Business strategy and the environment, 12(5), 279–291.
Kolk, A. (2008). Sustainability, accountability and corporate governance: exploring multinationals' reporting practices. Business strategy and the environment, 17(1), 1–15.
Kolk, A. (2016). The social responsibility of international business: From ethics and the environment to CSR and sustainable development. Journal of World Business, 51(1), 23–34.
Kolk, A., & Ciulli, F. (2020). The potential of sustainability-oriented digital platform multinationals: A comment on the transitions research agenda. Environmental Innovation and Societal Transitions, 34, 355-358.
Kolk, A., & Pinkse, J. (2005). Business responses to climate change: identifying emergent strategies. California Management Review, 47(3), 6-20.
Kolk, A., & Pinkse, J. (2008). A perspective on multinational enterprises and climate change: Learning from “an inconvenient truth"? Journal of International Business Studies, 39, 1359-1378.
Kolk, A., & Van Tulder, R. (2010). International business, corporate social responsibility and sustainable development. International business review, 19(2), 119-125.
Kolk, A., Kourula, A., & Pisani, N. (2017). Multinational enterprises and the sustainable development goals: What do we know and how to proceed? Transnational Corporations, 24(3), 9-32. https://doi.org/10.18356/6f5fab5e-en
Leonard, L. & Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. (2013). Principles and Strategies to Balance Ethical, Social and Environmental Concerns with Corporate Requirements. Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Leonard, L. & Gonzalez-Perez, M. A. (2015). Beyond the UN Global Compact: Institutions and regulations. Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Marano, V., & Kostova, T. (2016). Unpacking the institutional complexity in adoption of CSR practices in multinational enterprises. Journal of Management Studies, 53(1), 28-54.
Marano, V., Sauerwald, S., & Van Essen, M. (2022). The influence of culture on the relationship between women directors and corporate social performance. Journal of International Business Studies, 53(7), 1315-1342.
Martín-de Castro, G., & Amores-Salvadó, J. (2024). Regenerative Strategies: Exploring New Sustainable Business Models to Face the Climate Emergency. Cambridge University Press.
Mio, C., Panfilo, S., & Blundo, B. (2020). Sustainable development goals and the strategic role of business: a systematic literature review. Business Strategy and the Environment, 29(8), 3220-3245. https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.2568
Mohapatra, A. K., Matta, R., & Gupta, N. (2024). Evaluating the trend of the research in sustainability reporting: a bibliometric review. International Journal of Sustainable Economy.
Mohieldin, M.; Wahba, Sameh; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra & Shehata, Miral (2023) Business, Government and the SDGs: The Role of Public-Private Engagement in Building a Sustainable Future. Palgrave Macmillan
Montiel, I., & Delgado-Ceballos, J. (2014). Defining and measuring corporate sustainability: Are we there yet?. Organization & Environment, 27(2), 113-139.
Montiel, I., Cuervo-Cazurra, A., Park, J., Antolín-López, R., & Husted, B. W. (2021). Implementing the United Nations’ sustainable development goals in international business. Journal of International Business Studies, 52(5), 999-1030.
Moore, E. M., Dau, L. A., & Doh, J. (2020). Does monetary aid catalyse new business creation? Analysing the impact of global aid flows on formal and informal entrepreneurship. Journal of Management Studies,57(3), 438-469.
Newburry, W. & Gonzalez-Perez (2015). International Business in Latin America: Innovation, geography and internationalisation. Palgrave MacMillan, London: UK
Newburry, W.; Rašković, M. M.; Colakoglu, S. S., Gonzalez-Perez, M. A., & Minbaeva, D. (2022). Diversity, equity and inclusion in international business: Dimensions and challenges. AIB Insights, 22(3), 1–6. https://insights.aib.world/article/36582-diversity-equity-and-inclusion-in-international-business-dimensions-and-challenges
Nilsson, M., Griggs, D., & Visbeck, M. (2016). Policy: Map the interactions between sustainable development goals. Nature, 534(7607), 320-322. https://doi.org/10.1038/534320a
Ocelík, V., & Kolk, A. (2024). Sustainability in a digital world: Geopolitics, values and international business policy. In Handbook of International Business Policy (pp. 327-345). Edward Elgar Publishing.
Park, S. H.; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra & Floriani, Dinorá Eliete (2021) The Palgrave Handbook of Corporate Sustainability in the Digital Era. Palgrave Macmillan.
Peerally, J. A., De Fuentes, C., Santiago, F., & Zhao, S. (2022). The sustainability of multinational enterprises' pandemic‐induced social innovation approaches. Thunderbird International Business Review, 64(2), 115-124.
Perkiss, Stephanie; Anastasiadis, Stephanos; Bayerlein, Leopold; Dean, Bonnie; Jun, Hannah, Acosta, Pilar; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra., Wersun, A. & Gibbons, Belinda (2020). Advancing Sustainability Education in Business Studies through Digital Service Learning. American Business Review, 23 (2), 276-292. DOI: 10.37625/abr.23.2.283-299
Pisani, N., Kourula, A., Kolk, A., & Meijer, R. (2017). How global is international CSR research? Insights and recommendations from a systematic review. Journal of World Business, 52(5), 591-614.
Pradhan, P., Costa, L., Rybski, D., Lucht, W., & Kropp, J. (2017). A systematic study of sustainable development goal (SDG) interactions. Earth S Future, 5(11), 1169-1179. https://doi.org/10.1002/2017ef000632
Priporas, C. V., Zhao, S., Papanastassiou, M., & Best, S. (2021). Cultural Heritage as an Engine of Sustainable Development in the Tourism Sector. Engines of Economic Prosperity: Creating Innovation and Economic Opportunities through Entrepreneurship, 193-208.
Ramus, C. A., & Montiel, I. (2005). When are corporate environmental policies a form of greenwashing? Business & Society, 44(4), 377-414.
Rezaee, Z., Homayoun, S., Rezaee, N., & Poursoleyman, E. (2023). Business sustainability reporting and assurance and sustainable development goals. Managerial Auditing Journal, 38(7), 973–996. https://doi.org/10.1108/maj-10-2022-3722R
Rosati, F., Rodrigues, V., Cosenz, F., & Li‐Ying, J. (2022). Business model innovation for the sustainable development goals. Business Strategy and the Environment, 32(6), 3752-3765. https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.3334
Rygh, A., Chiarapini, E., & Segovia, M. (2021). How can international business research contribute towards sustainable development goals? Critical Perspectives on International Business, 18(4), 457-487. https://doi.org/10.1108/cpoib-08-2020-0123
Rygh, A., Chiarapini, E., & Segovia, M. V. (2022). How can international business research contribute towards sustainable development goals? critical perspectives on international business, 18(4), 457-487.
Scheyvens, R., Banks, G., & Hughes, E. (2016). The private sector and the SDGs: the need to move beyond 'business as usual'. Sustainable Development, 24(6), 371–382. https://doi.org/10.1002/sd.1623
Serdijn, M., Kolk, A., & Fransen, L. (2021). Uncovering missing links in global value chain research–and implications for corporate social responsibility and international business. critical perspectives on international business, 17(4), 619-636.
Shabbir, M. (2023). Exploring the relationship between sustainable entrepreneurship and the United Nations sustainable development goals: a comprehensive literature review. Sustainable Development, 31(4), 3070–3085. https://doi.org/10.1002/sd.2570
Sianes, A., Vega-Muñoz, A., & Valencia, P. (2022). Impact of the sustainable development goals on the academic research agenda. A scientometric analysis. Plos One, 17(3), e0265409. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0265409
Sweileh, W. (2020). Bibliometric analysis of scientific publications on "sustainable development goals" with emphasis on "good health and well-being" goal (2015–2019). Globalisation and Health, 16(1). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12992-020-00602-2
Van Assche, A., & Brandl, K. (2021). Harnessing power within global value chains for sustainable development. Transnational Corporations Journal, 28(3).
van der Straaten, K., Narula, R., & Giuliani, E. (2023). The multinational enterprise, development, and the inequality of opportunities: A research agenda. Journal of International Business Studies, 54(9), 1623-1640.
Van Tulder, R., & van Mil, E. (2022). Principles of sustainable business: Frameworks for corporate action on the SDGs. Routledge.
Van Tulder, R., Rodrigues, S. B., Mirza, H., & Sexsmith, K. (2021). The UN's sustainable development goals: Can multinational enterprises lead the decade of action? Journal of International Business Policy, pp. 4, 1–21.
Van Tulder, Rob; Carneiro, Jorge & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra (2016) Rodríguez-Arango, Liliana & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra (2016) What makes BRIC multinationals special? Progress in International Business Research (PIBR), Vol. 11, 41–57.
Van Tulder, Rob; Verbeke, Alain; Carneiro, Jorge & Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra (2016) The challenge for BRIC Multinationals. Book series. Progress in International Business Research (PIBR), Emerald Group Publishing Limited: Bingley, UK.
Van Zanten, J. A., & van Tulder, R. (2021). Analysing companies' interactions with the Sustainable Development Goals through network analysis: Four corporate sustainability imperatives. Business Strategy and the Environment, 30(5), 2396-2420.
Van Zanten, J. A., & van Tulder, R. (2021). Improving companies' impacts on sustainable development: A nexus approach to the SDGs. Business Strategy and the Environment, 30(8), 3703-3720.
Van Zanten, J. A., & van Tulder, R. (2021). Improving companies' impacts on sustainable development: A nexus approach to the SDGs. Business Strategy and the Environment, 30(8), 3703-3720.
Van Zanten, J. A., & van Tulder, R. (2021). Towards nexus-based governance: defining interactions between economic activities and Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). International Journal of Sustainable Development & World Ecology, 28(3), 210-226.
Vargas, C.; Gomez-Valencia, Manuela; Gonzalez-Perez, Maria Alejandra; Cordova, Miguel; Calixto Casnici, Cyntia Vilasboas; Monje-Cueto, Fabiola; Nava-Aguirre, Karla María; Minto-Coy, Indianna & Coronado, Freddy (2022) Climate-resilient and regenerative futures for Latin America and the Caribbean. Futures. Vol. 142, pp. 1–12- https://doi.org/10.1016/j.futures.2022.103014
Wettstein, F., Giuliani, E., Santangelo, G. D., & Stahl, G. K. (2019). International business and human rights: A research agenda. Journal of World Business, 54(1), 54-65.
Yeh, S., Hsieh, Y., Yu, H., & Tseng, Y. (2022). The trends and content of research related to the sustainable development goals: a systemic review. Applied Sciences, 12(13), 6820. https://doi.org/10.3390/app12136820
Zanten, J. and Tulder, R. (2018). Multinational enterprises and the sustainable development goals: an institutional approach to corporate engagement. Journal of International Business Policy, 1(3-4), 208-233. https://doi.org/10.1057/s42214-018-0008-x
Zhao, S., Dilyard, J., & Rose, E. L. (2022). Managing sustainable development in international business: Challenges and insights. AIB Insights, 22(1), 1-3.
The objective/aim of the special issue
This Special Issue aims to examine opportunities for, and challenges to, the future of decent work in Asia, with a specific focus on the role of regulation, institutional innovation and new industrial relations practices.
Asia is not only the most populated continent in the world but also home of several major economies, developed and emerging. The increasing globalisation of the economy in the region has impacted on nations in different ways. For example, Japan and South Korea were hit hard by the 1997 Asian Financial Crisis, resulting in the opening up of their labour markets and relaxation of labour regulation which led to significant growth in non-standard employment (e.g. Cooke and Brown, 2015; Gottfried, 2008; OECD, 2012; Osawa et al., 2013). While India has the most complex labour regulation in the world, the majority of its workers fall outside its protection because employers tend to offer informal employment (such as agency employment) to avoid perceived cumbersome legislation and staffing inflexibility (Cooke, 2012). Poor employment terms and conditions and inequity between formal employees and agency workers have been a major fuse igniting several major industrial disputes in the Japanese-Indian joint venture auto plants in the last few years, some with fatal consequences (e.g. Saini, 2016). Similarly, while China has benefited economically from being the world’s factory, the 2008 Global Financial Crisis has led to significant reduction in export-driven production. For many workers, jobs were cut, wage growth stalked, and social security premium not paid by their employers. In short, the shock waves of financial crisis undermined national economic and business stability. A direct impact of this instability has been the erosion of labour standards, measured by job security, employment terms and conditions and other labour rights.
The pre-occupation of national governments with economic growth means that GDP growth has, in many cases, taken precedence instead of workers’ wellbeing. On the one hand, employers have found more space in adopting creative labour practices to contain cost without sanction. On the other hand, hard-pressed workers have formed pockets of resistance, sometimes aided by labour non-government organisations (NGOs) as an emerging actor in the IR system, in protest against worsening employment terms and conditions (e.g. Cooke and Brown, 2015). As has been observed, labour disputes have been on the rise across many countries in Asia, directly or indirectly challenging the stability of political regimes (e.g. Ford and Gillan, 2016). Emerging labour movements have acted as the counter-force for governments to take action to address the power imbalance between labour and capital, resulting in new legislation, particularly those aimed at offering greater levels of protection to workers in non-standard forms of employment. However, how effective are these regulations? What may be the unintended consequences? How do different institutional actors react and interact that shapes the implementational outcomes of new legislation? And what are the prospects of decent work in Asia? This Special Issue aims to shed light on these issues through conceptual debate and empirical research.
Scope/themes/topics
The themes in the Special Issue reflect those of the 9th Asian Regional Congress of the International Labour and Employment Relations Association (ILERA), but also with a focus on regulation, institutional innovation and industrial relations practices that may contribute to or undermine the prospect of decent work in Asian countries. Below are some indicative thematic topics that we would welcome for the special issue:
- Changes in national legislation and administrative policies and their impact, both intended and unintended, on employment and industrial relations
- Changes in national economic conditions and impact on labour policies and practices at national, regional, sectoral and firm levels
- Labour market conditions and employment terms and conditions of workers in non-standard forms of employment
- How gender relations and the gender division of labour affect, and are shaped by, changes in work and regulation
- Workers’ movements and labour activism in advancing workers’ rights and interests, particularly those in non-standard forms of employment
- Institutional innovations, emerging actors and new practices in industrial relations and the prospect of decent work
- Changes in remuneration policy and practice, for example, wages, social security and company benefits, in the context of global competition and economic downturn
- Issues related to labour standards as part of corporate social responsibility
Authors are invited to explore other themes beyond these that are relevant to the overall aim of the Special Issue.
Timeline for submission and review process:
15 Feb, 2017 - Successful authors to submit full papers to the JIR for external review - submission online via manuscript central
Feb-Apr, 2017 - Referee reports due in from reviewers - via manuscript central and provided to guest-editors for their review and decision
Feb-Apr, 2017 - Successful authors invited to REVISE based on (1st) referee reports and Guest editor guiding comments to authors
May-July, 2017 - 1st Revised papers in (online) and back to referees and/or guest-editors for comment [2nd round of referee reports]
July-Sept, 2017 - Authors to complete 2nd revisions based on 2nd referee reports/comments
October, 2017 - Authors to finalise/proofread and submit papers to the JIR online - via manuscript central
October, 2017 - Guest Editor to finalise the Introduction to the SI - submit online via manuscript central (for review, to be organised by the JIR editors)
Jan/Feb, 2018 – full issue finalized.
Guidelines for Contributors – Summary:
- The length of the full manuscript (including references, tables etc.) should be 8,000words.Please note that it would not be possible for us to consider papers for publication unless they are within the standard length (so longer papers are not possible to publish nor is a large number of tables/figures possible to include).
- The anonymised manuscript should include a separate title page: with the author(s) affiliation and full contact details: full name of author(s), institution, postal address, email address, phone and fax numbers (noting the corresponding author). As well as a short biographical note for each author (100-150 words max).
- The manuscript should include a brief abstract (150-200 words) and keywords (3-5 words).
- The manuscript should follow the Harvard (author, date) system of referencing, with ‘endnotes’ (if necessary and kept brief) rather than ‘footnotes’.
- For the full JIR submission guidelines and style guide, please consult the JIR website at http://jir.sagepub.com
JIR Online Submission Process:
The Journal of Industrial Relations (JIR) is hosted on SAGE Track, a web based online submission and peer review system powered by ScholarOne Manuscripts. Simply visit http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jir to login and submit your article online.
How to submit a manuscript to the JIR online?
- Navigate to the JIR’s ScholarOne Manuscripts site at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/JIR
- If you are not already registered, you will need to register with the system first to submit a manuscript.
- To register, click the Create Account tab for new users.
- Supply the requested information.
- You will need to enter information in fields marked with a "req."
- Please take note of the user ID and password you create, for future use to log into the system.
- Once your account is created, click the link to log in.
- To submit a manuscript, click the Author Center link, and then select Click here to submit a manuscript.
IMPORTANT: Please check whether you already have an account in the system before trying to create a new one. If you have reviewed or authored for the journal in the past year it is likely that you will have had an account created.
Contact Details:
- Journal of Industrial Relations
JIR Editorial Office
Email: jir@econ.usyd.edu.au
- Organisers and Special Issue Guest-Editors:
Professor Fang Lee Cooke
Department of Management
Monash Business School
Monash University
Melbourne, Australia
Professor Dong-One Kim
Dean, Korea University Business School
Seoul, South Korea
President, International Labour and Employment Relations Association
References
Cooke, F. L. (2012), ‘Employment relations in China and India’, in Barry, M. and Wilkinson, A. (eds.), Edward Elgar Handbook of Comparative Employment Relations, Cheltenham: Edward Elgar, pp.184–213.
Cooke, F. L. and Brown, R. (2015), ‘The regulation of non-standard forms of work in China, Japan and Republic of Korea’, International Labour Organization Working Paper, Conditions or Work and Employment Series No.64, Geneva, Switzerland
Ford, M. and Gillan, M. (2016). ‘Employment relations and the state in Southeast Asia’, Journal of Industrial Relations, 58(2), 167–182.
Gottfried, H. (2008), ‘Pathways to economic security: Gender and non-standard employment in Contemporary Japan’, Social Indicators Research, 88, 179–196.
OECD (2012), ‘OECD economic surveys: Korea’. Chapter Three: Promoting social cohesion in Korea, OECD, pp.111–145.
Osawa, M., Kim, M. J. and Kingston, J. (2013), ‘Precarious Work in Japan’ American Behavioral Scientist, 57(3), 309–334.
Saini, D. (2016), ‘A popular HR chief burned to death: People management dynamics at the Indian subsidiary of Suzuki Ltd’, the University of Hong Kong, Asia Case Research Centre.
Summit Journal is the official publication of AFIRE, the association for international real estate investors focused on commercial property in the United States. Readers stand at the intersection of real estate, institutional investing, data science, and economics. Summit Journal seeks pitches, proposals, and/or completed articles of around 1,500 words for consideration and inclusion in the March 2021 issue of the journal. Pitches can be in the form of emails, abstracts, or other formats, and directed to Benjamin van Loon, editor-in-chief, at bvanloon@afire.org.
Pitches are due January 15, 2021, and if approved, article drafts are due February 12, 2021.
Published quarterly in digital and print formats, the award-winning Summit features articles from AFIRE members and guest experts as an extension of the association’s mission to provide an essential forum for real estate investment thought leadership through research and analysis of real estate capital markets, cross-border issues, policy, demographics, technology trends, and management topics.
Summit is a free, open-access trade journal. ISSN 2689-6257 (Print) ISSN 2689-6257 (Online) All issues of Summit are published in English. The first issue was published in April 2019.
This special issue will include studies dealing with the current economic crisis and the lessons that it can teach about the international environment and management of international businesses. The perspective on the development of the global economic crisis is still short-term and provides a look straight from the eye of the storm. Understanding the sources of the crisis and its impact can teach us much about how to manage, what to do and not to do and, perhaps, how to avoid similar complex events in the future. Since the crisis is global and encompasses so many different sectors and countries, it is important to present research on a broad variety of topics related to its socio-political and economic antecedents and impact.
Some topics suitable for inclusion in the Special Issue include:
* Company, national, industry and regional factors associated with global economic crises
* Impact of the global economic crisis on emerging markets
* Impact of the crisis on select local and global industries
* How companies have managed the great recession
* Strategies to deal with structural and cyclical fluctuations in
the global economy
* Do we need to change or adapt theories in light of new evidence?
The Editor of the Special Issue has intentionally kept the list of suggested topics short so as to stimulate creativity and encourage prospective authors to adopt a variety of perspectives when approaching this subject. The Special Issue will include a state-of-the art collection of papers relating what we can learn about impact of the crisis and business management in an international environment.
DEADLINE: The Special Issue will be published in 2010. Submissions
should be sent no later than December 1, 2009.
All articles will be submitted to a process of peer evaluation, in
accordance with the editorial policy of TIBR. They must conform with TIBR’s editorial policy, which is available at www.thunderbird.edu/tibr
For questions regarding this special issue, authors are invited to
contact: amir1s@colman.ac.il
Submissions for this issue should be submitted electronically to TIBR. Please indicate that the submission is for this special issue. IMPORTANT NOTE: Do NOT upload your title/cover page when submitting the manuscript.
The influence of China in business and innovation on the rest of the World will only continue as the new century progresses. History shows that China once greatly influenced Western culture and provided the world with new, radical inventions. However, the country did not progress well even with the establishment of new China in 1949 in particular during the “cultural revolution” and retreatment from the rest of the world during the twentieth century. Starting with the reforms of Xiaoping it was Western culture’s turn to influence Sino-culture and Chinese innovation- resulting largely in what some have called a ‘cost innovation’ strategy (Zeng & Williamson, 2007). However, this influence has been shown to exaggerate the incremental nature of innovations within the Chinese context (Johnson & Weiss, 2008). As the next phase in its transition towards a major global economic power, China has embarked on a mission to develop its capabilities for new and radical endogenous innovation and update the educational and intellectual mission of the country.
In the age of globalisation, China presents a unique setting for organizations. The unprecedented growth of China's economy, which remains the fastest growing in the world, offers significant potential for both Chinese and foreign investors.
The Journal of Technology Management in China (JTMC) is an international journal committed to encouraging and publishing work from researchers and practitioners within the technology and knowledge transfer, technology and business strategy and technology management fields in China.
Scope (of the Special Issue)
This special issue explores the topics presented in the seminal paper “A stage model of education and innovation type in China: The paradox of the dragon”, which won the 2007 Society for Global Business & Economic Development (SEGBED) best paper award and was subsequently published in JTMC. That paper presented a stage model of innovation linking innovation practices and processes to explore the changing nature of education and business in China over the last 20 years and into the future. The major issues explored were the links among education (and its reforms), learning and creativity, innovation type and business growth.
Papers for this special issue should relate to one of the topics delineated in the paper mentioned above. We welcome original empirical and conceptually rigorous papers at all levels of analysis. In general, papers should examine the connections among innovation, education and managing technology and business growth in China.
Topics may include:
* Historical perspectives of innovation, learning and education in China
* Case studies of Chinese created radical innovations
* Educational and innovation practices at the individual level
* Descriptive case studies characterizing the creativity of individuals and correlating this with educational background and life experiences within the Chinese context.
* Explorations of how individuals manage creative tensions within educational instruction in the schools, col1eges and universities in China
* Educational and innovation practices at the classroom level
* Exploration of the progress of various regions of China in classroom reforms
* Comparison cases of classrooms in which CBU (creative but undesirable) student behaviour is tolerated versus DBU (desirable but uncreative) student behaviour.
* Educational and innovation practices at the industry and institutional level
o Investigations of the creative process in Chinese educational institutions.
o Case studies and descriptions of industry and the need and use of creativity to explore the practices being implemented by Chinese companies like Lenovo, hazier, Alibaba and Baidu.
o Educational and innovation practices at the national level
o Educational and innovation policies involved in technological and process/service related innovation.
o Critical analyses of China’s national policies toward innovation and education.
We are also hoping to hold a conference for authors of accepted papers in order to present their papers and improve upon them for the final round of submissions. The conference is tentatively planned for Summer, 2010 at Erie, PA, USA. Details to follow.
Coverage (of JTMC)
JTMC is the only journal that focuses exclusively on technology management in China. The journal encourages theoretical and applied research papers which identify good practice, address the existing deficiencies in processes and assist in the development of the transfer of technology and knowledge.
Coverage includes the following areas of technology management and how they impact upon the areas of marketing, human resources, accounting and finance and the supply chain:
Technology management
Technology transfer
Chinese business and culture
Research management in China
Innovation management
Technology economics
Knowledge transfer and sharing
Knowledge management
Technology and business strategy
Project management
Entrepreneurship and leadership
Cross - culture management
Product life cycle management
Guest Editors of the Special Issue (Please send submission to Dr. Johnson)
Professor William H.A. Johnson
E-mail: whj1@psu.edu
Professor Joseph W. Weiss
E-mail: jweiss@bentley.edu
Editor
Dr Richard Li-Hua, Salford University, Manchester, UK
r.li-hua@salford.ac.uk
IMPORTANT DATES
Deadline for submitting all the papers to Guest Editors: March 1, 2010
Tentative Conference at Penn State Erie for authors of selected papers: July 2010
References:
Johnson, W.H.A. and Weiss, J.W. (2008) A stage model of education and innovation type in China: The paradox of the dragon. Journal of Technology Management in China. Vol. 3, No. 1, 66-81.
Zeng, M and P. Williamson (2007). Dragon at your door: How Chinese cost innovation is disrupting global competition. Boston, MA. Harvard Business Press.
THE IMPACT OF FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENTS (FDI) FROM DEMOCRATIC COUNTRIES TO CENTRALLY PLANNED ECONOMIES
Despite the recent economic slump and subsequent reductions and fluctuations of investment activities undertaken by multinational enterprises (MNEs) in host markets, the overall volume of foreign direct investment (FDI) has significantly grown over the last three decades. The major proportion of the FDI flows from democratic to centrally planned economies with the latter currently receiving huge amounts of inward FDI from the West. A representative example of this flow is China. China is often referred to as the factory of the world and/or the black hole of inward FDI. According to UNCTAD (2001, 2011), the recorded figure for 2010 revealed a more than doubling in the increase of China’s inward FDI (i.e., US$105.7 billion) since the year 2000 (US$40.7 billion). The same information also reveals that inward FDI in Vietnam dramatically increased from an annual average of US$651 million between 1989 and 1994 to US$ 2.1 billion in 2000 and US$8.2 billion in 2010.
A more direct example that clearly demonstrates the interaction between democratic and centrally planned economies is the Korean case. Based on mutual agreements between South (democratic) and North (centrally planned) Korean governments, South Korea established an industrial complex through FDI in Gaesung, North Korea. A number of South Korean MNEs participated in the project in order to exploit their capital and technology in combination with North Korea’s cheap labor force. As of March 2012, South Korean MNEs invested in a wide range of industrial sectors, such as textile, chemical, machinery, metal engineering, electricity & gas, electronics, food products, paper & wood, ceramics and so on. Since its establishment in 2008, the stock of production exceeded US$1 billion in September 2010 and approximately 50,000 North Koreans were employed as of January 2012 (EncyKorea, 2013). As the first industrial complex inaugurated jointly by South and North Korea, it has been a mutually beneficial contribution to political reconciliation, economic development, economical collaboration and cultural exchange.
However, we do not know enough that what impact this cooperation between democratic and centrally planned economies has had on the political, economic development, social and cultural areas. In this regard, the aim of this special issue is to bring together theoretical and empirical advancements examining the impact of FDI from disparate economies. We seek both theoretical and empirical papers that may address, but are not limited to, the following list of potential research questions:
- Does FDI from democratic countries trigger economic growth in centrally planned countries? How does FDI from the former economies function as a vehicle to enhance economic development in the latter?
- Who obtains more benefits from FDI between democratic and centrally planned economies?
- Is the impact of FDI different in different centrally planned economies and are there different patterns of economic development?
- What are the key factors promoting positive spillover effects of FDI in centrally planned economies?
- What are the primary conditions that inhibit the negative economic development outcomes from inward FDI in these countries?
- How do Western MNEs contribute to social evolution, particularly in centrally planned countries?
- What is the effect of profit remittance by Western MNEs on these economies? What encourages Western MNEs to re-invest profits in these markets?
- Does foreign investment induce political transitions and institutional changes in centrally planned countries?
- What is the extent to which Western MNEs influence cultural evolution in these countries?
- Are democratic economies influenced by outward investments into centrally planned countries?
- Does the economic cooperation between democratic and centrally planned economies affect national / country of origin image?
Submission Instructions:
The deadline for submissions is December 31, 2014. Thunderbird International Business Review, including style guidelines, please visit the Thunderbird International Business Review website at: http://tibr.thunderbird.edu/submission.
All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at the Thunderbird International Business Review. The guest editors are seeking reviewers for this issue and are soliciting nominations and volunteers to participate as reviewers. Please contact the guest editors to volunteer or nominate a reviewer.
More Information:
To obtain additional information, please contact the guest editors:
Pervez N. Ghauri, King’s College London, UK (pervez.ghauri@kcl.ac.uk)
Byung Il Park, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea (leedspark@hufs.ac.kr)
References
EncyKorea (2013), Industrial complex established in Gaesung. Available http://terms.naver.com/entry.nhn?docId=1821118&cid=1599&categoryId=1599
UNCTAD (2001). World investment report: Promoting linkages. Geneva: United Nations.
UNCTAD (2011). World investment report: Non-equity modes of international production and development. Geneva: United Nations.
International Journal of Manpower Special Issue: “The Impact of the Global Financial Crisis on Human Resources Management” Guest Editors: Dr. Anthony McDonnell (University of Newcastle, Australia) and Prof. John Burgess (University of Newcastle, Australia).
In April of 2008, everybody knew that something pretty big had happened to the world’s financial system. What we had no idea, bluntly, was how extreme it was going to be (Lord Turner, Chairman of the Financial Services Authority; cited by DeCrock, 2009: 63). Previous research has linked the development of the HR function to the history of business (e.g. Conner and Ulrich, 1996; Walker, 1999). Consequently, the way the world’s financial system has crumbled and how many economies have gone from boom to bust in a short period of time is likely to be manifest in changes in workforce management.
It has been argued that the HR function has undergone a noticeable shift from a traditional, administrative role to a broader one involving a great strategic input in organisations (Barney and Wright, 1998; Sparrow and Hiltrop, 1994). Exploring the role HR has played during and post the Global Financial Crisis (GFC) will further add to the line of enquiry as to whether HR is really a strategic function. Additionally, examining and understanding the impact the GFC has had on employees would be useful. This special issue invites submissions that explore some of the following areas and research questions. Please note this is not meant as an exhaustive list.
- What approaches did organisations take to workforce management due to the GFC? For instance, was it a ‘standard’ reactive approach of reducing training and development spend and layoffs or were organisations more proactive in exploring innovative ideas? Why did organisations adopt these approaches?
- What role did HR play in organisational decisions on how to manage the recession? Did HR have a strategic input or merely an operational role in letting employees go?
- To what extent were ethical considerations taken into account in decisions about whether to lay staff off or not? Was the GFC used as a convenient means to be selective about staff and get rid of poor performers?
- Did management learn from previous recessions? What are the lessons to be had from this GFC?
- Are there any enduring employment and labour market consequences following the GFC? For instance, the permanent loss of jobs in some occupations and sectors may lead to a catalyst for extensive labour market restructuring.
- What role did employee representatives play? Did management engage with employees over work changes and keep them informed of developments or did management become more unilateral in decision-making and organisational change?
- Many of the business leaders of organisations and institutions that have been to the forefront of the GFC were on staggering salaries and bonuses. What does this tell us about performance management and performance related reward systems? Are these systems being changed as a result?
- How did HR deal with the ideology of being a strategic partner working towards the corporate strategy while being an employee champion attempting to maintain employee morale and motivation and retain key human capital?
- What now for role of HR in organisations? Did the GFC end up being positive for the HR function in terms of showing initiative and displaying innovativeness in keeping staff, maintaining motivation and performance?
- How have employees been affected by the GFC? What impact has it had on employee morale, job and employee satisfaction, work-life balance and so forth?
This call is open and competitive, and submitted papers will be reviewed in accordance with the International Journal of Manpower review process. The International Journal of Manpower is ranked by Thomson Reuters (ISI) and is an interdisciplinary journal on human resources, management and labour economics. Submitted papers must be based on original material not under consideration by any other journal or outlet. Manuscripts should be formatted in accordance with International Journal of Manpower publication guidelines. Authors should submit their manuscripts as a word-file attachment which does not reveal their identity in the document. A separate cover page revealing author’s name and affiliation should also be submitted. The deadline for submission is November 12th 2010. The Special Issue will be published in 2011.
Submissions, and general requests for information, should be sent to both of the guest editors:
- Dr. Anthony McDonnell, Centre for Institutional and Organisational Studies, Faculty of Business and Law, University of Newcastle, Callaghan, NSW 2308, Australia. Email: anthony.mcdonnell@newcastle.edu.au
- Professor John Burgess, Newcastle Business School, University of Newcastle, Callaghan, NSW 2308, Australia. Email: john.burgess@newcastle.edu.au
References Barney, J. and Wright, P. M. (1998), “In Becoming a Strategic Partner: The Role of Human Resources in Competitive Advantage”, Human Resource Management, Vol. 37, No. 1, pp. 31-46. Conner, J. and Ulrich, D. (1996), “Human resource roles: creating value, not rhetoric”, Human Resource Planning, Vol. 19, No. 3, pp. 38-49. De Crock, C. (2009), “What I read About the Global Financial Crisis in 2007 and 2009”, Ephemera: Theory and Politics in Organization, Vol. 9, pp. 61-72. Sparrow, P. and Hiltrop, J.-M. (1994), European Human Resource Management in Transition, Prentice Hall, Hemel Hempstead. Walker, J. W. (1999), “Perspectives: Is HR ready for the 21st century?”, Human Resource Planning, Vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 5-7.
The Management Of Socio-Political Issues And Environments: Organizational And Strategic Perspectives
CALL FOR PAPERS
Special Issue of the Journal of International Business Studies
THE MULTIFACETED ROLE OF LANGUAGE IN INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS: UNPACKING THE FORMS, FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES OF A CRITICAL CHALLENGE TO MNC THEORY AND PERFORMANCE
Special Issue Editors
• Mary Yoko Brannen (INSEAD and The University of Victoria, mary-yoko.brannen@insead.edu)
• Rebecca Piekkari (Aalto University, School of Economics, formerly Helsinki School of Economics, rebecca.piekkari@aalto.fi)
• Susanne Tietze (Sheffield Hallam University, S.Tietze@shu.ac.uk)
Deadline for submission: November 23, 2012
Tentative publication date: Spring 2014
Introduction
Streams and sequences of decisions and resource commitments characterize the day-to-day activities of multinational companies (MNCs). Such decision-making activities encompass major strategic moves like internationalization and new market entries or diversification and acquisitions. In most companies, strategic decisions such as these are extensively discussed and debated. They are generally framed, formulated, and articulated in specialized language often developed by the best minds in the company. Yet the language used in such deliberations and in detailing and enacting the implementation strategy is usually taken for granted and receives little if any explicit attention (Brannen & Doz, 2012). MNCs have come to recognize the importance of language when it comes to national language in deciding upon language policies and employing the services of specialized interpreters in order to avoid Babel-like communication inefficiencies. They have also understood the importance of an official corporate language in regards to eliciting employee and investor commitment around strategic initiatives. Carefully “word-smithed” statements of strategic intent and corporate values in annual reports, internal organizational documents, and plasticized pocket-sized value-statement cards are just of few indicators of this. In addition, more and more companies have begun to put in place implicit language guidelines for use in virtual communication including e-mail, texting, webex, and video conferencing in order to avoid misinterpretations.
As such, the interplay between language (corporate) and languages (natural and national) is a critical challenge to international business theory and practice (Welch, Welch, & Piekkari 2005). The common corporate language is built over time around firm-specific usages of words, acronyms, and stories that often reflect the industry context and the language environment in the firm’s country of origin. While the corporate language is clear to insiders of the MNC, it is not to outsiders who lack their shared experience.
Language is at once an artifact of how thoughts are formulated as well as how they are communicated and discussed. Therefore, the language used by decision makers in international business both shapes and bounds what the firm focuses on and how it articulates its strategic options (Brannen & Doz, 2012). In this regard, language can facilitate and significantly limit strategic growth and performance of the MNC.
There have been attempts to render IB studies more sensitive to the existence and influence of languages and language use in the corporate context. Models about the internationalization process of the firm, both traditional (Johanson & Vahlne, 1977; Luostarinen, 1979) and recent ones (Knight & Cavusgil, 2004), are cases in point. Johanson and Wiedersheim-Paul
(1975) viewed language as one of the key factors that prevented information about the target market from reaching organizational decision makers. More recently, there have been efforts to raise the field’s awareness about the existence and influence of languages in internationally operating companies.
These efforts have been pulled together in conference streams (Critical Management Studies, 2007) and also in special issues of journals (International Studies of Management & Organization, 2005; Journal of World Business, 2011).
Despite these contributions, the field of IB research remains unsophisticated in appreciating the multiple forms, facets, and features of language and its impact on MNCs and on the way in which we study IB phenomena. This special issue is meant as a continuation and extension of this emergent body of research on language in IB. We concur with Cheng et al. (2009: 1072) that “moving [IB] forward is not about reformulating novel dependent or independent variables; it is about addressing a phenomenon that can only be unpacked by combining theories, concepts, data and methods from multiple disciplines.” As such, we seek interdisciplinary insights gained from a plethora of fields such as anthropology, communications, linguistics, political science, and psychology in order to generate genuinely innovative frames of reference for understanding the role of language in international business.
Language and Knowledge
During the past decade IB scholars have devoted considerable attention to studying knowledge and knowledge transfer across national, cultural and geographical boundaries of the MNC. Yet language considerations have remained peripheral in this endeavor. We see language and knowledge as inseparably linked in that knowledge is always coded into language.
Firms face pressures to continually reformulate their strategies based on new knowledge accumulated through organizational learning (Levitt & March, 1988; Schultz, 2002). This is especially true for firms operating in global contexts as strategy implementation is mediated by the effects of divergent cultural and institutional environments (Westney, 1993). Having a multi-country presence can provide tremendous opportunities for comparative learning for firms capable of simultaneously managing the additional demands from foreign markets, conflicting pressures on organizing in diverse cultural and institutional contexts, and cross-border integration. In fact, this learning opportunity has been termed the promise of the metanational firm (Doz, Santos, & Williamson 2001); that is, to sense, stockpile, and redeploy knowledge within its global footprint.
In this special issue we acknowledge the diversity of disciplinary perspectives on language and knowledge and adopt an inclusive position toward the range of approaches available to IB researchers. For example, in linguistic anthropology language is considered as “a cultural resource” that (re)produces the social world (Duranti, 1997). Building on this view, Tietze, Cohen and Musson (2003) define language as a system of meanings that is central in constructing organizational, social, and global realities. In this vein, language has a performative aspect because using language then becomes equivalent to “acting in the world.” Language is the first and foremost means and source through which the connecting of different socio-cultural, institutional and individual worlds occurs (Tietze, 2008).
Yet achieving such connections in international contexts is far from easy.
Even in situations in which English is used as the common language, speakers attach invisible meanings to knowledge that stem from their own interpretive frames and complicate the transfer (Henderson Kassis, 2005). We also denote the importance of verbal and non-verbal language in IB research. For example, in semiotic terms transferring the linguistic signals alone across borders does not ensure that the meaning is transferred as intended. On the contrary, more often than not shifts in meaning occur as the linguistic codes are given sense in a new cultural context, from the perspective of local interpretive frames and communicative norms (Brannen, 2004).
Why Make Language Central to International Business Enquiry?
Despite the dominance of English as a lingua franca, IB encounters have not become monolingual. On the contrary, given the growing importance of BRIC countries, languages such as Chinese, Russian, and Spanish are gaining prominence. In this regard, the field of IB has not advanced further in documenting and thus realizing the mechanisms by which MNCs can learn from their operations embedded in different language environments. One reason for this is that the methodologies used have been ineffective. In the JIBS special issue on qualitative research in IB (Birkinshaw, Brannen, & Tung, 2011), Westney and Van Maanen (2011) posit that this shortcoming is due to the fact that management knowledge in international business has been largely developed using classical economic models and that even when field-based studies have been deployed, these have been focused on executive-level practices. This has resulted in a ‘bird’s-eye-view” from afar and atop rather than an “up-close” and contextually grounded understanding of the micro-processes that either block or facilitate the dynamic organizational learning that is essential for an MNC to improve its performance. The latter requires research methodologies designed to surface deep, contextually rich insights from individuals at all levels, functions, and geographies in the MNC’s multilingual community (Marschan-Piekkari, Welch, & Welch, 1999).
Another reason for not realizing the mechanisms for organizational learning is that such learning is generally facilitated by multicultural teams. And, language, as both an essential artifact of culture and the vehicle by which strategic thoughts are formulated, communicated and discussed plays an essential role in the functioning of such teams. Building an integrated global strategy across markets which are geographically remote and have differing native languages and cultures is undoubtedly harder than what has been commonly acknowledged in IB research. Whether we are talking about language as the vehicle for expressing corporate strategic values and purpose (Brannen & Doz, 2012) or languages as the means of expression of multiple unique cultures and groups within and around organisations (Harzing & Feeley, 2008; Welch et al., 2005), the IB literature to date fails to take adequate account of its influence and impact on realizing international business goals.
The Scope of This Special Issue
This special issue invites submissions that develop, discuss, or apply interdisciplinary language-based approaches to IB phenomena in order to advance IB theory and research. The special issue is hoped to lead to an important reexamination of current IB models and frameworks and unravel the micro-processes through which MNCs, institutions, and networks are created, maintained, or disrupted. For example, themes may include understanding the effects of language on knowledge-sharing in MNCs or how knowledge residing in foreign subsidiaries is managed in linguistically constrained environments. Challenges in regards to transferring explicit knowledge such as issues related to effectively translating standard operating procedures, processes, and polices as well as in transferring tacit knowledge that is deeply socialized and context specific are of interest. Language considerations may also be one of the decisive factors in selecting an appropriate foreign operation mode to serve a target market or in making decisions about where to locate a shared service center or a foreign production unit. For marketing and service companies, resources in the customer language – both in-house and external – may be instrumental in reaching out for foreign markets and providing high-quality services. In terms of staffing and international human resource management, language requirements may influence job performance and affect staff selection, opportunities for promotion, as well as training and development.
Bilingualism and the role of biculturals in global teams, cross-cultural communication, and innovation offer an increasingly relevant area of research.
We also invite submissions that treat language as a methodological question and a window into cultural meanings. While IB researchers often construct survey instruments in multiple languages and pay considerable attention to equivalence of meaning and backtranslation (Usunier, 2011), the effect of the chosen language on survey responses is seldom examined. Language can act as a type of psychological priming that then affects survey responses.
Further, data are generally collected and analyzed in one or multiple languages but reported predominantly in English. Such translations and crossing of language boundaries often go un-mentioned and un-problematized in methodology sections of published IB articles and therefore do not enter methodological debates.
Submissions that contribute to the field by offering novel linguistic approaches are also encouraged. These approaches could be derived from semiotics, evolutionary linguistics, socio-linguistics, neuro-linguistics, as well as from other non-linguistically based fields such as political sciences, psychology, or artificial intelligence in order to shed light on constructs such as translation, intercultural communication, negotiation, as well as micro aspects of managing MNCs. Here, scholars are invited to redraw the intellectual reach of IB from a language perspective.
Potential Themes of Interest to This Special Issue The purpose of this special issue is, therefore, to identify new research questions and avenues that originate from a focus on language. We welcome papers that approach well-established IB phenomena through a language lens or make a contribution through interdisciplinary pollination (Cantwell & Brannen, 2011). Our call for papers invites language-sensitive research that is pluralistic in terms of underlying philosophical assumptions and research methods employed (Welch et al., 2011). We intend to include theoretical and conceptual contributions as well as empirical work that draw on qualitative or quantitative methods or an innovative mix of both. To achieve these goals, we also welcome conceptual pieces that attempt to frame language issues in IB and encourage submissions that are related to the following
themes:
Control, coordination, and communication in international organizations • In what ways does language use (corporate as well as national language
use) affect communication and coordination within and outside international organizations?
• Is it meaningful for MNCs to have official language policies? If so, how should they be designed and implemented?
• How do national languages blend with corporate language?
• How do language policies and practices differ between large MNCs, SMEs, and NGOs, and what are the effects on productivity?
• How does language use evolve in MNCs and what is the effect on organizational growth and performance?
• What are the costs associated with managing language diversity in an MNC?
• Is there a need to re-examine the basic code-model of cross-cultural communication given today’s changing workforce demographic of biculturals and multiculturals?
• What is the role and impact of non-verbal aspects of language on managing global organizations?
Internationalization and foreign operation modes • How does language explain different internationalization processes and patterns? Is there something called “language-driven internationalization”?
• How does language influence the choice and implementation of foreign operation modes (e.g., FDI such as mergers, acquisitions, greenfield investment, international joint ventures, outsourcing or the Internet)?
• Does language foster cooperation and/or conflict between companies and their foreign export intermediaries?
• What is the role of language in negotiating and contracting with international partners?
Managing people in international organizations • How does language diversity influence workplace interactions and relationships between, e.g., local employees and expatriates?
• Does language competence in general and bilingualism in particular pre-dispose managers to communicate better across cultural boundaries?
• What kind of psychological and emotional effects does the imposition of a non-native language have on staff?
• What is the impact of a common corporate language on human resource policies and practices?
• How are language considerations taken into account when recruiting and effectively managing immigrant workers (e.g., English language manuals)?
Innovation management, knowledge transfer, and organizational learning • How do language barriers enter global innovation and diversification processes?
• What kind of new product or service innovations may emerge from multilingual global teams?
• How are tacit as well as explicit language issues overcome in knowledge sharing and organizational learning across contexts?
• How is knowledge transfer in the absence of a common language?
International marketing issues
• How is translation handled in international marketing activities?
• How does the consideration of the “customer language” affect international marketing?
• How is language diversity accounted for in services that are offered across language boundaries?
• Are global branding and advertising language-free or language-dependent?
• What is the role of language in the traditional dilemma of global standardization and local adaptation?
Methodological issues
• How does language diversity in collaborative research teams affect team dynamics and the production of knowledge?
• How can key questions in research design and methods in IB be better understood from a language perspective?
• What improvements can be made to current measurements of language differences in comparative IB research?
The above is an indicative list, and we invite authors to explore themes and research questions beyond it. Detailed information about JIBS’ mission, emphasis, and preferences is available at www.jibs.net.
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue.
Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between November 5, 2012, and November 23, 2012, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Birkinshaw, J., Brannen, M. Y., & Tung, R. 2011. From a distance and generalizable to up close and grounded: Reclaiming a place for qualitative methods in international business research. Journal of International Business Studies, 42(5): 573–581.
Brannen, M. Y. 2004. When Mickey loses face: Recontextualization, semantic fit and semiotics of foreigness. Academy of Management Review, 29(4):
593–616.
Brannen, M. Y., & Doz, Y. L. 2010. From a distance and detached to up close and personal: Bridging strategic and cross-cultural perspectives in international management research and practice. Scandinavian Journal of Management, 26: 236–247.
Brannen, M. Y., & Doz, Y. L. 2012. The languages of strategic agility:
Trapped in your jargon or lost in translation. California Management Review, forthcoming.
Cantwell, J., & Brannen, M. Y. 2011. Positioning JIBS as an interdisciplinary journal. Journal of International Business Studies, 42(1):
1–9.
Cheng, J. L., Henisz, W. J., Roth, K., & Swaminathan, A. 2009. Advancing interdisciplinary research in the field of international business:
Prospects, issues and challenges. Journal of International Business Studies,
40(7): 1070–1074.
Doz, Y. L., Santos, J., & Williamson, P. 2001. From global to metanational:
How companies win in the knowledge economy. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Duranti, A. 1997. Linguistic anthropology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Harzing, A. W., & Feely, A. J. 2008. The language barrier and its implications for HQ-subsidiary relationships. Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal, 15(1): 49–60.
Henderson Kassis, J. 2005. Language diversity in international management teams. International Studies of Organization & Management, 35(2): 66–82.
Johanson, J., & Vahlne, J.-E. 1977. The internationalization process of the
firm: A model of knowledge development and increasing foreign market commitments. Journal of International Business Studies, 8(1): 23–32.
Johanson, J., & Wiedersheim-Paul, F. 1975. The internationalization of the
firm: Four Swedish cases. Journal of Management Studies, 12(3): 305–322.
Knight , G. A., & Cavusgil, S. T. 2004. Innovation, organizational capabilities and the born-global firm. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(2): 124–141.
Levitt, B., & March, J. G. 1988. Organizational learning. Annual Review of Sociology, 14: 319–340.
Luostarinen, R. 1979. Internationalization of the firm: An empirical study of the internationalization of firms with small and open domestic markets with special emphasis on lateral rigidity as a behavioral characteristic in strategic decision-making. Helsinki: Helsinki School of Economics Press.
Marschan-Piekkari, R., Welch, D. E., & Welch, L. S. 1999. In the shadow: The impact of language on structure, power and communication in the multinational. International Business Review, 8(4): 421–440.
Schultz, M. 2002. Organizational learning. In J. Baum Ed.), The Blackwell companion to organizations, 415–442. New York: Wiley-Blackwell.
Tietze, S., Cohen, L., & Musson, G. 2003. Understanding organisations through language. London: Sage.
Tietze, S. 2008. International management and language. London: Routledge Usunier, J.-C. 2011. Language as a resource to assess cross-cultural equivalence in quantitative management research. Journal of World Business,
46(3): 314–319.
Welch, C., Piekkari, R., Plakoyannaki, E., & Paavilainen-Mäntymäki, E. 2011.
Theorising from case studies: Towards a pluralistic future for international business research. Journal of International Business Studies, 42: 740–762.
Welch, D. E., Welch, L. S., & Piekkari, R. 2005. Speaking in tongues: The importance of language in international management processes. International Studies of Management & Organization, 35(1): 10–27.
Westney, D. E. 1993. Institutional theory and the multinational organization. In S. Ghoshal & D. E. Westney, Organizational theory and the multinational. London: Macmillan.
Westney, D. E., & Van Maanen, J. 2011. The casual ethnography of the executive suite. Journal of International Business Studies, 42(5): 602–607.
Guest Editorial Team
Mary Yoko Brannen is Visiting Professor of Strategy and Management at INSEAD, Fontainebleau and the newly appointed Jarislowsky East Asia (Japan) Chair of Cross-Cultural Management at the University of Victoria beginning Fall 2012. She is also Deputy Editor of JIBS and as such will serve as the internal guest editor of this Special Issue. She has PhD and MBA degrees from the University of Massachusetts at Amherst and a BA (with Distinction) from the University of California at Berkeley in Comparative Literature. In addition to publishing in noted management journals including the Academy of Management Review, Academy of Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Management Inquiry, the California Management Review and Human Relations, she has also published pieces on language and culture in Semiotica, and several anthropology journals. Her 2004 AMR article which develops a model of recontextualization using semiotics to understand semantic fit as an important complement to strategic fit in internationalization is widely recognized as an important methodological and theoretical contribution across the disciplines of management, marketing, communications, culture theory as well as political science.
Rebecca Piekkari is Professor of International Business at Aalto University, School of Economics (formerly known as Helsinki School of Economics) and serves on the JIBS Editorial Review Board. Her first article on language issues in MNCs dates back to 1997 (co-authored with Denice Welch and Lawrence Welch). It was followed by a stream of work which focused on the implications of a corporate language in MNCs for e.g., the control of foreign subsidiaries, power plays and politics between units, human resource management, internationalization patterns, as well as integration of cross-border mergers and acquisitions. Moreover, she has actively contributed to the discussion about language as a methodological question in IB research. Her work has been published in journals such as the Journal of Management Studies, International Business Review, Management International Review, and International Journal of Human Resource Management as well as in handbooks of qualitative research in IB and research on international human resource management (by Edward Elgar).
Susanne Tietze is Professor of Organisation Studies at Sheffield Hallam University, Sheffield Business School, UK. She is a linguist by training and is widely regarded as a renowned authority on language and organizations.
She has been awarded MBA and PhD from Sheffield Hallam University and MA in English and German (first class), from Karl-Ruprechts-Universität, Heidelberg (Germany). Her highly regarded innovative book, International Management and Languages (Routledge), establishes the relationship between two orientations – social construction and linguistic relativity – and demonstrates how they can be drawn on to frame and understand the activities of managers. Her research focuses on language and discourse as used in work contexts and she has conducted studies on emergent forms of work organizations. She has published in leading scholarly journals such as Organization Studies, Journal of Management Studies and Journal of Business Ethics.
The Springer series addressing Operations Management, MEOP - Measuring Operations Performance is devoting its next peer-reviewed volume to the topic of The Operational Challenges Stemming from Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries. While traditionally Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) has flowed from the advanced developed economies into developed and developing countries, more recently, a new trend has emerged in the pattern of FDI. Outward bound FDI from emerging economies has begun to increase significantly and has been growing at a faster pace than FDI from the advanced developed world. Increasingly nowadays Multinational Corporations (MNCs) from Newly Industrialised Countries (NICs) are buying business assets and capabilities all over Europe and the US. The Chinese acquisitions affecting the European and the US manufacturing sector are emblematic of a wider trend. Many emerging economies have benefited from a massive infusion of capital, technology and managerial expertise from the traditional industrialized countries. Because of this and other factors, firms in some of these countries have amassed sufficient capital, knowledge and know-how to invest abroad on their own. The proportion of FDI accounted for by NICs is increasing. A variety of reasons has been offered for the emergence of FDI from NICs. These include the support of exports, the expansion of market presence, the acquisition of established brands and foreign skills and the establishment and strengthening of local distribution networks. The increasing financial strength and the growing international exposure of companies from NICs together with greater domestic competition have also been suggested as explanations. Finally, the goals of building international brands, accessing advanced technologies and establishing R&D centres in developed countries help to explain this growing trend. There is a stream of work that deals with the internationalization of Emerging Market Multinational Corporations (EMNCs). These EMNCs (or EMNEs) have been the subject of recent interest, seen in a growing number of studies.
According to the literature, two elements can explain this interest. First, the scope and pace of the international expansion by emerging economy firms has been exceptional. Second, the patterns of international expansion by emerging economy firms have raised questions about their originality and whether existing theories of international expansion strategies are adequate or need to be modified. Despite being both embedded and exposed to a wide variety of national settings, the literature identifies some common features in their recent internationalization patterns. In relation to EMNCs being embedded in their home market some authors argue that some “push” factors that may have also driven them to invest in advanced countries. They label the resulting OFDI as ‘escape investments’, which are motivated by the desire to escape the home country’s weak institutions and economic underdevelopment. Additionally, the “pull” factors, such as the large markets and wealthier consumers of advanced countries, play an important role. In particular, some common challenges faced by EMNCs include a liability of emergingness, existing knowledge, technological and commercial gaps between themselves and their developed countries counterparts (DMNCs), the poor image associated with their corporate social responsibility often coupled by controversial political relations in the host markets. Nonetheless, there are also significant benefits that they bring into the new global production system. These are namely the introduction of disruptive business models as well as a fresh perspective. Within this work, there is the acknowledgement that the challenges EMNCs face motivate them to undertake an accelerated internationalization strategy, especially by extensively relying on Mergers and Acquisitions (M&As). M&As are often used as a strategic vehicle that enable EMNCs to acquire both tangible and intangible strategic assets to ultimately overcome their competitive disadvantages in being latecomers to the international business activity and lacking the resources and capabilities to be successful in the international arena. M&As are thus perceived as shortcuts to catch up with DMNCs, to also secure well-established Western brands, and to gain immediate access to advanced technology.
Differently from other modes of entry, M&As give EMNCs more direct control over the operation of, and its associated returns, by therefore offering significant value-creation opportunities that may not otherwise be available to them. However, while EMNCs are gaining considerable attention, we still know very little about their post-entry activities such as their implementation of post-acquisition and integration strategies. In particular, with relatively less international experience, we might expect that EMNCs will face radically different challenges when compared to their Western counterparts. These include negative country of origin perceptions, consumer bias and heightened levels of consumer ethnocentrism which may undermine the success on their products, brands, and marketing strategies. By seizing this gap in the literature, the main aim of this volume is to further investigate the phenomenon of Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries. As the result of China’s industrial policy, Chinese investors have been particularly active in recent times.
This volume will therefore focus on the Operational Challenges Stemming from Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries. It will seek to assess the state of Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries, their recent developments, their drivers, their opportunities as well as their operational challenges. To this purpose, contributions are invited that address the above theme focusing on the following topics. However, this is not an exclusive list and all contributions that relate to the theme will be considered.
In particular, contributions are encouraged to take a case-study approach.
- The state of Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- Forces and drivers influencing Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- International Supply Chain Transformations as a result of Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- Changing configuration conditions and International Manufacturing Strategy as a result of Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- Opportunities associated with Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- Challenges associated with Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- Chinese Acquisitions in Europe in the Luxury Sector
- Integration Strategies implanted by the Chinese Acquirers
- Cross-cultural issues stemming from the Chinese Acquisitions
- Risk and resilience of Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- The influence of emerging technologies on Chinese Acquisitions in Developed Countries
- The interplay of Chinese Acquisitions in Europe and servitisation
- Chinese Acquisitions in Europe and their impact on Reshoring
- Chinese Acquisitions and CSR
- Chinese Acquisitions and Branding Strategies
- Chinese Acquisitions and Knowledge Management
- Chinese Acquisitions and Transfer of Best Practices
The editor will select submissions for peer review. In particular papers adopting a case-study approach are particularly welcome.
The following are the key dates:
Proposals Submission: 30/04/2018
Proposals Acceptance: 15/05/2018
Full Paper Submission due: 15/07/2018
Editors select submissions for peer review: 31/07/2018
Reviews returned to contributors with directions from editors: 15/09/2018
Resubmissions of the final manuscript due: 15/10/2018
Proposal submissions should be sent to the volume editor Professor Alessandra Vecchi (email alessandra.vecchi@unibo.it) no later than 30/04/18.
The book will be suitable to be used as a teaching aid in a variety of courses in different disciplines (ranging from International Business, Operations Management to Production Management) both at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Additionally the book will be relevant to academic, researchers and practitioners who have a keen interest in the manufacturing industry.
The 2010 issue of Advances in International Management will focus on the theme, The Past, Present and Future of International Business and Management. The plan is that this first volume under the new editorship will contain approximately 10-15 short discussion pieces by leading and emerging scholars on (1) what we think we know, (2) what we think we need to know and (3) how we might focus in the future on critical topics. Depending on the topics chosen by those submitting proposals we may use a "point-counterpoint" format to heighten the interest and draw out the key ideas and controversies. We expect that the proposals would also form the basis of a number of panels and symposia at upcoming conferences.
Our format is not to have long drawn out papers or general unfocussed speculative essays but that each paper would stick to a narrow theme (e.g., the liability of foreignness, GLOBE, subsidiary-HQ relations, etc.). And they should then be positioned both looking back, looking at the current state, and looking forward. The topics can be theoretical, empirical, or methodological.
The time line on this is tight but we believe that having authors concentrate on a small paper (20 pages of text at the very maximum) this is doable.
So here is what we need.
(1) If you are interested, please send us an email (adv.intl.mgt@gmail.com) with a tentative title and the keywords of the topics by 15 October. If you can put together a 1/2 page abstract that would be great. You can send more than one if that makes it easier.
(2) Based on this initial screening we will most likely come back to you with some suggestions and potentially indicate who else might be working on the topic.
(3) By early November we will have an outline of topics and authors.
(4) By late December we expect the first drafts of your paper. These will also potentially be used to form panels for AIB, AOM, SMS and EIBA for the following year.
(5) Final manuscripts will be needed in January to early February (we will also have an editor to help out).
(6) The published articles will be ready by the conferences.
If you have any questions, please direct them to Timothy Devinney at adv.intl.mgt@gmail.com (note that this is the address for all correspondence)
We look forward to your proposals.
Tim, Torben and Laszlo
Prof. Timothy Devinney
Global Numbers: +61 2 8006 0048 or +1 412 5677440
Other Numbers:
Australia (Mob): +61 412 276 467
USA (Mob): +1 (847) 207 3202
Germany (Mob): +49 (151) 5316 7974
China (Mob): +86 (136) 5116 1087
Email: Timothy.Devinney@uts.edu.au
There have been at least two major theoretical approaches used in international marketing research. These are the industrial organization approach and the resource based-view. The industrial organization approach ascribes a firm’s international performance to its external market position. The resource based-view focuses on internal organizational resources such as marketing competency or marketing capabilities to identify the determinants of a firm’s international marketing performance.
In the previous international marketing literature, most studies adopted the industrial organization approach to evaluate a firm’s strategy, characteristics, and external factors as determinants of performance. Industrial organization theory states that the external environment imposes pressure on the firm to which it must respond. In line with this theory, Zou and Stan (1998) suggested that exporters who respond successfully to their external environments by developing and implementing an appropriate strategy would enjoy superior performance. The strategy factors that have been frequently studied as determinants of performance include adapting the different marketing mix elements to accommodate the needs of the local market, different channel relationships, together with the different types of channels (Zou et al., 2003). However, Zou et. al (2003) also suggest that the industrial organization framework only focuses on the impact of a firm’s strategy and its external environment on performance, and places very little emphasis on the impact of idiosyncratic internal capabilities, such as marketing capabilities, on the firm’s performance (Barney, 1991).
In order to overcome this void in the literature Barney (1991) introduced a new theoretical perspective that is the resource based-view of the firm. The resource-based view of the firm views the firm not in the light of its activities or strategy in the product market but as a unique bundle of tangible and intangible resources. In addition, the firm’s resources, not its strategy, are at the heart of the firm’s competitive advantage (Peteraf, 1993). In other words, the resource based-view states that the principal determinants of a business’ performance and its strategy are its internal resources.
Not all of the firm’s resources have the potential to create a sustainable competitive advantage. Barney (1991) argued that to create a sustainable competitive advantage, a resource must have four attributes: It must (1) be valuable, (2) be rare, (3) be difficult to imitate, and (4) have no strategically equivalent substitute. Specifically, resources that are necessary for creating a sustainable competitive advantage can be divided into two types, namely, assets and capabilities. Assets are the resource endowments a firm has accumulated, for example, an investment in facilities. Whilst capabilities are a firm’s complex bundle of skills and accumulated knowledge, exercised through an organizational process that enables the firm to coordinate activities and make the best use of its assets (Day, 1994).
In recent years, there has been an increasing number of international marketing studies conducted using the resource based-view of the firm (Calantone et al., 2006; Dhanaraj and Beamish, 2003). Additionally, Knudsen and Madsen (2002) have suggested that the resource-based view of the firm has emerged as the dominant paradigm. As such, this Special Issue focuses on the resource based view of the firm and its significance in international marketing. I am especially interested in original articles in the following areas:
1. The relationships between industry structure, strategy, marketing capabilities, learning, innovation and performance in international marketing.
2. The determinants of a sustainable competitive advantage in international marketing.
3. The relationship between an export venture’s resources and a sustainable competitive advantage in international marketing.
4. The influence of resource dependency on international marketing strategy.
5. An analysis of both internal and external firm factors on strategy and performance in international marketing.
6. The relationship between product, price, promotion and distribution capability and export marketing performance.
7. The significance of market orientation as a marketing capability in international marketing whether it be as a mediating variable or having a direct influence on performance.
8. The influence of firm capabilities on collaborative stability and change.
9. The relationship between market knowledge and new product advantage.
10. Cross-national comparative studies of new product development processes.
11. The antecedents of marketing capabilities and organizational effectiveness.
12. An investigation of the different strategic types, marketing competencies and performance.
13. The effect of export marketing capabilities on export performance.
The International Journal of Trade and Global Markets is a scholarly journal, committed to the advancement of theory and practice within the domain of international business. All papers that reflect high standards of research methodology will be considered. Submitted papers should follow the usual Inderscience format and guidelines and will be subject to a double-blind reviewing process. Deadline for receipt of manuscripts is December 31 2011. Papers should be submitted via e-mail to the Guest Editor, Dr. Craig Julian at the following address:
Dr. Craig Julian, Senior Lecturer in Marketing, Southern Cross Business School, Southern Cross University, Locked Bag 4, Coolangatta, Queensland, 4225, Australia. E-Mail: craig.julian@scu.edu.au
This edited book is scheduled as volume 12 of International Financial Review, an annual book series. The IFR publishes theme-oriented volumes on various issues in international finance, such as international business finance, international investment and capital markets, global risk management, international corporate governance and institution, currency markets, emerging market finance, international economic integration, and related issues. Elsevier Science published IFR volumes 1-8; starting with volume 9, Emerald Group Publishing, the U.K., publishes the Series (http://astro.temple.edu/~jjchoi/ifr.doc).
ABOUT THE NEW VOLUME:
The edited volume on The Role of Institutional Investors in a Globalized Environment will publish original papers that examine various issues concerning the strategies of institutional investors, the role of institutional investors in corporate governance, their impact on local and international capital markets, as well as the emergence of sovereign and other asset management funds and their interactions with micro and macro economic and market environments including the impacts on international economic and market stability. In addition, we are interested in papers that address the role of sovereign wealth funds in the current global financial crisis, as well as the potential role of asset management funds and private equity in corporate governance generally.
We encourage submission of manuscripts that investigate these broad issues concerning economic implications and determinants of institutional investments around the world. We also invite papers that examine the different types of institutional investors including pension funds, mutual funds, hedge funds, sovereign wealth funds, and so forth. Cross-country studies are of particular interest. All types of original papers – theoretical, empirical, or policy-oriented – will be considered.
Within this framework, possible topics include, but are not limited to:
- Do institutional investors lead to better corporate governance and/or enhanced firm performance?
- How do active and passive investors affect corporate governance, firm value and performance?
- The performance of institutional investors according to their type.
- The emergence of sovereign wealth funds: the impact of the institutional environment, their transparency, etc…
- What is the role of institutional investors in relation to the other internal corporate governance mechanisms?
- How do institutional investors pick up and influence their targets?
- What are the recent trends in institutional investors’ investments?
- What was the impact of the recent financial crisis on institutional investors’ investments, especially cross- border?
- What is the role that institutional investors play in changing local corporate governance institutions?
- What are the determinants of institutional investors’ participation in firms?
- Do foreign institutional investors help stabilize or destabilize local markets?
- The political economy of institutional Investment around the world.
Interested authors are encouraged to contact volume co-editors as early as possible. Complete papers should be submitted, electronically in Microsoft Word, via email to both of the co-editors by February 28, 2011:
Narjess Boubakri, Professor of finance, School of Business and Management, American University of Sharjah, United Arab Emirates
E-mail: nboubakri@aus.edu
Jean-Claude Cosset, Professor of International Finance, HEC Montréal, Canada
E-mail : jean-claude.cosset@hec.ca
We are currently seeking authors for the following book and its chapters:
THE ROUTLEDGE COMPANION TO European Business
A book edited by Gabriele Suder (The University of Melbourne), Monica Riviere (ISC Paris) and Johan Lindeque (University of Applied Sciences and Arts Northwestern Switzerland and the University of Amsterdam)
Book Description and Rational
International Business is a well-established research field, in which regionalisation has gained prominence in the last decade. Because Europe is a market that shows specific patterns of highly advanced market integration, European Business is a subject in its own right and with its own research momentum. In particular, firms view Europe as a challenging, mostly - yet not entirely - mature market location that is subject to complexities that help reveal strategic corporate strengths and weaknesses. Furthermore, Europe - and its many sub-locations - represents a location that due to its geo-economic and geopolitical position undergoes frequent and rapid change(s). At present there is no single text on the state of current research knowledge on European Business or which offers a comprehensive guide to research students and academics on the subjects within the domain of Europeanisation.
Target Readership
- Students and researchers of European business and international business;
- Academics and students seeking convenient access to the complex area of European business;
- Established researchers seeking a single repository on the current state of European business research knowledge, current debates, relevant literature and of future research agendas.
Chapter topics for which we seek proposals (except where author name is already indicated):
1. Introduction (Gabriele Suder, Monica Riviere and Johan Lindeque)
SECTION A. Opening Chapters
2. European Business: A literature review
3. European Business Research in Perspective: The focus of regionalisation in the IB literature
SECTION B. International Business Theory and Evidence in Europe: Origins and evolutions
4. Internalization theory and European business (P. Enderwick)
5. On basis of the Uppsala model: evolutions to European research models and frameworks
6. European Locations: multi-country or single regional market?
7. Europeanization and European Business Performance: Theoretical arguments for European strategies.
8. European Small and Medium Businesses and the Born Global concept
9. International business theory and European transition countries.
SECTION C. Culture, Identity and European Business
10. Culture and European Business: Past, Present and Future Opportunities (Sonja Sackmann)
11. European business cultures: theory & practice (A. Kaplan)
12. European Identity and European Business (Richard Brunet-Thornton)
SECTION D. Economic and Market Integration: Doing business in advanced regionalisation
13. Regionalisation and the European Project
14. Single Market evolution and its business impact (M. Benson-Rea)
15. FTAs and RTAs with third countries & European business
16. The case of Russia, Turkey, Belarus and more: Where to draw a frontier in the European business environment? (Andrey Panibratov)
SECTION E. The (International) Political Economy of European Business
17. About European Institutions: how the evolving institutions of the EU shape the environment for business as a whole
18. Non-market strategy and European business (Phil Harris)
19. European business strategy
SECTION F. Sectorial and functional perspectives
20. Human Resources Management and European Business
21. European Business Marketing
22. European Operations and Supply Chain Management
23. European Business Innovation
24. European Business and the Financial Sector
25. European Mergers and Acquisitions
SECTION G. Complex Challenges: Migration, climate change, innovation and more
26. Geopolitics and European business
27. Climate change & energy research and European business
28. Migration research and European business
29. Terrorism research and European business
30. Human Rights and European business (E. Giuliani)
31. European Business and (International) Sustainable Development
SECTION H. Emerging themes in European Business Research
32. Euro and European Competitiveness
33. Conclusion (Gabriele Suder, Monica Riviere and Johan Lindeque)
(We are open to receiving proposals for alternative topics for specific sections and are open to some interpretation of the suggested titles in proposals.)
Submission Procedure
Researchers are invited to submit, by or on 04 July, 2016, a chapter proposal of 500-700 words clearly explaining the structure and planned content of his or her proposed chapter. Authors will be notified by or on 07 August 2016 about the status of their proposals and will, if accepted for a chapter submission, receive chapter guidelines.
Full chapters (6000- 8000 words) are expected to be submitted by 01 February, 2017, and will only be eligible for review under condition that the chapters are submitted in full and in compliance with respect to the guidelines. All submitted chapters will be reviewed on a blind review basis. Contributors will also be requested to serve as reviewers for one other chapter in this project.
Note: There are no submission or acceptance fees for manuscripts submitted to this book publication. Authors will not be paid at any stage. All manuscripts are accepted based on a blind peer review editorial process.
Proposal Submission Deadline: 04 July 2016
Other key dates: Notification of proposal acceptance; guidelines to contributors : 07 August 2016, Submission deadline for chapters: 01 February 2017, Chapters Review deadline: 01 April 2017, Contributor revisions deadline: 01 July 2017
Publisher
This book project has already been accepted for publication by by Routledge under the normal conditions for such projects. For additional information regarding the publisher, please visit www.routledge.com. This publication is anticipated to be released in late 2017 or early 2018.
Please send your proposals or inquiries to The Editors on :
rceb2018@gmail.com . Please do not send e-mails to the editors directly.
Current mindsets and traditional practices get in the way of optimizing people’s potential and performance and negatively affect business and societies. “Ism’s” divide nations and people. Men still dominate women, children, and other vulnerable communities in many cultures, and women often do not have an equal seat at the opportunity table.
Even the use of the term “high-quality human capital” by economists and organizational theorists only weakly focuses on people. At its best, the term acknowledges that people are the more critical factor of production in the post-industrial knowledge/service era. On the other hand, the term treats people more as machines than as human beings, detaching life and lives from managerial decision-making, and disassociating organizations from their communities and larger society. Organizational cultures, too, often driven solely by the drive to dominate in the market or the search for short-term profits, neglect our real sources of long term value, global sustainability and meaning: people.
People are more than machines or capital, the productivity afforded by technology, or even the knowledge resident in their heads. People provide the creative pulse in organizations as well as the source of their successes and failures. They create the socio-economic health of our societies. People, as well as the organizations and societies in which they live, work, and perform, thrive in relationship and with care. Yet, relationships oftentimes fall second to self-advancement or self-preservation, and care is perceived as weak, expensive, or “just feminine.”
The way forward: to build human capacity through partnership and care. With partnership and care, people transcend cultural and philosophical boundaries as well as organizational hierarchies and tribal differences. Partnership – fueled by care - shifts us from hierarchies of domination, which rule through fear, or “power over,” to hierarchies of actualization, where power is used to empower rather than disempower others. Partnership-oriented cultures lead to innovatory performance, long term success, environmental sustainability, and human well-being. Care, a building block of life, a value-in-action, and a powerful and strategic human resource, empowers humans to be more fully human which incites the flourishing of knowledge, creativity, and even more care. Care is worthy of investment, policy, and practice because it delivers both measurable results and a more human world.
The creation of a sustainable global society will take a socio-cultural-economic paradigm shift across all institutions, leaders, and households so that care is viewed as a valuable resource and partnership is respected. For example, traditional measurements of performance (such as GDP and GNP, profits and share price) must advance so that people, care-giving activities, and care in market and nonmarket economies are valued in both the short and long term.
At this stage, however, research that allows us to improve our understanding of care as a resource for creativity, sustainability, and performance is still rather limited. Researchers and practitioners interested in beginning to fill this gap are invited to submit their work to this special issue. Theoretical and/or empirical papers of a quantitative and/or qualitative nature on all aspects of institutional, organizational, and societal management are invited. Cross-cultural and/or cross-disciplinary research perspectives are preferable.
Topics could include but are not limited to:
• Augmenting traditional economic theory, organizational strategies, socioeconomic definitions, and gender identifications with care
• Building partnership cultures in a cross-culturally complex world
• Relationship of caring strategies, practices, and policies to performance and creativity
• Cultural values and traditions that support or hinder the development of caring policies and practices
• Impact of gender definitions on valuing and giving importance to care
• Impact of gender definitions on development of caring leadership/management models
• Relationship between socio-economic indicators, the valuing of care work, and the building of human capacity
• Cross-cultural management strategies for valuing women, vulnerable communities, and/or disenfranchised workers in organizations
• Developing an underlying cross-cultural standard for care in nations and organizations
Submission guidelines
Papers submitted must not have been published, accepted for publication, or presently under consideration for publication with any other journal. Submissions should be approximately 4,000 to 6,000 words in length. Submissions to Cross Cultural Management must be made using the ScholarOne Manuscript Central system (http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/ccmij). For more details, please visit www.emeraldinsight.com/ccm.htm and consult the author guidelines.
A separate title page must be uploaded containing the title, author(s), and contact information for the author(s). Suitable articles will be subjected to a double-blind review; hence authors should not identify themselves in the body of the paper. The deadline for submissions has been extended to 1 December, 2011. Authors with questions about paper and topic suitability should email the guest editors.
“Cross Cultural Management: An International Journal” is listed in both Cabell’s Directory of Publishing Opportunities in Management & Marketing and ISI’s Social Sciences Citation Index®.
Guest Editors
Dr. Kristine Kawamura, St. Georges University, Grenada
Email: kristinekawamura@yahoo.com
Dr. Riane Eisler, Center for Partnership Studies, California, USA
Email: eisler@partnershipway.org
Since the 1990’s the political, economic and social landscape of the countries in Central and Eastern Europe has changed dramatically.
During the same period and throughout the world, public affairs has strengthened its position as an established corporate function with academic research and practitioner work as proof. While there appears a large variation in how public affairs is defined and practiced partly due to the differences in political structure among countries and regions, we believe that the term public affairs can refer to different sets of strategies and tactics and still fall under the umbrella description of the function, formulated by some as “an association’s or corporation’s external politics”, and by others as “influencing an organisation’s external audiences.”
What then is meant by public affairs and how does it differentiate itself from public relations and other functions or disciplines in different regions? In 1984, Grunig and Hunt defined public relations as “the management of communication between an organization and its publics” (Grunig & Hunt 1984: 5), while they related ‘public affairs’ generally to efforts towards publics’ interests, which would be primarily in the social, political and non-commercial fields. The Public Affairs Council in the United States defines public affairs as “the management function responsible for interpreting the corporation’s non-commercial environment and managing the company’s response to those factors” (Grunig & Hunt 1984:285). And at that stage public affairs involved “the key tasks of intelligence gathering and analysis, internal communication and external action programs directed at government, communities and the general public” (Gruger & Hoewing 1980:13). In a more recent paper, McGrath, Moss & Harris (2010) consider how public affairs is, and should be, defined and argue for a position of public affairs as “the fundamental bridge between the organisation, society and government, in the face of challenges from other organisational functions”.
This JPA Special Issue is dedicated to highlighting and exploring the area of public affairs as researched and practiced in Central & East-European countries. We define Central and Eastern Europe as including Poland, Czech Republic, Slovakia, Hungary, Romania, Bulgaria, Slovenia, Croatia with Germany and Austria closely involved. Our goal is to create a better and bigger picture of the intricacies, similarities and differences of how public affairs is practiced, regulated, developed, organized, researched and taught in this specific environment in transition.
We are inviting academic as well as practitioner papers covering specificities of Public Affairs in the region as well as country profiles of the state of public affairs, including, but not limited to, the following topics:
• What is seen as the domain of public affairs?
• How is public affairs developing and what is the stage of development of public affairs in a particular CEE country / region
• Has the region’s history led to a different type of public affairs, a different definition of what public affairs is and is able to do?
• Is public affairs shaping or repairing, pro-active or defensive in the region?
• Case studies of successful or not-(so)-successful public affairs activities?
• How is public affairs embedded in the university sector? Curriculum, chairs, research institutes, activities ?
• Who are the public affairs professionals?
• institutional setting:
• registration
• regulation
• education and training
• standards
• transparency
• Parameters of the political and political party systems from a public affairs perspective
• The state of professionalization of public affairs
We invite
• Research / theoretical papers on the understanding, theory, regulatory issues, history and application for public affairs at national / regional level, as well as
• practitioner papers, focusing on the state of affairs but also on well-grounded work on the “how to” aspect of public affairs in the CEE countries.
Review process and submission
• All manuscripts will be double-blind reviewed.
• Manuscripts should follow the style guidelines of the Journal of Public Affairs and are submitted with the understanding that they are original, unpublished works and are not being submitted elsewhere.
• First page: manuscript title and names, institutional affiliation, and contact information for each of the authors.
• Second page: manuscript title and brief (100 word maximum) biography of each of the authors.
• Third page: manuscript title and brief (250 word maximum) abstract of the paper.
• Fourth page and following: manuscript title followed by the text of paper. Third, fourth, and pages following should have no reference to, or name(s) of, the author(s) of the paper.
• Length of paper: ideally between 4000 and 5000 words.
Proposed papers should be submitted as an email Word attachment addressed to rebecca.coatswith@ashridge.org.uk by 28 April 2013. In the heading state ‘JPA CEE’.
The Special Issue will be published as issue 13(4) or 14(1).
References
Grunig, James E. and Todd Hunt. 1984. Managing Public Relations. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
Gruger, William H. and Raymond L. Hoewing. 1980. The new management in corporate public affairs. Public Affairs Review. 1: 13-23
McGrath, Conor, Danny Moss and Phil Harris. 2010. The evolving discipline of public affairs. Journal of Public Affairs. 10 (4): 335-352.
Professor Carla Millar is a Fellow at Ashridge, professor of International Marketing & Management at the University of Twente and a member of the Editorial Board of the Journal of Public Affairs.
Dr. Peter Koeppl teaches Lobbying & Public Affairs at the University of Vienna’s Department for Mass Communication, he is vice-president of the Austrian Public Affairs Association and a public affairs consultant.
Research in Experimental Economics (REE) is a series of edited and refereed research volumes published by Emerald Group Publishing. It was first published in 1979, with Nobel laureate Vernon L. Smith as the founding editor. Ever since, the series has become an important complementary outlet for publishing research in economics. Each REE volume addresses a particular topic. The topic of the upcoming Volume 20 is on the study of culture in economics, which might be of interest to certain International Business scholars working independently or in collaboration with other economics scholars.
Topics for the target volume
Culture is one of the key constructs in International Business (e.g., Leung et al, 2005; Caprar, 2015), but is increasingly getting attention in other domains as well. Economists are interested on how culture, broadly defined, affects economic and political behavior and outcomes like savings decisions, trust, tastes for redistribution, fairness, risk tolerance, economic growth, openness to trade, and more. This volume will focus on the contributions experimental economics can make to the culture-related questions confronting economists. In particular, we encourage submissions of lab and field experiments on any groups or social units where culture is a key variable of interest, along with studies that empirically investigate the validity of culture measurements, and how culture measured in the lab translates to the field.
A key requirement for submission is that participants are monetarily incentivized, since paying subjects according to the decisions they make during the experiment is a defining feature of experimental economics.
REE submissions are externally reviewed. The review criteria are the same as those used in major research journals (e.g. relevance of the topic, quality of the research design, etc.). However, it is important to note that REE has the freedom to consider papers that may not fit certain constraints of traditional journals in spite being valuable contributions. Some examples of such contributions are: replication studies, publication of null results, research that requires longer manuscripts for presentation of data or analysis, and papers focused on methodological topics.
Submission procedure
Interested authors are encouraged to contact the volume editors as soon as possible. For full consideration, completed manuscripts must be received by February 1, 2017. Space for inclusion in this volume is limited.
Email for submissions: cultureREE20@gmail.com
For questions and further information, please feel free to use the submission email above, or contact directly one of the volume editors:
Anna Gunnthorsdottir, Vienna University of Economics and Business (a.gunnthorsdottir@gmail.com)
Doug Norton, MobLab and Florida State University (norton.douglas.alan@gmail.com)
Dan V. Caprar, UNSW Australia (dan.caprar@unsw.edu.au)
Scope and Aims of the Book Chapters:
Proposed title: “The UN Global Compact: Fair competition and environmental and labour justice in international and domestic markets”
Since UN Secretary-General Kofi Annan launched the Global Compact in 1999, over 12,000 organisations around the world have voluntarily adopted and promoted its values and Ten Principles in the areas of human rights, labour, environment and corruption.
This corporate citizenship initiative has seen as a non-compulsory alternative to international market regulations. Around the globe, the United Nations Global Compact has promoted the creation of local and regional networks for businesses to act together to mainstream the Ten Principles of Global Compact.
This edited volume brings together contributions from around the planet on the specific implications for business when embracing the Global Compact. Managerial, internationalization, legal, behavioural and sociological perspective will be reflected at this volume in which both evidences and theoretical developments will be reflected.
Recommended topics include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Global Compact: Its background, context and current influence
- Political, cultural and social responsibility issues at the firm level
- Corruption and competitiveness
- Global Compact and business experiences
- Private sector challenges and the United Nations
- Business managers and the adoption of Global Compact
- Multinational corporations and Human Rights
- Business implications of child labour
- Labour relations and international business
- Sustainability and international business
- Multinational enterprises (MNEs) at the local and international environment
- Challenges for MNEs operating in emerging countries
- MNEs and poverty alleviation
- International Business ethics and global risk
- International business and the illegal economies
- IB, corruption and bribery
- IB and criminal organisations
- Public- Private and Business-Community partnerships
- Corporate Philanthropy
- Limitations of market based approaches
- Investment and CSR
- Climate change and international business
- Corporate Diplomacy
- Role of corporations in shaping global business policy
- Corporate Governance (CG) within the framework of International Business
- Corporate Citizenship
- Global Compact and IB
- Social Responsibility Networks
- Freedom of association and IB
Important dates:
· Submission deadline for chapter proposals (title and 300-500 words abstract): April 1st 2014
· Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals: April 15th 2014
· Deadline for full chapter: 1st of August 2014
· Notification of acceptance/rejection of chapter proposals: 30th of August 2014
· Deadline for submission of final chapters: 1st of October 2014
Accepted chapters will be compiled in a book, which will be published by Emerald Books within the Advances in Sustainability and Environmental Justice (indexed in Scopus)
Book Editors:
Dr. Liam Leonard, Editor of CRIMSOC and Advances in Sustainability, United States/Ireland. liam_leonard@yahoo.com
Prof. Dr. Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez, Universidad EAFIT, Colombia mgonza40@eafit.edu.co
OVERVIEW
The strategic human resource management research stream suggests human resource systems affect organizational stocks and flows of human capital as well as the value created and captured from these assets; yet scholars struggle to theorize and model the mechanisms by which the management of human capital leads to firm heterogeneity and performance. The strategy literature, while recognizing the value creation potential of human capital, frequently overestimates the asset’s manageability by failing to consider the complexity and causal ambiguity of managing an asset embedded in individuals holding free will, emotions, mobility, and collective proclivities. By taking an interdisciplinary view of human capital, we can extend beyond the boundaries of discipline-based research and expand our understanding of how human capital is used to create and appropriate value for the firm.
GOALS AND EXPECTED OUTCOMES OF CONFERENCE
Our goal in organizing this conference is to bring together scholars broadly interested in the study of human capital in an organizational context. Instead of showcasing completed work, plenary and break-out sessions will be designed to provide authors with constructive feedback to increase the probability of successful publication. Opportunities for organized and informal networking will abound.
SUBMISSION
We invite abstracts for conceptual and empirical papers that explore the intersection of value, variability, and management of macro to micro human capital. As this is a developmental conference, papers should be no further than the stage of early drafts with preliminary data collection at the time of presentation. Please submit an abstract of 800 words or less by the deadline of February 18, 2011. Submit on-line to Kathy Zwanzinger (zwanzinger_1@fisher.osu.edu) in reference to “Human Capital Conference”.
CONFERENCE ORGANIZING COMMITTEE
Benjamin Campbell, Ohio State University
Timothy Gardner, Vanderbilt University
Janice Molloy, Michigan State University
Shad Morris, Ohio State University
STRATEGIC HUMAN CAPITAL INTEREST GROUP OFFICERS
Russ Coff, University of Wisconsin
William Hesterly, University of Utah
David Lepak, Rutgers University
CONFERENCE DETAILS
- What is an “early stage” paper?—As outlined in the call for papers, we are willing to accept abstracts outlining research at the earliest conceptual stage up to draft papers with preliminary data collection. Before sending the abstracts out for blind review, conference organizers will screen to ensure the papers have not progressed beyond the appropriate stage.
- What will be the conference format?—With a developmental conference, there is great variation in the quality of the submitted work. Abstracts describing research projects that are less developed and less likely to benefit from feedback from all participants will be presented in “roundtable” sessions. This involves breaking papers into groups of 4-5 authors each. One by one each author presents their work, discusses their work with the other round table participants, then opens discussion to conference participants observing the discussions.
- What kind of feedback can I expect?—Presenters at the plenary sessions will be asked to include a final slide in their presentation that identifies three to five elements of their project that would benefit from feedback and discussion from the participants. This allows the participants to provide feedback on the entire paper but also focuses the group’s attention on key areas for improvement. Such a structure ensures alignment between the goals of the conference and the desire of presenters to present their best work and efforts.
Guest Editors: Luciano Ciravegna (Royal Holloway, University of London; INCAE), Sumit K. Kundu (Florida International University), Luis Lopez (INCAE)
Submission Deadline: September 15, 2014
Since 2008-2009 emerging markets generate the lion share of the world’s economic growth. As a result, managers and business scholars have focused their attention on studying the dynamics of emerging markets (Buckley, Clegg, Cross, Liu, Voss, and Zheng, 2007; Cavusgil, Ghauri, and Akcal, 2012; Guillen and Garcia-Canal, 2012; Khanna and Palepu, 2010: Ciravegna, Fitzgerald and Kundu, 2013; Wright, Filatotchev, Hoskisson, and Peng, 2005). The rise of multinational companies from emerging markets is becoming a major phenomenon (Ramamurti and Singh, 2009; Cuervo-Cazurra, 2012; Luo and Rui, 2009; Yamakawa, Peng and Deeds, 2008).
Emerging market multinationals (EMNEs) internationalize differently from developed economy multinationals (Guillén and García-Canal, 2009; Luo and Rui, 2009; Matthews, 2007; Yiu, Lau and Bruton, 2007). According to Luo and Tang’s (2007) “springboard perspective”, EMNEs internationalize before reaching a stage of maturity in domestic markets because internationalization nurtures the acquisition of capabilities and assets that they may lack. Some scholars reject this view, positing that EMNEs behave similarly to multinationals based in developed economies, only they have different sets of country specific and firm specific advantages (Narula, 2012). Finally, some scholars point that EMNEs may internationalize in order to escape from difficult conditions in their domestic economies or to pursue opportunities in an entrepreneurial fashion (Khanna and Palepu, 2010; Madhok and Keyhani, 2012).
Most of the studies on which EMNEs theories focus on a very small number of emerging markets especially China and India (Ciravegna, Fitzgerald, and Kundu, 2013). Several Latin American firms have internationalized in aggressive and innovative ways, often outcompeting established players (Casanova, 2009). Latin American firms are now among the world global players in several industries, ranging from cement (Cemex), to aerospace (Embraer), bread (Bimbo), sweets (Arcor), and wine (Concha y Toro) (Guillén and García-Canal, 2009). However, our understanding of internationalization strategy of Latin American firms remains shallow (Pérez-Batres, Pisani, & Doh, 2010). International business scholars point that Latin American firms internationalize rather regionally, though the number of empirical studies examining the phenomenon is limited, and tends to focus on a few well known cases, whereas the majority of Latin American firms, including mid-sized multinational companies, have thus far been under the radar of scientific research (Casanova, 2009; Lopez, Ciravegna and Kundu, 2009; Rugman and Verbeke, 2004). The result is an empirical gap with regards to the generalizability of EMNE theories to Latin American firms.
Do Latin American firms behave similarly to the Chinese and Indian firms that have been discussed more thorougly by the international business literature? Or do they behave more in line with developed economy multinationals, internationalizing gradually as they accumulate resources and capabilities?
This special edition of JBR aims to contribute to the debate on emerging market multinationals by inviting scholarly articles focusing on the internationalization of firms based in Latin America. We are particularly interested in new studies, which use fresh empirical evidence to examine whether and how the internationalization of Latin American firms corresponds to the EMNE theories (e.g. springboard perspective, institutional void perspective, linkage-leverage-learning perspective), or whether they follow conventional IB theories (e.g. eclectic paradigm, resource based view, gradual internationalization process model, internalization theory, and network theory).
The guest editors seek studies focusing on firm internationalization based on one or multiple countries of Latin America. The contributions can tackle, among others, the following research questions:
- Which theories from the international business, international entrepreneurship, and international marketing fields are suited to explain the internationalization of Latin American companies?
- Does the internationalization of Latin American enterprises contribute to the development of emerging markets multinational enterprises (EMNEs) internationalization theories? How?
- Do the springboard and linkage-leverage-learning perspectives apply to Latin American firms?
- What explains the speed and scope of internationalization of Latin American firms?
- What are the motives for internationalizing of Latin American firms?
- How important are ownership and the composition of the management team for the internationalization of Latin American firms?
- Does the eclectic paradigm explain the internationalization of Latin American firms?
- Do institutional characteristics contribute to explain the international behavior of Latin American companies?
To submit your work, please email your paper to Luciano Ciravegna at Luciano.ciravegna@incae.edu
All papers accepted in an initial screening will enter double-blind peer review process.
Submissions will be limited to 50 pages of text and up to ten figures and tables. Submissions must comply to the JBR style requirements. For JBR style requirements, go to http://cdn.elsevier.com/promis_misc/jbrrequirements.pdf.
References
Buckley, P. J., Clegg, L. J., Cross, A. R., Liu, X., Voss, H., & Zheng, P. (2007). The determinants of Chinese outward foreign direct investment. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4), 499-518.
Casanova, L. (2009). Global Latinas [Electronic book]: Latin America's emerging multinationals. Palgrave Macmillan.
Cavusgil, S. T., Ghauri, P. N., & Akcal, A. A. (2012). Doing business in emerging markets. Sage.
Ciravegna, L.; Fitzgerald, R., & Kundu, S. (2013) Operating in emerging markets. Financial Times (FT) Press, Pearson, New York, USA.
Ciravegna, L.; Lopez, L. & Kundu, S. (2013) “Country of origin and network effects on internationalization: A comparative study of SMEs from an emerging and developed economy”, Journal of Business Research, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2013.07.011
Ciravegna, L.; Lopez, L. & Kundu, S. (2009) “Born Global or Born Regional? Evidence from an exploratory study in the Costa Rican Software Industry”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 40 (7): 1228-1238.
Contractor, F. J., Kumar, V., & Kundu, S. K. (2007). Nature of the relationship between international expansion and performance: The case of emerging market firms. Journal of World Business, 42(4), 401-417.
Cuervo‐Cazurra, A. (2012). Extending theory by analyzing developing country multinational companies: solving the goldilocks debate. Global Strategy Journal, 2(3), 153-167.
Guillén, M. F., & García-Canal, E. (2009). The American model of the multinational firm and the “new” multinationals from emerging economies. The Academy of Management Perspectives, 23(2), 23-35.
Guillén, M. F., & García-Canal, E. (2012) Emerging markets rule. McGraw Hill, US.
Khanna, T., & Palepu, K. G. (2010). Winning in emerging markets: A road map for strategy and execution. Harvard Business Press.
Hoskisson, R. E., Eden, L., Lau, C. M., & Wright, M. (2000). Strategy in emerging economies. Academy of Management Journal, 43(3), 249-267.
Luo YD, Rui HC. 2009. An ambidexterity perspective toward multinational enterprises from emerging economies. Academy of Management Perspectives 23(4): 49–70.
Luo, Y., & Tung, R. L. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4), 481-498.
Mathews, J. A. (2006). Dragon multinationals: New players in 21st century globalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23(1), 5-27.
Madhok, A., & Keyhani, M. (2012). Acquisitions as entrepreneurship: asymmetries, opportunities, and the internationalization of multinationals from emerging economies. Global Strategy Journal, 2(1), 26-40.
Narula, R. (2012). Do we need different frameworks to explain infant MNEs from developing countries? Global Strategy Journal, 2(3), 188-204.
Peng M.W., Wang D.Y.L., Jiang Y. 2008. An institution-based view of international business strategy: a focus on emerging economies. Journal of International Business Studies 39(5): 920–936.
Pérez-Batres, L.A., Pisani, M.J., & Doh, J.P. 2010. Latin America’s Contribution to IB Scholarship. Academy of International Business Insights, 10(1): 3-7.
Ramamurti, R., & Singh, J. V. (Eds.). (2009). Emerging multinationals in emerging markets. Cambridge University Press.
Ramamurti, R. (2012). What is really different about emerging market multinationals? Global Strategy Journal, 2(1), 41-47.
Rugman, A. M., & Verbeke, A. (2004). A perspective on regional and global strategies of multinational enterprises. Journal of International Business Studies, 35(1), 3-18.
Yamakawa, Y., Peng, M. W., & Deeds, D. L. (2008). What drives new ventures to internationalize from emerging to developed economies? Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 32(1), 59-82.
Yiu, D. W., Lau, C., & Bruton, G. D. (2007). International venturing by emerging economy firms: the effects of firm capabilities, home country networks, and corporate entrepreneurship. Journal of International Business Studies, 38(4), 519-540.
Wright, M., Filatotchev, I., Hoskisson, R. E., & Peng, M. W. (2005). Strategy Research in Emerging Economies: Challenging the Conventional Wisdom*. Journal of Management Studies, 42(1), 1-33.
Special issue guest editors (listed alphabetically)
Dan-Cristian Dabija, Babeş-Bolyai University, Romania
Andrew Inkpen, Thunderbird School of Global Management, USA
Alexei Koveshnikov, Aalto University School of Business, Finland
Elena-Mădălina Vătămănescu, National University of Political Studies and Public Administration, Romania
The Objective of the Special Issue
Since the collapse of state socialism in Central and Eastern Europe (CEE), research on post-socialist transformation has informed and advanced various theoretical debates about the processes of organization and organizational change (Child & Czegledy, 1996; Uhlenbruck, Meyer, & Hitt, 2003; Meyer & Peng, 2005; Soulsby & Clark, 2007; Gelbuda, Meyer, & Delios, 2008; Dixon, Meyer, & Day, 2010; Clark & Geppert, 2011). The context of CEE countries provides an interesting laboratory for developing new theoretical insights and testing existing Western-derived theories (Meyer & Peng, 2005; Schwartz & McCann, 2007). CEE countries have been characterized as a region “where public and private are mixed, the boundaries of firms are blurred, and legitimating principles are not bound to discrete domains” (Stark & Bruszt, 2001, p. 1136). This stream of research has made valuable contributions in areas such as the role of institutions (Meyer & Peng, 2005) and the state (Suhomlinova, 2007); the role of corruption (Karhunen & Ledyaeva, 2012); the development of organizational capabilities (Dixon et al., 2010); work organization (Schwartz & McCann, 2007); organizational knowledge management (Uhlenbruck et al., 2003); and managerial identity construction (Clark & Geppert, 2011).
The transformation in CEE countries is ongoing and the last decade has been especially eventful. Several influential socio-political and economic changes occurred in the region. First, several CEE countries joined the EU or adopted the euro. Second, the region saw the formation of a new economic union, the so-called Eurasian Economic Union, which included Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. Third, the Ukrainian crisis led to the introduction of economic sanctions by several Western countries and Russia against each other. Fourth, several countries in the region witnessed rising support for nationalist sentiments and populist rhetoric. Finally, the region has seen several economic crises since the end of the 2000s. These events have impacted the ongoing transformation processes in CEE countries. The implications of the events for institutions, organizations and individuals are yet to be explored and understood by organization and management scholars.
Continuing the legacy of previous collections on the topic (Organization Studies, 1996; Human Relations, 2007; Journal of International Management, 2008), this special issue seeks to augment our understanding of the current state of transformation in CEE countries and the international management implications for institutions, organizations and organizational actors. We are interested in papers that examine the influence of recent socio-political and economic developments (e.g. the rise of nationalism, economic sanctions, the changing role of the state, the establishment of new institutional bodies) on business activities in the region and also papers that explore the lasting legacy of the socialist past and its manifestations in these countries.
The special issue has a broad focus and solicits submissions dealing with both foreign entrants and incumbents as well as newly established domestic firms in the region. We encourage methodological diversity and invite both theoretical and empirical studies. Both large-sample analyses and case studies are invited as long as they establish a contribution to our understanding of the theoretical mechanisms underpinning the transformation processes in the region and provide theoretical linkages with international management. We welcome studies from diverse disciplines, such as management, economics, sociology, psychology, etc. and topical interests, i.e. corporate strategy, international entrepreneurship, organizational behavior, cultural studies, international management, etc. Geographically, we seek submissions focusing on CEE and post-Soviet countries such as Belarus, Moldova, Ukraine, Kazakhstan and Russia. We are open to submissions that examine the transformation and its implications at any level of analysis, be it macro societal, meso/organizational, or micro/individual level.
The following list of topics illustrates the range of submission. Authors are free to contact the guest editors to discuss these and other topics they want to examine:
- How have domestic CEE firms and foreign entrants adapted to the evolving institutional contexts of CEE countries?
- What capabilities have domestic and foreign firms developed to cope better with the rapidly changing environment?
- What are the lingering manifestations of the socialist imprint and what are its implications for international management in CEE countries?
- What is the role of top management team (TMT) and leadership in CEE firms’ international expansion?
- What types of leadership and human resource management (HRM) foster innovation, learning and capabilities development in business interactions between foreign firms and local actors in CEE countries?
- What can foreign firms learn from local champions in the CEE region?
- What is the role and implications of CEE firms’ home country institutional embeddedness in their international operations?
- Are there country specific assets (CSAs) in CEE countries? How have international firms exploited these CSAs?
- How does the socialist legacy of CEE affect international firms’ operations in the region?
- How does the internationalization process and strategies of CEE firms differ from those of Chinese and Indian firms?
- What are the implications of rising nationalism in the region for business relationships between foreign and local actors?
- Are there any “survival capabilities” of post socialist firms that help these firms to operate internationally?
- What strategies do CEE firms use to gain legitimacy and overcome “the liabilities of origin” as they internationalize?
- What are the strategies of CEE firms and foreign entrants to cope with institutional voids in CEE countries?
- What are the processes used by CEE firms to transfer, adapt, recontextualize, and hybridize knowledge from outside the CEE?
- How do MNCs from outside CEE adapt their management practices and strategies when working in the CEE region?
- How do managers in CEE firms engage in sensemaking / sensegiving / sensehiding / sensebreaking and with what implications for their international business activities?
- What are unique knowledge management approaches and outcomes in domestic and foreign firms in CEE countries?
- How do firms develop and manage cross-border business networks in the region?
- How do firms use and manage cross-border alliances and joint ventures in the region?
- How is trust at different levels (individual, firm, institution) perceived, developed, established, and repaired in interactions between foreign firms and local actors in CEE countries?
- How do domestic and foreign firms reorganize and enhance their resources in order to become market competitive beyond CEE?
- How do informal institutions complement formal institutions to explain foreign investors’ entry strategies in CEE countries?
- How have CEE countries developed industry sectors such as IT or healthcare that have made them attractive to foreign investors?
- What are the dynamics and key characteristics of HQ-subsidiary relations in the context of CEE firms or foreign MNCs operating in CEE countries?
- What are the implications of the economic sanctions on the operations of Russian firms and foreign firms operating in Russia?
- How are power relations between CEE and foreign firm managers developed and negotiated and with what organizational and individual implications?
- What are the organizational and individual implications of prejudices, cultural stereotypes, and cognitive biases in relations between CEE and foreign firm managers?
- How do CEE and foreign managers engage in identity work and construct their (national) identities while operating in the region?
- What is the influence of powerful stakeholders, e.g. political and business elites, governmental institutions, etc. on the international operations of CEE firms?
- What are the evolving role and strategies of state-owned MNCs in and beyond the region?
References
Child, J., & Czegledy, A. P. (1996). Managerial learning in the transformation of Eastern Europe: Some key issues. Organization Studies, 17(2), 167-179.
Clark, E., & Geppert, M. (2011). Subsidiary integration as identity construction and institution building: A political sensemaking approach. Journal of Management Studies, 48(2), 395-416.
Dixon, S. E., Meyer, K. E., & Day, M. (2010). Stages of organizational transformation in transition economies: A dynamic capabilities approach. Journal of Management Studies, 47(3), 416-436.
Gelbuda, M., Meyer, K. E., & Delios, A. (2008). International business and institutional development in Central and Eastern Europe. Journal of International Management, 14(1), 1-11.
Karhunen, P., & Ledyaeva, S. (2012). Corruption distance, anti-corruption laws and international ownership strategies in Russia. Journal of International Management, 18(2), 196-208.
Meyer, K. E., & Peng, M. W. (2005). Probing theoretically into Central and Eastern Europe: Transactions, resources, and institutions. Journal of International Business Studies, 36(6), 600-621.
Schwartz, G., & McCann, L. (2007). Overlapping effects: Path dependence and path generation in management and organization in Russia. Human Relations, 60(10), 1525-1549.
Soulsby, A., & Clark, E. (2007). Organization theory and the post-socialist transformation: Contributions to organizational knowledge. Human Relations, 60(10), 1419-1442.
Stark, D., & Bruszt, L. (2001). One way or multiple paths: For a comparative sociology of East European capitalism. American Journal of Sociology, 106(4), 1129-1137.
Suhomlinova, O. (2007). Property rules: State fragmentation, industry heterogeneity and property rights in the Russian oil industry, 1992—2006. Human Relations, 60(10), 1443-1466.
Uhlenbruck, K., Meyer, K. E., & Hitt, M. A. (2003). Organizational transformation in transition economies: Resource‐based and organizational learning perspectives. Journal of Management Studies, 40(2), 257-282.
Submission process
Between September 1 and 30, 2020, authors should submit their manuscripts online via https://www.evise.com/profile/#/INTMAN/login. To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for consideration for this special issue, it is important that authors mark the button CEE transformation.
Manuscripts should be prepared following the guide for authors available at https://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-international-management/1075-4253/guide-for-authors. All submitted manuscripts will be subject to a double-blind review process.
Please, direct questions about the special issue to the guest editors:
Dan-Cristian Dabija (Cristian.dabija@econ.ubbcluj.ro);
Andrew Inkpen (Andrew.Inkpen@asu.edu);
Alexei Koveshnikov (alexei.koveshnikov@aalto.fi);
Elena-Mădălina Vătămănescu (madalina.vatamanescu@facultateademanagement.ro).
Biographies of the Guest Editors for the Proposed Special Issue
Dan-Cristian Dabija, Babeş-Bolyai University, Romania:
Dan-Cristian Dabija, PhD, is Professor at the Department of Marketing, Faculty of Economics and Business Administration, Babeș-Bolyai University, Romania. His teaching and research fields are retailing, international marketing, consumer behaviour and tourism marketing. Dr. Dabija completed his PhD Studies at the Bucharest University of Economic Studies, Romania, and has been awarded several doctoral and postdoctoral research scholarships at Romanian, German, Finish, Austrian, Hungarian, British and Polish universities. Dr. Dabija leaded a research project on sustainability in retailing financed by the Romanian National Authority for Scientific Research and Innovation. His research has appeared in International Marketing Review, Amfiteatru Economic, Transformations in Business & Economics, Moravian Geographical Reports, International Journal of Sustainability in Higher Education, etc. He serves on the editorial boards of Amfiteatru Economic, E&M Economics and Management, Marketing Education Review.
Andrew Inkpen, Thunderbird School of Global Management, USA:
Andrew Inkpen holds the Seward Chair of Global Strategy at the Thunderbird School of Global Management. His research has involved areas such as the management of joint ventures and strategic alliances, cross border and inter-firm knowledge management and transfer, and organizational learning. He has written more than 50 refereed research articles, more than 40 teaching cases, and numerous book chapters. He is the co-author of several textbooks and co-author of Global Strategy (Oxford: 2006) and the Global Oil and Gas Industry: Management, Strategy and Finance (Pennwell: 2011). His research has been published in journals such as Academy of Management Review, Strategic Management Journal, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Management Studies, Long Range Planning, Organization Science, Decision Sciences, and Organization Studies. He was a co-editor of a Journal of International Business Studies Special Issue on Governments as Owners: Globalizing State Owned Enterprises and Sovereign Wealth Funds. He serves on the editorial boards of Journal of Management Studies, Organization Studies, Journal of International Management, Asia Pacific Journal of Management, and Management and Organization Review.
Alexei Koveshnikov, Aalto University School of Business, Finland:
Alexei Koveshnikov is a tenure track Assistant Professor at the Aalto University School of Business in Finland. His research interests circle around issues related to managing people in multinational contexts and emerging economies such as Russia in particular. Alexei has published on various topics related to leadership, HRM, employee behavior, expatriation, cross-cultural interactions, identity work, and politics and power. His research has appeared in International Business Review, Journal of International Business Studies, Journal of Management Studies, Journal of World Business, Management International Review, Management and Organization Review, Organization Studies, and Strategic Management Journal. He currently serves on the review board of Management and Organization Review and Critical Perspectives on International Business.
Elena-Mădălina Vătămănescu, National University of Political Studies and Public Administration, Romania:
Elena-Mădălina Vătămănescu is a Professor of International Business and Knowledge Management at the Faculty of Management, National University of Political Studies and Public Administration, Romania. She is Head of the Center for Research in Management and Director for Romania of the international association Business Systems Laboratory (BSLab). She serves as Associate Editor of Kybernetes. The International Journal of Cybernetics, Systems and Management Sciences (published by Emerald) and as reviewer for over 20 top-ranked journals, such as Journal of Knowledge Management, Knowledge Management Research and Practice, International Business Review, Journal of Small Business Management, Technological Forecasting and Social Change Transfer, Management Decision, etc. In 2018, Dr. Vătămănescu won the national competition for research grants financed by the Romanian National Authority for Scientific Research and Innovation, her project focusing on the influence of intellectual capital on the European SMEs internationalization process. Over the last 10 years, she published more than 60 papers in peer-reviewed journals and conference proceedings indexed in well-known international databases, most of them revolving around the dynamics of international business, managerial strategies and knowledge capitalization.
Towards a New Corporate Responsibility and Governance? Identity Characteristics of Asia Pacific MNCs
Indian Institute of Foreign Trade, New Delhi, India has been a leader in research on issues in International Trade, Policy and WTO. Research activities occupy a critical place at IIFT. The Institute has so far brought around 700 research studies and surveys. A number of Publications like the Foreign Trade Review and Focus WTO are also published by the institute Quarterly. FOCUS WTO deals exclusively with WTO and WTO related issues. Each issue is dedicated to a particular theme. Based on the theme, a Lead Article is published in the issue.
As the next issue is devoted to the theme "Trade Barriers", I would like to request you to contribute highly analytical article focusing on the theme for publication in the Journal with a word limit between 3000 and 3500 or Book reviews on the above said themes. Please send your articles/book reviews to areej@iift.ac.in
Co Guest-Editors
Kevin Au (Area Editor of CCSM; STEP Asia Pacific), K. Ramachandran (STEP Asia Pacific member), Andrea Calabro (STEP EU member), Francisca Sinn Rocende (STEP Latin America member), and Matt Allen (STEP North America member)
Families and their ventures are the dominant form of business organization worldwide. Increasing amount of research has appeared in recent years to study them as they play a leading role in the social and economic wealth creation of communities and countries. To achieve continued growth and continuity, they must pass on the entrepreneurial mindsets and capabilities that enable them to create new streams of wealth across many generations—not just pass a business from one generation to the next. The Successful Transgenerational Entrepreneurial Practices Project (STEP) for Family Enterprising refers to this practice as transgenerational entrepreneurship. And the Project is the first global research study to focus on entrepreneurship in business families. Since 2005, the STEP Project has developed into a consortium with membership from over 40 schools spanning across four continents. It has hosted its first focused Research Conference in October, 2016. See below for several book publications by STEP.
Cross Cultural & Strategic Management (CCSM) is dedicated to providing a forum for the publication of high quality cross-cultural and strategic management research in the global context. Renamed and expanded from Cross Cultural Management journal after a new editorial team took over in 2015, CCSM is interdisciplinary in nature and welcomes submissions from scholars from international business, strategic management and other disciplines, such as anthropology, economics, political science, psychology and sociology. The goal of CCSM is to publish discerning, theoretically grounded, evidence-based and cutting edge research on issues relevant to all aspects of global management.
The editorial team welcomes the opportunity to work with STEP on a special issue devoted to advancing transgenerational entrepreneurship in the global context. The Special Issue seeks both theoretical and empirical papers on transgenerational entrepreneurship particularly, but not exclusively, using the STEP research framework and methodology. We do encourage authors from different schools and disciplines to collaborate, and to use either the 100+ in-depth case studies or the 700+ observations in the first STEP Global Family survey. Non-STEP members can partner with STEP members to obtain access rights to the special data sets. The co guest-editors and the STEP office will facilitate interested scholars to team up with STEP members (see http://www.babson.edu/Academics/centers/blank-center/global-research/step/Pages/home.aspx).
Transgenerational entrepreneurship may simply be defined as two or more generations of family members driving for new business activities, strategic renewal, and innovation (Habbershon, Nordqvist, & Zellweger, 2010; Habberson & Pistrui, 2002). In recent years, family businesses have garnered the attention of wide range of disciplines in a number of different outlets. In this special issue of CCSM, we encourage collaboration and seek papers in the broader context of transgenerational entrepreneurship and encourage scholars of different disciplines to submit a manuscript. On one hand, scholars can submit a paper as long as it is on transgenerational entrepreneurship with cross-cultural comparison or a global perspective in its discussion, for example, comparing succession practices across the US, Canada, and Hong Kong, and studying cultural uncertainty avoidance and family wealth management. On the other hand, scholars can submit a paper dealing with strategic issues related to transgenerational entrepreneurship, for instance, examining family control rights and innovation and studying family governance and competitive strategy, preferably with implications beyond a single country.
The following are examples of potential research questions that we are interested in, but this list is not exhaustive:
- What may be the relationship between successful succession and transgenerational entrepreneurship? How do entrepreneurial families and firms prepare for a successful transition?
- Preserving transgenerational wealth, which means a continuous stream of wealth that spans generations, is an important objective of business families. To what extent does transgenerational entrepreneurship contribute to this objective?
- Do good ownership structure and family governance encourage the incoming generations of a family to take risk, venture overseas, and spin off a company across international borders?
- Setting up a family council is regarded as a hallmark in family governance. Could the establishment of such family governance structure promote transgenerational entrepreneurship?
- Does the meaning of transgenerational entrepreneurship vary across different institutional environment? To what extent do different institutional environments influence how family businesses create new ventures or invest in them?
- Aside from quantitative studies, theory-based single or multiple cases across countries or within countries that raise new issues with international implications, yields new insights, and challenges existing ideas are also encouraged
- Methodological papers that test construct validity across cultures, multi-level interactions, or develop new constructs for transgenerational entrepreneurship are welcome.
- Deadline for submission to the Special Issue is May 31, 2017.
- The special issue editorial team will turn around the manuscripts quickly and send them to experts in the field to ensure good feedback on your submission.
Submission instructions
All manuscripts will undergo a double-blind review process. Submissions should be between 6,000-9,000 words, including references, figures and tables, and follow the manuscript requirement outlined on the journal’s website:
http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/author_guidelines.htm?id=ccm#10. The submission deadline is May 31, 2017. Please direct queries to: Professor Kevin Au, e-mail: kevinau@cuhk.edu.hk - See more at: http://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/products/journals/call_for_papers.htm?id=5630#sthash.TnwEXH1c.dpuf
References
Habbershon, T.G., M. Nordqvist, and T. Zellweger. 2010. Transgenerational entrepreneurship. In Transgenerational entrepreneurship: Exploring growth and performance in family firms across generations, ed. M. Nordqvist and T. Zellweger, 141–60. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
Habbershon, T.G., and J. Pistrui. 2002. Enterprising families domain: Family-influenced ownership groups in pursuit of transgenerational wealth. Family Business Review, 15(3): 223–37.
STEP Book Publications
Nordqvist and T. Zellweger (eds.) 2010. Transgenerational entrepreneurship: Exploring growth and performance in family firms across generations. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Mattias Nordqvist, Giuseppe Marzano, Esteban R. Brenes, Gonzalo Jiménez, Maria Fonseca-Paredes (eds.) 2011. Understanding entrepreneurial family business in uncertain environments: Opportunities and research in Latin America. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Au, K., Craig, J., & Ramachandran, K. (eds.) 2011. Family Enterprising in Asia: Exploring transgenerational entrepreneurship in family firms. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Sharma, P., Sieger, P, Nason, B., Gonzalez, A. C., Ramachandran, K. (eds.) 2014. Exploring transgenerational entrepreneurship: The role of resources and capabilities. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Sharma, P., Auletta, N., DeWitt, R.-L., Parada, M. J., & Yusof, M. (eds.) 2015. Developing next generation leaders for transgenerational entrepreneurial family enterprises. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Turning the Spotlight on Service Multinationals: New Theoretical Insights and Empirical Evidence One of the most noteworthy aspects of today’s international business (IB) landscape is the growing importance of service multinationals (SMNCs). As the services sector expands, the prominence of SMNCs in producing and delivering value-creating services across national borders continues to grow more than ever before. Data from UNCTAD show that between 1990-1992 and 2008-2010 global inward FDI flow in services grew almost 843% (from 95,772 to 903,256 million U.S dollars) compared to 570% in manufacturing (52,181 to 349,720 million U.S. dollars) during the same time-period. Success stories of SMNCs from different parts of the world, both developed and developing economies, have caught the attention of the IB community. Yet SMNC research has not kept pace with the unprecedented growth of services and SMNCs over the years. While Li and Guisinger (1992: 691) noted in 1992 that “results of our study suggest that service FDI can be explained by a rich variety of theories,” Capar and Kotabe (2003) lamented that “the service sector has been explored to a limited extent so far, although service firms have contributed to the majority of the job growth in the industrialized nations.” The state of SMNC research was summed up by Kundu and Merchant (2008), who observed that the “the challenge lies ahead in the development of theories of service multinational enterprise to explain the intricacies of service firms.” The aim of this special issue is to encourage research that develops new theory, provides robust empirical evidence, and promotes novel practitioner insights on SMNCs.
The importance and contribution of services and SMNCs in IB caught the attention of scholars almost a quarter of a century ago (Boddewyn et al., 1986, Dunning, 1989, Erramilli, 1990). Over time, researchers have attempted to draw on various theories, traditionally used for the manufacturing sector, to explain competitiveness and internationalization of SMNCs. But compared to studies in the manufacturing sector, empirical examination in the services sector has continued to remain grossly inadequate. We are yet to fully understand how SMNCs differ from their manufacturing counterparts, along crucial business dimensions such as birth, growth, evolution, performance and sustenance. The scholarly community has continued to remain divided on whether business theories that apply to manufacturing MNCs aptly suit the context of SMNCs. Meanwhile, the IB landscape has gradually changed and factors such as greater connectivity across nations, firms and individuals; global economic meltdown; increasing natural calamities, global terrorism and stakeholder power; increasing global participation of emerging markets, etc. have become powerful determinants of firm performance and competitive advantage. While paucity of research on SMNCs constrains valuable knowledge generation, it represents useful opportunity for IB scholars to develop new, insightful theories and empirical evidence.
Against this backdrop, this special issue solicits manuscripts that advance our understanding of SMNC dynamics in the context of today’s IB environment. The following is an illustrative list of research themes and questions that contributors might consider:
- How do SMNCs decide on location choice and handle the associated organizational and managerial issues (Kundu & Contractor, 1999)?
- How do SMNCs manage the antecedents, processes and outcomes of corporate diversification, internationalization and multi-nationality?
- Does distance (psychic, organizational, geographical, etc.) matter in the growth, internationalization, competitiveness and performance of SMNCs (Berry et al., 2010)?
- How do SMNCs organize and manage various resources and capabilities (Lahiri & Kedia, 2009) to efficiently formulate and implement localization, regional or global strategies?
- How do SMNCs’ growth, diversification and performance differ across industry domains within the services sector?
- How do SMNCs plan, execute and manage foreign market entry mode strategies?
- How do SMNCs organize and manage their human resources?
- How does organizational and strategic behavior of SMNCs differ across developed and emerging markets? (Aulakh, 2007).
Submission instructions
The deadline for manuscript submission is February 28, 2014. Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with Journal of International Management’s Style Guide for Authors: http://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-international-management/1075-4253/guide-for-authors. Intending contributors relatively new to JIM may find the work of Kothari and Lahiri (2012) useful.
Manuscripts should be electronically submitted to: http://ees.elsevier.com/intman. To ensure that all manuscripts are correctly identified for review in relation to the special issue it is important that authors select “Service Multinationals” when they reach the “Article Type” step in the submission process. All submissions will be subject to the regular double-blind peer review process at JIM. Manuscripts may be conceptual or empirical (quantitative or qualitative). Preference will be given to manuscripts that compare and contrast SMNCs with manufacturing MNCs. This special issue is expected to be published in the latter half of 2015.
Please direct any questions regarding the Special Issue to Sumit K. Kundu (kundus@fiu.edu) and Somnath Lahiri (slahiri@ilstu.edu).
References
Aulakh, P.S. 2007. Emerging multinationals from developing economies: Motivations, paths and performance. Journal of International Management, 13(3): 235-240.
Berry, H., Guillén, M.F., & Zhou, N. 2010. An institutional approach to cross-national distance. Journal of International Business Studies, 41: 1460-1480.
Boddewyn, J J., Halbrich, M.B., & Perry, A C. 1986. Service multinationals: Conceptualization, measurement and theory. Journal of International Business Studies, 17 (3): 41-57.
Capar, N., & Kotabe, M. 2003. The relationship between international diversification and performance in service firms. Journal of International Business Studies, 34: 345-355.
Dunning, J.H. 1989. Multinational enterprises and the growth of services: Some conceptual and theoretical issues. Service Industries Journal, 9(1): 5-39.
Erramilli, M.K. 1990. Entry mode choice in service industries. International Marketing Review, 7(5): 50-62.
Kothari, T., & Lahiri, S. 2012.Yesterday, today and tomorrow: An overview of research publications in the Journal of International Management. Journal of International Management, 18(1): 102-110.
Kundu, S.K., & Contractor, F.J. 1999. Country location choices of service multinationals: An empirical study of the international hotel sector. Journal of International Management, 5(4): 299-317.
Kundu, S.K., & Merchant, H. 2008. Service multinationals: Their past, present, and future. Management International Review, 48 (4): 371-377.
Li, J., & Guisinger, S. 1992. The globalization of service multinationals in the" triad" regions: Japan, Western Europe and North America. Journal of International Business Studies, 23(4): 675-696.
Lahiri, S., & Kedia, B.L. 2009. The effects of internal resources and partnership quality on firm performance: An Examination of Indian BPO providers. Journal of International Management, 15(2): 209-224.
Guest Editors
Mo Yamin, Alliance Manchester Business School, The University of Manchester, UK
Byung Il Park, College of Business, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea
Yong Kyu Lew, College of Business, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, South Korea
Purpose and Research Questions
In the dominant international business (IB) narrative on corruption, the tacit and rarely challenged assumption is that governments, particularly those in developing countries and emerging economies, are the instigators of corruption to which multinational corporations (MNCs) may have to respond (Habib and Zurawicki, 2002; Rodriguez, Uhlenbruck and Eden, 2005; Uhlenbruck, Rodriguez, Doh and Eden, 2006; Brouthers, Yan and McNicol, 2008; Cuervo-Cazurra, 2006; 2008; Petrou and Thanos, 2014). Thus, corruption is treated as exogenous to the MNC and as a feature of the host country environment, confronting the MNC’s decision makers with a mixture of risks and/or opportunities. The focus is wholly on the impact of host country corruption on the MNC (e.g., whether it reduces overall foreign direct investment (FDI) commitments in the corrupt countries and how it may affect the modalities of operations). The only dimension of corruption examined is almost invariably bribes or kickbacks demanded by of public officials and bureaucrats, who may provide ‘greasing’ services smoothing the path of market entry.
The orthodox treatment of corruption in the IB literature has in recent years been subject to extensive critical scrutiny by contributions to critical perspectives on international business, Critical Perspectives on Accounting, Review of International Political Economy and other outlets. Not surprisingly, a key aspect of critical contributions has questioned the total neglect in the orthodox approach of the ‘supply side’ of bribery and corruption. While it is axiomatic that, as it were, ‘it takes two to tango’, orthodox treatments exclusively focus on the demand side – the bribe taker – and simply ignore the supply side residing in large corporations and multinationals as instigators, facilitators and beneficiaries of often large scale corruption (Murphy, 2011; Otusanya, 2011; Sikka and Willmott, 2010; 2013; Sikka and Lehman, 2015).
Other critical contributions of a similar vein have focused more directly on the role of tax havens, offshore jurisdictions and ‘special purpose entities’ (OECD, 2001; UNCTAD, 2015; 2016) in channeling vast amounts of ‘illicit’ financial outflows from less developed and emerging economies (Kar and Spanjers, 2015). Murphy (2017, 169) has argued that tax havens provide the ‘opportunity for corrupt funds to remain forever hidden’ while Christensen (2011, 178) has noted the use of tax havens for making illicit political donations, embezzlement, fraud, and payment of bribes adding that ‘it has become increasingly apparent that tax havens provide a supply side stimulus that encourages and enables grand scale corruption’.
The above observations suggest that corruption is not merely occasional ‘grease’ but may have become a well-funded ‘routine’ in IB dealings of MNCs. They also indicate that recipients/beneficiaries are powerful, well connected elites (Rocha, Brown and Cloke, 2011). Large scale bribes can hardly be (wholly) cash based and in any case need ‘skilful’ accounting services (Neu, Everett, Rahaman and Martinez, 2013) and often the secrecy and opacity that offshore finance provides. This suggestion gains credence by a number of case studies showing the use of shell companies and corrupt accounting practices (Neu et al., 2013; Sikka and Lehman, 2015) and by numerous press reports on corruption cases invariably indicating the deployment of a complex web of financial transactions (e.g., Global Witness, 2016a; 2016b). Furthermore, presumably, the bribe receiving elites in less developed and emerging economies prefer (or even demand) that bribes are delivered in ways that can be accessible in ‘desirable’ locations enabling e.g., the purchase of luxury residences in European and other advanced country cities (Sherman, 2017) and easier access to specialist banking facilities serving global wealthy elites (Beaverstock, Hall and Wainwright, 2013).
By contrast, bribes to lowly and often poorly-paid local officials who may be in positions able to obstruct foreign market entry (e.g., by delaying administrative permits) can presumably be cash payments which are likely to be locally spent without needing to be routed via tax havens and offshore jurisdictions. Thus, arguably, the notion of bribery as ‘grease payments’ does not capture the changing nature of much corruption in terms of its scale and increasing dependence on ‘advanced’ financial services nor, importantly, bribes as a component of illicit outflows from less developed and emerging economies and hence the differential economic impact on host countries of the different categories of bribe recipients (low- middle level officials versus powerful elites) in less developed and emerging economies (Chang, 2007, 164).
Against the above background, this special issue seeks conceptual/theoretical and empirical contributions that enhance our understanding of bribery and corruption in the contemporary context whereby globalization and financialization have together significantly transformed the structure and strategy of MNCs (Yamin and Ghauri, 2010; Morgan, 2014; Coe, Lai and Wojick, 2014). While corrupt money has always sought sanctuaries (such as numbered Swiss banking accounts), an urgent issue for critical IB is exploring further how the ascendency of finance in the governance of the MNC may have enhanced corruption ‘tolerance’ amongst top decision makers in MNCs and the global value chain that they effectively control. Arguably, an important element of the ‘ownership advantage’ of MNCs may now stem from innovative effort in perfecting MNCs’ financial architecture in which the tax havens, offshore jurisdictions and Global Cities are critical nodes (Coe et al., 2014) and function as mechanisms for hiding capital. Some progress in this direction has already occurred, notably via the concept of the global wealth chains (Seabrooke and Wigan, 2014; Sherman, 2017) but there is scope for further work.
A related issue is the disconnect between the literature on MNC corruption and that on corporate social responsibility (CSR). An influential narrative on CSR acknowledges that with globalization the negative consequences of businesses have intensified and bemoans the regulatory ‘vacuum’ with respect to corruption along with other societal and environmental ills (Scherer and Palazzo, 2008). As Christensen (2011, 192) has noted, however, the use of tax havens ‘has scarcely registered on the CSR debate’. A promising perspective is one that sees CSR as a context within which there is (political) contestation between different legitimacy claims (Levy, 2008; Levy and Kaplan, 2008). In the present context, the emergence of non-governmental organizations (NGOs) with a mission of exposing and combating financial corruption, such as the Tax Justice Network, Global Wittiness and Global Financial Integrity, is a positive development both in terms of their own investigative efforts and also as partners for academic research collaboration on corruption.
In these regards, this special issue seeks both theoretical and empirical papers (both qualitative and case study based and quantitative studies) that may address, but are not limited to, the following issues:
- Exploring the link between MNC financialization and corruption in developed and less developed country contexts.
- Investigating the link between tax evasion and CSR and irresponsibility with respect to MNC engendered corrupt practices.
- Studying the differential drivers and impacts of ‘stay at home’ corruption and capital flight corruption.
- Exploring the link between MNC corruption and illicit outflows from less developed countries.
- Examining the link between the MNC’s secrecy infra-structure and large scale bribery in particular industry/sectors and/or countries.
- Investigating the effectiveness of NGO’s exposure of MNC corruption on the latter’s corruption behavior.
- Examining the drivers of ‘corruption tolerance’ – indicated by MNC top managers’ willingness to pursues corrupt practices despite the anticipation of exposure and consequent penalties.
- Studying the link between corruption propensity and the home country institutions (varieties of capitalism and MNC corruption propensities).
Submission Process and Deadlines
Submission Instructions
The deadline for submissions is 31st December, 2017. For more information on critical perspectives on international business, including style guidelines, please visit the journal’s website at: http://www.emeraldinsight.com/loi/cpoib.
All submissions will be subject to the regular blind peer review process of critical perspectives on international business. Guest editors are seeking reviewers for this issue - please contact the guest editors to either volunteer or nominate a reviewer.
References
Beaverstock, J. V., Hall, S. and Wainwright, T. (2013), “Servicing the super-rich: New financial elites and the rise of the private wealth management retail ecology”, Regional Studies, Vol. 47 No. 6, pp. 834-849.
Brouthers, L. E., Yan, G. and McNicol J. P. (2008), “Corruption and market attractiveness influences on different types of FDI”, Strategic Management Journal, Vol. 29 No. 6, pp. 673-680.
Chang, H.-J. (2007), The bad Samaritans: The guilty secrets of rich nations and the threat to global prosperity, RH Business Books, London.
Christensen, J. (2011), “The looting continues: Tax havens and corruption”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 7 No. 2, pp. 177-196.
Coe, N., Lai, K. and Wojick, D. (2014), “Integrating finance into global production networks”, Regional Studies. Vol. 48 No. 5, pp. 761-777.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2006), “Who cares about corruption?”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 37 No.6, pp. 807-822.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2008), “The effectiveness of laws against bribery abroad”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 39 No. 4, pp. 634-651.
Global Witness. (2016a), London’s Alternative Investment Market shown up by Liberian government bribery indictments, Available at: https://www.globalwitness.org/en/pressreleases/londons-alternative-investment-market-shown-liberian-government-bribery-indictments/ [accessed on 18 April 2017].
Global Witness. (2016b), Bribery arrest over multi-billion dollar mining rights and the UK's tax
havens, Available at: https://www.globalwitness.org/en/blog/bribery-arrest-over-multi-billion dollar-mining-rights-and-uks-tax-havens/ [accessed on 19 April 2017].
Habib, M. and Zurawicki, L. (2002), “Corruption and foreign direct investment”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 33 No. 2, pp. 291-293.
Kar, D. and Spanjers, J. (2015), Illicit financial flows from developing countries:2004-2013, Global Financial Integrity, Available at: http://www.gfintegrity.org/report/illicit-financial-flows-fromdeveloping-countries-2004-2013/. [accessed on 18 April, 2017].
Levy, D. (2008), “Political contestation in global production networks”, Academy of Management Review, Vol. 33 No. 4, pp. 943-963.
Levy D. and Kaplan, R. (2008), “Corporate social responsibility and theories of global governance: Strategic contestation in globl issue arena”, in Crane A., Matten, D., McWilliams, A., Moon, J. and Siegel, D. S. (eds.) The oxford handbook on corporate social responsibility, Oxford University Press, Oxford, pp. 432-451.
Morgan, G. (2014), “Financialization and the multinational corporation”, Transfer, Vol. 20, No 2, pp. 183–197.
Murphy, J. (2011), “Capitalism and transparency”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 7 No. 2, pp. 125-141.
Murphy, R. (2017), Dirty secrets: How tax havens destroy the economy, Verso, London.
Neu, D., Everett, J., Rahaman, A. and Martinez, D. (2013), “Accounting and networks of corruption”, Accounting Organization and Society, Vol. 38 No. 6, pp. 505-524.
OECD. (2001), Behind the corporate veil: Using corporate entities for illicit purposes, OECD, Paris.
Otusanya, O. (2011), “The role of multinational companies in tax evasion and tax avoidance: The case of Nigeria”, critical perspectives on accounting, Vol. 22, pp. 316-332.
Petrou, A. P. and Thanos, I. C. (2014), “The “grabbing hand” or the “helping hand” view of corruption: Evidence from bank foreign market entries”, Journal of World Business, Vol. 49 No. 3, pp. 444-454.
Rocha, J. L., Brown, E. and Cloke, J. (2011), “Of legitimate and illegitimate corruption: Bankruptcies in Nicaragua”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 7 No. 2, pp. 159-176.
Rodriguez, P., Uhlenbruck, K. and Eden, L. (2005), “Government corruption and the entry strategies of multinationals”, Academy of Management Review, Vol. 30 No. 2, pp. 383-396.
Scherer, A. and Palazzo, G. (2008), “Globalization and corporate social responsibility”, in Crane, A., Matten, D., McWilliams, A., Moon, J. and Siegel, D. S. (eds.) The oxford handbook on corporate social responsibility, Oxford University Press, Oxford, pp. 413-431.
Seabrook, L. and Wigan, D. (2014), “Global wealth chains in the international political economy”, Review of International Political Economy, Vol. 21 No. 1, pp. 257-263.
Sherman, J. (2017), “Illicit global wealth chains after the financial crisis: micro-states and an unusual suspect”, Review of International Political Economy, Vol. 24 No. 1, pp. 30-55.
Sikka, P. and Willmott, H. (2010), “The dark side of transfer pricing – its role in tax avoidance and wealth retentiveness”, critical perspectives on accounting, Vol. 21, pp. 342-356.
Sikka, P. and Willmott, H. (2013), “The tax avoidance industry: Accounting firms on the make”, critical perspectives on international business, Vol. 9 No. 4, pp. 415-443.
Sikka, P. and Lehman, G. (2015), “The supply-side of corruption and limits to preventing corruption within government procurement and constructing ethical subjects”, critical perspectives on accounting, Vol. 28, pp. 62-70.
Uhlenbruck, K., Rodriguez, P., Doh, J. and Eden, L. (2006), “The impact of corruption on entry strategy: Evidence from telecommunication projects in emerging economies”, Organization Science, Vol. 17 No. 3, pp. 402-414.
UNCTAD. (2015), World investment report: Reforming international investment governance, United Nations, Geneva.
UNCTAD. (2016), World investment report: Investor nationality-Policy Challengers, United Nations, Geneva.
Yamin, M. and Ghauri, P. (2010), “A critical assessment of the business network perspective on HQ control in multinational companies”, in Andersson, U. and Holm, U. (eds.) Managing the contemporary multinational corporation, Edward Elgar, Cheltenham, pp. 125-137.
Mo Yamin is a Professor of International Business at the Alliance Manchester Business School, the University of Manchester, UK. He received his PhD in Economics from the University of Manchester. His research focus is on multinational enterprises. His contributions include: a reassessment of Hymer’s influence on multinational enterprise theory; subsidiary knowledge creation and transfer in multinationals; reliance on online media in their internationalization process; and the impact of R&D cooperation strategies by foreign subsidiaries multinationals on economic development. His research has been published in journals including Journal of International Business Studies, International Business Review, Journal of World Business, Long Range Planning, Management International Review, and Asian Business & Management, among others. He has recently handled special issues on the topic of ‘rising powers’ for critical perspectives on international business and International Business Review.
Byung Il Park is currently a Professor in International Business at the College of Business, Hankuk University of Foreign Studies in South Korea. His research currently focuses on MNC strategy, and corporate social responsibility of MNCs and MNC corruptions. He has published in such journals as the Journal of World Business, Management International Review, International Business Review, Journal of International Management, International Marketing Review, Corporate Governance: an International Review and Asia Pacific Journal of Management. In addition, he is Editor-in-Chief of ‘International Journal of Multinational Corporation Strategy’ and has also handled special issues for International Marketing Review, Thunderbird International Business Review, Multinational Business Review, Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, and European Journal of International Management.
Yong Kyu Lew is an Associate Professor of International Business at Hankuk University of Foreign Studies, Seoul, South Korea. He completed his PhD at Manchester Business School of the University of Manchester, UK. Previously he held faculty positions at the University of Hull and the University of Manchester in the UK. His research interests include alliances, institutions and innovations, and economic and social consequences of FDI. His recent work has appeared in Journal of International Business Studies, Long Range Planning, Global Strategy Journal, International Business Review, critical perspectives on international business, International Marketing Review, R&D Management, and Industry and Innovation, among others. He sits on the editorial boards of Multinational Business Review and International Journal of Multinational Corporation Strategy. He is handling a special issue for International Studies of Management & Organization.
What is the special issue about?
This Special Issue focuses on the key characteristics and values of knowledge intensive institutions, how public affairs can contribute to their impact, and how governance and ethical behaviour can increase their value by supporting creativity, entrepreneurship and innovation.
Knowledge intensive services (KIS), knowledge organisation (KIOs), knowledge transfer industries and the nexus in which they interact are increasingly important and regularly referred to by politicians as a key facilitator of prosperity and growth. This is accompanied by the realisation that people’s knowledge, experience and creativity form the backbone of many organisations’ success; optimising the use of their knowledge to achieve the organisation’s aims and objectives is of key importance, as is the retention of skilled practitioners’ knowledge over time.
Knowledge intensive services (KIS) are defined as services where ‘knowledge is the main production factor and the good they offer’ (European Commission, 2012). These include not only professional knowledge-intensive business services (KIBS) such as IT services, financial services, medical services, legal services, management consultancies (Anand et al. 2007) and creative businesses but also non-business organisations such as educational services, universities, cultural organisations and public service organisations (in total ‘KIOs’).
The importance of such activities has been increasing in many economies worldwide, particularly in developed economies. It is estimated that in the UK, Finland and Sweden, KIOs account for more than 39% of employment (European Commission, 2012). In delineating the scope of the wider category of knowledge intensive environments, we look to definitions such as the activities of “organisations / firms whose primary value-added activities consist of the accumulation, creation, or dissemination of knowledge for the purpose of developing a customised service” (Bettencourt et al. 2002), also Caniëls & Romijn (2005), Simmie and Strambach (2006), Strambach (2008), as “Companies / organisations which rely heavily on professional knowledge, i.e. knowledge or expertise related to a specific (technical) discipline or functional domain, to supply products and services that are knowledge based” (Den Hartog 2000) as well as public administration / the Civil Service.
While the importance of KIOs is increasingly recognised, the KIOs in turn are realising the need for their value creation to be visible and understood not only among customers but also in the wider environment of politics and public opinion.
Public affairs is of importance to KIOs as they face a number of new developments in their competitive environment including a global shortage of talent (Schuler et al, 2011), information technologies that are reshaping the competitive landscape in KIOs (Federoff, 2012), the development of new business models such as offshoring of knowledge-intensive services (Lewin et al, 2009) and global open innovation models (Chesbrough, 2010), all affecting opportunities and barriers to entrepreneurship and value creation. At the same time the transformative capacity of knowledge throws up ethical and governance challenges about how those with the knowledge behave in husbanding, commercialising and benefitting from it - especially when information asymmetry means it is they who are the best able to assess its value.
The diversity of organisational forms among KIOs may reflect the different leadership and management approaches and the cultures that grow up in them. One form is the long-established organisations that base professional services on their knowledge assets (e.g. law, accountancy, consultancy). Often these are characterised by partnerships without external ownership, informal management, up-or-out promotion, and an emphasis on professionalization, which tends to manage quality by the use of control mechanisms not necessarily suitable to the demands of the contemporary knowledge intensive operating environment. As professions, many also thrive on a monopoly on the use of the knowledge for their profession, autonomous (self-) regulation, rules and practices that exclude non-professionals and mitigate competition amongst professionals; this can lead to a club-like environment with distinctive behaviour and even its own code of ethics. Attempts to apply skills from elsewhere to such an environment regularly end in failure (see also Von Nordenflycht, 2010) suggesting that standardised approaches to KIOs in general may not be effective.
The academic world has its own particular styles of management and interaction which have evolved alongside a more open approach to dissemination of knowledge; of late however there has been an increasing emphasis on ‘valorisation’ and commercialisation of knowledge, raising the question of whether traditional approaches to people, process and governance remain the most appropriate.
The changing environment for KIOs is further evidenced by a more recent wave of commercially-oriented institutions, characterised by emphasis on the search for innovative and self-starting individuals, giving them freedom to deploy their talents creatively, and basing revenue generation and growth on the value of the input given to clients together with the star quality of staff or teams. In such organisations employee bargaining power and preference for autonomy make authority problematic (Anand et al., 2007) and lead to organisational responses in the form of alternative compensation mechanisms and autonomy and informality in organisational structure. While behaviour, leadership and management in such organisations may often be “light touch” at the same time it needs to pay particular and constant attention to inspiring, developing and retaining staff and at the same time presenting a face to the outside world that is understandable and compliant with standards of governance and accountability.
The rising importance of intangibles in economies worldwide further highlights the crucial role of knowledge intensive and creative communication industries in current and future wealth generation. The recognition of this trend has led to intense competition in these industries (Mudambi, 2008).
In an environment where various knowledge intensive organisations are struggling to find the optimum management approach and develop robust and responsive cultures, issues of ethics and effectiveness are important both for those in the organisations and for society as whole (as in the case of the culture developed in banks).
While the creation of a ‘healthy’ infrastructure of effective KIOs is a priority, the plethora of publications on “knowledge management” contains little that addresses the leadership, strategy and governance, ethics and values challenges peculiar to organisations whose fortunes revolve around knowledge activities. To date research on value creation (Løwendahl, 2001) in KIOs has not kept pace with research in manufacturing organisations. Other research in this area has not progressed strongly and major gaps are observable, even in the Public Affairs domain despite the importance many governments ascribe to supporting such sectors of the economy.
The topic of this Special Issue combines attention to the values of KIOs with attention to the value they create, and seeks contributions that address the ethics and governance underpinning these. The Special Issue is open both to papers covering value creation in knowledge intensive services and institutions, such as educational institutions in general, and those covering aspects of values, ethics and public affairs. A variety of routes seems open to research Public Affairs’ role in creating or supporting value creation. Fleisher and Nickel (1995) highlighted process innovations in PA like TQM, whereas Googins & Rochlin (2002) and Humphreys & Grayson (2008) examined public affairs’ partnership route to create value. Next to Grönroos’ (2004) arguments that relationship overarches the value creation of marcom and public affairs, Surie & Ashley (2008) posit that sustaining entrepreneurial leadership for value creation necessitates ethical action to build legitimacy, and various authors link public affairs and value creation to CSR (Husted & Allen, 2009).
Our ambition for this Special Issue is that it will further insights into values, processes, functions and governance in KIOs such as universities, other centres of research and knowledge intensive institutions, as well as drawing implications from research in knowledge intensive institutions, for the development and management of sound, ethical and effective knowledge activities in general.
We are seeking both conceptual and empirical papers offering new insights into topics such as those below; all should be focused on creativity, entrepreneurship and value creation within and by knowledge intensive / professional services as defined above; in view of the limited research in the field, explicit coverage of/application to the professional conduct of Public Affairs is not required but would be appreciated.
Possible topics:
- New applications of theories of both value creation and innovation as they apply to knowledge-intensive organisational environments in general and PA in particular.
- Stimulation of and leadership for widespread innovation, Knowledge Cities, “silicon” hubs, clusters, critical mass.
- How knowledge intensive and innovative organisations provide ‘balance’ in economies and underpin desirable values in society.
- How to challenge and facilitate creative potential in knowledge intensive organisations and services.
- Fostering entrepreneurship and innovation management in strategically important KIOs.
- Creative use of talent, and tacit knowledge as sources of strength and competitive advantage for the knowledge intensive sector.
- KIO responses to social imperatives such as diversity, social inclusion, promotion of science & technology.
- Organisational and institutional responses to knowledge gaps and national research agendas – in the larger environment and internally.
- Conditions for success of state and private aid and preferment regimes addressed to the activities of KIOs.
- Strategies for being (national) champion and leading in value creation in knowledge intensive sectors.
- Information asymmetry as an opportunity and an (ethical) challenge for KIOs.
- Knowledge hoarding, patent trolling and open research.
- Identifying and combatting knowledge corruption within KI organisations and in knowledge intensive sectors
- Effectiveness and systemic impact of KIO recruitment and retention strategies for key knowledge workers.
- Impact of KIOs on migration, brain drain and cultural globalisation.
- Public Affairs as a knowledge intensive industry
- Integrity in KIOs and in Public Affairs in particular
Deadlines and review process
We welcome the submission of original full papers and policy papers, case studies and experience pieces to include contributions based on robust empirical investigation(s), with solid theoretical underpinnings, building on a comprehensive body of literature, setting the agenda for future research. All proposals will be reviewed by members of the editorial board and judged according to rigour and relevance as well as their ability to enhance JPAs reputation.
Deadline for the submission of full papers 1st October 2016
Submission
· All manuscripts will be double-blind reviewed.
· Papers are submitted with the understanding
o that they are original, unpublished works
o that they are not being submitted elsewhere
· For submission details please see JPA’s Guidelines for authors: http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/10.1002/(ISSN)1479-1854/homepage/ForAuthors.html
· However, for this Special Issue do not upload to Manuscript Central
· Please submit to aircsi@ashridge.org.uk with ‘JPA2’ in the email heading.
References
· Anand, N, H.K.Gardner, T.Morris (2007), Knowledge based innovation: emergence and embedding of new practice areas in management consulting firms. Academy of Management Journal 50(2): 406-428.
· Bettencourt, L. A., Ostrom, A. L., Brown, S. W., & Roundtree, R. I. (2002). Client Co-Production in Knowledge-Intensive Business Services. California Management Review, 44(4), 100-128.
· Caniëls, M.C.J. & Romijn, H.A. (2005). What works, and why, in business services provision for SME? : insights from evolutionary theory. Managing Service Quality, 15(6), 591-608.
· Chesbrough, Henry (2010). Open services innovation: rethinking your business to grow and compete in a new era. John Wiley & Sons.
· European Commission (2012). Knowledge-intensive (business) services in Europe. Available at http://ec.europa.eu/research/innovation-union/pdf/knowledge_intensive_business_services_in_europe_2011.pdf
· Fedoroff, Nina V (2012). "The global knowledge society." Science 335.6068: 503-503.
· Fleisher, Craig S. & Joanne R. Nickel (1995) Attempting TQM in organizational staff areas: TQM as managerial innovation in corporate public affairs. Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences / Revue Canadienne des Sciences de l'Administration. 12 (2): 116-127
· Googins, Bradley K & Steven A Rochlin (2002) Creating the Partnership Society: Understanding the Rhetoric and Reality of Cross-Sectoral Partnerships. Business and Society Review 105 (1): 127-144
· Grönroos, Christian (2004) "The relationship marketing process: communication, interaction, dialogue, value", Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, 19 (2): 99 - 113
· den Hartog, P. (2000): Knowledge-Intensive Business Services as Co-Producers of In-novation. International Journal of Innovation Management, 4, 491-528.
· Humphreys, Ashlee & Kent Grayson (2008) The Intersecting Roles of Consumer and Producer: A Critical Perspective on Co-production, Co-creation and Prosumption, Sociology Compass 2 (3): 963-980
- Husted, Bryan W & David B. Allen (2009) Strategic Corporate Social Responsibility and Value Creation. Management International Review 49 (6): 781-799
· Lewin, Arie, Silvia Massini, and Carine Peeters (2009). "Why are companies offshoring innovation?: The emerging global race for talent." Journal of International Business Studies 40.6: 901-925.
· Løwendahl, Bente R., Øivind Revang, and Siw M. Fosstenløkken. (2001) "Knowledge and value creation in professional service firms: A framework for analysis." Human Relations 54(7): 911-931.
· Schuler, Randall S., Susan E. Jackson, and Ibraiz Tarique (2011). "Global talent management and global talent challenges: Strategic opportunities for IHRM." Journal of World Business 46.4: 506-516.
· Simmie, J., & Strambach, S. (2006). The Contribution of KIBS to Innovation in Cities: An Evolutionary and Institutional Perspective. Journal Of Knowledge Management, 10(5), 26-40
· Strambach, S. (2008). Knowledge-Intensive Business Services (KIBS) as drivers of multilevel knowledge dynamics. International Journal Of Services Technology & Management, 10, 152-174
· Surie, Gita & Allen Ashley (2008) Integrating Pragmatism and Ethics in Entrepreneurial Leadership for Sustainable Value Creation. Journal of Business Ethics (2008) 81:235–246
· Von Nordenflycht, Andrew. "What is a professional service firm? Toward a theory and taxonomy of knowledge-intensive firms." Academy of Management Review 35.1 (2010): 155-174.
Extended abstract submission deadline: 31 July 2020
Paper submission deadline: 31 January 2021
Guest Editors:
Stefano Elia, Politecnico di Milano, Italy. Email: stefano.elia@polimi.it
Surender Munjal, University of Leeds, United Kingdom. Email: S.Munjal@lubs.leeds.ac.uk
Peter J. Buckley, University of Leeds, United Kingdom. Email: P.J.Buckley@lubs.leeds.ac.uk
Tamer Cavusgil, Georgia State University, USA, Email: stcavusgil@gsu.edu
Background and Rationale for the Special Issue
Over the last two decades emerging market multinationals (EMNEs) have been persistently internationalizing by undertaking foreign direct investment (FDI) in developing and advanced markets. Their FDI often involves acquisition of major industry players in host markets. The phenomenon of EMNE internationalization has stimulated a lively debate among international business scholars. The main points of this debate concern EMNEs catching up and competing with global peers (Awate et al., 2012, Contractor, 2013, Munjal et al. 2019), the asset augmentation strategies adopted for rapid internationalization (e.g. Luo and Tung, 2007; Madhok and Keyhani, 2012; Özcan et al, 2018, Ramamurti and Singh, 2009; Rabbiosi, Elia and Bertoni, 2012), the validity of internalization theory (e.g. Buckley et al. 2007; Hennart, 2012) and the relevance of ownership advantages (e.g., Hashai and Buckley, 2014; Contractor, 2013; Mathews, 2006; Narula, 2012), the role of the home country and institutional context (e.g. Buckley et al., 2012; Cavusgil and Buckley, 2016, Cavusgil et al., 2018; Corredoira and McDermott, 2014; De Beule, Elia and Piscitello 2014; Han et a;., 2018), the impact on the host country (e.g. Buckley, Elia and Kafouros, 2014; He and Zhang, 2018), and the characteristics of innovation in and from emerging economies (e.g. Govindarajan and Ramamurti, 2011; Mudambi, 2008; Fu, Pietrobelli, and Soete, 2011).
After two decades, this debate continues. The evolution of emerging economies drastically changes the rationale underlying the most recent acquisitions undertaken by EMNEs. The patterns of internationalization of emerging and advanced economy firms seem to be converging (Wang and Li-Ying, 2014). In emerging economies, a set of modern high-tech and knowledge-intensive sectors - highly capital-intensive and skill-dependent - have grown in parallel with sectors that traditionally rely on labor-intensive activities and natural resources, and the next wave of investments from emerging markets, in particular from China and India, is expected in these industries (Narula, 2015). These macroeconomic changes are the result of the strategies of firms. As EMNEs become more experienced, their modus operandi does not greatly differ from those of advanced MNEs (Cuervo-Cazurra, 2012). They increasingly rely on cross-border acquisitions to augment their technological, innovation, and managerial capabilities (Meyer, 2015; Buckley et al. 2016). Moreover, in recent years, EMNEs have increasingly been able to rely on more advanced assets as a result of the co-evolution of their ownership advantage and home-country national innovation systems, and their asset-seeking strategies are now supported by (rather than being a compensation for) the assets available in their home economies (Elia and Santangelo, 2017). The development of a knowledge and institutional infrastructure in emerging markets has fostered country-specific advantage and, as a result, has augmented domestic firms' ownership advantage (Laursen & Santangelo, 2017) allowing these countries to participate more fully in the global division of labor of knowledge production.
In addition, the increasing exploitation of new digital technologies opens further opportunities - but also challenges - for EMNEs. Indeed, on the one hand, the access to digital technologies (e.g. E-commerce, 3D printing, Internet of things, Big Data, Additive manufacturing, Smart Supply chains, Robotics) enable EMNEs to increase both their productivity in manufacturing activities and their effectiveness in accessing new markets, making them more competitive in the global arena. On the other hand, multinational companies from advanced economies can not only benefit from the same advantages, but also can exploit new technologies to reduce production costs (Strange & Zucchella, 2017), enabling them to challenge EMNEs on their own ground, given that EMNEs have largely developed their competitive advantage using the lower production costs offered by their home countries.
These developments seem to suggest that, while inquiries into EMNEs must continue, there is a need for an agenda-setting effort to identify trends and topics that deserve further scholarly attention. In particular, we suggest the need to explore an overarching research question, i.e. "What is still 'emerging' about EMNEs?" This special issue aims to extend the research agenda on EMNE internationalization. We propose some specific key questions to stimulate research on critical, yet unexplored issues related to EMNEs.
- Ownership advantage: What types of ownership advantages are leveraged by EMNEs for their internationalization in the contemporary environment? Are they different from those of the early waves of internationalization? Are they still different from those possessed by MNEs from advanced economies? Are traditional ownership advantages still relevant for the internationalization of EMNEs?
- Host countries: What type of host country and entry mode choice do EMNEs prefer today? Do EMNEs still prefer more risky host locations? How does the host country context (in terms of institutions, policies, industrial setting, culture, national innovation systems) play a role in attracting a new wave of investments from EMNEs? Why are EMNEs investing in other emerging markets?
- Home countries: How does the home country context (in terms of market, consumers, institutions, policies, industrial development, national innovation system etc.) of EMNEs evolve? Does the home country support internationalization of its EMNEs in a different way from the past? What industries will future EMNEs come from? What are the new geographies (e.g. Africa) from whence EMNEs are emerging?
- Distance: Do EMNEs still face large institutional distances in investing abroad? If so, does the direction of institutional difference matter? (from emerging to advanced economies rather than vice-versa). Do EMNEs still face a strong liability of emergingness and outsidership? What is the contribution of the diaspora from the emerging source country to reducing (or augmenting) cultural and institutional distances?
- Governance: Do EMNEs (and in particular Chinese and Indian companies) still utilize different management practices than advanced MNEs (e.g., as regards the transparency, the use of tax havens, capital flight)? Do State-Owned Enterprises, Business Groups and Sovereign Wealth Funds display different strategic behaviors from traditional MNEs? How can we disentangle the heterogeneity within each of these groups?
- Performance of the acquired firms: What is the impact on the medium and long-run financial and innovation performance of firms acquired by EMNEs? Have they expanded their sales or increased their internationalization (especially towards the EMNEs' home countries)? Are they gaining or losing employees?
- Performance of the EMNEs: What is the impact of EMNEs' portfolio of investments on their financial and innovation performance? Are they performing worse or better than MNEs from advanced economies? Did they manage to catch-up in terms of technology and productivity? Is the effect of cultural and institutional diversity on performance similar to their early investments?
- Knowledge and capabilities: How does internationalization contribute to enhancing the knowledge and capabilities of EMNEs? Have EMNEs been able to climb the value chain? If yes, what type of path and trajectories are they following? Are EMNEs still using a knowledge-utilization (i.e. more imitation-oriented) approach or are they increasingly adopting a knowledge-creation (i.e. more innovation-oriented) strategy? Are EMNEs capable of integrating and orchestrating knowledge and resources stemming from their portfolio of investments?
- Digital technologies: What are the challenges and the opportunities offered by digital technologies to EMNEs? Are they different with respect to those faced by traditional MNEs from advanced economies? Will digital technologies change the internationalization patterns and strategies of EMNEs? Will they help EMNEs to accelerate and catch-up with traditional MNEs, thus making the former less and less "emerging"? Will the "fourth industrial revolution" benefit mainly the advanced MNEs, e.g. in terms of lower production costs, thus weakening some of EMNEs' traditional competitive advantages?
- How will EMNEs deal with the forthcoming uncertainty and turbulent environment arising from the Worldwide Pandemic and from other recent phenomena like Brexit, the rise of Nationalisms and Populisms, the Trade war between USA and China and the effects of the Climate Change? Will EMNEs gain or lose competitiveness and market shares? Will advanced MNEs reshore some activities to decrease uncertainty, thus turning global into regional value chains and downsizing the role of EMNEs? How will EMNEs adapt and change their internationalization strategies to cope with these contingencies?
These research questions do not intend to be exhaustive. Rather they lay the foundations for fertilizing the international business and management literature by initiating thought-provoking research. To achieve this goal, the special issue aims at attracting contributions from a variety of disciplines such as international business and management, corporate governance, strategy and economic geography, with the aim of making multi-disciplinarily a hallmark of the special issue.
Paper Submission
Authors intending to submit a full manuscript for this special issue must submit an extended abstract, not more than 1,000 words (excluding references) via email to Stefano Elia (stefano.elia@polimi.it) no later 31 July 2020. Authors shortlisted will be required to submit a full manuscript by 31 January 2021.
The guest editors intend to host a paper development workshop for authors shortlisted sometimes in October/November 2020 in Leeds, U.K. or Atlanta, USA. This will assist authors in making progress on their manuscript and receive consultation from the guest editors.
Full manuscripts should be submitted via EES: http://ees.elsevier.com/jbr/
Manuscripts should be prepared in accordance with the Guide for Authors available at
https://www.elsevier.com/journals/journal-of-business-research/0148-2963/guide-for-authors
REFERENCES
Awate, S., Larsen, M. M., & Mudambi, R. (2012). EMNE catch‐up strategies in the wind turbine industry: Is there a trade‐off between output and innovation capabilities?. Global Strategy Journal, 2(3), 205-223.
Buckley, P. J., Clegg, L. J., Cross, A. R., Liu, X., Voss, H., & Zheng, P. (2007). The determinants of Chinese outward foreign direct investment. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 499–518.
Buckley, P.J., Elia, S. Kafouros, M. (2014). Acquisitions by emerging market multinationals: Implications for firm performance. Journal of World Business, 49, 611-632.
Buckley, P. J., Forsans, N., & Munjal, S. (2012). Host–home country linkages and host–home country specific advantages as determinants of foreign acquisitions by Indian firms. International Business Review, 21(5), 878-890.
Buckley, P. J., Munjal, S., Enderwick, P., and Forsans. N. (2016). Cross-border acquisitions by Indian multinationals: Asset exploitation or asset augmentation? International Business Review, 25(4), 986-996.
Cavusgil, S. Tamer and Buckley, P. J. (2016). Interdisciplinary Perspectives on the Middle-Class Phenomenon in Emerging Markets, International Business Review, 25, 621-623.
Cavusgil, S. Tamer, Deligonul, S.Z., Kardes, Il., and Cavusgil, Erin (2018). Middle Class Consumers in Emerging Markets: Conceptualization, Propositions and Measurement, Journal of International Marketing, 26, No. 3, 94-108.
Corredoira, R. A., & McDermott, G. A. 2014. Adaptation, bridging and firm upgrading: How non-market institutions and MNCs facilitate knowledge recombination in emerging markets. Journal of International Business Studies, 45(6), 699-722.
Cuervo-Cazurra, A. (2012). Extending theory by analysing developing country multinational companies: Solving the goldilocks debate. Global Strategy Journal, 2, 153–167.
Contractor, F. J. (2013), "Punching above their weight": The sources of competitive advantage for emerging market multinationals, International Journal of Emerging Markets, 8(4), 304-328
De Beule F., Elia S. and Piscitello L. (2014). Entry and access to competencies abroad: Emerging Market Firms versus Advanced market Firms. Journal of International Management, 20, 137–152.
Elia, S., Santangelo, G.D. (2017). The evolution of strategic asset-seeking acquisitions by emerging multinationals: The role of home- and host- country national innovation systems. International Business Review, 26(5), 855-866
Fu, X., Pietrobelli, C., & Soete, L. 2011. The role of foreign technology and indigenous innovation in the emerging economies: technological change and catching-up. World Development, 39(7), 1204-1212.
Govindarajan, V., & Ramamurti, R. (2011). Reverse innovation, emerging markets, and global strategy. Global Strategy Journal, 1(3‐4), 191-205.
He, X., & Zhang, J. (2018). Emerging market MNCs' cross-border acquisition completion: Institutional image and strategies. Journal of Business Research, 93, 139-150.
Han, X., Liu, X., Xia, T., & Gao, L. (2018). Home-country government support, interstate relations and the subsidiary performance of emerging market multinational enterprises. Journal of Business Research, 93, 160-172.
Hashai, N., & Buckley, P. J. (2014). Is competitive advantage a necessary condition for the emergence of the multinational enterprise?. Global Strategy Journal, 4(1), 35-48.
Hennart, J. F. 2012. Emerging market multinationals and the theory of the multinational enterprise. Global Strategy Journal, 2, 168-187.
Laursen, K., & Santangelo, G. D. (2017). The role of "non-economic" endowments: Introduction to the special section on what we know and what we should know about international knowledge sourcing. Industrial and Corporate Change, 26(2),279–284.
Luo, Y., & Tung, R. L. (2007). International expansion of emerging market enterprises: A springboard perspective. Journal of International Business Studies, 38, 481–498.
Madhok, A., & Keyhani, M. (2012). Acquisitions as entrepreneurship: Asymmetries, opportunities, and the internationalization of multinationals from emerging economies. Global Strategy Journal, 2(1), 26-40.
Mathews, J. A. (2006). Dragon multinationals: New players in 21th century globalization. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23, 5–27.
Meyer, K. (2015). What is strategic asset seeking FDI? Multinational Business Review, 23, 57–66.
Mudambi, R. (2008). Location, control and innovation in knowledge-intensive industries. Journal of Economic Geography, 8(5): 699–725
Munjal, S., Requejo, I., & Kundu, S. K. (2019). Offshore outsourcing and firm performance: Moderating effects of size, growth and slack resources. Journal of Business Research, 103, 484-494.
Narula, R. (2012). Do we need different frameworks to explain infant MNEs from developing countries? Global Strategy Journal, 2, 188–204.
Narula, R. (2015). The viability of sustained growth by India's MNEs: India's dual economy and constraints from location assets. Management International Review, 55, 191–205.
Özcan, G. B., Mondragon, A. E. C., & Harindranath, G. (2018). Strategic entry and operational integration of emerging market firms: The case of Cemex, Beko and Tata Steel in the UK. Journal of Business Research, 93, 242-254.
Rabbiosi L., Elia S., Bertoni F. (2012). Acquisitions by EMNCs in Developed Markets: An Organisational Learning Perspective. Management International Review, 52, 193-212.
Ramamurti, R., & Singh, J. V. (2009). Indian multinationals: Generic internationalization strategies? In R. Ramamurti, & J. V. Singh (Eds.), Emerging multinationals from emerging markets (pp. 110–166). Cambridge: University Press.
Strange, R., & Zucchella, A. (2017). Industry 4.0, global value chains and international business. Multnational Business Review, 25(3), 174–184.
Wang, Y., & Li-Ying, J. (2014). How do the BRIC countries play their roles in the global innovation arena? A study based on USPTO patents during 1990–2009. Scientometrics, 98, 1065–1083.
In this special issue, we invite comparative studies that examine growing insecurities in the fields of work, organization and employment in Central and Eastern Europe (CEE), including the effects of migration, in the context of the international ‘crisis of capitalism’. We are interested in research that investigates local responses (at the levels of the workplace, establishment or industry) to the spread of uncontrolled market forces in the region and makes connections to debates in the wider social sciences. We are particularly interested in studies which analyse the latest phases of transition in CEE as subject to contestation and negotiation by a plurality of groupings within economy and society, and which bring to the fore the significance of class, gender and ethnicity. We welcome submissions which capture the unevenness of developments since the financial crisis through comparative analysis of changes in the institutional arrangements impinging on work and employment. We also wish to explore whether, and how, the particularly hostile environment for trade unionism in CEE is creating new avenues for renewal and reinvention, and whether the resourcefulness and imagination exhibited by trade unionists in the region offer real learning opportunities for the international labour movement.
Key Dates and Contact Details:
Submission of extended abstracts (maximum 1000 words not including references): 29 December 2014.
Submission of full papers: 31 July 2015.
Please contact one of the guest co-editors, or the Editor, for any queries. The abstract submission should be sent by e-mail attachment to the following:
Special Issue Editors
- Ron Boschma (University of Utrecht, Netherlands, r.boschma@geo.uu.nl)
- Shige Makino (The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong, makino@baf.cuhk.edu.hk)
- Gongming Qian (The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong, qian@baf.cuhk.edu.hk)
- Xufei Ma (The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong, xufei@baf.cuhk.edu.hk)
- Lee Li (York University, Canada, leeli@yorku.ca)
- Ram Mudambi (Temple University, USA, rmudambi@temple.edu)
Deadline for submission: October 31, 2015
Tentative publication date: Spring 2017
Introduction
Traditional international business (IB) literature uses a country as a primary geographic unit of analysis in studies of strategic behavior and performance of multinational enterprises (MNEs) (Dunning, 1988; Zaheer, 1995). In recent years, two streams of IB research have emerged to focus on different levels and kinds of geographic units to study the locational effects. On one side, a line of research has begun to zoom in and use finer geographic units, i.e. subnational regions, to examine the effects of within-country differences (Chan, Makino, & Isobe, 2010; Lorenzen & Mudambi, 2013; Ma, Tong, & Fitza, 2013). On the other side, a group of researchers zoom out and coin the term “regionalization” to argue that MNEs use supra-national regions rather than individual countries to define the primary geographical scope of business (Qian, Li, Li, & Qian, 2008; Qian, Li, & Rugman, 2013; Rugman, 2005). These new advances in IB also echo findings from international economic geography, which suggest that a simple host-home country dichotomy becomes insufficient (Fujita, Krugman, & Venables, 1999; Iammarino & McCann, 2013).
Indeed, some aspects of globalization are inherently geographical (Dicken, 2004) and the explicit incorporation of space in IB analysis holds the promise of significant advancements in our understanding of the world economy. In the field of IB, the main focus of study has been the effects of transiting from one country to another, what are in reality discontinuous “border effects” in the sense that they change abruptly at national frontiers (Beugelsdijk & Mudambi, 2013). In contrast, economic geography and regional science have focused more on the effects of various forms of “proximity” (viewed as the reverse of “distance effects”) (Boschma, 2005) and these are continuous, in the sense that they change smoothly over space.
IB scholars have long recognized the importance of integrating local contexts into their research (Fujita, Krugman & Venables, 1999; Meyer, Mudambi & Narula, 2011). However, the nuances of local spatial analysis that have been developed in the large clusters literature in economic geography and regional science (e.g., Malmberg & Maskell, 2002) offer fruitful avenues for enhancing IB theories and models. Similarly, the analysis of regional economic blocs like the EU, NAFTA, ASEAN and Mercosur has received considerable attention in the international trade literature and this analysis has the potential to inform and extend the regionalization thesis in IB (e.g., Carrere, 2004; Frankel, Stein & Wei, 1997). These streams of research suggest that the effects of locational factors are multi-level in nature and the locational boundaries of IB should reflect both the diversities and connections between and across different levels and kinds of geographic scopes. Such an approach echoes and complements the literature on the “relational turn” in economic geography (Dicken & Malmberg, 2001), and focuses on the evolution and nature of connections of IB at various spatial scales.
International business activities occur at the interface of different levels of locational structures and different kinds of geographic units. MNEs must be concerned with local, national and supranational regional and global authorities and other organizations, and international business outcomes are often the result of a complex combination of responses to these different types of influence considered together. Accordingly, classical IB theories, which focus on “general” country-specific characteristics as a primary interest of analysis, should be extended to incorporate (a) more fine-grained information at various subnational levels; (b) more generic information at supranational levels. Such multi-level analysis holds the promise of significantly improving the specification of IB models and empirical estimates. It is possible that several effects currently ascribed to country factors may in fact arise either from local characteristics or from supranational regional variation. Further, different levels may evolve differently and at different rates (Cantwell, Dunning & Lundan, 2010). Since MNEs co-evolve with local environments, such multi-level analysis has important dynamic aspects as well.
The goal of this Special Issue is thus to encourage research that (a) goes beyond our understanding of traditional IB to focus on the cross-border activities of MNEs across multiple geographic levels; (b) examines the multi-level effects of geographic layers on strategies and performance of MNEs and their foreign subsidiaries; and (c) studies the effects on international business of interactions between different geographic levels of authority or organization themselves. We particularly welcome manuscripts that can stimulate dialogue between different fields of scholarship within and outside the realm of the conventional IB studies (Cantwell and Brannen, 2011). For example, theoretical insights of economic geography, regional science, political economy, and international organization may shed new light on the development of the economic activities of MNEs across economies at different geographic levels of locations. Similarly, recent theoretical and empirical advances in regional and urban studies, geography, political science, sociology, and anthropology may provide new theoretical perspectives for examining the nested structures of economic activities of MNEs across locations.
Topics for the Special Issue
We welcome both theoretical and empirical contributions, and papers that address regional and subnational issues relating to international business activities. We offer a few questions below to provide a sense of what the special issue seeks to address. These questions are illustrative at best and are not intended to set boundaries in terms of the key themes of interest.
- How do different IB theories intersect to explain the effects of locations at different levels on international business activities? How can studies outside of the business domain, such as regional and urban studies, political science, sociology, and anthropology, complement the IB theories on the issue?
- How do regional, national and subnational differences affect the concentration and diffusion of international business activities within and across regions? For instance, why do MNEs choose different levels of concentration and spread within and across regions? How do these strategies affect market performance of MNEs’ operations?
- The international setting consists of different levels and kinds of locational effects. For example, European managers have to follow not only the common EU policies but also distinct national and subnational regulations. How do managers make sense the complex levels/kinds of influence of regulations and design their internationalization strategies?
- Can the history of international relations provide additional explanatory power regarding the location of international business activities and geographic diversification decisions beyond the conventional distance effects? How do these ties affect MNEs’ regional and global strategies?
- Given that international business activities are simultaneously embedded in multiple subnational contexts, how does the regional or global portfolio of FDI affect the performance of firms and locations? What are the underlying organizational and relational mechanisms that make such arbitrage possible?
- Industry effects can be subnational, national, regional and global, which has been shown in recent economic geography studies on the strategic roles played by industry clusters. How do these effects interact to affect the behavior and performance of MNEs? In particular, how do the development of new technologies, structure of industry clusters, regional agreements, and changes in host government policies jointly interact to influence MNEs’ internationalization trajectory, agglomeration efforts, and innovation patterns?
- A focus on regionalization and subnational regions (and beyond) creates new methodological challenges and also opens new opportunities for IB research. On one hand, how do advances in multi-level modeling help in increasing precision to predict the crossing effects within, between, and across different levels/kinds of MNEs’ locational boundaries? On the other hand, how do qualitative studies can be used to capture the complexities and differentiated contexts of above-mentioned issues?
Submission Process
All manuscripts will be reviewed as a cohort for this special issue. Manuscripts must be submitted in the window between October 15, 2015, and October 31, 2015, at http://mc.manuscriptcentral.com/jibs. All submissions will go through the JIBS regular double-blind review process and follow the standard norms and processes.
For more information about this call for papers, please contact the Special Issue Editors or the JIBS Managing Editor (managing-editor@jibs.net).
References
Beugelsdijk, S. & Mudambi, R. 2013. MNEs as border-crossing multi-location enterprises: The role of discontinuities in geographic space. Journal of International Business Studies, 44: 413-426.
Beugelsdijk, S., Mudambi, R. & McCann, P. 2010. Place, space and organization: Economic geography and the multinational enterprise. Journal of Economic Geography, 10(4): 485-493.
Boschma, R. 2005. Proximity and innovation: a critical assessment. Regional Studies, 39(1): 61-74.
Cantwell, J. & Brannen, M. Y. 2011. Positioning JIBS as an interdisciplinary journal. Journal of International Business Studies, 42: 1-9.
Cantwell, J., Dunning, J. & Lundan, S. 2010. An evolutionary approach to understanding international business activity: the co-evolution of MNEs and the institutional environment. Journal of International Business Studies, 41: 567-586.
Carrere, C. 2004. Revisiting the effects of regional trade agreements on trade flows with proper specification of the gravity model. European Economic Review, 50(2): 223-247.
Chan, C. M., Makino, S. & Isobe, T. 2010. Does subnational region matter? Foreign affiliate performance in the United States and China. Strategic Management Journal, 31(11): 1226-1243.
Dicken, P. 2004. Geographers and “globalization”: (yet) another missed boat?. Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers, 29: 5–26.
Dicken, P. & Malmberg, A. 2001. Firms in territories: a relational perspective. Economic Geography, 77(4): 345-363.
Dunning, J. H. 1988. The eclectic paradigm of international production: A restatement and some possible extensions. Journal of International Business Studies, 19(1): 1-31.
Frankel, J., Stein, E. & Wei, S. 1997. Regional trading blocs in the world economic system. Institute for International Economics, Washington DC.
Fujita, M., Krugman, P. & Venables, T. 1999. The spatial economy: cities, regions and international trade. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Ghemawat, P. 2003. Semi-globalization and international business strategy. Journal of International Business Studies, 34: 138-152.
Iammarino, S. & McCann, P. 2013. Multinationals and economic geography: location, technology and innovation. Edward Elgar, Cheltenham, UK.
Lorenzen, M. & Mudambi, R. 2013. Clusters, connectivity and catch-up: Bollywood and Bangalore in the global economy. Journal of Economic Geography, 13(3), 501-534.
Ma, X., Tong, T. W. & Fitza, M. 2013. How much does subnational region matter to foreign subsidiary performance? Evidence from Fortune Global 500 Corporations’ investment in China. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(1): 66-87.
Makino, S. & Tsang, EWK. 2011. Historical ties and foreign direct investment: an exploratory study. Journal of International Business Studies, 42: 545-557.
Malmberg, A. & Maskell, P. 2002. The elusive concept of localization economies: towards a knowledge-based theory of spatial clustering. Environment and Planning A, 34(3): 429-449.
Meyer, K., Mudambi, R. & Narula, R. 2011. Multinational enterprises and local contexts: the opportunities and challenges of multiple-embeddedness. Journal of Management Studies, 48(2): 235-252.
Porter, M. E. (1994). The role of location in competition. Journal of the Economics of Business, 1(1): 35-40.
Qian, G., Li, L., Li, J. & Qian, Z. 2008. Regional diversification and firm performance. Journal of International Business Studies, 39(2): 197-214.
Qian, G., Li, L. & Rugman, A. M. 2013. Liability of country foreignness and liability of regional foreignness: Their effects on geographic diversification and firm performance. Journal of International Business Studies, 44(6): 635-647.
Rugman, A. M. 2005. The regional multinationals: MNEs and ‘global’ strategic management. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Zaheer, S. 1995. Overcoming the liability of foreignness. Academy of Management Journal, 38(2): 341-363.
About the Guest Editors
Ron Boschma is Full Professor in Innovation Studies at Lund University, and director of the Centre for Innovation, Research and Competence in the Learning Economy (CIRCLE) at Lund University in Sweden. He is also Full Professor in Regional Economics at the Department of Economic Geography at the Faculty of Geosciences, University of Utrecht. He holds a Master’s degree in Social Geography from the University of Amsterdam and a PhD in Economics from the Tinbergen Institute, Faculty of Economics and Econometrics, Erasmus University Rotterdam. He is a current Associate Editor of Regional Studies, having previously served as Deputy Chief Editor (2008-2013). As of 2014, he is Editor of Cambridge Journal of Region, Economy and Society. He is an editorial board member of many major journals. His work has appeared in the Journal of Economic Geography, Annals of Regional Science, Industrial and Corporate Change and Research Policy among many others.
Shige Makino is a Professor in the Department of Management at The Chinese University of Hong Kong. He holds the title of the University’s Outstanding Fellow. He received his PhD from the Ivey School of Business. His research interests include strategies for foreign market entry and survival, performance variations of MNEs, and multilevel issues in international business. He served as a Vice President of the Academy of International Business (AIB) and was Program Chair of the AIB Nagoya conference in 2011. He has published in leading journals, including the Journal of International Business Studies, Strategic Management Journal, and Academy of Management Journal.
Gongming Qian is an Associate Professor and currently Chairman of the Department of Management at The Chinese University of Hong Kong. He received his Ph.D. in International Business from Lancaster University, England. His research interests include international strategy, global enterprise management, SMTEs, and entrepreneurship. He has published widely in peer reviewed academic journals including Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, Journal of Business Venturing, Journal of International Business Studies, and Strategic Management Journal.
Xufei Ma is as an Associate Professor in Department of Management, Chinese University of Hong Kong. He received his PhD from the National University of Singapore Business School in 2007. Before he joined academia, he worked as an international business manager with the SINOCHEM Corporation for several years. With a focus on China, his research interests include the strategic issues facing foreign multinational enterprises operating in emerging markets and local emerging market firms competing domestically and globally. His research has been published in such journals as Journal of International Business Studies, Academy of Management Journal, Strategic Management Journal, and others. Xufei Ma won the Haynes Prize from the Academy of International Business for the most promising scholar.
Lee Li is Professor of Marketing at the School of Administrative Studies, York University, Canada. He received his doctorate in Marketing from Lancaster University, England. His research interests include internationalization, diversification, marketing strategies, and partnerships. He has published widely in peer-reviewed academic journals, including the Journal of International Business Studies, Strategic Management Journal, and Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice.
Ram Mudambi is Frank M. Speakman Professor of Strategy and Perelman Senior Research Fellow at the Fox School of Business, Temple University. He holds a Master’s degree from the London School of Economics and a PhD from Cornell University. He is a Fellow of the Academy of International Business (AIB) and Vice-President and Program Chair for the 2015 AIB Conference. He has served as an Associate Editor of the Global Strategy Journal (2010-2013) and is an Area Editor at the Journal of International Business Studies (2013-2016). He serves on the editorial boards of numerous journals. He has been a special issue editor for the Journal of Economic Geography, the Journal of Management Studies, the International Business Review and the Journal of International Management. He has published over 80 peer-reviewed articles, including work in the Journal of Political Economy, the Journal of Economic Geography, the Strategic Management Journal and the Journal of International Business Studies.
Postscript
When we initially proposed the topic, we consulted with Professor Rugman, a pioneer in regionalization. He fully agreed on the importance of this issue. He not only supported our initiative for a special issue but was also willing to serve as a consulting editor. To our sorrow, Professor Rugman passed away unexpectedly. Our efforts to organize this special issue can be regarded as a commemoration of this great scholar in international business.